This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http : //books . google . com/|
• • • •
70860W
(I
600079660W
-w
1
•••
• #
1 W.J
-1.
iiA
s^I
r
t
TEE
BOY'S 0¥H BOOK
% Complete (Sncsclo^sbia
ov
SPORTS AND PASTIMES;
ATHIETIC, SCIENTIFIC, AND RECREATIVB.
9 ^cto mitfon,
taoioosnT utiod Am oonmuiaLT nnjtoitt.
Ap1afftTQasdtouic«riil«niofth«worid; | CCTD '^Ol ItviniBMOiiMbagnaniiMnlnnitiiUtara; I • iLD '^ O I * .' Th0iiKWlhnpon«UMtloiioftb«mmn \ /
May And ila parody 'moDfr childhood'a tpottki /J <^> /
Aod Uft ItMlt whm kmimK happtart ^0-' Qf,, r- i fv \<» ^
la boyhoodrt brtaf and joeoad holiday. N::^0' i.. L \ |^V
LONDON:
CROSBY LOCKWOOD AND CO.,
7. 8TATI0NEBS'-HALL COUBT, LIJDOATE HILL.
MDCCCLXXX.
/
zL^. c. s^^
I FopcuK EscTCLorxDti of the Sporte aod Partimea of ,
, Bojhood and Tonth — a oompauioii for all hahdaji—n
, friend at all aeasoiia — a competent adTiBer npon Bvery-
J thing mnneoted iritli tlie diversionH of Country aad Town ;
^^ of LandandWater; of tliePlKy-groiuid, tlie Dnwin^-room,
^ tbe laboratory, luid the Qardsn— ia a desirable addition tn
6) every boy'a library. Such a work ia the Bot'a Own Boot
) If imitation bo — ai it has been aptly prononnced— tht
'-'.'- higbeat form of compliment, the proprietors of the Box's
■t^C'f^ Own Book have ample reaaon for conpratnlation i for it
\^ . '' onid be difficult to find any work that haa had bo many
* imilatora. Originally prodaoed more than a quarter of a
OMituiy ago, it haa long aiuce attained the dignity of a atandard work ;
•nd, hanng paaaod throngh ■oorea of editiooa, to the delight and iuatmction
of myriada of rvaderv, it atill hold* ita proud podtion aa tbe recognized
aatboritj npon ereiTthing pertaining to tbe amoaementa of Engliah boya.
It PBELUDE.
at home and abroad. This extraordinary snccees has naturally Btimn- lated to fresh exertions; as new editions have been called for, the value of the book has been increased by successive improvements and additions.
The Publishers have now« once more, the pleasure of presentinj^ the work in a greatly enlarged and, it is believed, much improved form. While nothing of consequence has been omitted from this new edition, additions of a very marked and extensive character have been made to its pages, and it may safely be said thatit now, more fully than ever, deserves the title of "the Justinian of the Playground,** so happily bestowed upon it by one of its critics. Every article has been either thoroughly revised or entirely re-written.
The Minor Indoor and Outdoor sports have been extended, and among the Athletic Amusements will be found the new rules of Cricket ; de- scriptions of the modem methods of playing Football; full directions for playing the fashionable games of Croquet and Troco ; the old English games of Hockey, Backets, Fives, Tennis, Bowls, Quoits, etc. i the Italian game of Pallone ; the Scottish sports of Curling and Golf ; the modem system of Scientific Gymnastics ; Broadsword and Singlestick ; Boxing and Wrestling ; Biding, Driving, etc.
Under the head of Athletic Sports must also be included five subjects of rising importance, viz. : — Lawn Tennis, Badminton, American Base Ball, the Canadian Game of La Crosse, and Bicycling. All of these are very fully and elaborately treated and illustrated.
To the pages on Aquatic Sports have been added remarks on Sea Fishing, and instructions in Canoeing ; while the article on Bowing has been further embellished by several new woodcuts.
An entirely new section, devoted to Drawing-room Games, has been introduced, in which will be found full directions for the arrangement of Acting and Pantomime Charades, Proverbs, Tableaux Yivants, Bouts Bimes, Definitions, and other favourite entertainments.
The chapters on Games of Skill— hitherto represented only by Chess and Draughts (both of which subjects are now re-written and improved — ^have been increased by the addition of Billiards, Bagatelle, Dominoes, Backgammon, Solitaire, and many other home amusements.
FBELTIDB. ▼
The MotioD devoted to Domestic Natural History has been augmented by a chapter on Dogs, an aooonnt of the Aqoarinm, and instraotions on the best methods of Indoor Grardening, the preparation of Seaweeds, Shells, etc. ; with nnmerons suggestions as to the management of Home Pets.
In the Scientific Department will be fonnd a copious guide to Practical Photography ; while tiie several chapters on Chemistry, Electricity, Optics, etc, are enriched by many new and interesting facts and experiments ; articles are now first introduced on the philosophy and uses of the Mioro- aoope and the Telescope ; and careful and elaborate instructions are afforded to the amateur Pyrotechnist.
The young Conjuror will find, in the pages desoriptiye of Legerdemain and Prestidigitation, accounts of the most striking and remarkable of the modem feats and deceptions — including the Bope Trick, the Ghost Illusion, the Indian Basket Trick, the Japanese Butterflies, the Talking Head, eto. i as well as very comprehensive additions to the Card Tricks. Those who are fond of Paradoxes and Puzzles will also doubtless discover much to amuse their leisure and exercise their ingenuity.
The only omission, of any extent, is that of the Biddies which have appeared in former editions. It was thought that this subject — ^being one which is amply provided for in minor works entirely devoted to it — ^might weU give way to make room for the many and important additions noted above ; especially as a mere aeUcHon only, and not a complete eoUecHon, of these ephemera could have been given.
It may be added that the labours of the Editors and Contributors have been largely supplemented by those of the .Artist. The introduction of new subjecta having necessitated an entire reconstruction of the text^which has been reset in new and beautiful type^more than a hundred new engravings have been inserted, to the permanent improvement and increased value, we venture to say, of the Boy's Own Book. In short, neither labour nor expense has been spared ; it having been the ambition of the publishers to render the work, in every respect, deserving of its great reputation and popularity.
On viewing the entire plan of the Boy's Own Book, as at present arranged, it will be found that a wider field than has been taken cannot well
>1
be imagined. It embraoei the oramamenta of all miiidB, and of alt BeBsotiB — in winter and in sammer — at home and abroad. The robnit and the delioate — the oontemplatiTB and the ingenioDS — have each their t&atet provided for. The Hportt and eierciseg of ootdoor enjoyment — the pastimet of a winter's fireside—and tbe recreations of scienoe, are copionaljr dotailed in onr pages, which have been printed in a oloae type, that we might be enabled to oompresa a whole librai; of aportfnl lore in the brief oompass of one haaif volume. We hare attempted to please seaiars and jonion— to mfte the saffr^es of grey-beard Wisdom and blooming Adoleeoenoe ; no easy task 1 but we have snooeeded ; tbe HiNOB'it; has given ns a Majobiti{ and we boldly make onr appearanoa at the bar of pnblia opinion, asinred that a host of advocates, appreciating onr indnstry and our motives, wonld each oheerfblly nndertake, on oar behalf, the teak of
3fliiinr Iports.
|
Oftmn «TT* MAApi.ifii |
PAOS 3 |
|
Gajrs wiTK Ton |
11 |
|
Qamxs wm Balls 14 Tmm Jmdiam Ball Gahx 21 Sramiog-S SaAoow Paittoximxs 67 |
|
|
Bouts Bimss |
70 |
|
73 |
|
|
101 |
|
|
GOLV |
197 |
|
180 |
|
|
POOTBALL CBoqmrr |
131 138 |
|
Tboco |
145 146 |
|
147 |
|
|
TxniS AJTD Pallovx Lawv Tnnrxs |
149 151 |
|
BAOvnrroir |
158 |
|
B^m Bal^ |
150 |
|
AsoLnrtf |
flqnati 263 |
|
Sba FiaHivo |
286 |
|
SwiMiiiJia |
283 |
|
JLowtMO |
298 |
|
vAVOIuVO •*#••■••••••••••••••■•• |
304 |
PAOV
Bpokts or Agilitt avd Spkkd 2<
MlSCXLLAJTBOUS OUT-OOOB SpOBTS... 36
Ih-doob Spobts 41
Spobts with Totb 46
FOBFSITS 75
AcnVO CVABADBS 77
AcTiHO Pbotbbbs 88
Tableaux YzYAjrrs 95
La Cbossb 165
Bowls, Qvorrs, ktc 170
FXHCIN4 177
Bboadswobd and Sinolb-stxcx 195
Abchbbt 201
BiDiHO 209
DBiyxHO 223
BtCYCLiNO 232
Otmkabtics 242
Dumb Bells ahd Ikoxab Clubs ... 253
BoxiBO AXD Wbestubo 258
Sailiho 807
Skatiho 819
Ib-doob Skatino 825
SUDIBA 826
CUBUHO 827
▼iii
CONTENTS.
€^t jiatnraltft.
FAOS
Snroora Bisds 820
Talxivo Bikds 853
DoMBsno Fowu 861
Tubxbts 870
QuiHBA Fowl 372
Qbxbb 873
DuoKS 874
PxoBOHS 877
Babbits 802
OuiHXA Pras 402
PAOB
D008 404
Cats 413
b^uibbbls 414
WXXTB MlOB 418
SiLXWOBMS 418
Bbbs 422
Gold ahd Szltbb Pish 428
AquA&ivx 430
Oakdxvivo 434
Ib-doob Oabobbih« 447
Ititntifit fxmtattoiii.
▲bITHMBTICAL AMtrSBXBlTTS 451
Maohbtxsm 485
Elbctbicitt 474
GaltabisxabdEuctbo-DCaovxtisx 484
Obbxistbt i04
FiBBWOBXS 511
▲xBOSTATXO AXUBBIUBTS 610
Acoustics abd Pbbuxatics 523
Optics 528
Thb Micboscopb 547
Thb Tblbscopb 665
PHOTOaHAFHT „...„ ^ 667
Thb Stbbboscopb 675
MiSCBLLAXBA 678
^mts of ^ktll.
Ohxss 588
B&AUOBTS 607
Backoammob 618
bokivobs 622
SOUTAIBB
Fox ABD Gbbsb 627
Aoov, OB THB Qubbb's Gvabds ... 627
MnroB Gaxxs 690
Baoatbllb 682
BXLLIABDS 685
Ijgwhmnitt, (£tt.
SixplbDbcbptxobs ABD East Tbzcxs 640
TBICXS WITH MOBBT 667
Tbicxs with Oabds 663
Fbats with Spbcul Appabatus, btc. 670
Pa&adoxbs axd Pvzzlbs 697
Dbap ABD Dun Alphabxt 700
MIHOa SPGBTS.
'KtMlly max^xll, tad all wbo
atnfrttii»B m> good
fiiT ■Uhuchu, 10 Ibeni
batUr tn oor " Bt^'* Own
beglnnlDg, tud i^ whai wt have to i^ tbou
lli« grmnd bftll
pootbttU, or **'*!*■ ir ttiA Tvadcr Into tlM
Peg In Ihs Ring."
a icmoB SPOBTS.
of his life ? And now, whfle writing abont theee minor sports, wb are oarried htuoY in imagination to the days when we flew onr Utes upon the breezy downs, or joined with onr clasS'mates in a game at ** Increase Fonnd.*' How well we remember that cheerfhl parlour, in which, daring the Christmas holidays, when mincemeat, plnm-pnddings, and young parties were most abundant, we bore a part in the ezhilirating and harmless fire-side sports of the sesson. Our oooupation revives the memory of that dilapidated ruin — ^the court of that mouldering castle, with a tall and stately efan rising ftvm one of its comers, and the outward sldas of its walls bedecked with ivy, apparently ages old, the constant home and nestling-plaoe of innumerable birds — ^the scene of our chief exploits at " Fives ;** the garden-walk where our school-swing was erected, between two gigantic sister pear trees ; and, in brief, of all those places where we played the games that were the delight of our holidays ; when a sportive bout at " Saddle my Nag " was, in itself, an ample reoompence for the last two hours of study, emplc^ed in working an intricate question in arithmetic, comxwsing a theme on some difficult subject, rendering a portion of the Iliad into Li^in hexameters, or a passage of Pope into French prose.
We are surely bringing no disgrace on our boyhood by avowing that we dewly enjoyed the sports of the play- ground. The line of a talented writer, ' ' A dunce at syntax, but a dab at taw,** has, by a thoughtless few, been converted into a proverb ; and those who were most eminent for their activity and love of the usual amusements of youth out of school, have thus been unjustly stigmatised as inattentive students. We have generally found the reverse to be the fact. Indeed, we have often remarked, that the lads who led the sports in the play-ground, stood high in their classes in the school-room. " There is a time for all things,** is a trite, but, in this case, an applicable observation : the scholasUc discipline wisely allots certain hours in the day for recreation ; they should be employed in healthful and agreeable pastime, so as to prepare the boy to return with mental vigour to his books : study should give a relish to sport, and sport a sest to study. But while we recommend that the school-room should be forgotten in the play-ground, we would imin-ess on our young readers the necessity of forgetting tiie play-ground in the school-room.
In the *' Minor Sports '* which follow we have endeavoured to make our explanations as plain and simple as we can ; always remembering that boys pref^ nUher to be told how to do a thing than to be wearied with details as to its origin or introduction.
■ tiat. la a mlU irtddiltfizeil and vhieh te (fT thi powv, aul the ^bical plecM are gradiullj idrodnoed betwesn tha
or mBibiB, fomid lu ArBt brokan with hunoien h
lin^ a flonr-mlU. Theiownsbma. ^TDOTes ; tbe nppar atona.
4 VISOR BPOBTB.
■tnami of wMec are pusad through the fOiron of tba lower (tone, md the pnann of the nppar atone on the Ultle pleoee nlli iLem otor end orer In ell djiectione, radnoinff (heir rough mrfhcee, aijd in eboot fllteen or twen^ mtwim* bmu Uiem out of the mill peifectl; round end niuHilh.
i. game et marblei ii hgellhltal end udting, end isqalrec e oonaidcnhle degree of ekill. Dr. Johiuan mti. " Whatever yon would do, however trUUng ioileeU', stiJTe lo do it well ;" end even to shoot a, marble with predeion. end to hit jonr merk olererl]-, moch prectlM le necesiei;. When one merble. bum • olerer pleTSr, hite anoUier. tt it with ■ eherp. cracking aotind, " coming qnlckl; npon the ear ;" nnlike the dribble, which eonndi doll end heevy, " Al en ecBdemy neu London, the eon of the meiler wee quite blind, end eonaeqasntlj could not pie; e( mublee with hli fklhsr'i puplli. BtUl hie eei wee eo ecute, Uuu he wee elweye cmlled upon ee mnpire. when any diSlcnlty eroee u lo the probabill^ of the player (From distaace or poeiliOD) hilUDg the ehot ; end when it wee properly done, would "—i-'"', ' A tail ehot, that ! and hie dedBkia waa never oncetioned."
Jl drcle la drawn on the groond wilUn which one pleyer bnilda a pyramid. by piecing three toarblse triengnlarl;, and a fourth in the cenlre, on (he top of them. Any oaier player may then aboot et Ihe pyiamid. at ao agreed dialADce, by giving for each time of ahooting, to the one who keepe the pyramid, a marble. ITihe ehooler Bbrihe the pynmid with bie taw, ae many of Ihe merblee oompoelDg the pyinmid aa mey be drlvea out of the circle, belong in the ehooUr, and the pyramid ia oonetantly to be kept up oompkie by iu owner. Thie
la e good in-door genu ; verlety end additlouJ Intenet m^ be given to it by each
player taking lh< offloe of pyramid-keeper at Mated intervala.
Three email holea ara dug, about a yard and a half aeunder; e line ia drawn abciut two yerda from the flret hole, from wblcb tbe playen begin the game. Chenoe decidee who thall have the tltet shoat i the object ii to drive the marble inlo the flrat hole ; If thle be done, Ihe pl^er ahoola egain, et the dialance at a apan, toward the eeoond. If, howarer, he mlae Ihe bole, the aeoond player begbu, and each ehoota, aUamately, aa the oUur mlaeea. After having ehot the nuutla Into a hole, the player ia allowed, if bla edvBtaaiy'a marble be near, to drive It, with hie own, aa fiu- »• he ean, end. If he itrlke It. to ahoot egeln. The game ia won by Ihe pl^er who geie first into the laat hole, in the following order : — first hole, second, third — eeoond, first — second, third. A clever player will eometlnna shoot ew^r all his advnsaiiee'
HIKOB SPORTS. 5
msrblM wtthoat prooMding b^jond the first or second hole ; tad in tUs waj win the game. Before 70a can " kin a taw," that is, shoot at another marble, you most make your flnt hole.
ABCH-IOAaD.
Tliis game, in some parts of England, is called Nine-holee. It has various names, and is aometimeB played with iron ballets instead of marfolee. The marbles are bowled ai a board set upright^ resembling a bridge with nine small arches, all of them
jirLTLnjinrui
mmabered ; if the marble strike against the sides of the arches, it becomes the pro- perty of the boy to whom the board belongs ; bat if it go throngh any one of them, the bowler claims a number equal to the number upon the arch it passed through. We have seen the boards in this game marked abore some of the arches with nihils, in this onto : — 6, 0, 1, B, 0, S, 0, 4, 0. In some plaoee, where there are no nihils on the board, and the numbers go beyond five, the bowler not only loses his marble, if it strike against the sides of the arches, but also gives the board-keeper a marble each tine he bowls. The taw is sometimee shot instead of bowled, which makes the game mors difl&cult and interesting.
BOirCX ABOUT.
This game is played with large marbles, called bonces. One player pitches his maible eome distance ttom the starting-plaoe, and his opponent takes aim at it, and eodeavoon to strike it. The other player then aims at the marble of his adversary, and to the game is continued, each player throwing by turns. When either succeeds in striking the bonce of his opponent, he receives a forfeit of one or more marbles (ram hioi. aa may be agreed on. The bonce must be pitched underhand, and not thrown or jerked.
BOOS Xir THB BVSH.
▲ good in-door game, and played by two, thus : — One holds, in his closed hand, a eertain number of marbles, and the other guesses ; should he guess right he wins them, but if he be over or under, he has to pay so many as will make up or leave the exafCt number : for example— should A, the player, have eight in his hand, and the other, B, guess three, B will have to give A five to make up the eight ; or should B goess ten, he will have to give A two, that being the number more than he held. The tnn of the game is making the closed hand appear great or small, in opposition to the nmnber concealed in it. The players hold the "Eggs in the Bush,*' and guess aHemately. ^ds amnsing game may be played with nuts, buttons, etc.
6 UIKOB 8P0BTS.
Licranra omr.
Any nimber xnij play at this game, which, perhaps, reqoins little skill, mnch depending on chance, and also on the ineqnalities of the ground upon which it is played. A gentle slope should be chosen, sa likely to render the game most intexeet- ing. The first player throws a marble sharply against a wall, so that it rebounds to a dintannt not exceeding two 3rards ; the second player throws another marble against the wall, endeavouring to make it rebound, so as to strike the first, which, if it does, he wins ; if he misses it his marble is left on the ground, and the next player tries his s^ in the same way. The game thus proceeds until a marble is hit, which entitles the hitter to sll the marbles that may be on the ground. Much excitement is often created whilst watching the zis-zag course of a marble that has been played, all wondering if it will touch this or that, going now within a hair's-breadth of one, and yet not touching it ; almost realizing the anticipations of its owner, and then, at last, slowly stopping, uselessly, at the termination of its devious journey, there to remain as a mark for the next player's shot. The game is also played with buttons.
HAVSXBS, OB TIFSHi.aBS.
A hole about three inches wide is to be made in the ground near a wall ; a line or garter is then drawn at about eight feet from it. The game, when played by two, is as follows : — It is first agreed upon what number of marbles shall be played ; and each player is to stake the same number at every throw, which th^ are to have alternately. Suppose the number to be three each : the thrower will then have six marbles, which he is to hold in his hand, and endeavour to pitch, at one throw, ttom. the garter into the hole— his object being, that an even number shall fluU in, say two, four, or six ; he then wins them all. Should an odd number fall in, as one, three, or five, he loses all, and his opponent takes them up : the game then continues, each player staking more marbles. If more than two are playing, the number of marbles to be thrown each time is decided as before, and then tarns are to be settled by chance, or otherwise. Suppose there are six players. A, B, C, D, E, F, there moat be the like number of games played, to give all an equal chance, as will be readily perceived by considering the rules. After turns are settled. A, or the first player, takes all the marbles in his hand, pitches them at one throw from the garter to the hole, and keeps all that fall in ; B takes up what remain, and throws in the same manner, keeping all he pitches in ; so follow C, D, E, F ; but it firequently happens that there are none left for the latter ones to " go " with ; the consequence is that they become the first players of the next game, and this renders all fkir. This game is sometimes called *' Tipshares,** but is little known about London by that name. It is also played with buttons.
•PAVS AV9 IVOPS.
This is a very simple game. One player first shoots hla marble, the second then endeavours to strike or mtop it, or otherwise to shoot his own within a span of it. If he miss or do not shoot within the span, the flxst player, from the spot where his marble rests, in like manner, shoots at that of the seoond j and so on, nntfl a snop or
KINOB 6FOBT8. 7
■pan is made, whan tbd marble snopped or ipftimed is taken* tad the game begnn by the wimier. Tbim game is also played with bofctoiis.
amnaing little game is Ttary easily played. One boy takes a certam number of mazbles, nuts, or buttons, tram his bag, and conoeals- them in his closed hand. His opponent then guesses "odd" or "even"; and if his guess is right, he receives one marble flrom the player, and if wrong, he pays one, each player taking his turn to guess a2teniately.
SHOOi XV m anre, os vao-nw.
Here we haye the real game of marbles, the scientiflo game ; the game of Ring- taw, as it was called in the olden times. Besides a knowledge of the rules, there needs much dexterity and tact; for example, — ^if, in playing tiiis game, your marble should roll near to a wall or fence, you are compelled, not having room to kneel behind it, to shoot or iUlip it firom the knee ; and should your marble touch the wall, or what- ever obetrueted it, you must then send it from the hip : both operations being very diiBcult of execution to an unpractised player. There is also the knudde-down, which yoa are bound to do, if called upon by those with whom you are playing : to knuckle- down, the middle joint of the fore*fUiger must touch the ground when you shoot* and the hand must remain in that position after the shot has left it ; this is obviously just, as it pievents the player pushing his marble nearer to the rin^ previous to delivering it from his hand.
Some years ago, a '* Blue " at Christ' b Hospital possessed such power and dexterity in fiDipmg a marble, that he undertook to stand on the pavement opposite Burlington Hooae, in Fiooadilly, and fire at, and hUt thirty times running, tsdx fillips, one of the nooe balls on the wall in front of the building, — a perpendicular height of about twenty-flve feet. He aooomplisbed his task, and returned to Newgate Street, accom- panied by a numerous train of brother Blues, the acknowledged Prince of Marble Flaycn. The feelings of the Buke of Wellington, after the glorious battle of Waterloo moat have been insignificant compared with those of this young hero of the marbles ; yet, it must be confessed, thqr both gained thehr laurels by the^friM^ qf§hots.
The rules ot Bing-taw vary in diflTerent places ; but the following are the most gVDenl : — ^A circle is drawn, into which each player places ss many marbles as joaaj be agreed on. ▲ line, called the offing, is then drawn at some distance, from which each in torn shoots at the ring. Shooting a marble out of the ring entitles the shooter to go4m again, and thus the zing may be souMtimes cleared by a good player before his eompanion or companions have a chance. Alter the first fire the players return no more to the offing, but shoot, when their turn comes, from the place where their marbles zested on the last ooeasioB. Sverysaarble struck out of the ring is won by the striking party ; bat if the taw at any time remain in the ring, the player is not only out, but if he have, previonsty, in the course of the game, struck out any marbles, he must put than hi the ling again^ and if one player strike with his taw the taw of another, the
lOKOB 8FOBT8.
TliiB eapital puns iiWen frera Shoot ia Uie King In %b» (OUoirlag panioolua : — ir, prerioiulf to anf mubls or ihot being Mrnck ont oT Uie ring or poand. the Uw of one of the pliTsn bs nnak b^lhttaw of BDOther (eic«pt Uutofbii putner), or In cue he ■hoot hifl tiiW within the pound, in eibher cue ba pnta ft marble in the ring, vid, beforu either of the othen plaj. ihoota from the oSng and ooctiBBee in the game j bnt, tf the tint of then erente ocddt *(tar one or more «ho(a have been Mniok out of the pound, if ha have prerioiuly, dnring that guna, obtained my tbatt himaelf, he band* tbem OTor to the pw^ irho ba« itraolE him, and ■!» pnU a (hot in aa betbre, preTtODilr to hie (hooting ttom the ofllng ; bnt it he have prerionel; obUlned no ahota dnring the gaou, he if potmUDftha gaineentii«l7,ot "kUled," bj-hia tair balogao AuDki and
again, if after a shot or ahote have been eBnck ont of the pound, hia taw get within it (oD the line ii nothing), he pnta hla ahota, if he hare obtained BD7, with an additional one, into the pound, and ahoota tram the olBng 1 bat if he haTa not obtained a shot or >hoU after hli taw eo ramalni within the ring, or " ^eta ht," aa it ia «Ued, he ia *' killed," and atanda out for Qie remainder of the game. At thin game, when therv ia onl; one marble left In the ring, Che taw ma; then lemaln inside it, wiHiont being " bt." The playen aeldom pot niore than one marble each in the ring at drat.
A doien or more marblea are placed bi a ring, in whicb the plajer aplna a Metotani, and u manf marble* a* are apnn out of the ring b; the teetolam become the propany of the iplnner. Anotber w^ to play Ihia game ia to aet the t«etotiim aplnning, and Uun, whoafar auoDeada in ihaoting at it while it i* going tooiul, reeeivn Bom the r»a
MINOB SPORTS.
cTthe playan as mtaxy mafblei as the flgnresahow on iha teetotum when it is knocked over and lias dead. This oafutal game maj be played on a floor or table, as well as npontbe groond.
KOKnro TEM rLvm.
In this game a line is drawn along the groond, and on this line each player places an eqpud number of marbles, tbns—
...A ^ O
Tha idayers then determine at what distance to mark the bob, or starting place ; this is generally made about six feet from the line. Next th^ take a chance for the order of play, which is usually determined by odd or even, or sbooting a marble at the line, the nearest taking the first go, and the next nearest the second, and so on, aeeoiding to the number of players. The first then shoots at the line from the hob, amd if he succeed in knocking away a marble, he goes on again, till he ML The next player does likewise, and he who succeeds in taking the largest number in the fewest ahots, wins the game. Picking the Plums is greatly improved hy the next player naming the marble to be picked out by the shooter. Sometimes bonces are used in this game, and the player's marble remains at the place to which it rolls till it is his torn to play again ; meanwhile, a player who has succeeded in picking out a plum, has the privilege of shooting to a distance any other player's marble within six feet of the line ; and from the place where the marble stops, its owner must play when his turn
m
C)
^
VOSTinCATIOKS.
This is a ikvourite game in Trance. Instead of the marbles being placed in aa in Picking the Plums, th^ are arranged in a square thus:—
And it ia the object of the several players to shoot them out of the lines, from the outworks. When a player's marble reaaina within the lines, he cannot go on till it has been shot out hy an antagonist ; but no player can *' take a Ufa,** that is, shoot out a marble, till he has released his aatagottist. Bo long, however, as the player can go on taking lives, the lives are no impediment to him, for he ahoota troax the place where his marble rests, whether within or b^ond the lines.
a line,
w
B
^
BOWOS XTI.
Each player places two or more marbles in a small ring. It ia then the otgect of the player to stand over the ring, and bolding his taw between his finger aod thumb, near to his ^e, let it drop among the mass; and as many marbles aa he forces outside the ring he claims as his own. But if he fUl to force out a marble, and his oiw remain in the ring, it must be left there as part of the common
lONOS BPOfiTB.
IfoM boys know bow to hold the nunlila whsn Ihay mnt to mhaot it mnj to ft dlitance, or Ktrikm it agkinit uiother. It ia not Goniidfirod tiio right thing to manly bowl it, or mmp It off bstween 1^ tlBg«n. It shoold be placed betweea (he point of the
The nuibla ia then piopelled from the Ihiunb with conalderable force. It reqnirea lome fvacticc to do thla neatly aitd welt ; bnl many boyq can ahoot a marble a doaen yorda with auch preciaion aa to make certain ^ oT hictiag anothcF marble nine ttmea ont of ten. Taki a good aim, lieeping yonr eye on the marble to b
acmck. and not on (he one between your Anger and Ihambi and then, w jinclice, yon will aooa know how to
taaOy ut up by twirling ■fc«
applying the whip with f^mtleiieaB m \ CT«uiag tbs Tigonr of the blowi w the top gsu
>l On whip-top. known u the OolchtMer top, of 4 "m prsented in tha mHgin. Ita Gonitraction im moat nnplfl, uui for ipfmiinff it is Bud to eioei the topi mads In ths commoii fbmL Ttaa prtnetpnl gtiott wllh wUp-topa mn " noH " and " BninnBMre ;" In ths Itinner, tht ahj«M I* to floff ths top to > csrtaln Olalaiioe lint ; In th« latUr, the top* u« whipfiaa agalHt auh other ontQ one ii knocked down. The b«t materinl for m whip, At thit cnpltaJ eport, la n dried eel'akln i it taj nrpuHe Dord or leethem thon^ tn ra whip-to]v nr« nude with an iron toe or point, wtiich gives thsm wolght
12 lONOB SFOBTB.
MUMMUIg-TOF.
HTumnlzig-totM of varions sizes are to be bought at the toj-altops ; very little art is neoeesaiy to use them. After the string is wound about the upright pieoe, one end of it is taken in one hand, and the handle of the fbrk-plece in the other ; the string is pulled strongly with one hand, while the other is thrust fbrth firmly in an opposite direction, and the top is set up. A moderate length of string only is necessary, as a long string operates as an impediment. The humming is loud, and the length of the spin is in proportion to the strength and quickness with which the top is delivered.
It perhaps never entered into the heads of any of our young readers to inquire what it is that causes the humming. We will tell them ; the rotary motion, or spinning of the top, causes the air which is ta it and that which surrounds it, to be agitated ; and by its rushing in at the hole, and being partially thrown out again at every revolution or turn, the humming sound is produced.
The more sonorous the wood, the more pleasing the sound. Cocoa-tree wood is considered the beet; when buying your top, by blowing into the hole, you can try its effbct. Various metal tops have been lately introduced, some of which will spin for five minutes or more. They require no separate handle, and a length of damp catgut or whipcord is the best string.
rao nr tbm bxvo.
In London, peg«tops are principally used for the purpose of being span, and taken up to " sleep," as it is called, in wooden spoons, but elsewhere regular games at peg- top are played, in which the victors carry off capital steel pegs aa trophies of their prowess at the sport A circle, about a yard in diameter, is first drawn on a hard smooth piece of ground, round which stand the players. One volunteers to commence by casting his top in the circle ; and the others are at liberty to cast theirs at it, while it remains in the ring ; but as soon aa it either spins, or rolls out, the owner takes it up, and i>eg8 at those which are still inside. If a player does not cast his top within the ring, or attempts to take it out before it is down, or fklls in spinning when he throws, or should a top neither roll nor spin out, in either case it is con- sidered " dead," and must be placed in the centre of the ring for the others to peg at. There is no order in this game, the object of the player being either to split the top of his companions, and thereby gun the peg as his trophy, or, by striking them suffi- ciently hard, to drive them beyond the boundaries of the circle, when their owners play with them as before. Sometimes half-a-dosen dead tops are driven out of the ring by one cast without any of them being damaged, and if th^ are made of good boxwood, they will not readily split. A top with a rather long peg is best at this game, as it is more calculated to swerve out of the ring after it is spun ; a top that sleeps after it is cast, runs the greatest danger, and thoae that sleep most are heavy-bodied tops with short, blunt pegs. The cord should be wound round nearly three parts of the peg, as well as the top, and a button at the end of the string is better than a loop. Some players wet the end of the string a little before winding it round the top. After the string ia wound round, the top should be held above the head, the string-button
XINOB 8P0BTS. 13
beis^ doM to the band, between the litde linger and the next, the peg pointing to the
wriet. The top shoold be thrown amartly to the ground in a cnrved line, with a sort
of oatoh at the string aa it leavee the top. This, which ia called the *< over-hand
qnfaB," la the moat admired. There is also tt^ *' nnder-hand," or " chimney-sweep's *'
wmj of B|rinning a top. This is done by throwing it forward in a
straight line, and quickly withdrawing the string. By this means
some players can spin the top in the air, and catch it in the hand.
The Spanish peg-top, of which we give a cut in the margin, is made
of mahogany, and tapered off gradually to the peg, which is short.
thick, and rounded, and not pointed as our tops axe. Spanish tops
spin near^ upright, and for thrice the usual time. It ia unnecessary
to throw them with any degree of force ; they spin best when set up under-lmiided ;
so that for playing on flooring or payement they are superior to those made in the
Kngtish foshion ; although, for the same reason, they are totally unfit for *' Peg in
thieBing."
CHxr-raoirs.
This game ia played with a peg-top and spoon, though sometimee the hand is used tnatnad of a spooxL A line is drawn on the ground, and a goal agreed upon, at forty or fif^ yards distant. Two small stones, or pebbles, are placed on the line, and the p]«yer who begins, spins his top on the ground, then takes it up in the spoon, and aims at hia pebble with the peg, in order to chip it forward towards the goal. As long as the top continues alive, he may keep tiGdng it off the ground into his spoon, and oontinne chipping ; but as soon as the top is dead, he must leave his stone where it stopped, until the other player has had his spin and chipped at the other pebble. The first player then commences chipping from where his stone was left, and so on alter- nately ; be whose pebble first arrives at the goal wins the game. When partners play the second chips the pebble fix>m where the first left it, and the third from where the second leaves it, and so on, tf more in number — ^the partners to go one ttom each side m rotation. Sometimes, when only two play, it is agreed to chip away as Ihst as you cam. Bottona may be used instead of pebbles.
OAHIB WITH BALLS.
-with ball* an nnmarmu uid emilecc Crtckat, Cnxgoet, iiiiV, Tennii, and football an gporla o[ laob impanoDoi as to cliiim t, tepanU plan In oar work, but Iha minor gamaa wiUi Bnlla onr j-onng reader will find nndtr tha pnaenl, head.
This game la by many considered to isnk next to Cricket. The ich anulUDr Uian a cricket ball, ii n»re dlfflcnlt to caloh. Tha bat by aU eicepc very young playcn, li flat, abont one inch thick, and
or play, It la best to sink the beel tt little in the gnnmd. The r tbe game : — Two bonndjiriea are Termed, aqnaHy placed, and at an ogrood diet4DCe on each side ef the tcHp. between which il it neccaaiuy the ball ehoald pass when nrack by the batsman ; and IT It tall outalde eilbor oT tbem ha Is ont. The game la played by any nnmber, eitbBr singly of by cbcoeing sides. The innfnga are toeaed np Rir, and the player who is to eommenee, places the bsU in the hollow ot tho trap, strikes the trigger with the bet. and. as tbe ball leaps from the trap, strikes it aa Ite as he can. One or the cither plsynn endesTonrs to catch it ; if he does so before it reachee the gronnd, or if tho striker mlaa t^e ball when he aims at it, or hits Iba , trigger more tliaii twice wiUioal aCriking the ball, or makes " an oSer" (tha trigger lobe touched bot oDCe), he is out, and the next in order takes hia place. Bbonld the ball be fftta-ly struck and not canght. an ont-player mns aner it and Urnws it np to the Dap Ihna the place where he stopped it. IT be hit the trap with the ball, tbe player is ont ; bnt if he miss it, the atrUier goes on again and connts one point toward game, which may be any nonber decided on, or which may be won by the side maklag the largest score. There is also a practice, Id some places, when tLe bonier baa sent in the ball, of the strikar*! goesaing the nainber of bat's lengtiis it la tmn t^e tiap i If he gneaa within the real nomber, he reckons tha± nnmber toward bia game ; bnt If he gnsss more than there really are. be loses hia inninga. The game may be pla;^ with one, two, or mors Innings on either side.
lONOS 8FOBT8. 18
In pfaijTing, do not strfke the trigger too forofblyp tmt soffioiently so to ndie Out ball about a ibot and a^half firom the trap, and catoh it in your hajod once or twice instead of itrildng, before you call *' play." This will enable you to Judge better where you afaoold etand, so aa to strike the ball with gittttoi' force, aaxd to observe in which direc- tkm yoa shonld send it with the least dumce of its being caught. Flayers fluently mdas the ban hj being in too great a hurry to strike ; remember also, that the ball ahtmld be allowed to rise to its greatest height, and stanick sa it is fUIing.
VOBTKIXV-SPSLL ; OB, "VUXB AJTO BrXLL."
Kortiiem-spen is played with a trap, a bell, and either a bat or stout stick, but the latter is most eommonly used. This pastime does not require the attendance of either of the parties in the field to catch or stop the ball, for the contest between them is mmjpiy who shall strike it to the greatest distance in a given number of strokes ; vne length of eadb stroke is measored before the ball is returned, by means of a cord made ftot ai one end, near the trap, the other end being stretched into the field by a person ■ratinned there for that purpose, who adjusts it to the ball, wherever it may be ; the end is divided into yards, which are im>perly numbered in succession, so that the peraon at the bottom of the ground can easily ascertain the distance of each stroke by the number of the yards, which he calls to the players, who place it to their account, and the ball is thrown back. This pastime possesses but little variety, and is by no 80 amusing to the bystanders as Trao, Bat, and Ball.
aouirnxBs.
This capital game with bat and ball is very generally admired. The bat used ia a smooth, round stick, about two feet in length. The players are divided into two equal parties, and chance decides which shall have the first ■ inninga. Five stones or posts, called bases, are placed from twelve to twenty yards asunder, as a, b, c, d, and the fifth (e) has f
a drvle drawn round it for " home,*' as shown in the margin. The oo^players are scattered about the field, except one, called the d a
feeder, who places himself at /, from whence he tosses the ball gently towards one of the in^players standing at " home," uiother ^V^
out-plajrer being stationed behind " home ** to retom the ball to the ^^
fiwder. The in-player then strikes at the baU with his stick, and should he succeed in hitting it, he immediately mns to the base a, while another in-player takes up the bat, and is served or fed with the baU ; however, he need not stop at a, if he thinks he can reach another base, ft, 0, orii, or even home again, without being struck with the ban by the feeder or any of the out-players. Should he be so struck, he is out. The in-player is also out if he miss striking the baU, or if the ball, when struck, DblUs behind home, or is caught by any of the out-players. An in-player stopping at a bsse should keep his eye on the feeder, and when he sees him toss tho ball to a striker, he should immediately run for the next bsse. Feeder is allowed to pretend to toss the ban in order to tempt a player to leave his base, and hit him with the ball as he
16 MINOS 8P0BTU.
inins, thtu patting him out of the game. As the in-pla7en arrive at home, after poABing throitgh the other baaes, thay take the bat in rotation untQ they are all oat. When all are out bat one, this laat player olaima " two taJr hits for the roonder ;" or if two players remain one may resign, and the other " take the roonder," thus : — He stands at the home, and the feeder tosses the ball to him ; if it does not appear to suit him, he need not strike at it, and the feeder moat toss the ball to him as often as he reqairee, provided he does not strike at it. He need not ran the first time he Btrikea at the ball, shoald he not send it a saffident distance ; bat the second time, if he hit the ball, he mast ran round all the bases in rotation without being struck by the ball, and before it shall have been grounded in the circle, or ** home." Should he ' ^ accomplish this feat, the players on his side go in again, and begin the game as at ^ first ; if not, the opposite side take their places. Of coarse, if he miss the ball whilst striking at it the second time, the rounder is lost. If at any time the number of the side should have greatly diminished, and these happen to be all at the several bases, and no one left at the home to strike, then, should the foeder or any player of the opposite side run to the home and ground the baU in the ring, the in-playera are put out, and the feeder's party go in. If he miss the ring in throwing, and any player fh)m either of the bases get regulariy home, the in-players continue the game as before.
A game similar to Eouiders is popnlar in the United States, where it is known as the *' Ball Game."
This game is played with three bases only by any number of players. One takes the place of feeder, and remains so until he puts one of the others out by catching his ball as it leaves his bat, or by striking him with the ball while he is running ftt>m base to base, as at Bounders. There are no sides at Feeder, the players taking the post of feeder as they are respectively put out ; and thus the game goes on.
STKIXS VV AVn LAY DOWIT.
This is a vety simple but not uTiamnaiTig game with a stick and ball, for two or
more players. He who begins it throws up the ball, as from the trap in Trap-bat, and
strikes at it as it Mis. If he succeed in hitting it away, he lays down his stick on the
ground, for the out-players to throw the ball in to. If the ball, so thrown back, hit
the baty or if the ball when struck by the batOTnau is caught by a fielder, («■ if the
batsman in taking aim miss the ball, he is oat, and the next in rotation takes his place.
Sometimes two misses are allowed among young players. The ball used in this game,
as wen as in Bounders and Feeder, is a small hard one, similar to that used in
Tennis and Backets.
narx-xoLxs, oa sso-hav.
Near a wall where the ground is level dig nine oac a less number of holes, according to the number of players, large enough for a ball to be bowled in without difilculty. Number them, and let each player be allotted a number, by chance or choice, as it may be agreed. A line is drawn aboat five yarda from the holes, at which one of the
XmOB 8POBTB. 27
pte^vn plaow hfawwiTfj tad bowlg tbe ImU into one of the holes. The player to whom tbe hole into which the hell is bowled belonga, picks it up as quickly as he can, and fudeayuuis to strike one of the others with it (the latter all run off as soon as th^ peioeite that the hall is not for themselTes) ; if the thrower miss his aim, he loses s points and is called " a flyer/' and it is his torn to bowl ; if, however, he strike another, he kMes nothing ; bat the party so stmck, in case he fUl to hit another with the ball, beeomea " aflTer," and it is his torn to bowL Five or six may be struck in succession, and the ball may be kept np^ no matter how long, until a miss be made, when the paily so missing loses a point and bowls. It is also allowed for one player to accept the ball from another, and run the risk of striking a third : thus, if A stand close behind B. and G have the ball in firont of B, A may signliy by motions that he will take the ball, which is then thrown towards him by C ; he catches it, and endeavours to strike B before he can run away ; if he miss he loeee a point, and bowls. The second bowling is conducted precisely as the first ; but he who bowls three times without passing the ball into a hole loses a point, and if he have lost one before, beoomes " a tenner ;" he nmst still go on, until he succeed in putting the ball into a hole ; It is his own Ihnlt if he bowl into that which belongs to himself. A party who his aim a second time becomes a *' tenner," he who loses a third point " a and when fbnr points sre lost the party stands ouL The game goes on VBifl all the playen are out but one ; the latter wins the game.
This game is sometimee celled " Egg-Hat," on account of the players using their caps instead of digging holes ; the ball, in this case, is tossed into the cape instead of being bowled into the holes.
CATCH-BAI.W
lUs is the simplest of all the ball games. Instead of bowling the ball Into holes, it is thrown in the air, and the name of the player for whom it is intended called out by the thrower. If it be caught before it has twice touched the ground by the player so called on, he loees no point, but throws it up again, and caUs upon whom he please to catch it If it be not caught in due time, he whoee name is called must endeavour to strike one of the others with it ; if he miss he loeee a point, and has his throw up. The remainder of the Rsme, the number of points, and the losers' punishmentt are all precisely as in Nine-holes ; of the two it is the better game.
VOVB COBirXBS.
This ie Catch-ball played by fbor players, who throw the ball from one to the other, varying the order of the throw as may suit their fhncy, and delivering the baU high or low, swift or elow, as the case may be. When ph^ed in sides, the party making the smaUest number of misses in a given number of balls wins, the only stipulatioa being, that every fiiir baU ahaU reach the catcher before it touches the ground*
ntS niTS 09 THX WSBK.
This lively game is played by six or seven players, who severally call themselves Xoadsyy-ToMdsy, etc. The first player tosses the ball against a high wall, and caOs
IB lONOB SPOKTB.
apon uiy pUjar to oateh It on Ha nbonoa b? etying tin Itj at the wwk whWi ba rspraseiiti. It Uia pl^vr uuned, ttiy WednMday. lacaeed In oMabing: (ba 1*11. ho
throws It apngftln wid cmlUuuChar player^ Iha ftiTi mnaiatiiiy^" mIHwj ■ pl^^iriia
OrigiDally Ihli gama was plajsd with a diatendad bladdai, bat now an India-mbbar ball ifl oaed Inatead. Tha ohjact oT Uia playan ia to toaa the ball from hand to hand wiihoat allowtng ii to naoh Iha ground. Though than la linia in tha daaoriptlOB or the game it ii TUy Unly and amoaing.
Wbm the ball ia haavy it ti uaoal to protect the ana wttli a leMhen gannttat, aa in thg ancinit Italian game of PaUon*. deaciibed fnrthv on. In ITnoe* tbia amoHmait ia aa popolar uaong achoo]-bo;a aa Football 1* with m ; and *ra aaa na rmaoD irh; it ahonld not be pnotiaed with adTaotaga bf Engliah lada, eapOCiaUy fta
large India-nbber balb are now c here given will better eiptain b
AncOur kind qf BaOoim-tatt ia mad* oT Isdia-mbber distended to aneb a degT«e of Umaity, or thlnneaa. a« to be capable of being k«pt up in the air tiy a mere toncb. Som* time ainc« balloon-balla, filled with hydrogen gae, were sold in London, bat their danger cauaed them to be diacoantenanced, and ttaei' hare tliacelbra ooaaed to be ao mied.
imrOK BPOBTS.
(Uie of Pall lUUia com- |iumiiTBi7 (impla. Thrm ^ inB wcbH m M( up in ft list, ■bont a 7>nl Bput. and ■ ball ii placed jnat
taTOBd (Iw moM diMuit ana. It ii iti« otijsct or Ih« pl^sr to (Dika hia own bill ■night (brongh lb* Ihna ■rchs is nob » mj u to hit the ball U tbe end. ir lie ttUXoio Ihia, (he nan pli;er kds on; bu be hu tha j^rilsgt of either plsyiDp- fight ibroogh the arcba* or at plaftDg hi* ball on (a Um ball Ibat Um in hia way, aiui Mnkmc It to a iLataoni. la eltbsr cbh, Ihe planar who fint lucoeedg In Khldng lIl^ ball tuiij tbroDgh th« afche* ajid bitting the ball boToad wina the gama. CrTHLUet ball* and bsop* m^ be oaed at Pall tuil.
AacUtr May /(fptarit M» garni la to ttrike Uia ban throagh a disisat hoop io a certain amnbar at blovB with a mallet or hockey-atickt and Uw player irho accom- plBbai Uta taak in the imallai aninber of bloiri wina.
Thia old KngUah apart ta aeldom played now-a-daya ; boC it ia wortta deacnbtng. A ■Dol ■ aet opon the gRnnd and one of the pbyara Cakea hie plan before it. while the Ptaa Saul at a dii^"** pnrioiulj a^^ned on. Odb of the latUr toaaea the ball towarda tba uDt, wtth lb* tntenCton of Rriking It. boi thla the player at the (tool eodeaTonra •o jnmit by beatJnx it away with hia hand. For erery ball ao abnok away he coanu Tta for ^asw, which may be twenty or mon poinu. But IT Ifaa player miH the ball. aaditati<katheataol,liaii"oW,"Bndaiaarow«rofIhaball takea hM pUoe. Ue is
90 MINOB SFOSTB.
also "oat" if etthv of thteplajenoaUditlwlMUaAflrbeixigBtetidkteok within He who flxtt makes the required number of points wins the game.
STOOLS.
This is a more extended fonn of Stool-ball. It was formerly played by both
sexes, as may be seen from averse of a song by D'Urfty, in his play of '< Don Quixote,"
written in 1694—
* Down In n vale on n tnmmor'f iaj§
All the Udi and lamm met to be nerrj; ▲ match for kiaaee ai itool-ball to plaj."
A number of stools are set up in a circle on the green, at a distance of half a dosen yards from each other, a player standing beside each stool. A feeder throws the ball towards one of the stools, and the player endeayonrs to strike it back with his hand. After the ball is struck the players change places, running from stool to stool ; and if he who threw the ball can regain it in time and strike any one of the pilfers before he reaches the stool to which he is running, he takes his place, and the player struck becomes the feeder J and so on as long as the players choose to oontanue the merry game.
Hvxuiro
Is a very ancient game, and may be traced back to the time of the Bomans. It is usually played as follows :— >
Any even number of players is divided into pairs, matching in height, strength, etc., and as each pair is formed, the two players walk away, and when the game begins become individual antagonists, especially watching ibs movements of each other only, during the play. When all the pairs are formed, two bushes or poles are fixed in the ground, eight or ten feet asunder, and directly opposite to them, about two hundred paces off,, two more, the same distance apart : these are termed the goals. Some indiflFbrent person then throws up a ball, and whoever can catch it, and cany it through his adversary's goal, wins the game. The difficulty consists in the party possessed of the ball retaining it long enough for that purpose, which his antagonist uses all his eilbrts to prevent, by striving to get the ball himself, as well as to impede the other's progress. The holder of the ball strives to keep his antagonist off by thrust- ing out his closed fist agahist his breast : this is called buttimg. According to the laws of the game, they must hurl, player to player, and not two attack one ; nor is the holder of the ball allowed to throw it to one of his own party, who msy be nearer the goal than himself.
BOWLOrtt.
Yon must not confound Bowling with Bowls, as the latter is played upon village greens ; for the instruments with which the games are pU^ed are distinct in sise and shape, as also is the olgect of the two amusements. Bowling, as played on the New- castle Town Moor, and in the fields of Northumberland, consists simply in the capacity to bowl a small round heavy ball a certain distance, within prescribed limits, in a larger or amaller number of throws or bowls. The ball, cr bowl, varies mnoh in weighty
MINOB SPORTS. SI
mesag^big to the tMte of the plajen — some weighing as much m thxee poonda, and oClifln aa little as throe onncea. The ball is nsnaUj made of poteherd->-or " potahare" aa tite mhusa generalty call it — the cmcible in which glaoa ia melted. Winstone ia ■lao used hj lome, but for ardinary play, a Cricket or Croqaet ball will answer rexy wen. The Croquet balla, known aa Nicholson's Patent^ which are made of gutta-percha and coooa-nnt iOne, answer capital^ for this game, aa well as for Hurling, Stool-ball, and PaB-maU. The game ia played in the following way: — The players, unre- atrieted in number, agree upon the distanoe to be bowled in the match, which generally takaa plaoe in a field or open space. The leader begins by bowling his ball ont into the field aa fhr aa he can, and then the other players follow alternately ; and he who roaches the required distanoe in the shortest number of throws, wins the game. Now aMiongh Uiia may appear a very simple sort of amusement^ where many join in it, mndlk ptoasniable excitement is caused. At his first throw, the players may make an ** upward cast," or a " ground bowl ;*' but after that, the ball must always be bowled naderiiand, not thrown or pitched. Each pilfer goes on firom the spot at which his hall stops, no matter what the condition of the ground; and when the latter is wet and aloppy, thia ia sometimes productiye of much fhn. In Northumberland, a piece of tape, or a aferaightstick caUeda *' trig," is used to mark the spot on which the ball rests, and the player is compelled to plaoe one foot on the "trig" when he makes his throw. But if the ball should happen to fUl into a ditch or canal— and this is not unlikely, as amile ianotan unfreqnent distance for a north-oonntiy match — the player may demand afresh throw from hislaat"trig;"andif upon any occasion, the thrower fkil to "stride the trig," a new throw may be demanded 1^ any player on the opposite side. The poipoae of the " trig " is to prevent the player taking a run at his throw. In balls made of potsherd, it is usual to have a small indent for the thumb of the thrower. Bat thia ia not neoesaaiy with a Cricket or Croquet ball. The game has lately been played in Victoria Park and Hampatead Heath, and is therefore likely to become as popular in the South of Bngland aa it is in the North.
ram nmxx ball oami.
Thia ia a very celebrated game among many of the tribes of North American Tiwlimns ; it is played hj two parties, each player having two bats, or rather net-sticks, with which he endeavours to throw the ball beyond certain bounds. Mr. Catlin, who nsidad for a long time among the aborigines of America, was preeent at many of these
Bach party had their goal, or '* bye," made with two tall, upright poets, six feet ■part^ set firm in the ground, with a pole across the top. Theee goals were about tottf or fifty yards distant from each other, and at a point just half-way between was anolhw small stake ; here was the ball thrown up, at a given signal, to be struggled for by the players.
The bats, or net-sticka, which they use, are bent m an oblong hoop at the end, with a wab of small thongs of leather tied across to prevent the ball from ftOling to the gzDBBd. Theplayeisholdoneof these in each hand, and bjr leaping into the air. they
oucb Uis laU bMiran the twn nattingt, and Oaow it from 11 wiUi Ihsir hosda. Tha objactorthaEUnalt to throw tlu ball < Eha nprifht polaa ctf mu of tha goal* ; and each tima Uiia ii ■
I widumt toneUiis It sma," UimC ii, batwcoi
Tliia plsuant a&d haaJUij amuamant fa pl«7«d by Uie lodiuu in aidaa or putlM ar aaFaiBl mea. Two Igadan bagts, and duwaa tLeir HTcral plijen, and a-poa gn»l oocuiona many hondred* aiaembla lo aea and join in the apoit. Soon after dark on Ibe prerloiu eTOning tlien ia a danoa, in which Uie woman aaiiit. A» uxm aa (ha ball la thrown np on tha toUowiag motnine, the atnisgle oommencaa, and acona of activa jonng fbllowa aia preaautl; engaged ; the old men, the aqnawa. and Qia children ■ittjng in a circle looMns on. A paoM takes place afUr each ball ia Mt home, and fifty or a bimdred fairly-cairled b^li wioa (he gaioe.
Thii game hae lately been rarlTed in the United Blotea tmder the tdile of " Ball Fla; i" aad haa became Tary popular, both oeua engaging In the oonteat.
SPORTS or AOILITT, STRKROTH. AUD BPBED.
51 HIB ii k mcMt emllant oal-^txir puUou. It BhonU b* pl)V«d in V ^VB'™"'!!- "^ <1>" Btm Uwa an Okgagcd In II. pro- t balgbt uid >«ili^, Iba httUi ti Uu iloTsn of than ir (koM in (me Bir koMS, their Q, Bod tfaaiT hiiBd* bent rorwud. to tliat t^Q chio oT each I, Iha right fDM ■ littls kdmioed, the lack t, lfHl« bant, ttu (lunildir* miuidsd. and Uw bodj flrni. Ths hind- BMlbaKbia tha apart, b^ ukln^ a abort mn, placing liii liandi on ths ibonldBrB of the neart piaj'ar, iprbi^inc with hla r»at u the imme time, and leopiug oTtr hi* head, aa ii|ii«iiiiiiil in the eat. HmTtaig cleared the fint. he goea on to the •eeond, third, fonrth, flab, etc. in luseaaian, and aa apeedilj aa poaaihie. When be haa gone over the laaL, be goea to the Ivnpar OlMuieo. and placea himaalf in podtioa for an the playen to leap om him hi lludr tarn. The StM orer whom ha paasad. followe bim over the woODd. tUnt ftnrlh. He., and wbsn he haa gone OTer, the one who began tbe guns plaoea jr him. The thbd Ailhm the lecond,
Laap-Frog la aomettmta plajBd in a dillbrent naaner, Ibm ; — One pUoee himaeU vbb hk banda on hia knes, hia bod; nearly donblad. and hla aide, inHead of hi* back, tnniad (owaidi Iba laapen, vbo, with a ibort mn, take tbair leap at aoma dlatanoe nm (to lad wbo to to b( mitMd orwi ha wbo takaabtolov tba fBrlbeat off !■
WNOK SPOBTa.
MTmiUij imAginad, Ii bf nc
Thli gams mo; be pli;ail b; Bar naiiibsr. A Una, etHM " tbe gaiter," li nurked on the ground, at which odo of tha playvia "makes a back," with hia aida (0 tba lioo. In doing u, ha ahould ba carafnl to kaap hla haad well in, ao aa to let hia Dbla net upon hifi breaat, or be la likal; to gat atnok hj tiia kneea of the other playcn- Before oran- manoing, it ia agned how many tMt an to ba ixmaidated the "By." Tbalaatonewho goes over the back aiea " Foot it," and tha oae down then movea on a tbot diatanoe. whioh i> meaenred by placing the heal of the right Ibot to the aide of the Mt, moring the left fbot to the toe of tha right, and than ahitUng the tight Ibol, «o *8 to rtanma hia original poaitioiL It (he dlauuiea uamad ia too gteat fbr any of tha playen to fl}', the one HO fkilmg lakea hia place at the garter j or ahoold the laat pl^er omit to Dry " Foot it." be ia down. Shoold lUl anooeed In Oying the nomber of feet agreed on, the player making the bttck takea a jamp from hia laat poaition, and than raoumca hia place, aa back, at the apot wh«e ha alighla ; each of the other players Chan Jnmp from tlie garter, and Oy over the back in rotation ; and so the guoe prooeeda till aome one ttiit to go claai over the bacic If any pU^er, eitbar Id the Sy or jump, gtana from nnda the gaiter, or plaoea hia handa on the back and remavaa them beftirB going over, he ia down. Tike game than oommenoea again aa belbni.
Why thia game ia eo colled we do not know, fiir it ia not pecnllir to Spain. BnC aa it tiM been lalaly plajed in the Part> and other plaoea In LoDdon, we mnat needa deanrtba it. One pl^v goea down Id the uitial way, and aa the flrat jnmper paaaaa orer hia back, he mnat laave a handkerchief, a cap, or ■ome light attiBle behind him. If thla article drop* ftom the back of Ilia atooper betOre tha player ia lUrly orer, then the Utter takea hla plaoe \ bnt if it remaio. it ia the boalDeaa of tha nait jomper to saiie and remore the aitlole aa he Tanlla over, and lo the game go« on. aach Jnmpor alternately placing ukd remoTing the cftp or.handkerohiaf.andbeoomlug tha borae when- •verhe (UIb.
AnuOfr mt oC playing epaoiab Fly la
tar Baoh jnmper to roll up hia haDdkarchief
Ml, and leave it on the back of the
all have paaaed ovar and left (heir
mSOn BP0BT8. 26
■aaoQiflr to hare one wliioh is aot his own, the two decide b7 a long jump ae to which is to go down.
Jmoiher tpoy is to jump over with one hand, and plaoe his haadkarohler with the other, sad then when he has jumped oyer, he is obliged to jomp back again, without remoTing his fbet from, the place where he alighted, and take up the handkerchief in hispasMge.
LAST MAX'S rUM9.
This is played in a somewhat similar manner to Fly the Garter. The difliorence is, that iTMif4ww1 of the one who is down moving the length of a foot, he goes to the spot where the Isst player, who is called the " cutter," alighted at. The best player is generally choaen by him for the cutter, so that he msy, by manoBuvring, or jumping a good distance, cause another to be down, and so relieve him. The one who goes first has the privilege of taking a jump, a hop, and jump — or a hop, step, and jump — between the garter and the bat^ before going over ; but whichever he does, the others most foUow, except the cutter, who is allowed to run to the back, so as to enable him to take a better spring. If the distance get too great for ihe first playerto go over the back with a hop, step, and jump, he is of course down ; but if not, it fhlls to the lot of the first one who fedla. The rules of the, game, as regards touching the garter with yoor tet, or the back with your hands, are the same as in Fly the Garter.
SKAvnnra jmos ajto auinmrG ruxs.
These are simply experiments as to the distance from which a plsyer can vault over the back of another without fhlling on the other side ; in the one case the jump being made with a previous run, and the other by standing close to the man who is
rax fvicnxe sora.
A long rope is swung round b7 a player at each end of it ; when it moves tolerably vegnlar, one, two, or even more boys, step in between those who hold the rope, suflta*- ing it to pais over their heads as it rises, and leaping up so that it goes under their feet when it touches the ground, precisely as in the case of a common skipping-rope. The principal difficulty in this sport is, to run between the players at the proi)er moment, that is, just as the rope is at its highest elevation, so as to be ready to jump over when, in its circuit, it comes toward the feet. Due time must be kept in the leaps, so that they may perflsctly accord with the modon of the rope.
There is another mode of playing with the long skipping-rope, namely, by the player at one end of it advancing a step or two toward the other, keeping the hand wfaicfa holds the rope on the outside, and then, with the assistance of the player at the other end, taming the rope round, and skipping over it in its circuit
Bor, sixp, Axn jmcr.
This is a sport of emulation ; the olitieot is to ascertain which of the players can go over the gieatest space of ground in a hop, a step, and a jump, perfbrmed in suooeasioo, and which may be taken either itSTwUng or with a run, as may be agreed.
W UNOa SPORTS.
Thii Ru&e la pliQ«d with lii or eight on «acb ilda. Ths Isdan irf' MKb p<u«7 dsdile vhD ihall hava the Ont innings ud tha losing pluyim thee place tli thni : — Oiig itanili alnnat niffigbt, with bia handa reatJng agauut Hona aolid and rapport — fj a me or a booae A aecond plafer plasea hia bead againit Ibe ft third igainn the sacond, and ao on till all an langed. Tha; mnat euher croat
OD thalr bnaata, laan Ibem on Chair kneee, or hold b; the Ddwhti oC tha on* ) ihsm. One of Cba winning Pl^} Bra now beguia by nmnuig and placing liia I npon Iha back of tba outer player and iHpmg u fU ttorward on the range M 0, in ordar to give ipaoa tor hia pajtoera behind who follow in anoceaalon, until a naga are aaddled. If tbay san all remain on, witboat (oacblng Che ground. Uie leader oonnta twenty, or rapaata three tiniaa the wordi "Jump. UuJa Nag- me. two, Ihiea." adding, the last time, "Oir, off, oS;" or If any of the oUier (ink beneath the weight, or toach llie groond to aappoit thsnuelvea, — the ridera Iheir inning* asd go on again. If. on Ibe conlnry, they cannot keep their aeata ■boy loaa, and Ibe other* take their place*. When the nagi eiy " Weak te rMer mnat diimouU, and Ibe game begins afttab ; ahoald tbay not do so they mnittakelbe placeoflhanagi. EaobrtderDaghtloCBll " WaraiDgl"
& line 1* draws coo length of the groond, aide* are choaen, player by playar, >}ter- ily. who anarwarda beoome oppooeoia in pair*. Bach aide lake poaaeanon of tbeir leotiTe baaaa. ^la game begtni by the playen Dboaan to oppoae each other, fbld- Ibslr ana*, and boppliiS en one lag. la tbia way each alleiiipla to enter the oripo- baae, hia DppontDt tiTing to pterent him, by poabing againat him with folded II. If he neoeed, the one he oooqacn moat give np, and kaya the game. The
lONOB 8FOBT8.
27
ij than go baek and aMist others of his own psrtj. Tlie game is won by those who remain hoppiag, and take poaeeiaion of their adTflnaries' baae. Dropping the foot on the ground doling the game» renders the plajer onahle to take Anther part mit.
JACK, JACK, ns aXSAB BVSBSl
The players leat themselTsa in a line, each clasping the waiet of the player before him. When all are nnited, two othen, called " Master" and " Man Jack," enter into conversation about the toavet tw the oom, maa^ntng the boys who are linked together. The Master teUs Jack not to let the bread bnm« or it will atick together. He then walks away, bat Jack, being a carelem fellow, begins to talk to a third, called the Pieman. The seated players then commence hunng, to aignify that the bread bums, npon which the Master returns, and desires Jack to assist him drawing the batch. Jack grasps his master from behind roond the waist, the Master lays hold of th^ hands of the first seated, and the two pnll nntil they separate him from the grasp of the player behind. Th^ then take the second in the same manner, and so on nntil they have thus drawn the whole line. This simple, but rather rongh game, is known in some parts of the conntty as " Drawing the Oren." It was played bf Grecian boys two thousand years ago ; so that, if it be not particnlarly elegant, it has at least the recommendation of antiqaity.
pBxsonas' bass. Prisoners* Bsse is troly a capital game for cold weather. The best number to play at it is six or eight on each side, bat there is no objection to more or fewer players. The choice of partners is decided by chance. Two bases formed by drawing a line about a dozen from a wan, and dividing the space enclosed into two eqaal portions, one of which is oocnpied by one set of players, the other by their sdTersaries. Two prisons are also marked, opiposate to each other, at from one to two hondred fbei (as convenience will permit) from the trtmt of the bounds ; the prison belonging to one party tbdbiuA be in a line with the bounds ef the other. A player, from one side, now begins the gsme, by running out midwsy between the bonnds and prisons, crying, ••Chevy! — Chevy I — Chevyl" One tnm the opposite party immediate^ follows, when an adverHoy porsoes him ; and so on in tan, both sending oat as many as th^ may The ol^ject of each is to overtake touch an opponent who has quitted
|
Prison 2. |
Prison 1. |
|
|
\ / « Chevy. A • |
\ |
|
|
Basel. |
Bases. |
•sooBS A»»AB«B» ro» r»ii«iis«s' »*■>.
I
28 lOKOB SPORTS.
thB bonnds beford himself; and to STofd being touched hy one of the opposite partj, who hae started to intercept his progress. If he socoeed in ratohfag his adyer- saiy, he is at liberty to retam to bounds without ftar of being stopped byhia opponent, who has now to reach home as quickly as poesible, avoiding his parsning adyersaxy. Daring this exciting scene, all players who haye been touched by opponents go to the prison of their own party, and are one by one redeemed by their partners ; who, in order to accomplish their release, ran from the bases to the prison before they can be overtaken by the opposite side. If saooessfrd, they are at liberty to retam to boonds without being touched ; bat shoold any happen to be intercepted, they haye to go to prison in their tarn. When all the players of one party are in prison at the same time, the game is determined in flf^yoor of their opponents.
Any player may sally out in pursuit of one of the opposite side who has left hia base, and then perhaps half a dosen are in " the opm" at the same moment. Every player caught by an opponent must go to prison, and immediately either base is left unprotected, the other side may take possession of it, and claim the game. When there are several players in prison, it is Ikir for them to join hands, and stretch out in a diagonal line over the grou^, so as to shorten the distance for the rescuer to ran ; but the last prisoner must keep one foot within the prison boundary ; and if they happen to break hands, any or all of them may be touched by their adversaries, and sent back to prison. It will be seen that this game is a sort of little war, with only hands and feet for weapons ; but it is a good game, f^U of pleasant sorprises and exciting attacks^ and requiring the exercise of patience, activity, and forethought.
The boys of France play the game in a somewhat lees amusing fkshion ; for aa soon as a player is touched, he goes to prison, and remains there till an exchange of prisoners is agreed on between the captains on either side.
KIPPAS.
The Greeks had a pastime called *< Hippas," which, we are told, was one person riding upon the shoulders of another, as upon a horse. A sport of this kind was in practice with us at the commencement of the fourteenth oentoxy ; and it waa a ftivourite May-day game in the time of Qneen Elizabeth ; the carrier, or " palfr^," as he was then called, was decked in gay ribbons, whilst the riders wore pasteboard helmets, and carried wooden swords and shields. It is still occasionally played in some parts of the country, and is performed by two competitors, who struggle one with the other, and he who pulls his opponent from the shoulders of his carrier is the victor. A soil piece of turf should be chosen for this sport.
xnro oinxB.
TIm mora of Cwnta'u mtn yon m«, Tlw mora the tam* wtU meny bs.
In order to play this game, the ground is divided into three parts by chalk or other
lines drawn across it, the spaces at either end, called baaea, being much smaller than
the middle one. The more players there are the better la the sporL All go into one
XZNOB SPORTS. 29
cf tbfB bMM, ezeopt '< the King," who u either elected by dhaaoe or ToluiteerB ; he jimem himeelf in the oantre of the space between the two baaes, and the othen ran from baee to baee, endeaTOoxing to avoid being caught hy the King. Should the King, however, snooeed in intercepting one of them, he touches him on the head three timee, and each time repeats the words, "I crown thee. King CcBsar." The one socanght and cjTOwned then joins the King between the bases, and assists in catching the rest. A fdajer is allowed to hop out of a base, and return, but if he place both feet on the groond, he must run towards the other base ; but if the out-players catch him outside the bases, on either one or both legs, th0y may crown him : unless a player, when oanghtk is properly crowned, he may return within the bases. When the players that have been caught considerably outnumber those remaining in the bases, the former may enter the bases and pull the latter out and crown them ; and the latter are allowed to defend themselves in the best way they are able. This game is sometimes called «« Rnahing Bases," from the players rushing trcan the base at one end of the gxound to the other.
KDTO 09 no CABTLB.
niis is a very simple and lively sport. One player places himself on the top of a little mound or hillock ; he is the King of the Oastle, and endeavouxs to retain ixMses- siom of his post as long as possible, against the attacks of his playmates, who endeavour, one at a time, to push him off. If he be driven off the mound or hillock, the player who dethrones him takes his place. In various parts of the country boys and girls play at this game, and while on the mound they sing in choros the rather rude lines
•■ X*B th« KiBv of the OmUc. Oet down, jvtt dirtr ntesl I"
WDDT, WmnT, WAT.
TUs is a femons game for a winter's morning. The more players the greater the ftm. One oommsnoes it by starting from a wall, or a line marked on the ground, with his hands linked one in the other, calling out—" Widdy, widdy, way, cook warning 1" He then parsuea the other fdayers, and if he succeed in touching one of them without unclasping his handa, thfy return home together, and then start forth joining hands, the same warning as before. Bach now tries to touch an out-player, who.
if fiMy snoeeed, has to retnrn with them, and th^ saUy out again with joined hands to overtake aqy other out-playerB, being obliged, however, to separate and retnrn to boands every time one is caught. The out-players have the privilege of attafkiTig them to eompel them to let go their hands, and on any occasion when the line is broken, thc7 eaa daim to be carried home on the widdys' backs. Only the two outside playen of the line can touch those in the field. The one who oommenoes the game is allowed lo join the oat-players after he has caught four. The game is decided when the whole are overtaken ; but it is very often prolonged when there are only one or two to be muLxuvH, if the line is of ax^ extent^ as the two outside ones are, perhaps, each intent on different ways, and frequently cause the line to be broken. No out-player can be JonAed after the line is broken.
80 lONOR SPORTS.
VOLIiOW XT LXAJ>BB.
With a bold and active leader, this sport is rery pleasant and ezoitinir* Any number may play at it. A leader is fixed on, and the other players range themselves in a line behind him. He commences the sport by some feat of a^ty, sndh as leaping, hopping, or climbing, and his followers then attempt to perform St in saooeasion. He then goes on to another trial of skill ; the other players follow his example, and thus the sport proceeds nntil the parties think fit to cease. If one boy can perform a feat, which tiioee who are placed before him in the rank ftdl in attempting, he takes prece- dence of them.
TOUCH.
This is a capital game of speed for six or eight players. One Tolnnteers to be the " Touch," or first player ; it is the object of the other players to run from and avoid him. He pursues them aU ; or, if he thinks fit, singles out an individual, and follows until he comes up with and touches him. The plajrer so overtaken becomes ** Touch," and endeavours to lay his hand upon one ofHhe rest. This active and amusing game for cold weather, is sometimes called *' Touch-iron '* or " Touch-wood." In theee cases, the players are safe only while they touch iron or wood, as may be previously agreed. They are liable to be toudiad only when running from one piece of wood or iron to another. If a player touch another, he must cry "Feign double-touch 1" which signifies, that the player so touched must not attempt to touch the player who touched him, until he has tried to touch another. The players are not allowed to say they " touch wood, or iron " by simply carrying a bit of stick or a nail ; the wood or iron must belong to the ground on which tb^ play. Boys and girls can play at this game with equal advantage.
CBOSS-TOVCH.
This is a pleasant varied of the game of Touch. The players, unlimited in number, assemble in the field or play-ground, and settle among themselves who shall first be " Touch," or *' He." This arranged, " Touch " runs after one or other of the players, and whoever he succeeds in catching becomes " Touch," in his turn. But while he is running after one boy, another crosses the line between the pursuer and pursued. *' Touch" is then obliged to abandon his original quarry, and run after the crosser, who has gone in a dififlsrent direction. Again another player darts between, and again must *' Touch " change his tactics ; and as often as the line of pursuit is crossed by another boy, that boy must be followed by the " Touch." So the game goes on, till player alter player is caught ; and a veiy merry and exciting game it is, especiaUy in cold weather.
TAO.
This is Cross-touch on the ice. One boy is selected for universal huntsman, who gives chase to the whole of the players. He selects any boy he chooses, and hunts him down till he is crossed by some one else. The fUn all rests in the crossing. Just as the huntsman has his arm stretched out to touch, having all but run down his prey, and being absorbed in the delicate regulating of his headlong speed, putting on the break by driving his heels into the ice, at this critical moment the deftest runner (or
UINOB SPOBTS. 31
■laMr, irthas»iDabapl4«dl)7ikBtan), ■woopadown, and wltli «oiA>at«l thooldcn ■ad *'-T'"g form, cnM In bMwMO bMh, uid eiixiM wtttumt a gme. He baa only a boi to tarii In, but b> doe* it i^iidlr, and la awnr like a blid ; and ■> Ilia gams oon- tinaca UD " Tonob " baa ancceadad " Tonoh," and tlia pla;Ba tin.
ne pb^ar cboaen aa the Hnntaman itarta ont from tha bonnda after the plajan fn Oe (MiL Whan ba aaooaeda In oalsblng oos, he ridia him bock. The two then join
Tfaia game, which ma; be played bj any aombar, ii biat adapted for tha diuk of a aommer'B erecins. Sid» are choaan, and one party reioaiiu "W bome," while the «lun SD out and hida thamaelTea. When thU is done, one player (praviooaly eboaen) MUaoot" Waning I" and hldaahlmflelfafterwardaaa quickly aapoaaible. The "home"
aboBEa, " I my, 1 1 " bnt, if before thia object be ■***^"*^. two of the " ool " aide can laana^ to teach homa anpar^ved, they call in all tha reat Frraa their hldiog-pUoea by ajia^ oat, " All home I " The whole parly may Uian go ont and hide again- The •Hbins putiy mult apr oiU two playara oT Itaa oppoeitn aide beToro they ai« entitled to
bide himself. When ready, he 4honl4 " Whoop I" lbs Dthcra then uUy ont to And him ; and the one who diaooTera
The hidden pUTer then braaka ^m hia ooneealmeot. atid if he oan oatcb one of the othere, the one bo canght BiB«t cany him on hia back to "home." II ia than the boy** torn who mode the diaeovery to go and hide hinuelf, and the olben endeavoor to diacover hia Inikins-plaM. a* boTore.
ia concealed by odb player, and the rest ■OtH^tDlhid K 1 the diaoorererla m Wa ^ame, for the boy or girl wbo haa aecreted the article to eooooratie thooe who ■IHaiiaib it, by telling Ibem that they bum, and to warn them of their departure from k ky a^iBc (bey lyeeie. Hide and aeek may be played either within doon or in IL?
32 lONOB 8P0BTS.
XATCnr, OB, PXTCK CLUB.
This is the popolar gaane of the Fain, the origiiiAl of "Aunt Sally.** The greet art is to hit the object on the ttiek, and not the stick itself, or the toy on its top will fell in the hole. The club should be thrown end first, and not horisontally ; and should be straight and rather heayy.
TIF-CAT.
Tip-eat, or " Cat," is a well-known game, played with a stick and a piece of wood about six inches in length, and an inch and a half or two inches in diameter, diminished from the middle to both the ends, in the shape of a double cone. By this contrivance the places of the trap and ball are at once supplied, for when the oat is laid upon the ground, the player, with his cudgel, strikes it smartly, at either end, and it will rise high enough for him to beat it away as it fUls, in the same manner as he would a baU.
A large ring is made upon the ground, in the middle of which the striker takes his station ; his business is to beat the cat over the ring. If he ikil in so doing he is out, and another player takes his place ; if he be sucoeesftil, he judges the distance tiie cat is driven from the centre of the ring, and calls for a number, at pleasure, to be scored toward his game ; if the number demanded be found, upon measurement, to exceed the same number of lengths of the cudgel, he is out; on the contrary, if It do not, he obtains his call.
Another waif is to make four, six, or eight holes in the ground, in a drculsr direction, and as nearly as possible at equal distances iW)m each otho*, and at every hole is placed a player with his cudgel ; one of the opposite party, who stands in the field, tosses the cat to the batsman who is nearest him, and every time the cat is struck, the players are obliged to change their situations, and run once tram one hole to another in succession ; if the cat be driven to any great distance, they continue to run in the same order, and claim and score towards their game, every time they quit one hole and run to another ; but if the cat be stopped by their opponents, and thrown across between any two of the holes before the player who has quitted one of them can reach the other, he is out.
naoPFEvo vsB 'xxbohixv.
A number of players join their hands so as to make a drele ; one only stands out : he walks round the outside of the drele, and drope a handkerchief behind which player in the circle he thinks fit. The party, behind whom the handkerdiief is thus dropped, immediately pursues the one who dropped it, those who stand on each side completing the circle by joining hands. The pursuer is bound to follow precisely the course of the pursued, who endeavours, by all the means in his power, to pussle and elude him, winding in and out under the arms of the other players, who elevate them for his accommodation. If he succeed in so doing, that is, if the pursuer make a blunder in his course, the latter returns to his place in the circle, and the first player drops the handkerchief behizxd one of the players again. When he is fairly overtaken by the player behind whom he dropped the handkerohifli; the latter takes his place, and he
XZNOB SPOBTS. 33
Joint haadf in Che cirote. Wban girls pUiy with bojB at this game, the farfUt of being eanglit is a kiaa : infiust the pastime ia neither more nor leaa than oar old &Tonribe, Kiaa mtheBing.
"Hunt the Hare" — ^inaome plaoee known aa "Hare and Honnda" — iaaneaqy bat capital game for a good number of boya in weather which ia too cold or too damp for Griekat and other paatimea. Now, although the whole principle of the game conaiata in the bogra who represent the hoonda running after and catching the hare, yet mach actifitj and ingennity are necessary when it is well played. The boy who ia selected ftor Hare should be a swift mnner, patient, daring, and ready at reaonrce. Having cliaaen your Hare, yoa next appoint yoor Huntsman and Whipper-in. These should be flxst-rste mnners, with plenty of that truly British artide called pluck, and not a little judgment and knowledge of the ground over which the hare is to be coursed. Than, aa real hounda track out real hares by " scent^" the boy-hare should be provided with a snbatitgte for scent in the shape of a bag of paper cut into small pieces, which he ecatters on hie way, always remembering that the hounds follow the scent thus given with implicit celerity. Now we wiU suppose the here Airly started, with seven minutes' law to enable him to get w^ out of sight. The huntsman, with a white flag, end the whtpper-in, with a red flag, collect the hounds about them and pursue the hare. They presently come in sight of the scent, which they steadily keep to, till perhaps ihej find themselves at ftmlt. The huntsman leads the pack, and if he loses the scent he criee " Lost I" On this he strikes his flag in the ground, and the hounds dispel se themselves in a circle to recover the scent. The player who finds it shouts oat " lUly-ho 1" The huntsman blows hia horn, and away go the hounds in the track of the hare. It is the business of the whijiper-in to keep the hounds well together, sad to assist the huntsman in every possible way in preventing the hare reaching home withoat being taken. The hare himself will, meanwhile, have taken aoefa pncantions aa win have given him a good chance of escape. He will doable the flelda, jump ditchea, and even ford stresms to shorten his course and avoid and thua in the course of a couple of hoars a good ten miles of ground win be got over, to the benefit of the health of all the players. A capital account of Hare and Hounds will be found in ** Tom Brown's Schooldays," in which work alao the game of Football is well descrfbed.
jureuira.
TUs is a good oountcy game and aflbrds mudi amusement, a smooth and level lawn being diosen, and surrounded by a rope ring. The jingler, holding a small ben ia hie hand, continues to sing it at intervals, while the remainder of the players, who aie Mindfblded, porsne him. The game ia won by the jingler if he avoids being taken within a certain time; but If within that time he ia caught, the pli^er who catohea the prise. A good deal of mirth ia often oocaaioned by the blindfolded
toning over each other.
S
lOHOE SPOBTB.
Tlila guns i* plajad In % TsrlMj- or waji. bat the ralloirfiig li the moat o DrAV with chalk, on Uie groond, ■ fipin luuiliir to that in the majffio, and lot ioning*- ^I'he player who ia to commence ttuula at the hob,* and throws an ofMer-thell into No. 1, whlcb ii oaUed theBnt bad) he then nep* or hop* into that bed, and with Uu [Dot he it iMndlug | on >ark* the ahell cut tow&idi the >. He then thmn thi I, atepe Into 1, hope into a, jerka the iheU from £ to 1, ant 1 (owanle the *, He nowthrowalliB ahell Into 3, Mepa ini ■iDide into 1 and S, ao that he ehall have one foot in ei ■prlnge on one foot into 3, jbtIcb the ahell into t, from : bom 1 (o the *. He next thnwa the ahell Into t \ etepa in sBride into 1 and S, alighta on one Ibot into 4. picks d] with his h&nd, pl«c«s it on (ha toe of the foot that is off ( throira ft ap b; > motion of the leg, and catchea it In his then jtunps back to the ■ in the esme maimer at he advauced ; i pl^er, in ntuming throagh the beds, must alw^s repeat the jomps be a adTandng, He now throws the shell into S i and pestling throngh the beds as berore, alighta on one leg In G, Jerks the ahell into *, catches It from his tOot. and nlnms to the '. He throws tiie ebell now to B, jerks it to 5, then to 4, eatohes it, and retoms to the *, When tn T. after jnmpiiig eeulde into e and 7, he jerks shell into B, 1, and tg hum S, to 7, B. 6, and I rotation, eatohlng it eaoh lime a* before, and letnmlng. In 9, he catches tlie shell t^m his disengaged foot, and rstnms to the *. In IQ, he Jerks it to 9; in 11, alter jumping aafride, he jerka it into 10, and then into » ; catching it each time Id B M before, and ratoming each time to the •. He now throwa the shell into the last bed, or " pinm- podding," aoiaetimea called the "cat's headj" oa arriving in vhich he has to catch the shell from bia . and then with one effbrt jerk it with the foot he la in thiDOgh all the bcda, ntoming aa nsnal to the *.
Hop Scotch. Draw a Ognre oi ground like that in the diagrato. Through this the chip or abell must be kicked, without its resting on a line, or the p '
a Mob with hie foot. Ull the centre bed is reached. From this point i the phtTsr hope back withont stopping or changing feet. Tbe chip may be either kicked (him bed to bad, la hopping back, or kicked
UIHOB BFOBTB.
1« in tha King of the Cutis, Chi* gkme ii pluyvd on ■ hUl or moiud. Kdea an r*-**t**'. ud GAch aida Blaoto m IcAder or pnnco. The ona aide l^e ponHfluoa of tbe
kardiM (Wteneil lo a Kick. The defendeim ttua Bnttomid tbii banner, the bnalnsss of Uw Mlncken being to obtain pomf ion of it by taj Me and read; meaaa. The allaiilim adTanoa in ■ body and esdeaToiir to dialodga Chati opponnta, who in their Dm poeh them baok and Xry to bold tbeir own. Any playar who falla to tiia ground ta oaoaidaml " dead." and ii ont of tlie game, being carried off by Ue comradea. In Ihia aUernataly atti-Wng and defending, the gama may be punned till one or the other paii7 gaiaa the jkMrj — the attacker* in one game bsoomlng the dafandaia in another.
Steeple Chaee la a rare good game for sold weather, for it ii not only a trial of ■peed and actiTi^. but a capiUtl pnaerratiTe of health. As; number of boya duv play at it ; and at Bngby, Bton, and otliar pnblio achoola, ft ia vary popular. When the playar* aaeemble on the fleld they agree npon a mn of a mile or a oonple of milea •award* eome cooapiODoa* object. ■* a cboich. a houae. or a tree, and home again, tbe boy wba get* back tint being the winner. No pwtlDalar routs need be obeerred, each pl^er ehooaing that which ha think* beet. Soma will take the high road, while othan win make a baee' line atiaight to the mark, acroa* bedgee, dilchee. awampa. plooghed Belda, and what not. Qood olimbora, jntdper*. and runner* atand an eKccllent chance or datingniiilitng thenaelTaa In the Steeple Chaee, and in large school* anch lad* an ksowB aa the Dnka, the Uarqule. the VlaoDunt, the E*jl,eto.j inTirtne of their prowaea.
vaHca urn maiiiB.
Thia game ia [dayad by two paitlea, whoaa nnmber* are aqnal ', they aD take hold of a rope, and the otyacl of each parly i* to pinll thoae belonging lo Ilia other acroa* a chalk line on the gronnd, by mean* of Uie rope. Whan all the playaiB on one aide are tho* polled orsr, or made priauoBr*, the other part; win* the game. Thia i* a very lively ipDrl, and any niunber may join bt tC ; it i* moat eeeaonabla in sold weather, irtKn it aflbrdi opUal exsntl*e and much amoeemest. The (bllowiag i* our aitlat'*
%a Vnrqsal Contiit.
HLBCSLLASIODS OUT-DOOB IPORTfl.
Thread the Needle nuy be placed b7 k lug* number
of boji uid ffii^, who ^ jcdn hasdi, uid Che gmme oom-
meium with tbe foDowing dialogue betweeo the two oatadde
pTHVpn It eacb end of the line : " How toaaj mils* to Babylon t"
ton." "Cmlg* Ihare byiMidlellghtf" "Tm,
" Hud bmck *s>iii."
V In ohixliF'Tice la tbli nwmlite. the jdivv who ilatida m( (he oppoella end of the line, and thi« DD* next him, lift Ibelr Joined hand! u high M poatfbla ;
wasroR SrOBTB. 87
wlioto line IbUow Mm, tf poMtbla, wtthoat dtonnltlng. niis is Ihreadliigtheiifledle. The ■KOD dialogiie is repeated, the nepondent in the ftnt faetomoe now beooming the inqoirer, tad running lietween the two players at the other end, with the whole Una alter Urn. The flrst then haa hia tarn again, and lo on aa long aa the players choose to oontitttte the gune.
Tliia ia a yexy simple, liTely, and amnsfaig game. It is played hy fire only ; and the place eboeen for the sport shonld be a sqnare oonrt or yard with four comers, or any place where there are fonr treea or poets, abont eqnidistant from each other, and fanning the four points of a sqnare. Baoh of these points or comers is oooapied by » the fifth, who is called **Piib8," stands in the centre. The game now the players exchange comers in all directions : it is the otigect of the one who stands ont to occnpy any of the comers whiidi may remain TBcant fcnr an instant dnring.the exchanges. When he snooeeds in so doing, that player who is left without becomes the " Pass.*' Itistobe obeerred,thatif AandBatcemptto exchange and A geta to B*s comer bat B fails to reach A*s before the pli^yer who stands ooi gets there, it is B and not A who becomes " Pass." In wet weather Pass in the Comer may be plsyed in the hoose, a good large empty room answering for the play-groand or meadow.
CAT AVD XOUSB.
The toy with which this game ia played con^Bts of two flat bits of hard wood, the edgea ct one of which are notched. The game ia played by two only ; th^y are both blindfolded, and tied to the ends of a long string, which is fliwtened in the centre to a poet* by a nooae or loop, so as to play easily in the eyolntions made by the players. The party who plays the mooae occasionally scrapea the toys together, and the other, who plajB the cat^ attracted by the sonnd, endearoors to catch him.
BVOK.
Dodc shoald be played by a nomber exceeding three, bat not more than six or ei^it. Each of the players being provided with a large pebble or stone, abont twice the siae of a cricket-ball, called a " dock,'* one of them, by chance or choice, placea hia dncdk on a large smooth-topped stone fixed in the ground. An ofllng being marked, at eight or ten yards' distance from the stone, the other players cast their docks at it in tarn, endeavoaring to knock the dock off its place. Each player, aa soon aa he haa his dock, watohea for an opportanily of carrying it back to the offing, so aa to again. If the player whose dock is on the stone can toach another after he haa np hia stone, and before he reachea the offing, provided his own dnck remain on the large stone, then the player so tooched is oat» and changes placea with the player at the atone. It sometimes happens that three or four of the players* ducks lie so dose together that the player whose dnck is out on the stone can stand in a sitoation •0 be within reach of all of them; in this case th^y cannot^ withoot mnning the risk of being toadied, pick op, ontfl one of those who are at the offlng is Inoky enoagh to attika the dnok off the large stone; then, be£kire its owner can replace it, which he
S3 IDNOH SPORTS.
mnit do bafore he <»n lonoh > v^v, ttie^ all taka np Uicir doeka and nm lo lU o&ns, wben. of uiona, Iha; an nA.
.Jiw<il<rini|> tT jrioriiv Ate paiac ii to monul thna or fbnr briokbata ana on top rf tlia otiiar, and to bj to dlilodgs the appar 000 b7 tiirowliig Uu dock at It bobm Iha kespor of ttie otMls can toaah tlie thronr. Tha pligFcr lo tonolud buoamea UiB
na other plajen Otea atUok tha bear with twiUed haodkerchletk, and ihs master endaaTonia ta toucli one of them ; IT ha can do ao without latting go tha ropai or pulUns the bear from his aaat, tha player lo touched takaa tha place oT tha bear. Kach bMT baa Uia prlTilega or chooainK hi* oWDmaater: bat being baar once, or eras oftener, doaa not eaonarale a plarer, if Itiiiij tonobed, from becoiniBK ao again.
A plank ig placed fcron a Tellad tiee, a low wall, ui a large atone, and a playar ■eati himaalf at each end ; b; a alight etertloD, If the plank be pioperlr balancad. each end Tiaaa and nnka altamately. It noat be obaerred that if the playera be of uneqoal weight, ha who is the heavier mut, to praaarva tha doe equilibrium, make bla end ot the plank ahonar. See^awa are eonwtimea made on a large anla ; — two upright poata, abont eigbc liwt high, are plaoed in the gronnd and aeonnd at tha top by a craaa bar ; between them a plank it nioely balanoad, eaob end of tbe plank having a woodeik taproaenlaUon at a horsa'a head and body, with bridle and ilimps. It will aaaiat tlie plafen If one itanda in the mlddla of the plank and inollnea hit body lltat on one aide and than on Hie other. A meobanlcal aea^aw, with eeau fbr tbe playeia, who an proTldad wiUi leather airapa to pnll agaloit each other, hae been lately iuTentad, Bikd i* TB7 popular at tha CrjUti Palace and other plaoea of an
e proT«rti whioh It tmrattUj kpplled to * ikflfl of bi« mone^," It ii playsd b^ lUmminff, or jvk' ■toms along ths miteoa of a ilTW or pond. ITth* Ihing Unvwii toDctxa the wU«r and nbonnd* once, Alt m disk ; if twice, a duck ; if thrice, « dnka. He who nukoa hii tlaU or pebble reboond the greetest nnmber of tinua, wiBi the BUDfl. Tfae ■un« affbct occnn whan a ahot Ored fhun a oanaon bits iht watAT a a tlantiiig dinctioii -, it will play at duck and draka for halF-a-mile before It ainka, ihoa iiMfiMjiiig the iiniiCiiiu and elMtio property ol waMr.
lirnaw. or netins them on hia kneea, forward lo aa lo bring hia back da
mgtaM a post, wan, tree, or other «
pl* JIT wbo glna the back lo Tba Snt plaTer having tlioi taken hia poai- ikn, the eecDnd leapa or nalu aatride on hia ta^ hoUa Dp ai many at the Bngen of one faaod aa be plaaaea, and aayi, '^Bock, Buck, bow maiiT borna do I hold ap P" The ptl^er whc (irea ihe beck makaa a Koeae i it ha name the nght DunbcT, the other placer becomaa
OB, bolda ap the aame or a diflbnnt nnnjb
at finger* and aaka the aame qnntloa aa bel
ifae B-na nnniber. It ia the bnaiueat of the nmplie
(In pan of the rider, and no attempt lo look ap by tb
le oMide ihiid playvr ; ao that when the Back'! gat»M
ibe OBpira baoomlng rider, and Iha Bock umpire.
atanda by aa niaplre- ^le
It there ia no foal play on r. Sometimce the umpire t, the ridar giraa a back.
Swtngteg can icarcely be termed a game. It ia nther an exerdae or amaaamaiit w one pcnon at a tine. All boya know how to make a awing. Soapend a rope mreiB two Iniaa or eroaa pieeea of timber, and aaat yonmlf tn the middle of the top aa it haoga down ; or have two ropca of equal length aoapended aa before, with a au leeBi^ Ibatoned at the other end. Than with a little impetna given by another iiwai JOB aaj maant up in Ihe air aa high ai tba length of (he rape will allow, o-
40 lOHOB BF0BT8.
jon JBMj tiwiag wish Uifl hAnds aloiis gnafdng tiu rofws, or f**"^^"g on tbt ttmL toA luilding: Uu npat Ughar up. In thl* m; gnat TviNf mij be produced in tlie iMnWhy sibrUh of Ihe iwliig.
auiu ID nn nraw. Id IliaM day* nhcm winter olothea (lia antftoe or the eauth with ■ numtle of oiow, and mur of ttie amiucmeiiU of the plnTgronnd kn thereby laipgoded. It ie > cnMom with boja. u loiiie of out toddr i«*den donbtleaa reiy waU know, to make IbM whioh ie an impedinHat to their old recreatioiiBf a mateiial for joang ontm. Tbea do ■DOWbaUi, bumlm if lighclj oompmaed, bnl Mhenrlee if etronglr kneaded, fly Bbont la •Jjaadanoe. Cftvee, end even pigmjr forowee ere nmanncted, whioh aepiring youth atuek and dstend by tnm. Napoleon, when a oadet at the HiUiary School at Brienne, ehowed hia partialis Tar the pioftewiton ho had choeen, by indul^big in aimilar ponnita. Od one oooaelon when the beary Ule of toow had pat a stop to other amneamenta, he penuaded hii comradea to conatmct a mow fort, with ita bom worka, ralaed parapete, and trenclua eompleto. He Uien divided them into plaloona and nndartaoli la oanuaand the attacks i the reauU waa a urlea of eiegaa. whleh wen oarrled dd with more or leaa auocaai for the epaoe of a fbrtnight. Thou oT our yoDng friends who are aat ailed with a like militai? ardonr, will perhapa find amnaemeDt in tbs ootutniotlon of a enow atatne. The rolUoK ball, whieh la first roonded by the little hands of a child, will, by driving it over the anew for a few boors, become too big fbr a man to move. Whan the Joyona tenants of tba playground have beoomo lUigned wlib the eieroise, or Ibo ball haa acquired a alie and weight anperlor to their
oat oC Die maas. adding to ita height and diminiahlng Ita breadth. Tbia is called the Bqdw Statne ; and whan complete, the yoong sinilplaTS ntlre to a oonveoieat distancs and, with the aid of anowballa, eaoh Dies hie nunost to demoUah that which he baa just lakes anoh poina to oonstraiii. It haa been related, and we behave with tnith, that even a small poitlon oT snow, Oietarbed by the delioale fbot of the antelope, in travanlsg the aummlt of one of the Alpine mountains, so Increased In rise in its pn>- grseg downwania, tbat at length it assomed a mora than Ibnnidable siea, and contlnned to do ao in lu descent ontil it formed one of tboee destraetive engines of natore, an avalanche, overwhelming booaea and even a whole village !
d. utd deUghtlU iiiilliuu I* lo ynO known ■■
at d— criptlon mmooBnarj. Thttrc 1a, bowerar, a Tftrlattoii ol
. tl, eaUed " Bbadow BotT." whieh la Im kirawn but «qn>l]j mmuiiig,
' A luge pkece of wUte line
m i M ■ littls diitaEaa from it, BaBf, irHh hia &■» unwd ttie 1. ii tMtad on * low atooL Dbwtlj In ■ Bita. and •boat a jard baUnd him. ■ table la ptaoed wtth a dandle on It i »11 Qis oOtr Ughla mart ba extlo- Koialiad. Tbe plajen tban wmlk. ona by one, between tha table and Battj (wbo muM not mn hia bead). UmpiaK, bopping, and grlmaeliig a* thejr pMaae, eo aa la diatort their ahadowi on the Unen. If Bnl^ can tell eamellj to whom imj ahadow belonga (gnaaaing onee oulj for aecb peraon), the pl^er wbon he ao dlaoorva takea hia place. In Ihl* gam* BaBf, at ooone, la not bliiuirolded.
nw jdajen aei M ginBp, la ahoB
reoTlt. Ooaof the
aa at Hunt tha Slipper, and one who baa " hDniar," who, kneeling in ^a oentre of (o place bis head In tha lap of one of the lOe In that poalUon the whlatla la to he dn to the tack part of hit MM or Jaoket, platan now blowi tba wUMIa and drape ledi lo lauA IW It. Tb* Other plBjer^ aa
42 MmOB 8P0BTB.
fhe opportmutiee ooenr, blow throogh the wbiatle and drop it, and if careftiUy done it will be some time before tbe " hunter " diacovera that he ia oariTing the object of hia aearch about him.
POKSB m soircw, ox hot boilxd BiAjre ajts bacov.
Thia ia abont aa aimple and noi^y a game aa can well be wiahed. Some small article ia to be hidden, the player whose bnainess it is to discover it being sent oat of the room while that ia being done. They then ciy, " Hot boiled beans and baoon, make haate and come in to supper." The searcher then returns to the room, and a player takea a pair of tongs in one hand, and a poker in the other. The seeker of the hidden treasure is then called in, and begina to hunt for the concealed article ; while he is at a distance firom the spot where it has been placed, the poker, which ia held between the legs of the tongs, is made to atrike them alternately with a alow moUon, so.aa to produce a kind of melancholy music. But as he approaches the concealed treasure, the music becomes more lively, and aa he recedes from it more slow and aolemn ; but when his hand is placed on the spot where the article ia to be found, the musician plays a loud and noisy tune on his strange instrument. Or the progress of the playOT in his search may be announced by assuring him that he ia " very cold," ** rather warmer," '* very hot," or *' burning his fingers," aa he approaches or recedes from the hidden object.
TBAsss AVD rxorxraioirs, ox duxb motiohb.
An unlimited number can play at this amusing and ingenious game. Bides are chosen, and chance decidea which shall be "masters" and which "men." The principal aim of the players is remain " men " as long aa they can ; or, in the lan- guage of the trade, to keep the masters out qf toork. The men then consult secretly, and decide upon some trade or profession ; the best is one in which the arms, handa, or leg^ are employed in various ways. They afterwards range themselves in a line opposite the masters, and the foreman tells them the first and last letters of the trade they have fixed upon — such as J — ^B for joiner, B — ^H for blacksmith, C — B for carpenter, T — B for tinker, A — ^Y for apotheoaiy, and so on. He then bids his men to
go to work — thus :
" Now, my men, tb« worlc*! bcfmi. No more speaking till it's done."
The men then begin to show by gestures the various labours which belong to the trade they have named ; for example, should it be that of a carpenter, one will appear to be sawing, another planing, others hammering, chiseling, boring, sharpening tools, and every other part of the trade requiring a distinct motion ; the less common the better, as being more difficult to guess. When this has continued for some time, if none of the masters guess the trade, the foremen tells the men to "stop working," and demand their wagea. The masters then have one guess each, and if none are right, the foreman is obliged to tell them the name of the trade they have worked at, and the men proceed to choose another as before. If any player speak while work- ing, or display any actions which do not belong to the trade intended to be represented,
lONOB BFOBTB. 43
or if he hftTV giren wrong letten, the whole aide to oat and beeome maeten. The game k oapeble of endleu variety, and ia as ftmoaJTig to the lookeraK>n as to the Idajen of H. It ia eqoally adapted for in and ont-door plaj, and ia aometiniea called •« Dumb Motaona." It may alao be played without giving the initiala of the trade
HUVT THX aurrBB,
Sereral yoimg peraona ait on the ground in a oirole, a alipper ia given to them, and one, in order to begin the game, atanda in the centre, whoae bnaineaB it is to " chaae the alipper by ita aonnd." The playera paaa it ronnd ao as to prevent, if possible, its being ftmnd in the poeaeaaion of any individtuU. In order that the player in the centre may know where the alipper ia, it ia oocaaionally tapped on the ground, and then enrtdenly and qoietly handed on to the right or left. When the slipper is found in the poaaeaaku of any one in the cirole hy the hunter, the bpy on whom it ia ao found takes the hnnter'a place.
; OS, "HOW so TOU LXKl IT?" "wmXB SO TOV UKl Tt?"
"rnuir so TOU liki it?"
Thia pleasing amuaement for the Christmas fireside may be played by any number. Que of the playera leavea the room, or goes out of hearing of the othera. In his abai^ffe the playera fix upon a subject, — ^for instance, an eatable, a piece of ftimitnre, as article of clothing, or anything to which the above questions will apply, and by the to which questions, the player, when he returns to the room, must endeavour to the suhgect fixed upon, the other playera striving to mislead him by their answers. After the subject is decided upon, the player outside is called in. After making his €airm, he proceeds to the nearest player, and asks him the flrat question, " How do yoQ like it?*' who, supposing the subject to be a bed, might answer, ** I like it warm ;*' he then pnsacia to the next player, who might like it cold ; the third might like it high ; the fourth low ; and so on. After he haa been once round, he begins again, asking the second question, ** Where do you like it ? " to which the replies might be, *' In a hooae," " In an inn,** *' In a kitchen," ** In a parlour.*' He then asks the third ques- tion, '* When do yon Hke it?" to which one might reply, ** In the morning ;" another, " At night ;" a third, ** When he is ill ;" afonrth, "When he is well," etc. DoTingthe time of hia aaking these queationa, the guesser is at liberty to name the subject, and should he gneaa zightly, the player laat questioned must go out ; but should he perform
tfaiee rounds without discovering it, he must take another turn outside ; in either rw antgect ia choeen.
Another mode is, for one player to leave the room, while those who remain fix upon a BolQeci \ the outside player is then caUed in, and asked the questions in succession, when much amusement is created by the apparent absurdity of his answera. The playera take it by turns to go outside.
THS SIS.
Those of oat readera who poaaeaa the fiumlty of inventing a long tale will find !n tUa gams an wcelkmt qpportonity for a display of their abilitiea, and for afibrding'
44 UmOB aPOBTS.
anmMment to their friands, and however large the muabet of playera, all may partioi* pate in it. The players being seated in a dicle, the one who ia to tell the tale aoaigna to each of the others the name cf some person, place, or thing to be mentioned in the tale : — for instance, one may be called "the old gentleman," another "the old lady," another " the little horse," another " the litUe dog," another " the landlord," another " the landlady," and so on until each player has a name ; and whenever, in the coarse of the tale, a name is mentioned, that player to whom it belongs must instantly rise np, torn round, and sit down again ; but the name, " the gig," is not given to any player, and when it is mentioned in the tale ttU the players must iWrnertlately rise up, etc. This game is generally played as a game of forfeits.
The following is an example of a tale, which, as well as the names, can be Tsried according to the ingenuity of the narrator : — ^I will now tell you a tale of an old gentle* man and an old lady residing in London. This old gentleman and old lady had a little horse, and a little dog, and a gig in the stable, and they one day went for a ride in the gig. On their journey they stopped at an inn, and Uie landlord and landlady of the inn were tJ^nHing at the door. When the landlord and landlady saw the old gentle- man and the old lady coming in the gig, the landlord called the ostler, and the land- lady called the chambermaid, and the waiter and the cook hearing the ostler and the chambermaid called, came running to assist the landlord, the landlady, the ostler, and the chambermaid, to get the old gentleman and the old lady out of the gig, and the ostler put the little horse in the stable, and took care of the gig, and the chambermaid carried the little dog ; and then the old gentleman, the old lady, the landlord, the land- lady, the waiter, the chambermaid, the cook, the ostler, and the little dog all went into ^ inn, and had supper comfortably together.
nussnra sijn.
This sport ensures plenty of fhn both to players and lookers-on, and at the same time is perfectly harmless. Two youths being matched to fight, or to *' fence," as we will call it, require to be previously " trussed," which is done in the following manner : — After being seated on the carpet, the hands, placed flat together, must be bound (not very tightly) with a handkerchief at the wrist, and the feet secured above the ankles. The legs must afterwards be drawn up, the feet resting on the heels with the toes raised. The arms are then passed over the knees ; a short stick, about four feet long, is now to be pushed over one arm, under both knees, and out again over theyother arm, leaving an equal distance of the stick out on each side ; this completely secures both the legs and arms, and renders the player almost powerless in every part except his toes ; so much so, that when thrown off his balance, the ends of the stick projecting beyond his body prevents his fklling directly on his side, but he has not the power to right himself, and must remain in that position till assisted. After both the players have been trussed, they are carried to the middle of the room and placed opposite each other, their toes just touching. The game then begins by each one endeavouring, with the aid of his toes, to turn his opponent on his baokorside. In either case, the one who accomplishes this is the conqueror. It mors frequently happens, on account of the difBcnlly of tho
MINOB 8FOBT8. 4S
p^ycn haliTiw'Tig tbeEas^hnei, ooopled with azudetyto prove the "heel ooek," thet thegr both tORi oyer aad lie like two tmaaed fowls resting on their wing-ekewers. In this esse, th^ must be sssisted sad plseed opposite esch other ss before, end this wlU most likelj hs;?e to be repested Mversl times before either of the cocks will be entitled to *' crow." This grestly contrflmtes to the ftm of the gsme.
Two boys kneel, esch on one knee only, holding the other leg off the groond, one opposite the other ; s lighted csndle is given to one, and an nnlighted candle to the other ; they then attempt to iUvminethe latter ; bat, being in eqnilibrinm on one knee, aad liable to be thrown off their balance by the least motion, they wiU iind this so difBcnlt s matter as to caose great diversion to the spectatoia.
There is a sport similar to the preceding one, fivqnently played by the parlour fire- side, in hoUdaj time : — An individnal eeats himself on a wooden bottle which is j>Iaced aidewmys npon the floor, and endeavoors, with a bnznlng candle, which he holds in his hand, to light smother in his left.
BAioir axroBB, a totch oin.
A player is blindfolded and placed in a comer with his back to the others. Another player (his confederate) takes a wand and tenches each of the other playere one after another with it on the head, ssying, " Baton r^poae, baton r^poae, baton ripossb'* and at last, letting the wand rest npon one of them, winds np with '< silr qm ?'* The blindfolded plsjrer then declares the nsme of him or her npon whom the waad rests. This is managed by his confederste in arranging the company, calling tham by their names : for instance, " John, yon sit there ;" " Charles here ;" " liaiy oppoaite ;** " Arthnr next to her;*' " Ellen next to Charles;" sad ao on. Or be may ssy sodi a thing ss, '* Dora, it's not Ikir for yon to langh." The nnderetaading betweeu the conftdenitee is that the penon last (or Isst but one, or first) nsmed is tiw one qpon whom the wsad is to rest.
f«;s>:»»/
f-'
lUd to thU
irinR to tha
bills for tbe porpos* of kite-flrins. uid ^ter BmoBioir thsDuelvea Tor Uu
dnj, i.b?7 samstimiM M their kilos Iddm, sad allow them to tty whera*ar
Ihawind OKj virj tlieni.
The celtbraMd Doctor fraiiklln t* nid to Iibti ntlan IM up ■ Idta pTWltnulj to hia EmtvlDg t2is wmia to bftthe, uid tban, lyiu^ on his bttcL, maSVr him- EsU to be dnwQ tcrou ■ nnun bj Its pomr. B« alM, tqr tiUfhinir a win to tta* bow of llu Icita, and iMdliw It down tlw Nring, oolUMtd Iba «lactria Ooid fron tha doodi.
lOKOB SPORTS.
47
aaad eoutejgd it into wliafc la called a Leyden Jar (a glaaa twmI UzMd wtth tin-fofl), aikd from which he obtained the electric spark. Some years ago, a Bristol achool- xxsaater azansed hia seholarB by traveUing along the poblio roada, with *"^*«<*'g speed, in a carriage drawn by kites ; and more lately a pobUo perfonnar was drawn in a ^oat from London to OraTsaend, by a conple of large kites.
To construct a common Kite, yon mnst, in the first place, procure a strai^lit lath of deal for the npright or straighter, and a thin hoop, or a pliant piece of hasel or cane, for the bow bender. Fasten the bender by its centre, with string, to the npright, within a little distance of its top ; then notch the two ends of the bow, and ftMten them to the npright by a string, which is made Ihst at each of the ends, and tamed once roimd the npright, as a, 6, c ; the string most then be carried np to the Junction of the bow and straighter, and made (kst at d, and thence to a ; from a, it mnst passthroogh A notfdi at 0, np to tf ; then down to /, where it mnst be tied in a notch out for that
porpoee, and np to a again. Yonr skeleton being now complete, yonr next task is to paste a snffldent quantity of thin paper together to corer it, and aflbrd a hem to be pasted over the outer edges. Next, bore two holes in the straighter, one about a fifth of the whole length fiiom the top, and the other rather less from the bottom ; run through these, and thsten, by a knot at the two ends, your belly- band string, to which the ball of string, by which the kite is flown* Is afterwards ftzed. At the part of the belly-band where the kite exactly balances, &sten the string. The wings are made of several sheets of writing paper, half cut in slips, rolled np, and fiutened at a and e. The taH, which should be fiiom ten to fifteen times the length of the kite, is made by tylug bobs of writing paper, four times folded, about an iadb, and a half broad, and three inches long, at intervals of three inches and a quarter, on a string, with a larger bob, similar to the wings, at the bottom of it. Your kite ia BOW oomi^ete, and fit to be flown in the usual manner.
There are, however, two objections to the common paper kite : first, the danger of
ttM paper being torn ; and, second, the inoonvenienoe of carrying
a large siae, man especially ona windy day. The porttMe doih
emovee these dl^ectiona, by the employment of calico in-
of paper* and through being constructed in such a manner
as to enable it to be folded or rather rolled up. The framework
^H't. of the kite is made of two slender pieces of wood,
nestly planed np ; these are placed across each
other, as shown in Fig. 1, and pizmed together
at the pohit at which th^ cross, by meana
II of a piece of strong tinned wire, bent into a
■ I loopatA. The circle seen beneath this loop, B,
Is a small wooden button, placed there to allow the stioka
ftirmlag the framework to move more freely on their centres ; the
end of the wire is also bent into a loop, but without a wooden button beosath it.
iL
48
lONOB 8F0BTB.
^7 thif amiigsiiiAatfe the two pieces of wood, by being toned on their oentzee, can be placed Icmgitodinally, one above the other.
The form of thie kite is an oblong diamond, as seen in the diagram, and the calico oorering, after being cot to the reqoisite shape, is h'^umed ronnd the edges, to prerent '^•^ the ftvying of the cotton. Its two acate angles are tied tighUj to the
top and bottom ends of the long stick, and the loop of the centre wire is psssed through the calico ; a piece of tape (see Fig. 2, C), is then ' attached to those comers of the calico that are to be fiMtened to the extremities of the cross piece of wood, and another piece of tape, B, is fixed to the wood itself; the tape firom the calico posses throogh the wire loop, ▲, at the end of the stick, and the two pieces of tape being tied together, the calico can be drawn tight, and the kite is fit for nse. When these tapes are nntied, the two pieces of wood of which the ftamework is formed, can be brought parallel to each other, and the calico being rolled ronnd them, and tied at the centre by means of the tape, the whole may be placed in a little linen bag, and in that manner rendered perfectly portable ; when on the field scarcely a minnte is requisite to strain the calico, and get the kite in flying order.
THX BXan KXTB.
The Bird Kite is more difficult to make, but when made, it will well repay all your trouble.' The frame of this kite and the flTi<«>iftH kite are shown below. A small cross is secured to the end of the straightener to cany the taiL The head and beak are framed
inch head frame*
with thin bonnet wire, or split cane fitted into a notch at the upper end of the straight stick, while the cross-piece keeps all together. The strings are disposed in the manner ahown in Fig. 1, which will better explain the oonstruction of this kite than any quantity of writ- ten description.
The calico for oorering the frame must be cut ftilly than the fhuooe, to allow for lapping oTer, and glueing the staringe and Frerionsly to painting the plumage, the calico must be sised to prepan the ooloua. AH the requisites csn be obtained of the olhnan. Tha
flt.i.
Fir.i.
lOMOR BFoare.
il 4 thii UU ia of ntim pecsUw o Ik —1 1*— p-* ba^B, oiUtd " uil eapa," *n iiiBpaDded U biMmls of >boat alx < « Ibe liDe depending fMm tlw uil of the binL One or than little enpe 1> nen In A Ifm. The mooUi of eaeb cap i* abont two fooluw in duiseter, ud li kept a t7 1 Itgiit wire ring, htnuDad In, and to wUoli tlia itrin^ an fc-*— — ' to Mtaoh ) np la Uie c«iitnl Ilea of tlie Uil. Eub cap ihoold ba iboU lime Incbea dwp. > ploon of the kite complete (Fi^. I) ■bowm bow it nay be p**"^*^ to *—**■*■ natora. m lagQt of tbe tail Tonat depend on Uia aiae of tbe bte. For a amalt oba, three or IT orjt win do i fbr 4 laJ^ one» Ave or alx» cf eveti more. But V, wben in tbe field, D iboglil Bud the lensUi of tail inaaDdest to iMlanoe the kite, ymi ma; might tbe n witb a UOJe aand or a few pebblaa *"i***^ of i«ngO.Tiiwg tii^ abring, or joa ntajr
the gpaoti beCwMD 6 '' an to be psinled white. Tbe T
ifBagrtieaUaeAied to thebell, and the whole weighted with a tail DaniOacted with
7 bqr knowB how to tnmdle the Hoop in the naoal m,j ; aennl pain of tin an aomeCittkea nailed to the inner part of tiie hoop, which produce a jingling la aDoia pvte of England, boja drlva their hoopa one againat the otbar, and w wtuae hoop )UIa In theae enoaoDiaa, ia ooaqnercd. Tbe IstrodooUon of iliahaa.huwe»ai.n«arty anpaiaeJed theme of the wooden oiiea. Tbe7 anmr- *- lar; the maann of whigh ti, that the anilkoe '
60 limOB SPORTS.
roand, a laiaer portioiii of it toucfaea the ground tliaa if it were flat Tba iron hoop is driY«n swiftly by meuis of a eorrod iron 11101:, by whiohit ispuhed, whilo the wooden hoop ia atmok with the wooden attck.
In. ancient times the tiling waa used as e formidable weapon in war. Oar readers are, no doabt, well informed of the contest between David and the Oiant Goliath, who was killed by a stone sent from the sling of his opponent. In the reign of Harold, slings were used in the English army. The following is the method of making one :•— Oat oat an oval piece of leather, aboat two inches wide at the broadest part ; at each of the ends ftwten a leather thong, or piece of cord,— one of tbese cords, or thongs, ahoold be longer than the other ; place a stone in the broadest part of the leather, twist the longeet thong twice or thrice roond yoor hand, hold the other lightly between yoor thumb and fore-finger, whirl it round swiftly several times, let go the shorter thong, and the stone will be shot to a great distance. Small lamps of soft clay, kneaded to the point of a pliant switch, may also be jerked to a considerable height. A new kind of sling, sold at the toy-shops, is made on the latter principle. It consists of a band of India-rabber, with a loop at one end for the stone.
r
CHS BOKBaAVO.
The Bomerang is an importation from Australia, where it is osed by the natives for killing ducks and other wild fowl that abound in the lagoons of that extensive
continent. The toy, which is formed of a thin carved piece of wood, flat on one side, and slightly rounded on the other, possesses several curious properties. If held horixontally and then thrown forwards towards any object, it will rise rapidly on the wind with a kind of rotary motion, and after a considerable flight return again to within a yard or two of the ttirower ; or if skilAilly thrown, it can be made to touch the ground and rebound several times after the manner of an oyster-sheU when it makes " ducks and drakes " on the water. It can also be made to strike an object behind a tree. In the recent war in New Zealand, the natives used the Bomerang as a weapon of ofibnoe.
SBIP-IACX.
The Skip- Jack is made in the form shown in the engraving, either of hard wood, or the bone called the *' merry-thought " in a fowl, well cleaned ; a piece of catgut, or strong string ia tied securely round the two arms of the toy, and a short stick intro- duoed into the opening between the two sides of the string ; this stick must be some- what longer than the distance from the string to the arched part of the wood or bone. The string is then twisted by means of the stick, until it a.
b^pns to act Uke a spring. You must next shift the stick, by forcing out one of its ends, in such a manner that the longest end shall be pressed against the toy at A, by the force of the twisted string. A morsel of cobblers* wax must then be applied to the underneath side of the toy, and the stick
lONOR 8P0BTB. SI
Ibrtiblj' bnmgbt ramid uul pmitJ agaliiM It. If U bit bow Uld on the gnnaA, Uia qirtnc d Iha nriiix »aa oT«comH tli« kdhMkuk of tliB wki, uid ths toj will ipritis to k Douidarkble blight. Tb« nnu princiiile la Kppliad, wttb good atroot, to liola WDodm Bgom of nti, cMa, orbogi.
Tbe UDiuemeiita wa are about to daacriba require conaiderable akin in tba plaTBT. Tli« gnetm an pUjed nitb tiro sticks of Ibe lame nie and tona. ascb about roar teet In lengtb. A amall boop, neatlj ooTared irilb Isathei, la placed otst tba two atlcka, Tbi^ an belli flrmlj In eacb band, and croaaad, tbej* ait than Buddeikly d aanndw i and tha Unpeeoa recdved by Uie hoop, mil thmv it op a great dutance ; it aetersl pla;en ai ■tgBgwd. it may be thrown from one to tha otbar, ui and extanaiTB
a plaf ad with a loy made at hard
like two nmca joined together at ^-^'' ttw apex. BO aa to aomewbat reaamble an boar-glaaa. ' Two atigbt and tapering atlcka are oeceaaaiy, and to
amcbed, — tern In the engTaving. Tha mode ot play- tag the game ia aa rallowi : — The player place* the rode (A tfae table. Uying Ibe doqble cone over the string i Ihen taking a euck ia each band, ba tsmlsaTonn to raise it. and mpport it on the iDring, a ftet (hat requires some skill, and cao only be accorapUabed by keeping tbe toy oonHtantly rolling bsckwarda and r«wBrda aa the string. When Uiis is accomplished, it may be thrown op in the sir. and caogbt on ths string, or if there are several players, it may be thrown from one to Ibe otber.
Baaledores and Shnttlccocks are to be obtAlQBcI cheap at sll the toy-sbope. The better aort at battledores are oorered vrith panhment. or crossed with fine catgut, which OB sccnnnt of their elasticity or spring, are tr«t trom the disagreeable noise of wooden hue. and aend the shnulecock mnch higher. The game le played by two pBwms. wbo. with the battledom, strike the shnUlccock lo and tro between them.
SboKlceock appean to bare been a taehiODable game among grnira pemous in the reign of Jamea the First. Bad is mentioned aa such in an old comedy of that time. AmoDg the anacdotea related of Priace Henry, son to Jamea the FInt, Is the faUow- ing : — "Hii Highness playing at ehottleoock with one fkr taller than himaelT, and ^***'"ir him. by chance, with the shnttlecook upon the forehead, ' This is,' qaoth he, ■ the eneoanler of DaTid with Goliath.' " The Chinese are famoos players of this g«>ne, tat tnataadcf the bauladore, they nse their naked hands, and sometimes eren their Ssec
62 MINOB SF0BT8.
Ten or a doxen standing in a ring, and dexteroiuly sending the sbntUeooek tram oner to the other, lay nuians of the feet alone, the blow being glTon with the sole of the foot or the ball of the big toe.
TKB 8TJCKBS.
Cat a circnlar piece oat of stoat leather ; bore a hole throngh its centre ; and pass a string, with a knot to prevent the end from escaping, throogh this hole. Soak the leather well in water before 70a ase it ; when thoroaghly soaked, place the leather on a stone, and press it down with yoar foot, by which you ezhaost or press oat the air from between the leather and the stone ; then holding the string, yoa may, by the pres- sure of the external air on your leather sucker, raise a considerable weight. An India- rubber sucker has lately been introduced ; the exhaustion of the air being produced by pressure on a little knob above the toy.
VHS BAmiLoa.
The BandHor is a toy made of hard wood, resembling a puU^ with a very deep groove ; roond this groove a piece of string is wound. To set the Bandilor in action the end of Uie string must be held between the finger and thumb, and the toy allowed to fhll, by this means the string is necessarily unwound ; but if its ikll be saddonly cheeked by a sharp jerk, the motion is instantly changed, and instead of continuing to fkll, it wUl rise towards the hand again, and the more rapidly it is fUling, the more readily it can be made to change its course. The Bsndilor cux be purchased at the toy- shops tat sixpoioe or a shilling.
THB WATXB-CVRSa.
The Water-cutter is a toy whose action depends on the same mechanical law as the Bandilor. It is formed of a piece of lead, or other metal ; the edges, if you prefer it, notched like Uie teeth of a saw. In this metal disk two holes are pierced at some dis- tance fi^m each other, and through these a piece of string is passed, the two ends being afterwards tied together. If the two extremities of the doubled string are pulled
^n>n sharply, and the string instantly slightly relaxed, the "cutter" will make f^ ^L several revolutions nn account of the impetus it has received when the string t * * Jr was pulled ; in performing these revolutions it will twist the string, which
^^«m3^ being again pulled with a jerk will be unwound, and necessarily carry roiind with it the metal disk ; the string is again loosened, and the greater imp^ns the cutter has now acquired will twist the string to a greater extent than in the first instance ; by continuing to pull and relax the string adroitly, the cutter m^ be made to revolve with great rapidity. The name. Water-cutter, has been applied to this toy because one mode of playing the game is to make it revolve wiUi one of its edges dipped in water, so that it may sprinkle the bystanders and the player himself, to the amuse- ment or annoyance of one or both, according to circumstances.
THX VHAlTlCATaOPB.
This very amusing toy is made and exhibited in the following manner : — Cut oat a circular piece of card, to which ftwten six bits of string, as in the cot. Draw on one
KINOB SPOBTB.
iM6 of it A flgoTB with balls, uid on the other, two beUe only, es repniented in tho
aangitt ; then taking one of the strings between
the fora>flnger and thomb of each hand, close to
the eard, twist or whirl it round, and, aoooidinff
to wliiehpair of strings yon use, the flgnre will
seem to be tossing two, three, or four balls in
dxfltarent directions. Various cards and devices
maj be used : for instance, you may draw a bird on one side, and a cage on the other ;
l^onlty using the centre pieces of string, the bird will seem to be in the cage or aviary;
a horse on one side, and a jock^ on the other, as in the cut {taking care to reverse the figures, or draw them upside down to each other), and by using the different pairs of strings, you may cause the rider to appear upon, leaping under, or by the side of the horse, as you please. Tor
other designs, we suggest a tight-rope and a dancer, a body and a head, a candle and a picture and ite frame, etc.
cirr Avn ball.
Wlfto has not heard of the celebrated amusement of the Cup and Ball, and of the BMrreOoas skQl exhibited by some players in catrhing the ball on the pointed end of the stem without malring a single miss P The ball which is to be caught is of ivoiy, and attached by means of a thin piece of string to the middle of the stem, at one end of which the cup is fixed. The other end of the stem is pointed, and a hole large enough to receive this point is made in the baU. The stem being held in the hand, the ball is aiade to revolve by twirling it between the finger and thumb, and when its motion has beoome steady it is thrown up by a slight jerk, and caught, either in the cup, a task requiring little sUH, or on the pointed end of the stem; which last feat requires con- siderable pnetioe.
nnx STBAWs, os /oa«Lnr» sticks.
Simple as this game appears to be, it requires great patience and a veiy steady hand; a number of smaU sticks, about half the thickness and twice the length of a laaSer match, are thrown into a conlhsed heap on the table^ and the businees of the player is to remove the sticks, one by one, with a longer stick, without disturbing or ■^^THng the rest. One player begins and continues at his task until he has shaken the heap, he then marks down the number of sticks he has been able to remove, these count towards his game, and the second player follows, and so on, until all tho sticks are removed. The winner is, of course, the player who has safely removed the greatest number.
DIBS.
This is a veiy exoellent in-door amusement. It is played with five small bones trmn the hind leg of a aheep. These are thrown up in the air and caught in the palm of the hand, or on the back of the hand, according to taste. All the requisite
lOHOB BF0RT8.
m TiTos-misa bcw.
NaMl; out k bit of wood, >txnU fOnr iochea long. Into tin fbrm oF Hit ctoek oT a iMol or gtm ; acoop d groove in tht upper part of it, ud In Ihii groora plus k large qain, span U boUi eaila. wbleh tuuia oa vilb nxed Ibnad, and lot it prejeci beyond tha polut of tba itack, and reach aa far aa the middle of it -, next procore en old watch- ■pring) irhich m^ be bought cheap at a watch-maker'B, cat off a piece of it about ee long aa the quill, bend it baetwud. and tie one end of It firmly to tiie upper part or bun end of tbe Mock. Then iwre a Bmnll hoi* ttmngh the middle of the stock, about half an iueh from tha mouth of the quill ; cut a pin in two, Ikaten one bait of It. by its
a bit of tfareed, the other end ot
I to the thread thati apring ; ihig ia the trigger, and your gun ta complete. To nae It, place a little arrow, of the quill and the hole in the Block ; pot the pin ihrougb Uiie hole, and bead back the aprlDg eo that the pin may catch it ; take the toy in your right hand, pull the trigger out with the roceBnger, and the ipring rrow to a couiiderable dialauce. If you target. Theee loya may also be bought
at the ahopa for a penny Ba<
The old'lhahloned taven private houaee, where it c " Drawing-room Archerj."
le or " Putr and Dart " haa lately tbund ite way into , a certain kind of populari^ under the name of a played with a brasa tabe, Ihrongh which a naedie-
Hl dart ia blown towards a target huDB a^alD* Willi a nnmber of darta, and acorea aa many pointa to the part of tbe target ia which tha dart becomi ring*, with a bnll'i^eye in the oentie, each ring bainj
tlie wafl. Each player i* provided
award* game aa he can, aooording fixed. The target i* pointed in
lOKOB SPORTS. 66
The Pop-gun is formed of a piece of elder-wood, from which Hie pith has been fciken : s Twnuner most be made, with a handle of a pzoper length, which shoold haTO a ■honlder to prevent the slender or ramrod point going the entire length of the gun ; the pellets are made of moistened tow, or paper. Put one into one end of the gnn, pash it with the rod to the other, and then placing a second pellet at the end where the fini was inserted, posh that towards the opposite end, and it will drive the first pellet oat with great force. This is caosed by the compression of the air between the two peUets. Pop-guns are also made with quills, the pellets for which are cut hy the quills oat of slices of raw potato or turnip.
Several new kinds of Pop-guns have been lately introduced. One consists of a hollow tube with two corks fitted tightly, one at each end. When you force the rammer in at one end, the compression of the air drives out the cork from the other with a loud report. Ton then reverse the toy, and patting in the one cork drive out the other ; sod so on as long as you please. Pop-guns on this principle are made in the forms of pistols, cannons, etc.
ma nA-sxoons.
By means of a tube of tin or copper a pea may be propelled from the mouth, by the mere force of the breath, to a very considerable distance. The natives of Macouslie, with a cane tube about twelve feet long, propel arrows with their breath with such force and dexterity as to kill birds and other animals.
PABLOVB BOWLS.
An amusing in-door game, recently introduced, is " Parlour Bowls." Each player is provided with two wooden balls, which are bowled in succeesion at a numbered post called a Jack, and he who succeeds in so striking it as te leave the figure 8 upper- most when the Jack falls, wins the game. The sport may be varied according to the fhncy of the players.
AanrvLBm, ob pabloub quoits.
Nine wooden pins, shaped like skitUes, are placed on an inclined plane, a number being painted on each skittle. The object of the player is to throw nine rings on to the several pins, scoring so many points in the game for each pin successftilly ringed. Sometimes the game is played in such a way ss to give forfeitures and penalties Ibr lodging the ring on the wrong skittle.
CASTLB BAOAfBLLB.
This w an excellent parlour game, and can be played by several persons. Bach pilfer chooses a castle, and if there be only six players, each can take two castles ; or, if fbnr players, three casUe^ These are placed inside the fortresses, as shown in the engravxDg, and the possessor of the '* Tower of London *' usually conunences the siege. Tlie esnnoB-balls are placed in the centre of the board, and in the midst of them he sptaa the top with all the vehemeooe he can ; the battery then opens, and the balls Itj abovt aad knock down llie OMtlfls right and left When the "firing" hss ceased, the
WMOB 8F0BTS.
m>7 b« had in two o
Alihoagli tliii gmms b«n tbB nunt of BafRtelle t( hu (careelr any rtBemblanM 1, either In ttu form of tbe board or Ibe ikiU raqnisfu for pla;1ii«. A ■tnmK ftnd a quick hand af« the moat ueccAAary qn«liflo»tion« of Uie player. Tlie board, whioli ii of Uie Ebnn ihown in tbe eagr«Tiii^, baa raiaed vits like the BagaCalle board, and oontaina within iU olr- oomiittfiUM (due flat pdeoee of Ivor; let into Uie wood. on wbioh the nnmben one to ulna are maiksd. in thSMung order win the holes of (he Bagatelle board ; on aaob of theaa apoU a niiall woodan jdn, reeemblinK a (Idttla pin, ia placed, that on ths centra) rtpoc being white i the object of tbe player la to knock down aa tnanj of tti pln4 ae poflaible, that be may Co the aamben on which they Uood ;
•f^
a qilnner, a. Pig. 1, which oonaiata
of a piece of wood wilh a nand Oat top. from wbicli a peg or foot prqjecta : a piece of Btring ia woond lightly round thia peg. and paaead thTongh the allt in the raised aide at one end of the board, a, Fig. 1. The ■p^""**' la tiien preued olcaely Maliul the aids with the left hand, while the player, graapbig the handW t, attached to the atiing. In his right, pnll* the aliringforoibly and with a •odden jerk, the conaequonce is, tl4 atrlag la nnwenad tnoi the apinner, and tha lattar, falling oa tbe board, haa
lONOB BFOBTB. BT
ImniiniQff-loii woakl Iut« Boqnirod nndsr nauCj tffniinr Awi^ ffOM llw ipluMr into tli* midato/ tiu pi^^ knookia^ down ooio* ■nd flag nMjr bMnan otlisn. In Ika aoaru ot U« trolntioaa It wmi nMbM Uie M*tf (haliiiwd,B^ tfttliaiitostag wttbtolantile foroa, Uu InttKit It touohs* ths VTQod it fljfls off uddfltly M a tan^tDt, uul agkin dAAh« mTnnTL|T the ploA. Tha IKiociial Mnin«m«iit oonslaU to mtohinc (faa prograH of the ipinnar, at H bannn* tkna ooa alda of tbe board to tba otba', aziil whto it ^ipaara about lo e^pit* it (addetily parlutfia itana bmrd, and wins the placer U» game. Tba gtme. aa In Bagatalla, ii oomtad b7 adding logathar the namban majked on ttat ipota on which lbs fallen piul Mood, and m^ ba d«ddad by one. two, or three apina from each pLafar, to be
Thia iutmimluni game ia of Fr«Doh oiigtn. The pl^en haTia^ Bnt determined ■pOD tlw oadar ot ■kortog, cmA tbooam a hone and tiuowa tha dice in faiweaaion^ There an aaniTal broi^a, hedgea, and luDdlea For the hone* to olaar, and thoae that cariDol, loae Ibair tarn and wail till the next round. Aa two oi three boiaea get before tha (Mt, and appnaoh the wiimJiig-poM, tba wottmimt baromat liit*aM. and if all Ptar ■'i'l> I°od hUDoor, tha gaaa l» tuoaUj omeltidnl amidat gnat laogbter. The
wins ralea ara aomelime* xrid with the boaid, bnt of oonne they ma; b« Tailed
» optim r4 the platen i—
.. When tha aukn an •gmd upon aud the pool made, each m«mb«r mnit aelect
Hne. and than enter him ai the atartiiig-poM.
I. Kacta mODbar Umwa tor chokie of move -, (ha bigbaat nombei elalm* the tint
a, *i-.ri TK* otben aeoonlkng to the nnmbor tiirown.
I. bch plajer to Ihnw with onlf one of tlia dioa when hia hone uriTaa at or
gftiua tha pool, and the Mcood
(§ UmOB 8P0RTB.
B. A sIMple or hnidlft-nee nan ba pl>;8d b; pladng ft fkUM ag^nM aooh pcM, >nl •ny player tiuvmriii^ msy nmnber dial wtnald plua hli bona so Ihit Iv doM not okv the f^», forffllte liii throw and waJta fai4 nnxt tuni'
e. All boiw diataaeed to pa; an uOs half ot Ihair origtnal ilaka, whiali it eanied
VAaLOCTB CBOQITkT.
AmoDg tbe amnaliig in-door ganwi latalj intradnoed. Parloni CroqasI dtaeiTBJlj bold* t. high place. The malleta. balla, and anhn an much ■mallar this thoae osed In Ch« regular Uwn game ; Mid tbe whole, encloaed In » box. mtj be otMlnad ot moa
We conclade this aeclJon by repmtins, In other wordi, a wboleaon'e pleoe ol advic
iho houn alloUed for «uidy. Ie« the grave porceptor oome npon them in tbe midrt i Lheir mistimed ipart. and join with Uiem in a nUier nnpleaaanl game of
^
§ia-
OBAWING-KOOM GAMES.
""Jii
,F IbU jttim maiij prct^ gUEU bkre b««i iotTodncei
rhich reqnire the eierci« of wit, memory, xni ii
uUismoe for ihelr due perfbreiaucc. A Klcction oT a
dMH. uxordlng b
noojed fbnnala, not tmij
ann'ing t'^me of qncattona kud uuwon ma; lie pl>7sd bj ftmr or
« in the rbllcnilng muDOT ; — Xuh plnyer li ruiniihcd witli Ciro Blip* ol
, Ob una </ UuM ■ qneittan la lo b* niiama and an th> otbtr a unm. Tba
60 DRAWING-BOOM OAHSS.
questions and noiius are then ooUeoted and placed in basketa or hata. ooi of whidb each player takea a slip at random. Brery one has now two alipa — a question and a noun. The object of the game ia to answer the question in an original verse or quotation, in which the noun is to be introduced. This is sometimes a matter of no small difficulty, owing to the inoongruily between question and noun ; but a little thought and skiU will soon enable the player to succeed.
We will suppose the question to be—" Are you fond of cricket P" and the noun " food.*' There is no similarity of ideas between the two ; but a sharp-witted lad would probably produce something like this —
Ycu ask me if Vm fond of cricket —
What boy is not throughout the nation P To catch a ball or stump a wicket
1a food for high congratulation.
Or perhaps the question might be— "In what country is Andalusia P" and the word " banks.** Then the ingenious youth would possibly reply--*
Through Spain*s fairest province, fertile and bright, Flow the waves of the gentle and broad Ouadalquivir ;
And the warriors of old, undismayed in the fight,
Drubb'd the Moors on the hcmkB of that beautiM river.
The briefbr the verse or quotation the better. Players who are clever and quick can make Crambo a very interesting and Urely amusemont. Various other games have bsen founded upon this model, but we are only able to make room for a few other specimens of this kind of play.
OKA.ftA.CTSBS Airo rRlBICTIOirS.
This is a parlour game in which young ladies and gentlemen can play equally well ; but to play it properly some preparation is necessary.
On slips of card write quotations from the poets and dramatists descriptive of a lady^s " character.**
On cards of a difibrent size, or colour, write other quotations descriptive of a gentleman's " character.'*
On cards of another size, or colour, write other quotations applicable to the fbture fortunes of a lady and genUeman. These last are called *' predictions."
Beneath each quotation, which should be short, write the author's name.
When the game is to be played, the names of the ladies present are to bo written on separate pieces of card ; and the names of the gentlemen on other pieces of a different shape. Place in separate places, first, the names of l^e ladies ; next the names of tiie gentlemen ; thirdly, the cards on which are written the ** characters for ladies;'* fourthly, the cards on which are written the "characters for gentlemen;" fijlhly, the cards which contain the "predictions;" and lastly, place in a bag a number of small pieces of card, all of the ^ime shape and size, one-third of the number
DHAWZNG^BOOM QAMB8. 61
to be marked *' L. T.," one-«hird *« O. F./' and the remaixiixig third to be marked with • Mv(»). A praaident ia then appointed.
The game ia now ready for pUqring. One of the oompaoy draws the name of a iMdj, another drawa the name of a gentleman. The gentleman ledds the lady up to the preaidentb The gentleman diawa one of the ** oharaotera for ladiea/' which ho banda to the president. The la^y in a similar manner draws one of the *' characters for gentlemen/' which is also handed to the president The president then reads to the oompany the ** characters " of the lady and gentleman before him. The president then drawa from the basket oontaining the ** predictions " one card, the lines on which be reads to the pair before him, aa descriptiye of what may be their fVitore fortunes.
The bag oontaining the small pieces ot card is now held forth to the gentlemiuD, who dxawa one piece. If it bear the letters " O. F." the gentleman most pay a forfeit, mmlem be can name the author of the lines read aahis ** character ;" if he can do this be redeema his forfeit. If the piece of card drawn bear the letters " L. F." the lady is Uable to a ftnrfeit, mnlett she namea the author of the lines read as her " chimuster." Bat if tlia card bear a star *, then the gentleman ia entitled to kiss his partner ; if, however, the lady names the author of the Unea contained in the '* prediction," the geotleman kieea his privilege.
Each name, dbaracter, {vediction, or forfeit-card, when drawn, is laid aside and not used i^ain until all the namea haTo been drawn.
When the namea have all been drawn the forfeits may be cried, and redeemed in the usual way. Or the namea and oarda may be replaced, and the game go round again, aa mdless oombinatiODS will arise if a sufficient store of " characters " and " predldions " has been secured.
The " characters '* and *' predictions " may be used on other occasions. Where but two or three are praaent much amusement may be created by selecting the names of *' abaent Mends/* and testing their ** characters," and trying their future by a *' pre- diction."
The pleaanre of a friendly visit may be enhanced by requesting the visitor to draw a " character," many unexpected revelations being thus made.
The following we submit as suitable quotationB, though th^ may be found in
Charaetenfor LadieM,
Plain innocence.
Unsullied beauty. — Thomtmi.
Dark-eyed beauty I time may fling His waste and witiixering power o'er thee,
But not one feather of his wing Shall bruah love's fond fideUty.-~7. K. Herve$,
That angel-smile of tranquil loveliness.
Which the heart worahipa, glowing on her brow. — HaXleck,
She Uvea in her allbctiona — all
Her hopea are with the arm ahe tnula win aave. — PereioaU
6S DBAWIKG-BOOM QAMEB,
Bat still her air, bar fttoe, each ohann Kiut spealc a heart with feeling warm.—.
The high and gifted lyre of heareiily song
dkth wanned her soiil with new Titalitjf . — LomgfMow,
Ckaraeten/br OmtUem&».
A youth to fortane and to &me nnknown. — Oaif.
.... A man. who take him all in all,
We shall not look npon his like again. — Shaketpeare,
Bound integrity, A firm, nnshaken, unoorrupted soul. — Thommm,
A man severe he wss, and stem to view, I knew him well. — Ooldtmith.
A man he wss to all the country dear,
And passing rioh with forty pounds a year. — OddBmUh,
Never shall his head control The honest beatings of his soul ; And ne'er by him shall be represt The gushing feelings of his breast. — T. K. Hervey.
A gentleman so rich in the world's goods.
Handsome and young, er^oying all the present.'— Bynm.
Predictkmt.
With each other blest, creative love
Still bade eternal Eden smile around. — Thommm,
Smoothly they pursue their way.
With even tenor and with equal breath.
Alike through cloudy and through suimy day, Then sink in peace to death. — KirkB White.
While his loved partner, boastfUl of her hoard, Displays her cleanly platter on the board. — OoldsmWu
Fu* from the madding crowd's ignoble strife, Their sober wishes never leam'd to stray ;
Along the cool, sequestered vale of life They kept the noiseless tenor of their way l^-Orajf.
A gentle pair By fortune sunk, but form'd of generous mould. And charm'd with CBxes beyond the vuIksz breast. In some lone cot amid the distant woods Sustain'd. — ITiomscm.
Our wooing doth not end like an old play ; Jack hath not Jill. — Shaieepeare,
mUWING-BOOM QAIOS. 419
oovnQvnrcM.
Tbe playvs moat be seated at a table. A number of slipa of paper are proyided* one fat eaob idajw, and as each aentenoe is written the slips are folded down so as to hide the writing, and passed on, thns no player writing two oonseontiye lines. First the phiyers write on the top of the paper the description of a gentleman ; then the name of a man (anj well-known or distangnished person will do) ; then an adjectiye or two deacriptiTe of a lady ; next a lady's name ; then the place where they met ; after- wards a date or period ; then a short speech for a gentleman ; next a lady's reply to ai^ sappositioas question ; afterwards the consequences that may be supposed to arise from may circumstances ; and lastly, an imaginary account of what the world said. When the papers are unfolded, and read aloud by the leader of the game, the effbcts are yery ludicrous. The following may be taken as a single exampl&^
Description of a gentleman. — Handsome, modest, and wealthy.
A gentleman's name. — Mr. Disraeli.
Description of a lady. — ^Loyely and accomplished.
A lady'a name.— Queen Emma, of the Saxiidwich Tslands.
The place where they met — Qreenwioh, Ihunous for whitebait and penaionerg.
The date—April 1, 1866.
The gentleman's speech. — " Dear ladj, I admire you."
The lady's reply.—** Yes, I like it boiled.'*
The consequences. — ^They were married immediately.
And what the world said. — ^It was yery right and proper.
Put together, the yarious replies would read — *' The handsome, modest, and wealthy Xr. Disraeli met the loyely and accomplished Queen Emma, of the Sandwich Islands, at Greenwich, a place fkmons for whitebait and pensioners, on the first of April, 1866. He said, *Dear lady, I admire you;* to which she replied, *Yes, I like it boiled.' The consequences were that they were married immediately, and the world said it was yesy right and proper." This game may be made still more amusing, in a large party of boya and girls, l^ introducing the names of yarions memben of the company.
THS sicasT. The leader whispers a sentence into the ear of his right-hand neighbour, who whispers again to his right-hand friend ; and so on right round the table. The last person repeats the sentence as he understood it, and the first one as he originally gaye it. Tery curious are the transformations that take place in the passage of the woids.
CKOSS QUK8TIOKS ijn> CSOOKSD AKSWIXS.
One player goes round among the circle, and whispers in each one's ear an answer he is to make to the next player, who comes after him saking questions. For instance, Charles goes round to Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4.
To one he whispers, " Hot, sweet, and strong."
To a second, ** With pepper and yinegar."
To a third, *' With my beet loye."
64 DRAWIKQ>BOOM OAMSa
To a foorth, " At the seaaide.*'
And to the whole oirele an anawer of aome kaod.
George comes after Charlea to ask any qaeationa his own wit maj soggess.
He may perhaps ask No. 1, *< What kind of a week have yon paMedP'
" Hot, sweet, and strong."
" Shall yon ever many P"
" With pepper and vinegar."
" How will you keep house on these P"
** With my best love."
" Do you admire blue ^es P"
"At the seaside."
And so on throoghont.
Mach amusement is sometimes made by the total yarianoe of the qnesttoos and answers, and sometimes a hard hit is administered to some of the company ; but^ of course, no offence can be taken.
An amnwing variety of this game may be introdnoed by anranging that the questions and answers shall all relate to animals and birds, so that when they are completed the relaters wiU reply somewhat as followa, imitatiawg aa nearly as possible the noise which the creature named makes. For instance— Tom says, ** The queetion asked me was, * What is the way a pig talksP' And the answer was, * Coo, coo, ooo.' " Robert says, "The question asked me was, *What is the way a donkey talks P* And the answer was, ' Gock-a>doodle-doo/ " etc
XHB VBAVSLLXK.
The traveller quits the room, and the rest of the players fix on the country th^ wish respectively to represent, somewhat in this ftehion : — ^A Turk twists a handkerchief for his turban, and with a stick appears to be smoking a pipe as he reclines on a cushion. A German student may be represented with mock knapsack, book, turned-down collar, and singing a Rhine song ; a Gknman lady should be knitting, with feet on a stove. A lAplander, warmly wrapped, should be shown by appearing to drive reindeer, which maybe represented by chairs turned down and a hearthrug over his knees. A gipsy's tent may be easily contrived, and the people of various countries similarly persoxutted ; and, when all are ready, the traveller comes into the room and endeavours to guesa the nation each represents. This is a game very like Acting Charades, but more simple.
LKU>iv» Qussnoirs.
The players being seated round the room, one thinks of an object or article, or eves any noun. The game is fbr the players to guess this object by asking questions con- cerning it. Bach player is to ask a question in turn. Bometimes the number of questions is limited to twenty, and of guesses to three. The questions should be framed on ttkB ezhanatlve principle, so to speak, leading up gradually to the obgect to be discovered. For instance, " Is it animal, vegetable, or mineral P** If animal, " la it hving or dead P" If dead, " Is it skin, bone, flesh, or sinew P" If skin, "Is it in ita natural state or manufiscturcd P" and so on. In this manner dever qoestionfln can
DRAWING-BOOM GAMBS. 65
timoit atwajB arrive tA the olgeot thoaght of, however peculiar. Tlie following enoqile will fDiutrate fhe mode of playing thia amniiiTig game. The player having Mated thai be haa thought of an article, the qnestianerB begin —
Doaa it belong to the animal, vegetable, or mineral kingdomP — ^Partly to the aainal and partly to the vegetable.
!■ it wed for foodP— No.
!■ it in ita nataral or prepared atateP — ^In its prepared atate.
Doaa it go fhiongh many prooeeaea before it ia fitted for naeP — ^Yea.
li it naaftil or omamentalP — Both.
Ii itnaed in thia ooontry P — ^Yea.
Where are ita original materiala fonnd P — In many parte of the world.
Ia it eotton, or paper, or leather ? — All thoee are employed in making it.
Ia it one particalar thing, or doea it belong to a olaaa P — ^To a claaa.
Do they vaay in aize P — ^Yea.
Doea one conaiat of many parte P — ^Yee.
Do they want aewing P — ^Yea.
Have they coven P — Sometimea.
Then it ia a book P — ^Yon are right, and yon have gneaaed it in fonrteen qnestiona.
Thia game ia often reveraed by the playera fixing upon the object in the absence of them ttam the room, who on hia retom endeavours to discover it by aaking of the company alternately.
It ia aometimea made a role that all qnestiona shall be so fhuned that they can be simply by *' Yea ** or '* No," and no other qneation shall be legitimate. It the ■occeea more remarkable to anrive at an out-of-the-way thing with no moro than theae two worda.
TWIXL THS PLATTBa.
aaraaing game reqnirea no great amount of akin, but the players must be aeHre awl alert in order to play it well. All the parQr sit or stand in a circle, and one sets up a wooden platter on its edge and twirls it round so that it spins whUe standing upright. Having done so, he calls one of the other players by name, and it ia the buKnesa of the latter to keep the platter spinning without allowing it to fall. He in kis torn caDa upon another, who, after giving the platter a spin, calls upon a third, the diird upon a fourth, the fourth upon a fifth, and so on; the game being that the platter ia to be kept twirling, and the player who allowa it to fUl to the ground pays aforftxk
THE AWamL CLUB.
Two playera are elected to fill the oifices of President and Vice-President j the rest chooae each the name of aome animal, bird, or insect which they will represent. The IVeeideot then relates an anecdote or recitea a piece of poetry slowly. At the occurrence cf any word the initial letter of which is the same as that of any animal in the club, the cry peculiar to that animal must be repeated by the player who represents it. For if there an a dog/a cuckoo, and a bee, at any word commencing witt^
DRAWINa-BOOli OAJOS.
ft fOiMC la demuded; If be usirsr all, ha Mkn Lbe Tioa-
or ikip rcnud hlic It ia the
the mnd ■D7 one who (pwlo, and whom he teeogniiea b7 hla
plajer it looctwd the playen in eba cuvla «ue to ikip. A ■nodiaoUioD of Hum guna i* called Poroo, in which the plaTsn gnmt like k pig. (mil the hoodwiDJced pl^er gveaaea Mhia Toice. In FranA Buff, a
gBma, the plaj'er has hie handa liai behind him Id
endeovonra lo mtch one or other of (be plnyore, snd the one who it caught or touched
tMcomea BoiT in his tnm. If thla game ia not vary Intellectual, It la, at anj rate.
Procure from a printer balT-B-doien aeta or printed alphabets. Paite them oa cajrdfl, and cut each out aaparatelj. Then pot thsm looae in a bag and abAke them dp together. Take ont a doaen or k> at random, and with tham endeavonr lo form words and aentenoes >o Oa* all the laUara ma^ be emploTsd. Tbis ie a quiet gams Ibr two or three i and by rersning the method, anagrame may be eaaily diaoovered.
Thla ia a new and amusing game. The materials reqniied an (bur oottOD baga or ooahione hair flll&l with dried peae. Two persona play by each taking two baga, one in cBch hand. They then throw Uie bags to one another with (he right hand, tntnsfhr the bag in the left to the right, and catch the oppoaite player's bag lu the left hand ; ao passing them ronwl fram one hand to the otiier, the pbofen throwing and ""->■*■■[;
DAAWINO-BOOU GAIOU. n
pMibl*; ^ tbonsb tkl* ii dimenlt U flnL, 7M -with jbuUm plaran an ildUat Hwacta Id k«p tha basi up Rir hklf u fanu or mon. In Oaaadk and tlis Oidnd SMM thi* gama la rarr popular ; and thon^ It iiiriiiia atmple Bnongti whan one (hM will to; the palleaoa d( anf bc^ tunrarar elarar ha
TUa ia ■ TB17 anniiing gasH fOr sTRung partlea. It la beat played in a doable draving-roam or parloor with roldlng daon. Betweeti tlia doon a aheet ia fixed, on vhjdi (ha ahadowi are to be ahown. In order to mako the shAdowi laorf
ia w«n to have the aheet well damped. The aadieace ait in the larger room, which ia darkmad, and the performer* lake their placaa behind the aheet. and when not per- ronBiii;r. tfaud al the afdee of tlie room imt of the waj of the light. The Folding doora wfam half eloaad fatto a capita] retiring plane. Behind the aheet. at aome diatanoe, ia plaeed a bright Ugbt. A good eamphioe lamp will do, but an oiiy-hydrogen light ia ■ha panpcr liking. AH i* now prepared and the panUmime coDunencea. X-nry one wba r'fT betwnn (he light and aheet caala a ahadow npon tbe latter. Aa the per- fcauMB waUca toward the ahaat hia ahadow diminiahea, and aa he cornea itearer the Ugt* it anlarga ; wben. b; jumping over the lamp, hia ahadow aeenu to 07 np to tha enhnt! and Taaiah. llnch (nn and langhler may he caneed far tlie eooiriTance, which a large eeale at the CnvtaJ Palace in the ChriaDnaa holidaTa. AH I m^ be Inlndnoed, both aolniale and inanimaM, and rttiatj amy be
rliilliaa. Mil Danuea, leap-frog, oomia Ikcea, and lo fOitfa, may be wen
68 DBAWING-fiOOX GAUSS.
this eMilj-amaged entertainment. In our iSnatntion tlie amagemeat of the perfonnanoe will be eeeily seen. The lemp being plaeed on the ground the aofeor Jumps towardt the sheets and conseqoently appears to descend fhnn the oeiUng, while if he jump back again oyer the lamp, he seems to Tanish upward. The audience in front see only the shadow, and hence much amnsement is crested.
CArraro tissbs.
This pleasing fireside amosement requires a good memory weU stored with poetry. One player recites a Terse, after which another repeats a verse, the first letter of the first word of which is the same as the first letter of the last word of the one already giren. For instanne, sappose a player to say —
Oh, what is fKendship bat a name,
A charm that lulls to sleep, A shade that follows wealth and ihme.
And leaves sad ^yes to weep P
The reply verse might be- Why, then, o'er earthly friendships moom.
As fleeting and as frail As lovely flowers, by rude hands torn
And scattered on the gale.
Here we have a similar sentiment in the two verses ; bat this is ^7 no means necessary, nor need the lines be grave in their tone, or sctaal quotations ttom poems. Th^ may be nursery rhymes or impromptu lines, or nonsense verses, s*—
The voice of the thunder 16 heard
Deep down in the mouth of the bear. And whisperingly lingers the bird.
As though no aflbction were there.
To which the reply might be- Then why do you thunder so loud.
If the bird should but whistle its plaint ; For love can be sought in a crowd.
If the lover don't feel vezy faint.
In fhct» the more ludicrous the images the more fVm is caused in a mixed parly.
KBADT SHTMXS.
This is not a game for veiy youthftil players ; but those who are fond of poetry will find it very amusing. Two, four, or more words are written on paper and given to each player. The words may be such as will rhyme with each other. Thus suppose the words chosen be— near, clear, dell, bell, the players endeavour to make a complete yene of which these words will form the rhymes. When all are ready, the papers are thrown into a heap and read aloud, and those who have best succeeded receive prizes or forfeits from the rest. The following are samplea of verses that might be so written :—
DBAWIKO-BOOK GAMES. 8^
Hark to Uie deep oatlwdnl bell,
Boimdixier o'er the waters (dear; Echoingr over bill and dell.
Distant copee and village
migfat
A gentle brook was mnmmrxng near,
Alhr was heard the ♦■faVHTig bell ; And peaoefhl sephyrs, pare and clear,
Befreehed the flowers in every deU.
Or again—
Fairies in the bosky dell,
Danoe beside the waters dear; From each yellow cowslip bell
Drink, nor dream of danger near.
TKX PBurcB's sursoM.
fHine of the players agree to soatain the parts of the Sultan, the Vizier, and the Prince. The Saltan takM his seat at the end of the room, and the Vizier then leads the Prince before him, with his hands boond behind him. The Vizier then makes a borlesqaie proclamation that the Prince having exhaosted all his stories, is abont to be ponished onleae a safflcient ransom be offered. The rest of the company then advance in torn, and propose enigmas (which most be solved by the Saltan or Vizier), sing the Jb«k verse of a song, to which the Vizier most answer with the second verse, or recite any well-known piece of poetry in alternate lines with the Vizier. Forfeits are paid eitber by the company when saccessfdily encoontered by the Saltan and Vizier, or by the Vizier when anable to respond to his opponent, and the game goes on till the fcirfeitB "w«»"t to any specified nomber on either side. Shonld the comi)any be victorioos, and obtain the greatest namber of forfeits, the Prince is released, and the Vizier has to ezecate all the penalties that may be imposed apon him ; if otherwise, the Prince is led to execation. For tiiis porpoee he is blindfolded and seated on a low stool ; tibe penalties for the forfeits, which shoald be previoasly prepared, are written on slips of paper and pat into a basket, which he holds in his hands, which are still tied behind him. The owners of the forfeits advance in tarn, and each draws one of the slips of paper. As each person comes forward, Uie Prince gnesses who it is, and if right the person most pay an additional forfeit, the penalty for which is to be exacted by the Prince himself. When all the penalties have been distribnted, the hands and eyes of the Prince are released, and he then superintends the execation of the varioas poniahniflnts that have been allotted.
BKTXnrO CA.BD8.
A large number of siipe of cardboard, or thick paper, being prepared, the players write upon them all manner of misceUaneoos snbstantives and adjectives. Three cards tgm thsn dealt to each player, without the dealer knowing the words written upon them. When all are sappUed, each player is reqoired to write a vene in which the
70 DRAWmO-BOOM QAMEM.
words shall be introdaoed. Thus, sappose out of the bums a player to get cards with the words minates, flower, and bell, he would probably prodace something lilce
We in each flower and simple bell.
That in oar path betrodden lie, See sweet remembrancers which tell
How flwt the wingM minutes fly.
Or sappose the words plant, triomphs, iteedom, AlQ to yoor lot, then yon might
rd plant my fbot on hero soil.
Where men fbr freedom fongh^— > Where Wallaoe, Tell, and Washington
Heroolean triomphs wrooght.
cnreo TXBSis.
Cento Verses are lines selected ttom Tsrioas poems, jost as they oocor to the memory. Each line shoold contain a like number of syllables, and rhyme with the one which preceded it. Thus, if one player
'Tis distance lends enchantment to the Tiewj another replies- It was the sweetest flower that ever grew.
Clever men have not disdained to play at these rhyming games ; and it is said that the great statesman Canning was veiy fond of amnsing himself and his firiends with Boot Rimes and Cento Yerses. 8npx)oee a foor-line Terse be chosen, each line of which ia a quetation from a difltoent poet ; thus : —
'Twas Greece, bat living Greece no more i
Memorial firail of yoathfiil years ; He sat beside the cottage door ;
His was a grief too deep for tears.
In this way a sort of poetic patchwork is produced — the word OnUo, indeed, meaning a cloak of many pieces. The jumble of ftuniliar linea often causes great amusement.
BOrV BDCIS.
Bout Rim& are said to have been invented by Dalot^ a poor French poet, who employed himself in finding rhymes for others to fin up with words ; and when ho lost a packet of these words he is reported to have lamented sadly that he had lost a hundred sonnets. It is not necessaiy when the rhyming words are provided that the sense should be perfect ; but of course the verse is all the better when it is. Suppose, fbr instance, you are required to make a soimet of the words daiXbdils, flUs, hills, riUa; come, hum ; home, roam f pent, spent, sent ; there, care^ where ; do you think yoa oould prodnoe anything like this?—
DaAWING-BOOK GAMES. 71
Sweet ipring ! the daisies end the delfbdile,
Snowdrops and riotots, and wild pansies coma
To bid thee weloome ; and the busy hum Of twice ten thousand happy insects fills The sonny air ; and all the xnnnnuring riUs
Wake ftt>m their long fanprisomneut. Onr home
Is gay with mnsic — and we long to roam To scent the heather blooming on the hilla.
Bnt in the city's dnlness ever peat There are who feel no spring retoming there.
Worn down with toil their wretched hours mia-spent, In Tioe and misery, disease and care I
Bnt e'en fbr them a kindly hope is sent. Contentment makes a summer erexywhere I
Or suppose the words were —
lore home fsars rose green cause hours
prore roam tears those seen laws flowen
Ton miglii make a Terse like thi»—
Mary, you say I do not love.
And that finam thee I wish to roam } Mary, my words and actions prove
That thy neat dwelling is my home. Then redden not your eyes with tears.
For which I tain would find a cause, Pale not thy cheek with useless fears.
Breathe not a word 'gainst comfort's laws I Oh, deem me not, my love, with Uioee
Who idle all their precious hours. For though I rather like the rose,
Fm not so precious fond of flowers ! By thy dear side Fm seldom seen,
Where flowers are sold — I*m not mgrem.
THB OAXB o* axnos.
Oneoftheplayersthinksof a word, and gives a word that wiU rhyme with it. The leak, endeavouring to guess the word, think of words that will rhyme with the one given ; but instead of mftntinnlng the words they thought of, the players define them. The first player must be quick in guessing what is meant by the descriptions, and aoBwer whether they ere right or not. Here is an ouunple—
One player says, *' I have thought of a word that rhymes with sane."
•* Is it a native of Denmark f"— " Ko, it is not a Dane."
'* Is it used by schoolmasters f" — ** No, it is not a cane.'*
•• Is it Builteing r*'— " Ko, H is not pain."
"Is it vrhat is meant when we say we would be glad to do so and so f" — "No, it
" Is it a Cfaristfaui namef"— " No, It is not Jane." ••la it to obtain I7 inooess P"— " No, it ia not gain."
DBAWma-BOOU OAUIB.
" li ifi ft •qoan of glaaa t" — " No, It i« " la it ID ba pnmd of our aooom] " Is !• Iba OMMj, or tbe DbMf"-
—No, It !■ Dot niiL."
"Yea, ttllBTKDt."
Vuiou words ni^ bfi ohoaao, «aoh 14 bnn, fan, pear, p«lf, Mc. r tint ^ *^ BCfiB- rasj t» tmcA tat tlixBla vllsbin *ii*ir«r best. Forfclti m>7 be addad to this gun^ and In mliod eompuilei of bo^s and girls it will tM fbond rerj dlTvtiiig.
This is ui aSbot prodsood by terj simple s ■lisdow. Tb« al:
le priodpla of svary light Shadow PsDlamiDie. and an; otlur ot^eot is
Ogme beinic darkaiied with a thick cloth, so as to Imib only pan of the scrcfo fnr Ught to act npoa. Two boya than go behiad, saoh holding (wo eandln, in snsh s
SIUWDia-BOOIC OAUSS.
AH tbe plijwi Maikd io ft eire1«. wiOi aae Id Iho A loD^ pi«c« of tKp« o ~ ~ ' B put of it with boUi baods, (b« Ian havliig both endi. Thn lodian hu hAAda fiT the pla^n belVire they can be dropped, and any on9 who is DC qnick to withdraw hia handa before thejr are loaibed, pajs a forfeit, aod lodiBo. Like other atanple eubm, this li prodnctiTe of cousidenble Tan.
Thia Tvry (ntcDaniial a
a called the Conridl of Prlenda, e fbmiahed with wrttln^ materiala. One of thcDi pro- idcaTour to define, not in tlie iMct dlcstionary method.
74 DBAWING*BOOM OAMBS.
is given, and again defined, and ao on as long aa the playen ohooie. FoiftftB may be exacted of those who fldl to prodnoe passable definitions. Here are a few examples —
What we all long for and seldom obtain. The sonahine of the sooL Yonth's prerogative and age*8 consolation.
life's ignia fhtmis, alwaya aonght, bnt seldom foond withoat aUoj. An enigma ; for we often bestow it on others, yet have it not ourselves ; but by bestowing, gain some portion of what we give away.
JExpFC98UM ;—
The mind's messenger. Passion's indicator. The soul spealdng in every feature. Vocal thonghk
y<mmMBs —
Wisdom's relaxation, wit's trifling, bal^s pratMe, parrot talk, the fbol's
philosophy. Beason's antipodes, whispered nothings. Froth on the glass of Ufe. Lord Bondreazy's reasonings. Speech without profit^ absurd to the mind, surely, is nonsense truly defined.
Chance: —
The misnomer of Ftovidence. Fate's dice-box.
Ikiaig: —
The twin sister of procrastinatfion.
Ponctnaliiy's adversaiy.
The chisel that wears away patience.
The red-tape knight who crosses the way of progioas.
OmatUmtUm: —
Kings, Lords, and Commons.
The fonndation-stone of health.
The nation's boast, and the people's toasL
An oUa podrida of fixed laws and various opinions.
A. WOBD DXVnrSD BT TRB MOnOlTS OV A. WAITD.
There must be two confederates — one we will call the magician^ the other the diMner, The diviner is sent out of the room and the rest of the company (without Uie connivance but within the hearing of the magician) fix upon a word. The diviner is (»]led in and stands opposite the magician, who is seated robed, wand in hand, with which he makes mysterious motions and draws cabalistic figores on the floor. Very shortly the diviner announces the word fixed on. The way this is done is as follows : — For each conso- nant in the word the magician makea aome trifling remark commencing with auch consonant, in the meanwhile making use of t2ie wand. For the vowels he points with the wasd to some part of the ceiling, according to previous arrangement say to the
DRAWIKG-BOOM 0AHX8. 76
lift-hBid eoraer oppotUe to him for A, to the rigbt-haad corner for B, to the leA-band eoriHr btkmd him for I, to the right-hand for O, and he maj point yertically to the floor or the oaOing for U. To giye an inatanoe. Let the word be *' Ghriatmaa." The magirian, after aondzy motlona with wand, aays, "GoroB a little nearer." More motlana and cahaHiitic marka ; (to oompanj) '* How can I go on if yon make sooh a Boiae." Motiona; (to miachievona little hoy) "Beally I mnat pat yon oat of the room, Tom, if yoa are not qnieb." WaTes wand and at last points to left comer of oeQing behind him for I. If otiona ; (to diviner) " Say when yoa know the word." If otiona ; (to drriner) " Take yoar time." MofcUma ; (to meny little sister) " Mary, yoa mnatn't fan^** Wavea wand and pofaota to left-hand earner of ceiling opposite to him for A. Motiona; (to diyiner) " Stnmge that yoa shoold be so long over the word." The diviner BOW anaoances the word. Indeed, if he is sharp, he can generally do so hotare it is all ^leDed ont^ To thoae who are not in the secret this appears very inexplicable^ seeing that the copftdenites cannot have fixed the word beforehand.
yoarxiTB.
Sevwal of the forsgofaiggamea are played with forfoitB. It is not necessary to tell oar readers how to 07 forfeits, for every one of them knows the old-fhahioned formala, how the forfeit-teller kneels in the lap of the erier, who holds the article above his head, and aaya— ■* Here's a pretty thing, a very pret^ thing, and what shall he do who owns this pretty thingP" Bat ss some of the penalties are very absord, and falcniated to create eonftision Instead of innocent amoaement, we venture to soggest a tew that are tne from these olgections, and yet sufficiently provocative of ftm and laughter: —
Pnah yoar friand'a head throagh a ring. [This ia done by patting yoar finger through a ring, and then teaching the head of the player with its tip.]
Bepeatwithoat mistake, "Peter Piper picked a peck of pickled pepper; and if Peter Piper picked apeck of pickled pepper, whore's the peck of pidded pepper Peter Piper picked r"
BpeQ ConslaTrtlnople qrUable hy qrlhtble. [TThe trick in this is, that when the speller gets to the foaith eyllabla, one of the other players calls out *' No, no 1" which eoofhaea him, and caoaea some taxL]
Sing a song, tell a story, aak a riddle^ or keep a serloos fhoe for five minutes.
Bepeatthenaaea ofantheSUttgsof Bngland. [The trick in this is, that the boy win most probablSy nm throagh a list of the sovereigns without omitting the Queens, and thns solgeot Umaelf to another forlWt.]
Aak agoestion that cannot be answered in the negative. [The qaestion is, " What doea YS S spell?"]
Hepeat without sloppfng^-*
When a twiner a twisting will twist him a twist, For the twining of hia twist he three times doth intwist I Bat if one of the twines of the twist do nntwist, The twioe that nntwisteth nntwisteth the twist.
Va&WINO-BOOlf QAUBa.
TlK (w»Jn tliat, in twiMOag, txAn Is Ow twiat, i» twlim wan IstwiBoI, ha ninr ilolh nntwliia, Twiit ths twain Inlartwiuins m, twin! man batwun, Hs twitting hi* twiaur, makM i cwitt of tb* tvliUL Gin the lint vene of ttas Twina-twiilcT in French —
Quuid on oordlfiT oordant vflot mooordar ■& oorda, Pdot aa «rd« recorder trou oordonfl il mooorda j M&is ■! I'nn d» cordons de la corda dMordc^ La oordon dSoordsni hit dAiiniBr la oarda. _____
Now SKT ■!! tHit in MToa lelte™. [Thna— A L L, T H A T.] [JOMNl
Write jonr nuna in ona latUr. [Thli mar be don* Ihna — tj-nJj^
Gonnt twenty baokwaidi. J V
Xight (bifdla mv b« ndcemM togMlur, by elffht playvn Jwidiig Iha lint figure of n qouirOla with thair ayea ihat.
In otmolEUion. Lat ua raoommand the fcrf<it-ori«r (a nrcAiIlj ahaUin from 4>?ta<*tjnff peiAltlea of ui DSbTuiia c1iukci«r, or mob M inToln anaMmlj' (unUiariidaa. LM him jilfty the guns in aoch ■ ws; m to earn from hla lUlow-plv*'* """^ ■ liilnila of good- wil). ktmlnau, and napaot aa he wonid not willingly
gtdai.
MONO th0 amnMmenti most popvilar at eyening parties is the soting of Ohandes or FkorertM. Thoy are easily arranged, and prodaoe a good deal of amnsement. A doable drawing-room, or parloors with folding doon, will do capitally for stage and aoditorimn ; the folding-doors serring for curtain and side scenes, behind which the actors retire on leaving the stage. The window at the back of the room will be foond rery nsaftil, and a few scenes may be introdnoed where The players who are to act in the Charade mnat arrange among them- selfea as to the distribotkm of characters ; while for dresses, properties, and decora- tfcms, a sufficient nomber of old ooats, hats, shawls, aprons, and other gannents, win be fbond in most booses; for ftimitare, chairs, tables, stools, etc., may be inferodnced ; and for properties, laths will do for swords, saacepan lids and dish coTcrs for i^i^\ and tin pots for hehnets. But we need do no more than suggest stage •pplianoes ; for smart boys will soon learn how to convert an easy-chair into a throne, or a aoiflt into a boat, a carriage, or a oonnter ; moustaches may be made with burnt enk, and the cheeks may be reddened or whitened with rouge or chalk.
These Charades are of several kinds i those which are performed entirdy in dumb sfaowf and are called Pantomime Charades ; Acting Charades, in which the speakers either stody the words of their several parts, or give them impromptu ; and little plays and forces, which are either Proverbs, Burlesques, or Dramas. We give a specimen of each kind ; though it is by bo means necessary to follow out our model too strictly. Clever boys and girls will soon mske plays for themselves. In the Charade a word of two or more syllables is acted, either in pantomime or by dialogue, each syllable **«"***g a scene. The players choose a word or sentence, each part of which should have a separate meaning, and when they have played it out, the audience guess its hiterpratation. When the Charades are short, new actors can be selected finom the company, so that all may have a chance of diHtiugnishing themselves by appearing on the stage of the Theatre Royal Back Parlour.
Of course, if a more finished performance is aimed at, some expense must be
in providing regular theatrical properties, costumes, scenery, etc. The following words will serve for either Pantomime or Acting Charades : —
Air-gun. Cap-rice. Drop-stone.
Air-pump. Court-ship. Eye-lash.
Band-box. Cross-patch. Eye-glass.
Before-hand. Cross-bow. Fag-end.
Bride-cake. Dice-box. Father-in-law.
Bull-rush. Dog-rose. Fan-light.
Badc-gammon. Dog-ma-tio. Fare-well.
78
DRAWEfO-BOOM 0AHB8.
Free-holder.
Game-cock.
Game-keeper.
Grand-fiAfher.
Grand-child.
Heir-loom.
Heir-at-law.
Hone-chOBt-nut.
Horee-man-ehip.
I-doU (idol).
Jack-poddhig.
Jack-boots.
Jew-ill (jewel).
King-craft.
Kid-napper.
Lady-binL
Leap-frog.
Love-apple.
Mad-cap.
Mar-gate.
Mend-I-can't.
HJM-nnder-fllaDd.
Kight-ahade.
Night-in-gale.
KoTcl-tiea.
Out-side.
Oot-rage.
Oat-poor.
Paper-maker.
Pack-cloth.
Pop-gun.
Pen-wii)er.
Pen-man-ship.
Qnarter-staff.
Quick-witted.
Quarrel-some.
Babbit-warren.
Rope-yam.
Rain-bow.
Bauce-bos.
Safe-guard.
Sweet-heart.
Bweet-bretd.
Tell-tale.
Tea-board.
Tide-waiter.
Tow-line.
Ten-ant-tiy.
Up-shot.
Up-bnid.
Up-start.
Vat-i-can.
Watch-guard.
Watch-man.
Waist-coat.
War-den.
Way-bill.
Water-fkll.
Water-butt.
Wheel-bar-row.
Young-Bter.
Youth-ftil,
Yoke-foUow.
In getting up a Charade or Drawing-room Flay, it may be thought necessary to begin with a sort of oi>Gning address or prologue. The one here given may be taken as a sugg^tion for the sort of thing required. It should be spoken with doe emphaaia and discretion by one of the lads : —
Addre9$. " To wake the soul by tender strokes of art, To raise the genius and to mend the heart. To make mankind in conscious virtue bold. Live o'er each scene and be what they behold, For this the tragic muse first trod the stage, Commanding tears to flow through every age t*
i»»
Thus Mr. Pope, in bygone years ; while we
In those same words invite your sympathy ;
Plead for your kindly greeting and applause.
And hope to move your smiles in this our cause ;
Prom you, our •• audience," •• public," and " the press,*'
We ask indulgence in a brief Addrras.
I see before me kind approving fhces,
And mark some dear old friends in various places ;
Patrons, whose hearty welcome, warm and bright,
I see in scores of laughing ^es to-night I
Our Entertainment, by your sanction crown'd.
Must be, and is, and will be, thrice renown'd.
We youthAil actors on this mimic stage
Find in your smiles our truest patronage.
We seek your approbation ; and if that we
Draw up the oortain* let the play begin 1
SRA.WQIO.B001C 01)08.
BACE6A1I1I0V.
It FiMT— BACK. Charatttn,
Two Limi BoT».
Scnn I. — A MntL, whicb mafbe mads b; fut ^mllA for biHi, tbowiag put of the window at be B ft iBbl« bebind. A lamp-poat may be auda ftppL»«UU
placing chseaa, buOer, etc., f; a lantern b> Uta top of s li a cbair and a table— bof aa old tpf>»-iiaamii pratandiag (a amok* a ahnt-plpak ate.
80 BBAWINO-BOOK GAlfBS.
Enter two Boys who ran aboat and begin to plaj at leap-fW>g. The one malrts a back, over which the other jtunpa ; the second then goea down, and jnst aa he ia about to make a back, he calls out, " Higher ! tack in your twopenny/' when
In rushes the Bxjjdls, who flourishes his cane, and driTee the boys ^ut. [The drees of the beadle may be made with an old ooat and a bit of red doth round the collar.]
Beadle swaggex-s about, and exU.
Be-etUer Boys, who again begin to play, when the Beadle once more drivoa them away.
Enter Old Wohak, Ssbyaitt Gzbl, and Fooxmav. Th^ stand and talk confidentially, and Footman shows wedding-ring, kisses the Servant Girl, pats ring on her finger, and BO on. The Old Woman is aboat to give mon^ to the Girl, when the entrance of the RBCBnxTnre Ssbosaitt causes oonftision, and the Old Woman puts the money back into her pocket [The drees of the Beomiting Sergeant may be shown by tying a scarf round his waist, pinning a bunch of ribbona to hia hat, etc.]
RBCBVimro Sibokaitt goes up to Footman, places a shilling in his hand, and marches him off*. Old Woman and Girl express grief and astonishment ; wring their hands and weep. Old Woman imitates the action of the firing a gun, and Girl &lls back ; but presently rises, takes ring tram her finger, and looks at it despondingly, as if to show Uiat the chance of manying is gone. Both weep and wail in comio grief.
Se-enier Footman. Old Woman and Girl dap their hands and show their joy. Footman exposes placard on which is written, *' Sent back ; not short enough for a soldier. {JScene do$ee»
Thb Sbcoitv^GAMMON.
Scm n. — A parlour with ordinaiy ftimitare.
BiCR Ou> Last. | Shabby Lotxb.
Enter Rich Old Last with a long purse in her hand. Thia she displays osten- tatioualy. Sigha and takes letter from her pocket and reads. Sigha again end replaces letter.
Enter Shabby Lotxb, who advances to Rich Old Lady, and immediately begins to make violent love to her by going down on hia knees, daaping her hand, placing hia hand on his heart, etc. Old Lady seems pleased and shakes hands with him. He kisses her dieek and then looks roond at the audience and winks his eye in an artftil manner. Again pretends to admire the Old Lady, who looks admiringly on him. He embraces her, and at the same mom^it takes the purse from her hand, cuts a caper, Bsadexit, Old Lady looks aatonished, screams out '< Gammon 1" and &inta. [Scene doeee.
DRAWING-BOOM GAMES. 81
Tn Whole— BACKGAMMON.
Yocvo Last. | Youve GKVTLi]CA.ir.
Taxions Yisiton.
Scnri m. — ^A drawing-room with nmuJ Amutare.
arrange themaelTes In groups, and look over the prints on the table, the flowers, etc. One sita down to piano and another standa orer her to torn the leaves of the miuic, etc
Emter Youvo Last and Qwstlmuax from opposite sides. Th^ bow and shake handB, and then go abooi among the company. The Yonng Gentleman goes to back of room and brings out a little table, which he places near the centre of the room. He puts a dxmoght-board on the table, and goes towards the Yonng Lady, whom he appears to invite to join him by pointing to the table, etc. Th^ bring chairs and sit at the table, one on each aide. He opena the draaght-board and commences rattling the dice-box, moving the dranght-men. Visitors stand round the table and appear to annae themselves by looking on. ^Scene clotes.
COHTEST.
AX ACTDIO CHAaASI XV TWO BTLLABLSS.
Mas. LocKin. I Chlablis Bia.ucramp.
Asa. Locutt, her daughter. | Asolpkvb Spajiks.
BusAV, a servant
CON—
Bern L — A parlour.
Snter Svaix, followed by Asolphus.
AsoLPSVi. I declare, Snaan, yon are looking charming.
8r3A2r. Thank yon, sir, I always do.
AsoLpsrs. Beany, now, yon don't say so P But where is yoor mistress P
firsAar. Mrs. Lockitt, sir?
AsoLPXTs. Mrs. Lockitt I Nol Miss Ada; the adorable, the incomparable Miss
a.
BrsAV. She is vpstairs, sir.
AsoLpBiTs. Upstairs — eh P Susan, would you like to have a shilling ?
Bpsav (curtseymg). Yes, if yon please, sir.
Anourvrs. Well, then, who comes here besides me P
BrsAjr. Let me see — there's the batcher, the baker, the milkman, the
Asomnn. No, no ; yoa ndsnnderstand me. I mean, who visits here P
Sraur. Oh, there's Hiss Canu, Mrs. Btannton and her two daoghten, Mrs.
8^ D&AWINO-BOOM aAMBS.
A2>0Lnnn. Stop, ifcop I I metn mala TiBiton.
BvBAV. Oh, w9 never have any mala yistban,
AsoLnnre. None 1 Biuaxi, Fm a bflfipy man. There*i a half-orown fbr yon.
SvMAM. Oh, thank yon, afar. At leaat none to apeak ot Mr. Beanohamp oomea here.
AnoinnTB. Mir. Beanohamp 1 Who is he P
SuBxv. ▲ Mend of the flunily, sir ; bat ha oomea here so often yon can hardly call him a Tisitor.
AnoLrmrs. Snsan, I am afraid yon have got that half-crown nndar flJae pretenoee. Bnt nerer mind, take my card up to Mrs. Lockitt. lOivet eard,
Susijr. Very well, air. (Aside) Under fUae pretences, indeed I [£ptf Sva&ir.
AnoLVHus. Now, who can this Mir. Beanohamp be F Can ha be a rival P If he is, m
BiUer BMurOEAXP, who placea his hoi upon table, slotoif draws <4f his gloves, and sits down ; Asolphub staring at him ths while,
AnospETTS. That's oool.
BiAU. EhP Did you speak P
AnoLFVus. No, nothing.
BsAV. I beg pardon.
ITakes vp book and begins to read. A pause, Biavceimp gives a sUght cougih.
AnoLravB. EhP Bid yon speak P
Bsxv, No, nothing.
Ano&nn». I beg pardon.
{Belvcvulmf puts down book, and walks up and down, Anouxm dosB ffttf same ; JltuUlg ^leg knock agahui each other,
Bxjlv. and AnoLraus. What do you mean, sirP
AnoLFHTrs. I insist upon knowing what yon mean, sir P I BiAU. Who are yon, sirP
I AnoLrauB. Never mind, sir.
1 BxjLV. There's my card, sir. Will yon fhvonr me with yonrsP [{rwes card,
AooLPSVB {rending eard), Charlea Beauchamp I
Snter Mbs. Locxm.
Has. LocKiR. Qood morning, gentlemen.
BuLV. I am charmed to see yon looking so well this morning.
Mas. LocKxn. Flatterer 1 Bat yoa, gentlemen, do not know one another. Allow me to introduce yon. Mr. Beaaohamp, Mr. Sparks— Mr. Sparks, Mr. Beanohamp.
[BxAVCKAMP and Sfaixs bow,
AsoLnnra. By the way, Mrs. Lockitt, why is Do you understand cons, Mr. Beauchamp P
fiSAV. Cona— eons— what are they P
DBAWING-BOOH GAMBB. 89
ADOurnn, What an eitnoidiBaxy inOMdnaX yoa are— don't know what a oon is? Whj, a oumiiMlniia, to be anxe.
BiAV. Oh! a commdmzn I
ICbi^ LooUtk Yea, lir. Bparka is ftmona for making oonnndrama.
ikBounna. Well, then, what astUle cf navigation neemblea an animalF (ApauBe,) Do JOQ gtre it np ehP
Bmlv. m give it up.
Uaa. LocKiR. And so will I.
Abolpmvb. Why, a (8)cow, to be raze* {Lamghi,) Ua*t it good— eh P Ain't it eapitalP
BxAU. (/orci»ff a iaugh). Yea, yea, yary good. I nppoae yoa have heard the news,
lCBa.LocxxR.Ko. WhatieitP
Bmur. ICr. Bearleigh hae fhiled for ilfty thooaand.
Xaa. LocxRT. Yon don't aay aol I wonder what his poor girls will do for dresses.
AnoiravB. Here is another oon. Why is an oyster like a tell-tale?
Bauxf. {fiknigging kit 9koiddan). Tm aore I don't know.
Anousirs. Do joa, Krs. LockittP
Mas. LocxiR. No. Yon know Fm a bad hand at guessing oonnndmms.
Anomva. Well, then, becanse it is impossible to keep its mouth shut.
{Laught immoderately, Btdtr AnA».
Asa. Good morning, gentlemen. [BxAUCKAifp amd Asolphvb how.
Mas. LocKXR. Where have yon been so long, my dear P
Asa. I had a visitor. ^
Xaa. LocKXR. A visitor I Who was it P
Asa. How inqnisitiye yon are^ nuunma. Well, it was the-— the— the dressmaker.
Mas. LocKXR. Oh 1
Asa. la there anything xtew at the opera to-night, Mr. Sparks P
As<»LrmvB. Beally— tiiat is— no, I believe not. But I have a Ibst-rate oon for yon. Why is baoan like tiae aethmaP
Asa. Beany, I cannot teU.
Asotxxns. Can anybody elseP No. Well, then, becanse smoking cures it.
\La»o^ exeestwelif.
BxAF. I think you have been misinformed about the opera, sir, for Madame Sol- feggio aingB to-night for the first time.
Asa. How I should like to go.
BxAV. Would you allow me to be your escort?
Asa. Mamma, shall we go P
Mas. LoGDR. As Mr. Beanchamp is so kind aa to oflbr, I really think we will
AsotravB. Now, upon my word, this is too good to be lost. Why is a speechless naamnih like Great Britain P
84 DRAWIKO-BOOM GAMES.
Mb8. Lockitt. I have it. Becaiue it's great but quiet.
Bjkjlu. Beally, a very good aoBwer, indeed.
AooLPHtrs. Ah ! bat that's not it.
Mb8. Lockitt. No 1
AnoLVHim. No. Th« answer is, because it's a king-domb. Now, that's very good —ain't it ? [Laughs exceedinglif.
BxjLU. Ladies, I will now take my leave. I will call for you this evening at half- past seven.
Adolphus. If you would allow me, I should like to accompany you.
Mbs. Lockitt. Certainly. With pleasure.
BSA.U. Good morning, Mrs. Lockitt. Good morning. Miss Lockitt.
IBows to the ladiei, and to Adolphus, and exit,
Adolphus. {eaUing afUr }iinC\. Mr. Beauohamp — ^Mr. Beauchamp— I have such a capital con to ask you. Why is a rhinoceros like a [JSwiu cff after BxA.ucHA.ifP.
Mas. Lockitt. What an extraordinary man that Mr. Sparks is. But come to tsx^^ room, my dear, I have -several things to show you.
Adjl. Yes, mamma. {Exenni Mas. Locur oitd Ad^ Scene dosar.
—TEST.
ScBiri n. — ^The same.
BnJter Adjl, and Susiir carrying a very large bandbox,
Adjl. Yon are sure you have packed up the right bonnet?
SuBAK. Oh yes, miss. The yellow one with the bird of XMuradise feather.
Ada.. That's right. Has Miss Bhipton been here to-day ?
SusAir. Yes, miss, and I gave her those dresses to alter for you.
Ada.. Has Mr. Sparks called?
SusAir. No, miss.
Ada. JThBu he does, I'm at home.
SusAjr. Very well, miss.
Ada. That's alL Stay, the lace of one of my best handkerchiefii is torn, will yoa mend it?
SusAir. Yes, miss. [^JBxU Subah.
Ada. Heigho ! How those men do torment me. I suppose I shall have to marry one of them to get rid of the other. I know maniTna likes Mr. Beauchamp the—
EtUer SusAir. SrsAH. Mr. Sparks. [Exit SusAir.
Enter Adolphus Spabks.
Adolphus. Good morning, Mias Lockitt.
Ada. Good morning.
Adolphus. I am glad to find you alone.
DRAWING-BOOK OAKE& 85
A9A. Indeed! Why?
Asoumm. Ever since I ^7oa caimot be ineenaible to— Hies Loddtt^ I am in
love.
Asjl. Yon don't ny eo 1 It is a very nice feeling, is it not P
Aitoirtnm. Ecstatic ! What would man be without love ; his life would be a blank —a sbq> without a rodder. Yes, love ia the guiding star of our existence, and without it aD would be ohaos and oonftuion.
Asa. Qnite poetical, I declare. I must certainly get you to write me a sonnet on lore in iqy album.
▲dolfptb. With pleasure. Oh, Hiss Lockitt, do you not pity me P
As^ Pity you I I thought the feeling was delightfhL
Astovrwa. H%Te you no compassion ?
As^ Compassion is pity, is it not?
AnoLpxcB. I win speak plainly. Miss Lockitt, I lo—
Enter Mas. Lockrt.
AifOhrmm {atUUt). Bother the woman I
Mas. LocxxT*. Ada, dear, I want you. How do you do, Mr. Sparks?
AnoLrars. Very well, madam. (Aside) Save a secret sorrow. (Siffhi.)
Mas. Locxm. When you send your paroel to Miss Shipton, Ada, tell her I want to
AAA. Very well, mamma. Mr. Sparks, will you do me a fovour?
AM»i.ncv8. With pleasure.
AAA. I want this small paroel taken to my milliner's, will you do it for me ?
ITahes up large bandbox.
Asoipsus (toMHff offhati). Really— upon my word
AAA. Yon object.
AvoiLnrea. Oh, no ; not in the least— that is — ^I'U send for it. Mas. Locxm. Don't trouble Mr. Sparks.
Aao&pars. It is no trouble, I aosnre yon. FU go and get a boy to cany it
BMdJately. {Exii AnoLnnrs.
Mas. Locnrt. How sOQy of yon, Ada. The idea of wanting Mr. Sparks to cany a
Asa. It's only a little plan I have, mamma, so say nothing more about it, please.
Mas. LocKiR. I have such a number of things to do, that I harffly know which CO begin flrat» so m set to work and do them. IHurriet (# rapidly.
Aba. It waa qnite ftanny to notice Mr. Bparks's fiue, when I asked him to carry ttat box fbr me. I wonder what there can be in bandboxes that makes men so aAraid oftham. lamsnre, if I wereaman, I wouldn'tmindcanying one.
JSMsr BlAVCKAlD.
Rbav. Ah, IDm LooUtt» I am so glad to find yen alone.
86 DBAWnrO-BOOK OAXB8.
AAA (Mid0). Here's Another men gled to find me elone. (JJhmd^ if«i«r««. ing this moment left me.
BiAir. I em pleeeed to heer it, Hies LooUtt 2 I hare oome to pleee my flite in your hends.
Ada. And what em I to do with itf
BxAV. Oh I oen yoa not gneee P Tor the last six monthe I hare been nrieewMe— wretohed— yet happy. Happy to be in yonr eode^— happy to be near yon.
Aba. I em ghid that I have been able to contribate to ycnr happinees.
BiAir. Oh. Mies Lockitt, believe me, I know that I am unworthy.
Asa {tuids). This is becoming serions. {Aloud) Bzcose me intermpting j^j but, Mr. Beaofihamp— I hardly dare esk yoa— will yon do me a &Tour P
BiAV. A thousand if yoa wish it.
Ada. Well, then, woald yoa mind taking this box down town fbr mef
[2Ubt up iht bamdbox,
BxAV. {mrprised). That box P
A2>A. Tee, this box. There is nothing vety eAlntordinaiy in a box, is thereP
BaAV. Certainly, I will take it with pleasnre.
A2>A. Thank yoa. Susan will give yoa the addrese. [GtMtMmdo*.
BxAV. Before I go, let me
Ada. No, not now; plaoe yoar flite in my hands when yoa retam.
BsAV. Well, ee yoa wish. Au rmxrir. {Atide) I most oeitainly get a boy to oairy this preoioas thing. [JSMf Bbaucxamt.
Asa. I knew that Mr. Beanohamp would not mind carrying it. Men make towb and proteetatione, bat the best way to test their ainoerity, is to get them to cany a bandbox. ISxU Asa. Scene dowet.
CONTEST.
Boixx m.— The same.
Suier AsxiLtmu,
AsouxvB. Nooneherel I em determined to come to some definite ondaretanding withAda. I will be accepted or rejected to-day 1 this uncertainty will drive me mad. I was certainly foolish— yee, decidedly foolish in revising to cany that baDdbox, for it would have been so eaey to have hired eomebody to have oanled it. Ah, stapid, stupid AdolphueSperkel [8Uidoumaibaek<^ Hao$; takm up book tmd rmdt.
Suter BxAVOXAMP.
BxAU. Freeions unfortunate 1 Couldn't find anybody to cany that blessed bandbox, confound it I Just my luckj I met five people I knew. No matter, it has pleeeed Ada» I am sure ; so in that quarter I am safo. {SMt»g AsoLrxim.) Ah I you hereP
Anoimm. {Bi$iutitmdcomkigjbrw0rd,) {AMe) MyxiTall {Abrnd^ Teet dr. and why shouldn't I be hereP
Bbav. rm ■ore I dont know.
DE^WIHO-BOOM OAHBS. 87
lao&nm. No» lir. and yon ^nm't know.
BnAV. I dfont itant to.
jLBoXinra. Don't pBorvricate, sir.
Bi4V. PxwBiieateP
Aoowvi. Yaa, air, preraricate. Do yon olijeot to the word* sir?
Bi4V. Ob, no.
AaoLnvu Toy wen, dr, ni use it if I like, sir.
BsAV. Wift all my heart.
AsotnnnL Tes,Bir. {WaOtanp ami down tk^fertipidlf^) What are yon here for, sir?
Ba4V. X la|ve yet to leam thit iiis neceaaazy for me to explain mj actions to Mr.
Yoa£re anottar«4te. Buv. (MmiUmg^^ IndMA ! I^am^soRy to hear ft. Aboukub. Ili^ air,/ aay it.em|ih>tioally, yoa're aaaothar. Bbav. Ifr. 9part%;[(an<a|t>a Igas to know'ttlit;inanniiic' of your oondncL Aaourai nait Ar^Rir. iMfinNr* itr. [Ahv* ^ JlN^0r« in Mtfaee,
Ba&v. 4iU tfyon do that ^givin m pi|pli>yim downalaizft. iMnMRifc So ipp. won't, sio. Mmaw^ I fl|N»yM4ri»twuiuoc 80 tniw»eaTa.
iiinwwii^ n»t fi«^9!QHrwvmn& C^SIiiPf/liVWV m hitfeux again.
Biu^ il^li giWiwr 4«iwwiqB Ap«<ikfloff»ri^P»nfH><y struggle about (hs room.
Wli^ 10 iB %^ vglg$t «iW]t^ IRhafe is the meaning of this dia-
inayawssf Bbav. I]iftTetoapaitt0iaetoyott|)te.IioekifitkfQrthisuiaeeail^«QBdi]OtonmyparL
iMMVKra. Tea, it is all on his part.
Biur. I will ffadah the diacnssion with yon, sir, elsewhere. At present, I expreaa
to Ifis. and Miaa Lockitt. Aml WhaS la the eaose of this distorbanoeP Asouma. He aaid he didn't prevaricate.
Xaa. LocKiR. Gentlemen, I see how it is; it is some misonderstanding on yoor part. Lat na think no mofe about it ^-oome, ahake handa, and be friends. "Bux. I hKn no ffl-AeUng towarda lir. Sparks. An& (floUt). What » magnantmona creatore ! AaouKva. I haifB no ot^gection to ahake handa.
Has. Loocm. That* s right. Come. {She taket their hemde, Joiiu them together, tktg ^kahe heariOtf.) Now let us go to Im&oh.
[BiAOOBSMt q0kr» hie arm to Aaa. AsoLpKim doee the eame to Has. Lockrt. Jm theg are watking off tih« enrtote drope.
DBAWTNQ-BOOU GAltXB.
"118 AS ILL Wmt TE1.T SLOWS VOBODT GOOD."
Charaetm, Jont Bonnn, landlord of ocmntij boML [ Piui E
Ht. CUHDI. I Fum Utitli, her diogliter.
BcDn^-'-A parlonr In an hotel tX ■ wMcrinff-pluo. Windov Hit bock. BosiTLCi diteooertd lookinff out qf vindov. Vicmail duttitig dusin, efc^ Bonrici. Hollo 1 thcre'i knDIha- pteUDTS parly landlns. Of anna thST'n QM coming hers. Oh, no, then'i a narria^ waiting for Uiom, Of oounn thoy'ra going to the Belle Tne Honw, top of the hill. Nobody ergr oonea here. Well, tbere'i one 1 going to have a ihomr iooii, and aa K^i an open caniage, UMgr^ throDgh befbrc thej g«t there.
D&^WINO-BOOK 0AKE8. 89
VzcKAXL. And wholl be afther gettin' wot, BnrP
Boviyjlcb. Thoce carriage folks. Yea, there it goes along the road, paat my home, oC ccfone. Hieliael, yoa may aa well ahnt up the hooae, nobody ever comes here.
MicwAXL. Aisy now about shnttin* up the hoose ; do yon think Fd be afther losing my place now? Git oat wid yon.
BovxvACB. Here it ia at last ; bless me how it comes down. Did you ever see such imin? Iffichael, go and shut the upetairs' windows.
XicxAXX.. An* shnie I will, sor. [^Exit Michail.
BowiwACM. Wdl, here I am, wxth rain staring me in the face. There never was Bocb an nnlocky fellow. Fve tried aU manner of dodges to draw cnstomers. I've had wtm Btip^'iirn and conjurors out of nnmber, yet they won't draw. I've half a mind to open a free hotel, and get rid of my stock that way.
Enter MichaiIi, hurnedly,
Hxauxu I knew th^d be afther coming this time, anyhow.
BoviFACS. Who's coming ?
jfirwiafi. Why them folks who paused by jnst now, here in a carriage.
BosxvACB. What I coming here?
HicxAX^ Yia, an* didn't I till yes so intirely ?
BoviVACx. Here they are ; now, IGohael, bnstle abont, and get things in order. FD go oat and receive them. * lExit Bovivaci.
IficMAXi.. Bhore now, it's a mighty nice bit of luck that shower was, that's bringin' fhoae jintale paple here, where there's plinly, and niver a bit of stint.
Emter Bovxvacb, JbOotMd dy Ha. CBOsrs, Pavl Envoims, Mas. Mtbtlx, and FAinmt. Theffeniiemeu have their eoat eoUan turned up. The ladies have their handkerchU^s ener ih^r bonnete,
BosnvACB. This way, ladies.
CaoBsre. Wbat a sadden shower 1 I am afraid you have got wet, ladies.
IThe ladiee hnuSi the rain qff their cJothet; the gentlemen do the tame.
Mas. Iff Tins. Not vety 1 It was fortonate we were so near shelter.
pAia. Exceedingly so. Can I assist yoa. Hiss Myrtle ?
VumM. Thank yoa.
{Bande Vlxtl her handkertiti^, with ttihi^ he wipee her mantiUa,
Iffaa. MTana (taking the hamdkerciiief from Paul). Don't trouble yourself, Hr. Cdmonda ; Fll asaiat my daughter.
BdnvAca. Tbere^a a dressing-room npitaira; would the ladies like to go to it?
Iffaa. MTBnx. Yes, if you please.
BonvACB {eaUi$tg), Itary, show these ladies to the dressing-room.
Has. MTanx. Come, Fannie. ^Exeunt Mas. Mtstlx and FAvm.
CaovoB. I say, Edmonds, we may as well hmoh here— eh?
BnraxDS. It was merely a passing shower; see, it is holding np already.
BoanvAGi. We have eveny accommodation, sir.
¥wmiiTi. Bom a bit of a lie is that
90 DaA^WING-BOOM OAMBS.
Obomvi. This leems a eomftatable plAoe, lod ire sluiQ bsve another ihower direotly, so I think we had better st^r where we are.
HiOBAXL. My BfatiTnfatw to a T.
BDXoinM. As joa like. I am agreeable to anythisg.
GunvB. LandloKd, oan we have Innoh here t
BonvAOB. Oertainlj, air.
Cioaim. Well then, prepare na a nice Innoh fbr fbor.
HxoxAxx.. Good look to ye. May the hair of yonr head be Yamg with diamonda.
BonvjiOB. Gome with me, Michael, I ahall want your aaaiatanoe.
MiOKABL. Arrah, now, an' ain't I the boy to help yon?
ISxmni BoniACB and Mioxajil.
OBoava (fooUMff <mi qf wMow). They aeem to have nice groonda here. It haa left oiTxaining'— let na take a atroIL
Pjlvl. Well, Fve no o1]|jeotlon. ISxmnt Paul Md CBoava.
Snter Mas. HxBfLB tmd Takko,
Mas. Mtbslb. B la of no uae talking, Fanniei I am ezoeedingly angzy with you.
Fabvib. But, mammal
Msa. Mtbslb. I have noticed it all the way. You let Mr. Bdmonda pay yoa a great deal too mnoh attention. •
Fabitzb. Bat I oan't help it, mamTna.
Mb8. Mtbslb. Yea, yoa oan ; yoa ought not to receive them. The idea of letting Sir. Bdmonda wipe yoar mantilla. Why didn't yoa let Mr. Croaoa do it?
Fajtvib. Mr. CrGBsoa never oflbred to.
Mas. Mybslb. Well, then, why didn't yoa make him? Yoa know that Mr^ Edmonda hasn't a penny in the world, and Chat 2Sr, Graasos is as rich as aa — oh, yoa know he is ever ao ridi ; yet yoa go on in this way.
Favvxb. I am aorzy, mamma, and ril try not to let Mr. Edmonda wipe my mantilla again.
Mb8. MTBtLB (Jtitting her), There'a a good child. Now go and aee if yoa oan find Mr. GrcDsoa in the garden, and be agreeable to him.
Fajtvib. Yeny well, manuna. (J^ids) Oh, what will PanlaayP [^SaeitVAXjnM.
Mbs. MTBtLB. Now, if Fannie (mly plays her carda well she wiU, in all probabiUly, be Mra. OrcBsas, and ride in her own carriage. Of ooarae, I ahall live with her. Yea, that'a aettled— ni live with her.
SnUrOmams,
Maa. Mtbtlb. Ah, Mr. CroBsoa, have yoa aeen Fannie f
CB<B8ua. No, I have not.
Maa. Mtbslb. She thia moment want into the garden. Ah, Mr. CroBeoa, yoa have no idea what a good girl ahe ia.
Gaaaua. I am extremely hi^ipy to hear it.
Maa. Mtbslb. I hardly know what I ahall do whan I loae her ; for I aappaae aome of yoa naoghiy men wiU be aoon robbing me of her.
BRAWINO-BOOK OAMBS. 91
Owatm. When dangbten are handaome, Hn. Myrtle, we moat ezpeot aach thinga.
liaa. MzsiuL She ia ao Idnd, ao oonaiderate, ahe never givea me a moment'a naeaaiDeBa. (Pavii amd FAnm are awn thromffh tke wimiow erottktg ike stage, talkhtg em'ueeiir togeO^.) {JMde) With that Mr. TBdwionilB again! I mnat pat a atop to that, {Jkmd^ There goea my dear chfld. Bzoaae me Ibr a minute, Mr. OroBana.
[iSvtf Mb8. Mtmlb.
CiOBacB. Strangewoman that; what in theworld can ahe be driving atF However, m go and aee how the landlord ia getting on with the Innoh. [Exit Caiiaua.
.Alter Paul.
Tavu, Oonlbund that Mra. Myrtle. I can't be alone with ITannie a moment but ahe maaa poke bar atapld old head in and apoU oar Me«-44IK«. Fve half a mind to-— no, I bavin't— yea no b [Mette hie oibta uptm hie hand, ae though loet in meditaiion.
Bnter Cwvoa, «alo feafta tip to Vlttl amd tape him on the back. Paul etarte.
Gaaaca. What^a the matter, Bdmonda, my boy ? What are yon dreaming about? Are yoa in love or in debt, wUchP
Paitl. Ahl yea— no. Bzoaae me. [IFoOv <if rapidly.
Caaava. Hollol whafa fbe matter with the man, I wonderP He'a in love, I ■appoae; bat it'a nothing to do with me. There'a one oonaolation though — blanch ia gutting on flnety. BeaUy ihat ftDow haa a capital idea of what'a good. We moat patronise him fbr the ftitore.
Xnter Maa. Mybtli and Fashh.
Kaa. MTsna. Toa here, Mr. OrGBsaaf I thoaght you were in the gardezL Fannie and I haTe Jnat been taking a walk round the grounda.
FAxna. Tea, and we have aeen aoch a dear little lot of piga. Booh tiny onea, no bigger tlttn Uttena.
Caaava. Indeed I they mnat be interoating. Bat where ia Bdmonda t have yoa aeeo him in the garden f
Kaa. Mthob (aeide), A good ezeuae to leave tfanm together. (Jload) I will go and aee if I can find him.
Finnx. Shan I oome too, mamma P
ICaa. Mtku. No, my dear; the ground ia damp, and you may oatoh oold. I Shan't be Umg. ISxit Maa. Mnns.
Caovin. We era gofaig to have— l^y iha way, I had nearly forgotten it; I mnat mix the aalad myaell Bzcuae me, Miaa MyrUe. [ JSvtf Caaava.
Favszi. I wander where Panl oan be ; he haa kept away from me all day. r 11 be quite aogiy with him when I see him, and tell him that mamwi^ aaya I am to have nothing Bflve to do with him.
Smier Favi, wUh hie hands in hie podsete, looking egtremdf dejected. On mekig WAMKtM he mm Jbmeard, tahee her hg ^ hand and ehakee iL Tasl. l^ydavFaaaiel
03 DRAWING.BOOK OASCBS.
Funnx. There, there, that will do; yon need not ehalce xnj hand off. Where hs^e yon been all this while, sir f
Pjlvl. I have been looking for yon, Fannie.
FijnriB. ▲ pretty excose, indeed I Yon conld not have looked very Car.
Pjk.VL. Do not be angiy, Fannie. ITriet to take her Tiamd,
Fakkix. Leave my hand alone, sir. Yon have shaken hands with me once already.
Pjlul. Why are yon so oool, Fannie ? Why do yon speak this way to me P
FAinm. Mamma says I must not talk to yon so mnch.
Paul. Oh 1 I see how it is : I'm poor ; l£r. Crcnms is rich.
Fasvix. That is an nnUnd remark, sir. Hnsh, hero oomea maimna.
Paul. May I hope P
Fajtvix. While there's life there's hope.
JSnter Mas. Mtbtlx.
FAKim. Ah, mamma
Mas. Mtstlx. Where's Mr. Crcesns ?
FAjrim. Jnst left the room.
Pavl. Yes, he left the room jnst now.
Enter Michail.
MiCHAXL. Where will ye be havin* it laid, here or in the garden?
Mss. Mtbsli. Having what laid?
MiCKASL. Bhnre, an' ain't it the tablecloth I mane ?
Pacl. Oh 1 yon mean the tablecloth ?
MicHASL. Wisha, now, d'ye see that ? As thongh ye didn't know !t.
Pavl. What do yon say, ladies ?
Mas. Mtxtlx. What does Mr. CrGBsns say ?
Pavl {<mds). Confonnd Mr. CrcBsns.
MicHAXL. He bade me ask the ladies; and bless '^em I 8a3rB lOchael 0*6rady.
FAHirix. Let ns Innoh here, t»*»ntna. . this is a very pleasant room.
MioHAXL. Pleasant I by the powers, it's a perfect paradise, now your ladyriiip^s in it,
Paul. We oan dispeoae with compliments, wj good fellow ; so look sharp, and lay the doth.
MiosAXL. Yes, tor, Fm the boy that'll do it immadiatel^. {BaU Michaxl.
FAinnx. What a strange man he appears to be.
Paul. Yes ; if he hadn't a brogne, I should have known him for an Irishman by the compliments he paid you, ladies.
Enter CuamL
Cxcnvs. Well, Innch is nearly ready, and really I mnst beg yonr pardon, ladies, bd I have oonntennanded yonr order, and Innch will be served in a zoom overlooking the river. A mnch pleasanter room, I assure yon.
Has. Mtxxlx. Anywhere yon like, Mr. CroBsos.
Acrma pboverbs. 03
PxFL. Suppose, while we're waiting for iTmch, we pass the time with a danoe.
Funm. Oh, that will be nice 1
Cmbcs. a oapital idea. lin. Myrtle, will you allow me the pleasure f
[Hbs. Mtbtli courtetietf and ha takes her Jbr partner. Paitl. FkB— I beg pardon, Hisi Myrtle, will you honour me with yoor hand P
[ShegweeU. Mm. Mtbtlx. Sir ! * PAin.. For the danoe, I mean. Mas. MnvLi. Oh ! {The mueie eMkee up, and iheff form Ihemadeee Jtr a qnadriUe. At theg are dandnff, Michaxl entere teUh a tray qf platee, diehett «^> Se looke at them a mbmte, then drops the traif, ruehet into the midtt qf them, and begins an Irish jiff. They disperse in co^/Stsion,
Entsr BonvAOB, «alo, on seeing Mxohaxl dancing, runs up to him, and after some
slight difficulty stops him.
BovxFAca. What are yon doing ? what do you mean by this conduct? Mxckajiim Mane, is it ? Ain't I entertainin' the illegant company for you ? BonvACX. You rsscalt if you don't finish setting that table I'll discharge you tikis instant.
Mxckasxm Och t be ai^ now, an' ain't it miself that's going to do it ?
[JPidcs up tray and broken crockery, and exit, BoviVACx. I hope, ladies and gaxtlemoa, you are not offended at wj servant's
CioEsrs. Ifot at all; at least, I am not But I certainly shonld advise you to get a waiter who wasn't quite so eccentric. Ymmwim. Shall we finish onr danoe P Paul. By all means. Come.
i^n^sr MxoHAXL.
MicKAXX.. If ye plase, leedies and jinfnimfm, lunch is ready. BoirxvACi. This way, if you please. [BonvACB leads ^ way, Csosus oiffBrs his arm to Vaxwtm, Paul {fffsrs his arm to Mas. MTsni, and exeunt. MxcvAK. Faith and troth it's an illegant company we've here to-day. Och! maTonmeen, what a pnr^ flgtoe the young ledy has, an' her bright «yes do you good to look on 'em.
BoviVACx (catting). Michael, Michael, where aze you P MxcKAix. (eaOing). Isn't it here I am? BoviVAca (eaUi$tg). Gome here.
MicxAXL Yes* sor, I'm oomin*. IRuns off.
Enter Yhxwcs.
FAMwa {loakiHg about stage). Where can myhandkerchief be,I wonder? I am sure I had it when I was dancing.
M DaAWINO-ROOH OAHBS.
Paul. What are yoa looking for P
FAinrxx. Hy haadkorohieC
Paul. I half alio lotfc aomflChing.
Favvh. WhatP
Paul. Hy heart I
FAnrxB. YonrheariP
Paul. Yea, Faxmie, my heart. Oh ! Faxmie, I oaxiBot— oannot go on ihia way any longer. Tell me^ — ^pray , tail me,— I implora yon to tell me that I am not IndiiArent toyotL
FunnE, Who aaJd yoa were P
Paul. Nay, do not trifle with me.
FAinrxi. Well then, — ^well then, — ^yoa are not indifltoent to me.
Paul. Whatraptnrel
Mm. Htbtlb (cattiMff), Fannie— Fannie 1
FAjrvzB. Hoahl here^a mamma. I wonder where my handkerohiaf can have got to P
[Paul and FAinm look ab<mt CM 9kige tuueUmtiif.
Enter Mas. JCtbtlx. Has. Htitls. What are yon doing, Fannie P Lnnch ia waiting. Fawh. I am looking for my handkerchief, mamma.
.Si^OKiauB. Csonus. Here yon all are»— eh P I have come to look after yoa« Lnnch haa been waiting for yoa thia laat quarter of an hoar.
Enter BcmiwAcm, fiiOowed 6y Hicxasl.
BovivACB. Beally this la too bad; aa a man who takea an intereat in hia bnaineaa, I protest againat it. Here, the Innoh haa been waiting more than twenly minntea, and ereiything ia getting cold.
HioxAZL. Yia, an* eo ia the champagne.
Cacnua. We can nnderetand your foelinga npon the rnkj^oct, Mr. Bonifoce, and appreciate the manner in which yoa haye attended to na. 60 much ao indeed, that for the fbtore, we ahall aIwa3rB come here, and recommend oar IMenda to do the aame.
BoviPAca. If the ahower haa robbed the Belle Yne Hooae of aome onatomerg, it haa done me eome good.
Cacnus. HowP
BoinrACB. Diditnotdriye yoa hare for ahelter, and have yoa notpromiaed me yooz patronage for the ftitore P
MicHABL. Arrah I good lack to the shower, that sent ye here.
Paul (atidt). And so say I ; I haTO grained a wifo hy iL
Favhxh. {aeide). And mamma has lost a daoghter.
Cbobus. Ck)me, let as give the lnnch another trial.
[BonvAOB ffoe$ qff^JbUowed 6y Paul, FAjrezB, CwoMua, ami Mas. Mtxtlx.
Curtaim faOt,
T»lilf Bi YIt»pM. orlMng plcCnm.ronnaiitMi'uidpTat^kliidDruiiiuamentfta •raiim paitiM. In Kal*iiisapkT*blcftn,yaiimimobMiTBtliawiiaefibcMorl<ght uid ahttdA» ooloiff Hsd bme, disbibntloii of flffonSf bk i^etoiial idbcti. It Ii dlOlciilt to give pm win be tU tbu an aecBimy fOi cIotbt hojt. iki In Uia Acting Chimds, » parlonr wtib UdinK-doora irflllw tbnnd moM coDTniitat } bat If &1»rga roomonlyliMjonrwrriai, JOB must SttV\» one biJf rrom the oilier irlOi eoiUini ud iisperj. The moat ImptKtmt IMtdra oT Tablaem ie the oonome oT the perlbrmen, and Ihtdr humony of Bolova. lb* U(htMt gurmmti ihonia b« In the front, k tVmg " bit of oolmu,"
06
BRAWING-BOOK GAMES.
such aa a scarlet sliawl, or a militaiy dress, shoald oooapy the middle, wMle the darker oostames should be behind, to form a set-off, or background for the whole. Too many gay colours spoil the eflbot ; and when there are more than two or three figures, one should be in shadow, reliered by something dark behind.
Coloured lights are capable of being used with excellent ^ect in Tableaux. These may be produced by coloured fires. But a pretty and easy way to produce the same eflbcts as coloured lights may be had by placing globes of coloured water, like those in the chemists* shops, in lh>nt of strong lights, out of sight of the audience. In the final scene, the stage lit up with Tivid red light has a wonderftdly good effect.
In the diagrams that follow — r, means right hand side, I, left, and 0, centre; while in each case the lower line is the fh)nt of the stage, flocing the audience.
The following are suggested as sulyects fitted for Tableaux : —
TKX DUIL.
At the back of the stage five or six chairs are piled one on top of another. Also at back of stage (<), a table, upon which are some bottles and glasses ; under the table a pack of cards is scattered. On the left, one of the duellists, in his shirt sleeves, looldn^^ towards right at his opponent, with a grim smile vLpan. his countenance. He is wiping his sword with a handkerchief that he holds in his left hand. His Second has his right hand resting upon the dueUist's left arm, looking at him with an anxious flEtoe, and ia pointing off with his left hand, as if advising him to fly. On the right of the stage, a wounded man is lying, in his shirt sleeves, with his head and shoulders supported by his Second, who is in a kneeling position, and looking at the injured man with a terrified expression. By the side of the fbllen man is a doctor, examining the wound with professional calmness. On the backs of some of the chairs, the coats, vests, neckties, etc., are carelessly thrown. In the centre of stage is a sword lying upon the floor.
Poeition of Charaeten.
1. Chairs. 2. Table. 3. Duellist, wiping his sword ; 4. His Second. 6. Woonded man; 6. His Second. 7. The Doctor. 8. A sword.
This Tableau is best shown in subdued light A fine gaose stretched acroea tba
TABLEAUX YIVANTS.
97
atase adds mnch to the effbct. The woimded man is to be made up so as to appear ezoeedingly pale and ghastly. To heighten the efftot, a few drops of red, to imitate blood, are to be seen on his shirt.
xiscEnr nr school.
Desks, benches, a black board, etc., to imitate a sohool-room, must be introduced into this Tsblean. A blade board is hong at the back in centre, and a boy stands on a stool before, sketching a Indieroos picture of the master in chalk. Three or four others look on. A desk is at right of the stage, at which a boy sits pretending to stady hard, while aft the door is seen the master entering with a cane in his hand, and a sospidoQS smile on his ikce. Two beys are scuffling aft the left, partially oonoealed from the master by the door. Another 1x^ stands on a table near the desk, with a donee's cap on his head. Three other boys are playing at marbles near the centre groap. In fibct, in this Tableaa as many boys as can be got firom the company ma^ be introdnoed. Some may be eating apples and cakes ; and a yarie^ of books, maps, hikstsndi, mles, and other school ftimitnre, should be scattered on the floor. As the intetesl of the scene depends upon the surprise, a good light is all that is necessary — aO the flgnres being well in sight.
|
L |
1 |
-J |
|||||||
|
7 |
2 |
6 |
|||||||
|
s |
4 |
11 |
|||||||
|
a |
8 |
* 10 9 |
|||||||
|
12 |
|||||||||
|
6 |
|||||||||
Potiikm qf CharaeUrt. 1. Boy at black board. 2, 8, 4, and 6. Boys looking on. 6. Boy aft desk. 7. Table dmice. 8,9,10. Boys playing marbles. 11. Boysacoffling. 12. Door, with entering.
OAOLioeno's maoio xisaom.
This Tableaa illustrates the tradition of the Magio Mirror possened by Count GsglioBtro, a so-called magidan, who lived in the seventeenth century. In. the scene, he is suppoaed to be showing a young courtier the image of his dead lady-love.
A large frame ahould be setup aft the back of the stage, centre, with a huge volume open belbTO it. A lamp (one of ooiious form, if such can be got) stands just behind the votanne, and acRMS the opsix pages of the latter a naked sword is laid. Ifi
7
98
DRAWINa-BOOM OAIOSS.
■knll ottn be had, that »1bo may be placed on the book. An imitation aknU maj be made of pasteboard.
On the left of the frame, in shadow, stands Count Cagliostro, pointing towards the ▼ision. On the right, the yoong nobleman stands in an attitude of fear and wonder. The vision is in the centre of the ft«me, standing jost back from it, and is represented by a young girl, extremely pale, in a long, sweeping, white robe, with her hands oroesed upon her bosom, and her eyes turned upwards. One or two thicknesses of gause should be stretched ow the fhmie, and the vision illuminated by two lights, placed one on each side, behind, and concealed by the frame. If curtains can be attached to the latter eo as to prevent the light of these lamps trom iklling on any- thjng but the girl, the eflbot will be beautiftil.
The costume of the Ck>unt should be a small black cap. with a single drooping black feather, a long black cloak or robe, with a lace collar turned over it, and ruffles about his wrists ; black stockings and knee-breeches, pumps with large buckles, and a small sword, complete the dress. His fiuse should be rather pale, with a black moustache and heavy black eyebrows. His expression should be solemn, and a little scomfril.
The young courtier should have a somewhat rich dress. A dark coat, with gold laoe on the cuflk, collar, and lappels ; light-coloured knee-breeches, white stockings, shoes with rosettes, a dress sword, laoe collar and wristbands, and (if possible) a powdered court wig. He may have a slight moustache and imperial, but should appear much younger than OagUostro, and should stand more in the light.
|
6 |
1 |
6 |
||
|
2 |
||||
|
4 |
C |
3 |
PoHHoB of CharaeUrt.
1« A large table, upon which the girl who represents the vision, is to stand. Upon its frtmt edge the frame is to be rested. 1. Small stand, covered with dark doth, supporting book, lamp, sword, etc. 8. Oaglioetro. 4. Courtier. 5, 6. Curtains stretched frxnn the side of the frame, to conceal the lamps which light up the vision. The frame may easily be made of narrow boards, roughly nailed together, and ooTwed with black valTet^ aeetly taoked on.
TABLKAUX YIYAMTB.
90
To the right eentre of the stage, a cayalier, dressed in a slashed doublet and Jacket, trunk hose, low shoes, with large pink rosettes, and a velTet cap and ftetner. At his side hangs a rapier. A guitar, upon which he is playing, is suspended from hU neck with a blue ribbon. The cavalier has a small moustache, and carries himself jaonftilj. To the left centre of stage, a man, oiveloped in a dark cloak, lined with red, o«epin^ stealthily towards the cavalier. In his right hand is a dagger. A slouched hat, with a feather, is to be pulled down over his brow, and a heavy beard and mooatache is to be worn, also black stoddngs and low shoes. With his left arm he is holding the doak to his fhoe, as though trying to disguise his features.
Stage to be rather dark. The cavalier to be in ftall light, with his back turned to- who is to be in deep shadow.
PotUion qf Charaeterg, 1. The Oavalier. 2. The Aiwaswin, with dagger.
fKi OAMBuns' WAJumra.
Aft right eentre ia a table covered with green baise, around which six or seven men Bitting, playing at cards. At the back of stage is a sideboard, with decanter and A waiter in a white jacket is standing at sideboard, pouring wine into a him, and leaning against the sideboard in an eaqr attitude, is one of the gamblem. On the left of stage some gauze should be stretched across diagonally, iMttiHwi which ia the figure of a woman, with one arm laid across her breast, and the other pointing upward. All the players at the table are intently watching the cards, writh one exception ; he ia stand ing erect, with an expression of wonderment and terror vpon his fiice, and is looking at the figure behind the gauze. His left hand is resting npon the table ; the right is outstretched, holding a card ; two cards are upon the floor, mm though th^ had just fUlen tram his hand.
The rigrht of stage should be in f^U light; the left in shadow. A strong soft light riioakl be thrown upon the figure behind gause, which can be made by letting the hgbft ahine throuj^h a globe of clear water. After a few moments, a good effect could be obtained by letting a blue light fUl upon the characters on the left, and a red one opoo the gaiiiblets. It can easily be done by using coloured water in the globes.
IQO DIUWIHa-BOOll QAICXB.
Th« flgnie behind gui» ihonld ba auind in b wbiu robe, lODking ntry pole, »Hh ■ vmoirfol titiUMlun upon bar bee. Tba gamblen ihonld b« well bat ■howilj' Ttas Sgim tWnfUnn M tlie table iboold be neetlj
m
i'laittoii q/' CAdmttert.
A* k Tarioty pf Uiil dniwing-room uniuement, BinglB flgUPea, ftpproprialalj' aMtumed, JOtJ be introducad. ClereT boya will find no gnat diScotC; in ropreaenting henKfl ef antdqoi^, aa Hercolea BlAyin^ tha Lion, ^ax def^in^ the UghtJiiiig, Iho Djing QkadiaMr, aUi. i In aaaomiog tbe poag of Napoleon at at. Helena ;
larmoninin. will add conuderabl; u tn conolnding thia aection, let ne renund ooi readera Lhat all Drawing-i in the exercise of wit, Intelllgeaoa, and niemo>7 ; *jid tbac Ibe one g- Dcceai ii the aYOidanee oT all Uada of
iHlUllllUUlwJtAUHCll
In Knd tlia KbDolboj. Bajtlty bu often Mood a, Rirrotindcd bj- Tunlhlbl idoai of e [hongh it maj »«in. y« it i> no !(■■ ■tnngs tbMo le played mMobca of Cricket againat nuidou, having nibaikda. brottm, and soMthMUi* Hit their ipeolaton. CriBkit la tha nniTSml pHtmn at thi peopls. Tha moo of Daron, who Ajtjuailj devtpadaJlapoatainfariortownatUDg, and ChaBouiaiMt boy who doat upon Uia B1B11I7 gania of (tngla iMok, harg l«M<r girta (ome auenUon to CiiekM. which \m amj- wfain grawlag tiao t^TOiir with Uw panplj^ mpteSiUf is tha noithAm and aantlivii
102
CRICKET.
The exact period when the invigorfttinip game of Cricket originated, is nnknowc The name is supposed to be derived from the Baxon opyoe, or criooe, a stick or staff with which the ball was stmck. In Btowe*s Survey of London, imblished in lfi98, it is enumerated among the games practised by the citizens, but nothing is stated relative to the manner in which it was played, or the laws by which it was regulated. The eelebrated humorist, Tom D'TTrf^y, who acquired the flekvour of Charles n. by the oomposition of ballads in which mirth and party-spirit were combined, has mentioned Cricket in Tol. ii., p. 117, of his *' Pills to purge Melancholy"--4he song " Of a noble race was Shenkin," commencing thus
" ff«r WM the prettlMt fellow At foot.balI or at criefat. At hunUns ehae«i or nimble nn. How featly k0r ooald priok It."
The appellation has not been traced earlier than these authorities, though Stmtt asserts that Cricket originated from the game of CMhbaU, two engravings of which
are given by him in his Sports and Pastimes. The first is copied from a MS. in the Bodleian Library, dated 1 334. It exhibits a female figure in the action of throwing the ball to a man whoee bat is elevated to strike it. *' Behind the women," he says, " appear, in the original de- lineation, several other figures of both sexes waiting attentively to catch or stop the ball when returned by the batsman." The second, which also presents two playera, is more ancient than the first* and is taken firam a genealogical roll of the Kings of Bngland to the time of Henry m., in the Boyal Library. This diflbrs from, the former, in the batsman having possession of the ball also* which, Strutt adds, " he either threw into the sir and struck with his bat as it descended, or cast forcibly on the ground and beat it away when it rebounded: the attention of his antagonist to catch the ball need not be re- marked. It does not appear in either of these instances how the game was decided.**
The worthy chronicler's description of this game is evidently an invention founded upon Am interpretation of these figures, which in the original MSB. are merely subordi- nate, without the least reference explanatory of the detail Strutt has added to them, and which appears to be the basis of his opinion that Cricket originated fh>m Club-ball.
It may be remarked that the game of Stool-baU seems to have borne a great resemblance to Cricket. It diiXlBred chiefly in the hand being used instead of a bat, and a stool substituted for the wicket, before which one of the players took his station, whilst another, flrom a proper distance, delivered the ball with the intention of hitting the stool. If he succeeded, his adversary was out, but if on the oontiaxy the ball wa«
OBICKET. 103
itmck liack, the rtriker oonnted one towards hia game, proyided tbe bowler did not oeloh the ball before it had grounded ; in this case the striker was likewise oat. The game was won hy the party who scored the greatest number of points before the stool was struck hj the baU. The game of Btool-ball itself, is described in another part of oar book.
If this elegant and heahhftil recreation did not spring firom either of the sources we have described, it may reasonably be infieiTed that we are indebted to a less ancient and more zeAned period for its scientiflc and complicated construction.
Aooording to the earliest description of the game, under its modem appellation, the distance between the wickets was twenty-two yards, the same as at the present time. Fach wicket was composed of two stumps and one bail ; between the former a hole was made in which the batsman, to obtain a run, was obliged to ground his bat befose the wicket-keeper could place the ball therein.
This rule snl^jected the wicket-keeper's hands to great ii^ury, as it frequently happened that they were in the hole at the same instant as the striker's bat. The unpleasant coIUsion led to the introduction of the popping-crease ; and to the stumps, which were previously but one foot in height, being increased by ten inches. The hole was abolished, and the wicket-keeper required to stump out the bafiwnan with the baD inhazid.
About the middle of the last century no particular weight was prescribed for the baD ; and the perfection of bowling consisted in vaiying the delivery as much as poflsible : — "kmg bops and half volleys," "grounders and home tosses*' succeeded each other, either fhster or slower as the bowler considered most likely to perplex his antagonist. Bats were made veiy diilbrent firom *' Duke's, Budd's, Page's, Dark's, or ClapshaWs best " of the present day : the handle was considerably shorter, and the blade long and narrow, bowed out in finont and curved at the back. Such imple- ments as these were but ill adai>ted even for what is termed *' slsshing hitting," and upon the introduction of the system of bowling len{fth btMttt this style of bat was found to be an insnfflcimit defence to the wicket. It was accordingly altered to the straight Torm, which presented greater advantages to the striker in blocking ; and placing him upon a more equal footing with the bowler, was the foundation of that safe style of play which this scientiflc game has gradually attained.
Hie next material change was the regulation of the width of the bat to its present extent; vis., four and a quarter inches: this was found very desirable, as many unaldlfiiil or oniUr players were accustomed to use bats so extremely wide as to exclude their wickets entirely thnn the bowler. Nyren says — " An iron ftrame, of the statute width, was coostruoted for and kept by the Bambledon Club, through which any bat of suspected dJmwisiooa was passed, and allowed or r^ected accordingly." About this time it was also decided that the weight of the baU should not exceed five and three-quarter ounces, nor be less than five ounces and a half. But the most important improvement to which the game of Cricket has been subgected since its introduction, is the using of three stumps and two bails for the wickets, instead of two stumps and one bail. Nyren gives the follow- ing aooonnt of its origin : — " On the 22nd of Kay, 1776, a match waa played in the
1U4 CRICKBT.
Artillery Ground, between five of the Hambtodon Club and five of All Bngland ; when a celebrated player named Small went in * Uwt man ' for fourteen nine, and fetched them. Another eqaallj good player, Lampy hy name, was bowler on the occasion ; and it baring been remarked that hia balls, three aereral timea, had passed between Small*s stamps, it was considered to be a hard thing upon the bowler that his straightest balls should be thus sacrificed, and the number of stamps was consequently increased to three, with which number the game has continued to be played ever since. Many amateurs were of opinion at the time that the alteration would tend to shorten the game ; and subsequently the Hampshire gentlemen did me the honour of taking my opinion upon this point. I agreed with them that it was but doing justice to the bowlers, but I diflbred upon the question that it would shorten the game, because the striker, knowing the danger of missing one straight ball, with three instead of two stumps behind him, would redouble his care, while every loose hard hitter would learn to stop, and play as safe a game as possible.'* The worthy veteran, Nyren, proved no false prophet, for at a match played about two years afterwarda, by the Hambledon Club against All England, one Aylward, a left>handed batsman and a Hambledonian, stopped in two days and scored the extraordinary number of 167 runs, the highest number on record at that period, and obtained flrom off the finest bowling of the day, namely, that of Lumpy, previously alluded to. In 1774 the weight of the bi^ was fixed at five and three-quarter ounces, and the old distance of twenty-two yards between the wickets was retained.
*m WAT «0 PLAT CmiOKlT.
Simply stated. Cricket is a game with a ball, bat, and stomps, at which two or more ^enona can play. The object of the game ia to make the greatest number of runs, the ball being struck by the batsman, at one wicket, after it has been bowled from the other by the bowler. Bveiy run flrom wicket to wicket ia reckoned fbr one point ; and the batsman is out of the game, when his wicket is bowled down, or if the bails are tipped off by the wicket-keeper, when the batsman is out of his ground ; or when a ball struck with the bat or the hand of the player, is caught by either of the players on the opposite side, in the field.
Cricket is played in two ways : Single Wicket, in which the batsman has to ran from his wicket to the bowling-stump, and baek ttffoinf before he can count one for game ; and Double Wicket, in which a batsman stands at each wicket, and when the ball is struck suffldently flu* to warrant a run, the batsmoi run and change places. Single Wicket can be played by two or more players ; but Double Wicket cannot be well played with fewer than eight on a side : the ftall game consisting of eleven on each aide, with two umpires, and two scorers.
Previously to the commencement of the game, the stumps are pitched — that is, fbrced into the ground, so that they stand quite upright— exactly opposite each other, twenty-two yards apart. A bovfUnff-create and a poppiftg-create are then drawn on the ground with whiting or chalk. This is usually done in public cricket grounds by the men who keep the torf in order. The bowUng-crease is in a line with the wicket, six feet eight inches in length ; with a retom-crease at each end, towarda the
CBICKET. 106
bowler ; and wiihin tlie retam-enMe, on etther lidB, and behind the bowling-oreeeo, the bowler miut elend whea he delivers the balL The poppiag-crosie is four feet in front of the stompBp and of enj length not less than the bowling-crease. In the djagiam btdcm, a, repreeente the ttomps ; 6, 6, the bowling-creases ; c, c, the retain- r I * ii« M ; and d, the popping ereaae. All together, the stamps and the creases constitute
a wicket . An ingenioos oontrlTanoe has lately
been need at Lord's and the Oral — the great ^
Metropolitan Cricket Groonds — by which the wicket ie kept invariably at the proper height
and width. It is a bese plate of naetal fixed in the ..
groond by two spikes, and provided with India- : v a 0 _
rnbber eoUara to receive and hold the stomps. ^ *^
The b—e plates for doable wicket cost 12s., and may be purchased of Messrs. Fuller and Margetle, the pntentees. Ironmonger Lane, Cheapaide, and of moet aellen of cricketing
The wickets pitched, the playcn take their several tuns at the bat ; and when all tbe plajera on one aide ai« bowled, caoght, or run ont, the other side, previously in tbe field, go in. The side that, in one or two innings, makes the greatest number of poiati* by nm% byes, and forfeitnres, wins the game.
DOUBLE WICKET.
The flin gaaaa of Doable Wicket requires twenty-two players, eleven upon each aide, merely practising, a less number will be sufficient, and the strikers go into the field lieir innings ; but as improvement gi eatly depends upon the near approaeh made to tbe legitimate game, we adviee our young fHeods to takeeveiy opportunity of playing it.
The two partiee teas up for first innings ; and two players belonging to the side that wins the toss go in, one at each wicket. The out-party place themselves in variooa situations about the field, to catch or stop the baQ when struck by the batsmen. One of the bowlera oommeooes bowling either four or six successive balls (as may pfwiooe^ have been agreed upon), hia object being to bowl down the wicket; if he ■ueoeed, tbe batsman retires ihnn the game, and another of his party takes his place. It, however, the ball ie struck by the batsman, he and hia partner keep running to each other's wicket, and back again, until their opponenta obtain poaaeaaion of the ball and throw it in to the wicket-keeper ; and one run ia scored towarda game every time chey change widbeta. Every run obtained by a blow from the bat ia acored to the f^tainan inaliiHU it ; but \sytB, widea, no-baUa, etc., are scored to the credit of the side. Shoald the ball be thrown up by either cf their opponents, and one of the wickets put down before the betsman running for that wicket haa reached it, he ia out; or if, after the baU ia atniefc, either of the fiektomen catch it before it xeaohea the ground, the
IOC CBICKET.
striker of the bell is oat The helanrwHi may teeve his ground to strike, end score any nms so obtained ; but he is oot prorided the wieket-keqwr snooeeds in patting down his wicket with it befbre he regains his ground. When the player who oommenoed bowling, has bowled either the four or six balls as agreed upon, the nmpire at his wicket cans *' Over," and the fieldsmen reverse their positions by crossing over to the opposite side of the ground. The same number of balls are then deliyered firom the other wicket, either by the player who previously stood there as wicket-keeper, or by one of his side appointed for the purpose ; and so on altemately . When all the players belonging to the in-party are out, they change places with their opponents, and bowl to them until their innings are over. When each side has had two innings, the runs are counted, and the party that has obtained the greatest number is declared the oon> queror. These are the principal features of the game ; and under the head of " Laws of Double Wicket," the regulation of its various positions will be found.
Bats, B^lls, Btuxps. — ^The bat most not exceed thir^-eight inches in length, nor be more than four inches and a quarter in the widest part. Bats are chiefly made of willow, and bound tightly round the handle with waxed twine, to alRird the strikers a Ann grasp, and to prevent concussion. The ftill-sised bat may be of anj weight, according to the taste of the player, but it very seldom exceeds two pounds an(i a half. The blade should be about twenty-one inches long, and four inches wide at the shoulder, gradually extending to four inches and a quarter at the tip. It should likewise increase in thickness from the shoulder towards the tip, where it is again rounded off. This form of bat is calculated to produce the greatest momentum in striking. The fkoe should be perfectly smooth, slightly curved from the middle to the sides ; and the back should be more acutely rounded than the Due. In making choice of a bat, never select one that is too heavy to use comfortably, with a handle that feels at all too thick when grasped, as such a bat will be veiy likely to cramp the hands ; but give the preference to one rather stout at the bottom of the handle or shoulder, as th^ are invariably the strongest. Bats are frequently broken in the handle ; and as many of our young friends may reside in a town or village where there are no bat-makers, they can get a carpento* to repair them by cutting out a portion of the blade, and inserting a new handle, which may be fhstened by one or two iron pins, or screws (see Fig. 1). The handle of a bat may be considerably strengthened by having it tongued ; that is, a piece of hard wood, such as lance or yew, let down the middle (see Fig. 2). Willow being a very brittle wood, the hal should be occasionally oiled with Hnseed or sweet oU, both during and after the cricketing season, to prevent it from drying and splitting. The beet bats are made with cane or whalebone handles, and cost from lOs. to 2ls. each ; though a good serviceable practice bat can be had for about 6s. The ball must not weigh more than five ounces and three-quarters, nor less than five ounces and a half. Its cironmltoence must not exceed '^ ^' nine inches and a quarter ; and it should be made of four pieces of ^^* ^ leather sewn together, so as to form two perfect hemispheres. At the beginning of each innings, when playing a grand match, etther side is entitled to call fat a vew
u
CRICKET. 107
teO. When the game ia OTer, the ball ahoold be well greaeed, to preserve the stitchee Ihnn TOtftiiig, and the leather from becoming rough. By all meaiui avoid cheap toy* •hop balB and baUa, for th^ soon get oat of order, and are dearer in the end than tharonghly good onea. There is a capital practice ball known as Nicholaon'a Patent Cumpouiid. Tbia ooet 4s. ; the double-seamed leather ball coats 78. 6d. Thorough- goixkg crieketers will probably purchase trousers, belts, cape, wloket-keeping gloves, bfittmg-glovea, leg-pads (or guards), and have a spare bat or two in case of accidents in Che field. AH these, of the best quality, may be had of Idllywhite, Budd, Duke, Page, or Wiaden.
The stomps most be sofBciently long to leave twenty-seven inches out of the groond. Tb^ should be made either of lance-wood or ash, bound with brass wire or stnmg twine, and grooved on the top, to hold the baOs, each of which should be four iacfaea long.
Tkb Uiom are appointed, one hj each party, to settle all disputes that may arise la the eonne of the game. As their decisions are final, two persons should be selected who are distinguished for impartial judgment, and knowledge of the laws. Th^ take their atataops, one at each wicket ; the umpire at the striker's wicket should stand at some distanipe at the on-side, so as not to be in the way of the players ; his duty is cbietty to decide whether the bataman is fUrly stomped out or not. The umpire at the bowler's wicket should place himself in a direct line behind it, to see that the bowler the ball fkirly, and that the batsman does not stop it when delivered straight, any part of his dress or person before Uie wicket. He is likewise to be first appealed to in all questions respecting catches befbre wicket. The umpires in all casee should jUbDh ttir wicketa, and the captains toss up for the choice of innings. The nuipirea usoaDy change wickets after each aide has had one innings.
Two BooaxBs are ehoeen, one hj each aide, to mark the game. They should be ptefOed in a line with cover-point, at some distance out in the field, so as not to be in the way of the players. The score for each side is kept separate. Every striker's mna are marked separately to his name each innings ; and when he is out, it must be itoecribed aa bowled, caught* etc., etc., as the case may be, with the name of the persoD attached by whom he was put out.
An overthrows and lost balls are to be scored to the striker ; and the wide balls, no balla, and byes, that occur during an iunings, are each to be placed in a separate line, and caet up with the runs of the strikers when the innings is finished, as already
Taa Gaouvn selected for the game should be extensive, and as level as possible, that 'the piogieas of the ball may not be impeded. To preserve it in good condition, it win be oocacionaUy requisite to have it roUed and watered ; and if the grass can be mowed, or eaten dose by sheep, it wiU be found advantageous.
Tsa WicxKB most be pitched by the umpires, direcUy opposite to each other, at the diateTireof twen^-two yards ftff men; but the distance may be varied (with the sise and weight of the bat^ ball, etc.) according to the strength of juvenile players. The stomps ■honld be placed doae enough to each other to prevent the ban passing through.
109
OBICEET.
wfthoat either striking them down, or knocking the bails oflT. When two matchee are played by the same parties, it is usual to allow the party leaving home the privilege of intching the first wicket within thirty yards of a spot fixed upon by their opponents.
Thb BowLiiro-CBKABK most be in a line with the wicket, six feet eight inchM in length (the stumps in the centre), and have a r^um-crease at each end, towards the bowler, at right angles.
Ths PorFiHa-cBXASi must be four feet from the wicket, and exactly parallel with it ; the length unlimited, but not shorter than the bowling-crease, as explained in the general directions on a previous page.
Thb Fibu>. — The out-players disperse themselves in the field, in front and at the sides of the players* wicket ; and change positions at every over. The position of the fielders varies a little with the description of the bowling, standing a little closer in for slow bowling than for swift round-arm. The following diagram will however snfll- ciontly explain the positions of the fielders when taken in connection with the remarks further on : — •
6
10
M
9 o
11
u 1
8
M A
O
THB B BLD BOB UVDXBXAVDy OB MBDtinC BOVH]>-SiJn» BOWLIir«.
••• The wickets r b b, the batsmen; r tr, the umpires; 1, the bowler; 2, wloket- k eper ; a, long-stop i 4, point ; «, short-slip ; 6. long-slip ; 7, cover-point ; 8, long- field off; 9, long on j 10, long leg ; 11, square leg.
"hi BowUH.— Tha Ii4n ihoold be held wttb tha hud uroas, »o iiai the tip* oT ■iM fiDgen maj Moeb moh oUur i and with jut a lolBBiaiit EiMp to keep it Haul;. Bowling ia a vary ImportaDt part of tiie game, and reqaina great ateadJneaB- Bad
but nrr U* ball! Diater w alower, accanllDg to the pacallaritiea of the ctriker. The bowler and wtckM-keapar ihouM liaTs a team aiga, by which the; ma; hint to eacli -Kher the proprieg ut Taryiug the diiacliail or ■wUneaa or lh« balla. Ronnd-arm ba*IiDi7, Uia Btyle sow atmon nnitsraall; adopted, li aceompUahed b; deliTaring the ball with a tora of the wrist, ao a« to maka It talra a cinjnlar ooiuae ttom the hand to the wicket. In thii mode of bowling it ia bait to gnmnd the ball, joat wlthoat the baiaman'i reach, in aa direct a line aa poaiible to the lag namp, whioL ia genera]];
Tsa BiTiHu ihonld (land with llie right Un* taOeimiij behind Ibe popplng- Rcaae la be on his KTmad, and aa near to tha block-hola aa poaaible, withoat being befbre hi* wiekM. The left TOM ahonld be placed lighll; on tha gromul, and aa mneh
MtHnde wiQ patmit. Baftara tha ball ii de- M^tM.
IiTered, tha bat aboold be ptaoed aiactl; '^^>w^
opiuaite tlM mlddla naiup ; it ahonld ba ^^2^\
fiaaped b; the middle o/ the baodla. with AF'- '^k.
the hauli almoit cloaa lo each olhar; thia JBmEW
hohUng it givea the pla;ar greUei Wf-J^^Bp^ '
hand ia placed ^ . .^ . - tSr ^m. L MEtet
iX the ahonlder -^ , ^^^^S)£ lHi4^K I IHfe B; kaepukg the leA ihonldar a Uttla forward ^|^|^^HH|fl9^^H2B^HNt ^^^^^ ia the direatoD of tha bowler, and the left ^^^^^^^^^^H^^^Dl^^^B albow well op. Uw baliman will aroid idik' ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^I^^^^E
lateed aa the ball )■ deliTared ; the e;a, at ^^^^^^^HF^Vlltt^^'^^ Ibe same lime, marking where it pitobea. ^^^^^^^^^H^,_H{|| ,, c nta Briker onght not alwaja to aappoae the ^^^^^^^H^HHI^BUmJM|^ ball win bD wlda, tkim Ita appamtt dirw- ^^fKB^SSf^^^H^^^ - Horn, b^ jMUldpln; ai If tie ware raapjetona of Tta cnmhig atomlght. In hitting hard, he
raiial kaqi hia hand! raths oloaa to each other, and let the ball ba Umek abont eii iadbea ftna tba Up of the bat. He ahonld alw^a aToid hitting tiatbr the hall i and wfa^ hfa paiteo' at tha oppoaita wickst la abont to atrlke, he ihonld ba teed; rr>r ruDtdojv, but he mnat be oaatioaa not to leave hia gronnd before the ball ia ont nf :ha boiriK'a hand. Aa aoon aa the ball ia dellTarad, ha may follow It, bat ahaold not ran loo Or. ao that. If no nina be obtajnad, he aa; return in tbna to aave hia wioket. Bmia brfOn wickK ahonld dapend opon the will of the aOriker, and thoaa bebind wioliet
numing to mto, you mw. »• >Jiown by Oib engimTing, »Toid ■ bl»olc eya, or tlu Ioh of yonr front tooth. Tlu batanmo, on oonunenclag pl^y, «honld uoartainirflliebawLBr from vhloh aide ha intendj to delitBr Uu b«U.
a Iha gama, u mDoh dspmidi on re from hla ground witiiont knocking down hia wlokM, whioh ii eaUsd '• numping out." He should UkewiM •» UuX Cba flsldimfm ■n in Uwir propar plaooa, and give bi« dlnctlona to them by ligta nlbcr Uun by wordL Tba wicket-keeper iboulil nud with bla left (!»( fbrwud, and hii hand* ahooM be ever ready lor aotian. He may place hlnuelf at a diUance of bwn halt « yard to two ynrfi behind Elw aMmpe, aooonUng to the etroogth of the bowling. In reOumng the baU to Iha bowler, he ihiMild deUver it lO thM the bowler may either catch <t at onoa or rooeive <t at the Ont raluund. Tha bowler ahould be aarod frvm all nnneceaiaiy OMifrue or running after or HoatdDg to pick up the ball, and no player ihoold ever attempt to keep wickM without glovea and leg-gnanls. It la uatua for tbe captain of the elereu to act aa wiclcet-keepar or bowler.
TBI SBoR-tLir ahould uaod >o aa to reach within about two or three yanla of the wloket-keeper! if lbs latter ihonld go frvm tha wicket after the ball the ahort-elip ■hould take hig place untO hii return. An additional ahort^lip b BometiBMa placed tor oatchee between thia player and tbe point, whan a iOiker fraqnently cute or lipa off the ball from tiie off edge of hie bat.
Tai PoiBT aboold placa hiatBeU a little In ftont of the popplng-oreaae, abont aerSD yanli from the wrlker. Be muat be an aotiTe player and a good oatobar.
Um-wiciiT should etaud on the off-aide, about aevsa yards from the bowler'a wl^st. He shonld tlirow in the ball about tlie belght of the baila, and not loo hard. If the bowler leaves bia place, mid-wicket should take It tin he returns ; and When tha bail la nit uliarplj- and itraighl to the bowler he ahDold " back up," to prevent a ma aomMunes made before the iDug-fisld r*achea the ball.
CioT»-niiaT.~-This player*! [daoe la between the point asd mld-wiokM, but ftnlhbr
OSICKBT. Ill
oat In the Odd, ao that IT Ihs boU atioald be hit to tlmm uid miHSil be will ba in
trtt«a janli tram the wick«(.
LoBB-vfOT ■hoold plwB hlniHir bahiod the wiokM-kssper. M * distance wbloh raail ba TSfisd Booardlng to the ewUtnen of the bowUu^. He ehould be able to tiirow ip well, M it fa not only Oie balla ttiM pan the wioket-keeper, but niCb h ■» jiul tipped Willi tbe edge of Ibe btt IbM he will have lo look to. He muM elao be attentiTs in
.D on dunld be placed on the olT-eide, between tbe middle wicket-
Oargain. Tbe ball (hoold be thrown np to Ibe wickM Waboot tbe hdghtof the baUa. Xacb pUjer elioald llni attend etrioUy to hia own paitietilar work, and ba raadj' Id aid bia mmradna when naoeaiaiT ; but be ahonld. of all thioge, arold nnntlsd-for tgtwiiMOi wtth Ihalr peanliar departmaoU of tba garnet ThU nbati laMon appUv ■on aapaelBllj to iba mjndleloiia niahlns forward to fliialell (or probably to mUr) a cMeh. Tba teaoU of nob an act mar b* digging the heel fflk* luo a o«mnde'a
118 CRICKET.
instep ; or, u the renowned Mr. Felix has said, " the cooseqnenoes axe likely to he the loss of blood, and ditto of temper."
CHAirOBS OF POflXTXOir.
When a left-hand player takes the bat, point and short-slip shoold cross over ; long- slip thonld stand wider a-field, to play leg, who most draw up a little towards the wicket, so as to ooTer short-slip and point. Mid- wicket shoold likewise cross over to play a-midfleld, and ooyer-point stand out rather wider. These changes can and thould be made so rapidly that whether the left or the right hand player is the striker the bowling may not be delayed.
If the batsman stoikes more to the on-side than to the off-side, ooyer-point may be placed as mid-wioket-on, long-slip and mid- wicket-off slightly contracting the diHtanoe between each otho: to make ap for the withdrawal of coyer-point.
Some batsmen are fond of displaying their skill in *' drawing " balls that rise towards the leg stomp. As the ball generally gets away between long-stop and leg, it is adyisable to place as " dram ** the fieldsman tibiat can best be spared.
In the diagram for the field, giyen in page 108, we have no player standing at leg, which would be aboot midway between 2 and 10 ; and no mid-wicket, who stands to the right or left (according to the wicket bowled from) about hi^-way between tho wickets, at a distance eight or ten yards on either side. These players are so placed for swift bowling ; but the Captain will necessarily judge as to the proper positions of the fielders, according to the style of the bowling and the manner of the bstsman, bringing his men saanr in or plaong them fturther off, as the case may be.
THE LAWS OP CRICKET.
DOUSLS WICKBT.
{As Revited by the Marylebone Club.)
I. The Ball must weigh not less than five ounces and a half, nor more than five oonoes and three quarters. It must measure not less than nine inches, nor more thaxs^ nine inches and one quarter in circumference. At the begrinning of each innings. cither party may call for a new balL
n. The Bat most not exceed four inches and one qnazter in the widest part ; it must not be more than thirty-eight inches in length.
IIL The Stomps must be three in number ; twenty-seven inches out of the groond ; the Bails eight inches in length ; the Stamps of equal and ot suffioient thickneea to prevent the ball from pawrfng through.
IV. The BowUng-creaae must be in a line with the Stamps ; six ilaet eight incd^es in length ; the Stomps in the centre ; with a retom-crease at each end towaxds tlae Bowler at right angles.
y. The Popping-oreaaa must be four faek ftom the Wieket. and paraUsI to Si ; im* limited in lengtb, bat not shorter than the BowUng-cresar.
CRICKET. lis
VL The Wickets miut bo pitched opposite to esch other l^ the Umpires, st the ttiiit^nfif of twensj-tno yBrds.
Vn. U sbAll not he lAwfVxl for either party during a match, without the consent of tha otiier, to alter the groond by rolling, watering, oovering, mowing, or beating, eizoept ai the commencement of each innings, when the ground shall be swept and rolled, rnUess the side next going in object to it. This role is not meant to prevent the striker from busting the groond with his bat near to the spot where he stands during the innings, nor to preyent the bowler from jUling np holes with saw-dos^ etc., when the groond shall be wet.
TUL After rain the Wickets may be changed with the consent of both parties.
IX. The Bowler shall deliyer the ball with one foot on the gronnd behind the bowling'crease, and within the retnm-oreBse, and shall bowl four balls before he change Wickets, whidi he shall be permitted to do only once in the same innings.
X. The ball mnst be bowled. If thrown or jerked the Umpire shall call " No Ban."
XI. He may require the Striker at the wicket ftx)m which he is bowling, to stand on that side of it which he may direct.
TTT If ihe Bowler shall toss the ball over the Striker's head, or bowl it so wide that in the apinkm of the Umpire it shall not be fUrly within the reach of the Batsman. he shaU adjudge one run to the party receiving the innings, either with or without an appeal, which shall be put down to the score of Wide Balls ; such ball shall not be reckoned as one of the four balls ; but if the Batsman shall by any means bring him- s^ within reach of the ball, the run shall not be adjudged.
Xm. If the Bowler deUver a «* No BaU,*' or a ** Wide Ball," the Striker shall be allowed as many runs as he can get, and he shall not be put out except by running oat. In the event of no run being obtained by any other means, then one run shall be added to the score of *' No Balls." or " Wide Balls," as the case may be. All runs obtained for '* Wide Balls" to be scored to ** Wide Balls." The names of the Bowlers who bowl ** Wide Balls" or ** No Balls," in ftiture to be placed on the score, to show the parties by whom either score is made. If the ball shall first touch any part of the Striker's diess or person (except his hands), the Umpire shall call ** Le^ Bye."
XIT. At the beginning of each innings the Umpire shall call "Play ;" from that time to the end of each innings no trial ball shall be allowed to any Bowler.
XV. The Striker is out if either of the bails be bowled oflT, or if a stump be bowled out of the ground ;
xn. Or, if the ball, from the stroke of the bat or band, but not the wrint. be held before it touch the gronnd. although it be hugged to the body of the catcher ;
XVII. Or, if in striking, or at any other time while the ball shall be in play, both his fiMft shall be over the popping^cresse, and his wicket put down, except his bat bo groanded within it ;
AVIU. Or. if in striking at the ball he hit down his wicket;
XIX. Or. if under pretence of running, or otherwise, either of the Strikers prevent a ball from being osught, the Striker of the ball is out;
8
114 CRICKET.
XX. Or, if Uie ball besfcniok, and be wilftilly ■trike it again ;
XXI. Or, if in nmning, the wioket be alrack down by a throw, or by the hand or ann (with ball in hand), before his bat (in hand) or aome part of his person be grotmded oyer the i)opping-crease. Bat if both the bails be off, a stomp most be struck oat of the groond ;
XXn. Or, if any part of the Striker's drees knock down the wicket ;
AAiii. Or, if the Striker toach or take ap the ball while in play, unless at the request of the opposite party ;
Xaiy. Or, if with any part of his person he stop the ball, which in the opinion of the Umpire at the Bowler's wicket^ shall have been pitched in a straight line l^m it to the Striker's wicket, and wonld haye hit it.
XXY . If the players have oroaaed each other, he (hat runs for th|B wioket which is put down is out.
XXYI. A ball being canght no rans shall be reckoned.
XXVn. A Striker being run out, that run which he and his partner were attempting shall not be reckoned.
XXVm. If a lost ball be called, the Striker shall be allowed six runs; but if more
than six shall haye been ran before lost ball shall have been called, then the Striker
shall have all which haye been ran,
XXIX. After the ball shall have been finally settled in the Wicket-keeper's or Bowler's hand, it shall be considered dead ; but when the Bowler is about to deliver the ball, if the Striker at his wicket go outside the popping crease before such actual delivery, the said Bowler may put him out, unless (with reference to the 21at law) his bat in hand, or some part of his i>erBon, be within the popping-crease.
XXX. The Striker shall not retire from his wicket and return to it to complete his innings after another has been in, without the consent of the opposite party.
XXXI. No substitute shall in any case be allowed to stand out or run between wickets for another person without the consent of the opposite party ; and iit case any person shall be allowed to run for another, the Striker shall be out if either he or his substitute be off the ground in manner mentioned in laws 17 and 21, while the ball is in play.
XXXn. In all cases where a substitute shall be allowed, the consent of the opposite parly shall also be obtained as to the person to act as substitute, and the place in the field which he shall take.
XXXm. If any Fieldsman stop the ball with his hat, the ball shall be considered dead, and the opposite party shall add five runs to their score ; if any be run they shall have five in all.
XXXIV . The ball having been hit, the Striker may guard his wicket with his bat, or with any part of his body except his hands ; that the 2Srd law may not be disobeyed.
XXXY. The Wicket-keeper shall not take the ball for the purpose of stumping, until it have passed the wicket ; he shall not move until the ball be out of the Bowler's hand ; he shaU not by any noise incommode the Striker ; and if any part of hia person bo over or before the wioket> althoogh the ball hit it» the Striker shall not be out.
CBICKET. lift
XXZVI. The Umpim are the sole judges of f^ or nnftur play ; and all disputes sihall be detemuned by them, each at his own wioket ; but in case of a catch, which tl&e Umpire at the wicket bowled from cannot see suffioiently to decide upon, he may aiiply to the other Umpire, whose opinion shall be conclusive.
XXXyU. The Umpires in all matches shall pitch fieur wickets ; and the parties shall toes up for choice of innings. The Umpires shall change wickets after each party has had one innings.
XXXviLL They shall allow two minutes for each Striker to come in, and ten minutes between each innings. When the Umpire shall call *' Play," the party refssing to play shall loae the matoh.
XJfcXiA. They are not to order a Striker out unless appealed to by the adversaries ;
XL. But if one of the Bowler's feet be not on the gi^und behind the bowling-crease and within the retnm-ereaee when he shall deliver the ball, the Umpire at his wick^ missked, must call, <* No Ball."
XLL If either of the Strikers ran a short npi, the Umpire must call "One
XLIL No Umpire shall be allowed to bet.
YTJTT No Umpire is to be changed during a match, unless with the consent of both parties, except in case of violation of the 42nd law ; then either party may dis- miss the transgressor.
XIJY. After the delivery of four balls the Umpire must call ** Over," but not until the ball shall be finally settled in the Wicket-keeper's or Bowler's hand : the ball shall tbea be considered dead ; nevertheless, if an idea be entertained that either of the Striken is crat, a question may be put previously to, but not after, ttie delivery of the neztbaU.
XLY. The Umpire must take especial care to call *' No Ball " instantly upon delivery ; ** Wide Ball " as soon as it shall pass the Striker.
XLYL The Players who go in second shall follow their innings, if they have obtained eighty runs less than their antagonists, except in aU matches limited to only one day's play, when the number shall be limited to sixty instead of eighty.
XLVTL When one of the Strikers shaU have been put out, the tise of the bat shall not be allowed to sny person until the next Striker shall oome in.
NoTS. — ^The Committee of the Marylebone Club think it desirable that previously to the cnrntneneement of a match, one of each side should be declared the manager of it ; and that the new laws with respect to substitutes may be carried out in a spirit of fiumess and mutual concession, it is their wish that such substitutes be allowed in all reasonable cases, and that the Umpire should inquire if it is done with the consent of tte manager of the opposite side.
Complaints having been made that it is the practice of some players when at the wi^et to make holes in the ground for a footing, the committee are of opinion that the Unpnrea Aould be empowered to prevent it.
116 CRICKET.
V^^^
8IXQLB WICKBT.
As already explained, Single Wicket Cricket ia plajAd in the sune general manner
as Doable Wicket ; with the exceptions pointed oat in the following roles : ^The
distance between the wickets is precisely the same as at Doable Wicket, consequently the batsman has twice the ground to go over in obtaining each ran. As a remedy for this evil the runs might, wo think, be fifteen yards in length, <n«t.^^f^t of twenty-two ; this could easily be managed by placing a mark at that distance from the wicket ; the striker putting his bat or person on or over the mark to entitle him to a run. The mark might be placed somewhat oat of the direct line between the wickets, to prevent its inconveniencing the bowler.. Single Wicket woold thos be rendered much less fetiguing to the batsman. The bowler might, as now, bowl ttom a stamp twenty-two yards from the batsman's wicket
i^HB LiLWB OT Bues.! wicKKT. (MorjfUibone Club.)
I. When there shall be less than five Players on a side. Bounds shall be placed twenty-two yards each in a line fr'om the off and leg-stump.
II. The ball mast be hit before the Bounds to entitle the Striker to a ran, which run cannot be obtained unless he touch the bowling-stump or crease in a line with his bat or some part of his person, or go b^ond them, returning to the popping-crease aa at Double Wicket, according to the 21st law.
m. When the Striker shall hit the ball, one of his feet must be on the ground, and behind the popping-crease, otherwise the Umpire shall call *' No Hit."
lY. When there shall be less than five Players on a side, neither Byes nor Over- throws shall be allowed, nor shall the Striker be caught out behind the wicket, nor stumped out.
V. The Fieldsman most return the ball so that it shall cross the play between the wicket and the bowling-stump, or between the bowling-stump and the bounds ; the Striker may nm till the ball be so returned.
YI. After the Striker shall have made one run, if he start again he must touch the bowling-stomp, and turn before the ball cross the play to entitle ^^t" to another.
VII. The Striker shall be entitled to three runs for lost ball, and the same number for ball stopped with hat, with reference to the 26th and 33rd laws of Doable Wicket.
VIII. When there shall be more than four Players on a side there shall be no bounds. All Hits, Byes, and Overthrows, shall then be allowed.
IX. The Bowler is subject to the same laws as at Double Wicket.
X. No more than one minute shall be allowed between each balL
GBIOKKT. 'il7
Ham xncm Duw. — Bachew hate of every dMcription. Woollen cape, made with to aheltar the eyeB. an preferable, h^xig not only light and oool to the head, but alMutbiug the peimpirateon. As loose shht-Bleevee eometimeft stop the ball in their folda» frxim whence it may be ahaken on to the wicket, an elaetio cotton or merino GneruMy shirt will be found the most oonyenient garment. If you incline to a flannel jBfdcel yoa will find it of most aenrioe when fielding, or to slip on after leaving your wicket vrith each a oeore as may have induced oopions perspiration. Encase your nstber hmbs in trowsers of well-ahronk flannel, with an elastio belt passed through loops sewn npon the waistband. Avoid braces, which always impede a cricketer's moveokents, whether he be striking, bowling, or fielding. Tie a cotton handkerchief roand your ne<dE, in preference even to the silk of Delhi, and this, with merino or thin socks, and well«spiked shoes, will complete your toilet. If the bowling be swift yoa win need India-mbber batting-gloves, and paddings for the better preservation of your shins ; and shonid yon, perchance, get a braise or two, remember that the very best remedy is sweet oil well robbed In.
Bowuva. — ^In bowling, an oance of practice is worth a ton of theory. The bowler most Imm by observation the vreak stamp of the batsman (as a commander recon- noitres the weak point of a fortress), and lay siege to it accordingly. As a general rule, the l^-stnmp is the most vulnerable, though balls pitohed rather wide of the direct line to the off-stump, sre passling to batsmen not well up in the hit known as " ^ cicf .*' In reaching out at them, the batsman is very apt to strike under the ball, and so pot up a catdi. Upon the bowler's judgment must depend the variation of his delivery firom swift to slow, and vice wrta. Where a style of round-arm bowling is atlisiim?, accompanied by considerable bias, or twist, in the progress of the ball, after groonding, the batsman has no easy task in defending his wicket. But in adopting round-arm bowling, esehew, by all means, the reprehensible practiGe of throwing; ibor the ball shoold be delivered with the hand below, and not above the
In 18«4 the Ifaiylebone Club made an alteration in the 10th rule, abolishing the penally tat raising the hand above the shoulder in bowling. When practising, com- menee with moderate force of delivery, which is easily increased in velocity after you h»ve aeqiiired the art of groonding the ball a proper length. The bias is imparted to th« ban by forcibly inverting the wrist in the deliveiy, and at the same time imparting with tbs little finger an impulsive twist, by which the ball, according to the nataral of bodies, acqnires a circular rotation, combined with a lateral progression.
M at ImM toar good bowlen, lo allow of a ohaoss at
a FiiLVDio. — Tba ■ to bowling or luffing, bat ba equallf divided with IWdiriff ; for gvA flgldiug la a Tety ImpoHaut Ucm in plajiii^ a matcb, and aqoally ao la ^ood wiakat- Insping. Hsnoa, tba wlokat-keapar la i«qaii«d (o poaaeai nadj Jodgioeal, kaonnaai of aight, and agility of limb. Like Velaon, be abould noi know ftar, witii reteenoe lo tita Teloci^ of the coming ball. Ha abonld oontlnnallj watch the poaibona of Kha
weak polnBa. It la aUo hla duty to mfcinfmiw oi^ar and prarcoib eonfuaion dniin^ tba
How to Dinm lom ffioin. — The donbia taak of tba batemao oooaiMa in atopplDg aome balla and biUlng otben. The Froper diacriniinallon aa to when lo bit aikd when to block maika tba tboToagb bataman. Pl^eia who adopt a ilaahing i^la lo plan too RTMt a cellanoa npon mate phjaioal fort*, wUcb tbay wrongl; la the aonroe of mcoe^. Anj uh aw^ with impnnl^ at a ball ooming (olantbl)- wide of Uie numpa -. bat the Toans crioketer aboold remamber that, jaat wiihrmt hia reach, thsre la a apot apoa wblob all UrHigbtly-deUvend balla that happen to (rraond andUBonlt to tnat, and not rnnely dangorooa, bnt fraqoenUy proTe " Dinamara.*' There ia bnt an le In which you mnat daoide will Btep forward and meet the ball, or noaln it with the tow Ubet If jon adopt the farToer plan, moat likalj the bowler will drop bis eaocaeding b<iU* . gradoallf abarter. until joa leaTa jnor I (aa the natoral oonaeqnence one of thana) jour wioket, If joa shonld decide apon . and ansrwaulB change Tonr mind, Jtn cannot leootsr fOanelf nOl- dentlf In time to lake the ball on the ^j. ^ow ibe advAntage of atopf^ng Ifaeae dangerooa ^'length biUld" by e block on the back play ia, that the ai^t yoo Ant get of the ball by Ita arriTBl, ia mnoh better tban when the eye ia directed fiirwarda in ivpoel- leadTanolng prcgeotUe. TbenfOre keep on yoor graond, and meet Ibaae balla oma block faUier tban ilak yonr wicket t^ itepping in to hit than. it noM be andernood that tbeae obaerTatlona apply ooly to b«lla gnvnding
OriTQ." IT, on Iha ooamiy, (h* Iwll gnxuids ■nd tin* (huplr, Bad tout qiha* of aoUan h K> Umited, thu In itnkiiiK U Uu b^ jtm SB haxittr <kil to itfika roar ttamps M tba ■ma tlua, Uian "■"*>■" il b; Uu fonwd blook. OaartUlj' Bpcaklii^, forward play 1* Iha uAit againit swllt bowling CbU oamM wUim jour mcb, ■■ the npiditj <d Vbe daltisy, wbsa Ibe baU la mat by baek pla?, often BBnda it off into Ihe point'i haoda.
WKila ■nnriiwg tO OOO I****"*** of Uu balA'
e ball np into / Um air in hla forward ptor. Tlii* be ■mid bj UM alaratlng tlM Wt albow
Thaai
« Inn hl«h eDDagh to pav over Um ■honldsr at tha bat. No. i may b« Dwlad, *■ pnrianily dscribed, bj
tfao budiat hitling yont atreDgth can beatow — a regular fannard driat. In blooking, cara miut be takeo to ttop Iho ball witb the contra of the blade i br if ^ ^ It ba oppoMd only by tbe enter edge,
GL. ^^ tbe obanoe will be a oMcb tat thort- * S 1 I ,i|p . ^nd if by the Inner edge, thera is
vary probafaQUy of ila glanolng off iDIo yonr wicket
apaaUog of playing the ball mnn the inner edge remlndi oa it vfU hen be well to eaeribe IA« dnxw, which la the moat elegant, and not tiie iDAet diffionlt, oT tha batamau'e eteacea. Tbe proper balla to drate are thoaa which ara pitched tomewhat ihott, and occa Dp rather within the Una of yonr leg HCjunp^ Aa anoh belli are not lafflcientiy rida tat jaa to gat n»nd at them by a fall log " swoop," yon mnit treat thsm In tha ttttuda afamrs by tha engraTing. Inrerting the blade of yonr bat by a dexlerotu twiitT* rikieh will owiae lh( baU to take the dlnotian of a nib inn or two, betwegs the lee and
■tiamptto draw ■ ball iWng tram tlw offiiil* <if
•re ;an will dmw jma MnmiM b^ doing ao. WbsD tba
ball ooous Dloie Blongllie grooult about UifVfl
be played between Uie legi ; bat IT it riaa aeran or elgbt Inebea wide, lorn abaipljraand at it, and drlre it with aU your foi«& ^lil is ganarallj an adTanEageona aOoke, aa, in •ddltlan to iba n4>idi^ tbe ball baa acqnired Ihnn the bowlar'a baud, iu telodt; ii oan-
iron^ prqjndiceand u
bat, if yoa expeet to be oat m will rarel; be diuppoUUed. hoi " qnia poase videntnr" be your mot remembflr, tbat ahbougb Vir^ wrote beibra Orloket waa plajad, it wonld not mon tnu had ha penned the maxiin yeatarday.
ttthawi
Lhe aOltode of any oele- Mr. Fell* haa obeerval, " indalge in the bnrleaque t Why lyounalT, and rotua the indignaldan of Ihewiekat-kaeperf"
dma wbeD the gj* it inrtionlirij ■{« to HO. Begin sanity, and
m ih* ball li dsUveriKl inr wiinHj to mtlc* joa xagooS tdot ^nand to H, Aaj At honiA ftnd block (Hpedalty if it ba a log ball), for, remeniber, job can mlas oii^ amee wHii ■ good wlokat-kwpsr bablnd 700. " Stepping Id " to hit ii a i^ls ot plaj that haa bean triad oflas, but leldDDi irltb taotb aucoeu. It 1* qolta srldant job camwi laara jonr gromul with saltan until joa aae Iha lAll pUcli, Dtlurwiaa tfaa bowlAr ma; poveiTa toot islmtlOD, and drop on* rather ilion, that will proTe a " trinuutt-."
Bj ptaTing back, a little too nmch, joa mar Uluwiae tempt him la gire one within joor abili^ to hit hard ; tmt be cautiou, tra there is inch a thing aa being too "rw-w^ng for OB«Mlf. Nerer think of making an; panlcoUr hit before Oa ball ii Iwwled. aa a ball that doaa not coit joar pnrpoee tnaj eanae an awkward miitake.
B<mie iialLa, alUtoogh detiTered a proper leogtii, will oome Teiy qoickly along the tTonnd into the wickM j when ]>oa perhapa expect them to ri» aboTa Ibe balla : these are called " ehooiing balla." and an eitremelj deatrnctiTa. Remember, the; depend iwin npDD the nature of the groond than the will of the bowler. Alwafi mat tbsm ta^rviy on the deCtanalTe in preflueiice to *' ewlpelng aw^ " at them blindly, or by diBBoe 1 for by BO playing yon will aaTB, Inatfiail of liikiog yonr wicket for an
1S2 CBIGKET.
80 mnoh for general direotioiis. There ere some few other polnfci to which wo would direct the young cricketer's attention. For instance, a few words on the way to get up a Cricket Club, will not, we preemne, be unacceptable. We proceed, then, to give some hints as to the formation of a Cricket Club.
Cricket is never so well played as when all the players on a side are acquainted with each other. Th^ are enabled to practise together, and to discover the merita and demerits of the play of each j so that when they make a match with a neighbouring eleven, they can select their best men. A good batsman or a rapid bowler often wins or saves a match ; and the fieldsmen, being accustomed to act together, prevent oon- Ibsion and awkwardness. The captain should always be a good player, and by h» judgment the whole of the eleven should be guided. The secretary keeps the accounts of the club, corresponds with other clubs and players, and generally does the writing business of his club. The treasurer takes charge of the cash, and makes and receives all payments, keeping a book in which each item of expense is entered, which book is checked with the accounts of the secretary, and audited at the end of the sttison. The comfort of a club depends greatly on the fkct that the secretary and treasurer ftilly ei\joy the confidence of all the members. The captain chooses the eleven that are to play in a match, and has the entire management of his side during the progress of the game. He sees that the game be well played, and that each member takes his proper position in the field. The umpire should, if possible, be chosen from the acquaintance of the members, rather than from the members themselves; and his general arrangements should be confided to a committee consisting of three or more in addition to the officers of the club. Every member on Joining should be fiimished with a copy of the rules ; and in order that our readers may know how to proceed, we beg to suggest the following regulations ; subject, of course, to variations accord* ing to circumstances. Minor points may be settled by a f^ bye-laws to be made by the committee of management, as occasion may arise : —
Bulea <f ths Oridtel dub.
I. The Club to be called the Cricket Club.
n. The Club to consist of members; candidates after its first formation to be
elected by ballot, a majority of votes either way to decide the election.
m. Honorary members may be admitted at the discretion of the Committee of Kimagement.
ly. The subscription of members to be per month, and entrance fee^
both payable in advance ; a fine of twopence in the shilling to be exacted on all aiTears exceeding two months.
CBIOKBT. 183
y. The Qnb to Im goremed hy a committee of five memben, in addition to the Oaptein, Secretary, and Tnemaxer, three to form a qnonun.
VL ThB Committee and offloera to be elected at the annual meeting of the membera on the fliat Satordaj in April ; and the Committee to meet at leaat one day a month during the aeaaon.
Yn. The aeaaon to oommenoe on the first Satordaj in May» and terminate on the aeoond Satordaj in October; and the practice daya to be Mondays, Wednesdays, and Satardays each, Saturday being oonaiderad a club day.
▼m. Erery monber is to obaenre the directions of the Captain in all matches.
IX. AH matches to be made by the Committee on behalf of the members.
Z. Tbs aoooonts of the Treasurer and Secretary to be audited by two members dioaen by the Committee, and presented at the General Meeting ; any balance to be carried over to the Club ftmd.
XL Honorary and visiting members to haye no voice in the management of the dnb, but to be suljiiect in all respects to its rules and bye-laws.
Xn. Tbs Secretary to keep an account of all receipts and expenditure, to have a general superintendence of the ground on the occasion of matches, with power to order sncli refreshments, etc., as the members may require, to conduct all the corres- deooe, take minutea of the proceedings at the Monthly and General Meetings, and otherwise act as the agent or ezecutiTe of the Club.
xm. The Captain to name the members who are to play in matches, appoint his bowlers, arrange the order in which Uie batsmen go in, and otherwise superintend the general order of the match.
XIV. The recognised colour of the Club to be [blue, pink, or otherwise], and the eleven appointed to play in matches to appear in the regular Club costume.
XT. On the requisition of any five members, exclusive of the officers, or of any three members of the Committee, or of the Captain and Secretary, a Special General Meetizig may be called, the expenses — ^if any — of such meeting to be borne by the requiaitionists.
XVI. The members present at such special general meeting to have power to erchide any member who reftues to comply with the laws and bye-laws, or in other respects renders >»tm«i>if obnoxious to his fellow-members. A clear majority of the naembeni present is necessary to cany this law into efibct ; and where the number of votea on either side are equal, the chairman to have the casting vote.
Avu. Alterataona in the rulea of the club may be made by the members at any genoml or special meeting ; but a month's notice of each proposed alteration must be given befine it can be entertained by the Managing Committee.
XVTIL The. proper^ of the Club to be vested in the Committee of Management and
Officers ; and so long aa [say 10] members subscribe to its ftmds, the Club shall
not be broken up or dissolved.
XIX. In the event d the dissolution of the Club, by vote of a General or Special General Meeting, the pwpeity of the Club to be sold ; and, after paying all its debts and Babilitiea, the money to be divided rateably among the members.
134
CKICKBT.
VOBM OV BXrOK.
In drawing up an account of a match — for publication in a newspaper or otherwise — the following ie the most approved form, which ie an actual report of a match played between the Flayers of the North against the Flayers of the South at Lord's Cricket Ground, on June 12, 13, and 14, 1866 : —
PULTMS OF THB NOKTH ff. PlJLTXSS OF TEB SoUTH.
SOUTH.
Ittlnn.
T. Humphry, c Tinley, b Tapiint 22
H. Jupp, 0 Biddulph, b Tarrant 23
G. Bennett, run out 100
H. H. Stephenson, o Biddulph, b Atkinson,.. 64
T. Heame, c Biddulph, b Grundy 67
W. Mortlock, run out 3
G. Grifllth, c Tinley. b Bhaw 0
T. Lockyer. b Grundy 6
James Lillywhite, jun., b Grundy 7
T. Bewell, b Grundy 0
£. Willsher, not out 0
Byes6,lb4,nb 1 11
282
Snd Inn.
oandbTsrrant 31
Ibw.bTarrant 17
bTarrant 7
St Biddulph, b Tinley ... 0
runout 9
runout 8
bTinley 0
0 Grundy, b Atkinson... 13
0 Wootton, b Tinley 10
notout 31
bTarrant B
Byes 5, 1 b 2,wl... 8
143
VOBTH.
1st Inn.
J. Smith, c Bewell, b Willsher IB
J. Rowbotham, b Bewell 28
A. Shaw, b Willsher 12
R. Daft, c Lockyer, b Lillywhite 78
R. Carpenter, b Bennett 34
G. Tarrant, b Griffith 1
J. Grundy, c Lockyer, b Mortlock 36
G. Wootton, St Lockyer, b Mortlock 6
G. Atkinson, b Mortlock 12
8. Biddulph, not out 3
R. C. Tinley, b Mortlock 6
Byes4, lb4, nb 1 9
242
tnd Inn.
c Griffith, b Mortlock... SB
c Willsher, b Griffith ... 14
b Lillywhite 2
c Griffith, b Lillywhite. . . 6
0 and b Mortlock 3
c Jupp, b Lillywhite ... 2
o Mortlock, b Griffith ... 27
bGriffith 19
h w, b Lillywhite 6
notout 5
bGriffith 4
Byes2, lb3 6
131
The South winning by 52 runs. Umpires — ^Royston and D«aa.
In the above c stands for caught ; b for bowled, H for stumped ; A to for hit wicket ; 2 6 «o, leg before wicket ; 6, byes ; I b, leg byes ; to, wides ; nb, no balL
Any remarks on the game may be added ; though, as a rule, the score win Bttffl> ciently describe the match.
CRICKBT.
126
VOIK OV SCOBB.
Soarinjf ihoela are sold rmdj printed ; bat may olerer lad osn nuke a book of for hinuelf . The followizig ia the form :—
r
Match
Pi4K9ed between
and
at
on
Hune of Pi«r«r.
1
2 3 4 6 6 7 8 9 10 11
Riin«.
How ontk ■a4 Bowler
Total Ban*.
Widea
Byea
Iieg*byea
Noballa Grand Total
THB MAVAoakavv or ▲ xatch.
The Captain ahoold, preTions to playtog a match, see that his eleven practise toge- ther, each man occaiqring his proper place in the field, and going to the wicket in the ■sme order as in the proposed match. Exoellenoe in fielding should be studied equally with good batting ; and there should always be one or more good change bowlers. As it i» easier to stop runs than to make them, in a critical part of a match, it is good policy, if you win the toes, to take the first innings. Then send in two of your safest batsmen to take the raw edge off the bowling in the early part of the game. But it is ii^Qdiciocia to put aU your best men in first. It is better to keep back a few of your moat steady hitters for the last wickets ; but whenever you see the bowling get at all kioae, let a resohite hard*hitter succeed the next man out. When you have a certain anmber of runa to get to win the game, it is well to have a couple of safe batsmen for theflniah.
If your side take the field first, the Captain should see that his men are well placed, and that they more fkrther off or nearer in accordance to the style of the batsman at the wicket. The bowlers should take proper time between the delivery of the balls ; but if your opponents are making runs too fast, then send in a fresh bowler, and change your tactics. Many a match is won by good generalship ; and though fielding is kas **^**"g than batting, it ia certain that if the fielding be loose, there can be no gooderickalb
A VBIT itajMUng Rune. ImDwi] h DdbM* Cricket, it plarad M •ome BhiMU. Two aidea are cboieii, wiiScb snay be MGb twantf. tUity, or ror^ itrong. The vickeU are Cwo large Btoaea, Ilka nulatoDea ; or (ha atniDpa of Oeea, or a pile of wood, or aiiythlDg alAe that la bandy ; and the b^l ia large and aoft, ahont douhlo tha ftiM of a criokBt-bAU. A Mont India-rubber ball anaweia admlrabl;. Tha fortj on one aide go in, and Qtt Dthar ttyny Maud odl to ^ or Bold ; tbe Selding couniala In atanding in at c\ate aa poaaible. and blocking every poeaible laaoe of (he boll. The bawling may be of any kind — a rolt, a tiirow, & pitch, or a awilt jerk ; and the game la ae ofl«n played on Ibe bare gravel of the playgronnd, ai on the mrf of the criokat-Beld. The mult is ft acene of wild confoeioii and Indeeerlbable etcitement. A man ia jerked one about ereiy tan aeeond*. However be may bit the ball, it la pret^ aan to be Btoppe^ before it haa gone fkr i and it ia a great triumph if he can atrike it H^ht over the heada of the fleldera. Aa aoon aa a player begina to run, all hie aide roajs fMnttoally to him to go foater, when perhapa he geU oonfUaed and ta put out in a aocond. The bail being aoft, la thrown bj any fielder who geta it HtAight at tbe wicket, without care for the bataman or the other playera. When all an one aide are out, the other aide ffoea in, and tito lUn commenoea all over again.
In conclusion, the writar. witb a keen remembnuice of similar omioyBnce, Mranu' onaly and conaldeislely adtisM every looker-on at the game of Cricket, to keep at a tals and reapwtfUt diatanoe from the bataman, otharwiaahemay betheunwilUngracipieDtof
Jn Bnnpdib itf.
T'^Nlh* Donlnra ptr<a at (be klnsdnmOolf li mnoh pnottnd, and >' '.-^ iidccd bdUI minllj ii «■■ ilaioM paoolUr to Poutlmnd. Ghilt ', rinbt ar* BOW, howsTBr. biimcroaa bjtb to EDgluid UM SoDiluid. /3 ^^^^\ '' '"*■"'' " ' roi'lo pMttms o( (ba KomBsa, "hioh tht; playrd 'OgjtfeW "Wl'J'o' la«b»F. iiaffird iflta rauban.) Oolf-biJk war* tor. ' ■ " nwilj »0 nail*, but are now oompgaaiJo'gBlM-paniha. In tbanlgo
nrGdwiinl tbe Third. Itaa Laitn oama Oim^cii naiappliadtotbtapai- H dsr)i«d ita« deanuiaailDB. no doabi, Frum tba oruokad olDb. or bat, iriib •hicbk waa plajadi tne twi viaoallad a " Baodv." fnimlM befaii bant j ai.d bcDO* (be
Golf h> nnw plaird iritb ■ olab, tbe bandla «f *bie>> if alrsJabi and naaallj mada or hlokor;, rwhcT m n tbaa liior ftm to ISDutb j the brad ot uw elan, wblcb ii taoad wlib burn and wslgtilsd <tlh >nd. ia a^ilicwd on u> iba tVa'L. Tbe ball ia a Unl* OD*. bnt rxoaediuilj hard, belnir. aa ai-rmAr atiiad. made of >Dlia.p*niha. Tha gBtne
ie Uh areBnd ; Um pan; aEbleTJnjr wlilcb la ihe
■DuUeat namiMT or airokei obulnln^ tba vIetoTT.
TBan are. imarally. two platan, wbo ba*e eaob
a pac of elnba and balL Whan Fbar paraooa plaj.
ibey furm aMea, eiob at two partoera, ba*lng one
ha)l K> (aob alda. wliiib tbef adika oJteniatal]' ; bet
neta player baa bla own aaaofolate. Golf ooDiaaa,
or iiiafa OB tber ate iera>d. nrj In aitant. aome, awimo.
MWb ■> Bt l.iidr«ra, where then an elKhtean holla, meaanrin( aeTenl nllaa.
nia kiOomtBg ara a
a orad Ja GolT, aa (n<an in [be "Golftn'
la ball. Bom. a piece of horn Inaartad in rUid, Iha attendant whn carrl** an, after haioE propelled by tba
B^. aiMklog tba gmacd » wrll i Ite eoM ol lb* elab-taead. Smi^ixr. a iM«oU*r'aalBba, Z>b4 a ball la aald to be dead w dabw ft Ula wiibont rollini, or when II Ilea eo c1 omKiatj. Dorm/, aa vanj bolaa ahead aa there ranulo trin t > plar. Stob. to drlre wOdly to Ibe left. Jira. a oastraecioa of t^A"- a waroiiiB cry to people in front of (be Btroki. Alt, a Blab Uaa flat when its head la at ■ Tarj ubioM angle U> Ihe •haft.
L BoHfing, wtica Ua Kranud r»n In knr Lwm (ui buDlbia. oUii*, cr tma frmud. iuuw Itn tLkft. XW. tlM InollDltkiD or *twa b«id to thfl cimikd la Us uattual
uloa o( ft hftll. Xinb, eoDnDori o^
Sama; Moond & guma wti«D woD. iM. ■ (.sdUb i.irumo-.id. Ihs bole nbtn bIom >o «. Swe,
Stnff, (li^htl^ KilEg the prnH In Milklpg. Sleat. m iii.J11<Jy "pni" fai.lM riom t. di-lmnot, boi 4M by ■ -I (i.hi.iB." Btimf. nhm U.o ovpoont'it
op ]0D
;oa to hnl« br Iba Bkiul mnbn' of pottloir. SHifi, m full itaot or itriia. 7<t. > piDOli of Hnd ur (Oil on wblob ihi b*U In sl'nir. (br Cbs flnt urok* from Mch bol*. Tappiaf • ball li l"vt*d Kfaao !i )■ bit hf Ibg lola mod not t>] foiu or KOnt. ITMf^uif , tbe pllobfd Iwtaa nsiUlig
JTob surf Oifn- ^fplsflmj ilte flow.— TbB Bom* of Onlt la pter^l •? (wo pnanu- f^ t>r fOor (im> of a Bidp), piajlni alurnatalj. It may alu ba placed br ihiMorioiir* panona, aash placing bla own ball. Tha paise ttHumenrca bj «acb panr plajlnf off a ball from a pLaoa catlad iba tft, n^ai* iba flrat bola. Id a maiob of four, tba«a wbo an to be oppoaad to aach other, and to plaj oir, ahall ba laoiad at ataKlnc. and (bill osBttana to dniiog tba maMb. Tba bol* tiwoD b; tba party bollog at FawaiC atnikaa. Tbe putj fining tbe bole la to lead, nnleaa bin adTPnarr baa won the natob, la wbloh oaaa, tb* adreraary leada off. Oca mnnd nr Iba Jiab ia reckoned a inatcb, uDlaaa otberwiaa atlpalaled. Plan i^ TWi'n;.— Uu>t be not oeaiar tbs bcrie tban fnor ctob-langthi, aod not fonbar from It tban tin. dangtuj U« BalU. — Tbe balla aBoek off from the tea maat not be BbaDired, looohed, or mo*ed before tba bcia <a played oot^ atid ir dontxa ariae, nelibar aball ba lifted till both partita leree. AiMM
hall ba Ht aiida a* Ibat tbe pliyer abalt merely baTe a tIbw of bli ball, and U •luck Caat, It may be taken ont aod raptaoad looaely. Cltnrnig Ut PmUimg-trm.—All
OOLT. IIV
koM lapadlaMbti of whftUm Und mmj Iw UTM, IF out iMrcmd t<r«Dtr jMtSm boa lb* but*, bm act U It ta to aon Iba b*lL fia{«, ffc^ir k iwU Um in ■ hols the flajv itell Dot tM M litxrtr to tska It out, bat IT ia & bDirov, ha mkr lift it, drop It bahlul hfan fniB hta bod, beliiBd ifa* huani, and piaj without loaiDg ■ itroha. Z^fHuf BaJb— Wtwn ttw ball) tt* wUhlo dx InobM oT Moh otbic, tha b)UI mrnt Um bola oraM bu ttflid tui iba ottur H plajwl, ud tba raplwaS. Bail (> Tafn' — IT tb* ball I* In nMr Iha ^lajtt mar tak* H otA Btiaust Om ball It h* pliuia, Ua It, aod plaf tvm bahind iha haurd, IsalDg a aBoka. Ate q^ ttc Omm. — Whatarar happaaa to a boll by "^"t"^ mnat b« nakoDad a mb of Iba btmii, ■nd anbmtuad to. Tbara an, bowtrar. rulou noaiMoiu dMailad In tha RdIm c/ Mwta dab. Aifl Idl.— If • baU li loM, aooUwr ball mar b« taad, bU IT tha or%tBaI ban It bOBd bafbn tba nth* )• aaook, Iha Bnt ahall b* pUfad. CImb. trtaii^ — If, in alrihinc, tha ofaib braak, it ia iMTaTthalta* lo ba aoaoanlad a inoks, it ibapanof tha oinb remahiing Id tha pbuar** hud aUhar atrika tha gionnd or paaa tha ball, aitimg tut Ou Sail —Id hoHnir. oo nuirk ihall ba plMWd or llna drawn to dtne* (ba ball to tha nolo, tr-ylavailt SaOt—Kwerj ball muit ba plvaO, wharenr it Uaa, or tba bula ba girai np, nnlwi whoa tha ball la mora than half oo*ai*d with wuar. JiUmff Adciit. — A plajrer mut not a«k adtlM alnai Uia gama, tram an; oaa aiiiaia hta own eaddi^ bla paitDK** oaddla, or hia pannar. ZHipaUt tball ba dMcr. niaad bj tha saptain si aaaior mambar pnaaot. I'amtif.—Ant pla^ai baTini loat a ball, aad iatmitag daU; bj amit-tnc it, ahall ba pawed bj any othir player ocoaing ap. Sallt apatUiig.—lt a liall ahall ^Ut, a fraah ba:l ahall be pat aoon ia fiajiBt tor a madal. BnaOl ijf Balm. — Where no penalty lor the infMngeoent of a ink la apeoally maetlODad. the loaa of tha lule ahall ba obdintood to be tba penalty.
BBUOrm, whisb gsaaally oDoilata of a acarlat ooat ud a Telrat oap, i« adopted. Probably Iba moat iiiiiabla ooatama wonld be tha ordinaij «a*y atyla of tha ■amtner toortai. We aboald But, howarar, reoannaiid tba aomawhat loo aimpla atllia depteted in tba Gjllowlng aoihanUo print of
•olbn at % jtmilml^ Icnbug.
SHINTV.
0 tVl playad with olob tiki ban, tvnu^j a'mMt ecmlliud U Iha HIghluid* Bod Idwul* til Baotlud, thoDgh of IbU T**n Otnba twT* bMn fbniwd In Bdlabnrgh, Olucow, MuiohMtfr, aad oUmt lowL Tha dub nHd ti fram SMI tMt )niiKi nd oaltbl to bs ft gBDtly florml h«Bd B or 7 iDobeB Id IvD^th, triaa^fhr Willi tb* baaa to tba grmiid. Clnbs w« ginarmlli nids of oaJc, ut>, or bireh, tin luUr bslnc pntosbla on uooiuit at Iti llghUiM* ui-1 tongbDWi. Tbo Iwll IbnBart; OMd wu oT wood. boC i* now sammij of wontoil (hTMid wDDod tichtlr and iuiIICbbiI; db > pIiM et oark >ad Mwsd for Hrara.! oonnM wiib tbnad or twin*, to about Iba iIh ot ■ orlokH Ml. Tb* game; tba MMon tat whieh to tnm >b« aid of Aotaain to Um bagliiDlDB of BpniiK. taminm fai tha b*l'. bdDE drlnii by on* pvtr walnat •uothw, th« aim </ aaob bain« to Mod It batman ud bajaDd two ^wlaa, plaoad abqnt >li juda apwt. •> boUi nda nf ih« flalil. Thara potl* u« (ha *a<{ or pial, brrmd wblah whan aitbar aida U noeaiaral iailriTlBgthaba11.ifh*]l"ia«MtobawoD. Tha fl*lri ahoDlil ha at lewt MD jard* In lasRUi by 100 In brpsdlh. uid iba platan ratj snmbar trma 10 lo fo & aUa. mkI bara a d'atlagntsfaltig bad^a. Tba moat Jadlotou moda of plajisg I* tn Boponit » Kood playar on auh tfda to daftad tha hail, and otbar two or fnar a frw paoa* tn boat. Iba raat toba Matlnnrd at tntermtdiala dlitacofi balwaao tfaa haiU! awitt naMra ■honid be plKxd nrar tbalr oppouenta' hii2 to mitt In tha ball whan antlabla, Tbe ralaa obaarrad In plajlng Bhtntr *ar; iOm'whM In dllTarant dl>trliiti,bDt»ll anagnMl tn tba RHln objMt balng to drift tha ball /lir brtKm (ha potM. whanapos aldaa «ra ohangrd. a " toil " bring won. Bhiat; mar ba playad ta ndlnar; ontdoor ooatamn, irhsn"tb«gara of old OaQl"- "
-4 FOOTBALL. f>-
Klon, Sngbj, Uaribonmgb, '
is pl^ed In tiie following mimaer : — ta two Ht* ctf ployan of oqiul nomberm ; fe large bmU mada n bUddar, or aa India-robber ball, oaaed with lealher, ii M bail — ia plamd wlthla them, and ili« abjeot oT each par^ at playera la to Uok the aO aonia Ibe goal of the other, and to pnrsnl it rrom paaalng thsta- own. The paitf aem whan goal the ball i> Uokad loiaa the game. Tbe game li DomBwaoed between M (wo giMlt, whlcb are generally ahont a haodrod jarda aaonder.
132
FOOTBALL.
Yoa will better nndentand the method of playing Football if we flnt set oat tlie plan of the ground. The following figure giyee yon the uanal ahape and way of marlring the ground, which should be aa leTel aa poaaible : turf is the beat^ and next to that, smooth gravel ; in fiust, there ia no plaoe ao well adapted for playing Football aa a good cricket-field.
a Touch e p Touch a
I
lOOyarda
lOOyaida
Touch e p
TLAR or ABOUMO.
Touch
The goala at either end ; aa, the goal linea ; e p, centre poata
of ground ; touek, the touch linea.
middle
At the diflbrent achoola th^ have Tarioua terma, auoh aa made flyera, hita, hacking, etc., with which you will aoon become acquainted when yon play the game ; but we need not trouble oursehrea about them juat now, aa evczy set of playors have their own ** slang " and mode of play, aome preferring the " open game," aa at Harrow, and others the doae game, as at Rugby and Bton. The ground in all caeea ia marked out with flags or posts, one at each comer, with centre poata at the aides, aa in the diagram, and maybe of any dimenaions not exceeding 200 yards in length by 100 yards in width. The goal is made of sticks with a cross piece on top, but at Eton and Hazrow they have fixed goals. We will first deacribe
THB orar «m.
The matchea usually consist of eleven on either side, but this number maybe increased at pleasure. A captain is chosen on each side, who directs the game for his fellows. One player always remains at the goal to defend it, by kicking back the ball to prevent it going through. The ball ia kicked off from the middle of the ground. Then all the players follow, but eveiy player must keep on hie right aide of the ball : that is, he must not be nearer to the goal he is trying to force it through than the ball. There is no croas-bar, and the ball may be kicked to any height, so that it does not pass beyond the space, on either aide, which ia indicated by the goal- atioks. When the ball is kicked into the air, any player may catch it; and then, if he succeed and call out " Three yards," he ia allowed to take a run of that distanrw.
FOOTBALL. l8S
and dropping tt to the ground, kick U withoaft htang ixitflrteed with by the others. The httll Ilka r^iidlj over the groimd, and when it goes out at the aide linea, or the goal linfla» it ia kicked etnOght in agahL No hacking or kicking at each oikmr tcith heel or toe it oOowei, neither ia it allowable for one player to strike or poah another. Bat in the open game, ** ohaiging" ia admitted. This " ohaiging" conaiBta in one player batting a* another with hia ahoolder. At Bngby the playeia are allowed to take ap the ban, and wieetio for ita poieeedon. The side which socoeeda in flurly kicking the ban thnagh the enemy's goal wina the game.
nija ia the Open Game, which ia harmleu enoogh, thongh by no meana deToid of We will now see how the game is played at Bton, where mach roogher iaaDowed.
THB CLOSB ttAXB.
Aas* HsRow, one player remains to defend each goal ; bat two act as " oomerers." Hien the fbor strangest boys close ap in a line, bmuUng down shoalder to shoolder, with their hands on their kneee ; foor others stand in a similar way behind them, and help to poah them forward. On the other aide the players do the same, and the two Ixaea stand dose together, making a sort of bridge of thdr shoalders. One of the **oonienn" pota the ball in the centre, between the ftet of these players. They then begin to poah, kick, and itraggle, till one aide bears the other down and forces the ball throned the goal. Breiy time the ball goes oat of the groond, this replacing and struggling is repeated. Fillers called " bolliee " are appointed to bring back the ball to the centre. Flayers are allowed to kick each other's shins, bat this shoald Yrj no meani be encooraged, as the game ao played beoomee dangerona and brataL riiirhtng ia not allowed ; bat the handa may be naed to stop the ball. When it is kicked beyond the goal-line a spirited race to toach it ensaee, and if two playera are elcae together, they charge each other with their shoalders, each tiying to get the adraotage of hia adyerMiy ; whereupon a third player often comes in, snd •* toachee it down." If the baU ia toached in this way Ytj a defender of the goal, it ia tarooght to the line and kicked etraight oat again ; bat if a player of the other side toocbes, an eirtting ecene ensoea. The baU ia placed in firont of the space marked oat by the goal-etlcka ; then a ral^, in which all the players take part, is formed. Bat insrrail of Ibrming in twolinea as before, each side makee a eemioirole, ao that there is no eeeape for the baU. Then, ahoolder to shoalder, th^ all posh and etroggle till the weakest side girea way, and, Ibllxng backwards, the whole go down together in a con- fbsed he^>, with the ball beneath them. They go on with the battle on the groond and straggle for the poseeerion of the ball, in spite of mod or stonee, till one or the other side *' scores a goal " by kicking the ball through the goal-sticks. Bat if, ss often happens, no goal is gained daring the match, or an eqoal nomberof goals is won on sfther side, then the pta^ers who obtain the meet nm^as— that ia, oftenest toach the ban beyond the tooch-lines on their opponente' side of the centre line — ^win the game.
AH the gamee at Football are modifications of theee two ways of playing ; bat lately the Football AsMdatkm agreed to a set of rnlee whereby the game may be pliyed in a mifann way at aU places. The following axe the reriaed
1S4 FOOTBALL.
L^WB OV VOOn^LL.
L Thie Tnaxiiwim iMffik qf the ground ahall be 200 yaxdB, the maximimi breadek •ball be 100 yards, the length azid breadth shall be marked off wifih flags ; and the gocUs shall be defined by two upright posts, eight yards apart» without any tape or bar across them.
n. The winner of the tOM shall have the choice of goals ; the game ahaU he com' menced by aplaoekick from the centre of the ground by the side losing the toes ; the other side shall not approach within ten yards of the ball until it is kicked off.
ni. After a goal is won, the losing side shall kick off, and goals shall be changed^
IV. A goal shall be won when the ball passes between the goal-posts or over the space between the goal-posts (at whateyer height), not being thrown, knocked on, or carried.
y. When the ball is in ftnusA, the first player who touches it shall throw it from the XWint on the boundary-line where it left the ground, in a direction at right uigles with the boundary-line, and it shall not be in play until it has touched the ground.
YI. When a player has kicked the ball, any one of the same side who is nearer to the opponents* goal-line is out qf play, and may not touch the ball himself, nor in any- way whatsoever prevent any other player trom doing so until the ball has been played ; but no player is out of play when the ball is kicked off from behind the goal-line.
yn. In ease the ball goes behind the goal-line, if a player on the side to whom the goal belongs first touches the ball, one of his side shall be entitled to a free kick from the goal-line at the point opposite the place where the ball shall be touched. If a player of the opposite side first touches the ball, one of his side shall be entitled to a free kick, at the goal only, frt)m a jwint fifteen yards from, the goal-line, opposite the place where the ball is touched ; the opposing side shall stand behind the goal-line until he has had his kick.
yn. If a player makes a /air eateh, he shall be entitled to a J^ree kick, providing he claims it by makiTig a mark with his heel at once ; and in order to take such kick he may go as fkr back as he pleases, and no player on the opposite side shall advance beyond his mark until he has kicked.
IX. No player shall carry the ball.
X. Neither tripping nor haddng «AaS he alhwed, and no player shall use his hands to hold or push hia adversary.
XL A player shall not throw the ball or pass it to another with his hands.
Xn. No player shall take the ball from the ground with his hands under any pretence whatever while it is in play.
XTTT. No player shall be allowed to wear projecting nails, iron plates, or gutta- percha, on the soles or heels of hia boots.
The above rules seem to meet all the ordinary requirements of the game. They also get rid of the jargon which players— especially those belonging to Bngby aad Bton — ^have at various times introduced into the game. The Association has also issued a definition of techninal terms used in Football : and as they will aasiat the young player in oomprehanding what baa gone before, wb Insert them.
TOOTBALL. 135
fmn viss xv voonALL.
Ptaot f tet.— A Idok at the ball wbfle it is on Uw ground, in any position In which the kiokier nmj chooae to place it.
^nee Kick. — ^The priTileg« of MftWng the baU, without obBtractUm, in each manner aa the ki^er mi^ think fit.
Act dutch is when the hall is oaught^ after it has tonched the person of an ailmnrsBrj or has been kicked, knocked on, or thrown by an adverasiy, and before it has tonched the groond or one of the side catching it ; bat if the baU is kicked from oat of toudi, or from behind goal-line, a flur catch cannot be made.
MaeUmg. — Kicking an adversaty on the front of the 1^ below the knee.
Ti'ippimyi. — ^Throwing an adTersaiy by the ose of the legs without the hands, and witfaoat hacking or charging.
Ckargimff. — ^Attacking an adversaiy with the shoolder, chest, or body, withont vaing hands or legs.
Ktuekmff on. — ^When a player strikes or propels the ball with his hands, anns, or body without kicking or throwing it.
MoUimtf Inclades the obetraction of a player by the hand or any part of the arm below the dhow.
Tomek is that part of the iield, on either side of the ground, which is b^ond the line of flags.
Momom. — ^This tenn, as explained on a prerioos page, is used to signify the tonching of the ban beyond the tooch-lines on the opponent's side ot the centre line.
Tomekmg dowm. — ^Tooching the ball with the hand, so aa to make it fkll to the
FoUowima JKdL— Kicking a baU tha* is rolling.
Mmtimp Kick. — ^Kicking a ball that comes in front of the player.
Drop Kick, — ^A ball dropped from the hand and kicked as it (Ula.
oosoxtunxirtt sskaeks.
WHh regaid to dress and s^le of play, we need only say that the flnrmer shoold be ligbt and ea^y, withoat braces; and that perflBOtion in the latter can only be aoqaired by pvadioe. It ia proper that the orders of the captain should always be obeyed impbeitly. Bmaxtness and aotiTi^ are eesential to good play ; and, aboTO all, it is •haoliilely neoessacy that erezy phtyer should h$ep hi» temper.
In '*Tom Brown's Schooldays" the game, as phqred at Bugby, ia minutely ; and a more recent writer (in " All the Year Bound") thus rerels in the of Football aa it was played in his schooldays : — ' The grand paatime daring the winter months was Football, played mommg, and erening. ^y it, the whole house stood or fell. Not plsyed, either, on the prfndplea of grass, which might do well enoagh for <feather-bed boys.' Ho, OBT syilem was a raat stony hard level groand behind the ooUege, which ofRsred a ftrm saUsflustofy basis fbr a strong and long kiok. No mean picking ap and running aws^ with the ball tolerated, but a ftdr-foaght stasd-vp battle. There were always
136 FOOTBALL.
maftohM going on, but there wee m eeMon^-4owaids BhroTetlde-^when tbe y*»tAtmmS itefeivBiB of the game set in. These were known popolarlj as the Giaad '**»*^}*m, and were the glorious dajsrs to which all the mde etrong-annedp strong-legged, mnsoolsr beingsof the place looked forward with a positiTelypainfta longing. The * sideB ' wei« picked and chosen weeks beforehand.
"The Grand Matches went on fbr three whole dajs. Th^ were desperate oon- fliots. The masters — steong athletio men— oaoght the prevailing tary and fought on difbrent sides. On the morning of the encounter erety one was arrajed in the worst and most andeut clothes the house could ftamish, so as to feel no restxuint tnm the fear of fells, or mud, or wet. By ten o'clock the two armies were drawn up in two lines, while in the oenfere, at about flfly feet from each line — measured with jealous nicety — ^was the football, lying hy itself. Bob Dayis, the leader of the French, and Jacky Smith, the English captain — swift runners and men whose giant strength of leg and daring was looked up to with fond admiration — stood buttoned up tight, each with a leg out and breathing hard, waiting for the signal. It was felt that the shock between the two would be tremendous, for there was a feeling of personal rivaby besides. A rusty old csnnon fired with great caution in the garden, was the signal, and the two lines set off at desperate speed, sad with wildness met in the middle like knights at a tournament. Bob Davis got the first kick, and I fear there was on that day laid the foundation of an enmity between these two heroes.
**These were desperate batUea. They went on to one or two o'clock. It was wonderftd to see our coarse starong feUows, who were desperately deficient at their books, how savagely tb^ threw themselves into the work. It was to be no child's play with them, so sny one who had a mind for amateuring had best keep out of their way. Th^ kicked desperately and recklessly, bearing away from the field, after such an encounter, a shattered shin-bone, the scar of which andureth still. When two of these heroes met^ it was feaxftil ; and their outward appearance, all mud-stained and dirty from many a fen and roU upon the ground, with the circular muddy stamp of the ball upon the left cheek, from a savage and well directed * shot,' bore an awftil and terror-striking aspect. I have seen a warrior levelled flat hy a splendid ' shot^' which came low and 'stinging,' and took him on the side of the head with a kmd report. Fraufelo cries greeted this exploit^ and the battle raged afresh, his paitJssas striving to avenge his felL The most exciting moment was when one party — say the French — finding the day going against them, came with an organised rush sad charge, artftilly conteiving what was called ' a squash.' This was the Forlorn Hope of the game, and it often succeeded. The struggle was made to begin near the eneQy*a gates, the ball was craftily held firm between the feet of a strong French gianL Hia friends gathered about him, packing themselves as close as th^ could, and thus a sort of 'heart' being formed, everybody came rushing up, and, laying their shoulders and back against the heap, tried desperately to push the whole mass, ball and all, through. But the other side would know their danger ; th^ would rush in also, striving to break it up, and set the ball free. The enormous mass heared to and fro, and cracked and groaned, now eddying forwaid, now lurching backward, until at last it was oairiad
FOOTBALL. 1ST
throoBlk. or alM tb* tttaA m* rooud. SaanaUmM Uiera wan dcapermte iliipnU* ; tlM ban tod beas m tb* rvga of goliiK Ummgh, on ths nlos taidWlnct 11ns, uul had bMQ diJnD back. Thm cum ■ Babal of ftantio (Xlcs. Oiimed cspnlne, irith IMmfiiaHaa nnmmg domi the bOM mmI pareolMliis Ui« eomlo (taiu on tha oonien of Uw Twf^iiiM uid ' bimfBd.np * Byes, frvsliolly uid iBTa^elj dflbated tiie point. nhoi Bob Davia and Jadk? fimltb, OBCh moro gmtwqoA for hl6 souv, OAmn nuhlng np, •od liiHRhuisvd U18T7 word*. Tbttu wtrrion k11 bnt propoMd UUllng tin mUtar
ir hinuelf, with ■ (welled mcmtb ud bettand Iwlmet) jaomiMf
Bd and pazicd IbenL Tbmi, when die alook aOiuik the laat hour, what ahon^ng
' m ctf yiatarj I Not the leaat nnpleaalng part waa I^e oeremon; Uiat
ticB, and bj all bianda lo Ihia o^iital game, we Mmeatl; adTiae onr Teadsn not to tadnlf* In tbeaa dangami praotiiiaa ; Ibr they mnat Temember that FootbaU, alOunigt N nenaauUj- a men niasli
^ HONG ooA-dcnr glhrnaa of modern istfodncdon Groqnet holdA ft v«i7
L bigb plmofl In tha flAunnticm of all who delight In UUetic eierciHe.
. It la one of tho few gnzDM Ifl wbich Udiaa end gentlemen oen
pier together i Mid heooe It li retj' popnler is all piwta of the
o the origin of Oroqnefi we will eej nothing, for nothing Han to be oertaioly known ; but we may hint that the modem gamo of CroQnet m adaptation of tha Pall-miU of our ta ent of n^co, Hockey, uid other
CBOQDST. !)■
n* ttfit tf On gamt, vhlDh mif be pl^od by two or mora panon*, 1* to Krlka • iroodiB ban Umngh m nriH of Inm hoop* Mt in the gronnil •oSDnUng to kidu
UiJit lowblehOolf liplBTed. Ths plarsr plKea bis bkll on Um gToasd, U a tittle ilwtMn*n Itom tiis ilutiikg-peg, uid iCrikfla It throngh Cho flrflt lioop. If hA inoceed in doinK (hia, ho knockx It tonrdi, or Ihronsh, the MOODd, »nd » on till he miiniM m hoop. The Doit pU;ar theo gOH on, and doee likewise ; and when he &ils to " make hla hoop." a thlnl player rollowi; and In this nj all the playeia pmoeed till one is cl«T«r or lucky enough to pasa the ball ebroogh all the hoope uid win Uie
Whea OLOre than two playen engage in Oroqnet it is anal to make aides, as in Cridiflt aod other games. The side which tint ooa^ree to "make the roond" of All the hoopa wins the gamo.
Each player is provided with a mallet and a ball, which aie painted or ooloured lo ooneapoDd with eaoli other, and to ■"T"~[r'''' them (him the balls and mallau of the other plajere. It is the ottject of each player not oidy lo pass his own ball thmogli th« hoops, bnt to prefenl his opponent doing so. In Ofder b strikia hjs hall against any other ball that may He between him and the hoop he aims at.
owD doee to il, and hita li away to any
This he does, not by KrikiiiB his opponent's hall with
hia adTersaty's ball away. It is nenal (Or the player (a pUoe bis foot on his ball la """"g the eroqtui^ " « - .. -? shown in the engraTing. Brfoie the owner c* the ft.*-":/ ban eo strock aw^ ean pass Ibnngh his hoop, he mnA hit tt back again to a spot wlienoe he ean play t at the snhes. The pl^nalake it in tome to stHka at tl^r lereial wooden ballsi and in Oder to prerent oonfhsion, eai^ one la prorided witti a UtUa iron dip, whkh has i
Thia idip ha bangi o
<X ooorae (ha beopa ntv hold one ot more otipa, aooording to the lOe^ti MMa tt eadi pl^ai** gtme. So long aa a [dayer oonUnDe to play #^ ^\ wkhou mlniag a hoop he goes on j bnt when he IWle, the next I I
•fl»«.aa>ln.dyitWd. 1^ I
TUa k the wbcte game timply daacrlbad. It wffl been aeen that "^^'^ '^'^
e hsTbig nnoe played with othaiB will know m from toy nomher of written dtreoUona. Bat i, we will endaaionr to further
liO
CBOQUBT.
4il
^tl
Qwovwn An tkb AMMXMBMKKn 0* ras Hoon. Croqaet can be played on any level piece of turf or field, of about twenty or more feet sqaare ; thoagh on aome lawna regular Croquet groondB are laid ont^ with a raised walk round them and Beats for spectators. Much stress has been laid by yarious writers on the game on the necessity of rolling, flattening, and mowing the grass for a Croquet ground, but in fbct a cricket field or meadow possesses ereiy qualification in the way of turf and space.
Various arrangements of the hoops msy be adopted ; but the two following are most generaL The figures show the directions taken by the balls from the starting- peg, round the toming-peg, and back again.
The hoope are set at
equal distances from
each other; from six to
ten feet apart is the best*
but that must depend on
the space at command.
The plain lines in the
diagrams tndigatft the
lines of progression,
and the dotted ones the £)ffntoiTn. lines. In the
first plan adopted by
Croquet players, of set- ting oat the hoops, ten
arches were used; a
hoop being placed
between 6 — 9 and the
turning-peg, to oorree-
pond with a similar
disposition of thehoopa
at the other end; and
sometimes, as in the
« * Eglington game," tun- nels and a cage are in*
troduced. The tunnels are of wood, and are placed on either side, in place of the hoops at 4 and 11 in our left-hand plan ; and through these the balls must be driven in their forward march and return. The cage consists of two large hoops placed crosswise, in the centre of the plan, with a bell suspended frxmi their point of juncture, which bell must be struck every time the ball passes through the cage. But whatever plan of setting the hoope be adopted, the mode of p^y is the same, namely — the striking the ball through each hoop in order, from the starting-peg to the toming-peg, and round the latter home to the starting and winning-pegj each player taking his regular torn of play.
£^9
OBOQUET. 141
and hting SMiBled by his Mends and deterred l^his opponents. This sltemate assist- •noe by the pertnen on one side, and opposition by the adTeraaries on the other, the game rwy lirely and attractiTe ; it often happening that just as a player is rly home the ball is croqueted sway to a distance, which renders vezy remote his ehaaoe of making his final hoop. On the other hand, a player may roqaet his partner throogh a hoop, and at the same time make his own game more certain, especially where the plan of the hoops extends over a wide space of ground.
ncmriOAL nans.
So^H^i is to hit another ball with yoor own.
Croqueted — ^when two balls are in contact^ and the player, placing his foot on his own ball, strikes it» and by that means cannons the other away, he is said to have cro<iaeted that balL
The Umr m the torn given to each player. This continaes till he fiiils to strike his ball throogh a hoop.
RoMT — ^A player who, after making the complete roond of the hoops, continaes in the game to assist his side ; as explained in Law X
Wired m aterm used when a ball is in contact with ahoop so as to prevent it going tfanmgh.
To peg is to strike at either of the pegs in proper order of play.
To diemist a ball is to croqnet it to a distance.
A bridged bail is one that has ran the first arch.
A dead ball is one that is in hand or oat of the game for the time being.
Other terms, each as "narsing,** "sfaraight stroke," "ranning a hoop," "over- nmning,'* "side stroke," etc., safflciently explain themselves.
L4WS OV CBOQmR.
A large nnmber of rales have been proposed, bat those which fbllow wiU, we Imagine, enable any lad to play Croqaet. The remarks within the brackets are intended simply to gaide the players.
I. Each player must start from a mallet's length from the starting-peg, and strike Us ball at or through the first hoop. [This is called " making the hoop."]
n. The playerB on each side take alternate strokes, according to the colours of the ball. [The ooloura of the balls, or the rings of colour, determine the order of play. This is s^tled before commencing the game.]
m. The player pxtNseeds till he misses a hoop, or ftiUs to croquet another ball. [His ball then remains where it stopped.]
lY. After roqueting a ball the player must croquet it. [That is, after the player has struck an opponent's ball, which is called roqueting it, he proceeds to croqaet it in this way : he puts his ball close to the one he strack, so that both balls touch ; he thfOi i^aoes his foot on hie own ball and strikes it with his mallet, or he may strike the ban without patting his foot on it. By this stroke he either merely moves the croqueted ball, or cannons it away to a distance. He may use any degree of force in croqueting a
142 CBOQUXT.
ball, and is at liber^ to sand it in any direction. To nmke a hard stroke, it is bert to bear lightly with yonr toe on your ball ; and to cause yonr own ball to follow the ono croqneted, yon ahonld hit high, with a kind of flowing motion of the arm.]
v. The croqueted ball must be moTed, or it is no stroke. \TI yon wish to leave the roqueted ball in the place where it stands, you touch it lightly with your own ball, just sufficient to moye it. This is called " taking the stroke oflT."]
VT. No player can croquet or be croqueted till his ball has passed through the first hoop. [Till he has " made his hoop " he can scarcely be said to be in the game.]
Vn. The player who misses the first hoop takes up his ball and waits till his turn comes round to play it again.
vni. A player may croquet any number of balla consecutively, but he must not bit the same ball twice during the same torn without first sending his ball through the hoop next in order.
IX. Instead of playing at a hoop or a ball, the players may strike the ball away to any part of the ground.
X. The player who haa made the complete circuit of the hoops — ^firom the starting- peg, round the tuzning^peg, and back again through the last hoop— may either retire item the game by hitting the starting-peg, or else become a *' Rover " by avoiding hitting this peg for a tune. A ** Rover " has the privilege of croqueting aU the balls during any one of his turns for play. But of course he only takes his turn in regular order. [A " Rover " is often of great assistance to his friends in croqueting away their opponents, and so allowing the rest of his party to get on towards the winning- I)oet.]
XI. A roqueted ball is dead, and in hand till after the player of it has taken the croquet. [From this it will be seen that if the player cannon from one ball to another or from a ball to a hoop, or frx>m a baU to either of the pegs, he gains nothing, but the displaced ball is restored to its position. Any baU that cannons after it has croqueted, however, counts.]
xn. The ball must be hit and not merely pushed. [That is to say, it will not be considered a stroke if you simply push your mallet forward. The stroke on the ball is considered Dftir if it can be heard. The mallet must be drawn back before the stroke to make the hit &irly. But it is allowable to rest the head of the mallet on the turf, and then suddenly advance it to the ball. In " following strokes " this plan is advantageous.]
Xm. The ball must be struck with the fboe of the mallet, and not with the handle or the side. [A push with the small end of the mallet used to be allowed, but it is now objected to.]
Xiy. The player is not restricted to any attitude in striking his ball, so long as it be fkUrly hit.
XV. Any player hitting the starting-peg after he has made the round of the hoops is out of the game, no matter whether his ball hit the peg by a stroke of his own mallet, or by being croqueted by an opponent When a player is out of the game, the rest proceed as beftxre. [See Law X.]
CBOQTTST; 143
ZVL The eHp la to be placed on the hoop through which the player ia next going, with the ^ai towmrda the ataiting-peg on one aide, and the turning-peg on the other. \TbB umpire plaoea and changea the clip, when dipa are need. Bhonld there he no mnpire, any player may azrange the olipe.]
XVn. A hall ia oonaidered to have made ita hoop if it cannot be touched by the malletTa handle placed acroaa the wirea from aide to aide. [It ia the bnsineeB of the uttpize to measme a wired baU.]
XYHL If a player atop at the toming-peg, he loeee hia torn, and the stroke does not ooontk [Bran though he may hare roqueted the ball ofT the peg, when his torn anives, he must start fh>m the place at which his ball stopped.]
XIX The side which first makes the round oomidetely, wins the game. [Some- times points are aoored for first hoop, second hoop, etc., but this is not neeessaiy.j
XX. The decision of the umpire is final ; where no umpire is appointed, the opinion of the m^ority of byitanders is to be taken on all points of dispute. [It ia, however, aoore satisfartoiy if it can be arranged to appoint an umpire. His duties are : to aae that the game ia played according to the laws ; to decide upon the fkimess of all baUs slmck ; to measure wired balls ; to restore balls disturbed by accident, etc., to their plaoea ; to place and axxange the clips, and to decide upon the order in which the playen go on at the start.]
A complete Croquet set consists of eight maUeta, eight bslls, eight clips, a starting- peg, a tomizig-peg, and nine strong iron hoops pointed at the ends, and painted white, green, or yellow. The pegs are about the height of a cricket stomp, and they, as well as the "*allffti, haTe rings round them uniform in colour with the balls, to distinguish the order of each player's torn to strike.
TIm JfolMs are made of varioua heights, weights, and pattema. The best length is about three feet to three feet and a half; according to the height of the player. The
handle ehoold be aerewed, not nailed, into the mallet heads, and painted in rings for the gvidaxBce of the players, who go on in the order of the colours. The above of mallet heads are tboee meet in nee.
Ths BaiU an gsnenlly of bete)) or other wood ; bat thtm bvn \kMj bMD inln- duoed bml^ of gntta paroha and oocos'aat Shrt. Tho; tav ksowu am " Kichot«m*i CompoUTid BaUflp" and atb in manj nwpecU inperior to the wooden baUi, from (hair ptrtSoC ntoiiditr uid elMtiolty. Thg twlls us •arenU^ paloled nd, gncn, bins, ^Uow, black, while, pink, asd orange. Somatimei the;r *™ palntad la rings oF i«d and blae, from one U toai reapeoliirelf . Ths ooloon of tba balla or linga Intom the pLaj«n whoae torn it ia to pL^-
The Hoopt or Anshti an either aSTen. nine, or ten in number, made of itronK gnlTanisad DT Japanned iron wire. They are either aqnare or rounded at tbe top, and etand aboat t«u ioohee out or ibe ^^und. Those ooloored while are the moat TfiadOj ■eea at dusk. Croqust sen on be ponhaaed of mon of the eaUen of eciokMlns appanlQB.
Several methods of itriUn; the ball an adoplsd by eroqnat players. In taking
tho oroqael, yoainay eiCher plaoa yonrfOot onjoarown ball ornot aayoaplMM; and
roar BQCOeai will depeod on ihe fUmeas and fiUneH with which yon make yonr etroke.
Hoah depends on the poailianB of llM ball*, whethar yon manly tap yonr own ball,
or gire it • fnU hit from the shoulder. For
QMjka itrofa, yon raise tbe mallet abore
the dunlder and hit hard i Ibr the (id*
strafes, yon tUmd a little to the side of tbeball,
and hold the mallet a little aslanti tbr tbe
9iraiffhl ttroke, yon place the mallflC parpen.
dionlarly in front ; for the /aO/mniig tlrakt,
yon hit yonr ball with a kind of Sowing
motion, which canece your ball to foUow
after the bsU croqueted -. and for ibg ipU-
fi^ ttroktt you may uae any anHMnt of
force Uiat seems necessary. Wben yon
strike yonr ball high, it follows quickly aflaT
the obi«t ban i when low, and with a.
■ndden dnwback motion. It atope at the
point or contact with Ihs other baD, and
nbounds an inch or two &om the point of
oononssion. To plsy well, yon most be
cateTnl to observe tbe rules of tbe game,
*■■ iTiiKst •rivii. i^jj make every stroke wit
tion to succeed. Ton can always make your ball go stnlght to tbs anh if j
the right place ; and you will find Uiat a gentle lap will often suooeed whe
blow would ftO. Finally, be csrefbl to play in a oonriaous and conciliator]
and never allow a momentary disappointmeat to exhibit ItMlf in anget or lU-
TBOCO, OK I.AWX BUXUBDe.
HIS i> kn noellml ont-aMoor gama, «p«ei«]l7 in gardsui wben
tar cricket, or Cluwe iporta which nqnire a
1X^4 lugs ipKB. An iron ring, which iwingi nond, ig Hied into Uw
-^^ ground, and the object of the gune 1b Tor emch pl&7er to urgp hii
^\\ ball Umngb tb« ring b; miaiii oT a long ens, at the snd of
1. The gasM U pUved bj ti
:egiV8,ni
t. Tbs game mar be played si
t. The Db)ect of aaoh plaTor is U
IT PLt4}lung hia ball from a starting-point, re of llie gronnd : ths plaj'er whose ball
r urge hia ball by msaiis of the one, so loe* so, the plainer so
thia is done hj tia placer's ball tint tbroogh tha ilag.
■3<a-^
ba eonildered teirl; nude onlees ths ball ilelirered is a cue-length dutanco IVom
I that Is UL
& player caosing Ua adrsnaiT's ball to pass Ihrongh tbe ring, eolitles the
Ued to camt, if in deliTering hia ball tho cue tonches Ihs iron
iltaont moring ths front Ibot, which
Is to b* plassd in liM with lbs ban.
146 HOCKEY.
BOCSST.
Hku we have a fine, exhilarating game, popular in every put of Bngland. and played with sticks of good old English oak or crab. Hookey is an amusement for all seasons — in the summer on the torf, in the winter on the ice. Bides are chosen by the two best players, selected alternately. Every player is provided with a good strong, toogh stick, hooked or turned up at the end in an oblique angle, so that when held by one or both hands in a slanting position, the end lies flat on the ground. A large oork bung is the object of contention. The best ground is a large field or meadow, — the opposite hedges or boundaries, the two goals. The sides are arranged in two lines opposite each other, the players standing several yards apart. The first strike is decided by chance. At about two-thirds distance from the striker's goal, the bung is laid down. When all are ready, the striker calls " Play I*' and with his ntmost foive sends forward the bung, which is "taken up*' by the rest with their hockey sticks. The game has then begun, each player endeavouring to send the bung back or forwsid toward his respective goal. Should the striker miss his first hit^ his opponent immediately takes advantage of it, and strikes it in the contnuy direction, which being but a short distance, frequently deddes the game ; otherwise, with many players, it may be kept up for a long time, the striker and his opponents following on to assist their pai^. When the bung is driven to or over either of the respective goals, the game is decided, and f^'Bsh sides may be chosen. In the north of Bngland the game is called *' Shinney," from the custom of the players striking the shins if the bung or ball get between the legs ; but we protest against this practice as tending to create angry feeling. With a party of good skaters, this game aflbrds fine sport, but of course can only be played on a sheet of ice of great extent. The following are the rules : —
1. The ball must be struck with the stick, and not kicked with the foot or touched by the hand.
2. The ball must be struck &irly through the goal, before the side can claim the game.
3. The goals must be marked by lines at either end; and in the centre a line mast be drawn acrosa to determine the side which has possession of the ball.
4. If the ball bound against the person of a player, he must allow it to fall to the ground before he strikes at it.
6. Any player striking another with stick or hand, kicking, or otbrawiae unfkirly playing the ball, is out of the game.
6. A captain on each side is to be chosen to regulate the game ; and it is the duty of any player, when directed by the captain, to fetch tho ball when struck to a distance.
These six rules will be sufficient. As to the ball or bung, an ordinary bung of good sice cut round the edges and bound with strong string, will last much longer than the mere cork. Some players use an India-rubber bottle cut close to the neok. This answers much better, and is much stronger than the balls ordinarily sold at the toy-sbops.
naoh hoBlIhr sierci», !■ plajBi io u opgu apace of i; • bigli mil, wbich tboold bs pminted blacli. Ths four eqnol comparOuenta^ nurkad with chalk, ao that 1, which dirtgiona ■ d b}- tha play BIB. A broad lina is marked ihth obalk or while pslol along le wholb length of the will, at the height of ftti^'tro inobea from ^le groond, above liich Une erety ball ought to atnlce the wall. The game ii eitremel; aimple asd u l^od br two or four pUvBn if bj lOnr each planar occnplea one of Ibe oam]ari' icfila into wtuch the ground u divided thoae neejeat thA wall being called in hand lajn, and tboaa faTOMil from Che wall oot-hand plareia whan than an dd!^
two plBT«r*, eaob ^narda iwo Emands or compartmenta. The ball ia propelled BgHinst the wall br a light bal or raeitt (from which Che »nune ukea its name), the flat part ot which ia fimned of a strong net-work of cetgiit. The ball ahould weigh one oronee, not more, and be tTeqnentlj changed, ao that those not in nse ni^ be dipped into a bag of powdered chalky aa, from tlieir email iise, the ffjra oould not follow tbera tn Iha game, wen the; not thus rendered easil; diaoemible when oppoaed to the block paint on Ibe walL IT ooi Jnvesile readers ehould not be able to avail themeelvea of a gixnad deroted to the game, we mar aa well Inform themj Ihat It la aaay to m^e a
148 FIVBS.
racket gromid on a small aeale, at the gable end of a honae or bam. The following are the roles and penalties : — Chance decides who is to begin the game, which is com- menced by the in-hand player strildng the ball against the wall ; if it strike under the line, or go over the wall, or does not rebound into the out-hand*s spaces, or goes beyond the limits of the racket ground, the striker is out, and the out-hand takes his place ; but, if neither of these occur, after the ball has rebounded into the out-spaces and hopped from the ground, it is sent back to the wall again to rebound into one of the in-si>aces, and so on alternately. Some players do not wait for the ball to alight on the ground, but Toll^, or hit, it as it rebounds firom the wall ; we do not advise this if it can be avoided. ISie great art consists in sending the ball in such a maimer against the wall, that in its rebound the opposite party shall be unable to pick it up with the bat or hit it ; whenever this happens, the one who stamck the ball counts one point, or an ace, and the game is so continued until one of the parries scores fllteen, or, as sometimes played, eleven. Rackets is played at the Cricket-ground, Kennington Oval, and elsewhere in London, but it has of late years been much neglected.
nvss.
The game of Fives is of great antiquity, and was common in England as early as the fourteenth century under the name of " Hand-tennis ;" it was also played in France, at a very early period, under the name of " Palm-play." At first it was played with the niUced hand ; then with a glove, which was occasionally lined ; afterwards oords were bound round the hand, to make the ball rebound more forcibly ; and hence, accord- ing to St. Foiz, the racket took its origin. The following are the generally accepted rules : — Fives may be played either single-handed or with partners. A good wall must be selected, with a sound flat piece of ground in front of it ; a line must be drawn about three feet from the ground, on the wall ; another on the ground about two yards trota the wall ; and a third, describing three sides of a square, of which the wall itself will be a fourth, on the ground from the wall, to mark the bounds. The players toss up for innings ; the wimier begins by dapping his ball on the ground, and striking it against the wall above the line, and so that it may rebound tar enough to fall outside the line on the ground ; the other player then strikes it in the same manner either before it has touched the ground, or dapped (i.e. hopped tram the ground) more than once ; the first player then prepares to receive and strike it at its rebound ; and thus the game goes on, until one of the players (kU to strike the ball in his turn before it has hopi)ed more than once, strikes it below the mark, or drives it out of bounds. If the party who is in does either of these, he loses his innings ; if the other, then the in-player reckons one on each occasion towards the game, which is fifteen. When partners play the rules are precisely the same ; each side keeping up the ball alternately, and the partners taking turns for innings, as one of the other side gets out. After the ball is first played out on each occasion, it is not necessary to make it rebound beyond the ground Une, which is used only to m^e the player who is in give out the ball ftairly in the first instuice ; that is, when he first takes his innings or when he plays out the ball again after winning a point.
i? andlKllbrtwoar kj Chu-ln the Becxmi!
chuactBT (0 Buketa and PiT«a j thty mn ai««kgaiid Bomaiu, uid an pUjBd with mint
tpBnaia. In the dsTa oftb* " many monmrch " Becxmd, Tnmii wmfl a Tuy (taihlonAbla tport, having been lU, &wa Fnnoe.
I7 placed In a oorered gallery ; Uioagh id France, when It ia MUl
in open-air eame. Fonnerlj many elaborate ralee and yajioofl CDritnu
id the Kama oT Tennii ; bat It will be lolBcianl if we briefly deactibe th*
ia plared. Tint, thai. It ia neotatnry to have a taJlery or room with a
tt each end. Aenaa the oentn oT (he nam ii iBitobed a piece of network.
En height, on eltber aide of which the playen ituid, ready to atiike tha
then an Bnir. they nnally divide themnelTsi into lidea. The fint planar drepa 1 on the groood, and atrikce at It with hlB bat. aa It raboondi, agalnat the oppoaite Lm U CaJla to the groond, a player on the other aldeof the net itrikea it np to the other lod m> the gaiUB ooDtinnea, each player aHaniataly alriking the ball wbenartr
150 FALLONE.
he gets a cxuuioe. But each player must hit the ball on His own side of the net, and a iK>int is lost by the ball striking the net; the side which first makes a certain number of hits, as previoiisly agreed, wins the game. A aet of TemM consists of six games, but if what is called cm advcmiage tet is played, two oonsecntiTe games above five must be won to decide ; or in case the players make six games each, two games in addition must be won by one side to complete the set. The game, w«»tf*^ of being marked 1, 2, 3, etc., is called -for the first stroke, 26; for the second, 90; for the third, 40 ; and for the fourth, " game," unless the players get four strokes each, then, inst^id of calling it 40 all, it ia called deux; after which, as soon as any stroke is got, it is called " advantage : " and in case the strokes on each side are equal, deux avain, till one or the other gets two strokes in succession to complete " the set," and win the game.
PALLONE.
An old Italian game that has nearly died out, and which was either the original of, or an improvement upon, our old Saxon Bidloon<ball, has lately been described by Dr. Fisher, a gentleman who has resided many years in Italy and (Greece. The game is played with a large ball weighing about three-quarters of a pound, which is struck backwards and forwards along a level floor, similar to the way in which the ball is struck in Tennis. But instead of being struck by a bat, the ball is hit by the player's wrist and arm, which are protected by a leathern gauntlet. The word Fallone means heavy ball, and various complicated rules are given for playing the game.
Ihdlone is played in two ways— one is called Ck>rdino-ba8so, or low line; and the other C!ordino-alto, or high line. In Cordino-alto a loi^ net, two feet wide, is drawn across the court from a middle post to a high wall, at an elevation of about fifteen feet, and immediately over a line of bricks. Twelve small bells are hung to the lower edge of this net, so as to betray the least touch of the ball upon it. Two players engage on each side. Eveiy ball, in order to count, must go dean over the net without touching it. There are no low balls to return, therefore a third player is imnecessary. This makes it hard work for the players engaged.
In the Cordino-basso the ground-floor is divided into two sides by a line of bricks, which are placed lengthwise across it. The object of each party is to send the ball to the other side of the transverse line, by striking it either befora it touches the ground or after the first rebound from it. Should the opposite side faO to send it back, a point is counted against him. A point is also lost by the player who sends the ball to the south side of one of the boundaries which mark the ground, or over the high wall on the opposite side. It is equally a point lost when the ball fells on the south side of the line of bricks. But a point is gained by the side which strikes the ball over a ow railing at the opposite extremity of the floor. Four of these points oonstitote a game. The first point is called 15; the second, 90} the third, 40; and the fourth, "game," as in Tennis. After each point has been gained, the nuurker declares the state of the game. In the high-cord game, the qrston of counting is the same, with this addition— every ball that strikes the net is counted as a point lost to the side by which it was struck.
j^t^AWN TEinns, fuTweatuUatoondiHudtliem
ot BptrntrMOi aai Lteia POani, bu, within tlie iHi law ;«n. in*^
^ ^ ^ ^ mch (taadr ndnoiHa In popnluttf Uikt Kms UH»imt ol iU ehun
X^f^- *'™^°' ■"^ ulnnIiiB« liawma InillipnuiblB to tli* " Bar's On
1» now gvno mjij 1ie dflkorllied a« & modified iDTm i
Tejmii, ■Irwdj l«»t»d. It li not dhmht; here to oampim tl
•■tehliilitbaTsIUlonihlpot tbcnew hTonrite wiUi Uia iHll.pIajof ninj, Hor•o^ i BoBwr'a "Ninaiaw." But it it nacauHrj, in tbe interHta of Joitloe, toiMonltlut I InDodwition into lUi annitiT u dna to tlie entsrprtH ot Kajor WIngfleld, lUe of tl iBt Dngvon Onudi. A Ht ot latlioritatiTs nilga. of whioh we abill «1ts tlie ts ■crMiiB, tun now b»«ii flnsU; adopted ij tlia gnat plajlDr alDba. It onlf Tantn *— j>w* |i»ww»*^iiy<^ftH**.iii|^irt«^rf^t.a jy««»w.i HidtbeganHi^ to point ont one or two i tfc« ige ptnalaaot aJfatagfof Ijwa Tennii. In theflntplaaeittianopBBabgBin (■■■■Tlj' played In a gudad; U eao be plared, and tirrelj tU* li In Ita ttmnr, I boUi torn ; aod It aflOrda i^nMrliiiiitt» (« eianlBa and daxtsritf wUdi dUmt Raidt
152
LAWK TENNIS.
games oombining the flnt-namied featnree eeldom preeont. "Nerer/* eajs an enthnaiost in the "New Quarterly Kagaaine," "ainoe the daja when onr ancient English sports flourished in their prime, and men of English blood took their pleasure, as it is ever their wish and wont to take it, on their natiye greensward in the open light of day -never since these cheerful old times has such a thorou^ilj enjoyable game as Lawn Tennis been invented for the delight of our countrymen and women. Other games of strength and ootivity have their special excellences, but none so com- pletely falls in with our humour as this one." . . . " It is pleasant to play at, and pleasant to see played ; and there is room in the game for almost any degree of skill and judgment, and strength and activity." Moreover, its acceptance by thA public is an accomplished fact. In suburban enclosures —on pleasant river>side grass-plots— as an adjunct to the park and the playground— the nets for Lawn Tennis are everywhere erected.
THx eaoirvD avs tkb oaks.
Lawn Tennis can be played on any firm and level ground, although turf, asphalte. or concrete are best suited for the purpose. The balls and rackets employed are generally of a special make, but they can be easily procured. The form, aspect, i^d dimensions of the oourt are shown in the acco=3r<L°7ii^ diagram. The length. It will be observed, is 78 feet ; the width, 87 feet ; while the width of the central net, A B, is
Ctf
a
■I
H
t
a!
I I
♦
m
LEFT
RIGHT
< 55
COURT
COURT
<— — 17 FIIT ^—22 FttT
88 f^et. The net is stretched between two posts, which are kept in place by gny-xopea. The heiipht of the net is 4| feet at the posts, descending to 3 feet at the centre. ParsDel with the net on either side, and 88 feet from it, is a line C D, which is termed th* ■ervice line. A central line, E F, styled the half-court line, divides the fribole court into four sub'Oourts, two ri^ht and two left courts. The boundary lines may be indicated by tape or webbing fixed to the ground by means of hairpins, or they may be marked with whitewash. A Lawn Tennis marker is made for this potpoee.
LAWN TEKNI8. 163
The number of plajexs is not tzed{ the game oea, in fact, be plajed byeaj number. But it iensml^ limited to two or four— more than two foxminflr aides. It is be^on by the plajezs toeaing for position, and the right to serre. This arranged, the plajer begin- ning, or the '* aerYer/' takes np his place in the right hemd evwrt of the end he has chosen ; and standing so that one foot is without the base line, he strikes the ball with tbe racket orer the net into that portion of the opposite rifi^t-hand court which lies between the net and the serrioe line. If the ball so delivered or " served," falls in the left-hand oonrt, or in the net, <xr between the serrice line and the base line, or ontside the coorts altogether, the serrioe is reckoned a "fault." But if, on the other hand, the ball be properly delivered in the right*hand court between the service line and the net, tbe opponent, who is termed the " striker*out," taking it at the rebound, returns it over the net to the server. As long as the ball so returned falls anywhere within the eztetnal line of the courts, or even upon the line itself, the return is valid ; and the boU is sgsin played back by the server or the plsyers on his side, and so passes backwards and forwards until one of the plsyers fiuls to return it, or it drops beyond the external Hne, sad oat of the game. The further details of the game will be fully gathered from theBnles. *
nVLSS OF TK> GAMS.
'Hie Rules which follow are those which have been adopted by the Karylebone Cricket Club, and the All England Croquet and Lawn Tennis Club.
1. The ehoioe of sides and the right of serving during the first game shall be decided by loass provided that, if the winner of the toss choose the right to serve, the other player ahall hnve the ebaioe of sides, and vio$ ««nd. The players shall stand on opposite of the net : the player who first deUvers the ball shall be called the Serwer, the the Striker-cia. At the end of the first game, the Striker<out shall become Server, sad the Server ahaU beoome 8triker^>ut ; and so on alternately in the subsequent games of the set.
S. Tbe Server shsll stsad with one foot outside the Base Line, and ahall deliver the service from the Bight and Left Courts alternately, beginning from the Bight. The ball served must drop within the Service-Line, Half-Court-Line, and Side-Line of the Court, which is diagonally opposite to that from which it was served, or upon any snehliBe.
5. It is s/eett if the beU served drop in the net, or beyond the Service-Line, or if it dropootof Court, or in the wrong Court. A fault may not be taken. After a fault, the
ahaO serve sgain from the same Court from which he served that fault. A The service msy not be eoQqfwl, i.0., taken before it touches the ground.
6. The Server shall not serve until the Striker-out is ready. If the latter attempt to the ssrvloe, he ahaU be deemed to be ready. A good service delivered when the
8brikar*out is not ready annuls a previous fault.
t. A ball is raCurasd, or ia>play, when it is played back, over the net, before it has %ffiM>hfiil the ground a second time.
7. It is a good service or return although the ball touch the net
154 LAWN TENNIS.
8. The Berveat wins a stroke, if the Striker-ont roXLoj the eerrioe; or if he fail to zetnra the eezrioe or the ball in-plaj ; or if he retnni the eervioe or hall in>pilej so that it dxop oatside any of the linee which bound his opponent's Gonrt; or if he otherwise lose a stroke, as provided by Law 10.
9. The Btriker-ont wins a stroke, if the Serrer senre two conseovtlTe faults ; or if he fail to return the ball in-play ; or if he return the ball in-play so that it drop ontsideany of the lines which bound his opponent's C!oart; or if he otherwise lose a stroke, as proTided by Law 10.
10. Either player loses a stroke, if the ball in-play touch him or anything that he wears or carries, except his racket in the act of striking ; or if he tonch or strike the boll in-play with his racket more than once.
11 . On either player winning his first stroke the score is called 15 for that player ; on either player winning his second stroke the score is celled SO for that player ; on either player winning his third stroke the score is called 40 for that plsyer; and the fourth stroke won by either player is scored game for that player : except as below :—
If both players have won three strokes, the score is called denoe ; and the next stroke won by either player is scored advantage for that player. If the same player win the next stroke, he wins the game ; if he lose the next stroke, the score is again called dence; and so on nntil either player win the two strokes im- mediately following the score of deuce, when the game is scored for that player.
12. The player who first wins six games wins a set ; except as below .—
If both players win five games, the score is called games-all ; and tibe next game won by either player is scored advantage-game for that player. If the same player win the next game, he wins the set ; if he lose the next game, the score is again called games-all ; and so on until either player win the two games immediately following the score of games-all, when he wins the set.
[NoTS.->PIayera may agree not to play advaniage-eeU, hut to d«e«d« ths set hy on« ganu after arriving at the ecore of gameiHdl.']
13. The players shall change sides at the end of every set. When a series of seta is played, the player who was server in the last game of one set shall be strikeront in the first game of the next.
Odds. — 14. A bisque is one stroke, which may be claimed by the receiver of the odds at any time during a set ; except as below . —
A bisque may not be taken after the service has been delivered. The Server may not take a bisque after a fault ; but the Striker-out may do so. 16. One or more bisques may be given in augmentation or diminution of other odds.
16. Half-fifteen is one stroke, given at the beginning of the second snd evexy subsequent alternate game of a set.
17. Fifteen is one stroke given at the beginning of every game of a set.
18. Half-thirty is one stroke given at the b^riuning of the first game, two strokes at the beginning of the second game ; and so on, alternately, in all the subsequent gain«s of a set.
LAWN TENNIS. 1S6
19. Thirty is two ttroket giren at the begimiinflr of orery game of a aet.
iu. Half-forty is two itrokea giren at the begiimiiig of the first game, three strokes at the begimuBg of the second game; and so on, alternately, in all the subsequent games of aseL
81. Porty is three strokes giren at the beginning of every game of a set.
SS. Half-Coort : the players haying agreed into whieh Conrt l^e girer of the odds shall play, the latter loses a stroke if the ball, returned by him, drop outside any of the lines which bound that Conrt.
Thk THmsx-HAVDSD AXTD Foua-HAVi>Bi> Oaxxb.— 28. The abore laws shall apply to the three-handed and four-handed games, except as below : —
In thethree^handed game the single player shall serre in erery alternate game.
In the four-handed game, l^e pair who hare the right to serve in the first game may decide which partner shall do so, and the opposing pair may decide similarly for the second game. The partner of the pli^er who senred in the first game shall serve in the third; and the partner of the player who served in the second game shall serve in the fourth, and so on in the same order in all Subsequent games of a set or series of sets.
The players shall take the service alternately throughout each game ; no player shall receive or return a service delivered to his partner ; andl^e order of service and of striking-ont once arranged shall not be altered, nor shall the strikers-out change Cknirts to receive the service, before the end of the set.
Am Axtssvatitb Mxthod or Scoanre.— M. The above Laws shall apply to Lawn Tennis, played by the game, except as regards the method of scoring. The word Hand^n Shan be snbetitnted for 8§rv§r, and ITond-OMt for Striktr-oVt.
25. Thb Hand-in alone is able to score. If he loee a stroke, he becomes Hand-out, and his opponent becomes Hand-in, and serves in his turn.
M. Thb player who first scores 15 points wins the game.
S7. If both players have won 14 points, the game ia ad to 3. The score is called Xew an. Hie Hand-in continues to serve, and the player who first scores 8 points wins tliegame.
28. In the thre^handed or fonr*handed game, only one partner of that side which is Handpin shall serve at the beginning of each game. If he or his partner loee a stroke, ihm other side shall be Hand-in.
29. Dorinir the remainder of the game, when the first Hand-in has been put out, his partner shall serve, beginning from the Court from which the last service was not delivered] and, when both partners have been put out, then the other side shall be
80. Hie Hand-in shall deliver the service in accordance with Iaws 2 and 3; and the apponeata shall receive tiie service alternately, each keeping the Court which he occupied. In all subsequent strokes, the ball may be returned by either on each side. SI. One or more points may be given in a game.
156
BADMINTON.
3J. The privilege of being Hand-in two or more BoooeaeiTe times may be giren.
83. Half -Coort : The playera having agreed into which Court the giver of the odda shall play, the latter loses a stroke if the ball, returned by him, drop outside any of the lines which bound that Court.
SAOMINTON.
^•j|v=
CIENTEFIC SHUTTLECOCK, or ** Badminton/* a name in aU probability derived from that of the well-known seat of the Duke of Beaufort, will not require ao detailed a description as we have given to Lawn Tennis. In the first place, this is a boy's book, and Badminton is by almost universal oonsent more of a lady's game— indeed, it is sometimes styled "Ladies' Bocketa"—
40. Ft.
•n
I I I I I
o
a
>
LEFT COU
RIGHT COU
POST
RT
m PI
ai <
o
n
r
ai n
RT
Mi 1!
NT COURT
> n
r i R
FT COURT
POST
•I5FT ^t- 10. F'^ ^ 15-Fl i
than a gentleman's; in the second, the popularity of lAwn Tennia haa aooMwhat cast it into the shade. It is, we believe, still very generally played in India ; but the dimate favours it more there than in thia country, where a brisk bieese would make it almoat impoasible to play comfortably without heavily loaded ahuttleoooka. For theae, and other reasons, we do not anticipate that it is likely to acquire any permaiMnt popularity.
BADMINTON. 157
The groimd for Badminton is ret ont as shown in the aeoompanying diagram. Much differenoe of praotioe prerails as to the dimensions of the Coort, which Tarjr oonaidenhly. Those giTen here axe takea from the *' Handhook of Lawn Tennis and Badminton," hj " Cavendish "—one of the best authorities npon the snbjeot. For ladies' plaj thej maj, howerer, be rednoed, so long as the proportions are preserved. The boundary lines are marked out as in Lawn Tennis. The posts should be about six feet high, and the net, which need not touch the ground, five feet high. For expert players the net may be lowered to four feet six in the middle. The shuttleoocks used should be more or less loaded, and the rackets may be somewhat smaller than those used for Lawn Tennis. Except thataU strokes are volleyed, and that the service may be delivered firom any part of the Gourts, the game is played as in Lawn Tennis. There msj be more than two players; but it is bnt to limit the number to four.
OOXrCLVDXBO BKXABXB OS LAWV TXnriB XVD BADXXHTOW.
We have thus endeavoured, within the narrow limits at our disposal, to give as dear a descriptiou as possible of these attractive games. As to Lawn Tenms, we think it likely to «**<«t**w its place in this country as long as Cricket— much longer indeed than its sister game of Croquet. In fact, we cannot but regard it as likely to become a truly national amusement. It has its poetical aspects, and, indeed, were " The Piinoess " but a poem of 1877 in lieu of 1847, its author must certainly have included it with the "pure sport" of that pleasant summer's day in those pleasant English grounds he has so well described. '* And here again " so might the lines have read—
" And h«r» again On the nnooth •hAvvn tcnrf LAWV-TSSNI8 oourtt. Spread out tjmmttrie with tbdr llnea of white,— Probtama to aolT* far p]earant«r than hia Who planned the " Aaaan' Brldfe" for paxiled youth, Pondertais with teaxa ; and hera waa eager talk Of " voUeja," "ootB" and "braaka." aa o'er the net The licht baD roae, and mindfnl of the hand That tangbt ita ooorae,* with fitful, deriooa tonia. Sped on Ita ohanglns flight from aide to aide."
Thus far our private lawn-Tennyson. May the Laureate forgive his temerity !
One very inviting feature of these two games is the special facilities they afford irt indulgence in flirtation— siace thoy are very generally engaged in by young people of both sexes. We are, of course, addressing Boys, who are supposed to know nothing of that amtisement; yet to their elder brothers, who vrill certainly take many opportunities of indulging in Lawn Tennis, we would whisi>er a word of caution. Hie healthy and invigorating exercise calling up exquisite rose-tints to the rounded cheek, and brilliant light to the speaking eye ; and the constant motion, displaying to advaatage the graceful gestures and piquant costumes of England's fail
• •«
J«mqma fneul aMniiiU dcsfrtf, tenmtqm Umorem.
BiSMOnOS.
lui^i, renaliiiff BqaBllj tbfl nmdj wit moA poarij teeth of
(Odh iuidlaiii uid too imeisbbls ■ttamotloiia. Thoae wlio, Ul
to It, ftlbalt tims h» besnii to vbltan, ud eran p«r(billr to dspriTeni of, our loctoil,
m» ■DCMptible to thsM gmtla infloeiioH, irlU, m Tntnr* oongilectlj to pndJot, in th«
AXBBIOAN BASB BALI«. 150
AMERICAN BASE BALL.
ABB BALL, which hM been reoentlj introdnoed into this country from the United States, is now generally called the national game of the Aj&erioMU. Cricket, indeed, makes a considerable figure among their sports and pastimes; but it has hardly found such faroor with them as it epjoys with us. The restless energy which prompts Brother Jonathan to ''hurry up" and "go a-head" naturally dis- poses him to seek, in his amusements, the element of excitement. Bsae Ball — ^whidh is, in reality, nothing more than Bounders (fhlly de- scribed on p. 16) reduced to rule, and made, in a measure, scientiflo— exactly supplies the excitement he demands. A rery short time is reqoired to play a game; the players are kept in constant acttvi^ while it lasts ; and there are no delays or suspenses to make it wearisome. Base Ball has, consequently, become, *' bqrond question, the leading feature of the outdoor sports of the United States." Such being the case, the " Box's Owv Book " would hardly be eomplete without some description of it.
Kach district of the United States has its Base Ball club. These clubs are under the eontrol of a National Association, by which the elaborate code of rules was first dimwn up, and is still periodically revised. The established authority of this asso- oatMm is Hr. Henry Chadwick, author of the •* Base Ball Book of Reference," a closely printed rolnme of more than ISO pages. Into most of its minute directions, including eren a section on the ** moral attributes " of the player, we shall not attempt to enter. Where the Americans, in many cases, consider a rule necessary, we in England should prefer to leare the decision of the queetion to the judgment of those concerned. We shall therefore confine ourselTCSto abrief account of the ground and the game, followed by a summary of such of the rerised rales for 1860 as are likely to interest the Knglish reader.
nu Qsouvs Avn na 04m.
TbB game should be played in a smooth field, about 600 fMt long and 800 feet wide. The distances between the bsses, and other particulars, are given in Rules I., n., and ni. ; but the dimensions may be proportionately reduced, if necessary. Wimt fix the point <^ the homs bate, and measure 127 feet 4 inches ttoza. it down the field. This will give the point of the teeond base. Then attach the ends of a eord 180 ftet long, with a knot in the middle, to the home and second bases. By taking the knot in the hand, and stretching it as fkr as it will go to the right, ytm win get ihejlrti bam; by stretching it to the left, the third bate. The square, with sides of ninety feet^ as prescribed by Rule L, sec. 3, will be thus com- pleted. Vorty-five feet from the home bsse, towarda the second baaei, an tho
160
AMEBIOAN BASB BALL.
LKFT « fllLO
CENTnK^ri£LO
SeCOND^ BAS£
ri/ts" ^ ritLo
lines of the pitohei^s position. Parallel to these, at the home base, is a line six feet lon^, across whioh (abont two feet to the left of the base point), the striker shonld stsiBd (Bale m., Beo. 1).
There are eighteen players, nine on each side. Whicheyer side wins the toss at the cutset takes the choice of batting or fielding. As soon as the first striker hits the ball, he starts for the first base. The rest take his place in torn. When three players have been put out, the fielding side takes the bat in the same way, nntU the ftill game of nine innings to each side has been completed (Role Y.).
The field, or *'ont- hand," as it is caUed, consists of six ut^Jldden and three out-fieldtrt. The former are the eateher, pitcher, three basemen, and Aort-^top; the latter, the 2^, centre, and Jlret or right Jlelde, Their stations are shown in our diagram as given in Mr. Peverelly*e " Book of American Pastimes.*' The Captain of the nine is
generally catcher. He stands behind the striker, catches pitched-baUs, fbuLballa, and tips, and watches the field generally. The pitcher^e station and duties are defined m Bule n. These two players have the most important positions of the side. The Jlrtt baeenum catches balls thrown or struck to him, and holds them on his base beftire the striker reaches it. The ssMMid ofid ^Atnfteesmsw chiefly touidildajerBbefbreieaehi their bases. The thort-etap stops balls, and backs up the in-field generally. The three 4eldera field all balls which reach them. Th^, especially, should be good throwers and sure catchers ; but great profloieney in both these departments is required ttom the whole of the nine. The nmpirt^e duties are minutely defined in Bole VH. . whioh we have not ooneidereditneoessaiy torepirink They maj be summarised as lbUow8^— -He is to i
HOMS^BAiK
eATCHCR ^
A BAIB-BAXX nSLB.
compute
SeCRCKS^ ^
AUXRJOAN BA8B mi-T. K]
riad ont, to Mttle dUhnnon, to dsddo m to lUr and mAir jUas, , balks, otc, and to daMrmlna wben play tball ba nupendad or podlioii to * dltBcoH one, raqairing great flmmeaa and Impar- tiBUtr- UK •mm'ii "Dlerk of the gama." Uany alaborata mMliodi oT aomliig Bi« prantbed in *"—<-« ; bat EngUah platan will find no dinonUr In dariaing a plan of
BUIOUBT OF THB BCLEB AND BZai7I.ATI0NS, ^ iMMMdnl iv (Jht ffotiDnaJ .aawaiotia* qf Batt BaU Ptaftrt.fiir IBSe.
Baci. 1. — Tki iaU mnat weigh not leaa than five, or more tlwD Atb and oua quartar, •DDOaa. It ninit meame not ICM than nine and ana qnaiMr, Dor mors than nine and AM bAtC lochaa ta elrcnmltaienoa. It moat be oompoaed of India'Tnbber and yam, «OT«r«d wtth laHliar.
hm, 1. — Tlf bat moat ba round, and nnut not aioeed tiro and a-half Inchaa la
Bee. i.—Tii bata mnat ba (bnr In niunber, at eqtul dfstnJioea &mo each oOier, ad IkManed upoo the eomen of a aqnara whoae aides an roipectiTBly ninBtj fatt. each of (be base* mnat oorar one aqnan foot of inifhoe, and the nrnplre aHoold ba Us to aaa tlim. The flnt, aeoond, and tlilrd bases mnst be canvaa baga, painted rtOm, and Oiled wftb aome soft mUerial; and the lioine-bsae and pUeher's pointe boold aaoli be ntaiked by a Oat plate painted white.
Bee. «.~-The boae hom whicb the ball is (tmok shall be nailed the home baat^ ad mnat ba dlrBiitl7 rqipoalte the aeoond baae i the Bnt baae mtm alwi^i be that B the rifht head, and the third base that on tlie left hand of the itrlker when UBBKjhm hto poaftlan *t aa home baae. In malobea, a line elull be narked fton
U
168 AHEBICAN BASE BALL.
tibe liome to the first baM, and from the home to the third baee^ eo aa to be diatinctly Been by the mnpire. The baae bag ia to be cosaideorad the baae.
BXTLB n. — PITCHnrO.
Sec. 1. — ^The pitcher's poaiUon shall be diown by two lines six feet in length, at right angles to the line from home to the second bsee, and having their centrea upon that line at two fixed iron plates, placed at pointa forty^five and fifty^one feet distant from the home base. The pitcher most stand within these Unes, and mnst deliver the ball as near as poaslble over the centre of the home base, and flaurly for the striker.
Sec. 2. — Should the pitcher fai\ to deliver to the striker fiiir bells, the mnpire, after warning him, most call '* one baU,'* and if the pitcher persists in sach action, " two " and "three balls." When three balls have been called, the striker shall take the flrsibase without being pat out ; but no base runner shall take a base on called balla, nnlesa he is obliged to leave the base he occupies.
Sec. 3. — The baU must be pitched, not thrown or jerked. If the pitcher moves, as though to deliver the ball, he shall so deliver it, and must have neither foot out- aide the lines of his position, either when delivering, or moving to deliver, the ball. If he Ihil in either of these particulars, it shail be declared a balk.
Sec. 4. — ^No player shall be put out on any hit ball on which a balk or a baU has been called ; nor shall a strike or a foul ball be called, or a base run on such a hit ball. But bases can be taken on third called balls and on "balked " balls in accord- ance with Sec. 2 of Rule IL No " baU" or "strike" shaU be called until the ball has passed the home base.
avLS ni. — ^BARnrcK
Sec. 1. — ^The striker, when striking at the ball, must stand astride a line drawn through the centre of the home base, not exceeding three flMt l^m either side thereof* and parailel with the front line of the pitcher's position, and he must not take any backward step when striking at the balL If he infringes this rule, a foul strike shall be called ; and when three such strikes have been called, the striker shall be declared out. If a ball on which such a strike is called be hit and caught, either tBxr or foul, the striker shall be declared out. No base shall be run on a foul strike. As soon aa the striker has struck a fiiir ball, he shall be considered a player running tibe bases.
Sec. 2. — Players must strike in regular rotation.
Sec. 3. — Should a striker stand at the bat without striking at ftdr balls, the umpire, after warning him, shall call *'one strike ;" and if he persists in such action, "two" and <* three strikes." When three strikes are called, and the ball be canght^ either before touching the ground, or upon the first bound, the striker shall be declared out, pro- vided the balls struck at are not those on which balls or balks have been caUed, or not those struck at for the purpose of wilftilly striking out. If three balls are struck at and missed, and the last one is not caught, either flying or upon the fint bound, the striker must attmnpt to make his run.
See. 4. — ^The striker is out if a foul ball is caught either before touching the grotoid
AMEKIOAK BASB BALL. 103
or vpan the flnt bonod ; or, if a fUr ball is strtusk, and the ball be held before toaidb^ag the groimd ; or if a ftdr ball is straok and the ball be held by an adrerBary on fttst baae before the striker touches that base; or if 4 fool ball be oanght from the hands or person of a plajer before touching the groimd ; or if a fonl ball be similarly caught •Iter touching the ground but once. No ftUr or fonl ball, if caught firom any other oljgect than the person of a player, even before touching the ground, shall put a player ouL
BVL> rr. — ^BUinmre ths basks.
Bee 1. — ^Flayers must take their bases in the order of striking ; and when a fair
ball is struck, and not caught flying, the first base must be vacated, as also the second
and third bases, if th^y are occupied at the same time. Flayers may be put out on
aaiy bae^ under these droumstances, in the same manuBr as when ruiming to the
Bee 2. — ^Any player running the bases is out if, at any time, he is touched by the ball while in play without some part of his person being on the base.
See. 3. — ^No run or bas6 can be made on a foul ball. Such a ball shall be con* sidered dead untfl it is in the hands of the pitcher. Nor can a run or base be made when a lUr ball has been caught without haying touched the ground ; but the ball shall be considered slire and in play. In both of the abore cases players running bases shall return to them, and may be put out in returning as when running to first base. Wben the ball is caught they tdbj, however, run their bases directly after it is settled in the hands <^ the pitcher catching it
Sec. 4. — ^When a balk is made by the pitcher, erexy player running the base is entitled to one base, without being put out
Sec 6. — A player Tnft!r*"g the home bsee shall be entitled to score one run ; but if two hands are already out, no player running home at the time the ball is struck can make a run to count in the score of the game if the striker or the player running the is put out before touching the iirst base.
See. 6. — ^Flayers running bases must keep on the direct line between them, and toodi them in the following order : — Ist, Snd, Srd, and home ; and, if returning, tbqr must reverse this order. No base can be run or player put out on a dead ball.
BULS V. — THB eiMB.
Sec. 1. — ^The gNne shall consist of nine innings to each side, when, should the immber of runs be equal, the play shall bo continued (unless it be agreed to consider the game as drawn), until a majority of runs upon an equal number of innmgs shaU be declared, whereupon the game is concluded. An inning must be concluded at the tiBM the third hand is put out
[If the game cannot be fiidrly concluded, it shall be decided by the score of the last equal innings played, and the par^ having the greatest number of runs shall be declared the winner ; unless one nine shall have completed their inning, and the other inne shall have exceeded the score of their opponents in their inoompleted inning, in which case the nine having the highest score shall be declared the winner. But no
AMBBIOAK BABX BAU^ u pl^ad nslaia Sn fsnlngi on Moh tUa ixn b«eo
Tlie only section of tliia mla which la of mi&cisnt importAnoQ to giro bare ie Uia£ on "fbultAlla,'* which ia aa follows; —
IT Uie t»u bom thg ttroka of the biu Snt tonebei tbs gTonnd, Uie penon of ■ pl^w, or tay other otgect beyond Ihs tins or nn^ of home and the Bist base, or homa and the Uiiid hue, it shall be (armed font, and mnit be u deolued by Uw ■UBplie nnukad. If tha boll flnt tonoh the groond, dthar npon, or in front of Uu Una or nui([e of Iboee buae, it shall be oooildei^d <Ur.
have briefly aammariiad en pp. SBS-l.
It doea not appnu' that Baae Ball haa beoome very popular In Ihli oraoliXi and wa doubt whether Kagliah ichaalboya will srer be diipoaed to inbititDle lie aomewhat diunbroiu coda of laws for tbe (Mr and eaay onea which regolate the aid Itailllar game of BonudeTB. If we once get luad to a thing in a aimple fhrm, we gosroely erar Bka It aUerad mnch, ersn altboosh it may (kirly elaim to be altered for Ihe bettar. Bnl, in any oaae, our yomig leadeia are now folly gaalitlad to comprehend tha Taiiooi and aomawhat oompllcMad dntlaa at inlaid and oni-fleld, uaplie and aootar.
Catctn, $iU\pi. intr Slriku.
'A CROSBB Is, like Base BaU, imported from Amerioft.
The time of its invention is not known ; Imt when the
French first visited Canada it was the fltvonrite pastime of
the Indian inhabitants. It was borrowed l^ the settlers of
Hontreal, some years ago, fhmi an Iroqnois tribe, and has since
spread rapidly through the whole dominion of Canada, becoming,
in fkct, the national game of the colonists. La Crosse bears some
resemblance to the Indian Ban game plsjred by the Choctaws,
and which was described at p. 21 of this book. There are, however,
several difllarenoes, which will become apparent when the rales have
been examined.
In the year 1867, a Canadian, named Captain Johnson, brought over a nnmber of Indian Ia Crosse players, recruited from the Seneca, Oneida, Mohawk, and other tribes belonging to the vicinity of Montreal, with a view to introdnce the game into England. The troup» had ateeady naade the toor of the United States, and some of them had played before the Frinee of Wales when he visited Canada in 1860. After exhibiting privately at ItMnfoil Hoose, Walham Green, they gave a nnmber of pnblio performances at the Crystal Fdaoe. The skill displayed l^ the players, the grace of the game itself, kelped cot as it was hy the smart bhie and red Indian dresses, tended greatly to make the exhibition popular with English spectators. Several La Crosse dnbs were, con- sequently, formed in this coontry. In the beginning of 1868, these were combined into a *' La Crosse Association," by which the Rales, hereafter given, were drawn up. The Association has also issued a convenient litUe mannal of instroctions, compiled by 3ir. Mart: H. Bobinson, of the Civil Service La Crosse Club, firom which most of our information relating to the origin and nature of the gsme has been derived.
There is, however, no evidence that La Crosse has, np to this time, become very general here. It has, nevertheless, many reoonmiendations to oar readers. In the first place, it reqoires few appliances — the crosses, ball, and five poles for the goals and centre, being the total. It is a capital winter amnaement. It is quite as exciting, bat not nearly as dangeroos, as hookey and football ; and although the rules are so few and
simple that the elements of the game may be easily acquired, the skill requisite to make a fizat>sate thrower and ronner is only the result of long and diligent practice.
Tkt Crotm, so ssmad tnm tti resembbmoe to a orotier (Fr. Mtwtt), if a hidkoiT^
166
LA 0B088B.
wood stick, bent nt tito top into » hook. Hidkoiy is genonHy ohoeen as being the Ugbteet, strongeitt aM beet malerial for the purpoee. Towards ^ . t^d the handle the stick is either roond or oral ; beyond the pin, C, ib takes the shape shown in section o^ A. It then tapers away nnfcil, at J^
the sharpest part of the onrre. A, it assnTnes the form of section e, d. Here the width should be rather less than an inch, and a good edge jgt is indispensable for picking np the balL At B the crosse is pierced, and a string passed throogh it^ both ends oX which are brought down and firmly fhstened ronnd the pin C. This keeps it in shape. Three other strings are then strstohed from the pin to the top; a network is fietetened across them, and laced to holes bored along the edge, which, aa shown in the sections, has been tapered for the pur- pose. Finally, the handle is roughened, or bound with string, and the croese is complete. The rulss state that it shall not be of a greater width than a foot The distance from the pin, C, to the top of the croese is about two fset five inches. The whole length is generally from four to flye feet, but a shorter crosse is often used. "There is little or no adTantage," says the Association's Handbook, "in a large crosse." Gut is best for the netting, which must not be bagged, or, as the Canadian rules explain, "must be flat when the ball is not on it." Such a crosse as here described, can be made or supplied by any dealer in cricketing implements.
The baU is described in Rule S. The Association recommends a ball with a wooden core, " too much springiness being undesirable." It should not be too light. Lilly- white's ordinaiy eighteenpenny hookey ball will serve vexy well for the purpose.
Tht goai$ are four upright poles, with flags placed, as prescribed by Bale S. A fifth pole is placed in the centre of the ground, which is described below.
TKS nXLD.
By Rule S the maTlmum ground is fixed at 260 yards long by 160 yards wide, and the minlmuTn ground at 100 yards by 60 yards. The boundaries may be marked in the usual way. *< Twelve players," says Rule 13, ** constitute a flill side ;** but a smaller number can, of course, play. The diagram shows the players of one side set ont. The other side is set out in the same manner. There is a goal-kaeper, A ; a point, B, placed twenty yards a-head of the goal-keeper; and a eoverpoiiU, C. At the middle tiag is a centre, D, who Amms, i.e., " tussles " for the ball with the adverse centre in commencing the game ; and, near the opponent goal, is placed a home, B. F, F, F, F, F, F, F, are the JMdert, distributed as the captain pleasea. '<One forward playw is usually put in advance of the centre flag, close to the enemy's cover-point. Bach side hss a man standing behind each ftusing man, or behind xta own frtcing man only, to take the ball tram him if he succeeds in getting it awaj trcm his opponent." The best arrangement of the fleld leaves the players (tho pokUe excepted) disposed over the ground in paira of Criend and Ibe. Th^ should
LA CROSSE.
187
k«8p lo their ttrtJom aa mneh m poaaible, otherwiae the game beoomaa diaorderly.
TbJa ia yvj impartantg and appUea moat strictly to the goal-keeper and point. The
latter fihoald always be the best ball-stopper of hia aide, aa he haa to preyent opponents tnim ranning in, and obligee them to throw the ball from a safe distance at the goal. The dntj of the home is to get the ball throngh the goal when it is thrown in l^ his own side.
Ob
r O
Oc
o o
T
F
o
o
BULES or m OAm.
The roles of the Montreal Clnb first used in this country — ^though sufficiently com- prehensive— ^were thought to require modi- fication for English play. The ** La Crosse Association,*' therefore, drew up the follow- uig* by which ail clubs belonging to it are obliged to abide. They were confirmed in February, 1868.
1. — T%8 crotae may be of any length, but the woven network must not be bagged nor of a greater width than one foot.
8. — The bail shall be of solid india-rub- ber, not more than nine nor leas than eight inchea in circumference.
3. — The goals shall be upright posts, aeven feet apart, with a tape or bar aoroos them six feet fhmi the ground ; when prao- tSeable, thi^r shaU be placed at not more than 260 nor less than 160 yards apart, and the ground ahall not be more than 100 nor less than 60 yards wide.
4. — t%e game shall be started by the ball being placed on the ground opposite the centre flag, between two pl»yers on opposite sidea, who shall ** tussle " for the ball with their croasea. Thia is called *' flacing."
6. — When the ball goes out of bounds, it shaU be thrown in [from the croaae] by the player who first touehes it with his crosse. When it goes behind goal without passing throogh goal, it iJiall be thrown out by one of the players behind whose goal it has poiised.
[The goal-keeper usually throws oat, and the ball should be thrown to one side of Utegoal.]
0. — ^The ball must not be oaught, thrown, nor picked up with the hand, except fai tbe oane provided for by Rule 7 ; but a ball coming in the air may be blocked or patted away with the hand to protect the &ce or body ; otherwiae it mnst not be
A IJl
7. — BhonU tha bill lodge In may plaoB tu
il I17 tha tund, and IramedlaUl^ plaosd oi
S. — The ball ahall not be hit irhlle oa tbe groaad, nor Uoked.
[The ball ma]r> <^ oocna, be ■^ook at in iho air ; and pnihln^ or apoonlcff It, ta the atlempC U lUl it, la parmlltad.]
B. — Ko pl^er ahall wear apLhed aolaa,
10. — A goal Im obtained when the ball fi oaoiBd to paaa betwrMu tbe ffoal-poata and ooder the bar or tape, In an; numur whaterer fa; osa of the defending aide, or in anj manner not forbidden by theee rnlea. b; oca of the aCtaoking dda.
[IT the ball bonnda Ihrmgh the smJ oIT the penon of a player. It ooont* as tlia JUDS, provided it ma not nuWrl; prapelled in (be flnt toaMuoe.]
iball the; dellberatel; trip, Uriks, or pnah eaoh other.
IS. — No pilfer (hall Chrow hia croaae.
[Thia mle ma designed to put a atop to a praotlM among Engliah idajan Of throwing thalT oroaaa at the ball when carried on an opponent* a croaaa.]
IS. — Alter eaoh game the playen ahall change goale, nnleae otherwiae agreed.
11. — A maloh ihall be dedded b; a nu^otitf of goala won dnrlng the time ape- oUed finpla;.
IS. — TwelTB playera shall oonadtnta a fall aide.
10, — Ko ohanga of plajera ahall be mads aAar a matoh haa oommanoad, wtthoat the oonaent ofboth paitla.
the bell throogh tiia goal a thalT opponenta ; and, ta doing ao, auapt in Hia eaaaa proTlded fOr bj Bal«aaai>d7, "the ball mnat nerer be eanght, thiown. nor picked np bf (he band." The eroiae mtut alwsja b« naeit. When the gronsd
beat pl^ar of eaoh aids, taking hia poaltlan of oenln, " Ikoea " Us op-
tt bMk batwean hl« lagi to iha plajen ct hia own tSde itaitdlnK bebbtd ■ it la aHlur aeiied. or thrown to onoUiar plSTar, sod ao puaaa baokwuda la ovsr the flald mtn, M Uat, tt la oarrlad or Uuvwn thmnith the goaL
It k pntsbla Uut Lb Crmat will Hod msoh gmtsr &Tanr wltli taja Vb BfelL Then ia a frealuvaa and Tuivtltij at>onl it that oumot 19 gfj ~.>hing Of ut bcdng amphatlcBllj a gaiaa of akOI, which aloua onglit to IkTOBrita in gngliah plaTgronnila. It ta tnia tliM a aznall UDotuit ot In naka a baj a modentel; good planar, hot tha aria of throwing, eatclking, as with tha ball — ■mellenea in all of wUoh ia raqnialta to make a Bi wB haTa nid. the raaolt of patlnit praotioa and oatoral laoility. Wa have not oon- aldarail It aamaaiy to putlCDlaiUa tha TWioua mathoda glran in Ur. Babiaaon'a book aa snidaa to laainan. Fnbablf Inatlnot will help onr ^onng naden ai mncb a* Boy writton inafrnetionL If no^ thej oan have no batter tntor than Hm Aaaoclation*a
Oofl word in DonoIoaloiL. Yonng plajera and baginnara bftTa a habit of '* handng tha ban," witiiih cannM be too maoh conOamoad. Thai* ia nothing for it bnt keeping la Tonr own poat. Otherwiae 70a win Intercept and impede eaeb other, a genera]
bebnr, nothing but a teen* of
' ftppcan tlut Bowli
f UCU, HOOfdliif lo Sulaxpetr*. ma tha rapljr of u
wu In Usfa Ml««m BTrr
bare bMn f— the larj t«
—a told lawn Dotared with doaalj-ahoni fnaa. with bladaa ai flm
aa th« pile of Talret i a pleuaat arlxmr, otwitowu with olmiBtla and honorancUa, or Uw awMt-aomtad lanaimlnei and a happT part^ ■alojioc tha apart; whll* tb* idd, ahDwaring down its ganlal !■;■. fluiaaa tha irvdnst earpat to ^ipear of a atlU nan TiTld graan.
"Within tlie praasnt ontnlT, and paltiiRilu'lj tn Bootliud, tha game, pltjrad fn th* opan air, and on a waU-tnrfad fiaan or lawn — aa dlatin^nlahad in>m the bowUng^Uej — haa soma to oooopf ■ U«h podtton among popular rsenatlona. At praamt, th*
BOWLS. 171
»
bo«liiigvgxeeniii«jftlxii08tbeooiitiderodaaan 'in^ It !■ to be
finud in nearly ereiry town north of the Tweed, and ia often laid out with ezqniaite bamty. It is gradoally finding ita way acroaa the border, like another grand Soottiah 9nBe» golf. Edinburgh has now a considerable nomber of bowling clubs, with many exeaOent greensy and not a few ekilfal playersj bat the west of Scotland, especially Oliagow and Ayrahize, aze the atrongholds of bowling, and there, aa also in the shires of Kirkcodbrii^t and Domfrles, axe to be found the finest greens, the greatest number of pl^rsra, and the most adTniraWe play."— OIoIm fncyelofxsdui.
Bowls may be played by seveial single plsyers, or there msy be two or three on a Bde as psztners; each plsyer has two balls, and he who oonunenoes the game has also a smaller ball, called a Jack, which he casts on the green, bowling it to any distuoe he pleases. He then bowls a ball towards the jack, the next player f oUows hJB example, and each player bowls in torn, until all the balls are expended. Partners m not to follow each other. The position of the balls with respect to the Jack ia then eiaouned— that which lies nearest to it counts as one to the player; and if his other ban—or supposing the game to be plsyed with partners, either of their balls— is nearer tte jack than any baQ belonging to the players on the other side, then his side are en- titled to aoore aa many more as they have balls thus placed. The game then proceeds ■s balore— the player whose ball was nearest to the jack leading the round off. The players bowl from the different ends of the green alternately, until the game is con- dnded ; tiunigh if played with two partners, two plsyers, one belonging to each side, csa bowl from either end without changing. The number for game is generally ekvea; wiien, however, the players are numerous, fifteen or some other odd nimiber b frequently fixed upon.
The interest of ^e game consists mainly in driying your opponent's ball away fma the jack, or the jack from the ball, and by bowling your own ball as near to the jack aa possible.
The baDs used at bowls sre biassed, that le, they are not perfectly round. A nail, or some other msrk, is placed at the thick end of the ball, and, when bowled, the
rked end is usually held towards the left hand of the bowler. The bias of the ball scoording to dronmstancea. When the game Is plsyed on a wide and lerel the ban chosen should be nesrly round ; but if the green be small in extent, a ban Willi a considerable bias is best
Vbe terms used in bowling are*, "to bowl wide," which is when the bias does not hold, or is not strong enough; "narrow," when it ia too stroi^, or holds too much; " fiaely bowled," is when Ihe ground is well chosen, and the ball passes nesr the jack, even ttioDgh it goes much beyond it; "bowling through," or a "yard over," is done in otdsr to move the jack; an "over-bowl," is that which goee beyond it; a "bowl laid at hand," ia thai put down within the player's reach, to bo in the way of the next bowler, and hinder his having the advantage of the best ground; "bowling at IsBfttti," ia neither bowling through, nor short; "a dead length," is a just, or exact, <"»; "throwing," ot " flinging," ia discharging a ball with a strength, purposely too snat tor a i*»»»fl>th, in order to carry off either the jack or some near bsU; "bowl or " *"«*T»"g wood," is when a ball has free passage withoi* atriking on any
179 AHEBICAir BOWLS.
oU&er ; "get off/' Is when a bowl, being naxrower, is wanted to be wider; "bowl best at jack," is tliat nearest the Jack; and "drawing a cast," or "bowl," is to win it >y Ixowling nearer, withont stirring either the ball or jack. A ball is said to " rub " when it meets with some obstacle in the ground which retards its motion, and weakens its force I and it is " gone " when far beyond the Jack. " Jack," signifies the ball laid for a mark ; "mark," is a proper bowling distance, not under so manj yards, and beine at least a yard and a half from the edge of the green; "lead," ia the adTsntage Oi throwing the block, and bowling first ; " oast " is one best bowl at an end ; and " end,'* is a hit, or when all the bowls are out. A "lurch " game is gained when one side soorsf tieren before their opponents haye scored fiye. The laws of the game are z—
I. AU the plajext must start with one foot behind the hob, or stsrting-plaoe.
n. The bowls must be deliTered with an underhand throw; if cast overhand, or flung, the player loses a point.
m. Ties (ihat is, two or moze bowls at equsl distances from the jack) must be played over again before the point is soored. except when the majority of bowls near to the jack wins the point for the side.
IV . The winners of the first game lead oft for the next.
▼. When the jack is struck from its place, all the bowls are to be messured from the spot at which it last stopped.
YI. Overthrows and underthrows (that is, bowls that go beyond the green or the marked distance, snd bowls that go lees tiiansix yards from the hob, count each a pt^t against the side to which the player belongs.
Vn. Striking the jack counts two points.
These several roles will be found sufficient for all ordinary puzpoees, though on some bowling-greens they have vezy accurate and elaborate laws.
▲naXCAV BOWLB.
Probably this game is a mere revival of the " Bowles," or " Dutch Bubbers," of oar snoestors. In the good old days when- Bess was queen, a bowling-aUey was the usual resort of gentlemen snd men of high degree ; snd in a f <»gotten poem we learn that it was usual for
An tamdMd kpl^littp, tnily toldBi Vo plijr with bowlM In AnflgrM oolda.
The modem game of American Bowls is also played in a narrow alley or covered ground. Nine tall, slender wooden pins are set on a frame as in Skittles, and the player bowls at them from a distance of thirty yards <»: more. The ball used is not flattened, but round. Several sixed baUs are used by the player, according to whether he has two or more pins to bowl at. The ball must be bowled along the ground, not thrown, as in Skittles. A boy is ususlly employed to set up the pins as they are over- tamed, to call out the number of points made, and to retom the ball. This he does
QUOITS. 173
hf phciBgH OB a rdaII trough, or wooden grutter, on either side of the alley, whence it roUa hj a gradual descent to the player. Points are oonnted in Tarioxu ways towards gome, which is generally a htindred up, and he who first gets the required number wins. The pins are set up, according to the fancy of the players, in various ways, as •qnares. diansonds, circles, porallelograms, etc. It is curious to note how games go out of fashion, and rerive, take new names, and become popular. Football and ianerican Bowls are instances in point.
Lova BOWU.
In tome parts of the country the game of Lozig Bowls is popular. It consists ■imply in bowling a skittle-ball along the ground for any determinate distance in the smallest number of bowls. On the 4th of August, 1739, the following advertisement appeared in the newspapers :— " A fsrmer of Croydon undertakes, for any sum by wager, to bowl a skittle bowle from that town to London Bridge (about elerea miles) in five hToidzed times." The wager was accepted, and the farmer accomplished the task in four hmsdred and forty-five bowls, stvting with each new bowl from the place where the skittle-ball stopped.
qaom.
" mr6. fan tbs Isboan of th* diao oama on. With atcody itcp aad alow, Hlppomedon; Aztftal Bad atrons, 1m p<dMd ttaa wall-known waiaht. By Fhlatjaa wamad, and find by Mnaathaas* fatc^ That to avoid, and thia to emiilate. B3a Tlcorooa arm ha triad bafora ha flmiff, Bnoad all hla narvaa, and avazy alnaw stnmff | Ihen, with a tempeat'a whirl, and wary aya, Paraoad hla oaat. and hurled tha orb on hl^ ( Tha oib on high, tanaoloiia of ita oonraak Traa to tha mighty arm that gnve It foraa, Var orarleapa all bonnda, and Joya to aao 2fei snolaiit bard aeouze of Tiotoiy.**
Hie game of Qnoits, or one nearly similar, is of very ancient date. Stmtt says, " The quoit seems evidently to have derived its origin from the ancient Disou^ and with us in the present day it is a dronlar plato of iron, perforated in the middle : not always of one size, bat larger or smaller to suit the strength or oonveaience of the several candidates. To play at this game, an iron pin, oalleda hob, is driven into the grotmd to within a few inchee <rf the top, and at the distance of eighteen, twenty, or more yards— for the distanoe is optional^a second pin of iron is also made fast in a similar manner, and two or more persons, who are to contend for the victory, stand at <me of the iron marks, and throw an equal number of quoits to the other, and the nearest of them to the hob are reelroned towards the game." But this is not universally the case when any but the quoit nearest the pinisoonoemed; for instance, if aquoit belonging to A lies nearest to the bob, and a quoit belonging to B the second, A can claim but one towards the game* thoogh all his other qiMits Ue nearer to the mark than all the other quoits of B, becaaee one quoit of B being the second nearest to the hob, oafs out. se it is called.
174 NINE-PIKS.
an b^dnd it ; if no waeh quoit had intorf ered, then A wonld have vockoned all hia <itioita aa one each. Having oaataU their qnoita, the oandidatea walk to the opposite aide and determine the atate of the play; then taking their stand there, thej throw their qnoita back again, and oontinne to do ao alternately aa long aa the game oontinnea.
Eaoh player has two qnoita, and one point ia oonnted for each qnoit that la nearest the hob. Fifteen points form the game for fbnr playexat eleven for two playera. If the pin be struck from the perpendicular, tiie ground line of the pin to the nearest edge of the quoit is considered fair measurement. Ties play again, and the umpire aettles all disputes.
Formerly rustics, not having the round perforated quoit to play with, used horse- shoes, and in many places the qnoit to this day ia called " a shoe."
A species of quoit, with the edge made ertremel/ aharp, is used by some of liie natives of Hindostan aa a weapon of offence, and when thrown with a atrong hand it ia capable of prodxtdng a very aevere wound.
"Similar to thia game was the throwing of the 'aolot,' a heavy sphericsl maaa of stone or iron, perforated through the centra to admit a rope or thong, by the aid of which it was thrown. In this game the furthest throw was the successful one. It ia still practised by the monntaineera of the Appenxell, in Switierland."— Ckom^srirs Bnoydoipadia,
snTTLKB, mrs-rais, btc.
These are all modifications of the same game, the whole art in which consists in knocking down certain wooden pins, placed in order upon a frame, with a heavy round or cheese-shaped baU. The player who succeeds in knocking down the pins, from a given distance, in the fewest number of times, wins the game. In SkitUm the ball must be thrown, not bowled, and every skittle is considered fairly down when it is overturned by a blow from the ball, or by the falling of either of the other pins. He is considered a good player who can knock down the whole nine skittles in two throws, and an excel- lent one if he succeed in frequently overturning the lot in a single throw. The great secret is to so throw the ball as to hit the first pin and the second at the same instant. The ball then strikes two other skittles in its passage, ond the chances are that aeveo* ei^t, or nine pins will be overthrown. In Skittles the balls are placed on a wooden fjrame, in a diamond square, with a single pin towards the player, thus : —
Dutch Pmu difFer from Skitties only in the pins being larger and o
more slender, with a centre pin, called the king, somewhat higher o o than the rest. It is the object of the player either to displace the king o o o without disturbing the other pins, or to knock down the latter and o o leave the king in its place. o
Formerly Skittles was played with four pina, and Dutch Pins and Kine Pins with nine each; but the four-pin game ia now nearly obsolete, the great weii^t of the ball rendering the game rather a toil than a pleasure. Sometimes the game is called Four Comers.
There ia a game called Nm§ Pint, played in some parts of the country, in which a heavy ball is suspended by a rope from the ceiling, the object of the playera being to
PUTTING THE STONE. ITS .
swing this boll at the skitAleB, placed on a frame in the mnial way. A modifloation of this game is made to senre as an infuit's toy. It is too simile to zequixe farther deemiptiou.
THBOwnro nn' hamksb.
TUs is an athletic exercise rather than an smusiTig game; but it has been popular with rustics for oenttiries. The sledge-hammer is nsoally employed, and he who can tlirow it farthest is the victor in Um contest. Allied to this amusement is another athletio sport, called
ruTTnro thx btovs.
This is the Scottish fonn of "throwing the hammer," and differs from it merely in the sabetitation of a heavy stone for a heavy hammer, and the Uot that the stone has to be taken up and held above the shoolder before it is thrown, while the hammer is swoDg underhand by ib» handle.
Casting of the bar snd hammer, says Strott, is frequently mentioned by romance wrfters as part of a hero's education ; and a poet of the sixteenth century thinks it higUy commendable for kings and princes, by way of exercise, to " throw the stone, the baire, or the plummet." Henry the Eighth, according to Holinshed, retained the "casting of the bar" among his favourite amusements, even after he came to the throne. At the commencement of the seventeenth century these pastimes seem to have gone out of faahion with people of quality, for a writer of that date, deeoribing a complete gentleman, speaks of Throwing the Hammer as an exercise "proper only for soldiers in camp, or for the amusement of the king's guard, but by no means beseeming ofaobOity."
jack's auvx.
This simple game is an adaptation of the ancient English amusement called Duck- stooe. The Jack is an iron figure, generally representing a sailor with folded arois, fiud upon a stand. This figure is set up on the ground at a distance of ten or twelve feet from the starting-plaoe, and the players aim heavy wooden balls at it, and endeavoar to overtuxn it. But this is rather diffleult, unless the ball hits the head or upper part of the figure, in consequence of its base being so weighted as to eoanteract the shock of the blow. Various rules are made by players, but generally he who knocks down the Jack the greatest number of timee in a given number of throws wins the game.
KXD, WHITS, AVD BLVX.
This game is played with three cubes of wood, numbered on their sides Uke dice— the first from blsnk to 6, the second from 1 to 6, and the third from 4 to 9. These cohes sre placed on short posts of wood, severally painted red, white, and blue, and set up on the ground. Each player has three wooden balls, which he throws one after anotJher towards the cubes from the Btarting>place, which may be at any distance previously agreed on •, and according to the number on the upper ftMe of each cube, nhm it is knocked off the poet, he counts so many towards the game. This game may be played by two or more persons, either singly or in sides, or sny agreed number of points, the highest winning.
XUKT aUJiT.
Xunt Sail; Is ■ mo* modilcfttlon of the Thres Sticks m Pennj of Qm fsjn tnA nee oonrsei ; ssd tbongh thace i* naJlj noaung in the khdb, die plsren oontiiie to get * ODdsldanble uuonut at tan snd marrioieiit out of tl. The Amit Sollj oonsuti of k wooden head palntod bluck. ud deeontod iritli s liidicniiul;-tihsp«d old cap. A short pipe is Axed is her mouCh^ and the whole game is to knock the pipe awoj with a Hhort hearj sticky which ia thrown from a distance of half-a-doiea or more yards. The great art of the thrower Is to strike the pipe with the end of the stick nther than with its side, bnt when Uds snd Toong ladlia flry, tiie/ are not yiirj pairticdlar In this ceipeot. Whenpl^edln Btdea, tha game becomes rerj amnsiDg ^ and while the fun is bolsterooSj tJw plojere ooimot tail to gain heeJth in tlie exercise, Toeooceed, aUjcmhsTetodoisto
ttiit Sub ^un nb Cltntu Stnig^
E?i1C1MCj «r^'(f (SSI
Tha mrt of Fnicin^ is ' IT «tc«Uent a: a body. All dilDtrciiCM, loo. in ilie and weight ^■»w*i iba p*rtiM oobtondlng, ore Dflatnliied. In iti practlofl tliar« und be no
178
FSNdNO.
rfi ftaWWi Fenoing among the Moampliahments neoenaiy to what is oaUed a HbenJ ediiOKtion. That it has these zneritB, there can be no doabt ; and it is, therefore, oon- fldeatly reoomniended to youth, as being not omlj perf eotty nnezoeptionable, but erca saperior, in most respects, to all other exeroiaes.
yOILS, MASKS, STO.
Tlio foils shonld be proportioned to the size of those who nse them. Thiity>two inches beyond the hilt is the mediun for men. The iron button shonld be oorered with leather, that the eflEbct of a thrust be felt as little as possible by the par^ reoeiT- ing it. It is necessaxy to use a gloTe on the right hand, padded on the back and the ontsides of the fingers. The masks must have wire fronts, stout enough to resist an aoeidental thrust at the fHoe. An eaey dress should be worn ; and it is usual, in academiea, to h»Te a spot, or heart, on the left side of the breast of the waistcoat.
HOW fO HOLn TEM WOTh.
The hilt must be flat in your huid, so that the two edges are nearly horiaontal when you throw yourself upon guard. Your thumb ahould be stretched along ttie upper flat part of the hilt» within half an inch of the shell, and the pummel ahonld rest under your wrist.
rosmovB ow m »vaxd amu luvob.
The more completely to illustrate the positions of the guard and the lunge, we will
separate them in such a manner as to show the exect situation of the body and limbs in each diviaaoan ; enabling a youth to practise with predsiafn thmt which is really the ground-work of the ait, and upon the exact execution, of which all hope of exoeUeaoe must be founded.
Standing perfectly upright, looking at yomr ad* ▼emry, with your tight side towards him, shooldere thrown back, right heel at the hollow of the left toot, and feet at right angles, the foil in hand point down, the left hand by the leftside, palm open ; mtee the right aim with the point of the foil direq^ed to the right lh>nt till the hilt is as high as the head ; turn the thumb down, and make a diagonal sweep of the aim and blade, till the shell or guard touehea (he left hand ; place the left hand, back downwaxda« on the blade does to the guard, and raise both araw
abore the head, with the point of the foil to the rear (Fig. 1).
Lower the right arm, bending the elbow till the hilt of the foil is opposite the
oentre of the right breast — ^the point as high as the Ikoe ; the left arm to remain the band open and fingers inelined towards the palm, the hands ^wfll
J-
r
ng. L
gnmid (iBeris. S).
with the Ml imkle, uid tf rlf ht uiglm Titli Ilia IcA foot Incline tfid point of tfaa fcdl lomrdi the left; gnwp theUlt with the naile upwsnUf moYmg theUftde
I wilh the ud the left knee bait until It IB (ha (Dot I the bod; being eqiiaUr
Thnxw (he pobit of the IMl Kinranl lowardi your ■dTenUT'i bie—l, niiinfr the hUt ae high u the ihooLder i prcgecl the light knee niher berond (he Ice; ■tnigblen the left leg, the Ibot bcdng nQI JUt on the gnnmd; let (Ul the Mt hud, until the arm ii Btnigbt, end (be hand twelte
(hnwu taok, and body eidewaye. » (hM jTO
In per (Fig. 3), (he lam (haiild be ex- tended with foroe, uid all (he ibo-
"fc fc eo (a mnnble K lunso, the* ymt
aliMMfy n^ be deoelTed,. end bmoght to the oppoeiDg vitOa, Lot the right Bim be thrown tanmH ■ (riSe before the et(an«ion of the other llmba end body, (hat
VhcD on the eiteiuioii. tba Umbi uid oUm paru of the bod; are In proper podtka tor tba lunge, whioh la oompMed b^ liini^ adnadng Ou rigM Jbot u far u foQ oan oonvontontly racomr from, leaving the aole of tbe left root flat aa (be ernnmd, b« when m guard, and Uie left leg parftotly aOwglit. The right hand ahonld b« on a lersl with the eres. Hie ■hoDldera and head thrown back, and the bod7 erect, pn that the right knee ia not tnmed in.
After delivaring the throat, spring from the right heel to your original pwltion of gnanl(FJB. i), reieiDg t^a leR ami (o it« proper cnrre, and bending the left knee. Bo oaretlLllooppoae thepoint Df joorlbUtoTDnr adrerui? with the tigbt arm axtandeO, nntil the reoorer; hu been in all other reapecta completed. On retaming to ga&rd, plant Uie right fbot firmly, to ahow that tlte body ifl properly balanced,
Th»e poaitioni may be practiHd at a majt on the wall wtih great benefit, cue being taken lo oooaeionally examine tba dispoaitioD of the t»dj- and limba in mcli dlTialon 1 and alwaya keeping the ettenaion distinct from the lunge, till perfect, when bolh may tie made at the eune instant.
It may be eatisOcUny to the pnpil to ehowUiBt the above diipcwlicm of the body and llmbe is indiipennble in Uie science of defence, independent of it« gTTir-*nlnrmi when properly eieootwl. The body ia presented aidewaya, to oflte tha leaat mark to an adTersaiy, and (be smallest snrtbce tor yonr paiadea to cover. The left ana beisK raised in a cnrre behind, ila andden ikll aesiata to prtiJeol the Ixidy forward in iha eitenalon and lunge, and the gnap of air it Iskoa when raised again, very mnoh aida the reooreiy. The balance of the body enables the pupil to advance or retieet triih Escility { and it ia only by its perfect extension that the lunge can be completed. The nails an npwarda in carte, that the stamgth of the thmob may be oppoeed to the blade of an advereaiy.
The tlirust of carte over the arm ia pertormed in the same maooer aa carte losido, with thla ditlbrence, th« the head la raised upright on (he ineide, and the hand w»U oppoeed ontward, in order (o be well eoversd. The thmat of lierc« diEIbn on^ from
FKNCINO. m
over thfS ann in the wxiaft baing nrened, the right hand being weQ ralaed, and
o|i|iuaed oafcwasd, and the left hand haYing the palm revecaed, or the tiaok of the
ftogen inward*
QVAxn nr cnaoB.
Tbe poeition of the gnaxd in tieroe is the same as that in carte, except aa ragarda the right arm and hand. Carte ia an inaide parade ; and to oppoae the thumb to an inaida throat, the naik are npwarda. Tieroe ia an ontaide parade ; and to oppoae the thumb to an ontaide thraat^ the naila are downwarda.
itffni— wti^ intheae, and all other paradea, that the oppoaition of force to be applied ■honld only be aaHloient to keep your advemry'B point out of the line of your body.
mroAenra amu niasHGAOiiro.
*'^fl*C<*«g in carte or in tieroe ia oppoaing yoor adveraary'B blade either inaide or ontaide, when yoa flrat join or croaa bladea on goard. Diaengaging ia performed by deateronaly •>ii<u*ig the point of yonr foil, onder hia blade, ttom one side to the other ; that ia, from carte to tieroe, or from tieroe to carte. Tha wtovement to be tm^f nffficietU to olaor tkt Node qf four adoenary, and no more.
YO ASVAM€M AMU BirBSAf .
In order to adyance, move your right foot eaaily forward to the diatanoe leqnired, and let your leA foot InrtaTitly follow to the oorreeponding diatanoe : theae two move- menta to be performed in nearly the flame moment of time. Keep your body and guard firm and ateady while yon repeat tUa Hve or aiz timea ; and let there be a abort paoae between erciy advanoe. Altar making five or aix advanoea, obaerre if the diatanoe and poaition of yonr guard be exactly the aame aa your diBtanoe and poaition were when yon commenced. In the leUoat, your left foot makea the flrat moyement yoor right following immediately.
no mEFLS numoAeanvf urn paxbt.
Baring had aoffldent practice at the wall to perform the extenaion, lunge, and reeoTcry, with predaian, alwaya remembering that quickneaa must be the result of neaineaa and aimpUoity in the vaiioua morementa, the pupil may practiae, with a companion, alternate throating and parrying, aa followa : —
Svppoae A and B to be engaged in carte, that ia, in the poaition of guard, with the aalla npwarda, and thumbe oppoaed to each other'a blade, so that a thmat from either woold paaa inaide without touching hia adTonary. A, therefrom, dropping the point of hia foil beneath B*a blade, at the aame time forming hia extenaion, and raiaing the point on the other aide, Inngea immediately carte over th^ arm. B, turning hia wriat ia timne, with the naila downwarda, oppoaea hia parade on the ontaide, just auffldent to eaoae A*a point to paaa hia body ontaide, without touching. On A*a recovery, he B'a blade in tieroe ; when B, diaengaging under in hia torn, forma hia exten- and thmata carte inaide, which A perriea with carte— and ao on, until the paradea are performed with predaion and rapidity. Predaion in the thmat la aoqiiirad 1^^ making the diacngage ao at juH to pom under pour adcer$anf*$ blade.
in
;FBNCiNa.
the point of yonr own beinif adTUioed hy fanning thA eztSBskm at the Buns timeu Predgion in the parade is acquired t^aniying aharply at the extent of guard neoeMazy, without useleH motion. QuicknaH is the oonaequenoe of preoiaion.
VKI ova, TWO.
After the pnpila hare praetiaed the simple diaengagea and thmsta, with their oor- reapondjng paradea, and hare attalTiert tMiJiltj and neatneaa in their exeoution, thej may oommenoe the flsint ons, two, aa foUowa :—
Suppose the parttoa to be on guard oarte, conaeqnently cohered on the inaide. A diaengagea beneath B's blade, hia point ad^anoing aa he forma hia extenaion, with anoh appearance of vigour aa if he would thrust oarte over the arm. B forma immediateljr the parade of tierce, with the nails downwards, to ooTar on the outside ; when A, lowering his point just sufficient to allow the parade of B to pass, again raisea it to complete hia lunge in carte inaide, which B must oppoae by returning to hia flrat parade of carte. On A'a recovery, B goes through preoiaely the aame attack, to ba met by similar paradea on the part of A.
Flff.ft.
The practice of this lesson evinces the advantages of a proper and sufficient extension, and a parade that is not too wide. The quick extension of the left leg and right arm, performed during the disengage, should throw the point towarda yonr adversary's breast with such an emphasis as to resemble a thrust ; at onoe forcing him to a parade, and taking a position much nearer to his body, rendering a aecond disengage beneath his tierce parade almost certain to hit, if not met with corresponding neatness by the deflsnoe. The parades must be made predae, coming to snfficieni guard, and no more. If the parade of tierce be made too wide, you cannot get back to carte in time.
Let the attacking party have the option of thrusting home In the oim, as the advert aary's knowledge that it ia but mfetmi may prevent him from going fUUy to guard.
F1BNGING.
188
on, TWO, nnn.
mm a fkoiU^ baa been acquired in practiaing the erne, two, the pnpila may the omt, two, thm, maldng the flist disengage Xxy the extension of the ann the two l^ the ftdl extension} and the fhtm by the oompleie hmge, to be bj the pazadea of tieroe, oarte, and
Lei the attack be neat and deliberate, not exhibiting so mncb amdetj to obtabi a hii aa to be correct and precise. The attacVing party should stand hia ground, with hJa left foot firm ; as nothing giyes greater promise of excellence than receiving the hJA without flJTichmg the body. Make the parades neat, and keep cool ; for any nerroosoees in your motion is fktal to good Dnudng. The simple torn of the wrist from carte to tierce, is atanost sufficient to cover the body. Take care that your hand je high enough, so that you do not oppose the /aibU, m weak poit, of your blade, to the Jbrte, or strong ^oit, of jrour adyersary's.
low CASn, OCtATl, SSCOVDl, Axn PBXica TaiUSfS.
"Law earte is deUTered in the same manner as the simple carte thrust* only tha hand and point must be fixed lower, getting your bodyiout of the line, that your adreraary's point may not reach your ^yes. It is an excellent thrust if your adyenszy hmro frequent recourse to his high parades.
Octave thrust is delivered on the fiank or stomach, the arm being well opposed out- waid. If yon parry your adversazy's thrust by octave, your return will naturally be tha thrust of octave, which may, at the same time, touch him with your extension only, he being upon his lunge.
The thrust in seconde is delivered after the parade of tieroe, or when engaged In tieroe, hy dropping your point under your advenazy's wrist, with the nails downward: hmge, and delivar the thrust on the flank.
Frisn ii (be natanl UmM la ntam, BftwiainTtng prfnw plrtdB^ whoQ wiTuysad ocoftldVAblf wiHua hiB n Dpan jm. It ii onl; an awmnlon <tf Iha aim fram lbs •dranuT'i bod;, iiatli being kept down, tha am mil
npwBid moUon of ymr wrii^ wltlioat morins Ihs aim, and, npldl^
— - 'n, dellTBT iha lunge outside bta blada In oute orar the ami,
A taking care to ema yoor body
W from a lime tliiiuL In the Mm*
To peiftinn the oetaTB paiade,
fMm the gnaid carte, lomc the
point, ae In leooDdfl, with the naila
■ Bp. Tour ann ilioald be ihinwn
FBNCma. 185
mneh m pcwriMab i& order fbat the poiiit may ikU on % Una with yoor adYanaiyfl
Samidrele pande ia used agaisat thmata of low carte, aeoonde, and the disengage aad throat of oarte orer the ann. Let your body be steadily inclined upon the lefb
aide; drop your point, with the naila iipwardB, ao aa to fonn an angle of nearly forty^ftre degreea with the gnard point At the aame time, raise the sword-hand aa high aa the chin, throwing the arm inward, and looking at your point over your arm.
TKB anou PASABxa 09 aaoovna Aim rana.
Beoomle ia a Tety powerftd and naeftil parade againat the simple throats of low aad aeoonde. To perform it carte to tieroe» the naila and wrfafc ahoold be tamed downward ; point ahoold be dropped, and bend oppoaed ontward, aa in parade of octare. The point'a from goard ia nearly the with the parade in octaye, the faielination of the blade ahoold form the angle of forty-llTe
the the the
The
Prime ia perfbrmed with the tamed downward, the hand aa high aa the month, and inward, aa in aemicirole. ahoold be drawn well in
Fi(.ia
towarda the bo4y, aad the wrist bent downward, that the point may fUl more than
186 FKNCINQ.
in any other low panda (sea Fig. 11). Wben proparlj patfbnnad, prima ia a graoaAil parada.
Flff. u.
fU COVVm, OB XOVKS TAMkVJU.
*
Tbe ooontor parades may be used when your adreniaiy dieengages, either in carta« tierce, semicircle, or eeconde ; they consist in following an advemary's blade in anch a manner as to keep him in the same engagement, whether on the outside or the inside. This is done entirely 6y tfis motyan qf the wriat andpUty qf the Jlngen; and upon neatness of ezecatlon in these imrades the perfection of Fencing depends.
OOUKTBB ZH C4JtTB.
When engaged in carte, and coyered, and yonr adverssxy passes his point benea^ yoar blade, intending to lunge carte over the arm, you immediately follow by dis- engaging under his blade, keeping him still in carte. Draw your arm slightly towards your body tin you flsel his blade, that he may not, by his extension, have passed the Jbrte of his blade to Qie/aibie of yours, uid force a thrust. Let the oirole performed by your point be as small as possible, covering welL
OOUKTBB AJTD BBTVBV WITH A. DI8S]raA.aXlCZirT.
The counter, or round parade in tierce, is performed in a similar maimer to tine counter parade of carte, only that the course of the point is reversed. When engaged in tierce, and covered, and your adyersaiy disengages with a view to thrust carte inside, follow his blade closely, with a small circle, made by the motion of the wriot only, till you feel his blade, keeping it still in tierce : come to guard by drawing tlie arm towards the body as before.
As before observed, fine fencing depends on the execution of the counter parade^ Not that any one parade, more than any other, will cover the body ttom all attacks, each one being sutiject to be deceived by a corresponding feint ; but practice in the ooontor parades gives suppleness and vigour to the wzist, rendering all other paradae^
FCNdNO. 1S7
M wen M tbe diungagw fbr the attach, eaner of efzeoatfon. It is, therefore, ezoellent preetiee for the popfla to pexfbnn the attaok 1^ disengage, and defenoe l^the counter, both in oarteand tieroe, as before reoommended in the <mm, #100, aa follows ; —
Buypuee an ei^faffemetU tn earte .* — A, disengages with extension, and Inngee oarte orer the arm. B oonnter disengages, parrying A's Innge on the inside, and, disen- gaging again on A's reoovery, attacks in torn by longing carte over the arm, to be reeeired hj A with the oonnter parade, and so on alternately. Be slow and exact at flnt^ allowing quickness to be the result of practice.
DouBui comma.
When the above has become Mtj in execution, let the parties cany it to the double eousler, as follows : — ^A disengages, throwing in his point with the extension of carte ovsr the arm; B counter disengages to keep A's blade still in carte, when A disengages a eeoond time, thrusting home oarte orer the arm, to be parried by the second oonnter disengage of B, who, on A's reooTsry, attacks in turn.
This is a most trying exercise for the defence, requiring in its execution all the qoalities for good fencing. In the attack, the point proceeds with a corkscrew motion, evading the adversazT's guard at the same time as it adyances towards his body ; whan pot in Tigorously, with the hand high, the opposing parade requires both and quickness to be in time, without a Hhifting of the body, which should be allowed while merely practising. The parade must be small as possible, caming to guard the second time with a contraction of the arm, to prevent a force by the adversary's^brto pressing on joarfaible.
The counter parade in semicircle is called circle, and, with that in seconde, is perfenned in the same manner as in carte and tierce, except that the disengages are made over the blade, instead of under, the hand being held high. It is advantageous to practise these parades for the wrist, though, in fencing for hits, the counter disengages for the low parades are not often of use. The circle parade is of great use in panying evecy direct thrust.
lOBonro TKS Biana.
The pnpfl should well understand what is called the faibU nnd Jbrte of his blade, and at all times observe how he is opposed to his advetsaiy in that respect. Theybrfo anj be said to extend fh>m the shell or guard, half the distance towards the point, thm/atbU being the remainder. Now, if 1^ your i>osition on guard the forts ot your advesaaiy's blade crosses your faUU, he has it in his power more or less to force your Made either to a disarm or % thrust, which your parade would be too weak to put andeu You are exposed to this by holding your point low, or your hand low, or by too graai aa extmiaion of the arm when on guard.
nn voacnro vata blam whxv ov nxaca.
Suppoae your adversary to hold his hand low while on guard in tierce, make your •rtenafcm with the hand high, binding his firitte with your JbrU, and lunge home. If not In time with his prime parade, he is surely hit ; for no strength of his in tierce mold be eqaivmlent to your advantage in the parts of the blades opposed to each other.
■oioDta tai BLUB m (u*n, o*
MiMhv low) ilbai, miklsg your aitenilon, mow Ub Jtiiftte,
FENOINO.
180
gTup of the foil, azid lift it from his hand. A smait laah of the blade in seoonde will tnqaextOj disann when yonr advenaiy ftnoee with his point low.
Obserre that theae attacks are only to be executed when your adyenaiy, by his negUffence, giyes tadr opportonxly ; it being impossible to perfoxm either of them on a good position.
There are several manoBiiTTes common in some schools, which, although not considered soond fencing, should be known to the pupil, that he may be on his guard with a strange antagonist. The accompanying cut ecarcely needs explanation. B,
rif. 14.
fast<iai1 of opposing a parade to A*b throat of carte orer the arm, slides his left foot backwards, and evades it, meeting his antagonist's body with an extension in seoonde. This will oocasionaUy succeed, but is dangerous from the difficulty of reoovering.
tJiSUn OV THS WSZBT.
This moTement may be performed when you i}eroeiTe your adTersary slow in Tnaking a return, after you hare lunged with a thrust ; as on the engagement of carte, suppose yon thrust carte over the arm, which your adversary naturally parries with aimple tierce, then lean with some degree of force upon his blade, and, as you recover to guard, deliver him a throat with the wrist in seconde.
XITVSy OV THS XXTXV8IOV.
This isperfonned after your adversary makes a ftill lunge with a thrust, which you may parry ao powerftUIy as to throw his arm out of the line of direction ; then, with an possible quickness, extend your arm, and deliver >'^"i a straight throst in return, before he haa time to recover. If the extension of the arm come not within reach, tben make the complete extension of the leg and arm.
This thrust is performed when your adversary is dilatory. On attempting to thrust, cover yooraelf weU ; by forming a gradual and strong opposition to
190 FE3TGINO.
jaar adyeraazy's blado, yoa can be in no danger of esqxMing yoonekf to an inlar- ohanged thrnat — that ia, a throat at the same momentb
AppBLa, Bx^n ov *n iXiAnB, Aim ousiDBa.
Appela, beats, and gliaadea, tend to plant 70a firm upon your gnard, to embamaa your adveraaiy, and cauae bim to give yon openings; they may be performed previoasly to simple thrusts, feints, or counter-disengagements, etc. An appel, or beat with the foot, is performed either on the engagement of oaate or tieroe, l^ sudden]^ raising and letting &I1 the right foot^ with a beat on the same spot.
The beat on the blade is abruptly touching your adversary's blade so as to startle him, and get openings to thmst. If he resist the beat, instantaneously disengage, and thrust home. If he use a simple parade, mark one, two ; or, if he use a ooonter^ parade, counter-disengage, or double.
Gliaades are sUghtly gliding your blade along your adver8ary*B, at the same time farming the extension of the arm, or the complete extension, wajiftging and lUsUaJniTig your body, so as to be aware of his thmst, and to make sore of your own. If you be engaged in carte, out of measure, a quick advance, with a glisade, must infUlibly give you some openings, either to mark feints or otherwise.
Care must be taken that on your adversazy Itoeling the pressure of yonr blade h.e does not disengage and hit yon.
A feint, in fencing, is the means of deranging yoor adTer8ary*s guard in order to procure an opening for a thmst. Bvery parade is subject to be deceived by a fiaint. We have described at large the Mnts of one, two ; and one, two, three ; deoeiTing the simple parades of carte and tierce ; as, also, the double disengage deceiving the ooonter parades. There is also the fbint seconde and foint flanconade.
Feint seconde is perfonned when engaged in tieroe by dropping your point, reversing your nails, and forming yonr extension as if you meant to thrust seconde : then quickly turn them upwards on yoor adversary*! parade of seconde, and deliver tbe thmst of carte over the arm.
Feint flanconade is performed by pressing on the faibie, and on the opposition of the blade delivering the thrust of carte inside.
Let yonr ftill fioint be performed on the extension ; the lunge being always intended
as a real thmst.
n»u8TDro A.LL VBnrxs.
Supposing the pupil to be capable of performing all the thrusts and parades witli neatness and dexterity, he may employ himself in thrusting against an advenaiy wboee endeavours are confined to the defensive. In this attack, he puts in praotioe all t2ie resooroes of which he is capable, endeavouring to confound his adversaxy with appelfl^ disengages, glisades, and fUse attacks by means of extensions, that he may dlsoover his favourite parade, if he has one ; perfbrming eveiy motion neatly — the baaard of a return not influencing the correctness of bis execution.
Disengage in carte witti the extensiGa; if yoor advenaiy parades wUh the
FENdNG. in
in earte, dlMiigBge again home ; if he parades with the nmple, out orer, and Innge carter If in tionoe, mark aeocmde with the eztenaion ; if he oppoees in aeoonde, die- engage over, and throw in carte inside ; and so on, through all the paradts and feints.
To parry all lUnts is to employ all the parades in fencing, Tsrying them oontintially, so that yocDT adYersaiy shall not foresee what 70a intend next. For this purpose, avoid all role in the soooeasion, one parade being as easily deceived by a feint as another ; and ipHien it is foieseon, the thrust of the sttaolring party is made with more decision, and is more likely to be soocesaftaL To decide upon the parade to be used when the throat is indicated, reqoires a promptitade seldom met with, if at all, even among aeoompHshed fencers. It becomes more an instinct to be performed by the hand, witboot the head being troabled on the sabject. Dq>end, therefore, more npon the vanely of your paindee than on yonr being able to choose one that shall meet the feint of your adversary when the faint becomes apparent. Do not stop on your parade, bat go on doubling till you feel his blade. As when on ghard carte, if he disengages, parry tierce, and, binding his blade with yoor hand high, bring him to semicircle, endeavoanng always to leave his blade engaged on a different side to that on which he may have caleolated to find it. Make free nse of the oonnter parades of carte and taeroe. Octave, qninte, and seconde, are no variety ftom each other to avoid feints, the asme feint deceiving all three : seoonde, as the strongest^ is preferable to the other two. Ktep the body firm, without flinching, depending on the wrist alone, and not yoor disengages to be made from the shotdder or the elbow.
THB SALUTS.
9b be peiJbimmJ wtHumt matkt. The salote is the oonrteqr of fencing, and cambtnee all that it teachea of graceftilness and elegance in motion and attitode. It is usually made the prefeoe to an assault, or set to for hits, as being a giadnal preparation for more energetic actton; and is commenced as follows : —
In order to render the salute intelligible to the young student, let A and B place thfwnaelves on guard as directed ; the mask and spare foil on the platform a short distance trom. the left foot. On the foils touching, turn the hand to tierce or octave, which will onoover the line of defence. B bows to A, who then forms his extension in carte and hmges in order to take his measure. Both rise to the first jxwtion by drawing back the right heel to the left. They then salute the speotatorB in carte and tieroe, and eadi other in carte, and come to guard.
A, who flnt took the distance, makes a disengagement and hmges in tierce, with thenafls up. B parries tierce and lowers his foil to seoonde. A remains on the lunge, and on feeling the parry turns the point of his foil to the rear, across the left breast, by relaxing the gnmp of the hilt, looking through the angle formed by the sword and After resting on the lunge for a moment^ both come to guard in tierce.
▲ then diaeugagea and lunges in carte, B parries carte and lowers his foil to half- Ay on raoovenng the pazxy, passes the point of his foil to the rear across the
in FEHOiNa.
rt^«hosldar,laoklngavertbaum(rig.lt); r
InoaHe. (It li nsoal (br ewh to thniK tieraa and a
ooraplsUd hia Inngei, marks one, tvo, wUb hi* blada and ■mutl7 bring! ht
up to hla rigbl heel, lui iword um nuaad to Uie right ; puKing a motnect, b<
back hit leTt toot, bending the left knM, and plaoea the blad« of the Ibil an
rigbl thigh, the point locUned npwarda (o the left, makM two beala with the rl{
hack to (be lail, the Bword hand ralaed" to the right, take a. pace to the nmi with the left toot, bending both Icneee, tba (Oil anKm Its right thigh la belbre, beat ono, two.
FENdNO. 198
with tbe right foot, sad bring tip the left, Mlote the Bpeotators in carte and tieroe, and preaenting the point to each other, oome to guard, repeat the two beata with the footi, and bring up the left* resnming the upright position, and waTntlng each other with the foil« the blade perpendioolar, the hilt aa high as the ohin, hand inoarte, bow and lower the fbila to the right, the back of the hand np.
Pnt on the maaks and commence the aaaanlt.
Von. — ^When the ftnt or npright poaition is aasnmed, the left hand ia down a few indiea from fba aide, palm open.
VKKWULL aaaacrxnon.
It ia dealrable thai thepapil shonld postpone the aaaanlt^ playing looae, or t^'^^f^'ng for faita, nntil he has acquired great fkdliiy and steadineaa in the ezeootion of all the laaaona ; and, by well mideratanding the meaning and intention of each throat, parade, and position, can aelect or adapt them to the partionlar oiroimiatanoe in which he may be placed. To go through a list of paradea or thmata to be uaed on theae occasions, would be to write that which is neyer read. On commencing to play looae, you must know and execute them all, or your defteice and attack will be wild, ungraceAil, and vnoertaan ; you win fUl into habitual paradea and thrusts, of which a Judicious adversary may take immediate advantage. We shall, therefore, confine onrselTea to a fow general directions.
Never engage or croas bladea on commencing an assault, or on recommencing after a hit, in distance, that you may not be exposed to a lunge from your adversaiy'a point ; an advantage which some permit themselves to take. Cultivate the habit of being exceedingly cautions of the first hit. Keep ftilly covered, on one side or the other, when on guard. Let the height of your hand and point depend on the height of your adversary, and the proper opposition of yoxajbrte. Never evade a hit I7 a retreat out of distance, aa you lose the chance of a repoti or thrust in return. If your adversaiy bokl his hand low, thrawyour point over his^btftfo with your hand high. Make flUae aftarkit to provoke returns, having prepaxed your parade and return. Have no fisvovirite movements, but try everything. If you fkil, ask yourself why. If hit, ask yourself wiiy ; and remedy the fkult on another occasion. Lot your thrusts in return be made by the wrist over or under. Never withdraw your blade by bend- ing the arm when on the lunge. When yon engage, act on the defensive, to discover yoor adversary's Ibvonrite feints or thrusts, if he has any. Vary your parades con- tinnall^, that he may not, in his turn, ascertain your own fkvourites ; for if even a good fencer be foxmd to use one parade in preference to another, he may be hit l^ one mnch leoa skilftil than himself. A learner, therefore, should practise all the parados, changing them continually ; going tram the high to the low parados, and back again, with the utmost possible agility, until, by practice, he is enabled to pany every thrust. Let your parades be prepared in your mind. Never thrust without being covered. Always make your parade before you return. Counter hits are disgracefld to both partiea. Always play for a certain number of hits — the very counting of them causes caution. Count on]y hits on the body ; bat if, at ihe same time, you are hit on the
IS
IM rSMCING.
■no or kiff, do not ocnmi ths hit on Uui body. Whan ycni obflerre «7inptomfl i>f aO&ck, dlamga([« qniokly, to throv jonr kdverur; 'a point ftom carta to tierce, or from tierce to can* { hi* lataDtloii will Oiiu be dinorbed. aad the UUck proportloD«}ljr WMkened. Alter u mmilt. pnoliH thnutmg tisrce and carte, to restore the preciiion uid usal- neoB wbioh moj' bave snffbred from tiM auxietjr and sxcilemeDt produced hj Uiq endeBTOnr to hit under Ilia hatard of a ntam. It bHns* yon back to principles, and enable! ;tRi U> ttea your advenaiy ittth an execmioa oontlonally impmving. And, above all tliinge, nerer m^e an aaaaalt, or Uunst and puiy at all roiala, wUhont the maekfl, HowTirer certain yon may be of blULnf? the breaet, your adTeraary may aooidentally bHng the point to hli fhce. The lose of an eye, or other injnry, in rery likely to happen fma ench nagleot.
In oonolnefos. ve beg oar yoongreaden to pertOm their FendngEivoiMa wiUi deoomm and gentleneei towards eaoh other ; endeavonring at the lame time to execute all their pandea. ete„ with predilon and elegance. Let them exhibit aa little awkward-
«•■ ae poaaible, and no loaa oT temper ; leM tlwlr "- be oompand, aa with pR>-
priety they might, to aa afllay between
t}f J$mu Kali tin ^ii|.
u-
s
BROJIOSWORD AMD SINGLE-STICK.
TPIE the pupil has ecmqaraed tha thwiyof FsDcins -r-. with the nplar or roil, ha will nUmsllf wish to know Kmathiiig of Ihe Bioadiward and Ihs ,^ maio dlntlpaUon bBtwsan the Broadiword knd the le ronuer la mployed in thmctJiif and nnitijig, 1^ adapted only tttr thnutin^. Many p4f«Dla af« hi? uie of arrae b; Iheir Bona, from a ooUon UaA Kith ihi- Hword and the toil ia apt to make ■ lad oTerbcar- -clfi-mf , bat thiaia not nail; Uia oaiai forwhtBawell- ■ r It in the lue ctf weaponi, he ii iararitWy elow to
-rer. Bat apail from thia, and looking at bniad- 7 fWim Binpl; a gyninaalio point of Tiew, it la one ) world, brinsin^ all the limba into exeroiae. deralopisg all irrecting Ilie depDrtmeDt, b«aid«a affording a pleesng meana or wewaHnn- la Ikct, what ilannlns ia for gtrla, Itocing and broadawoni an Air bajt. ^h* eaatom of deciding a point of honoor with the sword or piatol in thia uid oUwr omntriaa i* T«ndered criminal b; tho Uw. bot that is no maon wh; the art of itectn^ ahonld be n^lected. A genUeman ahoold poaaeaa the means of dofenoa, if it wne onlj againat thoae nnscrupnloua peraona who are to be met with in the satmrba <if sTsry popoloiu alty. eapedall:' in foreign oonntriea.
To thoae whoae pnnnlta an of a sedenlaij natnre, Broodewurd Bieroiae ia in- nliwble i the eOMa of a leaann once or twice a week oan be easily eeen b; iha healthy ebeek. «ipvUled cheat, and firm etep of Ihe popll ; In &ct, it leachee him the free nea ef hia Ihnbe. and at the eame time impneaea him wiUi the oonTidiari that mental wtttaoot phydcat enhnre ia bnt the half way to haalthy Ufs.
The. Ont (tap in Bnntdiword Eieniiaee ia to acquire a proper my of Manding. It ia thanftira neceaaary that the learner ahonld be laogbt the ri^ poaltlon. A cuelaas or ■ngracefU style ia aoon acquired, and not eaaily ermdicatad ; and whan ODoa habitnal. It ^ lual to expert pl^ with the aword.
In tba foUowlag Inatmetions it win be our Sim to render the aoqnirement of pro-
BROASBWORD.
a, m wfll go M men U> Ifaa pnoOoe, and ooDdiiM onr lawoiu in muoh tha mns V tB ft proreuor would (niidan s cIm*. meral; pramtolng that pnctice with ■ will gnUly AeUiUiU Uw (UIl oT lib* papit In tlie u*e of the ■word. e pncUcs ii UwBfB conducted by word of oommnad -, tbe pupil havlag been L how to potami the tu 7 Hid good lamper.
M OP ComiirB,— nrtC ftwiNiM.— Plam Ihs bands 1 book ind head
plTot; bring tha right hegl in trooi or the left, M that tha (tot mar tarm' an angle, aa Han In Rg. 1.
SKond FDfiHaii,— Band both knaea
and atap out with the right foot about
siitean inohee, the right knee p«r-
jiendloulur to the Instep, tha lail knea
T the Wt tool, the heal* (n Una
h each other, the body balAuoad,
s is tha poaitloii Ibr beating tha
(Fig. a).
iSitvK.iKaal.—Itaiie the right foot about two Itjchsfl fKim the gronnd, and beat smartly with tha flat of It.
DaMt AHack.—'Rtiae tha foot aa
■ wtm
^awllhtll
. — Mnva tha right (toot smartly forwatil t
r inehea, and
with the left, I preaerring the distance between the beela, an not shlfUng the right foot attar having taken yoi position^
JVrfiTv.— Thld IS porfbnned by morifie bock t^ left foot, and following with tha ri^t. Tbew movi ments Ibr oflfenca uid defence most be quickly mac
Caan by advancing the right fbot till the knee i* per- pendicular to the instap. the left leg (tally exlended, and the left foot Oat on the ground ; the body erect
BROADSWORD.
Tb* popO it DOW plaoad be(On Uw Urget, nTOrd In hud. ud with right trm ntttideil, caM throng the daric llihea, cqiDiDaiunag >t No. 1, Mid coDtinoizig the airMp of Oh (word to No. 1, ud M oa. U" can to pnwrT« the true direction ot tba edg*. It will b« HSn that the cnU I and 1 are made dowDwanl, 3 and 4 upward, S and 4 borlioulal frum left to rtghi, and 7 vertical.
AliW. — The paint or thrust li made b; exten-lin^ the arm, taking care that the poi of the sword Ib dol higher than the middle the cheat. The roaaoii for thii ta to aro
I French proreesoi
m the Innge." By practice onlj a
Aa the t<M>ging Guard ia InTariablj need in ■word play, It ie wall that Ihe pupil iliould have ■n earl; knowledga of ile adTaolaga over all other gnardi. It la fbrmed b/ enanding: the eword arm, the elbow Bhghtly raised, and the poiDt of the iword depraued towardi the lell ; the led ehODldar a little forward, and left hand behind the back (o be oat of the way of a cut
When tte lounar oan, \!j a oontlnDone mon- msnt of the sword arm asd wHat, make the cue pBrfeetlj Id the Orm poaition, he should be ro- perfonn them In the third poalMon. or, he leam to do this perfoctlj.
la Ilia >— "ip-g guard, aeoond pgaUion, in fronl oT the
IM eraHLK-STICK.
target md daliter the eaU u iwUUj ■■ poMflilB on lb* hug* i tlun iprlngtiig op to
the flnt poalbloD lAar eftch tnt, wlIA Iheaword KboTs the hewl,M In th^verailli guard, ■addsslj ratnms ibe poaitaon af gnud with ft imait b«M of tba fboC It will Ibnn • Tuy pleulng exerciHi, and give gnmt euppleooH to tbe wrlat ctf the nrord Bnn,
Wben tbe pnpU« ue fkmillar with th«M leaaon*, two alianU pnotiae the ooli and gnerde, Tlie; eboold be oppoeed to eedi other, aod nDinbend 1 ud 1, No. 1
Woui o> Oomun). So. 1. Mo. 1.
Bngagt. HULglng gukKL Wenglng grurd.
Ouiant. Oat " one " al the left cheek Fonn the Dnt guard a* de-
or ahonlder. pMed on the larget
Ot gtard. Both ooma to the hanging goaid in ttie ■eoond poaitlon. auim. CdI " two " at the right cheek, Fom gecoDd guard M <n
The eeraD cnta and ooieapondlng gnanlB being oompleted. No. 1 Bhotild altaok. Mo. 1 deCmdlng. The; ahoold then practise the onta and gnaidi attanatel^, alwajm deliTOring tho cnt in tiie Udrd poai^a, and guarding in Ute seocmd poahiotL
We have not Ihonght It iteeesuiy to parploi 0" mind of the omg pupil by arranging any oomplioalad practloea, «aob a* at« 3 be found In Che Book of Sword Bnroiie (br the anny i the BW aae; leeaoo* and general advloe in the managameDl of the word let forth fn theae raoarka will be foond quite nlBident to aJTbrd a ftind of amuaement and imtroction.
When a hit ia leoelTad, it la to be inunedlalelr aoknowladgad by paaalng the awonl Into the laft hand, or bj a wave of the Mt hand wllhoat disengaging the ewoid.
The ^ipointmenta to be worn during awoid play ate a float leather jaoke^ padded on the abooldera to prevent Injur; to tlia oollar-bona. a lag pad, eword. mask, and gMuMlet
The engrariDg (Fig. t) ihowa a awordsman in fan praetiaa
!\ L^ocatume. It is not neoaasar; to wear a gaantlat on the Mt
: I hand, bsoauae that ia behind the back, aa la Fig. t ; but 70a
should naTBT play at Broadsword or Blngle-eUok withoot a
mask. M, howerer caiefDl yon may be, -ivM-m. wUl aani».
i mask wcpuld hare rendered hanitleea.
Tba alogla-stlok ii to the sword wliat the H^ is to the rapier — a means far Isstniotion and pncUoe merely. In ordat to aooutton tha pupil to sharp practioa with the iwDrd it ia nacaesaiy that be should hare some independent praotloe with the dngle-etiA.
Tba eUoks to be used are about fbily iDDhea in length. The hand Is protected by a (bong bilt made of bnflklo lilda ; the mask and lag pad are to bo worn a* la tnDnt
FBAT8 WITH THE 8WOBD. ISO
The nme tarmation is naed fbr the atiok as the sword, and as the sttdk is the sob- stitate for that weapon, no cat is to be oonsideted fkir that is not giTen witti that part of the stick eomsponding to the edge of the sword.
On coming to gnazd, the sticks shoold join with a. sharp beat, the players UghUj springing back oat of hitting distance, and advancing oantioasly within measoie.
A Feint is made by menacing one part of year opponent's body, and when he answers b7 #^<*W"g his gnard, to hit him in another. The fUnts nsed are termed simple and oompoand. For examine : — ^The simple is, feint fbr the right cheek, and deiiYer the cot outside or inside the leg, on the pad ; the compound, feint for the right cheek and ootside of leg, and deliver the cut at right cheek. The feints may be multi- plied at the pleasaie or according to the skill of the players.
Do not attack till you eee a good opening, and are sure of hitting; watch yoor opponent's wrists do not look at his ftux. Do zu>t retire if yon wa avoid it, unless with the design of fe^if*'^g yoor opponent to follow yoa; seise the opportnni^ when he mores his foot to advance upon you, to plant a hit either direct or with a feints and above all do not allow yoor temper to be ruffled on receiving a sharp hit on an uncovered part of the body.
The cuts with the stick are to be given lightly and swiftly, and the point to be fre- quently used. The best mode of delivering point is, when the etick touches yoor opponent, to relax the grasp and allow the stick to pass backwards through the hilt.
When both cut together, the out delivered in the third position alone counts ; each cut or point must be promptly scknowledged.
WMAtB WITH XKB SWOBD.
Tarlous carious and remarkable feats are performed by adepts with the sword, such as cutting the bar of lead, slitting the silk handkerchief, dividing the leg of mutton, dividing the lemon on the hand of another person, cutting the eheep in halves^ etc. All these require great prsctice and dexterity, neither of which are to be taught in books. We may, however, briefly refbr to a few of these feats.
Cunora «hs Bab or Lnut. — ^This feat is performed with a heavy ship's cutlsss. gmmd very sharp. The triangular bar of lead is either laid on a block of wood or suspended l^ a string. In either case a sudden, decisive cut is neceesaiy, with the whole wtifflxt of the arm.
TxB Bmmar Fbat. — ^The sheep is suspended head downwards, the performer stand- ing in such aposition astohavea side view of the carcase. Qrssping the sword tightly ekae to the hilt, with the second joints of the fingers in a line with the edge, the per. feraar makei a sweeping, horisontal cut, with cut five or cut six ; the latter being the Bost powerful. The sword should be heavy and ground to a rasor edge. The leg of sButton is divided in the same way; equal force being required, in consequenoe of the sise of the bone.
Drmoia nrs Sosnornsn Oaursa. — ^ThJs pretty feat is performed with a very abarp sword. Pass a thread through the orange, and make a knot at its lower end. to prevent the thread slipping through. Then saspend the orange from the ceiling ;
m FBAT9 WITH THB SWOED.
aitd with a TBy iharp ■^'"^'*^ diTlde the thnad about mldmy irith out fln, vul tha onuige bUa. maks ant aix, and cleaTe ihe uwige Id 1uJt«. The Gist cot Is m« Jiut ahove jemr ch»t, and tha awond & little below It ; ancoeaa depaodiag entirely oi
id k little bel( Usay liinfUr («>• an piaoClBed b<r the prof)
naked heal oTbji aaaiatant, diTidlue- pillowa ardown, alicing TegeUblea. etcgB. etc., hot u we hkTe alread; aaid, ther caimot tw taught on papa-. Sword plaj- and aword <teta an of Tory auclant, origin. The athletea of old and tbe East Indluu of to-dn; are par- tleolarl; evport *ith the aharp aword- " When I waa in Indift," aaya Captain Nolafa, " on enKBgement look plooe between Ibe Nlwm'a iiregular hone and aome rebele. My atlfintion waa partlcDlarly drawn to (ha doctof'a npart of the killed and arouiided, moat oT whom anffbiAd by [he aword. In the colonuia oT renuLrka aach eotrieaafl these were nnmereoa — *tirTa col from the Hhoolder;' *head aevered ;' 'buth lianda cut off (appAienUy at one blow) i' and ao on -. (md all these feata were perTormed with old dragoOD iworda, with edgea as aharp aa raaoia. I uked. ' Hon da joa alrike wiUi your eword to cut off men'a limba F' ■ SOike hard,' replied tha Did trooper, 'with k drawing onL' "
And BO. H yon want to eiool in any of the ftata here mentioned— to aay nothing of deoapltatdng on enemy ahoald yon ever be a aoldier — learn lo use your anord with skill U. knowledge la power with
jjiEjgB} K lU* fdasd .Anhnj mi gnuly mooimfnid in Rnnfir tlmM, tod many
*■ flBr ***t"*w wen made for tti n^latlon. The HononrAble Artillery Oompuiy
U ' ImI ' ^ ^ l^mdim, though they have long diatued tbo weapon^ ue the remaine
'^'iil Vr "^ "" *'"'*°' (nIaTi% or Bowmoi or Arabsn. Ai to the time when
-Oln ' )■ •hooUng with the long-bow flnt begun kmonget Ihs Englieh, there
' ' [^5s '^ app«" DO earUJn uooant. WOIUm Rofni. iC will be noollected, wla
'^ killed by an anow, while hunting in the New ForeMi and Blohard
CcBDr d* Uon wu lUin wbllM beaieglBg the caMie at Chaloa*. by a Pranoh bowman,
in IIM: after thia time ws nad nothing of Arehei? ontil the reign of Bdwatd m..
wfaen an older waa laaned to tiut ahmriflta of meet of tiia Engliih ttmntiea to proride
Dts hsadied wUM bows, ud Bra hondred bnndlei of airowi, for tlie then taileDdttl
war agalnBl Fnnoe. Tha tanuRu battle of Om^ wu fongbt tbnr ytti* anermrdi.
in which it ia ataMd that we had absat two Ihoaaand arehsn, oppoaed M about the
Hoa BBDbar vt n«neh. In lb* OfUi year of the nlga of Bdward IT. an act wu
901 ABCHBBY.
paased that erecy BngUshman, and Irislunaa dwelling with BngUibmeii, ahould ba^v an Bngliah bow of his own height* which ie directed to be made of yew, wyoh, haael, aoh, or awbume, or any other reasonable tree, according to their power. The next chapter also directed that bntts should be made in every township, which the inhabitants were obliged to shoot at every feast-day, under the penalty of one half- penny when they should omit this exercise. During the reign of Henry YITL sereral statutes were made for the promotion of Archery. An act of parliament, in Elisabeth's reign, regulated the price of bows. Charles I. is said to hare been an archer ; and, in the eighth year of his reign, he issued a commission to prerent the fields near Londou being so enclosed as ** to interrupt the necessary and profitable exercise of shooting.'* So lately as the year 1763 targets were erected in the Finsbuiy fields, during the Baeter and Whitsuntide holidays, when the best shooter was s^led ** Captain " tor tlie ensuing year, and the second ** Lieutenant." Edward VL, in his journal, says that one hundred Archers of his guard shot» before him, two arxows each, and afterwardA Jdl together ; and that th^ shot at an inch board, which some pierced quite throufrh with the heads of their arrows, the board being well-seasoned timber. The distance of the mark is not mentioned. As a psstime there is none, perhaps, superior to this ; it has been for years highly popular in this country ; and in fkct* judging from the past and the present^ we may venture to jirediot that —
Th« ArelMr*! fport will narer b« «sllnaii Until th« BMnnoffy of Robla Hood, Of Crany's well-foncht field, ud CheTy.ClisM, B« blotted from the tablet of our uluds.
mS XKPI.XKXH18.
Ths Bow. — ^The young archer should, in the flrat place, select a bow that is adapted to his own height and strength. Ambition should not induce him to nWfotm
one suited to a stron^et person, as he will not only be thereby pane- vented from hitting the mark, but find the exercise so (htiguing as to become sui irksome toil, instead of a pleasing recreation.
Axxows should be delicately proportioned in length and weight to the bow for which th^ are intended. They are used blunt or shaxp, and vaxying in I their thickness, according to the fancy of the archer. Some are made so as to taper gradually tram the ftethers to the pile, and some vice terta ; others, agaizx, are thickest in the centre ; but those which taper tram the pile to the Usathers are generally considered the best. All arrows should have their nooks or notches cased with horn ; and the nocks should be of such a sixe as to fit the string with exactness, and be neither too tight nor too loose. Three gooee or turkey ftathen are afllxed to arrows ; one of theee, denominated the cook feather, is of a diflteemt colour from the other two, and this is always to be placed uppennoat on the soing.
I
ABGHSRT. 908
Tmb Bnor«. — ^Tluift part of the itring whidh reotiTM the noek of the eRow ie with Mwing-eflk, to prayent the Btring being rabbed and weakened. If the ■Ok ehonld oome off the etring, it ought to be re-whipped without delay ; otherwiie, tba etring will be in danger of breaking ; and this is not the only miachief, for, fhnn tiM breaking of a atring often ensoes the snapping of the bow. It is also adiiaable to whip the nooee and eye of the string, although many archers do not trouble them- aalrea to do so. The young archer will do well, if any of the* threads of his string Ineak, to put it aside and use another. Should the string become twisted or rayeUed, it ought to be le-twisted and waxed before it is put on again. A bow, flye fbet long whan braoed, should neyer haye the string more than flye inches ftt>m its centre. This rale win be a guide to the young archer in springing his bow ; whateyer be its length, lie yrill, of ooane, adjust the distanfie in the same proportion according to the
Tmb Tassbl. — ^This is yeiy necessary to the archer, for the purpose of elaaning the arrow from such dirt as may adhere to it if it enter the ground. TUB dirt» if sufhied to remain, will impede the arrow in its flight, and also reader its oouzse untrue. The tassel is suspended on the left side of the archer, mtd is thus always at hand tar use.
TsB QviysB. — ^The qniyar is fbr the reception of the brows, but is neyer constantly except in Boying, wbgai the archer goes ftxnn place to place and shoots at any he may select, instead of at a fixed target. Modem quiyers are usualty made of tin ; but in the (dd time th^ were eunatructed of wood or leather.
TsB Gi«oyB. — ^The gloye coneistB of idacea for three flngers, a back thong, and a yrrist^trap to ihsten it. The flnger-staUs should neither prqject far oyer the tope, nor be drawn back to coyer the flnt Joint. The gloye is worn on the right hand, and is used for the purpose of protecting the flngers from being hurt by the string.
Tax Ba4CB is worn on the left ann to saye it fh>m being bruised or t^imed by the bow-sMng. The brace should be made of stout leather with a yery
^ smooth sarlhoe. and should be kept well greased, that the string
^g^ may glide oyer it without impediment, and thus protect the arm. ^ Particnlar attention should be paid to this circumstance, as it fti|UBiiHy happens to the inexpezienoed, and sometimee to the practised, archer that the arm beoomes considerably bmised by the bow-string.
Tax Bbi.*. Poucx, axb Obbasb-xox. — ^The belt is buckled nmad the waist ; the grease-box is suspended fttnn the middle, and the pouch or bucket on the right side of it. A composition tar gi easing the finger of the shooting-gloye and the smooth side of the brace, when occaaion may require, is kept in the box ; the pouch holds the airows for IrnTnediBte use in target shooting.
Tbb Ascmiw — ^This is a large case, fitted up with the necessaiy drawers and for the receptioB of the bow, afeock of arrows, strings, and all the oftheardiar.
^
tM AfiC&SBT.
Bvm.— Bulti an nutda of Ions ^M* of tnrf, which an io h« EloMly praoBJ down.
Thej an ganaially pyiminidal in ■hapa, but maj ba ^ahioDed BCGordin^ to (ha tViCT of Uis archer. For grown-np panoui thejr ara aareD or aiKbt faet iride. Uma or Ibor raet think a Uis baaa, and tumrly •arm bat in hatght U ths middle. A nnmd pieca
*of paateboard ia placad in (hs ceotn oT Ihs bnet (Or a mark, by a pa^ drinn thmogb ila centn. The mafk ia incraaaed or decnaiad in liie acoording to Uw OiMauce at which ths archET ihoolg : fur IbiitT yanla, it Bhoald be foiu iDcbaa in ■<'"■>-"- ; for aiity jarda, aii inchea i and ao on in propoitiau ror a gt«ater diaianoe. Btaota Uiat lake plaoe oulaide tfaa mark an not nokoned, and he who placea moM ahola In the paateboard doiiuK the plar " ' Mcniiutad (he winnsr. Bona an frequenily placed at diObnnt dialanoaa from each other : a ect of bntle ia fOur, uhji'h are so concnved u to allow of ths playera aeatng them all at onoe. What ia called a aingle end, ia ahooting at one mark only ; a doable end ia ehootliig to a mark, lud back again from (bat mark to ths one flrst ahot bnm.
TiBam abonld be proportioned to the height and akill of (be jnTcnile anher. and
seim on lbs ban, whioh is of straw, worked aa in a bee-hive. It oontaina foBT drclea and a gold centn ; the inner dmle ia red, the mit while, (be third bUok, and «he wier ia whits, bordered with green. If ons target only be ahot at, a irreat deal o/ tinie is WSBtsd in going to IMoh ths urowa. and in retumiag again tc the ipot for ■hooting from ; two targets are, thenfOn, generally need, placed on oppoaita aidea of the Held, each pv^ Ti^^^^^g qj^ f^ j^i^ antagonist's arrowa aa tiifj an shot at fc*>* target near him.
In Arcbeiy malnhea (bare an genenlly two prius ; ons for the grsstsat tiambar of amws ahot into (he (arget, the other fbr the abot neareat the gold oenirs. Hila In the target an aomelimea reckoned all alikej but then is nsnslly a diatiDCtlon made. The guld cenln ia the mark ; and the oirole which approaches nsarest to it. being lea* in else than the others, and, oonseqnen^, mon difflonlt to hit. and nearer tho mKln mark itselT. an amw shot in that circle la deemed of mote value, in tvckODing for tlw prise, than if it wen to take plaoa lu any of Iboaa outside it; and so in pnpntkm with ths othora.
Scoaurg Ciana. — A penon at the target shonid be timiiataed with a card. baTin^ proper divisiona for ^o LnaartiDiL of the arcbera' Ttmmrm to ngiater the hila made by enob aa Ibej occnr. Tbie is naoally done with a pin, aoapended from ths card, as tlie bulla made b; It an more proof against accidenta than (be marks of a penoU ; and
KicEOHixe ma Bin. — The mode of aacertBlning the valae of the Uu, whioli la increased In proportion as tbey reach the oenOv, will be seen by the fOUovrin^ example ; — It qppean by the card Uiat A has utm in tha gold, three in the rad, earan
ABCHEBT.
2C5
in the famflr white, eleven in the black, and fifteen in the outer white— making, in the whele, thiitj-eeTen. The real yahie of these is to be ascertained by nmltiplying the hits in the gold by nine ; in the red, by three ; in the inner^white, by two ; by adding
yoBH or ram cakd.
|
Mahbi. |
0014. R«l. |
InMr WhlML |
Black. |
OatCT White. |
ToTAlu |
Valob. |
|
|
A B 1 |
• • • • |
• • • • • • • • • |
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • |
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • |
• |
1 1 1 37 36 1 |
61 80 |
% fourth to those in the black ; and leaving the nmnber without alteration of those in the ooter-white. By this process, it will appear that A's nmnbera, according to the vmlne of each circle, amonnt to sixty-one ; B*s total nnmber of hits is thirty-five only, boi calculated in the same manner, they surpass A's by nineteen. At grand Archery meetings there are frequently two prises contested for ; one, the prize for numbers, oompoted in the manner we have described ; and another for the hit nearest the centre or gold. Diflbrent opinions have been entertained as to hits on the edge of a circle ; Cbe best mode, perhapa, is to reckon them as fUling in the outer circle.
snnrGnrG vn bow.
The bow is to be taken in the right hand, by the handle, with the flat part toward the peraon who is about to string it ; his right arm should rest against his side ; the
lower end of the bow, which has always the shortest bone, should be placed against the inside of the right foot, which should be turned a little inward to prevent the bow ttom slipping ; the left foot should, at the same time, be brought forward ; the centre of the left-hand wrist must be placed on the upper limb of tho bow. below the eye of the string, the forefinger knuckle upon one edge of the bow. and the top of the thumb on the other. The bow is now to be pulled up evenly and vigorously, and the upper limb of it pressed down by the right hand, and the wrist of the left, which should, at the same time, slide upward, until the eye of the bow-string is safely placed in the nock. Tho middle, the ring, and the little fingers, should all three be stretched out, ss they are
not wudad In tUa opantion of iMnging tba bow ; monarfr, if tblt be not done, thcj ■n liabla to bo caogfat bennon Uia HrJos aad t^ bow. and Uiiii bsoame HTBralr burt. The joiing ■rohor dioald Mte can that tho ojro ii «^ pluad ta tba nock bafbra he nawroa hii l<n hand. Ha ■bould dM ba impatisnt in tha aotiaii of aMnging Iha bow, bnt parfonn it ayitemaEIcBll; i if he do not anocesd. M him laji It b; Ibr a raw minTitoa, and whan ho la oool, maka a aeoond attampt. To unatring the bow» tlio ■hart horn ia to be placad on tho gronnd, the palm of tlio left hand receiTing the flat aide of the npper limb ; the atiing ahonld be npwud ; the handle 1« then to be pmeI wlHi tha right sm, ao aa to ilacken the atriag t when the laltsr beoomaa looaa anonslii the eye ia to be bnmght oat of tlia nock by the thotnh of tho left hand,
A apon atrlng read; fitted to the bow ahonld alwv* ^ ^ readineaa. In caae the ona
in OM ihoold cbanoa to biaak. Braiy anshar oogbt alao ta make hlmaelt aoqnainted
p»q with the proper plan of OkIdk a naw utriog to Ua bow i ba will o1)aerve
^J y that an eja ia ahaad; made to the one end, and (hat the other la Mi for
" " ' himaelf to lU oo, becanae bowa Tary eonildcnblT in teogtli ; thia ia
done by what ia called a timber nooae» aa ahown by the diagram in the margin.
roamos urn raicnci.
In ghooting the utdw the Ihoa of Iha nj^rt-imia, ia to ba torned fnll towarlla tba
mark.batnot anypartoftbanrontof thebody; whicbalunld be turned toward (baaaM.
If the mark be Donb. Tha baala ahonld be a Itow
/ . inohea apart > tha bead ehoald ba lathar bent Ibr-
ward ; tba IcA baud, with the bow la U in a parpm-
dionlai poaiUan, la to be held oot Mralgbt lowarda
thanarit, with lha wriat bant inwatdi; the ■Rt>w
ia to ba btnoght well towarda the right ear, and not
Fig. 1). The ar- ahonld be drawn ' of lha ponch bj i middle, and
" "■ ^^ " -'-"^T^;!>-^ the fbrefinger
' of the left hand
paaaaa over It; by the other hand, the nock ia placad in the MTing at the proper plaoa, with lha oock feather arocnnoat (aaa Fig. t) ; when Uila ia dona, the fOreflngar of tlie leit liuid ia remored, and placad rmuid tike bow. White the Ion band la ralaiag the bow, the ricU ehotOd be drawing the airing, with two or three Engara only, and not the thnmb ; and when tha arrow, which ia to be held between the two Bnt Ifakgera, ia three-t«ita_ draim, the alq ahonld be lakaai.
ABCHBBY. 807
As •oan m it naehM the httd, it slumld be let looie, fat ftar of the bow iziAppizig. It is impartaat tbst the young srcber do not hold the bow npside down, ■• this would also endanger its breaking.
To Dkaw ths Abbow from the target or groimd, it should be taken by the hand, as near to the pile as possible, and extracted in the same direction as it entered. If these instmctkms be not attended to, the young archer will break many arrows in disengag- ing them when th^ are ftMt in the ground or the target
Bornro. — ^This is Teiy good practioe with the long-bow, as the archer is not confined to a particular place, but roves abontk selecting any conspicuous tree or other ol^ieci for a mark,instead of a fixed target. Boving may be practised either in parties of two or more or by a single archer. The sport may be rendered very tiseftil in tnarhing jronng marksmen how to judge of distances — ^which acquirement, in the days when bows and arrows were weapons of warfbre, was indispensable to a good archer. In roving parties of six or more, it is well to divide into companies ; and when the first company have shot at, and walked some disumce from, the first mark, the second abould shoot at it, and then the third, and so on. By this means time is saved and flaligiie avoided.
Long-bows of good lanoewood, with horn tips and plush handles, cost from Ss. to Ca. each, according to their vise ; but if you want a first-rate bow of lemon- wood, yon BBuat give from 8s. to a guinea for it. Arrows cost from 28. 6d. to 10s. a dosen, and qoiven from 4a. to lOs. each. Targefesandtheotherrequisitesforarchecyvaiy in price •eeoiding to aise and quality.
A sabstitate for the long-bow has lately appeared, in the shape of a wooden tube fitted with an India-rubber qiring, which is bound with silk. Against this the arrows are pressed, and the elastid^ of the India-rubber sends the arrow to a great distance. Ae a toy this new instrument is much used, but it oan never displace the regular bow and arrow. ForJKght'ikiooiiiMff, which is simply shooting the arrow as far as possibley it is, bowerer, nseftil and amusing.
SHV CBOSS-BOW.
The Cross-bow was formerly used as a weapon of war, and the bow itself being made of a strong steel spring, it required the assistance of mechanical power to bend it ; hnt the cm«iii-bow we recommend to our readers is not of quite so formidable a nature.
The stock of the bow (A A*, ^1 Fig. 1) is formed something
like the stock of a musket, to the exbemity of this the bow is fixed; from A to B a semi- circular groove is formed, in which the arrow or the bullet is placed ; at B there is a step in the wood, as shown more plainly in Fig. 2, over this step the string of the bow is drawn, and there it remains ^Bia it ii raised by means of the trigger. This last is constructed in various ways : in
lot ABCHBBT.
the pUD repuwataJ in tha nignTlag, tha look, it ws m^ to aill ft, b Ibniwd of Mm piacfls of bnua, or bAjd wood ; Uuae an lot Into Uia itook, which la piaroed for that puTpo«, u ■hown U C. Fig, S i their ihape li indloMcd bf tha dottad Uiiea at C imd D, Fig, I i ft pin ii driTen tbroagh the nock, and also throagh euh of Iheaa pleoea, so ■i lo torra two axl» on which thaj cui work, Tho ollhot of thia BTran^emeiit ta aa fOUowa : when the flnger drawi back the trigger D, ita upper portion praaaoa *ff»w*t the lower half of Uie lever C, and the apper part of Chat lerar la oonaaqnent]; forced agalnat the atrlog of Uie bow, whioh ii thna raised above the atap, and being dmm rordbl; forwud by the bow, ft oarries with it the ball Or the umw.
The cost of a good Croas-bow la tnna Co, to 10a, 6d.. though soma, ftir Ttrj joong KTchen, eui be porohased for as llltle aa la. Od. The bolta, or arrows, ooat bmn M. to Aa. Od, a do£On.
Whether the Long-bow or the Cms-bow be need, the arrows emplored shonld be all of eqnal length, thoogh this ts ot leas impaitaooe with the Croea-bow than with the Long-bow. Nothing ooDtribntes so nuiDh to niuertaJatjr of aba aa Ineqmili^ ia the length of the airowa ; therefore each bow, aooording to ita slxe and stnDg:tli, should be ftimlshed witii its own aet of arrows. Nor ahonJd the yonng arGber ahoot alone i for In sch
If he practise with others, he will atrtre to rninlatn Ua ooanpaiiioiu i and, ii of « eanlees, imakiUtal m
moKt mm, are unbltloiu of the (rjnmphi of hon tlilp 1 sod, wiUi nina;, ■ knowledgt of honaa kod dogB aUniU plucfl of a polito O'iucadoiL Tho child eacsped from
ir's nlUng-iUok, and, with a paBk-tfar«>d r .r|«t on hli mimlo iMed, with ac Bmoh giM aa a bunier gallopa alleF U]« hound*. FramridingaoaDe. IheMmBipiiit ftats Hilh UrinK mrmiM aa acceptable mcani for a id rendon a rocldng-hona a perfoot IdoL ■addle of Uie inmu>il MMd, the rtal reiiu (made rut b; tin taeki), jAndtaflnpportcdhja voodnicnipper^^Utheaeimiimiveaofaa^rut li aa AJexander felt when ha nbdaed BoofphaLaa ; a deed that hiitory eeerpd lell of. and wbtoh painten love to depict, aa our anlil hai. Pram the rockjng- joasgiidar take* aaotbar Map iqnwdi In the Male oC aquiMtion, b; monntlai It
210 BIDTNG.
a real IlTe doxikBy, who Uoks, and ahieB, and stands stock-stOl, and robs against a wall, or backs into a pond, and by these various tricks gives another morsel of experience to the yoathfU horseman. The day of gladness comes to him at last, when the graoeftil creatore, which has long been his admiration, stands before him ready to be mounted. The smooth glossy skin, the arching neck, the intelligent eye (which seems to scan his new rider with ^ curious inquiry as to his skill), the flowing mane neatly combed to the one side, the bushy tail, and the strength, the courage, and the ^rnmietiy, are all there. The rein is on his neck, the saddle sits lightly on his powerflil back, the stirrups dangle f^m their leathers, inviting the toe. Yet this last opportunity is often the source of anxie^, of pain, of disappointment, and accident. And why P Becanse the young rider lacks a knowledge of the many small things which make the good horseman, and render his seat upon the back of the noblest of quadrupeds safiB and pleasant and exhilarating.
In riding, as in other arts, it is practice alone that makes perfect. And in order to attain perfection, it is necessary to know what should be done, and what left undone. We will therefore, if you please, begin at the beginning, which is
BAnDLXiroTHa Hoasa. — ^The saddle is very often placed improperly. When it is too forward, it interferes with the tree play of the horse's shoulder, and makes him more liable to trip. The rider also is too near his neck, and has consequently less control of the animal's motions. The foremost part of the saddle should be a Aill inch behind the pkUe bone, as it is termed, that is, the flat bone of the shoulder. It should at the same time be ftill four inches from the hips. With country-fed horses, newly home from grass, or horses kept much on green food, a crupper may be requisite to keep the saddle from riding forward. This addition, although now commonly omitted Xxy practised riders, has uiother advantage, that of allowing the girths to be somewhat less tight than when the saddle has nothing but the girths to keep it in position. A good saddle should press evenly on the ribs, and not bear tightly on one part and loosely on another. Indeed, for the comfort of both hone and rider, a saddle that fits well is very desirable. A point worthy of notice in saddling a horse, and one but rarely attended to, is the tightening of the girths equally on both sides of the saddle, and not, as generally practised, on the left or near side only. The back girth is usually buckled first, and then the front girth, which is brought somewhat over the other, so as to bind it in its right position ; but wi^ some horses, owing to their malfbrmation, the back girths must be tightened over the trout, to prevent the saddle nhiftjng on to the withers. The proper length of the stirmps for most riders may be ascertained by placing the tips of the right hand fingers on one of the stirrup-leather catches, and reducing or increasing the number of holes, until the stirrup just reaches the right arm-pit. The saddle being adjusted whilst the horse is yetin the stall, the halter may beYemoved to make way for
Thb Bbxslb. — This is an important part of the hone's equipment. If the bit is too small, or too large, mischief is sure to result ; the happy medium alone securing ease to the horse and safety to the rider. Horses differ vezy much Ib the degiva of power required over the month, a very common mistske being to punish the aniaoal
Donbla n ■o when Um ridn wi«he baud. Thaj are moch
9m hii hcna cbieflj, or entinly, with the left m tha alngla nufBe when the hone will bear It to ■ nu1>-bit ; the anaffle nmal Ihsn be adopted. When doable ntea are naed. the one rein regulatea the bridoon, or maffle. the other oontnda the eorb. Id brtdUng a bone, Bnt aee that the ihroal'Uah tmd the cnrb^hain and einp an nnbaleneCI, then pn( the rlgbt ann throoBh the reina, to diTida them, and lahg the head-atall and oheek-itnpa apon the left thomb i paaa tha ratna oierlhe bone'a trndand Inve Ihemon Uaneck; abirtthe right ttnunb in place of the left, then gnlde the bita iuto the month with the left hand, while, with Um riKbt, jon biias the head-etall over the hene'a can. Fatten the thmat-laih onl^ » tight that fOB toar paia two at joai flngera between it and the animal'a cheek, and then. leeiDg the cnrb-chain be not twiated, lake it up to that link which will allow the fcneflngvr to be paaied between the curb and the horae^a jaw. The bit ia known to be properly a^JoMcd br the iteadincn of the horae'e head, hy hli Ughtueaa in hand, ■Dd b; tb* ease and mdineaa with which he obeys tbe rider. When * noee-band ie attached to the hridie, it ahonld be buckled looae enoogh to admit the aome amount of play. Having eaid thoa much of aaddle and bridle, let aa nndentojid Ihe proper
HovnnB.—Wben abo
tbe whip in Ihe left hand i
the lisht band, with wliicl) the left hand {the middle or loB^eet HogerdlTiding Ihem) until they are anfllcEently tiRhtened (br yoa to fMI the bsartas of the bone'a numlh. Throw the kioee enda over llui middle joint of the fbre. Bngtt, 10 aa to drop down on the offside of the hom'i neck. Then take the centre
tlie Ihmnb and forvflnitcr of the riiTht haad, aa already Id allowing Ihem
nnunt, Kuid before the left atiDiilder of tbe horse, hold a laah dnwawanfc, leave the eorb-rein looea on the ■t their oentre, between tbe thnub and foreOnger of
deachbed.aj
m with the IMIe finger of tbe left band, paadnj
to the ofT-alda over tbe end* of the (oaffle-reiDa. Take with the ligU hand a lock of the mane, and wind it onoeor twioe nnnd the leli thnnb. doeing tiM hatid ao aa flnnly Id giaap the reina and mane. The left band may BOW b* iMtiil OB the neck of the bone near to the wlthen. and wtthla abont tix or
KmiKa.
gl of ihs Hddle. With tha right hind, hold Uu ■tinnp until ; Uia right hAod Bhtmld luw bfl pnt on th> oautlfl, the bodj I the gwldle I move Ihg rigM right lag quick!;, bat not haatUj,
|
bono, ■od Hak auilj (no |
|
lerfctDg or bumping) into the |
|
Mddla. By tanking Uu toa |
|
of the boot atigbOj iamidi. |
|
■0 H to Hrfke tba right |
|
rtirrap gBnUy, tba no™. |
|
putlrround; brthiimauu |
|
it wUhoat tha aid of tha |
|
h*nd, whlOh thouU nwror ba |
|
amptojad «bM> tba attmipa |
>i« l«t; attar a little pme- tioa tha atirrapa may ba droppod arenwbaB gallop- ing, and qoioU; regainad hj nrikii^i both loea aimoUanaoDalr Inwaidi. Od gaining Iba taat, tha raina mnat ba drawn to their p
rtgbt hand. The cnrb-rdn ibDold be h
maOle, lO that the horaa
ma; hara the tree motkin ,i
of hia head. In riaing, the
(o« nuM not be allowed to
touoh the horse below the
pmperly bent i nor muat the Tight foot, when onaaing bahiod tbs aaddle, Couoh the onnip. The whip la now tranaibrred from the left to tile right hand.
ptsa^ant, and elegant
principlflfl. The ridw moat reel at hifl eaae. There muat be nOBtiffheaa,bntatlbeamme time OD aloTanlineea of pogCota Hi« head moat be np. hia sheat fbrward, hia ahouldera bask, hia loina carved. Bat, b; holding hia bead Dp, he mtiM not auppoaa be ia to be guing at tiia dondt. The chin ahould be drawn back — not be rvlaed — «nd the gluice
BIDING. 218
be diredod forward that the honemaa may see where bis boxve should go. If a rale be given, it maj be that the rider should look forward over the head of his steed, beiweeu the ears; but this, like all roles, mnst of conxse hare its exceptions. Cany- ittg his head up, he mnst not allow one shonlder to be more forward than the other, QntaM he ia riding in a eirole to the right, when the right shonlder mnst be slightly advaiiced, and this position rerened when riding to the left Some care will be requisite to preveoot this at first, for holding the reins has a tenden<7 to bring too mnoh forward the arm which guides them. The elbows most be kept to the sides, the right haiid resting against the right thigh, the bridle hand having the thnmb uppermost, and the finger nails turned towards the breast. The rider should not lean as though in a aloping-backed chair. He should not sit too &r back in the saddle, nor rest too much on his buttocks ; nor yet, on the other hand, should he be too near the pommel, nor reet too oompletdy on his fork. He muat not tUl into the '* genteel vulgar " mistake of keeping his legs quite straight and stiff, and thrust forward in front of the horse's shoulders, like a pair of compasses on horseback ; nor, on the other hand, should his heela be drawn up like those of a jockey. The knee, both for safety and for elegance, must be slightly bent ; the stirrup-leather will be some guide in this. When the rider's 1^ hai^s loose by the horse's side, the foot-bar of the stirrup should reach aa low down as one inch beneath the inner ankle-bone. When the leather is a4in0ted to this length, the foot, as Csr as the ball of the great toe, may be placed in the stirrup. But let this be remembered, that stirrups are not for helping a good rider to retain his seat; they are to assist in mounting, to sustain the weight of the foot» which would otherwise bear painftUly on the ankle-joint, and for service in rising from the saddle, and under some other droumstanoes to be hereafter spoken about. But, remember again, th^are not '* to hold on with," and the rider who uses them for that imipoee is never safe. Bo much for the present about the seat; but before our horse ia pat in motion, another important point must be attended to, which ia —
Tn BxEV-Kou>. — ^The rider has now a rein between each finger ; the superfluona kwae part of both bridles passing as before over the first Ihiger between it and tho thnmb, aa in Fig. 1. Here we see the two left reins below, and pj^, |,
tha two right reins above. With thia rein-hold, and with the left hand on^, many riders contrive to manage their steeds. It ia doubted by accomplished horsemen whether it is possible to guide a horse with one hand in this manner, unless what ia ealled a faUe tmUcation is given by the pressure of the reins on the neck. 1i is better, therefore, that we should not attempt that vrhich ia not adopted by the masten of the art. When you wish to turn to the rights pull the right rein ; when you want to go to the left, pull the left rein. This ia dear and natural enough ; but when you attempt to ride with the left hand only, it cannot be properly dcma. Indeed, the very contrary takes place. The common error is for the horseman to torn his left hand in tho direction he desires the animal to go, and the horse ia guided by the pressure of the reins upon his neck, rather than by the imiiratimi of the bit upon his mouth. Thia ia the origin of bad horsemanship, wilii
m BIDIKO.
ftU the ■wkwmrdnaii, Uw rldlonla, uid Uie dancer wUBb, fbUom la tta bmlB. Aa m us about to tearn Id ride, let q* MMt on tba b«M road. LM ni itgia at a roogh-iidar dual whan ha bnaka a ooU. Hs adopU tha plan bsama It la ths almplMt, tba moM uatonl. aud tb« «a*le«t. H« tak« a rein In eaoh hand.
You can Ihaii gin thetrne indiettlon U> your bona; and iriiau 700 bars Impraned , on 701U mind the Tslos of the itanple nle to oftan neglaoled — right
rein to tha right, left rein to Uw left — yon maj lake the nini in your left hand, aa ;oa faald them wban inoonting, galling in the aid of the right hand onl; when 700 wlati to ohange the poaltian of joor hone.
Boms othsr icia-holda hare baen rsoommanded. Ban la ana fOr a
alngls brldls in Ihs left hand, aa in Fig. >. It is aaid to poaasM Iha
adTsntage of aepafatlng Uyi two relne :
higen are batwaen them. Tn thia mods the right ni
P) lite left, aepanl
\„Fig. 3. Thentt \'\ hand lake* tba of (bs Isft, and
m^ and repLaoe aaoh Onger in
reiTia to the left, apply tha inFig, *.
Ohanging the brldoon oal; ii a almplsr
-S— -NJT- la anbatirated ftir the little flngar of the
«! •. M-lllh ' . ■• <» Pig. B. It Is a very good plan 10
^f^i>—i a bridle on a peg, or on tbs back of a
M rata-holda and tbeir ohange*. on hoiHbBok ths laanier will thus bava IDU n>r things whioh aiumot be prao-
lontoftlisaaddla. tis-t.
[n bringing lbs right / 0 aid irheti the donble reina are in the left hand, the i knooklea of tha right hand shoald ba tnnied npwarda aa
befbre; plaoe the flnt two Sngeia over the bridoon-ieia and U Wl II '^^O- the third Oager over the curb : let (be anpeTflnona portion paaa ^'^^ X^^
batwsan tha Brat flnger and the thumb — the lalter pnaaing it fkat, aa in F^. a. Tba hand fa than to bs placed In podtiaa— Ihnmb nppannoat, tiM buuklaa lowarda Uia horaa'a naok, and the linger naOa towarda tha ridar,
iy> ahoitai relna, do not move the left band from Ita poaiCioD, hut merely elaoken
BIDING. 115
ib» flngen, and, havjug taken the looae put of the xeins in the riglit head, drnir all ereoljr end eqoaUy until they ere the required length. Then piece the looee portbm heiween the thomb and ftirefinger as before, and tighten the left hand.
Ama — Tkm Hasd, no Bmxl, Ajm rax Wnr. — ^The plongh-bc^ Who xidee the flttmer'a hone to the Tillage pond, with a halter for reins and a hone-cloth for aaddle, has a practical maetexy of the aidt which writen upon equitation take such paina to explain on paper, but which, after all, can only be learned on horseback. The boy and the animal seem to move with one will; and the horse, which is sometimes leetiTe with the fkrmer on his way to market, is docfle with the lad, who has no stin***'^** from bit, spur, or bridle. The secret is, that the rider accommodates him> •elf to the peealiarities of his steed. The rider most, however, always be master, or his horse will master him. To accomplish this end eiTectaally and permanently, he mnat temper gentleness with finzmeas. What is wanted is a light hand — never jerking or polling hastily or with nnnecessazy force — ^with both reins always of eqnal length ; and the hand ever attentive to its proper position. The horse's month should be fdt (ss it is called) just enough to keep him slert— to make him ready to ob^ your wilL When be is so, he is said to be *' eoOeeted," At the aame time the reins should so ttr give to the motions during riding that each onward impulse should be felt and be ssristnl. as it were, hy the rider. The terms used to exprees this mutual feeling between the man and the horse, through the bridle, are the " corretpondenoe " and the **appK9.'* The control of the rider, thus ezerdsed with ease, gentleness, and elltet, is called the "mpport." The tenns are, perhaps, not the best that could be employed, but as th^ are generally received in the mamat/g it is requisite they should be known.
The action of the hand is -pawertal either for good or for mischief. A heavy hand
win spoil a horse's month ; a careless hand may risk the rider's neck. When in proper
pnT^f*"", a slight motion of the wrist, without moving the shoulder, allows the horse
to advance. Bhortening the right rein rather upwards gives the turn to the right ;
shortening the left rein turns to the left; shortening both reins stops the horse ; or, if
oontinned, reins him backward. Let all these be practised, as already advised, with
both hands on the reins.
■nm to Tomrft Hoasumr.
Start slowly, and without any *' fbss." Do not allow the hone to frrhanat himself at the *MigiiiT><Tig of his work, but let him warm to it gradually.
Slovenly motiotts of the rider's legs are mistaken for " indication " hy the horse, and, therefore, ooufose him.
In timing, the horse's head should be moved only just enough for the rider to see the animal's tjB on the side he is to go to. A horse's head should be straight, that be may see before him. To pull his head round is awkward, unnecessaiy, ugly, and daageroDs ; particulariy if the animal be going fkst.
Never draw the rein roughly — *' gentle but firm," be your motto — ^no jerking ; use ao more force than absolutely requisite ; and never foil into the error of depending on the reins for tapporting the rider.
K«nrlbrgMlokn|iUiaBngeruIlioppaslM theehMti th* kaneklM lomrtilb*
bcne'i naok ; tha tota mil tiini«d In, ud U» heel w«U atmk dona.
A good bor*» i* doing wsU when he mUa fonr mila *» honr, oMitan ili-aiid-*^ half, DMe eight-ud^k-hmlf, and gkUop« algrm. Tonng riderm miut not. hawsrer.
Tbe iiMe* of Cha hone are dlstliupiished by the teOna of the uilmKl In motiaii. In the Walk ho baa three legi on the gronnd and one offi In the Trot ha lilla two leg* at a time, haling, of conne, two only m the gmoDd, theao batng alw^a on oppoalte lidaa : In the Canter ha hu. atUmea, Ihnalega off ttie groond; in tbaOallap ha haiall fOnr laganKntumtaiiljafftheaartiitageUiar. In the Ambla we m« boUi leg* of the aame tida niaed at the aame InMuit. It nukjr be Dotioed In yonng foali when IbUowtng the man. What the lid* ii ready to atart, and wiibea th* hoise to moye in a Walk, he ahoold increase Che action al ghtly on che moatli bj
•ome praanre irlth both legij
bat thia indication ahould be
moat decided as the right
■Ida to indooe the aniioal to
lead" (or lift lint) hia right
[ leg Wheo the horae hat
^ Db07«Ithain»ll«Uontow»lk.
I the praamre ahoiild be t«-
■llghtlf eued. or he will ■nppoee 7011 deain him to pau into a ijntcker pace, the trot. Tha body moat be carried (aBUj-. The rider ahooU ba aapple tather than niff, reaMDbering that ha haa to depend for aaffely and eomfoit mora on the balanoe of hii body Hum area apoa the grip of Iha lagi and thigh*, and that he 1* not to regard atirrap* or rein* as mean* of " holding on.'* A good bone walk* in ejuct time, hi* Ibec coming to the ground with Twaotifnl regularity — one, two, three, fonr — oae. two. three, four; the Dnt being Iha off fore-Ibot, Uia aeoond the near hind-foot, the thiid Iha near fore-foot, tbe fonrtb the off bind-fbot. And bei^ the yonthfDl bonsman may ba told 10 remember that the lag* of tha horae are diitingniahed by the lermi " new " and " off." The groom alw^a goae to a hone'* head, when in tha alalile, b; paaaing the animal'* l^ aide ; the rider, when about to mount, alaiulB on tbe IcA aide oT bia •teed I Uw cuter, when driving bi* t«am, alwaya wnlha on tbe left *ide. Hence Uw neiniiC aide of the horae, which 1* tha lefteide, i* known by Iha lend " near aide /' tbe Tight aide, which la Outheat off, ii known a* the " off aide." Whilst ipeaking of these diattnctloni, oar hcsae betug now In motian, ■• may aonunlt (0 nmna^r tte rale or
the latO. Ahreyi itep Out n»r ililB. When tlil« keeiB yon beblnfl ft he nhicle, irtiich ta gdlsK ilowar Uiu yon iri«h lo pioceed, p«i on the right ilde wbai TOD havg done •□, r««ini»g»iii ' .- -'j -i.
■Ida of OiB read. An old rhjme wiLl
gliwld know tha ridVi will,fiiTnlylintgenU7 and Ihim tl» ottur IMt wiU lUl Im, arm fimr and U« Koinml he nOl. In the ■top iha nder'i mnu m ekaed lo hi* ndM both TAna tx9 drmwn cvenlj gndaaU; bnl fliml; lo
1, and not bs glnn
■^tK'^ -
7h srv* <*• *i>n* (o ln(, pi^ both l«gi and i^M Ih* bridlt hand, eneonnKtne him, ITT, irith tha Toice. Whan ha haa adapted Uw pwsa, aaia hli mmitb aligbtly. keepiDg the band In proper podtion. Haka no Jerking eSbrt, bat allow tha bodj to be mppla, and tha aettOD of tha horae'i frame will be
the cadence la ootmnenosd, and ainklns aa it conclDdea. An awkward eflbn on the
appavancs. Ho rulei tutsr than hla borat, and, as he Jerti and Jolta vp and
dawn, i« conrtanOj In Otager Of KOiag off. Take Ott moUon tmo the bane, and keap timB ffitb him. Da not leu too tartntAi retain Uia hand gmll; bat Dmlf in iu pniper piBC«, ud keep clOM to the amddlB with On thigha and Isgi, not "gripping" it morel; with Uie kaeae. Again, ramembcr (a keep die toe In and the be«l doira.
Tin Tml haa been divided into three degreea oT TaiTing apeed — Che modente, the extended, and the rnnning. The hone that on peifono all Uuee ma; be pat to than by a gteotflr or leu degree of enconngement ; bat inch nloeUea need not dietnM the leaner, who m^' be well content wilh hla (teed and hinuelf when, in the tant. the base ii 10 well "in hand" tluit onlj a alight degree of animation ii reqaired to Indnoe the gallop.
The Canttr li Danaldnvd aa a men vuie^ ot the gallop. It la, howew, entitled to be spoken oT u a distinct [see i the gallop being ■triotly a enoaeaslOD oT leapa in wbioh, aa we have alrcody iald, all fimr lege aie, at
the hone h*i alw«]v one .r v^ toot to the groond. iI'l 1^ In the (snter and gallop,
fi^^ aa in all other caiaa, 70a ff-T] ' ' { mnu araid Mifnieae at bodf ! orpoeition. WhOat piiMui- , ing a hold with the leg and thigh, and keeping both al- wa^B Bloee to llie uddle, do not (brget the balance. Be prepared for as; motion on the part of the horsa. and be raad; to adapt joamii! lo it. Unleee ;on are >o. toot leat ie not eecore. Ton ma; prepare yonreell for a horse'a rearing, bnt if he ahonld bll oa hie kneea ;oa would go over hii head ; on the contiar;, if yoa sipeoted the animal to klek, and diapoeed iroarealf aooordingl;, and he mted, eqnal inaeoori^ and danger wonld nin. What ;oii want in all Iheae ciraomataiuiea i* ooulldeooe. a anpple weU-balauoed aeat, and a
■ . trie or
enta him from giring proper e [DcalC kind oT gallop. The rider wants to bring the bone well on hla hannuhea ; to lilt both niie-lega, bnt to hidicata the one whioh Is to lead. This he do«s b; prewing both lege, tnmlng the hlpa allghtlj-, so aa to bring •omewhab forward tiie thigh on the Leading aide. Thla motion has a tendenc; to
nlaedaUttleabaretlielavelQf theelbowj the horee Is thus united, and a little ftartbsr
BIDINO. S19
enoooxttgenifliit with the voioe indoon the desired aeCioiL He mmt not be allowed to break ixito the trot; aboald he do eo, ke^ the hand more firm. When the paoe ie aecnred, the inner rein ehoold be kept rather ehorter than the other, and oonetant attention mnst be giTSn to keep the hone animated. It is hardly requisite to aa j that the slight change of position of the rider's hips mnst not induce a corresponding efaange in his shonlders. These mnst always be kept square, ax^ the head be directed, not sidewise, but forward, oyer the horse's head. Bemember that when the paoe is true the hind-leg follows the fore-leg of the same side ; and that when the rider is perfect, he can make his horse lead with either foot (and <diange is often desirable) always keeping him united.
The Oaliop difRots from the canter only in this— that the rider sits perfectly straight in the saddle, and that the paoe is more rapid. To gallop to the right, lead with the . right fore-leg — to gallop to the left, lead with the near fore-leg ; the hind-leg of the same side following the fore-leg in each case.
To torn in the canter, raise the horse on the leading rein ; prees the haunches forward and under; assist with the outward rein and by pressure of the calf of the outward leg.
To change the leading leg, choose the beginning of a cadence, and, during that cadence, let the rider's opposite hip come forward, and the reins be rerersed in position as the same cadence closes, that the horse may be ready to commence on the opposite leg without any cheek.
In atoppimg, both in canter and gallop, chooee the beginning of a cadence, when the fbve-fbet are coming to the ground, that the operation may be completed as the cadimce eloees and the hind-feet touch the earth. As they do so the stop should be complete. The hone is then in balance to go forward again, if necessary, as quickly as before.
The stop mnst not be attempted too suddenly in a rapid gallop by a young rider, or with an ill-broken horse. The '* double stop " is more prudent in such cases. This is done in two cadences instead d one. Throw the body gently back ; the horse checks half his speed in one cadence ; keep the body back and he stops as he completes the saooad. In all theee stops shorten both reins.
Always uwtisiii the impetuosity of your horse at starting, or he will soon be Afotoa (aa it is teemed), that is, will soon be out of breath, and his gallop be spoiled for the day. In galloping over soft ground, a ileld lying fldlow for instance, always choose the firmest parts. These will often be found nesr the hedge. When the horse's feet sink in the soil it quickly erhansts his strength.
liSjjraia. — ^In lesming to leap, in the riding-school, a movable bar, ten or twelTe foot long, is lodged an easy distance — one or two fert — ^fh>m the ground, in such a aaBxner that if struck it will giro wsy.
For the leap, that quality we have so often spoken of is most desirable. You want traVr^*^, eonfldence, a ready sense of the movements of the horse, and an equal I f dinrss to adapt yourself to them. None but a reiy experienced rider can assist his steed in the leap; the young homeman mnst be content to be borne safely over, not
little annnKin HOW mnld wa^gttt pnaorvMloa oTlbe baJuiM in On!
Tbg hone htiag wbU in r hi! rido', win miMiiTa hti !U uid s free bridle an tha t (he engniTiDg* will ihow, what ■
BIDINa. * £21
young honenuui xmut jumr fbrget thai in the leap the bands ihoiild be held low, and in tbe oentre ; the elbowe being cloee to the side.
Go deliberately to the leap, that the horse niay meaeure his time for rising ; aninoat- iag him, howerer, if he seem nnwiUing.
STUMBLOrft, KMJLMaO, AMD XIOKDrO.
The hint given Ibr the leap also holds good in these cases. A seat firm, npright, but flexible ; the baok well beni ; the elbows to the sides, and a ready attention to the motiona of the horse, are the points to be remembered. With a stombling horse, and indeed with one thai rears or kicks, it is well always to nse both hands to the reins, and to have them rather shorter than with a more dodle or safer steed.
When the horse is nneaay, ascertain whether bit, curb, head-straps, saddle, or ciuppei, gall him. If th^y do, dismovnt and esse them as soon as yon can. To tease a horse mmeoeesarily with ill«fltting or carelessly-disposed harness, and then to flog him for restlessness, is both n^jnst and dangerons.
With a wiumbUHg hone, keep your legs well to his sides, particularly in going down hiU, thai he may have his haunches soffldently nnder him.
A rearing harm is very dangerons for a yonng rider. When the animal rises, the body ahoald lean well forward, and thus, by its weight, assist in forcing the creature down. Just before the fore-feet are on the ground, the spurs may be applied. To a bad hoiBeman, who in emergencies has been accustomed to the dangerous habit of depending on the reins for some portion of support, a rearing horse is a most serious allhir. When the animal rears on his hind-l^ps, any pressure on the rein will most likely pnU the horse over, when his weight may kill or fkttally ix^ure the horseman. The inexperienced should avoid such steeds ; but if upon one, must never lose presence of mind. When the animal is about to rear, it is a good plan to separate the reins well ; slacken one and tighten the other. This compels him to move a hind-foot, and thna to bring his fore-feet to the ground. Then twist him round two or three
A UehMg hone must be held with a short bridle, but not so short as to prevent him going forward. When kicking is attempted, the body must be thrown back, and the horse's head must be confined. Twisting him round is the correction for this fault.
A boUing harm must be restrained, not by one oontmued strain, but by depressing both hands, and giving two or more distinct pulls (not jerks) j this will soon check the runaway.
A pimnffinff harm requires a little patience. His eflbrts to break his girths cannot hut long. Take care, however, that as he gets his head down he does not pull you fbrwazd. Hold Ihst with the legs until the At is over.
A thifing harm requires gentleness and patience. It Is alhult generally of timidity, and sometimes arises from defective sight. Press him with the leg on the side towards which he shiee ; keep his head high and straight forward, or. it you have tame, encourage him to look at the object which appears to alarm him. Bemember
BIBINO.
that a horse ne^v Aim or ■tartt towda Uie point at which ho looks. When yon think he is sroing to rab yoor log against a wall, torn his head towards it and he win desist ; if not, back him.
A rettwe hone reqaires patience as well as firmness to control him. Do not use spurs, unless to turn Uie croup. Always be ready to make peace with your horse. K he would torn to the right, do not strive to poll to the left, but turn him to the right rather longer than he wishes, and then get his head in the right direction and press forward. If he would stand stock still, let him do sa Two or three minutes will tire him. Above all, keep your temper ; to loee that is to give him the advantage.
covoLvnnro bsmiskb.
Be kind and conciliatory to the noble beast that bears yon, and never show the spirit of the coward by acting cruelly, or with unnecessary severity, towards a creature so docile, so intelligent, and so useful as the horse. Let the young horsenuui remember that this creature is endowed not only with strength for our service, and beauty for our admiration, but with nerves sensitive to pain, and a nature keenly alive to ill-usage. To a kind master a good tempered horse will by many signs show his attachment^ which will increase as he becomes better acquainted with him ; and we hope that none of our young readers will, from any foolish whim, discund an old friend to take up with some new ftivourite, as, if they do, befiore long they may possibly have to regret their
€^iii0c of Ponti*
il IiiMOTT praMOM 01 wltb %. tpbited p tha DriTlzig of on
mrrior qnaen af tho Tooni, hmrmrgTiiTi^
■■ aba drove UirDiigh tb« ruiki uoompuiied bjhsr (wo daaghura.
. ilunU; bsfbn iba enKaged In her Inn uid Ffttftl battle Willi the Ramuu. If
■ppser Hut Uw
le Onekt. with U
h ihe idea that [hej- S have bren mist Rvnudable, •ttbaach Uh7 iUled to pnre eflhotlre againit the hlghly-diaclpUoed Koraan legion*. It le the tiielofy of Onaoe, bowerer, wUoli mpplieg u with ao ■coanDt of ihe ■t dar* of the Bit of DHtIiib. Einge did not icniple to enlv (be Olfrnpic 11 which encircled Ih8 br
la while Uviag
B"Bii-fc mil* In langtli, wltli > plUu M MOh end, Tomid whiah teh «hvfM had npmlieiij to Bm M foil apaad. uul thi« wu klnuiM isiarl&bl? ft ouua of Oightfol MCideuU. Tbs conugB h*d la gu ranad ths pDlan t*eDC;-two times ; tiiBj ooald not. thflnfbre, lisva b«an plocad al thfl extmna mda of tiia Doojve, which at Rome waa ate hundrad yarda in Igngth. Kaoh chariot had toai honaa ahreaat ; tha dnver balanoad himulT In it irithout a asM, and aa iliBni mra no apringa to thsia vehiclaa, It nqoind no little atrength and daiterity for the drirer to kaep hi* pDalbon. The ordar in which tha chahoU enlAted and took pcaieaaioik of tfieir plaooa in the arana* waa daeidad b;f lob ; tha; ware then drawn np in a Una, and stated bj a aign^ from tha jndgea ; and be who paaaed tha pillar at Ihe top of the oourae twelTa tdmea, and that at Iba bat*om eleran time* without aecident. and iwcbed home fint, waa proclaimed tlie Ttelor. Sophoclea, in bii Electra, daaoribea tan of theaa obaiiota aa competinB in one nee [ and Pindar apaaki of Ibr^ chariota in one noe. As tha aim of eaob ohariolasr waa to gat Ural to the pillar, and torn aa oloaa aa poaaible to it vithoot touching, It will be aeoa that coUiekm waa by no maana impoaaibla, bat, on tha eontnr;. very probable.
AlthooBh at the preaent da; pTDfloleno7 la the art of Diivtng will not aenm aacb honouTB to the living or to the deadu webave deacribed, etlQ t. ganllan cBunot be eonaldered oomplele. sdIobs he ia ■ perAot raaater of hia horae, both out of bornaaa j and aa wa have already ^vaa inaOiujticn aa to the art of Hi now remuna fbr ua to fbroiah aaoh direcUona reapectiug Driving aa ahall n aaffloe to make the norioa a profloiaiit whip, bnt, at the Hame time, ahall injs oomfort and aafst; doling hta prograaa wU^ tha leaaona wa are ahout to gira.
t will anppaae jonr bfaat>
prudent driver would mount a Tebiola in which waa a hLgh^oooraged liorae, without looking to eae that the rvina were properly fiwiened to the trit. tha bead-piece pnpartj
tr Indeed wHh.
horwtoMe tbatUiibowwenm, wfalA naof
DBITIKO. 225
tiM foot And we will here Temark, that if it be neoeasary to see that the main points of your hameM are Tight, when you have the advantage of Uie daylight, it is even more neoeaaaiy that a critioal examination take place l^ night ; this can be effected as well by the hand as by the eyes ; and we should advise you parUcnlarly to observe that the reins are correctly placed, as many accidents have arisen from their being crossed. Having attended to these things, take the reins and whip in your right hand, as in the engraving on the last page ; then mount the vehicle, and transfer the reins to the Mt hand, one of them (the near rein) passing over Uie upper finger, the other, between it and the next ; then close the thumb upon them, and they will be firmly
grasped in the hand. Whilst f i^. ],
Fig. 1. ^^^ turning, or when driving a
high-oouraged horse, and in
critical situations generally,
the right hand must be at all
times called to the assistance
of the left; thus the reins
being grasped as before stated
(see Fig. 1). you pass the weond and third fingers between them, and loosening your hold on the off rein a little, let the right hand have complete command of its guidance, still, however, firmly holding both reins in your left, as in Fig. 2 . This position gives you great power over your horse. STAsmrG. — ^Holding your reins as shown in Fig. 2, start your horse either by your voice or by the reins, gently feeling his mouth, but neither pulling at it, nor jerking the reins. Many high-oouraged horses have been made jibbers by the stupidity of a driver. If a young horse's mouth is hurt, by the driver checking him evexy time he starts, he will be sure to incur some vice ; the habit of rearing or of jibbing, will most probably be the result. The learner may say, *' Suppose, however, he refttse to start, what then is to done ?** We reply, have patience, let the groom lead him off, caress him, speak quietly and encourage him to proceed, and if he presses on one side, as if he wanted to go round, turn him round, if there be room, and as soon as he has his head the right way, give him his liberty, and, by the voice or whip, urge him to pro- ceed. Much must here be left to the judgment : a touch with the whip in such cir- cumstances would make some horses jib, while it would immediately start others ; some it would be advisable to urge only with the voice, and to have a person to push the gig on, so that the collar should scarcely touch the shoulder in starting. Supposing there is not room for the horse to turn, and he persists in his attempt to do so, we have always found it best in such a case to desire the groom to let his head alone, and to go to the side towaida which the horse is inclined to turn, and then push against the extreme end of the shaft ; if he does this, speaking quietly to him all the time, fiarty- itwMt horses out of fUfy, that are not irredairaable jibbers, will, after a short struggle, proceed. The sooner.yon get rid of a confirmed jibber the better ; no quality such a brute f " possess would repay you for the trouble the vice occasions ; which is, besides, always a dangerous one.
15
223 DBIVING.
Thy Bojlo. — ^Haying started jonr horae, keep joor eyea open* looking well before yon, not merely for the purpose of avoiding other oarriages, but looking up the road* and on eaoh side of it, so as to notice if there be any impediment to your horse's progress ; any loose stones which he might tread upon, and thereby be thrown down ; any sudden risings or fallings in the road, or any object which might fHghten him. Always keep your horse well in hand — that is, feel his mouth ; if you do not, you are nerer prepared for emargendes ; if he stumbles, you cannot help him to recover his legs ; if he starts, you cannot check him. But in keeping him in hand, as it is called, you may still fall into error, for if the horse be very light in the mouUi, there is a probability th^ an inexperienced person may so check him as not only to impede his progress, but to put him out of temper ; and as nothing is more difficult for a novice to manage than a very light-mouthed horse, when he onoe takes it in his hoed to have his own way, you must be careftil merely to feel his mouth so as to have the reins at command, but still not sufficiently tight to check him : this is called driving with a light hand, and indeed is the perfection of driving, when it has become so habitual as to have assumed the character of *' a style." Toung drivers, in attempting this, will frequently allow their horses to ran from one side of the road to the oUier ; or if their peregrinations do not embrace the whole of the road, th^y allow their horse (in fitet make him) to sidle about in such a manner, that if they were to look at the track of their wheds they would be astonished at what they had been doing. This must be avoided ; as nothing is so ungraoefril as to see a carriage going from side to side. A little thought will, moreover, convince you how much unnecessary ground you have gone over by this practice. Holding in hand sometimes produces another bad practioe, particularly if your horse's mouth is not delicate ; it gets him into the habit of " hanging on your arms," and boring continually upon the bit, until his mouth becomes so callous that if he stumbles he must come down, unless you can hold hbn up by main strength. This may be avoided sometimes by keeping the bit moving in his mouth, but more frequently by not nnneoessarily pulling at the rein. Many a horse has become an arrant bore from this practice.
But the tyro may porhaps say, " But if my horse will hang on my arms, what am I to do then ?" We answer : — Whenever your horse has a vice or (lunlt you should con- sider what originated it; and this being discovered, a remedy will very frequently bo found. In the case in question, the fiiult is often produced by bad driving, and often from the horse never having been properly bitted ; in either case the advice we are about to give will generally be useftil, iMurticularly if the horse be properly driven when he is put in harness. When the horse is in his stable, let him, for three or four hours a-day. stuid with his head i^tened to the piUar reins, and with a colt bit in his mouth ; with this he will play, by continually rolling it about in his mouth and straining on the reins ; he thus becomes fluniliarized to the bit, and regards it, if we may so say, as a source of amusement rather than of torture. From being thus accustomed to the bit when he is not in motion, and when boring on it would become painful, he forgets his former habit, and will bear the bit lightly in his mouth when at work.
DRIVINQ. 227
DimcvLff BirvkTunn vom romro DBmiM. TuiKUO Tn BR Ajn> muinnv» awat.— Some ill-tempered honee will become Tiolent npoQ being in any manniir pat out of their way — such, for ixuttanoe, as being aoddenty stopped two or three timee within a abort distance, or receiving a aaddan cot with the whip ; but iniit4iad of exhibiting this violence by rearing or kicking, they will seise the bit in their months, close against the tusk, and run violently to one side of the road, aa if with the intention of landing yon in a ditch, or giving yon a resting-plooe in a shop window. Your best mode is to stop them at once by a qoiet pull, speaking softly, as if nothing were the matter ; and then coax them into good temper. If this cannot be done, give them the head for a moment (a shoii one it mnst be), and after bestowing a violent switch across the ears, snatch the reins snddenly towards the side to which the horse is boring, which will probably, tram the surprise, disengage the bit, and enable yon almost simul- taoeoaa^ either to pull him up or draw him away from the danger. Ton will observe we have said on the side to vMeh hs is pressing, for it would be all but impossible to draw him to the other ; for such a bmte always seises the bit by the branch or side iriiieh is next to the place he is running to, knowing, or rather thinking, you will pull the other rein, in which case the side of the Ikoe would aid him in resisting your efforts. The remedy for this is a ring bit, for it has no branches for the horse to get hold of, axid if he merely seises that part of the bit which is in his mouth, a sudden jerk will instantly disengage it, that is, if it be done with sufficient decision ; but our experience teaches oa, that in ninety-nine cases out of a hundred the horae will not attempt this ; be misses the branches, and is disappointed and abashed at not being able to play the
old trick. Some horses will, however, \(^ ^1
travel better in a port hUi the remedy ii T^'\z.^.
I 3
then is to have the bars protected by a broad side to the bit, which is by no means \trxaxaM inelegant, if it be properly made (see \^ Fig. 8). Such a bit may always be ob- |^ tained at a bit-maker's, and not unflre- qoently at a saddle and harness-maker's. This cannot be tusked. We will here observe, that an ordinaiy bit is composed of six parts Isee Fig. 4) : — 1, the cheek-pieces ; 2, the branches ; 3, the mouth- ptoee ; 4, the curb ; 6, the rings ; 6, the cross bar, the use of which is not only to strengthen the branches, but to prevent the reins of another horse Arom getting under them when driving in double harness.
F^vqnently, however, a horse tusks the bit, as it is called, with a view of bolting ,- if yoa cannot disengage the bit in the way directed, you have only to stop him as quickly ws yon can. Recollect, however, that a continual dead pull will never stop a runaway horse, unless indeed you have the strength of Hercules : his mouth soon becomes callous to the action of the sharpest bit Nor is it proper to keep jerking a bone under such circumstances, as that would rather urge him to increase bis ftpeed. The ordinary mode is to take the reins short in your hands, and then by a sudden.
829 DRIVINa.
steady moyement of the body backwards, ezertixiff at the same time all the strength of the arms. endeaTotur to pall him ap ; this, repeated two or three times* will generallj be efibctual. Suppose it not to snoceed, adopt the following pUm, by which we have stopped many a determined bolter who had bid deflanoe to more than one reputed Whip. Cross the reins in yoor hand — that is, place the right rein in the left hand, the left in the right hand — take them very short, and then suddenly put all your strength to them with a sadden Jerk, bat continae the pressors, violently sawing them at the same time ; if this will not bring the horse to his haonohes at the first attempt, let him partially have his head — ^that is, sufficient^ slacken your poll to give his mouth time to recover its feeling — and then repeat the eflEbrt. We never knew a horse that wb oould not stop by this method, which though not very gracefhl, is very efltetive.
SriTMBLiiro urn Surruro. — ^If your horse be kept well in hand, you will generally be able to keep him tram absolutely coming down. You wiU naturally put more force to your pull upon his making the stumble, and this jerk, if saoceeded by a strong continuous aid, generally keeps him on his legs ; a smart stroke with the whip shonld follow, to remind him that this carelessness is not to be repeated. A horse that is apt to stumble, or even one that from his form is likely to stumble, should not only always be kept well in hand, but also be kept alive by now and then being reminded, without actually puniBhing him, that his driver has a whip in his hand. A horse with his head set too forward — that is, low in the withers — ^is almost sure to come down sooner or later, particularly if his fore*legs " stand stall under him," as it is technically termed — that is, slant a little inwards. Stumbling, however, be it remembered, is totally distinct front slipping ; wood pavements will give the lyro plenty of opportunities of peroeivins the diflRarence. If a horse slips, a sudden jerk would probably throw him down ; in such a case the driver must aid the horse by a strong steady hold, letting him, aa it were, lean on the bit to help himself to stand. It requires some nerve thus to aid tbe horse, without being induced to jerk him by the suddenness of the slip.
JiBBivo is that sort of obstinacy in a horse which causes him to plant his fore- feet upon the ground and reftise to move. If we are asked what is the best mode to adopt with a jibber, we say. Patience I This, however, must be qualified by the temper ot the horse. Some jibbers {but very few) may be started by sudden and severe whipping ; ninety -nine times out of a hundred, it will render a jibber restivo, mischievous, or obstinate. Experience only can dictate the management of such animals. Some will start after waiting for a short time, having their head fr«e; coaxing is generally the best means, and, as before said, have patience, and do not be In too great a hurry to start. Some may be started by being turned round, and others, by being backed for a short distance. Many think it a good plan to punish a jibber when he is once started ; our experience proves the contrary, for, depend upon it, he will recollect this next time, and will not CeuI ftuther to exercise your patience, for f^er of the flogging. Kindness and good driving may cure a hone who is not a confirmed jibber ; but when once this vice has become habitual, you can never depend upon the horse : as we have said before, get rid of him.
Kioxxiro. — ^An experienced ^ye can generally tell if a horse is likely to Uok, and
DanriNa 220
aUo when be it aboat to Uok. We, however, alweji driye with a kiekmg-Btrap, and would recommend the practice. When a horse attempts to kick, yon mnst hold him well in hand, and lay the whip well into him about the ears, rating him at the same time with a load Toioe ; this plan we have generally found eflbctiye. We would, bowerer, recommend the young driver, first, to tiy the rating without the whipping ; the voice fVequently has a wonderfHil efibct upon a horse. Be sure, however, to keep him well in band.
RBABnro. — ^LitUe can be done in hameas with a determined rearer. When he tries to rear, if you have room, give him a half turn ; this will make him move his hind-legs, and win consequently bring him down ; you will find a series of turns punish and surprise him more than anything else. When you have once got him on the move, with bis head the right way, you can punish him with the whip, if he is one that you are sure you can manage ; if not, you had better leave well alone. With respect to rearing in double harness, we will here observe, the best way to act is, to push the other hone forward, and soothe the restive one, until you have fairly got him on ; you can then punish or not, according to your judgment, but not without reference to your abiU^ to manage the horses.
SHTnro. — Before a horse starts at anything on the side of the road, or lying on the road, he usually gives some notice of his intention, by cocking his ears, and bending his head towards the object. As soon as the driver perceives these signs of uneasi* ness. he should be upon his guard to prevent a sudden turn round, or flying to one side, which would evidently be dangerous ; and not only on this account should he be atten- tive, but because each time the hone violentiy shies, the habit is in progress of being conifa'med. As soon, therefore, P4 a horse, accustomed to shy, gives notice of uneasi- be should be coaxed up to the object of his terror, so that he may -perceiye its let him deliberately stand and view it, and if he cannot be got to it, let it, if possible, be brought to him, and then replaced in its former position ; thus let him be induced to go up to it by care and kindness before it is passed, and you will generaUy find that a repetition of this practice will greatly improve, if it do not cure him ; bat by no means flog or fbroe him up to it — ^let him take his time. We are now, of coarse, speaking of a horse whose sight is perfect. Some horses shy from having an imperfect vision ; in filets because they are going blind, and the sight is aflbcted ; and we would, therefore, advise a young driver to have his horse's eyes examined (if be is unable to examine them himself), whenever this shying is violent after a few lessons of the nature before detailed. We do not mean to say that there are not hones so timid that they cannot be cured of this bad practioe ; but we do say, that most hones may be broken of it, if taken in time, and also that nine out of ten of these animals owe their vioe to bad breaking, or bad driven. Some horses have a nas^ knack of flying on one side in passing, or flying round on meeting a carriage ; care and patience are the remedies, in addition to more work. I« very £requently arises tnm playfUness rsther than vioe ; and giving them more work to do will cure this. An experienced hand m^ foroe a horse forward, under such circumstances, by the lefais and wUpi but we recommend the tjro rather to slacken his pace upon meeting
230 DRivma.
an object that his hone will go round, or attempt to go round ttU; by doing this, and speaking kindly, the animal will be either soothed or diverted from his purpose.
DBITXira TWO HOBSXt.
We have addressed most of our remarks to a person driving a single horse, for this reason, that it is much more difficult to drive one horse, than it is to drive a pair, that is, if you have sufficient nerve. In almost all situations of difficulty, you can make the second horse assist you in managing the other ; if the one shies, and will go to the right — ^we will suppose it is the near wheeler — by opposing the strength of the other to him, which you will do by the reins, touching him with the whip on the off- side, you will prevent any very great deviation from the straight line. Again, if one will not start readily, the other, generally speaking, may be made to pull him on ; in. this case, never hit the restive horse ; or at any rate until your judgment is sufficiently matured to determine whether it will do good or harm. Suppose the one tries to run away — ^if he is an ill-tempered brute, it may sometimes be advisable not to irritate him by hard pulling — then all you have to do is to keep bacln the other, and he must shortly be beaten, as he will not only have the carriage and its oonteuts opposed to him, but the weight and strength of his companion to pull against. Sometimes a horse will be awkward in turning a comer, here again his companion assists you ; if he turns too quick, the other opposes him ; if not sufficiently so, a touch with the whip makes the other force him on. Instead of its being more difficult to drive two hones than one, as the tyro doubtless imagines, it is in foot just the reverse, when he has obtained sufficient confidence to attempt it. But although it is easier to manage two horses than one, it requires much more attention in some respects ; you must continually watch Uiem, or, perhaps, one will do all the work while the other is doing uaOiing.
Thx SajLT. — ^When driving, sit quite straight towards your horses, and rather more to the middle than to the off-side of the box-seat. Keep your body nearly upright, or inclined a Uttle backward rather than forward, and your feet weU together, extended outwards, and on no account doubled under your legs; a Ann seat is indispensable fbr your own safety and that of the friends you may be driving, therefore never sit with your feet doubled under you, for a sudden jolting of. the carriage, or incroaae in the pace of your horses, may capsize you into the road. Never ride in a vehicle that has the wheels secured only by a common Unchpin, for accidents arising from wheels, thus fSEkstened, conung off, are generally of a serious character.
AocinxirTs. — ^As accidents are usually unforeseen, the suddenness with which they arise is apt to unnerve the rider, and so sure as this be the case, his judgment will be at &ult. Presence of mind should, therefore, be exercised on all occasions of danger. With kicking horses before you (unless you are in a gig), the best plan is to let the whip take it out of them. With runaways, never think of deserting the box by jumping off, for there is a chance of your being able to puU them up, but none of your escaping severe contusions, if not broken limlis or loss of lifb, should yon tbiaw yourself from the vehicle.
saiviKa. oi
Dowr Bnu. — If tban an oT an taiiathrj ebMiteUx, wt would not kdTiiB lacUnc Out wheal eicepi witti a hmrj load, or when janr hono will not bold back ; bMldM Um Doable, tocldng ia a graM dlsadmitags. for b; Imtlag oat jam hoiMi wlian 7011 haie psMed Ibe pilcb of a hlU, tha motian of Uia oaniaga lakaa It half way np an ordinary riaa bafbra yonr hones feel the weight, and tbia. In a day's Jonmey, will ba fooad of conaidenibl* iinponaoce. If your honea will not hold baclc, or are not Eoaatcn of their load, locking Uie wheal baoomea neccaftary when the hill la long or ■toep. When tha hill ia not very aceep, and the near ed^ of the road happena to be of a magb. nuty saltm, or baa gniiBl or granila slnwii upon it, lake your near wbe^ a few inchca npon the reaiaClng aututanca, which will aupply the additional tHctian, or Ma. neceaaaiy to check the inoieaaiDg momentnoi of a downward pace, and obriata the neccaai^ of i^Udding.
Stomio. — When pnlUng np. aoouatom your boraas to stop by aoma aignal, and diBW In the Trioa equally, anleaa aiUier of tha ■w^tmI* ahowi a diainclinatlon to obay the nc*ioe. Yonng horaaa aboold ba atopped vary gradually, and oigbi or tm jarda allowed thna to poll up la i for thay are apt to resist atumpta to atop them short.
UitFHisa Hoaata. — Some penooa ara particular u U the coloor of thair honea. but it ia much mora important that their pacea and their lempen ahonld match, than that their ooloora should ba alike; for, if yon have one slow and the other h« — one irritable and Berrotii, and the other atnpid and obMinale — one trte, and tha other lika a lawyer that will not move without beios i«id — yon are Bare to weary out the free, aarroua. and foat hone, by whipping np the other to hia pace i and. althou|[h you may Ikold bim back, you will take aa mach Bli«i([th ont of him aa though lie was doing all tha work. If. therefore, your hOTaes do not tnatch in pace and freeneaa. get nd of Iha dull one, or depend on it yotu work wUl soon kill Iha ottisr ; beaidea, yon can oertr have any pleasure in driring
iron itesd " hu, ot Uta, baoome well known, and gmeimlly popn- '^ iiu, £verTwbs» Clili "highly-metAlJed mnlmiI'*a«BeTt«ltfl ulBtwioa, '^ la Amelia, ws are told that perwui of both aeiaa, aad of all ^ea, maj laen exercLiiEi^ tbemaelTea in rldln^-achoala eapecLallj conatmctad tCTthapracticaof imn-borsamanahlp! wblle, from the latcatacconnta. elnba are fonning ■■ br we«t u CalUonli and Ban Fiaudaeo. BraUieT JouatbaD, in taot. baa baeD aaid tolLre od bii Telocipeder In Fana, we bear o( pariloni lidaa down Sig-bta of Btflps. and along panpelj ot qoaja, and in the BoEa de Bonlogna^ Aa to Oanava. it baa been deflued aa "about tba gnatsct bot bed ot bicxclisg on the CoDtlnent" Hare, in addi totbe rank otriden. OixTe, and ereu portly, dtr genUemeii baTs bean obaacred propelling UiemaelTei to their placai of baalneaa, while trim goTcTttmeDt olarki bare actually Tentuied to wheel theiT maehinea to the Awful dotva ol Downing Btreet. Thereare, atpreanit. npwirdaoItSOclnba in tba UnltedKlnKdoiB. otwhidi the KMropoUa ooDtaina toatTSi aad the unnber o( oli
BICYCLINa. 233
is oompated at between 8000 and 90j0. Moet of these dnbe have been formed in the jMMt three yeen. In India and Australia, too, the iron steed is making progress ; it has been used in China and the Straits Settlements, has been seeu careering along in Japan, and haa been even imported into Barbery. In the face of all this evidence^ we cannot disregard this latest mode of looomotion. Time will try it, and decide, far better than we can, whether bicycles are of the things which posterity will not willingly let die. In the meantime we have no heeitaticm in introducing the machine to our young readers as a thoroughly healthy means of recreation, inyolTing plenty of muscular exercise, and giring every opportunity for the exhibition of skill aad dexterity.
SARLT HISTORY OW THX BICTCLB.
Some of the historians of the Velocipede haye traced the machine to a very remote period indeed. M. Villepigne, author of a pamphlet on the ** Velooe," ai&rms that he diaooTered, upon a tomb among the ruins of Thebes, what, in his sketch, certainly looks Tecy much like an early example of it. If this is the case, the invention, which now, to use an American witticism, has brought walking on its last legs, has been lather slow in ocmferring its benefits on pedestrians. It will not, however, be necessary for ua to take our young readers back so fiar. According to French authorities the baOooniat, Blanchard, and a certain M. Mesurier, exhibited a species of four-wheeled velocipede before the French oourt at VersaiUes in X779. "In this, the rider piessed his feet alternately on the ground, in a kind of wooden box, and certain springs in the box ga^e motion to the figure of an eagle with outstretched wings." It was, however, but a clumsy affair, very exhausting to its unfortunate propeller, and, indeed, can hardly be classed as a velocipede at all. In X806, a gentleman is said to have surprised the visitors in the Luxembourg gardens by his performances upon a two>wlieeled maehiiie, which he styled a "eMripUs." After this, the matter seems to have slumbered until 1818. when, it is dear, from the correspondence of M. Niepoe de Chalons, one of the inventors of photography, that he had either re>invented or modified the eiUripids of 1806. But, about the same time, a certain Baron Drais, Hasier of Woods and Forests to the Duke of Baden, patented, in France, a machine " diU vOoeipids" which is thus described in a contemporary periodical :— " It consists of two wheels, one behind the other, connected by a perch, on which a saddle is placed, for the seat of the traveller. The front wheel is made to turn on a pivot and IS guided in the same way as a Bath-chair. On a cushion in front the fore-arm is rested, and, by this means, the instrument and the traveller are kept in equHibrio." It was prapeDed by the rider's placing his feet lightly on the ground, and taking ▼ery long and alow steps, carefully turning his toes in to avoid gracing his heels against the hinder wheel. By this peculiar gymnastic exercise he was enabled to travel along a firm level road at the rate of eight or nine miles an hour, and faster down ft hilL As to fatigue, this was, of oourse, a great advance upon the clumsy apparatus of Xesnrier; but it was awkward, and exposed the rider to serious injury from over-strainiag, etc
234
BXCTGLINQ.
The Germans do not appear to hare been enthimiaatio aboat this invention ; but it wa» introdooed Into France, aa wo have ah^eady said, under the name of ** Draisena,** and afterwards into England under the mune of the *' Accelerator." It was, inikct, the Hobby- or Dandy-hone, which may be seen in so many of the caricatures which decor- ated the print-shops of Hfty years aga ▲ Mr. Gomperts, <^ Surrey, and others, made some improvements in the baron's machine, and in 1830, a M. Dreuse, belonging to the French xxMt-oflSkse, improving it fiuther, caused it to be used by the postmen of rural districts. During a whole dry summer, these ** eiUrtfireB,** as they were called, found favour with their riders and the public. ▲ severe winter, however, elTectnaUy nipi>ed them in the bud. It was found impossible to use them in ice or snow, and thqr were finally forgotten, to the great chagrin of M. Dreuse.
Our sketch shows this so called " Dreuxieimet** reduced from a drawing in M. Villepigue's pamphlet. It gives a good idea of the Dandy-horse. It must be noted that in this, as in all the previous essays, the machine was moved by the action, or "paddUng," of the feet upon the ground. This plan had many disad- vantages which need not be entered into here. In the modem " bicycle," the fbet «■■ dsbox""*".
act upon two cranks fixed upon the axle of the driving-wheel, and cause it to revolva rapidly forward. This is more simple and eflbctive, and tax less ftitiguing, than any method hitherto invented. The question when it was first applied, may safely be left to the inquiries of those whose interest it is to discuss it. Many forms of velocipede have been essayed by inventors since the days of the " Dreuxinme,** but the machine now adopted appears to have become known in America and France about the year 1863. Since then, its populari^ has steadily increased, and has now ex- tended to this country. Of the numerous expansions of the idea which have taken place, such as four-wheeled velocipedes, marine velocipedes, steam velocipedes, and a number of others, we cannot hope to give an account, but shall confine ourselves to the now generally known biosrcle, or two-wheeled, and tricycle, or three-wheelecl velocipedes.
Before proceeding, however, to the description of these last-named machines, we may just glance at a form of velocipede which is still believed In by some enthustaata, vis., — ^the one- wheel. It is said that progression in this way has been effected in America, and a description of a Monocycle, as it is called, has appeared in a practical scientiflc journal. But, as fkr as ¥re know, the machine itself; in flesh and blood, or.
BICTCLDia.
ntbar, ttmi •nd toatthv, hu not ^psand tamng at, md, in tha opinloa of thoai qraaUad to Judga, the Idas li whidlr impnotluble. Tha one-vliael hu, hoi prorad Taij uaaful to die oaricMnrlit, and toniu th* aabjaot of one of Mr. La]
nad* a " PhUoaopede," irhlcb wu mrtainlr a monoorsle U erar Umts waa one ■■—
The bifydf, aa tha nune Impliaa, oonaLlta of 1 IstrcmC. It iacosnaotadHtth theleiaer or nar wbael by a baring shaft, or "bacfcbooa," tannlsatad hj a fork in whkli tha latter nma. The front wheal rmiB aJao in in upright tort, aarmotJnted br a ateering-handla, Br vorkbig this handle tha rider ii enabled to torn the front wheel either to tha tigbt or to (he left, and u fnida the machine la BOJ dlnctlon. ThaaxleiafludlDthawheel. which rVTolTea eaaOr m the front fork. Bj praaalno; tha padala attached to two omoka which are plaeed on tha ada, the wheel tVTolTM lapidlr or alowlr. aa tha loroe applied ia n»re or leai ; and, paM- iBg forward, dnwa the rear wheal after (t. The rider alta npon a leather or pigakln aaddla, which ia OBiried on a ateal apriug in order to prerent Jolting, ••
and ta nananr ttnlled with haii or wool. In aome bi^elaa a atoall boi ia Hied ndar It for the purpoaa of holding keja.
other aitldea required far tha machini
tM BtCTCIDia.
which mi^t othsrwiieaurambertlie poctata ot the ilAar. To euilil* blmtoi to aliiGkeii apeed dowu-hlll ha amploya a braks. vdiich acta aithar apon the boot or th* mar wheel, or upon tha froimd, aa the am mij h«. Foot or toan different kindi. are gnwrall; flttad to tha lark, apon irUch the teat are plioei
Uiejr are Dot required to propel the machine,
Tbe enneied dnwliig npteaenta a modern ble/cle. To leaeen tha bi and JuTiDg irhlch wotdd otherwiae be euued b; ineqnalitdee of road, etc., and uoleeless progreaalan, the rima ot the whealj are fitted with iodiambber tjre an inch in thioknan. The beokbone is of ateel i and thia partacnlar example i with a ■afetr-brake on tha rear wheal, which li applied b; taming ronnd Ihe 1 box to which the brake-cord is attached. The diameter of the front wheel, of < Tiiriiiniii TUffnmnt ranrai Tha javaiulebicjcliitwilldowslltooar^tnUrcoiuiderw
tlioioa^ilT adapted to hii weight and length ot leg The 1^ ebonld be meiiaimd from the fork to tJie ball ot the foot; and I
,t ninat be borne in mind that the aeddle Binka when the rider ie monnted. In an; caae It <riU be beet not to ohooae too high a wheel.
eoaroely add, manj pattema of biorolee, oUof whi<^ hm« Hiefr anpporten. In bet, when we aa; that tbe laat edltiaa ot the " Blcjcliata' Hiodbook" containi a tnll
300 maohinei. osr roimg readera will gather that the artiola ia bj no meane a ; raritj. In aeleoting Uieir "—» mount, we ahould nooo-
U> applf to Bome good agent, anch aa Feake, ot Lelceater Square. Hwr. of Queen TiotoH* SOeet. or Oor, ol LeadenhaU Street, who hsTt alwv-a ■ large atock ot jBachtnee on hand. If they prvtar a eeoond-hand biejcle, there are leraral Bnna who aupplj them, and who lasne monthly tlit*. Tbe ehiet reqniaitea to be borna in &iind are atnngth. llghbieaa. and chcepneai. Thezv aj* a number of aoeeeaoHea. aoaae of wbieh are neoeaBerr. and aome tnej be dlapenaed wit^. A wrench, or epanner. For oataetening and fixing bolt* and eonwi, will osrtal&lr be reqairad; alH, an oil^aa, •
a rmimngnn. tnA % lunp, it
u that ahDurt
BlfflCLISQ,
tncb, or nUas, to csnr t>dd« ucl ends, ■ b«U, to w b« Maplffjed At nlff htr
Hie priM of ft well-iDAd? blcjcla nugn from £i upwaidH. Such a o i^BTi would be front 10 to Itt gaiatm^, without extnw, aooordiiig to «1eb. A luople BubliH for thg oK of poatnua hu bean nude U u low ■ prio* u 36 ahlUiup, ud It itt bean Rktvd in lame pariodicala tliat ui afidant luc^sle out be anpplied bj ttie &*k>n it £1, DoDbtLeaa, aa IhedeouAd iucreaaeii, biojclea will becoma leaa azpenalTO ; l^ H it ij biglily DPCMaarj that the matariKl* ahonld b« of tkabeat, In order to obriftt^ '■fri'irj to aocidenta and tha flbdleaa repairs wbicJi ui inferior loachina would require, ■■ ooEdidBr it adriaabla to aecure a t^rongblj weU-made article in the flrvt inatance-
It ii. perbapa, luuieoeamrj to impreaa upoa tlia joun^ bio^ellat that he ahonld t«ke can of bifl w^^ti^wa ; bat we add a few directiona on tbla head. It ahonld, in the Im iuiEncK. lie kept in a place (aa; a ahed or ooaoh-honaa) which la dr; and not too nni. If it be loo warm, the ra'jbera and tr-es will be affected i If damp, it will anffer ftoia nut or mildaw. It ahonld also be kept in an oprisbt poiition. Bicrcle^tanda of 4if irant kinda are to be obtained i in the abeenoe of theae it nu^ be reated againat a nU, or mpended to a beam h; the handle*. After a jonmar. the bright parta ahonld ti ribbed cleao. and an oiled rug paaeed oter them, to prerant ruaCiDg. The painted ^na ibonld be toocbed with a damp cloth. Vorther dataili as to cleaning the different Ivto win hm found in Mr. Henry Sturmer'a excellent " Hic^ cliate' Haadbook."
The tricyrlt m*7 be more readll; ^'—"'■— ^ It ba* Mrtain adrai bieycte, in that it T«|nlree tittle •rag Gaining tn manage it. and it kiagsmal, aafer. On the other laad. it reqnins more eivtiou a ptvpel it : and. if an accident or. the
liaUa to be injured anong tl 'hteh. Tlie dsmknd for ti
^ iacreaa* ■ and. aeoording to
•me oannlaetiiren. ia Ukel;
V> f,ml. if not eiceed, that of
t^ vntpler machine- Kererthe-
'••a. ae are faicUned to think.
■tlh the aocompliahed author '^
■■f Ihe "Bicyeliata' Handbook,"
<hat the halaii« ot btronr win alwara be on the i
*^ the tricycle ia " admirmblj adapted to meet'
ildia. and (fnid or narrooa penona." The n
■> pnaiune. In DDn« ol theae catagorlM.
of Uie latter. He admite, faewe -eqninmenta of elderl; gentlen 1 ol the "Boj'aOwn Book"
BICYCLtNO.
• nilat4M of triorclH, ditfarinc aoBMUfHaiHj (rmn
«acb other, ud muij of
T8IT oampUi^tad
■orksd b; cruki, wme by Itrfun. In tbo klDiplfi trl> cjcle DMd br I which <•« giis a ■kstah, ths
II grvat dsal, of oouraa. dvpenda upon thfl iBsmtr Umaelf t sad, la aoj' oue, hs must nuka Dp hi* mlsd bi & faw taiDbla. and to aome omalderalila damuida npon hli pluck ud panSTenoce. Pnaldm alona win makf him parfKt.
The wlmle sccrat of bicj-olinK i«, u the anther of the " Valoce " tnlj Bra. " ron- talned in OM word— BaJuiaa." .... "WhenronBDilTOnraeUloaiiicroiu' balaace uid iD danger of Ealllns, to anpport fonnelf jon iniiM turn the front wheel, bjr the aid of tba bandlfl or govomor, inunediatelj' to the lide toward which ^on ai« teuding. . . . The angle formed hy yon in thii caie ii. genenllj, TBiy alight, and a motiaa Bcarcalr Tiaible la BaAeient to aiiat&in jour eqnilibriiuji i ao much ao, that after one day'i exerciae fon will do it natnriLlly and almoat nnconatiloDal)'."
Thoae of onr fonng raadan who inhabit large towna wilt probabl; find It beat to Inke a lesaon or two m order to aat them going. Some ol the larger manufactitrarB. indeed, reaerra portloni of their premliea for the nae of their CDitomerg. and give them eierr taoilitr lor beoamlng ai^niunted witb the oae of the nwehine. In theae eatabliili- nenta. among TehicJei In ererj 8tag« of progren, may be aeen all eorta and aitea of bicjcliata. from the njere beginner, who ia being alowly lupportAd romid th^ lehool by a panting and paffing aaaiatant. to the expert pupil who diaplafa hia akiU by vmnltinK on ud off the aeit. ateering wilh one hand, atanding on the aaddle, and eihibitinK similar feata of proilclancy-
For the benefit at tlioee. bowerer, who m&y be obliged to depend npon tlieir own common^ensa and peTaeTenace to attain thia end. we aubjoin the foOowiDg aimple inatnictioni, which ahonld be c&refully atodied, keeping in view tike londMnaDtal dliection quoted above. They are taken from the " Bicycliit'a Hand-
BiCYCLnra.
Imk" baton ratorrsl to—* wort vhioh »« »n glad I
imed — ~"J Hr. Stunner rtnainiasnda thftt tlia
or bom* on* of tlie old Fnrliiui
biejdflo, DOW known ai "bono-
■hnken." MieeUng ana of neb
ft haifiit Hut hli low Jnjt tonoh
tb« ffonnd Tbon bo ii Hotod in
pAoring cut, Tbii will onftble bim to >feT« ^■t**"*^* wbfln Cftlllag b; itbiilsat. "Tblimnttor
"tbo next tuns ia to proeor* tlw iHiatue* at u obliging Mend (it a rfdv hlraaall, w Duch Uia botleiji tfaia done, BBok aonio ntirad apot wben the Toad makea ■ gentia aliva, and ebooH thla for jonr inotliing groosd. l.bonttliab*atlinHto)aara la aarijr in tbe uonaing. whoa no niaoUaf-loTiBC luianile oroUwr objaoUoaabla 'par^' la Ukalr to tnlrnde npon yonr aoUtade. to Indnlga In diibmrtening ufaillngl. Tbepoataud asleetod, ttaa lutooding li
LC little dia-
— from bii reaidenoe to the
TodaiTOiu, mj-U> Duke iDina ac-
la witli Ita motetuenu and
lait, taking 1
tlia top ot tbe ilope, and fnU in Uis
of the road, he abotild, nflor
Snt taking oS ttie padala. take liii
place in tba aa ~ "
supporting
id the other on one <k Now let bim «bn bii u miub oonfldence ai
240 BICYCLINa.
btiiind tlie rider, and sapportiiig the nmchine with both hands on the ipring behind. The rider will then find that hia weight ia more on one aide than the other, which will, of course, produce a tendency to fall ; thia he mnat endearour to counteract b/ gently pulling the handle on th$ aids to which he u falling i thia will, aa it were, put the wheel under him, and so enable him to regain hia equilibrium. At first he will find that he pulls the handle too hard, which causes him to overbalance on the opposite side ; the other handle must then be puUed, and ao on. Thia must be done until the bottom of the decIiTity is reached, when the machine must be pushed to the top and the routine repeated. At first hia course will be yeiy erratic, but after a little practioe, with oonfldenoe, he will soon find the exact amount of ' pull ' required to prerent a fall, and to ateer tolerablj atraight. Having now ao far mastered the balance, he must replace the pedals and repeat his little joumeya as before ; this time, howcTer, placing his feet on the pedals, and pressing slightly on the descending pedal ; this mtist be done at first very aUghtly indeed, no effort being mod* to propel the machine (which will run fast enough by itself down the hill), but only to become accustomed to the circular motion of the feet, in combination with balancing. When the tyro can descend from top to bottom of the hill without a spill, he may dispense with the aerrioea of his friend, and may oonaider the art in ita embryo form to be really learnt, for it only then requires practice to make periect."
He has yet, of course, to master the art of " turning " and riding straight ; but when he has succeeded in this, and can. moreoyer, trayel four or fiye miles without fear of upset, he ia quaUtled to mount the modem bicyde.
coHCLVDivo nsMAnu.
By diligently practising in accordance with the aboye rules, the learner will soon acquire tolerable proficiency. He should, at all times, be careful to keep clear of crowded streets, and should take every precaution to avoid collisions with vehidee or foot passengers. For purposes of warning his bell should be kept ringing in passing through towns. It should, however, be one that can be silenced easily, as it is some- times liable to frighten horses. Great care should also be taken to observe the rules of the rood. In meeting approaching travellers, the bicyclist must keep to the left ; in overtaking them, he must go to the right. When overtaken himself, he must keep well to the left, so as to allow the overtaker to pass him on the right.
In going up steep hills, he will sometimes have to dismount. By resting his elbow on the saddle, and guiding himself with the handles, he may greatly lessen his labour. But any toil of this kind is thoroughly repaid by the refreshing inactivity which he enjoys in going down hill. " In a journey of twenty miles, on a good road, a driver should not work more than twelve — the inclines do the rest." Wherever the incline is sufficient, the legs may be elevated to the cross-rests in front of the steering-handle. The bicycle then descends by its own gravitation ; the cranks work freely, and the rider has nothing to do but to regulate the motion by means of the brake. Bicy« dists are unanimous in their praise of this latter mode of progression, which is, indeed, the acme of bicycle riding. "Descending an incline at full speed," aaya
BtuYCLnfa. m
ooa of than, "taluoad on ■ bMutifBUj-Umpand itsal iprlug lb«t tekaa srerr Jolt tnun ths mad— whsel* apiniiiBg otbt tha graoiid k> lightl; Uiaj ttant ■eem to tameh it— ttie driTu'i ks( mtad oomtdrtablf on the coH-bar In frost -ihootlnK ihs hill M a apeod of thiitr or tortjr mlln u hanr— ths MDMtkm \M onlj oompuabto to that of HyiDg, ud i* irarth iJl ths paliu it covt* in kwrning to flipvrieDoo it. Hie rider (eela but OH puig when he reuhee tbe bottom of i bill, and tJist Is, that it ii OTVr^ bid but one exqui«it« wiih, which ii, that the vhole ooonOj tol^ht, eomehoT, baoanui matamoiphoHid Into dowa-hlll." But. let ux add, each a leat aa this shoold not be attempted b; mj but those ikilled in the nee of their maohine. Uanjr socidanta bare occurred Umngti the inability of the rider to ooDtrol hla bicjcle, to laj nothing of each lodicroiu MnolDations to an "eair deecent" aa are related In tbe following
t nlociFeda ridn to Brigbton and elaewhaie. 1 the " Box'* OlH Booi " betongi tlie prirtlegQ o< I. an antlreljr nicceaafnl
Sill. tB s»ib.
i\ I iijiiiifit^iiiiiMii. Jill, jiinr I
I GYMNASTICS. {
^ K Uie preMDt dAj, Ojmnnctin, u > bmiurli of phytkial ednaHioii, ^'/Y<^^^ hkTB twes u laiToiiniled with UchnloKlitiM, tlut miuif lada hkva /'>Vrj! ' i) thrnnk tram them laatesd of bcdng MtncMd I17 (heir plwlng and \-<3*^' JS )>»Ufa-EiTiD|[ fSata. Thta shootd not b«: for then la nothing in i^*^ OriaD««ticKiiBHii»o., whBnk.IitwithuipTopBrlimit«.topt«Tont«liiBn ^^ \ (Km ronnins >n imponuit put of mnrj BriUch boj'i (porta. Bm ■ k no danying Ih« but (hM the IMti o( ths QTmnMhun hkve Ibij daMTT* to tn. TUahMHlMafNmlfaamoMiliSciiltuid
GYMNASTICS. 343
fonnidable exaroises having been presonted too early to the youthftil papil, and the ezerdaea with the dumb bella and Indian oluba, the ropee and thtf ladders, the vaolting hone, and the perpoidioalar pole, having been taught before the lad was prepared to appreciate their several oaea.
Tnstfiad, therefore, of beginning, as in the German trealaaeB, with descriptions of various kinds of elaborate apparatns, we shall first select those exercises which are easy and amusing, and so pass on to the more ornate and difficult feats.
WA,LKDro, Bvnrzvo, JUMPnro, Atn> LXAriirG.
In Walxixo, the arms should move freely by the side, the head be kept up, the stomach in, the shoulders back, the feet parallel with the ground, and the body resting neither on the toe nor heel, but on the ball of the foot. On starting, the impil should raise one foot^ keep the knee and instep straight, the toe bent downward. When this foot reaches the ground, the same should be repeated with the other. This should be practised until the pupil walks firmly and gxaceftdly.
In Buvimra, the legs should not be raised too high ; the arms should be nearly atffl« so that no dbneoessary opposition be given to the air by useless motions. In swiA running the swing of the arms should be frt>m the shoulder to the elbow, the fore-arm being kept nearly horisontal with the chest. Running in a circle is excellent exercise, but the direction should be changed occasionally, so that both sides of the gZDund may be equally worked : as if the ground be not kept level, the runners will find it difficult to maintain their equilibrium.
Jinfnx«. — ^The first rule is, to &11 on the toes, and never on the heels. Bend the knees, that the calves of the legs may touch the thighs. Swing the arms forward when taking a spring ; break the fUl with the hands if necessary ; hold the bx«ath, keep the body forward, come to the ground with both feet together, and. In taking the ran, let your steps be short, and increase in quickness as you approach the leap.
LxAraro. — The Long Leap. — Make a trench, which widens gradually from one end to the other, so that the breadth of the leap may be increased daily. Keep the ftet doae together, and take your spring frx>m the toes of one foot, which should be quickly drawn up to the other, and they should descend at the same instant j throw the arms and body forward, especially in descending. Take a run of about twenty paces.
The Deep Leap. — This is performed from the top of a wall, or a flight of iteps, tncreaaing the depth according to the progress of the pupil. The body should be bent forward, the feet close together, and the hands ready to touch the ground at the same time with, or rather before the feet.
The Jfiffh Leap. — ^This leap can best be taken over a light fence that will give way in the event of its being touched by the feet. It may be taken either standing or with a run : for the former, the legs should be kept together, and the feet and knees raised in a straight direction ; for the latter, we recommend a short run, and a light tripping step, gradnally quickened as the object to be leaped over is approached. Yon should be particularly careftU not to alight on your heels, but Tather on the toes and balls of tbafeat.
IM
GTIINASTICa.
Poti-iums.— In pole.l«»irti«, tbs *im or tbe le»per !■ lo otaff (h« l»r, tSDoa, or ditcb in ■ nest Bnd olaui mamiaT, without loucliiiig aiths willi tba («*. Tlu pole ibonldbe of Wont ash, •Imort faflaiibU, from •ight to Wn f»et long. Every «™l wili m, tdll In a UUle vhfla be <xa lap > djich *nd badge wttb (■« *ad ooofldence.
Tlu B<^ Lstp Mrith Oe PrA*.— Take tbe pole with tbe riglit hand ■boat the height at the head, end with ilie left BbontUis height oT the hipa i when put lo the gronnd, iptiag with the riehl tiwt, nnd paw by Um left to the pole, over wbuevgr yoo bftve to clem, tuniiDg roimd M yon alight. M M U> front the place you le^ rrom.
Tin Dirp Lap wiA tlu Pah, — Thle requmA BOength in the anue and banda. Place tbe pole tbe depth you have lo leap, lower the body for- ward, caat off your ibet and awing round tbe pole lo u to alight with yonr fhoe fronting the point you leaped from. Come bo the ground, IT poBuble, on the balls of yonr feet. Tht htmf Leap vrUli On Pale. — Thla la pertbrmad precisely w (be taat. only that you apring forward, nthar than high i it may be praetiaad aeroaa the tcencb.
■ FLTIVII BlL
—Place a ball, or other co
ing, between tlie two het. in ancb a way that It i« held between the auklea and the inner aide of the feet ; then Idck up, baokwarda, with both feet, and throw the ball aver yonr hmA-
Doi UD C»ni Two. — The peiaon who ia to perform this exploit (whom we sbatl deeignate as No. 1) glands between two others, whom we shall call Not. S uid 3 : he then Biuopa down, BDd paasea hia right hand behind tbe left Ibigb of No. t. whoae right band he graaps ; and his led band behind the right thigh of No. 3, whose left hand he grasps. N'oe. 1 and 3 thca paes CAch one an arm round tlkS ns^ and ■honldeTS of No. ] , and when in this position. No. 1 , by raiaing himaelf gradually froik his stooping posilJon, lilts the others from ths gromid.
PBOBraiTi m FaiFinDiCDLta. — Hold your arma on your breaat. lie on your back ajid get up ngAiu, without making use of either yoor elbows or hands. This Is done wilb a auddea spring, by Brst throwing np yonr feet in tbe air. and then, aa tbey lelBin to the ground, riaing on your heels and bciogiug yoor body straight.
aruMABTics. su
Tbi Timra. — Plice tht palmi of th« lundi togMher, baUad 700, wilh the flogsn downmiTd, and tin thomb* nesnac Uio back j than, atill keeping u mnoh u pouible or (he pklmi logsUitr, uid, U leut, tha Oogan of ana huld toncbing thoie of tha oUier, turn (ho hands, by keeping the topi of the OngerB clone to t^a back, nntil the audi •!« betnes the alHialden, with the pahna togather, t)ia thntntw outward, and the topa of tlie a>igen toward tha head. Thii it a rulier OitBoult fSat.
LnTUB *i Abh'i Likste. — EleTatiDg t, pole at ann'i length has long been accounted a laperior feat i to do this. UiB arm muet be ■tretched DDt St full length, (he pole (tha poker wQl do to begin with) grasped with the nails apw&nl, ■nd elerated in a right line with the arm {eidi illasCrMion).
Snnoa THaoeoa lom ow
'-«^.
little jimctiie, joa nuty leap over
it. forwai^ and backward, with-
ont diBmltj- ; when perfect in thij, yon may, ae Iba writer of ihia has fraqnently dona,
place the lop* of tlw two middle flcgera together, and leap over them both ways, witb-
nat (dther leparaUog or loDchfng tham with tha feat. It is imposaibla to perform this
trick with high-heeled shoe* ; and, in fbct, tha great difflca]^ conslete in clearing the
heals. This liule ft^ it Men In tha illnMratlon j at wall as the Finger Feat, deecribed
heavy pole, shod M one end with iron, or a spike, if yon think proper : elevate it with tha other band to the height of the ear, and cast it at a target. At some or the aymnsslic schools, the popils are lannht 10 cast ^e pole rcil^ tb£a fingers, as they woiild a reed ; this is a bad practice — tha spear shoald be graiped with tha whole hand, the batt end of it coming between the foretlnger and thumb, and the fmnl, or shod part, projecting fn>m the little finger.
will permit ; poise it aocnrately. 1 . deliberMely before you cast it. throw yonr arm well bacit and delicer the pole with all yonr faroe,
TBI Tnuf-orn. — la performing this feat it la nsoeasaiy to tak< daan paoes. The tiick is to place the toe of the right toot against (t bdgbl of the knea ttom the grooad, and to thrav the left leg over it.
t take;
su omNAsnca.
ntolntiaii. u tbx whm your laft l«g naobv (ha gnmiid, roiu' back wtU tw to tha nU. Tba toa of tha right foot ki the piriiit apon whbdi jon moil ton ; aod tt mnM pat qnU tha wsll during tha paiformaziGe of tha aiploit> T^ pcrftam Uia tam-orar app«n Co bo a raaltar of oomidanble dUBouJ^, al the Dnt glxioe of Iha daaoiiptioii i bat It ma; ba sOeinpted b7 a Jad of tolonbla aotiTltf, irho haa mada bimaalf maalsr of tha inatrsctloQa. wtthont dangor. and, tn a Aort Ume, aooompllahad with (kcillt;.
Tub riHou Tut.— Toot amia mnat ba hOTiaoaallj placed aoroai the bieaat. and otooa to It ; the foraflogen of aaoh hand mnat Uun be brought into oontaot. In thia poaitlon. another paraon mnst aDdsavoor lo aeparata joor Angan b; pnUlag at aaeh um. HowBTar mnob gironger ha may ba than yoa. ho will not be able to dMach your flugeiB, if ;an hold Ihsm properly. But the penon vho atl«mp(a to aapaiete the fingan of tha other mnat not oaa a andden jark. but a regular fbroe. Another w^ of parfbrm- Ing Iha Eingar Feat ia ahown in the tllnsliUion on the preriont page.
Tn STOorua Stutcb.— Thla (bat to perfDrmad in the (bUowing mannar ;— Draw
a line on tha floor, againat which place the enter edge
of the Tight KM ; at a moderate diatance belilnd tha
right heel, plaoe tba lelt heel againat tba line. Take
a plaoa oT chalk in tha rigbt band, aloop a little
forward. pa«a tha right hand between the iegt im-
D^adiately ooder the right knee, and chalk the floor
as tti beyond Iha Una aa yon can. ao that you can
reooyar youraalf without nu>Ting the loea of the Ibet,
I )fi^^__-*^^^^' "* tonohing tha gtoimd with sither oT yonr handa.
--^Ki.— - — In thia oaae there ia no apriug From the baud, aa tbe
Ik only, which ia bald between the two bnOngen.
le and body may prn^aot otct tha obalk Una, If yov feet
keep their ptoper place, aa above direoled, on Uie ontar aide of It.
Tai Lois Buo*,— A line ia to be marked on the Boor, to wUoh both fbe^ w rflthoF, tha toea of bo^ your tfbati are to be brought, and beyond which Uiey moat not pasa. One hand, eitfaar right or left, at option, ii then to be thrown (brward (with- out loDchlng the floor in U> paaaage), ao Or aa, and no tkithar than, yon can apring
back again from tha horiwatal poaltion to __
tha original upright poaltion of tha body, j£^ FjT ^\ ^ '
without dlatnrblng tha ataud poatnra of Jk''^ J J . \ -* —
tha ibet, or aoraping the floor with the hand
in tha buk-apring. Tha diatanoe at which diObrent
from tbe hand will, of coniae, diflbr aooording to their length
le band, or *'>**"r"g the original pceition of yonr fbat, yoTL mnat at
t aa poaible; and whilst your body ia lappoHed by the hand on tbe Boor, chalk aa
t aa poaaible with tha other i altar Ibla, riaa np from your band and nooTSr your
OTICNASTZCS.
247
original poeition, without taaobing the groimd again with either hand. There is great
■oope for 'iH" and activitj in this feat, and there are persona not exceeding flye ftet,
or fire feet and a few inches, who will chalk considerably ftirther than others six foet
high. The great art is to bring yonr body ss near to the floor as possible, for which
purpose you axe allowed to move the feet backward from the line of demarcation, as fkr
as yoa ly^t which will bring the body modi lower than it is in the figure, and enable
yoa to fh«^^^, at least» the fhll length of yourself, which is considered pretty good
chalking, although there are persons who will exceed the distance very considerably.
When on the stretch, the body may rest upon the elbow.
Tbxai> ow ras Teuxb. — Place the inside of the thumb against the edge of a table,
and then moye yonr feet backward as fto ss you can from the table, so ss to be able
to reooTer yonr upright position by the spring of
your thumb without moving your feet. Yon may
accomplish this feat with much greater ease, if,
preyiously to springing frxxm the thumb, you make
two or three bends to and fro with yonr body.
Neither the fingers, nor any port of the hand,
except the thumb, should touch the table. It is
advisable to begin by making the spring with your
feet at a short fjin^^'^ only from the table at first,
and to draw them ftuther from it gradually as you
improve in the performance of the feat. The tiible
from which you spring ought to be a heavy one,
or opposite end of it placed close against a wall,
otherwise you may push it back when making your spring ; in which esse, a lUl on
the handa and kneea would be almost inevitable.
Tax pAX.M'SnDf o. — ^This feat is performed by standing with yonr flMse toward a
wbH, and throwing yourself forward until you support yourself from Calling by the pahn of one of the hands being placed, with the fingers upward, against the wall ; when in this position, you must recover your former erect station by springing from your hand, without bringing your feet forward. According to the greater or less distance you stand frt>m the wall the more or less dilBcult the feat Will be. As in the feat of the Trial of the Thumb, it is better to begin the performance of the Palm>spring at a short distance only frtun the wall at first; by practice, if you are active and resolute, you may at last rise with ease
with your feet placed fhU two-thirds of your own height distant ftt>m the wall.
Tks Pvlut. — Fasten a common poller to a horisontal piece of wood, or the
braaeh of a tree ; run a cord through ft, with a cross piece of wood at each end ; two
hoy take hold of these cross pieces one lies on his back and the other pulls him up.
2.8
GYMNASTICS.
sinking himaelf m he raiaee hi« companion; he, in torn, is tieratad in the lame manner — and thus each ainks and is laiaed alternately.
Khucklb Dowir. — This exercise is jtertarmed by patting the toes against a chalk line, kneeling down and rising up again, without any assistance of the hands, or moving the toes from the chalk line.
Bbxast *o Mouth. — Measnre the distance between the oataide of the elbow and Fi«. I. Flff.s. the extremity of the longest finger: mark that
distance on a walking>stlck or mler, as shown in Fig. 2. This stick mnst be held horisontally before you, as in the annexed sketch. Fig. 1 ; the middle finger being placed exactly over the mark ; the fingers mnst be kept at right angles with the stick, and the thumb placed over them, as shown by the fist grasping the stick (Fig. 2). Holding the stick in this position, you must, without changing the place of your fingers, lowering your head, or removing your elbow ttom. your aide, endeavour to raise the left end of the stick from your breast to your mouth.
To Tixi 1. Chaxb noM Uitdsb tov Without FALuira. — ^The figure represents a youth with the back part of his head resting on one stout chair and his heels upon another, and a third chair, which
ought to be of rather a lighter make, ^^ ii^-^jrjwi ^^^^ „ /.,>
is placed under him. He must Btiflto his body and limbs, throw up the chest, keep the shoulders down, and disengage the middle chair, which he mnst carty round over his body until he deposits it again under him on the opposite side. This is another of those feats which seem very difficult, but which are, in ftot, oaaj of execution.
Thb Poxaa Fkat. — ^This feat is performed with a common poker, which you hold near the top, between the finger and thumb, as shown in the figure. You then, by the mere motion of the fingers and thumb, work or screw the poker upward, until the slender part is moved up to the hand, whilst the poker remains perpendicular during the whole proceea. For the first few times that this is attempted to be done, some difficulty will be met with, as it not only requires strength in the fingers, propor- tionate to the weight of the poker, but also a certain knack, which is only to be acquired by practice. We have seen some persons perform the poker feat apparently without the least exertion, while others of equal strength have tried and (kiled.
Two to Ova. — ^With the skipping-rope several good and easy gymnastic exereiaea may be perfonned ; the best, perhaps, is the following : — Skip in the eommon way for
OTHKASTICS. S40
a ftrw Moonda, constantly increaaing your velocity of movement, and at length leap tolerably high, and whirl the rope round ao Dut that it may paas twice under yonr feet before th^ touch the ground : continue this tmtil you oan repeat it aeveral timee in suooeeaioni and at last, pass the rope three times, instead of twice, under your feet during the leap.
CLxmnro, sto.
To Cum na Bon. — ^In climbing the rope, the hands are moved alternately, one above the other, the feet drawn up between every movement of the hands, and the rope grasped firmly between them ; in descending, move one hand after the other, as the fric- tion, if you slide, would blister them. The best method of climbing the slanting rope, is to lay the sole of one foot flat on the rope, and the other leg over the instep of that foot.
To Climb nra PBBnKDicn.Aa ob Slaittiko Polb. — ^Move the legs and hand alternately, taking care, however, not to place the hands over each other, as in climbing the rope. In descending the pole, the hands are held ready to be used, if necessary, on each side of it ; the legs being then a little slackened, you will descend with great ease.
CLiiCBuro A Laodbb. — ^It is good practice to go up and down a ladder without employ- ing the hands. By this means sailors are enabled to run up the shrouds with weights in their hands, and firemen can assist people to escape from, houses on fire. It is also well to learn how to ascend and descend a ladder by the hands alone, without the assistance of the feet ; and in this way two persons may use the same ladder at the same time, one ootaide and one inside. To pass from the back to the front of the ladder, and tnce reraot m also a very usefhl feat ; and by no means diflicult when you have acquired the method of throwing yonr body round by the assistance of one hand only, while you grasp the Anther edge of the ladder with the other.
THB OXAVT BTBIDB.
Every public and school gymnasium is, or should be, provided with the apparatus which is shown in the engraving at the head of this article. It is called the Oiant Stride, and consists of a stout mast, about twen^ feet in height, firmly fixed in the earth. To the top is attached an iron cap or ring, which revolves freely on a pivot. To this ring are fiMtened from six to a dosen ropes, according to the size of the apparatus and the space at command. The ends of the ropes are either twisted into knots, or have wooden handles attached. The players take each one of these knots or handles, and having a firm hold of the rope, run one after the other round the central post. They will soon find that the motion has a tendency to swing them off the grotmd, and only allow their feet to touch it occasionally. With a little practice they will be able to make the complete circuit, swinging at the (tdl alretch of the rope ; and when all the playera are active, the exerdae ia very exhilarating. Some gymnasta can make two or three complete revolutiona without touching the ground ; and vari«ua are the vaults, swings, and tremendooa atridea aooompliahed by means of thia apparatua. It ia necea- aary, in order to keep the wheel taming, that all the players ahould start together, and keep pace pretty regular^. The more ttAy they give themselves to the rope, the laaa ttkelj an thgj to bump against the post and interrupt the other players.
23i BCISNTIFIC OnKASTICS.
twiagbig and t»inine roimd tht ems-pola, huiging bj the teet, tbe bcnl kneot,
etc. Id Ikcx, the supaulon bar give* ;<ia Bwrly kQ tha «ictcIm< perfOnnad witb
tb* tnptM. The posts shoald hmva
^^ ssrarml helcB, » that the croB-pola may
to the height of the pas
HtnlRht, and doC i
low between the shoolde™. Alter
practice yon will be able to turn
same distance from the ut&CninieDt.
TBI Tai»ii,— The appanUg known
bar. from which thepeiformer can eiecnts a TKrie^ of cnrioaa and heaJchTol Bi- RCiSM, Bnt he most practise long and MeadllT befOn be an hope to aoUsTe gnM
gronnd. Btrength oT arm ■: grand assistania in tnptse tha jaong Bspirantto
eight feat frum Che
d confldencs are the ^„
aeieises. First, let \,J1
D hj the bar and swing tc and tra. Then hs may iklsa himself by the mnscatar power of his arms, and throw himself com ptetely otct the bar. After that he may raise his legs, and Mill holding on by liis hands, pass his body heneuh and over the bar (Fig. 1}
[a performing on the trs[*M the feet must be kept ol
> together. >nl the crosi
SCIENTIFIC OY1CKABTIC8.
hud, not (00 tigbsly, with cfae bfmda waU, but not
a be taught on paper is leu
r b07 oan learn fOr hlmKlf b; ui hoor'e praciiM. All perfotinaaoee are CBiried on while the tfvpAie li on tiia awiog. This, tbangb apparently diSmilt, ii leei >o than IT lbs bar wen rigid and at rcn. Thoagb ,-
a new perthnnance. the mpbM la toj do meana
oatUQl
lkM,*J] tl
ODce formed j»n at lbs calietheuie coone for Isdiee taught by SignoT Voarino half a oentnry ago. AU Ibu it new la the dangtnna alsmeDl ; and thai, ire b^ do meani wiib to Macb or ■dTocaie. Id iia own proper place, the inptia la a luenil adjunct to the gTmDaaiiun j but a* K aeaiu (Or the eibibtcion oT daring and dangerooa teaXa, ila emploi'ment i< oettainly to be diAcooraged in all Oi
roH, nulled hj ihort etralght piecea, regnaped bythehanda. Thai □ railing the diunb>beUi In (Kml, cairying Ihi
tend to opOD Ibe chnt, (tiengthsn the anna, and give goneral rlgonr to the frame. A glasM at the engraTlng will ebow 700 mon aa to the method of exercifling with the Du&b'bella altnoet any amoDnt of written dotcTipCion.
There ia another Idnd of dumb- bell which ii much used in the gjm- Deela. tt ooaaiite of a long woodea or iron bar, wliii an iron knob ateacb end. TbiiLong-beUlatobeUfledand Bwnng forward and backward, round
— Aluonff the moat
Bl 8CIENTI7IC OYUKABTICS.
ooDiiii of tiro ohibfl of hud wood, wdgbloff from tan to fbr^ ponndB, For yooUu mud objtdren tboy ue of oodtm mnoh lighler. Tuiooi eieroUes an curied on b; ttasir meuu, trom tht aiiniila lifliiic of the oIdIk, to Ui* slabonte Bwlssi " o rognlBT nil* ttid grmdation. Fiimt,
round Ihs back of the bodj, oror
tUl All lb> ttalM
BTOond. uid hold oat U
d by
hort-
lontally from the aacli eierclie. Elaborate direction* bat tbr all pnccical pnrpoBea, giren ibowa yon anttcienC. It la anppoMd that the (vreral enardaaa ha &int linsa ft>Ua« each other, an interral of nat takio; place
'■ length previoiii U
In varioiu parta of India pjrformera wHb Uje Claba eihlhU a RieM nuniber of curioua and remaikalile feata; moh a> awiiiging the eluba npwarda and bohlod the head, and dexUnnilf catching ttiein by the handlea ai Otey come ia front i throwing tbem in drolea nnnd the liead and body, ttie one olnb forming a unaller cirele 'h^t the other, and eo on. SleadineMof 170 aodragnlaritrof action are theKrwt reqaititca for the Indian CTnb etenieea. Strangth alone irill accompUah little. When the performer begini he ationld bold the olntia firmly bnt aaaily in Lhe pahna, with the naila inirard. Then lie raiaea thsra oarefOlly 10 an upright poaitlop till tha palnii lam DDtwarda, keeping the kneea and l>ody erect, and bringing the anu perpendicularly back tolhelhrat of the body. If yon find that the weight of the iluhe la too much for your wriiila, and aoon tirea them, yon ranit nae a lighier pair ; but a little practice will eoon enable you to increaae their weight. Stand firmly, with the toea tomed a little outwatdB, and avoid all londenoy to awing npon either heela or toes. Do not fatigae yourself by long practice, but gradually Inoreaae the length of yonr exeiciae aa yoa become familiar with the implamenta.
In Franoa • aimllar aort of neniaa !■ (aoght with a atrnlght bm bar, which
|
SCISNTmC QTMNABTICB. |
|||
|
!■ DC* oDlj iwims nrODd llie |
>u»d and bod7, tat |
thrown to ■ diUmee ui |
|
|
o«.ghtb).«oU»rp«tormer. |
|||
|
,\ |
|||
|
/ ^» |
\\\ |
||
|
PuLOB. Gtmuium. —Dr. |
(^ |
m \ |
|
|
Bdinber, Dii«»or ot the |
|||
|
Uediod tijnuiutic InttiM- |
l/-- |
||
|
tion ot Berlin, hu IMely |
flP* |
Ik^-Qi 1 |
|
|
whieta bmn thl. »Un |
|||
|
)euT>ad-l«iktiig ums. ItU, |
V A^ |
||
|
in rut. > ■bnpli kpiKiMai, . |
|||
|
oowWlDS of two Kupended' |
|||
|
inm nirrniii for tlw I^M. B7 ^ |
Sftu |
Mi^ ^ |
|
|
It, bowiTcr, u tounnwe ' |
|||
|
( |
|||
|
I |
|||
|
hung in iny lilting or pUy root*, or (ntpaidad rmiD Uio |
|||
|
— -^ |
^^E |
K |
■■oh upanU oanlH wiUi mat and gracv; alowlr nllw Bhu quickly, keeping hi* li»il am» "d 1^ Oo^T "PP'» ' *«»Hng no b™o». ud
not buckling hii muelbsU too Ughtly. Th« Imptemsnt oau be ptmbued of mort Milan of CTiekeiing appMMne, or it nay be mmde U home with IsUhar or webbing ■tnpa, Hro wooden ring*, anil a p»ir of iron nimpL
TBI DDTonum o> BiHiuOE.— ^Thie ii uiotlier end eimplo' kind of gynmuCe ■ppustD*. aued for' oh wilbin dooii. It conu»U of an ladla-rabbur eiiriiig, to wbicb (le wtached by ropee or bande i a pair of handlee. The apparanu it hong 10 a hook KTemd Into the wood- wort nr Ue wall, the lintel over a door. etc.. and is then rady tor use- It is worked by preeeing (brwanl th* cbeet. with (he emu extended, end Ihsa allowlDg the India-nibbar to contniM. The motloD is repeated over and over agaio, and the motioiu or rowing. : airimniing. boxing, eto., can be imi- ' tated without much etertion. The arma ehoold alway* be kept to the ' front, and all jerk ahonld be aroided. ' By means oF thii lilUe implemeia, indoor gymnaetle exSTCiae may be ad- TantagwHuly taken, without learlng behind it any great eeneo of IWigm or sihsnation. Thii Implement — called after Lord Banelagh, a great pMnm , ^-_u -™^ for ghrli and boys, ae the amoost at foree reqoiied entirely nnder the control of the perfonner. nsT !• an iiteCrameiit of somewhat >imi]fcr appearance to the Banelagh. liece of wood In the place of the ring where the India-rubber bands are esospendingcord. It is ng«d in precisely the some way a« the appanou , and is veiy well adapted for indoor gynmastica.
Ih regard to tbe meOiod of traimug for Oymnaetlca we need say very little i e lads who are in the habit of playing Ci-iokel and other out-door Hpuru are I in a Bt condition to undertake any kind of exerciie. The young irynuuHt should loo mnoh nertion at any one time, and generelly abelaiu Ih^m the use of inla, and eat tparingly of re^mablee. By all means avoid the practice of emok-
ig and aTening, It Is Bdvisable not to eiert all your strength at the cummeuoe- ir at the ooodusion of an enrciae ; and aa soon as yon have Bolahed, nb your-
BCIENTI7I0 OTHKASnCB.
MlfdijuilhTOB^ towl, md JitM qnlcMy. NsTor drink m bnCifTta msM drink, sanAiiaToimelflowaler. A beK mm of grtax uainnnoe; l«t (he tn>Daon tw loon, uul do not wv bMMr In the gjrmauimn than > ODBrnaa^ ihlrt wiUi k pftir oT
WBlktai8onMatalipnMiMdIi7Uisah^hsrdiafthBlAndga,ordeHit,lnth« Boatb of Pnnca. Tbe habit Ii aaqntred ntJj, uid the ■BuUler the bo; 1*, tha longer It la naoMKuj to have hli atsta. Vj taaata oT thiaa odd addiliona lo the nMnnl lag, the rsM ftn kept ont of the inta, which Ilea deep dnring winter on Iha aanda, and fnan tbe heated land dnrtng ibe lamineT ; In addition to which, the ■pbara of Tkion tmr k perftot a Oat la mMeriallj incraaaed b^ tbs eleratdon, and the ahepherd can aaa hia ihaep mnch fntther on Rilta than he oonld fhon the gronnd. BUlia are eaallr oon- etnutod : two polaa an procoivd. and. at aome dlaance bum IbelT enda, a loop a! leallier or rope li aanirely Ikatencd ; In Ibeae the fbet are placed, the polea are kept in a proper poalUon bj the handi, and pnt fttrwud bj tbe aetlon of Ifae legi. A taperior nwde of making MQia la by labatiCutinK a piece of wood. Hat on the npper aarface, for the leather loop ; the foot reita on. and la Baatened t^ a atiap lo it i a piece at leather or rape la al*> aalled to Ibe atllt, and paaaad Tonnd th* leg jnat below the knee i MUu made In thli manner do not reach to the banda, bat ai« nuunged entirely by the IMt uid liga. la mati7 parti of Snffland, bo;* rnqnantl; ai
SOXZH'9 ASrO WaSBYKXH'ft,
BOnNG and TTmrtJlTig an Trnthor to bfl cvmAldmd ■« giofoiao than iporta j uul u nUh wa tnU them. Aa srar; bof (honld know how (a dottaid bisualf witli no otliBr ^ntfOBM tban thoM fOmiilied turn I17 Natsn, m ciflte na ^Dlogj for Inm- dueiiig tlMM aatifMU into tba " BciT'a Own Book."
In Boiing tbe parfimner wean well-padded laathar glovea, a pair. AJways ehoou the beat glorn, aa oommciii ooea aoon Anj spot of blood on the gk>Tea hai^mi, end loh a apot la aaen on tfaa gloTs it ahonld ba wiped, and the mark propeilr olMUoed nUh pipe-di^. The laatbar BJkoold be kept toft and pliable bj fraqoant pipe-olaying and beating. A pair of light IT rowtDK thorn, and a Onenae; shirt, will be found the beat ecxtiune for boien. AtdM bracea and tight nsakBrehialh. Tna Attitvoi. — The Ont thing to conaidflr in Boxing la the atljtade. Bland fina, wHli the left leg flnt if 7011 , hit moat &«elf with the right hud.
half-extended, read; to aCrlke or atop a blow. Qniekneae of eye and hand are the main elemecte of good Boe- Ing ; but do not bo in a hnrry. Onard the ftce wtOi the band well laiaed 1 and alway* keep jnnir eye en toot adTenary. blocking hla blowa with (ba anna, and at looD aa one ia
It la elwi^ fUr to make a lUnt of Hriking, ao >a to dmw yonr advciuiy that ha ctepa oat to atrika, itep in and plant Hit hardj than ii no sunr or IkTonr to
blmniHSd bj itgalar boxen. All thai an be dr hint* KOi '**"**^^*. and put the ^oonfi: bent In the bMC of a bant M BMicnth.
of dottanw Is Bmiiig u joa avoid ]
ikiil, Wlien jroa (M J^tor KlTtrHiy ■ban! to ■Dike u TOUT Ikoe or dMBt, beat nplii* blow wilb jonr Ml hand, and rMoni tta« ■troka witta tout right. Whcm yoiu
ICiiit, and then when be it about to .
goanl with hl» right, Uirow in jonr
light lUl to bia Ckoe, A tkilftil boier ,.,t^
DSTcr alma a blow without at Iba utns fi |'^
time bemg preparad to give a leoond fl i'ij^^^
and more sffMtnal ana. It la Blw^s ' WM
beat 10 l(«n to atrike with both
baoda, and pan? with eilhsr at plea-
mn ; Idr if joar opponent flnda I
jon oaa hit mor« raadilj with four ''
taft hand than with 70TI1 right, h
will feint BO B( h> make 700 naa jaaz le«M powemil hand in gnardiog, aod then
■MP fa aul MrOn hard at 7001 ohiM or &M What yon hafa lo do ti not aulr
2» WBRSTUNG.
to abrike, bat to guard yonr ftboe, chMt, and Bbomach. PiuctiM with a friend, and alternate^ ataike and parry ; for it ia onlj in thia way that yoa can acqnira oonlidenoe and aldlL A direct or round blow, aa it ia called, ia easily aeen and readily atopped. This aort of blow ia not oonaidered either a good or eflbotiTir' one. It ia beat to strike forward with each arm anooeeaively, aa rapidly aa you can; and whencTer yon can bar a blow, either with your arm or by throwing yonr head back, you ahoold do ao. Defend youraelf by drawing back the arm whenever a croaa blow ia oflbred, and do not ahift yonr position oftener than yon are obliged. If, however, yonr opponent stepa ba<^ follow him, and if he aeona inclined to still ftirther retreat, advance yonr foremost foot, bringing up the other after it; and still keep advancing, atriking meanwhile whenever an opportunity preaents itaelf.
WBlSnXVG.
There are variona styles of Wrestling practiaed in different parts of the oonntcy, and in Cumberland, Devonahire, and Gomwall, tiiis exerdae ia the common diveraion of the peasantry. The Cornish "hug," the Devonshire **kick," and the Cumberland " toasle," have been long known and ftared at fkirs and ruatic festivals. But though Wrestling is now almost confined to the labouring clasaea, the time was when the art was practised by the flower of the nobility of almost every nation, and in the ages <rf chivaliy to wrestle well waa accounted one of the accom- plishments which every hero ought to acquire.
The wrestling matches in the western parte of England, two centuriea ago, are ▼exy fully dsacribed by Oarew, an author of that time. He aaya, ** The beboldera cast or form themselves into a ring, in the empty space whereof the two champions step forth, stripped unto their doublets and hose, and untmssed (unbraced), that thej may ao the better command the uae of their limbe ; and first ahaking handa, in tcdcen of friendahip, they ft^ presently to the efftet of anger ; for ei^ atriveth how to take hold of the other with the beat advantage, and to bear hia adverse par^ down ; wherein, whoanever overthroweth his mate, in such sort, so that either his back, or the one shoulder and contrary heel do touch the ground, is acoounted to give the flalL If he be only endangered and make a narrow eecape, it ia called a foil. . . . Thia pastime," he adds, " hath alao ita laws ; for instance, of taking hold above the girdle, playing three pulls for trial of the mastery, the fall-giver being exempted from playing again with the fitkU-taker, but bound to answer his succesaor," etc. Priaea were given to the victors in these encounters ; and then, as now, the exorcise waa in high fiavour with the people.
Although wrestling ia a sport which ia more in vogue with rnsttca than with the educated classes, it is well that the latter should know how to defend themselves in chance encounters. Whatever the style of wresUing adopted, eadi combatant ahould take hia position firmly with his right leg advanced. Each seises his opponent by the upper part of the arm, and with the left foot twisted round the right anUe of his opponent, endeavours to throw him. Of course he will resist, and try in turn to throw his feUow. But each must stand firmly and aeise eyery advantage that preaenta
itaelf. Ic hu bam mil obanred ihat, to wraMUsg, >diLw donblw tlie IkoiiKlaa o; IhB bodji pmdBafla uid qalekn« often lupplTiiig the pUc« of MAn^Ui^ whBH propwlj applied.
'Tai T»n.— The ordinary way of IhrowCatt ii b UKTsfon, jm ehouU dOM with your aoMgo- nut, and placing cheat to obeet end knee to knee, make ItattlaJ of sCnnfth and eklll ae (o whish shell go down. If yes look well to yoDi adTemiy'B motions, yon wUI «oan pareelve that, befbn he Dies to trip yon up,
good hla eUanipt;
It yon may eeflfly du- i, and with your
th^Mffr well planted agminet h
throw, and sadeeTOOT ID make one yonieelf.
Alwayi oloee ■■ loon u job tan withont expoiing yonrsetf. and endrnTonr In the
Brat •tru^sl' <" f^l uppermost. Kever Uek m hit, M both an oowardly sod dangcnnu.
Tn FiLi Tbe "almple (Ul"l9 nada by pr«aahi« yoni ri^ foot tnalde yoor
adremuT'e left ankle, and then bearing down bli body, wttb » sudden (wist and puMuni of yonr ehoaldir against his shooldcr. Tbe " otoea-bnttook " is one of the Dboet dangerona iUls. It can only ooenr when yoor right aide oomee in oontact witli yonr opponent's right alda in closing fbr the lUL Then cite selua the belt or waist- band of tbe other with the right hand, and right ahoolder with (ha left head. In thta poaiUoo a sodden lift Ibrowa the weaker wieMler orar on to the gTonad, head bre- nioati and he saTeshlmsair fnm hijarT u beat he nn. ToaToiit the throw, band down and shp (hnn yonr opponsnt's grasp ; or hold hkn tighUy so that he oannot force yon down without going down himself. Beelstance and eflbrt are alike to be bronght into jAmj in wrestling j and howerer your opponent m^ Interlace his bmbe in yours, he will (kil to lirow joa If you keep yonr body rigid, and clasp him by the wsirt. Usoally a single tkU Is ooosldered lufBcietit with each combatant.
Tni Btiow un> CoLua Ouip. — This method of holding is commonly practised by DeTonahlre men i and by boya all over the country, where they wnstle in thtir ordinaiy clothes. Dlieetly yonr adTsrsary shifta hli poeltlon in order lo get a more liim hold, yon Buat also ahllt yotua, ao *e to defat hia Intention, and by moramant of hand, fbot. Bud body, endeaTOor (a twer him down, clceing with him in the final slniggla. and l"-».i"ir Up to hip, and ibmlflw t^ th^wiH". <"' f" "^ "t""" nminnumTiir oonquaied.
Tha ihls UA, IhoDgh pnaUiBa ta Danmililra. U ham nnlTOwUj oandamnad bj ' nor HisutorwnstliDg.
I.UII Tuiiu. — In (hli alylt of wnoUlng tha nombUanU BSlu «Mib
to show llie vuioiu posiUoiK br n
but ■ little inaotlM. in comuotion wllli time inscmotioni, i
^TO wttii tha Tirlana mauu of dafbnoe and oD^noe mBd *moi
To ba a good wnatlar, qnlelmoM of aye, agllitr of morament, Unngth of >im and las, and aqoabUi^ of tempar an Indupenaable. A good sran green tmf i* raqnloUa ; for a nrj hard aoil prewDH loo maob naJaUnce lo the toot, whlla a aoft ona oaoiaa the playen lo allp aod Momble. The draas ahonld be light and mtj i » pair of woollen or linen mmaeza, oonflned at tiie v^Bt by a bait, Hn elaatio ablrtt and
diepenae with oil but the tmnaen i bnC when jon wmtle tar men u ordinuy arlokellng coitame, mloiu the linked ahoee, will aetre sdmiiably. It la •ipnesly fbrbiddan by the etiqaetle of the apart for eitbar pt^er to aelje bia opponenc by the Ihioat or below tha belt, to oae the Bat, or in any other way (o Uke
y KGLDfO hu long h«Id » high nnk unons IliB ipoita or the peopls [ oT Kngltnil i poMa h&ve •rrUUn In lla pniie, and philoMpbera have delighted In Ua piaoUee ; U la Dot oanBnBd to puticnlu- plaoei, igea. rr girndfls of eoeiB^ t whcmrer the brook wandoi " thmogti hay haw or brooms glen." — whererer tfjo willow-bnnch laTa in the InamM— wbererer the Tnnit Iwpa at the JUy-6f, or the Pike tnika or the Balloon (piiiigi np the valeriUl — (ban alio aie Anglaia. a Royal^ ttHlf — oooaaionally nlaxea from the graTO dntioa m aoch mpoilor itation, from waighiogthiB balaaca or power, aAd detenuin' lag the ikte of Datione, *' to wield thevod, and oast the mimic flj."
26t ANGLINO.
Bom. — ^Tlie llzvt care of the Angler is to procare good rods, Uiies, hooka, and floata. A great varied of rode may be had at the shope, of bamboo. Tine, haxel, and bJckory ; for general flahhig, those made of bamboo, having several tops of varioos strengths, are best ; bat cane rods are mnch supwior for fine fishing. The rod for bottom fishing shonld be perfectly straight when pat together, and gradoally taper flrom the batt to the top. The best fly-rods are made more taper than others. Bods for trolling most be ftimished with brass rings of a good diameter, for the tndling lines to go throngh, whipt all the way np, at aboat ten or twelve inches distance ; the tope for this description of rod must be strong, and have rings whipt on with pieces of qaill, to prevent the lines being cat. The tops of rods for Carp, Tench. Dace, and Roach fishing, should be finer, and more elastic. The rod most neither be kept too dxy nor too moist, for the one will make it brittle, the other rotten.
Lorxs. — Those made of silk and hair are preferred, the best are pUtiied, not twitML
Hooks are nambered, and made saitable in size to the fish they are intended to take. For Barbel-fishing, Nos. 5, 6. 7, 8. and 9 are used ; for Gudgeon, Noa. 10 and 11 ; for Boach, Dace, and Bleak, Nos. 10, 11, or 12; for Tench, Carp, and Perch, Nos. 7, 8, and 9 ; for Trout. No. 6 ; for Chub, Nos. 8, or 9 ; for Eels, No. 8 ; for Grayling, No. 10 ; for Ruff, No. 9 ; for Minnows, etc., No. 13. etc. The above saiee are preferred by the best Anglers of the present day. For arming the hook, u^ fine, small, strong silk, well waxed, and lay the hair on the inside of the hook, other- wise the silk will firet and cut it asunder.
Floats made of Muscovy-duck quills are best for slow waters ; sound cork, withont flaws or holes, bored through with a hot iron, into which is put a quill of fit proportkm, is preferable for strong streams : the cork should be pared to a pyrunidical fonn, groxmd small with a pumice-stone, and coloured according to fknoy. Floats mnst be ao poised with shot, when on the line, as to make them stand perpendicularly in the water, that the least nibble may be apparent.
AsnoLSS Nkcxssabt von AiroLBxs. — Hooks for trolling ; the gorge, snap, etc, tied on gimp ; vrinches for running tackle ; disgorger ; split shot ; hooks tied on gat of various sises, to No. 12 ; hooks tied on hair, from No. 11 to 13 ; bags for worms ; gentle boxes ; floats of various sizes ; plummets for taking the depth ; baiting needlfce ; caps for floats ; fidi-baaket ; kettle for carrying live bait ; rods for troUing and bottom- fishing ; drag to dear the line, when entangled in heavy weeds ; landing-net ; dearing- ring ; lines of gut, hair, etc. ; thoee of four yards long will be found most useftiL
BAITS.
Lxvz BAm. — The lob-worm, garden- worm, and dew- worm are fbund in gar^dena and churchyards at night ; the best have red heads, broad tails, and axe streaked down the back. Thestf excellent baits for Barbel or Eels are found towards the latter and of the summer.
Gilt*tails, brandlings, and red-worms are found in old dung-hills, hog's dung, oovr*s ^nng, and tanner's bark. The brandling and giltptail are excellent bait fbr P^rch,
ANGLmO. 2CS
Tbneh, Bream, and Gndgeon. The red-wonne, weU-eooored, tsn taken by Tench, Perch, and Bream in mnddy watera.
The meadow, or manh-wonn, is of a Hghtiah bine oolonr, and a good bait for Perch ; it ia foand in marahy ground, or in the banks of rivers, in Angnat and September.
The tag-tan is found in meadows, or ohalky ground, after rain, in March and April ; and esteemed a good bait for Trout in cloudy weather.
The pa]mer>worm, woolbed, or cuiker, is fbund on herbs, plants, and trees ; and takes the name of woolbed firom its rough and wooUy coat. This is an excellent bait for Trout, Chub, Grayling, Boach, or Dace.
The oak-worm, caterpillar, cabbage-worm, crab-tree-worm, colewort-worm, or grub, may be gathered on the trees of colewort and cabbage, or on the hawthorn, oak, or crab-tree, and maybe preserved with the leaves of those trees or plants, in boxes bored with holes to admit the air. Th^ are good baits for Chub, Dace, Boaoh, or Trout
The bark- worm, or ash-grub, is found under the bark of a felled oak, ash, elder, or beech, or in the hollow of those trees where rotten. This bait may be used all the year for Grayling, Dace, Boach, or Chub. They are kept well in wheat-bran.
The cod-bait, caddis-worm, or case-worm, of which there are three sorts, are found in pits, ponds, or ditches ; th^ are excellent bait for Bream, Tench, Bleak, Chub, Trout, Grayling, and Dace.
Gentles, or maggots, are easily bred by putrefection ; th^ may be kept with flesh, and scoured with wheat-bran. They are good baits for Tench, Bream, Barbel, Dace, Gudgeon, Chub, Bleak, and Carp.
Cow-dung-bob is found under cow-dung, and resembles a gentle. It is best kept in earth, and is a good bait for Trout, Chub, Carp, Tench, Bream, Dace, and Roach.
The white-grub, or white-bait, ia much larger than a maggot ; it is found in sandy and mellow ground, and is an excellent bait from the middle of April till November for Tench, Boaoh, Bream, Trout, Chub, Dace, and Carp. These baits should be kept in an earthen vessel, with the earth about them, and covefcd very close.
Flag or dock-worms are found among the small fibres of flag roots, and in old pita or ponds. Th^ may be kept in bran, and are good baits for Bream, Tench, Boach, Carp, Bleak, Dace, and Perch.
Dace, minnows, roach, smelt, gudgeon, and bleak, are proper bait for Pike.
Grasshoppers, in June, July, and August, their legs and wings taken off, are good for Boach, Chub, Trout, and Grayling.
The water-cricket, water-louse, or creeper, which is found in stony rivers, will often take Trout in March, April, and May.
White snails are good bait for Chub, early in the morning, and for Trout and Eels on night-hooks.
House-crickets are also good, to dib with, for Chub.
Pabtb-Baiss axe not to be angled with in rapid streams ; but in pits, ponds, and slow running rivers, on small hooks. In this sort of angling your eye must be quick, and your hand nimble to strike, or the bait and fish will give you the slip. A quill float is better than cork, aa it sooner shows the nibble or bite.
268 ANGUNQ.
For a Chub, tekia lome old cheese, the suet of mutton Udnej, and » Uttie straif rennet ; mix them finely together, with m mndi tnnnerio m will torn them yellow.
For Boeoh and Daoe, grate fine bread into a little clear water, wherein eome gmn- ivy haa been soaked, add a little batter, and colour it with saffiron.
For Barbel, in Aognat, make a paste of new cheese and mutton snet. For these fish the bait may be bigger than a haiel-nnt»
For Carp or Tench, mix cramba of bread with honey ; or, for Carp, take equal portions of bean or wheat flour, the inside of a leg of a young rabbit, white bees'-waz, and sheep's suet ; beat them in a mortar ; then moisten the mass with clarified honey, and work it into balls before a gentle fire.
Sheep's blood and 8ailh>n make a good paste for Boach, Dace, Bleak, Chub, Trout, and Perch ; for the Chub only, put a little rusty bacon in it. Nearly all the smaller river fish will bite greedily at greaves.
GBOuHD-BAxn. — ^The most simple ground-bait for Boach, Dace, and Bleak, is made by moulding or working some clay and bran together into baUa or pieces about the size of a pigeon's egg, with a little bread crumbled among it.
A ground*bait may be made with clay, bran, and gentles, for Chub, Boach, and Carp, thus : — ^Mix the bran and clay together, in lumpe about the siae oi an apple ; put a dosen or more gentles in the middle, and dose the clay over them. Thia is well calculated for a pond, a still hole, or gentie eddy.
To make ground-bait, with otoy and greaves for Barbel :^-Chop or break a pound of greaves into small i>ieces, and cover them with hot water ; let them remain until softened, then poor the water off; pick out a sufficient quantity of the white pieces to bait your hook, and work up the remainder with clay and bran into lumps or balls. This iathe best ground-bait for Barbel that is used. It is also an excellent ground-bait for Chub, large Daoe, and heavy Boach.
Gentles and worms may be used as ground-bait for Carp, Tench, Boach, Daoe^ etc. In ponds and deep still holes, gentlea»may be thrown in by handfVilw ; but this does not answer in a current or stream, as they then float, and are carried from the spot you intend to angle in ; a few, mixed with bran and clay, will answer better.
Grains are good ground-bait for Carp, Tench, and Eels, in ponda or still waters ; but they must be quite ikesh, for if they be the least sour, the fish vriU not como near them. They should be thrown in the night before you intend to fish ; the same method ought to be observed when you ground-bait with worms. Borne anglers prefer ooane ground-bait made with clay, soaked greaves, and oat-chaff for Barbel and Chub.
Bii. nsHnra.
With Bars.— Sea fishing, as a rule, is unprofitable sport, as the fish are only to be found in numbers at great distances from the shore, where they swim in deep water, and are taken in nets by professional fishermen. Several sorts of fish may, however, be taken occasionally at the mouths of rivers, when the tide is flowing up from the sea. For this sort of angling, a strong rod, a stout well-leaded line, a large hook, and a good-sised cork float must be used. When fishing at the moutha of
ANOUNG. 287
men, where jaa may take Flat-flih, Bele, Baas, small Whitiiiga, and the fty of Cod and Haddock, bait with gentlea, alizimps, or red-worma yeiy well aooured. For the larger flih, when angling from a pier, rock, or boat, bait with a amall raw crab, a bit of whiting, a raw mnaael, or two or three large red-worma. For Mackerel, yoa may bait with a bit of bright scarlet cloth, and let your bait swim about mid- water, or eyen lower, if your taoUe will aUow it. When naing a crab or mnaael bait, yon should flah at the bottom. Salt-water angling is by no means so pleasant, nor does it require such skill and nicety in the choice and management of baits, floats, and tackle, as angling in riyers, ponds, or streams.
With Nsts. — ^The nets most commonly used Xxy fishermen are the TnnU, the Sean, the Ortmnd Sean, the Keer Drag, and the Trammel, The first is a huge bag tapering graduaUy to the end, and kept open aft the mouth by means of an iron bar. It is dragged at the wake of the fishing smack, and is a sort of omnium ffoihemm for evetything thai swims near the bottom. Trawling is practised both by night and day, and most of the fish brought to market are taken either by the Trawl or the Sean. This latter is the large fllat net employed in fishing for mackerel, herrings, pilchards, sprats, and other fiah that swim in shoals. It is let down into the water, and sunk by means of weights; it requiree tiiree boats and their crews to properly manage it. The Ground Sean is a net of similar character, but much smaller. It may be towed by rowers in a small boat» or dragged at the side of a yachL Wide, open stretches of sandy beach are flkTOurable for its use. The warp at the pole end of the net is left on shore, and the boat containing the net rowed round the space to be enclosed. One man rapidly handa out the net, taking care to let the leads with whkih It is loaded go first, while another pulla till the endosnre is complete. The end cf the net is then brought on shore, and the net and its contents cautiously landed. The Keer Drag is a smaller kind of Trawl, and may be dragged after a yacht or row-boat, the small end being lifted aboard oocaaionally and opened, to aUow the fish that may be caught to be taken out. But the best sort of net for amateur use is the Trammei, as it is rery easily managed. Trammels vary in length and depth, but those about 60 to 60 yarda long, and from 16 to 86 fbet deep, will be the most handy. The Trammel is commonly laid down in the ereuing and taken up in the morning. It hangs curtain-like in the water, and the fish in their search fiir food run their heads into the meshes, and so get entangled and fixed. Being submerged by weights nearly to the bottom, the Trammel needs floata to show its position and buoys to keep it in its place. The beet kinds of Trammels are double, so that the large fish are canght in the outer net, and the small ones in the inner net. AH these kinds of nets may be bought or hired aft the seaside, where good-natured '* salts*' are always to be found willing to giye young fishermen practical instruction in the art of netting seaflsh.
Littie is known of tiie habits of those ordinary accompanimenta of our break&st- table — ahrimps, prawns, lobsters, herrings, haddocks, whiting, etc. ; but more might soon be learned if, instead of consigning young fry to the ocean or the fish-kettle, we were to place them In a marine aquarium, and watch thefar growth and manner of life. 9y such a course, a visit to the seaside might be rendered profitable aa well as pleasttiablA,
le whM tttoklaaud
tniu tn m— 1 'j -irl '-r ri-ti Wnil. ■nil thn prnrnr nrMinni fnrllihiniT frtrlhnm
TuoDT, — In angling for Troot M ihe bonom, in Ui« ekrl; put oT the morning uid lus U night, ■!» daring the d*^, if (he wUer be muoh oolonrad, oh \ Mnng rod. nuiaiag tukle, ud Nu, » hook. Angle with ■ floM, paBtng BolBcieiit shot on tha linQ, p1a«d ftboot nine incha ebove the book, to nnk U» b*it, which ihonld be oub luge lob-worm, or two mtnh or deW'Worou, well econred. and Ttrj li>el;. Let your bait drag tba bottom ; do not strike the flrat time jon Itoel a tug, but nLtliar Alaokea your line, aod whan ;oa Ibel turs or three iharp pnlli, abike imanl; \ if a heaT; fl*fa. give lum Una, but lake oitrs that ha doea not nm Into weeda, or anlaogle your taokla
Make, which he wilt alw^i endeaTOur t<
, and lUugglea
Tnmt la Tery lU rtolently, leapiDj and Sfing In al hala the hook.
The minnow it a good killing bait for Tumi. Id Bgblng with a miniuw, hook it k email cork float, Ho. t hook, and let ;oni
ANGUNG.
2'S9
^^-
kjimi
iMgin to fised in ICaroh, and oontixme in seMon tin Hiohaatanas. The fint two or three months are best for bottom-lSshing, they are then fbnnd in ahallows ; in sanuner time the large Tront lie in deep holes, or eddiea. As th^ aeldom Ibed in the day, nnleas in dark weather, you moat fish for Trout betimes in the morning, and late in the evening, or yoa will not be likely to be soooessftil in yonr sport.
Oabv. — ^In angling for this shy lish, nse running tackle, a small quill float, line clear gnt line, and Ko. 8 hook. Yon may flah for them fh>m the end of February, if the weather be mild, until the middle of October. Bait with well-soonred red-worms in the beginning of the season ; and in the summer, with gentles, and paste made with honey and the crumb of new-baked bread, worked well together. Keep as far tram the water as yon can; ground-bait the place as for Roach, and plumb the depth "
the night before. The best time to angle for Carp is very early and late. When you have hooked a Carp, give him line, and be very waiy and patient, or he will get away. In rivers, strike the instant he bites ; bat in ponds, wait for a few moments. Look sharp after your bait, when you nse paste, or this fish will suck it completely off your hook wittumt biting. In still water, your bait should swim about an inch firom the bottom, but it must not touch the ground in a river or stream. Carp are found in deep holes, near flood-gates, in eddies, and near large beds of weeds.
Ths Pxbch generally takes a bait immediately it is offared. Perch angling con- tinuee fttmi Febraaxy to Ootober. Strong tacUe must be used in angling for them, a
cork float, gut line, or a twisted hair, and hook No. 7. Bait with two red-worms, well scoured, or a live minnow hooked by the lips or back fin. Shrimps, or large grey maggots taken fh)m potato or turnip plants are good baits, especially the former. Give them a few minutes to pouch the bait ; nse running taoUe, or you wffl certainly lose your fish. During the hot months, Perch feed veiy little; dark, windy weather, if not too cold, is best ; they lie about bridges, mill-pools, near locks in rivers and canals, in deep, dark, still holes, and eddies, in ponds near flood-gates, on the gravel or sandy parts, and near rushes.
Tai TsircH bites freely in dsrk, warm, heavy weather, during summer. For bait^ use red-worms, gentles, or sweet paste. Fish with a fine gut line, quill float, and hook No. 0. The Tench delighto in foul rather than clear water ; their haunts are principally among weeds, and hnder shmbs and bnshee. Tench axe more numerous in pito and ponda than in riven. They bite
iisB tackla.
b* middl* of tb* d«r. (Mn Ifai IMtar «od oTi^iO
E«D In Torj nmddj |>Jima. thef iboold be pot Into » Mb of dMr wMor, aUn. iDd ttwr will •am clMim UmuimItm, ao ■■ Is impiroTe tbair flcToor.
TBI BuilL, whioh onlr tjnsda In riTn, la ■ haadioma Oih, bat nans, mai nn- ■idned bat of littla TalnsIOr tbe Babla I It, bowsrar, Ulbrda aioiamt q Tha7 a» ■wgi*^ for in tha rlTor Tbamaa, In boata, with a tfout rod gal. Una, cork float, and Ko. T or S hook, balled wilb lob or mank w In nttliat ibaOow Mnuna 70a naj ma sithar a banboo or oana nd with ■ Miff lop, nmning taokla, BnB gnt line, qnJll Boat, J ' ~ No. B hook, and ball with nd-wonna,
r- i'/''r\ ganlle^ or gnan*. Tha bail mut
alwija looeli the groand. In baiting wtth woraia, «nl« (he point oT Ilia luok k UHla iMlow Ita head, and paaa It throogh to within a qoaiUr irf an laob of tta tan, whlob part, bj ita icavInK about, will antioe tha flah to bite I oorv --T", A'''^,/'--"^* -■ (haahankot the hook Willi the bod; of
' ' the worm, u moeh aa yon can. Strike
I7 the Inatant 7011 aee a bile, nlaa the top of yonr md, and M him ran wnM Boe before yon attempt (0 torn him ; lake him b; degnee into deep and etill water, and play wi^ him tlU he la quite weak, before ytja land him. Beftnre Ton begin, throw In plenty of gmmd-bait, and oontinna to do » Iteqnsnlly while fljhing ; makfl It with aoaked gnATSe aod clay, or malt graina, broken lob-worau, bno and cl^, mixed together In balla tha alia of an egg. Bailed uhnoD'a roe li nld to be an eicellent bait fbr thia flah.
■ITio Barbel ia aoaroely worth oooklng when it ia canghtg bnt It U,
Ita OaTourlgaaid to baaoDuwhatimprared towarda thelatiar and itf Uia aomi apawn ia a Tioleuc oatbartJc.
Tn Boies, althoDgh not very delidoaa, la by so maani a bad flah, when in Ifitbeatataterab1eaiie,andcwightlnari*er. When Oihing for Roach, toot Una abore the float mnit not exceed fourteen inches ; tbe float ahonld not be moro than an eighth of an ^ iach aboie watar. for Roaoh btte so llnety, that withont anaCDioe^ In yonr tackle, ynn will lose two bites out of three. Keep the top of yonr rod over tbe flaal, and whan yoa aee the lean moiement of it, Krike qoiokly. bnt ll|^tly, from yonr wriat, not from tbe arm ; if yoa book yoar Oah. keep him aa Dmch oDdor tba top of yonr rod as 70a ean, and b; plvi»> bim caralttDT he will aoon ba joor own t when SaUng Sir Boa^
ANQLINO. 271
it k bMfc to takia a landing-net with yoo. Paste made of white bread, two days old, ■lighUj dipped in water, which mnat be immediately sqoeeaed out again, ia the best bait for Boaoh, nearly all the year ronnd ; when aqneeied, knead it with the thumb and finger of your right hand, in your other pahn, tm of a proper oonaietence, and put a piece on the hook, about the eiie of a pea. Qentleemi^ aleo be uaed in the summer ; and blood, or red worms, and greayes, in the spring and autumn. Plumb the depth, and let your bait gently touch the bottom ; before you begin, and while angling, cast gTOund-bait in frequently, such as is used for Chub and Barbel fishing, dose to the floaL Chewed bread is also rery good for this purpose. Use a light rod, a thin line, and No. 10 or 11 hook.
Boach are found in riyers, on the shallowB, in eddies, and in deep holes ; also ab jut bridges, piles, and locks ; in ponds, near flood*gates, and where the bottom is sandy. Tb^ bite only during the summer months in ponds, but all the year in rirers. They will take a bait all day in mild cloudy weather ; when it is very hot, mornings and erenings are the best times to angle for them ; if it be cold, the only chance the Angler has of taking them is by fishing in the middle of the day.
Dacs afford the Angler much sport, as they generally bite boldly. Angle for them with the same sort of tackle, and in the same way, as for Boach, not forgetting your ground-bait ; which, for Dace, you may make ci bran and clay only. They are likely to take your bait, when angling for Barbel with gieayea and red-worms. Use a hook one sise larger than for Boach ; bait with a red-worm in spring ; in summer, use two gentles, or a small piece of gzeayes and a gentle on the point of the hook. Tou may begin to fish for them in March, and they will bite untQ October, but not after, unless the weather be rery mild.
The haunts of the Daoe are, for the most part, similar to those of the Boach ; but they may more frequently be found in
the stronger parts of the stream, among ^.^^KK^^^^^^^-
weeds, etc. In the warm summer months, if the water be clear, ahoaU of them may be often seen beskicg in the shallows. Whipping for Dace, with a small artificial fiy, of a dun colour, is Tery good initiatory practice for those who would become expert fiy-fishers.
Tua Gtmeioir, of which there are numbers in the Thames and Lea, bites well, and may be taken all the day, from April to October. The Gudgeon frequents gentle
streams which have gravelly or sandy bot- toms. They Boek shallows about the latter end of spring, and remain among them during the summer ; in autumn, they delight in deeper water, with a muddy bottom. In the Thamee, fish for them with a red-worm, a gentle, or a blood-worm, gat or hair line, light cork fioat, and No. 9 or 10 hook. In the Lea or New Biyer, you may use finer tackle, and bait with blood-worms. Strike
*n AHOUNQ.
luMaatlr, whm jen penttn ■ blto, ud lUh u lh« bottom of tb» mMr on (halloin whish ■» fns hum mada. Stir the bottom froqiusElj nitti > nk» or polo, while SahlnfT. In ordsr to work gp tlw wild kod gnrel, so u to dltookmr UkS mtaT. wUoh will BtincC ihno In ootuUcnible nnmben, putleoltrl; if yon Uirgw In ■ hw broksn TTomu ocOHioiwUf . Eiospt in ths cool daja or katnmn, and ibont the IMMr aid of April, ilien an hw fiih thnt bits more Ikeely u > proper bait Ihsn ■ Oodgeon.
TMiCEDiiim bold biter, either U the bottom or topoTibentar. Where yon ban reeeon to expect ■bM*7C»>'>i see numlng uokls. gut lioa, qnill floU, nnd hook No. B or 9. Btrihe the raoDieDt 70a pertelre ■ bite, ud let him mn ; gin plen^ of lias, otbenriee jDar lleh irill break aver. Soon T hii flnt mn, and a ftw piongee, yoa may bring him to (ha shon or landing-net. ^ The t«ile for Cbnb, In spring, an gantlia, i, iqd'wonni, bidloGk'B bralna, or a nnow; inanmrner. g(Dtleaandgr«tTas; in vinler (Rir Ihsy m«f be taken an ths year mnnd). bulleck's teiUns. pith trom the backbone, or a bit oT old Ctaeahir* cfaseea. Throw In pleotr ef gronnd-bait, oT soaked bread, pollard, and bnn, worked together, before yon begin, and oltan while angling. Chub bite beet tn ths morning and ersnlng. Fiih near the middle of ths absam, in the ipriog month*, and let the baU drag two or three inchM on Che ground ; in Ibe aatama, Chnb lie close in dark shaded holsa, and onder bank*.
Blui tni Untirow. — In the Thames Lea, and the New Birsr nnmben of Bleak and MlDbow an fbnnd. Blnk an Hsily taken with paste or gsntles at mid water or at the ijottom. Angle (Or them with a light rod, Blcgle hair line email qnill Boat, thrae or (bur No. It or 13 hooke, and belt
with a (law gentles ; or nee three or ^
Ibnr dUthreut baila, anch ss a blood ..^ / ^-iai. ». ~i.
worm, a genlls, a oaddis. a common ::^^^^^ ^
hones'Ry, era bit of red paste. Bait
(or lllnnows with a Uood-worm, a
■mall piece of nd-worm. gentlsa, or
paste ; nse light tackle, and a No 13
book. Strike aa soon as yon IM a —
bite. OccaslonBlly thnw In a few graina. or a little chswBd bread, to keep them
abonC your baita. Yon may take both thaae t^th, from April tlU October, at any time
0( ths day.
Eiu aie taken with the rod and iins, night lines, dead lines, and by bobbing (or BDindllng). Whan fiahing with a rod, nie gut or twisted hair lines, with a Boat, am) No. 8 hook ; bait with a wonn, tah at the bottom, and let the Boat remain a moment nader water befon yon strike. Tlis dead line should be made oCwhip-oonl i on which yon may pat Bre or six hooks, about nlnsinohss apart. Ths night line most be SMmg. ■od baited with smaU Bah or lob-woms. Bobbioc (or laiEBUng] is practised rmm a boat 1
ft n* fnehag,
• tnle ; ba h aipen and rtaadj In niiing yonr Itn* u poaiible, ■» that jonr flih ma; dnp off into Ibe boat. ImnaiM niunben maj be laken by thia mMhod.
BuiH. — Thii Toy bony flah Bbmuidi in Uia manjr iCngli^h (traaBU, Tlig; are BTwilhaTBd-w
le and Jnly t and. In gmAtml, with
Dm a mall
, and (inill float.
374
ANGLING.
N\
mnoh reaemble the Salmon fry, and aie to be angled for in streama with sandy or atony bottoms. They haunt the sides of swift streams in May. bat are considered to be in season in September, October, and November only. When strack, th^ must be handled rather gently, as their mouths are Tety tender, and if you treat them roughly,
s^^i,^^^ the hook will break away from its
'^-- -"* - hold. Use a light rod, a cork float,
a line hook, and a running line. The Mir best time to fish for them is in spring or autumn, ftt>m seven till eleven or twelve in the morning, and from four or five until sunset in the afternoon .- on a cool cloudy day in summer they will bite all day. The best bait for them is a worm or a gentle, or, in the sommer, a grasshopper.
Jack, OS PixB. — ^Trolling for Jack (or Pike) affords great sport and excellent exercise. Roach, Dace, Gudgeon, small Trout, Bleak, Minnows, and Chub are the natural baits for this fish ; artificial baits should never be used while there is a possibility of getting natural ones ; when they are used,
it must be with the snap. Baits of about ^^ -^j^^k^-STtT
four or five inches in length will be fbund to be the best size, the Jack (or Pike) being sometimes shy of pouching a larger bait. You may also take a Trout or Chub ■«- i^»-» y::--
with small bait, when trolling for Jack (or Pike), particularly if you happen to have a Uve Gudgeon on your hook. At the shops of the fishing-tackle makers, artificial baits of fish and f^gs may be purchased, made of wood, pearl, and also of leather, stuffed and painted for trolling. These sort of baits are very convenient for use on occasions when natural baits cannot be easily procured. Trolling lines are made of silk, and silk twisted with hair or gut ; plaited silk is the
best ; flrom thirty to forty yards, at least, should be kept on the winch. The rod must be very strong, with a stiff whalebone or good hickory top. The following are the methods generally used for trolling : namely, with the gorge, the snap, the live bait, and the head-hook. The gorge-hook is introduced into the body of the bait, loaded on the shank with lead ; the snap-hook consists of three hooks fastcued together, and put on the bait without entering the body ; the hooks used for live bait are single or double. To bait the gorge-hook, take a bait- ing needle, hook the curved end of it to the loop of the _^_^ .««^^ ^^ gimp (to which the hook is tied), then introduce the "^V Tl \ > i ^
point of the nesdle into the bait's mouth, and bring it out at the tail ; the lead will then be hid in the bait's belly, and the points and barbs lie in its mouth, the points turning upward ; to keep the bait steady on the hook, tie
7. —'»•■•»■ \
ANGUNa 875
ftli6 tail part to the gimp with Bome white thread. It ia to be obaenred thai the Jaek (or Pike) always swaUowa the bait head foremost. The snap-hook is baited by intit)- dncing the point of the upper or small hook, nndar the skin of the bait, on the side, and bringing it ap to the back of the fin. Another snap is baited by the loop of the gimp being passed inside the gill of the bait, and bronght oat at the month ; the lead lies in the throat, the first hook ootside the gill, and the others on its side, with the points just entered under the sUn ; this bait's month should be sewed np to keep the lead and hooks in their places. A live bait should have a
No. 3 or 4 hook passed through its lips, or the flesh beneath the back fin, taking care not to wound the back-bone. The bead-hook is formed of two single hooks tied back to back, or nutde of one piece of wire tied to gimp, with a piece of lead of a conical form linked to it ; the lead is put into the live bait's mouth, which is afterwards sewed up for the purpose above mentioned.
Jack (or Pike) will feed all day ; they bite most freely during a breeze of wind. When you use live baits, take at least six in your kettle, and give them fresh water occasionally ; if you use the gorge-hook, bait three hooks before you begin, and keep them in bran, in a gentle-box large enough for the baits to lie at their length, and take care that yoor baits are treah and Uyely.
The trolling season continues from July to the end of Febroaiy. The most likely places to find fish are near the end of scowers, in deep eddies, tumbling bays, deep still water in a river, and near beds of weeds at the mouths of ditches or streams that empty themselyes into rivers or ponds; near flood-gates, and bulrushes, in Iskes, canals, etc. When the weather is boisterous and cold, you may take Jack while other fish refuse OTcry enticement. When the water is somewhi^ thick, troll close in shore ; for, at such times. Jack, as well as other fish, are found near the sides. When the rivers and other waters are much choked with weeds in the summer, you may some- times find a Jack lie dozing near the sur&ce in an opening ; in this case drop a baited snap-hook, let it sink a few inches, and it is very probable he will take it ; you most strike, and lift the fish out instantly, or you lose both Jack and hook among the weeds ; your tackle must, therefore, be strong.
We shall now suppose the young angler at the riw-slde with a gorge-hook baited. First, let him fasten the winch to the butt of the rod, draw the line through the rings to the length of eight or ten yards, and fasten the hook on the line with a small swivel ; place the bottom of the butt against the side of his stomach, if the water be broad, but hold it in his right hand if narrow ; draw some of the line back with his left hand, and lower the top of the rod near the ground, then, with a jerk from his right arm, cast the bait into the water. By a little practice he may be able to cast his bait any distance. Let the bait fUl as lightly as you can ; when sent to the bottom, gradually raise it to the surAMe, and so continue to troll till you perceive a bite ; keep the line free, that
It wind np tba (bok line uid ■BOv. If tluv* be any ttrj
mighlng him ool ■■ tcaa u poailbls.
WlieD BihiiiK wtlh two IniU, pat k baml-aluped eork flokt on your Udb. uid > tow ■wmn ihot to iliik it tLms part* nndar waMr ; cvt your bait in the iBniB w^ u wtth dig Borga-hDok g the bait ahonld awim tatbar below mid-water, and let It ooatlnne ta •OTDe minntea. Tbe Bab takea lire bait with mneb Tlaleuoe, and tbe Boat dliqipean inauuitty ; ihanfoiti be tan alwaj* o keep your wtDoh nnkieked and Una tn» i gtn him Mn -■'""'■t la ponoh, or awallow the batt, and then iDika. In flihing with a majh book (eftber Ih* aprin^ or plain), 70a caat in aeanh eianljatwith the gorge j but whan fon Iteel a bile, atnke qnicU; and baid, that ;onr hook ma; get a Oim hold.
In trolling with tba bead-hook, caat in the bait aa before dimud ; tfas lead in its month will CHiae it to aink gndnallf , bat will n
water where yon are Ukel; lo allow him alwnt ten minolei' bot wind np four Una by dag
It la a temii place, taking caie to Bah eveiT yard of d a Pike. When yon fMl a bite, let the llih mn, and la tbr ponohlng. Ton mut Dot poll Umtaa rooghty, I, nntil ha ia ai
riv-risiiinra. S^
Foa NaCora] Fly-flahing, Iba rods ahonld be long and alandar, tl» Unea One, bnt not ao long aa tboae naed (tar AiUfioial Fly-flihing, tbt tacUa mnning, and the booki abort In their ahanka, and well proponlonad to aiie to the baila. By flablng with tlte wind at one*! back, the line ia waflad Ihroogb the air jnat abore the au&oe of the watav Id
AKOIJKO. 177
fltnaina, begin hj ilflhlng Jnat nnilBr the banks or near the diore, and proceed bj degreee, until aft length yon may throw yoor line the whole breadth of the water. In riTere which, dnring the ■ununer montJie, prodooe an abimdance of weedi, joa ihoold fleh between thoee plaoea where the current ie atrongeetk taking care eo to manage your line aa not to get it entangled. When flahing with a nataral fly, let it jnat reach theenrlkceof the water, and go gently down the etream I thetopof yoor rodahonldbe a little raJeed, and the bait kept in motion upon the enrflMe, by gently raising, lower- ing, and drawing it to and tto. When a fish takes yonr bait, after a moment strike smartly; and, if he be not so large aa to break yoor tackle, lift him oat immediately ; for by playing with him yon may, jnrobably, scare away others.
Hornets, wasps, and hnmble-bees, are good baits IbrBoaoh, Dace, Eels, Flounders, Bream, and Chub ) some boil them, but it is best to dry them in an oven, or over a fire ; and, if not overdone, they will keep a long time. The stone-fly is fonnd at the sides of rivers, nnder hollow stones ; it is of a cnrions brown colour, the body is pretty thick, and streaked with yellow on the back and belly.
The green drake is taken flnom May to July ; it is a long, slender fly, with wings like those of a butterfly i its body is yellow, ribbed with green; it turns its tail on its back. These are good baits for Boach, Dace, Perch, Bleak, and Flounders. The grey drake, in eise and shape, resembles the green drake, but has black shining wings, and its body is a pale yellow, striped with black and green. The time for taking this fly immediately succeeds that of taking the green drake, and it is used for the same lish.
Ant-flies are found in their hills from June till September ; two or three of them fixed on a small hook are certain baits fbr Boach, Dace, and Chub, if you do not angle above six inchee i^om the bottom. Theymay be kept in glass bottles, with some of the earth ttom which thoy have been taken above them. The fern-fly, or fern-bob, is found among fern, from May to the end of August. It has a short, thick body, and two pair of wings, the uppermost reddiah and hard, which may be taken off. The Chub never reftiaes it, and the Ttout will take it very freely at the latter end of May.
The hawthom-fly is fonnd on hawthorn trees, when the leaves are just shooting; it is of a black colour, and is used to dib in a river for Trout.
The great moth is to be found, in the summer evenings, in gardens, trees, or plants ; is used aa a bait in dibbing fbr Boach ; it has a very large head and whitish wings.
The bonnet-fly is an eatcellant bait for Dace, Chub, etc. ; it is to be found, in the snmTner mouths, among ■tsnrting grass.
▲BTxnczAi rLT-nsHore. Artifldal Fly-flahing is, t^ fttr, the most difiicult part of angling; time, patience, and practice are required to make the ^yro an adept in it ; by theory it can never be attained; a few days' instxuotion, under an experienced person, will be more beneficial
178 AltOUHS.
kiwmjd ita acqairamimt tiiftn tJM pniuBl of a^ th« work* ertiat on tlu> vabject. Wltli
tbfl pnliminuy port*, or mdiiiuiitA of UiB ■dimae (for wo H m^ wlUi proprio^ b«
oalled), ttie yomiK kogler nmy, hoirevcr, D»ka hinaclf aeqiuliitfld, I17 reading (ha
[oUairiDs paffc" ; and IT ha
■fter gireo on ihs gal^eot, ha nut;, wltli good pnetlce, SToa M
pToBotener In ArtlBolal FU-S>liiiig ; bnt it oaonot be iMmad ao aooD, or aa mil, from
any book at trom an eipoiiaziced Imtroclor.
AlOiongh wo ettongly recommend our yonng frienda to pnrohaae their flies (u well aa their rada, llDee, etc.) u the flahing-tackle ahops. where they may be had in greaUr perfection, and at a much eheaper me, than an iDdiridual can poetibly make Ihem 1 yet, aa goine of onr leader* may feel an inclination to siarciia their in gennity by making them, we think it right to give them gnffloient iuitnictioiii on Ihia heed lo enable them, BJt«r a little experience, to imitatfl almoatanyof the iiumerDua fiiea In nae, or erenincli nauiraJ flinaa tlkey may diaoover near t^e watera where they are in the habit of Aahing. Notice what eort oT Slee an taken by the Bab, aa yationg fiiea aie in aeaum in aome placea earUer than in othera.
The following articlea will he neonaiary tor maUng yoor anidclal Ole* : — Bear'* and cainor* hair of diffbrent colour* ; badger'* aod aptnial'a hair ; aheep'* wool -. hog'a down, aa oombed from the roota and brlnlea of a hog i camMa and mohair* of diBbrast colnim ; cow'a hair, young oalve*' and oolt'a hair ; tnr from th« tail* of aqnlneU, black, yellow, and dnn cat* ; the for of han'a neck ; the ftorn-eolonred ftarret** for t martin'* yellow fur \ CaJl* of while weaaela, molea, and black rabhite : dawn of a foi'a trab; far that eomea olT (he oiur and oUsr onbi blacklah and brown badger'a hair that haa Iain in a akJnner'* lime pit ; haoklea trom a 000k'* neck, and moh aa hang loosely on each aide of the (ail, of variona eolonra ; tSallien of all aorta of fOwla 1 and Ihoae which oasnot be got of the required oolonr* in a naRual state yoa muat get dyed. Fint wet yonr matsriala. In order to know how they wHl hold their eolonr — oolonr holng oftea of greater importance than abapa and nie 1 Ibr althongh. when ^, . dry, they may appear of the right oolonr,
yet they may alter when welted : take the hook in your left hand, betwiit yonr fore- flnger avd tfanmb, the shank back upward, and a stnmg alllc of that oolonr the fly rvqnirea, which draw to the head of the ■hank, and whip about the ban hook two or three timea; draw yonr Une bat««ai your Bnger and (hnmb. hold the hook ao Aut (hat It may only hare a apace to paa* bj \ then joining the hook and line, put on the wings, and faahion the body and head by twtating the grease called dnbbing OB your wsied ailk and lapping it on 1 wait by degnea toward the head, and part
ANGLma. 279
the wings of an even length, or the fly will not ewim npright; then torn it into • proper shape by nipping off the saperflnotia ends, and ftsten the fly to your hook* Having proportioned the fly, yon are to oonidder the size of the flah yon intend it for, and be sure the belly is of the exact oolonr, because that will be the most obvions to the fish.
The TpmmMlrStfiy or plain hackle, mnst have a rongh blaok body, whioh may be made with black spaniel's hair, or the whirl of an ostrich feather, and the red hackle of a cock. The prince dun most be made of the down of a fox cnb, with aah-colonred silk, and the feathers of a starling's wing. — Thegreen4aUfly may be mAde of the brown haii of a spaniel, taken from the outside of the ear, and a little from the extremity of ths taiL — The thom-tree Jly is to be made with a good black, mixed with a little Isabella* oolonrsd mohair ; it mnst have a small body, and the wings made of a wild duck's brightest feathers. — The early bright brown fliy is made of the hair of a brown spaniel, that of the flank of a red cow, and winged with the grey feather of a wild dack. If yon think proper to try yonr fortone at Fly-fishing in February or March, the first two flies are the best for the former month, and the others for the latter. The season for Artificial Fly-fishing cannot, however, be said to commence before April. Some anglers fish with a fly in winter, bnt little sport is to be had, except wit|i Grayling, unless the weather be onnsually mild before April or mnch later than Michaelmas.
The vidlet-ftif is made of bear's hair of a light dnn colour, mixed with violet staff, and winged with the grey feather of a wild duck. — The hora^fleth-Jly is dubbed witli pink colours, blue mohair, and tammy ; the head to be of a dark brown, and the wings of a light colour. — The email bright brown fly, particularly calculated for a clear day and water, is to be made of spaniel's ftir, with a light grey wing. These flies are used in ApriL
The green drake is to be dubbed on a large hook, with camel's hair, bright bear's hair, soft down combed from the bristles of a hog, mixed with jrellow camlet ; the body to be long, and ribbed with green and yellow silk ; the whisks of the tail made of the long hair of sables, and the wing of the Ught grey feathers of a wild duck dyed yellow. — The eUme-jig to be made of a dun bear's hair, mixed with a little brown and jrellow camlet, more yellow on the belly and tail than any other part ; place two or three hairs of the beard of a black cat on the top of the hook, in the whipping or arming, and in warping on your dubbing rib the body with yellow silk, and make the wings long and large, of the dark grey fiaathers of a mallard. — The grey drak^t body must be black, Irith black shining wings, very thin, and made of the feathers of the male wild duck or mallard, the down under a hog's bristles, the black hair of a spaniel, and the beard of a black cat. These flies are flt for May.
The ant-fly is dubbed with brown and red camlet, and the wings made of the feathers of a light grey pigeon. — The purple-fly, made with purple wood, mixed with light brown bear's hair, and dubbed with purple silk. These may be used in June and in July.
The orange-fly, which is made with orange>eo1oured crewel or wool, and the floather of a blackbird's wing ; <ft« vfaep-fly, made with brown dubbing, or with the hair of a black cat's tail, ribbed with yellow Bi^k, and the wings formed of the grey feathers of a
280 ANOLINa.
wild duck's win^ ; and tha hkis dtm, nutde with Um down of a WAter-monae and the bluish down fbiind on an old foz» mixed well together, and dnbbed with ash-oolonred sUk — the Ibathers of a starling's qoiU will ftxmiah yon with wings. The fbregolnir are fit for Jaly.
For August, the following are rather popular : — Ths late a$U-^t formed cit hair of a blackish brown, with some red in the tail, and the wings made of a dark feather ; the fem-Jtpt which is dubbed with the wool taken flram a hare's neck, being of the colour of fern, when dry, and the wings made of the darkish grey leather of a wild duck ; and the hearth-Jly, which is to be made of the wool of an aged ewe, mixed with some grqy hair, and dubbed with black silk — the light feathers of a starling are proper for the wings. — The Uttle blue dun, made of the ftir of a water-mouse, dubbed with ash- ooloured silk, and winged with the feather of a blue pigeon. ITie late badger is to be formed with black badger's hair, whipped with red silk, and winged with a darkish grej wild duck's feather. To make the eamel broom-Jfy, pull out, for the body, the hair in the mortar of old walls, and whip it with red silk — ^make the wings of a starling's lightest feather. The last three flies are used in September.
CASinrft THS un, no. Tour rod for fly-flshing must be light and flexible, and of a length propoxtioned to your power of casting ; when you have properly flxed the winch, and broug^ht your line firom it through the links, fix your fly on, and let out your line about the length of the rod, or something leas ; take the rod in your right hand and the fly in your left, holding it by the bend between your thumb and finger, with the point outwards. By observing this precaution you will avoid hooking yonradt When you move the rod backward to cast the Une, let the latter go from your left hand. Practise several throws at this length, and increase it oooasionally as you improve, until you are able to throw almost any moderate length with ease to within an inch of any spot you desire. Draw the fly lightly toward the shore, and look sharply at it, so as to be able to strike instantly, but not violently, if a fish should rise at it ; if you do not, yon will moat probably lose him, for he quickly discovers the nature of your bait. In zaising your Une for the second and subsequent throws, wave your rod round your head instead of bringing it directly backward. Ton should not return the line before it has gone its ftall length behind you, lest you whip off your fly. In order to showyonr flies naturally to the fish when you have thrown, raise your hand by degrees with a slight quivering motion ; and, as you thus draw the bait toward you, let it go down the stream (for you must never bring your fly against it), and before it comes too near you, prepare to oast again. If yon see a fish rise at a natural fly, throw your line a UtUe above him, so that the bait may come gently and naturally down towards him. Fish every yard of water likely to afford sport, and never despair of success ; for sometimes it so happens that after many fruitless hours spent without a flsh ever rising at your fly, you will fill your bag or basket during the last hour. The lighter your fly descends on the water the greater chance you have of a rise. The way to throw with the requisite perfection in this respect is only to be acquired by practice and love for the art Use only one
ANGLINa. 281
book at a tiinOt tQl yen. ean throw to any giyen dintanee with preoiaioii. Toa maj aoqnire soch a mastaty, t^ dint of obaervation and practioo, aa to be able to oaaft jonr fly under banks, Into holea, among biuhea, etc., where the best fish are flmjiWDtly Iband. Always fix your eye on the spot to which yon are thh>wing, and you will soaioely fUl, after a time, to cast yoor fly in the right place. The chief difficulty is to measore yonr length of line ; but a little experience will enable yon to calculate this properly. Endeavour to keep the wind at your baek, and when fishing in a small stream, where the middle is shallow, and the water ripplea, cast yonr bait to the oppo- site side, slowly draw it to the rippling, and let it float down some distance. You must recollect to keep yourself out of sight and your fly in motion, but not sufltoiently so as to ruffle the surftoe of the water, unless in a strong ripple, when the fly may eren be drawn against the stMam, that it may appear to the flsh as if alive. Bear in mind that the coarsest fishing, when yon are out of sight, may be more successftU than the finest when you are seen by the Trout. If you do not find the fish rise toward the top, sink your fly, by degrees, even to middle water.
If the wind be pret^ high, the fish wiU rise in the plain deep ; but when little wind is stirring, it is best to angle in the stream. We need scarcely remind you of the propriety of taking yoor basket, landing-net, book d flies, and, if you are able to eonstmct an artiflcial fly yourself, a few materials for fly-making ; so that if the flsh, which are often whimsical, wiU not take any of the baits with which you are provided, and you observe them rising at natural flies (and th^y will sometimes &ed on such insigniflcant ones as at other times they will scarcely look at), catch one of such flies, and make one fbr your bait as nearly like it as possible.
aX]nXA.& BUXiXS vox iXL AXGLXSS.
In bottom-fishing, plumb the depth truly and with as little disturbance as may be ; let your line, with the plummet to it, remain in the water while you cast in the gnnmd- bait, by which time the Une will be softened and stretched; keep as fkr from the water as you can. This, however, is often impossible, and, indeed, is not so imperative when the water is veiy deep. Use fine tackle, and you will the sooner become skilftil ; if yon break your tackle do not lose your temper, but sit down and diligently repair it. If hail (Ul, or the day be cold and the wind blow strong, the angler must not expect much sport. In soft rain, or foggy, close weather, most fish will bite. Never drink water out of rivers or ponds while in a perspiration ; keq> your llMt dry by wearing strong boots and shoes. It is supposed that the best winds for Angling are the south, west, and south-east. In hot weather, the cooler the wind blows the better ; but in the early part of the sesson, and also in antnniTi, a vrarm wind is more advantageous. When the wind comes from a cold quarter, such places as are most protected from its influence should be resorted to. Aclondy day with light showers, after a bright night, in general proves most fkvoorable to the angler, who may also expect good sport even on those days when heavy rains descend during the intervals between the showers. Wlien a calm bright morning is sooceeded by a gloomy day with a brisk wind, without any JMl of rain, the fish at least the larger sorts— are almost sure to feed. Weather-
m AHQUKa.
iHidDm i<of llie grealartbaDafltlotha aagler. When Iba wind bkm right acnat th«
vnler, AahwtthTonr back towvdait; not mavlfbecfttue jaaoan Umnryoor line with more (bolUtjp but beoanie th« flAh will certAii^ be rm titrnt Hide, watohiiig for Uie flieft, eU).. Out ma; be blown from the benk Into Hie wUer. Throw m anu- tbs buik on which fon Kasd n the wind. U it be high, will mffbr 700. In the nunmsr tima, when the mn ii oat in all his aplandonr, wid there ii ■cercelj e brsMh oT wind cdning, joa may often see the flih buktng in clear low water, with their Sni and a part of their backe above Uie enrlhce. On thcae oocaalona the? will rlae greedily at a hackle, if yoor foot leogth be flue, and yon fleh at a anfflcient digtanoe u be nnperoeiTed, nnder banks, or itivigbt down the sldea of Btreanu. Tonr line, for this pnrpoBe, man be long i sod if, when yon hook a flsb. (ha otlien should beooma alarmad, and shoot off, ntira for a short time, and In all probability thf^- will retam | if not, jon moil 07 elaawhera. SeTupnlons]? aToid all p{flcat0T7 poaahing. Before yon Osh in scnuiga waten ascertain tliot they aie free to the public i sod If not, by no means ventoie to east yonr line over them without first obtaining permissloD to do so tma the proprietors. Uoleat none ' whom yon may find in pieviona poesesBion of a spot whicb fon hsd iHlencIed to be the scene of yonr own reci«atiDQ ; bst, on Iha oontraij, ba dvil and obliging to ell those whom yon may meet on yonr excnnLoni. intent npon ei^oyln^ the eama iport ea jroorseir. tf two or mon penou angle in company, there shoold be a distance of thirty yaida, at least, between eseh. Uany pre&r aoUCade when ai^oyiiis this sport, and alwqi flsb aloDe, like Uiat Datoral Angler,
^ HK «ei|Ult«tu»iit of [}» hudIt art of Birtrnming can Maroetr 1m
IT aoocimpUihmRit ; Kir Uia d«li« oT
\g able to nTS your own llfB, or tlw life oT uother, on occk-
*t oo^ht to bo B Boffloiont moHTO to
'iDUsartlDnininMri no ono, Indsod.
bw > right, hj hi* own mwanllM, >1oUi, ot wmnt of enerfi;, to
> bnrdsn on noh ocouioni (o uoUiBr, toA too often be
luu of drowning botii.
It aura 1« ■ country haTlng the aotmn fbr its frontiBr, and that Ibe interior ebonnd* In rlren, brooke, lakes, and anUkdal canala, it may aum ■orprlaing that aneb s propntionaldy amall number of Ita li uigbt bare been mnoh mortt natnraJlj inftanwl. Hat e felt almaat u mnob et taM Id the water ai on dry gronod. Tbi npaeUing of the
B4 BWnnGNG.
alsndar boats of the natlYM of the South BeM, ia to them a antdeet of mflRfanent; thi^ Bwim about, take hold of the light vetael, right her again, and paddle away, never conaidering they hare been in may danger.
Eveiy other animal naea the same motion in walking or rmming aa that neoeaaary for ita progreea in awimming ; but man haa, in the watar, to make nae of action which on the land he ia unable even to praetiae aa an exeroiae. Thia dii&cal^, combined with the muYeraal eflbot of aa inmieraion on the breathing of thoee Tmnaed to it (allowing amply for all Taiie^ of endowment in what ia called preaenoe of mind), renders some previous fluniliarity with the water indispensable before any effbrts of the learner can be eflbctnally directed to his own support. Instanoea adduced of individuals swimming at their first attempt require much stronger testimony than we have ever found to accompany the assertion. There is, we ikre aware, a very conaida^ able difibrence in the time required by learners to obtain confidence in the water, arising more from mental than from physical variety in their organisation ; for we have known fine, ay, strong and daring awimmers, who used crutches when they walked ; their lameness but adding aest to their exgoyment, while, curved to the bending of the wave, they found repoee and ease where thousands of strong feUowa would have finmd nothing but death.
It has been sometimea said that swinotiing is haaardoua to persons of weak con- stitutions; but the evidence of medical men goes quite the other way ; and they agree that the exercise ia healthfiil in all cases in which actoal'diseaae does not exist ; and that even then it may prove highly beneficial when properly directed. Bathing, as well as eating and drinking, may doubtleas be indulged in to excess, and the directiona we now give cannot fhil to be useftil to all bathers.
Never bathe on a ftill stomach. Always wet the head before or immediately after entering the water, immersing it from time to tame while you remain in ; walk briskly to the place of bathing, undreaa, and plunge in immediately, particularly if during the colder months. Do not remain in till chilled, the time allowable varies very much with different constitutions — ^half-an-hour in the water may be considered an average in mild weather, when yon bathe fluently ; we have observed dark complexions to be the moet susceptible of inconvenience from cold. Never attempt a long swim, or. izideed, swim at all in deep water, till yon are master of various modes ; depth to the shoulder is sufficient for the ex^oyment of every manner of swimming but treading water; accustom yourself not to touch the bottom till you are coming out All the modea on the back maj be accomplished in from thirty-six to twelve inches of water. Nearly eveiy caae of drowning while bathing arises from the yet feeble swimmer taaking his powers to their utmost stretch, while he is unable to obtain relief from a change of position. It is then that a strain of the muaclea prodncea cramp, and he who was iktigued before becomes at once the powerless victim of a foolish boast Tc persons not already accustomed to the water, we advise beginning in the months of Hay, June, July, or August, when they o»7 oontinne tUl very late in the season, diminishing the duration of their bath with the inareasing ooldnesa, untU it becomes a plunge and no more.
PBACnCU. INSTBII(7nON8.
Ws will now (appon oiu of our Tonog friendi br the aids of k ■Bvain, (0 Mka hii Ilimt leuon in the art of iwlniiaing. If h* haTa usy IHend en with him, who la U osoa eompsUaC und willing (a giTe him U hawilldowall tofDDowlhem: uBuunpKin thla udumila than pnorpt. Bat IT he ihoald not be so fortmuMe, ba DUf Iblloir (ha ii wbioh w« an aliont to giTs fclrn on tha mttjaet.
awimmar allTa tottered, atep by aup, into the water, and aonnded the depth with on* fbot belbn ha lilted tha other Ihmi Uia bottom of the nream. Leander hlmaelf — with ■rhcoe hlMoiy and lUa, Uioaa of our rsaden who are loleiafal; advanoed tn the claaloi nn. donbtleaa, aoiiialiited — wbo, in (ha days of " boar antlqni^," ao oRen awuo acrou Ihe Selleapoot, ooca paddled to B poad -, and thow who, under our direetiona, make their flnt attempt to hooj thenualTCfl np by their own natural powera. In a shallow brook, may, hereafter, become loA^ ewimman enongb to perform Laamler'a feat, of wUch Lord Byron wna eo proud- We Teoonunend our young friend to bt patipot, SB wel^ aa paraererlng, daring hia probation in tiia art of ewinuning. He mnst not feel diagnaled and diaheanened, because he leems to make compantirely bnt little progreaa i let him remember that ba ia gradnall; acqniiing a new and moat important powor i ha la, by
Preriooaly to entering tha water, the bead and neck ahonld be well wetted ; the pupil shoald then advance, by a clou- shelving bank, in aome atreani tlie depth of whliA he baa aaoeitained. until he la breait high ; then let him fkce abont toward tha bank, and pnpare to make hie fint eai^ In ibia ait, as directed In the n«it paragnph.
Witli tha Due tomad townrdi tbe twok, at above directed, IK the papQ pnaa hit
bnoot gently on Lha witer, with hu hsad thrown buk, rflMin^ , ia It wan, hia chuk on
tba anrtaoa i bit two handa joined, either palm to palm, or with the baoka apwixda,
thumb to thumb ; tbe flngera and thmnba of eash hand closed light togethar. Iiet, Imn
Uian apring forward from
the ground, at tbe aame
.,j, tiraethnuUnghiaarmabe-
. ~ ' - fore hia lo tbtir giealeat
|
plated, 1 |
be mnn |
i tnm hia |
|
pahnao |
ntwarda, with the |
|
|
Chnmba |
below. |
|
|
hand a |
little |
(Fig. 1), preaaing Uia water In an obUqae direc- tion, backwarda and dowu- warda, (he anna atiU ex- tended, till tbey hava ds- ecribed an are of nias^ The apring obtained from tta motjon nndKblm for a&vah alait^ n
and placed in the flrat poaitionfPig I) The papd muBt notice that, to perform thia irell, the body muat ap- proach nearly Co a
peas thraogh ; the arms m end of the ■troke. taUna c aideaj tha time tot drawl
le brooabt well back, giving their greatest eflbrt at bo preaerre t^e balance by equaliiiixg ita force on 1 ip tbe lega la when tha haoda an pnahini* back
BWnOCEKa. 287
iraser, and the hands ahoold be thnufe forward at the moment when the lege are Btnick ont behind.
Many anppoee the motion of the axma is neoeesaiy for supporting the head ont of the water, and oonaeqnently, that there shonld be, at each stroke, a pmanre down* wards for that purpose. This is a mistake ; the impetus arising flrom the forward motion is enough, all force obtained in a horisontal direction subtracting finom gravity : any presoare downwards is, therefore, a loss of power, only tending to produce the Jumping motion so disagreeable in some swimmers. Let the palms fhoe backwards, like the flat of an car, not too near the surfttce, but at a depth that the swimmer shall have such a grasp of the water as not to pull his hands back but his body forward. The perfection of plain swimming is steady, rapid progress, with little disturbance of the water ; these qualities are to be obtained by keeping the backward stroke pretty deep beneath the surface.
It is another error that slow motion in the water producee fiist swimming. The reyerse is the case, unless the quick motion is not the correct one, as, for instance, if the hands performed the whole stroke near the surface ; when the resistance is felt to be slight, then a vety quick motion, making much noise and splutter, might be used without moving the body at all. However, the pupil must begin slowly, for fiut swimming is no more to be learned at the commencement than a fine running hand before pothooks and hangers. There is no greater obstacle to fine swimming, fencing, or any other exercise requiring correct motion, than a nervous temperament, which commences with a quick snapping movement, not to be controlled by the individual himself. Quickness must be looked upon as a consequence of correctness ; let the motion be proper, practice will make it quick ; but if a rapid motion is adopted in the beginning, correctness is scarcely ever the result.
COBXS, BLADDSBS, STC.
The perfection of plain swimming depending upon the precision of certain motions of the limbs, it may be supposed their attainment could be facilitated by the support derivable from corks, bladders, or air-jackets. We have already noticed that a certain fomiliarity with the water must have been arrived at before any advance in swimming can be calculated upon. Ton must have ceased to regard that element as a treacherous foe, and have commenced a familiarity as with a frolicsome friend, who, when respect- frilly cared for, may crack a joke now and then, but means no great harm after all. You most have become in some measure acquainted with the laws by which it is regulated — ^laws never changed, and which you have only to know and to respect, when you may play what tricks you please. To arrive at this footing, uiything that gives a youngster active employment while bathing is of use ; for as he should never be allowed to stand at half his depth, or to loiter in the water, circulation and muscular action may be promoted by any amusement that offers itself. But confidence is no more increased by these means than if he were in a boat ; his mouth and nostrils are never submerged ; he does not learn to husband his breath till the exact moment when he can inspire with freedom ; neither does he acquire the tact of getting rid of an
I TTTTgiMji inaiiilifiil of mtar InuudiMely (tint iwallowi it, or, mDI wont, M* part of U into tlia nmohoB or irlodpfpe)^— quBllfloataoru neoeiiBzy to m&kB % •winunBr, Kid which nuv ** acquired wUlii limning tha Hroka wUhont rappott, but not whils tli*
In kddltlaa to the abora DtgooUoD to oorbt and bidden, wa (Mir that thsj oflhr a dRDfCVons mconiBganaxit for lads to go bejxmd Ihalr dsplh, Wa tuTB fnqaeutJj iMn boji with Iheii besd* oodar wuar, from ths upe or Bring inatihtnn tha oorka togathsr haTlog ilipped dowa toward Die hipa, when tbaj would oartainly hare been drowned nnlBM imiitaTirr had been aObnled Ibem. Bladden ma; bare aoma Obw Ihroog:h whidi the air inaanaibly cecapea while tiiej aje being need j and we lure frequaotlf
A good war to Uaob bora to awin ia fbr aome oldv biend to anpport the ohin or oheatii giving, at the aama timo, oecaalonal Inamolioii and ei then leaTieg them to their
oironmatanoea ia cowardly and omeL
A atui batter method oT inac-netloa le from a boat, with a belt luidsr the ar
BWDOaNO. 289
body ifl thrown on the right side, »nd the right leg kicked hackwaid to its fbll extent. The hand descends through the water till the palm ajiproaches the thigh, which it evades by a slight torn, passing still in a curve through the water to its smrfiMe, which it leaves at arms* length behind. The body having been thrown round by the stroke on to the left side, the left hand enters the water in front, just previous to the appearance of the right above the surface behind. The left leg having been struck out while the left arm passed through the air, each arm describes an oval, of which the shoulder may be presumed the centre. The perfection of this manner of swimming is vigorous, quick motion, with as little disturbance of the water as possible, or it may be executed with a slow graoeftal wave of the hand, as it passes through the air, before descending into the water.
swnamro on ths sins.
When a swimmer finds himself fktigued, there is some relief to be obtained by swimming on the side in the following manner : —Raise the left shoulder ; thrust for- ward the right arm along the surface ; hollow the palm, grasping the water toward your breast* using the left hand alternately with the right ; the thumb downwards, in the manner of an oar, to push back the water towards the feet, striking out at Uie same time with the legs in the common method ; the striking out of the legs always accompanying the stroke with the left hand. There is, as observed above, some relief in this xnDdo of swimming from the mere change it aflbrds ; but we tiiink both this and the previous manner harder work than what is called plain swimming, both being more fiitiguing to the chest or wind from the violence of the action. In all the matches at which we have been present, the prise has been gai^^ed by plain swimming. These, however, are both showy, elegant exercises, and such as a swimmer should perfect himself in as much as iwssible.
BALAVcnro.
Previously to pointing out the veiy many ways of swimming on the back, we win say something of the principle on which all those methods depend — that is, the balance. Let any swimmer, when out of his depth, allow his head to fall gently back, till his fisce looks upward, and all the back part of his head is under water, when he may suspend himself perpendicularly for any length of time, with his arms folded, or in any other attitude he likes best. This position is shown in the cut on next pat^e. Of this Dr. Franklin seems to have been aware, and he rightly assumes that the lungs support the weight of the limbs ; but ho did not know that on the swimmer spreading his arms gradually in the water, extending them righfr and left, he would assume a slanting position, and that when, with his arms at their full stretch, his hands were brought behind his head, bia toes will appear, and he will lie at his ease on the surface for any time, without the slightest motion either of hands or feet, in any water. This manoeuvre is performed by so equalising the weight as to place the lungs nearly central : the head and arms at one end balancing the legs and feet at the other. Thus a swimmer may be considered as a plank or board, perfectly buoyant,
19
tui eapabla ot balni |at>p*ll«d tt
or liBM Ant, u hli own w^mid fluur.
Then i> DOthms more liuurloiu thkn u He Iho* on lt» iwsU of the ua, the pUut
do ifith Mill gmter I
Ion, mud bat
B ouinc« BO oonTmiantly look ftboal hiia. differiog rerj Uttla In bdvaiiu^ trom
■t dBKribsd msthoda. Bnt wta«n n tftka lolo ooiuidgndou the npoae iflbrded
mnicln whan ther Iuts bean tkUgued bf an^ other method, the nlUltf of
0 highly ectimated. Uuiy lime wonld be iatvI
•d wtthamnp, or panow MtddanUU; immersed,
ie qnitU; on IhelT bwki— vhm. If the bodjt be kept elnigbt kod tigld, it ii hn-
" id of etruff^ling Into ma opnght poeilioiL
body fonninl on the nufHce b; oontinued strokee, the hsndi bebig r«i«ad edgewmys, uid pBued gently along the cUea, till they deecend for another itroke. Thia mode of ewirarnlog on the back r*qaim (ha 1«mI exaitioii. nuf be ooutlnnad Ibr a gnu length
whu k before yon, wWich yon are pro- :
Theie 1b sIbo a TsnaUon of thlB me- Ibod , to pmctiee vhtch,
wilhdimwn from the water, and mcetJng each other nboTe the hreaat, Bhoold dc»cr: an are In Iha air, uitU they enter the water below the hipi, when, aner maklD); ti ■Irokea following nndar watar, they ahoold be a^s withdrawn. Thii metbod ^i an Bppeaianre of great eaee and giacefalneu to a BpecIUnr, who will Bappose Umt tb( wa« bnt Doa rtroke In ^e water between each appearance of the h&ndB a^>ove I Burpee. Quietncae and aelf^poaBeaHion ara naoaaHajy for Bncceaa in this mathud.
TUB are both exerted.
Ethodn— Til., that oommnnly called Roatina ai before, bringing 3~our feet to the Bnrf A your aHlea. Bsing Ibe huida la the Ban
BWUtMINa.
Ui^ghtmlng tb< arm Ui« water, and ma; bi
Lsd on your buck withont e bod)-, whUfl iwlmming in the fine dMCribed mathoil), and yoo wUI i«iain part of the iiopetm alrtedj' ftcquiwd. Tlieo Lhrow both huids out of ths water, u fcra« yon can reach.
wi.h to Vro^^. ^cM^^^^I^ enWriog again edge- '^~ '^C'---i'&L^
the ihoolden for a centre. The hands on appearing again on the surftice belov the bipl. ihoald pass immediatelj throngh the air for another
aa it removei tbo atreH entirely olT Ihe mnaclea of [he log. It ni»y lie gracefllUj' Taried by niing the right and left handa altamately.
For tbs pnclles et a Ihlid nwttiod Iba hwidi *od anni ira to b* nand ■■ In tha bn, bat Ui« pnignn Bhonld bs uded by Iha lonr limb* atrtkiiiK out with Tlgcwr, i/Ier ig bson diaim up to Uia bod; by tbe laoke made nith the anu. Tha kick ahould
If qnJetly by your
dda, diaving up your lagi lomid* tba ehoiC h high M poMible, and Hun itriklDS tbam backwards with Tigonr, which will oaua you to maka coniidaiabla progiaaa thiongh Ihs waur without naiug lh« arma at all. Whaa yoa draw up your f»t Uie ■DOTamenl ia Bgainit tha aurtan, whora there is little .naiatauog, bob whan you atrika tbaai onl, the force ■• applied In a downwatd direotion, whan the naiatasca ia gnatasL. Tha Ibr^Diag mathod it umAiI when your amu ara tlnd, or yoa hare ■omething to carry or tow after yoa, tha hand! being parfeody free.
boU
ngildlyth
For a Umg dire, or awim inlar, than la no dlSkranoe li actloD ftom that daaoribad under tha head Plaia Swimming, except thai
Unad upwuda, ai
kick, or rather, both hands and feet an pDabad in aiaetly the oppoaite diieeUoo b> In which yon wiah to go. Bonu adTls* that the hands should always b« bafon . ThIalaniJtnacassaiT, aathebndanar
291 Bwnocma.
stroke goes no terther than the bands had been preparafcory to its oomznenoement» and if there existed any obstmotlon the hands would have fblt it. In this way yoa may swim as fttst nnder water as on the sorftuse. When you find it neoessaiy to return to the suilboe, press the watw with the pahns downwards, and yoa will rise directly.
It is good practice, while teaming to swim in this manner, to immerse the flioe and head in a Teasel of water, white some friend counts one, two, three, etc., in your hearing, always endeayonring to remain longer at each experiment than the one previous. Withdraw the fluse when exhausted, tiUce breath quickly, and dive under again, always entering the water with the lungs and even mouth infloti^H^ m you may at any time get rid of air though you cannot replace it.
Many persons imagine that you cannot open your eyes when under water. Thiis is a mistake. Though the water may make your ^ee smart a little, there is n> difficult in opening and shutting them as often as yoa please either in salt or ires i water. All swimmers should accustom themselves to dive with open «yes, and they will soon get over the slight tingling sensation that ensues.
vax^noiG WATxa, xrc.
To tread water you must allow your feet to drop perpendicularly on the water, and by a nearly similar action to that of stopping up a ladder, your entire head and neck may be supported upright above the surfkoe. The motion te something fktiguing, and cannot be continued long without the assistanoe of the hands, which, by being pushed down backs upwards, and raised again sideways, will support the body with great ease, and for a long period. In this mann«r we have seen a party of swimmers hold very animat^ed conversation with one another. By farffafag tiM body to the right or telt» in treading water, a trifling progress may be obtained.
VASXOnS KA3KBWKIS ZV TBB WACSB.
There are several other mancDuvres to be performed by swimmers, such as trimming the toe>nails, swimming fkoe first, with the two hands r*^<ii«ig behind the small of the back, called ** m papiUoHt" spixming round with the knees at the chin, eto.. all of which, after having become master of what has been previously described, you have but to see done, and you may, with very little practice, do them yourself, taking chi« always to bear in mind that the body and limbs, however disposed, must balance each other with the fkoe above the water ; all those positions in which thte balance is least attended to reqfuire the greatest labour to perform.
As the force required in swimming is not in proportion to the resistance of the water but to the balk to be carried through it, these diflbrenoes among swimmers may be ascribed to the same cause as the variabte nature of the sailing qualities of diflbrent boats or ships, namely, their construction. A stout body, drawing more water, requiica a greater length and strength of aim to pull it through, although, in general, the longest limbs are attached to slender bodies. In the same way, minute differences in foim may frequently aisisti and render more natural, certain motions and poaitiona.
SWDOOKO. 285
BOW TO TXACH SWIMHIKO.
The following is the system of instmction pursued in the naval schools. It has been found very efficient, and we give it in the words of the goyemment professor of natation : — " A rope is laid out from the beach to a distance of about 100 yards, secured at each end by an anchor, and a small boat is moored by a hitch of the rope round the rowlock. By such an arrangement, the boat can be readily passed to and from iba shore, or kept stationary in deep water. A pole lashed to the middle thwaxt with a block made fast at the end of it, and a line passing through the block with belt or band attached, complete the appliances. The learner steps from the shore into the boat, which is then peraed out into deep water. With a band firmly secured under the arm-pits he dives off the boat, and soon finds exvJoyment in the sudden and complete immersion, which those who are allowed to wade into the water very generally dread. With support frt>m the line which the instructor holds in his hand or makes fast, the would-be swimmer finds himself in a good position for practiBing the necessary motions, and the instructor has every opportunity of giving directions. When able to strike out with steadiness and regnlari^, the urangement by which the boat is moored with the rope passing over the rowlock allows the learner to attempt to make progress towards the shore, and this is a matter of great importance, for it is no uncommon thing to meet with boys who can keep themselves afloat and go through the movements of the swimmer, but are unable to make much headway in the water.**
THB CKAMP.
Those who are very liable to that terrible contraction of the muscles called the cramp should never swim at any great distianoe from the land ; but if suddenly attacked, there is tittle or no danger if you are a tolerably good swimmer and do not lose your presence of mind. The moment you feel the cramp in your leg or foot, strike out the limb with all your strength, thrusting the heel out and drawing the toes upward as forcibly as pouible, totally regardless of the momentary pain it may occasion. If this does not succeed, throw yourself on your back, and endeavour to keep yourself afloat with your hands until assistance reaches you ; or, try to paddle ashore with your palms. Should yon be unable to float on your back, put yourself in the position directed for treading water, and you may ke^ your head above the surface by merely striking the water downward with your hand at your hips, without any assistance from your legs. In order to endow you with confidence in a moment of danger from an attack of the cramp, practise swimming with one leg, a leg and a hand, or the two hands only.
TO SAW AVOTRn PSUOK FBOM DBOWlTZVe.
Should you ever find yourself in a position to save another l^om drowning you will need to act with nerve and caution. Go carefhlly up to the struggling bather, so as to get behind him, without allowing him to cling to or hold you. Then, having the com- vaojxd of the situation, do not endeavour to lift him above the water, as that will destroy your own buoyancy ; but take him by the arm from behind, between the elbow and the shoulder, and puah him gently before yon. In this position he cannot touch
296 SWIMMING.
you or endanger yt>ar own aaftty, and if yon are a good swimmer yon can support bis head above water for a considerable distance. Bat in oases of threatened drowning, no time must be wasted, but the person in danger must be brought to land as well and as quickly as possible; and then, if he is insensible, the following methods of treatment^ which are those recommended by the Royal Humane Society, must be adopted.
TO BBSTOBX A. rSBSOV ArtAXEMThT DBOWVID.
All drowning arises from sufTocation, therefore the points to be aimed at am— Ibrst, and immediately, the restoration of breathing; and secondly, after breathing is restored, the promotion of warmth and circulation. Send immediately for medical assistance, blankets, and dry clothing, but proceed to treat the patient instantly, securing as much ft«sh air as possible. Perserere in every effbrt to restore life in the absence of a medical man, and certainly till the pulse and breathing has ceased for at least an hour.
Cautioks. — Loee no time. — Avoid aU rough usoffs. — Never hold the body up h}/ the feet. — Nor roll the body on eeuke. — Nor rub the body with salt or spirits. — Nor inject tobacco smoke or its in^tsiom. — Convey the body careftilly on its face, with the head and Moulders supported in a raised position, to the nearest house.
TsxATMBiTT TO RssTOBX Natukal BBB^THiire. — 1. To Maintain a Free Bntrunee qf Air into the Windpipe. — Oleanse the mouth and nostrils ; open the mouth ; draw forward the patient's tongue, and keep it forward : an elastic band over the tongue and under the chin will answer this purpose. Remove all tight clothing from about the neck and chest.
2. To Adjust the Patient*s Position.— FltMO the patient on his back on a flat surface, inclined a little from the feet upwards; raiso and support the head and shoulders on a smsll firm cushion or folded article of dress placed under the shoulder- blades.
S. To Imitate the Movements qf Breathinff. — Grasp the patient's arms just above the elbows, and draw the arms gently and steadily upwards, untU they meet above the head (this is for the purpose of drawing air into the lungs), and keep the arms in that position for two seconds. Then turn down the patient's arms, and press them gently and firmly for two seconds against the sides of the chest (this is with the object of pressing air out of the lungs. Pressure on the breast-bone will aid this). — ^Repeat these measures alternately, deliberately, and perseveringly, fifteen times in a minute, until a spontaneous eflbrt to respire is perceived ; immediately upon which, cease to imitate the movements of breathing, and proceed to induce circulation and warmth. — Should a warm bath be procurable, the body may be placed in it up to the neck, continuing to imitate the movements of breathing. R^se the body in twenty seconds ia a sitting position, and dash cold water against the chest and face, and pass ammonia under the nose. The patient should not be kept in the warm bath longer than five or six minutes.
4. To Excite Inspiration, — ^During the employment of the above method excite the nostrils with snuff or smelling salts, or tickle the throat with a feather. Rub the chest and fece briskly, and dash cold and hot water alternately on them.
swnaaNG. tar
TuimiTT im* KimiL BiutBara ait aiut BmoHD.-^Ta laduee OiraiJaSe» imd Wamth. — Wnp tha patient In diy bluiksu, and DomniBnce mbblng the Umtw Dprraidi, Brmly uid snargMdoiiU;. The fricUon mnet be oontmti«d onder llis blankeu or orar Che dry olotMng. PromoU Ibe wumtb of Ibe bod; b; the ippUcation oT bat Bume!*, boMea or bladden of hot mter, heated brlcka. etc, to the pit oT the nomadi, Uu armplta, betireen the thighs, uid to the aolea of Uie feet Warn ololhtug may gananllr be obtained tnm bjitanden. On (he reatonlion oT life, vhoi Ihe jmrer of twmliowing bat temrned. ■ tBupooafal ol warm walsr, InuiU qoantUla of irlne, warm brandur and mler, or ooflbe, ihoold ba givea. The patieni ■hmld be kept In bed, and a dkapoeltloa lo alaep encouragod. During reaction large mnalard pUMera Ut (he cheM mod below (he ahoaldare will greatly relieve Uia dixreeaed br
AlthODgh Uie weight oT one'! olothea will make bnt tittle dlflbranM in (ha water, yet we atrongly adriae the yotuig iwlmmer, when he hai beoome aipert in tbe art, and oonfldant of hie own proweea, to iwini occaaionallj wtth hie olothee on i fOr Ibie pnrpoaa, of cxjojie, he need only noe an old womKnal auitK By ao doing, he will ba frt****^ Uiat draai dofla not make eo much dlflbrenee aa ha might imagine, and l^na he wiU haTa more oourage and pieaence of mind if be (boold at any time aftarwarde Ikll into the water, or leap in to laTD aaDlber : ODnfldence In hie own powers being of Ihe flnt ooDeequetioe. Ilaay qnadntpade, even, are at flret fBarfOJ of trueting ihemeeWee to the watery element, though they hare ODlj to fallow Ihdr natural moTementa when an land to caue Ihemaelrea to ewim. The motJona of eereisl oealutee in the water are similar to those of man when iwimming i and it has been said, that he who wishes (a lean this an mlglit have a worse master thsa
, ITKB CMoks^ boating may bi uid to be tlis moM populu- aport ot
I ttM dar. Snrj mui lod boy in tho Hire* Ungdomi ii proud to bo
I to boot bli knoirlsilgt of * hone, ft iog. uid a boat. Brltona
_. ' lofs Che water ; aDd they, of all people In the woild. Hem to biTe
W^ made a play 'ground of the bbl
Rowing and aoulUng are aooompliahuauu wUch erery boy ihimld u 1 bat before learning to row. tb* tyro ihonld at least know hov to ewim : for without being able to awlm, no lad haa any bnalnflee in a boat, Preeoming, bowerv. that onr readeia bare taken adrantage of our InatrncUoni in the uefDl art of nitatiftnt we prooeed to glT> Um «omo practical dlrectioai in rowing and aoulling.
BOWINO.
Flnt of aU, it is well that the joung scalier sboald know something of the oon- Btmotion of a boat. Here we have a picture of the ordinaiy row-boat and its several parts.
DKBCBiraOir OV ▲ WHBSBT.
1. Bow. 4. 4. 4. Rowlocks (pronoonoed 6. 6. 6. Foot>board.
1. Cntwater or stem. ruUoekg). 7. Stem-sheets.
S. Tiller. 6. 6. 6. Beat. 8. Fore-sheets.
The cutter would have a tiller, which is here shown, but is nerer an appendage to a wager^boat for a pair of sculls.
3=31
1. Handle.
siSGanrxov ov a scin.1., ob oab. 1. Loom, or shoulder.
3. Blade.
aoATiVA nans.
Bow oxB, the darboard upright oar towaxds the bow of theboaL
Stboxb oxb, the oar rowed by the sbrokesman.
BvBOKBBXiJi, the 9t0rmmott man of the rowers.
Stbokb-sisb, the port^ or right side.
BowxAir, the man nearest the bow of the boat.
CozswAxv, the man who steers the boat.
Thowi. pars, the pins which sometimes are used for the rowlocks.
HsADPAST, sometimes called the pahUer, A rope fixed forward to fksten the boat after landing.
To iTirsHir tr scvlls, simply means to take them out of the rowlocks.
Rowan ow ; when this direction is given by the coxswain, all the oais are laid in with their blades forward.
Iir BOW; at this phrase, the bowman gets the bOat>hook ready to clear away for the shore.
Oabs are longer than «0mU«, but both are shaped alike. The oarsman takes a single oar; the sculler a pair of sculls.
VAVAOBIIXVT OV A. BOA*.
To lAAVB TR SmoBB. — Ou leaving the shore the boat should be pushed off with its head towards the tide, if there be a tide in the river. This may be done with the boat-hook or the scull ; the former is best.
TxB Bbas. — If using a pair of sculls, you must sit amidships to keep the boat
le boat by alCUng at about Uu ume diuum from tha Mhcr gnnwala. Ibt bock, from tha hip to Cha (hmltlan, ■honld bo gtnight. and ba ilwajia kept ao. nia Aeat ehoDld be anfficiently high to gira yon perfect conunaod of jo/OT Bcolli ; tf 70a sit nadar Cham, am it wera, that U too low» you nol rtaij loaa powar, bat mil inerilAlily Ml into l^lu vhioh joa ought alodioaaly to avoid i fonr fSet (honld ba In tha tnlddl* of the ■tmchsr, tha heel« oflarly oloaa. and tha tos tnmed ont. The inside oanmon ■hould Hit lalher ofT the asat Ihui Oir back upon it. The laga ahoiild not be qnite
rather beat and atick npwardB, and the lege will oaturall; recede from each other ; bnt will ooma togMhar, or nlber be brought Mmight, or aearlf lO, aa the boat ii pulled through thaw
1 roDT Hglu the loom of lebodrmiM
Tm> Gtitr or a Ounus. — Buppoelng yon (honld grasp tbs thin pan of tha handle, olose to the oar, or joM on tha sbonlder when it begins bi
Tai Pnix OF iw Ouaiiuf . — Having yaor oar properly at command, tt be inclined forward from die hipa ; tha back svaigbt — hy this we do not ahould ba upright, but that it should not be beet — the arms ezlsnded until the haads am wall over the loea, and the oar all but locked in the rowlocks j jour ajva knkiiig right befon 700. Tha blada of the oar, beiog at right angles wiih the wster. ta sow dipped till it is oomplatel; immersed, but no more — this most be done at once and deoidedlj ; the whole stroke moat then be pulled at the aame depth nntil It is imised from the wBlar aimnhanaenslj with cha act ot ttethcring. BeooUeot, that the moment
dap«h is a* mta, Oe unu u>d body bteia to Ul tiukmidi. It thsir fall itnteb nslil Iba bod; btoamM pvrponiUcDJv ; tht um ire (ben tomtght bom* ahuply (bat not witb ■ jerk) p«t the >idH, hdIU Hi* huida HiSln Uie tldo ftrnn (wo to tbne tncbei betaw ths cbnt, ny near tba lowtM ffb 1 wbils. U tbe BiDB momsnt. Uu «r 1< fcubsnd >ad Iba Mn>k« «iid«d. Tha back will DOW be B little out ct the pnpendioilBr (Rill Dot in Uw iMwt cuttMI) i the haw) apright 1 (be uma utd bo^r tra now igslo bronght briaki; forwud at (ha uuse moment and tba nmtina betora dceoribad asnln Ukaa place.
Tai OuSF or i Scullii.— Tha enilli must be bald \>j Ihe thin put of the handle, and most *o &r croas each other in flviit of Jon aa to oarr; jonr handa one over Iha other in pnlling home,
Twi Poti o» i 6ciiii»». — 'W» nei poaitlon and placing (haacBlli tn tha wi
Oamnan i" the only dlffMence in the motion ia. that ia palUng a pair one hand peu« aboTe the other. Tha illoatmtloiu in (beaa and tba foUawing pagea will ahow (be poai- t>OD> tha body ihonld aianme while pulling witb a pair of acuUa — or Indeed whUe palling a dnglB oar. Whan ■colling, yon iboald ftwpiBiitly look oTar yoor ahoolder to Hw where jon are going. Wa moDOt give bettor dlrectloni on thli pert ot onr anbjeet than an contained in Ur. Walker'* ■' Manly Eiarciiaa i" and aa Iheee initruc-
"Ilyway of curyingooe band orar tha other la aa followi L^fiuppoea I go from Breenwich lo BlackinUl against tide, I keep down on the Greenwioh aide, looklog (owarda tiie ahore, having my fhce over the lelt ahonlder, Tny riffbG hand ia then above (a place wbioh it will almoat ImpeneptUtlj take). If 1 go
an BOwiMa.
D7 fkoe to tdincd OT«r ny rl^ (honldar, uid tha left hud then natDiall? (rauM
IMthsw
tha wiirt ii itniglit ; hot u n elbowi mnit b« mik nod tha « tonrds tha fon-umg, — ihia pi
la us Untohsd ont. preriotu to pulling. ir la being delirarad ITom the Hmlla. the t np, K that tha huki or the hjuidt an tumad u fMtharing. In tMa poaitlea tha banda mnat ivnAin doriag tha ratam of the sciiUa, autil j«L an about to dip them again in the water. Bat ba aore to rai« tha acull •uffloiBntly high ont of ihg water, aa, if 70a do not. it ia pcolahle ;ou will (tether nndar it, or on it, and tbna impede tha prognaa of toot boat, and, to a oartain aitent, expand roar nrength. Wa have alnadf giren dlrectlona aa to tfaa dasT«e of immaiaion of an oaf I the aama ramaika apply to it aonll or scuUa.
Cnainm With raapact to nuranta we (baH only haie Mj, that In rowing agalait
tfde it is evident that at the aide of tne river there will be leaa reaiatana to your pro- greaa 1 and in rowing with the Ude, the middle of the ilnam will give joa moit a»istBuca. With reaped to catting oIT the point*, and avoiding or taking advantage or the eddlea. practice alone can give any Deeful lafaimation \ and the leaner, after he haa duly atndied our direotiona, will require a tew practical iBMom fhim an etperienced oanman : until practice haa been called to the aid oT theory, we moat 9trt>ngl7 advise oar young rMdete ant to venture hiia a boat without aach a perun with them. Many tivH have been loatby prematim MiemjMa at rowing.
Diciua WiTaa. — The mode of perlbrmiug thie opeiatlon is aa follow*: — Place the ecullj or oara in the water, with the concave part of the blades towarda you, and push BtToaglj BiniinBt It. This will foice the boat backwards, and from this mult it ia
To tuai witM BcDLU oa Oua. — Fint, with reapect to •colli — Suppoaing yon wish
Bowina. an
to tDcn tha bfafa haikl to Tom' tight dda, which would be iMlmieallrcallad "to pen,"
tMlog to Um left bud uf tha ■teennuI^ If tha« mre oua, back water with the right h*Dd. kud pull with tbe left, ud the boU will qnioklr torn. To tore with oen, the ■une opntkm most be perlbnsed. but b; two penoui fwtead of one ; IM ttie Due buk water while the other pallH, and of oonne I2ie lame elfbct ie produced.
UairnB, Pums, oi Cumuib. — If a boat la croeainft the nream, and another la caTDloe with the tide, the one haTlng the tide with It mnit go aetern of the other. In meettaig a boat, the one having the tide in II* hvoor mnit give way to the other, nnleea then i> lo moch nxnn Chat neither raqnln mnj oonruer. IT the epaee be ■0 oontracled aa to fdrce boUi boata naarlj into Contact, each lifla the •call* ot can
ont of the rowlocki. and lets tbem drift alongelde, or brinn Cliem into Che boat. acconUng to cirvninilaDcn ; the thnner is generally tufflrlent. Each bootiDan replace! hU acnila directlj tbe bnate bsve paeeed each other. In psieing, the one wblch overtakea the other maet iro oat^de and keep clear of the other'e (Coll* or oan, nnlcH there le ample room to i>a«a liuide witiunt oomiog io contact with the eeolle or oan of the other.
LiRDixs. — If the Ude be Id tost tkTonr, bring the boat in a rather elaaBng dii«c- tion towarde the place of landing, lo that ai jun reach the phice the tide ma; take the Uemdoira, aa It la alwajihnt lo land Mera to Ude. Wben you got to the landinc- pbioe, onihip the acDlla u berore directed ; bnt instead of leuiog them lie alongalOo, lay them in the boat with tbe loonia aft and the bledn fbrweid : then take hold of the headfuit^ jump aehore. and f^t«n the boat safely. This appljce to rirer rowing; but in bintlinff on tbe Ka-eboro, wIl^h there ie h bwbU, a little more oare must be UAcd ; yotu- boat, however, will be larger and itronger "■»"""' In thie vaie, joa mnei
|
wMchfor &■ |
imooth |
; (■ non 1* Ton tun |
it,"KiTe |
w»r" with all your |
power to th« |
|
|
»bor«. Thn |
t be nsuly toji |
imp a^ore wilh Uie ptinUr |
to bit hMd, |
|||
|
■ndptiU tht |
bOM 1 |
dp ont |
of th« .web of |
IhB mrf; |
||
|
hmTins flnt lud in |
theiri |
nn M bafim directed, and help him if he i |
||||
|
Boongh. |
||||||
|
Licnrcnaa ■ bou from the ixaeh li 101 |
nelimeaa |
morediBlCTiHaflWr. |
ifl a conndenble ewell, and Ihe boat la large (it will of conne tie strongly manned), the two bowmen get Into the boat, with th^ oan Toady Co act i the other men eqnally divided la; bold of each side her gunwale, entering the wUer with her, and forcing her head to the sea. They mnit not, howerer, all jnmp in until aho !■ birly afloat, for if ihe were to gronnd and ship a sea, the probability is Uiat her head would be turned, and that the next sea would capeiio bor before they could prevent it. In luch enaw lo« of lile ia by no meuu dhoooudoil Bn( wbra the boat ia aAoat. her head ia ■ometlmee corned for want of reHdinesa on the part of the rowen i in auoh case, let two bowinen with osn, or boat-boolu, go to the bow on the lee of the boat, and by foroiag iham into the Btrand, piuh the bead of the boat aeawajd. Lying broadaide to a aea ia very dangorooB. but if care and decision are used, the boat can generally be kept head to sea ; in fact, it is much mare eBay to keep it so than to return it, wben the lurf baa once thrown it toirarfs the sbore.
lately the practice of Canoeing, or eculliug with a doable-ended paddle, after the manner oTibe Bouth Sea islanders, has become popular with good OArsineo. The csDOe is probably the primitive form of boat. Uke many of our beet n-ager-boala, it is cut onl of a einsle tree or block of wood, and though light is very elrong. The a lingle acoUer, who sin in the centre of hia Tmil lia
pTcpela and rnidoi hinuielf tbrongh the wavn by nmna oi
by the centre, and dips eMb broad end into the water ii
eurprisiag wich what dexterity the accomplished sculler oan paddle in a canoe,
tbo featfl perfortDed in acanoeby one gentleman, the owner of the " Rob Roj
Deen told in a veiy inlereMins Tolnme, Canoediig. like many other arta, c
BOWING. a06
be acqnired by practioe. Let the tyro obtain a small boat, and with an imprompta paddle try his hand at this new, or rather, reyiyed art. In a little while he will doubt- lesB snooeed in propelling his craft throngh the water. We should advise him to begin on^ a shi^ow pond or in a narrow canal, as the canoe is easily upset if its occupant incline too much either to the right or to the left.
▲ TEW IXPOBTAVT BXXABKS OJt CtmBB BOWIirO.
Each OBTsman must be particular to take his time from the strokesman.
While rowing he must be strictly under the orders of the coxswain.
Let it be ever kept in view that keeping time and keeping stroke are the two great points for an oarsman's attention.
When there is any swell on the water, caused either by the paddles of steamboats or rough weather, care should be taken always to keep the boat's head well facing it.
VA17I.TS so BS AVOinKD.
Catching CrabB. — ^This term implies the act of (Uling backwards from the seat, through not taking hold of the water in the attempt to pulL
NcA Keeping Time. — ^Independent of the awkwardness of the appearance, this habit will be an effectual bar to your rowing in concert with any master of the art. Not keeping time, recollect, is not putting your oar into the water at the same time as the stroke oar.
Nat Keeping Stroke. — This, be it observed, is totally different trom. the preceding fkult. It is not doing work at the same time as the stroke oar ; and this may be neglected even when you have kept time by putting your oar in the water at the same moment as the strokesman did his. *
IkmbUng the body ovet the oar at the end of the stroke. — ^This prevents the shoot- ing of the arms and body simultaneously forward, which is a most important feature in good rowing.
Jerking is a ikult to which men who are pnwerftd in the arms are jiarticularly liable, as, instead of throwing the body gradually back, and thus partially pulling by their weight, they depend solely upon the muscles of their arms. They, therefore, give a violent muscular effort, which not being continued by falling back, the stroke ends, as it were, too soon, producing a jerk, which destroys the uniform swing throughout the boat, and thus decreases the propulsive power, and ultimately tires out the man. It is very annoying to the other part of the crew.
Rowing Bound. — This fault arises Crom not entering the water deep enough at the first. The rower feels he has not sufBcient resistance (and is in danger of catching a crab), he consequently deepens his water with the blade of an oar, forming a portion of a circle, and brings the flat part of the blade perpendicularly to the water, thereby tending to drag the boat down by its pressure.
Slacking the arms too eoon. — This not only decreases the ipawer of the stroke, but generally causes a positive impediment to the boat's rapid progress ; for the habit is gonoFally accompanied by one or two additional errors, vis., either feathering the scull before it is out of the water ; or allowing the boat to cany it along. In the flnt, you
20
^Df ROWING.
■dd to jtor own lobonr ; In th* noond, yon, to a oanain aitcnt. Mop Ib« boU. Toy light boala »n kpt to oaa» theia Ikolta. Tha ramedj in nu>h t, ame is, to dip tlie ami] ABOuke; but Ui« learaar muat reooUacicthAt the Mme I ordliiU7 l»U«.
TltmiWiv «I> «»'«' in rowing moM be aueftUlf Avoided. It is exoeuiToIy BD1107- iag to tha» OD tbe «ame Bida of tha boat.
PxUiiio Mo or puBing out ol the boat moBt be aioided, aa it ii mre to rock the boat, and oT course deoeua He epeed. Tha drat ii caused b; holding the handa loo near 10 each other ; the laoer by giring a mil towards the gnowale in (allinic back. Bitting nearer to the ininwale will l«od to remedy i^lue fault, which ii apt to be oom-
it dereatcd, da no experienced eye
CalviiS '^ "m' 1^ tht oar ni
conducea greatly to the laat.montii
other very oomm tha coneeiiBence.
Tory awkwaid appaaiance, and in (knit, and moM be aTolded.
We hare now recagntulatcd moat Ot the Ikntta to which (ubject. The learner must not be diaheartensd by the difflcultlBB ha will ba meet with dnring hii Sret Mtempte with the oar or acu whish will be hia habit of
ir renwrki on the adinlnblB and deUihlM exsrOlM oF 7 Baillsg, \ij code&ToariiiK U Impart to the 70011^ upinnl tbr jaohl- L ing hononrfl ft knowledge of Duitical tonns, ead of U I and rigging of yuhU md te^going veuels. TbiB
i ^ou appflaring « dotIcik ihontd ho btot hare t ~ deiteritr apon the bhio miter, or ba thrown into the bJiK jaAot« i mnd» together with the inatnictiou we ahall ait^pwarda o win enmble him to untue^inueir ai»n the water with comfort and eafety ; kwerer. tint b« la on no Mconnt (o attempt it without harlng an eiperienc«d peraon
wnh >■>—
M4iidiiiff oloMT to the wind than any other, it ii aim of It. Ws ghaU, thmron, dsKiiba one from Usm dock.
nnt we (haU give thaas paiU which are beat a eagnMng the veaHl ii aappovad to have two anchori : bow 1 In hMvy wealliar Itiia li i ~
10 handleat rig Tn yaohti. oi
necseaazj to know aoMel atom, from t2kB trtick U
. Bowsprit. [rnrled.
. Oaff with maiiutal
1, 14. Topmut Btiroada.
>. Tojimaat backnay.
9. Topnuat at^.
T, Bnnner and tackle.
1. TniTeller Tor Jib.
9, ChajmoL [ftirled.
1. FonaMy wHh torauil 30.
IS. Peak halyard!. Jib halyardi. Cahla. Fonoheet.
boom be, howarsr, preftrral, Uie kelob. or duidj lig (u giraatl, oriiOMly«Jl, the »a™iit«go of Ui« boBvier boom.
The HiMiwfcii lA BmaUer» Omi boom oouaqnontly ■hortor uid mon muu^wblfl, and it li smgnll; >llaw«d tbat Ihs jlsev makai a boM wrak v«i7 liTslr.
pr4ndp>U7 nnd by nnngglen and by Uie oout-gnaid. u thay *ra good naa botita ; in both ctuea thero are plenl? oT bands, and mider sncli oinmmstanon Ehay are ncrilenli Tar rongb wnther, Bui they havfi rather a lubberly look, tho csutu la oontinnally wet. and wben Uu ulli an doim Otey are alwayi In Iba rmj ; libey never have a Ught, olean, seajmut'liks appeamice; b«ld«, nnlan property bandied, Uiey are deeidedly (Unsmotu boata. A slngls la^aall Id a siaatl boat ii handy enoogb ; we, boiraror, ihonld even Hun prefer a Bpritaail, irith a small fbresail, alUioagh It mnat be
allowed IhU the Ingeail will bring tbe boat roond beuar in
tacking than ibe epriteafl can do without tbe snistanM of
a foresail.
It may here be obaerred, that
tlw reason tlie IngnD bringi the
boat ronnd in tacking is. that a
portion of Oia aaH la before Che I.DH1IL mBitlanillingeloaahaaled,whenu
the boat rigged with a apritaail only baa all ita oanvaa abaft, ^ and therefore gencfeJIy reqoiiea to be helped in tecking, pntUngootan oar to leeward to poll her ronnd j If, Ihererore, .miT.iii,.
we weie confined to a ilngle nil, we ihonld inclme to tlia In^nail, particularly aa in ■ailing doee-haaled jm hare more power over the boat, and iha worka handier^
The fallowing ia a cafe and moat handy rig, indeed it is the one wa (bonld adriFe oornadarloadoptinhia fliM anayi trf nimmanilitp We will n^poaa Ite boat to I e
aAILINQ. Ill
a ildff ttioaX dghtniai hat long, mnd toai (Cet lii beam {whicb will ba batter nndenbMd by llie word bratdUi. iltbongh tt dow not enutti; eipiME il* meuiing), wd liffSad ■■ nprtaaaea Id Uis tagivHag. With Uiu rig the bow can stand w«U to windward ; if aha haa been kept awa; too much ihe ipriiigi bar Inff qnk^y, aha tocka waU, and, indaed, u fit fOr any emarseacy. In rirar sailing, when noar hilla or hoiuea, thla Tig la moat aicellaiC, for if it ba blowing mah, yon an continaall/ aipoaad to inddeii and itrong pnfb of wind, ooraing betwean tha hoosea and Ibe hilla. In addittm to ordinary
only to let By bia jib-nheet, and [lat bia balm a-lea,
and, generally, hia boat will rigbt inunediataly ; if tbe
Bcgnall cvntinnea, ajid ia too itrong Ibr hia boot, lat
him throw np inio tha wind, anaicb Dnt the aprilaail.
ud haiiss got way upon her, kaep her cloae ; or. if
he haa eufflcient oonfldence in hia boat and his powei
wear her, and ha will ba anng and comfortable in
minnio ; tbe l»l««r mancBnTTa may, howorer, ba oon-
aidOHl too delicala for a Dorlo* to attempt. Bubar
than thia he had bettor puU Ihe boat'* bead ronnd "iitmi i-d idhi.il.
with an oftr, after jibing bar for tanking in tha nsnal way, if he wiabea la mn be1br«
lb* wind. This rig can ba easily woiked by one band. If the aheeta an bronght aft. One other rig we ahall notlo*. if tt be only to advlae our young Meade art to adopt
it. Til, — tha TT.-ii™.n, iriUi what is termed a balloon jib. The jib is no doubt Ihe most
drawing sail in tha boat; it is eqnaJly certain, howaTer, tbat It prcBHa her down
in Uie water mora than any sail i the latter quality haa, it would appear, beeti wholly lost sight of, and tha driving power of tho safl oaly been kept in view. Tha following ma will eibibil the sail to Ihe Ineipsrtearad batter than any Terbal eiplauaiiDn. Id addition to the diaadrantaga and danger to which
'"~^iHii&4^^«
ill never lia flat enough to oompata with the nasal cutter rig. Tit.— a (bMaiayiail, foraaail,andjib,oraTeD with a foreaaO and Jib, although f there it no doabe that in weather in which it an ba carriad. and mnning a liiUa free, it would draw a boat - "-— — — moat rapidly through tbe water.
We ifaall now endetroar to make the tyro ondantand the diffbranoe of rig which distinguishes (be ship, tha barque, the brig, Uia briganilaa, the schooner, and tbe iloop orenttarj for it woold be vaiy ridicnlOM to see a yonog gentleman sailing his beat down Ute PooU or tha Bonthsnptoa water, on hi* way to a ragatU at Cow™, who, by some acddmit, was disooTered not to know one sort or Tassel ftmn another.
TheBnt engruTing oq tbe next page shows us two TaMeli: that to the right with two masts wonld by soma ba nailed a sohoonar, but, having sqnare lopeaila to its foremast, it I*, mora strictly speaking, a briganline i on hi ...
Kod gaff-topuiil, at uhoaiKn bur*, but on tm toiamHl with boom Bimll&r Eo bar ""J"—'', k aqcare (bntapHil, her From Cba icbMiiMr ; abe hu. tlw. a roraatayaail u
the bu ■ ton and all fonuil lad a rojal i ihtte diiCm^niib id jib KL Wa m>7 bere Uka
"--'i^ 'iilii <
yiA':^ji A
tfafl opporhmjty of aiplAJnin^ tba difl^nnOB batiraen wbat ara tarmed fore and aft Baiii, and BqnareuUa. If tbe reader wilt look at tba foremaat ot this Teasel, he will notice that the sail neaieat the daok, called the OirasaU, ii a fore and all sail ; the nppei saila an bolb aqaareaaili ; all brigs and ships are railed aqnare-rlgged Teasels. To Uie left bf the aagraTiag is a cntMr, and oar icadar oan baTB proflted little b; it lia does not petvalTe the baa her nuinHSJI, mlTiapsall, fanaail, and jib ■eC
The three prominent Taaals in tbe abOTe are brigs. The one to tba led baa her Mils set, her maininait having a fbra and aft mniwii^ her topaail and royal being aqoareaails i all (lie aalli on her tbnmaat are also aqnarasails. Bemamber that all briga bale two maata mHy.
The angraTing of a barqaa must not be onnotioed. An inaxpariaueed eye would at enoa oall it a ship, m tt has three maata ; but if joa sbould addma yoorself lo a bina jaeket, and tbni name it, (ha hiloh up of his breeohea, and torn of his qnid, would aa plaiDlir oall jon ■ lubber aa if be bad pronaoneed Iba words, Kot many yaaia ainca this rig waa larely saen ; it is now Tory common, and posseaeing all, or nearly all, tba adTanlages of a ship, and teqairfaig ttwer men to basdle it. experience has approved Ha adoption. In Tery large Teasels, sneh sa Indiamen and ships of war. raDging from too tona apwardi, where pleuQ ot man can be always obtained, the ship rig. being
BATT.TWn
mote poiratfDl,i* mae kdnoMgecnu, kod geuenUf bMvsen B bBrqoa lud » iMp, whioti mt onn nriks t in tha rig of the miimmut. that la. tha matt oeanM (wo you will BSe that in the buqoa thu mut haa tt
upper an eqaaieaalla, when ICa higli n
by which tiifl gear e mtHl part, we (ball apeak generally ; ■ail. and Uu kind of Teaael la not a the ooBer, aa the tbrm oT rig beat
be "I*rboard."
We shall now glre a fBw of the r and dlBteent paru of a veaMt are known. Pot t but when we apeak paiticularty of a rope a named, the reader mnat apply uax remaika adapted for a yacht.
Eivt, to poll. Tim. tight.
BuaioAin, to the right.
Pun, to the left. The larm used U
wind. Cntlen have good weigh within Atb pcii not within eU.
Whtb ok rai iiiiii db, auLiaa ma, aaillu the iiiiatil ; her head la then eight pointa from the wind.
Binaa tbi wrvn, aalUng with the wind right aCI, or behind yon, that ia, with tbo headaiileBn pointa Itam the wind.
BuLDio WITH tai wiBD uiH tBi lUM. a»IUng with the head of tbe veeaal more than eight pointa ttom the wind, but not alxteen.
BiiLiHs wiTB Tn wuD BBFou TBI BBiH, With the TCaiel'a head leaa than eight potnta Ihna the wind, hot not cloee-haoled.
Ldii, keep nearer the wind; keepyoor luff, meaua, keep oloae to the wind.
g with the wind ft
314 SAILmO.
BsxjLT, make ihsi. 8cBxx>T, keep the helm amidships. Haul avt, more towardB the sterzL Put thx hslv dowit, pat the helm to leeward. Put trb hxlx up, bring it to windward. LxxwABD, the point to which the wind blown. WiiTDWAXD, the point Jh)m which the wind blows. Ship thx tillsb, fix it in the mdder head. Ukbhip, means, of coarse, exactly the reverse of the above. Jibs, the act of bringing over the sail fh>m one side of the VQssel to the other. Bbbd thb bail, fix it in its proper place. BoWBB THB SAIL WXLL UP, pall in strongly into its place.
Thb thboat ov thb xaiitsail (a Jbr» and afl 9ait), that part of the sail which is fixed to the i>eak close to the mast.
Thb pbax, the stick which is at the top of a fore and aft saO. Thb booh, the stick which is at the bottom of a fbre and aft sail. Hxin bails, any sails at the head of a vessel ; in catters, foressil, forestaysail, jib, and any others she may cany before the mast, except a sqaaresaO, which is sometimes used for ronning before the wind.
FoBB ahd apt bails, sach sails as the mafnaail of a cotter when str^ched fore and aft, by its sheets. (See description of catter and engraving.)
Shxxts, the ropes by which the lower sails are made fast in the position desired ; we say, for instance, " Haul taut the foresheet,'* which means tighten the foresheet. Each sheet is distingoished by the name of the sail to which it is attached : for instance, the mainsheet means the sheet belonging to the mainsail ; in like manner, jibsheet^ foresheet, etc. The jib. however, has two sheets, one on each side of the forestay, for the convenience of tacking ; the foresail has bnt one, which is made ikst to ^e traveller of the foresheet-horse ; as the boat tacks, the traveller enables the foresail to pass teom one side of the boat to the other.
FoBBSHXxT-HOBSB, a bsT of iron which passes from one ganwale to the other, to which the foresheet is finstened by means of a traveller ; it is an inoh or two above the deck.
Tbavbllsb, in the case of the foresheet-horse it is the ring that passes backwards and forwards along the foresheet-horse, as the foresail is jibed from, one side to the other. Speaking generally, the term means an easy ring attached to a sail, and ronning upon a boom bowsprit, or mast, to enable yon to haol ont or haul op a saiL Yabdb, the sticks by which sqoaresails are set.
Squabbsails, sach sails as the maintopsaU of a brig. (See description and cat.) Tack, to torn a vessel finom one side to the other, with her head towards the wind. When a vessel is obliged to tack several times to get to windward, we say she is beating to windward ; when she is tacking to get op or down a channel, we say she is beating op or down — ^by the by, in roogh weather she often gets a beating in the attempt ; when taddng to get off a lee shore, we say she is clawing off.
8AILIN0. 315
Tack, the lowest oomer of the ndl opposite to the sheet in all fore and aft sails. It must be reoolleoted that a Teasel's tacks are always to windward and forwards, and her sheets to leewsrd and aft. Hence we saj she has her larboard or starboard tacks aboard, which means she has tacks in the side detignated.
HAI.TABDS, the rope by which signals or sails are hoisted. We say, for instance, '* hanl tant the peak hazards," which is an order to hoist the peak of the sail well up. Ln munwEM ivn tackui, a sabstitnte for a back stay ; used in cotters on acoonnt of its being easily removed when going before the wind.
Scats, in tacking, the vessel is said to be in stays ttom the time the jibsheet is- let fly antn the foresail draws.
BoBSTAT, the rope fixed at the end of the bowsprit, and flurtened about half-way • down the stem. Chains are frequently need for this purpose.
Cat, a projecting piece of wood or iron to which sheets or halyards axe made fiut. Bacxstats, Fobsstats, etc., each of these denote the particular pert the rope supports. The former are ropes from the after part of the head of the topmast of a cutter-rigged vessel to the after part of the chains on each side of the ship ; the latter is a rope from the topmast head to the fluther part of the bowsprit ; it there passes through a block and comes in by the stem head, and is then made Cut to its deat.
Clxat, a prcgecting piece of wood or iron, to which the sheets or halyards of a yacht are made fbst.
Shbouds are also supports to the masts. Each shroud is distinguished by the part it is intended to support — ^for instance, the bowsprit and mainahrouds. These are som^dmes called rigging, and are thus described by a popular author : — ^Ropes f^om each side the topmast head, through the crosstree arms to the fore part of the channels, between the first, and second, and lower shroud. They lu^ set up or hauled taut, as are the back-stays, by means of a small tackle, one block of which is hooked to the thimble spliced into the lower end of the shroud or backstay, and another into t je eye- bolts in the channels.
Tax XAXK SHBouns are the ropes flutened at the end of the bowsprit, and extending to each side of the bows.
Book gut, a small tackle, one end of which is hooked to the mainboom, and the other forward to prevent the boom from swinging.
TomvG LziT, strong ropes which are near the end of the mainboom, and led through blocks on each side of the mast, just under the crosstrees, from whence it descends about half way, and is connected with the gunwale or deck by a tackle.
BowLors, a rope made tut to the foremast shroud, and passed through a thimble in the after lurch of the foresail, then round the shroud again, and round the sheet. Tedcblb, a small ring of iron or brass inserted into the sails. CxnroLxs, short loops of rope with a thimble inside them, and spliced to the lurch of the sail.
Gaskxts, ropes made by plaiting rope yams.
8xa.0K, a loose rope, — " Twke in the slaoik;*' that is, draw In the loose ropo.
Lavtaxd, a small rope.
316 bahino.
Bxiv, taking in a reef; is Igring in a portion of the saiL
Bsxv TACKLS, a small tackle formed by two hook blocks, one of which is hooked to the under part of the boom, about one-third of its length from the mast ; and the other fiuther aft. The fkll is belayed to a cleat under the boom.
BAB-anro, a short rope used in reefing, one end of which is made test to the boom at the same distance from the mast aa the cringle to which it belongs ; it ascends and passes through the cringle, then descends and passes through a sheaye on the side of the boom ; then it is passed on board and eUypped to the boom by means of its lanyard, or small line spliced into its end for the purpose ; this lanyard is also to make it fiast when the sail is reefed and the tackle remoyed.
Bowsprit ted, a bolt of iron that passes through the bowsprit bits and the heel of the bowsprit, to keep the bowsprit in its place.
BowdPBit BITS, two stout picccs of wood between which the bowsprit passes. If the reader has noticed the way a carriage-pole is fixed, he will readily conceive how the bowsprit is fiutened between the bits.
OuAviniiiS, the places on the side of the yessel to which the shrouds are fiistened.
Ths quastbb ov ▲ TBssBL is the place on either side at which the stem (bow, or cutwater) meets the side timbers.
MmsHips, midway between the sides of the vessel.
A-BBAM, at right angles with the keel of the vesseL The term has risen from the beams of the vessel lying that way.
Oast hbb, in first Tnakiug sail it means placing the head of the vessel in the most advantageous position.
Hblm's-a-lbb, the call of the helinsman when his hehn is hard down in tacking.
Bbadt about, a command for all hands to be ready in tacking.
siBBcnoirs bob SAiLiiro a boat.
Our instructions will be confined to sailing the boat we have recommended ; with this alteration, that it shall be a fore and aft mainsail, with a peak, but no boom ; when the young sailor is able to do this, he will have acquired sufiicient knowledge of the principles of sailing to enable him to set about the management of a larger and more complicated task. We must, however, give him two cautions : — •
First, never to go out without being accompanied by a waterman, or an older and more es^perienced person than himself.
Second, never to belay, or make fitst the sheets of a small boat; hxmdreds of valuable lives, and many good seamen, have been lost by this piece of foolhardineas. In river sailing this habit of fastening the sheets is more particularly dangerous, as rivers generally, for miles up, have houses, trees, or hiUs on each side, consequently, there are frequently strong pufb of wind coming between these objects, having all the effoot of squalls, and coming imexpectedly, particularly so to the inexperienced, are even more dangerous than an ordinary squall. In giving directions we wiU suppose the boat upon a large lake or pond ; we will, therefore, lay down a position fbr a harbour, state the direction of the wind, and the course we are to steer.
8AILINO. 817
Vint, then, the month of the harbour shall be north ; the wind south, with a little easting. Oar first coarse shall be due north, to enable as to get out of the harbour : and we wiU then direct our course westward, and return eastward to get off the harbour, and lastly southward to get into the harbour. Our boat is rigged with a pumpkin foresail, and fore and aft mainsail, with a peak, but no boom.
Caution. — ^In managing the helm be careftil not to jibe the mainsail, or some day whm you want it most you will find yourself without a masL
Gbttivo nmxa Wat. — Ship the tiller ; set tiie mainsail ; hoist the throat well np, and half hoist the peak ; see that the stays and rigging are taut ; hoist the foresail ; overhaul the mainsheet and the lee runner and tackle ; lower the throat of the main- sail a little, and then hoist the i)eak taut np. Seat yourself at the helm, on the weather side ; place a man to attend the sheets ; sUp your cable, and haul it up, or, if made fast to a buoy, let go.
Your boa^ is now before the wind. If the wind come dead aft, flatten aft the fore- sheet. We do not recommend booming out the foresail with a boat-hook ; a little more canvas is certainly then at work, but it has not a seaman-like appearance. If the wind come at all round to the starboard quarter, haul in the mainsheet till you get the sail nearly amidships ; put the helm down, and jibe it ; let go the foresheets, and make fhst the larboard one. In the directions to the steersman, the word *'port" is now universally used instead of "larboard;** but the latter term is still employed in speaking of the vessel and its rigging.
Reverse the terms larboard and starboard in the following directions, if you have been obliged to jibe as above. We will suppose, however, that such is not the case.
BanroDrG ths Wnro oir TOini Lasboaxd Bxak. — Starboard ^e helm a little, and let the boat spring her luff, with her head to the westward. Haul in the mainsheet, and haul aft the foresheet. If she come up too fhst, port the helm a little and meet her ; when on her proper course, steady ; now keep your eye on the sail, and see you do not jibe her, for carelessness, with the wind on the beam, may take your mast out.
We will now close haul our boat : — Base the helm down a little ; haul in the main- sheet, until you can lay her proper conrse ; haul your foresheet well aft; let each sheet be taut
If attention was necessary with the wind on the beam, it is now much more so. There will now be some strain upon the helm, which the boat will cany more or less a-weather. Keep your eye on the weather lurch of the mainsail, and see that yon do not be continually shaking the sail, as much way is lost by such bad seamanship.
To Taci. — ^We have got nearly abreast of the harbour. Put your helm up, which will let her go off the wind a little, and thus get good way on her ; then put it gently down ; ease off the foresheet a little ; aa soon as it shakes haul it in again, and hold it till the mainsail fills on the other tack. When the wind begins to fill the mainsaU, haul the foresheet well aft ; right the helm.
When the boat is in stays, if you think she win not come round, shift the helm on the opposite side. In small boats it is sometimes necessary to put an oar out to lee- ward. It has, however, a lubberly look, partionlarly when yon have head saiL Get
318 8AILIH0.
good mj on bar belbte 70D tttuk, mod lUa Is aeldoai nsoBUuy. Gontdnns to Uok till yod &n Vo windward of EhQ kurboar.
Baursifla todb B«u urra Hiaioni. — Lower Toor fliwil i lower the peak of tout malniiail. IT yon InUod to make taa to ■ bnoy, IM yonr mnn atuui b; with ■ boM- hook to lay bold or it i before laying bold with tba boet-book, or dropping your anohori be nue to keep well la leeward, and (ben eboot her bead Dp to windward. Wbea thia ia done, if you intend Co ancbor drop It. If your eaila are dry, stow them neatly > if wet, let tbem hanj; to dry. "Fba Battue of the weather moat, of c»iuh, in aomo meaanre, determine yonr ooudoct on thii point.
Few of our readers will probably be likely to panhase a yaob^ bat it may be aa well that we ahonld any aometbisg oa to tbe coel of auoti a leeaeL At a rule, yacbta under twenty-flTe tonaooat about £1G a ton; or, if tbecabia fiuinga be bacdaome, aa mncb aa £20 to £2( a ton. Tbeee are the aTerage prioee of new yaobta, but good aocood-band vMsela may often be bought at thim CIO to £12 a, ton. I«rger yichta cost more iu proportion to their eUe. The neoessary otew, in addition to the captain, ia a man for eveiy tan touj, with a boy or two, aooording Co eircumatancea. The wasea of jacht&meix vary trom Sla. to Sfie. a week, each man flw^™g bimaelf in eveiytbing, except the nuifonn ault, wbloh ie oonunonly given bim at tha opening of the aeaaon. The total canent eipeosea. inolading repair of Mile, new gear, etc, are ordinarily oalonlated at about a guinea a montii per ton, dnriug the time the TOaael la actually employed. Whea in harbor fbr the winter, one man ie anfflclent to keep a emaU yaoht In good order ,- but Uie eipeuaee of a well-ronnd aajllng boat depend vaiy moob
In oonsliuian, we have only to requeat the young reader's canfol atMstlon to fbtegoing direotiona, aa tbeaa will enable bim, with proper ei boat with eaae and ealMr. and (a direct Ita ooniae with fadliQ', t orer the blue water boldly and ateadily tt
EATWe ia br nc
I « modfira paatimfl, mad prabftblj tlu Inven- i«c««itT Uuis UiB dHin for niiiiueiimit. It f wutbeboutof •nortbenchJefUiD.tliEtlui ccmld tavTBiH ths gnowDpan ■kBta or wDod. BtrnU sUta IhU hs cuuiot by any msuu BMOtain at ' what tdma ikating mada Ita Bret appewance in England, bnl that lonw Daoaa L nardM an (bond in Uie tUrteentb oentury. at which period, to Klistephon, It wa» coMomary in the winlor, whan the ia would bear them, ff>r the yonnK ciUiena of London to haten the leg bonu of an^raaJi nnder Che ulaa of th^ feet, by tying them roond tbeir ankl», and then lairing ' a pals ihod with Irid into their bands, they poibed Uiemaelree forward by •Diking It againat the ice. and moved with celerl^, sqnal, eaya the anlbor, " to a bird flying throngb the air. or an arrow from a croaa-bow ;" bat some altowance, we prenmw, moat be made (br the poetical flgnre i 1m then odds, " st tlin«, two of them tbu fninisbed agree to aet oppoaiie one to another at a gr»t distance : they meet, elaratetlielr polae, attack and Mriteaaob other, when one or both of Chem tall, and sot
their fkn (n ouTied a gre&t diiUuioe fnra uul wli*£eT«r port of tha head oomu npoa
■teel, which an hoasd about the feM uid anU« Uke the talans of Iha Orwks and Bomana, wne, moM probably, broaght into England from tiie Low ConnD-io, wher^ they an taid to haiv originaled, and whgit^ it is w«U fcunru, they are almost imiTenally used by penona oT both BAKSfl when the permita. In the " Encyclopedia
rirer in Hyde Park ww iTer. ha eaw foar g«Dtl«tD<m there deoce, IT the eipreulon may be allowed, a mianet, in ■^^**«. with ai mnch ease and, perhapa, more elegance, than in a m i Qthen again, by turning and winding with much adrolQuao, have readily ■aion deioribed npon the ice all the latten in the alphabet.
Bkalea are of Tariooi fbmu, and dllt^ in their make, according to tha aersnl GonnMea in which they ar« need. In UngUod, where they are intended for amoiement only, a mnch lighter deeorlption ia made tiuo in Hcllarkd or Rnaaia, where, in the winler, Ibey form one of Che principal modes of traTslling. even for great diatancee. The shape of the iron givselha peculiar Ibatnre to the akale. In the Donhom conntriaa it ia made to project liji or eight inahea beyond the wood, and curl apwarda at the extavmity, to naaf ly tiie height of the kuee ; in lApland the iron pnyecta nearly two f»t. The rcswm fbr thkg ii Tery olear. It enabiM the ekaler to glide esAily over the which invariably Of
ironfl not made ao, the inhabitanta o
lid n
it being a commoD baskets tbll of egpii-
T to the varioni arliolce which they MmetiD
Skates aie made JI«(«I and jiioiit: foryomig beginners the former legsrds salMy ; bnC with the lallor only can velocity and elegance acquired. The blade of (h« skate should not project mnch beygnd ths wood, or, when the skater bea™ forward, the hind part of the foot will be raised too much from the ice, (he back of the leg liable to become cnunped. and the power of scriking out greatly decreased. A qnarter of an ineh in Uiickness. and about three-qnerters of an inch in height, are proportionate dimensione for (he bUdet of ikMes. High-bladed skalea are
SEATINQ.
SSI
OtDgtraam tar beginaen. Mid nquira coniMenblt eiettioa of Uis mniclM to keep lbs ankle gtilT, whils the ntarer the IMt an brought lo ttae Ice. wUhoot riiking theii GontActf Hie leaa will be that ibBin, and tii« greater bhe i^ctli^ of moTtag in all direc- tions. The bladei ihoold be lUghtl; oorved *t the boUom, u tUa ram astiats the ekuer In tnrning silher heel or toe outwards or tmraide wltb rapidly. Previooelr to gotng on the loe. the learner ahonld pnctiie both mlUng abtnit with hie ekatee on
glf on etlber foot.
aim, — The old-rMhloiied broad ■Dkle-atrap. with two large rings, is DOW but little used ; it pneeed eo much on the back put of Uie ankle u to preveut t2ie play of the foot, and frequently gave much pain. Having bored a hole In the heel of eaeh boot jtut large enough to recidTe Oie psffs, fft]A your handkerchleT ap into e pad, on which kneel with your right knee, and put os the lell ekaUi lint i thea kneel on the left knee while adjusting the right (kale. The long single etiap, passed twice tbrongh the skate and crossed on the foot, is found to be sufBdent, prorlded the skate be well OisteDecl into the heal of the boot ; a back stnp, however, may be need by The spring skate, in which then is no wood. Is piefOTTsd by
leaning on the iittidt tdge of the skate, and bending slightly lorwanL When you have slid eboot two yards OD that t>>ot, pal the other on the Ice, and gently throw your welgbl upon It, striking oat in the sane manner apon the ineida edge, and so on with each foot altertiately. Pig, l represents the altltade oC a learner at first starting olT When you wish to slop, raise the toee from the ioe, and net on yoor heele. as In Fig. 1, bend the body forwards gTadaally. and do not auempt lo lean backwards, the certain conse- qoanoe of whloh wonld be a aereie UL A sbok is need by some beglnnen to steady
322
8KATINO.
tbenuelyes, but we do not adviae it; it is better, at flnt, to haTe the snpport of a companion who can skate (Fig. 3), and by degrees he may leave yon to your own exertions. Above sU things, do not be disheartened by a few &l]s.
HOW vo piavoaif ves tabiovs xtolutiovs.
Before the skater attempts to cat flgores and other devices, he mnst be able to skate on the outside edge of the skate, to skate backwards, and to torn round. The outnds edge implies what it is by its name ; when acquired, it sends yon exactly in opposite directions, on both sides, to what the ineide edge does. In explanation : — Suppose that yon are skating on the right foot, it is easy to turn to the left, but not so to the
right ; to efibct which you most use the outside edge, by
striking out upon it either foot, inclining at the same
time the skate, the leg, the body, and the head, towards
whichever side you are
skating, holding the
other foot raised up
behind, and rounding
the arms. The right
hand should be raised
towards the head in
skating on the left
outside edge, and the
left hand when skat- ing on the right out- Flr. 4. side edge, as in Fig. 4.
The most difficult forward movement is the cross out- side edge, which is done by passing one leg across the other, and striking out with the foot as it comes down on the ice. As the foot on which you first Fl^. 6.
rested disengages itself (which it will do as yon proceed) from the crossed-leg position, throw that leg over the other, and, by continuing this, you will soon leani to sweep round on either side with ease. This is called Ae Mercury figure.
The salute in a right line is not easy of execution. Having first struck out, yon must place the feet in a horizontal line, elevating and rounding the arms (Fig. 6). Continue the movement as long as you can, or think fit to do so. This attitude, though difiicult, is frequently practised by good skaters.
Th£ salute in a curved line is much easier. Having started, you put your feet in the position you would adopt to describe the salute in a right line (see Fig. 6), only less horizontally. The head and body must be upright, the arms rounded, the hands placed on tho haunches ; in this position you describe a circle. You then draw yonr» self up, the knees having become slightly bent, and, raising tho right or left foot, pro- pare for another 6volution ; as either striking out straight forward, or towards one aide. To describe circles and curves will be found the most graceful and neeflil of
pToporUoBMI (o ttie n daaonbiug. Strike out rm I outward edge, tnrain^ in
upon. YoDT Af ee lowmrda tha ■houldsr oppo- Bi(» Uu4 wluoh dinoU the geneni mamsBni of th« aide
hsad, and tlia other bc)< downwardg, in (be directuiTi of the left dMOribing (he '— ^; -:. The hips moBt be kept Id. ana lb» ^ ~ bent ili^itly M t
eiW leg mi so modify bj
d w^ht uid poaitlan the lmpnl» ri.rwBrd, ud la
IT tirelt <M tit intiiit edge fontardt, yon mnst Hie pisos of Cork, or any olhar lidht body, ■ take t, Boffloient run, and sCnke out on t
nniBl Diannrr \ bnt if JOQ dnire to piroiulte or larD round, yr vbieh yoD do not akua over that dd which yon do, and, froi
yonr body in order lo detcrlhe the enrre, yoo ipin round on M on * piTOC
SEATING.
jaa miut InoUna tba bead ud bodj lUghU; Ibrwitrd, in ocd«r
of giavity.
rrom tba loa (Me Fl(t. S) i by Uiis opantioD tscb foot will dewinbe ui uc or Hgmant oT ■ oircla, SLcmld yoa teal TonnelT to be losing jaar eqnilibriam. bring boiA ■
ioD lj parfonned
&itd oocauianAJlj , by the he bip.. Retrofirade t diObr from onUnary corrtB by th^ dinctim ooty i uid at flrU dghl
panoD cannot zooTe baokwanle with the ■
backwards, 'hich jon M« not leMiue.
To turn nmnd, brios eilher bMl bebind the oUm, uid job lum w a matier af cuurvA. Da not torn too Bacidimly, or 70a may fklL
B; careTiill/ attsndiag to iLs abore directioaii, willi praotlce, }au will be able lo cat the numsrical flgurea, or aoj derioe that jon maj niah. The flgojo S I4 Um Iwit pnctico. aiid is deacribed by complsting the circle on the oatAide sdge fonraid. Tbii ia perfonned by croaaing the legs, and itrikiDg from the oaiside inateid oT the iuslde edge. To croaa ttao lags, the akaler, aa he diawa to the cloae of the itrakg na big right leg, mom throw the left qoita acroaa it, which will cauae him to preae hard on the oalaideor the right akau.lhim which he muu liuwidiataly atrlke, throwing back the left arm and Imkiag aimnltaneinuly orer the left Moulder, ao M to bring him well open the sutaide edge or the left skate. The S ia tormHl by completing a perfect rlrcle, in (he nuuiner deacribed, on each leg, before changing the fOot. The fignie 3, which ia iwrfbnned on ihe inaido edge backwarda. may next be practiaed.
naatime haa been lately teviTsd ; and. under the oaine of ladoor Skates, a improvement open the "|«tent rolle™" which were introduced into a Be Id a pantomime a quarter oT a cenbuy ago. It appeam that Ur. Jackaon le American Champion Bkster," bethcoght him thai It iroald be a good lie in inninier aa well aa winter. He Ihetefbre contrlTed to fli (bur India- sra OD iron flvmea. CMlh frame having a piece twned up in front ; Uios 1 pair oT akato. by the aid of which he aitoniahed people wiUi hla walUins. turning, twia^ng round and round, and baokwarda and ferwarda, and in all maoner of cnrree and angles on a oommoa Qoor. Albar a time some clever apcculater Uud down a floor of artificial ice, and ao rendered the roller-akatea mnch mere eaay to practiae in. BeieDM and iOTeDtioa have thua rendered akMcn independent of ftnat.
The Toller'akate ii a aimple contrivance, which auy ingeuloot boy can manage for himself. It conaisCfl of an iron or wooden fMme, to which ii tMteued bur lilUe wheeli, with India-rubber tii The wheela roll freely, each wheel on lie own axil, and
le you cas penorm all the flgnm comuionly in the ice. But there ia no reaBOn why the roller-ikatea ebould be k^r U^. If made a Ultle atTonger. they might be advanisgeoualy imployrr n Toada, 10 Uie eaving of time and the incieaae of pleaauro.
SaS SLIDING.
OOirOLDDIKO OBBnTA.nOVB.
The yonng skater Bhoold ayoid both very rongh and wery amooth ioe ; he most be fearleas, btit not too violent in his motiona, and ahonld never be in a hurry ; he must avoid looking downwards to see how hia feet act, and should recover his balanoo between each stroke. For safety, hia body may be bent slightly forward during hia first essays, but when he has acquired sufElcient confidence, he should bear himself erect, carry his head well up, and always turn his fitoe in the direction of the line he purposes describing.
He should wear flannel next hia chest to absorb the perspiration caused by the exercise, and avoid skating against the wind, if of a delicate constitution. When unexpected danger arises, he should strive to be perfectly collected. If surrounded by rotten ice he must crawl on his hands and knees, that the support of his weight may be distributed. If he fall upon rotten ice at ftdl length, he must roll away from it towards firmer ice ; and should he be so unlucky aa to get into a hole, he must extend both arms outwards in opposite directions upon the snr&ce of the ice, and tread water antil assistance be rendered him. A plank or ladder ofBer the beat means of extrica- tion, either being easily pushed along the ice ; or a rope may be thrown to the person immersed ; but we hope our young readers by prudence and caution will avoid the neceaaity of their application.
:tJ^^l^
LIDING is one of the diversions aaeribed to the yoong men of London by Fitzstophen, and, as fiur as one can judge fi?om his description of the sport, it difibred not in the performance fh>m the method used by the boya of our own time. He mentions another kind of pastime upon the ice, which is even now practised by boys in several parts of England ; his words are to this eflbct : " Others make a seat of ioe, as large aa a millstone, and having placed one of their companions upon it, they draw him along, when it sometimes happens, that moving on slippery places, th^y all fidl down headlong." Sledges are, now-a-daya, also uned, which being extended from a centre, by means of a strong rope, those who are seated in them are moved round with great velocity, and form an extensive circle. Sliding is perrormed by taking a short run (gradually increasing thb speed aa yon approach the slide), and simultaneously jumping on the left foot, and striking out forwards with the right. You maintain your balance by varying the position of the arms, which are raised upwards and slightly curved, the nails of both hands pointing towards the head.
In accomplishing a long slide when the impetus you have first acquired iUla to carry you the entire length, it may be revived by slightly stooping and then quickly
CDRUNS. S37
mkCng Toor bodj, U the nun* tini* langing Ibrnidi wltli (hs right ittii ■■ In
Ths poiiliini of tha feet dvpandi estinly apoii Chs capmblli^ and wQl of (ha
kBVptsg the inwafd aid^ of Iba Cat clOM logatbar. wilh
il» loea forward in the directton abont to be lakeii. Id this pooitioD CbB allder jam kcquii* the ut of balanoing hinuelf while he altei-Dat«)y miaefl Iho foot and •Sdia npos the other. Two small atonea sre sometimes ptiKWd abont midway op the ■Hde at each a dlMance apart that those sliding «n only pass the goal thus indleatad upon DIM tbvt without displacing the Monee, Da not gn out of temper; keep your UlsiiM ta well ae yon can, and ne^
rciLDO is a sport npon Che ice cammdn in ScoUsnd, where it is played by all classes dDiiii^ the winter, wherover the ice is strong enough to bear. Curling Ghtba aiv f^^'Vud sll o¥er Bcotlnnd. and have lately been introduced Inta Bngland, Canada, and v^rioa parts of Korth America ; and bimtpnit. or matches, are made in which all
Curling is played with p***^-^ roond stonea about nine tneha in diameter, each
which ve Ensde with holes or hondlea, to eauble ihe pUyer to hnrl at a point or mark. ^A game is ployed in tJie following way '• — Sides are made ap. nsosHy fOnr agnin tnor, or sii against six. with a director (who is ■Q'led the Mp) tbr each side, certain 1«i^ of lee, at Uiir^ or forty yards in length by eight or nine in width. ■tea (boeeB. This is oallad tba rink. At eaoh end of ths rini, oirolaa oBlled broui
A line ii dmrn Umngh ilie
The lOore in luually thlT^-one pointa^ aod each pl^er tiuowB tram the Btuting- plaoe io Uie opposite lee. taUnir alternftta throws. The stone* nbioh tkll to pus the hog eoore moat disUwt &om the plt^er do not coont ; and bU the stones thrown tovraniA the t«o sre measured, and thoes which are nearest to the cetitre of the brongh sje marked Vo the players, or the tide, throwiofc tham. Bach side has asuignsd In it one of the sides or the Ions line, and all Htonea which roll on tiie wrong side count to the players' oppozwnts. When tho stonas haTO been thrown from one end Io the other they ore thrown back a^aia, as in Qaolte. Varions minnu mles and regulations are observed in BcolUnd ; bat what wo haTe said will be Bofflcient, we t^cf , to enable soy company of boys to play ft Curling match J and as ice is not so commoD In Rngland as it is north of the Tweed, there is ao reason why Curling shonid not be pl^ed in any wcBlter in any field or open space j or that Enghah boye. already known as gcxid CrickoUis, should not be
#v •
th* pment da;, tbare i> Ktntity t.
Da Singing Bird of noma kind I* Lin
Hinwhicb
kept. The
Lark may now be lUrly tald to
Inmata of the palace ODd the
1 lillli) CroldOnch, bania with '^ chrli pEpiD^ -," Che Canary in hie neat cofce, placed
the mitrnUEii'tle and ggraninme oT the psrLonr window, amnsefl rata girl; ttjo lUaokhird, in hi* wicker booH, huDg nnder the
i^loddeue tho hcut of Che roilioi and every bird that Oies aflbnla
I in the keeping- of birdi, bat all do not know
wotde *j to the miona
Birda are taken by twiga, ameared with bixd-Ume, and by neta and trapa, to allnro them to which, deooya, or birdi tliat are tnuned fer the pnrpoee, are Freonently •mployed. Uany panoni, who gain their livelihood bj- bird-calohing, are as akiUUl
BIED8.
tn Uuir imItBtlDn of ttw tuIqiu notn, f to tajierttae the noonstlir of a daooy ( to
•oqnin this (brt» howQrer, thootfb aidad by Uib bird-call, would dcmuid too much tiSH Bjid Ubanrfrom our naden. Deooj-birda ■hould be taken irild, uid when fbll-grDini \ u thoM reared tr-im Oui neat Hldom knoir the eoU-aote anlBcieiUl; well ; and when tbnj do. tbey nrely repeat it alten enough.
HBTmg urivnl at (he epol which ia ftvqaODted hj the birdi ;oa wish to take, plaw
OTBT with brancboe, thai the binls may not eee siih other ; for in thac oase Cbe wild birds will not approach, nor will Uie decey-birda give out the oall^note. Btout forked (wigB. DmDared otdt with bird-Ume, ahould be fixed firmly in the earth clo» to the decoy-ca^ies, mA, attar ■ little time, the ttnafxn. allond by the call of the deooye, will alight npon the twiga. To prerent their eacapiDg, you must be nady to aecure thDm immediately they get limed. Bird-lime may be porchaaad at the blrd-Ancier^a ; ■nd where it can bo coDveoieatly obtained in thig way, it ie far preferable to making it, which is a (roublcBome. aod by no means cleanly operation. The following, howetar. la the method !— In the moDth oT June, peel the bark at holly from the tree, and boil it with water la a pipkin, nntil the grey bark aeparatoB from the green ; strain the water and the grey bark off, and place the green bark Dpon a large flat stone, whieb should prerioDBly he moialened : aovat It orer wi^ maheB, and in the couree of a fart> night It will tnrn to a aUmy matter. It ahonld then be beaten np in a mortar tDU it bsooioea fiim. and wall oleaoiBd by waabing ; alter which it may be kept in an csilhea jar. To Die it, melt a small portion, with a httle gooae.greaae, overtbe fire In a pipkin* and dip the twiga In it.
To insure suocees in oaptnring fairda In the Selda you ranat rise Tvry early, shortly after daybreak, Indeed ; tor, altci that the little creacacea are too bag
Ibr then the loia of Uborty make* them refnae their food, and die of buoget.
Tboae who may prefer reai^
ing birds from the neet to the
trouble of catohing them, may,
for a trifle, obtain a brood of
yoong onee Ttvom almoat aoy
Tillage lad. But our London
Men'la, who hsTe neither the
opportnnity of catohing their
oeetUiiga, will do well to lelect their stock from (be shop of
3 nird'fancicr. eren though at an increaao of cost, ia preference to
e ntnllH of the itinerant vendora who Hwarm the Btreets in tiie biveding
rarely have any bat old blrda, or oewiy-canght bnachsn.
BINGINO BIBDS.
S3t
IfXIB AHD TBAM.
Theae ore of TBirioas kmds, some of the most simple of which we now describe. Horse-hair Nooset. — ^In the wicter, when the days are bright* and the ground covered with snow, take several yards of twine, and fasten to them horse-hair nooses, six inches asnnder. At intervals of about eight or teu yards, drive stoat pegs into the ground, to which the twine should be secured. Strew some oats or wheat along the ^e, and the birds coming to feed will catch themselves in the nooses. The instant th^ are caught, you must release and cage them, or they will strangle themselves.
Ths Springle. — This is one of the most excellent traps in use, and is made in the following manner : — ^At the smaller end of a hazel switch, four feet long, which is caUed the spring, tie a piece of string, about fifteen inches in length ; nearly at the other end of this string, the catch (which is a little bit of wood, half an inch long, about half as broad, and one quarter as thick) is fastened ; a little bit of the wood must be shaved off on the flat side of one end of it, to adapt it for a notch, in another part of the springle ; a loose slip-knot, made of a couple of long, stout horse-hairs, is then to be fastened to the end of the string below the catch — and thus one part of your springle is complete. Next procure a smaller switch, about a foot and a half in length, bend back the smaller end, and fasten it within an inch 3r so of the ^ckor end, in which a notch must be cut to receive the thin end of the catch ; this is the spread ; a stump, and a bender, which is another pliant bit of switch, each a foot and a half in length, will oomplete the springle. It is set in the following manner : — ^Thrust the stump No. 1 into the ground; place the bow of what is called the
spreader over it, as No. 2; then, about the length of the spreader from the stump, push
the two ends of the bender securely into the ground, as No. 9 ; next plant the thick end of the long switch or spring at a convenient distance from the bender ; bend it down until you can put one end of the catch upward, on the inside of the bender ; then lift the spreader an inch from the ground, place the smaller end of the catch in the notch, and thus the spreader will be supported, and the springer retained from springing up. Now lay the hair slip-knot round the spreader and stump, and scatter such grain or seeds as are fit for the bird you wish to oatch, inside it. Scatter also a small quanti^ of the same sort of grain or seeds with which your trap is baited, lightly and sparingly, for some distance around the springle, so as to attract and lead the bird by degrees to the principal bait within the spreader of the trap. Your springle is now complete, and will appear as in the out. The bird, attracted by the bait, approaches by degrees, and at length perches upon the spreader, which ialls with its weight ; the oatch is thus released, the springer flies up, and the bird is caught in the hair noose, by the neck, wing, body, or legs. You must take
BiNODiG Bmns.
uJia him ; oUierwiia h> will eiUier bt Mnm^led. m
iboDlil ba driTBn inlo the gronnil, batwom which, wm another piece lapportlag the coTer-brlolc, e forked twig ^ must be piMed horuontallr. The trap biiag aet. the baiC n at the bot(4)ta» uid aL«o apoD Ibe Hidea of the The weigbl of tbe bird elighting on the forked iU caiue the mpporting of the eover-bHok to giYe id thtu aeciin the bird. In wlting this tnp, can placed es ba fhU npon the end bfiek, otherwise iu
jerk tlie string qoickl;, and (he si beosngbt.
Tranmelt. — Thee* are flsel; mesbed □ or twentj yards long, need for otcTiing
gronnd. The nets axe attached by packthread ribs to two tang polw eitncQltlee. In dark c]oad7 nighte, tbej should be carried abnat half a yard from the gmuDd, bir two persine, who mnst sweep the net alonR the fnrinDd at every three or four stepa. so that the blnl* majr be dlMiirtied ; and opon their fljrtng np, lim nets must be immediately dropped.
HaTJnR Bocceeded in taking your bttda. yon most oareral^ and tenderly tie thefr wingH- If OiBJ betray mnch agitatjon, they should, sa eoon ai they are bnmgbt home, lie put into a dark place, or the ca^es oorered OTsr for a short time, until they are re- conciled to their prisons. IT yon neglect Ihew preoautlDnE, tbey will beat Ibemselvea about in the cage, sad become seriously iiumnl.
The best method of accnsloming a newlj taken rail-grown bird to iM chanRe oT food, is to IcaTe it quiet in ita cage for some bonrv witbout diBturbance. It must then 1* plimged Id fteah water, and immediately replacsd in its cage. Although 11 may at Qrst appear exhausted, it will soon recover, and readily eU whatever food is given to It ; the bathing having the eflbct of increaaing its appetite- Some deUcatc birds eat with greedinees as B4»on as they ere brought into the house ; bat thia la an unnkvonr- noleiigni while those which mope for some hours, recover by degrwa. and an most likely to beroaied.
SINGING BIRDS. SU
Witli reipect to neatUngs, grrai oare ia neceasu; in ulectiiig the prwiias Uma R>r UUng tbem. Geuerall; spwIdDB, ic 1b whea Uw quills ot tbe uil-IMUian have ■ppeand, and th« other fteiben begin to grow, the eyes not boisg qoJle open. If Temoved earlier^ their Btomache will not dij(«t their new food ; if later, it will be diftUmlt lo make thera open their beakg. Then ore KHne birdi. howerer, with whom
Every ca^ed bird ahould have an abode mitable to Its tlie, habile, 1mA dlapoeitioti. Gcnenll? tpealdiig, a« rauoh room »e poeeible ebaald be sSbrded, partionlarly to fall grown bti^ ; with those leand from the nest, this is unnecessary ; and tiiare an some mature birds that never ^ng nnlees confined within narrow limits. In every case cleaniinesa is important and highly oondDoive to ^le healUi of ^le birds. AlthooHrli it wonld not be desinble to clean onl the cage ever; day, a* this wonld diatwb (be bird oftener than neceessiy, yet it gbonld not be negleeted leoger than three or fbar days. One of the chief oonseqaences of soch n^leot is diseased foet, lo which domea- Uoued birds an very liable, partjcolarly Idrks : great attention is therelbre required in &«qaenll7 aiamlziing them. The dirt should be removed bf oocaeiODall; loakliig
Tbs CiKisv's Ciai is made in a greaUr variety of forms than that of any other
bird. It has nsaally three penhea, and a drawer at the bonaia to tMriliisie the
Oleaoing of the cage. A water-bolLle is placed in one comer and the food-drawer runs
Bloog one of the sides. A tin or
wooden lop is sometimea placed over
this, and aevetat round holes are cot
in it, throogb which the bird gela at
his food withont scaOering It aboat.
The Canaij'a oage may also be need
for Unneu ami an kinds of FiDOhQs.
It otn be bonght at almost any price,
(Tom two to twenty shillings. The '
eagea fOrCanarlea, Linnets, and PiucheH may be hiiag fWnn the celling or against
the wall, Bcoordlng to circomstancea. If the window hoe the south. It will be well to
shade the cs^ with a pieee of thitl silk or network dnring Uie beat of the day, as
Inequalities of tempeiatore aie Ttirj ittjarioai to all staging bird*.
Tsii NieEmaiLs's Ciei Is wired only in front, (he beck aod ddea being fOmwd
of wood. It should lut be leas than a foot and a half in length, by about Ofje In width, and rather more than one in heigh:. The top ebould be I arohed, and covered with linen, or soft staff, stretched so Uiat the rd may not It^ure his bend, by darting Dp when singing. There onld be two pervhes, both covered with solt material like the p, that tbe bird'a feet may not Income injured. The feeding- lugh is placed In one of tbe front oomera. and a drlnking-glasa
In the other. The Nightingale's cage cost* from hslf-a-mown te twenty shlUinga.
lai hu > raised projeoiae tmr-ftvnt, whi<±, irlth the aim, 1* fonnfld of wire i mod s elopiDg roof ezul backboard, made of wood, A wauu- slaw ie placed on one aide, and on the otber a dnw-bos for food. Wtlhin the bow. a freali turf ■hoold be placed ; and aa tbe bird genenlly roOEte npOD it. or Bt tha boOom of tbe eaga. no percb ie required. A good ca^ for a larlc will ooA fft>m half-a-
Hi LiHirtT'a Cia* i< of an obloni; ehnpe. witod at the top. no Bides, and tbe Ihiat ; the back being of wood. It contains
bo bought for ttam two iMUinga to five ahilUiiKi. Tbia cag« likewise serve for aU kinds of Finehee.
I and ftoot ore formed of wicker ruiis, runnini; throagh wooden ^.bnra. Tbe food and wat«r an placed in two little projecting « St the Bide, and there is a drawer ai the bottom for cleaning -, o omitted in Ibe old-fsahioaeil wicker cage*. Tha prieo of the Improved b will atao do for Thntabee. variea fhiin three to twenty ahillinga. Thi BsiiDOia Ciei, If it is to be anepended against tbe side of a room, baa the ^ut, top, and eidee of wire, and tbe bock of wood ;
of food which appro&ehee neoreet to what they have be il slate. With foreign birds ihia is olten impoauble ; and it is. thorslbn. neoeesary lo use great cantion in giadDBll; babitoating ttaom to the change. Borne hardy birds are very aoon reconciled to the diffenmce i bnt the more delicate aorta pine and refuse erary deacriptionof food that ia offered to them, fiecarel^i] not to overfeed the yoong ; give them snBlcient, bnt in amall qnantiiica. at intervals of two or thr« boniB I and let the food be btih every day, as iiale or sour food occasions ratal disordere. For yonng birds, hemp-seed should always be bruised ; and rape and canary, both icalded and braised. Neatlinga nnialty raqojre to be Ibd ttom five or ib
BINGING BIRDS. 3S5
o'clock in the momiaff, until abonft the aame time in the eyening. The food-box lepieeented in our engraving ie an excellent contrivaoae for mwinting yoong birds in feeding themeelves. It is generally sos- ponded by two hooks to the inside bars of the breeding cage.
The peculiar food of the various birds is given with the direc- tions for their treatment ; bat the two following pastes may be generally employed. The first for Canaries, Goldfinches, and birds that eat seeds only ; and the second, for those feeding both on seeds and insects, as Chaffinches, Bullfinches, and Larks : —
Qerman Paste (No. 1). — Take the crumb of well-baked stale white bread, and having soaked it in clean water about half an hour, squcese out the moisture, and add to the bread two-thirds of the same quantity of well sifted barley-meal ; then pour boiling milk over the mixture, and stir it well together.
German Paste (No. 2). — ^Take the crust of bread, and moisten it as directed above ; pfQt it into a stone mortar, and, having added some carrot, finely grated, and a few spoonfiils of fine barley or wheat meal, grind the whole well together with a pestle. Both these pastes should be made flresh, at least every alternate day. German Paste properly prepared may be obtained of all bird-fonciers.
When flesh meat is given, it should be invariably treed fh)m every portion of fiit, fibre, and sinew. Many birds are choked by pieces getting entangled about the ^ngue. This may be discovered by their gasping, and making a vomiting motion. When this happens, take the bird in your hand, and gently open its mouth with a quill toothpick or clean pen, and carenilly remove the obstruction. Some white sugar- candy should then be dissolved in water, and the food moistened with it.
THE VARIOUS BIRDS.
^-^ij
There are many Singing Birds which it would be foreign to our purpose to describe ; we therefore select only those which are the best known and most admired, making such observatioDS on their habits, food, '(diseases, etc., as wiU be found usefUl to the young bird-foncier.
THX CAjrA.aT
Breeds in a cage, and is seldom found in a natural state in our climate. The choicest Canaries are of a bright yellow, with jet black spots. The next in beauty is the mealp bird, so termed from the mealy kind of colour which covers his feathers. The third sort is the mottled bird, white, mottled with black or brownish spots. There are also some that are all yellow, or all white, and some of a grey hue. In selecting your Canary, chose the boldest bird. If he stand up briskly, without crouching or shrink- ing, and his eyes look cheerful and not drowqr, he is healthy ; but if he mopes and ol^» his head under his wing, do not have him at any price. When in perfect health.
thadCDppliisortliBOviarylirDaDd,banl,uidw)ilUi btit If t( ta nwMi. aod of a dinr whlla aolDnr, tha Unl ii dueMed.
TbenBit point i» the goodnsH of H««ons. Borne biidj will opaa like tha Nigbtln- I gale, uul end like Ihs Titluk. Other* will begin like
tba Bkylark. Knd lUl inlo the DOtee of (he Kigbiiiigiila ; while Bome aing with diapleuing ah rill mm It is thfflaftue nacaaaai7» before yon pnrohaaeyoor CtOArj^ that ;oa ahoold hear it atng tn a aapuate oage.
BnediMg.^Cmaiitt oaaall; begin in April, and breed in Utj and Jooe. and aomeCiniea In l-aty or AugnB. Be euefal to aeleoi large, atrong, health; binle for breeding. Towaidt the middle of Maroh pat a cook and a han into * amall cage ; and whan joat fkmillar with each other, remove tliem to the breeding cage. You mnat fnmiih the biidj with a net of nuff nesla, each *a One bay, wool. fWthera, ootton, and moaa, whiob may be bonght at the bird-ahopa ready mtxed. The nest la generslly oomplMed in threa or four days ; and the hen omuOly lay* toax or fl™ ogge, white, with small red apote. Bhe alts fonrieen days. Let there be two boxes la the cage for the ben to baild in. as she will K]mBfiimee batch a aeoood brood before the first can fly, leartitg the ecek to bring them ap^ while she breeds in the other box. The breeding cage eboatd be idaoed to bee the morning san ; and when the weather fa warm, the windows ahonld be opmed, as the frraih air atrongthans the yonng birda. Be caraful in keepliig the cage very clean, and weU mpplied with flue dry gravel or sand.
Aod.~-While pairing, feed with boiled egg. bread, maw seed, and a little scalded rape, mixed ^ and. occaAlooally. groandsel run to seed. Give tiiem the bsaib when they have young, and let it be fntb every day. Let them have a few cabbage-teCtDoe lesvea now and then, and n-aqneut^ a little chlckweed wtth aeeds on It. Towards Jane, give them shepherd's pune ; and plantain dtuiog July and AngnaL Wbeo the young ones can fMd themselTei, rmnoTe them to separate oages. and give tbsm the yulk of egg, boiled bard, with a tlltia white bread, and scalded raps seed, to which add a small qusnUty oT maw seed. The whole ehould be well mixed together, and supplied i^vab erery day. Tbey msy also be fed npon rape and canary. When they haie done monlting, they may be fSd like the old birds.
Dutatti. — The Canary is subject to a kind of ■arfai^ which arises either l^otn cold, or eating too greedily of green fbod, or rank chickweed. If you blow the fbatbera on the belly, and find it swelled and full of little red Telns, then yon will know youi' Canary is surfeited. In that caiae yon most keep him warm, and mix oat- meal among the seed for Uiree or fDur daya, to cleanse him ; but if too loose, give him maw seed and bniised hemp, or maw seed and balled bread and milk instead, and put a little saBhm into the water. You may likewise take milM, bemp, maw, rape, and oanary, as much of each as will lie on a aixpecoe. and let them just boil np wiih a llttla water to moiatan them. Let the whole cool into a paste, and add abonl a qoartar
SINaiKG BIRDS. 837
of A new laid egg. boiled hard, and a little lettaoe eeed. The Canazy ia likewiae tab^eot to the pip, which ia a little pimple on the vent. If it doee not anbdde in a ahort time, the pimple ahonld be opened with a needle ; and, after it haa diacharged, a little wet iwnnded loaf rngar ahonld be applied to the part. The yellow aoab ia another dIawiHO whioh attacka the head and eyes of the Canazy ; it may be onred by anointing with ikeah batter or lard. When ihia bird begina to moult, he is melancholy, and hia ptnmage beoomea rough. He frequently aleepa during the day, with his head under hia wing; and, if a young bird, the cage ia oorered with down and amaU feathers, whioh the young onea cast the first year ; the tail and large feathers are cast the second year. Be sure to keep your bird warm when moulting. Set him in the sunahine, oareftiUy guard him from oold and wind, and feed him with nouriahing food.
TEM nOBTDIttALl
Builda low, in thickset thorny hedges, near sandy hills, or in a grove or orchard* among thick-leaved branches ; sometimes on a little riaing ground ; and having fixed on a spot, of whioh it takea exclusive possession, generally returns to it eveiy year.
The Nightingale is a migratoiy bird, and anivea in thia countiy in April or May, and departs in September. It ia universally deemed the king of singing birds, and admits of no competitor, but will die rather than be outdone. Its chief rival is the Woodlark. When in confinement the Nightingale will sing throughout the year, except when moulting. Those reared from the nest prove better birds than those taken fhll grown. The hen bird is smaller, duller in colour, and has a greenish hue on the back. She is not so erect aa the male, her eyes are smaller and less lively, and her throat is not so white. Hale neeUings are distinguished by being marked with white ; and those which have a white throat are sure to be males.
Nestlings may be taken at the middle or latter end of May ; but th^ should not be removed till ftiUy fledged, aa they are very tender birds. The nest, when discovered, should be marked and watched, tor its low situation exposing the birds to the rapacity of animals, they sometimes quit the nest even before th^ can fly. The readiest way of finding the young onee, is to observe where the cook sings, and to stick a few meal-worms on the thorns near the spot. Conceal yourself ; and when he takee them, notice where he carries them, and the loud *ise made 1^ the young onee while he ia feeding them, will direct you to the place. As soon as you have taken the nest, place it in a small basket, and cover it up warm, for the young ones are very susceptible of cold, and will soon die if exposed to it. Begin to feed them on small caterpillars, meal-worms, or fresh ants* eggs, mixed with a small portion of white bread, grated and moistened. As the Nightingale does not feed on grain, bread should be very sparingly given. When able to feed them- aelvea, put the young Nightingalea singly into cagea» with a little dry straw or moss at
22
336 BINaiNO BIBD8.
the bottom; and aflsw dajs aftarwrnrds, place a pan of water in the fiagie far ttMm to wash in. The ntoation c^ the ca^ most depend on the dispoaition of the bird, which can be diteoTerad hy Bhiffcing him to rarioaa paitR of the room, tiD, hy hia ilaiiiiftilnnn and singing, 70a find 70a have selected the right place. When th^ aie neuty fbll- grown, pat ante* mould at the bottom of the cage instead of the straw or moaa^
Food. — ^The natoral food of Nightingales is TaiioQS kinds of Jnserta, paiiaeiilarij little green catvpillan, fliea, gmbs, etc. ; and in the later nHmtha» berries. When first canght, give them meal-worma and fresh ants* eggs. When fresh ants' eggs cannot be procured, grate np dried beef, <n-heart, and carrot with dried ants* ^ga* whidi can be boazht at the bird-fancier'B. The Nightingale nnut alwaja be kept wdl eopirfied with water. In •»t*""*" and winter dried elderbercies ma j be mixed with the ants* eggs, with occawionally a little hard-boiled egg, or meat dried and powdered. A few meal-worms frtnn the miller's may be added to the food of these birds at aoij season. Never give fresh meat or soft egg to Nightingales.
iHseoset. — ^The health of the Nightingale soflfen most daring the period d moolting. Ita stomach, at that time, gets oat of order. This is seen hy the bird resting his head beneath his wing for some hooza, with his eyes half dosed, and his feathers mflled np. When yon observe these symptoms, give him ants' eggs and a spider or two, and steep some saffron in hia water till it ia tinged a deep orange ooloor. The bird is also liable to cnunp and othv diweases arising from damp, cold, and want of proper attention to cleanliness ; and, in antomn, he (k«qaently beoomea fist and hnaky, and refoses hia food. In both these canon let him have two or three spiders a day. When his (kt is reduced, keep him very warm and pnt saff^n in his water. Sometimes he ia afflictwl with atrophy, or wasting, when he becomes thin and haggard. Whoi this ia the case, give him a fig, chopped very small, with his meat, and make him swallow a hooae^nder. A msty nail should be pat into his water, which will operate as a tonic. After having been two or three years in confinement the Nightingale is liable to diseased fbei. To heal them, they most be freqoently soaked in warm water, and the loose skin and acalea, when sufficiently softened, tenderly removed. If they have become very wan, bathe them in warm water, dry them, and anoint them with ttttth laid or batter.
Bailds always on the ground, and generally in the rute of corn-fields or pastorea. The nest is mdely made of dry grass, and other vegetable stalks, and lined with fine hay, wool, and hair. The eggs are from three to five in number, of a dirty, whitish grey, speckled and blotched with brown. The hen sits on them a fortnight.
Nestling may be taken at the beginning of May, and should not be 1^ after they are ten days old, aa tb^ quit the nest very yov**;, especially in wet weather. Pot them in a small basket, with short clean hay at bottom, and cover them op close and warm. Feed them regularly and moderately, every two hours, with white bread and poppy or rape seed braised, and soaked in warm milk ; to which some antn^ egga, or minred lean meat, may be added after a dj^ or two. Let them be kept very ^ean, changing the h^ often. laa week*atiinethfly majbe lemovedtoalaiigeeagas pol
HINQINQ BIBD8. 3JB
ehuppad luf or Home bran tt tha botum, and (hUt it erarj do;. Wh«n able to had UmoMlTW. whlob Otaj nDl do ta abonl a maslli, p-n Ihsm di7 food, via., bread, eggi boQed hard, and hemp aead bmiied. When able to orack the leed, giTS it whole, with a littls bT«ad ommbled wi^ it. Then gire them a freeh nuf or gnat Ibrica a week, and di7 gjaTal at the boBomof the cage, wliichobaiiBeeraijda}'; and let tham have a linle frcah lean meat oocaaionally.
The Bkylark it u imitatiTe bird, asd when i a cage ihoold be kept from bearintt othen, i flireb old birdi have been known to adopt Uie aaag of enoh biidi u th^ an near. It ainga (rom eli ^ ' to eight months In Uie jear, and <> • long-lived bin], having been known to endme oooflnfiment tweniy oi are ksowi> by thair yellow colour, but fttll-grown blrdi aie not eo eaeily dJ Tie fbUowiag an the chief poinle oT dUTSrenoe ; — (he heel of the male la longer, reaohing beyond the knee Joint ; hie bneet te darker, and more apeakled with black, and ha haa a larger body. The female la amaller, hae no white line round tbe oheeka, is profoaely spotted witb blaok on the bank and breaet, and the bnaat Is of a pnrer while.
Aod.— The natural (bad is liueou (eapedally ante' eggs), seeds, osla, yoong buds, and the blad« of yonng grass. Having almd; given Instraotiona For tMding neetlings and TDong birds, wo have aaij to state, that when old birds a» flrst taken they must be tbd only on cala and poppy aeed; after which tha Qerman p plenty of gnea food, aa lelSioe, od lean meat and some ante' egg*.
IKwMn. — The Skylark is a hardy bird, tn and is also snbjeat to a yellow soiuf about the base of the beak. Otsta sr among its food, and give it tliree or Ibor woodlice, or a spider ca two, a
a smalleat of (he laika. It has a pleasing song, thoiigh It la miiy oompoaad of thfee notea. It Is a gfacefOI . bird, and takes great paliu in keeping Iteelf elaau ; tot whiob pnrpose it shonld be provided with a betbing- pas, and the water frequently "^^^g**^,
Thispnt^ mtle blrdbnilda on tlie ground, among the fone, oo moon and downe, or under a bush. Id a tuft of grass, In flelda and
> bling the Woodlark's, and Is composed of mm
and dried grsee, llnad with the same, but floDr,
of roota, wood, and hair. It !a;i twice a year.
Lomber, varying in oolonr, pink, grqy, brown, and
pala green i bnt in ■U Ihsn MtMlm, the ipaoin may M known by tlie ipcta, which ara ji^nnr t*-*" uiy othsr binl% vkd blended Into Uu Rnmnd eoUnir. nie ftmale diffbn Tery iligMly from tha in»le. lie thmrt, neck. Mid brout ■« of » paler jaQow i the white ipot In the woond Ul-EDMhv li BnaUa-, kod ths two Buivene baud! <m the wins* *i* whiter.
NaOins* "••J be lakan aboat the middle of Uay -, and their aitaation m«; be known by the or of the old birdi, whioh i« tender and pl^ntlTS, and iocreaaliiK in TBhemenoe aa tfaar approaob the seat. Whan taken, ooror them np warm, and nar themln tlie nuuun' dinctad tac akylarka.
Food.— The DaOml lOod of the IWaik i> all klnda ot fllaa. calsrpIllBia, beeUa*. and anta' egg* ', and gnal oue will be nqoind in leoonelUng It to the ohaa^ whioh it neeU with in Dooflacount. Aa eoon aa it 1* taken home, place it in a cttge foraiehod with tiro psrehea, and let it mnalo qniet for an hoar or two i thm gin it some tneal- woitna, ant*' eggi, or oaterpillaia. When it baa eaten (haac^ mix aomg more with the Qemian paate (No. 1).
Diteam. — It fteqasntly loaea ita fMhen oat or the monlting aaaaon, bealdet being ■abject to the Dana] illaiiaane of other birdi. If naglBOted, it will qoIoUy waste aw*j
and petiah. The nnnedy ia to give the bird Uie aort of Itood It ' ' '- '~ ' ' — '
a« anta' egga. m
ir than the Hkylaik, lAich it graMly
n form and ****^^'*i partionlarlf in a***g^"g aa it Aica, and aleo In remauiing
wlten it baa leaebad a oonudsrabla
to the air, wttb winga and tail expanded.
■ of thn Woodlark are exceedingly itnmg
it will not poor fmh ita aong in the pnaence of
The Woadlaik Ijoilda under green baska, in ■ bordering wooda, low in hedgea, high giaM, . oopae wood, or among bealb. The neat ia com- n interwoven with dry bladea of graaa and decayed leavea, and ia Unad with wool and hair, nie eg^ are from Ihiee to Are In nnmber, of a light gray oolonr, Taiiegaled with browniah Tiolat. The beak of the male ia black aboTa, brown below, sod inoliaea to a iimalii hoe at the tip. The crown of the head ia of a bright reddiah bnwn. maAed with four dark brown atnaki. The apper pert of the neok and back naombla the lop of the head in colour, and are covered with dark brown apota. The and of the back incUnea to browDiib grey, and the throat, breaat, and under part of the body are of a reUowiah white caet, Die two fanner beliig speckled with brown. The eoveita of Hie wing* and Ibathen of the tall an dark biuwo, and the Brat two of the laltar are maAed by a pinUah triasgnlar apot. The phmiage of Uw hmale la lOtogatluc palv
BDIOIKa BODS.
Ii lifhtv thu Iha mala'i. It oovarsd with m. [iiinliii nimilMr of ipoU.
HMtUnc* map be takm whoi tmtra dnr* o^ abcmt (hs flnt Ibrtol^it In Ukf, •Dd ibooliltwbdDiikiiU'sggiiniiiedwIlli bnad laaksdhimilk. Tti> dlncUoni glTv tx bringing up BijJtriM and TiUarka ihonld t» rollowad in nartng thla bird.
Ant. — In iprlng. befon ba eta tnA tnaecM and wonna, the food of tbe Toodlark fiooiiata of Iha joong bnda of liorba ud mtoi^uBaafla. In vaomer, ba Ibada chiaflf on luaaoU or wonoa i and doriDB Us antnmn, on poppy, miUat, n{ie aaaO, and oata. Whan Snt oansbt, ha ahonld ba put Into k oige with a, donhla parch, and fed with popp; aeadi and uta' aggt, to indoos him to aai. Straw tba food at tba bottom of Iha oaca, with plan^ of (uuL Tary tha food oeeaatonaltf with Oonnui puta (So, t).
DitKUU, — Tba WoodlaA ia liabla to tha diiMai ■"i""™*^ in daacxibing tha Bkyluk and TillBik i for whleh (ha aama rsmcdiea ihoold bo •mpl(7ad. Jodapendant, homTor, of thaaa, it ta fraqnently affiicted with one paooliar to Itaalf, irhloh atlaoka Iha
Dflaa ia tha only rvnodj,
Blnga thronghmit tha ymx, aiaapt when moultinj:. II nadHy aocpilna the notaa of oth^ birds, and when brongbl np from tiia naa^ maj alao tMi tatighl alia by whiatiing 10 It. Thay ahcnld ba kapt in aqnara oagaa, aa thay
(whlah ara ganarally mnuh too imall) ahonld ba anfllaiaDllr larga to admit of Iha inCrodnctlon o balhing-pan tar an hoar or two taeh i birda ling boat.
hadga, or In a foiaa buh. The neat
neat, and la oonpoaed of Aij weeda ai
twiga and moas, and lined with aoft wool, down of
plana, hair, aus. The aggi are tana foor to ili in
nnmbv, blnlah white, with a few
|>lnni end. Tbe fSathen on the ooak'i baok are browner than Iha han'a. Hold
the bli4 genlljr In j-oor hand and itrelib oat hia wing i If yon obaerre tba white
OB thne or fosr faatbuii olcan and bright, and raaOhlns qi to Iha qoilli, yon may
be Bare It la a eook, aa the white npon the han'a wing ia laea and &intar. The
famaln an nnaller than the malaa, and, whan uatllnga, nuy ba dlaHngnliihiiil by tlia
back bdng more gray than brown. Tha nala naatUnga nuty ba known bj their while
collar, and Irj their havlbg more white abont their winga uid laiL
Natlinga may be taken at ten dayg old, aboiiit tha middle of Kay, when the ehafta of tha fkathara hare jnit begnn to appear ; and win Itam tha aong of another bird all the better for being yoong. Corar them np wann, and (bad erery two bonra. ttom ate in the morning till alx or aeran In ^u eTanlng, on a mixtort of moialened emmb of whtta bcaad, aoakad i^e aaed, asd egg boiled liaid. Ba pankolar in Mtiag It b«
842 SINGING BIBDS.
freah eroiy day, as if it tnni aaar ft will aoonr them, and oooadoii diawuww and daatlu When th^ are able to feed themaelyea, wean them gradnally ftam soft food hj ghring them floalded rspe-eeed, and aAerwarda a mlxtnze of moiatened cnzmb (^ white bread, aoaked rape-aeed, and egg boiled hard.
The Linnet ia a distroBtfiil and soapioioaa bird, and rery difBonlt to be decoyed, rhey may aometimea be taken in the spring, with a good decoy-Urd and lime^twiga placed about the buah; and in aotmnn, by fastening lime-twiga to the atalka of lettooea mnning to seed, of whidh they ue very fond.
Food. — Their natural food consiata of all kinds of seed which th^ can shell. In the summer, they may be fed upon n^e-seed, not soaked ; but in the winter, raipe doea not agree with them for too long a period ; therefore, a little of the German paste (No.l) should be occasionally substituted, or some poppy seeds, with a flow graina oi salt mixed among them. Care, however, must be taken not to feed them too abundantly, or they will grow fiit and die.
Diasawt. — ^The Linnet ia generally a healtiiy bird, and, with care, will live in confinement for many years, though sometimes a swelling at the end of the rump will occasion him to mope. This, when ripe, must be pricked with a needle, and the pius let out, anointing the part with fireah butter, and feeding him for two or three days with lettuce seeds and leaves, or melon seeds chopped small. A little safDron should also be put in his water for a week or two. He is likewise occasionally troubled with a scouring, occasioned either by bad seeds or want of water. There are two or three kinda of this disease. The first veiy thin, with a black substance in the middle, not dangerous ; the second, gr^dsh, not so thin, but very sticky. In «ther of these oaaea, give him melon seeds shred, lettuce seeds or beet seeds bruised, and liquorice or saffron in his water. The third and worst kind ia the white clammy, which will prove mortal if not speedily remedied. For this purpose, clear away all other aeeds, and give flax seeds, and afterwards plantain seeds (green, or they will be of no use), or plantain leaves shred small, or a little bruised hemp seed, and now and then a little aeeded chickweed, adding white sugar-candy and a little chalk to the safflron and liquorice in his water. If this worst sort is not attended to early, the bird will lose hia appetite in a few daya, and then its recovery is hopeless.
THS GOLDFIirCH
Is a gentle, tractable bird, and eaaily acquires the notes of other birds, and ia capable of being taught a variety of wonderfbl feats. A cock Goldfinch and hen Canary will produce young partaking the songs and colours of both. It is a long-lived bird, and has been known to reach the age of twenty years.
The Goldfinch builda at the top of fhiit-trees when in blossom, on the extreme branches, and aometimea in the elder-tree, and among thorny hedges. The -nest is very small and neat, and is distinguished by the smoothness of its outward appear ance. The outside ia composed of moss, stalks of grass, slender twigs and fibres, curiously interwoven, and lined with wool, hair, and sallow down. The hen lays twice a year, and the eggs are aix or seven in number, of a whitish colour, marked
wmi dark nddiili brown spoM tl Uie large end. Tbe Itathara oa tb« lUga of Iha oook'a wing an ooal'blaok np to the ahoaldsr i bnt in tha hen tfaef are of a ilnUer blaok. IncHnmg Id gnr. The oock ii alio Imwriar on tbe baok. Ttia featban at tbe baaa of tbe bill In tike hai an brown ; and in tbe oock, black.
Ncatlingm m^ be taken in U^, bnt ahtmld be left till well fte^ered, ae tfasj an Tray tender biida. Whan tkkeo. wrap then f«ed thcsD sTvy two honn on poppy aeed, m of eaiiai; aeed, and ttie enuni anaked in milk. When able to giTB them oanai7 leed aa well a* aoft meat, till yon get them to feed on the i
ArI.— lu natonU Ibod aonaiala of vaiioni fclndi of aeede, ai thistlea, poppy, lettnn, rape, and eaoaij. Wbsn flrat oaogbt, gi^e It the eead yon otiaerve It to fbed on in tlie fielda, or liemp aeed, and afterwanla eanaiy, with ocoaaionaDy, eblckwaed, walcr-
fitaMaia. — The Ooldflnoh la a liealQiy bird, and seldom ont of order. Sickneu. wlien It happeaa. aiiaea almoat inTariably Ihim inattention lo diet. Too moch hemp aeed will oooaalon apilepv ; in which eaae, initantly aliandon it, and (Md ban entirely ODtbiatle or lettose aeed i give him aafflvnin lila water i and If nonred, emmbleohalk ajBOBg hia aeed. If Ilia eyea an weak and iwollen, anoint them wllli tmb bntter.
Ii a hardy bird, iBVlab in tODg. and wban brought op from the seat, or a tarancliaT, will dng all or eeren montba in tlie year. A dome-abaped eafe it not proper for thia bird, aa it pnfen hopping abont Uu Iwttmn in front. It bnilds near the top of a high hedge, partioalarly the bawtboni, or agalut the aide of a tree, or a garden wall. The . neet ia yery neat, and made in the ahape of a half-globe, flattened on the top. and eo nonded tbat it Hem* ae If it had lieen tamed on a laiha. The malariala naj oooarding to the bird't apponanittea of procoring Itaam ; and tUe may be lald in a gnat meaann of moat other Urda. The ontaide ia oaaally oompoaed of flne moea, dried giaaa, and Bbrea, enrionaly Interwoven with wool and oobwaba, which OtaleD it to the tree, from the lichen growing on which it ia difDcalt to be distingniitied. The tnaide ia lined with hair, wool, fWhen, and thinla-down. Tbs eggi an (Tom ftmr to ■is in niunber, of a very pale grey ooloor, with largo raddieh-hrown apoie. and ( few amall ipecka and atreaka at the big end. The ben baa two broodi in the year j •bo 0nt brood cheifly malaa ; tiie aeeond femalea. The oook may be eaaily diatingnialied at eight or ten dayg old. It haa more white In the wing, the Invaet ia redder, and all the tlHUhen brigbter. Hig belly ia ted. while that of tbe ben la a dlity kind of green. The bnaat of the oook. even when a neatUng, ahowi a reddiah tint, the circle ronnd tbe eye ia yellower, tbe winga blacker, and the llnea that croaa them whiter. IS yon plnok soma faalhan from ttie bnoat of a neatUng. they will be nptacad in abont • IMnl^it. If Ilia n«r tnOlun an red. Uia Mn) 1> » mala^
NcMUngt miv ba Ukea Iha begtiuiln« of U«y. irh™ ■1>°<K "n d^Ri old, or u xxm t the Uilftiu:ian begin to BppMr; fbr If left longst, ttaey wiU ba ipollMl 17 eMolilii« Uia luicaa c^ Mher Unla : and tod on iqia aaad. ■oaked la mtUr, and the cramb of iriiita bread.
Knl. — It! DMml (bod. In aprbt^ and numner, la tuaaoH t in wintar, MWda and gmlo. In ooDltaie- maut, (bed tham on i^w uad, mil Kikltad. Too maj ooimirimin"r add ohlakwaed, IMtaoe, ato. 1 and In wintar, a i^aoe of applo, alao maal-voima, anK' aggt, hamp aaed, ato. ..^^-Wk INMoaat. — The haalth of Iha Chaffluah BaIRm
WPQ^ "^^ *' "" t*!^ >* 1^ qoiokl; n
food, or inaacta, or bmid boOed In milk. It la atao often aiBicted with obMnutloa in the mmp gland, aiiatng from Ita sage not beinK prorlded with a bathing pan well lappUsd with fr«ah watar. To oore tt, put a little aaShm or a nu^ nail in (ba wal« 1 and If tUa doaa not anooeed, open tha gland, aa dlncted for the Blaokblid. DUnho^ to whloh it la alao aabjaot, ma; be Dorod br aaJfron in the water. Ooa^ fast often aiiae from negleoUng to remOTa tha lai^ BCBlee. wUoti ehonld tie ■klKnllT' done with a V817 ahaip knifs. If the; become ton, Uioy muM be anointed with fMeh butter.
The Bnllflnoh la eaall; Uinad, and aoon iHachM flaelf to IM owner. It ma; be langhc a raiie^ of tones, or the note* Ol othor Urda, Itiongh Ita natniBl notai are harsh and diaoordaut. The mala biM la more eaall; tanghl than the Ittmale. A large niUBber of Piping Bnllfinchee an broasht over rtum Oeiman; ern; ;aar, and aold at good prtoea ; bnt the Bngliah bird la eqoall; capable of being taught, If yon oonutxenoe with it belbra It begins its natoral DOtea. The best ttioe Is abort]; after haTing fkd them, aa the; are more MtenCiTa during tha progreaa of digeeUon. Do oot uae a bird- organ, aa ita notaa are often Inaocnrate [ bat whiatla to them ;oureelf, if ;on oaa wbistia w^ ; otherwlae, uae a flageolet, ^la birda rar; in their capaoi^ of learning ; same reqnice nine montha tor a ^ngle air, while others will aoqoite two or Ihna in that time. It baa, howerar, been obaerved that tboaa which team with aome dUBonlt;, retain the tones longer, aiut eieante them better. Tha Orn air should be ahort and aimple. and the bird's memoiy mnit not be cmrloaded tooquickl;. He mut be helped to oontinne the tone when ha stops; and whUe he ii moulting the air should be repeated to him, or he will be apt to forget it.
Tha Bnllfloob bnllds about Bra or six fMt ban the gmnnd, in onharda or wooda where sloe boahei or onA treee abonnd. and aomeCimaa in aolitaiy qniokaet bnahea upon a heath or common. Its neat la ooDStmolad with little akill, of twlga oovered wltb moaa, and lined with fine di; flbraa of roota. The egga are from four 10 six in number, of a pals bluish oolour, marked all orer with dark pnrpla blotcbaa and
BIBD8. 345
tha portion of lui pLmnagv which la red li bnjwiuBh gioj In Bha femiJe. HIa back is
of A deep gn7i and han oT a hrownlah hno.
Poll * fair (CMhan tnaa (hs bnaM of Uis
naMlinfT, and IT the naw IMthBn an a bright
rod yoa may be aura jrra han a male hi
bat if a pale brown, it to a ttomale.
If HiUnfia tna; be lalna tu the atiiy {art of Jane, wlian twain or Iboitaen dagn old. II, howerar, Ihar an to ba taught to pipe, foa muM l4k« tham at loai or fin dv* oU, ■> ■Iter that period Oier •aqnlre (be h>nh notei of the paimM, which the; uerar loee. Wnp them up wano. and let Ihem be kept Tei7 oleea, aad fed erer; two boon, a Utile at a time, with npe aaed enked In cold water for eight or ten boon, and then acmldsd and itrained. Bmiae the aeed. ud, having mixed It together with eome eoaked braed, boil a portloii of tt with milk, to the eoniineney ta paate, btah em; da;. BnMncliaa are eaeil; oanght all the ;«r RRmd, bj the deaa;-blrd, with limed Cwlga ; or, fo wtolar. b; a noose baited with berriee.
Feed, — Their aatonl Ibod la all kinda of berrlea, and a great raiMf of aeede, som, etc The; ma; ba fbd npon the Germaa paite (So. I), vartad with a little iftpe aeed i Ihoae which are to be laixght totj be IMd on popp; eeed, with, occaalonall;, a ver; Utue hemp aeed. The; ma; alao have a little plain Uamit. or acme Kreen meat — ae
Ztttatm. — Vhan tot of otdar, pot k little eaffron into Uudr water, and tr; Wood- letk'a fijod, or a mtitore of r^ie, hsmp, andeanai;. Bfrdi taken whan full-giown an met; Dl, and wm Ure eight or nine jmm bnt thoae reared tma the nert are Uabla to aanj dleeeaee. To preaerre them Mfictl; In hekllh, keep tham to nipe eeed, adding a ret; UHle hemp now and then, b; wa; of medioina. BDew the buttoin of their eagea with rfrv eeod, whioh helpe thair digeaHon, and whan monlling put a
nanall; alngi thmi^ioat the eprtng and emuiwr, and aoanetlnee all the ;ear roimd, except when monltfaig. It delights in waahlns Ita fkatheiB, and thonld, thanAnv, al«vB haTB water fai Ita cage. It nuv he taught to whiitle tone*, and to tanltate the haman Tcdoe ; and ita menm; to eo good, that when well inatenoted It wHl retain and eiecate aerernl aire. Thli bird, with proper oare, win Ure twalre cw fbnrloon yeaia. The Blackbird bnildi In the bottom of eome oloee bnah, and ooDoeala ita neat tbt; aitToll;! bnt, aa It bnilda earl;, and before tlun are mai? leana, It to iaell;diB- oorered. Thto bird alao bollda In the lop of polliida. when there are plenty of boogha. The neet it oral-ahaped, oompoeed axtsnall; of uwvl. twigi, flbrta of nwli. onsented with clay, and to Used with a aoft ooreilng of ha;, eoraetlnies intarworen with hair or wool, nie eg^ are general!; fbnr or five In number, marked with nttmerone mlnUa dark brawnidi epote. The hen neoall; b;a three tlmee dnaing the J—i.
jfmOingt av ^ taken aboot tbe tad of Mtnh M eight da;* oU, If the qnUto «f tha (aathfliB Iutb begun to ihow ttaBnuelrei. Whai taken, foed them ererr two or thng boon en
lomida the ba*e. When mil-gi
hsr phanage a dniky brownlib blaok, vblle the male'i ii TBlvety, aod oT a pnie jet.
flnf.— TbenattmlfbodofUW Blaokbiid la borlia, woimt, ioMCta, ihelled ntalle i cfaerriea, aod othsr aimllar Iralt -. and ita BRdfldal fOod, hnn freah meat, ont Turj miall, and mixed with bnad. or the Oarman Pans (Na. I).
Sittata. — Tha Blackbird is genarally ■> healthy bird ; bnC *liaD out of order, give him a honae-apldsi or tva, end a little ooohlne^ in hia water. The diaorder which moM freqaenllf tttacka the Blackbird, la tlw pip, which nu^ be removed br peifim- bOD, and aftarwarda anoinOnK the port with freah bnttar. A littla magnaaia aheold alterwanle be added to tiu bird*e water, ^lia dlaaae^ bowevftr, may generally b« prarauled by eapplying the bird pteslilblly wlU) fteah water fbr bathing.
The BoDg-lbnuh, or HaTla, ig a large handioma Urd, whloh la eaaHy taught to dug variona Biia. In Ua natnra] atate It warblea at all seaeona, eioept when moulting, at tha latter end of the (ommer. It bnilds In wood* or orohaida, and aometdmea In a thick hedge near tha . ground ; and on the etorap or agalnat the side oT a near a qnl« nieam. Tba Beat Is htrge, and com; eiMra»11yofanamoaB,deadgiaai,friths«dbaU7-leaTea, ate. Heady plaetered indde wUh a oemeot oooipoeed of , cow^dung and clay, by which H is MiaUj dietingniahed , ' from the oeit of tha Blackbird. The egge are from three to aix in nnmber. of a blolah-greon colour, apeckled. moetly toward! the large end. wiih targe and imall liier-oolmued apoK, The han generally !ay> twice a year,
BoDg-TbTTUhee may be eanght all the ;eai roond with a limed twig, KeatUng* may be laken at tha b^ttuning of Ajxil, whan twelve or fdmeen day* old. Wrap
mHOINO BIBDB.
Out DM up mom i and irlitn it g«U tml, Uks out the U with clmn «tn« tUl wall fcuhand ; then nmot* th ibnt p«nbM. ud •on
BHl weU brniMd.
Food. — The nUnnl Ibod of tliB Thrruh ii iiueeto, benlet, dad nulls ; the ■hslli of tt» latter thej break mgtiaal a nana. The artificial tooi ia the lanie aa the Black- bird'a, and '-— r" mcdnenad with milk. R alao raqnira pldn^ of fr«h mCar, txitb
Dimamt, — If Ton an cartful in the point of oleanlineia, it will aeldQiD be out at odai bnl if the cage la kept dirt; or wat, il geta U» cramp, and ita feet become nmiMad, whiA lamea It. Oood Ibod, friah inter, and clean lodging, are all that ia repaired to keep tout bird In health.
Bi^ pBwma eomidcr tlial tUa bird'* aong rirali tba Mightingali gira it (he prfftmioa. It li certabil; mora pnre, haa laaa aoenglh and lipieHlen. Ite da; aong ■ ai 1 1 Ij ceaaea thranghont the Tear, and la jan- knged, like (he Nlghiingale'i, br Into tba night. It mar be cangU wilh k Umed Iwig in llie aatomn, Uumgh 11 ia a nrj ahy bird. Neatlinga (■a be taken in the mlddla ot Mag, and lad on iKBd and milk.
The Blackcap bnlUa In oreluifda and thick eofB wood. Ita nert ia Ibmid nsi Iha gronnd, beqaent^ in a whitatbora bnah, and is oompoaed <* inibbla and dried laaTtB. lined wilh One iclt haj. mixed wilh hair. The eggl are from tttaz IOBi,arajeUowlah white, mottled wJUi Tellow, andcpoUed'
IT mealworma with it j and yon mqat la fbnd of bathing, ea aa the Nightingale, and !■ often
aOKked b; decline. For Ihia, he miin be fed on maalwormi and anU' egga, and a
r»tj naU ahonld be pot into hla water.
Ia «»B taiMd, and ita long, which it girea fbrth during tha sight in nunmar, is BO matiractiTe, oonAtJng of atrong and weak aotea aliemalelT.
It bsiUa among nadi or bramblea orarhangiiig brooka and panda, and nmetlmea
SIB BIMOIHO BIBD8.
in Uia atumiM ef wfUow-bw*. ot bj- tha ilde of ■ low buk i gmnllj nlnaiag. in > ipot irhsn tlia prajscdon oT » lump of turf, or ptan of nous, fbnn a pnxcotdon igatnit tlw wind and nin. Tha neat la aoma- a Ingenlonalf atOtahad to (hnacrlbni raadi, ao aa to pnolnda tha poaaibilit; of ita btiog takea wittumt aaraiing aada In twftln. It U oompoaad oilenialJj of hay i tha brim balng fimnad with tba thiokar itanu of Srj gn«a, and tntaniall7 of a bad of oow'a hair. The Bnatiiic laj* flra X egga, of a Ughtlih gray, apeoUad with darkiah k alaUH)oloared apota, iularmliigled wl^ abort dnakj hnaa. The head of Uu male la black, ipeDklad with reddiah apota. bill la black on (^ opper, and whltiah on Um nndcr part ; tha baok la black, ipottad with whliA and rad, and tha Umat and braaat aza ui a dnaky-wblte, the fBrmer baing ipMliled with blaok, and tha latter with brown apoW. In tbs ftmale, tha bodf la reddlah whiM. tha breaat bejug iDeaked with light Imwn, and tha back ia llgbler in aolonr, and not ao olaar aa that of tha male.
featUngt ma; bs takan abool the Bnl fonnisbt In IU7, whan tan daji old. and IM on the Gtnnui paata (No. l) or lapa aead aoakad (n watar, ajid udzad with tha onunba of whIU braad.
Faod.—Tht oattinC fbod oonilata of the nnmanma inaeeta that (nqoent tha walar- aida, aa well aa tha aaada oT Tariona nuhea, nada, and graawi ; and whan In conilaa- msot, thar ma; be (ad on tha Garman paate (No. 1], anta' agga, and popp; leeda.
OifOft. — The Bunting, after llring five or ali raan, ia a»okad with aBophy, or waMlng itWtf, whloli ganarall; taimlnatea ItUillj.
Ia an attraotlTO bird, and when raand and JM like the Klgblitigale, beoomaa ao tuna (bat It will laavB ita cage and perch and warble on lla maaler'a finger. The 000k la largw than the hen, and baa a One white throat. It ma; ba aaall; eanght with a limad twig of aprlng trap ; and naatUnga. takan early, ahould be (ad on braad and milk, or a liale barla;.meaL The WUtethroat build* near water. Id bnahea, tha atompa of willow and alder-tree*, and aoma- tlmea In tnfti of graa*. The neat la oompoaed ot fine aedge and mo**, lined with horse-hair. The egg* are tram foni to alz In comber, of a greenlah white. apoCted with oUva green, and, at the large end, gpeckled with *late4olonred "
Axxf.— When wild, the? f»Bd on »U Mod* oT tnaecia and grabs, and are nrj fond of (mail -'
naliapnian When Ihsy cannot obtain thla fbod, tha; anbetltule tor It o
1( ■ bold KKdible bbd. whkh ivobobly owm mnoti of iu popnUitty to tha ballad of llu
" OhUdno la tbe Wood." The ooek hai k deeiMr pUoh of red oa the bnut, ■ londar
ng, udbUdkar laga Uuui the hto. Bo ht* ■l<a> taftoT hair on woh dda of Ui
wool, uokll twlgt, Uniw,
ntth hoiM-halr. Tbe egga era usrer Ism tbaa fi»U', end treqnanllf Ave or lii In nrnnbar. Tbnj*n of ■ pale □rcAm-ooloar, Bprinkledall oror with roddiah-yollow ipots.
NntUngi may be lakea the beginning of liar, whsu about im ot tmlTe daja old. If dstered longer, the^ am apt (a be lollen. Put (hem bi a (mall baeket, with haj at t^ botunn, and 14ed than aa directed in rearing Tonng Nightingalea. Be carefbl not to orerfted tbam. When grown Mrong. pnC tbem in a Nightiugale'e cage, with moea ■t boUoBL Their Jbad in canflnement ia Iha lame aa that tdr the NlghUngBle, nried with that for the Woodlaik.
Diteai: — The onmp and glddlneaa. Give them a meal-w Ibr the latier. ilx or aeren earwiga tn a weak i or a Bnooth ouapfttar (oeoaelonaUy tbe
la the amalleat bird finiEd In Bittetn i tta length, from the point of the bill to the end of the IaU, being onlj fbnr inehee and a half. It haa a fine, sweet ^ note, whiob luU •etenl tnonth* in the 7«r, and ie mneh etrongcr than wonld be Imagined for so small a bbd. It boildi against the waUa of houaa, in tha back parte of stablea or outhonaea, and in woods and badges. The nest ie onrlona]; mads tn tbe form of S angsi^lcMf, the oatdde being of mces, aad tbe inside of hsir, wool, aadfMthen. I egress. Tht e|
happens that more than half the nombsr an halchad. Thsy ai
■priuklsd all ons'Wlth pale rsdqnta, aodmj smaU.
a Mkt. bnl before nmortiig > large otoee-wind
Ma iliaj> ihanld bemlt
ea Tonng NIgUliiSklae.
I, with one elds made like ■
Bqaiirera, and lined wtth wool a directed Ibr the Nifhti ipidar oocasioueUr.
Twite, the Bedelart, (he YeUow- ' tbe trooble of rearing from the neat, aod at* nanall]' boD8)» of Uia b The Sielun Atd Twtte are email merry birda. At tc Linnata. ae they be Eed like Chaffli
In (akiDg leave of oDF Batdeot, we catmot enfflcleiiUy impie« npon Yoong FanoiarB the impoTtanoe of ettentioD to the fbod and hahitatioiia of their fcath The poor bird» deprired of ila liber^» and thereby debarred from the e
enoe npon ila keeper, whoaa eareleaaiieBa or negleot wonld be ila deetrnctiOD. He who la guilty of negligence in thia raapect csimat teMOnobly eipeot la hare the pltMnuw
^F llii* hitOMtiug Dlaaa of bMt then m man; Xim 1 but (hoM tMlODging to tha PumC Dribs ore e mcM DUoenHu, u mil u the most Impoitauk ' Pannta are iiutim ot warm ollmatea ; lbs moM beaoCiAil klnda being id ohieUy in troirioal oooutriss, both in thsOldand Naw World. The; le iinlor of ClimbloK Birdi. belikg tsciubniied la Uieir natire <~L'i."i<i pstpsQdioiilarly ths Cmuka oT Inea, in wUDh they build ' ' - - aome decayed hole, whleh they enlargs or eooop ont rxUi lUtia l-i'.a Ui uiit thair coDTsnlancs. FuTOla *n hanJaonia blrda, ui Air of intelligeDOe, and often > aoriaaainff beaniy of plumule. The ootlina of the head fbnnt a graoftil cnrre, eitendlDg to the tip of the beak, which le hard and rounded, connected with the ekoll at the fonbeftd by ■ kind of Joint, so that theee birde poeseaa the aingnlar power of moring the nppa jaw inatead of the lower, whloh alone is capable of motion in other animale. The tongne le thiok, aoft, and fleehy. covered with ■mall dotted rlelngi in the ddn, and reaambUng in Ha rormalion the human tongne. It ia no donbt owing to Ihia that the parrot la able to imitate so dlatlncUy the mine of mail. The eyea are fixed on either aide of the bead, so that the bird oannot aee exactly balUfe it wtthont Biat taming the sya on ooe aide in that dlTMtloD. The ears in amall opsniDgi. pawliig in an obUqna dlnetion abore the
SB TALEHTG BIBS8.
eyea, ind oorerad br tha ftMlun. Sco Phtmi sanmllf dlflte' Is tbatr phimage from Uu tBokm, tlie lutar being oloUied Hitti (b» moat tbatry Aathari. la aoma THiatiei, howsvCr, thsrs la acarcatj ajiy peroaplflila diStaanos, and both talk aqoall; wsU. Th«r an long-Utad birda, bvqostitly malntiig a gnat age, aran wlien kept la oandnBaant. and we hkre read of a Parrot whlDh lired Dloatr-tlitM Tsara, haTing beooma qoiu Indrm, blind, and dsat Toong blrda do not aoqnin their propar oolonn anlil after the third id
enlartalnad Iijr amne penona, that the Parrot win Ivam to talk aooner in a tmall oaea. On tlta oontnur, tt cao acsrcatr ba (oo buss, and cba nun nwio that li giroi to Iha bird, the mora Ubsl? will it b* to thilTa and do well. It ia deanbla that Iha poubea placed in the oage ahonld ba made thicker in the cenba than at the onda^ In order that tbe bird maj chonae that part beat anltad to Ms giaap. AttenlioD to thia point fteqoently pismUa Iha IMt IHim becoming diaeaaed. The eaga ia oaoallr ball-ahaped. btfng fbmiahed, in addilian to pandua, with a moreabla ring or hoop Bnipcoded from the top, waicb aerrea the btrd for axaroiia during the daj, and Rirma ita looeliiig-plaoa at nigbt. Coekuooa are moat tn-
'■ — ' — '- ■ qnently ctaaloed to m peroh, with tbod and walcr-boi at eiUMr
end, aa ahomi in Iha engrkTing at tba bead oT the preriona page.
Aa an the dlArent kluda of PuroU reqaire almOar OeatanesC. we give the dtiee- tJona Tor feeding them nnder one head. The qiiantit7 boet of ooone be regulated by Uie aiE< and appetite oT the bird. Aa a genereJ role, it may be obaerved, that the ■pedes of fbod approiimatlag most nearly to what wonld have been obtained in a wild BtMe, i* alwaya moot adviaable ; althoogb in oonflnemant more care la xeqoiaite, aa the bird la deprii^ of the air and ezardae whlob wonld otherwiaa bare oonntetacted tba ill eSteti aiialng Ihini bad fooA. Fairota thrive best when kept apon diStieiit kiDda of grain, nnla, and aeeda, varied with bread leaked in bailed milk. Indian com ma; alao be oocaatonany anbelitatedt bting welt boiled for three-frnartera of an hour, whan the water ia drained oK and the corn given to Iba Urd oold. BiiMtnlt. and a very imall portion of tamp aogar, OT baid trait thoroaghly ripe, may be added ; bat paatiy, bonaa, atjd ever? kind of "ti^twi food, maat be acrapnloiialy avoided, aa invariablj leading to disease.
Clean gravel ia indispeniable, the little atouei they piek np aaalating the iiiiirmaa of dlgeation, whlcli, aa btrda bare no tasth, oonld Dot ba otherwise perTonned. The food ahoald be placed In glass or eanheowan pani. wbleh are easily kept olean. Zine boiea ahonld never be nied. aa Ibey an decidedly Injaricns, and tin bora nqoin
TALSraa HIBDB.
Of Uili admlnd ipada Owa Ii ui ftlmoM eodloa niM^, all of wUoh, howarar. reqnln ttu Mina mode of D«atm«it. Tbs Pairot hu » good k memory that, IT fn,trQot«d yonng, it wiU Ham lo repeat ro(ir« rmw, and aveD ailoma. Jt 1* toml Of ir^n^n^j um Toieea of ohildran, aad will alio perftmn all Unii. of tiioto and ■—"■'"g acUoiu, which, whan onoe aoqiiii«d, it Mldom forgWa. The Aah-col(mred or AMoan PaiTot Ib abont nine Inchea long, with a plmoage of a p«ari gnf or ilala oolonf , tlu teathen of tlie head and nndar parU of the body being margined with a dull white. The ttUljahort andofadeepaoaile*. Thii i» Ihe moat l«ct«ble of an the PazmU, and is alao an eicBllent talker. The Amaun Famt cornea from tbe BrBtOi and Maiioo. It ia of a bright green, merging oooaalonallj into jelkiw. The IMthen on the head and threat are yellow, edged wtth a blnlihgneni tliehnk le blaok, and the Aet aeh-ool(mi«d. ' Tbk bird ia eodal and oonMing, and being brought over ia great nnmboa, ie one of the oheapeaL It talke readily, and require* leae attention than any othH Parrot. Amongat the eliatae and more valnabte Undt i» the Uorton- Bts Qolden Parrot, which la of modoiate alte and peculiarly aplandid In appearanoe.
pinniage is delicately win, of a yallinriih green, the tail- (MMhera being edged wltb blue. Tbs npper mandible of the beak it red, and tbe lower blaok. A ring enoinilea the neck of the male bird, which ia wantliig in the female. She ii bIio diaUngoiihed by the under paita of her body haTing a yellower tint. The Boee-ringed Parrokeet le abont tbe ■In of a lark, of a rod and blue plnmage, with a red ring of IMthere ancireUng the oeok. Theee bird* are gwierally kept In pain, ae they are apt to pine when alnna. They
Talued for Uie beanty oT IM plmoaffe. Jt Ii a DMJie of the Uoluccas uid mboat Iht uce of & pigeon. Ita prindpAJ coIqoi Lfl bright red, Tuied with bloa jeUov violet, uul green. Tbsre is b1» the Blue MoaslAiD or Slue-CHpped L017, which ia mther larger than the tOnaer, ot a rich blue ■utd nuriMn colour the feubara dd the lop ol the bead ere of a dark purple hue, which ii relieved by m band of yellow olreling tlie nnds part of the throat. This vuiet; Is eiceedingly docile and aflbctionote in diapoaitien, aeemiirg
■^ pleoaed at being noticed, BJid delighting to roiuni
oelleul tnemory and may be taught to repeat
tonea that are whiatled in ita heejlng. This bird reqolrea more care thas moat olhera, and rauet be patticnlarl; gusrdHi from disughta or cold winda. The fatnale is dietingoiehed from the male by the yellow circlet on the throat being Donelderably paler. The Shell Lory or Shell Parrot la a choice and ■mall apecioa of Indian Parrot, with plnmaga ol a rich golden colour. Theae birds are oonmionly kept tn poira.
d for I
listinot and dnent articnlation. and Ibr the intelligence it diaplafi whom it ifl accustomed. It ie. however, very capricious ii is dialikn. ofien malicious. The Red
|
Weal Ind |
iee, and the Br |
i,an |
diaone |
of the largeat |
|
|
of the P. |
■ing |
about 1 |
;wo feet eight |
||
|
incheeln |
length. It ia |
rkably I |
leaulitm bird. |
||
|
being in |
liant |
net. wh: |
ich changes at |
||
|
thelowei |
'part of the back U> |
right bin |
8. The upper |
||
|
OOTBrtep |
rthe wingaar |
^hly |
I of the (
t,blne
naembling that foond on the turkey, and the beak ia an
strong as Co be capttble of cracking the stone of a
peach. Another livoiirite variety is the Blue and
Orange Uacaw. which ia similar in use to (he preceding, and though leaa daullng,
equally beadtinil in appearance. The head and pait of the wingi are of a dark green.
TALEDia BIRDB. SU
body nOrau. The tat! ia >1» blue, naw (he bue bordsred wltb Naok. The 11m>k do« not leam U UUi lo euil; u the commoa Furot, but, if taught when fotud, il imiutae tbe buklng of ■ dog, the toewing ot ■ cat, the bleMiDB of a iheep, etc. ,
Ii a Uvely bird, bold and klen In iu motioiu. It does not m> readily le bat is remarkable Ibr ite dodlilf aud affeaionaui diapoaitdon lletmiit and booq oompreheada what li said to it, will ealnla with the head when told, and ma; be taught to point out Dbjacte iudioued by touching them villi tbe tongns and beak. The Great White Cockatoo is anaUve of (be Molucoaa, about aeTenteen inchea in length, and of an eotirel; while plumage, with the eiceptlua of the large pinlan feathen, and a portion of the tail, which an of a pale primnHe hne. The ton, gf feiUbera ou the head il also tinged with ^sllow ; it is Bve inches loug, and nan either be raised or depressed at pleasure. The Great Hed^created Cockatoo is Larger in sise, being about two Feet in length. It la a noble-looking bird, and con readily bo lamed. It* while plumage Is beaulifull; ; tinged with rose colour ; the crest ia about six inches long, falling back upon the head. Tbelail is nrlegated with a pale lemon colour, and tbe beak ia of a dull blue. Thia spedea chiefl; eieels in lla oomct imitation of the >c eapsoiallj in crowing and clapping its wings like a cock. Cookatoga, which an al id bjr their oresta, an Ibe hardiest of the FaiTOt tribe.
I Haven, whose gloesy blue-black plus^age and harsh voice have given rise to many sOange old Buperstitions. It ia said to Uve lo an immeiiM age. and in former timee Us croaking wia believed to ftnelall death.
The Baven is a Htrong, brave, voracicna bird, with a remarkable sense ot small, and gnat strength of sight. It is abondant in wild moontainoua dlstiicM. boUdlng ia woods and generally selecting the largest treca fBr Ita rest. The old birds pair fbr Ufa. imiiBg many broods, and driving their young (Tom the nest »a soon aa they are able U> provide for themselves. The youug. if taken when half Hedged, an easily reared and nndered tame. The talking powen of tlis Baven and IM association with old
IH TALKIHO BIRIia.
mpinlJtioiu m» mil knoira. Our nodsn vill renumbar ths mmAarfat Barwn dcwrlbed b; Kdgar Poe, ud ttis budl; leu celBbnUd bird poiHned by Banabj Radge. In iB sUlve tUM Uie Baven fSeda npon dead uilnuls, dealroTliig alio, ;onDg luno, birda.
of ftnit. Ii will &«qa«illj rob lb* tuM* of
blrdfl to prorldA food for Ua jma^. The
Ratcd omj be aiutiued in oonOneiiisiit upon fng-
manta oT maO, or bread uid roll nseped in milk i
and with a little iiulniotion ma; b« taught tfl tb-
IieM varioiu words and phniMe. to cro* lllio a
_^ cock, hark llks a dog, etd. IE is attnctsd b;
-> '-"^1^^^ axiTthlng bright and glittfirlDg, and will cany off
^ ~f~ .f^A^ and hide illver Bpoona, trinkets, SIC. Allthehirdi
~ - ■ ■ - • of thie kind have a propeoeitf for Mealing and
oonoealing *mall irllola ; and the; even hide their tooi, and an<rwaid« deroar it
ideoe by piece in eeoret.
Ii slao tnoloded amongtt talking blrdi, Ihoagh it can Oi tow ward* Willi an; aort of dtillnctniia. It is about thlit«en indua long ; at la nMnlj black plnmagi, Biogptiiig on the head, which t« light grey. The Jidkdaw builds in the mob of old
fbnr to six giBBo ogga. oorarad with <
It will bBoome M> tame that it mair be kept
the jard with oommon poolB
amow Itaslf by fljing to and 1
r be taught to artiralete a
uoUoe* the ringing of the dfann-bell, fteqaently entaring the diulng-room at it*
Tb* (bod of (he Jackdaw, In a wild MaU, conelBla of gruba, WOTine, mieota, aa well aa »hoU.flah, acorns. beaoh-nuM, and ueds of oereBl plant*. It is also partial to wOd garlio i bnt after Indulging In It lt» breaili is most oOta^»e for several da]^ A tame Jackdaw. If aUowed the range of a good-sised garden, will bo oontent with an oooft-
TWe inhabitant of our old English woods is a remarkably beautifal bird. It is IhlTteeu laohes tong, with a aUky plomage of a purple reddish aahy gitry ; tie largor ooTsrla of the wings being dogwitlr barred with rloi glinoring blno and black, bletid- ln> into ons another i the fbnbead la whits, streaked with black i and Ike long looee
TALIONO BIBDB. tST
ItW tancth of Om DMk I the Uil ta black, ud llw isgi teown. Tha tenikla It mr ■imilar in ■ppfiMna, bar plimiags beinc iMher gnT<r ud not » nd h that of Ihs male. Tba Jar bnOda in high oopiilce wood, or hadgaa, oamnumainx by lajlng a
of flbronj roota and twl^B, matt«d thiokly togoUior, laaving a hallow antBoistitl; large to oonlain from flia to lOTfln egga, which He of a li^htiBh brown oolonr, IWtuJ7 apriDkled witii darker apota.
When oanght joang, the itj i» eaall^ tanebt to ■peak, md will trnqaenOj imitate eonodi with gren exactaeH. It will occailonallf, in ipriag, nUer a ■ort oT toag. whloh ia rather pleaalng, bat eo low that It can onlf be heard sloae at hand. The adolt biTd ia Tflry ahj, and will geneTBll7 oonoaal itaelf aa la an; peraona oome in eight, aametlmea tmung in
period. In eoBHwrnnnt. bowerer, it loeae mosh
or its timidly, and will fraqsmUjr
The Ja; ia a great deronrar of fmlt aod grain, and wtU eat Ukawlai iDMCta and worma. In a wild atMe it freqnenllr loba the emaHer birda' neala o[ tt yoone. and will pnjr on mioe aa well aa on old weaUj birda. The J^ may
la a baadeonw-looklng bird, about eighteen Inolua In length i oT a Tarisgatad btiok and wUte plomage, beaattTiillj ahaded with green, bine, and purple. It ma; be alaaaed
Ibr tbe defbuoe of Ha jnnuig. It ia generallj fonnd in pla«a dinoqlt
tbe bottom ii plaMeced with earth, and Uned with llbnnu noia. The Uagpla laji an or aaren egga ot Tellowlah whita ooloiir, apottad with browiu Toang biidi aboold be taken llrom the neet at alMDt a rattcight old, if It ia wiahed to render them tame ; aod when aiiillcientlf fledged they may be allowed to fly to a naigltboTiring tiee. entlring Ihem back again to 12ia place where Uiey afe ^"****^'*^ to reaainj thia la
3Se TAIiEINa BIBDS.
np«aud DDli] 11m; BTt fti]]; fltdged, when the pinioD rbither* ahonU be allgbtl; d^pal. By tbis mmii Utey will soon beoome ">■""'«■■ Willi their home, and hvqnentt; retorn lo it alter enJOTiiJg a tew botm of libarty. The Uogpie imima* maatcal Kianda, and Uje voices of animal* ; jt cui fttAO bfl tan^ht to Bp«k wil^ toleiablo diAtinctne«. It it capAbla of beoomin^ attached to Ita auendant. which it arincea by failowinff him aboat, rubbing itaelf agoinU him dqUI it la Ocoked. and Taiions other actions.
The Uanple, in a wild note, Uvea apon Iniects, worma, and all kindg of IRiita. When domesticated, It will eat ohnoat anything, hut 1a moat fond of cookad meat, and other thlngB brought to tabla. If more be given to It than it can eat, it aecretea a portion Ibr another meal. ' Thia peculiar instinct eihibita iteelf in very young hirdi- This bird la aUo rery fond of hiding away bright and glittering orticlee ; Bonth^y's well- known ballad of the " Maid and ths Uagpie " ia founded apou this cu
la finmd in great abimdance In ths neighbourhood of manhea, or Ibna, where it rooU ■t the reedi. It buildM ita ueat of di7 gran, in ths holea of traea or old build- ings, and laya £ve blae eggs. The plnmaga of the Blaiiing ia principally black, glosBed with beautiful colours. Taijing from bins to green and purpls, as ths light &11a on It. It is marked aU over with email ■poti. which are of a yellowiah brown colour on the head and back, and while upon ths breast. Ths Sterling ia a migratory bird, coming to our cUmate in ■e winteta, and tetornlng northward in the apring. Some, however, remain with db throughout the year. FUflnsmsnt the Starling beoomea very docile, and m^ be laaght to atier words and phiaeea, Ite nscnral nolee are a dnll whietle and a chattering noiia ; It will also imitata tann. It may bs EBd on hita of meat, inaecta. bread and cheese, etc.. with a plentifti] supply of water, for drinking and bathing. It should also be allowed to leave ita cage frequently, or, like Bieme'a celebrated Starling. It will pine away if it " can't get out." Diaiiau or uLimo lais, iiii> teitb auniua. AtOmio la a malady lo which Talking Birds are eopeeiallf liable, and Is eaosod either by their eating too freely or being aipaaed to onrrenla of air. It is shown by a frnqaent opening of the Iwak. as if gaaping Ibr bresth. To enra this, a portion of the Item oT a lettuce, ot water-crees, should be given three times a week, with bread and milk boilod to the thicknssa of pap. When lbs disease is violent^ a small quanti^ of cayenne should be mixed with It. and It should then be given daily. A rusty nati should also be put in the water. Con should be taken to keep the bin) wann. aa estia oovering being placed on the sage at night. The same remedy will •arva for Mn^ilill, or waaUng away, which is conunonly cansed by improper food.
Sax Bfet. — Whan (he qyes ore aflbctad with soieneas, Ihsy should b< mshql
TALKma BIBD6. 8S0
in tk lotkm made by pouring boiling water over the bmieed or aoraped root of white heUebore. The juice of the red beet» given as a drink, is in this complaint highly efBcacioas.
Moulting oocnrs with all birds once a year, and lasts generally aboat three months. Daring this period an extra degree of warmth and nourishment is essential, espe- cially when there is much difElonlty in casting the feathers. A bit of stiok'liqnorioe in the water, a biscoit soaked and well peppered with cayenne, or a rusty nail, will be found nsefkil ; but if the birds monlt easily, a slight variation in their food is all that is required.
Surfeit sometimes attacks birds which have not been properly attended to. It is manifest, in small watery emptions about the head, eaoaing the feathers on that part to faU off until the head is quite bare. To eradicate this disease, a solution of common salt snd spring water should be applied every day, wiping it diy, and anointing the head afterwards with palm oiL Until perfectly recovered, the best food is bread and milk, in which has been boiled a small portion of ground rice, and the same quantity of stiok-liquorioe. A warm temperature is now most essential.
Diseased Feet are occasionaUy caused by want of cleanliness, or neglect in pro- viding a sufficiency of water for bathing. This malady also sometimes arises ttam severe cold, and other causes. If stending on the perch should appear irksome to the bird, it must be taken firom its cage, and placed in one of small sise, where it will be unable to climb. A tin drawer, placed at the bottom, should be provided with luke- warm water, for the bird to stand in for about twenty minutes.
Diarrhcta is occasioned by a sudden change of diet, or by the bird having partaken of unripe fhiit. In this malady the bird is continually evacuating a chalky substance, which usually hangs about the feathers of the vent. In the case of Parrote warmth is particularly essential. While suftbring from it, the bird should be fed upon soaked bread and Indian com, the water from which has been strained off, and the juice of lettuce-seed, which may be obtained by boiling the seed, squeexed into it. The yoke of a hard*boiled egg is also a good remedy, or a little fresh butter or palm oil applied to the vent will be found of great service.
The Pip in Parrots is a cold which affects their head and throat, and by which the upper skin of the tongue becomes hardened, and the orifice of the nose stopped. The root of the beak becomes yellow, and the feathers of the head miBed, and the bird continually opens ita beak, as if to cool ito tongue. It will generally be found sufficient to scrape the tongue, and pass a feather moistened with oil through the orifice of the nose ; but when pip in a severe form attacks the bird, the skin of the tongne must be removed — an operation of some deUoacy, and which few but profes- sional bird-lhncierB can perform.
Parrote are also liable to It^flammaiion, which renders them dull and sleepy. Indeed it may be said of all birds that if they are inactive and dull, th^ are certain to be suflbring from disease. The remedy for Inflammation in Parrote and other Talking Birds, is a mash of well-boiled emden groate or Indian com, and the yolk of a hard-boiled egg, with drink made from the juice of rape-seed scalded.
TturmavaoL
tOtptt, fnm too ricb ftwd, li t, oodubob malidT' In Uidi, pttlkiDlBtr thoM 1 PuTot kind. Two or Ibnt drop! of ipblta at nl«« ihouU ba addKl to mtcr, *nil a Ikw dnpa itf oUr* oH -■*■-'"'■'"** IsUrnall;. Wlua Um biid lokod, tt ihanld ba ImmsdliMj Mikm cot of Uw ogs uiil plnagsil in oold . TbB b«ak ihooU Umq Im opansd, and ■ IttUa load or -my oold v
It bs blad, t7 dnwinf quo at Hit (an
e, and anoliilod wtth a lotlim Bude of pnoipUalii powder, ireH ndied la tnUr. Oara mnrt be (akan In nilng It that none gala Into (he ean, 07*^ at mouh of t^ bird. An tnftulon of tobaooo water ia cAaa iiiiiBiainillj applied. The cage aboold ba tfaorongUr oleanaad befcm Uia bird is allawed again to nae it.
Theae lamediaa. Ifoanftill)' adnititMrad, win be ftond capable, In — " — ] iiaam. of natoring a bird ■aStetnK (Mm dlacaaa to a Mate of healtb, whan ' — 'nfl of baing moptah and miaarabla, aa la ann to be the oaae wfaaa be i* mmnll, ba wfll oUUt aO
THE POULTRY- YARD.
XBS DOUSSXXa WWL.
T wlU bs idmltMd by lach of oar joaag mdon u am ipeak ftom STperliRuie, thM there un fair nun ■mnifng uid profltebls amploy-
A eggi thM an dall; laid, mtchtng for Die imjhing uid looking attar -^ tlu rMiinff of Uiii joong phlBkma, and, wLen ths riglU time ut^tm, \ tettag to Uudr tMlng proparly IkWrnad (tar Ubla. TboM who an -A dcdron* Ol nartng beBnUfal bned* of towla, wtthont to nnoli profit to b« deHred from tha oaonpftUan, cul fndolga thair taita unong f hncy breeda, tha ohlof of whJoh w« ihall prooBed to anuzie- tha porpoMi of profll, Um Dorkliig bnad i* geDarallr hold Id
S62 DOMESTIC FOWL.
THB TASIOV8 KUTDB OV BOMBBTIO VOWL.
Ths Gaxx Cock is of Blender and elegfuit appearance. He has a small head, decorated with a splendid comb and wattles, sparkling ^es, a provision of rich and gorgeons plumage, and an air of animation and daring oonrage. There are several yarieties of the game breed. Amongst the superior sort is the block-breasted red; this bird, from the back to the extremities, should be of a clear, bright, dark red, without any shade of black intermixed ; the upper convex side of the wing should be equally black and red ; the whole of the tail feathers black ; as also the beak, legs, and tiie tip of the wing. This cock is remarkably strong and healthy. The disposition of the Game Cock is fierce and quarrelsome ; and even young chickens will peck and fight each other, sometimes with such ferocity that tiiey will lose their eyes, or become seriously injured, before relinquishing the combat ; nor do they hesitate to attack other poultry. The hen to match should be of a dark partridge colour, with a clear red breast, bright hackled above, black underneath, and the logs and beak black. Their eggs, though less delicate, are more highly flavoured than those of the common hen, and are very generally preferred ; but they are not good layers, or patient sitters ; their chief excellence consists in the delicacy of their flesh, and in this respect their superiority is unrivalled.
Thb DoBxnra, so named from a small town in Surrey, are held in great esteem for their large size, and the superior whiteness and delicacy of their flesh. Thej are distinguished for having five claws instead of four, the common number found on all other fowls. They are generally white, which is considered to be as distinctive a mark of the purity of the breed as the additional hind claw. They are gentle and quiet in their nature, and valuable as excellent layers of fine eggs, and steady sitters when hpV«hiTig their chickens.
Thb Malay, ob CHnxAeoHe, were first brought to this country from Sumatra and the isle of Java. Th^ are the largest known breed of fowls, standing high enough on their legs to enable them to peck from off an ordinary sised table. Their plumage is of a blackish hue, marked with brown and yellow ; and the crow of the cock is ^T>"iTigir(fti and harsh. They lay fine eggs, but are not good sitters, and owing to the coarseness and bad colour of their flesh are held in little esteem by the poulterer.
Thb Bpavish, ob Polzbk, is another large breed, resembling the Malay in appmr- ance and habits. Their plumage is of a brilliant velvet-looking black, with a few tail feathers of various colours ; the head is adorned with a tufted crest ; and the comb and wattles are so unusually large, especially in the hen, as not unfrequently to hsng over on one side. They are highly prized for the immense number of eggs they produce, which has procured for them the name of ** everlasting layers.'* They also rank high as table birds, their flesh being remarkably white and tender.
Thb BAincAM. — ^This is a much admired breed, so small in size as seldom to weigh more t^^^^^i a pound. Its gay plumage generally reaches to the claws, although some persons prefer the legs devoid of feathers. The thorough-bred Bantam cock should have a proud and lively carriage, a bright rose comb, frUl-foathered tail, and larg« hackles. Those generally preferred are the jet black and nankeen coloured; the latter
D0UB8TI0 FOWL.
303
ihonld li«e the IWlun edgad irith bluk, the tucklac (UghUr marked wlUi parplt, tbe Uul fauhen taluk, mai the wings txaoUfnll; barred wiUt purple ; the br«n sin ■hoiild be black, ytsth whits edge* to tbe teathen. The plumage of the hen ihoald match u nearly u pouible with that of the cock. The Bantam posaeesea coualdeTable eonrags, and will not Bbrink, if pn
of egga of anpartor qoahtj; and, sot- wtibatandiog Uielr
ochpriisd. They « naadf ailtara
g bn»d bj leading titam too fkr from home, Ths7 ara hsqnsntly pnt h motben. Thia breed ta alao piiied for tbe anperior qnalitf of ita fleah, which poaieaaoa auoh delioaoy and flavotir aa to have been taken for partridge.
TBI Itias-iioaa poWL um I>Dm).HiLL Ooci. — The Barn-door fowl, although often epoksn of aa a diSkrent epeelM. poeMCa no other pecoliarlt/ Chan the circnmitance of baving been reared in a farm'Tard. where com ia tbraahed. aa tbe grain and liuectH irhioh tbe; oonatantly pick ap are oooddcsed to impart to the flBsh a enperior flavoor ; hence, all k bronsht ap aoqaiie the oama of " Barn-door fowli." The aame ma; be aaid of the Dim^.hill cock, which u too well know to require obat
The cock, like a tall tower, ihoold have a nlid fonndaUon, and nand Ormly on bla fbet, which ought to have a good bold of the earth b; sharp grappling clawa, for enob are the beat adapted to rake and tear up the groimd. He ebonld hare eliarp Hpqn. to abow how well be la able todeited himaelfi his thighi ahonld be targe and mtiacular. bia breaat wide, bla body totand, boldly compact, ;« wearing an air of rough robust oeaa. a email head, bright eye, and Vandyked comb of deep-djed scarlet, with strong "wattles" of the same rich bai, like an qtbI shield from bis throat, with his beak abarp, and strong, and short as the head of a javeUo. proclaim the tme-bora warrior and oUif of all itansatle fowls. He shonld be of the middle aUe, wiUi abort wingi of
S84 Txnavno fowi..
Ilw TiaiwA plnnuBi, TidggMed from tha dukeft bnnn to k bclIUant nd i hb teQ arohod, iriUunit ■ white hathor, wUoh 1* coneldeml s CLgii of eomrdlo* ; tod h« ihoold hara a slesr, itaiO, Jojoni onnr, -"~"-n prondt; anot, with hit bnd alantsd.
To boon s IboTongli good breed, tha baa ahotdd. If possibla, baar a itlaae reaam- bknoe to tha oook, not only In bar tgan, bnt alio In her phunage, with the lama niandMaa of body, and alio breadth, ai it alda greatly the pndiuition of egga ; wUle hor wingi ghonld be thlgkl; fSathcnd, warm, and downy, u they gtre a betlar ■belter to the brood ; and aba ckd also eit with grealar sa» if her lega an abort — for if th«y an long, and armnd with apoia, aha aita nncomfortably, and &aqaontiy breoka t^ agga ; nor eiui ahe, nnleea bar wlnga are wide, antOoleDUy cover tha whole number of her egga, or oflbrd tbat waimtb vhloh la uacaaiaiy (br the proper nouiBluiient of her
Aboat a doien hena are eomatonly AQoired to ana ooek. If any putienlar broad la saleoted, tbo Dorldng ahoald bare I^a prefbnnoe, where it can be procoiad ; or a oook of that apeciea aboiild be had to ^prore the oonuson breed.
The hen-btnua ahonld be wann and olaau, having, if poaafbla. a aantberiy aapeet,
at large enough to mCMDunodata Ita ftathary inhabitanla ; tha floor ahonld
ba illghtl; alavBlad above tha gronnd to praaarve it trani
~ / - -y\ the damp, and paved eitlier with ludnnted aipbalt or
/ ,' V alate ; Hie perobea abould be Bxed Is s aloping poaltion, at
-^^^ ' varlona dlatanDea one above the otiiar, oommancing roar or
Stb (Mt ttom tha groiind, ajid rtelog up gradiuUy to tha
lop of Uie han-honae, eaie. however, being taken that they
■hoiild not be placed exactly one above another. The beat
I plan of (Utins: ap tbe perobea la to plooa them In groovei^
r they can then be raadUy taken ont and cleaned, sad
' either pnt away when not wBntad, or again luenaaed as
I tha atook of fbwia ^rowa Urge. It ii aa well not to hav*
D of too reguloi a Ibrm, bnt, if poaalble, to raeambla
bnnohea of a Dee, aa blrda natmslly love bat to rooat
' upon Buoh aa bave tbe batk on ) Ihna aapUngs, when they
can be procured, make the beat perchca. A piece of wood.
with narrow alipa nailed aoroaa it, aboat tlirea inebaa apan,
' raaembUng the etepa of a ladder, abonld be placed in aa
daay eloping fbrm, 00 aa to enable tbe fOwla to climb more
nadlly firom tha floor to the perobea, and althongh lome
win prefbr tha tue of their wlngi, thia ia a great acccmmodalJan for tbe IM and the
indolmt It ia alio leqnialte where there are chickena, to erect a parch or two veiy
near the ground, lo tbat tbay mw bave a rooaUng-plaoe before th^ gain oonnga
DOMSSTIO FpWL. 866
enough to dimb higher, and johi their fkill-grown eompealoiu. A nnaQ open tpaee is nanally made in the door of the hen-honee to allow the fowla who are early liaers firee egreaa as soon as dawn oommenoes. This small door, though commonly made low, is better when at a little diHtsnoe from the gronnd, being more free frrxm the entrance of rats and yermin, and, by the help of a ladder placed inside, it is easily reached by the fowls. Any small ont-honse, which is perftxstly dry, may be adapted for the keeping of poultry ; and the more amigly it is sitoated the better, as long as there are opportnnities for the admlBsioTi of a fkee oorrent of air during the day ; for this purpose, a flow openings should be made of fine lattioe-work, with shutters to each, which must be careftilly closed at night. Cleanliness in the hen-house is equally essential to warmth. To preserve this, the walls should be now and then brushed, and whitewashed with lime, the floor well swept, and thickly sanded every morning, and likewise frequently washed with water mixed with quioklimA. If vermin of any kind should be fbund to exist, they can be eflbetually destroyed by ftimigating the place with sulphur. In this operation a little care is requisite i it should be commenced early in the morning byflrst closing the lattices, and stopping up every crevice through which air is admissible ; then place on the ground a pan of lighted charcoal, and throw on it some brimstone, or a handftil of sulphur. Directly this is done, the room should be left, the door kept shut and air-tight for some hours, care too should be taken that the lattices are first opened, and time given for the vapour to disperse before any one again enten, when every creature within the building will be finmd destroyed.
WKMBXMBu
Fowls which are kept for the producing of eggs and chicks, and are not being flattened, should be fed regnlarly twice a-day in the same placo, which ahould be aheltered fttim wind and rain; for although the open yard is most commonly used far the purpoee, both in summer and winter, unless the weather be dry it may be likely to prove ix^urious, for damp is more hurtlhl to fbwls than extreme cold. The heat of the noon-day sun is also iz\Jurious to very young chickens, although not so to fhll-grown ftnrls. As nearly as the variation of the seasons will allow, their food should be given to them at the same hour. The first (toding should be early in the morning, and the second an hour or two before snnset-HUi ample quantity being given them, or they will soon lose their robustness, and Isy fswer as well as smaller and inferior eggs to what th^ would produce if better fed. Fowls like a variety of fbod ; and refVise meat and vegetables of all kinds aflbrd them nourishment. Pure salt, and the liquor in which salt meat or fish has been boiled should not be given to them ; but bite of meat, liver, or sheep's pluck, either raw or cooked, and out up very small, will be a great improvement to their food; coexaely-pounded oil-cake, raspings, and broken shi]^ biscuit are also excellent, and all the better if ftall of grube, as Cowls are very fond of them, and of all sorts <rf worms. It will improve the oondition of the poultiy if some hard grain is given to them morning and night, and unless thrown in the yard, it should be mixed up with a small quantity of powdered mottsr, limestone, or graveL Boiled rioe is also an excellent food, espedaUy if it be boiled with skim milk.
3H DOKEBTIO FOWL.
orntniMad SDOUsh to ouim It to iwell vtthont nulning 1117 qiusti^ of Ihs Boldi biLt boUlug ii Dol neoSHUT lo digcstioa, ti the Cbwl's giiurd om cnub (lie bardeM ■pedseoroom. Bioe, In iddilioa 10 tM (trengthming qoalitiaa, is oonudend to im- prove Uie delioac; of the Btah.
Except in (he middle of winter, knd when monltinK. hem lajr dorlas the irhola year gBnanll/ tnrj aecond doj, althongh Hme will prodace two aggt in three daft- Altar l&Ting, the hen
ro porTectl; b1«ui and free tlom vennlD. The; BhoDld be fram tvrelTe to eighteen in sqnsre, uid alKiiK eii to eight Inchoe deep. Screw ii cannidered prefersl>le to ' Tor the lining of Uie neet.
laldfK^m* hiUchlng,
t( of laying, when n hen hae
erinoos by ecrsping np etrew, u if tor (ha pnipoee of linilding & comera. end uttering a peeoUar cry, resembling (he " clucking " with whlflh ehe oalle her chichenB ; ahe Qutten ebout. appean reet^eae and disturbed, and her oomb and waulfe, formerly of a brilliant red. become of a pale and lickly hue. When Ihia ia perceived, a not of uraw ahanld be made in one of (be baies. aad an ogR (boiled hard, aa leaa liable (0 bo broken) placed within (he nest, as an inilaoement to the hen to make nie of it. In cboosing tbo eggi on which the hen la lolended lo ai(, it is deairable that tbey ahonld be recently laid, and also ae large at poaaible, and, aa a mle. none abould be admitted (hat are more than a month old. It ia nob nnoanal tc plooe eggs of difliBreDt kinda to be hatched l>y the bea. for as she cannot diHtingnuh her own the will ^c upon any that may be oflbred to bar. It ia neoeeaary, alio. U/ examine the eggs, by holding ihem np againeC the light, aod obeerving whether the yolk contalna in the upper part of ita larger end a email, whitish, filmy autHtanoe, which ignite the germ of the future chick, and without which it cannot be brought to LiTe. Than li, UkawlM, > email oaviv Is tlw asme end of (he yolk, immediately under the
DOmSTIO FOWL. XI
than, flll«d with Blr. wMch eipuid< dorlog (be prooeu of hWahtog, and 1« no doubt fiir the BH of tbe chick whaa Snt brooght to MSe. The rrtisbaeu of Chs egg aaj be IMed b7 thii air-biig — ft uoall circle being ■ tiffn thM it is newly l«Id j and a Urgs one thu it ii etals. A hsn, if not isterfSnd with In the amsKsment or her nMt. gcDsnll; mskeg use of an odd number of egga, placing one in the middle, and diapoaiug the r«t in a cirda arannd it. It la aa well, tbeiefora, to lollow Ihia eiample, giiiEg lo a good-siied hen. two jean at age. at many a« ibe eon oonieaieally cotst. which will ba from thixtean to Sltaan, and la ■ pallet of the lame breed, trom nine to elavan. The proceu of hatching laiie twenty^aDe d^a. and daring thia period tha ben will generally ui patientl;, only remoring from the neat for a raw matneDte at teediag-time. Bome hane will lit for d&ya together withoac leaving Iheir egga ; and when tbia ia the case. they ebODld ba lifted from tiia neat once a day. and fod aeparateiy in the yard, after the other fowla. In do csm Bhonid more eggs be placed ooder the ben thaa ahe can perfbccly coTer. for too many might oocaaion all to ba addled. If the ban ahoold desert her neat oFler baring eat et«adily for aoma daya, aa will oceaaionally happen with young pnllela, eSbrU Jihonld be made to indnce ber to retnra, by replaeiDg her npon the neat, and feeding her while (hare with anything of which ahe ia particalarly food, for the eggs will bo lUHt If yonr endaavonre are nneucoeeafnl ; bnt if yon ahonid by tbia meana get Cham bstciied, yon abonld not tnut ber to bring up another brood. U the cloee of the Bighieentb day, tha Aral cry of the chick ia peteeptible, when tha attention of the hen ia redoabled. The little oeatore soon fnla aalQeient litAl energy to emerge from confinement, and tape for honra with lla beak against the ihell. which it M leugtb breaka, and riae* into life and hborty, a fnli-rormed feathered chidien.
Althongh manypetaona ibrce cmmba of breftd and peppereoraa down tha threau of the young brood immediataly after thay are batched, it ia better not to do eo, (Oi tha chicken leqoirea no food until tha neat day. the yolk whicb it baa taken into ita body being
then ; and the too CBiiy ii of food will only «
• yolk of a hard.
Tely ther may be than removed from Ibe neel, and piooed with the hen In a coop (Pig. t), made to move upon wbaela, and roofed and floored with thin wood, bartng clean ainw laid at the bottom, Oooaaionall; basket coope (Fig. I) are
M DOHKsnO FOWL.
uad I bat then m olijKillonable, m Uiet« ti no BhalMr ttx the han tn the tnot tt ft ■hover or laln oaaiax on. Altar tba UpM of i ocmpla of dafi, praridad tha irnathar Li mnn and dry, tha Ooop "wish Uia han and ohLokana ahonld ba cvriod, after fbadihg ■7 apot in the garden, and left tor a ftw honra wUh tlie roof ralaad, aa It ahonld not be morad, bowarcr, befbre the dew haa
■ thorongblf diaappaand, and imut
■ not be plaaad on gam, nolaM ft
I |j .~- .'■t'o "•"- I /!-' •"» baon recently mown, mnd ta
141 ' { J / 1 IjCS^^fe "V ic^ -^ *^*'' thonmebt; diy, Ibr damp k
F ' ^^^nm^^k. A *•>■'--— nmeinjnrlona than oold. B lar, periiapa, to leave Iham in m part of the garden (ae F; they ehonld not yet b« allowed to I with the podltr)'), the ben being oonflned fn tha coop, to __ prerent her from tiring tha brood
- ~ *"" by leadinff them over too mnclh
A handful of barlfly khonld be glrm to the hen while in tlie garden, a qnantl^ of which aha win break fac tha chtekaoa j theae will not amy ttx from tha ban, who trill call them to the ■heltsr of her wing In oaae of a ahower. or on the appearance of an; danger. Long before annaet tha ooop and lla oontenla ahonld be retmsad to tha hooae, and, aa eraning Dknee, the laat meal given and tha bnnd Wt tat the night. The hen ia not Dnftequently kept oonllBed in this w^ Ibr above a IMiiight ; the length of time, howerer. ahoold ba regnlatad aoeording to drcnmMaaoaa and (he atate of the brood and the weather. When the chlckena aoqolte aofBcdaot Hrength to mam abont, it ia tbne Ibr tbe hen to ba allowed the Uber^ of the gaidan, or tha range of a field, where she will ecratch np weeda and wonna for her chioha. Thit ihonld be oontinaed onta they ate oM enongh to be taken Into the poultry-yard and fad wHh tha other tbwla. While thne rearing, pure vMer ehoold always be left within their rtaoh. Thla ahonld be oonlaltied tn an ntBuC made fbr the pntpoae, which may be bought at any earthenware abop. By thia meana they are prerantad from welttng tbeir fbeC and ftethen. It ihonld be frflquantlychanged,fQrif infihred to remain till it tieoomaa fbul, it ia liable to genenUe dieeaao. Chlckena are ,- genenlly leparsted thmi the ben when aboat alz or eight *eek> old, bnt aha doea not entirely deaot them nntn they are Ibll- feathered, and able to take oare of thongetvea. it that her anxiety for them oeaaea. aha goea to moat la belbra, aj to lay. Tbe ohiokena will alio go to rooat, and ihonld have for their oae perchea not thicker than theb- elawa can eaally gnap. Theae ahonld neither be too ahatp, nor too ronnd. The higheet of the perchs ihonld not be more than three famt, from the
DOICESnC FOWL.
When * ohlnksn Sral <WBp« from tbs ihtll, ita itoiiiaeh la u tn; mall (bat It ii not oiBbls dT eotUalnlng man food *t ■ tinia than might tw rollad ap In th* OmrpMi of k puk Thla, hovew, Kxm sipuidt u the blnl inimaaa in growth, and in (b* oonna of MTsn oi Bight meka the orop wUl be ahla to oontals nearly aa mnoh da ttut of * pnim. asd asoh dmigth doia the giiuird aoqnho, that It aid* tba power ol the eloDuch In dJSMCUi([ the hardeat grain that can be glvim to Ik The ooane aand ttuif pick DP adda gntOj to thia Incraaae of tOength. which majr be alao ooniUanbly abated by bollhig as figg hard, and ponndlng the ahell qp wbh tt, and giving tt Utsm ooCMloiiaUy ftar food. At all weaka old chlckena may ba Ikd on eoni mlud with hot mealy potatoaa, and any Knfia from tha table, anoh aa an glran to atore ttnrli. Barley-meal mixed with milk ahonld be bvqiieatly given, can hUng lakta t>imt Coo mnch milk la not uaed, aa all watery f»d ahoold be aTolded, or It will aobjed them lo the aooor, rOr which the bat remedy la a portion of toaaled bread eopped in ale or broth. Cinda chopped ap amall. and the milk tbotonghly aqueeaed ant, are an exoellent addition to their rood, and can be aaaily made by poUlnK a piece of alnn Into a little boiling milk. Chicken* an paitiealai-ty Ibad of animal (bod, eilher law or drcued, and wHl eat It alone, or mixed wUh meaL Thia la
A brood aeparated from tha hen at the age of eight
atrong and healthy, will be grown anffl- datitly in a (hart Ume to be lUtaiedaa apring diiekeau, pollata, and oookerela.
Tba proper coop tOt the porpoae of httenlag aluald have partitlcni joet of
r ten weeki, and being Uud
it to torn ronnd. The (Tout •bnuld haTB '
bare wide enongh to admit (he head and
■ieekotalbwl.wtthalionghnndaiieath '<!-'•
to oontain food and water (Pig. 1). There ahonld b« a door at tbe baok, Ihioogh
which the fowl may be eiUier placed In the ooop, or remoTed from It. A falee bottom
€ m^ba mBdetotheoaop, whhihihoald B>- x:- ■ I '" removed and olaaued every Uuee or \ fCnr day* (Fig. 1). The coop may be i
nt.*.
Ibr It ii deabaUe (hat lUtsoing. they ahonld not be dia-
In the neighbonriiood i^ Horaham, an hltad DpoogrooBd oata, mad*
gg^ TtTBKEYB.
Into grad Mia miiBd np 'rith brown mgrnr. pot-Uqoor, ntflk, •nd hOB^ Urt, 01 oMfcuiBt, •afl tniMla, iriUi (hMp-B plock out op uiaU ; poUb of UiB «iM tor cr bring Duds of Uie pot-Uquor, mixed with bollad oMmml, and of puU. wUoh an i>»ed night and moming. Soma fowl* ao Ikttenad, and coopad tor two or tbr«e d^i pwriona to bdng crMmnaa, hare wBigbod u mnch aa Ian ponnda ; bn( thla bM baen piDli«b;r a anpeiiot breed, tha more ortloary hning avBragod
A gooi mode of fceding for tliB flnt w«k, ODtU they become oontantod in conflna- meot, la brniaed borlir made into a poite with toeacia and new milk, whioh ahonlfl be gHen to tham ftmr lima a day, or placed tor tbera tooa* aa IhBTplaaaei aUtUa gnnliOi
.TAJUSTZSS or rOTTXTXT.R
The Tnrkar la gananUj M IT ■ ft uoble-loakiiig bird, ntTniabed with apnn, and able to apread hia larfn tail IDra a peaoook ; hii head li emaU, and mrmonntad by a red fleahj^ protabaratiee, liaing bum the nppsr bm, whioh, whsn the biid la aidted, ahaogea to a dec^t eoarlet hne, and baoomea alongaled. loaa inohea below the bill, beneaUi whioh ia a membrane of the aame coloor, extendlBg to abODt * third part of the neck ; and a toll or black bair. fMlins bom the bieaat to the length of fonr or five inchea. The hen Tnrke; la mnob emaller in site, with a head more in proportian, bnt like Ibe npper ' port at Che aedk, deatittUe of hathan. and OoTSied with pale rad apota i ebe Is witbont the power of expanding her tall, ajid ia alao deatlMteorthelarge walUeaof the oock.
One cock is commonly allowed to Ibnr or flra bane ; bat if a large munber of ohioke be deaired, he ahonld be confined to two motea. whan the yonng wiQ aleo be atztniger, and more likely to thrlTo. When the hena begin to hatch, the cook must no longer be allowed to be with Ihem, a* he wonld intcrmpt the hana, and probably break the <«gai gr kill Oat fntnre chlcka. Tm'keyi may tw fed lo the aame manner aa fowie, and Indian oora or BUiiae wUI be fonnd to fUCsn them in a ihort time, Aa they grow f&t, thoy preAr laeting on the Door to the tronble of rooating ; atrnr abonld. thenfare, be ■trawn for them when thla ia the oaae i but if only kept for laying, they (hoold be placed ia a ihed Ihoronahly airy, bat leaa warm than the haa-honaa, Btted np wlUi high pardkaa.
TURKEYS. 871
Tnrkeji are in their prime for the table at the age of firom seTen to ten months, after which time they are chiefly naed for hreeding.
Laigmg, — ^The Tark^ hen begina to lay at an earlier period than the common fowl, prodacinir an egg genenlly erery other morning, though some will lay eveiy day ; and when there is any sign of an %{s,^ being about to come forth, the hen should be shut ap in the house until it is laid. When she has produced flrom fifteen to twenty e|^ she will be ready to sit, but will lay again during the summer, and sometimes in the autumn ; but at either of those periods the number of eggs will not exceed a doaen or fifteen. The eggs are of a larger size than those of the common hen, and poesess a superior delicacy which renders them highly prized in cookery.
Satddnff. — ^The number of eggs put under the hen should be regulated according to her size, never exceeding fifteen, so that she may completely cover them. The laying of this number will probably occupy a month, and it is desirable that those placed for hatohtT>g should be as recently laid as possible, being likely to produce stronger chickens. Tnzk^ eggs are sometimes given to common domestic hens to hatch ; and notwith- standing the increased length of time required for sitting, the hens wait patiently till the chicks appear. Thqy are also more tender mothers than the real parent. The period of incubation lasts firom twenty-nine to two-and-thirty days, but its close more commonly happens on the thirtieth. The hen is soon alarmed at the approach of a stranger, therefore no one should be allowed to go near her while sitting, except the person who has the care of the poultry ; for, if frightened from her nest, she may probably not return to it until the eggs become cold, and consequently spoilt. Nests may, however, be placed near together, as the hens never interrupt each other.
CMdca. — The Turkey chicks are more delicate than those of the common fowls, and must be handled with the utmost care and tenderness. When hatched, they are covered with a small, soft, downy plumage, and are very weak for the first few days, of which the third is considered particularly dangerous. They should, therefore, be kept in the house, and if the weather is veiy fine, taken into the air for a short time in the middle of the day, the hen being placed under a coop, through which the chicks can go and return. They should have nothing to eat imtil the day after th^ are hatched, when food should be oflRsred them in the open hand as thoy lie in the nest, at a time when the hen may have quitted them for a few moments. Care should be taken not to expose them to any extreme of temperature, or to wet, as a heavy shower of rain fiUling on their delicate plimiage, might chill the bird suflElclently to kill it in it6 then feeble state. Should such an accident occur, the young chicks must be taken near the fire, and careftdly dried with a soft warm flannid ; after which, a little toast and ale should be given them, when th^ may be returned to the shelter of the mother's wing. About the close of autumn there will be discovered on the breasts of the young cocks a tumour, from which protrudes a tuft of hair. In the second or third year it will reach the length of three or four inches ; the bird is then called a " stag," and has attained its foil growth. If carefolly managed. Turkeys will probably get through the first few months of their existence with little loss. When they begin to throw out those points or nipples, which all must have observed oovering the head and neck.
878 aUINlEA FOWL.
tbej reqnire great attention, for thia period may be conaidered the most dangerona of their Uvea, espedallj when they are changing to that acarlat colour, which aome call " shooting the red." Bnt immediately they have passed this atage, they soon grow strong and hardy, and well able to take their place amongst the other fowla. They are then called " poults," and are by many esteemed good eating.
Feeding, — ^In feeding the chicks, everything of a watery natore shonld be aroided, but parslqTi fennel, nettle-topa, mnstard, or any tonic herbs, may be given them, out up small, together with a few gentles ; a small qnantity should be commenced with, and gradually increased, according to the sise and strength of the chicks. Curd is an excellent thing for them, when not in the least sour ; a small portion should, therefbre, be made f^esh every day, and aa soon as the chicks are allowed to peck about the garden, a little coarsely ground barley or oatmeal may be mixed with it, or made into a separate paste with water, as mUk is liable to turn sour. The foodshould be placed in a small pan, and left for them to peck at; and they should also always hare within their reach a supply of pure water.
The Pintado, or Guinea Fowl, is a natiye of Afirica* where it is found in abundanee both wild and domesticated ; but it may now be met with in most dvilised countries. It is a handsome bird, standing high upon its legs, though when plucked of its flaathers it is not much larger than a Dorking fowl. The cock and hen are alike in sise and appearance, and cannot be easily distinguished. Their plumage is of a dark colour, speckled with small white spots. It has been found impossible to subdue their wild nature, or to fMten them like other poultry ; toft in confinement thqr aoon become poor in flesh, and gradually pine away. They delight to roam over fields, and pick up insects during the day. It ia. therefore* beat to let them have aa wide a range as possible, and they will return for their evening meal at the accustomed time, after which they will chooee some tree tat their roosting-place, and give notice of the approach of any person by a scream of alarm in which they all join. They may be considered a certain protection to a country house ; fbr, like a watohfiil dog, they are sure to arouse tiie inmates in case of danger. They are, however, dreadAil pesto in a garden ; for no sooner does dawn commence, than they breakfest heartily on firuita and vegetables, besides destroying young roota and seeds.
La^ng and Hatt^iing. — ^It is almost impossible to prevail upon Guinea Fowl to ■it on a nest prepared in a house. They will generally lay their eggs in some hedge or wild bush, and, owing to the deatruction caused by rata and other vermin, a brood can never be reckoned upon with certainty. When you have discovered the place where the Guinea Fowls are in the habit of laying, it is a good plan to viait it eveiy day when they are not by, and when you find an egg take it away, and leave a ihlae one in Ito stead. By pursuing this plan you may collect an immense number ; fbr Qub Pintados are proftise layen, though they never, like the Hen, make any noise after the production of an egg. If the Guinea hen appears anxious to ait, it may be as well to give her a chance of rearing her brood, placing bUbw of the eggs also under a domestto hen known to be a steady sitter. The eggs are not larger In sise than those of the
6EE8S. 873
Bantam, wUbh fiiwl is a good foater-mother, ranalnizig qnietly in the yard, wifhant tiring the jonng things hy dragging them through the graas. The prooeaa of ini*^i»my lasta thirty days. The eggs are apeokled in appearanoe, and very lioh in flavour. The Guinea Fowl is alao highly prised as a choice dish on the table, the flesh somewhat resembling that of the pheasant, bnt possessing more moiatness. The cook nsoally weighs about five pounds, and the hen, which is rather the more delicate of the two, a little less.
Ths Bomeatie Ooom is distinguished from the wild breed by a slight diflference of plumage, being generally of a pure white colour, while the latter is of a dull ashy grey. In choosing geese, select such as are ftiU-flBathered, large, and round in the body, with broad feet and short legs. The head should be erect, and the ^e clear and lively. The young of the Goose, when just hatched, are called "gulls," and afterwards "goslings." When a few weeks old, and fit for the table, they again acquire a change of name, and are called " green geese." Aiter harvest time, when termers generally turn them into the fields from which com has been cut, they are termed " stubble geese," till October, at which time they have attained their fhll growth, and are called "Michaelmas geese." Five geese are usually bred with a gander, and this number is called a " lag." Two or three geese are, however, quite sufficient to rear a plentilU supply of goslings for any private table ; and it is a better method to keep the geese intended for breeding during the term of their natural Ifves, as they become more proftise layers, as well as better sitters and nurses when they grow older. The Gander will be contented with one mate, and will, always con- tinue to be attached to her if allowed.
Laying. — Geese never lay during the winter, but commence in the spring, begin- ning earlier if the weather is mild and they are well fed and taken care of. The Goose commonly lays, two or three times in the season, from twelve to eighteen eggs, thus producing about fifty in the course of the year. When she feels a desire to lay, she may be observed csrrying straws in her bilL A nest of straw should then be made for her, and she should be shut up till she has laid her egg ; she will complete the usual number in the same place, producing one every second day. They should be taken away when li)id, and put in a cool place, only one being left in the nest.
Hatching. — After a month fttmi the commencement of laying, hatrhhig generally takes place, and lasts ttom four weeks to thirty days. The Gander should be allowed to visit the Goose while sitting, which he wiU do frequently, oocasionaUy taking her place on the nest while she feeds.
OotUngs should be treated with the same oare as the chickens of Hens and Turkeys.
m DUCKS.
■Btaf should bs IM at Ont wU^ baka^ n •ad mDk ; griM mar "wt b* iddad, mu) In tlw ooiitm ot ■ Ibw difi llu audi and milk otungadhir boiled mubadpotetoM. Ksuls40pa ami leMm, mt Dp udbH, abooU ■Jso be ^TeD them, with any nnbitiou fOod whkoh will not be lilul7 to caoie dlairijos^ AUhoogh aqoatio birda, thiQf ihonld be careftally protected from wet and cold dnrinc (fa* earij period ot thalr llT«a. OoaUnga grow Tei7 qofoklf, and wbsn lUUnad at only a Taw weeks old tbej tm ooueidered graat dsliiaclCB. They naj b« ker* than the water ontil matnrity wittaonl injniy. and, althODgh they tm nUonllj lond of it, It li reokoned to retard the prooees of iUteulng.
RiUaiiiag, ttt. — IT toined into a field. Kssw will bed upon the habage like shMp,
them, theymut hare boiled potatoes and oom girento thamerary ughtr with chopped roota or TegeUbloSi by which meane thoy will beoome attached to their home, and keep good honn. Ihiring the proceee or lUtening. whioh generallj oocnpiea aboat Ave or Ai weeks, geeae ihoold not be pennlHad (o haTB a wider range than that of tt« ooart-ynrd \ tor loo mnoh aiemlae will DBase Uieir Sesb to beoome tongh, eren if allowed pleaty of com. h is. therefore, common amongM breeders to ooop them In k darkened place, when thoy soon beoome reoondled to conflaamoit, and eat Toraeionafy, Barley and oats are eommonly need for tkttaning, a part being in meal, mixed with pot-llqnor or milk. To tliia a little met Is oAan added, and also chandlers' greaves. Another good method of fuiening Is to keep tbem in a told well strsmi with straw, and having two troDghi. one ooDStantly filled with dried oats and tbs other with clean water, foeding them baeidss twice or thrice during the day with white leOncea or osbbagee. for whioh potsloes ehould be occasionally eabetltated, ai too mnoh green A»d is liable to lateen (he flrmnees of fibre <a tlie fleah, and render tt flabby. In
bavlag aocees (o uiy pond
fleeh will prebably ba
of Inftrlor flavour. It is therefCn deair-
abls, when they are tUl-teathered. that
they ahoald have the use of some stream
the neighbourhood, and a
) will atoo be of sdn
e they will do good ui
by coDHunlDg froga. aloga, and all k
oT Insects which arc Ibtind above groi
withatm Uks mil, so
DUCKS. 875
The Muaoovg Duck Ja ft aepttnla ipedM, of ankDOwn origin, being eaUed in Fraaoe the "BarlMiy Dock," and in Other plaoea by diflbrent namee. It ia of a larger aiio than the common Dnek, and the flesh ia oonaidered of inferior quality. On aocoont of its aiae it ia chiefly used for crossing with other breeds. This cross produces a hybrid, which must again be paired with the com- mon speciea, and in this way a good stock can be reared. Most of the large Dncks brought to market are of this hybrid kind. They are reared in droves, very little atten- tion being paid to them till thej are ready to fktten for the table. In varioos parts of the ooontiy cottagers have the right of pastoring dncks and geese on the commons, where they literally keep themselvea, especially if, as is generally the case, the common is provided with a pond.
Laifnig. — ^The Duck is very proliflo, but careless in the laying of her eggs, which she sometimes drops in the water — seldom choosing the nest which has been prepared for her ; it, however, she can once be prevailed upon to go to it, she will probably oontinoa to do so. She commences to lay in February, generally choosing the night, or an early period every second morning, for the depositing of her egg. The eggs are larger than those of the common hen, and stronger in flavour. They are highly esteemed in pastry, and especially when mixed with hens'-eggs they are considBred to add both to richness and delicacy. They are generally of a bluish-white colour, some- ttmes speckled.
Saiehinff. — The domestic Duck sits for thirty-one days, the same length of time occupied by the wild species ; but she is not so attentive a nurse as the Goose. When the dnckUngs are hatched, they should be kept in the house for about a fortnight, according to the weather, and careftilly protected firom rain and cold. It is not at all unusual to place Duck eggs under a Hen for the purpose of hatching. Unlike the Hen, the Duck seldom exerts herself in defence of her young, allowing them to be carried off >y hawks, or carrion crows, while she only shows her alarm by shooting baokwaxds and forwards in the water.
jPleedinff, tie. — Am the flesh of the Duck partakes of the flavour of the food to which it has been accustomed, particular care should be taken, for at least a fortnight before killing, to confine them to select food. Oats are preferable to barley, which should never be used for the fkttfming of ducks, for, though it is more nutritive, it will render their flesh insipid. WhUe kept as stores, ducks should have lettuces, with any refose firom the garden cut up small, with half-ripe buckwheat, and at night a meal of boiled potatoes should be given them with com. When being Ihttened, the morning and evening meal should consist of oats, placed whole in a pan of water, which may also be left for them to use at discretion. Acorns, when ripe, are considered to impart a superior flavour to the flesh, and are very fattening.
376 DISBABBB OF POULTBY.
BISBA81S OV rOVLTBT, AHD TBMtM UKSDISI.
The wioiis dinfiMfw to which ponltiy are liable are oommonly oanaed efttier l/j wrong diet or a want of proper attention, and can be generaUy oaxed by adopting a diflbrent coarse of treatment. It is ea^y to rear ponltiy saccessftiUy if the Mrds are kept thoronghly clean, waim, dry, and well Ibd.
The Roup is a tpeoiee of inflnenza which attacks all fowls that are exposed to oold or damp. It shows itself in a difflcoUy of breathing, which causes the bird to gape, and a swelling of the ^es, which are moist and hnmid, aooompanied, in serious oases, by a watexy ranning from the nostrils. The plumage loses its natural brilliancy, and beeomes doll and rol&ed, while the bird sits moping in evident pain. The best method of core is to keep them warmly lodged, snd snpplied with good and Aonrishing food, and if the disease is more than commonly severe, the head should be gently wiped with a towel dipped in warm water both night and morning.
The P^ is a disorder which more fteqaently attacks the chickens of Fowls and Torkeys, although all kinds of poultry are liable' to it. When about three or Ibor weeks old, the chicken will often yawn or gape— a certain symptom of the camplaint> which is ftiriher developed in a thick ooyering over the tongue, also by its scratching at the roots of its bill, and a difBculty of breathing ; the windpipe at last swells, and becomes completely filled up, and, if not well attended to, the chicken generally dies in the course of a week. The ordinary remedy is to peel the thick oorering off the tongue with the finger-nail, and afterwards to rub the part with batter and hon^.
covcLvnnre OBBXKyi.Tioir8.
Care should be at all times taken to feed your poultiy with regularity. If you do this, and keep their nest-boxes and coops perfectly dean, the hens will lay more eggs, and the young chickens thriTS the flEieter. Boon after the young chickens have grown to a sufiident size for the hen to leave them, it wHl be noticed that the young oocks among the brood exhibit very pugnacious eymptoms towards each other, and as they get older they become objects of attack on the part of the old oook, who wHl in all probability chase them about the poultry-jard, particularly at fteding time, and prerent them fh)m picking up more than a few spare grains of barley. When this is the case, the younger fowls should be cooped up, otherwise there will be no chance of flfctlening them; even when they quarrel the same precaution should be adopted, and the pooltry-yard cleared of
5l IGHT yiua <■ Mid lo b* «botU tbe a Ihli b(«DEifti1 knd umAiI bM, but It purr^i PCS of bn«dlnB >fler It hu iHilwiil half ihH age, and ought T It will melon tboM which we In their prtme. >n la;* two while ag'se. and ilta Bftesn dBji Bfter the Momid keepa la the oeet from (bar or fira o'clock the next tnamliis ; ah* then goea off te 'j ^ feed, and the ooek lakea her place during Ihs da;. If the hen dela;,
to her dDlr ; the hen doe* the um* In tan of negUgsnce in Ihia napeet on the put of the oock.
The yonng on« are nanall; of dUfhrent aeiee. For the flnt three dayi after Ihe^ •n haMhed. the Itasale (eldoni leene them ; alter that Ubw, the oock and hen attend n wua the Old foppl^ the yoosg with food
8T8
FiasoKB.
is -tngwiaj ; ib« parrot birds ooUeot * quMitit; of grali oropi, uid titer it hBB Uiu Hum unldl lolt and maooxed, the^ out it ap toto tlw throau or the yoong odm. M the jonug birda aoqairg ttnagOt, tba old oi» ^TS the food Iwg prepantian, and at laat drive them out to proiid* in part tar thorn- aelTee -. hat they are often seen feeding tlislr young ones even when Che laOar are able to flj, and thej themselTeB are going to neet again. The young onee» while f«d by the cook and hen. are called "eqnab«"i nnderaii montfae old."tqaaakers"i and altar that age they are deoominBtad "pigeooi," being ina Bt Mate to mate and breed.
The [jrm of the box is loimUerial ;
be trinngnlgf is, perhaps, the best, becaase it allows the wet to ran off quickly. 11 th^ be msde with any nnmber of holea, ivhlch shonld be soffleiantlf large Tat the Ut tun round in them with teao- nhelTss and partitions of nx ur eight inches* .Bptii shonld run Llong Uie &ont, to keep he couples apart, and sflord them good will be Bn adtuitage, it
The trap q aide upon
to erect }at)per
lo keep out the cale. If poa- T ibe sake of wutnth, your Did tsa the saath or south- tut any place Uiat is dry, light, ud snfBdently conuaodloos. Dvoted into a good lolt. atiy is flisd on the oat- /** platfbrm of wood, at ths ^t'
:h. or ratber lass, aatinder. Tba Ibm depends upon the taste of the a
n«ps an, fbr the most part, sqaare, w1^ one, two,
; each of which is fninlahed with » door eontn'rad In such a
mon concealed within the loft, or any other place whence he oi
>e trap, eOMtaally to olon (ha eutranee in a saconi'
« «Bil; b« polled to. Thg Bap it indkpeiuable lo tlie tuaiar, if
tt, be would not imva » enfllfliont control over his birdB» ftod coold not oouJl tha Ml aOti amir Jlight, or whenerer hs conudend It Bdriuble lo do to.
Tbs boUiiv win i> > vetj tuefol addltloD to the loft or etcy. lis c< YOj linipLe : —A little eqiun, or rather oblong, wooden ftBine ii made Bufflcientl; iarga for u^ pigeon to peoe through it with ease i a ftllp of wood, tiiat is neorlj ofl long ee one end of the tmoB, t« then hnng to it, b; ■ ooDple of pair ot win eiapla, or Hmtn Mngee, ■o ae to pUf eaally ; into thli elip two pieoee of win are diivao, wide eaoagh ftput to admit a pigaoa'i head and neck, but not (he body, between and oa each aide oT them i tha i mnitbe long aoongh to reach below the '
of that end of the frame opposiw to whan
■Up. In which the wiree an driven, is hnng. " -z l_ .~^ -^^
The balling wire <a now oomplete i a latb or (wo mmt be cnt ont of one eide of the tlry, or a hole made la the n>of^ ot near the antnuioe to the loft, acoording to which of the piaoea ia destined ibr ita fveeption. Tbe frame ia ^etened In wiUi tJia pointa ot the wires dowawaid, aad so aa to open inward ; the lower part of the frame agralnat whioh they lUl will then prerent ihcan from movlDg ontward. The object of tha bolting win is lo allbrd a pigeon tbe mcana of geOiag into the trap, or lolt, alter it ia fUlenad np. For iniOnoe, lappoee a penon, who keepe Tumbler*, tome them oat for ao hooT*! Bight i at the end of that time he oallt in all he can. Qutene np the eotnnoe and quite tha toft, leaving two or three bird* ont ; tbe oDnatmoUon of tbs baldng wire is eoeb, that Ibe bM* in the loft oannot posh tt outward, while tboee who an oat, eao and will, when Ihftr wish to oome in, push It inward, lift it up, and enter. It is eqnallr nsetU In (he atoy ; altar two-thirds of Uu pigeons are Inside the (rap, the door* are palled np, and the straggler* anerwards get in bf lilUng the bolting wire. Tbe birds tlnady trapped cannot eeeape ItaiDagb it, while it aObrde as esar entrann lo Ibe tew Ibat are not seeored when tbe doon are oloaed. The pigeonHaill is a thrUl, long, ttid lood whlitle, lo whieh your pigeon* will attend, even when high on the wing, if you make a practice of giving them some ohoioe food after it. It is by thle call that tbe pigeons are brought Into the house or trap i they ahoold be regularly aoouMomed lo It, and brought in by it, iuvuJably, before Ibey an IM.
A very good tr(f-actiiig piffHm-trap ia made in tbe following manner : — A large squue cage is coniOucted of a wooden frame, and wires instead of rails or latiis, with two folding doors, eacli festened by bingM lo tbe lop. About a lOot frmn the bottom of lh« cage, a Iklea bottom of open wiree ia filed, and In tbe spaoa bMween the real and &l»a bottom, a pigeon 1* placed, by means of a little door in tbe side, aa a deooy.
■Dd,l9 tmpiMM
li flisMiMd. of ibont
In length, M Uu ottMr
■Uek, equal In Isngth to
ta tied by Iba
the trap, the tiro folding
tton. ()w Uktk ii placed batmen them,
irith ■ ■man portlcm of (he wooden edgte
of their tmaet reeling iigalul each end
the dean an pulled inward sdiI
I downward, ao a« to keep the itick. and
- ODnaeqnentl; Ihemselvee, In a proper
- sitaaiJoii. bj mean* at a piece of otgnt,
whieh li placed agalnM a raO of the ftame that rum ap the middle of one of (he ddee. When the nick la In lie pro]Mr plaoe. the (tring which beten* it to the aqaare piece of wire-work, tbu« one end of the latto- aboat all Inohea from the Iklie botlora ; the etlck li plaoed on the opposite aide to (bM on which the aqoore piece of wtn-work ie thni nleed ; tnd OlD onnoe weighs dropped on the win-work, will, bj meani of the itirinB, poll the eliek from between the dom ; the; being acted etronglr upon b; the apruig-woRn, tanmedictely cloee ; *a that If a pigeon b« aonctad to the trap, and endeaTonr to jofai (he deiM]r-biid, whloh it eee* fiseding inalde. and alight on the Inside of the nge, that is, on the eqaan piece of wii*- woA, it aiDit, of neoeul^, be canght. The lUu bottom is for the pnrpoee of prerent- ing the dcoc^-blid from eecaplng It woold be a matter of trifling diflcoIV to adiqK a bolting win to this cage i it shonld be p seed at one of the eldca benMth the lUea bottom 1 thns a bird na; enter after the trap is e oeed
pdgeon lk«ien ; It dUfen from ^le aery In shape, aUhongh Iti nee 1* the ssme. It ^ li either ootutrneted on a pIMfom or I J- mtaned to the roof-leads of t, hooae. Two frames. In the ibspe of a triangle, made or deal, and niled with stripg of tbe ■amo wood or laths, lie nailed brone of their sides to tile lead or platform, about thive or fonr leet apart, and eiscUy opposlla caob
trifle more thsa eqnal lo the dlstaoee be
ofeachafwhidiitisn
L TwoslnttarnilsaniiailedanlherooforplalfoRa, wl
PIGEONS. 381
extends ttom the lower oornen of the trieiiglee, and oonneot them together. To eeoh of these raOe a light frame, made of deal latha or rails, fixed about an inch apart, is hong Ijy small hinges. The fhunes should be exactly large enough to fill the space between the top and comer rails and the two triangles. A string is flistened to the outer edge of each of the frames or doors, whudi is brought up and run into apullej or swiTel, fixed on the top of the upper rail. One of the strings is then tied to the other, and the latter is left sufficiently long to reach a window, or other place, which commands a Tiew of the a«p. It is set and baited vexy simply : the frames or doors are placed flat on the roof, and a fBW vetches are strewed inside the trap. As soon as a pigeon goes in to feed, the two frames or doors are suddenly raised to the upper rail, by a concealed spectator pulling a string, and thus the bird is enclosed.
The shehres for the brMtUng-fdoM should be fourteen inches, or a little more, in toeadth ; and if yon breed Pouters, there ought to be twenty inches between the upper and lower shelTea, otherwise the pigeons will acquire a trick of stooping, which will spoil their deportment. Partitions should be made in these shelTes, about three feet apart, and a slip of board run along the firont of the lower shelves, about four inches high, to keep in the nests. This slip should run in a groove, or be otherwise managed ao that it may be easily removed, in order to dean out the nests when expedienL A similar slip must also be fixed in the middle of each three-feet division, which is thus adapted for a double nest; in one of which the old hen may lay in quietness, without being disturbed by her young ones in the other, as she often leaves them when about three weeks old to the care of the cook, and goea to nest again. Some fknoierB darken the nest by setting up a board a fbw inches within the edge of the shelves, having an entrance hole cut through ft ; thus dividing ihe partition into an outer shelf or landing place, and an inner room or nest; in this case, of ooniBe, the slip is unnecessary. A good contrivanee to keep the birds private when sitting is, perhaps, worth attention, as they are sometimes shy, and sit uneasily, or even fly olT their eggs in alarm on any person entering the loft Some tame pigeons will not make their nests ; to such it will be right to aflbrd a littte hay. Straw baskets and pans of earthenware are used 1^ many fkuxders for nests. When the latter are adopted, it is usual to place a brick between them (there being two pans in every partition) for the convenience of the birds, as well as more eflbctnally to divide and support the nest. The pans should vaxy in aise according to the pigeons for which they are intended. Stnw baskets are generally pretered, aa the egg ia liable to be broken in the pan.
vaxnnre, juxekq, xta
Gravel should be strewn on the shelves and floor, 19ie birds being fbnd of picking it ; besides, it gives the loft a much cleaner appearance. Cleanliness is indispensable; if yon suffer the loft to be filthy, the dirt will produce eiltets which will be equally annoying to yourself and your birda. Do not handle your squabs or young birds too much, lest yon bring an illness on them which may prove fhtaL
The common pigeon win, during a great part of the year, seek the principal part of its own food, and live upon almost any grains ^^ haaj birds require delicate Ibod
38S TIOJSOVS,
and much ttteatioiL. Of all grain old tant prove to be the beat aoited to the nafcure of these birda ; new taiea ahonld be given very aparingly, especial^ to yoong pigeona, at they are very liable to do them mnoh ix^nry. Hone beana are mtewmed tiie next best foodtotarea; the amaUeat of these are prefbrred, especially amaUtieka. Wheat, barVeyi oata, and peaa ought only to be given now and then for a change of diet, aa thqy sometimes hnrt them. Rape, canazy, and hemp-seed pigeons are immodsratdy food of} bat these most not by any means be made a constant dieL
Mating or coupling of pigeons is often attended with difficult. In order to eflteci it, let two coops be built dose together with a partition of lath between them, so that the birds may see each other, and tb^ should feed out of the same vessels ; bj supplying them well with hemp-seed, you may soon make them fit for mating, and wbsn you perceive the hen to sweep her tail, you may remove her to the cock's pen, sad they will soon agree. When this convenience is wanting, and you are compelled to put them both into the coop at firsts put the cock in three or four days before the ben, that he may get master of the coop, particularly if the hen be a termagant, or else they vrill quarrel so much that their bickerings will end in an irreconcOable hatred. When the pigeons are matched, you can give them the run of the loft to choose a nest Ibr themselves, or fix them to one, by enclosing them within it^ by a lath railing, giving them food and water in plenty for eight or nine days.
DX8XASI8 AVn BSKSDntS.
For the teet roup give fhem three or four peppercorns once in three or four dajs, and steep a handAil of green rue in their water, which you may let all the pigeons drink of. The dry roup is known by a dzy husky cough ; it proceeds fh»n a cold. To cure it, give them three or four cloves of garlic every day.
The canker arises trovx the cocks pecking each other : for this, rub the affSKted part every day with burnt alum and honey. When the flesh round the eyea of the Carrier, Horseman, or Barb is torn or i)ecked, bathe it with salt water for aevenkl days ; if this do not prove successAil, wash with a solution of alum.
When pigeons are infested with insects, smoke their foathera well with tobacco.
Pouters and Croppers are apt to gorge themselves when they have fitted rather longer than usuaL When this happens, put the bird into a tight stocking with its foci downward, smoothing up the crop, that the overloaded bag of meat may not bang down ; then hitch up the stocking on a nail, and keep it in this posture, supplying it with a little water now and then, till the food is digested. When taken out of the stocking, put the bird in an open coop or basket, and feed it but very moderately fur some time.
The megrimt is a diaeaae in which the pigeon flutters about at random, with ita bead reverted so that its beak rests upon its back. This malady is pronounced incormble.
When pigeons do not moult freely, put them into some warm place, and mix a good quantity of hemp-seed in their common food, and a little saffiron in their water.
If they be lame, or the balla of their foet become swelled, either from cold, being ool with glass, or any other aoddent^ i^PPlj tozpentine to the lArt afibcted.
nu an tiaiully bin* ur aili-oolonnd, frilh whlls backa and nd lagt. 1b^ wdgb abmt IhiiIMn oosoea eaoli, mjnln bat llttls sttanEfam, uid bntd onM a naoUi Air tba gnaur part of the yen. Bj fraqnant Judlcloiu cnmlss, thair plaias([s ttcrann TtrlsBaled wKh coppn and other coloim. At the varietiea of tlaajj plgeoni Bt Tsrj muneroiza, and u Aome of them are much alike In aiae uid c^lonr, wa ahatl iQbodaea enffraTinga only of the moat promiDant among tbaoo,
Tn Sioci Don, oa Wood Piaioi, — AH (ha beantirol vnijetlea of Ihs Cama plgeoD diTin ibeir origin from the Block Dora. ThU bird ia oTs deep blolsh-aah colonri the brvaat daahed wtth a fine grean and purple, the aldea of tiia neok vHh shining copper KJanr, the winge ue marked with tiro bhusk hara, one on the qnlll fnthera. and tlie MberonlheooTerta; the back te while, end tlie tell ii barred near tlia and with black. It ii the lania ahape aa Uw common pigeon, bnl larger and ■gonger.
Til Ttrli Votm ia a imiUl and very thy Mm. The top of tbe head la lab- olomd, tuienperaed with olive, the chin and forehesd white i (here li ■ ipot of blaok tetben on ench aide of the neck, cnrionil; tipped with white; the back ia aah-<olonrad. ■^ ■ tint of olive brown ; the quill feathere oT a doak; broim, the bnaet of a light porpIWi red, the extremity oT fooh leather yellow ; the ddea and inner coverta of tl» wnigi are bloiah and the belly white.
Tn TinoLaa derivee Ua name fKim Ita UunbliDg backward in the air when on the *iBg. It ia a Taramall, fDll-breaated bli4, with a abort bod; and a thin neck, a ehoct rand head and ranall beak. The iridea of Uie eye ehonld be of a clear pearl ookmr. tbtie pigeona, by their Bight, aSbrd great aatialbctlon to the Ibnoien ; for, bealdaa birtodiliny, Uwj will riia to a great height in the air. Oeod Uida, tMoiliwiaed wilk
38* PIOIONS.
•aohotlwr, will kaep Buob oIdh oompaay, UuC > HlgU oT a doun nuv b* ooTand with
a budkaTohM. Wliaa tlu wtodiBr ia waim ud clsar, IIU7 will oonUniw npon tb«
^^ri^^k wing fbr Ibur cr five hoim.
^^^^^B The Tumbler diiplii;! a oltanniiig Tariai; of aalonn in
^BBj^L iu plumage — ndi. jellowi, duiu, bloaa, blaoki, whitoi, and
MB^^r *'lTei«. Tumblen ■boold be kept by themwlTBt ; far if
^^^^K tber get luad to Qr with othen, th^r will, b; deenas, divp
^^^^^H In thcdr Sight. Span no sipmH Id the panhaH of one or
IJ^^^^^K two bird* that ItaTe boon uad to hish flTing, aa thsj will
mH^^^K be or InOaita Mrvioa in tnlDlng yooi jaang oaia to bs ioBj
^^m^ aoaren.
^^m Wh«n the plgeoiM are well aoqnainCed with Iheir hablt»
^fl tion, cam them out, and pnt Ihem npon the wins onoe a
\ day ; a olaar gnj morning, eapeeially for jonng 'Runblsn.
ii the fitlegt tiiae ; wheti tb^ an coming doirn, itnw a
lUUe hamp-Med, or np* and aatxj, to inrlta them homa, and than oonflne them tot
the net or the day.
Tan BiLD-uTiD Tdkblii Ii a flue ipeciea oT pigeon, with plnmaga of a gnat TarleQ or ooloun 1 a pearl eye, a oleao whlM head, with a white Qight and tall. They are reokoned tbzt good flyen t and when th«y are aloft Iq the air, in flue elear weather, tbs oontnat of their ftethera girea them a Tery pleaaing appaaranoe. Borne Toinblere are oallad black or bine beaided -, that ia, when a bird of aUher of thoae oolonra la omamimled with a long dash of wbua. reaehlD)
and the bird n
may be oonaidered ae a Toy h»Tirf»ftm» bird.
Tai Alkovs, oa Xumm Toniiii, derlra Ita origin from ooBUoon Tniobiet^ Jndiolonaly matched lo aa (o ion the faathar. Soma of theaa biida an rsry magnifi- cent In their plumage ; the mon TBrSegated th<7 an in the flight and tail, eapmlally If the gronnd be yellow, the greater ia their Talne. To be perfSM, the tall, back, and breaet man be Tariegatad. and the flight (or winga) not baned. A few are Itathered with three oolonn only, whloh eotnpoae the Krmine or Almond, aa yellow, whita. and black I bnt thaae an •mroe. Almond Tnmblen nsrer arrive at their taU beauty of feather till they have monltad eeranl timea! they togreaae In bean^ areiT year DDtil the decUna of lilt, when Uuy change (0 a moUlcd, eplaabed. or otliar tnfMor
Tai Cxann aicaada many of the oommoii plgeona In liae t IM plninage !• elOM, even, and Una j it la remarkable fbr Uw alagance of lla ahape, and by anmo of the old liBoian waa oallad the King of Pigeon*. A naked, wbita, fOBgoat lump of Qeah
FIGEOKa.
extendi Amn tbe lower peit oT the hud to the middle ot tbe npper ehap i i
called the mtUe -, tt it luiull; met b^ two imall pntubeniucn of eimiler fleih. u
fMm the lower oliep. The bird is moet vsluBhIs
when IM w«alea in or » blkoklih colonr. Tho
dicle ranad the hlack pupil of the eje (vhich it ^ ^ -^ i
BsnarmUr of ft red biick'doit colour, (hough con- ^^^'C^^ jl
■idervd more r*rt ^hen flaiy redj ii
rmril with > circle oT the a
rimgiu; it ia geiieraUy about tl
•hilling, bot tlie liroader ft (praide, tlie greater l
the valna Ht upon Uie binL When thii In
fleeh roDDiI the ere ia thick and broad, it ii
the Cutier to be a good breeder, and one thi
The following triple propertlee are atlribated to the Curieri three lu the hcsll, three in the eye, three in the wattle, and three in the beak. The propertiia in the bfad conaiat in ile flatneea. Btrsightneae, and length i for inatance, a Cerrier with a verr "At *kuU, a little indented In the middle, and a long dutow head, ia greatlr admired ; if the rereraa, it ia tenned barrel-headed. The watUa of the ejre ahonld be broad, droqlaj-, and unifOnn ; if one part appear to be thinner than another, it ia called pinch-ejed ; when the ^e ia equal, full, aud fnh troia imgnlaritiea, it la a roae- eye, and oomidered ver^ valuable. Tbe wattle ahoald be broad acroaa the beak, ahoit from the head inward the point of the bill, and leaning a little forward bum the bead ; if it lie rut. it la raid to be peg-wattled. The beak ehDUld be long. Mralgbt, and thick ; an inch and a half ia ■ long beak, but it ahonld not meuore f rJ<jriJ^^ lea* than an inoh and a qoartar. If the t>eak be crooked, it
^ u' v?4^ -^B ^ termed hook-beaked, and hghtl; eatccmed ; it ahould be
of a black calour, and thick ; when It it thin, it ia called iplndle-baaked : thla drrrtmne ila talne. Tbe length and it.inn»*M or ita neck are marka of ita elegance. Ita plumage ia generally either don or blAcV. tbongh thoe are alao ' splaabed. white, blue, and pied Carriora ; the dun and black agree tjeet with the beTore-deacribed prDperUea ; jet the blnea. and blus-pieda. being raritlea, are coniequenti; ralu- I ' able, eren though ralber inlteior in other rcapecla.
Carriets eie eelebreled for ih«r lore of home. Thia qtuli^ tenders them eioeedingl; naehil oa carrien oT meaaagea from place to place \ henca their name. Poetry and romance aboDDd with reference* to the cairier pigeon. The lover fastened a letter beneath ita wing and aet it free, when it immediately Baw bome to ita miatieaa and bore to ber it4 precioua mJMlve. Ere the dayi of electrio telegrapba, when ahlpa arrired at a diatant port, a Oarrier, brought from Ita native :o wtng liBck the newHi and eren in (hi* day Carriera are uac-l to their maateri. No matter how great the
a«a at flight ihoB randarlDE it
It iianuttter oTdlipDlewlietliertbaHarBemuilinoi beCwMn ■ Tumbler and ■ Curiar. or a Pouter uid ■ and then bml over again from ■ Carrier. It i>, in du make, vrrj liks the Cutler, only !«■ prominent In bJI potiea ; ita body is unaller, and lu necic aharter ; ni
e ejt, » that the distaoM between Ilia wattle on the . that on the e7e ii mneh more oonaplcnone. Bonemen none colonra ; but the nioet diatingniahed are the bine piedi, which generally prove the beet brefden. When ^ yonng, Uiey oboalcl be tegnlarly made to By twin a d^ ; and, ''^ aa they gain alnngth, must be let looie, and pat on the wing witbonl othen in compan;. The; are flhieSy naed for oonTejlng Uttart, the Banaina Carriera being rerj aoaroe.
Tma DuoooK waa originallj bred between a Tumbler and a Horaeman. By fr*- ijaaitlj malohing them wiUi the Horaeman, thew birdi w ' agility. They aw eiceDent breedera and tender nnrHi i which pnrpOM tbey are ftequentl; kept aa feeders for rearing other varietiM of pigeona. The Dragoon la Ughler and mmller •■ tbaa the Horaeman. Oneoflta principal beautiea ii the etaraigbt- Moa of the top of ila aknll and beak, which ought ahnoet to make a horlmntal line with eaoh otter. The Dragoon ia aaid lo be mors rapid for tea or twenty mile* than Hie Horeemaa ; nevertheleea, If the Horaeman be woU bred, it will always die- tanca the Dragoon at a greater flight. They thonld be flown and Batned when young, In the lame manner aa the Horaeman. The dlatinoti»e qnalitieB and Tariation of propertlea in 1
three beantiful btada the Carrier, the Horseman, and the
Dragoon— will bo aeon by oomparing the engraTings of their heada. in this sad Ihe preceding page,
Tai BKaLisa Fonris, oa Pourrae Bouiais, derirea Ita flret name from being originally BngUsh. It ia a croaa-hreed between a Horaeman and a Cropper ; and by rtsqnently pairing them Pouting Hotaemen have acquired great beauty and iBputatioii, The Pouter ought to meaaure eighteen Inchoa from the point of the beak to the end of the tail, and have a Bne ahape, and a hollow back sloping off taper bom tl« ahonldera ; when It haa a riae on the back, it ia termed hog-baekBd. The legs, ftnin the toe-nail to the npp« Joint in the thigh, ahoold measora aeren Inabts. The nop elionld be large asd drcular toward the beak, rising behind the neck, ao as to oomr and mnnesUy off at each of the ghonlden.
The bloe pied, black pled, red pled, andreUow pied are the meet (•••amed eolourai
PIGEONS. 387
but, if the bine pied uiil the blscli pied Pnuter be poieeeHd of the other qnelitiM. the
blank pled, on account of bis plumage, will be the meet valnable pigeon ; sod if the
yellow pisd hive tbeie loBrks, it will be preferable to either. The Itant of tbe crop
■hould be wblte. encircled with ft ehiiung green,
fiil«npened with the eama eoloor with which he is
pied; but the while ebould notnach lathe beck of tie
head, for Uieu be ia ring^headeil : there ebonld be ft
hftlf-moon4hAped pfttch, fellinff upon the chqp, of tbo
■une eoloor with which he \m pied; when that ii
wftntinfi, he le called ewBlIow'thnated. The hcftd,
neck. back, and lail ehould be nnifarjn. A blue pied
pigeon ahonld hiTe two blftck itreBki or ban neoi the
end of bolb wtoge -. if Uieea be of a brown sotonr, the '^
■yalue of the bird ii diralnlahed, and be ia termed kite^
barred. When the pinion of the wing ia epeckled
with white, in the rom ot a i^iae. it la called a rote ^
pinion, and ii bigblj esteemed ; when the pinion baa
ft large dash of white on the external edge of the wing fae ia i
lawn-sleeied. Poulers ihonld npt be naked aboot the thighi, n<
their legs and thighs onght to be stont. itnugh^ and well covered with whiU, lOlt,
down; ftetben. WheQerer it happens that the Joint oF the kaee. or ftny part of the
(high, ia tinged with aaother oolonr. ibe bird is said to be fool-thighed. If the nine
flight feathen of the wing be not white, he is fbol-fllgbied ; and when only the
eitmns Itether of the wing is of the same cotoor with the bod;, he is celled sword-
flighted.
The crop or ibe Fonler ought to be filled with whid, so as to show ill ftJI extant, with asee and fteedom. The reverse ia, being loose-winded, so that Ibe pigeon eihlbita BO email ft crop as to look hke ftn ill-ebaped Bunt. A Penter shcnild stand erect, and haTC a One. well-sbsped tail, which most not lonch the gronnd, nor sink between bis legs. He ought lo draw the shonldera of his wings close lo his bodj, displarlnB hie wiogi without slnddling, and walk almost oolirel)- upon his toes, wilhout jmBping or kicking, and move with an easy majestic air.
Tbi Dutca CiorFSa is thick, cinnuy, and abort lu bod; and lege, which are IMthend down to Che feet. It has s large pouch or bag, hanging under its beak, which it can distend with wind at pleasure. Dutch Croppen are gnval-eyed, and socb bad feeders of their fonng that as soon as thej- have hd off their soft m«t 11 is neeeeaaiy to place their foimg ones under a pair of smalt Runle. Dragoons, or Pouting Horsemen. The; an more addicted to gorge tbaa ao7 otber Pigeons, eapecislljr if not regslarl; ■iippUed with fbod.
Tn PiBisiu PoDTii was originallj-a native of Paris i lla bod; and lege en abort, It lux geoerall; a long, but not a larg* crop, and la thick In t^e girth. It is griatl; admirad for ita plnmage, eterr ftetbar being streaked with a varieCr of edouta, the flight exeqpMd, which ta while ; the more red thla Uid haa bUersperaed with tu other
J
3S8 FIGEOKa.
colonn, UuKKBUr iitheralaSBOt npnnlk Th^r m genual]}' what ia Mrmad bi or gimTflJ-e7e(L
Td LisMoia Rdht is a large pigeon, clow-rialbend, ihoil in the back, ai
bniwl-ch«(l«d i it ouhe*
Tftlae Chan ai
gnoBe-hnded, and ballow-B^edi the vjt is ited Hftb » thick akin ; (he beak ia verr Bbon. with a wattle OTer ila noairilit, and the npper ohap proiecta a Uttie OTBT the UDdeT' Thaj ue mnoh hariier binla than man; imagine, and tnoed lolerabl; well ; bnl the/ an bad and ougbt not to be Bulliared to bring Dp Ihair dwd ones ; thenfbie, it ii proper to iihift Ihair tge^ a Dragoan, or aama Mhcr i«oda- niine, in the directed Ibr the FoaUr : a Toong one at lonld, howarer, be given to Dicm to take off their aolt meat. Thej- are freqaeotl; at a griuled oobnu, enoloed round the aeck ; thoae moat eateemod are either red, while, or black motlled. Thia apeciea ia of gi«ater
ohlch mar 1>* nuDtionad the Simniah Rnnt, the Kant :, the Lace, the Finikin, the Tnruer, etc. Thei hirdfl ; but we mnat conftaa (^at we an
orFcieabind. the
penona who greatlj admire
tlie number. Thej ai«, in ont eetimauon. too clamsy tn
Tai TaoHrnai la nearly aa big aa the Runt, and vi iia leg! and feet aie cDvered with ftethen ; the crown of Ua haad ia round, and the larger it is the more It ia eUeamed. It la in general pearl-eyed and bLack- nuttled I bat the anieat nark to diittngnigb a good Trampeter ia the laR or feaihen which eproata from the root of the beak ; the larger Ibii tuft growi. the greater ia the value aet open the bird. It deriTsa iia name from imitating the aomid or the tinmpet, which ' El alwaja doea in the spring of Ihe year ; thcae who wiati to hmr them at other timea. FMd them tBrf liigh ~ with hemp-seed, which always has Ibe deaired eSkct, We cannot diacoTer that the Trumpeter ia, or ever baa been, maoh ia vogue, in Out, it ahoold be elaased ' ~ '■ ''
•inong what are called " Toys,"
Taa lliwun, or Kieokbt, ia of a cream oolonr, with bhick ban aor thougb the outaide, or aurtece of the reuhers, la of a cream, yet that body la of a dark eooty oclour, aa an also its akin and flue reathsri. use of a Tnrbit, and instead of a (HU, has a fine gullet, w ftttthers. Jle head la thick and short ; it has an orange-ooloTU^ eye, G with a small naked circle of black deah ; 11 haa a smsll black wattle on its beak, which is short and thick, like that of a BuIlOnch.
It la about the
PIGEONB. 3W
Tn Vat. — Thii binl ■ttneU notloa troia ths pleuing oontnin in lu ftstharr, Um ba*d ia ilmoa oovaml with A vefl oT whils telhen, whisli giY« it its nav e, IB Uttla bod; i* cUafE; wblM i iU hsad, MO. and th« >ti night huhen itf IM wiugt shoold b« i«d. yellow,
or bUek 1 and tluir us catlsd, ■coording to Cbe foct, 1
sithar rad-haadad, jgllaw-lieaded, or black-faaaded Kdoa ; wbaoerer Iha featiiara dllftr from this nlo, T foul-aighled, u Uie
BcOy .
moUOD In Ilie neck, which, with the brsadUi
or tta tall, glTei it the name of " The Braad-lalled
taper handsome neck, of the
serpentina flnm. niber leanlBK toward Uie baek, like
raa breasted, has a Tery abort
ot saldoni len than (Oor-aod-
rwver eioeedlDg sii-aiid-thhty,
bat of a tnrkayHsock, raising It
toncbaa Uie head. When loo
crowded with feathsn, it f^^qaentlj drops its toil.
^ , This is BO great an imperf^ctiaQ as never to be OTer-
'^ ' ' looked, be all the other propertin of the bird aver so
pnfaet. A ver; large-laHed bird ot ihiH ipeciu, which oatriee tte till aooording to tba
rrdea of the tmacy. is of very great valae- Thonffh the ^eaeral coloor of its plnmage la
ntizely white, (here are jellow, red, bine, and black pieds. Onr oat Is taken &om life.
Taa iictmatm, when good, is vny scarce. The real Jaoobine, or Jack, as it is sometimee called. Is a te ot InTerled m the back of ita head, which tomi toward Ilka Uia cap or cowl of a monk ; hence Ha laoobiiie or Capper. This lange la oalled
(IwUrd) lbs lower part of it la called the ibaia, and tha feaUien which eompone it ahoold be long and Uu^ The Jacobtne has a Terj imall head, a abort spindle beak, and eleu pearl efca. There are yellow, rod, Una, and black Jaoobiseai the yaUow-oolontad
^wm
according Co their
IM PIGEONS.
blrdi alw^* chlDi ths pnoedmce ) jnt, oT whstsTBr colonr UU17 b«, the; miut alov*.
mocoiding to ttu IkncieiB, have > white nil and fllgtit. uid a oleaa white head. Th« \»gi ind l^et of lome of (line birds are coveted wilh fHthen. Tbt Ruff uid tba Capuchin ate varieUea of the Jacobins.
Taa Tdibit lavorliula larger than a Jacobine 1 it haa a nmnd head, aodatalt of Itethen growing rrom the breast, whioh opena anil ■preadi both waya like the frill oT a ahlrt— thla ia called the puria ; It baa alio a fftillff, wUob teacbea from baak lo porle ; and it ia admired aooording to the largeneas of ila purls and shortaesa of ita bcAlt. Thers are yellow, dun, red, bloe, black, and aome few checkered Turbita. The back of their winga and tailfl should bs of ons coloor, 11a jellow and red- coloured ones ucepted, whose tails should he while ; there ought lo be bars of black acrcoi the winga oT tlM bluennlonred ones, but the reat of the bod; and "^t^ Bight tCalhen ought to be white \ and tbe bnoieTB
term them yoUow.staouldered, blne-shonldaivd, etc. Qoloura. Tbey become very Dne flyers, if propsrly bained when
young. Some of this species, of a nnirorm colour, such as black, blue, or whilsi haTv
freqaaatiy been mistaken and sold Ibr Owls.
Tb> HiLui is rather larger than the Nun ^ the head, tail, and flight are genarally
anilbrm — either yellow, rod, bias, or hlack 1 all Oie rest of the body is uanally while 1
it has no hood, but lis head ia ornamented with a flne, soft tolt of feathera, of a
diffbrent colour Trom those of the body, and slightly resambUng the helmet. Hebneta
are l>reUy birds, and tolerably good nurses ; but tbey are by no msona remarkable
Ibr good flying.
Tai BisB was originally a native of Barbary ; it is rather larger than a Jacobins,
has a short thick beak, with a small wattle, and a naked circle of (hick, spongy, red
■kin round about la eyes i whan the tOathera of
the frinlon lucline to a dark colour, the iiides of its
eyes are pearl ; but when the pinion (eathers are
white, the irides are red. aa in some other birds ;
ths wldar the circle of fieah round ihs eye spnads,
and the rodder it is in colour, the greater ia the
Talus set upon the bird ; this circle is veiy narrow
at firat, and does not arrive at ita full sirs till ths
bird Es fbur yean old. Borne of this apeoies
ornamented with a pretty tult of fCsthers. sprout- S_
lag from the back part of the crown of the b
The plnmags of the Barb la either dun or blacn ;
there are pieda of both theee colours, but Uttle value is plsccd on them, as they ai«
supposed 10 be bait-bred birds- Barbs are nearly alirays good bi
PIGR0H3.
Tn Om la nther iTaallsr (hu the Jacobloe. wltb > gnnl agre, ood ■ crookod bckk. mnoli nHisbling tti«( or the biid Inim whidi it derlvea Hi cams. The purte of Uis Owl ii nthsr Ui^er, anil eipeDdg more UkaarOM Ihma Chst of the Tnrbit ; bal, in oiher nipscti, Ihiii biid la bo tbtj' like the Tnrbit, the beak ucepted, u to render bd; fhrthcr dsierlptlaa ueedteu. PanJcolBr cure onght to ba taken that the lireetling placea at these blrda ba dark and privats, For the least aoiaa aSMBtala Iham, anil when digtnrbeil the; fl; off their egea, vhlch then get cold, causing tlM ambzyo bad to dla.
Having sow gone thningh the principal Tariatiea of the pigaoD tribe, we cuiolade with a nieral hint or two to the pnrciaaaera or breedei* at theaa beantinil biidi. In Ihs Scat place wa adviaa them, when buylDg lOr alack, to Iwwara with whom they deaL It wonld be abaolnlel; imioBaible for na to anomeraW the variet; of trlcka thai aie placed otr bj plgeon-dealsra to deceive the nnwaij. It joa aie deairoiu or having valnabla pigeona, it wonld be wall Ibr yon, IT poulble, to obtain Iha aiaiatance of aoma axperlanced fHand in '"■^^"ir jour pnrohaaea. The young pigeon'ffcncier ■honld by no meana begin with what are called Iha " loya," aoeb aa Sarba, Uaw- mets, etc. Tliejr are neitbar amoaing in the lolt nor clever on the wing. Neither, on tha otlier hand, la it worth hia lizna or attention to breed each oommon birda aa, being of no bean^ or valne, are Bt cmljr fOr
9> llijini |it.
T'EBBFIKQ HSU aerer, perhaiM, u much practiwd h it ii U tha It dA]-< f^it ontj do joaag penoni 1c«p Daminon Itebbila lOr Uwir inC, and poultsrsn bnd olben (br Uie table, but ot lua muijr rn have bacoma nbblt-breeden to ■ Urgs extant. Faiioy rabbiU are nrsl; to be met i*lili in the hand* of Che oinniiioii dealm, Bood cnui beinj; of too high a prica to oomg nithui thou- meant. Tbere are» boweTer, Beveial pHvate indivldnale of gnat leapactabili^ is town from whom axoellent Bpecimeoi ma; ba obtained by tJioee who wioh to la; Iba tbnndsIiOQ (Or a fkncr Mock. A ratablt. of wbaterar oolonr it may ba, la oartainlT ■ beaatiTul Utile animal -, bnt tha oomnum braed am very iararior In beanty of appearanea to the Ana lopped-oared c «e»er«l altMobe* from life will be fonnd in onr pa^sa. We t( panon who Has a wall-ordeied rabbiur. containing eome gc labbitfl, wiU be ao itrnck witii their enperior baan^ of appearanoa, that ba will not
think oT kaaplns insrtly aanunon nbblta. The Ont uiha onlyeitn eipeoae i for fins loppad-«and kninuli do not require mora or anperioT food Ibui da Ibe oommoo onaa. T>k«7 are, wa ooDl^aa, rather more (LellisDa is oouetitiitiaii. bat their flna appeanuc* niU certainly compenule their kaeper for tba care he may lake in keeping them Id oFdar : there ie alio a greater pleaiure In breeding valuable oninula, than rabbits that, at beat, will sever be worth, when reared, aboTe a feir ahillinga. And here let na impreaa apon onr yoiuig readers the propriety of feeding (heir rabbit* regularly. Poor creamree ! tbey are caged, eonilned, tniX wholly dependent npon lu — it wonld be the extmue of barbarity to neglect Lhuin.
^miiimn^^^sm
^
PniORi who hare nsier hod an opportnnity of seeing Ikncy labbila will, vei; pro- bably, be anrprised on Jookdng at the repreaentation of thoee animala which ie Jkithfnlly glTSa In onr engTBTing ; the Bgores are, in f>ct, taken Itom nature, and are or three atriking yarietiea of the fall of the eari, r
aa ipeoimenj of flrat-rmte rabblta. The one In t eared animal, two of the Mhers eihlblt eare only only la paribet. On the origin of lop4ared fkncy i information ; nor ean we aay whether they
following pasea.
readera will Bnd thli lubgect Beatad folly in the
th*D Ihou whlDb us kept in a domestic Mata i the; are for tbe meat port oT a gnj colonr, bat a Tow black, black and wbite, and iveo fkn-oolooRd
ThB flnli or wild rabbiu ia
The Wild lUbbit ia Teiy prolific, somedmn breeding gteren lima gsnarall; eight yoong on« it & time ; but mulUnidet oT yoong nbbit by damp and the numennia CTOatur« which prey npon them m their deTeooeleaa itate. Wild nbbita us alio very deatmcUie to jOiOng ctopa, and axe Iheiefora vnj propal; kept down by tinnari and landownera.
Common domeaUc rabbiu are of Tariotu coloon, black, white, grej, tkwn, mouse, etc Their prlcea TB17 according U> tlieir ago, alia, and beaaty. In wioui parts of the eounb? yoong rabblte may be pnrohaaed from aixpenoe u> a ■Lbtl^^ng each ; a lulT- grown nUibit will fetch &om elgbMenpencs to balf-a-crown 1 and fl it, ia general, the oD H^Tan for a common ftill-grown buck o
doe i the aTsrage valne it three ehllUn^ JOV '* '^^V^SE^^ 'C'"'
and eiipenee, or (bnr ahiUinga. -" ,Es -' ^a? "^y' _
One of the chief objecle In koepliiK '^^i^i ra, ■ / ^S»?/' 4j
iD^of adlahfbrUietBble; a thoee penona by whom they are kept at- tend at particularly to the BOTi of rabbiu whoae fleah la said to be the beet, as to tbeir coloon or shape. The ahort-l^rged Ant rMbilB are genemlly supposed to be the most healthy, and also the beat breeders. The large harfrcolonrod variety la miicb eateemed by some people ; Ijut the wldte, or while mottled with black or yellow, ai« more delicate In Seeh. The grey, and some oT the btacka, approacli nearer to the Abtout of the wild rabbit than any othera.
Foimatly a fine rabbit of any two ooloiiia. howeTSr short Its ears, was aooonnt l!sacy animal ; It i« now Teiy dlBbieot. Id Uie eye of a tancior of U>e pnaent day long-lopped ear ia an indiapenaable reqnislle. The first thingi that are looked at the length and bll of the eara) the dewiag, if the aniatal be In Ua prime, la
BABBITa.
sotload; the oelonn and nwiklngB m gcDOBl appcArutoe. Babbitt whose tip to Up, meAAumd mofWA the sknll^ -wnnJd be ralneUuiU; admUed liilo » ruider'* (tock, if Uie een All ever u finely i m, in due thcgr ex- ceeded Hut laoKlh (end tiiaj aeiDe- tiinei ue siiteea Inclw*. and erm npmrd). IT Uwy did not lop or lUI
downwKd in wlietta deemed egTMe- " ^
(Ol md beooming mKumr. Thedew- ~~' — "=--^ ■•.i^;:^^.^- Up. whlab ii only wen to idTuUge
in (kncy ntabita. after Cliey haie uuined Uudr full i^wtb. ii (he looae flnh that haage (tam the jaws on eitlier aide and extendi down the neck. The raader will obtain a better IdCA of tlw dewlap from (he ahetch, page 306, than from any lengthened deecription of it. The annexed cnt la a portrait of a fint rate ^ncy lop^ared rabblt> teri veeke old, with mit matching perfectly with each other, and meuoring tfairteea inchee from tip to tip. The difference in the back and genenl sppeannce, to lay nothing of eera, between the Itocy and the common rabbit cannot Qiil lo itrike the reader who will late the tronble of comparing the foregoing engiaving, or the Bgnrea in the eradp on page 383 with the illuetratlotia of the wild rabbit and the common domeatio rabbit.
Fancy rabblta fetch high piicta compared with thoae of the common onca -. ocot- tloully five, ten. and even aa much ai twen^ gnineaa. have been gtreo for a Brat-nw doe. Tary good Atscy rabblta, may, howercr, ba boiight for mooh leee amng than thcae i the foundation of ■ fimcy nock, pmrlded yoong rabblta only be bought, may
There are eereral gradei between the up-eored labbit Bud the true and perfect fancy lop. The tint remoTc Ih>n Ibe common carriage of the eara la where they (kll back- ward ungraoerally oTer the ahonlder, with Ibe hollow port outward. A rabbit that earriea ita eara in thli manner ia not reckoned a fancy animal, being worth bntTeTTlltUemore than a common one. Tbe next and, in Ihct, the moat geneial poeilion of the eais, ia aa in- dicMed IB thU cat. One of the eara lopa outwatd. and the other temaine upright. Bometimce tbe ear which lopa IMti cloee lo the cheek : in thia caae, the other, Instead of being nearly horiioata], ti drawn orer by the weight of the lopped ear, and when the animal ia in a etate of reat, rather Inclinea to the
T:Z:^^~._^-. . -" aame aide of the head aa the one that lopa. Babbiti
of thia dcaoription, howenr beantinil in ahape, and Una in colonr, an not conaldereil Tahiable ; bat they are often well bnd, and throw finl-T*te rabblta. Wete all the young rabbita which are bied from Ihn^ ^"■■"■'t to be
get RASBITB.
nutA, one half of them M leail, woold. we an conTineed. aarj on* wr nprfgU ; ■
qnkrtar of them would Ix entirely np-cued ; the re« ironld, for the moM put, bo at-
lopped. <» honi-loppBd ; andooea*iiHi»lly »perfeCT[kiicylWlofthetwoe«mronMoocnr.
TliB forwud, or horn-lop. wUah ti one degm
Dearer perfection thu the hnlf-lop. it irheii tbe em
rail doirawajil,&Dd prrgect forvTErd in front of the head,
^<^ uintbii (ketch, which wu taken from an eioeedinKlj
i it well-bred grej doe. whoee propertiee of fonn were
neul; perfect in all other napeeia, eicept in the (kU of
the eara. Her head wu mnarkkUr amaU and w«U-
ehaped, and her dewlap Tery full and bandtOTD*. Bbe
waa hred from a ciptla) gnj and white Btoek, and
■ ' generally pmdnced yonag of that oolonr. It ia
k that thia doe, like almost all othen ntaoae ean tall in the niue
The oar-lop i* aooorateiy depleted in the encrraiiiig beneath. The ean, In thia
Tarlety of the lop, apnad ont nearly horluiiitally
from Che aide or the head, like a pair of oan
Tram a boat. Uany excwlletit dofla an mora or leaa
oar-lopped, and the beet-bred IhaiT bocka are, gene- rally (peaking, entiiely so, A rabbit frequently
oan^ct one ear in a oorreot poaltion, whi
othar ia raiaed auOeiantly to conatitDte it a
lop. Thia, though by no meana a capital Barriage
of the eara, ia euperior to a;'
perfect lUI ; and labbltt whoaa ears both drop h«
aom^y down the cheek a
which are only oar-lopped are valaableaoiniala. If all theirotherpropertieaar
W« now oome to the real lop. The ean of the real lop (all. from the roota. domi
by the aide of tt " ' '
parte inwar^l, rorwsr<l, or partly backward ; and their Upa touching the gnntnd when le animal holda lU head in the uaual poaition- For a Brat-rate fancy lop, the hoUowa of the eara ahonld be tnmed eo completely baokward. that tbe outer or conTax port of them may only appear io Front : they ahoold match perCactly in their foil, and the Ices they alant outward in their deaant from Ihe roota. Che mora handaome tiiey an ormaidered. These perfect lope ar« BO ran, that a breeder, with a aiook of twenQ- capital doea. of auperior blood and bean^, and all of them
nearly, or even quite perfect in the aereral propertiea. may think hbnaalf yaj lucky
if Ihey pndnea a doaen Snt-rata lops, in tbe oourae of a aeaaon. The nbblt from
>hioh iha (katcb in the margin was taken waa nearly portect in aU bar propertiea.
W* will now i»s * few wordi on the importuit point ol oolonr. Tartoianhdl <cf ft rich brown» white, nnd jbUow) I« ooooidAnd Lba bat ; thsQ bluk luid whltA t DCSt Ikwn or IkwD Hid whits ; snd iflerwudB moosa ooloor *jid pure white (with nd «;«■) ; wboll; black or gny nbbita being thought the leut Tftlnable.
ir iha nbbit be white >nd black, gny &ad while, (iiwii and while, or lottolMehell, It ie deomed ladiapenaable Chnt those colmra be mixed u nearly u pouible in Ihe IbUowing Duumer : — The greMar part at the back, tbe hatmchea, and the bod;, ihonld be of (he dark colonr, or ahKhtlf ipoUad with while i a chaia or eerin ol the darker ooLonr ahoold oooa np to the ahDnlden, and the reit at the fore part of the body ahould be aUo variegated — while, however, predominating. Tlie ctin ihonld be entlrel; of the pmrmiling dark coloui of the body ; if olherwiM, they an lamed pie- bald, which ia a defect. The head ahoold ahow a gmt deal of oolonr ronnd the eyea, and at the noee, but it man DOl be wiUiaiit wbile. The belly may be enliiely while, and the ttazxttt or dewlap while, dark, or lariegated. The ipota and dark parte In general, paiticnlarly thoae on the back, muat not have many white haira mixed ■'"^"ir them I if they have, the rabbit will be grixiled, and deScieat in beaaty of eoloor ; the apota DD(t be definitely marked on tbe white, and the colonr on the back ahoold not break off abruptly, neither ahoold It be lightensd aw^ into the white by a gmdoal mixture of while bain with the black ; on tbe coDtraiy, the ed«ie* moat be gradually and positively broken, by black spola or palchea. leiieuing in *iu, and terminaUag with the chain on the ahoulden. Then are, however, bat fiiw perfectly-eolooredrabbitai the ■warn' they approach Co dot description tbe more highly an they eateemed.
Some CUusy rabbit* have their Ibn-lega bent inward ; bat thii ii not conaldcred a defoot. The tbap* of tbe eye is, in general, diflbrast la all (kncy nbMu to Iha oanunoD bned ; it is not ao ronnd, and a Ibid of skin appean puckered np on the aurtace of the eye at ila lower oonter.
Tbe rabbit-hoaae ahonld be dry extemally or intemally, will cause t freah air is abeolnlely nscesaary b
CI rot. Where large numben are kepi, them in a atate of health ; atill they ahonld not be exposed to draogbls.
tiulcfa« like a
3N RABBITS.
nbbila, irlth which (he young bnciar will prabtbl; b«gln, common
la tho mnrgln will iniBce, but bnodaomo nbbita ihonkl hnTe baudaome hoDHi.
Tbfl hutoh for doe* ahould bava a partition with a hole in it, to let them paaa troni one put to Iha aUier, Biul ft aliSe to clo«e Ihla bgle when tieceeaur. ?or weaoed nbblta, a hnlch wiltaoot tbia partition ia preC nble, and it ia unnecoeaaiy io make ■07 pertiUon In the bnck'a hutcbea. The breeding hutches ahould be about three ttet long, two feet and a half in depth, and eighteen inchee high ; the breeding place may be from dIds to (weWe Inches in breadth ; it aboald bare a door 10 flt the whole from »r It IkBlened 1^ a wparate latch or bnttoa to that need for the door of the ftodinfi- plaoB. The latter door aboald ut«nd the whole dinance IVom the partition to the oppoaile pan oT the hnlch, and in depth ttom the top to within two or three inchee at
the bottom; it must be made ofa
&mme of wood, tinned on the inalde with Wont wire or i^ender Iron roda nailed or driTen Into the (op and _^ bottom partaof the t^ame, from three- fl
qnajtae to an incb apart. Han on »p*lr of srnall hingea to that aide of the bnlch which la oppoeite the paitltion, and fkalen it by a IMch or button. Under Ibla doai
be *a oontriied that the door wi round the hole In the partition (' other part of the Interior of the b' teeth, a* they are very deiilnictiiB 1 a mere wooden hatch. The 1»Hoi
|
iforfood, wel |
Unned round (he edgee. ia |
oiuaiat |
|
|
flied t- |
Ihol |
wer pan oT the large door. |
or it mar |
|
Ukeep |
■e wilhoot any Iheleniog. |
Mail tin |
|
|
ugbl |
10 be circular), and. ia Ikct, |
to ereiy |
|
|
aUJh which lb |
e mbbiu can take hold of |
withthair |
|
|
and would actually gnaw tbemae |
TeeoatoT |
||
|
m must |
be planed quiU! amooth, with a : |
We elant |
ikofUi
lb la made di0%rently ^m the breeding bntcbca : Initead oT beinfc
being gradually ronndad off ftom the boot. The wire* an placed widn- apart, and are thicker and atrahger than thcae need for doea' hutchea 1 it baa no partition, and the drawer, inatead of runniog (he whole bt«adtli of tile cage, aa then la never more tiian one rabbit at a time to feed out of it. ia placed In the centre, to K piece which goea from aide to aide, as the front piece of the drawer in other hutchea. Then mtiat be ■a aperture at the back ckiee to the Soor, for Ihe eacap*
SB the entin Srant ot the cage, ehanld be well hinged and fhateocd with a iloiit bnttoa. The buok'i hatoh Bhonld not ba leaa than twenty iachea high, two IMt and > half bnad, and twen^ inohea at its deepeat part.
RABBITS. 399
HatohM may be itaoked one above ano^er, or set in a row, as choice or oon-
▼enienoe mi^ direct. They should, however, never be placed npon the ground, buu
elevated on wooden stools or horses, a foot or two above it ; neither ought the back
parts of them to be put close against the wall, but sufficient room should be left for the
dung to have a jwssage from the apertures made in the lower part of the back to the
floor
FBsnxiro.
On his skill as a feeder mainly depends the young ftmoier's chuice of prosperity vrith his stock. If too much food be given at once, the cmimal will get disgusted with and reftise it, so that a rabbit may be nearly starved by afibrding it too great a quantity of food. Most persons feed their rabbits twice, some thrice a-day. To a fiill-grown doe, without a litter, in the morning give a little hay, or diy clover, and a few of such vegetables as are in season ; in the afternoon, put two handftils of good com into her trough ; and at night give her a boiled potato or two, more vegetablesi and, if her hutch be clear of what you gave her in the morning, but by no means otherwise, a little more hay or clover. If you give rabbits more hay than they can eat in a few houn, eoccept it be to a doe just about to litter, they will tread it under foot, and waste it ; if you give them but a moderate quantity at a time, they will eat and ez\]oy it. Generally speaking, rabbits prefer green or moist food to com ; but it is necessary to make them eat a sufficient proportion of solid food to keep them in health ; occasionally, instead of com, a few split or whole grey peas may be given. When a doe has a litter, and also for rabbits recently weaned, we soak the peas for a few hours previously to putting them in the trough. If a rabbit will not eat a proper quantity of com, mix a small quantity of squeezed tea-leaves with her portion, and stint her in gzeen meat. To fatten rabbits for the table, or to bring a poor rabbit into good con- dition, good dry or scalded barley-meal is recommended ; and in winter, when greens are scarce, but not otherwise, grains mixed with oats, peas, meal, or pollard will be found useftil. Tea-leaves, in small quantities, well squeezed, may at all times be given, by way of a treat, but they should not be made a daily substitute for green meat.
Almost all sorts of vegetables and roots may be given to rabbits : as oelexy, parsley, and the roots and tops of carrots, lettuces, the leaves and stumps of cabbages and oauliflowers, turnips, parsnips, and even potatoes in a raw state ; but green meat must not be given in too great a quantity, and Uien always dry. Babbits also love dande- lions, milk-tbisUes, or sow-thistles.
A doe will eat nearly twice as much when suckling as at other times ; and when her litter begin to eat^ the allowance of food must be gradually increased. In our rabbitiy we never admit chaff, and grains only in a dearth ot green food. If we can obtain neither greens, roots, tares, nor grains, at feeding time, we moisten the com with water, milk, or tea-leaves. Though a rabbit mnst be restricted from rioting in green or soft meat according to its own appetite, yet it is cruel to affbrd it only such food as will Increaoo mther than appease its thirst : for this reason we moisten the gmin. i and some rabbits will even do well with an occasional table-spoonftil of water, beer, or milk; bat generally fhey require no liquids.
4U0 RABBITS.
Bsnonre.
The doe will breed at the age of six months ; her period of gestation is thirty days. The rabbits are not to be left together above ten minntes. Borne days before kindling, hay is to be given to the doe, with which, and the fine which nature has instracted her to tear from her body, she will make her nest. Biting the hay into short pieces, and carrying it about in her month, are almost certain signs of her being with yonng. The number produced at a litter varies from three to eleven. Destn^ the weak and sickly ones, as soon as their defects can be perceived, until the litter is reduced to five or ■<•■• If you leave more to be suckled, some will perhaps die, others be sickly, and none of them turn out fine. The old rabbits toe not to be put together till the expiration of six weeks ; the young may be separated firom the doe and weaned a fortnight after. If mrae than five or six litters are obtained in a year the doe will soon be worn oot^ and the young ones not worth much. The doe should not be disturbed by any other rabbit, while with young. Should she be weak after kindling, give her a malt-masli. scalded fine pollard, or barley-meal, in which may be mixed a small quantity of oordial horse ball. In this case, and, in fact, whenever a doe is weak, bread soaked in Tnfrv^ and squeesed rather dry again, if she will take it, will considerably strengthen her. If well fed, and kept warm, does will breed all the year ; but most fknoiem are con- tented with five litters a-year, and let their stock rest during the winter. It is advi*. able so to manage that two or three does should kindle about the same time ; you msty then take ttam the doe that has the greatest number, and put the excess under her that has the least ; taking care not to leave more than six young ones to each. It is advisable to obtain rabbits for breeding flrom a litter of two, three, or four only, as fhegr are generally stronger and finer than those which come iVom a more numerous one.
nniASss.
Diseases may, in a great measure, be prevented by regularity in feeding, good food« and cleanliness. For the liver complaint, to which rabbits are subject, there is zh> core ; when they are attacked by it, fktten them, if possible, for the table.
The gm^fftes are occasioned by damp or cold. If there be any cure for this disorder it must be dryness in their hutches and food. Boiled potatoes, mixed up with bran barley-meal into a iiaste, is considered the most desirable food ; green vegetsblea on many acoounts objectionable. Instead of water, a nnall quantity of milk and is generally given for drink ; and as the disorder shows symptoms of leaving tl&e animals, a moderate allowance of clover or fresh hay is occasionally given them.
PotbeUy is a disease arising mainly from want of exercise, and eating too mucli green food, to which young tame rabbits are very commonly subject. It shows itself by an unusual enlargement of the belly ; and when this is the case, no green food, axid very little water, should be allowed them. Any kind of dxy food, however, may be given with safety.
Squeesed tea-leaves generally restore a doe to health, if weak, or otherwise aflbefeed after kindling, if the food which we have directed to be given at that time, under ftbe head of Breeding, should taSL When old rabbits are attacked 1^ a ^oowsn, dry food
Be anfol la kMp yoor ntiblt hnlohea panloululj o1«sn ; > ihorC ho«, or a (nwet, ■Dd k huiCI-bnuli, *iU ba uCDeuarj lor ttiii pnrpOH. Do not handle jaui nbblM
br Iha ean, mid plus Ids olhar nndar Iha LoHsr pan of (bdr baoka. Vtjer alaakan Id aOmtloD ; a neglaot of a da; will do jooi stock mash liijai7, wbU* by ooialBDt can yoD aaj bread to gnat perftoUDii. Thoaa irbo are Eamilflil in oolbor* ahoola Dot onl; look at those or Uw rabbita thsy bn; tor bmdiog, bat alio aacertain, if imaibla, ttig aolonn oT the doea ihejr oeme from, for rabbila heqaentl; Uirow Uuara in whiob not a eln^ta jooag one of their own oolour can be tbnnd. If there happen, fbr iutan«, to have been a linKle cruaa of grey In yonr atock (br three or Ibnr genetstiDna lAck, it will frequently appear In atock, althonRh every breeding rabbit in yonr bnlchee be of a dlSbrent eolonr. Qrey la the moat dlfflcult of all oolonra lo eradicate ; bi£t even grey rabbita do not alw^a have jtjmig ones of their own oolonr.
The more yon rary the fbod, the fitter joar nbbita will be ; bnt obserre, that when they an oncejWyW (to use a term of breeden}, they t^nently fall atTand pine away to bad condition. It la Impoasible to lay down mlea for llta predie qnanli^ of the Tarlona Idnda of Biod to be allowed i a little eipeiienoe alone can leacb Uie yonthftJ lender what hli rabbita pnfer and wliat beat agreea with tbein.
By projier can and aUention, rabbita may not only be kept Ibr the take of their beanty of appearanoa, and the Inlamtiiig and harmleu amniemant which they aSbnl, bnt (he anrpliu Mook may be made M pey for their keep, either b; naiug them tor the
tbsj hkVB long besD iutrodaoed to this Bud oUjer Eonipeui dchui- Qiea. Thay lire and timTS In t«inper&te, uicl «vou cold cUiculas ; and wouM be eioeediagly luUDerDaB, had Ibey noi. lilu mou oUwr lUumali whose prodoos is abond&nt, s great number' of enomies. their own olfepring, whioh slso suflte
mnu, ffeauli,eu. Illsu mi Bod under Uiii idea, the; ST protection to thsir yoong Btoc' labbit-hooae the; Krs by no n
uwiUci
r or hah
d will
Tted on u; wute food tlut ms; be spilled about the Boor. If kept u la ihej will do best in bnlcbes similar to thou made Coi rabbit*. Theii TLiFn seed not, of course, be of such targe dimensions. OuineA Piga wHI tax Liid, ernin. and. in bet, whatever is commonly given to rabbits i teo-lMToa.
ireTer. they seem to prefer to ell other fbod, but they onght not to be
tbam, as such rood is likelj to prodaoe atroph;.
ir ODJ own pan. we have freqDent]; kiowti
in a litter. In eise they are eonsidenbly
f diilded ; th^ have two mmitig teetli in
They an oT varied Dolours, whAe, black.
OtlNXA PlOe. 4D3
and hwD i the lorUbMbaU, which ii a miitan at the thm mlonn, li genarall; pn. fbrnd. Wtaii* Onliisa Plgi luva snisnllr red ays*, like rrargM and white nhUla. Tba fl«h of Ost Onlssa Pig li certainl; eMable. bat it ii by no nuwu palaUble. Id thii oanntiy tluaa Bnlmala an narsr lucd for the labia, and have b«an Hgted oat;, It ii pncnmed, tram mcFtiTia at onriHlt;. They an perfiKtIy harmlBiB, uid, onleu it bo trne that they keep rata away ttom the nibbit-liDtchca. altogether dhImi. Thsy may be bmiifht at the (hope of the rabbit or pigeon dealen. at from lixpeoce apward, uoording to their age, ahape, and colotir. Thongh oRn kept u pets. Oulnes Pigs show very little iBielligence, and hardly ecer leem Is be able to diiliiigiueh between their maiMn uid peifect itraogers ; bat we have known Chem lo come when they ■» called and feed from the hand. If kept dry. warm, and clean, they are altogether ua- objKtlonable stable or ponlny-yard peta, bnt on accoimt of tbeir Mrong elDaviom we thonld not recomioend them for the play'room.
Katore, which has so abundantly proTided the Cape of Oood Hnpe sheep with tails, that the fanners, it is said, are flvqaently obliged to praride email waggimB to support them, has left the little Ooioe* Pig totally deetitate of lUi nsoal ippcndage to (he hind qnartere of anlmale. Were It not Ibr Ita coloor, the Guinea Pig migh^ indeed, be not Inaptly oomparad to
" ^ Sat bii^onl ■ CnL"
a Ilia Dog ■loM hhhu tutpabla at miolstering to our miilB rrilily. oT TeoeiTing nproof vltliaai complaint, oT ilitplajlng Q\j^'^k tai rich knd poor >n eqiul ■rdoor of frimdihip, and at RiUowiim ni to onr gniTH with nal and niu«lA>h nignC The dog lorn hit nuaur (br hk inra ■Bke. Othsr ulmali nbtait lo tomh uid parfonn the tuki be ciacti ; but tlia dog mpptan lo enlar Inlo hi* bmlnwi and hia aporca. and miuilfMta hit (Handiliip
DOGS. 405
for him in a thonBand Bagacioua and pleaoing vrays. The dog is evor oar friend and companion, and is found in all coDntriee, foithftil, brare, ■agadouB, and obedient s guarding out flocks and herdfl, protecting our homes, and grateflilly feeding from our hands ; retnming submission even for ill usage, and exhibiting for kindness a reverence and afltotion that is almost human.
CLAilsincAnov ov doos.
Katnralists class the Dog, in the genus Cauis, with the wolf, the jackal, and the fox, though it has little in common, except in form, with either of those animals. Dogs may be divided into several distinct varieties — ^the Spaniels, to which belong the Newfoundland and the King Oharles, the Water Spaniel, etc. ; the MastifT and its congeners ; the Greyhounds ; the Terriers ; the Hounds, including the Bloodhound, Fox- hound, Deerhound, Pointer, Setter, etc. ; the Poodles, the Pomeranian, and some of less marked character, as the Bulldog, the Pug, etc. The Shepherd's Dog, f^m whidi some naturalists derive the various kinds of dogs found in all countries, does not belong especially to any one class ; for, though in this country he is a rough, shaggy animal, commonly bred for the purpose of sheep-keeping, in other lands he is taken indiflbrently frtnn any species which shows aptitude for the purposes of the shepherd. The Scotch Colley is a notable example of an almost distinct breed of shepherd's dogs. The group of dogs at the head of this section comprises the Bloodhound, the Fox- hound, the Italian Greyhound, the Water Spaniel, and the Poodle. Each may be regarded as a representative of its class ; for, while all are fkithftil and sagacious, each is distinguished for the posseesion of some one quality not common to the rest. Thus the Bloodhound and Mastiff are ferocious and savage, and display no friendship or tolerance for any person beyond the immediate &mily of their mssters. The Fox- hound is remarkable for its keen scent, and surprising adaptability for hunting in company with others of its kind, while if it be separated tram the pack to which it belongs, it is rather listless and stupid ; the Greyhound, of which the Italiui Qroy- hound is a miniature specimen, is noted for its swiftness and keen sight, rather than for any particular display of firiendship for its owner, though it is often a household pet ; the Spaniel, on the contrary, is fiuned for its gentle and aiftctionate disposition, its lively and attractive manners, and its regard for every member of its master's fkunily t while the Poodle is, above all other dogs, capable of exhibiting teachableness. If you go to an exhibition of performing dogs, you will invariably find it is the Poodle that jumps over the chairs, walks on its hind-legs, finds the right card when the pack is spread out before it, and goes through the minority of those curious tricks which make us almost believe that the dog possesses reason as well as instinct
Certain peculiarities are conmion to aU dogs ; oxw of the most noticeable is the use the dog makes of its tail to express joy, hope, fear, love, gratitude, obedience, defiance, entreaty, or shame ; therefore to cut off* or deform its tail — as is done with some Terriers and Bulldogs — ^is to deprive the animal of what may be termed its most expressive feature.
We will now describe the principal varieties of the domestic Dog — ^beginning with
ths bjDOOM dcigi of Bt. Benurd, to well known In AJpine regknu for dJuovering tnvallen loM ia the (UDw. Tb* Newfonadluid ■■
geocfl beiiijf porticnil&Tl; dupUjed
|
UiU tiie NewfoD |
mdluid faM a |
|
uatunl Bpcitade f |
Or lhi.beneTo- |
|
jnmpe Into (tie |
|
|
■lighten bidding. |
■nd hubeoi |
|
kMwntoplangB. |
iftmndnnnilag |
|
m. Bemg a capi |
|
|
eo« atrsight lo the object ol lU |
paddles with tl to Uieihors. Wbmi ia remarkftbla, too, ia that thA dog when it aeiiei it drawsing: pnwin, '"' ahina it! grip of the olMhea till it
gets hi! bMd (Oran w*lv, ■• if eoiueioiu that Hhen a man's head U ftw he ia oat of danger. The employtneot of Nawfonndlaod and othar doga aa beada of burden was made illegal nmti jean ago, though tn other countriee thej are atill naed to divw carta and Bledgea. Tbe Newfoundland oame original]; from the Island tiler which it ia namadi bnb there ia a aomewhal aiaaller Tahetyof thia dog, called Che Lahndor.
Tht CtJiiy, or Scotch Collej, aa it ia nsaaJI)- eaUed, ia the most Ikithfal, aagamaoa, and hardy of all the doga employed aa gnaidiana of onr flocka. It was originally a croaa between the apaniel and the terrier, and atanda abotit iKenty-two incbea higb at the abonlder, with a lathei thin wiry body, sharp noae. and busby tall. A more naefa] tb>A ornamental animal ; a good poitinit of which ia seen in the aCanding figure abovo, 7^irater£(paii(<Jktaamallerdog(aaBeenin the group on page 37 1). It iaagood swimmer, and ia easily taught lo retriere, or bring back Uie wounded game. H ia Iherelbre eitenaiTely employed by the apotuman, readily plunging into the water after a wild dook that may have been thot. and bringing it back without delay or ligary. The Water Bpanlel la about twenty inchea In height at the ihouldera, and ptopoitioii. ately alont in build, with a One nose, (ringed sua, and curled tail, coverud wnh a btmch of hair to ita' extremity. Ila coat cooaiala of short criap curia, generally of a light brawa coloui Intenpenad with white. Ita tMt, like theae of Ehe NewfOnndlBod,
DOGS. «7
■re broad nd rtrong, and it* bod; la prarlded wllh a nalanl oil which caoMS Id ikfai
(o min the aetian oT water. AHet a pIdhkii, il girea Itself a vigonnia ahake, and ii drj in a hiw minntia. Thii walorproof iiaali^ debar* the Water Bpaniel Irotn the parkmr, rbr a* booq aa it ooinea near a flni, ita oily odour ia diaagreeably parwpCible.
T^ King CHarkt" Spaniti—vJ called tarn ths bot that Che •• Vtrry iiooMrab- patroniied doga of tlii* Und — li one of the amalleat of lie Ruoil]'. It la a bright, actiTa
and waiy aonneai, long aan, bnshy tail, and large "
bright e;a>. Ae a lor-dog it li much admired
appean in a TSnet; of eoloun, blank, brown, '
white, eto-. Intermixed in patcbea. ^le King -^
Charlea ia tOnd of being petted, and Iovm a wnrm ^
comer bj the Are. The smaller and ibsrper il
the Buie blgU; il ia prixcd. A breed of doga oi i ^
this Und, ealled the Kmheim, is etm enuller. ,.,'; /',,
Like the King Charles, it ehould have a short
mnasle, long dlk)' ears, >""tr<"c oloae to the head,
asd almoet tooohing the ground ; foil, eipreeslT*
ejBS; well "(eathered" tad, with hair wary sad _
glony, and ooTerlng the legs abnoet to the loeo. "
When the hair actually curls, it is considered a
sign rather of want of value tbas of actual beoo^. Wil'i lnrii~ id" King riNirli^ nwl
the fllM^ieltn are ver; popular i and hence they are uniTsnally kuono a* "tap-doga."
10 kind of dogs have a JlSitur ia very valuable. It Is the largaet oT cor "'"p"-'' breed of dogs, and nsnally stands Trtao twenty-five to (wen^-eight inches high at the shonldera. and weighs aboat a hundred pouole. Being originally a area* twtween the Bloodhound and the Bulldog, It has a hanging under Jaw, but never ahowi lis teeth, aa the Bulldog doe*. lu ooat ia imooth. and generally or a light liver ooloor, patched with black and white. When left to itself the UaMUT i* quiet enough, and will even allow children to play wtth It i bat when angered. K i* tlaroe and Implaeoble, biting and tearing with great fbnwi^. When it nunmta guard over the Ihrm-yanl or mrehouae st night-linn, nothing can atbant its attention from Ite dutiea, WHh mn, <7e*, and teeth at the eervlce of Its mastar, woe be to bim who
foe, and is never at lluilt ; once let it Oi It* teeth in the leg of as interioper, no fbm or flattery oan looaen Ihem. An anecdote oT a HaatUT that belonged to a tanner at Yarmouth, will Hhutnle this qnaU^ of onr (sUhflil waloh-dog. The tonner'e foreman had been in his employmant many yean, and was oonaldered aa boneot moiL Ae he was oanstantly about the prnmlsfi. and u*d (a feed the dog, the greatest good (MUng
foranaa nuda ap hli mlad to rob
hidM. Henr drfluuin^ of ^aj oppoalticm fftnu Ui« Mtltjir 4« (Oivmui brouBht hi* out to Ub irall or llio Tird In tlu doid at nlgbl, and tngas packlcijt np hia loadoThidM. Tha llutiir gmwlad a llttla, bnt whoi tlu ftnmu pUMd tt on Uu head, U Isf down •gain, aod the loblMry irent on, tba dog tbllawiag Uw man abont with hia gyaa Thanrsr bawesl. Tha hldaa ware Hlaoud, and toaxd one I17 one ow tlia wall into the oart 1 bnt when tb* man auanpled to aoala tbs w«Il and tallow, thados pimmd him by Ilia lag and bald him Ughttr till
oorand b^ tha tanner and gtrta into oiiato47. Now, Ifaai* aamia n In Iha dog"* prooeadinga 1 tor, while ha bbtbt dmbted (ha rfS'lit of themui lo remoTe Ihe hidea, (he monunC ba triad to laeva the ivemiaaa b; the wkU Inataad of Iho gate, bla loiplaiDU wan aronaed, and ha Utatad the ex-IbiaaiBB like »
Tht Gnuhcimd, the awlftaat of all dogs, la tband all onr Kmopa. ind la principally nsad in oonnlng tha han, which tl hnnta by dgbt. In anoiBst tinua II waa mors valued than tt la now. In apUa of Ua beaut; it la aomawbat of a coward, and haa not eren the boldnaat to attaok tlta haia thai it pormaa. Qnyhotutda have long Ihin lags. graeafiilly-fonned bodiea, nDooUi ooala, pointed noaea, ■hoit ean, and wavy, iM-Hka talla. In oolonr Orayhonnda at* bUok, while, gny, blown, or fkwn, oHhar wholly or lalarmixad. Tha " pointa" of a parftact areyhoimd an mantioaad In tha bllowlng ipt^nt Unea from an old writer :-»
sooB. m
naOnrhOiiiidiivwitUrtbaiith* lur«, andif Uia lUMriaabk t^nigtlt UhB, It would be xxm orenakan. Ita liiMiiuit MaebM i^ hawsTar, to loni is uglM man scuts thu Bie poMlbla to Its long-lagged pnnoer, and Uierefore it on often naoh oorar belbniti* nm down, and la then lolaiably aaD), aaUis Gre;hDiind aw fallow itoiiljao long aa it can aae It. Trlah, fiootoli, and Bnulan Ony hcHmda aro amallflr and ahaggior than their EngUah nameaakea, Kad an BBoenHj l6M Ughly Talaed. Th* (ay or Ttalim Brerhotmd ia ntlnaljle onl; aa ■ pet i Ibr Ua conatitntian ia ao delicate tliM it cannot Ijear the tlgotu- Of onr climate wiUiant clothing. Thoaethatara freeCnimapota of difltamt oalDW Innn the rest of their bodlaa an moat highly aateamed.
n* ttrrier ajdata in htobI Tariatica — the amooth, the haiiy, and the curly. The Eogliih Terrier (aae gnnp, page S78) la moat Talnable Ma honae dog. It will kill rata, and i* genarallj a moacnlar, ahaip. >nd aotlve lUtle ftUow. The Terrier ia the moat Donunon of all Engliah doge ; and, , •
wbco well-bred, la wpiBr».cheated and ■tanda flrml; on Ha leg*, which an Krong and maiCDlar. Ita mniile i* ■harp, Ua rbnhead higfi, and ita ayca large, bright, and intelUgant. Inoolonr it u blaok. tan, or wliiie, either wholly or In paichea. The Bkft Trrr eoTered with long atraigbt hair aa abnoat to look UkaaladyamtiirirhaD lylngdown. Italagaareahortgitabody long, and ttt Ijrlgbt a7« are almost hidden beneath a ahook of roagh, wiry hair. Itlaagoodnt-kllleT,andaflnt-
tMe barker; and ia tiuirefat^ Terj . ^ ^ -.^■■
tiaefulinahonaa. The Bkje Terrier ahouM have rough, wliy hair j when it li miky, yon m^ aoapeot a crou with the BpanleL T»* Maittf, another dog of the toy Hn.< ii ■--■-■- •orthetlnanBaa.glcM, and length of ita hair. It origin^ly came (hnn Malta, la bnpllea, and ia a kind of Terrier, aeldom wetghing aboTe three pmmda.
The Planter, the Better, the Foihonnd, the Beagle, and the Hairier, are purely aporting doga. and aa aooh are UDaqDallad. They hunt by aoent and an eioeediagly •agaokoa*. Indeed,aportoigdogamaybo«aidto bemuoh moieaagaoioiuthan domeatio doga, alwayg excelling the foodie. All tbeae doga have a itiong brally likencea.
Azhwnfa are trabted to hnnt the Ibi in paoka, aa the others are to diMoier the ha»«, partridge, pheasant, wild fowl, ate, to rouse them from tlieir hiding-plac™, and IMch them when they lUlt7 the ahot of the aportaman. Foihousdi are very ogadoua and panleularly aBacbed to their nutatera. They are kept hi a state of the aarsraat dlMilplina, and are doobtleaa the nvMt higUy-priaed of aU the ouine triba, espeelalty in Knglaod. Eooaela of tbs moat aipenilTa kind an erected tor Ibelr reception, and
I an ■imitallr sxptsdad In tliatr m genenliT belieTsd to bare been bred tnaa the old BngUth Hotmd, {mpntrtd I17 s MHeaoTjudieiaiu a liach dog in »pMk ■■
the oanBeqoeiiee ii Uiw in hnulins Held Ibe FOz- J hcnuulwLtlalw«7i implictUj I ob«]> the itighuat ordtr or utnra of the hmiUiiiaB, oxhoDndB tilt gmeimltj } onder two bat In fadgbt. of propemoiuue leugtb, '_ the (iBDiBle being aomewbal ^Jer than the male. Id IT Poxbonnds an sone- nUj hwn uid while, or rnwD Quirked with palcbH of bluk, while, or gnj, A ponnic of the Foibosnd, token trom > very excellent epecimea of tlue breed la Hen in the gronp on page 37fc Tht Hamer ia ■ amaller deacnpUon oT Foxhound, and nasd to be employed in the banting of the hue, which It taUowa by aoent. Tbe Bfagl*. or BraicK ia the ""-"—' of the b-ve boimda, uid ie eeldgm more Uuu fomteen inobce in height. It ia ahapod like the Harrier, and ia naed in haro'hnnting.
Tha SetUr.or Land Spaniel, ia * eort of croaa between Uie Pointer &nd Us Bpwiiel, and paitokea of tbe cheraclariatice of both. II derivea Ita name trom ita habiu of Bet- ting or croacbing when marking down ita game. There are nnmemoa varietiea of Uie BoUer, A peritoDt Better ahoold bftve, according lo the ojrinion of the beat jndgea of (porting dogs, a moderately heaTy head, a abort neck, strong loina and back, ajid barrel-like body. Ita tail (or " Sag." *■ the Bportamen call it) ahoold be farnislied witb a tkn-like bnub of long hair, alightly onrled npword at the tip, bat nerar raised aboTe the leiel of the aDimal'a back. IE* lege alxiDld be " featbered " to the (Mli and ita eye ahonld be bright and iaielligeat. The Setter ia a good water-dog, and cain endors cold and bent better than moat other kinda of honnda, in eonaeqaence of being t«t«d- clothed with long aolt hair. Tlio SaUer hnnle tiy " body-acent," wheieaa Uis Beaile and Harrier Ibllow the IboMepe of their game and haat by " tbot-ecent."
Tlu Pointer la a hound of aimilai charaetar lo the Batter, and ia ao called fRim Ite habit of nandisg atUl and " pointing " u any game It may dtoooTor. It ia talb^
DOGS. 411
larger ^•■•^ the Better, and Bxnaller than the Foxhonnd. The oroaching flgore in our illnstration is a portrait of an old and valnable Pointer, which wae also taoght to retrieve. No dog is bom a retriever, thoagh many honnda are so named from their aptitude in recovering game shot at a distance frt>m the sportsman. It is more nsnal to train a Spaniel to retrieve than a Honnd. The Pointer has stent limbs, blunt muzzle, rather straight and stunted tail, with smooth coat of black and white, or fawn (inshed with black. Its scent is very acute, and as it discovers its game it gently approaches the spot where it lies and fixes its eyes steadily upon it, with one foot gene- rally raised a little from the ground, and its tail extended in an almost straight line. From this position it will not move tiU the sportsman has come up and ilred at the bird. If the bird rises and runs, the dog follows it cautiously, still preserving the same atti- tude, and when it stops points again. It is said that this dog is so sagacious that if its master miss his game two or three times, it declines to trouble itself about finding the bird again ; often displsying a kind of vexation if the sportsman be long without obtaining a good shot.
2^ Bulldog t the last on our list, is popularly believed to be the bravest animal in the world, never knowing when it is beaten, and fighting till it dies ; so that the term « bulldog courage " has come to express that sort of enduring ferocity which is said to belong to uneducated animal natures. There is no doubt that English Bulldogs, like our soldiers and sailors, possess a large amount of pluck and endurance; but the same animal in India is a mere cur, that lies listlessly in tiie shade, and only becomes pugna- cious upon very great provocation. The figure of the Bulldog is peculiar. Its fore- quarters are strong and muscular, its chest wide and roomy, while its hind-quarters are comparatively thin and feeble. AU the vigour of the animal seems to settle in its cheat and head. Its fierce little eyes gleam with fire, and its underhung jaw and white savage teeth seem always ready to attack any unwary passenger it may chance to meet. The Bulldog is a persevering combatant, and may by judicious teaching be made to do almost anything a dog can do. As a watch-dog it has no superior. According to the dog-fanciers, a thorough-bred Bulldog should possess the following characteristics : — ^the head should be round, the skull high, the eyes large and bright, the forehead well sunk, the ears half erect and small, the muzzle small and square, the back short and well arched, and the tail straight and almost hairless. The Bulldog has been crossed with almost every kind of sporting dog ; but without great care be taken the breed is apt to degenerate. *' We want," says a popular writer, " no anato- mical knowledge to judge of the ferocity of this brute. Look at the head of the animal. Is not the cranium a malformation ? Do not the habits of the animal prove it to be a pamp(«red creation ? It is not generally known, that the disposition of the genuine Bulldog is too fond. It will fondle upon any stranger ; and yet, contrary to the general custom of its race, it displays small preference for its master. It will fondle a human being as though its heart would burst with affection ; but upon the slightest excitement >-^ften upon a sudden sound — ^it will fly at and mangle the hand that was caressing it. It will fix upon an object^ and frequently suflfbr itself to be dismembered befbre it will let go its hold, although its roaster's voice be energetically raised to command it."
DogB BA all ounJTOroni or flah'oatiitg ■t.im^i^^ though In • doumtlo Btata th^ Buy iw nuutt 10 (ted on maar Undi or vegtlable tnatUm, u biicolu, breUl, poutoea. Hoe. sU:. The ben food for a dog is a Froper adndxton of fleah — u trips ttud tha Inaidca of animalo— -aDd rice boilsd in water in whioh mfiat had been dneaed. Hcnoda and oChOT apoRins dog* ara rbd on horu-Beeh ana biscuit, greaTn, aod lacfa likti. All dogs like to pick and gnair bona* i and to keep tfaem tn health th^f should bs regularlj Ted and clauwid. Tbeir hooaea ahonld be alwaj-a sveM uxd olean, and Hit/y UtetDHlvea ahonld be wulied onoe a week. IT ihs)- are foond to be inftated with flcaa, rab a liuls pomlered camphor into their eoau aller nahlng, but flnt let tlicm be perfectly dried. A tea-apoonfol of torpentine, beaten into the yolk oT an egg, and well nibbed into the coat ia a good remed)', as It alio ■ bad of clean ysUow (or tnipenCiiic) deal BhaTingB. All doge are ant^ect to a ^*"tt" called the distemper i bnt we aboold advise our readera not to ptuchaee a pet dog — or Indaed any otber dog — till It bai paased through that Dial. The distemper, like maasels In ohildreii. genenlly attnoka them in pappyhood. If yon find your dog getting out of condition, losing its halr^ or becoEuing snappish and cross, do not attempt to doctor It yoojaelf, but take it to a lelerinary hospital, or get the advice and assistance of a regular dog-hncier. From mere attacks of indigestion, honeTer, tbe dog may be generally reliered by a lea- Bpoonnil of castor oiL Clcanhneasis the best pr^TentiTB of sicknCHSi and wiOk care and attention yon may keep a dog for a doieayean irlthaut having to take It lo llie doctor.
In oonoloalon, we may remark that If you keep your dog well fed and treat him kindly, yon will sacora a brave. Intelligent, and fkithfol compnnion. All dogs posaea* a quali^ very rare In other animals, namely, tha capacity for receiving, nndenuuiding. and returning the biaodshlp of Uudr masten. This grand chmctaristic ii coaaon allko to the Oerce Mastiff and tha poor despised Pag ; the lithe and gracefol Oreylwuid. and that curious cross between the Spaniel and the Terrier. C|)E p«mmniin $og.
tbs Mate of UtUnhood
'tkila the On loves U* boau,
li ■ pleaust KOd by no mMu nugnoe-
lU or nselUB member of a brnil;. The cat 1*
and when Uie one livea the ot
which had orataioly never leen one belbie. Bhe brietled ap, itood Uill for an InUant, and hen ponnced npon the poor Utile aolniat with all the hrodt]' of Che tig«r, lo whoee tribe abe belonsi. There are eeTeral diitinct varietiea of the eat — (he Asgoim, with iie long beanliltJ tttr; the Chartrenee^ or Uani Cata, which are deetitDle ot tAJlej the TonolieeheLl, or Spmiih ; the Perdan, the Angola, the Chineae, eto.
Cata may be taught to perform a varietf of ■"■"''" g tiieke, and maf be eo domeeti- ealed bj ktnd uage oa lo become very pleaaant oompanknu In the hooie. Tliey are mbjlect to bat Tew diaeaeee. and ba*e mob an InTinclble dialike to dirt, that the; reqiUre no eaie beitowed apon them beyond Hieir daily lopply oT rood : and even IT thej aie minted In thai, they wiU ooDtrlTe to esiet. They erliun great attachment to their home* and maalen : and Ihongh they occaeiotially wander, they invariably find their way back again. Cata are niy proUAo, and display great attbctJan for their yonng. U jaa aie fond of your garden, don't grow valerian In it, fbr tT yoa do. yon will atteactaU the cata in the nelghboniiuod. Theeeaoinal* are *o partial lo thli ammsUo plant that they will roQ over It and Kiatoh at it Ull not a Krap remalu. The beat Ibod for cau will be tonnd In a jndicloni admiiton ot animal and Tegel&ble food, dth, and any hooeebold ■eiapa, with an oecadonal aanoer of milk. They ihould never be fM wholly on flesh, as it ia apt to make them fonl, (at, and laiy. Notice how lU and sleepy the bntchen' cats invariably are. It wag oooe beUeved that the donuaticBted cat was the same breed as the wild cat, but natntaliats now agree to oonsider them distinct species. Bat however this may be, yon will do well to carefnlly gnard your fkvonrlie canary and yonr pretty gold-fish trom the reach of Fpsiy ; as. however gentle and domeacicated she may appear, her native propensity for killing her prey will peep
ONE of tha im Bqniml. In
LStctim It displays tairanli fu prolector. The srjuiTrel is an isliAbiUni if the woods, and seldom nntuns aay disVavx (Voqi a tree, which i( c&n in cue of danger, spnajinnK from bough to bough, SDd Ove lo Dm, : hu rUrl; baffied lU panuers. The aqnirrel li a beautifal liols ; ita lenFr^> A^mi the tip of the nose to the iniertioit of the tAil, is lii InDhea. Ilatail la u longaa, or eTea lunfrer than, its body; and ill aad bnulir, as it uauaJl; ia, add* greatly uy tbe elegaul aad ippearance of the liule anima]- Wbea siLdag, the tail la
1 either
' ■ nbovo snd pure while beneath. In winter tlie fUr takes ic rej'ish tinge, and becomes thicker, warmer, and brijf bter than i Ibo decoraWd with long totta of hair, which grow in autumn bnl nnn iiunmer monlhs. Old sqnurela may be detecMd b; tbeir leMh. h are ItiTga and slroag, and qnite yellow. Bquirrels may be bonffht of bird^ s fbr about three or bmi shUlinga, althongb handsome one* l^h a much
Oisn. — Time are many dlRkreBt Undi ot eaun.
■hilliii^ apmrdi. Tha nvolring <»g«, npnaenUd ii
>o often adopted ; for ths poor !
the engraving beloir, le □
The inner wood-
; -. _ . ^ ^--- -— "- work of tha
- " aqnlrral's cage
moat be corered wiUitin, or the animal, b; oontmnal gnawing, wonld qniekly dsatror tt.
Food.— The ■qnirrel nbalaU DhiaO; npon Tariona aorta oT ftolC, preCerring tboae of
the nut kind, Ita aharp teetit eaaUj gDawin^ thronflh Uie shell of the walnat, filbert,
cbotnul, or aeom. In oonflnement. a litcla (nah br«d aoS milk may be added.
BaiiDiiia.— In Its wild Uala the aqairTel bnilda ita n«t in a Rirk or hole amoncKt the topmoat hnnchea of loft; treea i oocaaionall;, howerer, it makea oae of an old orow'a or rook'a neat, whioh il eleverlyadapta ftor llaeM. When tame, all that ia necee- uxj ia to add aome wool U the uiaimra nest * week or two beltira the Tonng onea an •rpeoted. The female aanally prodneea three or ftrar yonng onea onoo a ymi. At thii period, IT molHled. the will diiplay reeohUe coniage in defence Ot her jonng, U terooilj. and proTing heraelf lo be, when eoraaed.
jj HE White lionie i> ■ variety of the a
ftln sereml other klndi, Uia blaak^ Rhwa-oolooi^, bloclc mnd whit*,
ud black and brown, wluch u* *U •cinsr, and coueqnenU; toora
BxpanaiTe than Cbe plain white. A nay pntly piebald nuqr, hcnrera-,
be otjuined br a ctoh between Che while and the oomnwti brown
The cotnniDn monae nu; be eatil; uned, and maoy tola an told
a have amneed tbeir lottelioe** with Ua antlca. Viewed in thla
U7 saiily forglTe the dapredatlDDi of Dm hoiueboU peM, or at
le leave it lo Pnuj'e tender merciei.
White mice ma; be purcbaied cheaply at Die biid-ihopi. Born and bred In c»n~
nemeat, they are eo gentle and ikmiliar that even whan laAred to ntn loooe about *
Dom they ssror atteni|it lo eecape.
wuiTB men.
Cara shoDld b
le eagealmji
hmn to uosnd to obuia their fa ihoniigtily clean.
Food.— WbiU Uice are anull; fed upon bread wMked in milk. Bqaeeied prettr irj. Thej are ■!» very fond of oate. bfani, and peaa, of which a modarale aUowanoe mar Iw giyna. Cheeae and meat of an; kind an deeidedlr olqeotioiiable. When bread- lug, the fbmale shoald be left lo henelf for a f^ d^H, aa the male wiU Kmieciiaea deiCoy the joaag mice, II li moM imporlant IJiat the cages be kept in prCFper repair, and that tho Aorm be care^ly fbneried np, otherwise thdr little tonanta maj get oa^ and be loct, or share the bte of their brown-ooaud brelhnn, and beooDirB victims to tia claws of the oat, or to the ojtiilcial monsebap, or erea to
,^m'"
B Silkworm li the CMerpiUu- wMeli jieldi ns tha besntiful flbra ' kDOwIi u lilk, Tb«rfi &re, hDWVTer, aeTtiraJ other kinds of lAire HIT^A *^^^ produce ftn inforior sort of liUc Indeed, the qiuation u to nl!^ wbnber sDCh lUiiinal produce si the latter might not ba pnOUbly ^ employed, hu ronned tha sabiaoC of muoh Boiantiao inquiry- The > Bilkwonn originBUj came tma China and Indi», In which ooouBin IC ia gilll lOTicelj coltiTBtsd, The reuioK of BllkwDnna u cturied an lo soniB eonsidet^ able eitent in Italy and FiKiea ; &nd as long a^ u the reifni of James I., it waa rpcommenil«l by royal edict aa a braneli of national Industry ia thia eounlti. But whether trom tha comperatlTs scarcity of the molbarry, the leavea of which foru the □Btoral fbod of Che ^Ikworm. or tiom the dlfflenlEy of TtMiimg the Inaact is
from Billfworme haii been hitherto a mere amusement in Bngland. Our remuka therefore mnst l« mnflped (o this Tiew of (ho subject.
Th» Oi».— Hatch I Ha.— The egg of the silkworm la nearlT TOOnd, and in aiae rather leas than a mnstard seed. When flnt laid it is of a Ught yaUow, bat H Boon change* to an aah colour. Bilkworms' eggs may ba purchaaad at ■ low ptioa la
mar alwara be abl^iwd ftom yeac to ,
Aboiu (ha Utter aid OC April, (he wbloll tba^ wen hid b; Hit moth, ta BhmUow tr^'s of papn, which ■bould be put where ihe tnu m*j tbiue pownflUly
^QU (ha aonlh ia Ihe bat for tiiii par' pOM. T)w tnTS maybs mads of itont oulridge paper dooblad. with Uie edges (Dmed np, alnuat on Inoh high, aH round, and eewed or paated loEMtur a( (tie oomeiB. It li adTieable lo eover ihe nrs with a bi( at gaoM ; and eapeolal can must be taken that thej are aeoore from in (ha tray* in a proper BicoaUon, leave joiing wonna or lame an waimed ii
TBI CinariLua.^ — The larva or oalerpiUar, when it ii Ont hatched, ia of a dark boa, but when foil gnjwn ita eoloor ia a craamy whil« i it hae a unall drola on eaoh aide at evet? joint, and two half drolea on iteback; iia feet are aix in rnunber, (tana being placed OD each aide near ila bead: it haa alao ten boldeia. eight in the middle of the bod;, and two al the talL While U lemaina in (he oatsrpillar Uata, or ratfagr from the time It ia batnlied ontil it begins lo iplo, the Bllkwonn iaa fonr liok- naaiM i duiing each of Uieaa, whioh laeta aboot three daya, the worm quita ita food,
Fiaiisa baa a powerfol Inflocnce on the qnanti^ and cpiallty of the ailk which ji- . , _ the worm* prodooe. Bad food might
compTunisa all i a healthy nouriab- giveu at proper timea. would, oonbary, remedj maoj ineon- cea, and prerent mai^ evila. The qnancUj of food ebonld bo ref- lated by the appetite of the wonna, and aa opiniona diflbr grcotlj in thif reapect, it ia diffloaU (o lay down any settled rnlea. The qoanUty will be tained by careftilly watch- such abonld not be given at a (inie, nor mut they be led totally without, aa tiatlng ia very deatmctive, and food must not be with- drawn daring (be nlgU. Bllkworma abonld be IM OD tiie IMah leaf of (ha mnlberiT-
am, which ta theb nUoial ud iirap«r tbod, bnt «b<n thcM an nut procaraUe, Oe jaaag iMvea of leaam rorm the beat nibitJRile. WIthoni M l«wt an ■"— -t™—' ■apply of mnlberry learea, hownrer, the wGrms will rartiy thrive,
TmnuTon. — Ad evan tempervRm (honld be malataiacd in the sputDiait in whloh jaa keep yoor ■Ukworm* ; Uuu of the ordlnuy ikmlljr ■HUDg-toom, which is eeMom eipoied to ezOmw Tsriuloiu of heat and cold, wOl BmenUly be foosd effloient. The bmt average heat Ka eilkwonue la (Vom eiitj-BTe to •ereiiEy deKreea, thoogb they will thiive at a mtich higher ODe, provided the aparDuent be thoinaglily tqdU- lated. Eiceai of dryneaa or hcmldity la alike hurtftil ; the Tonner miut be piaided Bgalnat by allghtly waterins Che room in very dry uHom, and rbeding the worma with moiat lesvee. Vben the stiaoepheTe 1> damp, whatever may be the heat of tha weather, the air mast be dried by meam of Are,
Ciusunu la eeseatiat to the ancoeas of bnedlng and Ibe preaerratlan of beatth amanget tha wcraia. Tbey ahould be aiTBDgeil fa aepaiate Days, moie or less ahalkiw aooording la their aise, antU they have attained their TOD growth of (rom twti and a half to three inchu long. All Uttera of dead leavaa, etc. ibonld be oarenilly oleand away Drom the dilltoi«iit tnya, that the wonne may not be compelled to lie on them. Itiaoaoal to remove the worms both befoie and after tha changing of the iJdna. whidi l» beat dona by a slip of paper passed beneath each. To pnao-re iheia troa Oaat, k piece of net or other light ftbrio ahonldbe laid over their traya while the room is betas
TaunnaiuTioi. — At the ead of fbr^ or foi^'flve daya Ihim the time of thalT being hatched, they begin to change to a clear tranaparenl pink or flcali ooloor. par- tlcalarlj oa their tails ; soon after, they grow natlesa, and refuse tbeir Ibod i when these symptoma are pertetved, it la tims for yon to prepare fOr their spinning.
Tu CocoDit. — Aa soon aa the indioatlona mentianad in the hut paragraph are per- odved, roll np aniBll Kiaare piecei of paper, Oomer-wiM, and pin Ihein to a tape acretched acroea tha wntl of a room, end wiUi the poinUd ends downward; when a wona altogether qoite lEa (bod, place it in one of ; these little workahops, as they may with propriety be called. Itor in (h«e the wonn spina its silk. It dispoaea of He web la eoch a manner as to leave a csviQ within ; Ham
aeain caata lie akia. and changes ita appear- ance allORvther. It ahoold be Idt nodis- tarbed ia ita Laboors antil, by gontly shaking the cocoon at the ear, the aorelia may be
thing Uka ■ kidnaj-bean, Bnil (a at tuiij dead. It 1« now tanaed as anrelia, <ilu;iali*, or grub. The largoit uid Hunt of the ooooona ihould ha laliatd, aiul Uid Mida tor the pnrpoae of pmdac- iag aggi. Tha ailk bomg all voond o^ the ennlla * k plaasd in ■ liula bnm, Jut nndar the anrtkce, nod in Ihia aitnaliOD it alltotB its changa aa well and >a sooa aa if it ware left in the ooooon. WivsivB TM< Snx. — The ooooonj when oompletad an of diifbrent ooloure, Torjing from while to a reddlah fallow. There are also some of a saa-grean^ and othara bnff or iieah ooloor. niare la no neoaaaitj for Hparating the difl^ient tliadea to wind (ham apart, aa all the hoaa an loat in the ftaton ■oonilng and preparing of Qa lUk. WluD 7DB haie a large nimiber of eoeoona. It (■ -— — — — j to pnaerre all Che gmba. Altar iHDOTing the locae onlalda illk from Uia cocoom, threw a tpiaiitll7 of (ham Into iMiUDg watar. B^ thii mean* the anrelia will be deunjaO, aud the ptooeaa of detaoh- taig Ihe ailk fhmi tha web grealiy laoiliialed. SUrTonnd the ooooona in the water with aliKIa brnab of blnhroda, when (ha audi of the aOk wUl Im Ibnnd attaahed to the twiga. Yoa ma; (Iwn wbtd tha dlk ofT each eoeoon with great aaae. The oooood, whan earefnllr nnwoond, ooialBta of a aingle Ihiead, nerer dlaoontlnued, abotit IM jarda in length, and wedghlug, wbea di7, three gtaini. It baa thna been oalonlatMl a pound, avoiTdapola, would extend ISl milea. and forty-Mran ponnda wonld
la the globe.
A winder or reel ma; be bonght of the lellerB oT aUkwonaa' agga, or nAde with tonx oroaa plaoaa of match-wood pmrided with a handle.
Tu Xoia. — Wths, — IT left to UeelT, the chiTSBUe taraaina moUonlaaa Ibr about twan^ daja tn the heart of the ooooon, when it bnnte like aa egg hatching ; and iiiUh< a hooked fMC amergaa a jellowlah, heaTj, doll- looUng moth with wingai bnt theaa wing! it never niai fbr flTlng, onlr orawUng alowly abont in the place In which it haa been hatched. It eat* nothing dnring ita eiiMeuoe In the motb ■tale, whioh ta of brief dnratlon, aa lb* non after she baa laid bar a, and the male Ikeqaeotlr dropa off before the female boa ""!*>■-' lading. Tha motha are placed to la; on a abeet of papv, whioh li Imioeraed In fteab IB Ibe egga hare acqnlifd an aah colour. They are then dried, and aara- (UI7 pnaerred for the fbllowlDg jear. The fCimale moth prodnoea between three and lOar haudied egga. Abont too coooona an calcnlated to jiald on an aTerage an onooe
JVOR ■(!«« the Bee Iiu U
whole UA <■ one oantmoed mcx umb li Uie Toy perftetion of Intect & r Bi If H bad been laid out hy thfl nUe wid oompnefl ; Bad in arety way di It merit that baaatitDl line oT Shakepean"!, lo which Uie poet hu happily jd it " a dnging idbhid that bnilds a golden roof," We haye all aean ■I arouDd the honeyed cnp or the flower, and aUght ea gently npoii (hs ^ as Karcelf to (hake the poUea into the Med-cop, in which it phmsea cat oT the rich treann which it soon beua away to iu diOoDt hire. Then it is corioua lo know Chat wblle it la ont amonget the flowen Harchin^ for tbod ila eompaniona ve bn^ building the oelli ; that one bring* in the malsriali which another plaoea together in proper order, while a IhM ia in attendance to enpply them with food daring the prooeefl of Iheir laboor, opening lis hooe; -bag, and giving a drop to one. and >o eontinning khuhI le circle of hard worken until theitock ii exhamtsd.
urn AionncTcrai ot Biie The inbabltanta of a hire aonilBt of
^he qneen, and mothfr of de commnnity ; the dionea, or malae of tbs 'orkdng-bee. The qoeea-bee la of a larger aiae, and gnatei length (X
BBES. 428
body, than the iwt ; abe is of a darker oolour aboye, and a yellowish hoe beneath, and poBBOtace a sting of a curved form. MThen flye days old she begins to deposit her eggs, and oontmoes laying until the nflddle of autumn, ftom about 160 to 200 a day. The drones are more bulky in body, and the head is rounder in shape, the eyes are more fVill, and the trunk shorter ; they haye also an additional articulation to the antenna, and possess no sting. When flying, they may be distinguished by making a louder noise than other bees. The drones render no assistance in procuring honey ; and as soon as the queen has finished laying, they are usually killed or escpelled the hive by the workers. Although they have been previously scattered through different parts of the hive, they generally collect together at the beginning of autumn, as if aware of their approaching fkte, and when the attack commences they make a vigorous resist- ance ; bat owing to the comparative smallness of their numbers, and their natural deficiency of sting, th^ have not a chance of escape.
The wwking-bee is smaUer in sise than either the queen or the drones, being not more than half an inch in length. Its body is of a dusky-brown colonr, thickly covered with hairs, and provided with a homy and hollow sting, which has at its base a little bag containing the poison it shoots into the wound. The working-bees form the m^ori^ of the hive, and on them its principal duties devolve, some being employed at home as nurses to fiBod and take care of the young grubs, and finish the comb and cells which have been founded by ^e others, while the wax-workers are charged with pro- visioning the hive. They gather the pollen of flowers, and also collect the odoriferous and resinous substance called jnopolia, which is used in their architecture. These the bees cany on their thighs, which are admirably oonstmoted for the purpose, the middle portion of the hind pair of legs being so hollowed as to form a basket, which it fills with the sweet store that is first kneaded into a little ball, and thereby rendered drier and less adhesive ; and this pleasant task is continued until the hive or box in which they are placed is well stocked with honey.
Hzvss AVB Bozxs. — ^There are various opinions relative to hives and boxes, and it is still an undecided point which of the two is preferable. Those persons who wish for ornament, and are not particnlar in expenditure, may have boxes as costly and elabo- rate as th^ can desire ; some being made with glass roofb and sides, through which the bees may be seen at work inside.
Btraw hives ought to be large and wen made, and placed on the centre of a stout boaard, long enough to hold a small hive or box on each side, with hollow communica- tions, to be opened or dosed at pleasure. When the bees become crowded in spring or summer, the entrance to one of the side hives must be opened ; and after they have taken possession of it, it must be ventilated by i^ hole previously made on the top ; this will prevent unnecessary swanning.
Another mode of enlarging a hive, whidi is called " capping," is accomplished by taking a straw hive of large dimensions, and cutting it across about one-third of its length flnom the upper end; then fit to the lower portion a round piece of wood, tolerably thick, and having in its centre a hole about an inch and a half in diameter, stopped with a oork or bong; place over this a hive rather smaller in sise than the
4M BBB8.
flnti ■ad when the bees have filled the lower portion yon have only to dmw oat the oork, and the honegr yon will find in the cap will he of the fineet and pnreet qaaHty.
Borne persons place a roof, or wooden ooTering, over the hives, with an qpenini^ at the back, by which the progress of the bees can be examined ; and this is certainly of advantage in regulating the temperatare of Che hiye, and serving as a protection from extreme cold, rain, or sunshine.
OBTAizmro Stock. — Ck>nsiderable care is requisite in choosing a stock of bees. If you purchase in early spring, you should endeavour if possible to have them fttnn some one with whom you are acquainted, and upon whose honour you can depmd. In the summer season, you mi^ form some judgment for yourself upon the merits of a hive by visiting the garden in which it is placed, and watching about mid>dfl^ whether the bees crowd busily about the entrance, and if those returning to the hive appear to be heavily laden. If this is the case, and swarming has not yet taken place, yon wHl do well to eflbot the purchase. If the bees hum loudly, it is considered a sign of strength, and their remaining within the hive in bad weather is also a favourable token ; for if they come out, it shows they *>« short of provisions. When a stock is obtained in autumn, it should be after the massacre of the drones has taken place. This may soon be ascertained by observing the stand and the ground about the hive. It is better in purchasing to choose new hives, which can contain no old worn-out comb ; but if you have any doubt on the subject, it will be advisable to ascertain the Iket by Aimigating the hive in the evening, and examining its contents. The genuine colour of the oomb is white, that of a former yesr is ctf a darkish yellow, and when the combs are black the stock should be xtQected as valueless. If you send your hive to receive a swann, it should be where you can depend uiKm the bee-keeper, for although a first and strong swarm is valuable, a second is greatly inferior ; they can afterwards be distinguished \jj the formation of the comb, which the first swarm commences at the middle point of the hive, and the second at the side.
SrrvATxoir ov thb Hmw. — ^The stand for the hives should be fixed on a dry and, if possible, a sandy soil, the ground sloping in fhmt so as to cany off the water oocasioned by rain, and unexposed to the droppings from the eaves of houses or hedges. A hig^ wall, or outhouse, is a desirable shelter either behind or on the esst of the stand, and a few dwarf shrubs should be so disposed around as to shelter it from the heat of the noonday sun, which is highly injurious to the hive, and would, besides melting the hon^, cause the bees to swarm at an un&vourable period. The eaxij morning light ought also to be avoided, as it will tempt them forth while it is too cold, and thus occa- sion the death of many in spring ; and in summer, if th^ commence operations so early, they will become too tired to continue their labours during the after and man advantageous part of the day. The most favourable aspect is, therefore, south-westerly, ao oontrived as to be shifted a little, according to the season, inclining rather more to the west in spring, and in autumn to the south. Be carelU to choose a quiet sitoatioo. and one free from unpleasant smells, for bees dislike noise and bad odours.
Food. — Among the flowers and shrubs which should be planted abundantly in the neighbourhood of the bee-hive, are the yellow ftme. or gorse ; which, besidBS being one
BSSB. 425
of the earliest of eprixig-flowon, blooms nenrlj all round the year; pale primioaes and golden broom, sweet riolets, erocnaes, and fhiit-trees, white and pmi>le olover, mig- nonette, lilies, and single roses, yarioos heaths of all hues, brown thyme, priyet, with its hon^ smell, marigold, laaiistiniia, and snnflowers. Bees are also fond of mnstaxdy sage, and radishes, peas, cauliflowera, and parsnips, asparagos, paral^, and oelaiy. Well proTided with these, your bees will never haye occasion to stray tar from home in search of food, and the honey they prodnoe will be of the finest qnaUty. Water is also essential to bees, and shonld be placed near the stand in shallow pans, with pebbles for them to rest on while drinking. Any depth of water is ol^ectionable, as yonr bees mi^ be blown into it when retnmtng heayily laden to the hive.
SwABMnre. — After the qoeen has began to lay, the nmnbers of a hiye rapidly inorease, and the bees soon find they require cooler as well as less crowded quartera. The royal larys, which are caraftilly guarded by the workers, are also approaching to matority, and the qoeen^bee, who is preyented from killing them, no doubt beoomea alarmed at the number of thoee who wiU shortly dispute her reign. It is then that ■warming takes place. Its most certain indications are dusters of bees hanging like bunches of grapes on the outside of the hiye, and sometimes on the standing-boaird ; a neglect of toil during the most fkyourable weather ; and a peculiar humming noise, which is heard within the hiye for seyeral nights preyious to swarming. A short time before their flighty howeyer, an unusual stillness preyails, which is occasioned by their loading themselyes with honey for their journey, after which the old queen leads off the ibst swarm. A change of weather is suffldent to frustrate their intentions { when, therefore, you are desiroua of preyenting your bees from swarming, it mi^ be done afltetoally by syringing with water those which duster on the outside, whidi they will mistake for rain ; or, if after they haye left the hiye they hoyer in the air without ■ettling, they may be brought down either by firing a gun or throwing up dust, which possibly the bees mistake for thunder or haO.
The second swarm is generally announced by >^ dlffbrent sort of busiiag, wfaidi is Mid to be caused by a contest between the queens, as to which shall lead off from the hiye. If, through inattention, a second swarm should chance to come off immediately after the first, you shonld return it to the hiye as soon as possible, and secure its queen ; If depriyed of the queen, ii will, howeyer, oommonly retom of its own accord. Aswarm will sometimes diyide Into bands, and settle separately; this is owing to there being two queens, therefore one must be secured. When the qneen>bee alights, the others ooUeot in a heap around her, hanging together by means of their feet. Th^ are sometimes suspended in this way IVom the brandi of a tree, when th^ may be eeaily taken by placing an empty hiye under them, and tapping the bough ; they should then be sprinkled with honey and ale, and confined for about twelye hours. It is said that the bees send out scouts preyious to swarming, who choose a place for encampment ; it is, therefore, a good plan to leaye an empty hiye smeared with hon^y in some ■oitable place, not yery near the old one, and it may possibly be selected.
A good swarm should wdgh tnm flye to seyen pounds ; if flye pounds in weight, it la too weak in numbers to support itself, and should be united to another by mesas of
426 BEES.
ftiTnlgfttion, wbioh will be hnreaAer deecribed. After hlTizig the swanxi, th^ sboald be fiBd for a few days, for if thie shonld be omitted, and unfavourable weather follow, tiie bees will be starved. In taking BwanoB, as well as in aU operations with bees, it is advisable to wear a piece of thin ganse drawn over the head and neck, and a p&ir ot woollen gloves ; thus attired, no accident will be likely to ooonr. Early swarms are more advantageous than lato ones, but swarming should on no aoconnt be allowed to take place unless the stock be strong in numbers. It may be prevented by an enlarge- ment of the hive and lowering the temx>erature, and for this end it is recommended by some that the hive or box should be provided with a thermometer as well as a ventilator. The most fkvourable degrees of heat are said to be firom seventy-five to ninety degrees in the stock-hive, and ttom sixty-five to seventy-five degrees in the side boxes. The removal of boxes, glasses, and slides should be managed as careAilly as possible, so that the bees should scarcely know their habitation had been meddled with.
TAKiire HovxT. — ^Various portions of honey, according to the state of the hives or boxes, may be taken sometimes as early as May, and during each of the summer months. The grand deprivation should, however, take place about the month of August. The old mode of obtaining the honey was hy the suffbcation of the bees, a most unwise as well as cruel practice. The method now commonly employed is ftimigation, under the efRscts of which the bees are ])erfect]y harmless, and will recover from the temporary stupor uninjured. For the purpose, provide a small tin box with a tube extending from each end, the ends of this tube being so formed that one can be easily inserted into the hive, and the other attached to the end of a bellows ; the box shonld be so made that it can be opened at pleasure. The dried^lMi^riM ptUrerulemiut or fhsa ball, the bovieta giffantea, or fh>g-oheese, are generally used, and will be found best for the purpose ; should there be any difiioulty in procuring these, a few tobacco leaves folded in brown paper, or rags soaked in a solution of saltpetre, win produce the desired effbctb The quantity of the prepared ftmgus necessary would be abooi the size of a hen's egg, or less may in some instances jnove sufficient, but it will be better to have an ample supply. In using tobacco, however, care must be taken not to carry the fhmigation to too great an extent, or you may sufibcate the whole of your stock. The matter should be ignited and placed in the tin box, and the proper end d the tube being inserted into the lower iMurt of the hive, ply the bellows gently; the bees will quickly discover the smoke, whidi should be prevented fh»n escaping by oovearing the hive with a cloth, their alarm will be announced by a loud bussing and commotion, this will cease in a few moments, and the bees will lUl as if dead. The hive may then be removed, and a new one smeared with honey inside placed over the bees.
Another system, called tapping, or driving, which dispenses with fhmigation, is by some persons preitBrreA, This is done by taking an old chair, fh>m which the bottom has been worn or out away, and in the evening, when the bees are asleep, placing the hive turned up in the chair. An empty hive, smeared with honey, should be pat on the top of it, and a cloth wrapped round the point of junction. You must then with a stick strike the reversed hive round the sides, taking care not to use violence, otherwise the combs may be loosened or ii^uied ; but let your strokes be regular, comnwrnetog ai
BEES. 427
the lower end, and gradnaUy aeeending to the top. A hnxnxning noise will preciently BDnonnce that the bees are distorbed, and they will then mount into the empty hive ; removing the cloth, and raising the upper hive about an inch above the lower one, will hasten the ascent of the bees if it should previously appear checked, and in their sleepy state it will be unattended with danger ; the lower hive will shortly be deserted, and the one containing the bees may then be placed on the stand. If early in the season, the bees will resume their toU on the morrow as if nothing had occurred. In uniting stocks the same plan must be observed as in the taking of honey. The best period is from the middle of August until the end of September; two persons should act in concert, each taking a hive for fumigation, so that both stocks may be simul- taneously in the same condition. It will then be necessary to search for the Queen, which must be removed from one of the stocks about to be united. There will not be much difficulty in finding her, for she usually lodges at the top of the hive, and is one of the last to fiUL She will, therefore, be discovered among the uppermost bees. When the stocks are hived they should be drenched with sugar and ale, and the help they will render to each other in licking their bodies will soon produce friendliness, while it will prevent them from, distinguishing their former comrades.
DisxASXs Aim Bnicns. — ^To prevent the generating of disease, and preserve your stock in good health, a frequent examination of the hives is necessary. They should then be cazefhlly tned from the presence of stale and candied hon^, which is highly tqjurions to bees, and will, if unattended to, produce diarrhoea, hy which means num- bers will be destroyed. The enemies of bees are more numerous than their diseases ; the best safeguards are a strong stock, which will be less liable to attacks, and a thick coating of Roman cement over the hives, the entrance to which should also be narrowed towards evening, as a ftirther protection IVom the ingress of mice, moths, and insects.
Thb Hits xv Wmn should be placed if possible in a dark, cold, dry outhouse, a suffideni^ of honey being left in it for the support of the bees, and the entrance being almost entirely closed tram. November to liaroh. Internal dampness should be care- ftdly guarded against, as well as that which originates from external causes. For this end, a bell-glass, well covered with flannel, should be placed over the opening on the top of the hive or box, and removed every now and then, that the dampness caused by condensed vapour may be wiped IVom the interior. The quantity of hon^ left in the hive for winter consumption should be, according to its sixe, from twen^ to thir^ pounds, exclusive of the weight of the hive and bees.
Tu Paovra vo bb DBxrrBX> bbom the keeping of bees under flftvourable circumstances, is by no means insignificant. A set of six boxes or hives, ought to yield a jnofit of at least £10 a year, reokonxng the price of the best hon^y at one shilling and sixpence a pound. To obtain the honey inire and dear, suffer it to drain from the combs without pressing them. Save the combs, and the bees wUl clear them out in the winter, when they require fbod.
♦«-
'^'~ OLD Mill SIlTer Plah, m flih nf Om gold oup (padM □cil, havB ItmgbMD amlliu' to thii oonntry. Tfa«;aniwtiv<a Lu, fuid, ucordlnK to Pennut, were lltM IntrodniMd into Bng-
___,_^ 1B»1, uid b«cama lolBrsbly oommon aboni 17(8. Thej haie
J^^^.^Z^'^ "^" leoome compleMir sUoralixMl both bare and in Mlier puM ^~, V^^^ 'i( ]:i[rDpe, and bread treelj, «p«ial1j in pondi in mim and
V^T^v) ^ nhAl^roil i^itiuttionB. la nuny of tLs eOeanu ot Portagal ^Id carp P'i^ aboiiud. fniin xctimse they an broDSht over to Uiia eoiuiD7 in trading
(p
I '■■-I ndapted for kcwping la globfla are from foor to fife inoIiBa IS ahonld bo procnrod, if posaibla, from lonie pgnd where Oioy are known lo be healthy, and ahonld never be placed with Dthen mini a diflhranl locally, SB atnngs fish genarallr hont eaoh other to death. The flah eoU tat the •IreeU an. tOr the moal pan, bronght from Oie coontiy. and Knnatinica die In a ibort time from chan(ca of tempetatnre and Iha dimrenoe of tha water. For the ume raainn. flah afaoiild not b« pimbawd trom conaarrMorles, aa there i* a sreat dangar of tbelr ndt aanririnf k
GOLD AND BILyEB FISH. 429
0LOBXB.
The globe shonld be only abont fbnr-flftlia filled with water ; and if bj uiy oon* triranoe a amaU jet can be fixed in the globe to throw np the water, and ftmish a good ■apply of air to the fiah, they are more likely to continue healthy. A wide-moothed globe ia preferable to a narrow one. It ia yeiy important that too many fiah be not kept together in the same globe, aa plenty of room ahonld be allowed them to awim about without coming in contact with each other. Gare« shoiild, moreover, be taken to keep the globe in the coolest part of the room ; near an open window, if possible, so that the fish may have both light and air. On no account shonld th^ be placed near the fixe. Thimdexstorma are very apt to kill them ; on soch oooasiona, therefore, the globe shonld be removed away from the window, and the water in it shonld be changed as soon after as possible.
The water shonld be changed every morning, and the globe be thoronghly cleansed, rhe fish shonld be taken ontvery carefhlly with the hand, and placed in abasin; which is preferable to nsing a net, as the latter is very liable to break the scales of the ilah, and thereby destroy their brilliancy of colour. While they are in the basin, where they may remain for half-an-honr, feed them with a few bread cromba, or biscuit, broken very smalL They will require feeding only once a-day. A few branches of box should be kept in the globe, to enable the fish to rub off the slime that might otherwise clog up their gills. The branches of box should be well cleansed every morning, and fresh box used once a week.
nxsxASBs Avn uxxniss.
Immediately a fish becomes diseased, separate it from the others. A fish in a state of disesae may be detected from an imdnlathig motion it displays when swimming, and by its frequently coming to the top of the water for air, which shows fimt it has not Bufi^ent power in its gills to obtain enough air from the water. All healthy fish possess the meana of separating oxygen from their native element, and seldom, if ever, come to the surfece except for food. Occasionally, too, the Qold Fish, when sick, will make a noise resembling the bursting of a bubble, and afterwards remain almost motion- lass at the bottom of the globe. A diseased fish soon loses its brilliancy, and looka dull or donded. The best remedy when a fish shows the first symptoms of disease, is to place it in ashallow vessel and turn a tap of water gently on it, allowing it to drop very slowly, for twelve or twenly-four hours, nntU the fish regaina ita usual poaition, when it may be placed with the others. We have ktfown many instances of fish being saved by thla precaution being taken in time. Female fish not nnfrequenUy die from not depositing their spawn ; and aa nothing has yet been found to induce them to do this, there is no remedy but to return them to the pond, where th^ will breed freely. A fish when diseased is invariably attacked by ita healthier companions, and if not attended to qniokly, will, in all probability, die within fbur-and-twenty hours.
T^ 1 r 1 1 ITU i| t I M
THE AQUABItJH.
«Bna or wbiob M17 bo7 naj krId a good kDOw- ^ of th« hAbila &ai1 p«caliuiti««ofUH lower orden of anim^ttfift, [ ii u Improramnil upon th* Gold-Bab bowl ; anil Uiough ItMj ; hiliodiuiad uid made (Uhionablo. mi not kltogecbtr nnkoowD ■ OillMTt Wbit«, Uis BDlliDr of (hat ohannin^ book, the " Katoral Histoiy of Belbonis," aemaa to hsva bad a glimiiae of Ihe Idea an whiob the Aqnarimn is Ibnuded — the uuon in one email flav box or globe of planU and UviEtg animals, each producing the element reqairad for the euMODtUion of the other. ■■ When," aaye the philoaopher-natnralist, " I bajipSD to be Hhere j^old and eilver Dsh an kept in a glan bowl. 1 un alwa;! pleased with tliB
THE AQUARIUM. 431
to which I paid no small attention, taking ereiy oooaaion to xemark what paaaed within its narrow limits." He deaoribes how the fish greedily deronr the water-plant called Imma (dnck-weed), and how they sicken and die if fresh vegetable matter be not introduced into the globe.
Tbb PBDrcin.a ov ths AqvAMtuK. — The Aqoariom may consist either of salt-water, with marine animals and plants, or fresh-water with fresh-water animal and yegetable life. Bat whether the one or the other be chosen, the principle on which its frvshnese and actual ezistraioe depend is the same— namely, the proper balance between the oxygen given off by the plants and the carbon thrown off l^ the fish or other ^i^iw^i^ia } the combination of the two gases preserving the water pure, keeping the ^Tiiw^aia alive, and ftufitaining the growth and renewal of the plants. The scientific principle by which we imitate nature in ne Aquarium is very well explained by Sir David Brewster :— '* Water has the power of absorbing certain quantities of atmospheric air and various gases; the presence of the air gives to the rain and spring water their refreshing qualities, as may be proved by expelling the air from water by boiling, and then tasting the insipid liquor that remains. Ordinary water always contains a certain amount of atmospheric air, and also a toaoe of carbonic add, which gas is a compound of oxygen and carbon in the proportion of sixteen to six. The leaves of pkmts, when acted upon by light, decompose this gas, and, having no necessi^ for oxygen, they merely absorb the carbon. Animals, on the other hand, require oxygen for the purpose of removing the waste carbon of great divisions of organized beings. But two other elements play an important part in the phenomenon of life— namely, nitrogen and hydrogen. Both plants and animals require these gases as food. Th^ combine to form ammonia, which is found in small portions in the atmosphere and in water. Ammonia is indeed the main fertilizing element of vegetable life. Plants obtain their supply of it either through the natural water absorbed at their rootlets, or by means of artificial manures ; animals, through the means of the substances th^ devour. AU forms of vegetable and animal life are built up of these four elements." Thus, then, the philosophy of the Aquarium being explained, let us now see how we may contrive a cheap and eflbctive apparatus, fitted alike for the drawing-room or the play-room.
Ths Takx mjtd thb Watbb. — First, as to the tank or globe— the receptacle for your water uid its living plants and *n<Tniti« Whether you determine on a marine or a fresh-water Aquarium, the tank is the same. It may be either square or round. If square or rectangular, it should be perfectly water-tight, with a plain piece of glass to place loosely over the top at night and when the room is being dusted. A propagating glass turned upside down forms a good, strong round tank, which may be purchased cheaply of the dealers in horticultoral glass ; lately, indeed, they have been made of grace- ftil shape in perfect^ white glass, purposely for use as Aquaria. The advantage of square over round tanks, is that they do not enlarge or distort the objects seen within them.
Having bought your tank, your next task is to fill and stock it. It must be pre- pared for the plants and animals by placing at the bottom a layer of stones and gravel — afresh* water gravel for fresh-water, stones and sand for salt-water. These form a basis or foundation i>r the roots of the plants. It is well also to have a little rock-work
432 THE AQUABimC
tiflfng from the bottom jtut above the Borflice of the water. Then fill it with water. For a Freeh-water Aqaarimn, ordinaxy pond or canal water will do ; but for a Marine Aquarium you must hare the proper sea- water. Do not tiy the artificial sea-water adver- tised, but get a sufficient quantity trom. the sea itself, taken at some distance troxa tLe shore. This yon can procure without much trouble or expense. In London there are people who continually- provide a fresh supply ; and as few parts of the country are mnch more than eighty miles trom the sea, it should not be a veiy difficult matter to obtain salt-water. But if real sea-water is veiy difficult to procure, the following mixture will form a tolerably good substitute. It so nearly aHutmilates to the actual oompoeitios of ualt- water that it will support life in the marine Aquarium :■—
Common salt (chloride of sodium) . . . 3| ounces.
Epsom salts (sulphate of magnesia) • > . i ounce.
Chloride of magnesium 200 giaina troy.
Chloride of potassium 40 „ „
These materials, properly dissolved, are to be added to four qnuts of common soft- water, the same proportions being observed if you enlai^ the quantity.
Thb FBX8H-WA.Tza Aqvaxiux. — Presuming that you begin with a Fresh-water Aqua- rium, you will find the best weed to grow in the water is the anaeharis alsi$tastrum, the weeds which often choke the canals and inluid streams. This pretty moss-like plant may be easily procured in Covent Garden Market, or obtained from ahnost any canal at any time of the year. Another weed which does admirably in the Aquarium is the nmun' cuius aquaUUt (the water crowfoot), which may be taken from any pool during the spring months, and placed in the tank, when it will send down roots and grow abun- dantly. Be oareftil to remove all broken or decaying shoots, and keep the weeds from multiplying too test, or the balance between animal and vegetable life will be destroyed.
In stocking a fresh-water Aquarium great choice is left for the young naturalisL He may have small carp, gold-fish, minnow, or ahnost any kind of river fish, with water-newts, or efts, or even a good-sized toad, which is by no means an ugly or uninteresting animal. The toads and newts will crawl occasionally to the top of the rock and sun themselves. A diving spider is also a good addition ; but you must by no means neglect a good supply of water-snails and fr^esh- water shrimps, which wUl be found very useftil in eating away the cottferoa, or green slime-weed, that collects on the glass. Sticklebacks are veiy amusing little fish, but they must be kept by them- selves, for they are quarrelsome fellows, and have an ugly knack of poking their sharp spikes into, and mortally wounding, the other inhabitants of tiie tank. Some watcr- beeties are also harmless, but others prove a great nuisance. You must avoid placing young pike in your tank, though by themselves they are amusing.
Tn Miaiini AquARnnc. — For the Marine, or Bea-water Aquarium, the sea anemone iflctiiUa) and various kinds of crabs may be had in great variety of the dealers ; and if you are fond of sea-side wandering you may procure them for yourselves among the rooks and in the littie pools on the shore when the tide is out. Limpets, sea-snjula, ■hrimps, periwinklea, star-fish, etc., may be introduced at pleasure ; while for the
SEAWEEDS AND SHELLS. 483
plaoto, any of the small sea-weeds will do. When gathered, a little piece of the rock to which th^ grow should be chipped off, and the plants placed in the tank without being detached or bruised. The plants and rockwork should be arranged picturesquely. BemoTe any sick or dying animals, so as to prevent the water flrom becoming foul.
coircLin)Dro OBsnTATioirs.
The Aquarium should be placed on a stand or table in a good light ; and if the sun shine directly on either side, that part should be protected by a green-baise curtain, which may be removed when the sunshine departs. Once fixed, the tank should not be disturbed. A window with a north-western or western aspect, is a capital situation. Be careftil not to crowd your tank, and when you find the water-level getting too low, raise it by the addition of more water ; but do not meddle with the arrangement of the tank too often, or you will alarm your live stock. In the nmnagement of the Aquarium, as in other pet fancies, cleanliness is the grand secret of success.
. , SEAWEEDS AND SHELLS. >^>^^
^^^ -V- ^P
Tm gathering of Seaweeds and Shells is an amusement in which all young people delight. All round the coast are to be found numerous pretty specimens of shells and seaweeds, n^fish and polypes, sea-urchins, etc. Among the shells most common in the sands of the British coast are various orders of— nautilus, radiolata, convolvulata, canalifera, corbulea, myaria, serpula, nympacea, hon^oomb, and other marine shells too numerous to mention. Our space will not permit us to more than glauoe at this sulgect, for the science of conchology requires a volume as large as the '* Boy's Own Book."
Of seaweeds we can also say but little. The delicate make and exquisite beauty which characterize the forma belonging to the natural order Algae cannot ikil to inspire the most superficial observer with mingled feelings of surprise and astonishment. Dr. Hooker enumerates upwards of five hundred species of seaweed, to be found on our ahores ; but the most common are the podded wrack, the slippery forkweed, the sea- strap, the red sea-film, the mammilated gristle- weed, the common and feathery mingle- hair, the thread ropeweed, the broom-like rushweed, the scarlet homweed, the purple nlva, the plumweed, the elongated and coralline ceramium, the littoral, the sea-lettuce, the prickly deemarest, and the black revalet-weed. This curious order of vegetables approaches so nearly in some instances to the forms of animal life, that naturalists are as yet undetermined in which class to place them. When dried and spread out, sea- weeds may be made into exquisite little bouquets ; and if care be taken to contrast their colours, very pretty effldctB are produced ; for you may get flowers of scarlet and blue, brown, purple, and pink, witb filamentous stalks and rocky leaves, and anaDge them In a hnndzed dalioata and pleasing forma.
28
or jroatb. Uum gudcafng. There ia ■ pleulng utdvity ftbotrt (li«
boBT npsntionsordfEtrinir, hoeiiiK, and planllnfr. ftdmltsbl^ adspUd ■ boylah Bad ja;onii ipirit. It. moreoTer, InonB a bay to
hahm of eieratH and indnali?, for which ho I* afterwutla ramirded, f y%k la gathatiaff the Howen he hu cnltiTiled. ud tuing the (nlta h«
hfl4 afleiated to [>Toduca. There ia nmethiDg poetical In the Tery act log, for it waa the eniplDymenI at onr Ont partnls in Eden i and no psnoa mipjr Umwlf wiUxtut atwlnlng pmm of mind and haalUi of bodr.
GABDENINa 485
MSTBODS OP Bsnmre thb eBoinrD.
Bnt we miut not for^t that much haid-haxided and pleasurable labour ia neoenaiy to porchate this delight ; and Che best method of aooompliahing it we ahaU giye in a aeriee of plain and homely deecriptions, each aa a boy cannot 0^ to comprehend ; and, like the homble mole— one of the earliest gardeners — ^we shall begin vrith
Digginfft which is necessary to render tbe ground soft, so that it may easily be pene- trated by the rain, and by the roots of the young plants. Evenness is also essential, as if there are hollow places they will be sure to collect the moisture, to the i^juiy of the pkmts grown in the rest of the soil, which, flrom being too quickly dried, will generally look poor and withered. If manure is introduced* it may be spread orer the surface of the bed, which should then be dug as if it were a portion of the soil, or, as some persons prefor, a heap may be placed near at hand, and a small quantity of manure deposited at the bottom of each furrow as it is made, covering it with the eaith fh>m the next fkrrow; and so on in succession.
Pmnting is chiefly used amongst plants and small trees, to avoid the ii^oiy to their roots which would be caused by digging. It oonsiBts in taming the soil to the dei>th of a few inches. It is also of advantage where seeds are to be sown early in spring, causing them to germinate sooner than in ground which had been dug before it had lost the coldness imbibed during winter.
FoHcing differs l^m digging and pointing in stirring the soU without taming it. This is accomplished by applying the foot to the hilt of the fork whilst thrusting it into the ground, and then pulling back the handle as in digging. This is a good meUiod of loosening the soil in shrabberiee, or in any place where trees do not require to be taken up and replanted. Hard ground mi^ thus be pulverised to a considerable aepth for tiie free admission of air and rain to the roots of the plants, which is so neceasaiy to thdr growth and prosperity.
Hoeing is another operation in gardening used fbr the removal of weeds. The hoe is also employed in making drills for the sowing of seeds, in drawing up the earth round the stems of young growing plants, and in loosening the soiL For these purposes
there are two kinds of hoes — -^
the thrast-hoe and the draw- ^ ^/N
hoc. The former is most easily ^^
managed, and may be used
with equal advantage for the " destruction of weeds or for pulverizing the soil. The draw-hoe is best adapted for forming furrows for the recep- tion of seeds, as well as for drawing up the soil round the stems of such growing plants as appear to require it. The operation of hoeing-up is of advantage only to such annuals as have weak and slender roots, and long trailing stems, like the pea, or to plants like the cabbage, which throw out fibrous roots above the vital knot. It in intended to strengthen plants which require much nourishment, by causing them U> throw out more fibres from their main roots ; but the operation would be ixyurious to woody plants, the stems of which, above the main root» should be free from the soil.
<]
436 QASDINIKa.
Tbii put, called t^ gardmcn the neek or collar, is the moat Txtal one of the plaBt^ aa manj treea, if atripped of their roota, while this part remaiiis nnii^iized, will throw oat ft«ah ones, or, if cat down close ahoye it, will form f^eah ahoota ; but if the collar is cot thiongh, or aerionslj ixgorod, the plant will die.
Baking ia asefbl in giving a smoothness te the soil after it has been dog np. by dragging weeds and stones together, and breaking the clods of earth which have be«i left by the spade. The proper time for osing the rake is in dzy weather, and, if tbe handle is held high, a slight degree of exertion will be sniBcient Ibr the pnxpose. When yoa wwot the teeth of the rake to enter the groiind, the handle mnat be held low. The rake for collecting grass after mowing shoold have wooden teeth.
Soilt and Manure. — The beat soil for gardening purposes is composed of sand, day, and lime, of nearly equal proportions, rendered lioh hj decayed leaves and depoaitiias of animAl matter. A sandy or clay^ soil, without the addition of lime^ is neoeasaarily (Ad — the former not retaining a soffioient d^^ree of moistore round the roota to pieamu them in a healthy state, and the latter being of too close and compact a texture either to admit air or allow the roots to spread withoat a considerable waste of strength in the effort. A chalky soil, mixed with sand, is excellent for growing vegetablea; and chalk, althoogh considerably colder, sacoeeds better nnmixed than any of the other kinds. It ia especially capable of great improvement from manore.
Manures supply the difllarent gases necessary to vegetation. There are three ktnd^ commonly used in gardens, vis., animal, vegetable, and mineral. The firat is genSKally the reftise of stables, with occasionally guano, pigeons* dimg, and bone^ust; the second is decayed leaves, tan, and charcoal ; and the mineral manure is prinapaUy lime, although nitrate of potash and nitrate of soda are occasionally used. 8<»ne oawtjon is requisite in the use of manures, aa too great a quantity will cause as much i^jiuy to the plants as too little. The safest manure for all gardens is the remaina of aa old hot- bed ; or, if the eflfbct is not desired to be immediate, but of longw duration, half-deoaiyted stable manure. To produce a quick eflbct on aandy soils, crops of vegetables should be dug into the ground, and the decomposition which ensues, being equally diatoibaiad through the soil, will aflbrd the plants afterwards grown in it considerable noaxiahmanL
HOTBXDa
Are generally formed of stable sweepings in a partial state of decay ; this is caDed by gaxdeners " long litter." When this is first taken from the stable^ it should be laid in a heap to ferment, and left for about a week, when it will require *>**^ng tog«- ther and turning over with a fork, taking care to place what was outside in the interior. This operation must be repeated every few days, until the manure is all of one ooloar, and has become so rotten that it can easily be torn asunder with the fork. It is then fit for use, and should be spread in layers on a piece of ground a little higher than the ordinary surface of the garden, in a aheltered situation, and, if poasible, open to the aouth'; the layers should be beaten down separately with Uie back of the fork, aad continued till the bed is about three foet in height, and exceeding the sise of the finuns which is to cover it by about a fbot. Some earth should be laid roond the bottasa of
OABDENINO. 487
file lied, a ftw inches in width, to reoeiTo the moistiim whioh win drain tram the miunire. When the bed is completed, and made aa even ae poesible, the tnme of glan Bhoold he placed over it, and the eashea oloeed, nntil a steam appears npon the glass. The manure may then be ooYcred with mould to the d^ith of three or fonr inches, and on Uus monld the seeds may be sown. Bome persons, however, prefer having the •eeds sown in pots, and plunged in the soil. The heat of the hotbed must be regulated sooording to what it is to contain. For flower-seeds and cucumbers, 60 degrees will be Bofficient. Melons require a heat of 66 degrees, which must be increased to 76 while ripening their firult Should the average heat sink considerably below this estimate, it may be increased by exterior linings, which are narrow masses of fermenting horse, dung, placed round the main bed. If the heat is too great, it may be lowered by raising the glasses, and if this is iiunfflcient, excavations must be made in the sides nearly deep enough to reach the centre of the bed. These may be filled up with any material which will receive heat without imparting it* such as turf, leaves, or cold dung, which has already undergone fermentation. Hotbeds are also made of tan or decayed leaves, placed in a kind of box formed of bricks or strong boards, and this kind of hotbed is certainly the neatest. Those formed of stable-manure qpkn, however, if desired, be thatched outside with straw, or covered with bast-mats to improve their
appearance.
TEM raorAOAtioir ov ruuras.
Sownra Bbsm. — ^Where the ground is light and movable, roots will never form ; it is therefore necessaiy, before sowing seeds, to give a degree of solidly and firmness to the soil, by beating it down with the back of the spade, or pressing it with a flower- aancer, so that th^ mi^ become firmly imbedded. Thus, when grass seeds are sown on lawns, th^y are commonly rolled in, for the purpose of fixing them. The next point to be attended to is to cover the seeds lightly, but sufficiently, so as to exclude light, which impedes the progress of vegetation without depriving them of the influence exer- cised by air. Moistore and warmth are also essential, and there is more of all these qualities near the surfhoe of the ground than flsur beneath it. When a seed is put into the ground, it is the heat and moisture which cause it to swell. The skin then breaks and peels oflT, when two shoots issue, one of which ascends to produce the stem, leaves, and flruit, while the other grows downwards and forms the root Some seeds will germinate more easify than others ; thus, mustard and cress may bo raised for the table upon wet flannel placed in a saucer, as the plant will live for a short time upon the nourishment contained in the seed.
Bulbs urn Tvbbbs diffier firom seeds in continuing to exist during the whole life of the plant, while seeds soon wither away and disappear. Like seeds, bulbs should be fixed flrmly in the ground, for they also require the influence of warmth, air, and mois- tore to make them vegetate. In planting tnnicated bulbs, sudi as hyacinths, where tlie roots descend perpendicularly to a great depth, it is necessary that the earth be previously deeply pulverised, so that the young roots may eaaily penetrate into it. Bulbs are also peculiar in producing only a limited number of leaves, and if any of these are destroyed before thi^ are fiiilly grown, or cut off before th^ begin to decay,
in GABDBMINa.
the bulb is u^Jnred to nxoh an extant m eiHier to produoe no flowers the fotlowmg MMon or yery few and inflsrior ones. Oara aboold therefore be taken to keep all the leaves axiix\jared, and ItUly exposed to the son and air. The balb is always improved t^ preventing the flowers from prodooing seeds. Bulbs should be taken up aa soon as the leaves have decayed, and kept in a dry room omtil the planting season in antosm.
PaorAOATtoir bt Dnnsxov. — ^Besides raising t^ seeds, plants are propagated bj divi- sion, which is of two kinds— -vis., those which form roots for themselves in the groond, taoh. as suckers, layers, and ontttngs ; and those which are rooted in another plant of the same species, as in grafting, budding, and inarching.
Nearly all plants which send out strong, straight, underground stems, such as the rose, the lilac, the raspbeny, etc., produce tudktn or budt, which, shooting firom one of these stems, form fibrous roots of thdr own, and become distinct from the paxeafe tree. A smaU degree of care, therefore, is all that is requisite in separating the young plant and placing it in new soiL Occasionally, when the parent is strong, a povtion of the underground stem, horn which the sucker has sprung, is cut off with the young plant ; but when this is not the case, it is usual on the renK>val of a sucker to cut in its head to prevent too great an evaporation from the leaves. Strawberries, and other plants, throw out runnen, or long shoots springing from the collar of the plant, which runners throw out roots at their joints. Theee only require to be separated from the parent and planted in good soiL C^ffkeU are young bulbs, which form on the root of the old one, and only require breaking off and siting in rich Ught soil to produce new plants.
Lasers difibr very little from runners, being so called when art has been emplayad to make the plant throw out roots when it would not have done so of itself. Some plants have a tendency to throw out roots wherever a Joint of the shoot oomes into oontacA with the moist soil, and these only require pegging down to make them form separsie plants. There are various modes of layering. The common method is to select a shoot on a growing plant, as near the root as possible, and having out it half through make a slit in an upward direction : then place a bit of twig between the divided parts and peg down the shoot, buxying the joint in the ground. This wiU stop the piugieeii of the returning sap, which, accumulating at the joint, will cause it to throw out sepa- rate roots, and so convert the shoot into a new plant that may be divided Ihnn the parent and transplanted. Sometimes the branch is wounded Instead of being cot half through, either by carefolly removing a ring of bark below the joint, twisting a wix« round the shoot so as to pinch it in, or pwHsing any sharp instrument several timea successively through the branch, so as eflbctnaDy to interrupt the returning sap wtthoaik preventing the passage of the sap that is ascending : and any of these methods will mswer the purpose. By taking several of the lower shoots, a number of layers m^ be made at the same time from one plant without causing it any injury. The fi^^^Mxr* mode of layering is generally applied to camelUas, orange trees, and many other planfta. This consists in wounding a branch by peeling off a rind of bark, and proeoriag a flower-pot in which some moss is placed at the bottom, filled up with moist earth, aad open on one side so as to admit the branch, which should be supported in its place bgr
GABOSNINO. iJ8
four little atiolai tied to the pot with etrixig. A piece of wood or brick most be placed iDAide the pot, before the open part, to keep the earth from fkUiag out. Thie operation may bo performed with leaa trouble by using a pieco of lead instead of a flower-pot. The earth in which the branch is placed should be very moist, and will require frequent remoistening if the season be dry. As soon as the layer is thought to have taken root, a deep notch should be made in the branch below the i)ot. It may afterwards be divided, and the young plant transferred to any part of the open ground. By this meUiod, a young tree will produce flowers and fhiit at a veiy small sise.
The best seasons for making layers of pinks, carnations, pompones, chxysanthemums, etc., is during the months of Februaxy and March, before the sap rises ; or in July, after the summer supply of ascending sap has already risen.
Cifttktg§. — ^Nearly all plants which produce shoots may be propagated hy cuttings, although some will not so readily take root as others. As a general rule, all soft* wooded plants which have an abundance of sap— such as geraniums, verbenas, fhchsias, etc. — are muc^ easier to strike than dry, hard-wooded plants. The shoot for putting into the ground should be out off as evenly as possible, just below where the young wood is united to that of older growth, leaving a small portion of the latter attached. It should then be placed in sand, and covered with a bell-glass. Cuttings should be taken from thoee branches which grow nearest the ground, and are preferable, if of moderate growth, with leaf-buds, not flower-buds, upon them. Those which are diffl- oolt to strike are sometimes plunged in a hotbed, that the bottom-heat aflbrded may ■timnlatie them to throw out roots. Heath-Uke plants are among the most difficult to propagate by cuttings, and require especial care. Others, such as the willow, the vine, and the currant, grow so easily that they will throw out roots ih>m whatever part may be put into the ground without any preparation.
Outtiings of gnenhonse plants succeed best when put thickly into pots, and if well watered at first, and covered with a close glass so as to retain the moisture, th^ will seldom require watering afterwards. Those, however, which strike readily, may be put in the qpen ground and in oomjnon soil without covering.
PipiMffg are cuttings ef pinks and carnations : so-called, owing to these plants having Jointed, tubular stems, and when prepared for putting into the ground th^ are pulled asunder with the fingers, instead of cutting them with a kniHs. The time for performing this operation is in autumn, when a shoot should be taken that has near^ done growing, holding tiie root-end in one hand, and with the other pulling the upper pari above a pair of leaves, so as to divide it at the socket formed by the axils of the leavea, when tbe end of the shoot pulled oiT resembles a tube or pipe. Some persons out off the tips of the leaves of pipings, but they succeed equally well without this. They must be inserted in fine sand, and covered with a hand-glass.
JSudding is the art of uniting a bud which has been taken from one plant to another plant which has a root, so that it may grow with it and become a part of the same tree. Budding is principally employed in propagating woody plants, especially select species of roses. The best time fbr performing this operation is in August, when a shoot of the same year'a wood should be cut off, and incisions made above and beneath a bud.
440 GABDSmKO.
cm both sides, longitudinally and across, so that the bad, when removed, Is attaehad to an oblong piece of wood pointed at its extremity. The wood mnst then be careftillj separated, so as to leave the bark with the bud attached ; and if this is aasompliahed without injozy to the bad, the operation will be saooessftd. Corresponding slits, longi- tadinal and across, are then made in a shoot of the stock, near the fork of a branch, aad the bark is opened on both sides of the slit with the handle of the budding-knife, whidi is made flat and thin for the parpose. The piece of bark to which the bad is attaehad is then filled in, and the bark of the stock dosed over it. The whole sncceas of thia operation depends upon the exactness and nicety with which it is performed, as it will not be likely to take unless the inner bazk of the bad fits quite closely te the wood of the stock. When this is accomplished, the two parts are bound together with atripa of bast matting, which should be tied with bows aad ends, so as to be looaened when the bud begins to grow without disturbing its position. The ligature should be sufibred to remain until the bud is firmly tmited with the stock. A plant can only be budded on another plant of the same nature as itself, whidi puts forth its leaves and flowers at a corresponding time of the year. Thus, when used for fknit-trees, a peaeh or apricot may be budded on a plum, as both are stone fruits ; but it wouM be useless to attempt to bud them on another order, such as an apple or a pear. As soon as the young shoot begins to grow, the branches of the stock are generally shortened, so as tc throw the whole vigour of the tree into the bud. There are several different kinds of budding, the principles of which are, however, precisely the same. It is better that the operation be performed in moist or cloudy weather, not earlier than the latter end of July, or later than the beginning of September. The budding-knife diould have a short blade, curving outwards, as being less liable to ii^ure the wood of the plant when making the incisions.
Qrafting difn^rs from budding in its being the transfer of a shoot with several bods and leaves on it, from one tree to another, instead of only a single bud. The plant on which another species is to be grafted is called the stock, and the shoot about to be tmited to it the scion. This operation is generally limited to woody plants, and, as in budding, it is necessary that both should be of the same nature, if not of the sanie fiunUy. The stock should be a flrmly-rooted plant, with a stem rather exceeding in diameter that of the scion, which may be a shoot of the growth of one or two yeara. There are many uses in grafting : one of which is to strengthen a weak species by joining it to one of vigorous growth, by which means its beauty of appeuanoe will be greatly enhanced. Strong plants are sometimes grafted on slow-growing stocks for the parpose of prodacing dwarf plants, and specimens of large trees. Camellias can be easily grafted on one another, and by this means a beautiftil varied of colours is some* times seen on one tree. Grafting is also of great advant^e in the propagation of fruiU trees, which are more readily increased by this method than by any otho*, as yoon^ shoots of seedling plants grafted on a strong stock will produce firuit much sooner than when left to grow on their own roots. There are various modes of grafting ; bat we shall describe onty those most commonly onplqyed.
Timgua QrtfJHi^ possesses the advantages of not requiring the stotik aad tike aoioii
QABDBMIMa. 441
to be of the aaine lise. It is perfonned bj onttiag both Che adon and the etook in a sloping diiectioii, bo aa to fit each other. A alit being made in the stock, a tongoe, or proQeeting part formed in the soion, is fitted into it The head of the stock is then cut off in an oblique direction, and wlantiTig npwanls from the part cut to recdre the scion, and the two are tied round with a strip of bast-mat, or closely wrapped in moss covered with grafting-elaj. This is the method of grafting frnit-treee practised in nurseries.
Merbaeeoma Qrt^fUitg is generallj need for pane and fir treea. A young shoot which is sofBciently tender to break easily between the flngera, is prepared by stripping off the leaves at its extremity and catting it into the shape of a wedge. The shoot of the stock for about two inches should then be taken off, all the leaves for about two inches ftuther being removed, leaving only one leaf on each side close to the top. Between these a slip is made with a fine knife in the shoot, into which slit the scion is inserted ; the parts are then bound together with a piece of thin woollen doth, and protected Ihun inn and rain by a cone of paper placed over them.
In Cl^ Qrc^tmg the sdon is cut at its extremity into the shape of a wedge, and inserted in a cleft or notch made in the stock to reodve it. The line of junction is then covered with grafting-wax. This method is veiy useftd in grafting the tubers of herbaceous peonies with sdons of the tree peony, which succeed much better than cuttings, and will flower the following spring. Choice dahlias may also be thus grafted on the tubers of etrong common sorts.
Jnarthino is the most simple and natural of all ways of grafting. You may have observed, in walking through a wood or shrubbery, that the branches of two difihrent trees have become united. This has been first occadoned by one branch lying across another, until by aome aoddei^t the bark of both has become wounded, and the ix\jured parts being afterwards undisturbed, have adhered and grown together. Inarching, as usually practised, oonsisti in bending a branch, which is also partly out through, and inserting the bed thus formed into a slit made downwanis in the stock to recdve it. The parts are fitted neatly to one another, and are then bound together as in ordinary grafting. The inarrhed plant wlU be ready to be separated from the parent in five or aix months, when the head of the stock, if previously left on, may be cut away and the plant removed, as the union will then be complete. This mode of propagation is gen^ rally practised in spring with camellias and magnolias.
(7n|/Kii9-«lair consists of three parts of any stiff clay to one of horse-dung, free from litter, and a little out hay, well mixed together. The mass is then watered, and well beaten up several timea a-day for about a week, till the ingredients are thoroughly mixed, when the clay will be ready for use. A superior kind of grafting-clay is made of half a pound of pitch and half a pound of yellow wax, mixed with one pound of cow- dung. Orafting-wax, which is occadonally used instead of clay, is made of equal parts of rosin, turpentine, and beea'-wax, with a little tallow, melted together and well mixed. The use of Oraftang-day is to cover the surlbces of the plants at their pointa of union, •o as to prevent their becoming too dry ; in whidi case they would shrink, and the operation be unsncceasftd. The day is applied by being spread on strips of cotton, •ad ftMtened to the tree with a length of bast-mat.
448 OAHDBNINO.
Ii often neoeiMiyin a gaxden, both to remore trees and ahrnbe from the noiaery to tlie plmoe where they are intended to remain, or in the oeae of eeeda whidk have sprang up too thickly, and require thinning. The points to be Mlmilfil to are, to be oareftil not to iqjnre the roots, to fix the plant firmly in its new situation, shading it from the son, which is necessary to prerent too great an erapon^ lion from the leavea, and watering, that the plant may have an abundance of ttoorishment, which will do mnoh towards remedying any iiyuzy it may have sustained in removal.
Borne plants, such as balsams, are fanproved by transplanting ; others, snob as hyacinths, do not bear it well, unless particular care is taken in the opera- tion ; and all tap-rooted plants, like the carrot, are peculiarly unfitted for it. When, however, it is necessary to remove them, it should be into very Ught soU ; a hole, half-filled with mud, being made, the plant should be placed in it and shaken, so that tiie mud may reach all ita roots : the hole may then be filled up, and the plant shaded frx>m the sun. When trees or shrubs are taken up for the purpose of being removed to a distance, their roots should be wrapped in wet moss, encloeed in an outer covering of *"'*t**ic > when nuMS cannat be procured, a portion of very wet soil must be left with the roots. It is of great import ance in transplanthkg to preserve the roots in a flexible state, and fbr this reason, care is taken to keep them moist. Annexed is a cut of the best form of trowel used In tmaa- planting fiower»roots andwnall plants.
Water is of almost equal importance to soil in the cultivation of planta, for thej could no more exist without the one than without the other. The quantity whidh should be given varies according to the season of the yeer, more being required in spring, when the sap is beginning to move, and in summer, during the season of flowering, than in autumn or winter. It depends, also, in a grsat measure, upon the nature of the plant, all those which have large broad leaves requiring nearly double the quantity given to small>leaved ones. Plants grown in the shade will also do with a smaller supply than those exposed to the fall influence of light, and a healthy fhst- growing plant requires plen^ of water. Pond-water, when it can be procured, is the best for plants, and clean spring- water the worst; the former being always im- pregnated with air. and the latter containing mineral substances more ii^arious thaa beneficial. The temperature of the water should equal that of the soil as neariy aa possible, being rather warmer than colder ; and the best way to insure this is to keep the water in an open vessel, in the same situation as the plants, ftur a few houn before it is required for use. Hot water will sometimes produce an astonlBhlng efibot in forwarding bulbs, care being taken that it is not poured on the plants, but on theeaztl& near them. Many persons, in watering, pour the water close down to the stem or oollar of the plant. This is very iz^ozious, except in the case of vegetables, the roots of whidh are abort and never very for ih>m the stem. Boots commonly consist of two parts — the main roots, by which the plant is firmly embedded ia the soil, and the flbrona
GABDSNINa.
441
TOOtB, which sapply il with food; fbrthit purpose thioj are AvniBbed at their extremittee with a xuimber of little poree» exactly of the natore oX a sponge. Theee esqpand to imbibe the moiatore on its approach ; and then atmtnti&ag, it is forced into the roots, and thence oireolated throogh the stem and branches, timing into sap in the leaves. In sommer, plants should be watered in the evening ; in spring and antmnn, the morn- ing is the best time ; and in winter, they shoold have a very little ; when necessary, in the middle of the day. The leaves of plants should not be watered while the son is upon them, as it will generally caoae disflgnremant by covering them with nomerons brown spots. It will not, however, ixyore the plants which should not be solTered to become too dry.
LXSV 01 SASILT-BAI8n> AITVUJlLS.
In the following list the seeds fbr the flowers marked with an asterlsik may be sown towards the latter end of August, or the begixming of September, to stand the winter. If the winter be not veiy severe, thqr wUl flower earlier and be stronger than seeds sown in the spring. First is given the common name of the flower, then its colour, and last its period of blossoming t— >
China Asters, various, July to Sept. Prince's Feather, crimson, June to Sept. Love Lies Bleeding, crimson, June to Sept. Sweet Sultan, lilac, July to Oct. Yellow Sultan, yellow, July to Oct. Oom-flower, blue, various, Jime to Sept. Garden Ohxysanthemum, yellow and
white, July to Oct. Pretty CUtfUa, reddish-pink. May to Oct. Convolvulus, blue and white. May to Oct. Collinsia,* bhie and white, May to Oct. Isuge-flowered ditto, blue, May to Oct. Dwarf Bindweed, various, June to Oct. Tall ditto, blue, June to Oct. Coreopsis, yellow and blood, July to Oct. Bocket Larkspur, various, July to Oct. Clammy Entooa,* blue, June to Oct. Three-coloured Oilia,* lilac, purple, white.
May to Oct. Milfoil-leaved ditto,* puxple. May to Oct Headed ditto, blue, May to Oct. Pretty Oodetia, pink, May to Sept. Blegant Gypeophila, white and pink. May
to Sept. Aflrican Hibiscus, white and purple, July
to Sept. Gudytofti variouB, Ju]|y to Sept.
Ameaua«likey anlftisaia, blue, July to Sept. CaUfomianLaathenia, yellow. May to Sept. Sweet Pea, various, May to Oct. Androsace-like Leptoaiphon, various. May
to Oct. Cluster-flowered ditto, purple, May to Oct. T.<T«a^n».ti— ^ yellow and white. May to Oct. Lupin, blue and white. May to Sept. Laj^Boae ditto, rose, June to Sept. Yellow ditto, yellow, June to Sept. Large-flowered Malope, crimson, June to
Sept. Ten-week Stock, varioua, June to Sept. Showy Nemophila,* blue. May to Sept. Speckled ditto, white and spotted. May to
Sept. TwD-ftced Bvening Primroee, purple and
primrose. May to Sept. Bed and White ditto, May to Sept. Four-winged ditto, white, June to Sept. P0PP7f various, June. Califomian Platystemon, yellow, May. Mignonette, straw-coloured, aU the year. Schisanthua, lilac-purple, June. Groundsel, purple, June. French Marigold, striped, yellow.red, July. Alrioan dittOt yellow-orange» July.
^^ OABDBiaNCI.
vKwaa, nunmre, aitd rsoncnov ov wujnB. Prumng is chiefly used for removixig broken and unsightly bnmohes from arnft> mental trees and ahmbe ; to alter the form of a tree, or to make it prodnoe more flowen and frnit^ by thinning oat weak and crowded shoots ; also, in transplanting, for proportioning the head to the roots. When trees are intended for timber, the branches should be cut oiT while th^ are quite yoong, so that the knots may the wood as little as possible ; while those required for screens should be shortenfid at their extremities, to make them throw out an additional supply of short branches. Tte pmning must, however, depend upon the form the tree is desired to take, to groi^i advantageously with others in the same situation.
In the pruning of firuit-trees moderation must espedally be attended to, for if carried too for in generally ends by destroying. Sometimes a tree is apt to produce what axe called water-shoots, which are, in appearance, strong-growing branches issuing from the main trunk, but these bear neither flowers nor tnm t They should, therefore, never be sufibred to remain, unless the tree eeem exhausted by too much bearing or be deficient in wood, in which case they would greatly add to its strength by the quantity of rich sap sent down from the leaves. The time for pruning is either early in spring or at the * commencement of winter, when the sap is not in motion. The operator should be supplied with pruning-shears which have a sliding-joint, so aa to make what is called a draw-cut, as it is neoessaxy that the branches be cut clearly off and left unbruised by the division. The cut should be made as near to a bud as is possible without injuring it, leaving about as modi wood beyond the bud as the thickness of the branch ; for if a long piece of branch be left on without any leaves it speedily becomes decayed, and will often seriously injure the tree. The cut should slope downwards from the bud, so as to be exposed to the influence of sun and air, and also to prevent water lodging in the angle.
Traiming should be regulated by a knowledge of the habits of the trees intended for the purpose, and this is especiflJly neoessaiy in the case of fruit-trees, diSbrent kinds of which vary in their manner of bearing. Thus, some, such as apples and pean, grow on short spurs projecting from the larger branches ; some only bear fhiit at the exts-emities of their shoots, and others simultaneously on all the branches. In eveiy case of training, neatness is an essential point to be attended to. Training against » wall is performed by shreds of cloth put round the Inranches and nailed to the waU. In this operation care diould be taken that the shreds are not so long as to allow the branch to become bruised by being violently shaken through wind, but yet suflioieotty long to admit of the free passage of the sap. The wall should be covered by spreading and bending the branches backwards and forwards, without crossing one npon the other ; but always exposing the fhiit-bearing branches to the sun and air, and ooca* sionally shortening the long shoots to make them throw out side branches. Flowere axe trained by tying them to stakes or wooden fhunee. Sometimes these are made in the form of a pyramid, by fixing three poles, or a pole with three legs, in the groond. and suspending hoops finm them. When covered with roses, e frame of this kind looka
GABDKNINa. 445
Twy beaatiftil. Cnimbtng BluribB am tarned roimd the piUan of a yenndah, or tied to treUifl-work, in a similar maimer, with ligafeares of bast-mat, and are yeiy omamentaL The hop>plant, with ite htrge leaves and elegant flower-bonohsa, is a free and rapid climber, and reqnirea yeiy little care to make it ran np a jMle or cross an arch. Large- leaved ivy, honeysaekle, canary-creeper, oonyolTnlos, clematis, ivy-leaved geranium. Jessamine, and passion-flower are all good climbers; bat for rapid and abundant growth they are &r exceeded by the Virginia-creeper, the wild vine of the American foreets. In this coontiy it begins to leaf early in the spring, and remains ftill of life till late in the autumn, when its leaves tarn to a warm raddy brown.
Dettroging Insects, — Of all the evils the gardener has to contend with, insects are the most difBonlt to be rid of, and occasion a vast amount of i^juzy. Birds, although frequently destroyed as depredators, do comparatively litUe damage ; for though some of them devour a portion of the fruity caterpiUais are their favourite food. Butterflies are all very destructive in the larv» state. They are so exceedingly proliflo that many which are seen fluttering abont lay thousands of eggs, and when these eggs become caterpillars they feed on nearly every diflinrent kind of tree. The caterpillars of the cabbage-butterfly are immense fleederB ; they are of a whitish-green colour, soft» and very active, leaping about in the hand when taken. The lackey caterpillars, so-called from the curious stripes with which they are covered, resembling the tags on a foot- man's shoulder, collect innmnbers, and having enveloped themselves in a web devour the leaf on which they have fixed themselves, uxd drawing to them one after another leave nothing but the veins. The eggs of the moth may be often found in winter encircling some naked twig, and adhering so firmly together that Uie entire ring may be removed without breaking. The caterpillar of the beautiful little ermine moth is very destructive, as is also that of the red-headed pigmy, which foeds on the leaves of the roee-tree, which may often be seen marked with a number of brown zig-sag lines, with a small black line running down the middle of each. But the insects most destructive to the rose, geranium, fhchsia, etc., are the aphides, those little green flies that cover the buds and young shoots in myriads. They are difficult to destroy ; but a great many shoots. may be nearly cleared by dipping them in a basin of water, and skimming off the flies as they appear on the top. Lime>water, made with just as much lime as the water will hold in solution, and tobacco-water, made by patting half a pound of the best tobacco to a gallon of boiling water, are good remedies. These should be allowed to cool, when the shoots should be dipped in them, and after remaining a few seconds, well washed in dean water. Another method frequently employed to destroy diffbrent kinds of noxious insects is fumigating them with tobacco, t^ which means thi^y become stapifled and lUl fh>m the branchee, when they can be gathered up and destroyed. There are several kinds of fomigating-bellowB made for the purpose, but the bast way is to flll asmall brsas famigator with loose tobacco, which, when lighted, should be screwed on one of the patent blowers, and the ftames soon spread through the greenhouse or amongst the plants.
Bnails and slugs do much iiyuiy to vegetation, and are very difficult to get rid of. The beat method of entrapping them is to plaoe aUoes of raw potatoes at night where
M aABDBHtNG.
Oitj HUM ■bmind. I^jag * Ow flomr-pcita tuwr U hand, lolo wUoh Ihcf wll] gowrdlr crawl befbni iha dew Is off Ui* Imvm Is the nanlng. Scanli (bonid b« made far nullf ftDd t\ag* lnw1ntni]iKnigitlT7uid boi-adgingi, »ha«mui7will bs dl*o(>vared In t, torpid UUs. Dntroying tban >t Uila aiuaii will ba oT iddMonsl BdTmiitege ia pnTenldiig the prodncllai) of nomerotu tgf, wUch wooid b* laid fa ttw IblkiwliigBiRiog.
The ladj-'hinl ahonld be ipand hi tba gvoenl deatrnottOD of iOMCta, aa It does graod teniM U a giudcm by destnjing lbs larta at Iha apbla, nr UUIe grean-Bj, npoa whlA llUiea, botblDltdarTaaadllapgrfMtitale.
ProUctiHe Jram Fntit. — Dniing early ipiiiiK planU raqnitetoba wannly eotoad on the up, and alio orar tbe rgota and eolUii and If Ibit ii attendad lo lliej will ■lutals DO injnry rrom IVoft, even Uungh the ddaa be 1<A srpowd. CatneUiaa, and moat ot tbe balf-hardy Inea and ibmba, may be proMcUd by laying atmr or dead leavea over the nuU to tba depth of two or tbne tncbea, as troit nercr psaaMMs ID' IdIo tbogTtnmd'
Wooden hamea, oorarad wUb oDsd paper, diObrent died glaeiM. and eea-kale poM, are oaefDI fbr email planle i wbllo llie larger lender Bbmba ibDald bare Foreringe at buket-woz^ made Ugbt emllgh to bo ivmoved daring One days. Covera fbnti«d of emir or plaited nubca, are alao Tai; convenient tor winter nae. Wall (mlt-tteea ai« commonly ptriteoted by mate, and Iheae ehoold have a number nf rlnga Ikatenod on tbs apper end, lo be bung on hooka driven inio ibe walL The sldee mey be accumd lo naila during wtody weather. A uoiable wooden coping ia alao naoeuaiy, made eo aa to T^et on Uie npper booka and oarer tike apace between the mat and Uie wall. Kooah- Isg oQ and bnUaing tbe bkmonii. altbongh fMqnaitly employed aa a mode of pmUD- tion, ia DoOMearily iojarioiia. A little cai* and attenllon an all that ia ivqiiiBte lo pmuiiu the garden nuinjimd during the ■evereet hcela. The more lender plosta, bowerar, will of oontae need the warm lempeiUare <tf
INDOOR 6AR0EIIIN6.
{% tn)CX)R ud Wiodow OudBniii« an among Ihs nuM dcUghtAil nuuu d •dJOfinK Oowan iD tmrnt. Tba goM point Is U uir loch hwiU u wQI Ij bflar p04-enltau«i and to rear those plants irfaloh gitnr goiokix nnaio long In blaaaom. Uaajr persona think It dinoiLlC to grow •TB in •□ inbshiiod lOom i bat with a litUa iDgannilr and paljsan, h maj b« aooompUsbed. Psrhafs the moet Msily-managed and aim kind of Indoor garden is Ihst oontained in
The Wardlsn Csaa is made of all sfaapee and Bliea. to fit the place In irbicb it is to stand ; and ferns are the plants moet nsoallj grown in tt. Fnnfl flonri&h In these asai if the; are prorided with the pinpei kind of aoU ; asd when thsr are once llt*al thar tcqnlra bnt UUle aucnidon. The Wardisn Caee when Dnt used ymt inade air- tight and wuer-liKbt. and consHinenll; the glass was soon oorered with dew. How, u to iDRin ToitdlatlaD to tlu
448 DTDOOB OABOSNING.
plants ; and whatever the form of the oaae, proTision ia made for the dniniag 13S of anpembimdant moistnre. The first thing to do is to determine on the sise and satoataon of 7onr case, which may be made either of wood or metal. When of wood, the inside should be well pitched to preserre it from decay j bat sine with metal bars for the glass is best. The soil for ferns shoold be of loam from rotted tarf. peat broken and sifted, braised sandstone and broken flower-pots, the pieces not larger than a hasel nut ; dang rolled to mould, and silTer sand. The whole should be well mixed and thoroughly saturated with water before being placed in the case. In order to preTont the soil from running out, the ventilation holes at the bottom should be covered with broken crocks, so as to keep the earth from clogging the passage of air and water. The door of the case should be made to fit close, and whenever any moisture oondenseB on the glass, the door should be opened for half an hour or so. The soil will ke^ sufficiently moist for months. The ferns may then be placed in the soil, and in a abort time you will have a huidsome little garden. Various kinds of ferns — as the maiden* hair, the atplenium, the beautiftilly variegated pteris tricolor, several kinds of lycopods, and the beautiftil metallic blue sdagineUa — ^may be grown in a Wardian Case ; but the best plan is to purchase a case already filled, of a respectable dealer, uid r^lenish it from time to time. Take care to remove all decaying leaves, and to Inep down redundant growth. A place near a window is best suited to the fern case.
K you have more ambitious views you may enclose a bay window with saahes, and fit the inside with shelves, and hanging baskets, as shown in the engraving at the head of this section, so as to have a perpetual flower garden.
oaniVABT nmooB GASDzxiKa.
For ordinary Indoor Gardening various kinds of bulb»— as hyadntha, tuUpa, crocuses, ixias, snowdrops, jonquils, ranunculi, gladioli, etc. — ^may be grown in pots and glasses in the open room. Any of the resiiectable seedsmen about Covent Garden will Aimish you with priced lists of bulbs, and all directions concerning special varieties. Flowering bulbs should be so managed as to secure a good succes- sion of blooms ; while for the window or table there have been contrived varions handsome forms of flower-baskets, filled with sine pans for holding the soil. Instead of ordinary soil, however, bulbs of various kinds may be grown in a mixture of ooooft- nut fibre and charcoal, which retains moisture for a great length of time.
Hanging baskets form a pretty ornament to a room. They loay be bought cheaply, either in wire-work, zinc, gutta-percha, or wicker-work, and sown with moneywortk pendant ftiohsias, ivy-leaved geraniums, sazifraga, or campanulas, aU of which grow readily and require but little attention.
Though most persons like to see flowers in a room, but comparatively few know exactly how to manage them so as to keep them healthy and fresh. Nothing ia so delight(U as to see plants in a window, and yet how common it is to discover them in a drooping and sickly condition, and all for the want of a little knowledge and cam In order that our readers may cultivate their indoor flowers in the best manner, we ■ulqoin a few directions as to
INDOOR GABOEMING. 4I9
Th* Memagem&nt qf Pkmt» in Windowt. — ^In buying plants of the naTiei7ina&, select each as will best snit the spaoe they an intended to fill, aToiding flowers that are too high arbnmchy, and purchasing those in bnd in preference to those in fhll bloomu Place them in tilie flower^stand or on the windowHBill in each a way that th^ correspond aa nearly as may be in height and width, and contrast well in colour. Before patting them in their places, however, cleanse the pots of all mould and dirt, and make it a role to keep them clean. Some persons pat the flower>pots in ornamental covers of paper or wicker-work, or in oater pots of ornamental potteiy $ this greatly adds to the general elegance of yoor collection.
Where ihB plants grow firom a single stem — as in fttehaias, geranioms, etc. — it is a good plan to cover the moald with tnah. green moss, which will hold a good quantity of moistare without ipjoring the plants. Never water the plants except when they really recjuire it. This yon may soon ascertain by simply patting yoor finger into the soil, when, if it feels moist, no water will be needed ; bat if the soil be dry, which will not happen more than eveiy other day in aatomn, or once a week in winter, then water the plants thoroaghly, so that the moistare sinks right through the mould. In hot weather indoor plants wiU need water every day.
Never allowplants to stand in the water ; that is, if your pots stand in saucers, take care to remove all the surplus water which runs through the soil. Never nse pump water if yoa can obtain river or rain water ; but if you can get only pump water, let it stand for two or three days in the open air previous to applying it to your flowers.
The temperature of the room in which yon place your plants should be as regular aa possible, all extremes of heat and cold being destructive to good flowers. Let the plants stand near the window on mild sunny days, but in oold cloudy weather remove them to the middle of the room. When the day is warm, open ihB window, so as to give the plants the benefit of the fk«sh air, or remove them into the garden. SCany of the hardier kinds of flowers wiU bloom well on the outer sill of the window finom ICay to November. tn sultry weather yon must shade your choicest flowers firom the direct rays of the sun, or they will get parched and their blossoms will flill ofl*. This is especially the case with the more delicate 8<nts of fhchsias and fhncy geraniums ; though the hardy plants of this kind stand a wonderlU amount of ill-usage before they cease to throw up flowers. You must constantly examine your flowers to see that their pots do not get too taW or roots. You may easily discover whether this is the case, by taming the pot upside down, when a slight tap will loosen the mould, and leave the plant and its soil in your hand in one compact mass. If you find that the roots run in irregular circles over the surftkoe of the mould, it is a sign that the pot is too smaQ, ftnd your flower must be shifted to a larger one.
It will be well occasionally to sprinkle a little water over the foliage of your plants, which should always be kept f^esh and clean. Some of the larger leaves of geramuma and other plants will want, now and then, to be cleansed of the dust which will aeoumulate about them, with a sponge or soft flannel ; or you may give them a good wetting by means of a qrringe with a fine rose>top, taking care to avoid the flowers that are in ftall bloom. Flower-buds, however, thrive well by being constantly refreahad.
INDOOB tusnxsaa.
a liquid nuimn addsd to a iiuit of wUv win b« toa^ umAiI l g Iba blooming of flonn. Thli mlzton miut, hotrarar, b* appOtA to III •oQ, KQd not to th* plant, A ^ood and wmtt ■*J™"^»"* maj be mkdA of fbor oana of immonU, two onncM of nltra. and out onno* ot brown aogmr, dlMolTOl Id ■ pii of boillog wMer. Thl« Klatlon, when eold, 1> to b« pot In • itoppend boMla, an addod to Uu water jaia cue fbr jonr plaola. In tiu proportion of ■ tea-apoodhil to gallon. GflnoiBllj, howerer, ordinary lain-water, not too cold, w21 mffloe to tec Indoor plante in good oondMon. If 7011 notion that bkaaonu fall off beftve thoj ai foil; denloped, it It a eon mark that (he plant ta lioU; and neada n pot or into the open air ; bnt If joa atUod to Ln Haroely IkO to proaper.
mignODetta ; while, if ^u an Fond of bolba. a ehoioa vaiittT "^ t>>lip*i UUea, Jonquila, hTaoinUu, leillBi, etc., mar be reaied in aBpanU pota, and tlian Mn •anfnU; and butafnllf, into that pnOr raceptaola tOr KAora'a laralian cUUimei.
AiEintmiisiniiiiAiii
i^umisisiiiitHvs.
» mind u SDT dagiM of partMttos ' In Bniope, unong tha Oneki, who mada dm of the IstUn of the
^ by tha Bomana, who, bnldM DbaiacUn lor mch nnk of rlairtn. } ,- Y latroduosd oUiaa for Sva, Bltj, tai flve bniUtied, which an nOl \^' Died ftir Dhtpun of book*, and aame othar ptupoaea, Tha com- mon ■riUuDStio, la itbloti Ihs lenAiKblo Ognna, 1, 1,3, 4, S, 0,7,
Ouna IdBo Snnpa, bj mj of Spain, from tha Anbiana, who an ■aid to hkTB noalrad it from (ha ludiiuit. It la aappoaed Co h>TB ttien Its origin &om the len ftngsn of the hand, whloh wne mode aae of in eompctalJoni, before ahlhmetio wia bKiDCht Into ba art. .
TbA Tndlattf are vary e^iart at oompntlng wUhonl pen or ink i and tha nativn of Fan, In SoDlli Africa who do all by the aitanganeat of grsina of maUe, «ice1 the Suropean, with the aid of all hia mlea ajul Implemaata for wriiiug. Bnt tha deEtarl^ of thoa* people oumot for a mament be oompered with the faata of mental aiithmetlo •ihibitert br Qeorge Bidder, the jonth wti»e portiait standi at the bead of this arUisle, who, al a nry early age, and wiUunl ediuMiini, wa* capable ot aolTing yaj Intrteale
452 ABITHlCSnGAL AHtTSEHlOTTS.
qoMtioiiB in arithmetie, without the tiM of pen» pencil, or writing implements of any Bort, but entirely in hia own mind, as correctly and qnickly as the moat expert peraon ooold in the common way. We have personally witneaaed hia abilily in fhia respect^ «Dd among many other complicated qaestiona which were pat to him, we recollect the follow- ing:— Bnppoeing the son to be 96 millions of miles flrom the earth, and that it were poeai- ble for an insect, whose pace should be 7\ inches per minute, to travel that space, bow long would it take to reach the sun ? This he mentally solved in a very short tiiae.
Several other mental arithmeticians have appeared within these few years ; "««^g the rest, Jedediah Buxton, an illiterate peasant^ who waa never taught to read orvrrite, appears to have been eminent. Several of the questions answered by this man have been recorded ; among others, we recollect the following : — ^How many times win a ooach- wheel, whose circumference is six yards, turn in going 204 miles F In thirteen minutes Buxton answered — 69,840 times. Then he was asked : — ^And, supposing sound travds at the rate of 1142 feet per second, how long will it be before the report of a cannon is heard five miles offP His answer waa— 23 seconds, 7 thirds, and 46 remain.
Zerah Oolbum, another mental calculator, was bom in the United States m 1804. When only six 3rears old, he was heard to repeat the multiplication table to him«etf ; surprised at this, his fhther asked him what IS times 97 made, and received iiistantfy the answer — 1261. Questions in multiplication, of two or three places of figures, vrere answered by Zerah with much greater rapidity than they could be solved upon paper ; and questions involving an application of this rule, as in reduction, rule of three, mmI practice, seemed to be perfectly adapted to his mind. In short, he resolved the most difficult numerical questions as if by magic. In 1812, Zerah exhibited in London. On one occasion he succeeded in raising the number 8 to the sixteenth power, and ga^ethe answer correctly in the last result ; namely, 281, 474, 976, 710, 666. He was then tried as to other numbers, consisting of one figure, all of which he raised as high as the tenth power with so much ftusility and despatch, that the person appointed to take down the result was compelled to enjoin him not to be so rapid. He was asked the square root of 106, 929, and before the number could be written down, he immediately answered 327.
In 1839, Kaster Bassle, who was only IS years of age, went through some extra- ordinary calculations at Willis's Booms, in London. Five large sheets of paper, cloaely printed, with tables of dates, specific gravities, velocities, planetaiy distances, etc, were distributed among the visitors, and every one was invited to ask him a question relatxDg to these tables, to which he received a correct answer. He could repeat long seriea of numbers, backwards and forwards, and point out the place oi any number in the aeries ; and to prove that his powers were not merely confined to the rows of numbers in the printed tables, he allowed the whole company to form a long series, by contribiiting each two or three digits in the order in which th^ sat, and then, alter studying this series for a fiBW minutes to commit it to memory, he repeated it entire, both backwards and forwards, from the beginning to the end. These performances are believed not to have been the result of sny natural powers of memoiy, but of a method acquirable by any i>erson in the course of lessons.
In 1 841, among the bqys employed for calculation on the Ordnance Survey of Irtfaad,
ABITHMBnOAL AMTTBIMBNTS. 453
wu one Alexander Gwin, a natiye of Deny, eight ywn old, who had got by rote the fraotional logwithma ttom. I to 1000, which he repeated in regular rotation, or other- wiae. Hia rapidity and correctneae in caloolatiiig diatanoea were extraordinaxy. He conld, in leaathan oneminote, make a return inacrea, rooda, perchea, etc., of any qoan- tity of land, by giving him the aonreyor'a chained diatancea ; while the moat practiaed arithmetician would certainly take nearly an hour to acoompliah the aame.
Many other inatanoea of extraordinaiy powera of mental calculation might be adduced, but our apaoe wama ua that we mnat quit the aubject. We will, therefore, at onee pre- oeed to lay before our young readera aome ezamplea of arithmetical amuaementa, in the practioe of which thqr will find ample aoope for exerciaing their own montal powen.
XO TILL AST VinCBXB TKOVQWt Of.
Beaire any peraon to think of a number, aay a certain number of ahillinga ; tell him to borrow that anm of aome one in the company, and add the number borrowed to the Mn«"nfc thought of. It will hcrc be proper to name the peraon who lenda him the ahil- linga, and to beg the one who makea the calculation to do it with great care, aa he may readily fldl into an error, eapecially the flrat time. Then, aay to the peraon — " I do not lend you, but give you 10, add them to the former aum." Continue in thia manner : — " Gire the half to the poor, and retain in your memory the other half." ^len add : — "Return to the gentleman, or lady, what you borrowed, and remember that the aum lent you waa exactly equal to the number thought of." Aak the peraon if he knowa exactly what remaina ; he will anawer " Yea." Tou muat then aay — " And I know, alao, the number that remaina i it ia equal to what I am going to conceal in my hand." Put into oneof your handa five pieoea of money, and deeire the peraon to tell how many yon haTe got. He will anawer five ; upon which apeaa, your hand, and ahow him the flre pieoea. Yon may then aay — " I well knew that your reault waa flye; butifyouhad thought of a yexy large number, for example, two or three milliona, the reault would haye been much greater, but mj hand would not haye held a number of pieoea equal to the remainder." The person then auppoeing that the reault of the calculation muat be difltarent, according to the diilbrence of the number thought of, will imagine that it ia neoeaaaxy to know the laatnnmber in order to gueaa the reault: but thia idea ia fklae ; for, in the oaae which we have here auppoaed, whateyer be the number thought of, the remainder muat alwayabe flye. The reaaon of thia ia aafollowa : — ^Theaum, the half of which iagiyen to the poor, ia nothing elae than twice the number thought of, plua 10 ; and when the poor haye re- oeiyed their part, there remaina only the number thought of, plua flye ; but the number thought of ia cut off when the aum borrowed ia returned, and, oonaequently, there remain <mly flye.
It may be hence aeen that the reault may be eaaily known, aince it will be the half of thennmbergiyenin the third part of the operation; for example, whateyer be the num- ber thought of, the remainder will be 30 or 26, according aa 72 or 60 haye been giyen. If thia trick be performed aeyeral timea aucceaaiyely, thennntiber giyen in the third part at the operation muat be alwayadiflteent ; for if the result were aeyeral timea theaame, the deception might be diaooyored. When the flye flnt parti of the oaloolation for ob-
454 ABITmOBTIGAL AMTT8XMXNTB.
ntitm, to render it more complex, by saying, for example : — '* Doable the remainder, de> doot two, add three, take the fomrth port," etc. ; and the diiftoent etepe of the rnlmlntfam may be kept in mind, inordor to know how much the flntieenlt has been inereaeed or diminished. This irregular process never fldls to oonfonnd those who attempt to fbUow it.
A Second Method, — ^Bid the person take 1 from the nnmber thought of, asid tben double the remainder j desire him to take 1 from this double, and to add to it the nnxn- ber thought of; in the last place, ask him the nnmber arising from this addition, and, if yon add 8 to it, the third of the sum will be the nmnber thought of. The appliimtkm of this role is so ea^, that it is needless to illustrate it by an example.
A Third Method. — ^Desire the person to add 1 to the triple of the nmnber thongbt of, asid to multiply the snm l^ 3 ; then bid him add to this product the nnmber tfaonght d, and the resnlt wHl be a sum, from which, if 8 be subtracted, the remainder will be ten times of the number required ; and if the cipher on the right be cut off from thexemnin- der, the other figure will indicate the number sought.
Example : — ^Let the number thought of be 6, the triple of whion is 18 ; and if 1 be added, it makes 19 j the triple of this last number is 67, and if 6 be added, it makes 63, from which, if 8 be subtracted, the remainder will be 90 ; now, if the cipher on the right be cut ofl^ the remaining figure, 6, will be the number required.
A Fourth Method. — ^Bid the person multiply the number thought of by itself; then desire him to add 1 to the number thought of, and to multiply it also by itself; in the last place, ask him to tell the diflbrence of these two products, which win oer> tainly be an odd number, and the least half of it will be the number required. Let the number thought of, for example, be 10, which, multiplied by itself, give 100 ; in the next place, 10 increased by 1 is 11, which, multiplied by itself, makes 121 ; and tlie diffcr- ence of these two squares is 21, the least half of which, being 10, is the number thoogbt of. This operation might be yariedby desiring the person to multiply the second num- ber by itself, after ithas been diminished by 1. In this case, the number thought of win be equal to the greater half of the diflbrence of the two squares. Thus, in the preceding example, the square of the number thought of is 100, and that of the same number leaa 1, is 8 1 j the diiftrenoe of these is 1 0 ; the greater half of which, or 1 0, is the number thonght of .
TO TXLL TWO OX VOBX ITUMBXBS TKOVOXT OW.
It one or more of the numbers thought of be greater than 9, we must distingniah two cases; that in whi6h the number of the numbers thought of is odd, and that in witfeb it is even.
In the first case, ask the sum of the first and second, of the second and third, the third and fourth, and so on to the last, and then the sum of the first and the last. Having written down all these sums in order, add together all those, the places of whioh aie odd, as the first, the third, the fifth, etc. ; make another sum of all those, the plaoesof wtdtii are even, as the second, the fourth, the sixth, etc., subtract this sum from the fonner, and the remainder wiU be the double of the first number. Let us suppose, for fnrampae. that the five foUowing nnmbert are thought of, 8, 7, 18, 17, SO, whidi, when added two
ABITHiaETICAL AKITSBiaENTS. 455
•adfeifoaaalxyTe, giTOlO, 20, 80, 87,23: thesnmof theflnt|thJrd,uidflftti, is 68, and thifeof th« aeoond and fourth is 67 ; if 67 be Babtnctedfrom 68, the Temaiodsr, 6, will be the doable of theftnt number, 8. Now, if 8 be taken from 10, the flrstof the soma, the remainder, 7, will be the aeoond nomber, and Iqrprooeeding in thia manner we may find an thereat
In the aeeond oaae, that ia to say, if the number of the numbera thought of be eren, youmnat aak and write down, aa above, the anm of the first and the aeoond, that of the aeoond and third, and BO on, aa before ; bat» inateadof the aum of the fliat and the laat, you muat take that of the aeoond and laat ; then add together thoae which stand in the even plaoea, and fonn them into anew amn apart ; add alao thoae in the odd placea, the fliat excepted, andaabtraotthia aom from the former, the remainder will be the doable of the aeoond number ; and if the abcond number, thoa found, be Babtractedfix>m the sum of the flrat and aeoond, you will have the flrat number ; if it be taken from that of the second and third, it win giye the third; and ao of thereat. Let the numbera thought of be, for efamp1a,S,7, 13, 17 { the auma formed aa abore are 10, 20, 80, 24, the aum of the second and fourth ia 44, ttom which, if 80, the third, be subtracted, the remafaidarwiU be 14, the double of 7, the aeoond number. The flrat, therefore, ia 8, the third 18, and the fourth 17.
When each of the numbera thought of doea not exceed 0, they may be eaaily found in the following manner : —
Having made the person add 1 to the double of the first number thought of, desire him to mnltipty the whole by 6, and to add to the product the aeoond number. If there be a third* make him double thia first sum, and add 1 to it j after which, desire him to nmltiply the new sum by 6, and to add to it the third number. If there be a fourth, proceed in the same manner, deairing him to double the preceding sum, to add to it 1, to multiply Xny 6, to add the fourth number, andao on.
Then, aak the number aiiaing flrom the addition of the last number thought of, and if theie were two numbera, aubtract 6 from it ; if there were three, 66 ; if there were four, 666 ; and ao on, for the remainder win be compoaed of flgurea, of which the flrat on the left win be the flrat number thought of, the next the aeeond, and ao on.
Suppoae the number thought of to be 8, 4, 6 ; by adding one to 6, the double of the first, weshan have 7, which, being multiplied by 6, wiU give 86 ; if 4, the second num- ber thought of, be then added, we ahan have 89, which, doubled, gxrea 78 ; and, if we add 1, and multiply 70, the aum, Iqr 6, the reanlt wffl be 806. In the laat place, if we add 6, the number thought o^ the aum win be 401 j and if 66 be deducted from it, we ahan have, for remainder, 846, the figuxea of which, 8, 4, 6, indicate in order the three numbers thought of.
rax voxxT eAMX.
A peraon having in one hand a piece of gold, and in the other a piece of aflver, you may teU In which hand he haa the gold, and in which the ailver, by the following method : — Some value, represented by an even number, such as 6, must be assigrted to the golds and a value repi^esented hy an odd number, such aa 8, mnatbe assigned to the ailver ; after which, desire the peraon tomultipty the number in the zdght hand, l^aqy evennumberwhalew, Baeihaa2j andthattn the left by an odA number, aa 8 j then bid
466 AaiTHMETICAL AHUSBMENTS.
hJm ftdd together the two prodnoti, and if the whole Bmn be odd, the gold' will be intiae right hand, aad the eUrer in the left ; if the ram be even, the oonttarj will be the oaee.
To oonoeal the aitifloe better, it will be rai&cient to aek whether the torn of the two products can be haLved without a remainder.; for in that eaae the total will be even, and in the contrary oaee odd.
It magr be readily leen, that the pieces, instead of being in the two hands of the same person, may be supposed to be in the hands of two persona, one of whom has the even number, or piece of gold, and the other the odd number, or piece of ailyer. The same operations may then be performed in regard to these two persons, as are performed in regard to the two hands of the same person, calling the one jiriYately the rights and the other the left.
raS OAJfS Of THX mxHO.
This game is an application of one of the methods employed to teU sereral nnmben thought of, and ought to be performed in a company not exceeding nine, in order thai it may be less complex. Desire any one of the company to take a ring, and put it on any joint of whatcTer finger he may think proper. The question then is, to tell what person has the ring, and on what hand, what finger, and on what joint.
For this purpose, you must call the first person 1, the second 2, the third 3, and so on. You must also denote the ten fingers oi the two hands by the foUowxng nunoben of the natural progression, 1, 2, 3, 4, S, etc., beginning at the thumb of the tight hand* and ending at that of the left, that this order of the number of the finger may, at the same time, indioate the hand. In the last place, the joints must be denoted by 1, 2, 3, beginning at the points of the fingers.
To render the solution of this problem more explicit, let us suppose that the fouth person in the company has the ring on the sixth finger, that is to say, on the little finger of the left hand, and on the second joint of that fllnger.
Desire some one to double the number expressing the person, which, in this case, will giro 8 i bid him add 6 to this double, and multiply the sum by five, which will make 66 ; then tell him to add to this product the number denoting the finger, that is to say, 6, by which means you wHl haye 71 ; and, in the last place, desire him to multiply the last number by 10, and to add to the product the number of the joint, 2 ; the last result will be 7 12 ; if tram this number you deduct 260, the remainder will be 462 ; the first figure at which, on the left, will denote the person ; the next, the finger, and, nnneri qnent]y, the hand ; and the last, the joint.
It must here be observed, that when the last result contains a cipher, which would
have happened in the present example had the number of the figure been 10, you must
privately subtract i^m the figure preceding the cipher, and assign the value of 10 to
the cipher itself.
nn Qiia ov thx bao.
To let a person select several numbers out of abag, and to tell him the number which shall exactly divide the sum of those he has chosen : — ^Provide a small bag, divided into two parts, into one of which put several tickets, numbered 6, 0, 16, 36, 63, 120, 213, 309, etc, and in the other part put as many other tickets, surkedKo. 3 only. Diswahandftil
ABTFEiamOAL AMU8BHENTS. 457
of tiokeU from the first ptai, and after allowing them to the oompany, pot them into the bag again, and hftvmg opened it a aeoond time, desire any one to take oat ae many tickets as he thinks proper ; when he has done that, you open privately the other part of the bag, and tell him to take out of it one taCket only. Ton may safely prononnoe that the ticket shall contain the nnmber by which the amount of the other numbers is divisible ; for, ss each of these numbers can be multiplied by 3, their sum total mnst, evidently, be divisible by that nnmber. An ingenious mind may easily diversify this esurcise, by marking the tickets in one part of the bag with any numbers that are divisible by 0 only, the properties of both 9 and 3 being the same ; and it should never be exhibited to the same company twice without being varied.
nn cMWAxa oamx.
Two persons agree to take, alternately, numbers less than a given number, for ex- ample, 11, and to add them together till one of them has reached a certain sum, such as 100. By what meanscan one of them inftdlibly attain to that number before the other ?
The whole artlilce in this consists in immediately making choice of the numbers 1, 12, 23, 34, and so on, or of a series which continually increases by 11, up to 100. Let ns suppose that the flist person, who knows the game, makes choice of 1 ; it is evident that his adversary, as he must count less than 11, can at most reach 11, by adding 10 to it. Tbeflrst will thentakel, which will make 12; and whatever number the second may add the first will certainly win, provided hecontinnally add the number which forms the complement of that of his adversary to 11 ; that is to say, if the latter take 8, he must take 3 ; if 0, he mnst take 2 ; and so on. By following this method he will in- (Ulibly attain to 80 ; and it wHl then be impossible for the seopnd to prevent him firom getting first to 100; for whatever number the second takes he can attain only to 90; after which the first may say — " and 1 makes 100." If the second take 1 after 89, it would make 90, and his adversary would ihiish by sayhig — " and 10 make 100." Between two persons who are equally aegnainted with the game, he who begins mnst necessarily win.
If your opponent have no knowledge of numbers, you may take any other number first, under 10, provided you subsequently take care to secure one of the last terms, 66, 67, 78, etc. ; or you may even let him begin, if you take care afterward to secure one of these numbers.
This exerdse may be performed with other numbers ; bat» in order to succeed, you mnst divide the number to be attained by a number which is a unit greater than what you can take each time, and the remainder will then be the nnmber you must first take. Suppose, for example, the number to be attained be 62, and that yon are never to add more than 6; then, dividing 62 hy 7, the remainder, which is 3, will be the number which you must first take ; and whenever your opponent adds a number yon must add as much to it as will make it equal to 7, the nnmber by which you divided, and so in continuation.
ODD OB XVIV.
Bvery odd number multiplied Iqr an odd number produce* an odd number; every odd nnmber multiplied by an even nnmber prodncee an evennumber i and every even num-
45e ABITHMBnOAL AMUBBHEKTB.
ber nmltipUed bgr an eran number alio prodooM an eren nmnber. Bo, again, an mrea. nmnbar added to an even number, and an odd nomber added to an odd nmnber, prodnee an eran number; wbile an odd and eran nmnber added together pvodnoe an odd nmnber. If any one holds an odd nmnber of oomiten in one band, and an eren nmnber in Uie other, it is not diffloott to diaoover in whldi hand the odd or even nmnber ia. Deairethe ptatj to multiply the nmnber in the right hand l^an even nmnber, and that in the left hand bj an odd nmnber, then to add the two anma together, and tell yon the last flgmre of the prodnct J if it ia eren, the odd nmnber will be in the right hand; and if odd, in the left hand ; thna, anppoaing there are 6 ooonten in the right hand, and 4 in the left hand, multiply 6 by 2, and 4 Iqr 8, thna : — 5 x 8 «b 10, 4 x 8 s 12, and then adding^ 10 to 12, yon hare 10 + 12 = 22, the laat ilgnre of whieh, 2, ia even, and the odd nmnber will oonaeqoently be in the zdght hand.
nomsna ov citAnr wummmmb,
Ov Odd Nmoiaa. — ^All the odd nnmbera above 8, that can only be divided by 1, can be divided by 6, by the addition or aabtraction of a nnit For instance, IS can only be divided l^ 1 ; bntafter dednoting 1, the remalndflr can be divided l^ 6 : lior ex- ample, 5+ 1 s6} 7— IsO; 17 + Is 18; 10 — 1 s 18; 28 ^ 1 824, and ao on.
Ov NvuxB Th»ml Select any two nmnbers yon pleasOb ^ad you will find that either oneof the two, or their amount when added together, or their difibrenoe, isatvraya 8, or a nmnber divisible by 8. Thus, if the numbers axe 8 and 8, the first nmnber is 8 ; let thenumberBbel8nd2, theirsmnis 3; letthembe4and7,thediflbrenoeis 8. Again, 16 and 22, the flist number is divisible by 8 ; 17 and 26, their difRarence is divisible by 3, etc
OvNuuxB Fkn. — ^If you multiply Slqr itaelf, and the quotient again by itself, and Uie seoondquotientbyitaelf, the last figure of each quotient will always be 5. Thus, 6 x 5s 26; 26 X 26 a 626; 126 X 126 b 16,626, etc. Again, if you proceed In the same manner with the figure 0, the last figure wHl constantly be 6.
To divide any nmnber by 6, or any multiplicand of that number, bynieans of simpto addition: — ^To divide by 6, double the number given, and surk off the last figure^ whi^ win represent tenths. Thus, to divide 261 by 6 1->261 + 261 » 622, or 62 2-lOths. Again, to divide the aame number by 26, you must take four times the numberto be divided, and mark off the last two figures, which will be hundredths, thus, 261 + 861 + 261 + 861 a 1044, or 10 44-lOOths.
Ov NuMsn Nora. — ^The following remarkable properties of the number 0 are not generally known :~Thus, Ox lse;ex2Bl8, l + SsO; ex8« 27, 2 + 780; ex4e86,3+6ee;ex6s46, 4+6s0;ex6a64,6 + 4»0;»x7» 68, 6 + 8 » 0; 0 X 8 s 72, 7 + 2 » 0; 0 X 0 B 81, 8 + 1 a 0.
It vrill be aeen by the above that— 1. The component figuxea of the product nmde l^the multlpUoationofeveiy digit into the number 0, when added together, make vivx. 2. The order of these component flguree is reversed, after the aaid nmnber has been multiplied by 6. 8. The component figures of the amount of the multipliers (via. 45), when added together, make vxvb. 4. The amount of the several prodnots, or multiples of 0 (vis. 406), when divided by 0, gives, for a quotient, 46 ; that is, 4 + 6 a mx*.
ABITHlfSnOAL AlfUBKBCENTS. ICQ
It is alio obMryable, that the number of ohaDgee that may be nmg on nine bdla ia 862,880 ; which flgmea, added together, make S7 ; that is, S + 7 » vm.
ioid the quotient of S6S,880, dlTided by 9, wiU be 4M>,8aO; that i%4-fO + S-fB + 0 <s vxvi.
To add afignKn tomiffgivm nmmber, foMeft AaU rmtdtr tf divitSUe bif Nins :^~ Add the fignreB together in your mind, whldi oompoae the nnmber named; and the figure which most be added to the smn prodnoed, in order to render it dlTiaible by 0, is the one lequired. Thns, sappote the given nnmber to be 7021 : —
Add those together, and 15 will be prodnoed; now ISreqaires S to render it divisible by 9; and that nnmber 8, being added to 7C21, canacs the BMae dlTisibillly ^^»
7621 3
9)7624(686
This ezeroise may be diversified 1^ your speoifying, befbre the snm is named, the particalar place where the figure shall be inserted, to make the number divisible by 0 ; for it is exactly the same thing whether the figure be put at the head of the number, or between any two of its digits.
To muU^ph 5y 2fins Ay Simple SuUraetUm, — Supposing you wish to multiply 67688 by 0, addadpher to the end of the sum, then place the sum to be divided underneath the umrnn^^ and subtTBOt It from the ssme ; the quotient will be the product of 67688
multiplied by 9 ; thus : —
676880 67688
608247
Kwmber Vhni and IN^Mm*.— If any two of the following sums, 86, (58, 81, Itr, 126, 162, 207, 216, 262, 261, 806, 816, 860, 482, are added together, the flguxea inthe quotient, when oast up, will make either 9 or 18. For instance^ 216 + 262 ■» 468, sni 4 + 6 + 8 => 18; or,68 + 81 » 144, and 1 + 4 + 4 » 9.
nci VSITBD niflXTS.
The figures 1 to 9 may be placed in aooh order that the whole added together make
isactly 100. Thui^—
16 86 47
98
2
100 The secret is to arrange the figures 1, 8, 4, 6, 6, 7 fai sodh a manner that» added toge- ther, they make 98, when by adding 2 you get the whole nine digits into the oalculation.
460
ABITHiaBnCAL AMUaEHENTS.
so Dnoom ▲ bquabb vuxbib.
A square number is a number prodnoed by the mnlfcipllcalion of any number tnio itwlf ; thus, 4 multiplied by 4ie equal to 16, and 16 ia ooDseqoently a eqnare number. 4 being the square root fhm which it epringB, The extraction of the square root of any nnm- ber takes some time ; and alter all your labour yon may perhaps find that the nnmber is not a square number. To saTs this trouble, it is worth knowing that every square nnm- ber ends either with a 1, 4, 5, 6, or 9, or with two ciphers, preceded by one of these numbers.
Anothfir property of a square number is* that if it be divided by 4, the remainder, if any, will be 1-^-thus, the square of 6 Is 26, and 26 divided b7 4 leaves a remainder of i ; and again, 16, being a square number, can be divided by 4 without leaving a remainder.
▲ lQ.aX0 BQVAal.
The following airangement of figures, firam 1 to S6, in the foim of a sqnare, win amount to the same sum if the numbers are oast up perpendioularlya horiaontallj, or firom comer to comer, the quotient in every direction being 111 :—
|
29 |
7 |
28 |
9 |
12 |
26 |
|
32 |
31 |
8 |
4 36 1 |
6 |
|
|
23 |
18 |
16 |
16 |
19 |
20 |
|
14 |
24 |
21 |
22 |
13 |
17 |
|
2 |
1 |
34 |
33 |
6 |
36 |
|
11 |
26 |
10 |
27 |
30 |
8 |
TO waxen wmom ova lo voktt rorans wxxn voua waiesn.
To weigh any weight flrom 1 to 40 pounds by the use of four weights only, the weights must be respectively 1, 3, 9, and 27 pounds each. Thus, 2 pounds may be weighed by placing 3 pounds in one scale and 1 in the otheri 6 pounds, hy pladng 1 and 3 in one scale and 9 pounds in the opposite, and so on.
TBM CAVCXZ.L1D fflflVBI ttUlSSan.
To tell the figure a person has struck out of the sum of two given numben ; — Arbitrarily command those numben only that are divisible by 9 ; such, for instance, aa 86, 68, 81, 117, 126, 162, 261, 860, 316, and 432.
ABITHMEnCAL AMUSEMSNTS. 461
Then let a person ohoofle any two of these xnunben; and, alter adding them together in his mind, strike oat firom the snm any one of the figures he pleases.
After he has so done, deeire him to tell yon the snm of the remaining figures ; and it follows, that thennmber which yon are obliged to add to this amount., in orderto make it 8 or 18, is the one he strock out. Thus-—
Suppose he chooses the numbers 162 and 201, making altogether 428, and that he sftdkea out the centre figure, the two other figures will, added together, make 7, which, to make 9, requires 2, the number struck out.
THB SXCl OUXSSn USBMA.
A pair of dice being thrown, to find the number of i)oints on each die without seeing them t — ^TeU the person who cast the dice to double the number of points upon one of them, andaddStoit; thentomultiply the sum produced by 6, and to add to the product the number of points upon the other die. This being done, desire him to tell you the amount, and, having thrown out 26, the remainder will be a number consisting of two figures, the first of which, to the left, is the number of points on the first die, and the second figure, to the right, the number on the other. Thus —
Suppoee the number of points on the first die which comes up to be 2, and that of the other 8 ; then, if to 4, the double of the points of the first, there be added 6, and the sum produced, 9, be multiplied by 6, the product will be 46 ; to which, if 8, the number of pcrfnts on the other die, be added, 48 will be produced, from which, if 26 be subtracted 28 will remain s the first figure of which is 2, the number of points on the first die, and the seoond figure 8, the number on the other.
ncs eoTxanev avs tsi sags.
A sorereign being desirous to confer a liberal reward on one of his oourtierB, who had perfonned some Tery important service, desired him to ask whatever he thought proper, assuring him it should be granted. The courtier, who was well aeqnainted with the science of numbers, only requested that the monarch would give him a quantity of wheat equal to that which would arise firom one grain doubled sixty-three times successively. The value of the reward was immense; for it will be found that the siz^-fourth term of the double progression divided 1^ 1, 2, 4, 8, 10, 82, etc., is 9,223,872,080,864,776,608. But the sum of all the tennsof a double progression, beginning with 1, may be obtained by doubling the last term, and subtracting from it 1. The number of the grains of whea^ therefore, in the present case, will be 18,446,744,078,709,661,616. Now, if a pint contain 9216 grains of wheat, a gallon will contain 78,728 ; and, as eight gallons make one bushel, if we divide the above result by tight times 78,728 we shall have 81,274,997, 411,296 for the number of the busheb of wheat equal to the above number of grains, a quantity greater than what the whole sarCsoe of the earth could produce in several years, and whioh, in value, wnaM exceed all the riches, perhaps, on the globe.
TBI Hoass-niALn*s babsaiv. A gentleman taking a fimcy to a horse, which a horse-dealer wished to dispose of at
MB ABrrmanoAL amusbmbnts.
as higha prioe m he oooU, ths lattsr, to indnoe the geatlenum to become a prirrTiiinr, oflbred to let him have the hone fbr the Talne of the twen^-foorth nail in hie BhoeB» fedkoning one fikrthing fbr the flntnail, two fbr the second, fbnr fbr the third, and eo on tothetwenty-foQxth. The gentleman, thinking he ahonld haTe a good heirgain, aooepted the oflbr ; how mistaken he was the resnlt will show.
B7 oalcnlaliing as beftne, the tweniy-foorth term of the progression, 1, 2, 4, 8^ ete^ will be found to be 8,S88,008, eqoal to the nunber of fktffhinga the pnzohaeer gave for the horse; the prioe, therefbre, amounted to £8788 2s. 8d. *
▲ blnb of seren persons agreed to dine together every daj taooe8BiT<d7, so long they could sit down to table diflbrently arranged. How many dinners would be saiy for that pmrposeP It msy be easily foond, Iqrthe roles of simple progrseston, that the blub must dine together 5040 timss befbre thiy would exhaust all the azraDgeinaDta possible, which would reqoire aboye thirteen years.
na BAssR An» snuris.
If a hundred stones be placed in a straight line, at the distaace of a yaid fhna SMh other, the first being at the same distanoe tram, a basket* how many yards mnst the person walk who engages to pick them np, one by one, and put them into the baakaaf It is evident that, to pick up the first stone and put it into a basket, the person rnsat walk two yards; fbr the second, he must walk four; for the thiidt six; and so on, uicnaa- ing by two to the hundredth.
The number of yards, therefbre, which the person must walk will be equal to the som of the progression, 2, 4, 6, etc., the last term of which is 200 (22). But the sum of the progression is equal to 202, the sum of the two extremes, multiplied by 80, or ha3f the number of terms; that is to ssy, 10,100 yards, which makes man than 5k miles.
ffHa CAir Of iXB.
How to divide 8 gallons of ale contained in an 8 gallon can into two equal parts, having only two empty bottles to eflbotit with, one containing 5 gallons and the other 8. First, fill the 6 gallon bottle, and you will have 3 remaining in the 8 gallon can; fill the 8 gallon bottle ih)m the 6 gallon, which will then contain only 2 gallons; poortheS gaUons in the 3 gallon bottle into that which holds 8 gallons, which will then contain 6 gaUons; then pour the 2 gaUons out of the 6 gallon bottle into the 3 gallon bottle, and filling tiae 5 gallon bottle fh>m the 8 gaUon can, which at present contains 6 gallons, yon will have 1 gallon in the can, 6 in the largest bottle, and 2 in thesmaUest; by filling up the S gallon can from the 6 gallon, you leave 4 gallons, or one-half the 8 gallons, in the largest bottle; and, lastly, pouring the contents of the 8 gallon bottle into the 8 gaUon oan« which 0Qa> tains 1 gaUon, you have the second half, or 4 gallons.
coTrvmra ▲ biluoit. What is a billion f The reply is very simple— a million times a million. This is quickly written, and more quickly stiU pronounced. But no man is able to count It. Ton
ABTTHMBTIOAL AKI7BXMENT8. 463
OBaocKmt 100 or 170aininiite; but let ns eren inppote that yoa go as ftr m 900 in a siinute, then an hour will prodnoe 12,000 ; a day, S88,000 ; and a year, or 306 d^yi (for every fonr years yon may rest firam counting, during leap year), 106,120,000. Let na sappoee, now, that Adam, at the beginning of his existence, had began to count, had con- tinued to do ao, and was connting still, he would not, even now, according to the naoally sappoaed age of onr globe, have counted nearly enough. For, to count a billion, he would require 0612 years, 84 days, 6 hours, and 20 Tniuntea, according to the above rule.
fn mmxMM sBmr-fKan.
If number 78 be multiplied hy any of the progressive numbers arising from the mnltiplication of 8 with any of the units, the result will be as follows:—
|
X |
8 |
sa |
210 |
|
|
X |
0 |
^ |
438 |
|
|
X |
9 |
s |
667 |
|
|
X |
12 |
as |
876 |
|
|
X |
16 |
s |
1006 |
|
|
X |
18 |
as |
1314 |
|
|
X |
21 |
ss |
1638 |
|
|
X |
24 |
as |
1762 |
|
|
X |
27 |
as |
1071 |
On inspecting these emonnts it will be seen that the last flgores run thua--0, 8, 7, 6, 6, 4, 8, 2, 1. Again« if we refer to the sums produced by the multiplication of 73 by 3, 6, 0, 12, and 16, it wlU be flound that by reading the two figures to the left of each amount backwards, it will give 1, 2, 8, 4, 6, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0.
OUBIOUS OALCULAXtOm.
If a pin were dropped into the hold of the Great Bastem steam-ship, and on that day wedc a aeoond pin, and on that day week four pina, and ao on, doubling the num- ber of pina each week for a year, there would, by the end of the 62 weeks, be de- posited no fewer than 4,603,699,627,870,496 pins. Allowing 200 to the ounce, the weight of the whole would be 628,292,868 tons ; and to carry them all would require 27,924 ships as large as the Great Eastern, which is calculated to hold 22,600 tons.
AMnmanoiL raoauaaiav.
If you could buy a hundred ships, giving a fbrthing fbr the first, a hali^penny for the second, a penny fbr the third, twopence for the fourth, and so on to the las^ doubling the sum each time, the whole amount paid would be £667,760,707,063,344, 041,463,074.442 188. 7id.—« sum which in words runs thus: 667 quadrillions, 760,707 trillions, 63,344 billions, 41,643 millions, 74 thousand, 442 pounds, eighteen shillings and sevenpence three farthings. This amount in sovereigns would weigh 8,667,088, 690,327,499,123,418 tons.
THB AMnmatioiL KousmAr.
One of the best and most simple mouaetrape inusemay be constructed in the following manner .—Get a slip of smooth deal, about the eighth of an inch thick, a quarter of an
^
<M ABITHianOAL AVDESUKKIS.
tDOh broad, mnd tt ■ niSdflnt lesKtli to cot oot thi follovlng puti (f ll» mp. Fint, ■n nprigbt p<«c«, thna or Rmr inolm high, which mut be •qiui* K Uw boOam, and ■ ■null pleoa be cut off the Up to St the notch la No. t 'lee Ko. I In themugiB). The Hoond pJeoe mnit b« of the aune length M tba flnt, wlih a noMb ont ■cmM newlj mt the top of K, to (It the top of No. 1, mul th* other eod of it tnmaed to atehihe ncicefa Is Mo, 3 (hb Ka, 1). Tb* third piaoa ihoald be twice ■■ long <■ eilher or the othan,
or il to oMch the lower end of No. l. HaTiug jwoomlid thna Ibr. yoa mnit pot the pleoee together. In Mdcc Id flniah It, by adding another notch in No. S, the axaat (ttnatlon of which yon will dlicovar aa Rjllon : — Place No. 1, SI It ia to the cut, then put the notch of No. 1 on ^yZ ■ — ■ —1-^ the thinned top of No. 1 j keep it in the aaue Inelination
aa In the mt ! then get a Oat [4ece of wood, or a alate, one end ot which miut rest on Ihegronnd, and the cenln of the edge of the other ob the topofNcl. YoD will now find the thinned end of No. 1 eleraledl^tbewBlgbt of the Bat piece of wood or elatoi then pnt the thinned esd of It to thODOtdot No. 3, a^ draw No. 1 down by it, nntll the whole forma a memblance of a Dgote of 4 ; at the emot place where No. 3 tonchea the upright, ont a notch, which, b; catching the lod of No. I will keep the Dap together. Yon tnaj' now bait the end of No. 3 with a piece Of eheeaei a monae, by nibbling the bait, will poll down No. 3, the other pieces im- DedSately Hparate, and the alata or board lUla npon the mooae. We bare aeen munbBt of mioe, rate, and binli, oansU by thla
g Be power ot tbs Uagnct to Mtract or repel Iron and certain other satMiauces, enable! u to perftimi aoma very amiuiag eiperunenta with masical eflbct la ths haoda of Che little magiciBn tlie nugnet mblea a irend, Ihe timpla toucb of which Is sulDcienC to ptodoce e wonderful malts. Yet. the magiiet is but a piece of iron or« .d mixed with Mod/ poitlBlsi i thence ic haa alee been called iu ind. " Leidentein," algnil^ing the leadiog-stone. or loadstone. It it fimnd in varioiu pans of the world \ uii it la aaid to have been found abnndantlr Dear Uagnesia, in Lfdla, from which circamalance ita oatne ratj have been derived. Tbe mngnet hna the pecnUar propertiea of attmcting iron, pointing to the polta ot the world, and of camniiinicating it* virtaca npon Iron bjr touch, witliont loaing anj of lla own qnalitiei. The discover; of tbe magnetic inclination to the poles of the earth, has been of immense advantage to navigators ; but it was unknown Co the ancients —
C«iUiw. atj kmpt ihc IH
Is an insbrunent con^eting of a magneCio bar or needle, balanced on a vertical pivot so t> to be capable of turning rreel; on a borliontal plane, the poinc of the needle plajiug Is ft circle of which ita pivot is the ceotre. The pivot is Died in the bottom of a cylin- drieal box. closed at tha lop by a plate of glass, to aa to protect it Itam the air. Tbe magtietlc bar is attached to the ander aide of a circular card, on which tbe tlurtj-two poiale of dircctioD, called Che " pointa of Iba compass," are marked. In order that it
UAQA'ETISU.
landmuk nor Ijeotoa pathway to diract (h«ir slepe. ThB tend oompsM ootuuta of & m&gnBtlc aeeiUo. placsd upon t. polDt in thB centra of a biMi or wooden box fiiniislud with a gia- dnoUd cud. dlrided into polDta and qnaitsr-polaU oT the oimpaos, Chs M. Bad 8^ pointa bemff mado to comA- 7 eiactl; with th* aeedle.
J be gquan, i
nd ia fumiAhfld with two Mxalghl edges of br»M, or Indoi tnarka, to Bet 10 any pioposed line, wuj «om8tlmBi with a Bight. Tbetop ' ?£j.
ia oorered with sIbaa to preTont tho needle Trom beins dialiirbed by the action of the au, circle indloote the bearings of any diatant olijoci id nlalli
MAGXETISH. 467
TAXI0U8 KnTDB OF ▲STinCIA.L AVD VATUB^L XAeVlTS.
It may here be observed, that the smalleet natural magnete generally poiaeaa the greatest- proportion of attractiTe power. 8ir Isaac Newton wrae in his ring a magnet weighing onlj three grains, yet it waa able to take np 746 grains, or nearly 260 timet its own weight; whereaa, magnets, weighing above two pounds, seldom lift more than five or Biz times tbeir own weight.
Take a poker and tonga, the hirger and the older the better, and fixing the poker
upright as shown in the engraving, fiisten to the upper part, with a silk thread, a piece of soft steel, having its marked end downward j then graaping the tonga with the right hand, a little below their middle, and keeping them nearly in a vertical line, rub the steel with the lower end of the tongs, from the marked end to its upper end, about ten times on eadi side of it. By this means, the steel will receive as much magnetism aa will enable it to lift a small key at the marked end ; and the bar being sus- pended by its middle, or made to rest on a point, the marked end will turn to the north, and is called the north pole, the un- marked end being the south pole.
Hard iron or steel becomes pemaaently magnetic, almost instantaneously, if it be rubbed in the direction of its length several times, not downward and upward, but onty upward.
It has been found that, at the end of summer, steel fire-irons, which have remained for several months resting on the fender in a room, have become decidedly magnetic.
The Rev. Dr. Scoresby has shown that, by drawing a piece of steel down the back of his hand, in one direction, the palm of the same hand being pressed against a powerful magnet, he can giro the steel a considerable magnetic power through his hand ; and 1^ reversing the direction of the steel, he can as easily demagnetize it.
The price of magnets, however, is so trifling, that, unless for the purpose of curiosity, no ezperiAentalist would undertake the task of forming them. A natural magnet, or loadstone, in mass, or cut in a slab, may be purchased for as small a sumaa sixpence.
As the two ends of a magnet are denominated its poles, so of a touched needle ; and when placed with just equipoise upon a pivot, the end which tains toward the north is called its north pole ; the other is, consequently, south. When the noi^ pole of one mag- net is presented to the south pole of another, attraction, equal to its powers, takes place; and if the substance so attracted be afloat upon liquid, or in any other situation capable of changing places, they approach toward, or come in contact with, each other.
All iron bars standing erect, or fixed perpendicularly (such as the iron railings be- fbra houses), are magnetic, the north pole being at the bottom, and the south at the top. It is, also, a curious flust, that the uppermost part of the iron ring round a carriage- wheel attracts the north end of the magnet, and is, consequently, a south pole ; while the lower part of the same iron, in contact with the ground, attracts the south end of the needle, and is, therefore, a north pole ; turn the same wheel round half a circle, and these poles immediately become reversed.
468 llAGNBTISM.
When a north pole is presented to another north pole they repel each other, a* shown in
THI WOITDBBFUL VWAX, IVC.
Cat in oork the fignre of a swan, and oorer it with a coat of white wax, ww>Tr<wg ukb eyes of glasa beads; conceal withinits bodyapiece of magnetised steel, andset itafioat upon a basin of water. Bound the edge of the basin may be placed yarious devioest and, among othersk a swan-house, each as is seen upon a river, may hang over and touoh the water ; here the swan may take shelter oocaaionally, and in it he may be made to turn round, in order to increase the astonishment of the spectatora. By means of the magnetic bar, placed within the swan, and of the magnetic wand, the figure may ))e made to approach or recede, by presenting to the edge of the basin the north and south poles alternately.
The wand is thus made : — ^Bore a hole, three-tenths of an inch in diameter, through a round stick of wood, or get a hollow oane, about eight inches long, and half an inch thick, FroTide a small steel bu-, imd let it be rery strongly magnetised; this rod is to be put into the hole you have bored through the wand, and closed at both ends by two small pieces of ivory, which screw on, different in their shapes, that you may eaai]y distinguish the poles of the magnetio bar. This oontrivance is applicable to sevevBl other kinds of floating figures, as ships, etc.
The Wonderftd Swan was a flAvourite trick with the celebrated Breslau, who osed to make it spell any person's name at command, by having the inside edge of tltf basin, in which it floated, marked with the twenty-four lettera of the alphabet. He bad a powerftU magnet concealed about his person, and the swan of coux^e foQowed his motions. Thus, if he wished the swan to spell James* he would first move toward J, and the swan being attracted by the magnet, would drive its bill against the letter ; he would then go to A, and so on, till the word was spelt. The trick was of ooune only wonderftil to persons unacquainted with the properties of the magnetw
MoffTutic FUSi. — A pleasing toy, on a similar principle to the swan, may be pur- chased at the shops. It consists of two or three pieces of lead in the shape of a flah, casi hollow, and very light, with fins, scales, etc., painted in imitation of nature. In the mouth of each is inserted a small piece of iron wire, rubbed strongly with a magnet. The angling rod is formed of a small piece of wood, a few inches long, to which is attached a silken thread, with an iron hook, also strongly magnetized. On throwing tbefiah into a basin of water, uvl holding near it the line and hook, which may be baited, the fisb will follow, and ultimately attaching itself to the hook, may be readily drawn out of the water.
A Magie Spider is aJso made to move over a dial-plate, and answer various aritb- metioal questions from speotatoiB, such as telling their ages, etc. This is done by Tiwaiw of a magnet oonoealed behind the dial-plate, and secretly moved by the eaihibitor. In this and in similar experiments where ^e iron appears to fly towards the XDagaat, n must not be supposed that the iron is a mere passive agent ; the iron attracts the mag- net with the same force as that with which the maefnet attracts the iron, it beins an established law of nature that all acti<m is attended with an equal and corroqxmdix&g
MAGNEnSlf. 4G9
TO JkBcxscAnr xv ▲ tvmvsAJtcm covtaiv jjtt xioir.
Hold a piece of loadBtone, or an artificial magnet, near the subetance rappoeed to contain iron ; and, if it contain a conaiderable quantity, the two bodies will adhere to strongly, aa to require considerable force to separate them. If the substance contain but little iron it will not be sensibly attracted, unless it be placed on a piece of wood or cork swimming in water. Sometimes tea is mixed with iron fllixsgs ; these have been detected by plunging into the suspected tea a magnet, which instantly becomes coated with the filings. Brass-foonders, by plunging a magnet into brass filings, or clippings, are enabled readily to separate from them any particles of iron which may be present.
■OBSS-BXOB Mioxrats.
Magnets frequently consist of a single bar bent in the form of a horse-shoe, to be pur- chased at rarious prices, from 6d. to 7s. 8d. In this form of magnet the two poles are brought near each other, and are connected by means of a piece of soft, that is, unan- nealed, or untempered, iron, called an armature or keeper, by which the sustaining power of the magnet is much increased. It also enables us to apply the two poles to experiment, as shown in the engraving, where, from a hook attached to the armature, there hangs a scale, in which weights are placed to the amount of many pounds. Before applying the armature, if you place on the smooth ends of the poles a thin piece of wood or paper, yon will find that the armature will still adhere with considerable force, proving that absolute contact is not necessary to dis- play the attraction between the magnet and the iron. If the magnet be hung up in this position, and the weight gradually increased day by day, its lifting power will increase very materially. ** If, for example," says Mr. Tomlinson, « in his " Student's Manual of Natural Philosophy," *' a magnet will bear up exactly ten pounds, and no more, and we suspend it with this weight attached for a week or two, we shall probabfyfind that at the end of that time it will increase to ten and a half pounds, and so on, with a gradual increase." It is probable, however, thai this attractive force is sutyect to a diurnal and annual variation ; that is to say, the magnet, when it has attained its maxrmnm of attractive power, will support a greater weight at one time of the day than at another, and at one season of the year than at another,
■ow TO 1U.XI k xxnavR oi littx.i xievxTS.
The attraction of the magnet for nnmagnetised iron has already been mentioned. This attraction may be shown in a pleasing manner by employing a bar-magnet, at one end of which a notch is out to indicate the north pole. Place this magnet upon paper, and sift over it iron lUings, when such as are not attracted by the magnet will, when shaken off, arrange themselves nearly in a star-like form, in greatest number at and about the poles, where the attraction is strongest. Or, the filings will (Ul into beaotiftil curves by the following contrivance. Stretch a large sheet of paper upon a frame of wood, and place it flat upon a table. Put under the paper, so as just to touch it, a bar-magnet ; silt a thin layer of iron filings upon the paper, gently tap its under surflioe, when it will
470 MAGNETISM.
▼ibrate, and the magnede force will arrange the filings in pretty figores. In this esperi< ment each filing becomes a perfect magnet ; for it is one of the laws of nxagnetlam that eTery particle of iron in the vicinity of a magnet becomes a magnet. If a Rteel ring be magnetized, the magnetic properties remain concealed while the ring is whole ; but if it be broken at any point, each fragment will be fomid to poesess the properties of a com- mon magnet. It is cmrioos to reflect that the magnet may be applied to iron and sted as often as we please, without any loss to the magnet itself. One magnet is sufficient to magnetise thoosands and ten of thousands of steel or iron bars, withoat loaingr cuiy of its magnetic power.
A String qf Magnets. — Again, place a bar-magnet upon a table, with its norOi pole projecting over the edge ; then hold a key near such north pole, present a nail (tin tack) to the end of the key, and it will be enspended, in consequence of its indooed magnetism. To the first nail a second, a third, and a fourth, may be successively attached. Tb» lower end of the k^ and the points of the nails are then, respectively, north pol^ ; while the upper end of the key and the heads of the nails are, respectively, south polea. Then gradually remove the key and the attached nails from the projecting magnet, wli^ they will get beyond its influence ; and, consequently, losing all magnetic power, tbe naUs will fall to the g^und.
If, instead of holding the key at a certain distance fmax the magnet, youat ofnoe brinip it clr^e to it, and apply the nails to the key, luid thai place the south pole of another I I magnet near to, or in contact with, the north pole or lower end of the key, its handle, being also a south pole, will be repelled, and the north end of the first magnet will be attracted by the south end of titie second ; C(Hiseq[nently , the key, with the hanging nails, will fUl.
The Rev. Dr. Bcoresby, with a powerftd oompoand mag- net, consisting of two bundles of steel bars or plates in a wooden frame, has taken up 11,000 nails (tin-tacks) ; aad holding a key at four inches frvm ttie ends of the magnete, this key became so powerfril a magnet as to take up and suspend another key, weighing nearly as much as the former one.
SrimBT BXFSBX]fS5T8 JX XAOITXtlSX.
To tkow that MagneU always point nearly North and South. — ^Take an nnmagnetized needle, or bar of iron, and balance it on a centre, in a horisontal position, or suspend it by a thread, when it will remain stationary in any position : take the same bar, or needle, when magnetised, as directed in a preceding experiment, and it will immediately torn one end to the north, and will not remain in any other position. All magnets that axe at liberty to obey the magnetic influence, turn their north poles to the north, and their south poles to the south ; allowancu being made for the variation, which is not only di£rerent at diflEbrent places of the world, but is difilorent at the same place at different times ; the quantity of this variation can only be determined by astronomical means.
Test qf Magn^e Pouw.-^To ascertain whether a piece of metal, or mineral, is
MAGNETISM. 471
magnetic, present it to one of the poles of a poised magnet. IF it be attracted at ooth poles, yon may- then conclude that the substance so tested is not magnetic.
Magnetic Action and Ba-<»ction, — A magnet and a piece of iron attract each other equally, whatever disproportion there is betireen their sises. If either be balanced in a scale, and the other be then brought within a certain distance beneath it, the very same counterpoise will be required to xnwvent their approach, whichever be in the scale. If the two were hanging near each other as pendulums, they would approach and meet j but tbe little one would perform more of the journey in proportion to its littleness.
To pott Moffneiism through a Deal Board. — Place a common sewing-needle on a smooth hraixontal board, and move a strong magnet underneath the board, when the needle will revolve along tiie board, according to the peculiar motion given to the magnet.
Ma{n^etism bg Hammering. — Place a bar of iron in a vertical position, and give it a series of slight blows witii a hammer or poker, when it will acquire a feeble degree of magnetism ; hence it happens, that the anvils and other tools employed in smithies are endowed with magnetism. It is, however, a remarkable circumstance, tiiat if you strike a magnet^ its magnetising force will be either very much impaired or altogether destroyed. Percussion and ftiction in the required position would seem, from this and preceding experiments, to be the ehief means of magnetizing iron and steeL These operations, as it were, waken up the inert particles of the metal to admit new magnetism, <»> to develop that which a]rea4y resides in it» originally derived from the earth.
so ixHiBiT rai icAeirxTic spakk.
The magnetic spork may be prodooed with great ease and certainty, and with a mag- net of moderate strength, by employing the little arrangement shown in the annexed figure. It consists merely of a cylinder of soft iron, round the centre of which are wound a few feet of small copper wire, ^^^ .,^^ ^ carefhUy insulated by a oovering of cotton or silk. To one end of this wire is soldered a small disk of copper, which is well amalgamated. The other end is bent up, the point cleaned and amalgamated by rubbing it over with mercury, and brought into contact with tbe disk. On laying this cylinder across the poles of the magnet and then suddenly breaking contact, tbe point and disk become separated at the same time, and the spark appears. With powerfhl magnets, such as are prodoced when strong currents of voltaic electricity are made to circulate round bars of soft iron, the spark becomes a dazzling and continuous light* which has been used successfully for lighthouse purposes.
no Ki^evmc tabli.
Under the top of a common table, place a magnet thai turns on a pivot, and fix a board under it that nothing may appear. There may also be a drawer under the table, which you pull out, to show that there is nothing concealed. At one end of the table there must be a pin that communicates with a magnet, and by which it may be placed
tTS UAQNSnSM.
IndiSferaDt pD^ttOnii tbli pin man be u plued u not to be riilbls to tlie tpeouon. Etnn Boma BMel flUnga, or vei7 amall nulla, orer that put Qf lh« toblo wben the nugnel li. Tlien uk any one to land ■ knlTB, or > key, whieli will then attnct put of the uUi or fllingfl. ^en pluHni; yonr hmnd, In & corelcBfl muuiBT. on tbe pin at Uie end of the table, )'on alter tie poalcinn of the tnagnot ! and giTing tli« kty to anj- penon, yon deain bim IoinBketbeexpennant.«Ucb1iawiUtbeiiDotlM able to perform. Ton then give the kej- to aaothar pataon, at the aama time pladng the mainiet, bj means of the pin, in the Ant poaition, when that peraon will inunedlatelj perform the expehmeoL
By aid of the gas miorrscope there baa been exhlhiled a beantifnl illnnralion of the Diabetic cumnla olitalnedbj placing aamall horae ahoe magnet between the glanea of the microeoope (lider, and allowlag very Dae iron filinga to Ut within iu aphere of attrae- tlon. TheaeniingBBTenotMeQlUling, bat the inatant they adhere Iher be- conu Tialble and appeu to atart fnio etigteuoe, branching oat, aa tber in-
, the appearanoe of an ertraordinftrj' vegetation. Theae, arbm g rapidl)- over a dlak of diameter, hare more the glo tlua of soythtng I Datoral. Tbey aeem to apnad lika tbe I bnocheaandleaTea of atiee^bnisting ^ into lie ftUneaa of groirth in eeoonda Then, if Ihe alider be tapped with the flngera (or better with a key), the branehea wlU be aeen to more and sllar. aiTBiigltig themeelvn here mora conipaetly, and there more looaely, like Ibliage waving in the wind, abikinglj ilinatrattng U» onrre and onrranle predncvd by nfagnetic infloence.
Vei7 curiona and loaCmetlve effbetean alee ahown by inlradaoing magnetiBed neadlea and tier-magneta, dmple and eomponnd, ondar the microaeope i a pair of horee^lue magnets, arranged with aimlUr polea, and alao vith polea oppoeing eacb other, aAHd
a produced
Our readen will, donbtleaa, teeoUect aeventl atoriaa In whieh the powera at tbe magnet are greatly eiaggeraled. Other aanoDte of He virtoee, though line in Iket, yet really appeu. wilhont lome oonaideratioD. to be Sctiliona. There are Aw leaden wbo are not aoqn^nted with the bMt7 of that mariner wbo, u It ia gnvely related, tg-
wtucb oOHtBluHl an inuaense qt
In a GcrniBJi coElecCion of tairj u the ftajnoiu Charlcnugne, tlie blElifDl «quime vrho fiU'>D<Led on hia heroic knlghU, the dunMlB tu dlMreM whom thej- relief ed. the dvrorb i>lia irers iheir frienda, and cbn gtaotaand magiduiM who " worked tluir earthly woe," ere tlie principal chanKten, we remernber a paaaa^ to Uke eJIbct following; — *'The knight, who volunteered to adven- tnre forward tnoi the body of cavalrT thAi were bent on this exploit, to reooimoitre the potillon of this gigantic mehiuiter'a eaatle, had Hnrcelf npproaolied within aigtit of it, irbea be beheld tba enonnona bulk of the giant hunaelf leaning againit the ontward wall. FamuuiC to the inatmotiona ho bad received, the kz^ht, forthwith, taneil hie fnlhint atecd'a head lowarda bia oompaiiiona in amu, and, U a ewift pace, came prick- ing o'er tho plain. He now heard the giant in pnnuic, and itmek bla apura iuto hi« good tieed's Bouki but,alaal he had scarcely approached vrllhin view of lAe cUlvatric (roop, when the might; band of the giant magician waa acretchad fOrtb, aimed onl; with one of hit bone'a shoos, which waa made of losdalone, and. by its auractive power* oa bli tteel armonr, bla grieved ataocialee bad the moniflcacion of seeing
" C^t $iugbl anbnntti.''
ELECTRICITY. 475
pomp, was successfal. Next* Mr. Hawkabee oonstmcted a more powerftil machine of glaM ; and, in 1709, lie pabliahed the first treatise npon the subject. Then, bodies were arranged into two classes : the first dedries, or those which, like amber, were capable of being excited ; and eonditetont or those thonghft not to be capable of excitation, yet which allowed the electzlo fluid to pass along them. The difference between the electri- city of glass, called Titireoiis, and that of sealing-wax, called resinons, was next esta- blished ; and the diaoovery of the Leyden phial, in 1740, drew muversal attention to the science. Its mode of action was explained by Dr. Franklin, who maintained there to be but one fluid instead of tvro, as heretofore beUeved. The dimination or redundancy of this single fluid, Franklin supposed to be the cause of all electrical action. In conjunction with the Abbe Nollet, Franklin asserted and proved the identity of the fluid with lightning ; the Doctor brought the latter down from the clouds — <* Bripuit fhlmen coelo ;" and the experiments by which this identity of lightning and electricity was demonstrated, were tnadewitha sheet of brown paper, a bit of twine or silk thread, and an iron key I This disooTevy has been practical^ useful in applying oonductoia to buildings, by which their safety during a tixunderstorm is almost insured. Ships, particularly in tropical climates, are especially exposed to danger from lightning. It is to the late eminent electrician, 6ir William Snow Harris, that we are indebted for the application of a system of con- ductors which hare insured to ships such absolute safety during thunderstorms {tee ittuetraHon o» the cppotUe page), that since its Introduction into the public service damage from lightning has vanished altogether from the records of the navy.
Of more recent date is the application of electricity to the instantaneous conveyance of intelligence by telegraphic wires — a feat of science which is now as familiar as the railway itself.
We now proceed to describe a few of the readiest means of producing electricity, aa well aa the most ready and economical apparatus to be employed in electrical experi- ments.
IDDLI XXAVS OF mODUCZNe IX.SCTBICXTT.
The production of electricity may be observed in a very fkmiliar manner, thus : — Tear up a piece of paper into small fragments, and place them on a table ; then take a stick of sealing-wax and rub it briskly with a piece of flannel, or against the sleeve of a cloth coat, and immediately after hold it near the fragments of paper, when the small pieces will soon be observed to be agitated, and the smaller to fly quickly to the wax, to which having adhered for some time, a fiBw will suddenly jump oflT; others which have touched the stick edgewise will dangle from it a considerable interval, and then fisll oflT by their own gravitation, when the electrical force haa sufficiently subsided. It was by observing amber produce similar efltets after friction to those just described, that elec- tricity obtained its name.
Or, hold to the fixe a piece of common brown paper, about twice the tlie of this page ; when quite dry and hot, draw it several times between the sleeve and side of a coat, so as to rub it both sides at once with the woollen suiftce, when the paper will be rendered so powerfhlly electrical, that if placed against the wainscot or papoed wall of a room, it will remain there for some minutes without falling.
476
ELECTRICiry.
Or, warm a pane of glaM and rapport each end upon a boolc ; pla45e sofine bran underneath the glass, and rub ite npper side with a warm black Bilk handkerchief or a piece of flannel, when the bran will rapidly fly, and dance up and down. Thia ezpexi- ment is said to hare been the only contribution that Sir Isaac Newton made to electricity ; but it was important, inasmuch as it proved, what was unknown before, that giasi showed electrical eflbcts on the side contrary to that which was excited.
Or, break a piece ofloaf-sugar in the dark, and it wUl give out a beautiflil lambent bine flame/ When grocers are sawing loaves of sugar, the sugar dust is beautifully huninooa.
Or, warm two pieces of white paper at the fire, place them upon each other. on a table or book, and rub strongly the upper paper with India-rubber, when the papers will be found so strongly electrical, as to be separated only by force; or, if torn asunder in the dark, they will give out the electric spark. Silk may be made to produce the same eflbcts.— Or, if a piece of paper be placed upon a smooth table and then rubbed smartly with India-rubber, the electricity developed will be so powerfat that two or three goose-quills may be made to adhere to the under aide of the p^xr. ijtfter it has been raised from the table.
XBB TBAVSLUVO VIATHSS.
Fix a stick of sealing-wax, w, andarod of glass, o, upright in a strong piece of wood, as shown in the engraving \ then contrive a slender piece of wood, like that marked a ;
and from the end of its arm hang a very slender thread of white 8ilk« with a light downy fbather attached tc its extremi1;y ; get some one to hold the board firmly while you rub the glasa rod briskly with a dry silk handkerchief, and the stick of sealing- wax with a piece of dry woollen doth. By doing thus, yon bave excited the electricity of the wax and of the glass ; but the elec- tricity in one case appears to difibr in some respects from thaft of the other, and, consequently, that of the glass is calledpostf ire, and that of the sealing-wax, iMgatxoe; one appears as if it bad too much, and the other too little, and this state of things con- tinues until an equilibrium is established. Accordingly, to effect this, you will see the feather continue to move from the wax to the glaaa, and vice versa,
L CHXAP XLBCTBZCiX KACHIVX.
Take a piece of smoothly-planed deal board, less than half an inch thick, and cat it in a circular form ; fix into the centre of this board a handle of glass or of hard wood, dried in an oven, and coated with resin or sealing-wax ; but before you flx the handle in its place, you must cover the board neatly and smoothly with tin-foil, pasting it eare> frilly on, and taking particular care that there are no inequalities on the edge. To complete this cover, or npper part of the apparatus, flx near the edge on its npper ma- fiioe a brass wire, at the top of which is a knob also of brahs. Next proceed tooonfitraet the lower part of the instrument, i, which is called an electrophoros ; this lower part must be somewhat larger than the upper circle : to form this, take a piece of tm-foil.
ELECTMCITT.
477
larger than the intended plate, and spread it ont smoothly on an earthenware plate of the proper sixe, so that the edKea of the foil may be tamed np round the oircnm-
ference. Then melt, in an iron ladle, equal parts of shellac, common retin, and Yenlce turpentine j keep the mixtore at a moderate heat until the fUmes oease to rise ; then, when it be- comes a little thicker, but still sufficiently fluid to flow freely, pour it into the tin-foil until it is about half an inch thick; when it is cold, trim it neatly round the edges, and place it on , a board, b, with that side which is covered with tin-foil downward, and confine it to its place on the board by means of four stops, marked s s s s. One circumstance to be particularly noticed in making this instru- ment is, that, to be successiVil, the tin-foil must be laid perfectly smooth, and free from any lumps or inequalities of surfhce. To make use of the machine, sUghtl^ warm your apparatus, and hold the upper plate by the handle, without touching the tin-foil j ttien take a piece of warm flannel about ten inches long, roll it np slightly, and draw it smartly towards you across the resinous plate, nntil the plate is excited. Now place the upper plate, with the handle previously warmed, in order that it may be perfectly dry, upon the resinous plate, and touch the metal knob, from which a spark will be obtained ; immediately lilt the plate by its handle, and again touch the brass knob ; this time you will obtain a more vivid spark, and you may repeat the operation many times before the eflbet ceases.
THI LSTDBir JAB.
The Leyden jar is an apparatus by means of which electricity may be accumulated ; and when a powerful electrical machine is used, and a number of large jars are employed, the quantity that can be collected is sufficient to pro- duce the most eztraordinaiy efitets ; but you may succeed in charging a moderate sized jar by the assistance of the little apparatus we have just described. A L^den jar is a wide-mouthed glass bottle, partly covered inside and outside with tin-foil, whilst a strong wire, with a brass knob at the end, passes through the cork, and communicates with the foil in the inside of the bottle. To charge this jar with your little apparatus, excite the resinous plate with the flannel, place the upper plate on it, and draw a spark from the brass knob with your knuckle. Then lift the upper plate from the lower, and apply the brass knob to that on the top of the Leyden jar, when a stronger spark will pass, and the jar begin to be charged. That this may be rendered evident, before you begin to charge the jar, place on the top of the brass rod a little instrument called an electrometer (a measurer of electricity) ; it consists of a brass wire with a brass knob on the top ; and on one side of this wire, a semiciroular piece of thin wood is fixed, marked on its edge with a scale of degrees. A thin piece of cane, with a pith ball at its extremity, p, moves easily upon a centre ; as the jar becomes charged with electricity, the cane and pith ball rise, and thus indicate the degree of intensity of the charge of electricity in tbo
478
ELECTRICITY.
Lejden jar ; and when ihe cane lies horizontally, or marks 90 degrees, it ia a proof that the jar la fhlly charged. If you then touch the foil on the outaide of tha jar with one hand, and tibe braaa knob with the other, yon will feel a shook, the violence of whicb is in proportion to the size of the jar ; but with the same amount of electrici^ you may cause a party of persons to iMurticipate in the shock, by taking hold of the tm-ftdl on the outaide with one hand, and grasping your neighbour's hand with the other, he doing the same by his next neighbour, and so on to the last of the chain standing ready to touch the brass knob at the top of the jar ; as soon as this ia done, the circoit is com* pleted, and the shook fblt by all, with as much force as if one only had received it.
TRS nAKcnra dolls.
An electrical machine of a more complicated nature than that just described a
necessary to perform this experiment satisliBkCtorily. This is the cylinder electrieal
machine, shown in the engraving ; it consists of a glass cylinder supported on two
glass pillars, and so mounted that it may be turned rapidly round; oneadi side of this glass cylinder are two other cylinders of brass, called can* ductors, which are also mounted aa glass pillars. To one of these a cushion is fixed, to which a piece d silk is attached, long enough to reach across the glass qylindor very neariy to the opposite conductor ; and thi« Mcond conductor is ftimiahed with a row of brass points on titat side which is opposite the glass cylinder. The cushion is covered on the inside
with a dark coloured ointment, called an amalgam. The best
description of amalgam is that made of one part tin and two
parts line, melted together, and then mixed in an iron mortar
with six parts of hot mercury. The three metals are next
rubbed up into a paste with hog*s lard, and spread on the
cushion. The conductor to which the cushion is attached is
called the negoHoe conductor, and corresponds with the seal-
ing-wfuc in the first experiment ; whilst that with the points ia
called the potUive conductor, and answers to the glass rod.
To perform the experiment of the dancing dolls, a chain is
attached to the negative conductor, and connected with the
earth ; by turning the handle quickly, the friction produced
by ^e cushion on the glasa cylinder excites the electricity,
which is conducted from the earth by means of the chain, and through the cylindct
with the cushion ; and is again transferred from the glass cylinder to the oppoaite con-
ELECTRICITY.
479
ductor, to one end of which, in this experiment* a wire is attached, with a knob at the end. If, when the handle is tamed, you place yoor knuckles at a little distance from this knob, a series of sparks wiU pass with a cxackling noiso ; but if you suspend from tilie conductor a circular brass plate by means of a chain, and at a small distance below you place a similar plate of metal, fixed on a metal stand (see the engraving), then the electricity passes quickly from the conductor to the upper plate ; but a number of little figures made of the pith of an eldw tree being laid on the bottom plate, as soon as the stream of electricity is excited, they will rise, and continue to jump up snd down be- tween the upper and lower plates in the most grotesque manner, being occupied, as the feather in the former experiment, in transfeirixig the electricity between the two plates.
THX XLICTBICAL WDTDKILL.
Place a piece of wire formed into a cross, Uke that in the cngraring, with the points of the arms bent as there repra- ^ sented ; then put the machine in action, and the passage of the electricity along the wire will keep it rapidly in motion.
C
rai DAVCDIG BALLS.
This experiment is effbcted on precisely the same principle as the last ; but as there is no apparent reason for the effect pro- duced, it is perhaps the more surprising of the two. Take a large dry glass goblet, hold it against the knob at the end of the con- ductor, so Uiat the knob shall touch the inside of the glass; then baring placed sereral small pith balls on the table, cover them with the glass, and th^ will instantly begin to dance about in - every direction, until the electricity of the glass is exhausted.
THB anroxva bills.
The phenomena of attraction and repulsion are well illustrated by the apparatus shown in the margin. Hang a brass arch, ▲, to the conductor by means of a short chain, having previously attached to the extremitieB of the arch two small bells, by means of brass chains ; and to the centre of the arch another little bell, by means of a silk thread ; between these bells two small brass balls are also suspended by a silk thread, and to the centre bell a chain is hung, reaching to the table. As soon as the machine is put in motion, the electricity will pass along the brass arch, and down the chains to which the outside bells are suspended, when they will become charged ; the small brass balls will inmiediately begin to move betvt'een the outside bells and the centre bell, oanying the electricity from the last, as it is conducted ttom the earth by the chain that depends from it ; and as long as this is going on, the beUs will continue to ring.
480 KLECTRICITY.
8XA.IiI5G-WAX WOOL.
Provide a pointed wire at one cud of the condactor, aoAen a piece of aealiiig.
by heat, and fix it on the wire ; let that end of the wax that ia ftirthest from the conductor be still Anther heated bj the application of the flame of a lamp or omdle, and torn the handle of the electrical machine briakly, when the melted wax will instantly become a conductor, and ahow the pas- sage of the electricity by being driven in fine threads like coarse wool.
XLICTXICITT FBOIC A. BLACK CAT.
To receive the electrical shock from a cat, place the left hand under the throat, with the middle finger or the thumb slightly pressing the bones of the animal's abonMfr ; then, on gently passing the right hand alone the back, sensible electric shocks will be felt in the left hand. Very distinct discharges may be obtained, too, by touchinjf the tips of the ears after applying friction to the back of the cat. It will be hardly neces- sary to hint how requisite it is that a good understanding should exist beiweea the experimenter and the cat.
BODXXS SXXXLAKLT XLSCTBinXD KSPBL BACK OTKBB.
This electrical l^t is illustrated in an amusing manner by the figure of a hoed <rf hair. It is placed in a hole in the conductor ; when the machine is set in motion the hair stands on end as seen in the figure, each fibre avoiding its neighbour. Again, if several strips of thin tissue paper be tied at the end of a long wooden rod in connection with the con- ductor, set in the middle of a large apartment, they will open out equally, like radii from the centre of a sphere, on putting the machine in action ; if a conducting body hv approximated to them in their charged state, they will incline towards it from the concentration of the electrical force.
THB XLECTBXCAL SriDBB.
Cut a bit of cork in the form of a spider, ftimish it with eight white-thread loprs, and run through the body a long black-silk thread, by which hang up the imitative insect. Excite a rod of sealing-wax and anothM* of glass, both by flannel, and hold them on each side of the spider, which will vibraie backward and forward.
TEX CHABOES OIT THB COBDXTCTOB A.KD TUB CtJSKIOX ABB BQUA.L BCT OrrOSXTK.
This is proved by coxmecting the conductor and the cushion together by a wire. On revolving the glass no signs of electricity will be obtained trom either; but if the machine be large and in energetic action, the wire will appear to be sonouaded with a lambent flame : otherwise the electric fluids will traverse, and the discharge take place invisibly along the wire. But if the wire be interrupted, vivid sparks will appear at the rapture, arising from inductive action, and consequently discharge taking place.
SLECTRICITY.
m
BPntm ov inm aitd bssxv bt lUcniciTT.
The flrst may be aoeoinplkhed by the little appTatua ahown in the figure. Place it lo that the ball, a, can receive sparka from the condnctor ; ponr spirita of wine into the cap, 0, till the bottom ia Just covered; place the cnp onder the wire, d, then torn the machine, and the sparka that are received by a will fly to the wire through the spirits to the cap, and generaUy set it on fire. To fire resin the Leydcn jar is required. Tie some tow loosely round one of the knobs of the discharging rod, and dip it in powdered resin ; place the naked knob in contact with the oatside of the charged jsr, and bring the other quickly into contact with the balL Discharge will then take places and the resin will burst into a vivid flame.
TO warn owpowDsm bt blsctexcxit.
The powder is placed in the wooden cup, a, either dry or made into a pyn^ TuWicftl form with a little water. The brass ball, b, which movea on a joint, is brought immediately over it» the chains, e d, being connected with the outer and inner snrftice of a Leyden jar. On the discharge taking place, the powder is inflamed. This experiment may be made more amusing by placing the g^mpowder in a brass tube 1| inch long and 6-8ths of an inch in diameter, and enclosing it in a box made of seven pieces of wood, so united by hinges that when put together it may represent a house. The wires through which the discharge is to be passed must bo pnytected from contact with the brass tube by glass or ivory, and to ensure success a foot or so of wet string should be included ia the circuit in order to moderate the velocity of the discharge.
TO BBXAK ▲ WDTB OLAS8 BT XLXCRIOXTT.
^ .^ Hang two carved wires, provided with a knob at
/ ^ M \ Mch end, in a wine glass nearly flill of water, so that
/ ^Km \ ^0 knobs shall be about half an Inifli asunder ; connect
/ ^m \ a with the outer coating of a charged jar, and 6 with
y S V the inner coating, l^ means of a disdiarging rod ; when
^y^ crA^ v^ ^^0 explosion takes place, the glass will be broken with
, violence. In a similar mamier hard wood and even stones
may be split asunder, but for this the charge must be
strong. It is, however, pneatble to send electrical shocks through water in a glass
without breaking it. By employing a glass tube a foot long and one-eighth of an inch
31
492
ELHCTRICITT,
in diameter, and naing erold-wires abont half an inch apeii, Mr. Cathbertaon Boeoeeded in deoompoaing water into ita constitttent gaoea without any ezploaion taking place.
A. VLXABiiro xAinrsa ow azsxBrmro ths xlsctbio uoht.
Paste lome stripe of tin-foil on a plate of glass, having portions cnt out so thai the Bpaoe represents letters, as shown in the figure ; or draw a serpentine line on the glass
with varnish and place on it metallio spangles about one-tenth of an inch apart ; or stick the spirals in a spiral direction round a glass tube : in each case lines of fire, occasioned by sparks passing apjiarently at the same moment through all the spaces, wiU be observed on connecting the fint piece of foil with the conductor, and the last with the ground. If the elec- tric diadiarge be made to pass throogfa a tube or globe of glsss from vhich the air has been nearly ontircly removed by the air-pump, a very beautiful blue or purplish light is produced, filling the whole vessel, and closely .resembling the aurora borealiB.
TEM JJntTSOm OB niAVOHD JAB.
This is a beautiftil and instructive experiment. The figure represents a jmr, tho ooatings of which are made up of fifty-five squares of tin-foil one inch square, each perforated with a hole four-tenths of an inch in diameter, and pasted in five rows inside and outside the jflu*. The diagozLals of the square piecos are placed horizontally and vertically, and their points or angles are separated by about one-twelfth of an inch. The rows of the tin-foil squares ara similarly placed on the inside of the jar, except that their hori- Bontal points nearly touch one another at the centres of the circular holes of the outside squares. I>iiring the charging of the jar, the sparks are seen jumping trom. one metallic surface to the other ; and when the jar is discharged, every part of it within the boundaries of the metalUo spangles becomes momentarily illuminated, presenting in a darkened room an exceedingly brilliant appearance. This experiment fHimishes an admirable iUnatration of the theorit of the Leyden jar. For every spark of electricity that enters the jar a oorresiwnding sp»k of the con- trary electricity leaves it, and when it is remembered that it is the glau ihaX is being charged, not the metallic coatings, the leaping of the sparks fh>m'one si>angle to another becomes at once intelligible. If the jar be placed on an insulated stool, or sus- pended by non-conductors in dry air, it immediately ceases to become louunona.
KUCTHICITr.
n»oe ■ little modal of a Lrus oiniioa on a oironlar on the top of & Lejdcn phi&] inBteu] of a boll, aA she figun 1 CODDSCC the ■ymus piece of brua, a, wUh til coating, and arrange it at the duiluice of about half an the monUi ot Uie cannon ; bring the knob, b, of the cannoa in oooUtct nith the condnctor of the machine, and hold > canl be- tween the month of the cannon and the braaa plats, a. ao that It ahall not (ouch either. When Iha Jar faai racelTed a ■ofHcient charge, the eiploiion will pass, and the card irill be perTorated. With a large jar. or. atill batter, a oombioation of jan, called an electrical batter}-, k piece of ttaat plate glaea ma^ not onlj ba broken in fragmenls. but reduced to v impalpable powder, and wood and Uonea nuj be aplit with Tiolance,
to dlacharge Itaslf when ; of the jar is connected 1 aid featbera, attached
Thia ei:peTlraent iUueOatea the fdct that a jar will ba lii the two Doatinga are loo close to each other. The inner ct with [wo wlrea, one of which proceeda to the biidi (made o to p&ecea of linen Uiread). and Uie other proceeda to within a thcrt dietftnoe of the moiile of the gun. The gon la ixmiiected with the onier coating b; ■ wire prooeeding ftom it to the aporteman, and a ilip of tln-fOil which ia pasted along the flgnre to the miuile- Wlkile the jar is being charged. Iha birds will elevate themselves b; electrical repolslon. and whan the charge reaches to a certain degree discharge will lake place
iileofUi
binli; shmrieiqrUiaspTOTing itself lo bo, iu addition I ^ .^ESb Sbot.
ofUie I its other usoflil accotapUilUBeDts,
GCTRO-MAO'ETIBM. that ia, mBRnetum prodocvd t?
Blectricity^ ia ft brilllBot dlaooTery of IhB pnaanb ceumrr^
believed & ooocKUon Eo exlAt beCwoen Kledncity um M&f
Uig DiicoiiuUiioe Uut tha pole* of the oompaM-imdle hai
treqnentlf nrened during Umader-MorTOB. and that the umr eSnt
produced Ij; electricul diachargea. Ta dMenniDe this eoaotaica,
Oeniled. ot Capoiiluiseii, nade •>
mpleu
BQ girvn to slartricity midcT a peCDliBT ronn ; thru baing darived from GttlTanl and ToUa, th« du- Cbeulcsl eledncity would, howavgr, be a flnsr tann Toltaiam, aa k^U u for alectfo-magnetlKn, ainGe the galvasia cnmnt laagaetiun ii oiciiod by chemical agency, that is, by the action of acidi and the elsaCrie power by biction, or by induction from the atinoephars.
GALVANISM AND ELECTRO-MAGNETISM. 485
to noDVca ▲ ciALTAirxG cusBun.
Take a glaas eroblet, and nearl j iOl It with dilated Bulphnrio add, oontainiag one -pBii acid to seven of water ; place in this liquid a piece of two diMimilar metals ; one ihonld be readily acted on by the acid, and the other with greater difflcnlty. Pieces of sine and copper will answer the purpoee extremely well, the sine, however, being first amalgamated with mercniy. To do this, place a little merouy in a saucer, and poor over it some water made acid with snlphnrio acid ; wet the sine with this acid in the first instance, and then apply the merraiy, which will readily spread over the sorfhce. To the upper end of each of these pieces of metal, /~^ r^\\
a piece of copper wire is to be soldered, or fkstened by means of a / wL j I
clamp, which can be boaght for a trifle at any optician's. The end I (^ ' f^
of the wire attached to the piece of copper wire is called the po$iiiv0 \ W t [j
pole of the batterjft a name given to the appamtos ; and that of the \ iM j II
wire attached to the sine, is called the n^oHvt pole. When the \ Im. III I
metals are placed in the dilate salphorie acid, no chemical action \ '^C'^*'-^ / will take place ; bat if yoa bring the end of the wires into contact, \ /
babbles of air will be seen to escape firom both of the plates of metal, \y,.^y and the sine wiU be dissolved gradoally by the add; while a cairent ^ ^
of electridty is established, which pnsscw through the Uqnid from the sine to the copper, and along the wire from the copper back again to the sine, and so on. The current of electridty thoa produced, and which is called the ffoivanie corrent, is, however, ex* trenuly feeble. But if the plates are large enough, the passage of the electrio oarrent is much more evident ; and every time the ends of the wires come in oontactk a spark ia prodooeda and the wires themselves become heated.
AYPUOJLnoir ov ma oALvurao battkbt to BLAsmro, bto.
It was Lieut. -General Pasley who first applied the galvanic battexy to a practically naeftd purpose, and he used it with complete sncoess in the removal of the wreck of the Boyal George, at Spithead. The destruction by gunpowder of the Bound Down Cliff. on the line of the South-Bastem Bailway, on Thursday, 26th January, 1843, an illustra- tion of which we have placed at the head of this chapter, is a most striking example of the succeesftil application of a sdentiflo prindple to a great and important practical purpose. In this grand experiment, by a single discharge from the battery, 1,000,000 tons of chalk were, in less than five mlnotes, detached and removed, and £10,000 and twelve months* labour saved.
TO BBBUOa ICBTALS BBOX THXXB SOLUTIOirS.
Among other properties possessed by the galvanic current is the power of redncing metals firom their metaUio aolntions ; for it can also decompose liquids by separating them into their component elements. In the last two experiments, the bubbles of air that escape from the plates of copper consisted of a gas called hydrogen, one of the ele- ments of water; the oxygen, the other element of water, was separated by the sine plato} botaa flut aa thia took plaosb it oombined itself with the sine, and formed an
AND ELECTRO-UAONBTISM.
og UmIT TlUi lb* ■nlpliiule aald. B nlpbUI a/ lino li tonoM, which renuiui fur ft time in aoliUiaD, but kdamuilB hUi down ia the ahBpe of CTTBtAli. If, howflvor, ^"■**—^ of water uul iiiiphiirlo ecid klooe^ yoa dueclTe in the liquid, in a upanue bIhs. ■ fow OTitala of enlphMa of copper (blue Titriol. ■ campound of mlphurlo add end copper) i aod Instead of bringliig ^e long wine intj contact. 70a pleoe IhalT ends in diie liquid, Iha atretuu of electrlcl(]r leperotet the copper IVom iK ■oIntioD, end the win connected with the line plue beoonua csUed with > bttuuifal depoeit of meUlllo cappv 1 and ihie ncbon will continue until the whole of the copper ifl eepanted trotn the BoluUon, euppoelng the «tretkni of eleoDiclty to be ooniinoed without inlermptlou ; and If you ntteob ■ properEy-prepaicd oaet &om a medal to the wire connected with tbt linc plate, the copper ie dep<iail«d upon the mould, and wbai of a ■afflcieiil Iblclmees it can be remaveil, the mult being a beaatilU oopjr of Iha medal from which the cnet vae tajien^ But it le one thing to ondertcaud theoretically bow thie ie effbcted, and anoiher to be BucceeBfOl in practice i tor when yov- are working with eo mjBteriuue an B^nt ae electricity, many obetaclaA may Intervene to prevent yonr en^ ceeg. The art of producing copiea or medali ia tbi* manner liaa tieen called eleccraCfpe.
a Danlelt'e battery ;
The moat eaiential part ol the apjiiiniliui ia a good bauery. That npreesnUd Id flW mgTBTing is called DanieU'e Cowlaul Butisry, ou the principle uf nvhich all other con- ■tant batteries have been GOnstmclcd. The simple battorie perimeniB, although Ihey produce a current of aleclririty, j become exhausted ; but a Daniciri battery, if properly aU anion fur soma da^. The engnving repreaenu a single < each cell is a battery in itself, but
of these cells are connected logetlier 10 prodDoa a gnua effect 1 the enter oylinder is fbimed of copper, but (0 make ita f inlemaJ cooamctlon iBtelUgible, 11 is repneeulad in th« sn- graTing Be if it WM liansparent 1 the inner cylinder, t, wliich is closed at Iha bottom, is formed of parous tarthcnwaro, or any other porotii substance, and the space between the copper and the earthenware oylinder is Qllad with a saturated aolntiaa of lulphaie of copper. To obtain ■ satuiated solution of tbi« aall. pour bolliog water upon a qeanttty of ayilalB of aolphaw of copper, and continue to add fresh crystals until the wmx^ will dusolve no more ; then allow (he BOlmlon to cxxd, and pour off the clear liquid, leaTing that portian of the ealt Uiar baa Bgsui crystalUied si. the bottom of tlui vesMl. This solutioa being poured into :ha bauery, a piece of copper pierced with holes, n, Is placed inside of tlie copper cylimlert near the top, and a qnanCi^ of ciyilala of copper are laid npon it. It is neceeaary Hut the liquid should ooTer these crystals, which m disaolted iu the water as laal as tits solution deposits lis copper, which. In this forra of battery, takes place on the iniida of tba copper i^llndar, from which it may be detached ever^ now and them A rod or
OALTANISU UJD XLS<TrBO-ICA(INKnsi(.
titala ot line, (, la placed In the poroni enlpbDric etid. A. win, v, ii next suae KooOieT, F, hj tbe copper cyliniler, the
IB prodncUon
to be copied being plaCAd in ftdeoompcningcell, Thie 1> OBoally a long wooden boi, atrongly bonnd logeUior, uid coated on tlie tneldewitb a vamiab mads of raein and Tnoetian red, dl£- voiced in tnrpentine ; two bnuw rode eie laid Bcroei the lop oT (hit box leugibwlBe, and bi one end oT each a ecrew-cLunp is flied, throngli which, whan the betUir}- la In action, the wine, v and r, are paaied and screwed fbst i the decompoeition cell is filled with a solution or Bolphsta of copper, Uie strangtb of the solution depending on the power or the bntter; i a email qoantitf of snlpbniie acid is added to the Bolulion of sulphMeof copper in the deoompoei^on cell; themonlds, B K K, are ban;;, aa seen in the eni;raving. on the brass rod to which the wire that proceeds ftom the lina In the battery ie attached ; on the opposite rod, pleoea of copper, c 0 c, are sospeadod ; and as the copper ie deposluid From the solnUon. tbe acid thoa NC five dissolves these [rieoes at oopper, so that they have lo he tt«qoently renewed.
In thia insUnoe, no deoomposition ceO is used, but simply one of DasieU's hsEteries, (he perTornled oopper plate being removed. The monlda, k k. are placed at the end of wine ettnebed to the eIdo rod, as shown in the engravtag, and part of the copper is depoeited apon these tnonlds i bnl in employing this simple sppa- TStns, great care is necessary tbr tiie porpoee of keeping np the reqni^le strength of Che sotnUon of sntphata of copper ; ff this is not attended to, the copper depoeited will generally bs eiQemely brltUe, so (hat, aHhongh something tnsy be saved by this plan, it is always better to employ a desomposiUon coll, whloh can be made of any shape and suitable Ibr any pnrpoee.
Hooldi or plaster of Fatis may be either taken IVom mMal or from aoother cast in plaster. To take a cast in plaster fft>m a medal, mb tiie fkoaof the medal very alighttj with sweet oil ; then tie a piece of ctiir paper or oard-board ronnd the edge to retain the Uqnid piaster, and place the medal on a Rat boeid ; mix np plasm of Paris to Uie consistence of thick cream, and ponr as mnch as yon consider necmsiy orer the tnedaL It is as well to poor a drop on first, and force it wiUi yoor fingers into the in- scription and abarper paita or the medal, if the work la TMy compUoated j this will
488 OALTAJnaX AND SLEOTBO-MAGNBTISX.
have the «fltoi of ^mrmting air-balibloi in the oaat^ and ihonUI the znoold not \» lemored nntU after the lapse of leyeral honn, to allow the plaster to become paitiaUy dry. After the plaater is perfectly diy, the moulds should be heated and soMared ow with warm tallow or beeswax, which, being warmed at a flre» will melt and sink into
the pores, so as to render the plaster imperrions to water ; the back and sides of the mould should then be painted OTer with Brunswick black, or any other eomnum varnish ; a small hole is then to be made in the side to insert thewire by which it is to be suspended ; the end cf the win is then dipped in the tarnish and thrust into the hole. When the Tamish is dry, the fttoe of the mould must be rubbed over with finely' powdered blacklead, using a veiy soft brush, and taking oare that none of the blaeUesd remains in hunpe in any of the narrow cuttings of the mould; the blaoUead moat also be oanied up as high as the Buspendiag wiie^ to fona a metalHo connection betweoi the wire and the Iteoe of the mould.
onnojLL oasiBTAnovs am tAxaQ as xiacTBorm oorr.
To be sncceasftil in taking an electrotype copy of a medal or any other work of art three circumstances must be attended to, namely, the power of the batteiy, the strength of the solution of sulphate c^ copper, and the sise of the mould and piece of copper opposed to it. ** If the battery is too large, or the copperplate in the decompoeition odl too large, or if the mould is too small, hydrogen as well as copper will be mlraflod, and the deposit will be the dark powder ; the same will occur if the solution in the deoooH position cell containa too much acid, or too little sulphate c^ copper. To rectiiy ttiis, the battery maybe made smaller by pouring out some of the solution, and so exciting lea of ita suzlhce ; or a smaller copper plate may be used in the decomposition cell, cxystab of sulphate of copper may be thrown into the liquid contained therein, or the copper plate and mould may be remored flurther apart. Each or all these altezationa may be made, according as circumstances or convenience may dictate ; but a few days' expeh- enoe will be better than pages of instruction. If the battery is too small, or the copper plate in the decomposition cell too small, or if the mould is too large, or if the dccoin- position cell contains too little acid or too much sulphate of copper, or if the weather be too cold, the copper will be deposited very slowly, and will preeent a dull red exterior, and be of a very brittle texture ; and the alterationa neceesaiyto rectify this defect wH) be precisely the reverse of those just mentioned." The time requisite for the completion of the copy of a medal depends on various circumstances — the rapidity of the deposition, the sise of the medal, etc. ; but the quantity of copper dissolved in the decompoaxtion cell la a tolerably accurate guide to the quantity deposited on the moulds. When the electrotype ia complete, there is no difficulty in removing it firom the wax or plaster numMn ; but to rcmove it firom a metidlie mould requires some management. Striking the mould gently on the edge with a ruler, and repeating the blows flkequentiy round Che ohponmferenoe, will in general looeen the electrotype.
CO MLMCno-BTLD OK XLXCi;^0-8TLVllB Alt OBJICT.
To ooter a piece of metal with gold or silver by the electrotype process requirea the
-GALVANISM AND SLECTBO-MAGNETISX.
468
nine apparatas aa in the previona ixutanoe: but the liquid in the deooapoettion cell
must, of coone, be of a difltoent nature, either a soln- ^ p
tion of salt of gold or silver ; and instead of copper for
the positiye pole, a piece of gold or sUver moat be used.
If the olyect is small, a piece of gold or silver wire will
be sofficieut for the purpose. The decomposition cell
for the purpose of gilding or silvering should be of
glass ; and as the solution Is expensive, it should be
no larger than necessary. If several small olgects are
to be gilt, th^ may be arranged as shown in the engraving. F is a wire connected
with the copper or positive pole of the battery, to which a thin plate of silver or gold
ia attached, and N represents three wires connected with the '^ sine or negative pole of the battery ; to the end of each of these wires a mould is fixed. If the olq'ect to be covered with the precious metal is larger, such, for instance, as a cap, the following arrangement may be made : — To the end of the wire, F, ia fixed the thin plate of metal, which is bent so as nearly to surround the ol]gectk and the wire N is attached to the olqect itself, which |^'. must be entirely covered
with the solution. As the plate of metal does not
entirely surround the article to be gilt, one or the
other must be shifted from time to time, for the pur- pose of equalizing the dqxwit of the metal firom the
solution. If you wish to gild the inside of a cup, you
can dispense with a decomposition cell, as the cup
itself forms the cell (see Bngraving). The wire N is
aorewed, by means of a clamp, against the lip of the
cap, at some spot where it is not required to gild the metal ; when the clamp is fixed,
that portion of the inside of the cup that is not to be covered with gold is varnished ; and
the eolation, when poured in, must fill the cup to above the lower line of the varnish.
TO nMTAXE THX OOLD AVD SILVZa BOLVnOVS.
To prepare the silver solution, dissolve a piece of dean nitrate of silver in distilled or rain water, then pour on it liquid caustic potash {Uqmor poUuBot), and a brown powder will be instantly precipitated — this is oxide of silver ; and if the clear liquid be poured off, clean water must be added to the precipitate to wash it. When it has again settled, the clear liquid is again poured off, and the remainder may be dried and kept in a phial for use. The best method of making a solution of this oxide is by the em- ployment of (cyanide of potassium, dissolved in water, which will perftetly dissolve the oxide. In common practice, the yellow salt known as pmssiate of potash is employed, the oxide of silver bdng first boiled in a strong solution of this salt in water. The article to be silvered shoold be well cleaned by immersion in a weak acid ; it may then be
400
OALYANISM AlTD SLECTROKAaNSTIBlC.
boiled in the aolatioii, and by that means it will obtain a thin coating of silver ; it is thA Uttaohed to the batteiy in the manner already described, and a stream of electridQ' passed throngh tbe solution. The quantity of silver deposited may be known by csre- ftilly weighing the plate of silver, and ascertaining how mnch it has l(»t. With respect to gold, the solution may be prepared by dissolving gold in nitro-muriatie acid {aqua reffia), composed of nitric acid and muriatic acid ; canstic potash is added to this soln* Uon, and oxide of gold is precipitated. The oxide of gold is then boiled in a solution of prussiate of potash in water, as in the case of silver ; but a thin plate of gold most, of course, be used in the decomposition cell instead of a plate of silver.
rAlCILIAK GALVAVIC STVSCn.
Cover the point of your tongue with tin-foil, and its middle part with gold or sitTer leaf, so that the two metals touch, when a sourish taste will be produced* Thissimide efibct is termed ** A Gal^ranio Tongue."
Mr. Brande directs the exi)eriment to be thus performed : — '* If a piece of sIlTer l« placed upon the tongue, and a piece of sine under it, no efibct is perceived whitst the metals are kept apart : but, if their ends be brought into contact, we immediately per- ceive a saline taste, and a peculiar sensation resembling a slight electrical shock : sometimes, also, when the surface of the metals is extensive, a flash of light aj^wut to pass before the ^ee."
Oalvanic experiments may be made with the legs of a flrog. A live flcmnder will answer nearly the same purpose. Lay the fish in a plate, upon a slip of sine, to whicli is attached a piece of wire, and put a shilling upon the flounder's back ; then touch tbt shilling with the wire, and at each contact strong muscular contractions will be prodooed.
ICAOmBTIO BTFXCTS OF THS OA.LVAJriC CITBKm.
The little apparatus shown in the figure is a very convenient arrangement Ihr exhibiting the actions of a galvanic current on the magnetic needle, a a, two toiced wooden pillars, screwed into a base-board, B, and surmounted by two mercury cups, c c. D, a copper wire, the ends of which dip into the mercury, as do also the wires connected with the opposite extremities of a Daniell's constant battery. A current of galvanic electri- city can thus, by shifting the wires, be made to pass in either direction along the wire D { 0 is the magnetic needle nicely poif^cd on a wire which, by means of the screw, G, may be e:cTnted or depressed, and the nfeedte thna aet
OALVAKISM A3W BLECTRO-ttAGNBTISlt.
491
Mate abow or below the wire, D, or it may be remoyed and replaced bj the dipping needle, K
The experlmentii which may be made with thia little apparatii» are very important! oonstitating. aa they do, the very baaia of Bleetro4ei00raphy, Those deainnu of be- coming aoqnajnted with the leading principles of thia beaatiftel acience are recom- mended to repeat the experiments oyer and over again nntil th^ are ftdly oonversani with all the affections of the magnetic needle and the oondocting wire.
nmicATxoir ov sioirjL&s bt kaoxbtxo nxsLi.
Place the apparatos jnst deecribed in Che magnetic meridian, that is, in a position SQCh that the magnetic needle properly x>oiaed and in its place, is exactly parallel with the win D. Firtt, let the wire be owr the needle, then nmke contact with the batteiy, and it will be fonnd that ike pole qfthe needle v^ich is nearest to the negative end qf the hattery will always move towards the ioest. Second^ let the conducting wire be placed under the needle, the end of the needle which before moved towards the west will now move towards the ecui. Thirds let the wire be over the needle as in the first experi- ment, bat shift the wires so that the gal'^nmic cnrrent may pass along the wire in a contrary direction, and it win be foond that the movement of the needle is exactly the opposite to that in the>lr»< experiment, and so also if the wire be placed nnder the needle, the motion of the needle will be Che reverse of that in the second experiment. There ia never any variation in these results, and it is easy to see how they may be made to indicate signals. Thns, suppose that instead of the wire passing either one* over or once under the needle, it is bent so that it passes both over and under the needle at the same time, but in oppo- site directiona, aa shown in the figure, ^ c=^ then the galvanic current traversing j j the wire above the needle conspires ^ i ■ equally with the current passing along If^
the Wire below to deflect the needle
f^om its natural position, and so the eflriBCt is doubled. Again, suppose, in- stead of simply passing once over and onee under the needle, the conducting wire be caused to make a number of convolutions, the deflecting ix>wcr of the current will be proportionally increased, and an instrument will be obtained by which the needle may be moved by a very feeble current. Conceive now such an arrangement placed Tertically instead of horiaontally, and yon have the indicating instrument of the electric telegraph. Now, electricity passes along a copper wire with a velocity of not less than 288,000 mUes in a second t It is evident, therefore, that such an apparatus may be placed at Liverpool, and the battery at London, and that provided the metallic communications are carefully made, Xtae movements of the needle will take place in accordance with the above laws, and 4b a tima so small that it may be considered an instantaneous ; and lastly, if we tnpposa
QALViSmi AND KLKl^niO-IUQNCTIBlL
AlUHMgh Uw Uar improTgiMBM In elactro-talegnphlo m
• bne led to tte
\ W \\k m
V ^ '«v
y v/ y//
Q If L
X Y r
ii liculed both
Ths alplwbei
n Ihe right uid tho lelt band «ide ot tbe neWUe i •ome letMn rvqnlra ronr moTemeiita at ths needle, bat tba lut motion which conipletai Uie in- dkuioii of ■ leuar sitaUad on the rvU huid aide ■ alwajfl K morement to tbe riffht ; lu lik« "■■*p*vprr the taM motioD which compleu* the IsdioadOD o[ K huotr on tbe I^ Bide U slwsyi m moTsment (d ths I«/t. for example, the leOer W ia Indicated hj ;?Mr motioiB oT the needlg, three to tbe led and one to the right, Tbe opentor moit bear In mind that the deflectioiia nt the aTmboli for each letter cxmhhiwi In the diiecUaa oT the ■honmarkt, and mil with the Ions osaai the ddtactkniB dT a tingle needle ma; thuabemadeto denote all the letUra of U» alphabet. The leOera an indicated bj the movement ot the u/^ier half of tbe tieedle, (he niuaerala by ttuisa of the iMcvr hair : tor example, the Ogan t ia deaigtialed bjr the moUim of the lower eitiemit; once to the right and once to Uie lelt i the flgnra B br a the left and once lo the right, and ao on. The coil with Ita a
GALTANISU AKS BLBtTTRO-lUGNETIBlL (M
•D appamtiu for qulokly ihnttliiK on, shQUlng off, sua cbaDginfr tfac direction et tfa* enrrent, «o u to Tory tha Dotlooa of Uia necdla, Is ■btoloMI; iiuUipguable. Numeroiu O0DtrlTu]C«i of gnat Ingotirilty have bean in- .
Taniad, bat the ona shown in thi flgnre will ^^ / ■'•
aarra very well Tor private Bxpfiritnaating. On a aqusrad block of wood aia Biad tha two brass bands, B B, C C, umnioated at their ai- tmaitiea b; sqnare blocks of brass with bind- ing screws, and cup-shaped holes. D D, two flat pieces of brass connected and losoluad by tba glass rod, B. Thaaa are tha biHk pieces, and move oa joiuls, F T, where they are con- nscledbjlha wires, PtT, with the benaiy. The other binding screws M Uie terminations of tha biBSfl bands serve b through which the
repreMating a teleffrapblo signalling appantos, mar with two or three hundred Ibet of ti-ni.tjri wire.
Some of ODT Toong readers tnaj have oonunenoed tlie prudaot habit of leaving their Borplns gold, silTsr, or eren copper, to accomolale In the bands of tha banlur. Thost who hare taken la pmctisltig the nsefDI art of eleetroiTping will ecarcel; need to be remitided that there is another way of canstag tl maj frequentlf find thenuelvea GoncflnOmtlug their
produce efl^cts which nppfz magicnli ,
IT roreCUben, hnve be«D efleetHl lolel; b; its xmacj.
I (^ J nil it4 brsocbce, bat Jnerel; to direct the inquiring ouDd of yxyath ^-^ « •'■ skim tightly and agreeabl; oiar in EUrikoe i for vhich purpoH
oil ai mmuaed, m bftTe addril
ie expIasUions of the decompoailioDa, or cliemlisl ohanKU. irhich Mke plKca, in et to ihow that, elthough mlmnn magical in appesnnce, they an di
CHEMISTRY. *»5
HCTn^ fixed and nnerring law of Natnro. Withont any Airthor prefatory obsenratiozui, we B^f^^^ now commence our chemical recreations.
CXTSTALLIZATIOX.
1. ^DiaeolTB one ounce of sulphate of soda (61auber*s salts) in two ounces of boil- ing water ; pour it, whUe hot, into a phial, and cork it dose. In this state, it will not crystalliKe when cold ; but if the cork be remoYed, the dystallizaUon will commence and proceed rapidly.
The experiment will occasionally fiiil under unfttvourable circumstances. Should this be the case, drop into the fluid a crystal of Glauber's salt, and the whole will immediately commence shooting into beautifUl crystals.
2. — ^Repeat the above experiment with a small thermometer immersed in the solution, and corked up with it. YThen cold, remove the cork, and the thermometer will be seen to rise. This experiment shows that heat is given out in the act of ciystallisation.
3. — Take half an ounce of common soda and dissolve it in about its own weight of water; then pour into the solution half an ounce of sulphuric acid (oil of vitriol)* When the mixture is cold, crystals of sulphate of soda will be found in the liquor,
4, — ^Take common soda, and pour upon it muriatlo add ; this will produce muriate of soda, our common table salt.
6. — ^Take carbonate of ammonia (the common volatile smelling salts), and pour npon it muiiatio acid until the efitenrescence ceases. The produce will be a solid salt, vis., muriate of ammonia, or crude sal ammoniaa
6. — ^Mix two ounces of oxide of lead (litharge) with three drachms of muriate of ammonia, and submit the whole to a strong heat in a cmdble. The heat will drive off the ammonia, and the muriatic add will combine with the lead, forming a muriate of lead. When the operation is complete, pour the ingredients into a metal veesd to oool and crystallise. This is the patent yellow used by painters.
In this experiment the lead is dissolved by the muriatic acid, which has been dis* engaged by the heat driving off the ammonia with which it was previously combined.
Alum BcukeU. — ^Make a small basket, about the sise of the hand, of iron wire or split willow ; then take some lamp-cotton, untwist it, and wind it round every xxnrtion of the basket. Then mix alum, in the proportion of one pound with a quart of water, and boil it until the alum is dissolved. Pour the solution into a deep pan, and in the liquor suspend the basket, so that no part of it touch the vessel, or be exposed to the air. Let the whole remain perfectly at rest for twenty-four hours ; when, if you take out the basket, the alum will be found prettily ciystallised over all the limbs of the cottoned frame. In like manner, a cinder, a piece of coke, the sprig <^ a plant, or any other object, suspended in the solution by a thread, will become covered with tjeautinil crystals. If powdered turmeric be added to the hot solution the crystals will be of a bright yellow ; if litmus be used instead, th^ will be of a bright red ; logwood will yield them of a purple, and conunon writing ink of a black tint ; or, if sulphate of copper be used instead of alum, the crystals will be of fine blue. But the coloured alum-crystals are much more brittle than those of pure alum, and the colours fly ; the
405 CHEMISTRY.
beet way of prBMrving thorn is to place them under a glass shade, with a sanoer oon* taining water; this keeps the i^moepfaere constantly satorated with moistora, the crystals never become too dry, and their teztore and ooloor undergo but little change.
A QroHp qfvarUma CoUmred OryttaJs. — ^Take half an ounce each of the solphatas of iron (green Titriol), copper (blue vitriol), sine (white vitriol), soda, alnmine (alnm), magnesia (Epsom salts), and potssh ; dissolve these salts in separate vessels, and afte^ wards pour them altogether into a large vessel and allow them to remain at rest until by the evaporation of the water the different salts again begin to czystallize ; and when the water has evaporated, and the crystals are diy, the appearance will be extremelj beautiftil, in consequence of the various colours which will be found intermingled.
Seavtifkil Cryatats of Bismuth. — ^Having melted a quantity of the metal bismuth in an iron ladle, remove, by means of knife or otherwise, the dross or scum that floiUa on the top, then allow it to rest until a crust of hard metal is formed on the sur&oe ; as soon as tiiat is the case, make a hole in the edge of this crust, and pour off the xDotal that still remains fluid in tiie centre of the mass ; when it is entirely cold, remove the jiippar crust by means of a file, and if the experiment has been properly performed, the inside of the mass will be found covered with a beauUfVil group of crystals of bis^ muth, suflSLciently curious and pleasing to form an interesting mantel-piece omamflmL
STMPATHinO DTKS.
1. — ^Write with a diluted solution of muriate or nitrate of cobalt, and the t^/iilng will be invisible ; but, upon being held to the fire, it w£U appear perflBctiy distinct, and of a blue colour: if the cobalt be adulterated with iron, the writing will appear of a green colour. When taken from the fire, the writing win again disappear. If a land- scape be drawn, and all finished with common colours ezoept the leaves of the trees, the grass, and the sky, and the latter be finished with this sympathetic ink, and the two former with the adulterated solution just mentioned, the drawing will seem to be un- finished, and have a wintay appearance ; but, upon being held to the fire, the giaaa and the trees will become green, the sky blue, and the whole warm and beautiftLL
2. — ^Write with a diluted solution of muriate of copper, and the writing will Im in- visible when cold ; but upon being held to the fire it will appear of a yellow colour. A landscape may be drawn and finished, as in the last experiment, and, in addition to the sympathetic inks then used, corn-fields may be painted or finished with the above ink. The whole will have a veiy dreur and bleak aspect till held before a fixe, when it will instantly assume a cheerfhl and lively appearance, as if by magic.
3. — Write with a weak solution of alum in lemon-juice, and the characters win rem^n invisible until wetted with water, which wiU render them of a greyish colour, and quite transparenL A letter written with a solution of rock-alum alone, being dried, and having a small quanti^ of water poured over it^ the writing wiU appear of a whiter colour than the paper.
4. — ^Write with a weak solution of sulphate of iron (green vitrioQ ; when dry it win be invisible ; but if wetted oret with a brash, dipped in tinotore of galls, or a decoction of oak-bark, the writing will appear black.
CHBIOSTRY. 497
6. — ^Write with the above solution ; when dry, wash it orer with a solntion of imiaeiate of potash, and the writing will be of a beautiful blue.
6. — Write with rice-water, and when dry it will be inyisible j but wash it over with a solution of iodine, and the words will appear of a violet colour. This was practised with great success in sending invisi)>le dispatches during the late war in India. The first letter of this kind was received tram Jellalabad, concealed in a quill. On opening it, a small paper was unfolded, on which appeared only a single word, <* iodine." The magic liquid was applied, and an important dispatch from Sir Robert Sale stood forth.
In all secret, or sympathetic, writing, as it is called, there is a chemical decompo- sition : this is more particularly striking in the experiments 4 and ft ; in the former of which, the gallic acid unites with the iron, forming a black ; and in the latter, the prussic acid unites with the iron, forming a blue, or pmssiate of iron.
BXAT AVD COLB.
1. — ^Take one ounce of muriate of ammonia, the same quantity of nitrate of potash (saltpetre), and two ounces of sulphate of soda. Reduce these salts separately into powder, and mix them gradually with four ounces of water; the result will be, that as the salts dissolve cold will be produced. A thermometer, immersed in the mixture, will sink at or below the freezing point. If a test tube bo filled with water, and im- mersed in the mixture, the water will soon be trozoa.
2. — ^Put a small quantity of sulphuric acid (oil of vitriol) into a glass or cup, and pour upon it about half its quantity of oold water : upon stirring it, the temperature will rise to many degrees above boiling water. In mixing sulphuric acid with water, great care should be taken not to do it too suddenly, as the vessel may break from the increased heat, and the acid be spilled on the hands, clothes, etc. ; the greatest caution is neces- sary in using itt as it will bum almost anything it touchee.
3. — ^Oissolve a little lime in muiiatio or nitric add, then pour some of the liquid into a glass, and add to it a few drops of sulphuric add; the whole will become nearly a aolid mass, and, at the same time, give out a strong heat.
4. — Set a quart pot upon a stool, on which a little water has been previously thrown, before the fire ; put a handftil of snow into the pot, and also a handfrd of com- mon salt. Hold the pot fkwt with one hand, and with a short stick stir the contents with the other, as if you were churning butter ; in a few minutes the pot will freeze so hard to the stool, that with both hands you can scarcely disengage ^t.
5. — ^The most powerfVil of all freezing mixtures is a mixture of muriate of lime and snow. To produce the greatest efibct by this mixture, equal weights of the salt finely powdered and newly-fallen snow must be quickly mixed together. This is the mixture that is employed to freeze quicksilver.
6. — Fill a common thermometer tube with cold water, and suspend It in the air by a string. If the tube be oontinually sprinkled with ether, the water will presently 1>ecome ice ; the quick evaporation of ether, in the above experiment, carrying awey the heat from the water.
tfS CHEMISTRY.
BXPXHIXXVTS WTTK PKOflPBORITB.
In dealing with phosphoros the young experimenter shonld be eepeoiaUy ouvftil. It should not be uxed in pieces larger than a moderate eixed ehot ; it shonld be cat under mist with a sharp i>enknife, holding the stick with a pair of ftnroepa ; it ehoald not be touched with the fingers, as the warmth of the hand may, if it is dzy, eanse it to ignite spontaneously, and when once ignited it is very difficult to extinguish.
Tht Ma^qf Flame, — ^Take six pert of oil of olives and one of phosphoma ; let them digest well together, and preserve the solution, which, in the dark, will beeome lummoos.
The Miniature Thamee on Fire. — ^Let fkU a Ibw drops of phosphoiiaed ether on a lump of loaf>sugar j place the sugar in a glass of wann water, and a veiiy boantiftil appearance will be instantly exhibited ; the efTect will be increased if the sorfhoe of the water, by blowing gently with the breath, be made to undulate.
A Fountain qf Fire. — Put fifteen grains of finely granulated sine, and idx grains of phosphorus, cut into small pieces under water, into a conical wine-glaas. Mix in another glass a drachm, by measure, of sulphuric acid with two drachma of water. Then take the two glasses into a cUurk room, and there pour the diluted aoid over tht Kinc and phosphorus in the other glass ; in a short time beautifUI jets of bluish flatts will dart from the surface of the liquid, the mixture will be quite luminous, and a column of beautiftil luminous smoke will rise from the glass. This experimrat is a splendid one, and may be very easily performed.
Photphoreeceni Spar, — Coarsely powder some fluor spar, and sprinkle !t^ in a dark room, on a fire shovel made hot (but not to redness), and it will emit a beautiftil phos* phorescent light for some time.
The Phoephorie Steam Bath. — ^Lay a small piece of phosphorus upon a bit of ^luat, place the glass uxwn the surfSsce of hot water in a basin, and the phosphorus will Inflame.
Ignition by Percueeion. — Put a piece of phosphorus, the sise oi a large pin'a head, into the middle of some dry cotton, previously dried on blotting-paper ; strike It with a hammer on an anvil, and it will inflame.
To Bum Brown Paper by Phoephoru* and Friction. — ^Wrap a grain of phospboros, dried on blotting-paper, in a piece of brown paper, rub it with some hard body, and it will set fire to the paper.
To Light a Candle by a Qlase qf Water, — ^Take a little piece of phosphoros of the size of a pin*s head, and with a piece of tallow stick it on the edge of a drtnki&if-^teai. Then take a lighted candle, and having blown it out, apply it to the glass, when it will immediately be lighted.
Luminpue Writing in the Dark. — Fix a small piece of solid phosphorus is a qnill and write with it upon paper ; if the paper be then removed to a dark room, the writang will appear beautiftdly luminous. The luminous appearance arises from t2ie Uoec com- bustion of the phosphorus, and the peculiar odour is occai^oned by the prodnctioa of a remarkable substance called oeone, which is supposed to be oxygen in a state of *»^f%?t*^ chemical activity.
coxBusnoir nr nm inroxa watk*.
1 . — The Well qf Fire, — ^Tbrow a flaw grains of chloiate of potash into a tall gteas nboo t
CHEMI8TBT. 409
three {Mrte filled with cold water, then add a few fragments of phosphome about the BiM of small shot. Pat the lower end of a long glass ftinnel In contact with the ehliv rate at potash and poor down it some oH of vitriol ; the phosphorus will soon enter into combnstioxi, forming what has been called a " well of fire."
S. — Aiuiher WiM qf Fir€, — ^Add, gradnaUy, one ounce, hy measure, of sulphuric aoid to fire or six ounces of water, contained in an earthenware bssln ; throw in an ounce of granulated sine, and a small bit or two of phosphorus, when phosphuretted hydrogen gaa will be produced, which takes flre immediatelj it comes in contact with atmoepherio afar j so that in a short time the whole sur&ce will become luminous, and oomtinne so kng as gas is generated, which may be seen darting firom the bottom through the fluid with great rapidilgr.
d.^Bsd-hoi Fir0-^HM in Waier,'~Tm a saucer with water, and let fisll into it a grain or two of potassium ; the potassium wiU instantly burst into flame with a slight eocplosion, and bum yividly on the surface of the water, darting, st the same time, from one side of the vessel to the other, with great violence, in the form of a beautiAiI red- hot fire-balL Be oareflil not to approach the &oe too near to the saucer during the experiment, aa the burning potassium is sometimes thrown with some violence from the water. Thia is the experiment which has recently been advertised as " Devil's Tears."
4. — WUl-o*'(h9-ioiap. — ^Take a glass tumbler three parts fllled with water, and drop into it two or three lumps of phoephuret of lime ; deocmiposition will take place, and phosphuretted hydrogen gas be produced, bubbles of which will rise through the water, and take flre immediately th^ burst through the surftuie, terminating in beautifrd ringlets of smoke.
0. — Oretm F^ wnder Water. — ^Put into a glass tumbler two ounces of water, and add, first, a piece or tvro of phosphorus about the sise of a pea, then thirty or forty grains of ohlorate of potash ; next pour upon these, by means of a funnel with a long neck reaching to the bottom of the glass, five or six drachms of sulphuric acid. As soon as the aoid comes in contact with the ingredients flashes of fire begin to dart from under the Burfhee of the fiuid. When this takes place, drop into the mixture a few pieces of phoephuret of Ume ; this wiU immediately illumine the bottom of the vessel, and cause a stream of fire, of an emerald green colour, to pass through the fluid.
Here it may be necessary to caution our young fHends not to exceed the quantities vre have directed to be used ; for although we have avoided everything that is danger^ oii8» yet an excess (A quantity, in some cases, might be attended with inconvenience.
comvsnoir avd xxplosiov.
1. — ^Bruise, and slightly moisten with water, a few crystals of nitrate of copper ; add a IIbw drops of water, then roll them up quickly in a piece of tln-fbil. In about s minute the tin-foil will begin to smoke, and soon after take flre and explode with a slight crackling nnise.
S. — ^Put a small quantity of oalfiinw! magnesia into a cup, and pour over it a sufR- cient quantity of sulphuric acid to cover it. Almost immediately combustion will fommenoe, and sparks will be thrown out in sill directions.
jyX) CHEaOSTBT.
8. — ^Pnt a litUe dxy jmlvBrised ebarcoftl into a warm tea<«ap, and ponrorer H vma nitric acid, when combustion will take place, as in the preceding experimeut. The tea* cup should be placed in a soup-plate containing a little water.
4. — Pour a table-spoonftil of oil of turpentine into a cup, and place it in the epen air ; then put about half the quantity of nitric acid, mixed with a few drops of aulphnrie, into a phial, Oastened to the end of a long stick ; pour it upon the oil. and it will immediately burst into flames, and continue to give out much light and heat.
fi. — Put a little iodine into a saucer, and drop on it a bit of phosphorus ; the tvo substuioes will manifest a strong affinity for each other, and very shortly combine wiili the evolution of flame, producing a mixture of the two iodides of phosphorus, whicL remains in the saucer as a compoimd of a reddish colour.
6. — Mix a few grains of chlorate of potash with twice their quantity of loaf sacnr reduced to powder ; place this mixture upon a plate, dip a piece of wire in sulphuric acid, and let a single drop fkll trova. its end upon the mixture ; it yru\ immediately burst iuto flame. The mixture should be made on the plate, or a sheet of glased paper, wiih a paper>knife.
7. — ^Take a metal button, and rub it for a short time against a piece of wood or stone, then touch a small piece of phosphorus with it ; the latter will immediately take fire and bum.
8. — Put a small piece of German tinder into the lower end of a syringe, then dnir
n the piston and force it suddenly down by giving it a smart blow against a wall cr
table, when the tinder will be ignited, either from the sudden condensation of the air
or the friction occasioned by the movement of the piston. Syringes for this pnrpoM
nre sold at a>>out half-a-goinea each.
0. — Combuttion hif concentrating the sun*i rayi. — Hold a double convex glass, of about two inches diameter, to the sun, about mid-day, when shining very bright, at in focal distance from a piece of coin, which will soon become so hot that it eannot be touched with the Anger. The intensity of the heat produced will depend upon the siie find convexity of the glass, and also on the season of the year. Gunpowder, phc»- p'lorus, etc., may be set on fire in this manner; and, with a rery poworftU glass, most of the metals may be melted.
FBScirnA.Tioir or icetals. — xxtallic raxxs.
The Lead Tree. — Put into a decanter about half an ounce of acetate of lead (susv of lead), and iill it to the bottom of the neck with distilled or rain water; thm sos* pend, by a bit of silk or thread, fastened also to the cork or stopper, a piece of saxe wire, two or three Inches long, so that it may hang as nearly in the centre aa poasibls ; and place the decanter whera it may not be disturbed. The sine will very aooa b< covered with beautifUl czystals of lead, which are precipitated from the aftlntaon, and this will continue until the whole becomes attached to the sine, asanming a tree-like fionn.
Ths Tin Tree. — ^Into a similar vessel to that used for the lead tree, poor distilled cj min water, as before, and put in three drachma of muriate of tin, and aboat ten dzopa of nitric acid. When the salt is dissolved, suspend a piece of sine wire, aa in the last
CHEMISTRY.
ver, and llll up ititled or ntio wM«r [ ui DUTice or nwTCQjy,
ipiuisd Id the mott beaatiral ubo- iDblins: real T«getAtirm. Tha ibova eTperltnenU Bboir tbe pre- cipitsUoa of one metal bf Bnother, OKini; U> iha UBuit}' ihai etlau betwem lUem. 1,1 '-^-/-.-'i^ TliB mfUl in soluUoo bSTing B greater
' ' - adlull/ (br the pure metal nupended in
II, precipiUlM flMlT hvm the •olntion, nnee flrml/ utachedUiento. Tl.s w, produced *• aboTe deicribed, !■ nrequmtly c-Uod Arbor Kana, or the rre« of Diana.
aUter. — Poor a liola nlide acid npon a unall plsce of pun ailTer. or lilver leaf, and It will be diuolred la a few mioiitei.
O^^ier, — Foor a Uttle diluted nitric acid npon a email pieoa of copper, and. In a ahoct time, the copper will be dUeoived, and the Bolntion will have a beaatiAil blue colonr.
Lead. — Four a liKle diluted nltrle add upon a imaU piece or two of lead, which it will Brat convert into a wUte powder and (heti diuolve.
Inm. — pQur aome mlphnric acid, dilnled with about fonr timea Its bulk of water, Dpon a few Iron ailngl ; a Tiolenc etTbrreaance will enine, and In a little lime the fllinga will be diuolved.
Toprvduee a Hue b// wi^ng lica entoiiTlru JIuUlt. — Pnnrn litlloof the solntlon of
potaah, and the whole will aaaama abeantiftil bine colcnr. In this Gi|>erlment, decom- poeition takaa place ; the snlphuric acid leavlniir the iron to unite wiUi the pntasb, in<l tbe pruaelc acid leaving the poUah to unite with the Imn. formiag pnualatc of Iron, and nlphaM of poUah -, the HlphMe of poueh remaining in ■olntion. wblle the pnu- alale of iron li alowly predpUatad, lUUnt: U the tiouoni in Ihe atate of a One powder. Thii ll Pmaslan blue.
AiuMer Um cdIw?- prodactdjtvm tao go'ourltn fitiidi. — Pat into a glsaa a iioantiij
502 CHEIOSTRT.
of water, and diasolve therein a few oryatals of salphate of copper, then pour in anoall quantity of liquid ammonia, and the whole will immediately be changed to a beantaftil blue. In this experiment the ammonia tinitee to the copper, fbrming ammonimei of copper, which ia of a beautiftd blue, approaching to violet.
To product a ytUow from two coUmrlmt Jluidg. — Pour a little of the aolnfion of nitrate of biamuth into a glass, then add to it a amaU quantitj of solution of proaaiate of potash, and a yellow colour wHl be immediately prodnoed. In this ezperimeDt^ as in the last, we hare decomposition ; nitrate of potaah and pmasiate of bisnmth ate formed, the prussiate of bismuth giving it the yellow colour.
To produce a brown from two colourlmt fiuid». — Pour a little of the aohitkm of sulphate of copper into a glass, then add to it a amall qqantily of a solution of prosaiata of potash, and a reddish brown will be produced. In this experiment we have sal- phate of potaah and prussiate of copper, which gives the brown colour, aooordiiig to the principle just laid down.
To make black ink from two colaurleu Jluide. — ^Put into a glass a quantity of water, and add to it some tincture of galls ; then put in a small quantity of a aolnium of sulphate of iron, and the whole will immediately become black. Here, as in tlie p>e* ceding experiments, decomposition is efibcted ; the gaUie acid uniting with tha iron, forms our common writing ink.
To change a blue liquid to a red. — Pour a little of the inftiaion of litmna, or of red cabbage, into a wine-glass, and add to it a drop or two or two of nitric or tnlphnrie acid, which will immediately change it to a red colour.
To change a blue liquid to green. — ^Pour a little of the inltislon of violets into a wine- glass, and add to it a few drops of a solution of potaah or soda, when it will be changed to a beautiftil green ; to which, indeed, alkalies change most of the vegetable eolonn.
To change a red liquid Hnto various colours. — Put a little of the infaatefn of red cabbage into three difbrent glasses ; to the first, add a Uttle muriatic or nitrie add ; to the second, a little of the solution of potash ; and to the third, a little of the aoliition of sulphate of alumina, and potash (alum). The Uquid in the first glass will be oonvarted to a fine crimson, that in the second to abeautifhl green, and that in the third to a purple.
To make a colourless liquid become blue, lilac, peat^-cohured, and red, trtfikntf touching it. — ^Put a drachm of powdered nitrate of cobalt into a phial, oontainlnflr an ounce of the solution of causUo potaw, when the decomposition of the s^ SAd pre- cipitation of a blue oxide of cobalt will take place. Cork the pUal and the Uqaid will assume a blue colour, firom which it will pass to a lilac, afterwards to a peach tint, and finally, to a light red.
To remove, and afterwards restore, the colour qf a ribbon. — ^Dip a roae*e61oiiLrad ribbon into nitric acid, diluted with eight or ten parts of water, and as soon aa tirt colour disappears, which it will do in a short time, take out the ribbon, and put it into a very weak alkaline solution ; when the alkali will quickly neutralize the acid, and the CJkrar will re-appear.
The faded rose restored. — ^Take a rose that is quite fiftded, and throw some atilpbnr on a ohafing>dish of hot coals j then hold the rose over the ftimes of the sulphur, and
CHEMISTRY. 503
H will become qnite white } in this itate dip it into water, pnt It into a box or drawer ior three or foor hoore, and when taken out, it will be quite red again.
Tks ProUm» lAqind^ — ^A red liquor, which, when poured into diflbrent glaaees, will become yellow, blue, black, and violet, may be thna made : — Inftiae a few shavinge of logwood in common water, and when the liquor is red, pour it into a bottle ; then take three diinking glaaees ; rinse one of them with strong vinegar, throw into the second a small quantity of pounded alum, which will not be obeerved if the glass has been newly washed, and leave the third without any preparation. If the red liquor in the bottle be poured into the first glass, it will assume a straw colour ; if into the second, it will pass grsdoaUy fh)m bluish grqr to black, provided it be stirred with a bit of iron which has been private^ immersed in good vinegar ; in the third glass, the red liquor will assume a violet tint.
Tkt Wamdet^ D^, — ^Dissolve indigo in dlhited sulphuric add, and add to it an equal quantity of solution of carbonate of potass. If a piece of white cloth be dipped in this mixture, it will be ^langed to blue ; yellow doth, in the same mixture, may be changed to .green ; red to purple ; and blue litmus jmiptar be turned to red.
Ths Chofrndeom Mi$tsnU. — Mix together, and expoee to a strong heat, in an open erudble, for little more than a quarter of an hour, three jMuts of nitrate of potash, and one of deutoxide of manganese, both in a finely powdered state. The compound thus obtained, possesses the following singular properties : — ^If a few grains of this prepara* tion be put into a glass, and cold water be then poured on it, the liquid will first turn green, and next pass rapidly to imrple, and finally, by beautiftil gradations, to red. If hot water be used instead of cold, the liquid will assume a beantafhl violet colour. The colonzs will be more or less intense, in proportion to the quantity of the oxide used, for a more or less quantity of water; ten grains, ina very little water, will pro* daee a beautiftil green colour, which will pass, with rapidity, to a dark purple, and subsequentty, to red. If a small portion of the chamdeon mineral be used fbr four ounces of water, the colour will be a deep green ; by the addition of more water, it will turn rosy.and become colourless in afew hours, giving, in the process, a yellowish predpitate. When the liquid changes dowly, it is easy to discover other hues, whick it takes in the following order — green, blue, violet, indigo, purple, and red. The phenomena produced by the chamdeon minersl, have attracted the attention of several men of sdenee ; and it seems, f^om the result of thdr experiments, that in those pre- perstJnns of the chamdeon mineral, in which there is a greater proportion of potsss than manganese, the green requires more time to change into the other colours ; and the greater the proportion of manganese, the more intense is the first colour, and the quicker does the liquid acquire the other tints. The eflbct of hot water, in this ex- periment, is mudi jDon powerftil than that of cold.
pbasaok's Bssrxim.
This most wonderftxl chemical and philosophical toy has exdted eonaidardile interest ; many persons assuming thi^ the conjurations of the Egyptians in the time of Moses were produced by some chemical preparation of like nature. Pharaoh's BerpaUi
504
CHEMISTBY.
are composed of lulpho-eyanide of mstcory, wkioh is generally rolled up in a eone of tin-foil ; and being lighted at its apex, there issues slowly forth a serpent-like oosl which twists and turns in all directions, and continues to issue from the cone in a manreDondy curious maimer until all the composition is consumed. The serpent, snake, oir Tiper, as it is called, may then be handled without breaking ; but it is ^ery light and brittle. Internally it has a black metallic appearance ; but externally it is of a dirlj wfaiM colour, not unlike that of a real snake. But the most strange-looking chemical serpents are made when the sulpho-cyaxude of mercury is mixed up into a paste with a htcle thin gum-water, and either roughly shaped into a cone or made long like your finger. These, when placed on the fender or on a plate, and lit with a match, bum with mMt astonishing fierceness, jiroducing a snake of a light or dark brown colour, many yards long. It must be stated that the flimes of the burning chemicals are hurtftil if they are inhaled, and therefore Phuuoh's Serpents should be lit in the fender, or in a wi^-Tcnti- lated room, that the noxious gas may escape by the ohlnmey or the window.
WATSB BIWITCHin.
Pour some water into a plate, light a bit of loosely-crumpled paper and throw it into a glass ; then turn the glass upside down, with the burning paper in it, in the plate, and the water will gradually rise from the plate into the glass until the latter becomes half tall, so that the surface of the water it contains is much higher than that of what is left in the plate.
The following is a much more striking mode of exhibiting the same effbct. Take a plate, as in the last instance, and fill it with water ; then produce a small empty i^hial, into which you assure the company you can pour water through the solid glass bottom, and not through the mouth as unlearned persons would do. Having declared that it it
neoessazy that the phial should be perfectly dry when the ex- periment is performed (for the purpose of opening the pores of tiie glass, as you may add if asked the reason), take the opportunity of heating it at the fire until It is too hot to hold, in doing which you may save your fhigers by thrusting a Ion? stick into the phiaL As soon as it is sufficiently hot, place it, without delay, with the mouth downwards, in the plate d water; then pour a tea-spoonftil (^ cold water on the bottom as if you were pouring it through the glass, and every time you repeat this the phial will become more and more filled with water ; and as this evidently takes places wfaaDew the water is poured on to the phial, it will have every appearance of having passed
through the solid glass.
x.A.uoHnro oas.
A few lines on the mode of preparing and administering nitrous oxide gas, or, as it is termed. Laughing Qas, will, we doubt not, prove acceptable and interesting. Although not fitted to support life, yet it may be inhaled for a abort time, and the eflbots prodneed are moat extraordinary. The manner of breathing it is this : — ^The nitrous oxide gas. having been previously puriiied by standing over water, is pat into a large bladder, or
CHEMISTRY. 5C5
Tarnished aUk bag. iMtTinff a wide glass tabe, or a stop-stock with a large bore, afflxefl to ita neck. The bladder is then held by the tabe in the ri^ht hand, the month of it being closed by applying the thumb, and the nostrils are closed with the left hand ; the air contained in the Inngs is expelled by a long respiration ; and the tube of the bladder being instantly applied to the mouth, the gas is breathed flrom and into the bladder as long aa possible, which, perh&ps, will be about two or three minutes. The efibctsdifito greatly, according to the constitntioDS of the persons by whom it is respired. In gMieral, however, they are highly agreeable. Exquisite sensations of pleasure— an irresistible propensity to laughter — a rapid flow of vivid ideas singular thrilling in the toes, lingers, and ears — a strong incitement to muscular motions — are the ordinary feelings produced by it. What is exceedingly remarkable is, that the intoxication thus produced, instead of being succeeded by the debility subsequent to intoxication by fer- mented liquorB, does, on the oont;ury, generally render the person who takes it cheerftxl and high-spirited for the remainder of the day.
WIXX OAVZI.
The celebrated Davy lamp, for the protection of the lives of miners firom the explo- sion of fire-damp, aa it ia called, was invented by Sir Humphry Davy through hia knowledge of the fkct that flame requires so much ,-'^
beat for its existence, that if cooled, by any means, fjJiML
it becomes extinct, a mere red heat not being suffi- cient for its support. You can lODve this fact very
?v*?>
easily. Take a piece of wire gauze, such as window ^^
blinds are made of (the meshes should not be too
coarse) , hold this with a pair of pliers over the flame ^ '
of a ca^le, and pressing it down, yon ¥riU see that the flame cannot paaa through ; but
that the inflammable gases of which the flame is composed do pass through ia evident,
and may be shown by holding a lighted paper above the wire gauze, when thsy will be
inflamed and bum as before. A more striking experiment is the following : — ^If, while
Che wire gauze is held over the flame of the candle you place a piece of camphor upon
it^ the vapours of the camphor will pass downwards to the candle, and then bum, but the
Bo'.id camphor on the top of the wire gauze will not burst into a flame, because neither
the candle flame nor the camphor vapour flame can pass through the meshes of the wire.
COMBUSXXOir XV XXXSD «ASM.
Put into a long bottle, with a narrow neck, a lighted taper, and let it bum tin it is extinguished ; carefully stop the bottle ; next introduce another lighted taper, and H will be extinguished before it reaohea the bottom ; then introduce a small tube containing hjdrogen, made by pouring on zinc dilated sulphuric add ; light the hydrogen at the aperture^ and it will bum within the bottle ; alter it is extinguished, introduce a lighted match, which will bum for some time ; and after its extinction, if phosphorus be put in« it will be as luminous as in the air ; and, if heated in the bottle, it will prodnoe a pale yellow flame.
506
CHSUSTBT.
Flir.i.
TO SHOW THIT R XI OVLT fKI OOmSl 09 A VLAXB TBI* ftlTBI OUT HXAC.
Take a piece of clean note-paper, and hold it over the flame of a wax-oandle, aa dose to the top of the wlok as poedble without toaohing it ; aa aoon aa it begins lo aoorcb, remove the paper, and you will see a clean round spot in the centre, showing that it has remained nni^jured hy the inner part of the flame, while the dark ring of chaired paper, by which it is surrounded, is a proof of the power of the outer portion of the flame.
to SKOW THAT A CAVSLB CAJTITOT MVtM WXTHOVT A GViain 09 FVaa AXB.
Take a glass, resembling a bottle with the bottom out off, about seren inchee hiirL and four inches wide, the opening of the neck being about three-quarters of an inch ; place a short piece of lighted wax-candle (fixed on a piece of slate or metal) beneaUliCbe glass, as Fig. 1. Aa it is neoesaaiy in thia experiment that no air should be ^le to
enter at the bottom, the edge of the glass naust be joined with a piece of putty or beeswax. In a fsv
A^/ seconds the flame of the candle will become dim, and
C^Ep C^pp it would soon be extinguished ; but if yon now tsks
/^ * ^ ^j ^>Sv ^ thin piece of brass or other metal, and place It, ss I V ^^ )3 Bhown in Fig. S, in the mouth of the botUe, the candle
will again begin to bum clearly.
To understand this experiment, it must be recol- lected that a candle can no more bum in confined air Uum a man can breathe if locked up doeely in an ircm chest, but that it must become extin- guished after consuming the oxygen, the yital portion of the ab:, unless supplied with fycsh air ; but as the pure air from without endeavours to pass through the neck of the bottle, it is prevented by the warm impure air with which the bottle is filled ; aa soon, however, as the piece of metal, shown in Fig. 2, is inserted, the struggle between the air within and that without is at an end, the pure air passes in on one side of the metsl and the impure escapes on the other side. That this is the esse may be easily ahowo br lighting a piece of wax-taper, and after blowing it out, applying the smoking wick close to the opening on each side of tiie brass, when in the one caee it will be drawn into the bottle, and in the other driven away.
MAevssivx wm.
The metal magnesium when ignited produces the most intense and brilliAnl flaase known to chemists. It is ordinsrily prepared and sold aa a round wire or flat bead like a watch-spring ; and when lit at a candle or gas jet, produces a fiame of the porest and most vivid white light — brighter than that derived from the oxy-hydrogea or osy- calcium lights, or indeed any other soientiflc means of illumination. It is sold at mhamk 3d. per foot, which quantity is sufficient for numerous experiments. Its Ught so nmBxij approachea the nature of sunlight that it can be employed in taking photographe. ia exhibiting various effects in theatres, or wherever it is desirable to show a msgiillliffnl dasEling light. Magnesium is the motal of the earth magnesia, andHs prodnetion in
J:2i
CHEMISTRY. . 507
appreciable qnantftios is dae to very recent chemical remarohea. It ia made bj placing a few piecea of aodiom or potaauom in a platinum cmoible, and covered with ft»g- menta of aahydrona chloride of mAgneaiam. The oover of the emoible ia to be Ikaiened down with iron wire, and heat applied by means of a apirit lamp, A violent action tokea place, and the crucible ia allowed to cool, cold water being then applied to the moaa, which diaaoh'es chloride of potaaaium and exoeaa of chloride of magueaitun, and leavea the metal magneaiom in the form of globnlea. It can also be prepared by the galvBBio onnent by deoompoaing fhsed chloride of magneainm. Bat ita preparation in thia manner ia ikr too difficult far any amateur chemiat to attempt.
XA8T CBKKicAi. xxnainvn.
A Lmr wiraour Flucs. — ^Procure six or eight inchea of platinum wire, about the hundredth port of an inch in thicknfaa ; coil it round a email cylinder ten or twelve timea, then drop it on a apirit lamp, eo that part may touch the wick and part remain above it. Light the lamp, and when it haa burned a minute or two, put it out ; the wire will then be ignited, and eo continue aa long aa any apirit remaina in the lamp. If a little atrong Xau de Cologne be added, the burning will give out an agreeable perftime.
A Liquid noDUOsn fbok two Solum. — "Mix equal portions of f ulphate of aoda and acetate of lead, both in fine powder; let them be well rubbed together in amovtar, when the two aolida will operate upon each other, and a fluid will be produced.
A Sous paoDuciD FaoM two Liquids. — ^If a saturated solution of muriate of lime be mixed with a saturated solution of carbonate of potaah (both transparent liquids), the result ia the formation of an opaque and almost solid mass. If a little nitric acid be added to the product, the solid mass will be changed to a transparent fluid.
To XAXl two IwisiBLx yjiK>i7K8 ViaiaLi. — ^Toke two tumblers whose mouths are of the same aise, and moisten the inside of one with liquid ammonia, and the other with muriatic add ; cover them for a short time with a cord, and then, removing the cord, place them mouth to month ; immediately dense white Aunea will be viaible, which, if collected in quantiUeo, would become a solid crystallised substance (sal ammoniac).
BsiLLiAXT MiTiLLio TxeiTATiov. — Lay upon a glass plate, separately, a few filings of copper and iron ; then drop on each a little nitrate of silver ; the silver will soon precipitate, whilst the iron and copper will oxidize, and become coloured. Then arrange the ramlflcations with a small pointed piece of wood, whilst the flame of a taper, being placed under the plate of glass, win increase the evaporation, facilitate the reaction of the substances, and by blackening the under aide of the plate form, aa it were, a deaign.
Riaor OsAPis. — ^Dip the bowl of a tobacco-pipe into melted reain t blow through the pipe^ when bubblea will be formed of a brilliant ailveiy hue, and a variety of eoloura. Thia ia the mode hy which the Italiana imitate bunchea of grapea; the tmbblea being fisstened together, and dusted with powder-blue, to resemble bloom.
To HOLD PxrwM ovxB Tax Fxam or ▲ Oaitdlb witkovt Buavnre r. — ^Plaoe a polished bar of iron or brass, like a ruler, on a sheet of writing«paper, and lift the two ends of the aheet; hold them tight with one hand, and with the other gnwp one end
5»« CHBJnSTKY.
of the bar, amd hold the paper, where it covers the bar, over the flame of a candtab when it will become black, but it will not burn ; but if, instoad of a bar of iron, yoa make nee of a piece of wood, the paper will scorch and soon burst into a flame. The reason of this is, that the metal oouductiug the heat away from the paper, cools the paper aa ftist as it is warmed by the candle ; but the wood, being a very bad condactor of heat, cannot convey it away as rapidly ns the candle supplies it, and, conseqnenMy* the paper is first scorched, and aflerwanU set on fire.
Gold amj> Hot, which is which ? — Take throe basins, pjit cold water into one, lukewarm water into the second, and hot water into the third, then place your right hand in the cold water, and your left in the hot ; lei them remain in for a few instanta, and taking them out, plunge both hands into the lukewarm water, when it will feel cold to the left hand and hot to the right hand, thus showing what a bad thermometer the human body is.
Thk Caitolh Ihvisiblt Extihouisrkd. — Place a lighted candle in the bottom of a jar which has its open part uppermost (the jar being filled with atmospheric or common air) ; then take a jar filled with carbonic acid gas, and invert it over the jar in which the candle is placed ; the eflbct is very striking ; the invisible fluid, being heavier than atmospheric air, descends like water, and extinguishes the flame. The whole, to spectators who have no idea of substance without sonsible matter, has the appearance of magio.
DicoMTOSinoir or Glass. — Glass, it is well known, is formed by the ftisioa of silicions and alkaline matter. It is not, however, so generally known that glass, to a certain extent, is decomposable by water. Thus, if powdered glass be mixed with distilled water, in a short time, if turmeric test-paper be dipped into it, there will be indicated a portion of alkali in solution.
Drcovpositioh or Pajpre. — Heat together two parts of fluor spar with one part of boracic acid, and fifteen parts of concentrated sulphuric acid, when a gas (fluoride of boron) will arise, forming very thick vapour, when let into moist air. White pai«r plunged into this gas instantly turns coal-black, the paper being decomposed, and new compounds formed by the ox3''gen and hydrogen of the paper, and the «>^**^?"fffffrti of the fluoride of boron ; the charcoal of the paper being thus set at liberty.
DrLiCATV Tkst or Iodiitk. — Take a tea-spoonful of arrowroot, which is a vecy pure variety of starch ; put it into a wine-glass with a tea-spoonful of cold water, and w»i» it ; then fill up the glass with boiling water, and stir it welL Pour some of tlus eohn- tion into a glass, and add to it a few drops of tincture of iodine dissolved in water ; a dark blue precipitate will instantly appear, although the quantity of iodine prwmiil will be only about one grain in a pint.
SzHPLX AxALOAHATioir AVD SxpABATioH. — Placc a globulc of mercoiy, etioat tbe size of a pea, on a piece of paper, by the side of a globule of potassinm, eboot hatf the size of the mercury ; fold up the paper so as to bring tixem into contact with omrTi other : some caloric will be immediately disengaged, and the amalgamatiofn will be complete in a fbw seconds. If it be then thrown into water, the mercury will be dia- engaged and tUl to the bottom; the potaasium, on the contrary, will deoompoae the
L
CHEKISTRY. ff^
water, absorb the oxygen, and the hydrogen, being set at liberty, wlU bnnt into flame. The potassium will be converted into oxide of potaasiom, or potaas, and diaeoWe in the water.
Tax ICaoio Srooir. — ^Put four ouncea of bismnth into a cmcible, and when in a state of complete Aision, throw in two ounces and a half of lead, and one ounce and a half of tin ; these metals will combine and form an alloy ftisible in boiling water. Hould tiie alloy into bars, and take them to a silversmith to be made into tesrspoona. Place one of them in a saucer, at a tea-table, and the person who uses it will be not a little astonished to find it melt away as soon as he puts it into the hot tea.
MxT4L MiLTBO osT Papsb ovib A C^iTOLi. — An alloy, which may be kept in a state of ftision by placing it upon a piece of paper and holding it over a candle, may be made by melting together equal parts of bismuth, lead, and zinc.
To AjriLTza Suoaa. — Chemists have asserted sugar to be a compound of water and charcoal. To prove this, make a strong syrup with water and loaf sugar ; pour about an ounce of this syrup into a gallipot, and set it in a plate } add to it an ounce of strong sulphuric add, and stir them together with a glass rod held at arm's length ; they will presently blacken, grow intensely hot, and ultimately charcoal will appear in a black, solid form. This is a very beautiful and almost magical experiment, and it is an excellent illustration of the total change of form which bodies sustain when made to act chemically upon each other. The mixture should be stirred at a distance, and set under the chimney.
To UiLT A Fiicx ov MiTAL IK 1 NvT-SHXLL. — ^Hix together three parts of nitre, one of sulphur, and one of fine dry sawdust. Press a quanti^ of this mixture into a walnut>shell, with a thin piece of copper coiled up in the midst of it, and then set it on fire, when it will burn rapidly, and the metal will be ftised into a round globule, while the shell only will be blackened.
To BxpABATB Oil raov Watxb.— Most of our young readers are, doubtless, aware that oil is lighter than water, and floats upon its surface. If a vessel of any con- venient description be half filled with water, and a portion of oil be then poured on it, the oil may be easily separated from the water by one end of a wick of cotton being placed in it, the other end of which is carried into another vessel ; the oil, obedient to the laws of capillary attmction. will rise gradually into the cotton, and fall, drop by drop, tram the other extremity of it, into the vase or cup, which is placed to receive it.
Mbtallic TBiL3r8icTO.Tiov. — ^Dip a piece of polished iron — ^the blade of a knife, for instance — into a solution, either of nitrate or sulphate of copper, and it will assume the appearance of a piece of pure copper ; this is occasioned by the sulphuric acid seising on the iron, and letting taXl the copper.
To Mblt two Hbtallic Uixtcbbs bt Fxicnoir. — ^Melt, in one vessel, one part of mercury and two parts of bismuth ; and in another, one part of mercury and four of le^d ; when cold, they will be quite solid : by rubbing them against each other they ^ivill soon melt, as though each were rubbed separately against red>hot iron.
TsB IvcomiirsnBLz Tbbbad. — Wind some linen thread tightly round a smooth
SIO CHEMBTBY.
pAbls. ncare Qm end, and If 700 expow Itio Ura tUme of altmiior fikndla Oietlintd will DM bora ; Rn thB oalotlo Cnvenei, irlthoaC Biiag it, uid oclr tmM tha Mbh
S«lsct & toft, •onnd, md lecnrstaly-eat oorti, thM will lit » nuraw-tiKnitbed jit^ gJatt inula t nmkeabols (hningb Uia ccrk, and fit liibiimiTiiloelyapKceariobaecD- pips. Put uionaaor two of gnnalmied ilnc Into tbeboMIe, and liboatbalf tm itwia tnMT, to wUcb add ■amo itTaog (nlphiiilo acid, tmtU yoa flod a toleiablr bnk eflteveaoeiios ouaea. Kaxt, toaert Uie Cork llllsd with (bt lobaoco-pipa into Uw jxei of lbs bottle i allow tba eObmacsnos to pniond modantely for abuol two raiBsic* n-hen bydragen will ba gmaratcd 1 Ibsn applj a piec* of lighted paptr to tlia end of the tobacDo^pipa, wboD tho hjdtogen will Inatant^ tales flrs with a obarp pop, and bora (br aoms Urns with a pala bhu flame. Ba canfal to allow two or thnn miniitta to slapM) bsFOTS jon apply lbs llgbt to the and oT the tobaoeo-idps, by which mam the air will ba eipalled from the bonis. IT. oo tha other hand, the light be applied iba loatant after the add la poured on the watsr and iIdc, the hydrogen mtilng wiik iht air, DpOD being inflamed, will explode with great violence. The pals fiMne of the gu may be iscraaaed to brilliancy by BifUng; over H a amail quantity of tnHirmra
mi the bowl of the largeet lobaooo-pipe that «n be proenied wtth puaJuul col (oannel ooal aiuwen best), and oloas the top of It by Uw sftpUcadoB of plpo-ol^. or, what la betur, a minora of land and bssr. Wbsn the covering li dry, place the bowl of the pipe la a clear fin i In a Ibw mloDtea a denie snoke will iesoe Ihim Uta eteBi. which, OB the application of llgbted paper, will inflame, and wHl Donttone in a beanlifcl
gaa will be snflciSBtly biiUiant to Ulnmlnala Uie (tody of
C^ lilllt «u factor.
u Gnopowxler Plot wm lo b»ve
fl^^i twni ptrpatnud. It wu the iiiUatlon of Onido Fiirku, CMcah}-, >• K iriaMT, and tha other ooniplimton, to Bra ■ large qaantit; of rhii- Ip^i^^l powder, eaneiNiUaiuly plued benauh Um Ptrllunent Hoiue, at iha cMV moment when Jamas the FIrMud his ParUamant ware anembled, and '^ ^' eo at one lonHble blow lo dntroy King, Lords, aud Common*. The ^ despicable plot was proridentially discovered on the eve of ita comple- ^ly/'^-: ^^'' Hon, aJHl the conAptralora aeixed and aAarwafda executed. The event !^\P t '- ^ " ^ liaa OT»r einee boon oommemoraied by the oanyiag abont and bnrning of y^^^^i^^ "^ elBgy oT Oraj Fawkee on the ennlveniuy of the momanWni daj ; and C^Svli^i^^~^ though the cnatom hu loat much of iU lignlflcanDg. imd only tbtj poor ^^/-~; A boya and " roughi " now beer a Ony from door lo door, j-at the letting i^ff^^ ' / '^"^ dnworka la 11111 popular on the evening of the ■nnivaraai; ; and ^ "V^C/. ** <"" ^""^ would be Incomplete wiUiout a chapter on Fireworki, we yj^^^; — ^^ proceed to ehow how thtae rather Ibrmldable toye are made.
ntoMeal laeantatioat. — Diaaolve eryatali of any nit oT copper in aplrlta of wine i Uglit Ifae eemtloo. anl It will bum with a beantimi emeraM-greeii Baaa. Fiecee of ■ponge eoaked In thli iplrit, lighted, and anipended by floe wliea DTer the ata^ of
512 FIEEW0RK8.
Crimson Fire. — ^Pnt into a gallipot one ounoo of ■pirits of salta, and add to it as mnoh powdored nitrate of strontia ac will make a thick paste. Next, pat a gndiron oyer a slow fire, and set on it the gallipot, and allow it to remain there until the oon- tents be very nearly dry, taking care to avoid the Aimes, which are polsonoaa. When the mixtore has cooled, add about four ounces of pyrozylic spirit, and pour the whole into a bottle for use. When required to be used, wind some lamp-cotton on a nail of about two inches, and drive this into the end of an imitation torch, etc, and pour on it just as much of the liquid as the cotton will absorb, without tdlowing it to drop off; then light it with paper, and a most beautiful crimson flame will be produced.
Coloured Flames. — ^The following salts, if finely powdered, mixed with apirits of wine, and set fire to, will communicate to the fiame their peculiar colours : — ^muriate of soda (common salt), yellow ; muriate of potash, pale violet ; muriate of lime, brick red ; muriate of litha, red ; muriate of baryta, pale apple-green ; muriate of copper, bluish green ; borax, green ; nitrate uf copper, emerald-green ; chloride of calcium, oranife ; chloride of lithium, purple.
Another plan Is to mix the powdered salt required for the particular coloured fire with powdered sulphur, and ignite the mixture in an iron shoveU
Silver Fire, — Put xrpon a piece of burning charcoal a morsel of the dried oystals of nitrate of silver, and it will immediately throw out beauUftil sparks, whilst the aoifbos will be coated with silver.
The Bengal lAght. — ^The following is the Ordnance receipt for this very eflbctire fire : — ^Nitre, one pound ; sulphur, five ounces ; sulphuret of antimony, two and a half ounces ; mix together on a plate, or a sheet of glased paper, with a paper-knife, and light in small quantities with a match. It is perfectly haxmless, and burna with a brilliant white light.
PBXVCXPAL nroBssixiTTa AVD covrosxnoir 07 csaiosb.
In Pyrotechny, or the Art of Making Fireworks, the principal ingredients neoeaaaxy are — ^nitre, or saltpetre (nitrate of potash) sulphur, gunpowder, charcoal, phoaphonu, camphor, resin, alcohol, linseed-oil, iron and steel filings, sine, bismuth, copper ttn> foil, Dutch-leaf, f^ilminating mercury, lampblack, nitrate of strontia, chloride of potaaaa, nitrate of baryta, chlorate of strontia, potassium, sulphuret of antimony, oon)er, bomcic acid, benzoic acid, various gums and rosins, and sometimes aawdust, for the produoticm of variegated sparks.
Of course all these ingredients are only required in the making of fireworks opoii a very large scale. They are to be obtained ftom the chemist in as pure a state aa pos- sible, and must be prepared and compounded according to scientific rules, asfoUowm s —
The difltarent salts, carefhlly dried, must be separately reduced to a flna powdflr in a mortar, or on a marble slab with a grinder, and sifted through a clean aifliTe. Tbex are then to be put up in separate bottles with glass stoppers. The gunpowder raqiured must be mealed, or rubbed down to an impalpable powder, and careftiUy pot aaide in a diy and safe place. The sulphur and rcdins must also be rubbed fine and sifted, aaul then bottled like the rest.
mtSWORKB. 518
Gunpowder, giilphtar, rMin, And salU are the moet fireqnentlj nied — all kinds of flreworka oonaisting of admiztimt of these in greater or lesser quantities. As a rule, the larger the firework the slower must be the oomhustion of the ingredients employed to charge the casee>
The ehaiges may be divided into three sorts — ^the white, the grey, and the black. Of these the white is the slowest in combustion, the black the quickest. In all kinds of ehaiiges the ingredients must be oareftiUy weighed, separately ; then well mixed together, and lastly, sifted through s fine hair sieve.
The following are the ingredients and proportions of the most usual compositions : —
Btrcmg Bbtek Charge, of quickest combustion. — Mealed gunpowder, 9 parts; sifted ebareoal, 1 part^
Ordmarg Blaek Charge, of brisk combustion. — ^Mealed gunpowder, 7 parts; sifted charcoal, 1 part^
Jkark Ortg Charge, rather slower of combustion than the last — ^Mealed gunpowder, 9 ; sifted nitre, 4 ; sifted charcoal, S ; and sifted sulphur, 1.
LigM Qreg Charge, slower than the last. — ^Nitre, 8; charcoal, 2; sulphur, 1.
White Charge, of slow combustion. — ^Nitre, 21 ; charcoal, 2 ; sulphur, 1.
The WkUeei Charge, of slowest combustion. — ^Nitrc, 6 ; charcoal, 2 ; sulphur, 1.
The abore charges, when rammed into cases, emit, when ignited, a gradual and lengthened burst of sparks or flame more or less bright. To diyeraiiy the exhibition, and give colour to the sparks and flames produced by ignition, various chemical ingre- dients are added. Thus — red flames are produced by nitrate of strontia; green, by borado add, or I7 the nitrate of bazyta ; purple, by chlorate of strontia ; biue, "by snlphnret of antimony ; %ohUe, by camphor, pounded resin, lyoopodinm dust, sine, arsenic, and bismuth, and also by mastic and other rasinons gums; whileysUow fire Is made by igniting the oxalate, nitrate^ and other aalli of soda.
BOW TO KAKi ram ciras.
The eases fbr fireworks are cylindrical tubes of various lengths and stxes. Small cases may be made of the leaves of old copy-books or other stiff paper; large cases, of cartridge paper or pasteboard, several folds pasted one over another.
The smallMt cases — as for Squibs, Crackers, Catherine-idieels, etc. — are made by rolling the paper evenly and tightly three or four times round a smooth iron wire or rod. The last fold is then pasted down and the rod withdrawn.
The caaee for Squibs, Bookets, and some other kinds of fireworks, have a cAoie or neck, near the end where they are lighted. In small cases this neck or choke is made by alightly damping the part to be contracted with a brush dipped in hoi starch, and then, with a strong packthread, well waxed, wound once or twice round the damp part, <trawlng the neck slowly and uniformly to rather leas than one-half its former diameter, with as little wrinkling as possible. ▲ bolt or roller fittfaig the Inside of the neck is then introduced, and, by winding the waxed thread several times very tightly round, tlaeOhokewillbooompleted. The ends of the thread are to be firmly tied, and the Whole aeccued with glue.
as
f.U FIREWORKS.
In large CMea of oartridgre or fMsteboard, a partieaUtr kind of roller, wfCh a pnm- sion for the choke, is necessary. This consists in haying a hole bored in the end of tbi roller, to the depUi of about two inches, exactly in the middle, and of the ^i«w»*<— gf the intending opening in the choke. Into this hole in the roller a cylindrioal peg of hard wood or metal is fitted half an inch longer than the hole is deep, »t*^ haTing a short head nearly of the same diameter as the roller. In the ■■titionrf^ diagram A ■ tte
roller, B its handle, with a bole
transversely through it, for the purpose of applying a lerer power, if needfhl, in the act of rolling the ease, aad twtatisg ihe cord tofbrm the chokes; O la the head of the adaptation piece, and the small part exposed between ▲ and 0 is to moaM the choke npon. The paper or pasteboard is rolled round ▲ and C, as thmigh tbej but one ; and in using a roller of this description it is better to have the paper or board out in several pieces of the length of the proposed ease, but in breadths to go only twice or thrice round the roller, so that at every second or third turn the choke may be drawn A ^^^^^^^^J~ closer by a gentle pull of the waaced twine round the ^^^^J^S '■■ » &im|% narrow part of the roller. It will be found very con- ^^^^s^^^gg^ venient to slope off one end of the sheet or board, in the j^^r^- — 4i^Yla. shape of the figure at side. Here the length of the case ^ pg:^^^ ' ""Vl |l|^^ p isAO, and the width of the paper fh>m A to C ought to be
such as to go twice round. Now the side A G being applied parallel to the axis of the roller, and the s^et rolled tightly on, the diagonal B D will fbnn a spiral from the choke, terminatin^it the handle. The loose end of the paper or board being aeenred by IMste or glue, the choke is to be oonstricted by a gentle pull of the waxed twine or oovd round the contracted part of the roller, and the next sheet being applied apsida dows the spiral will terminate at the dholn, and must be secured in the same manner. Ths neck is again to be drawn a little doser, by passing the string over this shaeft also^ moving the roller and case round all the while to prevent the neck firom wriaUfa^. Another sheet is now to be rolled on similarly to the first, the spiral terminating at tts handle, and the string round the neck is to be wound tighter and tighter every toni; the next sheet is to be applied similarly to the second, the spirals always altemating ; and the choke is to be gradually completed by drawing the ligature closer and doas' on every additional sheet. The rolling must be continued, pressing the roller bflavQy down on a firm, smooth table, to make the folds even and firm, till the ease is of snfE> eient strength and of such thickness as to go easily into the hollow mould in whieh n has to be charged.
The neck of the case being firmly bound, and well secored with glue, the rdDer nsty
be caivftdly withdrawn Ihim the long end, and the adaptation piece pushed oat in aeoa-
trary direction ; the ease may then be put aside tUl the paste or glne is thoroughly dzy.
Lsrge oases — as for Rookets, etc.— ^re enclosed in a wooden mould, made in halvas»
previous to being charged, to prevent them bursting when the charge is ramwiad in.
FIBEWOBKS. 515
HOW TO CHABOB AJTD POIBV VHB CA8B8.
Tonr <MUM8 arast be tlioron^bly dry. To charge a Bqoib or Serpent, with its choice preyionalj prepared, a spigot ia introduced into the neck of the case, and both case and BfAgob an placed on the table in a perpendioalar position with the open end upwards. ▲ thimbleAil of the quickest composition is passed into the case by means of a small fhnnel, and the composition well pressed down with a rammer. A second and third quanti^ is then introduoed and rammed down till the case is nearly ftilL A little corned gunpowder is put over all, and the case closed with glue or a drop of sealing- wax, not in flams. When the ease is closed, the spigot is remoyed, and the end pointed or |»imed with touch-paper — ^you then have your Squib complete.
By pointimg is meant the applying round the orifice of fireworks some substance having the quality of tinder, so as to be not only easfly lighted, but aJso when lit to bum slowly without flame, and to continue burning until reduced to ashes. For this purposeoommon tinder is not so well adapted as German tinder ; nor is German tinder so manageable as touch-paper.
Tondt-poper is made by impregnating thin blue paper or white blotting-paper with nitre in solution, by soaking or steeping, and afterwards diying it. If upon trial the paper bums too slowly, it must be dipped again in a stronger solution; or if too quickly, it must be soaked in warm water to abstract part of the nitre, and again dried. To make the solution, some Tnanntkrtarers dissolve the nitre in vinegar ; but hot water answers nearly as well.
Besides touch-paper, another preparation, called quick-match, is often employed to convey fire to the charge of fireworks, especially to such as are not pointed with touch- paper. Quick-match consists of cotton- wick of greater or less thickness, according to tbe siae of the orifice or ttibe it is designed to enter, impregnated with nitre in solution in the same way as touch-paper. But when manufactured in quantities, a reel is used to wind the cotton through the solution several times, to the end that it may equally imbibe a sufficient portion of the nitre. Quick-match is used chiefly to form the inside of long pipes, called leaders, small in diameter, and commonly made of paper, designed to connect two or more set pieces with one another, so as to fire them in succession without the necessity of discharging each of them singly. The pipe or tube of a leader ia sometimes filled with inflammable composition instead of quick-match throughout.
Serpents, Crackers, Roman Candles, Rockets, etc., are pointed by rolling a small piece of touch-paper round the month, so as to prqject half an inch or more, and tying the paper with thread. The pointing being fixed and dry, a small pinch of corn-powder ia let down into it, oaUed theprtiNtfv, and the mouth gently twisted to keep the powder in.
siecvAB«Dre.
The discharge of fireworks should never take place in damp weather ; and every possible precaution should be taken before setting fire to any piece, to avoid accidental explosion or danger. Squibs and Crackers may be beld in the hand and fired; but they must be thrown into the air before they finish. Very small rockets may also be lei oir from the hand; but large sky-rockets are hung upon a naJl in a poat^ or the
516
nBlWOSKJI.
■tick ifl pMMd UnoQgli two riagB to giro » proper direction, either iwriwwMliffiler or obliqoe, and then lighted by a match ai the end of * atiok. A rocket oontaining a poond weight of charge will riae fipom 300 to (K>0 jarda in the air | large nxteta (him 800 to ISOO Tarda.
m0CKBfB«
The oaaflB for BockeCe mtut be filled tightly ; fbr thia porpoee thqr mnet beplaoad Jn e moold. Thia mould ia in two halTtia, which axe flnnlj boand to each other. A hollow rammer ia now to he driren down throogh the empty caae, to make the ne^ doae and amooth trpon the nipple and ite swelL Nezt, e portion d oompoiatigm of greater or leaa qnickneaa, according to the aiae of the rocket, ia to be pat in. and iba hollow rammer made to foUow. The rammer ia to receive serenl afaarp strokea of a maUet proportioned to ite thiokneaa; and, when withdrawn, the hollow in the end of the rammer to reoeiye the piercer, most always be picked clean to prerent it from being dogged, and the rammer Ihmi being split.
In thia way yon proceed till the case is filled. Beeidea the tabe whidi oonatitefeee the body of e rocket, there is genemlly a head, bat in yery small locketo thia ia little else than a neat folding down of the apper end of the caee with a tight band round is about half an inch from the top, moeh in the shape of a coronet and atifilbned with glae. Before closing the tobe, some corned gonpowder ia placed orer the ehaxse to give a flash and report when the charge ia bamt oat.
Other rockets, again, terminate at the top in a cone made of the same maleriab as the caee^ and glned on after being filled with diflteent kinds of oombostiblee. I«rger rockets are ftuniahed with a pecaliar sort of head, terminating in a cone like the mentioned, bat this head is a magazine, which explodes with more or lea according to the snbetances Inserted in it. ▲ rocket-head of the last deacripfticQ »
generally a tube of the same sort as the oaee of the rocket, bat haying its internal diametiir pnwriw^ eqoal to the external diameter of the cae^ so aa to fit apon the case like the lid on a piU-booc The length of the head may be from a third to half the length of the caee, and should always ternnxkate m a cone, as being best adapted to oleaye tbe air when the rocket ia in flight. The flnt flstne in the accompanying diagram repreeents a case with a coronet head; the second, a case with a plain conical head ; and the ttiird, a rocket-oaae with a eylindrical head terminatiBS in aoone,
A variety of beantiftil cokmn may be ■^^fliU"' issoing from a rocket daring its flighty b^ *i^»«^»g with the charge, in proportiona watranted by ex- perienoe, any of the ingredienta reconunexidied fbr tinging the flame of Roman candles and fonntaina. Powdered fiint glaai^ fkae mm
i!
11
VIBBWOBKB. 517
ixsm-mmti, and ponnded resiii, wdl lifted together, in eqiul qnantiltieB, and mixed with twice their weight of strong blaok charge, may be lued fbr the kui thna allotmenta, before elating the caae ; and will, when the rocket baa nearly attained its greafteat elevation, lepreeent a shower of fiery rain, commonly called, from ita gandy Appear- ance, the Peaood^t TaiH.
Varioas charges are naed fbr Booketa. A miztnze of powdered bismuth, metallic antimony in powder, pore copper fliinga, steel dnatk and dhlorale of potaasa, sifted together in equal qnantitiea and mixed with twice their weight of wtromg black dboty, make the fine show known as Webster's Lamp. Another beaotiftil charge called Bmoe's Spangles, is composed of eight parts of powdered camphor, six of sine filings, five of ponnded csnnel coal, two of sifted solphnr, two of lyoopodinm seeds, one of chlorate of strontia, and one of boracks add, blended with fonr times their weifl^ of the dark ortg okarge. This mixture bmrns with lightning-like flashes of Taziegated light» giving ont wonderftil scintillations of great beaoAy.
Boekata with separate heads present great varieties of coloor and fbrm, such aa miniatore sons, Chinese fire, jasmine flowan» sparkling astres, biasing pelleta, Siamese jets, Hindoo lustres, etc., all made with the compositions for the dillbrent coloured fiMs already mentioned. These materials are loosely enclosed, and the fnteratiflea filled with com powder. Instead of loose composition the head of the rocket is sometimes filled with serpents or squibs, arranged like * sheaf of arrowsv lieads downwards, without priming i and when the head is blown off they fl^ about fa the air in a very amusing manner. Yon must be caraftil that sufficient com powder is put into the end of the caae ; this blows off the head and fires its contents.
BOXIV OAVSLH.
Boman Candles are tnbes filled with quick composition, and throw out burning balls, aons, or stsn in proftuion. When (bred they are either fixed in candlesticks or wooden reoeptaoles. Bometfanes a row of candles is srranged in a board perforated withholea at equal distanoee. The cases are simply cylinders primed at one end and fhstened at the other. They are filled with dilllBrent compositions, to yield light and fire of vaiioiis degrees of resplendenoy in the same candle. In fhot no two candlea need be exactly aUka. The suns snd stars are placed in the middle of the black mixture. A sun of intense brightness may be made by melting a Inmp of pitch in hot water, in abasin, and whilst of the consistence of glasier's soft put^, rolling a small piece of it into a thin sheet, before it cools, and then putting upon the middle of thia sheet of pitch abit of phosphoms, as big as a jiea, with half a thimblefol of sifted nitrate of soda, or nitrate of baryta, or sulphate or snbacetate of copper, nitrate of Mrontia» camphor, sine filings, or other flsme-colouring substance, and doubling the soft pitch up like the rolled dough of a dumpling, round about all compactly in the shape of a nut or a gooseberry. The little ball thus formed may be encased in lint» which has been dipped in oil of turpentine and dried.
CAVKXSnrX-WXXXLB.
The composition of Catherina-whaels is varioas; but the ordinary black or grey
518 FtBEWOBXS.
ebarg« will answer adxnirabljr. The efaarfs is flUed Into a lon^ ease, and wound round a wooden centre, in whkh. is a small hole for a pin or nail to pass throogSi. to fix the firework to the wall or to a frame. When lig'hted the wheel letolfes in a moat pleasing manner, throwing oat a oirole of yarloasly-ooloared qmica. Lai^ designs are formed on this plan for pnblio displays. Sqnihs, Boman nmirtlns. and small rockets are sometimes arranged with their mouths all in one directian roond the rim of the catherine-wheel, and seeored with glue or with waxed twine. When the wheel is TOty large, it is made to torn on two piyots or centres, with little iHotioD, and armed with two or more powerftil rockets. It is then called a roeket>wheel, or wheel-rooket ; mad may he made to revolTO either Tortieally or horisontany.
oa^CKiis.
These consist of long caaee bent backwards and forwards in the manner fiunOiar to all bojB, and tied tightly in the centre. They are filled with qniek con^Maition, with a pinch of corned powder at each taming of the case ; and their endspiimed with taoch paper. When fired thoy go olT with a lend reportat each tarn of the paper.
ooircLusiov* Varioas fbrms of fireworks may be oonstnuted by ingenioas lads — as the ainrsl wheel, the grand Tolate, the yew-tree, etc. ; bat oar limits will not allow na to dilate upon them. Haying, howerer, shown onr yoong readers the prinoiples upon which aD fireworks axe oonstracted, we conclude with a few cantiona. Take care^ in letting off any description of firework, that yoa exixMO neither yoozselYes nor the speotatan to danger ; never cany squibs, crackers, or other fireworks, in your pockets, and when aboat to fire them see that the toach-paper is inoperly Ughted ; but on no aoooons attempt to blow upon tary touch-papw to quioken its combustion ; fbr if you do, yoa will probably get a sadden and Tiolexit blow in the Ihce, which is by no meaaa a pleasant method of displaying
9HE IneihBiutlble lngenuitj of man hu led him, [n lU >g«. etp"^ ><>
vluUTsr hs Uiongbl would add to faia power. Not coDWat
with Ibe enjDjmeutA of Lbs land, be cIbbtm Ibroagb His water like a
Ha iTDuU Ikin. ■!*□, fl; like Lha binli, uul hM. for maoir ages, laaked :■ winm for UmuU: Aa be eumol twtio tsr on Uw I be flj in tbe air, and bowater Ingaoioasl}- ba mar add u bii bod]', be baa naTsr jtl aoeoeeded bj tbeir meatii in aiutaiiiilig bimaelf above the iTirfbca of tbe eartb. A balloon, howevor, ia to Uie air wbat a ibip ii to water i It eaabla a man to riie even bejood Ihg moai adventurcui of ibe Ibalhered tnbea : and tbii bB baa aneceeded In eonirlTlng.
Tha carlieae attempt to eonaaiict lAlloona waa made in 1742, bj CaToibo, wbo flrai Dried to InlUta bladden ; bnt they prnved too heaTj-. Be aflerwarda made baUooiia ol India paper in a globular tnna, and coated witii paint and ramiab ; bnt alao wilboot ■ncoeH i and wia. at lengih, under the neceaaltf of resting eaiianed wltb aoap-bnbblea. For bailoona maile on a lai-ffor scale, tbe world ia indebted to two bnrtben, Damed Motitgolflar, of Aimoaty, near LjooM. Tb^f caiutmctcd a bag ol Boa ailk, tt Ibe
530 AXB08TATIC AMUSBMBNTS.
eapaoity of tboaft ftntj oabio feet; and applgFing barning paper to the apertare, tlie air within the bag became rarefied, or lighter than that ontaide it, and the baUoon aaoended rapidly to the ceiling. In the following year (176S) they oonatnioted another, about thirty-five feet in diameter, which waa inflated by straw and chopped wool bwifr bomt under the opening, and rose upwards of 1000 feet ; it lUl about three-quarten of a mile from tho place where it ascended. In a subaequanft ascent, it roee about 6000 feet. These experiments gave rise to an opinion among the philoaoplMn of Paris, that as the weight of hydrogen gaa was ten times lighter than common sir, it would answer the purpose better than the rarefied air of Montgolfier ; and, on tbs 27th of August, 1783, at the Champ de liars, Paris, a baUoon, filled with l^drogea, ascended to the height of S1S9 feet.
The first ballooning exhibition in London was by Count Zembeooari, an ingeokaB Italian, who, in November, 1783, launched, from the Artillery Ground, a beauUfliBy' ornamented balloon, filled with hydrogen, which descended within two hoars at Pet- worth, in Sussex, forty-eight miles distant.
About the beginning of the preeent century ballooning attneted conaideralde aMa- tion, and scientific men began to reason and experimentalise upon tho phenomena of atooslation. A balloon being, in feet, only a large kind of bubble made of iiibUb isis capable of preeenting a certain resistance to the preasore of the gas within the ^"■Itrttl bag and the atmosphere outside, it was soon demonstrated that a bag or balloon, wbao filled with a gas speoiilcally lighter than common air, must ascend. In the same way, a Montgolfier, or air balloon, ascends by reason of the rareflustion, or thinTifag of the air within it, produced by means of the heat from the lighted spirit or other material employed.
B^ond the mechanioal difficulties inherent in all balloon experiments, there ames anftt'Mir and very serious one ; namely, the impossibility of human beings breathing and living at extreme heights above the surfeoe of the earth.
The most important discovery in aerostation was the substitution of earimretted hydrogen, or coal gas, for hydrogen. It has been ascertained that the asoendins fciee of a small balloon, three feet in diameter, filled with coal gas, is equal to eleven and, when filled in the old way, with hydrogen gae, to not more than fifteen Oreen, the veteran abronant, made hundreds of ascents in balloons filled with eoal gas; and upon his retirement, Kr. Coxwell experimented largely with generally with great success.
During the last few years Mr. Olaisher, the astronomer, baa made numerous ascents, in company with Mr. Coxwell, for strictly scientific purposes, the detalla of which would occupy too much of our space. Suffice it to say, that thery fanvs ascended to heights never before reached, and verified many sdentifie theoriaa as to the amount of osone, etc., in the atmosphere, and the capacity of the human body to sustain life under certain exceptional conditions. So frequent^ indeed, have tmUoon voyages become, since the discovery that common street gas would inflate a balloCTi aa readily as the more expensive process that had been previously adopted, thatbttDooea have almost ceased to be ot^ecta of cariosity. But as the popularity of balloonlwg' has
.AXBOSTATIC AHUSBMENTS. 5a
waned, Um acieiitiflo naeftilnefls of Mrostation has attracted more and more attention. A Bodetgr of learned and edentifio men, nnder the presidency of tho Duke of Argyll, has Ately made ballooning and aKrology generally the sabject of inqniiy, and incidentally nused tho old question as to the possibility of men flying with wings. Indeed, the members of the AJronantioal Society shrink firom the discussion of no theoiy, however apparently impracticable, whioh seems likely to foster and develop the science of aero- nautics, or sailing in the air.
TO OOHITBVC* A BALLOOV.
The shape of the balloon is a principal object, and should be spherical ; the bag or cover is best made of the silk stuff called lustring, cut in gores or slips of the form of the quarters of an orange or melon, and varnished over. But for a Hontgolfler, or heated air balloon, on account of iu great sixe, linen cloth has been used, lined within or covered outside with paper, and varnished.
After providing the necessary quantity of the stuff, and each piece being properly prepared with drying oil, let the corresponding edges be sewed together in such a maTinwr as to leave about h^lf or three-quarters of an inch of one piece b^ond the edge of the other, in order that this may, in a subsequent row of stitches, be turned over the latter, and both again sewed down together : by this mode, a considerable degree of strength is given to the whole bag at the seams, and the hazard of the gas escaping is greatly diminished The seam being doubly stitched, as above, lay beneath it a piece of brown paper, and also another piece over it on the outside ; upon the latter pass several times aoommon flre-iron, heated Just sufficiently to soften the diying-oil in the seam ; this done, every interstloe wlH be now closed, and the seams rendered completely air-tight. The nedk of the balloon being left so that it may be opened or closed at pleasure, and all the seams finished, the bag will then be ready to receive an outer ooating of India>mbber varnish, which is made by dissolving caoutchouc in naphtha.
The car or boat is made of wicker-work, covered with leather and painted; and the proper method of suspending it is by ropes proceeding firom a net which goes over the balloon. The net should be formed to the shape of the balloon, and fkll down to the middle of it, with various cords proceeding firom it to the drcnmference of a circle, about two fbet below the balloon ; and firom that circle, other small ropes should go to the edge of the boat ; this circle may be made of wood, or of several pieces of slender cane bound together. The meshes of the net should be small at top, against which part of the balloon the inflammable air exerts the greatest force, and increase in siae as they recede firom the top.
WOM BALLOOT.
Make a balloon by pasting together gores of bank-post paper; paste the lower ends round a slender hoop, fh>m which proceed several wires, terminating in a kind of basket, sufficiently strong to support a sponge dipped in spbits of wine. Bet thespirit on fire, when its heat will rarely the air within the baUoon, and cause it to rise qnioUy to a great height. When, however, it rises into a very rarefied atmosphere, the air wiOUn the balloon expands rapidly, and there being no means of lessening its quantity, it bursts its fhdl prison and escapes, leaving the skeleton of the apparatus to fhll to the ground.
IXBOBTATIO AlICBBUENTS.
Put K lUUs ether toto k bottle of aKontohana ; olne Utighaj, (imIi it In bat mM, ftnd It will bMone inflMed to > cooildentile iIm. Theee globes may be nude •> lUa as to be tranaperent. A pleee oT IndiA-mbbur the bIh of e welnnt hiA been thoe ex- tended to ■ ball Bfteen ItiDhet Id dleinater. Soma jaan elnoe, a auratohcrao ballocm, thni nude, eecaped from PhUutelphk, ajid ma finmd 13D mlleg tnia that ettj;.
Inflaia s Hnull bnlloon made oT gotdbeater'a akia ; (111 It from a bliddor or Ju-. azid Ue a ttanad ronnd the moath of it to preront the cacape oT Ibe gae. When folly blows, attach a CUioffnl oarof colonred paper, or veiiy thin paaCeboard, to It. and let It doat in a lai'ge room ; it will toon gain the oeiling, where it will remain ; ir It be IM oB in (be open air, it will ascend ont of aight. Tble eiperimsnt ma; be varied b; potting graiu of shot into the car, in order to aaoertain the diflinnGe between the waiglit of hjdrogeii gu and atmoepherio air.
A fery preOy balloon, of recent Invention, mi^ be pnrehued of the phfloaopUeal initroment maker*, Jt ig made of goldbeater'a akin or India-nlibar, in varioaa fkntaaUc ahapea — •« Punch, Me. — and k to be had in » Tarlely of eina. It is so extnmel^ Ugh^ that when fllled with hrdrogec gat, and let bee in the atmosphere, it readi^ "—^-li
A Pinchnte ta a sort of inTsrted luabrella, mipended from (he oar of a ballooB, Mwt
SeTcrraJ Ibtal aoddenCa having arisen from t^e oie ef paraohnEes, they an no lon^«rttn- ployed either in sdentlflD or popular aft«naatjcs. The prlnoiple of its gradoal ten to the groond is found in the tkct that tha air. coming in eomaot with the under ■iiilbin of the expanded head of the patacbute, reaista its downward progrce, IWs prtestpta is exemplified in the well-known
iHSi science of Aconatioe treats of the nature, phenomena, and laws Bound ; and that of Pnenmstios relates to the meohanism and pK>- perties of aArifbzm fluids, as the atmosphen, its weight, elasticity, eto. All that we shall here attempt is to illustrate the ilrst principles of these branches of science, hy a few simple recreations, which require but very inexpensiTe apparatus, or can be shown without any such aid.
SOUKS Aim Tona,
Bir John Herschel has thus iteiiliarly iUustrated the distinction between sound and noise : — ^To produce audible sounds, a certain force or sudden* nees is necessary. Thus, waye the hand slowty through the air, and the eflbct will be noiseless ; but strike a whip suddenly in the air, and the eflfbct will be that of an explosion. As the impression conveyed to the ear depends entirely on the nature or law of the impulse, we obeerve great variety in the continuance, loudness, and quality of sounds. Every irregular impulse communicated to the air produces what we call a noi$e, as distinguished from, musical sound. If the impulse be short and aingle, we hear a crack, bounce, or explosion ; yet so sensitive is the ear, that the most short and sudden noise has its peculiar character. The crack of a whip, the blow of a vatwtiiwr on a stone, and the report of a pistol, are perfectly distinguishable ttam each other. If the impulse be of sensible duration, and very irregular, we hear a crack ; if long or interrupted, a rattle or a rumble, according as its parts are more or less con- tinuous, and so for other varieties of noise. As the ear retains for a moment of time, alter the impluse on it has ceased, a perception of excitement, if a sudden and short impulse be repeated beyond a certain degree of quickness, the sound will appear con- tinuous. The frequency of repetition necessary for this production of a continued sound from single impulses is, probably, not less than sixteen times in a second.
rxTCR ow 8oinn>8.
All persons have remarked the peculiar whizzing tone of a violin string, while the player is tuning it. As he tightens or slackens the string, the pitch of the sound varies with evety change of tension, and thus produces that gradual ascent and descent of tone which has such a singular efltect. This may be imitated by strongly vibrating a glass ^blet half fhll of water, and, during the vibration^ suddenly emptying the glass.
AIB-XVBBLXS AVS SOimD.
Half fln a tombler with champagne, ginger-beer, or any other eflbrvescent liquid. And, during the eflbrvescenoa, strike the glass upon the edges* when it will lose its power
m AooDancs and pneiihaticb.
of rtngfns, and gl*s ealj ■ iIIhuiiiihIiIii lad pall^ ■ninrl. Ai lh» •AfTtwanoa nb- ■Ida, the •oond wm, homnr, btooma clvnr utd olnnr j ud whoi Iba aiisbiitiMiB hiva mldrely dloippaand. Qu gliii -will rii
width l4 AxActl^ »qu&l to
freedom. A windaw, rf K Imigth of tbt b»rp, with tha nth Joat rmlMd to atUBO. Whsn tha sJr blon upon tin mi «|irin,i.
with dllrtrtnt dagrae* of (broe. it —■—■---
biMt brii]«( out all Ihs lonM in full oonMrt, u
lo Ihg mooth, (uid BjtDl; BOpponjog ic I17 the [iiiiniini t^ 1^ ptnllel sitnoiltiet of Iha fnunt against Uu leMh, then iCrike the tongue of tha harp with the flugBT. Ae th« bulk of air in tha monlh eaa be altered is ita rorBi, aiaa, ud other olnnuDitaaoea, to aa to pndDOe, bj reatprooaticHit maDy dlflbroot aounda ; tenc* tha rariatr of lh«e bahuigliig lo the Jaw'a-harp.
Ur. Tomlinioii, in hli " Maoual of Natural PhllMapby." tain : — A "■"■■""ti Ut^ pnrallj that moiical glauaa an very diffloalt lo pli^ ; lh<i ii quite a miitaka, (br [liw 11 la no imtmniBnt requiring ao litUe akdll and attestloa fmm the perfancer. A I6w hoan^ piaetlM win enable any one to brinff out tha tonaa UDj and al««rly -, and whoi fiiia ■km la attahied, the ohoiM and eieontlan of malodlM mtut be lelt to tha (arte i^ ^a parfbrtDan, linoe no fiutlur direotioiuDBD ba given. Uany anggeatioiia have baas aiMla aa to the baat laode of ""'""j tha Tlbiatlona of the glaaa, bnt It It donblM aiiaC^K any
AOOtrSTICS AND PKBmCAllCS.
est
mode is so arailable, and ooniisteiit with the object in view, aa the molfitened finger. The learner will ihid it adTaatageona to tmploj water eUghtly impregnated with alum, with lemon-Jnioe, or a Aw drope of monatio aoid; bat with a little tact and a little piraotioe, pore water will do perfisolly well. It may alao be remarked that the beat tone ia elioited when the middle Ihiger is employed j and thia mast be moved JYvm, and not io¥fard$, the player. The glaaaea ehonld likewiee be ftnqoenUy aponged, to ramore any dnat or greaoe from the edges ; and, previooaly to performance, if the learner find it rtifflmilt to bring oat the tones, the handa shoald be waahed in loarm water, for the par- pose of softening the skin of the flngen ; which most be well dried, and then dipped in eold water, to prodooe the tone. A glass of cold water shoald be contained within the ease, as near to the performer as possible. When the apparatoa ia set aside, theglaasea ahoold be protected with a cover from dost and ii^joiy.
HOW TO COMTtTtS nXBTAVCBS BT SOVITD.
Assoming that soand passes through the air, anifotmly, at the rate of 1143 feet in a second, or throagh a mile in aboat 4} seconds ; any distance may be readily found, in lbet> by multiplying the time, in ssoonds, which the sound takes to arrive at the ear, by 1142 ; or in miles, by multiplying the same by S-14ths.
The time taken for the passage of sound, in the interval between seeing a flash of Ughteing, or that of a gun, and hearing the report, may be observed by a watch or a aeoonds pendulum; or it may be determined by the beats of the pulse, counting, on an average^ about 70 to a minute for persons in moderate health, or 6| pulaationa for amile.
TRB sovxBsiov ASS n^saxB xxraaiMnrs.
The apparatus for exhibiting this interesting experiment may be purchaeed at a philoeophical instrument maker's, and is shown in the accompanying engraving. The sovereign and the flaather are to be laid together on the brass flap, A or B ; this may be let down by turning the wiM, 0, which passes through a collar of leather, D, placed in the head of the glass receiver, from which the air has been pumped out; when the sovereign and the feather will both roach the bottom at the same time ; for gravity, acting independently of other forces, eanaea all bodiea to descend with the same velodiy. If, on the other hand, the aovereign werp beaten to the thjimess of gold leaf, it would be as long in lUling through the common air as the feather ; the reeistanoe of the atmosphere to felling bodies being proportioned not to the weighty but to the Buzfeoe which the body opposes to the air.
VXSZBLB VnXAtXOV OV GLASS.
This ikhenomenon is very pleasingly shown by the use of sand, or of the seed of kfeopodtmm (dfaib moss), or of the kfeoptrdtm (puff ball), which is, perhape, the finest powder known, each grain, being less than the 860th of an inch in diameter. Sprinkle some of thia dust on the interior sorftM of a oonioal-shaped drinking-glass, when a
526 ACOUSTICS AND PNKUMATICfl.
amall quantity will adhere to it ; then draw a Tiolin-bow acroae the edge of tiie gfaaa; when a oonnderable portion of the powder will be shaken from off the turfiioe, with the exception of fonr narrow lines of powder, raaohing from the top of the ^laai a conaiderable waj down ; in these lines, there is frequently not only the ariginsl portion of the dust remaining, but an additional quantity derived ftt>m the oilier portions of the glass ; and it will always be found that the point to which the bow is applied is midway between two of the lines. It is also vezy remarkable, that if the powder be sprinkled on the oit/lsid«, instead of the inside of the glass (care bein^ taken to preserve the inside quite free from the powder), a similar thing will ooenr, via., four trains of powder will be seen passing down the inner surfhoe of the glass. For this experiment, a conical glass, or a wine-glass, must be employed ; and if it be blue or green, the efibct will be heightened, inasmuch as any figures formed wtthm the glass will be more striking from the contrast of the light-coloured powder upon the dark ground. It would appear that during vibration, a portion of the powdc is carried up, over the edges of the glass, and settles down into four vortical linea.
TO SUPPO^ A PBA. VrOV AIS.
Place apea upon a quill, or the stem of a tobaooo-pipe, and blow npwud tluvagh it, when the pea will be borne upon the column of air, and made to dance up and down in a very curious manner. Two small pins run crosswise through the pnn will inn nsim the eflbct of this pleasing little experiment.
CHS TUimrChVOBX.
Some amnsing experiments may be made with the common tuning-fork. Urns, fttsten upon one of the branches of the fork with sealing-wax a circular piece of eard, of the aiae of a small wafer, or sufficient nearly to cover the aperture of a pipe, aa the sliding of the upper end of a fiute, with the mouth stopped ; it may be tuned in tuueon with the loaded tuning-fork (a C fork), by means of the movable stopper or eacd, or the fork may be loaded tUl the unison is perfect. Then set the forte in vibratkm by a blow on the unloaded branch, and hold the card closely over the mouth of the pipe^ when a note of surprising clearness and strength will be heard. Indeed, a ftate maj be made to ** speak *' perfectly well by holding close to the opening a vibrating tuiins*- fork, while the fingering proper to the note is at the same time performed.
Or, provide two glass bottles, and tone them by pouring water in them, ao that taA corresponds with the sound of a tuning-fork. Then apply both tuning-foika to the mouth of each bottle alternately, when that sound only will be heard, in eadi oaae, which is reciprocated by the unisonant bottle ; or, in other words, by that bottle wbidi contains a column of air, susceptible of vibrating in unison with the fork.
TO raova tkax air is a suBSTAjroa.
Invert a wine-glass, and plunge it in a vessel of water ; force the whole of tlie bo4y of the glass under the water, and you will see that the air in the glass prevents the water filling it, which would be the case if the air was not a substaaoe. But another test is
ACOUSTICS AND PNEUliATICS.
527
provad by this experiment ; the water bae filled a portion of the glass, and conseqnently the air is a compressible sabstance, for it takes up less room than at first ; bat it is also elastic, for as joa lift the glaas^it again oocapies its original space, and again fills the glass. Ton maj make this experiment more striking by placing a small beetle on a piece of cork, and laying it on the sorftuse of the water : then, by inverting the glass over it, and pressing it down, yon will more readily see the diflbrenoe between the leyel of the water inside the glass, and that without. It is on this principle that the diring-bell is oonstmoted.
CO PBOn THAT TRS AXX HAS WXIOHT.
^ike a bent glass tube, with one leg longer than the other, and fill it with water ; this you can easily manage, by holding the arched end downward in your left hand, with your thumb just above the opening ; then pour water down the long leg, uniil it overflows at the shorter; as soon as this is the case, close the hole of the short leg with your thumb, and fill up the long leg ; then, taking hold of the tube with your right hand, place your thumb on the opening of the long leg, and, removing your thumb ttcm. the other end, yon will find it will not overfiow. Why is this t the weight of the air we breathe presses upon the water, and will not aUow it to escape ; but if yon lift your thumb from the hole of the long leg, it will immediately begin to run over ; close the hole again, and it will remain suspended in the long leg ; open it, and it will again overflow, until the water in the long leg is on a level with that in the short, when it will remain at rest; for the water is in equilibrium, and the atmosphere presses equally on both its surlkwes. The "Cup of Tantalus " toy is constructed upon this principle.
To construct this amusing tqy, fbrm a drcnlar piece of sUfTcard, or thin sheet copper or brass, about three inches in diameter, and then cut it out spirally, so as to resemble a snake, as in the illustration (Fig. 1). Then paint the card ri*. % Fie. i. '
or metal the colour of a snake, and draw out the spiral fh>m head to tail ; next provide a slender piece of wood on % stand, and fix a sharp needle at its summit ; upon which fix the tail of the snake, letting the body coil round the stick, head downwards, as in the woodcut (Fig. 3). The apparatus is now complete, and should be placed as nearly as possible to the edge of the mantel-shelf above the fire, when the snake will begin to revolve in the direction of its head ; or, the snake may be suspended by a thread from the ceiling, over the current of air from a lamp. Two snakes may be made to turn in opposite directions by merely drawing out the spiral of one fh>m the upper side, And of the other from the under side of the figure, and fixing
them, of course, on separate rods. Ineither case, if the rod, a, 6, be painted to resemble » tree, the snake will appear to climb it| and the illnaioa be thus greatly aasisted.
OifBlIIS.
' banrsoi UiB globs its inhkbU and " the wimdai of tha hwTOM abar* oi r« tlia axqoMto fioUi, uid prafBuly of conatmction, which uv lo bt fbund minnti [DVdiictleiia et Uia outli t~-to tno* t^ p*tb or tha plmM Id lu eeK
OPTICS.
round the magnificent orb of 6bj, and to detect the pnlaation of the blood, ae it flowr through the Teina of an insect. Theae are but a fliw of the powers which this sdenoe ofRan to man ; to enumerate and explain them all would require a sjMce equal to the whole of our work ; but it is our intention merely to call the attention of our jurenile readers to such things as combine a ysst deal of amusement with much instruction ; to inform them aa to the construction of the various popular instruments ; to show the yrtm.nnair of usiug them, and to ttqplain some of the most attractive experiments which the science affords. By doing thns much, we hope to offBr our readers a sufficient induce- ment to extend their inquiries into this interesting and usefol science. We oommenor with
CAXEMJi OBSCVai,
Which, though very common, is extremely amusing. Almoet every one has seen it, but few persons know how to construct it. AC represents a box of about a foot and a half square, shut on evexy side expect at D C ; O P is a smaller box, placed on the top of the greater; H N is a double convex lens, whose axis makes an angle of forty-five degrees with B L, a plane mirror, fixed in the box, O P ; the focal length of the lens is nearly equal to C B 4- 8 T, «. 0. to the sum of the distances of the lens from the middle of the mirror, and of the middle of the mirror fhmi the bottom of the large box. The lens being turned toward the proepect, would form a picture of it, nearly at its focus ; but the rays, being intercepted by the mimn', will form the picture as far before the surbce aa the focus is behind it, that is, at the bottom of the larger box ; a communication being made between the boxes by the vacant space, Q O. This instrument is used in photo- Igraphy, and also for the delineation of landscapes. For the latter pnrpoee the draughts- man, putting his head and hand into the box, through the open side, D C, ai^ drawing a curtain round to prevent the admission of the light, which would disturb the opera- tion, can trace a distinct outline of the picture that appears at the bottom of the box. There is another kind of Camera Obacura, for the pnrpoees of drawing, oonstmcted thus : — ^In the extremity of the arm, P Q, that extends from the side of a small square box, B L, is placed a double convex lens, whose axis is inclined in an angle of forty-five degrees to aplane mirror, B O, the focal length of the lens is equal to its distance from the side of the box, O T ; therefore, when the lens is turned toward the ilhmiinated prospect, it would project the image on the side, O T, if the mirror were removed ; but this wiU reflect the image to the side, M L, which is aa ikr distant from the middle of the mirror as this is from, the side O T. It is there received on a piece of glass, rough at the upper side, and smooth at the lower, and appears in its proper oolouia on the
S4
580
OPTICS.
upper tide of the plate. It is evident that in eacli of theee inatrnmente the image h inverted with respect to the object. H 8 is alid to prevent the admission of ligfai doims
the delineation of the picture; and others, fbr the same purpose, are applied to tiM sidei M R and N L.
You may also oonstroet the Oamers Obscora in a room, thus : — First dazten the room by closing the shatters, and evexy place where the external Ught can be admined. Then cat a drcalar hole in the shutter, cs a board placed against the window, in whklt place a lens, or oonvez-glaas, the Ibeiis of which is at the distance of not less than foor, nor more than fifteen or twen^ ftet : frca six to twelve feet is the best distancg. At this distance, also, place a pasteboozd, covered with the whitest paper, with a black border, to prevent any of the aide njB firom distorbing the pictore ; let it be two f^et and a half long, and eighteen or tweotr inches high ; bend the length of it inward, to the fbrm of part of a circle, the diameter of which is equal to doable the focal distance of the glass; then fix it on afrmme of the same figure, and place it upon a movable fbot, that it may be easily fixed at tbat cxaa distance trom the glass where the ottjects paint themselves to the greatest peribetioc. When it ia thus placed, aU the objects which are in the fh>nt of the window wiU be painted upon the paper, in an inverted position, with the greatest regalarlty, and in the lodst natoral oolonrs. The Cameras employed in public exhibitionfl are made on ibis plan. There is another method of malring the Camera Obscora — by a adoptie ball ; thatis. a ball of wood, through which a hole is made, in which hole a lens is fixed ; this baDii placed in a wooden fkame, in which it tarns freely roond ; the firame is fixed to the hole in the shutter, and the ball, by toming about, answers, in great part, the uae d tb« mirror on the outside of the window. If the hole in the window be not bigger than a pea, the ol^eefeB will be represented without any lens. Ifyouplaoeamovatdeaokqjcae ball outaide the wizidow, by taming it more or less you will have upon the paper all ihe olijecta which are on each side of the window. The inverted position of the imac^cs may be deemed an imperfection, but it is eoaily remedied; for, if you stand ahcrre the board on which they are received, and look down upon it, Cbqy will ^>pear in their nataial position; or, if you stand before it, and, placing a common mirror agalneiyaar breast, in an obUque direction, look down in it^ you wiU there see the imagea ereett and th^y will receive an additional lostre tttan. the reflection of the glass ; or, plaee twe leases in a tube ttiait draws out ; or, lastly, if yon place a large concave aaJRor at a proper distance before the piotoze, itwill ajipear before the minor in the air and in am erect position.
If, instead of puttfaag the mimr outside the window yoaplaoeit in the nam, and
OFnOB.
Oil
jthom the hole (which mmt then be made near the top of the shutter), yon maj reoeiTe the repreeentation on a paper, or a aheet^ pbuKd horiaontally on a table, and draw all the otyeda that there ^»pear painted. In thia way artista fteqnently mate draught akelohea of landacapea and flgniea.
Thx MAOvivmra Oammua. Oaaouai. — ^Let the raja of Ughft that paaa throngh the lena in the ahntter be thrown on a large ooncare mirror, properly fixed in a frame. Then take a alip or thin plate of glats, and sticking any email otyeot on it, hold it in the int^jAmnt nys, at a little more than the fooal diatanre fh>m the mirror, and yon will aee, on the opposite wall, amidat the xeflected raya, the image of that olgect^ Tery large and extremely clear and bright.
Thx PsmciiBO Cammua. Oaacua^. — ^Make two holea, F/ (Fig. 1), in the ahntter of a dark chamber, near to each other; and againat each hole, a prism, ABC, and a 6 e, in a perpendioolar direetion, that their apeotrums, M N, may be cast on the paper in a boiixontalline, and coincide with each other; the red and violet of the one being in the ■ame part with thoae of the other. The paper ahoold be placed at aooh a dietanoe from the prisma that
tlM
be snfll- dilated. FroTide eereral papen nearly of the aame dimen- aioDB with the
and draw linea
imrallel to the
diviaiona of the
ooloarB;intheae
diviaiona cat out
each flgnres aa yon may find will have an agreeable eflbot, as fiowere, trees, animals,
etc. When yon have placed one of theae papers in ita proper position, hang a black
ciotb or paper behind it, that none of the rays that paaa thitragh may be reflected and
eonAiae the phewnnenon : the fignre cat on the paper wfU then appear atrongly iUn-
minatH with all the original ooloon of nature.
If; while one of the priama remaina at rest, the other be revolved on its axia, the oontinnal alteration of the ookrara will afRwda pleasing variety; which may be ftorther incresaed by tnming the prism roond in difltarent direotiona. When the prisma are ao placed that the two apectmma become coincident in an inverted order of their ooloora, febe redendof one fhUing on the violet end of the other, if th^ be then viewed throngh 1^ third prism, D H, held parallel to their length, they will no longer appear coincident, bnt in the form of two distinct speotroms, p i and « m (Fig. 2), crossing one another in ihe middle, like the letter Z. The red of one apectnim and the violet of the other, whiab
598
OPTICS.
were ooincident At N M, bdng parted from oaoh other by a greeter refrMtion of tte Tiolet to p and m than, that of the red to n and t.
This recreation may be ftirther diyereified by adding two other jiriania, that afaafl fonn a epeotram in the same line, and contigooiu to the other ; I7 which not oo^ tin variety of flgnres, but the vidssitode of oolqors wiU be oonsiderab^ augmented.
OAJOai. LVODA.
Opposite to the place or wall where the appearance is to be, make a hols of at lesst •a foot in diameter ; or, if there be a high window with a casement of that dimeosicn ia it, this will do much better, without such hole or casement opened. At a oonTemest distance, to prevent its being perceived by the company in the room, place the olqect or picture intended to be represented, but in an inverted situation. If the pscture te transparent, reflect the sun's rays by means of a looking-glass, so that they may pea through it toward the place of representation ; and, to prevent any rays flrotn pawsmg aside it, let the picture be encompassed with some board or doth. If the obje^ be a statue, or a living creature, it must be enlightened by casting the sun's raya on it» etther by reflection, refraction, or both. Between this olqeot and the place of lOAn^ewitslaw put a broad convex glass, ground to 8u<di a oonvexi^ as that it may repxeseut tiie ol^ect distinctly in such place. The nearer this is situated to the Object^ the mcB« '«ril the image be magnified upon the wall, and the fisrther, the less ; such dzveonsH^ depend- ing on the di£fbrence of the spheres of the glasses. If the olgeot cannot be ooavaaiepi]^ inverted, there must be two large glasses of proper spheres, situated at distances, easily found, by tdal, to make the representation correct. Thia wliole ratns of object, glasses, etc., with the persons employed in the mBnagement of iheEB. are to be placed outside the window or hole, so that th^ may not be perceived by the spectaton in the room, and the operation itself will be easily pexfonned.
A Bncns Oaxxba. LuoxDi., remarkably cheap, and peculiarly an>]ic8bl« to the delineation of firuits, flowers, bulbs, seeds, and other small objects, may be naade as
follows : — ^The figure represents a piece d thin plate glass, A D B F, set npriight oa a drawing-board, by means of a vroefea standard, A B C, in a groove, in wltSc^ tiis edge of the plate is retained by the vredges* G and H. The woodoi standard is imj* fixed to the drawing-board, and may be aca oa ft in any oonvenient position. To m apparatus, it is placed in front of the with the standard, ABC, towards him ; the object to be oopied is laid on the leArtaaad side of the plate, as at O ; the bead ef tibe observer being also a little to the left of (fas pillar, and the eye directed towwds the middle of the plate ; as at M, a distinct image of the ol^eet O will be perceived, w S"
ns
ft 1^ CO the iwpn M P ) and mt. M th* nma tbu, ■ pandl held la tbt dgtit-lund •Ida of Um pl«M will b« aqiuUly lisibl*, it majr b« applied to ttsoa tbe iouga at P.
Borne MUutian ii ittqnlrad in miectius > ftTQamble petlticiii (br the appumtu. Id nspsitta UiB iUnminalian of the ot^ec^ and iU admlUiug only BUEh a degnaoT light to Ibe papar, cm the right-hand aide of the glaaa, aa may give aufflcient dlaLiaotneM to tiia pointortha pencil, by which precantionlhanflected ima^ la aeen to Uie beat advantage.
IE moat be nooUedcd bhaC tlte daUneatton will not Topnaent the origioa] objset aa beheld by direct Tiiion by an eye placed at I, being that of a reflected imaga, similar M what wontdbe aean by direct riaion, if the aye had been altnaud at K.
la Yflzy Bimpla in oooabnotiont conaiiiting merely of a picture, aeen through a magni- tfin^ glaaa, smctly in Hat aame manner aa in Che oonunon ahowa exhibited in tiiM M'eeu, and may baforraedat very Ulcle tronble and eipenae, while It maybaTariedto infinity. The contriraooe will be readUy oadentood by the IbUowins illtutntlan ; —
In the hole of a door or partition insert a doablyHiouTex lens, A, baviug about Ihne IbeC fbona. AC rathar leaa than the focal distance of the lana from it, plana in a Tortiaal pcalUoD tbe pMnra, B, to be re presented. Tbe apUcaJ part o tha eihibitioB is oow compMe but, as the fnine of tbe picMn woold be aean, and thns thi fllaakio be deOroyed, it la neoea
frame, rormed of tbnr short boards. TbB bams, which is to be p*'"**^ blaok, pnTeota the raya of light paaatng beyond aoenain line, sc- oording to ita distance tram tbe aya ; the width of it being
lena, the picture is secc
ihr^TOgb an opening, which adds —-^^ --
Yory mn«h to the effect ; and, if that end of the box, or
ui edge to it, npmsnting the outlet of a caTo, a Oothio rain, 01
wluch might be psrUally lighted ap by the top of tha box being ssmi-traiispaient, tha
beauty, and appannt leali^ of Itaa pietora, would be Tary much aohauoed.
Upon the top of the (tame ia repreaenled a lamp to Ulominate tbe pictara > wUla ■11 eztiaiieotu light ia caiefoUy exdaded, by Ibe lamp being ooutatned in a box, open in tbe front, and at Ibe lop.
Thlsai
dbrBlr
534
opnofi.
Fir. I.
Flff.t.
David Browster, and its name is derived from time Greek woide halof, beauUM ; eidtm, form ; and ajfaofwo, to see. The flgnreB produced by the Kaleidoaoope an need in the prodaction of patterns for silk and other fUnios. Fhotogr^ihs are frequautly taken of the figures for this porpoae.
To oonstmct this instroment, procure a tube of tin, hran, pasteboard, orany oUaer material, eight or ten inches long, and one and a half or two inches in diameter; plaee a cap upon one end, with a small hole in the centre, at the drcomferonoe of tfaa
cirele, d, as seen in Fig. 1, which is a view of the right end of the instrument, from which the cap has been re- moved. The circle is the edge of the tabe, the lines, aeand 6 e, are the edges of the two reflecting snr&tces, which are nearly of the same length as the tube; they may be made of two pieces of looking- glass, or of plate>glaas or crown-glass, which have been blackened at one side e e, the snrfkcea,//^ bems wtil polished. The blackening may be effbcted with the smoke of a lamp simply, or vpoa varnish, or with any other black matter which effbotoally resists the nys of ligltt: and the two reflectors must be kept apart at ^, by means of a piece <d ooric, or any other substance, placed at each end of the tube. Ate, where the reflectors join, lli^ should be straight, and adapted to each other ; or th^ may be placed diflbreoflj, or even parallel, as in Fig. 3. At the other end of the tube (the olgect end), vrbara tiba two reflecting surfltces, a ebe, terminate, a circular piece of ground glaaa is to be fitted into the tube, and retained there by means of a piece of wire, which la to be bent to a circle, and placed upon the glass to keep it steady. Over tSiia catd kt another tube be fitted, an inch or two in length at least, capable of beang tamed round; and, at its end, let another circular piece of glass, smooth, be fitted is. similarly to the preceding. Into this outer cap, or tube, put the objects to be Tiowed. which may consist of any semi-transparent coloured substance, as glass, beads, ahcBs, or pearls, and the like, but not too many at a time. Place the cap on, and then, ad* vanoing the tube to the eye, still keeping the side, a 6, upward, look through at d^ aal you will have a brilliant eymmetrical repetition of the objects which are placed bciwiiau the two glasses, and visible through the angular aperture, a be. Turn round tlMcain, more or lees, in which the obgects are so placed, and you will perceive a duuage tn tiia combinations oi the images ; new forms will present themselves, entir^ ilifTbiiiiH from the former, sometimes arising out of the centre, at others vanishing theret, aod occasionany playing round it in double and opposite osdUationa. Standing stil], bow- ever, the draughtsman may copy ofT upon pai>er the thapei that prosent themsetvea. If he cannot hope to equal the varied tinti which are developed in sncoeasloa;
an* Atlgfattng tha ajB br the perfMtioD oT Ua fOnnsuidlli* brilllMiCT rf Us oolontliig,
both at irhich dapend npon pnviooalr muiBglag tha ol^ecti to ba Tlawed, and Iho aag^ at wblob Ciba two roflecton^ d c and b r» an flrad,
'"t***** of ^uo nfleelOT3» tiila inBtmioeiit may be conitrnotad wibh throa or lAon aoohplanca, vhlch majbaamogad diffbz^utly aa regarda each otho : but tbe perfte- tum of tba ffaleldoacope la to be foood in procoriog tbe nfloctiaii of «<i"<^*nt natorml objaOa, and in redndtig tham to tha alie proper for pictorial raprewntatign. Tbla ma; be aooompUabed by fixing npon Gm object and a convex lena, Taatened to the afu£er titb*, which mnit Uwn ba nearly aa long aa tha inner onot in order tliat the right focna may be tbODd, which ia adapted to the paitlcnlar otjent ; wa two or three letuea may ba kept, of eeTeral Ibcal lengUu, whlcb abootd ba alwi^ leaa than Ita ^roiteet dtatance trota the eight-bole, and will be tbond, genaralljr, at Irom oi>e-ranith to a third at tbat dia^Aoe. A farther Tariation, howeTer, may be obtained, by introdnciDg two lenaea i One fixed to the inner tobe^ tha other to tha allder, Iheae by meant of the elider, tha (bciu will be foand.
the alM of tha Kaleidoacopa may be made to correapond with that inatnunenl, ao that ita glaeaea may be oocaaionally borrowed. A ocncaTe glaaa, placed at the light-hole (if. Pig. 1), will throw the obiecU off and redoce theii iLie, by taking cara that the tbcal len^ be eqoal to the length of the r^ptetart.
Bappoelng tha tiuEmmant to oontaia twsa^ emaTI piece* of gUo, etc. and that yon make ten duuigee in eatA mlnate, it will take the iaixRiceiTable epaoe of M1,S§0,88>,K" yean and 3M daya, to go Ihrongh the In la capable of prodncing, unonntlng (according to our i o an etami^. Or. If yon take only twelTa ai
iU tlien reqaire 3S,tal d^ri. Of Bl yeara and M dayi to
waUorakilli, an
Agnrei of renurkable, natoial, or
groteaqne objects. Hare la a i
talion of tha ordinary Uagio lAntem,
a tin box. with « fcimel ^-^w. on Uie top. npteaentedby «, and adoor /f~ i^ |' on one aide of it. Thia n being bent, aa ahown In the flgnre. kerraa Ibe donbla porpoae of letting
repnaent. in a dadc room, an a wUU
1 01 lemng xv ■ ■ : i ]
iBbottomof iVPil'S'' \
lednlamp. W "N
light. In the middle of lliebottomot
the box ia plaoed a mo
a. which moM baxe two or three good
lighu, at tha halght of tha oanM of the poUabed (in reOector, c. In the front tf tha
536 OPTICS.
box, ofyposite the refleetor, Is fixed a tin tabe, m, in wUoh than alidfls anothflr tsfti^ ML The aliding tube hae, at its outer extremity, a conTex leoA, of abont two imeliea diameter ; the tube, m, also has a conTex lens fixed in it, as shown in the figure, of three inches in diameter. The focus of the smaller of these lenses may be about tan inches. Between the tabe, m, and the lamp, there mnst be a dit or openincr (aa at
i i), to admit of the passage of glass slides, mounted in paper or wooden fhones, sad& as are represented in the margin ; upon which slides it is that the miniature fignree are painted, which are intended to be shown upon the wall. The disdnetness of the en- laiiged figures depends not only upon the goodness of the magnifying glass, but open the clearness of the light yielded by the lamp, a. Magic Lanterns may be pmrhaiwid ready-made of any optician, at all prices firom 6a. or 7s. 6d. upwards.
2fb PcmU ^ SUdet, — ^Draw on a paper the suttjoct yon desire to paint. Li^ it on a table or any fiat surflace, and place the glass oyer it ; then draw the outtizies* with a yexy fline i)encil, in varnish mixed with blade paint, and, whm dry, fill up the other parts in their proper colours. Transparent colours must be used for thia pur- pose, sunh as carmine, lake, Prussian blue, verdigris, sulphate of iron, tincture of Btaafl wood, gamboge, etc. ; and these must be tempered with a strong white Tamiali, to prevent their peeling off. Then shade them with black, or with bistre, mixed with the same varnish. Slides properly painted for exhibition may be purchased.
To Ea^tibU the Magic Lantern, — ^The lamp being lighted and the room daiteDOd, place it on the table, at some distance tmrn. the white wall or auspended aheefeh aad introduce into the sUt, « <, one of the slides represented above, with the JSguxes inverted. If the movable tube, », be then pushed in, or drawn out^ tiU the proper focus be obtained, the figures on the slide will be refiected on the wall in their diafciBei colours and proportions, with the appearance of life itself, and of any sise^ firam dz inches to seven feet, according to the distance of the lantern fh>m the wall. )Cov»> ments of the figures are easily made by painting the subject on two glasses, and panitnt the same through the groove.
To RepreterU a T&mpeat. — ^Provide two plates of glass, whose firames axe so thht
that they may both pass freely through the groove of the common Magic Lantera.
same time. On one of these paint the appearance of the sea^ from the slightasl
OPTICS. «87
to the moit violent commotion; wproBcnting, flrrt, > cabn } ftfterwaMi a nnaU agitfttioiif with some olondi ; and so on to the end, which ahonld exhibit a ftuloiu storm.
Theee representations are not to be distinct^ bat ran into each other, that they may fnrm a natural gradation ; sad great part of the eflbct depends on the perfection of the painting, and the pictoresqae appearance of the deslgXL
On the other glass, paint yeesels of different forms and dimensions, and in difib* rent directions, together with the appearance of doads in the tempestooos parts.
Both glasses being ready, pass the first slowly through the groove ; and when yoU come to that part where the storm begins, move it gently np and down, which will prodnce the appearance of asea that begins to be agitated ; and so increase the motioa till yoa come to the height of the storm. At the ssme time introduce the other glass with the ships, and moving that in like manner, they ^i^ill exhibit a natoral representation of the sea, and of ships in a calm and in a storm. As the glasses are drawn slowly back, the tempest will seem to subside, the sky grow clear, and the ships glide gently over the waves. By means of two glasses, dlsjKMed in the above- mentioned manner, nnmberless other sut^jects, comic as well as serious, may be repre- sented.
*HS PHA]rCA.SlfAeOXZA.
In the exhibition of the common Magic Lantern, the spectators see a round drole of light with the figures in the middle of it; but, in the Phantasmagoria, th^ see the figures only, without any circle of light. The exhibition is produced hj a magic lantern, placed on that side of a semi-transparent screen which is opposite to that on which the spectators are, instead of being on the same side, as in the ordinaiy exhibition of the Magic Lantern. To fkvour the deception, the slides are made perfectly opaque, except in those places that contain the figures to be exhibited, and in these light parts the glsss is covered with a more or less transparent tint, according to the eflbct required. The easiest way is to draw the figures with water colours on thin paper, and afterwards varnish them. To imitate the natural motions of the ol^Jects represented, several pieces of glass, placed behind each other, are occasionally employed. By removing the lantern to diflbrent distances, and, at the same time, altering, more or less, the position of the lens, the images are made to increase and diminish, and to become more or less dis- tinct at the pleasure of the exhibitor ; so that, to a person unacquainted with the eflbeb of optical instruments, these figures appear actually to advance and recede.
3b make 8emi4rantparent 8crmn$ Jbr the PhantMrnofforia. — Semi-transparent screens are prepared by spreading white wax, dissolved in spirits of wine or oil of turpentine, over thin muslin : a screen so prepared may be rolled up without injury. A clearer screen may be produced by having the muslin always stnined upon a rec- tangular firame, and preparing it with turpentine, instead of wax ; but such a screen is not always convenient, and cannot be rolled without cracking, and becoming, in a ahori time, useless : therefore, nothing can be better for the purpose than the farmer.
snsoLTure vixws. Dissolving views on a grand scale are produced by means of two Isnteras; with werj large lenses lit by the oxy-hydrogen lighti At the exhibitions at the Polyteohnio
llcdlar eUhcto. Th« lulsm mn of tlie ■
mngla Ihal Ui8 oirolB of Uffhl Uiniwii on tb
tlw lanteroa." Tho bMib tn pm
ludaoape. and on tha other ■ wiater Tiew. Ths tint picture i*
■r"f*"j Bud then, by meuu of m wsnw in the lantera, it ii dT&wn ftwi^ wbflB tin
othBT piotnre ii piuhed farwKf^ niUB onn fdctiuo grmdnallj dlflsolTva into th# ottav.
Od* alaotHa light it nude to ilhuninate boUi nuiTOn. It i> not Ukelj IhU anj of our
KBdan will mttmijii to nuke the appsimtoi tbr DiHolTing Tiewi ; RiT if the; did, at;
wonld prolwblj lUL The lAuteme and ftUdM mftjr be procured dtha by hire or par-
ohaaa of *1bioM aoj- Dpttdan. Practloe will eooner duulliuiie Uie roong epsUor with
the emcliu sfvraiKft of the DinolTinit Tiewa then any enuHmtof writt«d deeertptiOB. la
eoimeotloti wUti Hie niagio lantcni tlw oxy-hydrogeti mlonwoape 1* ttaqnentjy need.
-VV-??
Inuloee k tmell maglo lantern in & box lir^ enooRh to encitete a Bnall awisg dmting-glM*. Thli will reflect Che Light thrown on It b; (ha lantern in nu4i B war that it will paaa out at an apntnre at the top of the box. The apertore ihoold be oral, and of a alae adapted to the cone of light which is lo pen Ihrongh tt. Thne abooU ^r . ■-- be a Sap with tungei tc
the inside of the box ma; IwU
also be holea in that part oF the box whiBh is om
the lantern, to let ont the Bmolcef and over Ibe
enough to oontahi a mnall qnjuiti^ of bomlnK eoaL This chaflng'diah, for the better carrTing on l^e rliwptton, may be inclosed ia a peiuCed tin boK, HlKint twelve incbea high. etandlDg on Ibor tun.
ra in the groove, a b, ejid rut manogeil by a oord and policy, e d ef, that tt nvj* be raleed and let down by the cord coming Ihraagb U>» antelde of the box. On Um glBM, the apectra miut be pointed — small and contraeud, ainoe the flgnn will a|niaei. whan redeoted, of a greater length than It is dnwn.
When you have lighted the lamp in the lacCem, and placed the mintr tn a p'lipa' diitrtlon, put the box on a Uble, and, seUIng the chaflng-dish in it, throw aoBH inoeBM powder on the bnming coal. You then open the trap-door and M dam Oa glosa tn the gmore alowly, and the Hsiue wOl appeal- reflectBd on the smoker as in the Ulaatntion. When the smoke eraporalce, dntw up the glass that the Bgiu« la^ die- appear, and shut the trap door.
This eililbltlOQ will aSbrd a deal of wonder ; bat obeerve. that all the lij^M la Ite room iDDM be extiaguished ; and the box should be placed on a high taUa, HiM ika aporture thntngh which the light oomea oat may not be seen.
OPTI08. 88B
nn wnuuB saluit, ob xvltifltuis nsAfu. HaT6 a box mado, about eighteen inohee in length, eight inches high, and a foot in width, or of anj other sixe yon preter, but of the aame proportions; at each end of this box place a Hat piece Gt looking-glass, but at one end make a drcolar hole, about an inch and a half in width, and remove the silyeiiag from the looking-glass at that spot to enable you to see the interior of the box. On each side of the length of the box finm two grooves ; then paint upon fonr pieces of pasteboard trees, columns, temples, or anything you please ; and having out them out like the set pieces on the stage, fix them in the four grooves you have made in the box to receive them. Then paiutother sul^ects upon one aide of other pieces of pasteboard, and fix one of them on the sides of the box, and against the looking-glass through which you look into the interior, and also against the glass at the other end, observing that the work at that end must be as trifling and indistinct as possible, so that it may obscure but little of the glass ; but, nevertheless, some work must be painted near the centre of the farthest glass, to conceal the reflection of the hole through which you look. Place on the top of the box a wooden cover, over wfaidh a piece of fine muslin has been stretched. If the eye is then placed at the opening, the objects in the interior will be reflected from one mirror to the other in endless succession, and the view will appear like a long avenne, of which the eye cannot see the end. A variely of other efftets may be produced by lining the four sides of the box with looking-glass, or even constructing a box with six, eight, or more, sides so lined, by which olijiectB, such ss toy soldiers, playing-cards, etc., may be multiplied to an almost indeflnlte extent.
tiis MAOio sisa This curious Uttle tqy is formed on the same principle as the Thanwmtrope, but it is much more elltotive. It oonsiBts of a circulsr piece of pasteboarda about twelve inohee in diameter, with small openings cut in its drcumflsrence, all pointing towards the centre ; on one side of this disc various flgnresi •re drawn in a eirde, for instance, a man on honeback, leaping a ftnce ; the flrst figure rspresents the rider and horse stancllng before | the teioe, and the last represents them ss standing on the other side of the Iteioe, as if the leap had been completed. Between these two flignres there ere several others, representing the rider and horse in dilftrent parts of the leap, just rising ttonx the ground, springing owmt the top of the fisnoe, and so on. This painted board is fastened to a handle^ in such a manner as to turn round essily . To use the toy, you stand in front of a looking-glass, and hold the disc between yourself snd the glass, the painted side fhdng the glass. If you now twist it rapidly round, and look through the notches in its oironmiiBrenoe, you will be sorprised to see the horse and his rider apparently leaping the taace, as if they were alive ; but if you look over the margin of the pasteboard at the reflected image, all the flgores are invisible, and an iadistinot greyish circle is all that is seen. The fttct is, that whsn you look through the notches yon only see the figure of the horse and rider at the instant the apertoieia
610
QPnCB.
the board paaaes joor tj9 ; lo that the piotare hmtftntanaooaly ftanned on the ntinaof the eye is aa saddenly obliterated, uid ia in thia maTmer not oonftaaed hj |WM->i>.iiii|y or snbeeqaent impressions. On thia aoooont the eje reoaiTea in saooeasion the pictnreBof the horse and rider in all the attitodea of the leap, which are blended, aa it were, into one action. The apparent apeed with which the rider advances, aapposing the diae to maintain the same relooitj, dependa upon the proportion between the nnmbfir of apertozea in the margin, and the nnmber of figuea of the hone and ridar.
xvamots AVAXOspHOBia.
This recreation ahows how to draw, on a flat snrftuM, an irregular flgiire, whidi shall appear, when seen from a proper point of view, not only regular, but elflvated. Provide a thin board, about two ftet long and one foot wide, as AB CD, and place there- on a circular c piece of card or stiff drawing- paper, on which
a distorted figure is to be drawn, that, being viewed from the point H, shall regular, and exactly resembling that which ia placed at M F.
Fix, at the end of the board, an upright piece, I, of thin wood or tin, at the top of which is a sight-hole, H, of two-tenths of an inch in diameter.
Prepare a lamp, or candlestick, the light of which may be raiaed or lowwad at pleasure, to which is fizeda braas arm, bearing a sort of conical ftmnel, D, wboae opaong at the end next the light ia not more than three or four-tenths of an inch in *tfaLm«^i»P
Draw the subject you would represent on a piece d glass of equal height with Oa space, M F, with a very light stroke, and with any colour that is quite opaqoa. Tbea
remove the upright piece, I, and place the lamp, so prepared, in such a manner that the light may be exactly where the aigh^hola, H, waa. Its rays then passing through the glass at M F, win en- lighten the sarflMje of your paper, and there show, in a diatorted form, the subject tiukt is painted on the glass. Then draw, wldi a pencil, all the strokes of the shadow aa they appear, and, takxag away the light, replace the upright sight-piece I, and sea if what you have drawn oorrespond with the sulqeot on the 83aaB» correcting what imperfections there may happen to be. In the last place, colour the subject so traced with the utmost attnnttcm, inspecting your work, from time to time, flrom the point of before you give it the finishing stroke. When the figure tibat di»wn and painted on your paper is viewed from the Bights H, it appears to be
nnM ptdnt whm tha glao. If V. mu pl*Md snd in Ih* luna fWm that It mi painted oa Uu glui. It appearm to the Bjn <tiq slevaud aborg the tmthoa of (tas boaul oa irhloh tha diswlag ta pland, aad thereby recetvee a Temarkable and pLeaalag illnakm.
The above enl te an IDnnnition of the eipBriniaDt on the UK i»g». being ooutrnolM n the wme principle i and It la onlj nucMaij to Tie* it at tha oan«oC point of alcht <M
548
OPTICS.
before deecribed) to ttaaatOrm its seeming deformitf to legnlarity and propartaoa. For this purpose, a pieoe of osrd is to be cut oat» of the exact dineosioiis of Fig. A, B, 0. ThecirolB ▲ is a romid hole, to be cat out of the card, precisely at that spot* forming the sight-hole. Draw your penknife across the line F O, to enable yon to doable back the shaded piece B C, and form a foot for it to stand on. Yon win have thna oonstrnoted the sight-piece, which yoa are to place exactly on the spot marked D. Then, keeping the paper perfectly flat, and applying yoar ^ye to the sight-hole, yon will find the picture reetored to its proper symmetzy.
Another mode of producing a similar eflbct is as follows : — ^Draw anything yoa may fimoy on a thin white pasteboard; then prick it; afterward place the same perpendi- cularly on a horisontal sarfikoe, which we will suiypoee to be another pasteboard; pot a lighted candle behind the upright pricked board, and draw, on the horisontal amlhoe^ the lines given by the light, and you will have a deformed design. This being donsw take away the drawing that was pricked, and the candle ; Chen place your eya whecc the light was, and you will see your drawing assume a regular fbnn.
BOW lO Bia THBOUaH A BSZOX.
Ckmstroot a hpllow box or oaae, like the figure here given. One side is impuae^y removed in the engraving, to enable you to see the arrangement of the interior. A,B,C
and D, are four small pleoea of
looking-glass, all ptaoed aft an angle of 46 degrees, with xeqpeet to those sides of the box on which tbay are fixed; at B and G, two flat pieces of glasa are inserted, as in the qre-glasa of a telescope. Supposing you look through the opening S, in the
direction of an olqeot pbiced at O, you would see it in the same manner as if there an uninterrupted view between E and O, which is evidently not the case. The eanae itf this is readily explained. The image of the object at O is received on the looidn^ glassA, by which it is refiectedtoB, as it is again firomBtoO, and afterwards toD; and this last image» in D, is seen by the eye of the spectator, placed at E, in the same direc- tion as if, in reality, he was looking at the real object itself, in the direction of the dotted line from O to B. Firom this it is evident that the placing an opaque body at F cannot prevent the oliijeot at O being seen. Of course all this interior arrangement of the instrument is oonoealed, and you place the toy in the hands of a companion, that he may look through B or O, it matters not which, at any object placed beyond. Yoa may then safely aver that your instrument is of so magical a nature that it will enable youto see through a brick wall ; but as a single brick is more convenient, and eqaaBj wondsrftzl, you are willing to satisty his doubto at once, which you do by plartng * brick at F. Of course it wiU be understood that any other opaqae dfaaeotwill anawer the same purpose.
OPTICS.
10 BITIDl A BAT OV WHin LIOR.
We all Imow that the ran*i light, if reoeived on a sheet of white paper, appean to
be white, the more partioolarly ao if it cornea through a small hole bored in a piece of pasteboard, or other sabstanoe, painted black, and is received in a dark room ; but to show that this white light is composed of a series of coloured rays of light, yon have bat to hold ap a inism (a three*sided piece of glass) in the Bonshine, and receive the rays of light after they are refracted, by passing through the glass, upon a sheet of white paper, they will then appear of aU the colonra of the rambow. P is the prism, L the ray of the son's light, and 8 S the white screen on which the coloured raja are reodved. This is an exceedingly jnetty experiment when properly performed.
HOW TO KiXX 1. rasBM.
Provide two small piecea of window-glass and a Inmp of wax; soften and mooldthe wax ; stick the two piecee of glass apon it, so that thqr meet» as in the engraving, wherewisthewaxand^and^thepiecesof glass stack ris^L Fif.i.
to it (Fig. 1). The end view (Fig. 2) shows the angle, a, at which the pieoea of glass mee^ and into which angle pat a drop of water.
To nse the prism thoa made, form a small hole, or a narrow horisontal slit, in a window-shutter, so that yon can see the sky through it when you stand at some distance bora it in the room ; or a piece of pasteboard, placed, in the upper part of the window-sash, with a slit cot in it, will serve the purpose of the hole in the shutter. The slit should be about one-tenth of an inch wide and an inch or two long, with even edges. Then hold the prism in your hand, and look through the drop of water, when you will see a beautifhl train of colours called a spectrum, at one end red, at the other violet, and in the middle yellowish green. '*>• *• The annexed Figure (3) will better explain the
direction in which to look. Heree is the ^ye of the spectator ; p is the prism ; h the hole in the shutter or pasteboard ;« the spectrum. ^ a little practice you will soon become accustomed to look in the right direction, and will see the colours very bright and distinct.
By means of this simple contrivance, white light may be analysed and proved to consist of eokrared rays ; and several of its properties may be beantiftilly illustrated.
>^
TB> CKnrxsa shadows (ombsis chihoxsbs). Hake an aperture in a partition wall, of any sisej tar example, foor flMt in lengtli
544 OPnOB.
•ad two in tanidth, lo thttt Om lower edge magr be eboni ftte tet Cram Om floor, end eoTer it with white Iteliangaiue,veniiabed with gam-oopel. Fronde eevenelfteeMi o( the eeme eiae ee the epertore, coveied with the wme land of genae, end ilr liiwlii ■|wiii the game different fignree, each aa landeo^pee and bedldinga, analogoaa to the which yon intend to exhibit by meena of email fignea reiHeaeuUng men and
ThOM iignres are farmed of peateboerd, and their diflbrent pazta axe made aooording to the ellbct intended to be prodnoed I7 thnr ahadowB, when moved and forward behind the fkamea, and at a email diirtance from them. To with more Ihciliqr, amall wirm, fixed to their movable parte, are bent made to tfrmlnate in linge, throogh whidi the fingeca of the hand are pnt^ figure is snpparted by the left, hy meane of another iron wire. In thie may be made to advanoe or recede, and to grwtimlate, wxthont the gprctatnra the mechanism hy which they eie moved ; and ae the ahadow of theee fiignree ie na obeenred on the paintinge tall they are oppoeite thoee parte which aie not atnmgis Bbaded, they m^ thus be concealed, and made to appeer at the proper others m^ be ooceeionaUy snbetitated in their steed.
It is neoeeseiy, when the figures are made to act, to keep np a sort of to their geslmes, and even to uniteto the noise oeoaaioned liy dilltoe&t The paintangs mnst be iUominated firom bdiind, by means of a lamp, placed opposite to the centre of the painting, and distant from it aboodt ilonr cr five feet. Various amniring scenes m^y be xepreeented in this manner, bry eosfikigmg email figures of men and animals, and making them move in as nateral a way ae which will depend upon the address and pnMStioe of the penosi who e»hihits
OCUIAM BPacnu, oa Accnnvcu; coloubs.
Cot a fignre oat of red p^mt (or a red waftr will do), place it on a aheei of w^te paper; view it steadily for simie seconds with one or both ^yes fixed on a part of it, and the red coloor vrill become lees brilliant. Then torn the the red fignre upon the white p^iMT, and yon will see a distinct preni fignre, wlu^M ^ spectrum, or aooidentel coloar of the red figure. With the difltarent ooloinwd yoa may observe diilbrently-coloared tpedra, as foUows (the ooloors of the figures being given in ordinaiy ^rp^ thoee of the spectral figures in ifealiQB):— nBd,blmiMhffrem; Ormnge, blme;Ye}kfW, indigo; Green, mUMk eioM ; Btae^ rmi; Indigo, ortmoe-peOow ; T&dlet, yeOow; White, ttadc; Bhu^ wiMte.
The two last of theee experiments, via., vdiite and black figures, may be I made by using a white medallion on a daik gronnd, and a black profile speotrmn of the fonner will be found to be black, and that of the latter whitaw
VAXAnA.T's lueio
This apparatus, first used by Profeeaor Faraday, may be oonstructed aa fbOowa : — Cot two cardboard cog-wheels of equal size, place them upon a pin, and vrhni them round with equal velocity in opposite directions ; when, limtead of producing a faA^txst, as one wheel would do, or es the two would if revolving in the same dxreotka. tlMtt
OPTICS. 645
will be an extraordinary appearance of a fixed wheel. If the cogt be cut aslant on both wheels, the spectral wheel, as it may be called, will exhibit slanting cogs ; but if one of the wheels be tamed, so that the cogs shall point in opposite directions, then the spectral wheel wiU have straight cogs. If wheels with radii of arms be viewed when moving, the deception will be similar ; and, however fast the wheels may move, provided it be with equal velocity, the magic of a fixed wheel Mrill be presented.
Or, cat a cardboard wheel with a certain number of teeth or cogs at its edge; a little nearer the centre, cat a series of apertorea, resembling the cog^s in arrangement, bat not to the same nomber ; and still nearer the centre, cat anotiier series of apertures, different in number, and varying firom the former. Fix this wheel upon another, with its fhce held two or three yards firom an illuminated mirror ; spin it round, when the cogs will disappear, and a gresrish belt, tiiree inches broad, will become visible ; but, on looking at the glass through the moving wheel, appearances will entirely change : one row of cogs, or apertares, will appear fixed, as if the wheel were not moving, whilst the other two will appear as if in motion ; and, by shifting the eye. the other and new effects will appear.
XXHOB OrtlCASs XXPSBIlfXim.
1. Affix on a dark wall a round piece of paper, an inch or two in diameter, uid a little lower, at the distance of two feet on each side, make two marks. Then place your- self directly opposite to the paper, and hold the end of a finger before your fkce, in sach a manner that when the right eye is open it shall conceal the mark on the left, and when the left ^e is open the mark on tiie right. If you then look with both eyes to the end of your finger, the paper, which is not at all ooncealed by it ftom either of your eyes, wiU disappear.
2. Fix, at the height of the eye, on a dark ground, a small round piece of white paper, fuid a little lower, at the distance of two feet to the right, fix another piece, three inches is diameter ; then place yourself opposite to the first piece of paper, and having shut the toft eye, retire backwards, keeping your eye still fixed on the ftnt olqect. When yon are at the distance of nine or ten feet, the second will entirely disappear from your sight
3. Or, fix three pieces of paper against the wall of aroom, at equal distances, at the beight of the ^ye. Place yourself directly before them, at a few yards distance, dose your right «ye, and look at them with your left, when you will see only two of them, suppose the first and second ; alter 3roar position a second time, and you will see the second and third, but never the whole three pieces together.
4. On a sheet of black paper, or other dark ground, place two white waflsn, having tbeir oentres three inches distant. Yerticalty above the paper, and to the left, look with tlie right eye, at twelve inches ttom it, and so that, when looking down on it, the line Join- ing the two eyes shall be parallel to that joining the centre of the wafsrs. In this situation cloaa the left eye, and look fhll with the right perpendioalarly at the wafer below it, when tliia wafer only will be seen, the other being completely invisible. But if it be removed ever mo little from its place, either to the right or left, above or below, it will become im- mediately visible, and start, as it were, into existence.
The Inverted Pin, — Hake a hole in one side of a pill-box, about the sise of a small
3ft
5M OPTICS.
pw; •BdhftTlngbirokanofftlMhMdaadiHfftoribewiivorBpin.llzttwilhtliB upwudat •Dd(mtheop|X»iteuddortheboxmftlnaiinaU«'hol«. Ba^viag plmoeA \h» Ud on, hold tbe box oloMto yoor qre, and look through the hole in whioh the pin is fixed, in the diiMtUm of the nialler hole opposite, towaidsaaj iferaogUgliftkae the ak; or a oendle, tor iinhiiioe. Ton will then eee the ptaieIeBxi7,appeTCnt)ymadkBngBBfled» hot the head wiU eeem to be downwarda inatead of in ita raal posftioa.
J%« MmmgiKsd JfoMy.— Take a Urge diinking-glBaa, of a oonioat fbcn. that a, ■UU M bottom and wide at top, and haTing pat into it a ahiBing, let tt be half ffikd with water; then plaoe a plate apon the top of the glaaa, and torn it qniekty' over, Oaft the water may not get oat : a pleoe of ailrer aa large aa half-«-ocowa will imraadiaiafy appear on the plate, and, aomewhat higher up, another pieoe of the aiae of a ehUlfaig.
2b Imitate a Mirage. — Proride a glaaa tumbler two-thirda Ihll of watai^ and poor apirtt of wine upon it ; or poor into a tombler aome ayrup, and fill tt op wttti when mixed, the obgeota aeen through it will be inTSrted.
Vigion tktotigh a Piu-hoU, — ^Take any minnte ol^eot, a toijf amall inaeet, far : held on a pin, or gammed to a alit of glaaa ; then preaeut it to a atrong light, and look at it through the fineat needle-hole in a blackened oard, plaoed about anindi belbra ik The iaaeot will appear quite dJatinot, and about ten timea larger than ita oataral eiaa. Then auddenly withdraw the eard, without diaturbing the objeet, wfaiidi wiU inatamfy heoome indiatinot, and neaiiy iuTiaible. The loaaou ia that the naked egre esanot aee at ao amall a dtetanne aa one ineh. Rut the oard with the hole baring enabled Uue^ft to approaoh within an inoh, and to aee diatinotlj at that diatanoe, ia tiraa pao^WI to be aa deddedly a magnifying inatrumant aa any lena or eombination of lenaea.
An (Hffeet beUtg piaeed MWnd a Oomvex Olaa$, to make it appear b^fitraii. — ^Provide any ot^|eot, auoh, for example, aa a amall arrow of wood, an inch and a half in lengik. and tie it perpendicularly to a pieoe of black oard, which must be auapeaded fhmi a wall at about the height of the eye ; throw a atrong light on the oard. and place bcftre it a lenttoular glaaa, two or three inohea in diameter, in auoh a manner that it may be distant from the arrow about twice the length of ite focua. If yon then aaaka » potaoa atand at a proper diatanoe, oppoaite to the glaaa, the arrow will appear to him to be auspended in the air before the glaaa. TUa atngular eflbct of diopthca may, with and a little ingenuity, be applied to a Tarie^ of other arauaementa.
Jfo^ Skadowt. — ^Light two oandles, and place them upon a table before » waahed or light>papered wall ; hold before one of the candlea a pieoe of ec^ovred taking oare to remove to a greater distance the candle before whitAi the eoloarad glaas ia not placed, in order to equalise the darkneaa <^ the ahadowa. If you nee « piece cf green glaaa, one of the ahadowa will be green the other afoie red; if yon -qie of the ahadowa will be Aiae, the other a pate gettow.
Twa-Jbld Befleetion, — ^I*roTide a eiroolar piece of glaai. and with a moistened with apirit of turpentine, pieroe the centre of the glaea ; holditi the fingers and thumb in the annahine, or the atrong light of a lamp, when i eflbcts will be produced. If the glaea be fwl, the hole pierced in the middle will be green ; if the glaaa be green, the apot will be red; if Mii«, orange ; and if yrftose.
THE MICROSCOPE.
TB1B MICR08C0FB.
547
HE Microscope is one of the most Talnabie optical ioBtramentB ever isTented. By it we are enabled to unfold a world of nuunrela in evnry leaf and flower, and bring into yiew myriads of animate and inanimatie olyects tliat are too minute for obser- vation l^ means of the naked eye. Throngh the mcdinm of the Mioroaoope, we maiy discover order, and system, and teeming lifl» in a drop of water that the touch of a Ihxger may obliterate for ever. JJthongh so varied in pattern, microscopes may be divided into two classes, the stiapfo and the ean^ptmnd,
TMM waoLM mcBoeoon Oonrisla of one lens only—hence it is somatlmea termed the »ki^ microscope— or of two cr three Isdms, so aiivnged in combination as to have the effiDCt of a single leBS. There most always exist more or less imperfeotion in a U-convex lens : but except in those of high magnifying power, tbay are deflMsts of little consequence, and are such as fona no obstacle to its use in the earlier examination of most objects. These lensea are mounted in varioua fonns. The first and simplest is the hand- magnifier, a single lens mounted in horn, and of convenient sixe for the waistcoat pocket, which osn be bought ttom one shilling upwards. The double, triple, and oombinatiott lenssa increase the magnifying power, according to sise and number of glasses. Thsse, thesimpleet of simple microscopes, enable the observer to make examina-* tlon of the many intereeting objects met with in a country ramble or a garden walk.
The leas can be employed in various ways, and, by a little ingenuity, be made aervicsable as a Dissecting Microscope. Get an iron or brass rod, fix it to a leaden foot, producing something bke a small retort stand, then bore a hole through a large wine oork, so as to slide somewhat stifily over the ujiright rod. TUce a stout brass wire and twist one end of it round the ooik, out it off to the required length, and turn ita other end at right angles ; then pass it through the hole drilled in the handle of Ihe magnifying glass, and the dissector is thus complete. The sliding cork will pennit tbe lens to be imised to a higher or lower level, according to the focus required, while the length of the horisontal rod win permit the hands to be used with freedom.
One of the many purpoaes for which such a fbrm of mioroacoiie will be found useful, is the selection of the smaller kinds of shells present in most sanda. A. small quan- tl^ of the sand supposed to contain them may be spread on a piece of black paper on the table ; and, by means of a needle or penci] brush, brought to a fine point. Much Important work may be accomplished in a short space of time with this instrument, mad With more certainty than with a compound microsoope^ in which otgects appear
513 OPTICS.
Whore a higher power is required, the Ooddingian Ztent, ao called after the eminont profeHsor who designed it, is at once the beet and cheapest. It caa be obtained of most opticians for 3s. 6d. ; and consists of a polished sphere of glass, with a deep groove cut round its oircomference, and the hollow filled with black ceramit This forms what is called a stop, and corrects to some extent the aberrations, while it renders the field of this little microscope flat and good in whatever poaition it is held. These lenses are usually mounted in ivoxy, having a handle two inchea long for the convenience of holding. As a high magnifying power for the pocket, thia lens is most valuable. By means of it not only the form but the structure of many animal and vegetable substances can be discovered; but its focus being shorty the manipula- tions made with it need a little care. The lens, held in the right finger and thorab, should be brought close to the eye ; the object, by means of the left hand, is then to be brought nearly in contact with the end of the lens ftuthest from the eye* If &e object is transparent, it should be held up before a window so as to allow the rays 6f light to pass throuc:h it ; if opaque, it should be held down, so that the foil tight /rom the window may fall on it
We may suppose our young reader to have provided himself with one or othfor of these pocket magnifiers; and should he hereafter become possessor of one of a better class of instruments, such as we are about to mention, let him^omember tluit a botanical lens will still prove useful for the cursory eTSTniustion of any olgect thsS may be found in the field, and enable him to decide whether it is worthy of bea« taken home and placed under the compound microscope.
THS coKPOUirx) mcBOscora
Consists of at least two convex lenses, called respectively an offfeet-glatt and cye^ glass ; and dilTors from a simple one in having the image of an object formed by the object-glass farther magnified by the one or more lenses forming the eye-glasB. Through this microscoiM an object appears enlarged on two aocoxmts : first, the image itself is larger than the object ; and secondly, we are able, by means of the eye>glase which should be placed at its proper distance from the objective— ftirther to megniiy and to see it distinctly. For instance, if the image is twenty times larger thaa the object, and if, by the help of the eye-glass, we are able to view it five timee than we could have done with the naked eye, it will then be magnified fire twenty, or one hundred times.
A useAxl microscope may be obtained for ten pounds. This sum will no donbi ap- pear to many of our young readers too vast, so we are glad to be able to introduce to their notice the excellent Compound Microscope which Mr. Baker, the optician in Holbom, supplies for as many shillings. It is contained in a mahogany box eight inebet long, three and a half broad, and three deep. It consists of a body, or outer tubcv standing on a circular foot about two inches in diameter. On the lower pert of the body is fixed a mirror ; above is a firm stage with a hole to receive the liisrbt. axni over the laUer the object is laid. Above the stage ii a tube in which aUdes another tube called the body, containing an eye-piece at the upper end, and the olgect-gla&s
»t \he lower BmL Thii eyi'iiiece is
who inTBDlad ic for dm with tht ulac
found equally well ndBpled for tlw mil
Qot Aold uid bSbrding correction o
eoniiiu of two pUne coaTox laoiea, planed at a diatance
from each odiar equal to half the anm of their focal
tongtha. The Oat nrtkoea of then leuaei are towarda
th* tyn 1 that naareat the eje la lenncd the eye'gUaa, the
other beins called the fleld-Rlau. We are particular in
deaerfljinK thii ere-pface, it being of the fbrm employed
THX UlCSOSCOPE. ta
the Hngheniaa conitmctiDu falttr EuBbens B, butithaa been ■cope), RiTinB a
■ to be doscribod. The eicellence of the depend! Teiy much on (he form of the tye- piece. With thia mtcraaoipe an inpptted three magni- Qrint; powen or otyect-glaueg. tmmbered 1. 1, and 3 ; the fine being (be higheaL. and magniiying nearly equal to tO.OOO tiniea. Theae lenw oa at the lower end of the cube. The box Mmtaina aleo two drenlar glaiKi on which to I
ne aide and while on the oth' monnled ot^ecta, a cage, animalculie and Tarloua little inaect
The tua of Uu Hkroioope in early daja hu developed taatet and hsblta of thoaght and obeervation which hare proTed very raluabte, and led Is great anceeea In aAcr UTe. And In (he hope tbnt DOT yonng Mend* will oommenoe thig ilelightftil aiudy, and, Bndiog it ao attisctlve. may at aoma l^tore day
on (he Achromatic MIcroacope.
Thia dlSkra (hnn the ordinary and loBt-rleacriboil in atntment chiefly aa regarda the obJect-KlaMeA. Thei<b eonaiat of aererml tense*, accurelelj- ground, poliatieil, and centeed, and ao placed in rttpect to each other thai one glas* correcta what la called the chromatlam and aberration of the oUier. By ihla mcana objecta are t re- td without thoae tringea of rainbow coknirfng which I ai« alwaya aeen currounding the image In lesa perTect miCToacopea. One of the beat and cheapest of theae la whioh r«eelved the approval of the Society of Arta. ' and la by moet optldana aold under the name of (be Edocaliuaal UieraKope, it having been adopted in many achooli and collegea.
. "I
650 OPTICB.
It iB ftmiihad with thfM poiran— oaaidj, tlM one-iadh, bilf-tndh, and qnwler- laoh (AgeollTM. It baa a lUdlng ilaga for fha imipOM of oonvanientlj mtfviag the efeijeot, and ia Jointed ao aa lo aoJt tha poaftion of Oia baad whan the ubaeniii' ia aaated at a tabla. The bodj, or taba whan tha otjeot-gltiini aie aet^ ia mored to a&d ftom the ot^jaot hy large and ilaa eoiawB, oaUad the tpkik and alow motiana It it alao aappUad with dieaeoting-lbraapa and ataga-ftereepa (with whieh aa ol^fact oan be examined in aoj dizaotion), and a liTa-boxt all fitting into » mahogax^ oaaa^ eo managed that additional appaiatoa. If hanaftar obtafaiad, oan ba rmdOj paotod withinit. The ooat of thia oompaot mioraaoopa ia thna gnineaa.
tm ArFAa^tui fo acooxfavt tm Mzcioeoon.
▲a tha Tarlooa mpptntatM mantionad aa aooompanying tha Ednoational Ifioroaoopa are aimilar to thoee in tha more azpenaita olaai of inatramante, it maj be wall to giTe acme explanation of thair vaee.
The lM«0e Ibrming tha powan aorew on at the kmar end of tha tnba or bodlj. and when the three are arranged in oombination, tha qoarter^inoh, or hJgfaaat power, ie obtained; on remoTing tha ontar lena» tha power la redneed to half-indi, and the upper one beoomee one-inoh. Thaea are marfcad 1, S, <» to inaora their bafag plaead qb the mioroaoope in proper order, No. < bafag naanet the ^ya. Tha oonTaaleaea of th» arrangement ia arident Whan aa dbgaot baa been well aramlmwl with ttie loweit power, Ko. 9 oan ba added, and tha raok a^Jqitment tamed ao aa lo bring tha giam nearer to the ot^eot, whioh la aura of being in the exaot field of the glaaa. Thia ia of no amall oonaeqnanoe, aa tha banting ftv » little ot^jaot ondar a high power ia » sMat tediooa operation.
On the 9iao§, i. #., tha flat metal table ondar the ot^feot-glaia, maybeaaan tharaiaed ledge against whioh the glaaa elide holding the ot^feot ia laid, and whioh, by aUdiag up and down, oaniee the ot^jeot with it. Thia morement is neceaaazy in order to bna; areiy portion of a large ofajfeot under tha field of tha mioroaoopa.
Tha hvge-headed aorawa aeen Joat behfaid the atage are thoea which flbna tht coaree a^jnatmant, and raiae or depreaa tha body of the inatroment by meaaa of a rack and pinUm. Whan the higher power ia need. It is deaizable to obtain aa approximatB foooa with thia, and then employ the fine a4f oatment for a more ezaot Ibeo^ The eoraw to eflbot this la aeen on the tabe Joat above the oljeot-glaaa. Tha mhrvor ia ao fitted that it oan ba tamed in any dhwitkm, ao aa to throw tha raya of hgbt eitfaar atraight or obUqoaly, aa may ba reqalred.
▲ small hole may ba obeenred at one ootnar of the ataga-plate, and into Oua to what is called the ttoff&JbrctpB, a oontrivanoe Itar holding aa ot^ject^ such aa a fly. or fragment of a mineral, whioh can thna ba t**"**"^ on arety side. Thia little las&u- meat Is almost indiapenaable.
Tha fow-ftcw, or aalmalonte oaga, la alao a moat naeM part of tha apparatwa. It is ampl(qred for confining Uving ol^eote, sooh aa inaeeta, animahwli, mksoseopie plants, or any ot^ject whioh reqnires gentle pressore, or to be fixed ia pnaitioii. U is ▼ery aimple ia operattoa. Tha upper oap is remorad and tha Inaeot^ or drop of
down oulfl aiadrop ot w M mImb (Oioftr, orlhs bauttMrofiArt, «■> 1nk«p(>im fcraMor hoon la tlila saf*' A Mndmmr la gaaarallj anpplM wAh Uu mlsoiooiiat aad, ■* IM wnu tanpinta. liuadlbromdaiialngllgUimopaqiM ol^acta. It la monnWil to tmIoqi myt. Ontel UlaiiuiatiMiiTanleiitiitltMlBwIikihltltfllMdiipoBthsaMsalatJwiiuiuiar of Hia Cotcapt JnM ilsacnniBil ; motion to all diiMilfoiia being Uini obtatoad, lU(bt can ba tbrown from any qouur. Tlw tStat prodniiad on nub otfaota aa irtoga oT tha dtomoud baetla, ftettaaiB of Ilia hnmratog bird, eCo., la hrllllact to tfaa ■■*t"*t. and tha obaoiiai la ohanuad with Ibelr Borgsoiu Dakmring aad baao^. Want of apaca fUrblda our aDlarc- Ing upon all the Tarlons tbrmi of ^qiantai irbluli hava bean tram tima to tlnia addad 10 the mleroaoopa, all of whioh b>Ta an
Wb mnit not MmDlnda Impoitaot iupmramant affMed bj lb. Iba Unoenlar i*toolpls l» miaroaciopca. Th»n|[h hla nBtfttos
and Ua Uba>U^ tn Ittttj giving world, ira aia no longar ttanra^ " Ibe nuglo tnbe,'
ThalaR-handtBbalaillgtat>rlDfl)lBad,andilartght-baDd I osa la adjuted at tb* proper angla. At tha lower and of tbla tuba, abora tbt ahteot-glaaa, la a amall box o priim, ao eonatrwiUid aa to lUde Biastlj half-way oirar die t*J% of light paaatog from Iha objeel. Tha nanUaT Ibla ^v., |,. amngamanl la, that wbfla one half <^ Iha light paaaaa np ^fi-V. iba taba nsobatrantad, Clie othar half mnal ftrat paaa thraogb tha pitein, *h«n, after nndargDlng two nfiaellona, it aaoapea np tba Mt tab*.
In nalng the Btnomlar IClonaoopa tt win b* obaamd tha* Iba apaee ba of dUtemt peraona Tarlaa In wMUi, hanoa a(
to dirersa or oomvga, aa nuf ba Baaaaaaiy.
J
553 OPTICB.
FortoxiAtaly for tha poiuflson of the ordinaiy microaoope. the binocular anange* menWcan be readiljr adapted at a moderate ooeL
coLLicTxov ov oBjacTS voB THx mcaoeoorB.
HaTing thus giren our readers an insight into the mechanism of the microaeope, irs now ofDor a few suggestions for the application of the instrament. And here a field opens to us so extensive that we must be content to take a few only of the more enter- taining branches of investigation, and chiefly those in which the ol^ects may be cacalj obtained.
The apparatus required in collecting objects for the mieroeoope are few and simple, and such as most youths can readily manu&cture for themselves. All that are rea&j necessary are— a net of muslin for taking objects, such as butterflies on the wing; s little tin box containing a few rolls of paper ; a pond stick, with a wide-numthed four^ ounce bottle, attached either by a metal clip or merely tied on by a bit of string to the end of a landing-rod, jointed in two or three lengths, as many of the moat beaoti- toX aquatic ol]|iects seek the quiet depth of the pools — the longer rod is also oonveniat for reaching and pulling up weeds, such as auaeharitt c^rw, etc. — a few bottles, carried loose in the pocket ; a tin sandwich«box for botanical specimens ; and some piU-bozea With a sharp eye and a little practice, you will soon be able to bring home a store </ amusing and inMructive objects.
The class of objects which present the greatest attraction for the beginner are thoee termed animaUmla. They are ea^y to obtain, and even a single drop of wato* wiS aflbrd amusement and excite admiration for hours ; in ftust, a new world opena to the microscopist— a world of beings totally different firom anything he has been to see. Many microscopic ol^ects are so transparent that their internal oven the act of digestion in aninoalculA— can be perceived, and the food txmced from its entrance at the mouth to its passage into the internal cavities. In many inataaces the eggs also can be seen within the body of theee minute insects. Nearly every postd or pool of stagnant water will yield a large supply of theee beautifhl creatures ; and if brought home and placed in a glass vessel, with some of the weed, in order to keep the water fresh and clear, a miniature aquarium can be formed which will aflbrd a t^*^^^^^ change of sulqect for study and observation.
The best way of showing living animalcule under the microscope is to lift a f^*^^ quantity of the water from the bottom with a glass tube, and deposit a drop or two upon the lower glass of the live-box. When the cover is pressed down, the wbole will appear in focus, and can be examined one by one. This flattening of the field of view is necessary with most living otyects, or they will be constantly darting out of sight.
It may also be noticed that the most delicate creatures, such as corfkvCff and Jto§euiaruB, prefer a quiet resting-place, and will always be found attached to weeds. A small portion of the weed should be cut off and placed in a cell filled with water, aud what appears to the naked eye to be a mere green stalk, wiQ be found, under the xoiao- scope, to teem with life. Along the edge of the weed are numerous minute tianapaf^ tubes, issuing from which may be seen living creatures of veiy delicate stmctnre ; and
THE KICROSCOPE. 553
M they are watched, annmber of wheels will appear to be put in rapid motion. Theee are called the eUia, the most interestiDg feature of the vorticelUe. By aid of the micro- 800i>e the porpoae ot this wonderfhl moToment is fhlly explained ; for no sooner are the wheels brought into play, than innumerable small objects are caught up in the Tortex and conveyed into the stomachs of the Toracious creatures.
A multitude of curious animalcuIflB exist both in water and on the leaTes of plants, and whether we examine the struggling inhabitants of a stagnant water drop, the mites from a decayed cheese, the parasitic insects that attach themselves to all living creaturee, or the different parts of various animal and vegetable structures, our wonder and our admiration are alike excited.
No objects are so easy to examine as plants, and perhaps none are so easy of access. On no deiMurtment of nature has the microscope thrown more light than on the structure of plants. If we take a section of an apple, or a portion of a flower, or a section of a leaf, and place it with a little water on a glass slide under the micro- scope, we shall see that these parts are composed of little hollow bodies of varioas shapes. These are called cells, and we thus learn that all parts of plants are built up of cells. It is particularly interesting to make a thin section of some soft vegetable •nbstance, and lay it under the microscope. This may be done with a sharp penknife, and if a little Canada balsam be run over it, and a thin glass fixed thereon, the structure can be made out in a veiy satisfactory manner. The tissues of plants are also well worth examizxation. One dT the best is the wttUate tissue, to be found in most water plants. Ita ol]|iect is evidently to allow of the presence of a quantity of air in the spaces between the cells, by which means the stem is lightened and the better adapted for growth in water. The petal of the common scarlet geranium afl*<>rds a beautifiil instance of the way in which the cells of plants become marked by their peculiar method of growth.
The bark and the wood of trees are also well seen under the microscope, and are very instructive when cut into oblique and horizontal sections, which can readily be (lone with a sharp raxor. If a thin slice be laid on a slip of glass and covered with water, or, better still, immersed in Canada balsam, its structure is brought out 00 plainly that we have little difficulty in judging the character of the tree ttom which it bos been taken.
Let us now take a glance at insect life, for in this we shall find innumorable objects to excite our astonishment and admiration. Insects are so called ttam the word inseeta^ their bodies being divided into many distinct parts. No matter whether the specimen we have captured be a flea or a bee, either can aflbrd intense gratiflcation. The head of the flea, with its array of lancets, so minute and yet so powerfW ; and the leg of the be?, with its convenient pocket — for the bee collects the pollen of flowers, and rolling it into little pellets, places it into the hollows seen on the outside of lier hind-legs, and thus safely carries it ofi* to the hive — ^will each aflbrd food for many hours* study and amusement. Then there is the tongue of the butterfly, so long and flexible that it reaches down into the deepest flowei -cups, and with the several little brushes to be seen at the tip, brings up the sweet pollen on which it
664 omofl.
feeds. These and zneaj other pttte of ioMoli an eMy to ps«|»n,aiidwffliftiln^ 70a for the tronblek In&ot^ thepoaMHorof amteoMopewfflhiivdljneedtobe toU whet ofcijeoto to eramhie, eo munennis en thqr and ao esoeediafflj liiliiiwiliin
nxvABAfiov ov ancmiri.
Soma little praefeioa ia required in order to soooeiaftilly prepan and moimt ^t^eeb for the micnMoope; and we cannot do better than preeent onr readen with a i^ practical eoggeationa on thia part of oor an^eci.
The artidee neoeaaaiy are—* atook of glaaa alipa, three indiea t^ one iadtn eaae thin cover or watch git aim { a bottle of Canada baiaam; a few common needleamoBitfad in wood, to be naed in dlanwting apenimenaj two or three glaai roda ; a few eam^ hair broshea, with which to lay the ot(jeota atmight upon the glaan alipa; a pair of brass foroepa, with which to aeiae and hold the ottjeots ; a pair of line-pointed aeiaaoak to divide or remove portiona of the apenimenaj and aomeemp^ pomatum potai to reoeivs apeoimena in coarse of preperaition.
Having provided these, we would recommend the atadent to take aoBBO ainqpte otfject for experiment; and few can be better for the porpoee than the wing of aosDS insect. Bnppoee yon aeleot a bee or a waap, and with the fine adsaors aevir a wing fhnn ita body; then wash it with a camel-hair brush in wann water, pteee ii between two slips of glaaa, previonsly cleaned, and pot it in a wann comar for a few days. When quite dxy remove it feom between the alipa, and aoak it for a short time In torpentine. Thia renders the oliiject more transparent^ and fita it to zeeetc the balsanu Then take a slip of glass and careftdly dean it^ and by mwiTia of the forceps lift the wing feom the torpentine^ and oarefoUy place it in the exaei eenixe of the slide. Now lift a small quantity of the balsam on the end of a glass rod, and let it fell upon the oliijeot, holding the slide for a few minntea over the Hams of s candle, at a distance anAdent to melt the balaam, whidi will gradually spread Use^ over and around the otject. Ifairbubblea ariae, they may be broken by tosddng then with the point of a needle. The thin glass cover, having been warmed, duNild now be placed upon the otiject^ and a alight pressure applied to disperse the ma^etltaom balsam. Place the aUde in aome warm spot to dry — an oven will do very vr^U, if not too hot. In a abort time ths balaam round the edgea will be hard enough to admit of ita being ecraped off with a knife. Nearly >11 objeota whidi are to be pcevexred msy be mounted in this way, and can thua be exhibited at all times.
COKCLVnOW.
Tolumea might be written on the microeoope and ita uaea ; but mun^fli hi»« we think, been said to recommend thia moat usefol and pbHoeophieal inatroniaut to &• attention of all inquiring yontha. Once possessed of a microeoope, yoa'vrfll find as lack of olideots worthy your attention. Ingenious people are constantly burying selves in devising new and curioua ant(jeota fbr examination ; but enfflcisttt to a lifetime of study is to be found in svaiy dimy pool and every wayside
THE TBLE800PE.
MS
EXT to the MidtMOope, the TelMoopeiB with boyi the most IkTooflta opticftl instnuneDt; though for the moat put their knowled^ extends no ftuther than the feot that H is a tobe fitted with glaaaes, ligr means of which distant ol^{eets may be riewed. Bat a little thought will infbnn them that by simply placing the eye to the end of a telescope, th^ achieve almost the same result as if they had travelled many miles towards the ol^eot at which they gase. For instance, if we look at the moon or the planet Jupiter through a teleeoope magnifying a hundred times, we produce the same effiDOt as though the moon or the planet were a hundred times nearer to us than they aotnally are ; or as though we had made an afrial voyage of thousands of mUes in a single instant of time. By means of the teleeoope the science of astronomy has been rendered so exact that our knowledge of the motions, changes, and appearances of the heavenly bodies is now most intimate ; and we are thus enabled to talk with certainly of the mountains and valleys in the moon, the rings of Batum, the moooa of Jupiter, the phenomena of the fixed stan, and the peculiaritlea which belong to the millions of stars that compose the Hilky Way.
Telesoopesareof twokinds-^rqAvr^*iVMxdr(^lM<«fV; thefirst consisting of lenses only, the last of speculums and lenses. The simplest form of Befraoting Telescope ftoiF»yM4 of two convex lenses, placed in a tube, one at each end, with a concave eye- glass at the end of a smaller tobe, which fits into the laxger one and slides up and down, so as to lengthen or shorten the focal power of the instanunent. ▲ Beflecting Telescope is fitted with a speculum In the place of an ol^)eet-glaas. In the reflecting telescope the rays of light bom the ot^Ject looked at are received on a eonoave mirror having a hole in its oentre ; iholng this is a smaller eonoave minor, ptesedeo as to be opposite to the hole in the larger one. This receives the reflection of the image ftom the larger minor, which image is viewed through lensss placed in tubes eilsrior tothe hole in the larger mirror. Only teleecopes used fbr astronomical pnrpoass are con- structed upon this prinoiplei we may, thereforeb confine our rsmarks to the ordinary refinsotlng teleeoope.
▲ lens is a pieoe of glaas ground to a certain eorve, so that the rsya of Mght passing through it^ instead of preserving their paraUeUsm, are bent into another shape; thus, t^ means of a double convex lens the rays of parallel light converge to a Ibeus ; and on looking through a refracting tdesoope all within the roaad elnle of light at the other end— oaUedthe " field of the teleeoope" — is brought eleasr to the eye and mneh enlarged ; the Ibeus being made to suit the sight by lemlhaBiBg cr rttortenJng the
OPTICS.
tabM oT the inttnuniRit, lU tbtj- lit
lug celntjsl objsota an fltted with be
mflleriaL In wtcecopce Tor lookina •una diamewr nod locaa ui tba coin whaMver we tra loaking Bl_-shi[>i). humica. rtlntaut lAodscapes, nc. — ia Iheb' tnw iva tiaiiB^ though the magnifying [x>wenof tha iujitruEnoDtara pnportioQatolj' dimini^ei Though a telescope ii a compumlLVUlj^ simple iiiRtrumeub, wv Hhonld not a^tiev
ilo the other. This u of the ohject viewed. ' IKB of the Biuae kind, and all ohjeda viewed Hin. moDD. and itan are romui, thii ia ad ibjectA, a concBTS e^e-glBaa, el ifaa
PHOTOGRAPHY.
fHOTOGBAPHY ii tha ut of wrlUns or dnwing by Uw ^etacy of light ; tim pArticolAT chflmlcal nffbct ot ligitt in chs productioD oT pbotogrApblc picturv*, baing dne to tlw dukenlng oT pnpantiaai oT lilvBr b; mMm of nctinitm, or Uie ny power of Uia nm. Tha MrliHt UtRnpta U Oxing the imagei of tha CamarB-DbKnis b; ttaa ahamSoal ioHaoiioa or light war* oukda bj Wedgwood and Davj, and flnt aanonneed in the jaai ISOZ i but Photognphy na IlUIa thought of until the npoted dlai»vfli7, in I83S, by tL Dagoam, of the procaM termed " DagiurTeo^pa/' ainca which time gradaal and Tuiona ImprorBmanla have been •Sbctad in tha practice of taking aun-pictune.
The photogiaphlo apparatua conaiita of a catnera. lena — e[ng1a or triplet Ibr Tiewa, nd doable combination for pom^te i tHpod, or camna itand ; a glaaa dipping bath }r the nimie of allver eolnUou ; ud a saKa percha dipping bath for the flxlng eolation, "he roUowing are alao miuiallei ;— A pair of ecalea with glaaa pani, lo be CBRfully
PHOTOQBAPET.
mtd, (nd k IM of Hnmll brua migbta, eonwndiig Iron OM gitin u pint, or CmntT mince, gnduatad glut nautm j two two-aoDa kUh meuim gndnatad IdIo mtnlm* or drops ; ft Stw ejtia- driul gtiM rod* — A qnATter ar mc inoh in '^'*"*^'" and onfl foot In Itti^tli^br mmn; •olotloiM J ft iM of thr«A f Uh dBTittDpinf cap*, dbs of whloh is (0 bft uaad for Uh ina deraloping ftohitbni «<tl|>i ono T" Ux PJiogftlUc denlopinc ■olntion ndv, sod tli« other ntdjIotaattittMMtolhrtaiMgt; lwDone-pinlKluafaiiD*l«,on*tarfllterin8lluoi>Uodka
[^'~--.^ tha nitiaU of dlvar ftolDtiOB luad in tht
printing prDcflaa i onftJfOttft penhaftmiui for flLtftring Uie Iraa derokipB^ — thai Itauieli (o b« kapt for th^ own aapftnu ■olntiDna i fllurlng papac, Iha b«M bein(
nquiring onlj to be folded in balf tvicai inaeitedin tha oriAoa of the fnnnal aod
eona, when tha liquid to be flU^vd nuM Flitl-— Tea Cahika. be ponred asalnit tha doable aid* ; osa
gftllOD of pur* diitilltd waiar ; liro or tbne wooden plaM boie> of tha rattoiied mm, for atorlng awa^ glaaaa when olauiad, and positlTa and negative pi^ma. Tn GiimA.— Tb* body of a Oamen, eoitabla for elthv portnuu oi la aipaodad or eonbuMd bj mean* of a long acraw.
PH. 1^1
dalinet p- eteadj'. for tbia
inwarda whan in ii
proper place. Id ord( ■- to prodacc aharp an It la abaolntelf uacaaaary that the oaniBrm ah 1 ihoold be moonled on a Uftod. Taiiou ki
FHOTOaOAPHT. US
■!• and bj pho«Dgi«ph«n. fron U» ilnipto Bipod Muid mg. 1), mo* Biitabta wliwi l«klng I«idio»pM, whidi eoBi (hm 7b. M. npi»mrt% to th« nio™ iim(b1 »iid «ipMi«rt ^nitiiig ■snv Kwid far tha aBidio, (hovn in Fts- S.
Tma Dui Sun coBilM of ■ frsna of wood, with ■ lUdlng ■hoUW bi rront ud i UuffWl buk. TUa Owk. wbtfi opeasd, ■taowi k ptqlMtdns iMlg* of wood, upon whkib !■ t*id tb« (t fniiM cf wood, cr carrifr, h*Ttn( u Qpaifaw Id lb* omB oornapmdiiiglo MMM (ind glBM, ud lltud wttb ■ illxr w. at neb oonn, apoo which ths glu* ptaM ii pUoHl, pnpand ■Ids downnrdi, Bad (lu hlngad bank olOMd and tkiUned. Ths pnltton of tha dark lUda in lh> Oamara ia hd In FIb- ], whn« th« InMnunanl ii npiioaBd lo b« nadj, whBn plaead on
the DaA Blida (* to hold tba prapand plata^ aa aipUlnsd
that lb* modal, or alttsr, ma; reoMn the prtoolpal light from (hat dlmUan.
Tba abon plan ii ■'ti'ir-^ ao that tba (iner (hall front (ha north, tha •idC'Ughta
badng to lb* >aM and waM. Tba l«ngtboriUigall«Tli SthM,aultha<ridth 11 faet.
7rom tba Soaring to (ha rooT. A, ■honld bs abont 1 1 (Mt. (ha roof Uaolf alopliig down I Hjr II fta(from Ato 0, a( abon( an angla of 41 dagraaa. Tbla part of tba roof ■boold
ba of glaaa, with aa IttUa wood In the framawort aa poaalbla i Vb» ramaiBdor of tha roof
being Oat, and oompoaad of any opaqaa maiarlal. The ddB-lighta. D, ■honld alao ba or
gUUB, ooctaapondlng in length to (he top-light, and axtasdiag to within one fOot of (be , flooring. The roof fnm (he baekgromid B to A ia 4 fbtt. TUa portion abndd ba
parlMtij opaqaa | and IT U ba blngad at tba end B, ao aa to Uft np, it will prove a ytrj
600 PHOTOGRAPHT.
iMirable ▼entiktor during smnmer. The top-light E will reqnire two blinds, woiking one under the other from A to C, one being white and the other black, to be used ea oocaaion may require. The aame proviaion of blinda must be made for the aide>lighta D, running on a rod in the ordinary way. The interior of the room must be colovned of a dead pale-green tint, in order that the light may not strain the eyes of the sitter, or cause reflections. At one conwr of the opaque end of the gallery, a portion may be boarded off for the Dark Boom, and a piece out out at F for the neceesaxr window of yellow glass.
The best colours fbr backgrounds are manuflbctnred both so flatted oil and body colour, and should be of a tint that will not come out either too light or too ds^k. nioee most generally used are of drab or slate grey.
Thb Dabk Room. — ^In the absence of a glass house, proceed to select a modermte sixed apartment for the Dark Room. It should have only one small window — ^if more, cow them up with thick brown paper. This room, which is to be used otUg as a dark rtMim, wherein to prepare and develop the sensitive plates, and store away chemicals, must ha^n all fohits or dag light totally excluded. This may be efliected by coTering the window with three thicknesses of yellow glased calico ; or what ia better, the window ahoold be boarded up, leaving an aperture of one foot square. In this aperture place a sliding frame glased with two puiee in thickness— one on the top of the other — of glass of tbs deepest orange ; a colour which emits a light that has no chemical effbct on the seositiTe surfkce of the prepared plate, and at the same time gives sufficient illnmination for our purpose. Remember that the ^iffJUeet gleam of white light from any chink or cranny is fatal to success, causing the surfhce of the plate, upon application of the Devidoper, to become.^;;0Vwd, and lohitened all over. Beneath the window there should be a sink ocm* fcaining a waste pipe, and also a tap over the sink with a plentiftil supply of dean Irater. Near the window — so as to enable you to distinctly see when the plate has bean iufflciently long in the bath — must be a shelf to hold the bath containing the sensitizing solution, but at a distuice out of reach of any splashings firom the sink, one drop of which will entirely spoil the bath solution. A short bench for firames, etc., a few shelves for chemicals, and a long clean coarse towel, will complete the arrangements of the dark room.
raocxss Yoa raonucure glass rosnivxs.
Having his camera, his chemicals, and other apparatus ready, the smateor is advised to commence work by making copies of engravings, and to become thoroaghly master of that branch before he attempto portraits or landscapes. Begin with the essiest process in Photography, that of obtaining Collodion Positives on glass — vrfa:^i are defined as photographs giving a natural representation of an otgect when viewed by reflected light.
Three or four fine diaper cloths are required in cleaning the glass plates, niey must be well washed in soda and water, and afterwards plentiAilIy rinsed in cold water and dried. They may then be considered perfectly tree from soap or grease.
Clsahiito <xb Plaxb. — ^The glass known as flatted croum is the cheapest, and answers very well for Positives, when free from scratohes and perfbetly clean ; but patent plate is preferable, as it is more easily cleaned and produces pictures with
FHOT0ORAFH7.
501
gnatflr brilUaooy. OleantheplatebypoorlxigonitBiarflioeaf^droiMof thepoliriK ingmiztai«->-oompofledoftripo1i,2dTac1mi8j oarbooateof iron, SdnofamB; mslhjlatod aloohol, 2 onxkoeB; distilled water, 2 oonoes; to be kept in a olosely-oorked bofltie. Haying nibbed thia mixtnze well orer both aldea of the plate with a toft of cotton wool, take one of the clean olotha and mb off any ezoefla, finally poliahing with another cloth, oocaaionaUy breathing on the anrfiice, and taking care to hold the glaaa plate in the cloth whilst polishing, so as to preyent ita sor&ce being tonched with the hand ; for, bear in mind, that e20itmliii«9f ta Mwry op^ro^iM
Fhotography. It ia deairable to dean glaaaea in aome place other than the dark room, and tokeepthemin a plate box nntil thoy are required. When glasaeshaye been preyionaly xued, the old collodion films are easily remoyed by placing them in a dish containing one ounce of common nitric acid to one pint of water. In this solution thoy must remain nntQ the films become loose, when th^ are easily removed by mbbing with a piece of rag tied at the end of a stick. Afterwards well wash the glasses under a stream of ronning water, to remoye all traces of the acid solution, and rear them up to diy, so aa not to toudh each other. They may then be treated aa new glasses. All dotha most be used for their own work oiUif.
OoAffnr« <m Pl^xi. — ^The collodion recommended, and which is alwaya to be depended upon, ia Mawson's Positiye Collodion. It is obtained in two solutions, plain oollodian and iodiser in separate botUes, which may be mixed as required ; but collo- dion is beet when iodised a ftw days before use. This sHowb any sediment that may form to subside. Procure a perfectly colourless bottle in whioh'to put the collodion, •a that preoaotion ensnres cleanllTieHS whilst coating the plate. Take a preyioualy
cleaned glass, and remoye all particles of dust by gentle firiction with a dean chamois leather, finally dusting both sides with a 1| indi flat camel's>hair brush, or gilder's "tip,** Just before applying the y V Y^ '^•'i^JV^ collodion, — ^which haying
^/ \r ti 1\ ^ ^^ band by the comer, 8,
between the finger and thumb, aa in Xig. 6, hold- izi^ it horiaontally ; poor snifident collodion on the centre of the plate to eaaily coyer It by inclining the plate Ihrst to 1, then 2, then 3 — ^if possible avoid touching the thumb ^then 4, from which comer retom the superfluous collodion to the bottle, holding the plate nearly vertical; then, by placing comer 4on the neck of the bottle, give theplatea rocking motion by raising and depressing comer 8, which wiU caose the lines or fturowa -vrliieli ibrm to coalesce and leave an even and glassy sorfhce. Ck>ntinue this rocking xaotiofft until the fihn beoomeB set or firm, when sometimea a dnlnoM comes over the
80
5^ JPHOTOGRAPHT.
anrfkoo. It is now ready for ixmnonion in the Nitrate of SilTer Bath ; but no exact tim can be giren for this operation, which depends on the temperatore. In nimmer the plate oan acaroely be immereed too soon after oollodionixing ; in winter one or nro minutes will be required before the ether has soificientlj evaporated.
Tn Nm^n ov Szltxb Bavb, in which to excite the plate, is nuule l:^ plaoiog ins AMD and dMii glass-stoppered bottle>*
Becrjstallized nitrate of sHrer ' . • • I oonoe Distilled water 14 ounces ;
which solution contains a little more than 80 grains of that salt to the oonoe of dia> tilled water ; and when dissolved, add to the solution 1 drachm, by measure, of the iodised collodion to be used, shalring occasionally during six hours, when it most he filtered into another dean bottle. Take a piece of blue litmus paper and dip it into this solution, and should it turn red in less than one minute, you wlU know that the solution is sufficiently acid ; but should the paper still retain its oolour, it will reiiaae the addition of two drops of pure nitric add. By frequent use the silver bath diminisbet in quantity and strength ; therefore, it is best to have a stock soluticm, tvmxmj^i^^ ^ grains of nitrate of silver to the ounce of distilled water, immw the coUodiim^ when tte quantity and strength may be kept up by occasionally adding a portion to the ori^issl bath.
Poor as much of the nitrate of diver solution into the glass bath as wiD oow rather a larger surface than the plate intended for use ; and having coated a jdut with collodion, place it on the dipper and gently lower it into the bath, taking can not to pause in this operation, otherwise a line will be formed across the plata. AX^sm the plate to rest in the bath for a minute, then draw it up and down several tiSHs to allow the ether to ev^;)orate, when the plate must be again left in the batii for auoibw minute, or until its surfhce is fi«e (hmi grea^ lines, and the solution flows off is one even sheet. It is then to be taken off the dipi)er, placed for a minute on seven! folds of dean blotting-paper to dnun, and put on the carrier in the Dark Slida^ ^oeoig and fiistening the back.
FoouBSxira thb MonxL. — Previous to preparing a plate, it is as well to arrsB^e the camera and the model. If for a portrait, a Head Rest wlU be required to keep tbe person firom movingr The best head-rests are those made of iron, with a beayy fix4; they are easily adapted for dther a dtting or standing podtion. It will be w«ll that jra diould iveviously mark upon the rough surfhoe of the Focussing Olass, in peneO, t2ae rarions slsea of plates, as this wUl enable you the more easily to focns or |»laee tte subject In the centre of the plate used. Beplace the focussing glass in Um oaaDSEa. which place on the stand, and point the lens to the model. Bemember, tlM fanber the camera is from^the object, the smaller the picture ; the nearer to it» the lars«r. You obtain the focus by covering your head and the camera with a cloMi of biadc Tdvet, and looking wpon the tutfaqp of the ground glass for the image, wbiidi wiC >« found in an inverted podtio^x. If the image is not perfectly distinct^ moTa tbe body of the camera by means of the screw at the back, until it is neariy so ;
PHOTOGRAPHY. 563
it in that position by the serewB underneath the foeoseing glaM ; and then, by moving the rack of the lens, the finest a4JnBtment may be obtained. Place the cap on the lens, remove the.focnssing glass, inserting in its place the dark slide containing the prepared plate, and caieftilly draw up the sliding door, allowing it to fUl down on the top of the camera.
Exposuma. — The sitter, or object to be photographed, being perftetly still, remove the cap from the Lens, when the image is thrown on the prepared plate. After a few seconds the ezposnre is complete, and the cap most now be replaced. The time of exposnre varies according to temperature, intensity of the light, the sise and focal length of the lens, and the state of the collodion and bath, so that no exact rule can be laid down ; but as this process is very quick, commence by giving a short exposure of three seconds on a clear day — and by prolonging the exposure of each plate a few seconds, the amateur will soon learn, in developing, which plate has been timed most correctly. Having exposed the plate in the camera, you then take it into the dark room in order to develop the picture on its sorfi&ce.
D>vxu>ricuT. — The picture on the prepared plate is developed by means of a solution of —
FrotOBulphate of iron .2 drachms, by weight
Nitrate of i>otaah 1^ »» »»
Glacial acetic acid 2 „ by measure
Methylated alcohol 4 »• tf
Ck)mmon or distilled water .... 12 ounces „
dissolved and filtered into a clean bottle. This solution will zemain good for a month if the bottle be kept properly corked.
Four into the developing cup for present use about one ounce of the above solution. Take the plate out of the dark elide, and holding it in the hand the same as if oollo- dioniaing, pour rapidly but gently» along the lower edge of the plate, snfflcient of the developer to speedily cover it ; then by a tlltxng motion of the hand the solution will be carried aooas the plate ; and it most be kept flowing backwards and for^razda until the development is complete.
Be careAil not to pour the developer all on one place, otherwise a stain wQl be left on the flniahed pictore. After applying the developer, the image quickly appears, those parts most strongly lighted showing first, and then the middle shades— when the developer must be instantly poured off and washed well, until all grsasiness disappears. If the development be continued until the darkest shades are out, the beauty of the pictore will be lost Should the plate have l)een over-exposed, the image will start out immediately the developer ia applied, and the fhiished pictore appear of a greyish tint; if under-exposed, it will require three or fbor minutes to develop it» and then the whole of the details will not be obtained.
The plate ia now insensitive to light, and the yellow shutter of the dark room may he drawn aside and daylight admitted, when, upon examination, the piotore will ba found partially obscured by the iedide <if i^rer. Thia is removed by— »
5M FHOTOGRAPHT.
Thi Fmsro Pboosm.— The solntion for tlUs delicate proowi ooneiflts
QT&nide of potaasinm 1 dnohm
Water • ounoai
No flttering required.
•Ai Ihia eolation is of the most poisonoiia nature, it is beet to pat i^ into a gotta peroba dipping bath, the plate being placed on the dipper and immersed, moTing ap and down antil the picture appears clear and free from the iodide of ailYer. Hm plate most then be taken oat and rery well washed, both on the back and traat, drained Cor a fbw minutes, and dried. When thoroaghly dry, it is ready for Tamishing. Scefanea Yamish is the best for the purpose, andre<inireB the plate to be slightly wanned beftm a clear fbe, when the yamish is poured on the pictare in ihesame manner ae ooDodion: tbe excess being returned to the bottle. The back of the plate is now to be held neu* the fire, when the TBrnished side aasumes a hard and glassy appearanee. The rercnB side of the glass must be corered with Batee*s blaok yamish, which dries rapidly. The picture is now ready for insertion in any of the osoal frames or oases. Shonld the amateur, as adyiaed, iirst copy engrayings, he will soon see whether or not his pboto* graphs are good copies, as they ought in eyeiy reepeot to reeemble the origteals as regards the yarious tints. Haying thorooghly mastered the prodootioii of glaaa Po»- tiyes, yon may now proceed with the
mGkrrrm nooiss.
A Kegatiye Photograph has quite the reyerse appearance to a positiTe on haying the lights and shadows reyersed if yiewed by transmitted lights all the pure whites of an otgect by peribct blackneas, the blacks or shadows tafy transparenoy, and the yarious gradations of tone in the same imcerm order, as the parts represented more or lees approaoh the white or scmibre ihadee.
In order to produce good negatiyes, frx>m which to obtain any nnmberaf lii£QiBziA proofti on paper, it is essential that the chemicals should be of as pure a qoali^ as poseible, and in the best working order. For negatiyes, use ostty the pslnnt plaae glaesi collodion, Mawaon's Bromo-iodised ; and for the ewriting bath take —
Triple oxystallised nitrate of sOyer 36 grains
Distilled water 1 ounce
]£iz the requisite quantity, and iodise with the collodion to be used aa directed for poeitiyes. In winter the s^ngth of the silyer bath may be increased from 36 graiaa to 40 grains to the ounce of distilled water. The manipulatory details are the same as for positiyes.
The exposure should be half as long again as for positiyes, and the plata with a filtered solution composed as follows : —
Protosulphate of iron \ oonoe
Olaoia] acetio add } „
Methylated spirits i „
Common water .....S,,
PHOTOGRiPHT. 565
•
' Whenihaiutxtttobathisnew, vttylittiejnetfaylatedBpiritwiUbeT^^ It ia only Teqaialte at all times to pot in just miBcienft to make the developer flow eaeity. In developing, do not poor on the plate more liquid than ia reqtdaite to oover it, and, if poaaible, prevent any of it flowing over the edge. Continue the development nntfl all the details are flUly out, and the picture appears like an over-exposed and over- devetoped Positive, when the plate most be well washed and redeveloped with—
Pyrogallic acid 10 grains
Citric acid 20 „
Distilled water 8 onnoes
Poor as much of this solution on to the plate as it win contain withoat overflowing^ keeping the solution flowingto and frofbr a minute; then return it into a dean develop- ing cup, and add two drops of a solution of silver — 20 grains of nitrate of silver to 1 ounce of distilled water — then pour on and oiT quickly several times, examining the plate often, as the picture will rapidly become more intense. The proper degree of intensity can only be ascertained by pnotioe and careftQ observation. If over^intensffled, the ^cture wiU be hard and eAoOy, and much of its detail and beauty destroyed. As soon as the requisite intensity is obtained, the plate must be again well washed and immersed in the Fixing Bath of <;yanide of ixytasainm or a saturated solution of hyposulphite of soda, after which it must receive a thorough washing, and be left to drain on a fiBw thicknesses <rf blotting-paper; then dry and varnish. Whendiy, and previous to varnishing, examine the negative, and should it not appear iitteose enough, redevelop with pyrogallic acid smd silver as before, until the proper intensity is axrived at ; but this intensifying is best done alter ffadng and befbre it is dry, as by moistening the film when it has once become dry, the picture has a tendency to loosen, and be lost by slipping oiT the glass. AlbBt each time of using the pyrogallic developing cup, do not omit to wash it well out with the fingers; and take the precaution to well wash the hands after using the fixing solution, particularly alter hyposulphite of soda, iehieh i$ highly i$^riou9 to ths nitraU qf wSner bath,
BncAKKS. — TfimWHimi: exposuTC iu tho Camera is indicated \ij a want of detail where such should be rendered; the high lights possessing fkill opacity ; detail in tha shadows being veiy fUnt ; and the middle tints being almost entirely absent. Over- exposure is indicated \3ff the picture suddenly starting out upon application of the developer; a want of contrast between the lights and ahades, or the deposit of sUvsr being too equally diflbsed over the entire picture. Bemedy for ove^exposurs. — ^Wash off the developer immediately the details ars out, ixistead of continuing such develop- ment, as in the case cX a properly-exposed picture, and intensify rapidly by using m stronger dose of silver with the pyrogaUio developer ; taking care not to over- intensify.
The greatest source of fhilure is the nitrate of silver bath having bsoome dis- ordered through long and continued use ; in which case it becomes contaminated with organic matter and other impurities introduced by the collodion, causing the picture to be veiled with a kind of fbg, and streaked in the direction of the dipping. This
566 PHOTOGRAFHT^
lAttor imperrection may often he remedied hj moving the plate, upon its flrat n
in the bath, sereral times in a lateral or Bideways direction, repeating cmcfa naoremenM
before taking the plate oat of the bath. When the bath haa been long in nae the
idctare will eometimee appear ftill of minute transparent spots termed ptnAoiei, cansed
by the bath haying become charged with iodide of silver; in whidi ease, it is beet to lay
it on one side and make a new bath. To remedy a disordered bath, poor tba silrer
solution into a dean wide>mou^ed glass bottle, and make it alkaline by drcqypiag
into it two drops of a satazated solution of pure bicarbonate of soda, oansing a while
preoipitete ; and should it become dissolved uxxm agitation, again add the aohitkBi
drop by drop — shaking between each addition — until it remains mUky ; vrhen it most
be poured into a clean flat porcelain dish, and exposed to strong sanhght until tt easces
to smell of alcohol or ether (obtained from the oollodionised plates), when it may be
filtered and ten drops of dilute nitric add to the pint of bath — pure nitric acid ^ aaaaoe,
distilled water 6 ounces — ^may be added ; and after being well shaken, allowed to staad
for two hours — ^when a plate may be prepared and«xpoeed, and should it still be fi^gy
or strei^, a few more drops of the add solution will set it right. In the ^^^^^nr^ of
sunlight, place the bath on the hob near the fire for six or eight hours, when the rtrengtii
must be tested with the Argentometer ; and should it be too strong, in oonaeqaeBoe of
evaporation, suffldent water must be added to make it of the original strength, and then
it must be filtered. A bath giving pin-holes may be rectified by adding diataltod water
until the quantity is increased rather more than ane-ha\f, when it will become tarbad, is
consequence of the predpitation of iodide of Silver, whieh fmult bejtttered <mi, made
alkaline, sunned, eto., as above ; after which treatment and filtering, ite strengyi aiast
be tested, and Ito original strength made up by the addition of pure nitrate of silrer ; or,
the dish containing the solution may be placed in a warm oven — the door left alightiy
open — BO as to evaporate down to the strength required.
It not unflrequently happens that a newly-made bath produces foggy and afcreal^
pictures ; and should the introduction of a few drops of the add solutaon not remedy the
defects, proceed as above.
f KB PBZiTTnra raooxss.
The production of proofis fh>m negatives is termed printing, and is nuMUy aooom- pUshed on paper, the surfiftoe of which is rendered glosey by means of a **^*T>1ing ct albumen (the white of egg) containing a certain portion of salt, which, upoa ecmtact with a solution of nitrate of silver, is converted into chloride of silver, snd >m>o»p««« blackened upon exposure to daylight.
The negatives must first be examined for any small transparent spote that priaft black on paper ; each spot or defect must be touched with a very fine pointed oaonti's hair pencil filled with vrater-oolour — the most suitable being Indian red, which makes any spot so touched perfectly opaque, so as to leave on the print a fcmi— |Mi»MiTi*y white spot.
The following articles will be required in the printing process.* — ^Argentaiaeter; glass dish for silver solution ; one porcelain dish for toning onfy ; one parcabun dbh ibr fixing onlff ; one gutte peroha, extra deep, dish for finally washing proo& after flziag :
PHOTOOnAPHT. m
tbnr prlntinK tmoea ; ciCnte of aQver ; cUorlde of gold i aoalata of loda ; pors blo>r> bonUe or loda ; hypoanlpbile of toda i p^ior elipi i horn loroa[ia> ons pair; bwUn.
Tbs pnpaT«clODoraIbameni»d[iapeibeiiigtei]iible«n»,ltla>dTiul>latap(inih*M H readj prepuvd by Bome waU-known makfir.
Thers an two kinds nf paper — BivA, ■ tbin franob papar, poMeadiig ■ high (rlaBc, Ads texture, and which la eaailj tooed ; and Saxe, a Otrmao pftpsr — lh« ■"-<'"'" thick- bMA b«Bt — 'Whkb ii by many prflfeTrfid for Ita almost parfoct freadcmi front metallic apou,
Tke ArffenioBuifr ii tabe in which ia innrtfd I
100, wiU) a bnlbtnu bot- ric-r.— Tn AigimKma.
(ota» and Is luad for the poipoH of tefiLin^ tha BtronKth in giaina of ■lLy«r ■olnliona. On oniiis a taM Cnbo for that pnipose wilh Ibo aolutlon, and then Immsning ths unber on Ihs aoala, and Indlelaa the nnmb«r nf 1 ona ounca of dinoied watar.
frutlitg flrama may ba had dtlur with or wH hoot plate-glBia In front. I^c<«i«anploe(ln. by 8) in., if Uu negattrea an apos patant jdata, may be entnuted to franiM without plate-glaaa, which are cbcaper; but when prloa 1* not ta Dtgeet, Uie Ont'inRitlonad an prettovbl*. Ia Ibct, vary cheap photographlo appantna a» by no meana to be racommended, a* llnt-nta pictnrea HTweTer talented and oaraAil may be Uie operator, paper, take at— Ordinary oryitallized nibate of ailrer • , , 00 gralna
Ml lii onncea more nlatlon than anndsnt to oarer the bottom of the gla« diah to the depth of half an inoh ; diaaolve and allow to Ktand nntll a alight "*"^'^*w, oaneed by a portion of chloride la the water, haa aattled to the bottom of the bottle ; Bltei Into another cleeii bottle, and avoid pouring ttae eadiment into the llltar. Alter naing thia eolntion, poor it baek into the bottle coniaining the mdimeiU, well ehaUng, which preventa for a long time the eolation becoming dijoolonnd. It li aa well to teit the ■trength after nee, *!ftft-ving ap the defloiency in qoanti^ and atrength by the addition of water and nilrsle of ailTer, to oaoaa the ArgentoniBtar to riaa sp to flO graina. If after a time the ailTor eolatkni beconus red or dlsoolonred. add two teaapoonfoti of kaolin, and after well ■'■-"" g allaw to Maud tislil eetUed, when tba clear poftioii may be miered. Take a piece of moderately itrong atiing, apon which nupend aome AmericaD paper clipa, and strain tiie string from one end of tiie dark zoom to the other, out of reach of direct daylight. Having waahed (he glass dish, take it into the dark room, poor into It. to the depth of half an Inch, the silver eolntlon ; lake a piece of the slbnmBniied paper, pnviODslf etu to the reqnind siie — a qnuter sheet is a most coo-
fmlBst ilM, irhjoh ma; ba cut to iiiMUar jiaam d Um props' ihapa lAmt MmltiMH. thu ttJiag botli Hat and InniblB— uid piKa It mrrfaSr, ilbiuimiimed aia, ataa tba ■olBUon, bf l4UDg batwwn tbs flngoa ud Ummbs of tha eight toA trt handi Out oppoaits audi of the p>p«r, bmdlogitM in Fig. B. the oesBs ol tha papv bimigtnai^ in emtaet with tha Uqnld, ud lh« twv and* gntduall; lowoed until Iha cbHtb pin ■• lloat«d, oare belos lakan not to lei anj al tha aolatioD gM on to the back. Alia' a few ■eooDda, mlM ap ana coniar wtih tha horn fonapa, asd ihoohl thara a^jpii' bdj air babbloa on the aorfboe, tonoh tiiem wiUi a olc^ itanp of cardboard, and ivplaoa Iba paper on the bath, irhan It nuiM rem^n tot three minntf ■ for the pnrpoae ortmiinc, an egg-glaaa b mnit oiofal — when it in to be lUted off tha bath b; one oornar, mj
tleuOg, tmne np by one of the clips to dry. nnd a 1 1 rii t rliltn till l[lii|j [ia[iiii allailmil to the lower oomer. Hiur preftr oiiiig black pins inMcad of cUpa, iDHMns the poiBt throagh one oomer, and pinning the paper to tbe edge of the abelreB. The pieeea of blotting-paper mnat be kept together to be ti«at«d aa afterward* directed. Wbon tbs paper it perfectly dry, tAke it off the clipa or pina, and place in a dimmr ; or what la mor« convenient, a good hatboi, wMcb may be kept hnng np in the dark rrxna. TUe a Piinting-hame, remOTe the hinged bask, lay tbe negative on the glaaa or in tha groon, Tamiahed aide npwarda, and lake a piece oT tha eetiaitiied paper of ths props' aias. laying it, prepared dde downwarda. on the negative, apon which plaoa a pieca of black doth or velvet, replacing the back, which keepa the paper in Dloie oonlaot witli be negative by meani of bare and screwa, or aprliigi only, nia frmme la n<nr to be a- poaed to ilrong daylight; and, ahonld tha negative be very intanaei It may cBqali*
IDiiIlaU I but, M > gtncnl rnle, wllli k tnodBntaly lulaDM or mik nagatiT*, prtat- Inc In (ha alud* k pnAnhlB. The tima nqcind In prioting dapandi upon lb* ioUDilQ of llM nogatlTa. brUllHiar o^ Ueht. and whsthtr ■ ilniag or makly MlUd papar hu tma mad. Th* p>taM snut tt ttmea be aiamined la the iaXk mm, or In krar; wkll^it, b; Ultfaig np ma half of Iha baok of the fr*iB*, (ha ottaar half balng left 1001170(1, vbiob prarenta (he prinl from beln^ dleplaoed. Aa (ha print Icoee moch Is eome loalng-bHlu, knd 0017 Uttla In othen, gnat ettontlaD mnit ba paid u to the depth raqolnd to print, ao u to allow for the after redaction tn tlia toning and fliln^i bat for the tonlng-bathe mantlaned. it wilt ooij rsqalre, tar No. 1, Co be prinCed vwj alight]; deeper than deelnd whan Saiiliad ; bat fin- No. 1, it will nqolra (0 be two abadaa deeper.
TaiMinia. — An the photognfihi beooma anfilclentlj printed, tbefaniat betaken oat attht frame and pnt togatherma drawer cr portfolio, enUialy ■>iU1Jm1 from da^llgh^ ontil the daT*! printing la complne; whan the; nuf be trimmed to the proper alu Ina wot light, at the axmme aid at a room, at a diitanoe from a wladow ; or b; gaeltghC
For the binunlng oT prlnU obtain a neolnaff (vfMiv tabb, aolA for & oonaieta of a pleoe of wood one foot ^-^
aqoara, ontliBoa tanad, ao aa to rerolra, a which la fitted a alab oT plata glan, on lAioh Che print la placed, (hca np- warda, and Uie ffi
put down npon the print In the pr
poeitlon ; tban, by holding the eh^jo
finnlr clown, and nmuliig roond the
edgea with a abarp knift, the print wlU ^
be found to b« reiy neatlr cnl. Koep J
ajl thren trlmmlnga wHb tbe pleoaa
of blotting-paper before meoUoatJ, and an waatad allTer Utara and other papara oontamlnated with ellTsr. Having iHmmed Iba prisU. take Om tUvtr tUah, aaaij lUllng ft with wstfr ; than hnmam, one at a time, all the printa, tnralng them onr three or foiir tlnui. aUowhig tham to raat a fow mlnntee ; when, aflar again tuning Iham mer, tbe water, whlsh wil] l» foond qnlta milky, moat be ponred — not down th* link, briTi intJi * two-gallon brown eartiunw^^ Jog, when the dlah m^ again be half flDad with water, and the prooeaa of toning ovar repeated. The priBia an no
Tbe toning-bath laoW eadl; maiiaged, and Hie a (bllowa : — PTocaie a clean 10 oonoe bottle, and poor inl Into wbioh put tlia oontenlaof a SO gialn bottle of " Boltoa't nentraJ ohloilde at gold." WIieD disaolvod. one drachm oT thia lolnlion will oonlaln one grain of chloride of gold.
gill B Wioobaatar or 80 oonoe bottle with oommon water, Into wbieb pnt 1 oonoe
.gfQ FHOTOGBAFEnr.
of acetate of soda, and when diaaolTod add 16 drachma of the chloride of gold aofaitioa^ well ahalring, and in twenty •four hoon this toning«bath ia ready far nse. Una booie muat be nnmbered 1. Obtain two other Wmohester bottlea, which number 2 and S. Haling washed the prints, fill the tomitg-dish to the depth of half an inch, or aalBrawit te more than cover the qaantity of printa, with the toning solution. Take the pnrttB out of the water, one at a time, and immerse them in the bath, taming over eadi print aeveral times before putting in another, otherwise the toning proceeds unequaQy. This bath being new and yeiy energetic, the prints require watching veiy dos^y , sisos when half a dosen are immersed, it will be found — esi>eciall7 in summer — that Qam first put in hare changed colour, firom a disagreeable red to a rich aepia, Ticriet, or purple tint, and perhaps to a rich black — the shades occurring in the order ennni»> rated* To obviate too dark a tone, tbey must be taken out and quickly immeiBed in tias gutta percha dish filled with clean water ; but whatever tone is required when finished, remember to tone one shade darker, in order to allow for reduction in the fizing-bath.
When all the prints are toned, change the water aeveral times. Pour the toniag aolution just used into bottle No. 2, in which place, and keep, a piece of onfimiwn jchalk. Into No. 8 bottle put about one pint of solution out of No. 1. Upon again nainf the toning-bath, pour the contents of No. 2 into the toning-dish, immersing the prinfii until they appear to change colour, or for ten minutee, when th^ must be renuived to a dish containing No. 3, and left in it until toned ; after which the batfaa must ha returned to their own bottles. The toning may be conducted in weakeUxi^igkt, huk tte previous washing must be done in the dark room. When bath No. 3 gets weak or slow, put half of it to No. 2, replenishing it (No. 3) firom No. 1.
Fixing. — Having washed the prints firom the toning solution, immene them is the Fixing Solution of one imrt of hyposulphite of soda to two parts water — ^balf a pc^ of hyposulphite to one pint of water — ^in which they must be constantly kepi morii^ by repeatedly turning over. The prints upon first immersion may indiae to tarn red, but the original tone returns ailer a ^ort time, or upon their being waalwd a^ dried. They will now be observed to become lighter and look brilliant^ and whan tha whites appear pearly, and upon looking through them th^ aeem transparent aad clear — ^not mottled — th^ may be considered as fixed, and should they be reduced in tone, may be taken out and put into the gutta percha dish fUled with. water. If the prints are over-printed^ leave them in the fixing'bath longer, until they are reduced to the proper depth, which should be the case in from minutee to one hour ; after which time they become a disagreeable grey or alate oolosr. and are consequently spoiled. Under any circumstance, it is desirable to leave than a this bath for not less than ten minutee.
After using the fizing-bath twice, strengthen it by adding two ounces of hjpaaalpfasis of soda; and after again using twice, put it into a separate two-gallon jar tat aAot treatment. This fixing may be accomplished in stoong daylight. When fixed, tlw prinss are to be taken in the gutta percha dish, placed under the tap, and the water allow«d a* gently run on them all night ; but if this cannot be conveniently done, Vtub water most be changed often during the first hour, and the prints turned twice in each chaase of '
FH0T06BAI'H7« 571'
tiy timB tnqpsaslQj changiafr the water darlnff six Taoxan, thoy will be well waghed ; ihej most now be taken out, hnng acroas a clean line of string to drain, blotted off between clean blotting-paper, and allowed to dry spontaneonsly.
Another Toning-bath, — Make a satorated solution of bicarbonate of soda. The prints must be washed until the water ceases tobein the«^M«i^ degree milky. Allow one grain of chloride of gold for every ftill-sised sheet to be toned. Test the 'Chloride of gold with blue litanas paper, and should it prove decidedly acid, one drachm of the carbonate of soda solution must be added to each grain of chloride of gold — ^when TnlTJTig the toning-bath — but should it prove neatral, add two drops only of carbonate of soda to one grain of chloride of gold. Mix in a marmalade jar —
Chloride of gold .1 drachm = 1 grain
Common water 8 ounces
Carbonate of soda solution 1 drachm or 2 drops
For each sheet of paper.
The water in the first instance must be warm. Allow it to stand half-an-hoor, then poor it into the toning-dish and immerse the prints, which in sunmer tone rapidly ; but lb wtoier the bath must stand near the fire to become slightly warm. Aiter the prints are toned, wash and fix as usual. This bath must be retmmed to the jar, and when again required for use, only the gold solution must be added. After three or four times using, carbonate of soda solution must again be added. This toning-bath im- proves with age, unless something accidentally gets into it. Any tone may be obtained, firom a warm sepia to a rich velvety black.
For a satisfoetoiy washing apparatus, make a wooden box 2 feet long, 1 foot wide, and 8 inches deep, tiioroughly watertight. At one end, about two inches from the top, make a hole, through which pass a syphon, made of three-quarter-inch gutta percha tubing, making the interstioe between the hole and the syphon water-tight — ^the end in the box reaching to witiiin one inch of the bottom. The outside end, for con- venience, need not be more than two inches of gutta percha, but a piece of India-rubber flexible tubing, eight inches long, must be attached. This box is placed in the sink, beneath tlie tap, which is tamed on so as to caose a gentle flow of water on to the prints. Wben the water has risen to the bend of the syphon, it is rapidly run off, the box aer^in becoming filled ; consequently the prints receive innumerable changes of water without attention.
In the case of over-printed proofh, mix double the quantity of carbonate of soda eolation, nsing it ten minutes alter mixing, when the depth of tone will become very macb lowered in the fixing; but observe net to tone so dark as when the proofk are rightiy printed.
MOTOTUrft.
.Aiter the prints have undergone the process of washing they are ready for moonting on cardboard — ^the best only should be used — or tinted mounts made for the purpose. The prints may be mounted either before or after they, are dried ; but tb^ are more MMily jDBJiBeed if, when blotted off, they are placed one on the top of the other, the
B72 raOTOGRAPHT.
wbola in ons bMtp, fl»e downwards, on a olflan pieoe of brown paper. Twiat maoB /WtMvHMKfo thiek ataroh, And, by means of a broad etiff brash, eoat the topmost ptu*>> graph on the back, which most then be placed on the cardboard in the exact pootioa it fa to ooonpjr, and when ooyered with a pieoe of thick dean blotting<paper, it maei be gently rubbed down so as to make the print adhere firmly. Repeat thia nntfl aU aremoonted.
The T"^T"^*M prints most now be put beneath a weight, with a piece of smooth paper between and on the (iMse of each. When the prints are thorooghly dry, and not before, they are ready for being pressed and rolled in a machine for that porpoe^ which gives them a high gloss and finished appearance.
PrerioQS to rolling, the prints most be examined for white spots and deftets, whidi mnst be touched in with water-colours moistened with a Uttle gum-water, care benif taken to match the tint of the photograph as nearly as possible. By the careftil blendiug of Indian Mb and lake, any photographic tint may be obtained ; and if the ookmriag be judiciously done, any spot so touched will not be obserred.
▼XOMIRUia.
For this much-admired style of portraiture the background used mnst be whiter or nearly so. The vignetting is eflbcted in the process of printing either by rigneM glasses sold for the purpose ; or, what is better, by cutting in the centre of a piece of cardboard an aperture of an oval shape, the edges serrated like the teeth of a saw. aa eighth of an inch ip«*iia»' all round than the desired sixe of the vignetted portioB of the photograph. This card is now placed flat on the outside of the preaaun in such a position that the top of the head can be onfy just seen, and it naxA be secured by pieces of gummed paper, and the pictures printed in the shade, aU^itly elevating the top end of the frame : or they may be printed in sunlight by eoiwiug the apertures in the cards with white or blue tissue paper. Landscapes may aJao be advantageously vignetted, which gives them a veiy effbctive appeanmoe.
ssoovxBT or sxLVxa. All pieces of blotting or other papers containing silver, clippings of psinta, cac. must be burned in the open air on a c^m day, by placing a few dry clippinga in a eoal- ■outtle, setting them on firo, and adding the remainder, a portion at a ttw^ yy^ta the whole be consumed. When the mass is quite cold, collect the ashes and place them in a dry jar. When the jar containing the washings i)rom prints, eto., beeooaes ftill, put into it a table-spoonfVil of common salt, well shaking the jar or slarrmg with a pieoe of wood, which causes t^e water to become milky. After ntamllTig twenty-four hours, the deposit of chloride of silver will have settled at the iKifctosn, when a pinch of salt may be again added ; and, should the water remain tlaai, you know that the whole of the chloride is precipitated. The clear water may tfaen be poured oarafhlly off, retaining the deposit until the jar becomes half filled wfOt the chloride. The contents of the jar are then to be collected together on a filter or fittn«» and thoroufrhly dried by placing them near a fire or in the heat of the ana. AH old silver solutions must be treated in the same manner. The jar eootenne^ the
PHOTOGRAFHT. 573
hypo filing Bolutions mnsl be treated with wilphide of potMsinm, oommonlj oalled liTer of Bolphnr— two ounoee to one pint of water. Thie aolntion ahonld be kept oloee^ corked, ae the solphide poeeeaaes a moet diaagreoable odoor. Add to the hypo jar half an oonoe of the aolphide eolation and etir well. When eettled, add a Hbw more dropa of the eolation, and ahoold the miztore then remain clear, add a tew dropa of nitrate of ailver. If the mistnre torn brown, it ehowe that there ie an ezoeae of the solphide ; therefore, one half of it moat be ponred into another jar, and ftirther addi- tions of hjpo made to both ontil the jars contain thioik deposits, which most be thrown on flltere, collected, and dried.
When developing glass PositiYes or NegatiTes, a portion of sUver may be sayed by
pomring the developer off the plate into a wide-moothed glaae bottle, kept in one comer
of the sink for that porpose. When fUl, the bottle most be allowed to stand for two
days, 1^ which time the redaoed silver ftJls to the bottom without ftirther teeatment,
and the clear portion may be ponred away. The pyrogallic and silver developer may
be ponred into the same bottle as the waste iron developer. When a quantity is oolleoled.
throw it on the chloride filters. The gold in old toning-batha may be treated with a
JO gxain solution of protosnlphate of iron, and the deposit of metallio gold oolleoted
on a filter. The chloride of silver and paper ashes may be put together} bat the
anlphide of silver must be kept separate. These residues are to be taken to the gold
and silver reAner's» who will either purchase them or return yon the resulting
preoiona fni*ti^Tfi
THX DBT PBOCISS.
By means of a good Dry Process we are enabled to dispense with heavy photo*
gnqibie paraphernalia when going on a tour into the country in search of suitable otgects
for the Cwnera. All you want to cany with you are the camera and stand and a Hbw
dxy platea in a box ; or, what is still more convenient, six double backs, or dark slides,
each slide carrying two plates. But should twelve plates not be sufficient, take any
qaantity in a box, peifBcUif UffM-Hght, and fill the slides at night, or in a perfectly dark
room, by means of a lighted candle, placed as tar from the platee as convenient to see.
After eixpoeing the plate^ they can be returned to the box and a fkesh supply obtained.
Their dervelopment can be delayed until you return home ; but it is always advisable to
develop aa eoon as possible after exposure. Then are several proceosoe each having
iteadvocatee — as Taupenof s collodio-albnmen, tannin, gelatine, Fothergill's, and various
othors. The first has proved very sncceasfal in the hands of some photographers, but is
rather tedious in preparation. The following, which is a modification of the oollodio-
fi|KiiT»Mm process, lately introduced, ia deddedly the best, having for its recommendation
aimplici^ and certainty in preparation, combined with rapidity in action. Ooata plate
witli good bromo-iodised coUodion and sensitise it in theordinaiyforty-giain nitrate of
aiiver batb; and after well draining, immerse it in a clean flat porcelain or glass dish
i^PTity^i-KiTig jHntillfld water— ffhsTiffiniy the water after the immersion of four plates i tilting
tba '**'^^ to and fro untQ all greasiness of the surflkce of the plate has disappeared, when
it mvMt be taken out and snffloient of the following solution poured over the film. Take
tbewbitea <m^ of two fresh eggs and put them into a clean glsss bottle with a fbw small
£74 FHOTOGRAFHT.
pieces of egg<«heU ; tben add ten drops of strong liq. ammonia— Ave drops to egg — and shake the mixtnre until it appeals one mass of froth ; after which it may be allowed to subside. This albnmen solution will keep some months if the bottle be w^ corked and kept in a cool place. Before using, it is best to filter snfflnient of the solution for a few plates, by inserting a piece of clean sponge or ootton*wool in the neck of a small glass ftmnel, through which the solution will pass, if the ftocmel is ms plugged too tightly. Allow the albumen to flow over the film backwards and ibrwards for two minutes, when the plate mnst be held under a gentie stresm of water for a Hm minutes to remove aU superfluous solution ; and, after rinsing with distiTlert thirty-grain solution of nitrate of silver, containing a few drops of glacial acid — ^nitrate of silver, 80 grains; distilled water, 1 ounce; glacial acetio acid, 6 drops — ^most be poured on. After keeping the solution moving on the plate fcr two minutes, it may be poured off into the waste developer bottle, and the plate mnst be thoroughly washed with common water. Finish by a rinse witih dis* tilled water, drain, and finally iiut in some comer of the dark room, restlag ca several folds of blotting-paper, out of the reach of both dust and dayliglift. V tto darkroom be in a warm sitoation, the plates will soon become dry, when thay nay be stored away in boxes until required for exposore. Although these plates h&re known to keep in good condition for six weeks after preparation, it is best to them only a few days before using. The exi>osure is about three timee as long fiv a dry as for a wet plate ; but always make it a role to expose the plates for the doqwrt shadows. To develop, place the plate on a levelling stand, and moisten the saxftifie \if ponring on it distilled water, which allow to remain a minute or two ; then tOt it off. and pour on a three-grain solution otpktin pyrogallio acid — pyro, three gnuna, dialiBsd water, one ounce^-and let it remain on until aU the detaiU are visible, or » fidnt red inoage is seen, when the plate may be taken in the hand and the intensiflcatkni flTiwJtififl with either pyro and citric acid, or pyro and glacial acetic acid, adding a f^iw draps of a ten^grain solution of silver — ^the former being suitable in warm weather, and Uie IsSttr in cold weather. Fix with hyposulphite of soda» and finish by giving the plate s thorough good washing.
In addition to the ordinary bromo-iodized collodion, it is as well to have a ooQodiaa prepared with three grains of bromide and three grains of iodide, whioh wiU be ftmad advantageous in taking landscapes possessing great contrast of light and Bha^ or where the light is unfavourable, and little contrast to be seen; in whioh case, a mere vigorous negative is obtained by increasing the bromide.
If the exposure appears insufficient, detail may be obtained by oontanued derekip- ment with the plain pyrogaUic. If, on the other hand, the exposure be too kmg thwt being the best direction for error — ^by proper use of the add pyro and any amount of contrast con be securod.
-♦-*?
^i»^^S83»£g'
THE STEREOSCOPE.
"" V/'^ Slarooscope — frnin ori/inpi. sniii). nnrt wicmu. I Me — thM butmo- flipT^g ii»« liBtnunent »nd Mieotiao ley which not o^lj bringa before oe tbe H '^v' pictoni'iat the model in kootaiat and upparsally tangible (arm, wu tjjl^^ inTsntedbj ProreHOc Wheatslone — originator of the electrlo tclegiBph flll ■['> —who. In 18S3, adTuiced oerUin new propo«itioB« retpeotlng tlie :^.,''ft theory of hinoonlar Tieion. In 18S8, hemsde knownbi* iDTeMigniicnw iparan "Some Remarkable and Hitherto Uaohserved Phenomena of BinocnUu " which wu read betbre the Bojal Society; and it waa dnring the interval betwsm iri leas and 183§, that he prodnced hli Beflsctlng Stereoacopa (Fig, 1), oontiat- (wo plane mirrora, fixed on a centre lapport capable at adjnatmBnt. and ilnnty 1 Iha centre of a mahogany ftane coctaiBlng grooTee. in which ■lide two anna ■t each end — lapporting the picture*. When viewing the pictons throngh tlw In front of the mirror'-which are not asHifui] — they are made to rainglde t7
579
THB STEBBOSOOPB.
Tmi RiixBcmro Bnoiosoon is capable of ahowing pictures of any required siss. The engravisg shows a flront Tiew of tlieiiisfcmmflnt : — ^A A are two plane mizTon, about four
inches square, inserted in fhunes, andaosd- justed that their backs fimn an angle of Bisetf degrees with each other; these niizron an fixed, 1^ their oommon edge, against an np- right* B, so as to allow the Sjfea to be plseed before the two minors. C C, are twoslidiss boards, to which are attached the npri^ boards, DD,whichmajberemoTedtodxfl^ rent iHntflnnns fknm the mirroza. This a lis l^Bmwucnnm BnasoKot a. ^^ne by a right and left handed woodoi
screw, rl; the two ends of which pass through the nuts, e e, which ave fixed to Ute lower parts of the upright boards, D D, so that by toming the screw-pin, p, one waj, the two boards will approach ; and 1^ turning it the othe^ th^y will recede from aeh other J one always preserving the same distance as the other from the middle Uia B B are panels to which pictores are fixed in each a manner, that their oanes|win<iiny horisontal lines shall be on the same level { and theee panela are capahla of sbdiag Wuskwardsand fbrwards, in grooves, on the upright boards, DD.
To use the apparatns, place your qyes as near as poarible to the mimm, the rigU eye before the right-hand mizror, the left eye before the left-hand mirror, and more tba sliding panels, BB, to or from yon, until the two reflected imagea ooineida at tlw intff* section of the optic axes, and form an inoage of the same apparent magnitode at t^ of the component iiictnres. The pictnrea will, indeed, coincide whan the eliding psari* are in a variety of diArent positiona, and, consequently, when viewed under diftzwi inclinations of the optic axes i but there is only one position in which the binocolar. csr twofold image will be immediately seen single, of its proper magnitode, and withooi fktigoe to the eye.
If the pictores are aB drawn to be seen with the same inclination of the optic vxm, the apparatos may be simplified by omitting the screw, r I, and fixing the eprifi^ boards, D D, at the proper distances. The sliding panels may also be diapensed vrU^ and the drawings themselves be made to slide in the grooves. Outline figures nay <2^ be exhibited as solid; but in order to obtain the moat ftdthfril resemblanoe of i«l objects, shadowing and colouring may properly be employed to heighten the eflMi- Careftd attention will enable an artist to draw and paint the two oompon«nt pictnzw m perfect identity with the olqect represented. Flowers, crystals, bosta, vasaa, instraiMnB of various kinds, etc., ma^ thus be repreeented, so as not to be distinguished I7 ac^ ttom the reel objects themselves.
Tks Bsnucnxa oa LsimoinuLa Sxixiosoopa is the most conTeniont, and it is general use. It consists of a wooden box, provided in firont with ahinged Ud, whicb a lifted up to admit light for the illumination of the picture ; and mounted with two leay lenses of a prismatic shape, the centres of which oerreepond with the pnials <rf the eyc^
Although FroflBssor Wheatstone first contrived the Befraoting Stereoaoope, (be ^
THK BTBBB08C0P1. iTI
tnxlijctlon of priamUle Inuet wai nude b; Sir DBTid Bnmter. Threa htmdred j-eon Man Chiirt, EonUd sppean to hkve o))MrT«d llu prfaielple of the SUnotoopa, Oslsn slao, In Ida mirk ■■ On ths Um oT (ha I>mr«D( Fsru of the Bnmui Body," taOj dCMiibes
bod; wtth both syM, and Ihen allarutely with the right *nd left. Fnrta. OasMndl. and Oall held tlut we Ha with only ooe eye u e time, ■nhough botli remain open, one being nlaieS ^ni\ ioAttentive to Ql^ectA, while the other ii upon the itretch. Bacon uya, " We aee mors exqniiiielr witli one eye ehot than with both (^ca, becHOU the rital apirita thna unite them- •etree the more and become the ebonger,"
For the prodncUoa of eteieoMopio piotorea, a Binoonlar or Twln-lena Camera will be nqnbed j the chemicali and manipulation bcdng the eame aa lOr other negadvea ; but ^reat care moat be exerciaed in tiie developmcoit of the nogatlfea, which mnat not be too interne, tnily moderately lo, and well Bipoaed — bnt not oret-expoeed — othtrwiaa the printa when viewed ia llie StemwcopB have a moiev eSbot, and appear aa If taken on aaoowy day.
InmoanUiig printa taken with twin-lenaae the pictures require reversing i Iherefon. pTflTiooaly to cutting to the proper lixe and ehape, tflrn the printa &ce downwuida. and by ■nartlng them on their backe with L and R. Indicate 1^ left Bud rigbt hand pic- tures I In whloh w«y they an to be mounlad on the sUreosoopio card.
m the " Ghost in the Stereoscope," reoenlly and extensirely ed how the phenomenon li enioted. The studio Is flOed with ea, or anything that the mfod may sngKeit for a ghostly picture. XTBrythlnglinowamnged — siiiHittl^irhMC— and the place selected aslo where the ghoet is to appear. The Camera ia now placed, the foous obtained, and the prepared plate inserted Te«dy tor eiposnre. Ha-rlng decided upon what length of exposare moat be giren. oommenoe by giring one half the foil exposure ; plaoe the cap on the lens, and kindly reqoeat Mr. or Uiss Ohost— who is supposed to be waltJng, ready decked out In some style peonUar lo his or her calling, at some place nMir at hand — (o pro- ceed to the appointed haunt, a 11111111 [t any prerionsly ooncelTed poattlon, careflilly avoiding the ili^Ua^ movement of any of (he prarioaaly placed otijecta. Whan the proper positton la attained, the signal " to be ami " ia made, and the plate again •xpoaad tar the remainder of Ihe Ume. Upon daraloplng the piilare, a fllmjr aad setai-aanspaieat image or ghost will be seen, all ottlecta beyond the ghoet appearing aa if aeen thtongb a thin cr glassy medium. The ingODlona ^TO may use this procsas In n nuie^ of fbrmt, and obtain many emlotia reaoKa 1 flir even the varying the length of
JCKLLANKODa BCIENTIFIC KBCKEATIONB.
UISCBUUUKKOTTS SCISXTIHC JILXCaSATlOm.
^ ECfiEATITE SCIENCE hM b«omne qnita * ihs il>r with the rltlng gmcndoa of all olu nalJ; Ibe ciitkk and li
1»Te haul ire pnctiainy lunntJcH ; bci if what wi eaUas dsF*rtnieiil of the Bof't Din youlhi lo nuk. rortliar nHuch into [hs myutneB of ChamliBT. El» ■ Iriojty, Oal villi 1,(0, Opttcs, ai
! ITS ben Ta]]y Mtalned. The object at ■
i.vRtflp, np tho hill of knowledflv; i
'if hl« FUh, and aiding bim, u plguantl; a* mf b(
Dnrfng TOT cold w
which it will bt pnOdUr lUU.
it boin« ftuian. But IT ;oa •(;{)•(• Uu tmmI. Ota ir with great r^iidi^. This ODTioiu phsnomanan ia (bua aiplaliud. WaMr d a lU npaiate parttotaa <iiioIk«I#) a
UacoMlTea. When waur oooli at perfect raat Us ptutiotea appraaeh «aah oahir, f^ Iha fluid or lUr wi^ which U la kn oonlaot gr«daa]lj eaoapea ; bat lanioUiiDtf men a imnrinQ". nnleaa Ihs degree of cold be tbit intense, to determine the niolflniLa ^ arrange themaolTea in a dlflhrent manner. This dBtarminatlon thef rm»iie h; tb« shook, whioh dettro^ their eqalUbrlnni, and tlisr hll ose Dpoa the other, aad tom into gronpa in amh a '"■""*^ aa at onoe to produoe ioe.
BOf Vl.-^
need in mumfMtOTka for the doors of farnaoet, and In priTale hooiea Ar TitilMi"f eoraa to gai J«a. It I* oooMlanall; emplcTed in plaa* of wtaHaw-glMt, md tai been umewhat enanalTel; adapted ai a anbatlaue fbr glaaa En tba takiDg' of pomi' by pbotography. The new art, however, oonaMa In pradoiing varioaa flgana •>' dedgBeonBlieetaoriniea, which an afterwarda attaohed lo wlndow-paiw* bj meu* of Tamiab. Tta* deaigoi art mehangeable, and when tuUftillr airaa^d pandsB a
lOSCBLLAKEOUa SCIENTIFIC RECREATIONS. 579
exoeedJngty pntty eflbct The mica is flnfe split into thin plates, and the printing or Qolonring is applied by hand or by means of the ordinary lithographic prooesB. QUd- ing and lilveiing can also be applied, or the nsnal ilhiminating pigments may be need. Vitriflable pigments can also be nsed, bat then the painted sheet mnst be passed thnragh a ftamaoe, which renders the work indestructible. This, however, is a some- what expensive process. If the designs are skilAiUy pat together on glass, the eflbct of a beaatiftil mosaic is readily inrodoced. Mica so printed or coloored is applied to a host of ornamental toys, eto. ; and we have seen it adopted in the shape even of imitation stained-glass windows to libraries or conservatories. Figures, letters, landscapes, armorial designs, in varioas colocrs, may thos be executed with an effect that is really charming.
CinX.LABT AtTULOBOV
Is soeaOedfinomtheHne hair-like tubes of whiohcertain substances are composed attract- ing and retaining fluids. A pretty and fttmiliar experiment exemplifying this law is the placing a shrimp or prawn, after pulUng off the flm, with its tail in a glass of water and its head hanging over the side. The water is then drawn up through the body and dnopa Away through the head, as long as there is any in the glass.
Aiinthiir very simple but eflbctive experiment, illustrating not only capillaxy attrac- tion, but also the tendency of water to find its own level, may be made tiius : — Place two tumblers side by side, and put together a doeen or more threads of cotton or worsted of sufllcient length to hang ftx>m one tumbler to the other, so that the respective ends n^^ly reach the bottoms of the tumblers. Then nearly fill one of the tumblers with water, when you wfll soon observe the water gradually creeping or becoming absorbed up the thread, and so down into the empty glass ; which process will continue until exactly the same quantity wHl be found in each glass, when it will cease.
sncino osAVirr or Bkvt Ajrn vbxsh watxb.
An ea^ experiment, showing the difitoence in the gravity of "aI^ t^^^ treeii water, is ihna performed. Get a tin boat, and placed in a glass or basin of plain water it will be firand to sink ; but if you add salt to the water in sufllcient quantity, the boat may be jaadeto float.
f»i«th«r experiment is to place an egg in a glass tube half fViU of water. The egg ■inks to the bottom, but if you pour brine into the tube bj means of a long-nosed ftuinel, the egg will gradually rise. The Dead Sea is perfectly clear and bright, but the water holds so much salt in solution that it is impossible for a person to sink in it. The eaperior density of the sea enables ships to float more heavily laden in it than in riverm. For this reason, homeward-bound vessels commonly discharge part of their cargo ai poits situated at the mouths of rivers.
COLUMBUS OUTDOra.
The story goes that Columbus, the discoverer of America, when dining in company with some Spanish noblemen, was twitted with the sUghtness of his achievement ; and ^.Ha± in axusvrer he took up an egg and asked them whether they could make it stand on
590 HIBCELLAKEOnS SCIENTIFIC RECREATI0K8.
end. Each tried bat fttiled, when GolnmboB, cmeking the end of the tgg npon the table, etood it upright. Bnt the feat may be performed without breakixig the thtlL ▲U yon hare to do is to shake the egg thoronghly, when the yolk will break, and bemg heaTier than the white, will lUl to the bottom of the shell, thus enabling the egg to stand on the table without toppling over. But of course it must be nicely halanrwl Bo long, however, as the yolk is entire and floating in the centre of the white, it is impossible to make the ogg stand up.
SXKLIYOV LXATX8.
Put leaves into rain water and allow tiiem to remain until the fleshy part of the plant is quite soft and pulpy. Then wipe off the regetable matter, and the flbrons parts onfy will remain. If not quite firee, again immerse them, and remove any gif oe that may remain with a fine oamel-baJr brush. Skeleton leaves, when properly prepared, form very elegant ornaments under a glass shade.
TO SBOVZX PLABTXB BUSTS, ITC.
Apply isJTiglftiffl size, until no part of the surfkce beoome dry or spotted ; then, with a brush, go over the whole, observing careftilly to remove ax^ of the aise, while it 0 yet soft, that may lodge on the delioi^ or sharp places, and set the bust aaide to dry. Then tiJce a little very thin oil gold aise, and, with as much of it as will just damptfa» brush, go over the figure, allowing no more of this sise to remain than wiU caose A to shine. Bet it in a dry place, firee firom smoke ; and after it has remained tbentca%j' eight hours, the figure is prepared for bronzing. Bronso powder of all mfitalHr colours may be had at the colour-shops. It should be dabbed on with a little cotton wooL After having touched the extremities of the whole figure, let it stand another day; Umbo, with a soft dry brush, rub off all the loose powder, and the figure will resembto the nmtai which it is intended to represent, and ixMsess the quality of resisting the weather.
TO UAXM WOOD LOOK LIKB rVOBT,
Take half an ounce of isinglass, boiled gently in half a pint of water till dissolved : then strain it, and add flake- white powder till the mirtnre becomes white and ooawiateitt like cream. Give the box or carved wood ornament three or four coats <tf the sotaBOB, lotting each coat dry before the next is applied, and making the sorftMe smooth with s clean cotton duster. A few grains of carmine or chrome yellow will produoa a aligh^r pink or amber tint.
TO SOFIEir Am XOVU) HOBV.
To one pound of wood-ashes add two pounds of quick-lime ; pour on a qoait of .water, and boil till the quantity is reduced to a third. If you dipa quill in the miztnn and the feathers come off, the solution is sufficiently boiled; but if tba ptame remain on the quill, you will know that the mixture requires more boiling. When sufficiently boiled, strain the liquor off the sediment, and in the liquor thus strained pot ahavings of horn, and allow them to remain in for two or three days. Than, ailsr anointing your hands with oil, you can work the horn ahaviags into a masa aad woaSA /hem into any shape you please.
MISCELLANEOUS SCIENTIFIC RECREATIONS. 581
xiroBATxiro oir soo-aHXLLS«
Design on the shells any figure or ornament yon plee«e, with melted tallow, or any other fkii oily sabetanoe ; then immerse the eggs4n very strong vinegar, and let them remain nntil the acid has corroded that part of the shell which is not covered with tin greasy matter ; the covered paits will then appear in relief, exactly as yon have drawn them.
to ncnias na xxaox ov i oour, ox copt i nosuxs, cm i uexal ruLvx.
Take a well-polished copper-plate, place on it a coin of a different metal, and then having heated another coin or piece of metal, place it on the top of the first, and as soon as all is cool, remove the two coins ; sometimea yon will see an image of tiie underside of the lowest coin clearly visible on the snrflMM of the copper-plate ; bnt if it be not so, breathe npon the plate, and it will appear dearly defined. This is the simplest mode of exhibiting this cnrions efitet ; bnt if yon wish to form more distinct images, or copy engravings, a more complicated method mast be adopted. Bnb the snrfkce of the copper with mercniy, nsing a little nitric add and water, to enable it the more readily to ntnuigamfl^iA ivith the copper. Wash the plate well, and dry it with a piece of chamois leather, nntil it becomes aa bright as a mirror ; then, place the picture to be copied smoothly on the mercurial snrfbce, and lay a sheet or two of blotting-paper over it^ and press the whole down closely by means of a weight or a screw-press ; the perflsct snc- oess of the experiment depends in a great measure upon the doee contact of the print with the copper-plate ; the print is to be left ia this manTiwr for a couple of hours, but tbe process may be hastened by placing a hot plate of metal beneath the copper-plate. After a sufficient time has elapsed, the paper is to be removed, and a very slight image of the print will be visible ; it is then to be exposed to the action of the vapour of mer- eary in the box that accompanies the camera obacura, and in a few minutes the picture will appear; it is then to be removed to another box, containing a little iodine, and being placed, with the mercury side downwards, on the top of this box, the vapour of the iodixM wUl rise and blacken aU the darker parts of the picture to which the vapour of the mercury has not attached itself.
*0 MAXX AXTXnCIAL COMAIs VOB A OBOnO.
Take a quarter of an ounce of vermilion, and one ounce of dear resin ; melt them K^pether, and paint the twigs over with composition while it is hot ; if it should not lie* evenly, hold the twig to the fire, and the resin will be melted and become smooth. Twigs of black-thorn form the best imitations of coral ; but before the compodtion is applied, the black-thorn must be peeled and well dried*
ITATITBX-rBIirTKD VXSHB,
Perfe^ and beautiful copies of ferns may be made by thoroughly saturating them in common beer or stout, and then, after draining off the superfluous moisture, laying tliem flat between sheets of white paper, without more pressure than the leaves of an ordinary book will supply. After the impresdon is taken, lay the sheets of paper out to dry* and when dry, smooth them carefully with a worm flat iron.
Kt HiscaUiAMKOua scientific
■o cm auM.
VBks k imall notch, hy mama Of a flla, on ths adga of a plMa of glaaa i Umi, nuki tha enil ot a tobaooo-pipa, or of ■ rod oC boa of tlis uma liie. Tad-hot In tha tbr l apply ths hot Iron, or pipe, la tha notch, and dtaw it alowly along the nrike* of ihr ^laii in auj dlnctloD fan plaaae \ a etack viU t)e made in ths glaaa, and win bOor the direcUon of the iron. Cylludilcal glau tsihI*, asch ai Daaki, nu^ be eat ia ttu BuddLo, by wrapping ronnd Ihem a wonled thnad dipped In tpirit of tuipanliiM, and •atting It on Bn irheit FUUned dd tbo gllea. DLaca of glau iat,y also be cat aader
Take off Uie wioga of aereial bnttarfliea and plaoe thes carelhny on iRitinf-paptr. ■pread aa in (ha act ot flying. Now bare anotbar pieoe of paps oorered with elan fine gnn-vater. Lay Ihia gautly down on the tnt with g«ntle pnaann, and Qx wiugi will adhara. Plaoa a piece of abnit card orer (he wingi, and prw with ymr Sagen or the amootb handle of a knifa. The wings will than be flnnly flxad, and joa can la draw the tOnna of the bodies between, and ooloor thsm aftar nataia. In a very pret^ ploton may aaaily be made, and the dalioata phunaga tt the
We BloaeUiiaaeetionwilli regret 1 tbr. to oar iMnldng, tt la tin moat attnullTe oh in tbarolnmei and itglrana plaaanre to beliete that our yooog frianda wIQ uotncRty read it, bnt eiparimantaliie tot themaelTea. There la a world of deligiit and inalirw- lion in Boienca^ Thongh to nuny it may at flrat fleem dry and ditBcoltt do aoener do they fltlrty entor Into ita ueret ohambera and unfold ita myriad wondera, than they
Toyagera of Ehbla eacspe the wllei ol
tip Sttmiil.
i
|
O'J, |
■MSDUIT |
gamw. |
Ctaw il |
|
.bwdirth. |
|||
|
■■pitted |
in erary |
cirilHtd |
|
|
the warlil |
, from Biberi. to Roine-fri.ni |
||
|
leelsiKlu |
1 the wildt |
; ■Ddtaa* |
|
|
b«n Uie |
dolight 0 |
f empeni |
•.. king., |
|
phll-oph |
t™. ud |
||
|
In geneml. tor og |
|||
|
hiTBbeen |
pivenof |
It* orimn. |
|
|
llTU ■Ithol |
Igh it «IU |
1 be tnusd back w |
■Btiafbclory proolk o
GnoiBn ohlef*. d
584
CHESS.
who makes it of oriflntal eztraction, and to eome to iu from PttniA, throog^h Aimbia; as most of the tenns employed in the game are eithor coiTaptioiui or tnnslatiiaafrom Persic or Arabic words. Thos, oheok is plainly derived from the Persian tekaek, or king ; and uuU, in the same langnage, signifles dead ; hence, ekedemats, or the king is dead. In Hindostan and China the game has been prsotised from time immomoriaL
Chess is a capital mental exercise ; nothing in it is governed by chance ; jndg- ment is everything ; a player, therefore, cannot lay the blame of his losing on fiartone bat must ascribe his miscarriages to deficiency of jadgment, or inattention. It acts strongly, too, on the sense of honour; irascible persons should, thertfore, avoid it, unless they have learned to acknowledge that the acutest minds may be guilty of an oversight. It has one splendid advanta^ie over almost all other sedentary games— thst its lovers do not play at it for wagen, the honour of the victory being the ooiuinerar*t cmly reward« It may be called a representation of war in ntiniatnre ; two litUe armSes of different odours are drawn up opposite each other iu the order of battle^ prepared for mutual attack, and to take prisoner the king of the opposite party.
k
nri BOJLBD JJTD nn posinoir ov thm
The game of Chess is played by two persons on a board of sixty-four squares, aUer- Ziately black (or any other dark colour) and white, with sixteen pieces on either tU/t, which are also coloured black (or red) and white to distinguish those belonging to each player. The pieces consist of a King, a Queen, two Rooks (or Castles), two BisbopB, two Knights, and eight Pawns. Each player has a perfect set^ which are arranged on the board in the order shown in the following diagram.
The pieces have their separata moves, and the otgeot of the game is to piaee joor adversaiy's king in sndi a posxtian as to render him Aort<i0ooia&a^; the player who first succeeds in acoompUshiag that and wins. All the pieces take in tha direction of their moves, except the pawn ; and wliea thoy take, they do not» as in Draog^ta, move into the square beyond, bui into that occupied by the piece attaeksd. The captured piece is then removed from the board, and is out of the gama altogether. In placing the board betwem the playeia, a white square is always to the right band of each player. At the oommenoemenft of the TSB riBCBi AmkAtBB » ok»Bk or battlb. game the position of the pieces (takinir <^ white side as an example) is as follows : — ^The king's rook is on the white oomer square : next comes the king's knight, next to that the kiag*s bishop, then the king, and next to him the queen, who stands always on her own colour — ^blaok queen on a black square, white queen on a white square. This is considered tha kegr-nota ot the
k
CHESS. ses
▼bole arraagement, moet jaang pUiyen oommenclng to place the men by patting the qoeen on her own square. Next to the qneen stands the qaeen's bishop, next to that the qaeen's knight, and on the black comer sqaare the qaeen's rook. The pawns stand in the sooond row of sqoaree, immediately in front of the pieces, as shown in the diagram. The pieces and pawns on black's side are placed in exactly corresponding positions, on the opposite side of the boax^ the coloors of the sqaares being of coarse reversed — the qaeea standing on a black sqaare, and so on. In play it is osoal to can the king, qaeen, rooks, bishops, and knights pieoet, and the pawns men.
Bshop. Rook or CMtto. Kinff. Queen. Kniffht. Pawn.
THB XOTXS AITD POWBBS OW THX YASIOnS mCXS.
Ths Kuro. — ^The king is the most important piece ; tixe sole object of the game
being to hem him in, so that he cannot more witboat going into snoh a sitaation ba
would render him liable to be taken if he were not a king. He is then diedcmated,
and moat surrender. He steps only ftx)m one sqaare to the next at a time, bat in any
direction whatever, either forward, backward, sideways, or diagonally ; he can also
take any of the enemy's men in any sqaare adjoining to him, so that he does not place
himself in chock; that is, in sach a sitaation that, were he not a king, he coald be taken
by the enemy. The king is never aotaaUy taken ; bat if he be in check, and can
neither take the attacking piece, interpose one of his own, nor move withoat being
in cheek firom another of his opponent's pieces, he loses the game. Whenever the
king is attacked, the adverse player mast cry " check," which is a warning to the
monarch either to defend himself, or to move into a place of safety. The two kings can
never stand on adjacent sqaares, since they wonld mataally place each other in check.
Tbm Qvssir is the most powerfhl piece on the board ; she moves, like the king, in
any direction — as flo* as she pleases, provided the sqaares in her line of march be nn«
oceapied — ^upwards, downwards, sideways, or diagonally, combining the moves of all
the pieces except that of the knight ; and herein oonsista her saperiority and valae over
any other piece, even if it be aided by a pawn.
Tvs Books (or Cajbtlxs) are next in importance to the qaeen. Their progress is backward, forward, or sideways, bat not diagonally ; and they may move as far as the field is open.
Ths Bibhof mores diagonally only, as ftur as the sqaares are open. The bishop, therefoi«, always keeps the same ooloored sqnaro as that on which he is placed at the beginning of the game*
5S3 CHB88.
Thb KviftHT is particularly uaeftil at the beginning of the game, and ahonld be one of the flrat jiiecea brought into play. The knight moves in a peculiar way. the moye being one square forward, backward, or sideways, and then to another square {oi a diiHsrent colour to, and Author remoyed from, that on which he cniginally stood) diagonally. Or yon may rererse the order of the explanation by saying one wqpan diagonally and then to anothn square (of a different colour to, and farther remored from that on which he originally stood) in a lateral or yerticsl direction. The mors is, in Ikct, a combination, though limited in distance, of the moTca of the castle and the bishop. Remember that the knight must always be played two squares from his starting-point, and to a diilbrent coloured square. Thus, at the beginning of the game, the white king's knight moves to a white square, and the white queen's knight to a hlmtik square. A knight may be placed on any one square of the board, and moved hence into eveiy one of the other squares in sixty-three moves. We give an example of this curious problem at the end of the article.
Tm Pawvs. — A pawn, at his flrtt move, may advance either one or two squares straight forward ; but after having once moved, he can only advance a sinirle square at a time. In capturing an adverse piece, however, a pawn moves one square diagonally either right or left : but the pawn never moves backward. The pawn is the only man whose mode of taking differs tram his ordinary move. On anivxng at an eighth square, or the extreme line of the board, a pawn assumes the power <^ pm$ piece his owner chooeet to eaU for; so that a player niAy have two or more queess, three or more rooks, bishops, or knighta, on the board at one time. This is called t/ueetDUHf * pawn (as the original rule probably was that a pawn so advanced was ex. changed for a queen only). If, on moving two squares, apawn is placed by the side ol an adverse pawn which has arrived at the fifth square, the advanced adverse pawn may take the other inftaeaing in exaoUy the same manner as if the latter had moved but one square. This is called taking en paeeant, apower confined to the pawna.
ncHiriCAL Txuis rflKD nr tsi oi.Ma.
Araox. — ^When one of your pieces is so situated that, were it your turn to more, you could capture an adverse man, you are said to attadt such man.
CxBTLura is a compound move of king and castle, in which the castle is brought to the square next the king, and the latter moved to the other side of the caaUe. This is the only opportunity during the game that the king has of moving two squares at osee step. Various conditions attached to this combined move of king and castle are ex- plained in Law XIV.
Cbbcx. — ^When the king is within the range of an adverse piece or pawn, he is said to be M die^ I he must then either move to a square where he will be out of check, interpose a piece or pawn between himself and the attaclriTig piece, or take the latter, either himself or by one of his pieces.
Caxox BT DiscovxBT is given when, by moving a piece or pawn, cheek is suddenly discovered or unfolded trom another piece, whose attack was previously msaked by the piece now moved.
OcLBSDa Kff*
CuicxiLLXi. — ^The king being in check, most get out of cheek by one or other of the means already stated ; if he cannot either take the fttta^Tk1T^g piece, interpose, or more to a square not commanded by his adyersaiy's forces, he is chedtmatedt and loses the game.
Comma Attack. — When yon repel an attack by playing yonrself an attacking, instead of a detaisiye move, yon make a comuier atiaek, which is often the strongest kind of defence. Suppose yonr adversary to assail a knight, and you leave the knight en prise, and eounUr attack his queen, this ddlsnds your knight for the mumentj as, were he to take it, yon would capture his queen.
OovBLa Chick is given when, Ity moving a piece, check is not only given by the piece actually moved, but also discovered from another piece by the removal of the flnt.
DovBLBs Pawv. — The leading pawn when two are on the same file, the leader having reached that file by taking an adverse piece or pawn.
Dbawv Qamm. — ^When neither player can checkmate, the game is drawn. Such an ending is in many cases inevitable ; as when both sides are redoced to king against king without pawns } kings supported only by two knights, or a knight and bishop, with which pieces only, mate is impossible ; when one player insists on giving a series of checks and the other reftises to make any other move than from square to square and back again, which constitutes perpeimal €heek. Stalemate, also (see p. C69), is reckoned a drawn game. It is considered a drawn game when both players remain with almost or quite an equality of force, as with queen against queen, rook against rook, knight against rook, bishop against rook, etc., except in particular situations when the sttarking force can obtain some decided advantage. A game is also drawn when the player left with an inferior force, as bishop against queen, rook against queen, king against two bishops, gives notice that he will county and his opponent Ikila to naate within y|/ty moves on either side.
Ex Passavt. — To take a pawn in jpaeting. This is a vexy simple move, though it ie not generally understood by young players. When your pawn has sdvanced to the fifth square, and your opponent, at the first move of his pawn on the next file, pushes it two squares forward, he passes the square guarded by your advanced pawn. Yon have then the privilege of removing your adverssiy's pawn and passing into the aquare which your own guarded, just as if your opponent's pawn had moved one aqnare, instead of two. A pawn only, and not a piece, can be takei»ff» paetamt; and it ia at the option of the player whether he take advantage of his privilege or not.
Em Paxss. — ^This term is used to express the position of a piece or pawn attacked by another and in danger of being taken.
Pool's Hati. — It is possible to checkmate in two movea, and this ia called /bofe mate, to mark the ignorance of the parly defeated. The following is the Ibrm of this mate: —
WHITB. BLACK.
1 K. Kt. P. two squares I 1 K. P. two sqnarea
8 K. B. P. one square | 8 Q. mates on her K. R.'s fifth
FoBCBB HovB is a move compelled to be made ; as, Ibr inatanoe, if yon give check.
5g9 CHESS.
foTMOeing thai the ohedc cm only be met by the interposition on a certain eqoare of s certain piece, ■ooh interporition beoomee a Jbrced moot.
FoBKxre is a term applied to the moTe of a knight or pawn when it aoails two pieces ; as when the knight gives cheek and bythe same move attacks a piece ; bat the word properly refera to the divergent powers of all the pieces.
OAnmrs ▲ Hovs. — Suppose yonr adyersary to give check with his qoeen, which qneen yon drire away by interposing a castle, you here gaim and he losot the more. Philidor says that two lost moves are equal to a pawn. One lost move may cost ycm the game, and you may {frequently win through gainitig a move.
Gaicbxt, a term derived ISrom an Italian word used in wrestling, signifles the offering some apparent advantage to an opponent in order that^ should he accept it, he may be the more easily tripped up. In Chess it is used to denote the oflbring of a pawn or knight with the view, should it be taken, of securing a better position. There ai« various kinds of gambit in the several openings ot the game— as the king's, queen's, Muiio and Allgaier gambits, so called from their inyenton, or from the pieces to whieh the gambit pawn belongs.
Oimx* Vlwk. — ^The pawn sacrifled in opening a gambit, as well as the pawn which cax»tmes the oflbred pawn, are called gambit pawnM.
iMfSBTOsa. — ^To mterpom is to bring a piece or pawn between your king and the piece that gives him check ; or to stop your advenaiy*s attack on a piece by placing between the combatants a piece of your own.
IsoLATsn Paws. — One which stands by itself unsupported by another pawn.
J'AnovBx. — ^This term is used when a player touches a piece or pawn in ordtf to a4fiut or place it on its proper square during the game. No player is aHowed to touch a piece without moving it, unless he use this word, or its English equivalent
Majob Pxicss Aim Muroa Pixcss. — The queens and rooks are termed nu^or pieces, the bishops and knights minor pieces. The pawns are generally distinguished ss "men."
pAseKD Pawv. — One which has no adverse pawn in front of it, either on its otrn file or a file adjoining.
PsBTBTVAii Ghbck is givsu whsu a king is in such a position thai his opponeot insists on attacking him (giving him check at each more) with a piece <»> pieces so that he cannot escape, although he may have one or more squares in which to take refhge so as to avoid checkmate. The game is then drawn.
Qunvxiro a Paws is its change into a piece on arriving at the eighth square of a file. The piece selected may be a queen, rook, bishop, or knight ; but the pawn ■mm' be changed directly it moves on to the square. In some situations, the change into a knight is of great importance, as it enables the player to give check 1^ a move not possessed by the queen ; but as the powers of the latter combine those of the rode sod bishop, it is usual to change the pawn either for queen or knight. It has already been explained that any or all the pawns may be changed into pieces t thus, the phiyer may have two or more queens, three or more rooks, bishops, or knights on ttte board.
Raxx Avn FxLB.— Thehoriaontal, or lateral, squaiesare tennedrstifo; theperpeadi- eular, or vertical, squares are termed ,/lkf.
CUGSS. Kqg
Bcbolab'b Hasb, a oheokmate which can be given in four moves, as described on page 662.
BxoTKXBBD Matb is a term used to express the position of a king so suiroonded by his own pieces that he is obliged to SQirender to the attack of a pawn or knight
BvALxiun is such a position of your king (not being in check, and not having any other piece which he can move) that he can move to no square without going into check. In stalemate the game is dravm,
QvnovtnfG a Pxsca is guarding one piece with another.
Wnmira thx BxcHAH»m is obtaining a nugor for a minor piece, or one of the latter for a pawn,
LAWS OV CHKSS.
I. The board is to be placed with a white square to the right hand of each player.
II. If any error have been committed in the placing of the board or men, the game must be recommenced ; but either player may claim that the game shall be finished as it stands if four moves have been completed on each side.
UL The players draw for the move in the first game, after which the move is to be taken alternately in the succeeding games of the same sitting.
IV. The player who gives odds is entitled to the first move.
y. ▲ move once made, by your having moved a piece and left hold of it, cannot be retracted,
Yl. If you touch a piece, yoiv nmst play that piece j but as long as you retain your hold, you can play it to any legitimate square. If you touch a piece or pawn that cannot move, your opponent may compel you to play your king, unless the king be unable to move. When you touch a piece for the mere purpose of adjusting it, you are bound to say so, using the French term " j'adoube," or its KngHsh equivalent.
Yn. If you make a fidse move, your opponent may, at his pleasure, either cause yon to retract it and move your king, or claim that the fUse move shall stand, or that you shall make a legal move with the same piece.
ym. If you touch one of your opponent's men, he may compel you to take that man ; or if that be impossible, to move your king, provided it can be moved without going into check*
CL If, on the king being checked, due notice is not given by the word " check," the player whose king is attacked is not bound to notice it ; but on the check being after« wards detected, all moves subsequently made must, as flu: as practicable, be recalled.
X. Drawn games count as no games at all in any match, except by agreement smong the players.
ZI. The time for consideration of a move is not limited ; but a player leaving a game unfinished without his opponent's permission, loses such game.
XIL When at the end of a game one player is left with sufficient superiority of force to win — as a king and rook against king, king and two bishops against king, etc. — ^he who has the greater force must give checkmate within fifty moves on each side, count* ing fhnn the tame notice is given, or the game is drawn.
XTTI. Stalemate, and perpetual check if persisted in, oonstltnte drawn games.
«n CHESS.
Xrv. OastUng oannot be accomplJBhed under the following ciroamtteneet ; — Ityaat king hue jneyionalj moyed daring the game ; if your long is at the moment in ohe^ : if Tonr Idng in castling move into check ; if the rook with which yonr long eantlet has previonslj moved ; and if either of the squares crossed by the king is commanded hj any piece or pawn of your opponent. Castiing is only allowed onoe in a game. The king can castle either with his own or wiUi the queen's rook.
XV. When a player gives the odds of a rook he may castle on that side of the board from which he has taken the rook, provided the rook's square be empty and he doea not otherwise infringe any of tixe rules for castling, as given in Law XIV .
XVI. If the player touch both king and rook, intending to castle, his adwnaiy m^y compel him either to move one of the two pieces, or to castle.
JLVU. Directly a pawn attains its eighth square it must be exchanged for a queen, rook, bishop, or knight, as the player may choose, but it is not allowed to remain a pawn.
AVJUUL No penalty can be enforced for a fhlse move if the other player noT« a piece subsequent to the fltlse move, and fiul to call such CaLse move.
XTX. The saying aloud " check " does not compel the player to give chMd:, unleas he have completed the move by quitting the piece in hand ; nor does it compel him to play any piece he has not touched. But if, in consequence of saying " che^,*' the other player moves his king or kdj other piece, he may retract the move, loovided iSbt mistake be detected before a subsequent move be made.
XX. The player who undertakes to win any game or position, and snoeeeda obSj in drawing the game, loses it.
XXL The player who gives odds of a piece may remove It from eitiier side of the king ; but if he gives a pawn only, he must remove the king's bishop's pawn, nntoai otherwise stipulated.
XXTT. The player receiving the odds of a oertidn number of moves must not move beyond his own half of the bou^
XXni. All cases of dispute are to be referred to a third party, whose decision shall be final.
XXrV. Lookers-on are forbidden to comment upon the game either by way of approval or otherwise.
OHSSS VOTATIOir.
By the simple plan here explained, the player, with board and men belbte him^caB easily follow the moves of a game from written or printed direotiona. At starting, all the pieces on the board are said to stand on their own squures, and the pawna on the second squarea of the piecea. Then, as a pawn or piece moves, each move ia distin- guished by the i&ame of the square to which it moves, which is thai of the piece which originally stood on the first square of the file, together with ifta number. Bach square is reckoned from the side whence the piece started, thus — ^White quean's aeeoni square Is black queen's seventh ; or, when the king's pawn moves, he is said to move to his king's third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, or eighth, as the case may be; and so also of all the other pawns and pieces. This wiU be better understood by a diagraa^—
CHBSB.
501
BLACK.
|
1 |
|||||||
|
•biT^'b |
•b«-i3b |
•twab |
•twb |
•tw'S |
*b«*a'3 |
•b"13*3 |
•b8-H-3 |
|
Q.R.8 |
Q.Kt.8 |
Q.B.8 |
Q.8 |
.K.8 |
K.B.8 |
K.Kt.8 |
K.B.8 |
|
8H'5 |
813b |
8ab |
8b |
8-3 |
8a*3 |
813*3 |
8*H-3 |
|
Q.R.7 |
Q.Kt.7 |
Q.B.7 |
Q.7 |
K.7 |
K.B.7 |
K.Kt.7 |
K.B.7 |
|
8Hb |
E'lXb |
sab |
8b |
83 |
sa's |
8133 |
8H'3 |
|
Q.B.6 |
Q.Kt.8 |
Q.B.6 |
Q.8 |
K.6 |
K.B.8 |
K.Kt.8 |
K.R.8 |
|
f-Hb |
»12b |
tab |
rb |
»*3 |
»a'3 |
»13-3 |
»a*3 |
|
Q.R.6 |
Q.Kt.6 |
Q.B.C |
Q.6 |
K.6 |
K.B.6 |
K.Kt.6 |
K.R.C |
|
rub |
913b |
sab |
9b |
9 '3 |
9a-3 |
9133 |
9a'3 |
|
Q.R.4 |
Q.Et.4 |
Q.B.4 |
Q.4 - |
K.4 |
K.B.4 ■ |
K.Kt.4 |
K.B.4 |
|
»Hb |
913b |
9a b |
9b |
93 |
9a-3 |
9133 |
9a-3 |
|
Q.R.S |
Q.Kt.9 |
Q.B.3 |
Q.9 |
K.3 |
K.B.3 |
K.Kt.3 |
K.B.S |
|
z*sb |
^•13b |
iiab |
lb |
4*3 |
za-3 |
iH3'3 |
^•a-3 |
|
Q.R.2 |
Q.Kt.a |
Q.B.2 |
Q.2 |
K.a |
K.B.2 |
K.Kt.a |
K.B.2 |
|
sab |
813b |
sab |
Sb |
8 '3 |
sa*3 |
813-3 |
B-W^S. |
|
1 Q.R.«I. |
Q.Kt.Bq. |
Q.B.Bq. |
Q.8q. |
K.ftq. |
K.B.sq. |
K.Kt.sq. |
K.B.Bq. |
WHITK.
It will be seen that each Bqnare has two names, one for noting white's moves and the other for black's. In noting a game on paper, this is made plain by placing the moTes of each colour in a separate column. Thus, when we writ»—
BLACK.
1 P. to K. 4
2 Q. Kt to B. 3,
1 P. to K. 4
2 K. Kt to B. 3
we mean that white's pawn has moved two sqoares, that is, to his king's fourth, and that black haa replied by also moving his pawn two squares, i.e., to hU king's foorth; then white moves his king's knight to his king's bishop's third square, and black moves his queen's knight to his queen's bishop's third square. The taking of a piece is thus stated — P. takes P., or B. takes Kt. By this system eveiy move can
be clMurlj ifcAted, m will be leen by the foUowing mofres of the little game known BA ** Soholar'B Mate :"—
BLACK,
1 p. to K. 4.
2 K. B. to Q. B. 4 S K.KL toK.B.S
1 P. to K. 4
S E. B. to Q. B. 4
S Q. to K. B. 6
4 Q. takes K. B. P. end metee
The oontreetions need in this eyetem of notetion are — Ch. for check, aq. for Bqaan, K. for king, Q. for qneen, B. for rook or castle, B. for bishop, Kt. for kni^^t, rnaaH P. for pawn. These letters are used either singlj or combined. Thus, when we wnt» K. B. P. to K. B. 8, we mean that the king's bishop's pawn has moTcdto his own king's rook's eighth square ; and so also of the othn pieces and pawns. Game I. (p. 670), which is noted completely from first more to last, shows at a glance the entire plan of notation, as given abore, which is the one now aniversally adopted.
SLSMivTABT nrsTBVcnoirB, um astioi so saomms.
It is Qsnal for each player to begin his game by playing his king's pawn twosqfoares. This, however, is perfectly optional, as the early moves in every game are merely preliminary to the player's grand attack or canftioiis daflBnoe. But they, nevertbeleas, give to the games their special character of strength or weakness, and in many caoei determine the final result. The various openings are known by diffbrent namea, as already explained under the definition of the teim gambU, The players move in ton. The otgeot of the game, which is to give the enemy checkmate, can scarcely be eflketed without some definite plan. The player should therslbre look forward thixngh the several moves requisite to bring his men into a given position, and also to provide^ from time to time, against his antagonist's attempts to frnrtarate his design, or to attack him in turn. He must seek to penetrate his adversary's plota tram themovvs he makes. He is not obliged to take a man when it is in his power; but, whan he does, the man with which he takes it must be placed on the square occupied by the man taken.
If the king's pawn be advanced two squares, and the queen's one square, an open- ing is made both for the queen and the queen's bishop to the king's side of the board : and the king's pawn cannot be taken, without the queen's pawn taking the adTersarT*R man in turn, and supplying his place. If two pawns be advanced side by side, neither defends the other; this is sometimes done to ftuther a plan of attack; the pawn sacrificed on these occasions, and the adverse pawn capturing it, are called p»M6tfjMNni#. After the pawns are advanced two squares, the knights may be brought forward, either to support them or act upon the offbnsive.
The plan of attack should be gradually formed ftt>m the commencement of the game, and each step taken should have a tendency to forward it, nnleas when it is neoeasaiy to thwart the plan of the adversely. The player must not suflbr himself to be diverted from a well'Ooncerted prqieot by any collateral advantage ; for the taking of a pawn or piece may prove injurious when it leads to a deviation from the principal otjject. If your plan be discovered and firustrated, it is better to form a new one than
CHESS. 503
to peraeyore in the old. Look well otot the board before you move, that yon may notice what piece is attacked, and diacorer, if poesible, what your adversary can do to coonteract yonr moves. A plan may be most effectoally concealed by excluding the qneens and rooks, or by executing it through the agenqr of inferior pieces or pawns, or by masking the pieces intended to eflbct it behind men which have apparently xua mflu- enoe in the game. The skilfhl player, if his moves be calculated with precision, wID some- times sacrifice his most important pieces without hesitation, in order to tn<«ifl*iS bis antagonist, or when it is necessary to the accomplishment of his plan ; nay, he will ollen do this intentionally, to lead his opponent into the hope of winning, and checkmate his antagonist when the latter fkncies he has the game in his hands. It is common Ibr a good player to conceal his purpose till it is out of his opponent's power to firistrate it, and then to pursue it openly. To give check without having it in your power to follow up your attack, is, in general, bad play. If your checking piece can immediately be repulsed, you lose a move. Never attack, therefore, without good preparation ; and if your attack proceed well, do not suffer yourself to be drawn aside by any bait your antagonist may throw in your way. The object in chess is to give checkmate, and not to take pieces. Sacrifioe your own when the loss of them will frustrate the line of defence adopted by your opponent.
If your adversary leave a piece unguarded, examine the position to see whether it were left so from necessity, oversight, or design. You do not always gain by taking a piece, for you may be checkmated in consequence of taking even a queen. Be not eager to take an adverse pawn in ftt>nt of your queen ; for, as your antagonist cannot take him, he Is frequently a better protection than a man of your own. If you cannot save a piece, endeavour to take one of the enemy's ; or, hy improving your situation, to obtain a compensation for the loss. When you can take a piece two or more ways, examine which way will be the best. If your antagonist can take the man in return, take it with that man which is of the least value. To exchange man for man, occa- sionally, is good play, or even to exchange a queen for a rook or knight^ when either of these pieces would prevent you ftt>m giving mate.
Qoard your pieces sufficiently ; and if your opponent's position be doubly guarded, let yours be trebly guarded. The more valuable pieces should be guarded by those of inferior worth ; for, if your opponent guard his minor piece by another minor piece, and you employ your better piece to take your enemy's, you "lose the exchange." An advanced pawn should be weU guarded, for it is often indispensable to a checkmate and may make a queen.
Castling is not always advantageous, as ISrom the conflnod situation in which it places the king, it sometimes (particularly when the adversary has his knights in play) pre- rents his escaping out of a subsequent check* It is, however, common to retain the power of castiing for some time, and to keep the requisite pawns in their places. For sa long as you are able to castle, your opponent wiU be at a loss on which side to direct his attack ; and when he has decided, and brought his main strength to bear on one side, you can frustrate his design by castling on the other. It is not good play to move too soon the three pawns in front of the castled king ; but liber^ of moving may become
38
994 CHXS8.
to get tfie Idag oat of check ; thfercfon, it it w«II at onee to anove the rock's pawn one Mineie.
Do not crowd yoar foroee too mneh together, ea this reatiaiae their moremeatB ; s piece that cannot more is often worn than lost, bj sTanding in the waj of ocher^. EndeaTOor to crowd yoor antagonist's game, which yon may sncoced in dcKng if b^ bring oat his pieces too early, hj driving them hack with yoor pawns. BndeaTonr t ^ open your game by jadi4^aa exchanges shoald jroa ffaid it getting crowded.
Neirer make a more withoot examining whether yon be endangered by jtMiu- opponent's last more, nor without calmlating whether it will allow him to bartn yva by his next. Bewaieof hiskniyhts. as they command diffhrent sqaaras at pnea, »awi Tw<r fork two or more pieces. If a knight command the sqaare of a qaeen or rooik, as tbe Mune time that he gives check, the piece mnst be lost onleas the knight can be taken ; sj avoid this, when a knight ia near, more any migor pieces to a diiRnent colour fitsn that of the sqoare oa which yoar king stands. Do not let an enemy's pawn attaci two of yoar pieces at once. Beware of two, and stm more of three pieeea, that xnanif«sc a design on the same square. Block np the way to sach sqaare by one of yoor pawcs or a gnarded piece. Yoar qaeen ahoald never stand before yoor king, aa, in eoch » sitaaUon, she may be loet, by a goarded rook being bronght in hor front, ia whidi position yoa cannot remove yoar qaeen, becanae sach a move would leave yoar kixur in check, so that you will be obliged to sacrifice her for a rook. When yoa find your game irretrievably lost, do not prolong it by idle moyea, bat retire graceftillx,
nmnras ov oamss.
The whole porpoee of the game being to checkmate yoor opponent, it ia iieeeB»zT to bring all your forces into such a position as to enable you to attack his king wLi> at the same time you guard your own. Now, in order that you should comprefae:^ the nature both of the attack and the defence, it will be as well that we Okc^'-l explain, somewhat at length, the various methods of check. Yoa are already mwMr? that when the king is within range of an adverae piece or pieoea, he is in dk«dfc. As : that when (being in check) he cannot escape either by moving to another aqoare, takisc the attacking piece, or interposing a piece of hia own, he is checkmated, Hue lats situation may be formed in several ways : first, hy the sole agency of adverse pieoea. as if the board were without limits and the attacked king withoot pieeea or pawa» -, next, by adverse pieoea aasisted by the sides or limitation of the board ; thirdly, ^ adverse and friendly pieces togetiier ; and fourthly, by the joint effbct of these aep&rstt^ elements.
As this explanation includes every position of checkmate, it also involvaa all ^ consecutive elements ; the order of the moves, and the process of producing the siccA- tions above referred to, are Uierefore now before oa. As the king, standing on a aqoaxe away from the side squares, commands eight other squarea, the forces sufllcieBt >•* checkmate him must, in their range, be able to command or control nine aqaare&. Hence no two pieces can force checkmate when the king is on a centnl aqoare ; but three minor pieces can give check to the king in the middle of the boaH»
CHBB8.
5d5
and foroe bim into the tide or oomer aqoarM, and there gire him mate ; bnt in each caae the attacking king most aaaiat.
To render what we have said more easily eomprehenalble, we annex a diagram ,1^^^^ showing Tarious methods of forcing check-
mate. In the position fhns shown we presume the black king to have been forced into the comer square.
Here it will be seen that the black king is not in check, but if he had to be moved he would be stalemated, because he could not moTe without going into check. White, howcTer, having the move, checkmate can be forced in several ways : —
In one move, by the rook checking on the white square beneath the black king; or, by white queen taking black queen.
In ttoo moves, by white bishop giving
^H MS ggM ^TZA H check, whieh fbroes black queen to take it,
i"^— * 1 when rook mates as before on white king's
^''^"'* rook's seventh square. Or by white queen
moving to her fourth square, and giving check, when black queen must take her, and
rook mates as before. Or by white queen moving to king's rook's third, when black
queen must take her, and rook mates, as before, or bishop mates on king's fifth.
In three moves, thus —
1 Q. takes Q. 3 Q. takes B.
1 Q. takes B.
% Q. interposes
|
1 Q. to Q. 4, |
oh. |
|
i B. to K. 6, |
ch. |
|
3 B. to K. B. 7 mate \ |
|
|
Orthn*— |
|
|
1 B. to K. 6, |
oh. 1 |
|
2 Q. toK. B.3, ch. | |
|
|
3 Q. takes Q. |
, and notes | |
|
Or thus — |
|
|
1 B. checks |
|
|
8 Q. to Q. 4 |
|
|
3 R. mates |
1 Q. takes B.
2 Q. takes Q.
In four moves, hj six different methods, vis. : —
1. B. eh., Q. ch., B. ch., Q. takes Q., and mates.
2. B. eh.,' Q. ch. at K. B. 3, Q. oh. at Q. B. 3, and R. xsovea to K. R. 7,
and mates.
3. B. ch., Q. ch., K. movea to B.'s 8, and R. mates, or Q. or P. mates.
4. B. ch., Q. oh., R. to K. Kt. 7, and R. or Q. matea.
5. B. oh., Q. oh., R. to Q. 8, and either K. discovers mate by R. moving or
Q. or P. mates.
6. B. ch.,Q. ch., P. ch., and Q. takes Q., and mates.
Or ptr^ttital cfift^ tnAj b« fonwd by ths bUiop giring cluck. TtM black qiuea 1 gblig«d to Uke him. irbes white qoten glT« ohack on E. B. Bid iqiun. Tlw bteek iiesn muM interpoM i boc initiad ot mUiiig, while qaMn again giTM chBsk on Q. B. rd (when B. Q. atanda la thA diagram), and u on oooEinDally.
Ijutly, tUlcnutU may be given thna — P. morsa and givea chadr, whoi tb* black lUMnmoM Ukg il; than tnok UAec q., and becaoM thakiiig mmot man wiUiaiu ning IdU check wiita the rook, nalRoala la the ramk.
The etndy of the ruraEniog poaiUon, and tha aersral methods whonby checkmate rom AiLch a poaiLioa maj he acoompliehed, wiU bmlliariie the mind of the jKnat^t player the gama, Thaae, howerer, an by DO meaca tbe onlj ifvya of ilanoe, any one aaperior pleco. In eoujuoe^on withiu own king. Died king i or any two tapoior plsaea, or inftuior pwoai aaaim i by pawna, can girs checkmate. We prooeed (o 0fB ■ Ibw men siampica of endhiKi. ** Blmpla check '^ ia giTan by any one place or pawn; "doable check" la ^van by two plecei attacking at the ume time, which occnn whan, by glTing check with ona plMM. you at tbeeame lima uncoTaroheck from another. For iniliDce. look M (hi poaiUon at Iba piacaa in the lalC-hand diagram balov ; —
The king ia notnow In oheak, bnt if the knight mora to fall king"! bUiop'a eeecad ■riuere, or lo bla queen's bliliap'a fifth, ha will """■"^*- or diaooYBr cback from tijt biehop, and at the eame lioMgire check by the knight, thna prodocing " doable chcA." " Perpetual check " can be glTsn by ■ alagle piaoa, eveii a^alnM a aaperior turte. In the Bait diagnuB we aaa haw oa» qaesn Mo always glt« ehaok i Itir as sood ta
OEXBS. SST
rlthsr dT the bUck qnavna IntnrpcN, (h<i mcT« to the Dthsr dlacanal, ud ■■> pill* Uia king that, «*ai wltb tha wrtilanet {^ two qoeaiu, hs cannot aioapa.
Ai we ban alnadj MUed, Ibe most limple tOna oT diecknuUa are Oiata wttb Ilia qasni or took, when Iha baud it nearly clear toward! the end of Ou game ; end ererr joang plj^er iboold know bow to mate te tbeee poeltioiii In tbe eaialleet num- ber c^ motee. To cbeokmate with the croeen, nnaeeiitod by mdj pleoe except her own Idng, it li psBenar? to drive Ibe attacked king to a aide eqnare, ami then to bring np yonr own king to a Kiaara inunediatety oppoelio or at not more than a knlght'a move dietaDt. Tbui Hit qneen la bronght ap sad apeedUj givu male, aa eeen in ILe m gi*>n below.
I ■ I
Will) Ung and queen agalnM king, obockmala eon alwnfg be eHMed. from an; pail of lb* bcaid, in at moM tweotf moTea. Tlie wa; to effect thii ia flixt to eonOne the oppoeUa king to a portion of the board, hr pladng jonr qoeen on a tide aqoar* or ttie Hne In (rant of the adrene king, and then gradnall; moving np 70111 king, eoUuU wben tbe two Uogi are oppoaite each other ron can give cbeok and drlre your opponent back to another Uoe. Then prooeed a* before Ull ;on get blm ia the lait row of aqnaree, uid getting neerer and nearer with jaaz king, give him mate bj moving between Ihe two kjogi (a* m the left-hand dlagism], or taking op a pceltkm aimllar to that of the rook ia tbe other diagram.
Hate with the rook ii eftMed In mndi the aoine manner ea with the qoeeti, tbe two Idngi being oppoelta each other, oe in tbe right-hand dlagnm aboTe. Hen, ee the ktaga may not move next each other, the black king liaa do eacape and la checkmated.
^he checkmate wiUk two qoeena, or with qeeen and rook, ia also Ter^ cae7- Yon may eSbct tbie withoat the eeolalanee of tbe king, fai the manner shown In the n»t diagram- Here the king oanDOt move out or tbe rook'* check withaat moTlng into Uie Una guarded bj Ihe quean, and i* thet«rar« mated.
m m
.■_■_■
m
I m
M PI
1 ■•
U&M with a qniien and two roola i> »l*o TOiy mh; in Bn; jsrt of Lha baud. AH ]-oa bar* to do ii to sst roar plson Into inoli ■ poallion u UiM ilio*ii In tlw rigltf. hand dlognm abort.
VMa with rook, biihop, ftnd pawn* if a llula mom dlfflonH. Ttas flnt of tlta two foUowliis poaltioDa ihowi how rook aod biibopmafba mads to produce aracnltdmilBr to that artaing from tbaaUuk of a knight, in additioc to lha power pOHMiadbj a qoem.
|
m m m m |
|
a ^ H ■ |
|
a a ■ B |
|
m m m m |
|
m&m*m m |
|
m m m m |
|
m w s m |
|
m m m m |
» a a K
■ B ■ ■
I m w.(t\m a a*a a
a a a ~~ a a L . a a a a
■nona hia blihcp lo qaem'i knight's teeond hidus. Tha admu king tan then onl^ more to the wjiun dlagoml to tha nuk. The irhiu kiiig moraa lo the whjta aqnaro to tha right (Q. Srd), dlaoaTering check, and mataa.
As szoeedingly neat and preO; checkmate ii ahown (a Uie right-hand diagram od Iha laat pags. White moTM his knlgbt to hia king's tbbd iqaan (that bctwaen the iwo kings and tha rook). Tlie bUok king haa Uwn bnt one more, and tha rook giiaa [nats OD klng'a blahop'a (bnrth aqnara.
Ai an Dlnatratlon of tha romtb dsserlpliim of cbsckmste (see p. SM), take the pcaltlon ■bows in tha laK-hand diagnm balow. White's king- may be anfwh««— ont of tha ~ -.-----. idbjhi* own foroa ; —
_■_■_■
Thla la a very Ingenious oomblnatJoD, and la introdDnd la order to explain tallj tha action of the aerenil plscea. Jn order to eSbot the male, while knight takes the black biahop and glrea oheok. The Uag can only move into the white aqow. The other white knight than mores lo rook's sixth aqnare and again glrta check. The king oaO' not take the lint ^"'g'*t, becaoaa ha wonid thua move Into check ; he must therefore (■kg the seoond attaoklDg kalght with hIa biahop, when the knight that remains takes Um Uahop and gl*ea eheok. The king la obliged to more into one of the black aqnares, whsn the white biahop gl>ea check and mates.
la the right-hand diagram above white pl^a and malea fm two movea. First, hj irlring check with the biahop, when tha king is obliged to move Into the oomer and is mated with tha kniKht. Then, If the pawn be iVBOved aad the knight placed on his Brth •qnare, he ntppcRa the rook and UIUU7 matea in two movaa. With the paws remored •nd knight at king's Ushop'a fifth sqoara. white maUa In two nwrei i aa he doea, also.
600
CHXSS.
where pftwn was, and bishop at Idng'e rook's flfthp the suite is likewiae two moves. We now proceed to farther illnstrafee oar sabjeot by a few
in
•Axn voa raxcRCB.
The following games, which we shoald recommend the beginner to play ewer eeveral times, are presented, not as the best that ooald be selected, bat as illuatx*tions of certain openings fi^qnentlj adopted by practised players.
Gm I. — KaQ'B KjnoRT*s Gambit.
1 P.toK.4
2 P. to K. B. 4
5 Kt. to K. B. S 4 P. takes P.
6 B. to Et. 6, oh.
6 P. takes P.
7 B.toB.4
8 P.toK.Kt.8
9 Castles
10 K.toB.'ssq.
11 KttoK.6
12 P.toQ. 4
13 Q.toR.6
14 B. takes P., ch.
1 P.toK.4
3 P. to K. B. 4
5 K. Kt. to B. S
4 P.toK.R.4
6 Kt.toK.6
6 Kt. takes Kt P.
7 P.toQ. 4
8 Kt. to K. B. 2
9 Q.toK.B.3
10 B. to K. 3
11 P.toQ.B.3
12 K. toB.sq.
13 K. Kt.toR. 3
14 B. takes B. 16 K.toKt.Bq.
16 Kt.toQ.2
17 B. to Q. 3
18 P.toK.6 10 R. takes B.
20 B. takes Kt.
21 P. takes P.
BLACK.
1 P.toK.4
2 P. takes P. 8 P. to Q. 4
4 B. to K. 3
5 P. to Q. B. 3
6 P. takes P.
7 B.toB.6. eh.
8 P. takes P.
9 P. takes P., oh.
10 B. to B. 3
11 Kt.toK.B.S 13 B. takes Kt.
13 Q. takes P.
14 Kt. takes B.
16 Q. takes Kt.,ch.
16 B.toKt.6,ch.
17 Kt.toB.S
18 B.takeBB. 10 B. toB.4, ch.
20 R.toQ.6
21 KttoK. 4
22 B. takes B., ch.
23 Q. takes Kt., ch.
24 Kt.toQ.6
26 Q. to Kt 7, oh. 26 B.toQ. 3,ch. 37 KttoB. 4,oh. 28 P. to Kt 3, mate
BX.ACX.
16 K.toQ.'a8q.
16 B.toB. 3
17 B.toQ. 2
18 K. to B. 2
19 K.toKt. a
20 Q.toB. 4
21 Q.takeaP.
22 Kt takes R.
33 K. to R. 8
34 K.B.toQ.Mi.
36 K.toB.4 26 Q. takea B,
37 K.toB. g
Gakb n. — ^Kiiro's GAXBn.
BLACK.
1 P.toK.4
2 P. takes P.
3 P.toK.Kt4
4 P.toK.Kt 6 6 P.toQ. 3
6 B. to K. 3
7 K.B.take8P.,ch.
8 Q.toK.Kt4
9 Q. to K. Kt 6
10 Kt to Q. B. 3
11 K.KttoK.B.3
12 K.R.toKtsq.
13 Q.B. takes Kt
14 Castles
16 Q.R.toK.sq.
16 Q. to K. Kt 3
17 K.KttoKt6
18 P. to K. B. 4 10 P. takes P. SO Q. takes R. 31 Q.R.takesP.
22 Q. takes Q.
23 K.B. takes K.R.P.
24 B. to Q. B. 2 36 K.toB.a
26 K. B. to B. 6, Ch.
27 K.B.takesKtP.
28 K.B.tohis6 20 R. takes R.
30 KttoK.B.3
31 K.toK. 3
32 Kt to Q. 4
33 B.toK.4
34 P.toQ.Kt 3 36 P.toQ.R.4
36 P.toQ.R.6
37 KttoQ.B. 2
38 B. takes Kt
39 P.toQ.Kt 4
40 KttoK.sq.
41 K.toB. 2
42 Kt to K. B. 3
22 P. takes Q.
23 K. R. to bis aq.
24 Q. R. to K. 8. ch.
36 K.R.toliia8 26 K. toQ. aq.
37 KttoK.4
26 Q.R.takesQ.R 80 R. takes R. 80 R.toQ. 8 31 R.toQ. 8
82 K. to K. 8
83 K.toB.S 34 P.toQ.B.3 86 P.toQ.RS
86 P.toQ. B.4
87 KttoQ. B.3
88 P. takea B. 30 K. to B.4
40 R.toK.KtS
41 K.toK. 6
43 R.toK.KtS
And black erentaalfy wins.
CHESS.
601
Gjluh m. — Knrs'g Gambit DiCLXim.
|
WHITB. |
BLACK. |
WHin. |
BLACK. |
|
1 P. toK.4 |
1 P.toK. 4 |
19 B.toK.8 |
19 Q.toK.Kt3 |
|
2 P. to K. B. 4 |
3 B. to Q. B. 4 |
30 Kt to K. 2 |
20 P. to K. B. 3 |
|
8 Kt. to K. B. 3 |
3 P. to Q. 3 |
21 B.toQ. 2 |
21 P. to Q. 4 |
|
4 P.toQ.B. 3 |
4 Q.B.toK.Kt.6 |
22 KttoK.B. 4 |
22 Q.toK.R.2 |
|
6 B. to K. 2 |
6 Kt to Q. B. 3 |
23 P.toK. 6 |
23 Q. takes Q. |
|
6 P.toQ. Kt. 4 |
6 B. to Q. Kt. 3 |
24 Kt takes Q. |
24 KttoQ.B. 6 |
|
7 P. to Q. Kt. 5 |
7 Q.KttoQ. R.4 |
26 B. to Q. Kt 4 |
26 K. Kt to K. 6 |
|
8 P. :o Q. 4 |
8 Q. B. takes Kt. |
26 B. takes R. |
26 IttakesB. |
|
9 B. takes B. |
9 P. takes Q. P. |
27 KttoK.B.4 |
27 K.KttoQ.7 |
|
10 P.talceBP. |
10 Q.toK.B. 3 |
28 B. takes Q. P. |
28 K.KttakesR. |
|
11 B.toK. 3 |
11 KttoQ.B.6 |
29 B. takes Q.Kt |
29 KttoQ.7 |
|
12 B.toK.B.2 |
12 Q.take8K.B.P. |
30 B. to B. Q. 6 |
30 B. takes Q. P. |
|
IS CMtles |
13 Kt.toK.B.3 |
31 P.toK. 6 |
31 P. toK.Kt4 |
|
14 Q.toQ.3 |
14 Kt.toQ.R.4 |
32 P.toK. 7 |
32 B. to K. sq. |
|
15 Kt.toQ. B. 3 |
16 Castles on K. side |
33 B.takesK.B. P. |
33 P. takes Kt |
|
16 P.toK.Kt.3 |
16 Q. to K. R. 3 |
34 P. takes P. |
34 R.takesK.P. |
|
17 K.toKt. 2 |
17 Q. R.toK.sq. |
36 R. takes B. |
|
|
18 Q.R.toK. sq. |
18 K. toR.sq. |
And white wins |
I. |
Gaxb ly. — Tmm Alloaibb Gaxbr.
This is a favonrite opening with many players, rather showy than safe; but if the ■econd player take the oflbred knight, he will probably loee the game.
WHITB.
1 P.toK. 4 1
2 P.toK.B. 4 2
3 KttoK.B.3 3
4 P.toK.R.4 4 6 Kt to K. Kt 6 6
6 Kt takes K. B. P. 6
7 B. to Q. B. 4, eh. 7
8 B. takes Q. P., ch. 8
9 P.toQ. 4 9 10 K.KtP.takeeP. 10
WHITB.
1 P.toK.4 1
2 K. KttoB.3 2 8 P.toQ. 4 3 4 Kt takes P. 4 6 Q. B. to K. 3 6
6 K.KttoQ.Kt 6 6
7 Q.B. takes B. 7
8 K.KttoQ. 6,ch. 8
9 KttakesB., eh. 9
10
BLACK.
P.toK.4 P. takes P. P.toK.Kt4 P.toK.Kt6 P. toK.R.3 K. takes Kt P.toQ. 4 K. to K. Kt 2 P. to K. B. 6 K. KttoK.B.3
WHITB. BLACK.
11 Q. Kt toQ. B. 3 11 K. B. to Q. Kt 6
12 Q.B. toK. B. 4 12 K. Kt P. takesP.
13 Q. takes P. [ch. 13 P. to Q. B. 3
14 K.B.toK.KtBq.,14 K.toK.R.2 16Q.B.toK.6 16 K.R.toK.B.8q. 16Q.toK.Kt3 16Q.toK.2
17 Q. to K. Kt 6, eh. 17 K.toK.R.8q.
18 Q. takes P., ch. 18 Q. to K. R. 2
19 Q.B. takes Kt.ch. 19 K. R. takes B.
20 K. R. to K. Kt 8, mate.
Gaxb Y. — Thb Siciliav Opbhikg.
10 B. to Q. 3
black. P.toQ.B. 4 P.toK. 3 P. takes P. K. B. to Q. B. 4 Q. to Q. Kt 3 K. KttoB. 3 Q. takes B. K. to K. 2 K.R. takes Kt K. KttoB. 3
WHITB.
11 CasUos
12 KttoQ.2
13 P. toK.B.3
14 P. to Q. R. 3 16 P. to Q.Kt 4
16 KttoQ.B. 4
17 P.toK. B. 3
18 Kt takes Kt
19 Q. toQ. 2
20 Q. R.toQ.8q.
BLACK.
11 P.toK.R.4
12 P.toK.R.6
13 P.toK.Kt4
14 K. R. to K.Kt,Bq. 16 Q.tDQ.Kt3
16 Q. to Q.B. 2
17 Q.KttoK.4
18 Q. takes Kt
19 K.R.toK.Kt2
And white wins.
602
CHESS.
Gim VI. — Thx Scotch GutBit.
|
WHITB. |
BLA.CX. |
WHITB. |
BLACH. |
|
1 P.toK.4 |
1 P.toK.4 |
22 Q. Kt.toQ.B.4 |
22 P.toQ.Kt 4 |
|
S K. Kt. to B. 3 |
2 Q. Kt to B. 8 |
28 Q.Ki.toB.6 |
23 Q. R. to Kt. 3 |
|
S P.toQ. 4 |
8 K.P. takesP. |
24 P.toK.6 |
24 B.toK.Bq. |
|
4 K.£.toQ.B.4 |
4 K. B. to Q. B. 4 |
26 P. to Q. R. 8 |
26 K. to Q. 3 |
|
0 P. to Q. B. 3 |
0 K. Kt. to B. 3 |
26 Q. R. to B. sq. |
26 Kt to K. 2 |
|
6 CastlM |
6 Q.Kt.toR.4 |
27 K. B. to Q. sq. |
27 K. to Q. B. 2 |
|
7 B.P.tak«6P. |
7 Q.Kt takes K.B. |
28 K. Kt. toQ. Kt 3 28 P. to K. B. 4 |
|
|
8 Q. P. takes K. B. |
8 P.toQ. 4 |
29 K. Kt to Q. B. 6 |
29 K. R. to B. 3 |
|
9 B.P.tk.P.,mpM |
. 9 Q. takes P. |
80 K. Kt to Q. 7 |
30 K.R.tBkeaK.P. |
|
10 P.toK.6 |
10 Q. takes Q. |
81 K. Kt takes Q.R. 31 R P. takes K. Kt |
|
|
11 K.B. takes Q. |
11 K.Kt.toQ. 2 |
32 Kt to Kt 3 |
32 R.toK.4 |
|
12 P.toQ.Kt. 8 |
12 Q. KttoKt. 3 |
33 K.R.toK.6q. |
33 R.takeaK R..ch. |
|
13 B.toQ.B.S |
13 K.Kt.toK.B.Bq. |
84 R. takes R. |
34 K.toQ.3 |
|
14 B. takes K. Kt. |
14 K. R. takes B. |
86 KttoQ.4 |
36 P.toQ.B.4 |
|
16 Q. Kt.toB.8 |
16 P.toQ. B. 3 |
36 KttoQ.B.2 |
36 B.toK.B. 2 |
|
16 Q. Kt.toK. 4 |
16 Kt.toQ.4 |
87 R.toQ. sq.,ch. |
37 Kt to Q. 4 |
|
17 Q. Kt. to Q. 6, oh. 17 K.toK. 2 |
88 KttoK.3 |
38 P. toQ. B. 5 |
|
|
18 K.Kt.toQ. 4 |
18 P. toK. Kt.3 |
39 Kt takes Kt |
89 B. takes Kt. |
|
IB K. R. to K. sq. |
19 Q.B.toKt. sq. |
40 P. toK. B. 4 |
40 P. toQ. B. 6 |
|
20 Q.B.toKt.Bq. |
20 Q. B. to Q. 2 |
41 R. to Q. B. sq. |
41 B. toQ.B.6 |
|
81 P. to Q. Kt. 4. |
21 P.toK.B. 3 |
42 R. takes B. P. |
|
|
And white* wiUi a rook against a bishop, ai |
id an eqaal number of pawns, oaghtto win. |
||
|
OiMM Vli. — ^Thb Cbiitbb Gaxbit. |
|||
|
WHITB. |
BLACK. |
WHITB. |
BXJLCK. |
|
1 P.toK.4 |
1 P.toK.4 |
8 Q. B. to K. 3 |
8 K. Kt to B. S |
|
2 K.B.toQ.B.4 |
8 K.B.toQ.B.4 |
9 Q.P.takesP. |
9 Q.KttakeaP. |
|
8 P.toQ. B. 8 |
8 Q.toK. 2 |
10 K.Kt takes Kt |
10 P. takes Kt |
|
4 K.Kt.toB.8 |
4 Q.Kt.toB.3 |
11 B. takes B. |
11 P.takesB, |
|
6 P.toQ. 4 |
6 K. B. to Q. Kt. 8 |
12 Q. Kt to Q. 2 |
12 C^tftlea |
|
6 CaaUes |
6 P. to Q. 8 |
13 Q.toK. 2, |
|
|
7 P.toQ. B. 4 |
7 P.toQ.B.4 |
And onght to win. |
Gajcb ym. — Thb Muzio Gaxbit.
This is a variation of the King's Gambit in which the first player sacrifloes a kni^Ut. and unless it is well plajjred is a lost game for the first player.
WHITB.
1 P.toK.4 3 P. toK. B. 4
3 K. KttoB. 3
4 K.B.toQ.B.4 6 Castles
6 Q. takes P.
7 P.toK.6
8 P. toQ. 3
BLACK.
1 P.toK.4
2 P. takes P.
3 P. to K. Kt. 4
4 P. to K. Kt. 6 6 P.takesKt
6 Q. to K. B. 3
7 Q. takes K. P.
8 B. toK. R. 3
WHITB.
9 Q.KttoB. 8
10 Q.B.toQ. 2
11 Q. R.toQ.sq.
12 K.toR.sq.
13 B. takes Q. P.
14 Q. to B:. R. 6 16 Kt takesP. And white wins.
BLACK.
9 K. KttoK. 2
10 P.toQ. B. 3
11 Q.toQ.B.4, ch. 18 P.toQ. 4
13 P. takes B.
14 Q.toQ. 3
16 Q.KttoB. 3
Black's fifth move completes the gambit.
CHI88.
AQ3
xoTnrc TRS KirxGSff oru A.U. vem nqvLaxa ALasvATBiT.
The problem respecting the placing the knight on any giren square, and moving him from that sqnare to every other on the hoard, haa not been thought unworthy the attention of the first mathwnatinians. Let the knight be placed on any square, and move him fh>m square to square, on the principle of always pUiying him to that point, from which, in actual play, he would command the f^eet other squares ; observing, that in reckoning the squares commanded by him you must omit such as he has already covered. U, too, there are two squares, on both of which his powers would be equal, you may move him to either. Try this on the board, with some counters or wafers, placing one on every square ; and when yon clearly understand it, yon may astonish your friends by inviting them to station the knight on any square they like, and en- gaging to play him, from that square, over the remaining sixty -three in sixty-three moves. When the Automaton Chess- player was last exhibited in England, this was made part of the wonden he accomplished, though as the above plan was not tiaen known here, he could not adopt it, but used something like the method laid down by Enler, a diagram illustrative of which we subjoin.
Ab this is are-entering series of numbers, or interminable route, it does not matter on which square the knight is placed at starting; ut, hy nc- qniring the plan by heart, which is soon done, you can play him over an the squares from any gtvan point, his last square being at the distance of a Imight's move from his first. It is obvious that this route may be varied many ways.
Vn kVtOMA.tOB oxns-njLTBB.
Our sntq'ect would hardly be deemed complete without some notice of the celebrated Automaton Chess-player, which at two several periods was exhibited in this country. The machine in question waa constructed by M. de Kempelen, a gentleman of Presburg, in Hnngaiy, who came over to England in 1786, and exhibited it for upwards of a twelvemonth, without the mode of operation being discovered. On his death, it was purchased by M. Maelsel, who also came here in 1819, when the invention excited much wonder as ever. An eye-witness of its performance thua describes it : —
The room when it waa exhibited had an inner apartment, within which appeared
|
JK |
<v |
^ |
<^ |
A: |
T^ |
-f' |
|
|
V |
s? |
fe |
>> |
/ |
If |
||
|
f> |
\ |
\ |
A |
i-f |
|||
|
Of |
\ |
u. |
^ |
/ |
xy |
f |
|
|
f> |
K |
^'i |
X |
y |
y^J\ |
y |
|
|
h |
/ |
V |
\ |
V |
!^ |
||
|
w |
">> |
^ |
^ |
^ |
|||
|
^ |
<> |
-5 |
O |
L>r tha TniUih haMoo, glUliie beUnd k t intottdUi, amllirofflMMidkbairiB hoiffbtii to whjoh it w«a ■ItThtnl bj lbs iroodm H*I on whiah it Mt. Th« chast WBB plaoed npon four 0— toca, whiob, togalhar nilti (ha tLgiaa, mi^a b* Btovad to an; pan at th* romn.
On Iba plain taittue rormad b; tha tap of tha cheat, in tha omtr^ irMraiudau iDunovablaobiaa-baBTl, of haiidaomo dimttialaiia, Dpon which
raiwd, aa if in the aoitad* of hoM- u oii^nally placed in iu Tight hand.
wiiJiin -nhfoh it atood, in front of the ai
tHvBd in the cheat, tvo in the front and two in tha
long (hallow drawer made to oontain tha Bheai-m
lonatnpOB, KOdacnna ooanten; twaI«aaBrdrawi
in tha bod7 of the flgnra aod ita lower puta, were lUtewiesopeaM, and IbaTarkUiRiba
whioh ooTered Lhsm wu niaed i ao Uiat the cotutraottOD, both of Iha Sgnie and d»st,
inUntlotAllT """ dlipUyed, and the exhibitor Intcodncsd a lighted candle into the bodT
of the Dheet and Ognre. by which the interior of aaoh waa, in » gieat meaau*. raoiknd
tmnapanmt.
The cheat wu diviiied bj a partition Into two Bqnal ohambere i that to the riKht at Uie dgnre waa tha □uT^Irea^ and uoonpled soaroel; oa»-lhitil cl the 1»d.r of Uh eh«t ; it wai filled with little wbeela, leTer*, erlindera. and other maohinery naad iq doct* work ; that l» tha left osnlained two wheela, aome amall bairela with apiiDga, and tn qmutera of a aimls, placed horiaontallj. Tht body and lower parte of the Butre eoa- lained certain tsbaa, whlcb appeared to be eoadnctor* to the maohinerj. After a anlB- clsnCtime, during whioh each apeotatoraatiifiedhiaaenipleaandanrlaeitr, theeilubiior closed the doon, made aome arrangement in the body of the figure, wodbd op (he wivks with a key interted Into a amall opening in the body of the cheat, and ptaoad Iba eoahion nnder the left ann of the figure, which then rested npon tt.
In pl^ng a game, the antomaton nude choice of the white men ; it Ukawiei gan the flni more. It played irith the left band Initead of the right, Ifae right hand bajn; cotietantly fixed on the cheat. Thia alight inoongmi^ prooaeded from inadTstanee oT (he inventor, who did not diaooTer his m pletcd to T^ioedy the defter
motion of the hsad, as If taking a view of the board ; the same n close of tha gama. In maldng a more it alcwly nised ita left ai
CHBSa. 005
plaoed under it, and directed it toward the aqnaie of the pleoo to be moTed. The arm then retnmod to ite natural position on the ooahion. Its hand and ftngera opaned on touching the piece, which it took up and conveyed to any propoeed sqaare. The nwHAffnt were performed with perfect oorrectneaa, and the moxiety with which the arm acted, especially in the delicate operation of castling, seemed to be the resnU of spontaneous foaling ; bending at the shoulder, elbow, and knuckles^ and caotioaaly aroiding to touch any other pieoe than that which had been moved.
On giving check to the king, it moved its head aa a signaL When a fh^m move wss znade by its antagonist, which fiiequently oocuzred through curiosity to observe in what manner the automaton would act — as, for instance^ if a knight had been moved like a castle — the automaton smote impatiently on the chest with its right *>»«*<, replaced the knight in its former square, and would not permit its antagonist to recover his move, but proceeded immediately to move one of its own pieces, thua punishing h*m tag his inattention.
It was considered of importance that the person **«a^>n4 against the antaBoaton should be attentive in moving a piece ejcaotly in the centre of a square ; otherwise» the figure, in laying hold of the pieoe, might sustain some injury in the delicate mechanism of the ftugers. If its antagonist hesitated for a considerable time to play, it tapped smartly on the chest with its right hand, as if testifying impatience at the delay.
During the time the automaton was in motion, a low sound of olook-work was heard, as if runuiog down, which ceased soon after the arm waa reclined on the cushion. The works were wound up at intervals of ten or twelve moves by the exhibitor, who was usually employed pacing up and down the room s approaching the chest, however, from time to time, on its right side. It was understood that th» automaton oould not play unless M. Oe Kempefen, or his substitute, was near to direct its moves ; but it is very certain that the whole mystery lay in the chest, and that there oould be no coxmection with the floor, as the inventor advertised his wiUingness to exhibit at private houses.
And now for the secret of this wonderful deception. Although the automaton beat numerous skilful chess-players, in diflbrent countries, its moves were actually directed by a boy concealed within the machinery ; so that, in &ct, whoever the boy oould beat at the game was sure to be conquered by the automaton 1 This will show that it is in the power of youth to attain such a mastery over chess as to render them capable of competing with capital players of a mature age.
coircLirDiiro obsirvatiohb.
Thus have we dallied and toyed with this royal game, until it has reached a length which its importance alone could warrant. Our duty, rather than our inclination, now urges us to conclude. Fain would we have added a few rich and racy anecdotes of chosa-playing, before we closed, but our limits will not allow it Willingly would we have apoken of that famous king, who made his castle-oourt a ohess'fleld, on which the pieces played were living squires, some attired in cloth of gold, others in costly vests of ethereal blue, powdered with silver stars ; while knights, armed cap-^-pie, gorgeous SB tor a tournament, pranced over the chequers, at the bidding of the king and his
rinl In tiifl ffftms, who goTomsd t^a iuotm of Hut BplAkdM fl«ld Ttota m ouiople^ baleoD; iboTe. We ahiiald not hara largMUnt tbat iruoibla mniou ot tofBh^. io the eUan ttme, who, trlun baUen b^ hli brathsr, look ap the nvutiTt chaw-boaid. aai, moM OAf^AlAmAllj, bnjk« hifl tIouf'i bead; dot thai nun, who, by Dften pl^ro^ with a hot 4iid Uttj laoUer, knew bin uonparuasnt go wait, that Iha hutant he gara ehack- mata ha Bbw like aa arrow fhuD lbs room, to aava hia aoonn fnim k aimllar <Ua to that <if the rofal piMja to whom wg iit,rt jmt aUnded i nor that great hidiTidDal, who. being nndtr aentenBe of death, reoeiTBd a perempUnx aanunoiu to the Ikt*] bloA whcs playing a gvne of obeaa, aod begged that the offloer who came to iomA htm v> hia doom woDid bear witoeaa that he had tlie best of the game. Had we " ample acapB md verge enongh," ire would, with a Kirpasains pleaean — (0 oanelrea, at least, if not to our readen — relate the mode and manner of onr own aoqnlnmant of the gaaML It waa nnder the (all and atately ehaa of Oray'a Inn Oardena when we SrM iMnit to know what check and checkmate meant. Uany a night and oft have we, then jmt emrnrgii ig IKim oar boyhood, glided (brth throngh a private gateway into that qniit plaoo. and spreading onr board npon the graaa, played by the light of a ftill mmmer moon, until the world, and all that moved njion It, eieepc the kinga, the qneena, the knighta, and thoae ■' Mont mca-M-arma" on the pigmy field beneath ni, were fOrgoBan. Oar in- ■tmctor In the game wm a fftUaw-atndeDt of legal lore. A " world of waura " ta now hMwMn uB ; be became a roamer, and 1* now, perhapa, whUe we an '»"*-'"g of the night when flnt we beat him, dreamlbg of that pigmy board beneath the etnu of thoae cool and ahady gardana, though repoalng, it may be, on a sandy paiow is tha wiMi or AMo 1 or, oalcttlatlng moves on the anmmit of the Andee ; eheeVmaUng aa Abyasmmo chief i or having aaanmed Ihe turban of the Hoalemi, aqttsttliig in a bower, and play- ihg oheas, in ontwatil appeaianoe
^ Cnih, istt^ nt ^nb.
well
uiiug. AAmtiieaMMt olCiiPtt^ingm loot, therefon, bA demniKl, In uiy euncrtl^ ealnkt our joaas R*d<n,
The gitaa of DnaghU li andmiblcdl; ons of groat uitlqaitf i and from tha (kcl that it waa fband to ba fkinlUar to th* uatiTu oT N*ir Zokland and othar aaelvlllici) oonniTiaa, on thsirdlKovetybj'KaropaBiu, then •MCUlltUe dooUUiat la pofm of tm« It pRcadcd Cfaoa*. U i* a (kvoiinU gama In all drlliied conntrlti, in atanj if irbirb
608
DRAUGHTS.
BLXCX.
it is known as the ladiM* game. In FiaDOo it ia called '* Le Jeu des Dames,** and in 8ooUand the draoght-board is still popularly knovm as the ** Dam-brod *' (the Ladies' board). In 1668 a French mathematician named ICallet, published an elaborate treatise on the game. He was followed in this ooontiy by Mr. Payne : and a lata- writer, Mr. Stnrges, has improred upon both. But these books are all too elaborate for beginners, and assume an acquaintance with the main principles of the game which young players do not generally possess.
MXTHOO or YLATIVO THX GAVB.
Draughts is played by two players upon the ordinary chess>baard of aixtj-fbor squares, alternately black and white — thirty-two of each. The board is so placed that each player has the two white squares, tallied the " double oomer/* at the right- hand side of his own end. Each player has twelve men ; each set of twelve befaig of different colours, usually black and white ; the one playor taking the black and the other tiae white. These are placed on the board in the manner shown in the diagram. A fhll set of dranghtmen consists erf" fifteen of each colour, the extra men being pnDvided to crown those which become kings, and to make the set perfect for backgammon.
The board is placed between the players, and the pieces are moved diagonally on the white squares, one square at a time. The first player moves a man one square on his side, and then hia opponent movea a mnn in the same manner — always ia a diagonal or slanting direction, ao tha4 the black squares are never used. A man can only move one square at a time, except when an adverse man sUmds in the line of his march, with a vacant square beyond, wlMn be leaps over the adverse man to the vacant square ; the man so leapt over bein^ thns captured, and removed from the board. The men all "take" in the direotiaii of their moves, and no move can be made unless the square be emp^, or a man ean be captured by jumping over him to a vacant square. When two or more adwse men are so placed as to have each a vacant square in the diagonal beyond him, and all in the line of march of the man being moved, the player takes as many men as may be so situated, making a second, third, or even fourth leap, as the case may be, in the same move or rather series of moves.
Each pUyer moves alternately ; and the object of the game is to oaptare yoor opponent's men, or to pin them in their several squares so that they cannot move with- out being taken. He who first succeeds in clearing the board of hia adversary's or so pinning them, wins the game.
WHITS.
DRAUGHTS.
009
BIiACK.
The men move forwardit on the diagonala only, but when tiie player eaooeeds in morying a man to the laat xow of sqnaree on his opponent's aide, anch man beoomea a King, and ia crowned — bythesimpleprooeaaof placing another man of the same colour on the top of him. The kings haye the pxlTilege of moving either backwarda or for- wards on the diagonals. Sithfir player may make as many kings as he can.
HOTATXOir OV THX QXMM.
Below we give a diagram of the board nmnbered according to the vystem of
notation now nniveraally adopted. A little familiarity with this plan of notation will soon enable yon to play the game withoat aeeing the board. Notice that the first two lines of fignree downward, firom the left npper comer, are all odd — 6, IS, 21, 29 ; 1, 9, 17, 26 ; the next two Unea are all eoen — 6, 14, 22, 30 i 2, 10, 18, 26 ; the next two odd— 7, 16, 28, 31 ; 3, 11, 19, 27 ; and the last two evm^—9, 16, 24, 32 ; 4, 12, 20, 28. Therefore, the square iznmediately beneath ^^1 or above any other square is eight placea distant. Thus, below sqnaxe 11 you have sqoare 19, while above it you have square 3, and so on throughout. Observe that the aquarea firom right to left of the player at the upper end of the board, are alternately I, 8, 11, 16, 18, 22, 26, 29; while thoae from left to right are altemately five and four flgurea distant : — 1, 0, 10, 16, 19, 24, 28 ; the same rule holding good if you count from the lower line of figures, 29 to 32, diagonally to the right or left. By thiaeystem of notation the player can always bring before his mental ▼iaion any position of the men on the board.
WHixa. four and three figures distant t
wwAcaoAS, axAXpLia ov sh> modi ov vllyimq.
We wHI now snppoee that two lads sit down to play a game, and that the white men oecopy the lower half of the board and have the first move. As only the men on the traot rank can move aa yet, the player has the choice of moving a man into either of ftha aqoares 17, 18, 19, or 20. As the move from 22 to 18 Is generally considered a good one to begin with, we will suppoee that white makea ik It ia blaok'a torn to move a piece ; he, like hia adversary, can only advance one of his front rank now j he may move the man on 9 to 13 or 14, that on 10 to 14 or 16, that on 11 to 16 or 16, and tha* coi 12 to 16 only. The white having moved from 22 to 18, the black then may mar^, if he pleaae, from 11 to 16. In the next move, the white man on IB win take the macDt ao placed by black, on 16, by leaping over hia head into 11. It is now blaok'a torn to move, and he^ in letam, can take white's man which stands in II, by ttubm of
eiO DBAU6HT8.
the men standing on 7 or 8. In caae he makes the oaptore with 7, he jumps over Gub head of the man to be taken into 16 ; if he prefer taking him with 8, the moTS will be from 8 to 16. An opportonitj here oocmv of giving a practical ezplaxuUion ot the Jn^ff. Supposing, when black had moved from 1 1 to 16, white had omitted to take him in the matiTier explained, and made some other move, white would hare '* atood the huff;" that is, black might have remoyed from the board the whUe man Uiat atood on 18, or compelled white to have taken the black man on 16, whichever ho pleased. This is "standing the hnif;" and be it recollected, that so taking off the man from 18, is not to be considered a move, black having his move after having removed the man. before white can move again. " Hoff and move " is the rale. That is, when a plajrer neglects to take a man en prite, his opponent removes from the board the man bs should have moved, and then moves one of his own men.
The term «» prite is used to signify a man so placed, with regard to an advm man, that the latter can take it.
In case the game were in a more advanced state, and that the black man, whidi st the beginning stood on 4, had been removed, the white man on 18, instiflad of takxDg only the black man on 16, would have taken the black man on 8, in addition, I7 leaping over 16 into 11, and then over 8 into 4, which would be reckoned as cos move. In tills case, the man in 4, having reached one of the back squares of the enemy (1, 2, 3, and 4), becomes a king, and is crowned.
We will now give a practioal example or two of the king^ powers of these " crowned heads." Supposing a black king stood on 29, a white king on 26, a white man on 18, another white king on 19, and a third white king, or a white man, on 27. — if it were black's move, and the board was clear, except only of the pieoea that ate mentioned, he would take them all thus : ttoxa 29 to 22, taking 26 ; fro-m 22 to 1 5, taking 18 ; from 16 to 24, taking 19 ; and i^m 24 to 31, taking 27. If, however, the black king only take the first, second, or third of these pieces, he would stand the hnil^ t. 0., the adversazy may either remove the black king off the board, or compel him to take the piece or pieces thus placed in his i)ower, at his, the adversary's, pleaswe.
To show the difference between the moves of a man and a king more clearly, va^ pose, instead of a king, black had only a man on 29 ; in that case, the man might go to 22, taking 26, and from 22 to 16, taking 18 ; but here his exploits would end, aa he could not move backward from 16 to take 19, but, on the oontraiy, ha must reat on 16 ; and, at the next move, would himself be taken, by the white king, on 19, jumping over his head into 10.
When, aa we have abeady explained, all the men, on one side, are taken, or ao hemmed in by the opposite colour that thQy eannot move, the person who haa pfa^ed them is beaten. If, towards the end of the game, one, two, or three kings of each colour be left on the board, and neither player oan prevail on the otherto risk a move, or if one who is weaker tiian, or has not the move of the other, be detennined t& move to and fh> in safe squares, where he oan never be taken, the game is then dimwn. and given up, neither party winning. We shall presently see how two kings osay oon- quer one, or a player with the smaller numerical fbroe can beat hia opponent.
DRATTGHTS. eu
L The board most be bo placed that each player has a white double corner at hia Tight hand at his own end of the board.
n. The choice of colour and the first move of the game must be determined t^ lot, after which each player takes the moTe alternately.
m. Black moves firsti and the pUiyers change men with each game. lY. Pointing over the board, or any other action by which the player preventi his •dyemry i^m ftiUy seeing the men, is not allowed.
T. The player who touches a man, except for the purpose of adjusting it on its sqoare, must move it. A man moved over the angle qfa square, mMst be moved to thai tquare and no other.
VL Any piece enpriee must be taken ; and if it be not taken, the player's opponent may " huff *' him by removing from the board the man which should have made the oaptore, and then playing a man of his own. It is optional with a player either to insist on his opponent taking an ofibred man, or to allow him to " stand his huff."
Vn. Five mlnptai is the maximnm time allowed for a move ; any player exceeding that time before he movee, loees the game.
Vin. The player who quits the game, or leaves the room during its progress without the consent of his opponent, loses it.
DL When two kings on one side remain opposed to one on the other, the former player may be called upon by his opponent to win the game in twenty moves, or resign it as a draw, the moves to be counted, twenty on each side, from the time of notice.
iL When there remain three kings opposed to two, the player with the weaker force may call upon his opponent to win in forty moves. If he fUl, the game is drawn. XI. With two kings on each side the game is drawn if one or othOT player fidl to win in forty moves, after receiving notice that his moves will be counted.
XIL A player making afidse move must either replace the pieces and make a legal move, or resign the game, at the option of his opponent.
XTTT. When several pieces are taken at one move, they muat none of them be removed from the board till the taking piece has arrived at its final square ; and if the player fkil to take aU the men he can by the move, his opponent may huff him.
XSY. When a man wrrives at the last row of squares on his opponent's side he most be immediately crowned ; but he cannot move again till his opponent has moved. ZY. All disputes are to be decided by the minority of the company present.
SAXn VOB PBACnOS.
Bemembering the plan of notation shown on the numbered diagram* we may now p!Ay a few games in order to fiuniliarize the student with the principles of Draughts. Tbe men may occupy eit];ier end of the board ; but, for the sake of convenience, we znAke the black men move first in the following games. A star placed against the figure shows when a man has been taken, and a x where it is made a king. Of course many variations in the moves might be given, but they are not necessary to be shown, ■inoe our otigeot is merely to eet the student on the right road, leaving him then t» attain proficienfly by practice.
|
612 |
DRAUGHTS. |
|||
|
. GakbL- |
—Black so Plat avb Worn fo Wzv. |
|||
|
BLACK. |
WKRB. |
BIiAOK. |
wHin. |
BLACK. |
|
11 to 16 |
22 to 18 |
1 to 6 |
18 to 9* |
26 to 22 |
|
16 — 22* |
26 — 18* |
6—14* |
19 — 16 |
18 — 23 |
|
8—11 |
20 — 26 |
11 — 18* |
20 — 11» |
10 — 14 |
|
4— 8 |
26 — 22 |
18 — 22 |
26 — 17* |
22 — 18 |
|
12 — 16 |
24 — 20 |
13 — 22* |
11—8 |
18 — 22 |
|
10 — 14 |
27 — 24 |
22 — 26 |
8— 4k |
7 — 10 |
|
8 — 12 |
24—10 |
26 — 29 K |
4— 8 |
14—17 |
|
7 — 10 |
32 — 27 |
2— 7 |
23 — 19 |
10 — 14 |
|
0-13 |
18— 9* |
29—26 |
27—24 |
17—21 |
|
6 — 14» |
22—18 |
14—18 |
21—17 |
14—17 |
17 to IS
8— 4
24—20
4— 8
20—16
8—11
28 — 24
24—20
11—8
8—11
wixuB.
ir BlAok, at his Berenteentli moTe, had played from 12 to 16 instead of malriTig bis kingp he would have stood a better ohanoe ; and, instead of moving from 14 to 18^ at his twentieth moTe, he should haye played from 26 to 22 and pinned the Idbog.
Oaxb n. — ^Blaok fo Flat avb D&aw m Gaxb.
|
BLACK. |
WHITB. |
BLACK. |
WHITB. |
BLACK. |
WHITH. |
|
9 to 13 |
22 to 18 |
4 to 8 |
23 to 18 |
16 to 19 |
18 to 14 |
|
10—16 |
26 — 22 |
8 — 11 |
28 — 24 |
10 — 17* |
21 — 14* |
|
6—10 |
18 — 14 |
12 — 16 |
24 — 20 |
2— 7 |
22—18 |
|
10 — 17» |
21 — 14* |
16—19 |
27 — 23 |
7 — 10 |
14— 7» |
|
16 — 19 (A] |
1 24 — 16* |
19 — 24 |
14—9 |
3-10* |
18— IS |
|
11 — 26* |
30 — 21* |
6 — 14» |
18— 9» |
11 — 18* |
26 — 23 |
|
8 — 11 |
29 — 26 |
24—28 |
9— 5 |
18 — 27» |
31— 6* |
|
11 — 16 |
26 — 22 |
7 — 10 |
23—18 |
1 — 10* |
|
|
Ifthavanati |
Dn (A) be made at Black's flftl |
imore, he wins. |
|||
|
YABIAnOT A. |
|||||
|
U |
[oTSs 1 to 4 on |
both sides as b |
efore. |
||
|
BLACK. |
WKRI. |
BLACK. |
WHITB. |
BLACK. |
WRm. |
|
16 to 18 |
22 to 16* |
17 to 21 |
26 to 22 |
SO to 26 |
24 to 19 |
|
11 — 18* |
29 — 26 |
6 — 9 (B) 22 — 18 |
26 — 17» |
19— If* |
|
|
8—11 |
24—19 |
13 — 17 |
26—22 |
17 — 22 |
10— « |
|
4— 8 |
28 — 24 |
17 — 26* |
31 — 22» |
22 — 16* |
6— 2] |
|
1 — 6 |
24—20 |
9 — 13 |
19—16 |
16—10 |
20 — 1« |
|
6 — 10 |
32 — 28 |
12 — 16 |
30 — 26 |
11-20* |
2— 4* |
|
10 — 17* |
23 — 14* |
21 — 26 |
26 — 23 |
and Black wins. |
|
|
2— 6 |
27 — 24 |
26 — 30 K |
16 — 10 |
Bat if Black play ficom square 6 to sqoare 10 at his fbnzteenth xdotb (rariatKai B^ he will lose t^
VABIATIOir B.
ۥ
|
BLACK. |
WRm. |
BLACK. |
WHITB. |
|
6 to 10 |
22 to 17 |
8 toll |
26 to 22 |
|
13 — 22* |
26 — 17* |
3— 8 |
19 — 16 |
|
11 — 16 |
81 — 26 |
12 — 19* |
22 — 18 |
BLACK. 16 to 22* 24 to White
|
DKAUaBM. |
6 |
||||
|
Gaxi m.— ^Blaok to Mots axb Whrb to Wzv. |
|||||
|
sues. |
BI.A.OK. |
WHRB. |
BLACK. |
WHI9B. |
|
|
11 to 16 |
23 to 19 |
16 to 24* |
28 to 19* |
16 to 19 |
7 to 2k |
|
9 — 14 |
22 — 17 |
11 — 16 |
81-26 |
1— 6 |
2—9* |
|
6— 9 |
17 — 18 |
16 — 20 |
28 — 22 |
6 — 14* |
17 — 10* |
|
2— 6 |
26 — 22 |
20 — 24 |
22 — 17 |
16— 6* |
29 — 26 |
|
8 — 11 |
22 — 17 |
24 — 27 |
17 — 10* |
19 — 23 |
26 — 22 |
|
14—18 |
28-23 |
27 — 31 K |
30 — 26 |
23 — 26 |
82 — 18 |
|
4— 8 |
28-14* |
8 — 11 |
23 — 18 |
26 — 30 K |
18 — 16 |
|
9-18* |
37 — 83 |
81 — 27 |
10—7 |
80 — 26 |
16—11 |
|
18 — 27* |
32 — 28* |
8 — 10* |
21 — 17 |
26 — 82 |
11—7 |
|
10—14 |
17 — 10 |
27 — 24 |
18 — 14 |
6—10 |
7— 2k |
|
7-14* |
19 — 10* |
24 — 16* |
14— 7* |
10 — 14 |
2— 6 |
|
• — 16* |
24—19 |
11-18 |
26 — 21 |
14—9 |
6 — 10 wins. |
|
Oa] |
n IV.— ^BiJLCK |
TO MOTB ABB |
Dbaw. |
||
|
9L1.CK, |
WHin. |
BX.ACX. |
WEIVB. |
BLACK. |
WHm. |
|
11 to 16 |
22 to 17 |
12 to 19* |
83 to 7* |
17 to 22 |
23 to 19 |
|
8 — 11 |
23-19 |
2-11* |
26 — 23 |
22 — 26 |
21 — 17 |
|
9—13 |
26-22 |
4— 8 |
22 — 18 |
1— 6 |
18 — 14 |
|
«— 9 |
27 — 23 |
13 — 22* |
18— 9* |
6—10 |
14—9 |
|
9 — 14 |
24-20 |
6—14* |
80 — 26 |
8—12 |
9— 6 |
|
15 — 24* |
28 — 19* |
22-28 |
81 — 22* |
11 — 16 |
6— 2k |
|
11 — 16 |
82 — 28 |
8— 7 |
22 — 18 |
U_24* |
2 — 11 |
|
16 — 24* |
28 — 19* |
14 — 17 |
21 — 14* |
drawn. |
|
|
7 — 11 |
19 — 16 |
10 — 17* |
26 — 21 |
||
|
Oa: |
MB y. — ^Black |
TO MoTB ABB |
Wnr, |
||
|
BX.10K. |
WHjn, |
BLACK. |
WHUB. |
BLACK. |
|
|
32 to 18 |
11 to 16 |
28 to 19* |
14 to 17 |
19 to 16 |
12 to 19* |
|
18 — 11* |
8— 16* |
26 — 22 |
9 — 13 |
23 — 18* |
14—18 |
|
21 — 17 |
4— 8 |
29 — 26 |
6— 9 |
21 — 14* |
10 — 17* |
|
23 — 19 |
8 — 11 |
32 — 28 |
9 — 14 |
24—19 |
16 — 24* |
|
17 — 18 |
9—14 |
31 — 27 |
1— 6 |
22— 8* |
17 — 21 |
|
J7 — 23 |
6— 9 |
26 — 21 |
11 — 16 |
28 — 19* |
21 — 30*1 |
|
18— 6* |
2—9* |
87 — 24 |
7 — 11 |
16 — 12 |
30-16* |
|
24 — 20 |
16 — 24* |
30 — 26 |
3— 7 |
20— 2*x and Wins. |
|
|
Oai |
a VL- Black |
VO MoTB ABB |
Dbjlw. |
||
|
BI.1CK. |
warn. |
BLACK. |
wxxva. |
BLACK. |
wncB. |
|
22 to 18 |
9 to 13 |
26 to 23 |
6 to 9 |
32 to 28 |
4 to 8 |
|
26 — 22 |
6— 9 |
80 — 26 |
11-16 |
28 — 24 |
16—20 |
|
29 — 26 |
10 — 16 |
24 — 20 |
16 — 24* |
24 — 19 |
8 — 11 |
|
21 — 17 |
7 — 10 |
28 — 19* |
3— 7 |
19 — 16 |
20 — 24 |
|
26 — 21 |
1— 6 |
20 — 11* |
8 — 24* |
16— 7* |
2 — 11* |
|
23 — 19 |
9 — 14 |
27 — 20* |
12 — 16 |
22 — 18 |
13 — 22* |
|
18— 9* |
6—14* |
20 — 11* |
7 — 16* |
drawn. |
614 ' DSATTGHTS.
S4TXVe TEM XOTS.
We mnflt now dnw attention to the importance of Aaofrng ike move upon an ant^ gonist. The valoe of this will, no donbt» have fine£piently ocoorred to the plajer in the oonzee of the preceding games ; bat there are sitoationB when it is not onij n^ifuft^ bd detrimental. To have the move when your men are in a jxroper position, upon an opea board, wHl often, in a short time, give yon the i>ower of forcing your adveraazy into sneh a sitoafeion as will render his defeat certain ; but having the move when yoor men are huddled in confusion together, and you are nnprepared to attack fhnn asy quarter — that is to say, when you are strong in number, but powerless in poeataon— win, not unfrequently, cause you to lose the game.
In order to know whether any one of your men have ttie move over one of year adversazy's, you must careAilly notice their respective positions, and, if your oppcmea have a black square on your right sngle under his man, you have the move upon hiss. This is a general rule, and will apply to any number of pieces. To illustrate it with an instance : — ^If white have a man on 22, it being his tnm to play, and black's maa be on 11 , white has the move. There is, however, another and somewhat simpler method of ascertaining whether the player, whose turn it is to play, has the move ; namely, by counting the squares and the men ; and if the squares be odd, and the men enran, er the men odd, and the squares even, then the party whose tarn it is to play has ihe move: thus, if there be a black man on 19, on 26 a white king, on 28 ablaok king, and on 32 a white man, and white have to play, he has the move, and may certainly win Uie game; tiie opposite plsyer's men being even, and the white squarea between fhem and his own odd; thoe are three white squares from the bladk king on 28 to the white king on S6 (vis., 24, 27, and 31), and between the black man on 19 and the white man on S2 two white squares, 23 and 27, making together, five. White begins l^ moving hia man to 27, the black king goes to 32, the white man proceeds to 24, and is taken by the black man on 19 ; the white king now goes to 23 ; the black king must next steii to S7, having no other move (his man being on 28), and is taken by the white king* wlio thai gets into 32, and wins the game, as black cannot move his man.
BVDXVGS OV OAlOS.
Two Kiii0$ to OiM.^-The player who haa two kings to one, towards the end of the game, can tiways win in at most seventeen moves, by bringing up his men and forcing his opponent's king into the double comer. Suppose your adversary to have retaested. to square 32, and you to have brought up your men to squares 23 and 19. If it is his turn to move, he can only move to 28, when you move from 23 to 27 ; and when he moves back to 32, you from 19 to 23. You can then win in eight moves, at most : —
|
BLi.CK. |
|
|
23 to 27 |
28 to 32 |
|
19 — 23 |
32 — 28 |
|
27^32 |
28 — 24 |
|
82 — 28 |
24—20 |
BI.1CK.
23 to 18 80 to 16
18 — 15 16 — 12 (or 20)
16 •— 11 white must movesiMi black wins.
A. like aeilea of moves will accomplish the nme end in the opposite doubls
DRAUGHTS.
m
Three Kingi to Two, — ^Wilh time UngB to two you most give man for man ; when, haying two to one, yon proceed aa before. There are several ways of forcing the ex- change. Yon may either drive the weaker force into the side square or get all the men in a line on one of the long diagonala, and then give one for one.
Two Kinge to Two, — ^Two kings to two is a drawn game so long as the players keep the double comers ; but if yon can get yonr kings into this or a like position on either side of the board — Bladt, kings on squares 2 and 7 ; White, longs on squares 14 and 16— the kings on the side squarea must win. Suppose black has to play : he moves ftt>m 7 to 10, when white muat take s and whichever way he takes, he loses hie two kings.
▲svics TO Touira fla-tiis.
When yon ait down to plsy, make up your mind to win, and consider every move before xmiking it. Look well over the board, and see that none of your men are en prioe, not a trap artAilly laid for jrou to toll into. Study not only your own position, bnt that of yonr adversary. Never touch a man without moving it ; determine your move before you put down your hand, and then make it When you have the move,
pursue your game with judgment and care. Keep your men well towards the centn of the board in a pyramidal shape, taking care to back them up so as to leave no blank squares behind your advanced men. Many players consider that they do well to keep men on their last squarea as long as they can. This plan has its advantages, for it pre- vents jrour opponent firom making kings; but it is also apt to cramp your game. The beat plan in oommenoing the game is to make a flow judicious exchanges, so as to open the way for your back men. This yon should do by avoiding the side squares as much as possible, and pinniug your oppo- nent's men as they advance. Endeavour to march on for a king aa soon as you can.
BLA.OK.
¥'
aa.
■// '"v
I
lit:.J, i.. [
1
U Uo^l
WBITX. WBITB VO HOTI AIID WIIT.
aa the power possessed by his majesty of moving and taking either backwards or forwaids givee him an immense advantage. The above diagram, for instance, exhibita a position in which the king is very powerfhl. In this case white's initial move ia from 13 to 8, when black must take from 3 to 12, and then the game proceeds thus —
|
BL40K. |
|
|
6 to 2 |
23 to 16 |
|
10—6 |
1 — 10 |
|
7 — 14 |
16—7 |
|
S — 11 |
6— 9 |
|
14— S |
18 — 17 |
|
WHITB. |
BLACK. |
|
6 to 9 |
17 to 22 |
|
0 — 14 |
22 — 26 |
|
14—18 |
26 — 81 |
|
18 — 22 |
4— 8 |
|
11—4 |
12 — 10 |
|
waiYB. |
BI.ACX. |
|
4 to 8 |
16 to 10 |
|
8 — 11 |
10 — 23 |
|
22 — 26 |
31 — 26 |
|
26 — 30 |
A iBim move in this game would have proved fjatal to white ; therefore, great
•le DRAUGHTS.
vatchftilnMS is neoeswry to miooeia. Nmnerona lik» ezamplM migbi be given, tat thJB will bewifBnifmtto ahow what we mmau Play witli ooorte^y, and abOT« aU, keep your temper.
poamova voa pxicncs.
In the following poeitiooa it may aeem that the aferongeat Coroe ooght to win, hot this is not always the caae.
1. IHoelfc.— Men on aqoaiea S3, 81, 27, S6, 24, 32, 21, 19, 17, and 13. WkiU.^ Men on 18, 16, 16, 12, 10, 8, 7, 6, 3, 2, and 1.
Kow black moves and wina. He goes Ikom 24 to 20 and gains two for one, because white mnst take from 16 to 24. Black afterwarda wine one of the men m$ prise, and presently finishes the game.
2. Black. — ^Eing on 26 and king on 27. White. — ^King on 26, man on 21. In this position black wins, either with or without the move—
BLiLOK. WHXn.
27 to 23 26 to 29
23 — 18 29 — 26
MLkCK, wuica.
26 to 30 26 to 29
18 — 23
8. JBI^Mfc.'^King on 19, king on 18, man on 28. White. — ^King on 32 and king on 27.
WHm. BLi.OX.
27 to 24 18 to 16
24 — 20 16 — 11
WHITS. BUICX.
20 to 24 19 to 16
24 — 20
And white, with the move, draws the game though with the smaUerforoe, l^ keeping the command of square 20.
CHB Losnro aua.
This is exactly the reverse of the ordinary game, and he who flzst loaea an bia men wins. Itisbynomeanssoeaay aaitaeematoloseyour menadvantageonaly. Inthii game the best squares aare the side onea, and it is by no means an unusual thing to compel a stogie man or king to take a large number of men. The ponnrasion of the move is of great importanoe in the Loeing Game, aa by a judicious series of saerifieas you may get your opponent into such a position as obliges him to take. The ponwonirinii of two men (or kings) to one is advantageous towards the end of the game, aa with one move you may then fbroe your opponent to take. A litUe practioe will aoon maho you ^H""^"' with thia interesting variety of Draughts.
POLISH saiveHts.
Polish Draughts is sometimes played on a board of 100 squares, 60 of eadi eolonr ; but in England it ia generally played on the ordinaiy dranght-boaid. With the enlarged board of 100 squares the gune becomes much more intricate. The peca* lisrities of Polish Draughts are— that the men take both backwards and fhrwardiw a square being pasaed and repassed aa often and aa long aa there is a man e» fri$f ; and that the kings travel over any number of diagonals, taking auii^ men aa wmj lie in their way, either in their forward or backward march. lake the bishop in Oheaa, the king goes to and tro so long as the way is dear, without xeflsrenoe to dietaTioe or to the fact of there being more than one aquare vacant between him and the maa as
ujunple of Pollib Snofkii >^
|
■uct. wnn. |
■UCT |
|
|
IS tola 1 |
tola |
IS Ml |
|
»*-» |
— ■ |
18 — 1. |
|
IS — 1 |
||
|
It— IS |
— la |
19 — 1. |
|
IS — M |
— a |
M — * » — 1 11— I |
|
W — » |
— I |
fT M — 3lE
M* wfaa know Ultl* of Dima^Ua arai^to oanildar It a poor uid Ufilng gtmai UKIcboCh Uunghtbj^ the fiiUawliiK eitnctbnm Dr. Jobnuoa't Dadjea- 'Tiij iiii'iTiiMllin" nilBDiaiUf proTM 1 — "Trlfln maythlnkorDuJiisuifUiliig I boc duca tt la Ilia greU ohanoMrinia of > viae nun to ho arauu tn Uialr n obrtUe ooueqasnoei, KOd Mcartalu oontinKanolea, joor lordahip will think a triBa bxirUch ths mind ii innmi to caatton, foreaifhtt and oircQinapflotlon-'* 3tiGhuloi], WB bag to aaenra our raadan, that aimplo aa ii m^ ^paar, tiia7 a bs kbit to acnin anr profldsnor Id Diaoghta without aoma itoily. aad mneb ; lor althoogh it doaa not reqnira on*-tetith of tlia attantloD aanHmTj to llie It of Gheaa, 7«t it ia tolallf Impoaaible fbr DDr rDoag frlenda to darlrg nuuh a, it they more tha pieota aa narelaailr aa a ooapla of
B PUJW
^ AGKOAUUON is the modsn nuu Rf ths uu A; word i> mud to !« dorlved from the WeWi, ai Jp liat Strqll uys. iiilh ic
/ tha Buou iac uid gamen, ■ tuck game: » CBllcd b men from hii antagoaWl tablfls ii
iieilm« takea up and obligod los<> <>*ck. Hi** >^ " ««■' at the table (Tom irhlc)) Uie; came, Wliaunr b« the e^mology (tf ia name, the gune hai been long and diauiiedlj a Ikvourfce ainni«mimt.
ii a game of chance, in which ekill and memorj ue z^qnlmL It larhed board with dmaghUaeD, dioe and dioe-box. ^le xuoTee ot wi of the dice, and. a* wUl be pnwmtlr Been, th» goal la won by the player who encoeeda in briDginK all hie meo Into bia own aide of tte tabk and then igoriap them off the table (aa eiptained henaller).
^iB Baokganimon-board conaiata of two paitfl or tablea, genarallj imited by a hiafa Id tlw middle, ao that the; oan be ahat np like a box. Each table poaaeaBs twtfn polnu, aix at each end. Thaae polnU are colonred black and whlla (or asj otbv oontraaied oolonra) alternately ; but the ooloura have no rBferaaee Go the gamdw and aie only naed to randflr the counting of tha gams more eaay. Tha Wt-hftDd divWiv on the one alda, and tha right-hand on tha other, ia tha ">ionH,"or toner (able, of aaek ■a two or man polnta appear od tha dioa tbnwn tttsa tha bat.
uoEGAKHom ns
to the imh tia mored onirard ttom iwlnt to poliic, Idll bII the mea of oiw eolomr antva la Uieir upanle hjnoss. The ioilda of foldiiis draogiit-boBnlB an ganenllf umigsd
Ths game !■ plKfad b; t*o plsTsn, who havt eaoh tUtocm men (nnull; dnn^V Bian), ona ut being blank and the olbsr white. Id beglDaiag the game Uia man are plaoed on tlie boaid in the masnar aliown In the thllowlng diagnm, two mea on the US-point on each ude, flie on tha lii-point, Uine on the eight, and Sva on ih* EwelTO. The two dioe are oomnion to both pla;ara, but each one haa hia own dloe-boi, and the thnwa are taken allemalet;. The dice an perfect cubea, markad wiUi dota (Mm one to alx. rrenoh lamiB am oammonl7 Deed ; that, one is called OM ,- two, dmor ; thne, M (at trail) i tonr, quatn i Bte, cingiie ; and ali, n». At anrj throw the two dioe are empli^ed i oouaoqoentl^, the plB^er may throw from two (dooble-aoe) to twolve (donble^ii). If the pla; ar throw daMtU, or two dlea rf one DOiubcr, be oennta doable the number of dole on each dice ; tbns, b; a throw o( double-two, be doea not ootint tOnr, tnit eight.
Sappoea the table *■ amuged lo Ilia diagram to be plaoed between the p^aj-en, whom we will call black and white. The men moTa towarda their soe-polnla, and are gOTBmed in their moTee by the throwi of (he dice. Thu. white coonta ronnd trrtra the aee-polnt of blaofc, and black ooonta round from the ace-polnt of white. Theee pdma aie aeen to hare aerarally two men on Uwm, on oppoaite oomer* of the table.
Tba gtanil otgeot oT the game ia fbr each
' npon each die collectlTelj with Thm, if quaira
point ag'iaeably to the throwi Sualtr htariitff Mnt, or sun board. The plvar who Biit I ■he board whii tha game.
In throwing, the nnmbei 'may be reckoned bj Iteelf, oi tha nombs on tha olher dia. ta thrown by one die. and «
■Dothar ail poiuta i or a aingle man can be ■dfanoed ten poiate alwaya proriding a point *■"■'■ i»w«» Ttita, «viTa'i osrik lAtia. la oponto allow tUa mortanent to iL If donbleta are thrown, fOormenmi^ be moved ■a many places as there are dota on the dice. Instead of one or two, a* may be dona In tba oaaa at ordinary throws. Thm. mppoaa yon throw two danoaa, yon may move one man tight plaoaa, two man (bar places, or fbnr man two places, always preannilng lha4 tha nad be olear. Ho man can be moved to a potut oovarad by two of yonr on. If Btuh point be oorared by only ona mui— which is called a frw n saa ba hit sad be ismovad (Mm tba polnli and placed on tba bar
an BAOKOAIOCOK.
Iwiwemi the tables, and his place taken by the man who has won It The nmovil of a man to the bar throws the player to whom it belongs considerably bdbdnd in the game, beoauae the man most remain oat of the play till he is entered by a throw of the dice taming ap the number corresponding to one open point on the adversary's table ; after ^idiioh he is broaght round in the ssme way as are the others in the set to which he belongs. The freqaent oocarrenoe of this tatrng fif a bfoi gives an advensiy a great advantage, and allows him to win his ffammim. If, at any time during the game, every point to which yoa might move is covered by the adverssxy's men, your men mast remain m tiatu quo, and the adversary takes his tarn } or if aoij one men can be played you most play ik
We most ezplam that there are three kinds of victory — one the winning^ the Ai<,the second the winning the ffommon, and the third winning a ftadgammoa. The pls^v who has played all the men round into his own table, and by fortonate throws of tibe dice has borne or played the men olF all the points, wins the Atf. The gatmmum may he thus explained : — ^When you have got all yonr men round to your own tsble^ eovering every point, and your adversary has a man out, then yoa are enabled to bear at lift yonr men away. This yon do by throwing the dice and removing men ftom the points corresponding to the spots on the dice. If you can bear all yoor man swsy before your adversary has borne off one man, yoa win the pasMnoii, which ia ei]ai« valent to two games or hits. But if yonr adversary is able to bear one of bJa before you have borne all yours, then your victory is reduced to a kU. If the has borne all his men olF before the loser hsa carried all his men to his own table^ it is a baekffomnum, and held equal to three hits or games. To win two games ool at three is called winning "the rub," ss at whisL
XXPLUTATZOV OV nOKVXCAL hbks.
Backward Oame, one in which the plsyer has not succeeded in moving his mflB so fhr onward as his opponent has.
Bar, the division between the inner and outer tables.
BeaHug ytmr men is the removing them from your inner table^ when yon have brought them all round.
Blot, a single man left on any point.
Carrfing ycur men, is the removing them from point to point by throws of the diosL
CoveriMo your man is a move by which you are enabled to place another man m ftatkX. of a single man, and so prevent yonr adversary lh)m " hitting a bloi."
DouJblets, two dice of equal value, as two aces^ two thiees» etc IXmble fives or sizes are called high doubl^.
Entering your wtan, is the replacing of your man after he has been hit. . No aaaa can be carried forward while another remains to be enteredi bat meanwhile^ the other plsyer goes on with his game.
Forward Oame, one in which the player's men are advantageoiuly moved onwaid by means of high throws, doublets, eto.
Sitting a blot, throwing any number on either of the dice OQrreqxMiding to $ha
JCiMv poimti, IM k term lued •h«o a pl«;ar i* npU^ numins mwtj from, of
gviiiiii^ cm, hl< adrenuy.
PoaU, the MTsnl diTisloiK ottbetabJtm, u aoo-pcAit, Iha Ontlatlia huurUiblei fix, or bai'poluC. Uia one noil IhB bar, etc
Tlis tarmi. Km, J^Mt, Oammim, Mo., an Rifflcl«ntly explalnsd to the tab
pirfnt and quitted It.
TTT If jon plif irith tbnrtacn men onlr, then Is no pnialt; *"*"■""[[ it, bscaaoa, wltb a iMa Uian the fotl lumibs, jon plaj to a disadraataga.
IT. If one of two anmben thnm onabla a man to ester, the Bnt man rnnit be enterad and the aaeoDa played np to a Taoant point ; bnt If more than one num tuts to enter, and odI; one nnmbar glTiug the privOeffs appear on tlie dloe, the latter man most remain on the bar till he can enter.
T. If yon bear aoj onmber of men before yon have entered a man ^^en up, and which, oonaeqnentJy, joa wore obliged to enter, anoh men, so borne, mast be entaied ■gain In jodi adnnaiT'i tablet, as well as the man tahea up.
TL [f jon hare mistaken yoor throw, ajid plajed It, and yonr adverM^ bare thzowiii ll is *Dt in simi power or hia choice to alter it, nnlev both pailte apes.
deUghtfol pastime when IndnlKed in fbr amojement ontyi lament is allowed to enter, the board ahooM t>a pot othe Bre; (Or, eren tbooKh the stakes may tnTarramall inotesn them grows ImperoepUbl;, tlD at last a Tonng boy does of [4vi>8 ■*
MONO uinl-sdeiitUla gBiuca DominoM ilii i mMj
^ holds a blgh ptua ; (Or, Ihongti b; mui7 hwkad
upon u rUhor IrtTU, 11 Bfltink npital «untaa
powan, uid oetuinl^ ■■ much amiuanmt ■■
Abonle gwoea.
red on an ordiimij table, wjti) oVlinis jieem at the bulk, the fikoe* bediis nhite. ud diTidsd lata portion eitber blank or marked with black qiok, e niBQlar set of dominoaa ootuiMa of Onai^-ti^a k to double-ux. SeU that ^ up to doubto-nizt^ lacfli, an occaBlcmallj uwd, azid grutl^ liiiiiiaaa Than an Tarioiu gamea '
Ths domlnoH (■omeUmn called " card! " and KmKitiiDea " atonM ") an ihnfllcd fluw downwuila on the ttibla. and the plaTera each draw one to datenniiui which ahaU first play. Tha dominoes an then i«4haffled, and each plATsr taks* • eertain nambv, tha aet being diiided eqnall; amongit the pUysn, from the Uoek on the table, a^ plaG«* (hem edganf on the labia, or take* Ihos in hji baud, ao that their pipe an
mm
ot eeen b7 tlM other plarers. Bairhahaidrawntliehlsheet domino attheBntdn* ai the pOM, or priTilese oT pIsTing lint, and then the game proceeda aa fbUowi ; —
The flrei plftyer, after (uxaoffing hia cards, laya ooe, ftce npwaidi, on tha taMe. M next pl^er tlten pli^ a dcodno whieb hu at ana ma a ooiT*QioDdlns nambv
DOMIKOE0.
of pips to that at ono end of the domino first played, placing it ao tlikt the oonespond- ing numbers flill in a line, and then the next, and so on, each domino played corres- ponding at one of its ends with the nmnber at one end of the line of dominoes ahready played. In oaee of a <* donble," the domino is placed across the line, so that when serend pieces hare been played, they present some each a figure as thatishown in the diagram on the preceding page.
For instance, suppose the first pl^y a donble-siz, the next may play six-three, and the third double-three, and the fourth a three-one ; then, when it comes round to the first player's torn he nuty put down, say, a double-one, the second a one-four, and the third, who has no corresponding domino, cries " Qo 1" when the next perhaps plays a double-four, and so on till one of two things occur — either one of the players gets rid of all his dominoes, and so wins the game, or the game becomes blocked; that is, neither player has a domino to match or pair with the number of spots at either end of the row of played pieces. In this latter case, he who has the smallest number of pips left on the dominoes in his hand wins the game. But when a block or *< go" occurs with one player, the next goes on if he has a domino that will pair ; and if he has noth then the next plays, and if he flul the next, and so on till the game is over.
• • ^ • • •
-^— ^-— • — — — • I ■ • ■
— • «HM • • ■■■- a : -I—*
• • • a •
Two or more players take each a certain number of dominoes, and the ol^eet of the game is to make the end pieces count five or multiples of fire. Thus, with a donble-six at one end and a double-four at the other, the player with the last would count twenty. Say the dominoee are played thus : — ^The first player plays a double-one, the next a one-three double-one and three count five, so the second player scores one point; the third a double-three, the fourth a three-six; then the first player [• » puts down a double-six, and the second a one-four at the other end. and the third a donble-fbnr: double-four equals eight; double-six, twelve, being together twenty, or four times five, for which the Uist player scores four points.
This is a variation of All Fives, and is usually plsyed with a set of dominoes up to double-nine, each player taking five or seven dominoes. The ot^ect is to get seven or multiples of seven at the ends when added together, one point being counted for each seven. Thus, the player who starts with seven-seven (a 14) takes two points, and if you succeed in getting a double-nine at one end, and a double-five at the other, you score four points for the twenty-eight. Thoee dominoes which make seven in themi* selves, vis.\ four-three, six-one, five-two, are termed ** matadores," and can be played at any stage of the hand, turning either end outwards at your pleasure for your opponent to play at. The double-blank is also a matadore, and can be played at any time. Each player takes the poge in turn, and he who first gets the allotted number of points — s^y, fifteex}, twenty, or thirty — ^wins.
AM DOMINOES.
In this gama each plajer takes three dominoee, and the one with the pom poti down a domino. The other playa a oorrespondlng card if he can ; bnt if he hai not •aoh a one in hie hand, he diawi fh>m the elook on the table tin he obtain one that inU ^ go " at either end of the line. Both jriayera draw ttom the stock as they reqaiyB a card, but three dominoes most always remain nndrawn. He who lint sBceeedi in getting rid of all his dominoes, or has the ft west pips in his '< hand " when the plsj u stopped, wins. The great secret of this game—and indeed all the domino games iita dose the game to joor opponents and keep it open for yourself.
SOKtVO POOL
ICaj be played hy two, three, or four players, either sicgly or ■■ paitnsrs. A daseiip-
tion of the winffU game will snffldently serre to 'acquaint the reader with tha method inTsriably adopted in this, the great domino game of French players. Fint tfaq^ determine as to the order in which they shall ait lonnd the table, by drawing eadi s domino as the cards lie Ihoe downwards. He who gets the highest has Umpom, sad the rest follow according to the valne of the cards they draw, than right to left. Tha dominoes are then shuffled, and each player takes five or seren, as may be agreed on at starting ; the pom passing in torn to the left till the game is orer, when the plsyen again draw fc^ position and start. Fifty or a hnndred points are played finr, and one of the players keeps the score. The game then proceeds in the nsnal way till oot either plays out or stops the run of the dominoes. Then the scorer martsa to the osaiB of each pilfer the nnmber of dots left on his nnplayed dominoes, and be who fint makes the nnmber agreed on — 60 or 100, as may be — ^Is oot of the game. Bnt he en re-enter by ** starring '* — that is, patting into the pool a som eqnal to bis crigjoal stake — ^when he is placed on the same fooling as the player with the higbeat nnabfr. All the players are allowed to star while three remain, bat whan only two an ]eft» tks priTilege of starring ceases ; and those two either play oat or diTide the pool. IVhs fimr persons play, thqy need not change places, as partners sit opposite each otiisr.
ABIOT78 amnsing gamea played with boards and men have been ^ftriistiiM^^ firom time to time, apon the prinefplo of Chess and Dranghts. Some of tht most simple of them need no description in these pages, beoanae the raki by which th^ are governed always accompany the apparatas necessaqr ^ playing at them. Others, howerer, are of a somewhat hij^ier olaa, sod reqoire the exercise of patience and ingenoity for their proper develupmwt These we proceed brieQy to elnoidate, oommenoing with tha fkToarile or rather ttudp, of " Solitaire.*
»i
UNOB GAMES WITH BOARDS AM) PIECXa.
(hat nnlm yoa priDoipHToii will uDt be «l prfncipls (a ba otMsmd ii ud work op
hols b«yond, dc K hols b«rand 11, u in Draiighu.
pniceed opon «
tn accompliEh il. Tb* gcneisl Elear imj ths aids mublw, from whicb joa ttarXed, uid
lONOB GAMES WITH BOABDS AKD PIECES.
the fignres mark the order of march — 1 to 1, 2 to 2, etc. In the first Diagram the martile
IB to he removed from the also, the black spot indicates In Diagram 2 the marble hand upper comer; and, by moves, the game may be seven comers of the board, again, we find ^
/
7^
2/
.o
k^
o-
elght plaoea
by taking the
corresponding
the seven other
board. There
other plans
adopted; bat
reader is ac-
the principle on which the
to his own devices. He
careAil to move the marbles
them neither too crowded nor
wonld defeat his intention,
that at least two marbles
9—^
'Jt2^S^^
A6
^
2l
/S
23
^
2 0
/tf
20
A-^<i>--V-T-#-^
^
,p D
^
centre, and, as in the oChos the place of removal, is to be removed fh>m the left* a corresponding series of played from either of the ath» Referring to Diagram 3, ^_ we have also
-Q Q of xemovsl
marble fhan positions ia sidee of tibs are numema thai may bs now that tht quainted with game is played, we leave him should, however, always b« in such a way as to leave too much alone, as either pJaa and he would probably find
would be left on the board in such positions as would not allow of the removal of either of them. Auc^ar wa^ dt
playing, ia to remove a marble game by leaving a marble in opposite side of the board, than the ordinary one ; but it general principle of clearing distant squares, ^
or three, with Q q —
ing, to lead up Solitaire may
^
£g-
%
1
23
'<>.
;9.
by two persons, Jy 0"
ners or oppo- their moves al- with the view of thwarting each simple as the game at first almost as interesting and in- ferring to the diagrams, it will times repeated. Where this is move is continuous, as in
/.s
7P
-6-
e.
u
5
//
2S
-O
-W
«
o
k — ^y—^"^?^-^^^
mis
2S
fS.
^f
/V
/J.
5V«
from any hole, and end tha a oorresponding hole on the This plan is rather more ea^ is governed by the away the men from
and leaving two holes isfeenrefe- to thft final movB. also be played either aa part> nenta. They lake temately, edsher assisting or of other ; whea, sight appears, it m^y be made tricate as draughts. [^Oxi re- be seen that figures are several the case, it shows that the draughts; and thatona marble
is moved into several holes, taking a man aft each step of its progreaa. J
MINOB GAMES WITH BOARDS AND PIECES.
C27
vox AVO 61X81.
This Mientifio but amnnlng game may be played either uxxm a Draaght-boaid or m Solitaire-board, or even upon a sheet of paper marked as in the diagram below, in which the Fox and the Geeee are placed in poaitioQ for beginning the game.
To play Fox and Geese you
metal, which yon call the Geese,
the Fox, which is placed in the
object of the game is to confine
cannot more out, The Geese
lines, not on the diagonals ; and
next the Fox,
take him, as in
leaping over
there be a vap
hind. The Fox
ward, forward,
the straight
Geese are not
back. In order to pin the Fox
fbrward one after another in soch
behind, so as to leave the Fox no
When the number of Geese is
them to confine the Fox; bat» pro- There are other ways of play- Fox on another spot and altering the arrangement of the Geese. The game may be
played so as to make the Fox take all the Geese without being himself taken or confined
to any particalar square. In the latter case, the Fox chooses his own square at starting.
If played on a draught-board, the best position for the Geese— which may be repre-
oented by eight white draught-men — is on the two upper rows of squares, I to 8 ; and
for the Fox — ^which may be represented by a king — square 11. If properly moved os
the diagonal lines, the Fox must be driven towards the left-hand comer, and pinned
in square 39.
AOOV, OB Vnx QUXXV'S aVASDS.
This ingenious and accusing game is, in many respects, akin to Dranghts ; but the giving piece for piece has no place in Agon, which is won by the attainment of position, and not by the removal of the pieces. Hence, every piece is of equal im- portance, and the playing at the game begets a habit of regarding the situation of all the men rather than one ; showing the advantage of concentrated action. Unless all tba pieces are so played as to act simultaneously at the decisive moment for winning Iha game, all the previous labour is lost ; and one piece forgotten, or left too fkr oiT, lenders it impossible to act eilbctively.
Dxxscnon vox Pi^Turo. — The game is played on a board divided into hexagonal oompartmentB, and each player has seven pieces, via., one Queen and six Guards.
have seventeen discs of paper or and one of a diflSMmit colour for middle, as in the diagram. The the Fox in a corner, so that he y march forward on the straight whenever a Goose is on a spot the latter can Draughts, by him, provided cant spot be* can move back- er sideways on lines, but the allowed tomove in a comer, the Geese must go a way as to fill up all the spots spot into which he can jump, reduced to six it is impossible for perly played, the Geese must win. ing this game, as by placing the
E2e IQKOB GAUEB WITH BOAKDS AND PIECGH.
To conunence tha guns che pStaem u« to be unogad oi Ibllowi -—Put Uie t* qneeni on two oppoaiie oorncn, uid Oie gnai^ od g«ch >id« of tha qosnii. neb eolm ktlonute, wiUi one hexagon left Tuaikt bfltwoan Hch piBoe (two hexagom viU I vusot on aach lids luttaew from ttw qoMoi). Sm Pic. 1.
HIKOB GAMES WITH B0ABD8 AKD PIECES. t»
If the plAjen so agree, the game may he oommenoed l^ each alternately placing « piece anywhere on the board, and then, when all the pieoea are laid down, each aUemately moYing forward to obtain the middle.
Having decided which ahall move tint, the players alternately move a piece to- wards the centre, one hexagon at a time, or to the next hexagon of the same colour, 8>] that the piece shall remain at the same diatanoe fh>m the centre, it not being allowed to move a piece backward.
Any piece, except the queen, being in a position between two of the adversary's, so that the three pieces form a straight line, most be talcen off the board for the next move, and put down anywhere in the outer row. See Fig. 2.
If the queen should be placed in the position between the adversary's, so that the three pieces form a straight line, the queen must be removed for the next move, but may be pat in any place, being vacant, the player pleases. Bee Fig. S.
That player who can first put all the pieces in the middle, that is, the queen in the centre and Uie six guards around her, wins the game. See Fig. 4.
Two experienced players may put the pieces in a particular position ^mmetricaUy, cr otherwise, and, each taking the colours alternately, endeavour to win the game.
Laws or tbm Qajtb. — ^L None but the queens are to occupy the centre, n. No piece must be moved backwards. HI. Of two or more pieces liable to be put back at one time, the queen must be first moved off; any others at the player's option. lY. Anj piece touched must be moved, or the move lost. V. Should a player put the six guards in the middle, leaving out the queen, such player loses the game.
Hnrrs so Platibs. — ^No advantage will accrue, but, on the contrary, flrequently a
loss, by throwing back one only of the adversary's pieces, as the piece thrown back
may be placed so as to obtain a much better position. As no piece is allowed to move
backward, the queens must not be moved into the centre too hastily, as when there
(having no move unless thrown out) their nseftilness is imiwJred. The player should
endeavour to obtain such a position as to be able to throw back several pieces by
following moves, and then move on to the middle before the adversary can overtake or
^et between the pieces. The surest mode in which to win the game, is to crowd the
adversary's pieces as quickly as possible towards the middle, at the same time taking
up a position to be able to throw back all his pieces in succession, as soon as an opporw
tnnily offlBrs. When a player has the queen in the middle, if not able to win the game,
he may often re-open it by bringing a piece against the adversary's, so that if his queen
ahonid be thrown back, he may throw back another piece in return ; hence, in throwing
back the queens, the greatest caution is always necessary. The player will generally
find it advantageous to have one piece at a greater distance firom the centre than any
of the adversary's ; it must, however, be in a position to get to the middle when ths
game is drawing to a conclusion. The position shown in Fig. 2 is certain loss of the
game to the dark pieces ; the light pieces having fovoed the dark queen to move into
the centre, will be able to throw back a dark piece eveiy move, and thus win the game ;
tmt should the light pieces be moved too early into the middle, it will be impossible to
tbxQtw back the dark queen without hsaanling the reopening of the game.
UINOB GAKCB WTTS BOASDB ASS FOCES.
Thii (mtisnt Suglisb gtrae 1* pl>7ed irith dnngbtmeo, coin*, or paper duo, oa ■ tab1« dittim in Una, u in UiB dingrara. Two playera luive eacb nine men of difltmil culoon. The olject of Uia gams is to form rava of
three pieoa oTUieu
The Dial plaTer placet flea, when his mnta^ankt
a pleee on an; one oi
Uomedialel; pota anolber piece oa ai
mi^ appear llkel}' Co prerent the row I
Aa aoon aA a roir be fbrmed, the playo- who mcceedi
be who flret aacoeeda in taking all the oppoaite niea Imt two wine tie game. The men may be pUeed oa anr ot the angtaa of the Unea and be mored back- wards, forwarde, or diagonallr ; but aa «»n ai a no pieoe mar belong to two or three rowa ; any ot the
n pieoes of the •qoares being oapable of Ibrming pane of three row*.
boje- The InflU^uoenta dj quanlit; or wooden dieoe.
s For a raimd part^, or it may be played bj two in the game are a lat of twen^-fonr numbend eardi. a b of which bean a nomber cotteapODdiog to the flgme*
set of tweoty-ronr oarda. Theea nnmben are ranged in oolnmna, Uib unitt fa ibt lirelcalamn. tbe (one in theeeoond, Ihatwsntieain the Ihinl, the tbinie* in tha fbcrtli, the tbrdei in the filtli, (be fllUea in the sixth, and u on op to nine^. the highest nnm- to throe rows, and oi
Hash oaid is divided ii
re ot (ham munbcred and fOor blank, a
Q ^ Q EUg
id) E5 E w.
e diagram. The game t
to each pl^er. If 4H1I7 two cr three play, Ihcj nay hara two tr three earda eacb. Hartng dealt (he oarda, the laadertakea the bac eontaining the nambcnd dieca. which be diawa out rapidlj ona hj ana, calUng ont the noKOien as he deea eo. The plv«r wbo
lis card to the one called, immediately coTera tt with one of the glaia ooDnlsra, and le who first laooeeds In coTsrlngall the nninben on his card winslbe gune. In otdrr o make Lota interesting. It is usually played tor a smsU pool, made np by as sqaal
JCDfOB. GAMES WITH BOABBS AND FIEOES.
631
oontribntion trom each plAjer, of nnta or other small stake. When so played, he who first gaooeeds in ooyering all the nnmbers in one row takes a fourth of the pool ; the player who first covers a second row takes another fourth, and the remainder is given to him who first succeeds in filling all the numbers on his card. The winner of the pool then gathers up the cards, and the game recommences, the players taking it in turns to deal and draw the marked discs from the bag.
TheLoto SpeUtng Qaime is a diilteent arrangement of the caids, with letters instead of figures ; and the object of the play is to spell some word as the discs are drawn out of the bag. It is a vezy interesting amusement, and provides ample scope for the exerdae of memory and dexterity. Loto boxes, with cards, discs, and ooimters complete, cost from Is. to 168. each.
SQUAXLS.
This is a new name for the old game of shovel-board, or i>uah*penny. A party of players sit roimd a table, in the centre of which is a circle marked in divisions. Each player is provided with a coin, or metal or ivory disc, which he pushes with the palm of his hand from the side of the table towards the circle, and the object of the game is to lodge your coin in the centre, and at the same time to force the coins of your opponents away from it.
Another plan is to mark the table in divisions, as shown in the margin. Each player has three coins. The first player pushes his coin into division 1 ; then the second goes on and tries to knock the first player's coin away ; and so on till each division has been passed, and one of the players succeeds in lodging his three coins in the last division, 6, and thus wins the game. A good deal of skill is required in avoiding the lines and leaving a
^
coin in the separate divisions.
nn BOTAL OA,ia ov ooosi.
In this old-fhshioned German game the figure of a Gooae is printed on a large sheet of papor, and divided into sixty*three squares or divisions. The object of the players — any number of whom may join in the game— is to make sixty •three points by successive throws of two dice. The first who succeeds in throwing that number wins the pool, which is made up by equal contributions fimn all the players, who throw alternately, and add the number of each throw to those already made by them. Each player's position on the Goose is marked by a coin, a counter, a pawn, or some small article. Any number beyond 63 sends the thrower back as many points as he exceeds 63. Thus, if he were 68, and he threw 11 by a 6 and a 6, he would go forward 6 squares to 63, and back 6 squares ftt>m 63. In addition to this, certain numbers on the Goose are barred, and if the player make them, he is fined two counters, which are added to tbm pooL A nnmbered dxaught-board will serve instead of a Gooae.
AGATELLX itandB in t)
DnogbU does to Che«.
r^ r '"'^ ^'^ gnunl form of Uie BogkUllc-baud, ud kngir tbx ibc
|f^^\^ ot^vct of tha game ig to Btrike che ivory bmOa with com into bolet
'* mads in Uie bed of tlia labia JoM u In Billivdi tlie balla ub ftund
into pocketep Hmdk leu fbne la the blow, tbongh not leae akin
in tha player, Is neceuaiy Ha halaing Eha b^la In Bacatetl* Ihu
ue Teqniaiteln pocketing and aumoDiDK in Ihe more KiaitiSemiDa.
Bagalalle-boarda ara mada oT vaiiona aiiaa. flrem ftra feat by an> to
faet by Uine, with alata bed* oaTerad with fine graan doth. lod
Tonnded bj proparly-tempsrad Indla-rabbar onihiona. In (be bed
IhB labia are aonk nine enpt, or bolaa, nnmbared napaoliTaty ooa W
e, and on Cha aide ol tba board an bolaa (m&eially eigh^ <n atsb
wemtag the game with pegL Tables at the beat kind, wtth balk.
.ildng-boardi, etc., can ba parobasad at » oo*t at tnra aix ui twiBV
Vsnou kinda or^runee are played on the Baeatelle-boanl. Tba
Iboea known aa t^ English, the Frebch, Sana Kffali and 1
BAQATEUJL ^
ni uroutH eAxa, Or "La Bagatelle" (as ft is often called) par esrosStfMeif, is playodt^ two penons, or any equal xuunber taUng sides, with nine balls — ^nsoally four red, four white, and one blaok. The first player places the black ball on the spot in firont of the holes, and then placing another ball on the spot i^ the lower end of the table, strikes it with the cue or maoe against the black ball, which most be hit and dislodged before ax^ score can be made. The rest of the balls are then to be played up in the same manner. The object, of course, is to " hole " the balls, and when all the eight balls are played np, which is done one after another by the same player, the numbers of the holes which are filled are counted up and scored to the player, either on the marginal holes with pegs, or on Ijaper or a board. If the black ball is holed it counts doable. The first player having played his round, the second player does the same. If more than two players are engaged, one of each side plays alternately. The players, of course, use their best judgment and skill either in striking any of the outstanding balls or cushioning for the holes. There is room for much practice and much exercise of skill in becoming acquainted with the various angles at which the cushions should be struck, and the Tarious degrees of force required, in order to reach certain holes.
Any number of rounds may be played as may be agreed, the player or side which makes the greiMest number at the conclusion of the rounds winning the game ; or a floore may be played for, usually once up and down the marginal holes with the pegs, ▼is., 160, the player first getting *' out " winning the game, xmless he should have played first, when his opponent is entitled to another torn to give him an even chance.
Should there be more than two players engaged, they may at their option all play against each other instead
©
f^ /^"pN of forming sides.
The position and numbering of the holes are shown in the accompanying diagram. And it will be seen
O/^ /^N that were all the balls to be holed — ^which is quite a
N^ \^ possible feat for a clever player — the total number that
could be scored at one round, supposing black (which
O^^^ counts double) to be in the 9-hole, is 64. \^ If a ball rebounds (h>m the semicircular head of
the table, or from the cushion, and passes back beyond the baulk line (a line at about 18 inches from the player's end of the board, from within which he must play his balls up), such ball ia considered dead, and is out of the game for that round. At the commencement of the round, all balls that are played up before the black ball is hit and dislodged l^om the spot are considered dead, and removed from the board : as is also any ball that ia struck off the table. If a ball stops dead on the brink of a hole, it may be challenged t^ the non'Striker, when, if it afterwards rolls in, it does not count, but must be replaced.
TBS FBnrCH OAICI.
This is alio played hy two persons, or any equal number taking aides. If two
esi BA6ATELEB.
oolonred ImUs are used, one is placed on the spot, and played at with the other, eaeh coonting doable in the holes in which it lUls. The players all take alternate strokes, and the highest aggregate score wins the gams. If the oolonred ball be Tniwtnl, the idaiyer forfeits five points to his opponent.
BAJTB IOA,L
Is a gams played by two persons, who each take foor balls of opposite coloan. The black ball is placed on the spot in trout of the holes. The first player begins by stnk> ing one of his balls at the black, the other player following him, and so on slteraatety. He who holes the black counts it towards his score, as well as all balls of his own ookmr which he may hole ; but on either player holeing one of his adTezaary's bails the number is scored to the adverae player. The game is usually 21 or 31, as naay be arranged between the players.
*SB CAinrov ojja.
The cannon game consists of cannons alone, or cannons and holes, as may be agreed. If the holes are added to the cannons, the latter count each two paints, and the former the numbers marked.
MISSZSSXFH.
In this game the Bagatelle-board is provided with a bridge, marked with nTonbefs over each arch. The object is to play the balls through the arches, and the player reckons the number of each arch which is entered to his score. Two or more balls going through the same arch all count. In order to render the game more difficult, the cushion must be struck with the ball prerioas to the latter passing through the aroh, otherwise the number is scored to the adversary.
COCKAMASOO, OB BTTSSXHT BIAjLCXLUI.
This is a game similar to Bagatelle ; but the board is provided with % nntntwr of
little iron pegs or points, with arches, in the centre one of which a bell is suspended.
and a channel all round the board. The ball is struck up through this chann^ and
fUls back through the pegs, whon certain points are gained according to nnmben
placed on the board, with additional points if the bell be rung with the stroke of the
ball. It is an amusing game for young players, but decidedly inflnior to Bagsteilp
In Gockamaroo the upper end of the board is elevated In order that the ball aoay fUl
back to the player.
coircLunivo mmmamem.
In playing all these games the ball must be struck with gentle firmness, Uie ens being held lightly between the fingers and thumb, and not grasped. The side-stroke, and the division of the object-ball (as explained in the section on Billiards), may be properly introduced in order to make the necessary angles. The most scientiftc strokes are those which are played against the cushion in order to hole a ball in the side-cups, or to drop in a ball that lies in the vicinity of the hole. Hard play st Bagatelle ia destructive to success ; and if you strike your ball rather low, you ham % better chance of holeing it than if you strike too high.
I or indoor kthl«t<o guDH, andconUlsiwltUn iF okill »ad ohfuioe ■■ to nader it & gneit IkToorlts with platan of almost aver? nUion in the world. It I'M pn>- t*b1; koown M u aarly period, as Bhakaapekre >p«iiJa o[ II tii liii play ot ~ origiD iB gsoenllT Mli)lnil«d 1« th« ITnoch ; H at Croquet ^d oUi«r modoii ganwi — BiUludi la pro- bablj an improTenuat upon nme old aport which waa oammon alike to n Mid their NormaD oonqaBTora.
is plifed upon art obtoog board aovered with Ons gnai otoUi, provided with ail natlad pooksta, ona at Bach oornar, and one in the Denbe at tli« Imglh of the board on aithar lids. Ul ronnd the ontar edge o! cli« table there ii an alaitic cnihion ctf India-rubber, al«o severed wlUi cloth. The bed of the table i> of alata, and the Itthle itself ■tftnda upon six legs- Ths regnlar dimenskma of a foll^lied billiard-table ■r* twcln Aat by dx, teaaiat two eqnal wipsrsa Insids Uw ouhioo. Bmallar tables
636 BILLIARDS.
•re made fbr nae in private honeee. Bat whaterer the siae of the table, it la faidia- peoaable that it stand perfectly Ann and level.
The instmmente used in BiUiards are ivoiy b^ls, vaiying in aise tma two inches in diameter, according to the dimenaiona of the table ; and coas, which are smooth, tapering, wooden rods, tipped at their smaller ends with leather. Bometimes ladies play with a mace, which ia a hammer-headed cue ; bat it haa nearly gone oat of fashion. The height and weight of the one depend mnch npon the taste of the player, bat one that will stand upright beneath the chin will generally be found the proper length.
rBBLIlKnrABT DrSTBUCTIOirS.
The otg'ect of all the games played on the billiard'table ia the forcing the ivoiy balls into the pockets, by striking one ball against the other with the cue ; and tbs making of caramboles or cannons. Cannons are made by the player striking two balls snocessively with his own ball.
The first thing the tyro has to learn is to strike the ball jffoperly. Tfaia ha does by placing his left hand on the table behind the ball to be stmck, so as to form a rest or bridge for the cue. A glance at the illustration below will show how the bridge is
made, and the ball stnick. The bridge-band should be well hollowed, and rest ai<oB the wrist and the tips of the fingers, with the thumb a little extended, ao as to gire tree play to the cue, which rests in the channel between the forefinger and the thumb. The cue is held lightly in the right hand, neither grasped too heav^y nor held too daintily. Having pointed his cue towards the ball, the player draws baok his right hand, and then, with one free, easy jppulse, drives the ball in thb direotioB be wishes it to take, either towards another ball or the cushion, as the ease may be. To prevent it from slipping off the face of the ball, the top of the one ia finely ttrnghenad with sand-paper and kept chalked. Much of the success of the player dependa upon the making of a good bridge, and the holding of the cue nearly parallel to the top of the table, at such a distance from either end as will leave about as mach wei^ft ia front of the hand as behind it This is called £he "balaxice of the one."
avmnuLL siscBimov ov ths oaks.
In commencing a game certain uniform methods are .adopted. AH biHiaid-tablea are provided with a baulk line and baulk semioirole at their lower eode^ end three
s.
BTLLIARDB. 637
«poti— one in ihd oentare of the table, one at the upper end about a fbot from the
ciuhioD, and one midway between the other two. The latter ia called the " pyramid
tpot," aiid the one at the end of the table, " the apot.*' In the ordinary game of Billiards
with three balls — ^two white and one red — ^the red ball is placed on the apot at starting,
and the first player etrikee at it with his own ball, or gives a miss. The white balls
are eeverally known as the ** plain ball '* and the *' spot ball," from the latter haying
a small black spot inserted in order to distingoiah it fh>m the other. The aeoond
player then strikes his own ball from baulk at eitiier of the balls, if the white be
b^ond the baulk ; and then the game i>roceeds by each taking alternate strokes at
the balla on the table till one or the other succeeds in making a cannon or pocket.
The player goes on striking at the balls as long as he can continue to pocket a ball or
caonon. If the red ball is forced into a pocket, the player aooies three points for what
is called a ** red winning hasard ;'* and the red ball is replaced on the apot. If he
strike the red, and by the aame action play hia own ball into a pocket, he aoores three
for a *' red losing hasard,** and then makes his next stroke from the baulk. A white
ball played into a pocket is either a "winning" or a "losing" hasard, aoeording
to whether the object ball or the player'a ball fall into the pocket. The " player's
ball " is the one struck with his cue ; the ** object ball " ia the one struck with the
ball of the player. For every white hasard, two points are acored ; and for every
cannon alao two pointa ; if the player make a cannon and hasard by the aame atroke,
he acoree the i)oints for each ; thus he may make four, five, six, aeven, eight, nine, or
ten points at a single atroke. In the latter caae, he muat atrike the red ball first,
make a cannon, and pocket all the balls.
If the player miss a ball, his opponent acorea one point, and if he force hia ball off the table or into a pocket without striking an object ball, he makes what is called a amp, azid loses three i)oints. The progreaa of the game is recorded on a marking" Ix>ard, which is always sold with the table.
In order that the reader may more fully understand the ordinaiy wi^ of playing, we extract the following, with permission, tram Captain Orawlqr, one of the acknow- ledged aothorities on the modem methods of billiard-play :—
vsB wxnmre, Losnre hazjlbd, astd c^saxbols gams.
This game is played with three balls, two white and one red. It is made up of
winning and losing hasards, cannons, miaaea, ,and various penalties tor foul strokes.
The red baU is placed on the apot at the commencement of the game. The playera
then string for lead and choice of balla ; and ho who loaea the lead either begina playing
by strilcxng at the red ball, or 1^ giving a miaa in baulk. If the first player give amiaa,
nr fail to Boore off the red ball, the aecond player goea on and tries to score by making
a hasard or cannon. If he auoceed, he goea on atriking at the balla till he miaa a
fttroke and lUl to aoore. And ao the game proceeds, each player making as many as
be can ofiT hia break till the allotted 60 or 100 points be reached — ^he who first makes
ttie required number winning the game.
S^rimgwmgfur the Lead is done in this way : each player plaees his ball within the
938 BTTJ.TARDB.
baulk semicircle, and atrikes it with the point or bntt-end of hiaeae to the top-eoaUaoi and the player of the ball which stopa neareat to the coahion at the banlk-end of the table wina the lead, and ohooaea hia balL It ia generally conaidered a alight dia- adyantage to lead off, aa there ia only one ball, the red, to play at. But between equal playera, the diaadvantage ia ao little that either of them atarta without stringing. Who* pointa are given, the receiver of the points nsoally leada off j but thia ia not impemtiTB^ as the pointa are given to equalise the game.
POO&
la played by two or more playera, each of whom has aoolourad balL Each player haa three iktet, or chanoea, and each takea hia torn to play at hia opponent'a ball, and drive it into a pocket. For eveiy ball ao pocketed the owner of the ball loaes a lilb to the player who pocketed it, and for every miss the striker also loaea a life. When all bat one of the players have lost their lives, the game ia won hy the player who relaiaa a life or lives ; or if two players are left each with an equal number of Uvea, tbeiy msj either divide the game or play it out.
Is played with fifteen balls arranged in a pyramid with the apex towaida the plajv. The game, which is generally played for a stake upon the game and a email aon for each ball pocketed, conaists entirely of winning haaards. As eveiy biUiazd-tableii accompanied by a set of rules for the several gamea, it is not neoeasaiy to give the laws of Pool and Pyramids.
There are several other gamea — as the White Winning Game, the Cannon Gaae^ etc.— as well as several foreign games ; but as we have ahown the general printiptas of Billiards in the directions and rules, fbrther detaila are not needed.
TSCmraCAL CXBKS OOMMOV fO ALL BILLXASS OAIOS.
AnffMl baUs are those which stop in a comer in such a way aa not to aDow ths player to strike them out so as to hit the olqect baU.
Baulkt the line drawn at the lower end of the table.
AMftt-<^ivl^, the semicircle struck fh>m the baulk line. Aball iasaid tobetatesft when it is below the line ; and when so placed cannot be played at with a baU inhaadL
Break, — A break is a succession of hazards or cannons without an intervening
Breakhtg the baUt is the striking the red from the spot at the beginning of a
Bricole, a ball struck against a cushion in order to make a cannon or haaard on iti reorossing the table.
Btttt, a heavy cue with a broad base, with which the ball may be struck in giving a misa. lang-buU and ha^-btUt, are long cues for playing at a ban beyond theieach of the player.
Qmntm or airom5ofe.~Wh6n two balls are struck in oonaecntive order by tfaa player's ball the double stroke is termed a cannon.
Coup, a stroke in which the player's ball nmi into a pocket or goea off the table without striking an ol:(iect balL
BILLIAimS. 689
DoubM, ft ball 8ln6k affaanai an object ball, so aa to maka the latter reboand from a oaahion towaxda a pooket.
Futt-gtroke, ha^f-baU, etc. — ^Tha player's ball atrook ftiU againat the centre of the object ball, is termed a *' full atioke ;'* if the balls coma into less contact with each other, the stroke is known as a *' half'ball," or a *' fine ball ;** and when the player'a ball strikes the olgect ball in such a way as to cause both balls to fly off in correspond- ing, or nearly corresponding angles, such stroke is called dMding the object baU ; when Bide (explained elsewhere) is pnt on the player's ball, and it strike the object ball half fUU, such a stroke is described as dMding both balU.
Heusardf a ball pookated after coming into contact with another ball When the striker's ball is pocketed after contact with the olqect ball, it is termed a Umng hazard ; If the object ball be ixwketed, the stroke is called a wnning haaard, A double hazard ii a stroke which forces two balls into separate pockets, or into the same pocket.
In hand, a ball after being pocketed is said to be in hand, or off the table.
Jfttf , a ball which, on being struck by the player's cue, (kils to touch the object ban. Qwimo a miMt is playing a ball out of baulk to a place of safety.
Re§lt a cue provided with a hammer-head, or cross of metal or wood, on which to rest the player's cue when hia ball is beyond his reach bj the ordinary bridge.
LAWS or BILLIAanS.
I. The game commences by stringing for the lead and choice of the balls. [This rule applies to all English Billiard-games. In stringing for the lead the feet of the player should be behind the baulk, and not at the side of the table. If in stringing the player's ball strike the other, the players string over again.]
n. The red ball must be placed on the spot ; and replaced there when it ia pocketed, or forced over the edge of the table, or when the balls are broken. ['* Breaking the balls *' is the replacing them as at the beginning of the game— the red on the spot, and each player's ball in hand — ^when he who has to break the balls plays at the red, or givee a miss. The balls are said to bo broken when the first player has struck the red or given a miss.]
m. A player making a stroke in a game must finish that game, or consent to lose it.
IV. The striker who makes any points continues to play until he ceases to score, by missing a hazard or otherwise.
y . If, when the cue is pointed, the ball should be moved without the striker intend- ing to strike, it must be replaced ; and if not replaced before the stroke be played, the adversary may claim it as a foul stroke. [This is to say, a ball moved accidentally must be replaced as nearly as possible. This law is intended to meet cases in which a ball is under a cushion, or angled in a coma*. If the player fail to strike hU own ball, he can make the stroke over again.]
VI. If a ball spring from the table, and strike one of the players, or a bystander, ao aa to prevent ita filling on the floor, it must be considered as off the table. [The penalty is the loss of three points if the player's ball has not first struck a ball on the tables but if a ball has been so struck, no fcrfeit can be claimed.]
MO BnXIABDS.
Tn. When a ball nms so near fhe brink of a pocket as to stand then, and after- wards fUls in, it moat be replaced, and played at, or with, as the oaae may beu [The (Challenging a ball, as in Bagatelle, is not allowed in Billiardi.]
Yin. A ball lodged on the top of a cushion is considered off the table.
DC. When the player's ball is off the table (in hand), and the other two balla are in banlk, the possessor of the ball in hand cannot play at the balls in baulk, but mnat strike his ball beyond the semicircle, or play at a cushion out of baalk. [In such s case, the player may use a butt, or play with the butt-end of his cue, and strike at a cushion out of baulk, so that his ball on its return maj hit the balla in baulk for a cannon or hazard.]
X. A Une^KtU cannot be played at by the striker whose ball is in hand. [A lix>e- 6all is so-called when its centre is exactly on the line of the baulk, in which case it a to be considered in the baulk, and cannot be played at, except from a cushion out of the baulk.]
XL Erery miss purposely made must be given with the point of the cue, and tlw ball is to be struck only once ; if otherwise given, the adveraaxy may claim it as a fool stroke. [But the player may give a miss in bauUc with the butt-end of hia cue, wbea he plays his ball to the top-cushion.]
Xn. No player can score after a foul stroke. [The following are ./bul ttroku : — ^If the striker move a ball inthecu^qf striJang and fail to make a stroke ; or if he plaj with the wrong ball ; or if he touch his own ball twice in playing ; or if he strike a ball while it is running ; or if he touch his opponent's ball with hand or cue ; or if his feet be off the floor when playing. The penalty in all these .cases is losing the lead and breaking the balls. Enforcing the penalty for a foul stroke is entirely at the optka of the adversary.]
XIII. If the adversary neglect to enforce the penalty for a foul stroke, the striker plays on, and scores all the points that he made by the foul stroke. [Thua, if a ftnl stroke be made, and not called, it cazmot be enforced after the next stroke is made.]
Xjy. Two points are scored for eveiy white hazard, two tor eveiy «^T»nfm, and three for every red hazard.
XY. When the red baU is pocketed, or off the table, and the spot on which it shoold stand is occupied by the white ball, the red must be placed in a corresponding Botoa- tiou at the oUier end of the table ; but if that should also be occupied by the other white bnll, the red must be placed on the spot in the centre of the table, between the two middle pockets ; and wherever it is placed, there it must remain until it be played, or .the game bo over.
XVI. If a ball be moved by the striker in taking aim, such moving of the ball moat be considered a stroke. [This appears to be a contradiction of Law V. : but there, it will be remembered, the player did not intend to strike the ball moved ; here ha is in the act qfttriking ; and if, while in the act of striking, the ball be moved ever 00 fitlk^ it must be considered a stroke ; except, of course, that your opponent may allow yos to replace your ball and amend your stroke. This applies equally whether the atriker't ball be in hand or not, and whether it go out of baulk or remain in the aaraidrcie. j
BILLIARDB. «*1
Sm. If the player misB strikixig either ball he loses one point ; and if by the same stroke his own ball runs into a pocket, he loeee Ontm points. [That is to say, his opponent scores the points forfeited hj the miss or the oonp. All misses count towards your sdTersaiy's game.]
XVni. If the striker force his own or either of the other balls over the table, alter having struck the object-ball, or after making a hazard or cannon, he neither gains nor loses by the stroke, and his adversary plays on without breaking the balls.
XIX. If the striker wH/kUy force his ball off the table without striking another ball, he loses three points; but if the ball go over by aooident, he loses one point only for the miss.
XX. If the striker play with the wrong ball, and a cannon or hazard be made thersby, the adversary may have the balls broken { but if nothing be made by the stroke, the adversary may take his choice of balls the next strokoi and with the ball he chooses he must continue to play nntil the game is over.
XXI. The playing with the wrong ball must be discovered before the next stroke is played I otherwise no penalty attaches to the mistake, and the plsyer goes on and scores all the hasarda he makes.
XXTT. No person, except his adversary, has a right to inform the player that he has played, or is about to play, with the wrong ball.
XXin. If the adversary do not see the striker play with the wrong ball, or, seeing it, do not choose to enforce the penal^, the marker is bound to score all the points that may have been made by the stroke.
XXIV. If the striker's ball be in hand, and the other two balls within the baulk, and he should, either by accident or design, strike either of them, without first playing out of the baulk, his adversary has the option of letting the balls remain as th^ are, and scoring a mJss — of having the ball so struck replaced in its original position, and scoring a mine of making the striker play the stroke over again-~or of counting it as a fool stroke and breaking the balls.
XXV. If the striker's ball be in hand, he must not play at a cushion within the baulk, in order to strike a ball that is out of it. [Should he do so, his opponent caa inaist on Us playing the stroke over again.]
XXVL When the striker plays at a ball near to his own with the point of the cue, the stroke is fliir ; but if he play it with the butt-end, the marker must decide whether the stroke be foul or fair, [idl strokes are fisir with the point of the cue. In pushing- strokes, the point or butt of the cue must only touch the ball once. If the ball be tonehed and the cue be withdrawn by ever so little, and the ball be again touched, pnaned, or struck, such stroke is foul.]
XXVn. When a ball is on the brink of a pocket, if the striker, in drawing back his cue, kxibok the ban into the pocket, he loses three points, as for a coup.
JUlViIi: In giving a miss from baulk, should the plsjrer fhil to strike his ball oat of Iwiilk, his adversary may either let it remain so or compel him to play the stroke orer ag:ain. [The law applies to balls in hand. If the player's ball be already within ihe banlk Une, he can play it^ with the point of his cue, to any part of the baulk ; and
41
612 BILLIABD8.
raeh tiall oumot be straok Yty the other plajer, if hla bftO be also In hand, vnteM he flnt play at a oiuhion out of banlk. IntentkHial tniimw can be plajed either in baolk or oat of it. The mias may be either played ftxnn the end or fhe aide cnabloa.]
XXIX. When the ttriker, in gMxig a miaa, makes a find atroke, bia advonaij xnay claim it aa such, and enfivoe the penalty. In aneh a caae, the point for the miaa ii notaoored.
XXX. Noperaon ia allowed to take np a ball during the pi ogieai of the game withoat permiaaion of the advemxy. [The player who illegally takes up aball tiiat ia in i^ during the progress of a game, loses the game. In fholk neithM* player ia allowed to toneh a ball'exoept it be in hand; that is to aay, he may not touch it in order to alter its position. He may, howerer, lift it to aaoertain whether it be the apot ball or the plain ball, when any donbteziats aa to ita identity.]
XXXI. ▲ ball in play that ia moved by accident by either of the playen, or by a looker-on, or by the marker, most be replaced, aa nearly aa possible, to theaataaAwcioii of the player'a adTersaiy .
mm. The player may haTe the balls replaeed if hia adTeraaiy accidentally take up a ball that ia in play ; or he may inaist on hia adversary breaking the balla.
TYYTTT Neither the player nor hia adTeraaiy ia allowed to obatroctthe oouae of a ball in play, under the penalty of aforfUt for a fool atroke and the breaking of the balls.
XXXIV. If the striker's ball, when it ceases to roll, touch his opponent^a ball, no aoott can be made, and the latter must break the balls. [The striker in this oase may ran his ball into a pocket, or make a cannon by playing it on to the third balL If he do either of these, the balls must be taken up, and the red placed on the apot. when the adversaiy plays from baulk, aa at the beginning of the game; that ia to aay, be ** breaks the balls." Butif the striker foil to cannon or pocket his own hall, all tlkebaDs remain, as they are when they cease rolling, and the other player goee on aa navaL It is necessary that the marker or some disinterested person ahonld determina aa tothe balls touching, for they may be rery close together, and yet not actually touch each other. If the red baU and the adyetaary's ball touch each other, th^ may be played at by the striker.]
XXXV. The decision of the marker ahall be final on all pointa of diqiute.
ADTXOa TO TOUHO rLATBBS.
It is generally considered bad play to pocket your adversaiy, except when you want to keep the baulk or finish the game. There are, of course, positiona in which it would be good policy to pocket the white baU ; but as, Ity so doing, you leave only one (the red) to play at, you reduce your chances by just one half.
If you are uncertain about your side-stroke* do not attempt to give the nsiaa flran the side-cusbion, but play at the red, and endeaTOur to bring your own ball into banlk. Place your ball on one of the end-spota of the banlk semicircle, and atrike tba red by a half-ball ; the blow being given to your own ball just above ita centre, niia win bring your ball back again into baulk, and leave the red under the aide-eaabioB, | aboTC the middle pockek
BILLIABDB.
643
Brery stroke shGiDld be made with a deflsite object* and if there is no haiard or caanoB apparenti play to leave yonnelf aafb. Never strike at the balls at random.
II la often good poliqjr, when yoa eaanoft soore, to strike gently your opponent's ball, or the red, so as to leare it nnder the cushion.
Be oarenil how yoa vary yonr style; nnless ihsre is obvions reason for a high or a low stroke, a sids-etroke or a screw, plsy an ordinary stroke, and divide the otgect-baU. Do nol experimentalise withont a direct purpose.
An advantageous miss when yoa are nnder the cushion msy save yonr game.
Bemember that it is not only the hasard before you that yon have to make, but the hasards that will be left after your stroke. Good judgment in anticipating the oonseqpienoes of your stroke is therefore a primary element of suooees. White winning haaards should be played gent]y,so that» should you fiiil to make them, your opponent's ball may be left under the cushion. Bed winning hasards should, on the oontrsry, be made with strength enough to bring the ball away from the cushion, if you do not anoceed in lodging it in the pocket. Knowledge of strengths is half the battle at Billiards.
VAUOUS SnOKBS.
In the following diagrams the youiig player wUl discover the direction to be taken by the ball after leaving the cue : —
f)(^.
OO-J
LOG
WIXRIlia BASABat.
Wll
»>9Iir« BASABItS.
iB order to make hasards and camions with any kind of success, you must remem- that the direction taken hy your ball after striking the objeot-bell, wUl be the ^io«ss>tvpttt of the direction between the cue and the object-ball ; h& other words, the
A
644
BILLIABDa.
sngto of reflecUoxi is eqnal to the angle of incidBnoe. When the lines of sogte between the two balls and the pocket* or between the three balls necessary to a canxum^ doaoi appear to equal each other, the player makes them do so by diyiding the olgeet-ba]l, or by patting *' side " on his own baU.
By this is meant that the amount of force employed in striking the ol
•IBB-trmOKB CAimOBS*
OAffHOK*.
CAB son • VBOM TSS cvsaioi.
and the precise point of contact between the player's baU and the object-baU nm^ be regulated according to circumstances. If the ol^eot-ban be struck fUl, the two balls will tmvel in the same direction; if it be struck smartly in sach a way that the side of the one baU meet the side of the other, the direction taken hj than after contact wiU be opposite to each other, and th^ will depart at angles more crien wide according to the amount of impingement between them. Thus, in making the strokes shown in the diagrams, the amount of contact between the two balla wffl in- variably govern their direction ; or, according to this amount of contact will be the deviation of the balls ihmi the line of aim; the smallor the contact^ consiafeent wilh the strength at which the ball is stnwk, the wider the angle between the dii«otk» cT
the balls.
Great accuracy of «ye and nicety of caloolation are neeeesaiy in so appartioning the quantity of contact between the player's baU and ttie oloect-ban, as to matooneor
both of them travel in the direction intended, either in making a cannon or pocket. This accuracy of aim in dividing the oloect-baa can only be acquired by practice.
nzi sxx>B-i«Bon. There is another method of calculating the proper amount of
bhuabds.
6tf
hy the "dde-alroke." •* It,** nyn Captain Crawley, *' yon strike a ball on ita side, it will, while rolling forward, alao epin on its axis towards the side on which it is stmck. On eonkact with another hall, or the onahion, the forward roll will be diminished or alto*
gether stoxiped, according to the force of the spin, while the axial roll is continued. The result of this is, that the spin oaoses the ball to roll in thedireetionof this latter rotation.
It follows from this that yon must always strike Uxe ball on the side towards whiohyonwishittogo. The proper eflbct of the side- stroke is not seen till after contact with the olq'eot- ball or CQshion ; when, if the ball has been stmck on ita right side, it wiU tnTel to the right ; if on ita left side, to the left. To increase the divergence, yon mnst pat on more
'side,' as it is termed, rfc4fiii« A SAU oo« o» BAULK— u.i.UNBAna*«aaBt»B*«TSOBi. ^Jajjeii ii^fi^n^ ^^n^ yOQ
mnst hit yonr ball more towards the outside. In making a side*stroke you must recollect that in hitting yonr ball veiy much towards ita side, the cue is apt to slip ; to
Mfl BUXUBOS.
pnreotwluolitti tlpmutbawaUohalkalL MiiM iilijmi — 1« lillliiMhiiliii*« uliliiiiil Uending to ik (o. It baln^ dUnaolt alwaji lo lOrika Uia lall nHllr in it* eantas." Va bMar nuXIa of pnoCiiliig Uu ildfraboka owi ba &nmd than plajing jmv ball
tlia lino, lint on oni EiilB ami thn m tha ottur, bj pattiag on eoimipDuIInK "dae." Tbia ta ihown In the diagnm on Hu [KHieding pags, in wUch we sea how a ball Mraek on iH ilda will rMun into baulk at an angle man or loaa widc^ aoconUng to (tw aiBonM ctwatmgUttaA dds amploTaiL With tha »ol»iitWc player the qnaotl^ of "aiila" ia a niatlni of niea ealenlMlon, m Ilia proei'Wi of a ball ainok on ita rida la ibuIbbI akm than nmal: but altar oonlaM with another ball or tha onahton, ttflie* off M an angle mora or leaa vida, aoooMlng to the fOrae of the niglna] inipetiu. To mak* Iha alda etroka (nc«a*efall7, tha ooe mnat ba held a liMla diagonally to tha ball, tha planar at Iha aama inatant glfing a TB17 alight twirt of tha mln, ao aa to prodnee a BiBt of robbing motkin of hia one'a tip on tha ball.
If TOO hit the ball Ugh abon Ita horlaontal oantee, it MTela Ikatar tbas BBoali If 70U hit It below, and at the aaaae ^me with a aodden drawbaok of junr hand, the ball will go mora alowly than when btt foil, and either atop at tha point tf oontaol wiib Iha oths ball or ntoni toward* Itaa atrikgr. Thla la called Iha '■ •erew,~ ■ moat natfU aBoke in all gatna at Billlardi, eapaoialtr at Pool and Pyramid*.
Tlurogh BQUardi may be Joatly eooalderad a* the moat tciectille of the atUaUa fame*, lha beginner need not be delaned bj ila apparent difflcnltiu i fbr no ioo>B will he oommezioe hia pnotioe than tbuy will raniah imperceptltil;. To rcftain from joining in a game till yoa thorooghly nndEffatand it. la about M wiae aa detvminiBg not to baths tlU yoa know bow to awim. First wonaMm jonnalf to knock about the balls for amnaamant, and jon will aoon aoqnlre enon^ dexleri^ and knowladge to enable Jon to make a stand againat muij a man who oonaideia liijniielf
OiIRCUUBTAKCBS ol ImpoHwuM, after > mmn hu uiired st matan jtmn,
rranoc* of hU j^jntlinil ilift. ThB luter mgiaTe kU Ihclr little hUtoriM
^ on Uu " t»bM of Uu bnin," uul rMain all Iheii orlgliul dlitinctiiHS, TMn
1^ aiKl 7«ajm iiftor UioH which havB nbfleqnsDtlj taken place ixe piut awaj
uid Ibrgottes— OTi at leaat, until they hmTe left bnt a dim and Ikit-fkdlng
r«eoni In tli* "obatnbar of the mind." The noelloetion of an crant, one of
the moat InBnsntia], perhapa, of oni whole Urs. which look plaoa fome ten
Di hae almost departed from oa ; we cannot, nunlally, and wlthont a blnnder,
er ttm bf (Mt in tegnlar ofdo^— we lee oidr dl^olDted poitiona of it boddled
048 LEGERDEMAIN.
oontoaedlj tog«£her — (he abadow of the event, vagne and indistind, flitB oocMioaallj before our mind's eye, but the aabetance itself is ahnost buried in obUvion ; wherees. on the other hand, the remembrance of the ftrat exhibition of Legerdemain that in oar childhood we ever witneooed remaisa ae vividly on our mind as an oocuirenoe of yester- day. Every feature of that seeming magician who swallowed fire, kept tt alive and brilliant below the surface of water, enacted other feats of apparent dominion over the elements, caused dumb figures to give proper answers to all sorts of questions, pad- locked an urchin's cheek, and in a hundred ways cheated our eyes, before we had well worn out our second suit of boy's clothes — ^is as well remembered as though we had never ceased to look upon him. It was evident, to oar unpractised c^, that he was not a mere mortal ; for no man, aa we thought, innocent as we were, could by any possibility ooz^ure a shilling, which we held fast in our hand, into one of car Uttto schoolfellow's pockets, or make a haberdasher's shop of his mouth, and draw troaa. it dozens upon dozens of yanls of ribbons of all colours, and at the option of those arooxul him ; we could not conceive that human flesh could withstand red-hot iron, or that any iwwer, short of witchcraft, could remove a thing from before our eyes, which were all the time eaznesUy fixed on it, without our seeing its motion. The feat which mystified us most was this ; — ^He apparently devoured a piece of raw meat, and then accoally, as it seemed to us, swallowed a quantity of firo, as he said, to dress it— (hua making his stomach its own cook, and his inside a kitchen.
Bcmembering, as we do, the delight we felt at this, our first glance at Legvrdemain : kno^ving, aa we well do, that the youthfcd mind is, aa ours onoe was, fond of *>»«* son of recreation, we shall bestow even more than our usual pains in making this artiele as complete as can be consistent with the nature of our work. We think we nu^ ptodge ourselves that there is no superior treatise on Legerdemain in ezistenee ; tme, thoe may be more bulky ones, but th^ contain much useless matter, and acoounta of tricks which it is either impossible to perform at all, or, at any rate, by the rude, antaqaated instructions which they aflfbrd. The following pages will, we trust, be found to con- tain all that is valuable in this art, unencumbered with dross.
To render the recreations more easy of attainment, we have adopted a plan f* classification, separating the simple tricks from those which are more complicatad, ami consequently more diflloalt. We doubt not but that this part of the work will be a favourite study with our readers, and that it will afi'ord much innocent antraaemeot during the long evenings of winter, around the comfortable parlour fire, to many a little social circle.
In concluding these preliminary observations we wish it to be remenbered, that in addition to the matter contained under this title, many excellent sdantiflo reereatkms. which will be accounted capital conjuring tricks, are to be found in the pagea devoted to Scientific Amusements, where they are more properly placed than thej would bav^ been here ; and to these we take leave to refer those who have an indination to become ** Magicians de Society."
SIMPLE DECEPTIONS AND EASY TRICKS.
VfM UAt tuTs witucued tba parFormuiMB oC ume prohuar of oanjonoK, or *■ wlurd," or " preUi JigUiue jr." And woudorsd how he parfiiTmail m nuui7 caMoo* uid sAonlshlDg triclu. We may u ones inform Iben thM mow of the ItaU of Ibe eonjanm tat ettbn of t1flightK>f>huid, oonHBdmoy, or mechA&lnl sp- in of tBj of thcM three prisclplei, aided b; ■bondasce of >niiiU talk and otbsr meana of diilncting the Mtantlaa of the aadisnoe tram a panknlar oxaminatlou of Iho modmt operamdi of Lhe bick in progreea.
Legerdemaitt (oompoead of Uirae Fronoh worda slgnliyiDS lUmbla or U^t of baJid) ia abeolately Decenaarj- to the perfonuanea of the moat almpla trloki ; and more than thia. the T^^nng jagglei moat aeeoatom hlmaalf (o do many thlnga with hia left band which be osaslly doei viih hia right. Aa aoon aa he oan do thia. be will be on (be fair road to the acoompliahmont of many of the fteta of magio (>i>-«*Ued) which have
Having tboa pat him in poaaeariea of the prindpal elomaota of aucccu in Legcr- damaio, we now proceed to deaorlba a fisw
BIUPLE DBCBPTIONB A^D EABILT-PIRFORMBD TRICX8. Tib ALMoin Taica. — Get three almondi. or any other eaublea. and, having placed (hem apou the table a ahorl dlatanee apart, pa( a ha( over each. Tell the oompany (bat yon will eat (ha three aJmonda, and, having done eo, will brtag them nnder which'- ever hat they pleaae. When yon have awallawed eacb aepanualyi nqneat one oT the Bpectator* lo point ont the bat nnder whloh they ahatl all be. When choice baa beeo niade of ooe of the hats, pnt it npon yoor head, and aak the oompany If yon hare no(
lUllled your promiae. TBI Gum o> Warn imia ii
; Hit.— Place a gl
a table, a&d
e50 LBGBBDKMAIN.
hATing put a hat over it, ofllBr to laj any of the company a wager that yoa will drxsk the wine without raiaing up the haL When your wager is aooepted, particularly xeqaest that no person will touch the hat ; then get underneath the table, and conunenos anoUng and umaolring your lips, aa though you were swallowing the wine with ocm* aiderable gusto. After a minute or two has elapeed, eome flrom under the table, and say to the person who aooepted your wager, ** Now, sir.'* His credulity will imme> diately induce him to raise up the hat, in order to ascertain if the wine be drank. Immediately he does so, take up the glass, and having swallowed its contents, say. « You hare lost» sir; I have drunk the wine wtthout lifting up the hat.** This trick generally excites much laughter against the simpleton who thus dupes himseU.
Taa JuooLsa*s Dssssst. — Get a large apple or turnip, and cut several pieees to resemble candle-ends. Shape some almonds into wicks, blacken them at one end bj burning it for a short time, and blowing it out» and then stick them into the candlet. You will cause considerable surprise if you light them one at a time, and, when they have burned for a few seconds, put into your mouth and swallow them. The beet wsj of doing this trick is to set up one of the mook oandles in a candlestick, and bring it into the room lighted ; then place it upon the table, and take out the candle and est ik To make the wicks bum well, th^ should be previously steeped in oil of carrawayi, or any other essential oil.
Tn Taasi Knvas. — ^Wager any sum with a person that yon will give him thrN knives to hide, one after the other, and will tell him where he deposits the 2af<. He will doubtless stipulate that he shall be permitted to hide them out of the room. Thii you readily agree to, and, on presenting him with the first and second knives, he will go out and caieftilly deposit them in some secret hole or comer. During his abseao^ put the third knifb into the fire, so that it will be moderately heated by the time he is prepared to receive it. As soon as he takes hold of it. he will very natnraUy deposit it upon the floor, with snndxy ^aculations incidental to the touching anything too hot to hold. You then say, " There it is, you have deposited the latt upon the floor, sod I have won the wager.'* This trick generally causes much laughter.
Tn BBin«a oi Knvas. — To erect the bridge of knives, you must ftast place tfarce
glasses, or small cups, at the comers of a supposed triangle, and about the length of one of the knives yoa use distant fhmi each other, upon a table, the fkur, or any even surfkoe. Then take three knives, and arrange them upon the glasses in the manner repce- sented by the cut The blade of No. 1 (as you mar I>eroeive by inspecting the engraving) goes over that of No. a, and the blade of No. 2 posses across that of Na S, which rests on that of No. 1. The knives befaig placed in this position, their blsdes will support each other.
Ow OF THB Ooxxov. — Auy person residing near a common may raise a heszt^ laugh amongst his fHends by the following simple deception : — ^Pick from off Um ODrnmon a pebble stone, a piece of wood, or any other minute ol^eot ; produce it to
8DCPLB DEOBPnONS AKD EASY TRICEB.
051
Um oompttoy, uid aagr, *' Ladies and gentlemen, allow me to oall yoor attention to a nmarkable natoral oariouty i aomething decidedly out (ffUu common.** lianj of the spectatora will examine it minntely, to diacoTer wherein its noTolty oonaista $ some will peroeiTepecnltaiitiea which others will not be able to distingniah. Daring the somtiny, yon peraist that it ia decidedly out of the common ; and, when their patienoe is pretty well ezhaoated, take the atone, and robbing it on yonr aleere, aay, " Ladies and gentlemen, I will explain to yon thia ht9U4 natura. I have said that it ia something out of the common, and I will prove my assertion. This atone ia out of — — Common (naming the place), where I piclnd it np this Teiy day."
Twa Bosna GoiriirBom. — State to the company tiiat it was proyed some years ago at the Haymarket Theatre, that to orawl into a quart bottle was an impossibility ; but the rapid pi'ogities made by the march of intellect in these enlightened times haa poroTed that any peraon inay crawl into a pint bottle as easHy aa into hia bed. Having thna prefheed yonr intentiona, yon get a pint bottle, and place it in the middle of the room; than go ontaide the door, and creeping into the room npon all-fours, say, "Ladiea and gentlemen, this is crawling t» to the pint bottle I"
Thi Toraa's Taoon. — A trick, similar to the Bridge of Knires, may be perfonned by three tobacco pipes in the following manner >—Procnre three common tobacco pipes, place the hollow part of the bowl of one of them on the table, aa No. 1, and let ita stem be anpported by another, placed at No. S ; then put the other pipe aoroea Noe. 1 and S (as No. S), so that ita bowl end may snpport the Stan of No. S, and ita own stem rest on the bo^ end of No. 8. This little tripod, •Ithon^ eanstmcted of such brittle ma- teriala, will, if carefUly pat together, aap- Xiort a jog of foaming October. Whenosed to show that it will sapport a weighty the three bowla should be brought considerably closer together than aa repnaented in the maxginal eak, ao that the bottom of the Jug may rest upon all three of the stems.
Sabxkt Tbbd. — Produce a small stick, and tell some person jnesent that he will be completely tired before he has carried it out of the room. If he deny your assertion, take a penknifb, and, haying cut with it a y«ry small piece, deaire him to take that oat first ; upon his return, glye him a similar piece, and so on, until he confeeses him^ self tired, which he will soon do, for at therate yon out up the stick, it would take him months to carry it out of the roouL
Tks Novnasoam. — Get a nut, and, holding it towards the spectators in yoor closed hand, that they may not see what lies therein, profees yourself to be capable of showing them what th^ have neyer seen, what you have neyer seen, what no one else haa ever aeen, and what* when yon and th^ have once seen, no one else ever shall see. Ask them to guess what it is, and when they have tried in yain, crack the nut, show them the kenael, and put it in your mouth and swallow it.
dS2 LEOEBDEMAIN.
Tn MrsfiBiovB Borli. — Pierce a few holes with a glaxiei^s diamond in a oamBioa black bottle ; place it in a Taae or jng of water, eo that the neok only ia abova tha surface. Then, with a thnnel, fill the botUe and oork it well, and while it ia in the jug or vase. Take it out, notwithstanding the holes in the bottom, it will not leak ; wipe it dry, and giTe it to some penon to nnoork. The moment the cork is drawn, to (he park's astonishment, the water will begin to run out of the bottom of the bottle.
Thv Borlb Sisonoorv. — Fill a small white glass bottle, with aTery nairow neeik. fhll of wine ; place it in a glass vase, which must previously have suffloieni water in it to rise above the month of the bottle. Immediately you will perceive the wine zisflw in the form of a little column, toward the surftKse of the water, and the water will, in the mean time, begin to take the place of the wine at the bottom of the bottle. Ite oanse of this is, that the water is heavier than the wine, which it displaces, aad foroes to rise toward the surface.
Thb Maoio Cikcls. — Tell the company that it is in your iwwer to place any per- son in the middle of the room, and to draw a drole round him, out of which, although his legs shall be perfectly free, it will be impossible for him to jump, use aa ma^ labour and exertion as he may, without partially undressing himself. This will eaose considerable astonishment, and some one of the party will, doubtless, put yoor powers to the test. Make such person stand in the middle of the room, blindft>ldf>rt ; button his coat i then, with a piece of chalk, draw a circle round his waists outside hia ooat. Upon removing the bandage from his eyes, and pointing out to him the aitoation in which he is placed, it will be evident that he cannot jump out of the ring withoot taking his coat off.
Advavtaoboub WAfiBB. — ^Desiro a lady or gentleman to lend you a watch. Sia- mine it to form an idea of its value ; then oflbr to lay the owner a wager consider- ably less than the value of the watch, that she does not answer three times oon- Bocutively, "My watahr Present her the watch and say, '< What ia thisP'* She will not fi&il to reply, ** Ky watch." Afterwards present some other olqeoty aakfng the same question. If she names the objects you have presented, she haa lost the wager ; but if; on the contrary, she is on her guard, and says, *' My wafeeh,** she evidently must win. Then say to her, *' You are sure to win, but supposing I loae, what will you give me P" If she replies, " My watch," take it, and leave her the wager stSLked.
To Jxm.t A Glass ov Wavbb wxshou* 8pii.i.xire n. — Poor water, or axty Uqnor. into a glass until it is fell to the edge, and place over it a square pieoe of pretty Bfaronjr paper, so as to cover the mouth of it entirely ; and above the paper, place an? smooth body, such as the bottom of a plate, or a pieoe of glass. If you then invert the whole, and afterwards raise it up, you will see the paper adhere to the glsas, so that no one can take it away without spilling all the wafer. This efDMt ia prodaoed Igr the gravity of the air ; for, aa the air presses on the paper, which covers the Boonthor tha glass, with superior weight to that of the water, it must neoessaxily support It. Bob as the paper becomes moist, and affbrds apassage to the air, it at length fhOa down.
A Fast Pbisovbb. — ^You tell a person that you will clasp his handa together in such a manner, that ho shall not be able to leave the room without HTifi1iiBiilnft
8IHPLB DECEPTIONS AND EAST TRICKS. 853
ftlthongh you will not oonflne his feet, or bind bis body, or in any way oppose his exit. This trick is performed by clasping the iMir^s hands ronnd the pillar of a large circolar table, or other balky article of Aimitare, too large for him to drag throngh the doorway.
To LxR A Bom.a wrk 4 Snuw.— Take a straw, and baring bent the thicker end of it in a sharp angle, as in fignre snlgoined, pot this onrred end into the bottle, so that the bent part may rest against its aide; you may then take the other end, and lift up the bottle by it without breaking the straw, and this will be the more readily accomplished as the angular part of the straw approaches nearer to that which comes out of the bottle. It is necessary In order to succeed in this feat, to be particularly careftd in choosing a stout straw, which is neither broken nor bruised 1 if it bare been prerionsly bent or damaged, it is unfit for the purpose of performing this trick, as it will be too weak in the pert so bent» or damaged, to support the bottle.
Tkb KyoRiD Thbiau. — Considerable amusement, not unmixed with wonder, may iM occasioned among a party of ladies by a clerer performance of this trick. Itis most ftequently performed by a female, but the efltet of it is considerably increased when it is displayed by a youth. A piece of calico, muslin, or linen, is taken in the left hand» m needle is threaded in the presence of the spectators, and the usual, or eren a double or treble knot» made at the extremityof onaof theendsof it. The operator commences his work by drawing the needle and the thread in it quite through the linen, notwith- standing the knot, *nd continues to make several stitches in like manner successively. The mode of performing this seeming wonder is as follows : — A bit of thread, about a quarter of a yard long, is turned once round the top of the middle finger of the right band, upon which a thimble is then placed, to keep it secure. This must be done privately, and the thread kept concealed, while a needle is threaded with a bit of thread of a ■««»nM' length. The thread in the needle must have one of its ends drawn up nearly close, and be concealed between the forefinger and thumb ; the other should bang down nearly as long as, and by the side of the thread which is fiutened under the thimble, so that these two msy appear to be the two ends of the thread* The end of the piece that is flutened under the thimble is then knotted, and the performer begins to ■ew ; by moving his hand quickly after he has taken up the stitch, it will appear as though he actually passed the knotted thread through the cloth.
Tsa Tavb Tbxox. — ^This trick consists in suflteing a person to tie your thumbs together tightly, and yet that you shall be able to release them in a moment, and tir tfaem^ together sgain. The mode of performing this trick is as follows : — l^j a piece d tape across the palms of your hands, placed side by side, letting the ends hang down f then bring your pahns quickly together, at the same time privately catching hold of the middle of the tape with your fourth and fifth fingers. Then direct any person to tia your thumbs together as tight ss he pleases, but he will not, of course, in reality be lying them, because you have hold of the tape, yet it will nevertheless appear to him
esi LE6SRDBMAIN.
that he is doing so. BeqnMt him to plaoe a hat over your hands ; then blow npoa the hat, and say, " Be loose," slipping toot thumbs from nnder the tape ; direct him to remove the hat^ and show your thnmbs free. You then reqnest the hat may again be placed over yoor hands, and blowing upon it, yon say, "Be tied," slipping j^mr thumbs under the tspe again ; and whan the hat is remoTed, yovc thumbs wiQ appesr tied as at first. After performing the triek, oonv^ the tape away lest it be detected.
TBI THUKB-svaxra. — This is a. very simple trick ; but, hj performing it quickly, you may surprise and pnaale a spectator very considerably. Wind a piece oi abring round your thumb, thus : — ^Let one end of it, a, drop between the thumb and forefinger
of your left hand { then wind the other part, whidi yon retain in your right hand, two or three times round yoor thnznb ; next, make a little loop, 6, with the same end, which hold between your finger and thumb. Now, let go the end, e, and take bold of the end, a, which you must haye left about sis or eight inches long, and you may make a spectator tKoey you paaa it through the loop, and take hold of it again when ao prissnil through, in the twinkling of an eye. To inerease tha auxpriae, you may make the loop as small as posaibla. Thia apparent piece of manual dexterity ia performed by passing that end of the string marked a aa qiuioklyas possible round the top of the thumb, so as to come between the forefinger azid thumb; it win thus get into the loop, and you will seem to have pasaed the end through ik Tbm OovjiraoB's Joxi. — ^Take any small ol^eot in each hand, and stretch yoor hands as fhr sa you can, one from the other ; then State tiiat you will make both the aztldfla oome into either hand without bringing your hands near each other. If any one dia- pute your power of doing this, you have no m(»re to do than to lay one olqect down upon the table, tnm yourself, and take it up with your other hand.
Tn WovDiBWL WijriBS.«-On each side of a table-knifb, or ivory fblder, ati^ in the presence of your company, three wafers. Take the knifb by the handle, and torn it oTer two or three times, to show that the waftes are all on. Desire some peraon to takeoffonewallBr from one side of the blade; torn the knife twice, and there will appear only two wafers on each side ; remove another wafer, tnm the knife twice, and U^ere will appear only one wafer on eaoli side ; take the third wafer away, tatn the knife twice, and there will appear to be no wafer on either side. After a momentary pause, torn the knife again twice, and three wafers will appear on each side. The secret cf this capital trick consists in using wafers of the same sise and colour, and tomtaig tha knife so that the same side is constantly presented to the view, and the wafers are taken off that side, one by one. The three wafers will thus remain untouched on the other side, so that when you have first made it a^iear that there are no wafen on either side^ you may, apparently, show three on each, by the same meana. The way to torn the knife is as follows ;^-Wheu you lift it up torn it in your hand, with your finger and thumb, completely round, until the side that was uppermost when you lifted it oomes uppermost again. Thia is done in an instant, and is not perceptible, if adroitly
SIMPLE DECSPnOXB AND EAST TRICKS.
656
PHiLotoYKT GK&iTBD. — This feat is really an excellent one, and has astoniahed crowda of epeetators. Begin by itating that yon are about performing what yon have no doubt will be regarded as very extraordinary, and you will leave the company to dedde uiwn what principle of natural philoeophy it is aocom* pUahed. The mode of perfonnanoe is as follows : — ^Lay the piece of wood across the palm of your left hand* which keep wide open, with the thumb and all the fingers far apart, lest you be suspected of supporting the wood with them. Next, take your left wrist in your right hand, and grasp it tightly, for the purpose, as yon state,' of giving the hand mora steadiness. Now, suddenly torn the back of your left hand uppermost, and ss your wrist moves in your right hand, stretch out the forefinger of your right hand, aod as soon as the wood comes undermost, supixnt it with
the forefinger. You may now shake the hand, and after a moment or two, suffbr the wood to drop. The spectators sup- pose the wood is balanced by the action of the air, and try to do it themselves ; but, of course, thsy must, unless you have performed the feat so awkwardly as to be discovered, fiul in its performance. In this float, you must keep your fingers so low that no one can see the palm of your left hand ; and move your finger so carefhlly, tiiat its action may not be detected ; and if it be not^ yon may rest satisfied that its absence from round the wrist of the left hand will not be discovered, as soma of the fingers wiU be naturally supposed to be under the coaL When you have turned your hand over, do not keep the stick too long upheld, lest the spectators should take hold of your hands, and discover the trick; before their surprise is over, remove your forefinger, and suflbr the stick to fUl. If yon have no objection to reveal the secret, you can do it again, and while th^y are gravely philoso- phising upon it, suddenly lift up your hand (vide Cut) and expose the trick. This will, doubtless, create much amusement.
Tbs Kvorxd HjLvnxBacxxxF. — This flaat consists in tying a number of hard knots in a pocket-handkerchief, borrowed from one of the company, then letting any person hold the knots, and by the operator merely shaking the handkerchief all the knots become unloosed, and the handkerehief is restored to its original state. To perfonn this excellent trick, get as soft a handkerchief as possible, and taking the opposite ends, one in each hand, throw the right-hand md over the left, and draw it through, as if yaa were going to tie a knot in the usual way. Again throw the right-hand end over the left, and give the left-hand end to some person to pull, you at the same Uva» pulling She right-hand end with your right hand, while your left hand holds the handkerchief jQst beyond the knot. Press the thumb of your left hand against the knot to prevent its slipping, always taking care to let the person to whom yon give one end pull fhfst^
BO that, in fACi, lie U only palling against yoor Iq/K hand, Toa now tie another knot
exactly in the same way as the flxvt, taking care always to throw the right-hand end
over the left. As yon go on t^ing the knots, yoa will find the right-hand end of the
handkerchief decreasing considerably In length, while the left-hand one remains nearly
as long as at first ; because, in Ihot, yon are merely tying the nght-hand end round tkt
Uft. To prevent this from being noticed, yoa should stoop down a little after each
knot, and pretend to pall the knota tighter i while, at the same time, yoa presa the
thumb of the right hand against the knot, and with the finger* and palm of the eame
hand, draw the handkerchief, so as to make the left-hand end shorter, keeping it at
each knot as nearly the lengtii of the right-hand end as possible. When yoa have tied
as many knots as the handkerchief wiU admit of, hand them round for the company to
feel that they are firm knots ; then hold the handkerchief in your right hand, just bekrv
. the knots, and with the left hand, torn the loose part of the centre of the handkerchief
over them, desiring some person to hold them ; before they take the handkerchiof in
hand, you draw out the right-hand end of the handkerchief, which you have in the
right hand, and which yoa may easily do, and the knots being still held together by the
loose part of the handkerchief, the person who holds the handkerchief wiU declare he
feels them ; you take hold of one of the ends of the handkerchief, and desire him to
repeia after you, one — two— 4hree, — then to let go, when, by giving the handkerchirf a
smart shake, the whole of the knots will become unloosed.
Should you, by accident, whilst tying the knots, give the wrong end to be pnHed. a hard knot will be the consequence, and you will Icnow when this has happened the instant you try to draw the left-hand end of the handkerchief shorter. Ton mast, thei»< fore, turn this mistake to the best advantage, by asking any one of the company to see how long it will take him to untie one knot, you counting the seconds. When he has nntied the knot, your other knots will remain right as they were before. Having flniahed tj-ing the knots, let the same person hold them, and tell him that as he took two minotca to untie one knot, he ought to allow you fourteen minutes to untie the seven ; bat as yon do not wish to take any advantage, yon will be satisfied with fourteen seconds.
You may excite some laughter during the performance of this trick, by deaizing those who pull the knots along with you, to pull as hard as they please, as the hand- kerchief is not yours ; you may go to the owner of the handkerchief, and desire him to assist you in pulling a knot, saying, that if the handkerchief is to be torn, it is right he should have a share of it; and yon may say that he does not pull hard, which will cause a laugh agsinst him.
TRICKB WITH KONKT,
TBICKB WITH HONEY. M of Uie TOT fint thiugi ^n mnit lesrn to do In beglimlii^ IT eoqjnriiig pnctlo, li to pal* a coin. Tbli i» not aa 7 opsndon to eipUu, bU with the aid of a ooupls of u m will Br to do M. Pint baluice > coin (uy IT hBlf«.«niwn) on Iha tlpa of Uw ■enmd uul En, or, better tUIl, on tli« MCond iager 011I7, daadrios It by toaiMnB It light:; with the thnmb. Now clone tbe luuid qnicktr, and joa will find ibit Iho coin ll«e bi the palm. loiniedlately thro^ fisrwnrd the tbumbt ■0 Uu( the oola ii held between Ihs ball of ibe Ibomb It paut of tlie pain thnt ilea between the MOonJ and third Oncers, ne ihowa In the engraving. Yon can then apread the fingera and ihow the back of joar hanil to the company. Pnctlw tbia rreqneuUy, fini with ono , liand and then with the other. When ycm are perfect in thia trick yon ma; soon learn To Fua i Com IiiniiLI noM ona lUm *o txi onu.— Ton begin hy layin- that you are abuut to perfbrm ■ taj dilScnlt ftat. and that li li oecouaiy t> borrow two IwUci-owna (^ IioITImilcc). HaTlng oljtaliied the coins, tuck up your Blcevea to ihow that yon haTe HDthing concealed there, rick ap one coin with the thumb and eeoond , finger of yoar right hand. Kow pnlend to place tho cuin la your l^ hand {which yon immediately cloac), bnt io Ihct tMlm It with the right, and hold it eecnr«ty Ihiu. If you do tbia nBatly. yonr right hand win look aa L'it were empty.and the audience will (appeae llie coin to be in your le^ Now take the other coin in yooi right haiid. put that band behind yonr back, keeping Iha lalt beCore yon; conunaad the corn to " Foaa I" and M the Miaa moment chink the two eoini to^oUiert and then bringing yonr right band fOrward, Iny tbe eoiua on the labia. Aa a rule, nerBr repeat a triok dlreoUy, u
«58 LEGEBDElfAIN.
perfuniumoe la snre to be watched more doselj than the first j bni go on with it^ntV*' trick M quickly m possible.
Tkb Sxxnnrr Tbick. — ^Privately stiok a small portion of wax upon jour thnmbir Ton then tell one of the company that you will mideitake to press a sixpence so firmly upon his fosehead that he shall not be able to shake it off within five minntee. Ton add, that you will use no adhesiTe Bnbstance to make it stick, and that he must not touch it with his hand. Haying accepted your challenge, yon press the sixpence Tery hard upon his forehead with your waxed thumb, which will caose the coin to adhere to the thmnb, while its pressure upon the forehead will have occasioned such a pecuUsr sensation, that the party will be firmly persuaded that the coin is there. After the specified time has elapsed, drop the sixpence on the floor, and he will suppose that he has at length succeeded in shaking it off. You then invite him to a second attempt^ and when the five minutes have expired, instead of dropping the sixpence on the ground, you permit him to put his hand on his forehead, when his surprise «t n<x finding the sixpence there may be readily conoeiyed ; his ludicrous endeavour to shake off from his forehead what is not really there will aflbid inilnite amusement to the spectator.
AjmQut fooy ^performing (he Sixpenm^ 2Vidk.^Stick a little bees'-waxuxxut the nail of the longest finger on your right hand. Borrow a sixpence of one of the ecm- pany, and let him put it into the palm of your hand himself, that he may be •****<ij^ of its being there. Close your hand quickly, and secure the sixpence with the wax ; this may easily be done with a little practice ; then blow upon your hand, and s^, " Presto, pass I" Open your hand suddenly, and the ooin will appear to have yaniaheil, to the great astonishment of the spectators.
The Cuaiovs Gsoss. — Oomi>ose a cross, with thirteen sixpences, shillings, or any
Mo. L. No.1 other coins, as No. 1, in which it will be perceived you may
o o reckon nine in three diflbrent ways ; that is to siqr. in the entire
0 o o o perpendicular line, up the perpendicular line to the crraa hne,
o 0 o 0 o o and including the cross line, first on the right, then on the left.
^ ° These are the qualities of the cross. The puzzle is to take twa
^ o ^ ^® pieces away, and still to leave the same qualities in the
Q Q cross. This is done by taking away the two outside pieces of
o o the cross line, and lifting the two which remain one piece higher.
o 0 The figure will then be as No. 2.
Ths Sslv-suppobtbs Conr. — ^Privately cut the rim which is raised to paroteoi the
fkoe of a shilling, so that a little bit of the silver msy stick up ; tske the ooin in yonr
right hand, and by pressing it with your thumb against a door or wainsooc^ the bit
that sticks up will enter the wood, uid jvevent the coin from fUling.
Trb CovTXDsa^TB Skillxvo. — ^Having previously marked a shilling with a cross, conceal it under some object in the room; then request one of the company to lend yon a shilling, snd say, "Now, I am going to perform a triok with this, and that yen may know it again, I wHl mark it. Take a penknife, and cross it on the same side as the concealed shilling. Ask him if he wiQ know it again» and than knock midsr the
TBICKS WITH MONET. 65»
ftibld, and n^, *' Presto, be gone I'* Convey it secretly up your sleere, and teU the OQsnpany it has vaniahed, but yon have an idea where they will find it. Name the idaoe where yoa concealed the first shilling, which will be immediately disoorered, and from the similari^ of the mark, will be taken for that which was lent yon.
Tsa AvDfXTSD SnrxiroB. — ^To make a sixpence leap ont of a pot. — ^This is done by means of a long black horse-hair, fkstened to the rim of a sixpence, by a small hole driven throogh it. This feat should be done by night, with a candle placed between the spectators and the operator, thoir eyea being thereby hindered from discerning the deception.
Ova Sixnvoa BuBsn zaro Two. — ^Wax a sixpence slightly, and stick it to the under edge of a table without a cover. Then borrow a sixpence tram one of the company, and, turning up your cuA, and opening your fingers widely, to show that yon have not ancrther concealed, rub it qoiokly backwards and forwards on the table, with yonr right hand holding your left under the edge of the table to catch it. After two or UuBd feigned nnsuccessftd attempts to accomplish yonr olg'ect, you loosen the concealed sixpence with the tips of the fingers of the left hand, and at the same time sweep the borrowed sixpence into it. Bub them together for a few seconds, and then throw them both upon the table.
Ths OutMwuvLJ WaATpas Sixnvca. — ^To perform this trick you must have a handkerchief with a counter, the same siae as the sixpence, sewed in one comer of it ; take yonr handkerchief out of your pocket, and ask some person to lend you sixpence, which you must seem careftilly to wrap up in the midst of the handkerchief; but, at the same time, keep the sixpence in the palm of your hand, and in its stead, wrap the comer in which the counter is sewed into the middle of the handkerchief, and bid the person feel that the sixpence lent you is there. Lay the haodkerohief under a hat upon the table, take a glass or tea^cup in the hand which holds the sixpence, place it under the table, upon which knock three timea, saying, ** Presto I come quickly.'* Then let the sixpence drop from your hand into the glaas. Twke up the handkerchief by the comer which oontaina the counter, and ahi^ it, and the sixpence not being there, it will appear to have passed through the table into the glass or tea-cup.
When you have performed this trick, hold up the sixpence, and say, " Who gave me this sixpence f" The owner of it, being off his guard, will no doubt erolalm, ** I did." If he do so, put it in your pocket, at the same time saying, " Sir, you are the most charitable person I have met with to-day." If, on the contraxy, your joke should be anticipated, and the person pointedly replies, " I lent it you," then, to prevent a laagh being raised against you, return the sixpence with a very gracefhl bow, and say, '* Sir, your civility is quite overpowering." This joke can be tried at the completion of any trick which requires the loan of money.
To Da^w ▲ SxiLiiiirci our ov ▲ HAxnxncKixv.'Oet a piece of brass wire, and having filed each end to asharp point, bend it into a ring, exactly the sise of ashilling. Bequest one of the company to lend you a shilling, which yon put into the middle of the handkerchief. Take it out again to convinoe the spectaton that there ia no decep- tion, and in its place substitute the ring ; then twist the bandkarehief round until the
«0 LKGESDEMAnr.
riD?ununeilIi<lbrmoraabfmag. To inenus the d«c«ptioii, yon cui np it aTnn the table, end while doliis so, yon maj' aanej the ahiUios into one oT j-nur inisicou pockete. Beqiuet the panon who lent joa the ehilling to hold the handkerchier half Hsj down, ao that tha ahUlin^ eauuit peaa. with hla hand nndor the table. Then band the ring allghUy apef^ dimw it tbnngh the hajkdkerchkf, pnt it npon one of toot flagera, and bringing the handkerchief Trom under the table, tell ^a oompeny iba Bluiliug ha* paaaad from it into yonr waiatooat pookeb When the peracm who held Um handkerchief ba* eeanthad fbr it in tbId, prodnoe il bom ; onr waiiiooat pocket, aod
Tn Pranunn Con. — Pravido * reond Uo box of the eiie of a large aonff-boi, ■nd likewiee eight other boxea, wUch vriU go eesily into each other, and let the leas o/ ibem he of a aiae to hold a ahilling. Each of these boxee ahoold ahut with e hinge, end 10 the least of them there mnU be a amall lock, thatened niUi a ipriog, bnC which cannot be opened willioat a key i and observe, tbat hU Iheee bom mual ahst ao freely, that the7 may all be cloeed U ouoe. Flaoo theaa boiee in each oilier, with their lope open, in your pookeC; thenaek apereonfor a ahilling, and deain him to mark it, that it maf not be changed ; talfo Uiia piece in one hand, and in the otber hare anotlKr of the aanu appeaianee, and potcing yoor himd in yonr pocket, yoa Blip the piece that h miirked Into the leaat box, and, ehatting l^em all at once, yoa take them ont ; then, allowing tba piece yon have in yonr iuind, and which Uio oompany enppoee to be the anme that was marked, yon pnUmd to make it paaa throngh the boi, bnt deztennuly convey It away. Yoa then present the box, for the apectaCon da not knovr yet that there an more than one, to any penon in company, who, whan he opena it. Sod* Biiuthor, and anoCber, till he oome* lo the laat, hnt that be cannot open withont the key, which yon then give him ; and, retiring In a distant part of the nwin. yon tell him to take out the ahilling himaelf, and see if it bo the one marked. This tiick may be made mora enrprlalng by putting the key into the innfi^-box of one ef the oompany, which you may do by eaklng tOr a pinoh of enoff ; the key, being very amall, will lie con- cealed among the BnolTi when the penon who opena the bosea aaka Ibr tha key. tail him that one of hia Menda haa II id hli malT-boi.
Tea iKToniBILiTT luvi PoniBLi. — Flaoe three picoeaotmoneyon the lalile.aa in BMoat, amlilBalie aome penon to remore the piece tWjm
discovered, iraosrer No. I to the side of N< piece from the oonire without touching il y, or a ting, ia pot into a box ia the pna
TRICKS WITH IfONEY. Ml
•f a penon who holds it; the operator standa at a diatanoo. and hida him shake the box gently, and the piece is heard to rattle inside; he is desired again to shake it, and then it is not heard to rattle ; the third time it is again heard j but the fourth time it is gone, and is foond in the shoe of one of the company.
The box must be made on purpose, in such a manner that in shaking it gently up and down the irieoe within is heard ; on the contrary, shaking it hard, horisontally, a little spring, which IMls on the piece, prevents it from being heard, which makes the person who shakes the box imagine it is not within. He who performs the trick then touches the box, under pretence of showing how to shake it, and, although it is locked, he easily gets out the piece by means of a secret opening, availing himself of that minute to put in a fklse piece, and to leave the box with the same person, whom he causes to believe that the piece is or is not within, according to the manner in which the box is shaken ; at length the original piece is found in the shoe of one of the company, either by means of the person being in confederacy, and having a similar piece, or by sending another to slip it on the floor ; in this last case it is found on the floor, and the person fixed on is persuaded that it fell from his shoe aa he was taking it off.
Tax Masksd HALV>caowx.-~BoiTow four or five half-crowns, and announce that you can ten by the touch alone which coin was privately marked by one of the audience. You then spread the half-crowns singly on the cold marble mantelpiece, and after a few explanatory sentences, request one of the company to take one half-crown from the number, mark it, and pass it round to his friends so that all may carefkiUy examine it. Bo particular to ask every one to grasp the coin tightly, so as to make sure of the mark, that he may know it again. Then sweep the half-crowns from the mantelpiece into a hat or bag, and lot the marked coin be put with them. Shake the whole of them up together, put in your hand, and you win be able to take out the marked coin. This will seem very wonderftil ; but tho secret of the trick lies in the simple fact that the marked coin has got rather warm by IVequent handling, while the coins on the mantelpiece have got cold by contact with tho marble : the difllerence of temperature enabling you to select the right one immediately. To enhance the mystery you may peribrm this trick blindfolded, and there need be no distinctive mark on the coin beyond a diflbrence in its date from the others.
Ths ComrxBTiBLB Conrs. — Procure two imitative sovereigns or medals, and two white pieces resembling shillings, but not the genuine money, becauae of the lawa enacted against ** deflicing coin of the realm." Grind these pieces to half their thick- ness respectively, upon a stone or at the glass-grinder's; then placing a yeUow and a silver piece together, you will have two pieces seemingly gold on one side and silver on the other. A neat rivet should be employed to keep the ground coins together ; but if the one be composed of tin or antimony (Queen's metal), and the other contain iron, adhesion win take place by mere contact and pressure.
Lay one of these doable pieces on the xNUm of one hand, yellow uppermost, the other hand to have white uppermost ; then having bid the company to notice this, shut your hands, strike them together, or with one hand underneath the table, the other on the top, order the pieces to " Change, presto I" Whna this is goixig on, the pieces must be
UGIBDEMAIK.
qnickar, Mid Uw Brick 1* kln^i Imked apon vilh kdmintioD, mptt^aUj if Ihs canjnnT hM Uia ftddrVM to bazTow & ■hnnw^ uid ■ nrflTeigTi of tho compuiy, neither of which, bowtrtr, don he nuks dm ot, but plAoes tham kiida till the jugsls la oomplctod. In Ihii trlsk Ihs pow« of pBlmlog » ooia 1« broaehi into operation vtiy (uooeaanillT.
Tki OoFimH Cbaibid. — Twit two papsTB, three Incha aqokre each, dindad into two folde, of three equal partA on each aide, ao ttiat each folded paper mmuna otte inch square ; than glos the back pan of the tvo together, aa Ihe; are folded, and lut aa they are opened, ao that botli p«pat* eeam to be but one, and wliiah aids soertr ym open it ma; appeer to be the aame ; if 70a hare » lixpeDOe Iti one hand aad a ooimlv in the other, ahow one, ajul 70U may, by tuning the paper, aeam to change it.
Th> Pouid Pmr. — Place a emoolfa card on Hie tip of (ha middle flnger of yoni IcA hud, and on it. nloely belanced. and with il> oentre exactly ova- yoor flngs^ point, a penny piece. Then, by a amart OUip with the middle flngc* of your right hand, jon may eteike aw^ the card from under ^ penny. Icaring the penny poiaed on the Up of yonr linger. A reiy liule practice wfU enable yon to do thii trlok witbont ever tailing. The cam moat be BO careAdty BBuekealodriTe it nnUghtDtrthaangBi if yon fillip it npwaid. It will of ooune take the penny with it. Our young eonjuns will, in after lift, donbtleaa, be engaged in imporluit monetary taanaactiana, and althaugh ha will then oarafttUy avoid " Trick* with mrawy," he will probably find it oouTenient periodically to examine into the atateoTbia acaoanta, when we troat be m^ alwayi aniTe at a similarly ntlatactoi]' and onimpaachabla
or Legerdemain are Out Trlofca with C»da. oT whJch, Id Ihfl annlng pafffls, w« preMUt ooj" rMdenivith t oonqmheulTe WhAterer nu^be Uie otQHitioiu, and whechflr llk«j be mil founded '' or not, againM ovd-plSTbiK, It i> naUher onr du^ nor ineHnatlon here to > admined, b; aver^r liberal-minded person, ' tiial br the mere pnrpoae of performing a ftow ■'""■^f ftata of doxteritj, to Thlle away a winter erenlng, atuI T«1az tbe mind for a time fhmi echolaaUo atadlea, tbe Inaodactiob of a pACk of oanle la onexDeptionable. Id conclading theee praliznlnwy remarki we have to eipieu one regret, wtalcb ia, that wherau we have fteqaaotl; amoeed many Toang fHendt is onr cirele with the following nrd fMta, ws hate now lold "all ws know," and ai ereiy Ounilf will oer- tainl7 beoome poeseaoed of a copy of thl* new edition of the " Btrr'a Own Book," wa fear we am nerer reprodnoe on* of oat old jngslca without — aa tha man who malla an old joke Ii twined with "that'e a Joe Uillerl" — haying it oaat in onr leeth, •' thafi a Bct'» Own I"
We will eommenee onr inHrneUoni la Itdi Important branch of Legerdemain b/ initiaUng the beginner in tha myatariea of thoaa three moat pawerfol elernenla in almost bU card tiicks, " Shuffling," " MaUog the fttsa," and •' Forcing."
66i
LEGERDEMAIN.
BKUVWUX^.
In Bbowing tricks with cards, the principal point consists in shofSing them nimbly, and always keeping the required card either at the bottom or in some known place of Uie pack, four or five cards from it. In reserving the bottom card, yon most always, whilst you shuffle, keep it a little before or a little behind all the cards lying nndemcath It, placing it either a little beyond its neighbours, and right over the forefinger, if before, or if behind the rest, so that the little finger of the left hand may meet with it, which is the easier, readier, and better way. On beginning your shuffling, shuffle as thick as you can, and, at the last, throw upon the pack the bottom cturd, with as many more as yon would preserve for any purpose, a little before or a little behind tiie reet, teking care that your forefinger (if the pack lie behind) creep up to meet the bottom card : and, when you feel it, you may then hold it until you have shuflled over the canls again, still leaving your secured card below. Having acquired dexterity in shuffling you may proceed
*0 UAXM THE PASS.
This consists in bringing a certain number of cards from the bottom of the pa^ to the top. Many of the following recreations depend on the dexterous performanM of the mancBuvre. Hold the pack of cards in your right hand, so that the palm of your hand may be under the cards. Place the thumb of that hand on one side of the pack, and the first, second, and third fingers on the other side, with your little finger between those cards that are to be brought to the top and the rest of the pack; then place your left hand over the cards in such a manner that the thumb and Uie fingers may be arranged according to the annexed figures : —
The hands and the two parts of the cards being thus disposed, you withdraw the lower cards confined by the little finger and the other parts of the right hand, and place them, with an imperceptible motion, an the top of the pack. It is necessaiy, before you attempt any of the recreations tha* depe&d on making the pass, that you should perform it so dexterously that the eye cazmct distingnish the motion of your hand : otherwise, instead of deceiving others yxm. will expose yourself. It is also proper that the cards make no noise, as that Will oooastoQ suspicion. This dexterity is not to be attained without some practice. It is aomecimes usual to prepare a pack of cards by inserting one or more that are a small matter longer or wider than the rest ; and that preparation will be necessary in some of the following recreations.
lOBcnro.
Fordng is making a person take such a card as you think fit, while he sappoaea be is taking one at hasard, or according to his own inclination. It is almost impoaaible to describe how this is done ; we must» however, attempt it.
First, decide upon or ascertain the card to be forced ; this must be done privmte^. or while you are playing with the cards ; then place it» to all appeanmoe, earelwwly m
TRICKS WITH CARDS. 6.5
the pack, bnt still keep your eye, or the little finger of your left hand, in which you hold the pack, upon it. Now, request a person to take a card from the pack ; open them nimbly from your left to your right hand, spreading them backward and forward, so as to puzsle the person in making his choice ; the moment you see him putting out his hand to take a card, spread on the cords till you come to the one you wish to force ; let its comer be most inTitingly put forward in trout of the other cards, and let it make its appearance only the moment his fingers reach the pack. The mode of operation seems so Ikir, that, unless he knows the secret of forcing, you may put what card you please into his hand, while he thinks he is making a choice himself.
HaTing thus forced your card, you may tell him to look at it, give him the pack to ahuffle as much aa he pleases, for, in Ikct, do what he will, you, of course, can always tell w^ it was. A method of doing this cleverly is the first thing to be acquired ; for, without it, few of the master-feats can be performed.
Should you, however, happen to meet with any one in comiMny who may know this trick, you must have recourse to the following expedient. We will suppose the card you wish to force to be the ace of hearts, but the person you present the pack to will not take it, but persists in taking one near the top or bottom ; let him do so, still keeping yoor finger against the ace of hearts. As soon aa he has drawn the card he wishes, and while he is looking at it, slip the fourth finger of your left hand between the ace of hearts and the card immediately under it, press the cards tightly together in front, in order to conceal the finger, and desire him to retom the card to any part of the pack he pleases, at the same time opening the pack at the place where your finger is, taking care to withdraw your finger immediately, lest it should be seen, when the card will be placed under the ace of hearts. You then shuflle the cards slightly, for should th^ be shuffied too much, the two cards which are now together might chance to get separated. Ask the person who drew the card, whether he thinks his card is now in the pack ; he will, of course, answer in the affirmative ; you say that you doubt it, throw the top card of the pack on the table, face uppermost, and so on with the rest, until you have gone through the pack ; then ask if he has seen his card, he will answer. Yes : you can now either teU him the name of it, or finish the trick in any other way you maj think proper, as by your watching for the ace of hearts, you will perceive what his card is, by its being the one which immediately follows it. This and the forcing trick are more useful in assisting to perform other deceptions than as tricks in themselves.
THS ASSOSTSD PACK OV OABDS.
Several astonishing feats may be performed by means of a pack of cards assorted, with the help of a certain formula of words, in such a manner that the thirteen numeri • cal denominations of the cards {i.e., aoe to ten, knave, queen, king) occor four times in the same consecutive order, the four suits — ^hearts, spades, clubs, diamonds— also following in regular succession. The formulary is, of course, merely useftil as an aid to memory, and may consist of words strung together without much regard to sense. The following is the rigmarole with which we have been aoonstomed to make up the pack. Sixtg-hoo regimenU heat nimeti/'three, tn cams the king with eighty-ftmr ihtmeand
(M LEGEBDSlCADr.
mmi and teventy-ftve women. By reading ten fbr regimentB, aoe for tJi^w^w^ knave for men, and queen for women, you will see thai the whole thirteen cards are giren in thiA Bentenoe in the following order : — 6, 2, 10, 9, 3, king, 8, 4, aoe, knave, 7, 6, queen. To make np the pack, eeparate the fonr snita fkoe upwards and pick them up in the above order, alternating the suite in regular snooesaion, until you have picked up the whole pack. Of course you can alternate the suits in any wsy you plesne — ^heait, club, spade, diamond, or spade, heart, club, diamond, eto. ; but to render tiie trick essier for the memory it will be well to do it always in the same way. You will now find that let the pack be foirly cut any number of times the consecutive order of the cards, both ss regards numbers uid suits, cannot be destroyed, and knowing one card, you can always tell what card either follows or precedes it. You can now proceed to inform tbe spectators that after th^ have all cut the cards as many timee as th^r please you will undertake
To Tbll svsbt GAan nr nn Pxcx. — ^In order to do this you must privately ascertain what card is either at the top or bottom of the pack after the final cut^ and yon caa then, without a single mistake (although care must be ezerdsed in remembering the above formula and the order in whieb you have arranged the suits), repeat the whole X>ack one after another before th^ are turned up : for instance, suppose you have the suits thus — hearts, clubs, spades, diamonds, and the top card is ten of dubs, the cards vrillthen ran in the following order — 10 of clubs, 9 of spades, 8 of diamonds, king of hearts, 8 of clubs, 4 of spades, ace of diamonds, knave of hearts, 7 of dubs, 6 of spades, queen of diamonds, 6 of hearts, 2 of clubs, and so on. The same order exactly would. of course, have resulted had you ascertained the bottom card of the pack to have been the two of hearts. You have two things to think of oonouxrentiy, via., the numben and the suits, wherein consists the sole difficulty of the trick. You may oflbr to per^ form this trick blindfolded, having first ascertained a k^ card. Take care to lay the cards down again in the same order, and having convinced the audience that you know the whole pack, which you will i>robably do before you are half through it, you mi^ proceed to inform them that you have inherited from your anoestors olfaotocy organs of powerftd acuteness, and that you sre thereby enabled
To DismrounB Ojlsdb bt TKaza Sicslx.. — ^Having the kqy to the arrangement of tlM cards, ss above, you can hold them up one after another, smelling at the backs, but wiih* out seeing the &oes, and at first you may pass over the common cards, only undertaking to distinguish the picture cards. When you come to a queen you can say you smi^ scent, and it must be a lady ; to a king, it must be a gentleman, for you smell snuiT; to a knave, it must be a common fellow, for you smell stale tobacco. After a time yon can say that a little practice has rendered your sense of smell stiU more acute, and you can distinguish a ten by the large quantity of ink or paint it has on it, an ace by the small quantity, etc., etc. Some spectator will probably accuse you of seeing them in an opiK>8ite mirror, and you can convince him that there is none and oflte to be blind* folded. Do not persevere in this trick too long, otherwise some of your audience rai^ begin to smell — a rat. You can vary this trick (but not on the same occasion or beftee the same company) by undertaking to distinguish the cards by their weig^ which you
TBIOKB WITH CA&DS.
667
do hj taSkbig tfaem up (tbe oonaeoathre order being preaerred) and protending to weigh them on yoor forefinger. Yoa can then (preeerving the order of the pack and having them cat again) offiar
To Pics out amy Gxbd Kamsd vaox *hi Pack. — This 70a do by aaoertaining the top or bottom card and prooeeding as before, but mentaUy, not looking at any card till 70a torn up the one desired. Of conrse great aocunu^ will be required here, as if a mistake is made yon do not disooTer it till 70a torn np the wrong card and get laughed at, whereas in the fhst trick described, if 70a make a mistake 7on correct it imme* diately, and it is ezeosed and set down to a mere slip of the memory. In all these tricks 70a will be carefhl not to allow the pack to be t^n^ffled, although spectators ma7 cut as often as the7 pleaae. FinaU7, 70U can announce a gnmd feat» which 70a ma7 call
A GATKianro or tks Glaxts. — After the7 haye been again out (but not shuffled) as man7 times as ma7 be thought necessar7, deal them out into thirteen heaps of four cards each, with the coloured fttoes downward, and put them carefhll7 together again. When this is done, the four kings, the four queens, the four knaves, and so on, will be found to be together, to the no small surprise of such of TOur audience as have not discovered or surmised 7our secret.
DIVnrATIOV BT CIBM.
Borrow from the audience three articles, sa7 a coin, a ring, and a k«7. Then take twenty-four cards fh>m the pack, and say that by means of them 70U will be able to divine which of three persons, in 70ur absence from the room, takes the coin, which the ring, and which the ke7. Then give to one of the ^penaoB one card, to the second two cards, and to the third three cards, placing the rest upon the table. Before leaving the room sa7 that the person who takes the coin is to take as man7 cards tram the pack as he a]read7 has ; the person who takes the ring, twice as man7 cards ss he has; and the person who takes the ke7, four times as many cards as he has. Ton wiU then retire, and in a few minutes, when the three persons announce that th^ have arranged matters, yoa return and, consulting the remaining cards of the tweut7-four, at once announce who has the coin, who the k^, and who the ring. This seemingl7 difficult feat is performed in the following manner : — First 70U mentall7 call the coin a, the ring #, and the k^ 1 ; 70U then mentaU7 dlstiugnish the person to whom 70U gave one card as 1, he who got two cards as 2, and he who got three as S. The solution of the problem depends upon the permutations of the above three vowels (or their corresponding o1]!JectB), all of which that are possible will be found contained in the following French sentence, which must be committed to memory : Par fir Cesar jadi$ devmt «t grand prince ; thus (the third vowel being of coarse understood as following as a matter of course, although not oontalned in the word or words) ; —
|
1 |
a |
0 |
i |
Par fir |
S |
e |
i |
a |
devint |
|
2 |
e |
a |
1 |
Cfaar |
6 |
i |
a |
e |
»i grand |
|
8 |
a |
i |
e |
Jadis |
7 |
i |
0 |
a |
prince. |
era LKGERDEMAIN.
Kow, on retaining to the room, your object in oonnUting tfao remaining cards is eSmply to count how many are left, which most either be 1, S, 3, 6, 6« or 7 ; by no poesibihty could there be four left; and the above table will be an infallible guide to yon in deciding who has the seyeral articles : for if only one card be left it refers to the words Par fer, in which the first vowel is a, and the second e, therefore the person distin- guished w 1 has the coin, a, and the person distinguished as 2 has the ring, e, and the remaining person maut hare the key ; again, if six cards remain they refer to the words 9igrand ; and the person distingnished as 1 has the key, i. No. 2 has the coin, a, and No. S must have the ring, e ; and so with the other four possible remainderft. Observe that the first vowel in the word indicated by the remaining cards represents the person mentally known as 1, and the second him known as 2.
VHs Txv riixs or cibds niscnrouxsnan.
Take any twenty cards fh>m the pack, and arrange them in pairs' fikoes upwards, on the table. Ask each member of the company to select in their minds, respectively, any pair th^ choose, and to remember careftxUy the cards they select, so that they may be able to identify them when they appear again. Then giUher the cards xvp in a pack, taking care that the pairs do not get separated, and inroceed to lay them down on the table, fhoes upwards, in four rows, in the order represented hy the letters of the following words, which you must have previously committed to memoxy : —
N O M E N M IT T TT 8 D B D I T BORIS
You will perceive that these twenty letters consist of ten pairs. Taking the first pair of cards you arrange them to represent the two N's in Nomen^ the second pur to repre- sent the O in Nomen and the O in Roria^ the third pair the M in Nomet^ and the If in MutuB, and so on till th^ are all disposed of, each pair of cards representing a pair of letters. You then ask one person, who has mentally selected a pair of cards, in which row or rows his cards appear. If he says both in the third row, you know they mnst be the cards representing the two D's in Dedit ; if he says one in the second row and one in the third, you know they must be those represented by the T in Mutua and the T in Dedit ; if one in the first row and one in the third, they must be those occupying the places of E in Nomen and E in Dedit, And so you deal with all the other po-sons who have selected pairs. It is an improvement upon this trick to have the pairs of cards in the first instance placed with their backs upwards, so that you do not see the faces until you proceed to place them in the order of the letters. This is no additioa to the difficult of the trick, but perhaps enhances its mystery to the spectators.
TO TILL TSa VmtSMM OV PIPS OV JkJKT TWO CABBS nSAWT.
Ask a person to draw two cards ftt>m the pack, and to reckon small cards by Hxtat pipsy and court cards as ten. Then teU him to take from the pack as many cardSk
It.
TRICKS WITH CABDS. MT
flocnting eadi m one, aa will main tip the number of pipe on each of the two original carda to 26. Thia being done, on pretending to oonanlt the remaining cards (bat actoaUy merely counting them) yon will be able to announce the total nnmber of pipe on the two corda drawn, which will be the same aa the nnmber of carda left. For example, if a ten and a two be drawn, 16 carda mnat be taken to bring up the ten, and 23 cards to bring up the two, respectively, to 26. Add 16 to 23 makes 38, and the two cards drawn make 40, which subtracted from 62 leayes 12, and thia yon will find to be the number of cards left, and consequently the number of pips on the two carda.
The form of this trick — ^the principle remaining the same — may be varied by under- taking to perform it blindfold and without touching the carda. Supposing the cards drawn to be the aame aa before, ten and two, youaak the person to deduct each number firom 26, and to tell you the amount of the two remainders. Ten from twenty-six leaves 16, two from twenty-six leaves 24 — total 40 ; this amount you subtract from 62, and •Rive, as before, at the nnmber of pipe, vis., twelve.
As a further variation — ^useftU in caae any of the audience begin to speculate on the number 26 as being just half the pack, and therefore oflbring some kind of clue to the mysteiy — ^you can name any lees number than 26 (but higher than lo) taking care to add to the amount of the two remainders double the number of the difference between the number you name and 26. For instance, suppose the two cards drawn to be the aame, 10 and 2, and you mention 19 aa the number to be deducted from : then 10 from 19 leaves 9, 2 from 19 leaves 17, twice 7 (the diflbrenoe between 19 aud 20) is 14; add 9, 17, and 14 together gives 40 ; consequently the number of pips, as before, is 12 (».«.» the difference between 40 aud 62). You may now proceed
VO TBLl THE VrXBBB OV PITS OIT AVT THSBB CABDB.
The clever young arithmetician will have no difficulty in applying all the above principles to any three curds drawn. In this case, after the three cards are drawn, you must announce that you will draw one yourself, ostensibly for the purpose of con- Boltation, but really to reduce the pack to a nnmber divisible by three. You then pro- ceed as before, with the exception that the number to be made up with each card is 16. In the blindfold version of this trick the drawer of the three cards must deduct their respective numbers from 17, and tell the amount of the remainders, to which add one fbr the card you draw, and subtract the total from 62, which will give you the nnmber of the pips. This may be varied, on the same principle as in the previous trick, by naming a number less than 17, but more than 10, taking care to add three timet the difilsrence to the total remainders.
niB VBBVB TBIOX.
Force a card, and when the person who has taken it puts It in the pack, let hiiT shuffle the cards ; then look at them again yourself, find the card, and place it at the bottom; cut them in half; give the party that half Wbich contains his card at the bottom, and desire him to hold it between his flngw and thumb just at the comer ; bid htm pinch them as tight as he can ; then strike them sharply, and they will all fiiU to the ground, except the bottom one, which is the card he has chosen. This is a veiy
870 LBOERDEMAnr.
onriona trick, and, if well done, ia nally aatonJahing. It ia a great improTeBaant oi thia triok to put the ohoaen card at the top of the pack, and torn the carda ftoe aprwaid, 80 that when 70a atrike, the choosing party's card wlU remain in hia hand. actoaD^ ataring him in the feoe.
VKa KVATSS AJTD TRB C0V8XJLBLB.
Select the four knaves from a pack of cards, and either of the kin^ to act as eon- Btable. Conceal one of the knavea at the bottom of the pack, and laj the other tiixea with the constable down npon the table. Then sajr, three knaves went to rob a booae; one got in at the parlour window (patting one knave at the bottom of the pack, takxng care not to lift the pack so high that the knave already ait the bottom can be aeen), one got into the first floor window (patting another knave into tiie middle of tbs pack), Uid one got in at the garret window (patting the third knave at the tap of the pack). The constable being determined to captore them, eloeely follows the last knave (patting the king also apon the top of the pack). Yoa then direct aa mai^ of the company to cat the cards aa please, and yoa state tixat yoa have no doabt the con- stable has socceeded in catching them, which will be evident upon your spreading oat the pack in yoor hands, as the king and three knaves will be foand togirther. A vexy little dexterity only ia necessary to enable yoa to oanvqy a knave aeoratljr to tlie bottom of the pack.
raa Tusir-ovaa wmax.
When yoa have foond a card chosen, which you have previoosly forced, or any card that has been drawn, uid which you have discovered by the meana before deeeribed, in order to finish your trick cleverly, convey the card, privately, to the top of the pack ; get aU the other cards even with each other, bat let the edge of yoor top eaxd project a little over the reet ; hold them between yoor finger and thumb, about two feet trom the table, let them drop, and the top card (which must be, as we have said. the one drawn) will liedl with its feoe uppermost, and all the rest with their fiieet towards the table.
fO TILL A CkWD THOUOHT OV BLDmVOLD.
Take twenty-one cards, and lay them down in three rows, with their ftusea upward ; (<.«.) when you have laid out three, begin again at the left hand, and lay one card upon the first* and so on to the right hand ; then begin on the left hand again, and ao gocsk until you have laid ont the twenty-one cards in three heape, at the same time reqaasfeing any one to think of a card. Wnen you have laid them out, sak him which heap his card is in ; then lay that heap in the middle between the other two. Thia done, lay them out again in three heaps as before, and again request him to notice where bis noted card goes, and put that heap in the middle, as before. Then taking up the cards with their backs towards you, take off the uppermost card, and reckon it one ; take off another, which reckon two ; uid thus proceed till yoa come to the eleventh, which will invariably prove to be the card thought of. Ton must never lay out your carda lesa than three times, but aa often above that number as you please. This trick msiy be done without your seeing the cards at all, if you handle and coimt them carefbUy. To
TRICKS WITH CARDS. 671
6ivenjfy the trick, yoa maj nae a difltevnt nnmber of cards, bat the number choeen must be diyisible hy three, and the middle card, after they have been thrice dealt as directed, irill always be the one thought of; for instance, if done with fifteen cards, it must be the eighth, and so on ; when the number is even, it must be the exact half; as if it be twenty-four, the card thought of will be the twelfth, etc.
TO PBBDICT THl POSXTIOV OV X CAMD HT X PACK.
Desire a person to remember a card and its place in the pack, reckoned firom the bottom ; then, in a dexterous manner, convey a certain number of the cards from the top to the bottom, and subtract them, in your mind, firom the nnmber of the pack ; for example, the pack consists of flf^-two cards, and you have conveyed seven to the bottom : tell the person the card he has thought of will be the for^-fiilh, reckoning firom the number of the card, the place of which he has to name ; thus, if he says it is the ninth, you go on counting nine, ten, eleven, etc., and the card he thought of will be exactly the forty-fUth, as you announced.
Another way qf performing this trick i$ at fcHUnot : — Present a pack of cards to one of the company, desiring him to shuflSe them weU, and to get them shuffled by whomsoever he pleases ; then make several persons cut them ; after which you will propose to one of the company to take the pack and think of a card, and remember it, and likewise its order in the pack, by counting ftom the bottom card, one, two, three, four, etc., till he comes to the one thought of; ofibr to go into another room, or to be blindfolded, while he is doing this. Now declare in what order the card ahall be in the pack ; say, for instance, the twenty-fourth ; and, by attending to the following instructions, it will prove to be so : — Suppose the person who tbinkb of the card stops at thirteen, and that the thirteenth card was the queen of hearts, the number you have stated it shall be in the pack being twen^-four ; you return to the room, in case you had left it, or desire the handkerchief to be removed, if you have been blindfolded ; and, without asking any question of the person who has thought of the card, ask only for the pack, and apply it to your nose, as if to smell it ; then pass- ing it behind your back, or under the table, take, finom the bottom of the pack, twenty- three cards ; that is to say, one leas than the number you have stated the card thought of shall be; place these twen^-three cards on the top. This being done, retam the pack to the person who had thought of the card, requesting him to reckon the cards ftom the top of the pack, beginning by the number of the card he thought of. His card being the thirteenth, he will be compelled to count fourteen, and you are to stop him when he comes to twenty-three, reminding him that the number you have men- tioned is twenty-four, and that, consequently, the twenty-fourth card, which he iA going to take ui», will be the card thought of ; and so it will most certainly be.
fHB PiqUXT PACK.
Desire some person to choose three cards out of a piquet pack (a pack froim which the twos, threes, fours, fives, and sizes are excluded, leaving thirty-two cards), observ- ing that the aoe is to be counted eleven points, the court cards ten, and the other cards
672 LBGBBDBMAIN.
according to the ooimw th^ nuirk. When he has made his ehoioe, deaire him to lay on the table hia three cards, separately, and to pat upon each parcel as many cards as are wanted to make ap fifteen points ; that is to say, if the first card should be nine, ha most place six cards ; if the second a ten, five cards ; and if Uie third a knave, five cords upon it; this will make nineteen cards employed; consequently, there wiU remain thirteen cards in the pack, which you are to ask for, and while pretending to examine, cotmt them in order to he certain ef the number left ; add sixteen to the remaining number, and you will have twenty-nine, the number of points that the three ohoaen csrds contain.
VO M A-KS A CARD JUXT OUT OV THX PACK.
Let any person draw a card, and afterwards put it into the pack, but take care that you know where to find it at pleasure. This you may do by hamug forced it. Then put a piece of wax under th» thumb-nail of your right hand, and fksten a hair by it to your thumb, and the other end of the hair, by the same means, to the card chosen ; spread the pack upon the table, and, making use of any words you think fit» make it
jump from the pack about the table.
I
ns TXLL-TALS CABD8.
Tell any one to shuffle tho pock, to take off the upper card, and to notice it, then to lay it on the table, with its fluse downward, and put so many cards upon it as vrill make •up thirteen with the number of spots on the noted card.
For instance, if the card which the perwm first looked at was a king, queen, knat^ or ten, bid him lay that card with its face downward, calling it ten ; upon that let him lay another, calling it eleven ; upon that another, calling it twelve ; and upon theft another, calling it thirteen. Then bid him take off the next uppermoet card : suppose it to be an eight, let him lay it down on another part of the table, calling it eight ; upon the latter another, calling it nine, and so on in the same way, until he makea that heap up to thirteen ; then let him go to the next uppermost card, and so proceed to lay out the third parcel in the same way as the two preceding, and should the uppermost card be an ace, he most lay it down, calUag it one, the next two, ete.
All this should bo done either while you are out of the room, or your back is turned ; upon your turning round, you take the cards which have been left ; your ol^ect being to count, without its being perceived, how many there are remaining, you throw aaide the three top cards, and lay the next three on the table, with their ftoes upward : then throw away one, then turn up one, and so on in the same way, until you aaoevtain how many cards there are ; we will suppose that you find twenty-five cards lefl ; dedaet ten, when the remaining fifteen will be the number of all the spots contained in all the bottom cards of the three heaps, counting the court cards as ten ; you must reooHeot that ten is, in all cases, the number to be deducted from the cards remaining.
Having found that fifteen is the number of spoto on the carda, do not declare it at once, but select tram those cards which lie on the table, Ikoe uppermost, three or four which added together will make fifteen. For instance : should there be a deuce, a five, and an eight, lay them aside for a moment, and taking the other cards ttam
TRICKS WITH CARDS. 673
which yon selected the three, pat them along with those which yon prarionsly r^ected ; yon now hand the three tell-tale cards to any person, assuring him that the number of pips on those cards will be the same as those on the bottom cards of the three heaps, which will be found to be the case.
TBM CAMD OV SXTXVATXOir.
Get a pack of cards in which there is one card longer than the rest; open the pack at that part where the long card is, and present the pack to a person in such a manner that he will natuiaUy draw that card. He is then to put it into any part of the pack, and shuffle the cards. Tou take the pack, and offbr the same card in like wniwTiar to a second or third person, taking care, howeyer, that they do not stand near enough to obeerre the card each other draws. Then draw several cards yourself, among which is the long card, and ask each of the parties if his card be among those cards, and he will naturally say Yes, as they haTS all drawn the same card. Then shuffle aU the cards together, and cutting them at the long card, hold it before the first person, so that the others may not see it» and tell him that is his card. Then put it agaim in the pack, and, shuffling them a second time, cut again at the same card, and hold it in like manner to the second person ; and so of the rest.
If the first person should not draw the long card, each of the parties must draw difltenent cards : when, cutting the pack at the long card, put those they have drawn oTer it, and, seeming to shuffle the cards indiscriminstely, cut them again at the long card, and show one of them his card ; then shuffle and cut i^ain, in the same manner, and ahow another person his card, and so on, ronembering that the card drawn by the last panon is the first next the long card ; and so on of the others inlike manner.
na oxosav casd BBvaAixn bt a mrcB ov Bvurw.
Force a card, suppose, for instance, the five of clubs, having previously written the words, or drawn the spots, on adean dieet of paper, with a tallow candle ; then hand the pack to the person on whom the card is forced ; bid him place it where, and shuffle the pack how, he pleases ; ask for a pinch of snuff, strew it over the sheet of paper, blow the loose grains off, and the remainder will stick to those places which the tallow has touched; thus telling the person what card he has chosen. The paper, be it observed, if done lightly with the candle, will not appear to have any marks on it. For this trick we are indebted to a celebrated performer of legerdemain, and it ia really a most excellent one.
to KILL AMY VirMBXB OV OAIDS DSAWir.
This is a good extempore trick, i.e., one done without any preparation, of the pack or otherwise, and may be performed as follows : — ^Throw a pack of cards, fhees downwards, on the table, ask one of the company to draw a card but not to look at it, and you tell bim (before seeing it yourself) what it is, which he is to remember when called upon. Then take the card and hold it in your hand, &ce towards yon, and proceed in the same way with seveml other persons. Then draw a card yourself, and before looking St it say, *' I shall draw the ao-and*so." You then have all thedrawn cards In your
43
f7t liEGERDEMAIH.
huid with Ifaa boo* tavardi ;oa, knd begin by taUng IliB fint penon what tari jm
told him b« draw. and. upon hii tsUiog joa, ^oii throw It on ths tabla, and *> m
with tha othan. Finally yon ■»;. ■' I draw the BO-ud-aa, Mid there it ia." The
secret of (hie triok is thai joa priTOIalr manage to bei
the eardfl — eaj the Idng of hearta — which 7011 keep jonr eye on Hud
torn comeg ; when the Brat pereoQ haa ilrawn, job lay, befon taking hi
Hm king of heart) ;" yoa then lake It ap, and eeelog what it ia, yon u
name oF the card drawn b; the next placer, and eo on. When tlie Ian peraon has
card yoa draw (bsTore eeeing It), and yon of cooree draw tbs king of beaita. Too can then gire all the playen Uie carda they calUoi, and yoor own bx>.
Drive a flat-hraded and tharp-poinled nail throngh a nrd. force a aimilar caid on any peraon preaent, receive It into the pack, dexURnuly drop it, and pick op. bdbbii, the nailed card ; place Che latter at Iba bottom of the paok, whicb take In yonr rigkt hand, and throw it, with the bottom Ibrward, agalmt » wainaoot or door 1 tbe nailsl card will then- be fixed, and the raat, oT courae, lUl to the gronnd. I'ako can to jUtee yciuT nail BO that the troat of the card, when fixed to die door, may be azpoeed : to efl^ thia, you must alao remember to pot the bock oT the oaid otitvard, placing It (heo to &c* with the othera, when yon put it at tlie boClom of the paok.
Take a pack or carda, and paint the backe of one half a( the pack with what Bgnna yon think lit, ae men, women, birda, fiowen. etc Alia paint the Ikeca of tbe other half of the corda in the same manner ; Ihoa yon wUI haT* a complete pad df odd pktorea, and may, by ebowing the bcea of that part of the pack wboee backa only have been pal&led, uid then, by a momentary ahnffle, appamlly trans- ^ / forming them into a eet of ffroteeqae flgnitt, ^odace
tbe pack ; It la aa foUowi : — Take a doaan caida. or more, and draw a line from the right-hand npper comer, to the left-hand lower oonwr of ibe f^ce of each of them ; thejr will ihna be all eqoally divideiL Then paint part of lome odd fignie on tbe right dniiiiin
of eaob eatd, learSng the len nntotiched. By a little deiteri^, yon may now wiinii id
tranaform a aet of common carda into a painted pack.
TBICK8 WITH CAKBS. 675
eontriv^, without being peroetvod, to get all the other cards with the jtointB of their pips in the aame direction ; then reqoeat a person to choose a card ; do not force one, bat let him choose whichever he pleases. While he has it in his hand, and is looking at it, carelessly torn the pack in yonr hand, so that the position of the cards may be revened ; then bid him pat the card he has choeen into the centre of the pack; shnflBe and cat them, and yon may to a certainty know the card choeen, by its point being npeide down, or in a difibrent direction from the rest of the pack. The drawer of the card may perhaps be acqoainted with this trick, and will torn hig card ; if yon perceiye that to be the case, yoa will refrain from taming the pack, or dexteronaly tarn it twice, when the result will be the same.
THX CABD DEAWir nOX TSS COXT POCXR.
State to the company that yoa will permit any penon to select a card, which you will allow him to conceal in the pack, and then pat the pack in his coat pocket, and yet, without looking at the cards, yoa will draw fttmi his pocket the one he selected. To accomplish this, you must have a card in the pack which is a trifle longer than any of the others. Force it upon the person, and when he has placed the pack in his pocket, by introducing your hand, and holding the pack top and bottom with the thumb and fingers, yon will easily discover the long card. You forthwith produce it, to the astonishment of the gentlenmn who selected it, and who will doubtless consider that yon have reached the acme of pocket-picking proficiency.
TBM BSOAL ALLIAITCa.
Take four kings, and place between the third and fourth any two common cards whatever, which must be neatly concealed ; then show the four kings, and place the six cards at the bottom of the pack ; take one of the kings, and lay it on the top, and put one of the common cards into the pack, nearly about the m*ddle ; do the same with the other, then show that there is one king at the bottom ; derire any one to cut the pack, and as three of the kings were left at the bottom* the four will, of course, be foond together in the middle of the pack.
TKX CAin VJTDVm TH« HAT.
When yon have discovered a card by forcini^, or any other way, contrive to get the
card to the top of the pack, which place on a table under a hat ; put your hand beneath
it, take off the top card, and, after seeming to search among the cards for some time,
draw it out.
TO cowxBT Tora ACTS xvTO Tova Kxvas.
Select from a pack of cards the four aces and four kings, and let them be laid, an ace and a king alternately, through all the eight cards. Shuffle them until one of the aces becomes the bottom card ; then, utting strange words, put your hand containing the cards to the edge of the table, and privately let part of the second card, which is one of the kings, be exposed. Show the spectators the bottom card, which is one of the aoe^. fxiA be sure to cover the part of the king exposed with your fingers. Draw out the same
an UEQSRDEJtAIN.
king, aul lar It npon Ilia table ; Own ahoBIa tha «rd« mi balbn, and joa wfU fasTB ' two aosi at Uia boUom ; taka off Ihs lop oanl, and plaoe It is the middla al tha jmtk j do Iha uma with tlie boOom Dard, which ia ona of the acea. and then ahnr anolhv aea Bt berois, and, in In plua, la; down tbcreon a ting. Ptnoeed in tba aauia maoBer until TOIL have laid down the fonr Unga ioitead of the ftmr aoea. nw apasMaa wiD imaglna tiia fbnr aoca mn Ijinf npon tha tafala, and Than th^^ am ttim«d iMp wiU ba graally nupriaad a( tha tnnannaatioiL.
ProTlda a dnmlar mimi', Uie frame or which moat ba M leaat la wide aa a oaid. Tha glaai la the eenlre muat ba made la moTa in Im gmoTea, at A B and C D i and ao voeh of tha aUrerinK moat ba aorapad off aa la aqnal tfi tiia ciaa of a oanmuD caj^ Obaarva that the glaia ahoold be Ukewlaa wider than the card. Than paaU orv tha pan where tlha qnickailver ia nihfaad oB, a Ctt4 that exactly lita tha apaca. n^e a
at be placed againat a paitilioti, (himgli which two at
and qnSak^Ter. While he glaaa la bdng drawn forward, jon elide off the card Ihva the bottoiB of the pack, and oanvej' it awaj. Tha card Exed to the mirror maf eaaHy be changed each tiine tha experiment ia perfbrmad. Thia recreation m^ alao be made with a print that bae a Rlaaa beftira it, and a frame of anJItcient width, by maUng a ahl inthenwnp. through which the card ia to piaa j but the aObM will not ba eo aUkng
ea-iil]-. with a knob to prerent iti ooming Umm^ Onr yaug raadata win ijearty
undflitand oarmaaniog. whan we lay, that in all reapeela it n>»at nw«h>e a poft-gm. wiib the single eioeption thai the altok which fltatlvtsbeiBiut beef the Milage (tf the Mb*, eiolBBiTalr of the haob.
TBICES WITH CABDS. 677
Next iteep a card in water Ibr a quaxter of aa boor, peel off the fkoe of it, and doable it twice aoroea, till it beeomea one-fourtb of the length of a card, then roll it up tightly, and thmat it np the tabe till it beoomea even with the bottom* Youthen throat in the atick at the other end of the tabe till it joat toochea the card.
Having thna provided yonr magic wand, let it lie on the table ontfl yoa have oocaaion to make nae of it, bat be oaretal not to allow any peraon to handle it.
Now take a pack of carda, and let any peraon draw one j bat be aore to let it be a aimilar card to the one which yoa have in the hollow atick. Thia mast be done by forcing. The peraon who haa choaen it will pat it into the pack again, and, while yo.i are ahnffling, you let it fkU into your lap. Then, calling for aome eggs, deaire the peraon who drew the card, or any othor peraon in the company, to choose any one of the eggs. When he haa done ao, aak if there be anything in it. He will answer. There is not. Place the egg in a saucer ; break it with the wand, and, pressing the knob with the palm of your right hand, the card will be driven into the egg. Yon may then show it to the spectators.
THi irovsa nr nn pack.
Have a pack of cards flMtened together at the edges, but open in the middle like a box, a whole card being glued on aa a cover, aod many loose onea placed above it, which require to be dexterously ahuffled, so that Uie entire may seem a real pack of cards. The bottom mtist likewise be a whole card, glued to the box on one side only, yielding immediately to the exterior pressure, and serving as a door by which you convey the moose into the box. Being thus prepared, and holding the bottom tight with your hand, require one of the company to place his open hands together, and tell him you mean to produce somethiug vexy marvellous firom this pack of cards ; place the cards then in his hands, and while you engage hia attention in converaafeion, take the box in the middle, throw the pack aaide, and the mooae will remain in the handa of the person who held the cards.
«K1 BOVSnaXiJHBS.
Take a pack of carda, and place all the aces together, the twoa, the threea, and so on np to the kings. There will then be thirteen diflbrent heaps. You say, " Here are four houses (laying down the four aces separately), which four knavea enter for the purpose of robbing (laying a knave upon each aoe), and take with them their implementa for houaebieaking (and upon each of the knavea yoa lay a two, three, foor, five, aix, aeven, and eight). The mistreases of the house come home (laying a queen upon each of the heaps), bringing their money with them (laying a tiine upon each queen). Shortly after, their husbands also return (laying a king upon each queen), also bringing money with them " (laying a ten upon each heap). You have now iUfpn^,^ of ^Q the cards, which form four distinct heaps. Then lay one heap over the other, and let as many persons cut them as please. When this is done, if you commence at the top of the pack and lay the cards fluse downwards, one by one, so as to make thirteen separate heaps, you will find all the aoea together, the twoa, and ao on, aa yoa original^ placed them.
LESSRDEUAIK.
On (lu Boa of cloba fix, b; Blightly mWDg it, « haut, and oaOaatMot hmti k elab, In each a muiner ttaU tlisy wUl euily slip oEt Show l>in« two Ma to the omi- piulf ; Clisa, UJdng iha aoe of olabe, d»in « panoa to pu hii foot npos i^ utd u joa pUce It on lilt gioond. diaw awnr the slab. In liks mKinsr, pl>cs the seeming Aoo of bcutii ODiler lite Ibot of uuMher pnon. Ton can then conamend ttie two curL* to ohange their plaoee ; and Uut the; olxg' joor ooounand, the two penona, on taking up Ibeic aud<. will ban ocular damonitratkni.
A deception aimllar to thii is umMlmea pnctised with one oaid i aoppeee the ace at diamondi, OTor which a olnb is paaMd Ughtly. UUr ahowlag i, paeon the card, ;«■ let him hold one end of it, and ;on hoU the other, and, while 700 amnu him wlili dia- ooono, tUda off the htart. Then, Uv^ ttas cwdi on the table, bid Mm ODTSr it with his hand ; ;oa then kDOOk uider Omi table, and command the dob to tnm into the ace
A conlMaiaW [1 pnTionely (0 know the caid 70a have taken from the pack and pal into jaitT pocket-book ; then preaent tha pack to him, and deaire him to fix on a card (which \n will snppoM to be tbe qoeeii of diamonds), and place the paek on the table : then aak him the nsjne of Uie card, and when he sayi Uie qoeen of iHamfmHw, uk him if ha Is not mistaken, and if he be snie that Uie caid ta in the pack t When he replies in the atfirmaUTe, la;. " It might be Ibere when fon looked over Uie cania, bat I believe it is now in my pocket ;" then des!i« a thiid pemra to pot his hand in yonr pocket, and take gal yoor book, and whan it Se opened the card wUl appear.
The I—*-"-' in thla, and, in fbct, la all similar tricks, most be dexlennu i he oogbt 10 nndentand what yon wish him to do b; tiie ilighteet hint — a oooffh, a motiotl of tha Hoger, or oonjnrlng stick, ao that he ms; bo as aooampUshed a couMonU ■■
Call]), l^t Sipiml pig.
FRAT8 BKQmBINa 8FS0IAI. APPARATUS, OR CONFEDEBACV,
^xW^OST oTthe trlob parfiirnitd b; Ihs profBnlaiul oonjnran are carried on
P y>f b7 the kid ordonrBdanUa, or b; mechuiical and cbemical msuu, ninmii
M n ] ami nnbunm to tbn utdknca, whoan attantlcm ia diTerted by Tarlona
^r^ O' tnganlmu derjcn ftnni a minnte enamlnatlon of Uia melhoda whareby
ji^2}^ ^^ apparent wonden are worked. To deacribe the elabomta meohaniani
^^d amploTad In eoma of tba aatoniihing reata of a Hondln, a 8tadaie, or an
■^ Andertoo, mnld ooonp; onr apaoa nnneceaurllf, aeaias that lite bieha
eonlA noi be perfbrmed wtthonC t large axpenditiiie of mono;
e are othen — and thoee not the leait aninaing— irhioh aa ingenkioa
irithoat muoh dUScullj. Borne of the beatoTtliem we now proosed
BlaboiBta.
Get two foimele lolderad one within (he other, bo aa to appear like ana ; ponr a little wine into the nonller end of the ontalds fannal, torn it np. and keep the wine in br planing yoni thnmb at the bottom of the funnel ; thit mnU be done printely. Than ponr loma mon wine into the broad part of the maehlne. drink It olT complete); i tarn (he broad end of the fniuiet downward, to show thai all la gone ; and inUantlr tnmlDK Tonnelf >boa(. pnnonnoe lome mystic lenu i Chan wllhdimw yotir nnger Ihmi
Prorida an oMkto book of pUis p»p«r, of wtuteTsr thiokma Ton plisa*. Tnra UTS' MTm leaTH from the baglnuliig, uid palal ■ grmip of flowan ; tbsii turn onr gcn«n TDOia lOBTM, Bod pAiDt l^B Haiiia K^Bio, uid H On, until yon have turned the book
leaveL Tnni the book ov«r again, and paint npon eror? tilth laaT a pami, and ihBi paMe Brlp* npon them h j-on did Dpon the Bnt, odIt a little lonr down. Pmoaed in thii tDaimer lUitU yon have painted the book ftill of piotorea of Tartona aoAa. '■^•^"fr ^are that one aide of the learaa it left blftnk. Whan yon naa tha boak, hold it in yoaz left hand, and eat the thamb of foor right h&nd apon the lint of tha parehnMnt Mstb ; ran the book through, and it will appear fall of flowen; than bQ^ uid, blowing npon iha book, mn it through again, wltii Uie thumb npon the Beoond atip of panhmimt, and it irill appaar fall of parrola, and u on with the othai saiiaa of plMnna. Aftovaida, B tha book, and rtm it through aa befbm, and it will appT mmprmiil of bluk
fignni of giaia, an inoh and a half high, r
Harlecinlii, Oolumbtna, and Fanaloon, whidi may be obtained at the gian-bkiwer'a, with a snaQ holo iri flaoh of their lege. Inuuet^ tbem into wMar oODtainad la ft glui bottle, which ihoold be about niteea inchea high, azid coveiad with a bladdir tied that over the top. A amall quantttj of air nnrt be laA betweeii the bladder and the nifkea of th* w»(er. Whan jos wlah (he Sgnraa to go down, ptaw roor hand haid upon the top, and th^r will ■ink ; when yon wiah them to riaa, take joor hand awaj, aod tha; will Immediately de ao. Tariom loya made to lUnitntle the aetaotillo prinoipla of tba may be ponhaaed of the philoaophloal iualranaM ■-*>i— i
r, or braaa, or ai^y othv metal ; tbay !■■* D BTeiy reipeot. aioapt that one mnat have a mmb thrnn^ a, whole, without a notch. Show the whole ring, bat oosoeal IhB whioh haa the notoh ; and tMJ, " Kow, ru put tJiia ring through my ohee^" and prlTUflly Blip tba notch over one aide of yonr tnooth ; then take a email Kiek, which you moBt have in rsadineei, and Blip the whole ring npoa It. holding yonr batid ow U, about the middle of Che atiok ; bid lomebody hold fkit the Btkik at both enda. and my, " Bee Ihli Hug in my ohaek } it Inmi round :" than. whUe yon perooiTB tbam hMn their eyes upon that ring, on a audden, whip it out, and itrika it apaB tha atlck i attha ■ams lima oonoeallng and whiriing tha ring which yon hold yonr band onr, mmd about the Rdok, and It will be thought that yoa have brought that ring npoa the ^id which waa upon your ohaek.
TEATS BZQUmCfO SPBCUL AFPABATtTB, OK CONPEDERACS.
Cat ont tlie fignn of a, dne«"i- nunmUd, In iriMd : lat the bom ba In a pnnefng poiilloii I pnt lbs hind-Iegi on the edge or a Ubis, ind It will, of coona, bU offi but jon G&n prevent it from mo doin^i b; Adding to Ua weight. For tliia porpoae, you moit baTS ■ lluls bole made In the centre of it* belly, into wbloh ran one aaii of a piece oT wire, ao bent bwikwmrd that tbs otber end of it, to wblcb a weigbt is Sied, may be onder Ibe table. Tbs dngooa will not oulf stand safe, fant yon may put him in motion, and be will prance np and down, wltbont tbere being the least danger of 4, ^ hii nOUoe. The wire ahonld be ooniiderably f^ longer In proportion to tbe alee of tbe borae^ian ia repreeented in the engraving in the margin, if yon wlih the Sgnre to oome mncb below tbs edge of the table when pranoing. If it be no longer than tbat Bbown in tbe cot, (he bone's (Ore-lega
can only desoend lo a distance eqoal to that
between tbe weight at tbs sud of tbe wire, and (be bottom of the table 00 wbicb the flgnre la aeL In fftct, Che dragoon may be made to desoend lower, and riie higher, tn [goporlion to the length of the wire, if it be proper!/ ooryed and fixed in the figai«.
To sdM tbis fMt, ymi moat baTS a knllis made with a gap in the middle of Ihs ilads. Too most Donceal Chs gapwitii theforcAngsra of the right hand, and tbea place ha knifk aaroai yoor noae or hand, which will then appear 10 be half cot olT.
Prorlde yonraelf with a pleoe of brnaa wire, pointed al both enda, and bant ronnd lo u lo (Ortn a rind, abont the liae of a wedding-ring. This yon oonceol In yoiir band in lbs laiDe way as yoa palm a ooin. Ton onnucence yonr twrlbrmanoe by borrow- ing a aUk poGkst-bandkerohiaf from a gentleman and a wedding-ring from a lady ; and Teqneat one paraon to bold two of tbe comsra of tbs bamlkerohisf uul anothsr to bold the otber two, and to keep Uiem at foil itretcb. Ton next exhibit tbe wedding. ring to the company, and azmonnce that yon will make it pass throngh the handkf^ chief. Then place yooi band nnda the handkerchief, and snbatltstiog the falsa ring, wblcb yon bad prerlonaly concealed, press It against the centre of tbs baodks- ebisf, and desire a Hiird pcnon lo take hold of lbs ring tbnagb tbs handksTabiaf, and to close hia linger and thnmb Uiroagh tl» hollow of tbe rmg. The handkerchief la held io tbia Dumaar (br lb* pnrpoea of ehowing that the ring baa not been placed wilbln a. Ibid. Now deaire the psreoos holding the comen of tbe baudkerebiat to lat Iham
•lilt ntalnlns Ui hold. LetuiathcrparwniiuiirgncptlieliudkerclusruligtiUrMlia plMiM. thng or four InchM below the ring, and (all tlis pcnon holding Uw xiag to M It ga, when It will bg sridenC to the eompwi; ibtx the ring li aeoan within tha faand- k«rshi«r. Ton than lell tha peiwm who ei«p> ths h&ndkenhisf to hold ■ h>t am it, Ukd, laaifng jonr huid nnderaeath, yoa opan tha {bIh ring b; bending ona of ita pointa ■ Ut(l« Mida, kad bringing ona point gantl; through th* bandherchieC ;an eaai(r dn« oat tha wnn»lnrtBr, balag caranu la rnb tha hole mads in tha hiadkarehiaf. with Tour OngCT and Uiamb, to oonoaKl Uis fnwtore. Yon than put the bonowad ring oror th* ootalda of tha mlddla of tha haodkarchiaT, and dedTiiig tha pnwn who hold* Ilia hat to taks It away, jun ahow the ring (placed aa daaoribed) to the oompanr { uking an n ia engaged, id oonceal tha braaa ring.
Uaka a figure. roaBmbliog a
pith of the BldeT-tt«e, wbloh ia lolt, and can eaail; ba cut into any fbimg than pnivide for !t an hemiiipliBiical base, or aome raiy haayy inbataaDe. each aa tha half of a leaden ballad mada Tary imooth on the oonrex part. Cament tha fignre to tha plana part of tha bamlapbare ; and, in whatever altnadau It la placed, whan led to Uaalf, it will rtae upright. In ihii matoBV were eoDMrnetsd those amall flgntaa. nailed Pm liana, aold ai Paiii) tha; were formed Into bataallona, and being mwle to Ul down, by drawing a rod orar them, they immadlately itartad up again ■> loan u it wa* TamoTed. Vb think that the tgan tf a beim. or maiter at tha flercmoniaa, l« mnoh mote apisofKiaia (Or thia biok than ttuU of a aoldlar. aa the lanar ealdoa bowa, while by the former, the moat prolbnnd incllnationa an oAck perrorraed. By moving it once downward, a ■aneaaion of hovm ' nay be prodnccd. TheTombola,OTOhincflelQnibler, iaaiBiilBlj Btmctad. Indeed, aararal of tiie mora elaborate tnoka tjt tha dapandsnt on balanced weighta, ooneealad aprlngi, hIliB( OB of the prinniple whhsb gOTera* tha Bowing Baas.
Tha following ia a famona hat with the monntebaiika at oonntry kin. nw poddiac eonaiata of twelTS or thirteen little tin hoopi oorered with eoOon, and ao made aa to lUl one throngh another. Thla ao4ialled pndding la held frtTBtely tn roar leA tuod. and with jmor right hand yon take a ball ont of yonr pocket, and i»B>end to pot it inta yonr left hand. Bnt. Initaed. lat It alip into your Ii^ and olap your padding, irtuch will be thought to be the ball, into yonr month : then IncUoe your band, opn yonr mooh, and the pndding will allp down at ita fnll length : witb ymr right hand aDik* It iaae yonr month again ; after doing thla three or tanr linieai yoB band, and put it aalda without tnipidoD.
FKATS BEQUHtlNO BFECUL APFABATTTB, OR COirnCDBRAOT. (81
Bomir ■ ring uid plttoe It InaBdo ■ huidkBrohlflf. Hake two p«noTu liold fla«h one and of k ainiJI itiDk, and corer Che middle of 11 with tba handkeroUof, which yon •oddeulj pull Bwa7, and dimTsr the ring on the (tiok. The eeoivt 1* (hia -, — There ii a pocket in ILb handkenihlef. In whloh a apllt or diTided ipring ring l« oonoeaJed ; yon mi ring, and while the aadlanoa are looking at the perwnu holding the mck.
pBlIegn, tiM nee of vhloh mar glMae» be eean b; Hait, eoutnict two uuie oouiua nl tatalj almllar weight and general Let, bowerer, the wheel*
(hanUuMol the other. DaTonrwork
■0 neatly, that the wheal* of each Eoa;
ran eqittUy well on their reapeotlTa
nxlee. Next praride (wo hunp* of
load, which mniE tall; with each other =
to a ecnipla, and ba enffloianUj' heavy _i
to poll the eberioM up the phwe. Fix ~
a piece of Ihtead to the &ODt of each of
tba duulota ; pata Iheaa ttmadi through the polleTi. uid faiten oi
to each of them. The Ihreada, be it remarked, should be long enough only to naoh
from tli« obarloU. when placed at the root of the incliosd board, throngh tlu pnlleTe to
tbe leads ; and the boud ahoold be ao indlaed that the dietanee hom the pnlteye to (ha
grooad be piedeelr the Mnie ae that of the obaiiote to the pnllaya. Tow apparataa
being thai ready, fliat welgli the oharlou together, and then the leaden balance^ in
the preienee of (he epectaton, and let them inapeot joor apparatne (o *e* that all i*
IklTj than start yonr oharinta, and noCwKhelanding tbe eqnalllir of their welghla, and
that of the leads, one of the Ooaohes win conslderabl; owattlp the other ; that wtth
tbe hlgheet wheels being alwvi (be wlnosr of the raoe. This meohanlcat Irath U
nnknown to many, and may. If properly managed, piodnos much snrpriee.
flB4 LEGEBDXliAIN.
tti0 table to perform the feat with. The pevfoimer bonows anTimber of handkerbhieb, taking care to put the marked one uppermost in making a bandle» though heaflbctB to mix them together promJecuonaly. The person whom he desirea to draw one of the handkerohielii natorallj takes that which oomes first to hand. The perfonner then desirM to shake them again to embellish the operation ; but, in so doing, brings the right haod- kerohief uppermost, and carefUly fixes upon some simpleton to draw ; and if be find the person is not likely to take the first that oomes to hand, he prerents him from draw- ing bjflixing upon another person, under pretenoe of his having a more sagadoua look. When the handkerchief is torn, and carefhlly fblded up, it is put under a glaaa upon a table placed near a partition. On that part of the table on which the handkerchief m deposited is a little trap, which opens and lete it ftJl into a drawer. The oonlbderstob concealed behind the curtain, passes his hand under the table, opens the trap, and sab* stitutes the second handkerchief for the first. He then shuts the trap, which so exaetlj fits the hole it closes as to deoeive the ejes of the most incredulous. If the performer be not possessed of such a table, he must havea second handkerchief in hia pocket, and change it bj sleightK>Miand.
<n wjnan RJurssxacHixF.
This is a very simple trick, and only requires dexterity to bewilder the spiwiaUw.
You must be provided with a double-headed tin canister, which must slide in a tube in
the way shown in the engraving. The interior of the canisMy must be divided into two parts, A and B. Inside B ptace privately a piece of cambric crumpled up like a pocket hand* kerchief, which you may sprinkle with a little ean-de-cologna. When you are ready, place the canister on the table, A vp- wards, and ask a lady to lend you a white handkerchief, tdl her that you will bum it to ashes, but that you know of a remedy by means of which you can restore it to her <|iiile un- injured. Sprinkle some of the eau-de-cologne on i^ and place it in the compartment A. Now make some spee^ about com- bnstibili^, and show the canister round with the handker- chief inside. As you replace it on the table, take care to puh up B and invert the canister ; drop a lighted match on to ihe cambric and let it bum to ashes, and ask the company to
notice the ftxmes of the eau-de-cologne ; show the ashes around, and as yon replace the
canister turn it as it was at first, upwards, and after a flourishing speech, draw o«U Ihs
lady's handkerchief and present it to her.
TSS B1.I0MXD BUD*
Beparate an egg in the middle as neatly as possible ; empty it, and then, wUh a fine piece of paper and a little glue, join the two halves together, having first pot a live canary bird inside it, which will continue imhurt in it for some time, prortded yoa nuik* a small pin-hole in the shell to supply the bird with air; have, also, a whoie egg in veadiness. Present the two eggs for one to be chosen $ put the egg whidi «***'**^*Tm the
FEATS REQmKINa SPECIAL APPA&ATITS, OB CONFEDEBACT. 9»
bird oiezt to the person who is to ohooee, and for this pnrpoee be Bure to select a lady ; ■he nataisUy choosea the nearest to her, becaoae, baying no idea of the trick to be per> formed, there is no apparent reason for taking the Author one; atanyrate, if the wrong one be taken, yon do not &il in the trick, for yon break the egg, and say, " Ton see thai this egg is flur and l^eeh, madam ; so you would have fotmd the other, if you had chosen it. Now, doyoaohoosetoifaidinitamoiiseor ac&nazybirdf" She natorally declares for the bird; nevertheless, if she asks for the monse, there are means of escape; yon ask the same question of several ladies, and gather the majori^ of rotes, which, in all probability, will be in &vonr of the bird, which yoa then produce.
TKX B««-BOX.
The egg>box is made in the shape of two bee-hires, placed together, as A ; the inner
ahell. B, is covered with half the shell of a real egg ; the upper shdl, 0, is of the same
■hape. but larger, being, in fact, the lid or upper part of the box, of which D is the
lower. Place C, which is the outward shell, upon B, and both upon D, which axranga-
ment puts all in readiness for the performance of
the trick. Now call for an egg, and then take off
the upper part, B C, with your 'forefinger and
thumb, and placing the egg in the box, say,
•< Ladies and gentlemen, you see it fhirly in the
box;" and uncovering it again, say, "You shall
see me fhirly take it out ;" putting it into your
pocket in their sight. Now open your box again,
and say, " There's nothing ;'* close your hand about the middle of the box, and taking
C off without B. say, *' There is the egg again ;*' then put 0 on again, and taking C,
together with the inner shell, B, off again, say, '* It is gone again," and such will
appear to be the Dsct.
rax nxB AiTD wnrx borlx.
Get a tin bottle made with a tube nearly as big as its neck, passing from the bottom
of the neck to the bottom of the bottle, in which there must be a hole of a sise to
correspond with it. Between the tube and the neck of the bottle, let there be suiBcient
apace to allow you to poor in some wine, which will remain in the bottle outside the
tube. Begin the trick by pouring a glass of wine out of the bottle ; then place it on
the table, over a concealed hole, through which the confederate will tiirust a burning
ftusee into the tube, so that, at your comumnd, fire is emitted from the mouth of the
bottle. As soon as the fire is extinguished, you can take up the bottle, and pour out
more wine.
YHS Gtrv nicx.
Pncore a small gun, and get two bullets to fit it, one of them of lead, which you may mark in any way that the spectators may know it again, and another of biaeklMd powder made up into a ball, which you must conceal. After having handed the real bullet about to the company, that thqy may be sure there i§ no decepUim, change it for the artifldal one, and allow some one to drop this into the gun ; ram it down yourself
ess
LE6EKDEMAIK.
as bard m yoa can, and yoa will of ooone break it into powder. Go to tbe end of the room, and, extending your band, tell the person to fire at it. When tbe gnn froea off, pretend tbat the ball baa hit yonr band, and, while yon are inakiTig oontortions, oontriTe to get the real ball into it. It will heighten the eflbct if, by some meana, yon blacken the palm of yonr band to show token the ball hit. No one nnaccnatomed to Jlre-anaa should perform this trick. A oery small charge of powder in Uie gun ia suffldeni.
TBS GLOBS BOX.
ThiB trick is not inferior to the best that ia shown with boxes. It is done with a
box made of four pieces, and a ball as big aa may conveniently be contained therdn ; the ball aenrea, as the egg does in the egg-box, only to deoelTa the band and eye of the spectators. Thia ball, made of wood or ivory, is thrown out of the box upon the table, fbr ereiy one to see that it is substantial ; then put tbe ball into the box, which close up with all the piecea one withio 'another ; remove the upper shell with yonr forefinger and thumb, and there will appear another of a difftreat colour, red, blue, yeUow, or any other colour yon may fancy ; this will seem to be another ball, though, in fbet, it is no more than a shell of wood, neatly turned and fitted to the box. L is the outer shell of the globe, taken off the figure M, the top of which represonta tbe ball ; N is an inner shell ; O, the coyer of the same ; P, another inner shell ; Q, the cover of the same ; R, a third shell : 8, that which covers it. Many varieties of ooi^aring apparatus are made upon this principle ; but aa their construction is too exact for home manufturtqre, we need not ftirther describe them ; more especially as th^ can be purchased at the togr'ebops.
TO TAKS SSATnSBS OUT OF 1. KAHnKSBCHISF.
At any army clothier's you may buy some of the large plumes which are worn by oflloers. Theee feathers can be compressed into a very small space, and wben shaken out can be made to look enormously large. Take off your coat and l^y thxee or four of these plumes on your left arm, with the stems near the wrist ; then pfot your coat on again, and you will find that the foathers will lie smoothly and not prerens yoa fh>m bending your arm. Bonow a gentleman's handkerchief, and wave it abont to ahow that it ia empty ; then throw it over the left huid, and draw out one of tbe plumes ; flourish this in the air, and shake it so that it may assume as large a abape as possible ; of course, yon can repeat this as many times as yon have fbatbera. If you first prepare an ornamental stand of some kind, with holes to reoave the etems, you may place the feathers upright, one after another, and make snob a ahow tbat no one will believe they could have been concealed about you ; of oonrse, mora phnae* asight easily be placed in the other sleeve, or up the badk of the coat.
FBATS BEQUIBIKG SPECIAL APPABATXTS, OB OONTEDBBACT. 6a7
m iimHAUsnBLB borli.
This dever triok is perfonned with a bottle, whioh oaa be proonied at an the fihope where ooxqnring apparatue to sold. It is usually divided into four or fire com- paitments, as shown in the aocompanying diagram, with a centre to hold milk or whatever yon intend the bottle to i^^pear to be filled with. From each compartment a small tube reaches to the neck, and when yon are performing yon most place your fingers on the aids of these tubes, as on the holes of a flute. Fill one compartment with | port^ (he second with sherry, the third with gin, the fourth with brandy, and the centre with milk. ProTide small thick wine- glasses, which hold but very little, and into some of them put a few drops of burnt sugar, oil of ahnonds, or syrup of any kind. When you are ready* pour out a glass of milk ibr each of the company, and then rinse out the centre of the bottle, whioh will be apparently empty. You may now ask them what UuBj will {irefer, naming the various kinds of drinks which you are prepared for, and by a miztora of two or more yon may induce your audience to believe that you can snpply ahnoet anything they can ask for. This trick requires great practice, as any olnmsineBs on the part of the operator will be sure to betray him.
CO CHiirox A. BOWL ov ivx aro a bowl of watbb.
Procure a glass vase, such as is used for gold fish, and line the inside up to the neck with black silk ; iUl the vase with clear water, and, if convenient, put in a few gold fish. You will find that the black silk wiU be forced against ttie sides of the vase, and make it look exactly as if it were filled with ink. You can buy, at the usual ahops, a ladle with a hollow handle, having, upon pressure, an opening into the bowl ; pour a spoonftU of ink into the handle, and when all is ready dip the ladle into the vase, and as you bring it out cause the ink to fiow into the bowl of the ladle, pour it into a glass, and hand it roxmd to the company to examine. Borrow a handkerchief and throw tt over the vase ; withdraw it immediately, bringing inside with it the black silk lining, and ofRar to your astonished audience the gold fish in the vase,
A. BHOWXB OV SWXXTXBAIB WWOU A KAITOXXBCHIBV.
Make a three-cornered bag, something like the letter V, with the mouth downwards ; prooure two pieom of fiat watch-spring, and sew them one on each side of the mouth, 11 such a way that th^ press together. Fill the bag with sweetmeats, and, npon holding it up, you will find that the springs will prevent their iUling out, but that if yon press the springs at each end, the mouth of the bag will open. When prepared for use, hang the bag in a handy place on the side of a table, away fh)m the company. Take a cake-dish, and show it round to jnrove that there is no deception ; borrow a lady's lace-bordered handkerchief, and placing the dish as near as possible to the bag throw the handkerchief over the dish, and while you are arranging it, manage secretly to take the end of the bag into your hand in such a way that when you hold the hand- up Iqr its centre, to show the beaotiAa laoe edgee^ the bag will be concealed
688 LBGSBDEMADT.
within it. Now aqneese down the handkerchiflf with the left hand, open the spriags of the bag, udA the Bweetmeate wiU fUl in a shower on to the diah ; ooaw^ the emp^ bag into your pocket, flooriah the handkerchief to ihow that nothing ia conoealad in % and hand roond the sweetmeata.
CBS nrXXHJLlTSfXBLB HAT.
This trick, like the Shower of Sweetmeats, is i>erformed by means of an inTerted V-shaped bag, into which may be placed feathers, floweFS, or aagr other small aitaclee which will stow away into a small compass. Having borrowed a hat, you tap it and tap it, and pretend to perform certain ceremonies with it, talking rapidfy all the while. Then yon place the hat on the table, on this other side of which, oat of sigfat of the andienoe, yon hang your bag of feathers ; and while explaining what yon mean to do — how yon will cause the hat to tell aU manner of secrets, and so on — ^yoa torn the top to the andienoe, and at the instant of taking it np, draw tiie bag into it. The trick is now complete, and yon have nothing more to do than to pat year other hand into the bag, widen the spring, draw cut the feathers, etc., and throw them among the andienoe. But it greatly enhances the wonder of the spectator if, when yott are aboat to retom tiie hat to the owner, yon tarn it npside down and drop a heavy cannon-ball from it on to the floor. This is easily done ; for when yoa find the hat almost empty, you pass roand to the chair or table where yoor cannon-ball stimds ready for yoo, and lift it — by means of a thimib-hole-Hlexteroasly into the hat. To make the wooden ball look more like a real cannon-ball, it shonld be previonsly well rabbed with pltunbago. Or yon may pass a cabbage into the hat in the same way, having previonsly cut away the stalk neatly, so as to leave a hole for yonr thumb.
THB BBAV TUCK.
This is one of a number of feats performed by means of the mechanical box or vase described in the next article. When opened, one departoient is seen to be empty ; bot, when shut and again opened, it is discovered to be filled with bran, oofllee, beana, or what not. Whatever the form of the box, the principle of its construction is the eame. In the Bran Trick, a pasteboard vase shaped like a coffte-am is used. Two covers, which fit into each other, are so contrived that they, together, fit the top of the om, and may bo lifted off either separately or together. Upon one side of the lower cover, which is flat and disc-like, is fastened a quantity of the bran, or other materiaL This ia pre- vioosly done with glue. In commencing this trick, the pofbrmer takes a small quantity of bran, removes the covers, and pours the bran into the vase, tibrowing it ba^waid and forward between vase and cover sevezal times. At last, with a few oabaUstie worda, he commands the bran to disappear ; and taking o€r the cover, shows the vase to be empty ; for, in his manoBuvres with the bran, he has actaally ponred it upon the table out of sight of the audience. He then puts on the doable cover again, and taking off the outer one only, shows the bran which is glued to the inside cover. Thia the audi- ence suppose to be the bran they saw him poor into the vase. Again putting on the cover, he lifts the vase, and once more removing the top— ibis time taking off both ooveia — shows a handkerchief in the vase. The handkerchief he has eaatrxTad to get
FEATS BBQUIBINO SPECIAL APPARATUS, OB CX>NFEDEBAGT. 68B
1
^
into the yaae dnring his VBxioiu numipnlatioiui. In the same way, raw ooflbe beans may be transformed into flowers, etc. ; or into real hot ooflbe. In the latter case, a tin tabe containing the Uqoid mnst be passed into the vase daring the performance of the trick.
«n DBJLWXB-BOZ.
It is difficult to describe the box need in the Bran Trick ; but as it is absolutely necessary, for the proper performance of certain conjiuing tricks, to have a box which can be emp^ or ftOl at pleasure, we will try to explain how such a box is made, as by its means a number of clever deceptions may be performed. The apparatus is called the Drawer-box, and it is made in three parts. No. 1 consists of a box having two sides, a bottom, and one end, tiie otiier end being wanting. No. 3, which is just enough smaller than No. 1 to fit into it, has two sides, a bottom, and two ends ; and No. 8, which is the cover of the drawer, and large enough to admit of No. 1 sliding into it, is composed of two sides, a top and bottom, and one end. Now if No. 2 is laid in No. 1 they will look likeone box, the end of No. 1, which is wanting, not being missed, because one end of No. 2 fills its place. When about to use the box fill No. 2 with beans or any similar material, place it in- side No. 1, and put both in No. 8. Now if you pull out No. 1 only (Na 2 being held inside No. 3 by a pin which runs through the bottom of No. 3 into the end of No. 2), the box will appear to be empty. Push back No. 1 in its place, withdraw the pin from the bottom of No. 3, pull out Nos. 1 and 2 together, and the box is ftzll. Any carpenter can make a box of this kind, or it may be bought ready made of any of the sellers of oox^juring tricks. It is by means of the Drawer-box that the trick of
VHB WASHSn ■AVnXXBOKISVS
Sa perfbrmed. A number of handkerchieA, taken from the audience, are apparently placed in a small washing-tub, into which water is poured, and afterwards ivesented to their owners washed, dried, folded and scented. They are placed in a box or vase, and the performer says, ** I will give you these," when, instead of wet handkerchiels, he throws out a number of flowers. He now brings out a box, which he shows to be emp^, and uttering a few cabalistic words, opens it again, when there are the hand- kerchiefs dry and nicely folded.
In order to perform this feat, it is necessazy that a number of handkerohials shall have been collected dnring the evening for various tricks. Provided with these, the performer easily selects substitutes, which (and not the borrowed ones, as the audience will suppose) are washed and placed in the Drawer-box. The so-called change into flowwB is nothing more than a pretence fbr gaining time whilea oonlisderateis changing
602 LEGSBDEMAIN.
bMket on its side. Toa then ptoroe the basket several times ^nm/^ ike middle tfae sword (as shown in the engrsTingf on pa^ 649), and at erery thrust the girlinaide soreains ; and, finally, ahe appears to die in angnish.
Meanwhile the first girl goes quietly ronnd to a side box or anjrwhere else yon nsy choose, ready to appear at the moment yon torn the basket on its aide to show that it is really empty.
jAMjrasM cowimiwa.
The Jajxmese batterflies, the dancing plates, the spinning hat, the *M*^^r*rT ftether, the joggling balls and knives, and the twirling dishes, are not tricks, imipei^ so-called, but marvelloos feats of dexterity only to be acquired by dint oi long pn^tioe and considerable skill. The Butterfly Feat is, however, worth trying. Two pieces of tiuoe paper cat or torn in the form of Maltese oroeees are miited by a fine bair or thread of silk, about two feet long. They are then thrown into the air uid kept in motion by the rapid waving of a Chinese fim. After a little practiee, the butterflies esn be made to f^ up and down in the most amnsing manner, darting hither and thitlMr according to the wiU of the operator, resting against tha wall, and f'nHwting hlb so naturally as to deceive moat of the spectators.
TEM OKOSf XLLVaiOV.
This clever i)erfonnance properly belongs to the department of Optical Kxperimenti, bat as it is atrick, and not an experiment, we place it among the feats of Legeniemain.
The Ghost lUusion ss performed at the Polytechnic Institution is an elaborate aibtir of sheets of glass and sunk chambers — a modem application, indeed, of the tci^ described in the book called " Natural Magic," written by John Baptista de Posta^ in 1668 — more than three hundred years ago.
The means by which this remarkable deception is produced may be thus described. The stage on which the performance tslces place is divided from the flqaeetatora by aa upright sheet of thin and perf^Bctly dear plate glass. The stage beang daritoned, the transparent sheet becomes, in fiut, an unsilvered looking^glaaa. nuroogh this glass screen a subdued light is made to pass so that the penons on th« stags beyond may be seen, but not very distinctly. The ghost is simply the refleotfen in the glass of a perBon hidden firom the aodience, uid placed at an angle m thmA, beneath the stage. Upon this person the rays of a poweri\il hme-light are thrown, so that the reflection appears white and ghost-like, with every past thrown toto iiiniifl relief. By sadden^ shutting off the light} the figure in the glass disappears, vHiile by gradually reducing the light the image flMles slowly away. In ftot, ths whole ia bm a simple application of a natural law of optics. The actor who perfbrma the ghost hss a difficult tadE ; for though he eeee no vision and is on the same side of the atags aa the audience, but lower down, he has to place himself in such a positian as by ttks laws of reflection will bring his shadow into contact with the real actors on the stass. 1b» glass screen in fhmt of the stage is invisible to the spectators, who look throsi^ iL b is carefiilly Inclined at an angle to meet the shadow thrown upward, whi^ seen as ter behind the glass as the living figore is b^bre it.
FBATB RKqummCt BPBCIAL AffARATUB, OB 00I4rCDXttACT.
ram thii dMolption It will ba asan that thg Ghoat HIuIdii ia cms chat eaiini
.mn
ba perfinaiad In * ptlTats hcnaa. Biitt)ianiliaiiOT"ObMt" wbioh mctm kll pnipMn
0« a pUn deal box 3 fcat B likchea Umg, bj 3 tat la width and 3 tn depth, with a lid AuMtiad OD. Col an oblong pie« ot 3 teet long br 1 faat B isohia wlda ont of tha lid. mid In tUa apamuv Si a pl«o« or oImk glaas. Than Una Iha box with blaok papar, «ai«ni]lf pasted tODad. Now nand the box os ila aod with the lid opes, aa aean in Fig. 1, which ahowi the inMrior of the box.
|
\ |
|||
|
\ |
jL |
\ |
Fir. 1-
in llie aide ot the box. In thia hole III a The hole miut be midwi^ Rom each aid*
A in while, and place It diraotlr oppoalta tlie lew, ** la Fig. 1. Oat a amall dark limtern, or odia' oovend light, and plaoa it •gatnit IbB leu* at tfaa back, aa eloae aa poailbls. Harlog taken np joai poaitlon in one eotntr of the room, with the box on a table or Hand, and the room daifeenad, joa mm^ now annoonoe with a flooriah that fon are ready to mU np the ghoal Throw the light of TOUT lantern on the lenaand the ghoat will appear, aa In Fig. 3. By oieiuu of a allt In the box yon oao attach a wire to Ibe tgan. and more it about at pleaanre j all which moVBnmta will, of ooone, be nprodnced in the ahadow on the glaaa.
In India. Iba bMhplaae of what may be a trick ii very popular. The jnggiar ahowa a imail aUok to hla aodienoe. and then en- velope hlmaelf in a laige ihawl. In a mionte or two, the ebawl i* remoTed, and the JDfr^lar ia aeen aitting apparently in mid air, placidly amokirig hla hookah, and reeling one arm n^ligeatiy on the croee-top or handle of hie nick, the other end of which ■eema aimplj lo tonch tiie gronnd, Variooa modiAcationa of thia performanoe are •howD by our praOMtUmaJ wiiarda, under inch namca aa the " Soapendad lady," or the "Ktbeieal lied Boy." The wliard bringe romrd a yonog girl or a boy, and alatM (bat by measi of ether, or aome other chsmlcal aubalance, the boj (or girl) wlU be put
m LBOERDBtunr.
gTSTJutioD, su.. Me. Vhilt thli onlioii la bdng made, tha winrd'a ■IliimliiiiH oslenlkiiooaly bring out ■ larg* bottla, uid ■ atwwl or onruln. Tha bof ia made in ■mall M the bottle, aod aenu* to lUl aoddenlj' aaleep -, tba iiluirl la thrown over hlB^ Cba wiiard eDMrtBlm hla uidiaiice for s hw nunaUa wlUi iha nauaJ " paOor." Biifl lb* ahtwl is ivmovad wmi a flonriab. The boy la then seen anapended aalaep In the air in ftn aa7 boriiontal poalllon, wlthont any viiible maaua of aappoit ottwr Ouhi m digtat nick. Pnanitly Che wiiard make* a tew oaballatiD peiaea, uaan • aenteaca or tva ot aham t^Un. iind. Tntta 1 the l»d Lb on hit feet and bowing lo (he audience.
The explanation oT this aeeming wonder la aa fOUawa : — Stmng Iron winft, with •piingi and Jolnta, are (Dncenled in the dreai ot the bo;, and all that i> nawaai? daring tbef«w minntee be la under theahawl ia to effSct the jancCaD between tbe hidden irau- work and (he tapport i vhieh, Inaund of beios a mere wand or itiok, la ft itraDg ina rod, wltlk Ita lower end flnnlj fixed into a acrovr^nnt in the flooring. The boj la (tun placed In poaltion, and the exhibition ia cumpleid, fur he i* aeeo apparently Ijtng npon nothing. The iron.work la ao adjoated aa to aapport the perfbrmer in the poaitiDii chosen. Id tba ect of plaoliig the bo; on hla nm. the hingea which joined ifae nprigbt Iron rod with the wiraa onder hii ololhea ue dlaconnacted, and the wliard lioDiediatel]' T«noT» the rod from Ita aoeket. OT eouiw thia (rick ia too alalxrola for priTatt petfonnaooe.
The Brothan DSTenport and olhen dexteri^ in getting free from ropea which wen tied abont (hair bodiea In bU manner of Ingeniona ways, and aTMrwaida tying tbem- eelvea up again. They pntanded that the Irtck WM performed by nuana of ajriritoBl agewiy ; bat, in AM, it la an old aod aimpl*
ohair, and in the otiier baond with hla
behind him, boUi method* being ahown
iUoatntiona. In either of theee caee
can extricate yonraelf is about five 4
minDlw, without going tnio a dark chamber ^jv^
aa (he Da*enporta didj or yon may. If yon ^^ '
wiah lo make the nick appear Tet7 myetcrl- ^j:;
Oni, inaiat on being allowed (o go bdiind a
aonen or a fbldlng doer, when yoD prooeed to
untie yooraalf. The aeeiM liea hi tbe flict that
thebody. by leaaonof llaflBxiblllq-irf jolnM -'- -^
and mmolea, can be baul in a TaiMr of waya. All you hara Bj do la to ailj^h
FEATS REQUIBINa SPECIAL APPARATUS, OR CONFBDEOACr.
out of tba ropM. Biqipou jnm are Uad fa U
jon molt b«nd bukwrnrda, bo A« (o bring four huidi up
vhJeli foa niitla, uutwiat. uid ape«dily get
btm mm. It m^ h&ppsn UiU jm h)iv« (a
Jump onr your huidfl uid pou tha loopa
over jaai lisad; Irat tba enil being nnm
looHnsd. mil ths reat li eur.
II ta nlber mondilBcult to dcuch 7Dii> Nir from a eluir, mpeotol)7 if the lag* of it mn suTed or onuunsnl«d. Bat yon endea- Tonr to set one limb free, tad then by band- ing bickward Bad Rmnxd, jon will loan looean the vhole amngement at kooU and fUtenlngs, and eo get onl. A little pnietlee win enable yon to tie yonnelf np again. It mnit alnye be nndantood that the lopea are not lo be tied in snoh a way ai to hnit 70a. With BngeiB and teeth jon may eoon sncceed In nn^dng any knot in atoixtlah rope. Thii la the wbole ucrat. Ton will
nmembar that tha Davenporta RiUed to extricate thenuelTea when they were tied by a ■aCoi; and that theiieiaUaneeinlbetiickwaatheRKDltaflanKatidanlnonapncliae,
A rather onrioni and amnilng deceptloa ia practiaad by the profbaaional wiEarda tinder the natoe of Clarnot/ana. A glri ia blindfolded aeonrely by one of the oompnny. and than, in answer (o qneitloaa propoaed by the peifgrmer, oorrectly luunea any borrowed ariicla, giTH tba niunben on bank-notea, the data on ooini, etc. In thia triok It la lunal Bo tiave aBTeral eonfMaraCee. in addition to tba girl oa tlie ataga. The performeT, when be bit borrowed a anllleiant number of artiolea from tha company, holdi np aomelliing, and eaki the preaumed olairroyHnt what It ia. Bhe answen, daioribing the article : probably, in the eaaa of numbers or dslea. balng already ac- qnaintad wlUi them, tntnt the fact that the eoina or noTea, etc., ware received from a oonftodBrate. The tnethod of arranging thia axhibltloQ la to hafa a preTionaly-CDneerted code of aigaala—eTBry qneaUon baring a corraapondlng anawer. Tbne. anppoee a ring to be the article bonowed, (be parformer aaka, "TThat hare 1 beief" "A ring," aniwar* tha clairroyant. " la It plain, chaud, or >M with preciona atonca F" "Plain." *' A wedding.ring or a keeper f* " A keeper." And BO on thronghont any ntunber of cin«gtiona and anawera — tlie blindrolded girl, having thoroughly learned ha- teiaon. knowing Immediately what the article ia by tha nature of the queetioD.and wbataortof arttele It ia by the way in which the queatian is propoaed, or tba orriar in which the lanna of tiie aenCenoe are arrangod. Haring delerTmned on a plan of prooedore, nOtUnf bnl manuny and qnleknaaa are needed. In tlie inatanee, eay, of tbe ring, the
(M LXOBKDKUAIN.
obUrrormat ksowi whnbar it be plain, ohawd. or jemlM, br llw ordar of Ihs wsdt In tba qoMtion ; lud it besn k bnnlet, ihe migbt lUTfl baen ukeil, " Ii It jmnUad,
anoh iLTtJclfiB ■■ panoTU oHuUy oury about wiUi than to a pnblio ontarttiniDnt ^ >■ mtoba, Tingt, brooobBt, pirn, otudni, penoU-oun, Bumaj, ktja. Mo.
ThB old TlUagt Mr tridk of hxtenlog ■ padloek thraogb tbs ebsek of t, iiwcttitv a ^arj M<U7 pBrfDrmsd. A lock is made for tba pnnnaa, umilar to tlw ml In ibe margin ; tbat iMb of ita bo* marked A, moiC b« BaeA i the othar, B, mnit ba jdimid
§to the body of Out lock, at X ; lO On* It mar P^ <o am] m nth ea». Thii ildB of tba bow ihoold havo a leg. witb two Dotehta i
I poniblB, a]
<r hold tb« two ddea of the bow aa doae togMbv •> IB othflr notch hold tbaa a propoitionablfl flhrtanrr o that whan lookBd apon the Dheek, thej ma; naUba » hard nor ^at hold it bo Bligbilf that it ma; be drawn off. Let tisra be a key, D, to It ; and. lutlr. let Iha bow bai* Mrenl iDtobea filed In It, bo that the place of the paititioia* wbok Ibt ock Ib (hnt. ta»y not be nupeoted. Yon moat get a poaon to hold a ihining betweaa hii I«eth i then lake another ■billing', and with Tonr Ml band oObr to *e( it sdge-wiaB between a Becond peraon'B teeth, pretending that :roai IhKbi IB to (am both BhilliiigB into whioh oT their month* they pleaee. Thi* will afltanl jaa a Ikir opportanltr of ptWing on yonr look, and, to the i anwilling oonfedeiWe, and Iha rast amoBemeiit of hia companiona, hi
]PA,E&1ID®SIE3 AT!© IPTIJSSILIES, '
. AltASOXEB isd PobIu, Kllbongti hy bobj pettaat looked apon ai men trlOn, luTS, in nmnarons lutoiicei, coit their ' iDTODIoim ttuuldBTttljla tima, mnd many of Uiom exlifblt gnat in^eiial^. Wa ou mdilf inwgins that some or tba oompUcMed pniilea in the sntninB } pagn map hare bees origlasll; otnutniited bj oaptima to iian an; the luHUs o( a loni! and dnsi; imprtwmmeut ; (hu doei the mlanj of a Aw J oonduoe to tbe amuaemeiit of man;. We look apon a Pajadoi b of eaporior riddle, and a tolerahle Pnxile, in oor opinion, blkea a Ant-rate rebna. ^lere I4 often oonaidaraljle (hoaghl, Dal- I, reqolrad to aalva lonia oT thcaa ctnnga r, tbllomd Oie maiaa of a Paula ao aideotly, aa to be anCiraly abaorbad in deriaing meana to axDlDBCe onvMlf bom It* bewildering dllBoaltiet ; and tblt almost aa mneh plean lug a rtcuvj orer it, aa «• have in ooaqnartng an adTenatj at mdm n ■kill. It ta, "la good aoolb, a rtgbc dainty and plaaaant paminie," Btoaf vanderingt of uiollier penon attempting to dnoidate a Fuadoi Pnitle with whloh one ii prerionilj acqnainted. tt la laoghabla to with hope M tb* apparentlf apaady end of hii tnmble*, wbmx roo kao
698
PARADOXBS AND PUZZLES.
moment, he ia actually ftirther trom his olgect Chan -he waa when he began ; asid it is no less amnsiTig to watch his increaaing despair, as he oonceiyes himsftlf to be getting more and more involved, when jon are well aware that he ia within a single torn of a hapi)y termination of his toils ; bat what a mirthftU moment is that, when there being only two ways to torn, the one right and the other wrong, as is naiiaBy the case, he takes the latter, and becomes more than ever
** PoMd, ininlcd, and TpnplBni.*
A Paradox or a Pozxle oaght, perhaps, never to be explained ; the party to wluxa it is i>roposed should rather be left in ignorance of its aolution, unless he anooeed in discovering it himself; if he fail after two or three ^orts, and yon disclose it, hia vaaHy will be hnrt, on aooonnt of his having been foiled by a qneetion that, alter its aolnftion, appears so simple, or, as he will call it, in some instances, silly and ridicnloos ; whmeas, if he discover it, without assistance, he will praise it for its exoellenoe, and be pleased at his own cleverness.
We now proceed to open our budget : — Our first article is that paper Protsua, whidi may be often seen about the streets turned into rude likenesses of a great nunber of things, animate as well as inanimate, which is known by the name of
Tboublb-wit. — ^Take a sheet of stifiT paper, fold it down the middle of the aheet* longways ; then torn down the edge of each fold outward, the breadth of a penny ;
measuro it as it is folded, into three equal paita,
with compasses, which make six divisions In the
sheet; let each third
part be turned outward,
and the other, of course,
will flail right; then
pinch it a quarter of an
inch deep, in plaits, like
a ruff, so that, when the
paper lies pinched in its
form, it is in the fiashion
represented hy A ; when
dosed together, it will
be like B; unclose it
again, shuffle it with
each hand, and it will
resemble the shuffling
of a pack of cards;
" " close it, and turn each
comer inward with your forefinger and thumb, it will appear as a rosette Ibr a lady's shoe, as C ; stretch it forth, and it will resemble a cover fbr an Italian eoroh as D ; let go your forefinger at the lower end, and it will resemble a wicket, ■■ B ;
B
PARADOXES AND PUZZLES.
699
close it again, and pinch it at the bottom, spreading the top, and it will represent a fan, as F ; iiinch it half-way, and open the top, and it will appear in the form shown by G ; hold it in that form, and with the thumb of yonr left hand torn oat the next fold, and it will be as H. In fbot, by a little ingenuity and practioe. Trouble-wit may be made to asanme an infinite variety of forms, and be produotlTe of very considerable amusement.
Thb Wm-MBKCHAira Aim bis Glxbx. — ^A wine-merchant caused thirty-two casks of choice wine to be deposited in his cellar, giring orders to his clerk to arrange them, as In the annexed figure, so that each external row should contain nine. The clerk, however, took away twelve of Uiem, at three diflftorent times ; that is, four each time ; yet when the mer- chant went into the cellar, after each theft had been committed, the clerk always made him count nine in each row. How was this possible P The problem may be easily solved by inspecting the following figures :—
|
1 |
7 |
1 |
|
7 |
7 ' |
|
|
1 |
7 |
1 i |
|
2 |
6 |
2 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
4 |
1 |
4 |
||
|
5 |
6 |
3 |
3 |
1 |
1 |
|||||
|
2 |
6 |
2 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
4 |
1 |
4 |
||
|
tni |
10rd«i |
r. |
9r |
dOrde |
r. |
41 |
hUrdf |
>r. |
PsoviT Aim Loss. — ^A man bought ninety-six apples at three a penny, and the same number at two a penny ; he sold them again at the rate of five for twopence. Queiy — Did he gain or lose P Answer. — ^He lost. The ninety-six apples, at three a penny, cost him 2s. 8d., and the ninety-six, at two a i>enny, 4s., making togeUier 68. 8d. He had one hundred and ninety-two apples, and sold thirty-eight twopenny worths, for which he received, of course, 6s. 4d. When he had done this, he had only two apples left ; he consequently lost a firaction above 3|d.
Thx Gboxbtkioal Mobbt. — ^Draw on pasteboard the following rectangle, whose side, A G, is three inches, and A B, ten inches, o Divide the longest side into ten equal parts, and the shortest into three equal parts, and draw the perpen- dicular lines, as in the figure, which will divide it a into thirty equal squares. From A to D draw the diagonal line, and cut the figure 1^ that line into two equal triangles, and cut those triangles into two equal parts, in the
direction of the lines E F, and G H. You will then have two
triangles, and two four-sided irregular figures, which you are to
place together, in the manner in which they stood at first, and
in each square you are to draw the figure of a piece of money ;
observing to make those in Uie squares throus^ which the line A D
passes, somewhat imperfect.
As the pieces stand together in the foregoing figure, you will count thirty pieces
of money only ; but if the two triangles and the two irregular figures be joined together,
as in the two last annexed figures, there will be thirty-two pieces.
|
K |
^ |
^ |
^ |
U |
||||||
|
^ |
r |
H |
B |
|
A |
"~ |
■" |
B |
||
|
^ |
|||||
|
- |
|||||
|
C |
D |
700 PARADOXES AND PT7ZZLE8.
Tn SLifinsB Lij>T. — ^We aball suppoee there axe thirteen ladies in oompeiij, one of whom 70a wiBh to mortiiy ; yon* therefore, provide IS ooaegaya, and annonnoe thai jon mean to let chance dedde which of them ia to go without one. For thia pnrpoee, make the 13 ladies atand up in a ring, allowing them to place themaelvea aa th^ please ; and distribute to them the IS nosegaja, oonntingthemfirom 1 to 0, and making the ninth retire from the ring, and cany with her a nosegay. It will be found that the elerenth, reckoning fbnm the one by whom yon began, will remain the last ; and, oonaeqaently, will have no share in the diBtribation ; yon, of cooiseb will begin ooonfezng with the one who stands second in the ring tnm the party to be exdnded.
Ths 8kssf-vou». — ^A Ihrmer had a pen made of 60 hnrdles, capable of holding 100 sheep only : supposing he wanted to make it sufficiently large to hold double that number, how many additional hurdles would he have occasion f<» ? AnBtoer. — ^Two. There were S4 hurdles on each side of the pen ; a hurdle at the top, and another at the bottom ; so that, by moyingone of the sides alittlebaok, and placing an a^iHitiryt^ hurdle at the top and bottom, the size of the pen would be ezaoUy doubled.
Ths PooB-Homa Psoblbx. — ^There is a aquare piece of land, containing twenty- flye acres, designed for the reception of twenty-four poor men and their goTemor, who are each to hare a house situated in his own ground, with the governor's in the centre. How msny people's land must the governor pass through before he gets to the outside of the whole P AnBwer. — ^Two ; for the ground being square^ it wiB consist of five rows, each five acres.
81VBV nr Two. — Out a iiiece of bread or paper iu the form of a bom-Bboe Fig. 1), and desire some person, by two outs, to divide it into seven Fis. 1,
pieces. The manner of doing this is as follows : — Cut across from a to b ; this will divide the shoe into three pieces ; then place the two ends by the side of the upper part, as Fig. 2, and cut across £h>m e to d. The shoe will then be cut into seven fdeoes. There is afigure '^^
pnssle scmiewhat similar to this, by which five may be made seven in lll/^^^ • one out. A piece of paper is cut out in the shape of a Boman numeral «»■•■■ five (V) ; it is then, with a knife or scissors, cut across, and the two points plaoed on the right of the lower part ; thus it becomes seven (VH).
ExoHTBBV WoBDS IB TwBBTT-THBBB LBTtiBs. — ^Whstdo the followiug letters aigBiiy in the French language, pronounced in the order in wUch they stendP 2 » » « o p y liavqliattlieded. Anmowr. — B£taM est nM au pays greo, eUe y a ▼^ea, eUe y a t^tft, elle y est d^c^dto.
Tkb WoxiV, vhb Oo^t, Ltm tsb Gabbaabs. — Suppose a man have a wolf, a goat, and a basket of cabbages, on the bank of a river ; that he wishes to cross with thema, and that his boat is only big enough to carry one of the three besides himself. Ha bbiuS therefore take them over one by one, in such a manner that the wolf shall Iusvb bo opportunity of devouring the goat, or the goat of devouring the cabbagea. Hovr is he to do this f A»Moer. — First he takes over the goat ; he then returns and fcakoe the wolf; he leaves the wolf on the other side, and brings back the goat; he now tnksa over the cabbages, and comes back onoe more to fetch the goat.
PARiDOxie An) pdzzlkb.
RouwnD*! Bawn.— Ttaa ■ooampaiiTliiK BigimTlDg rapnwid*, It 1* Mid, It
•n. It eaitiiif ii > moat ingtnioni contriTUoa, and niBr ba ouda pi ih unnwnwnt. Tha ponle Miiialata In geltlim. ftora one of 1^ nnnur la bowar ia (ha ewtra, wtthanl oroiBliis U7 of Iba UiMa.
roe
PARADOXES AND PUZZLES.
Ths Chsist Chbat. — Cut two longitadinal Blips oat of a card, aAabed (Fig. 1) ; also, out out an oral above these slipa, as e. Take the part (/) between the two longi- tadinal apertares, with your finger and thumb, and draw it toward yoa, uotil the card be bent into a half -circle ; paea part of / throagrh the oval, tf , and then throagh the part of/ so passed through e, introdnoe one of two cherries, whose sterna grow together. Let the stems, and also /, pass back through the oval ; put your card as much in the original position as possible
Fiir.i.
again, and it will appear as Fig. 2. The pussle is to get the cherries off withoot breaking their stems or damaging the card. It is only to be done in the mannfr described for patting them on.
FuioDS FoBTT-Fivx. — How can number 46 be divided into four such paita, that if to the first part you add two, from the second part you sabtiact two, the third part yo« multiply by two, and the fourth part you divide by two, the sum of the addition, the remainder of the subtraction, the product of the mnltiplieation, and the quotient c^ ^e division, be all equal P
Answer,
The Ist is 8, to which add 2, the sum is 10
The 2nd is 12, subtract 2, the remainder is 10
The 3rd is 6, multiplied by 2, the product is 10
The 4th is 20, divided by ... 2, the quotient is 10
46
Tes Puszlx ov TVS Gross. — Out of a single piece of paper, with one cut, to make a perfect cross and produce all the other forms shown in the right-hand diagram. The
puzxle lies in the manner of folding the paper. Take a
piece of writing-paper, about three times as long aa it ia
broad — say six inches by
two. Fold the upper cor- ner down, Bs in diagram
1 ; then fold the upper
comer over the firsts and
it will appear sa in 2.
Next fold the paper in
half lengthwise, and it will appear as in 3 ; afterwards fold from end to end so as to form 4. Cat throogh carefhlly with a sharp knife or scissors in the direction of the dotted line, and you will have all the forms exhibited in the cut.
Thb Pabtial Bspbisvb. — ^To arrange SO criminals In such a manner, that by count- ing them in succession, always beginning again at the flrBt,,aod zcgeoting every ninth
A
N
PARADOXES AJtn) PTTZZLES. 708
peraon, 16 of them may be aaved : — Arrange the criminalB according to the order of the vowels in the following Latin yerae : —
4 6S1 SI It asitti
Populeam ^rgam mater regina /erebat.
Beoaaae o ia the fourth in the order of the Towels, jou most begin b j four of thoae whom yon wish to sare ; next to these place five of those whom yon wish to pnnish, and BO on alternate^, according to the figures which stand over Uie rowels of the aboTe vene.
Thb Pvzilzvg Boras. — ^This perplexing inyentlon is of great antiquity, and was treated on by Cardan, the mathematician, at the beginning of the sixteenth century. It consists of a flat piece of thin metal or bone, with ten holes in it ; in each hole a wire is loosely fixed, beaten out into a head at one end, to prevent its slipping through, and the other fiistened to a ring, also loose. Each wire has been passed through the ring of the next wire, previously to its own ring being fastened on ; and through the whole of the rhigs runs a vrire loop or bow, which also contains, within its oblong space, all the wires to which the rings are flistened ; the whole presenting so complicated an appeanmce, as to make the releasing the rings from the bow appear an impossibility.
The construction of it would be found rather troublesome to ^e amateur, but it may be purchased at most of the tqy-shops very lightly and elegantly made. It also exists in various parts of the country forged in iron, perhaps by some ingenious village mechanic^ and aptly named " The Tiring Irons." The following instructions will show the princi- ple on which the puzale is constructed, and will prove a key to its solution.
Take the loop in your left hand, holding it at the end, B, and conaidn' the rings as being numbered 1st to 10th. The Ist will be the extreme ring to the right, and the 10th the nearest your left hand.
It will be seen that the difficulty arism from each ring pasaing round the wire of its right-hand neighbour. The extreme ring at the right hand, of course, being uncon- nected with any other wire than its own, may at any time be drawn oflT the end of the bow at A, raised up, dropped through the bow, and finally released. After you have done this, try to pass the 2nd ring in the same way, and you will not succeed, as it is obstructed by the wire of the 1st ring ; but if yon bring the Ist ring on again, by reversing the process by which you took it ofiT, viz., by putting it up through the bow and on to the end of it, you will then find that by taking the Ist and 2nd rings toge- ther, they will both draw off, lift up, and drop through the bow. Having done this, try to pass the 3rd ring off, and yon will not be able ; because it is fastened on one
7(H PABADOZES AND PUZZLES.
side to its own wire, whieh is within the bow, and on >tha other side to the Ind ring, which is without the bow. Therefore, leaving the Srd ring for the present^ tgj the 4th ring, which is now aft the end all bat one, and both of the wires which aiRsct it being within the bow, you wiU draw It off without obstmction ; and, in doing this, yoa will have to slip the Srd ring off, which will not drop through for the reaaona before given ; so, having dropped the 4th ring through, you can only dip the Srd ring on again. Tou will now comprehend that (with the exception of the 1st ring) the on^ ring which can aft any time be released is that which happens to be seoond on the bow, at the right-hand end ; because both the wires which aflbct it being within the bow, there win be no impediment to its dropping through. You have now the 1st and 2nd rings released, and the 4th also— the Srd still fixed ; to release "which we must make it last but one on the bow, and to aflbot which pass the 1st and 2nd rings together through the bow, and on to it; then release the 1st ring again by slipping it off and dropping it through, and the Srd ring will stand as 2nd on the bow, in its proper por- tion for releasing, by drawing the 2nd and Srd off together, droppizig the Srd through, and slipping the Snd on again. Now to release the 2nd, put the 1st up, through, and on the bow ; then slip the two together off, raise them up, and drop them thrtm^ The 0th will now stand 2nd, consequently in its proper place for releasing ; thenlbra draw it toward the end. A, slip the 6th off, then the 0th, tad drop it through ; after which replace the 6th, as you cannot release it until it stand in the poaitaon of a Sztd ring ; in order to efftot this yon must bring the let uid 2nd rings togeUier, through and on to the bow ; then, in order to get the Srd on, slip the 1st off sad down fhnmgk the bow ; then bring the Srd up, through, and on to the bow ; then bring the lat ring up and on again, and, releasing the 1st and Snd together, bring the 4th through •"^^ on to the bow, replacing the Srd ; then^bring the 1st and Snd together on, drc^ the let offend through, then the Srd the same, replace thfrflst on the bow, take off the lat — m^ Snd together, and the 6th will then stand 2nd, as you desired ; draw it toward the end, slip it off and through, replace the 4th, bring the 1st and 2nd together up and on again, release the lst,'bring on the Srd, passing the Snd ring on to the bow again. replace the let, in order to release the 1st and 2nd together ; then bring the 4th toward the end, slipping it off and through, replace the Srd, bring the let and Snd together up and on again, release the 1st, then the Srd, replacing the 2nd, bring the let up and on, in order to release the let and Snd together, which having done, your 8th ring will then stand 2nd, consequently you can release it, slipping the 7th on again. Then to release the 7th, you must begin by putting the 1st and Snd up and on togethtf. and going through the movements in the same succession as before, until you find yoa hnre only the 10th and Sth on the bow ; then slip the 10th off and through the bow, and replace the 9th. This dropping of the 10th ring ie the first efltoctnal movement townrd getting the rings off, as all the changes you have gone through were only to enable yon to get at the lOth ring. Ton wiU then find that you have only the 9th left on the bow, and you must not be discouraged On learning, that in order to get that ring ol^ all the others to the right hand must be put on again, beginning by putting the 1st nnd Sad together, and working as before, until you find that the 9th stands aa Snd on the
PARADOXES AND PUZZLES.
705
|
^ <jt |
|
t^ 0 |
|
^1^ |
|
^^% |
bow, at whicli time yoa can releMO it. Ton wiU then have only the 8th left on the bow; you must again init on aU the rings to the right hand, beginning by* pntdngnp the let and 2nd together, tin yon find the 8th atanding aa 2nd on the bow, or in ite jiroper position for releasing} and so yon proceed until you find all the rings Anally released.
As you commenoe your operations with all the rings ready fixed on the bow, yon will release the 10th ring in 170 mores : but as you then have only the 9th on, and aa it ia necesssiy to bring on again all the rings up to the 9th, in order to release the 9th, and which requires 16 moves more, you will, consequently, release the 9th ring in 256 mores ; and, for your encouragement^ your labour will diminish ^tj one half with each foUowing ring which is finally released. The 8th comes off in 128 moves, the 7th in 64 mores, and so on, until you airiTC at the 2nd and 1st rings, which come off together, maWng 981 moves, which are necessaiy to take off all the rings. With the experience yon will by this time have acquired, it is only neoessazy to say, that to replace the rings, you begin by putting up the let and 2nd together, and IbUow precisely the same system as before.
Tn DiTZDXD Gaxdsv. — ^I have a piece of ground, square in shape, in which aire
growing ten trees, with my cottage placed as in the left-hand diagram. How am I to divide it so as to give each of my five sons an equal portion of like shape, with two ta*ees each f The solu- tion of this apparently impossible itet is given in the right>hand diagram. Nume- rous puzslee of this character may be constructed by ingenious youths. They look curious and difficult at first sight; but, like the folded-paper cross on page 672, there is really nothing very remarkable about them when the explanation is known.
Tn HsABC jjTD Ball Pvszx.b. — ^To make this puzsle it is only necessary to cut a thin piece of wood into the shape of a hearty to make six holes in it, as represented in the annexed eaX, and provide a thin silken cord, which is to be doubled, and the two ends fastened into a small wooden ball. To play the ball on, pass the loop through
the hole 6, from fhce to back, up to 2, Ummgh which bring it» and then through 8, 6, 4, and 1, in succession ; then through 2 again, and down the back to 6 ; bring it through 6 to the (kce, and pass it over the ball ; then draw the loop back again through 9 and 2, and the pnssle (which is to take the ball and string off aner being thus fixed) is set. To play the bell off, place the heart before you in the position described by the cut ; slacken the string by drawing at the back, the ball toward the hole 6 ; then loosen the reet of the string by pulling it toward you, and draw up the loop as far as you can ; then pass the loop through hole 2, down the other side of the heart to 6, through which bring it to the face, and pass it over the ball ; then draw the loop back again through the same hole, and the balland the string wHl come off. Care should be taken to avoid
|
* |
^ |
|
^ ^ |
^ |
|
^H<% |
|
|
<^?24 |
70«
PARADOXES ASD PUZZLES.
FicL
twisting or entanglinfr the string. The length of the string should be proporUoned to the size of the heart ; if jon make the heart two inches and a half high, the string' when doubled shonld be about nine inches long.
Teb Cau> Puzxls. — One of the best puzzles hitherto made is represented in the
annexed cut. A is a piece of card ; 6 6 a narrow slip divided trom. its bottom edge, Uie
whole breadth of the card, except just sufficient to hold it on at
each side ; ^ c is another small slip of card with two large square
ends, a a ; d is a bit of tobaooo-pipe, through which c c is passed,
and which is kept on bj the two ends, e «. The pnssle consists
in getting the pipe oflT without breaking it, or injuring any other
part of the puszle. This, which appears to be impossible, is done
in the most simple manner. On a moment's consideration it wlU
appear plainly thai there most be as much difficulty in getting
the pipe in its present situation as there can be in taking itaway.
The way to put the puxsle together is as follows : — ^The slip ce e€i» oat out of a piaee
of card in the shape delineated in Fig. 3. The card in the first figure mnst then be
gently bent at A, so as to allow of the slip at the bottom of it being also bent sofiBcieotly
171 to pass double through the pipe, as in Fig. S. The dietacbed slip
tS!^^ I ^th the square ends (Fig. 8) is then to be passed half-way through
I I the loop / at the bottom of the pipe ; it is next to be doubled in the
|_ J centre at a, and pulled through the pipe, double, by means of the
g/ • loop of the slip to the card. Upon unbending the card the pnsale
ri will be complete, and appear as represented in Fig. 1. In. order to
yf take the pipe off, the card must be doubled (as Fig. 2), the slip
^ passed through it, until there is sufficient of the loop below the pipe
\ij to allow one of the square ends of the sUp (Fig. S) being t^wc^
Wig. %. Fi<.t. through it. Fig. 3 is then to be taken away, and the pipe alipped
off. The card for this puzsle must be cut very neatly, the pnssle handled gently, and
great care taken that, in doubling the card to put on the pipe, no creases are made in
it, as they would in all probability spoil your puxsle, by betrsying to an acute specsafeor
the mode of operation.
Thx Bquaxx or TxiiveLis. — Cut twenty triangles out of a square bit of wood, ae marked in the engraving ; mix them up together, and bid any pemn make an squars of them. The key to this puxsle may be acquired by remem- bering the black lines in the cut ; by which it will be seen that four triangles are to be placed at the comers, and a smaU square made in the centre ; when this is done the remainder is eaey of execution. A piece of card will do instead of wood, it is much easier to out out : but on account of its warping, wood is to be preferred to it. Great care must be taken that all the edges are smooth and regular, for if any of them are notched or wavy, so as to tally with each other, th^ aaej, of course, with little difficulty be put together.
Thx Sqcasb Hols avd Rovwd Stoppss. — How can a mechanic file a square hole
PARADOXES AND PUZZLES.
707
Flff. 1.
Flg.t.
with a ronnd file, and 1111 up aa oval hole with a round stopper ? Anmoer. A piece of
pliable metal being doubled, l^ applying a round file to the double edge, and flUng a half-equare gap, on opening the metal a eqnare will appear. Again, if two oomere and an edge at the end of a mieer's iron cheet be filed away with a round or any other file, there will be an exact •qoaxe hole left. And, ftirther, if a cylindrical body be out obliquely, the plane of the section will be an oval ; end, consequently, a round body situated obliquuly in an oral hole will completely fill it.
Tu TupLB AcooMMOSAViov. — ^To fonn a regular geometrical solid which shall fill up a circle, a square, and a triangle :— TUce a round piece of wood ; let its height be the same as its diameter; mark a line diametrically through ita centre, at one end (Fig. 1) ; then cut away the wood, right and left, firom the Une at the top, regu- larly, towards each edge at the bottom. You will then hare Fig. S. Then, in a piece of card or thin board, cut a circle of the same diameter as the base of the figure you have formed, and a square, earii side of which is the same aa the diameter of the drde ; also, a triangle, whoae baae and height are the same aa the square ; and the figure you hare cut out will exactly fit all three. This may be performed, fbr the sake of expedition, with a cork, a piece of apple, or aqything easy to cut, and a piece of stiff paper.
Tax SoALX AVB Boia Pvzxi.b. — ^Provide a thin piece of wood of about two inehea and a half square i make a round hole at each comer, snfflciently large to admit three or fbor timea the thicknesa of the cord yon wiU afterwards use, and in the middle of the board make four smaller ronnd holes in the fonn of a square, and about half an inch between each. Then take four pieces of thin silken cord, each about six inches long, pass one through each of the four comer holes, tying a knot underneath at the end, or afBxing a little ball or bead to prsTcnt its drawing through ; take another cord, which, when doubled, wiU be about seven inches long, and pass the two ends through the middle holes a a, fh>m the fh>nt to the back of the board (one cord through each hole), and again from back to firont through the other holes hh; tie' the six ends together in a knot, so as to tarm a small scale, and proportioning the length of the cords, so that when you hold the scale suspended, the middle cord, besides passing through the four centre holes, will admit of being drawn up into a loop of about half an inch from the surface of the scale ; provide a ring of metal or bone, of about three quarters of an inch in diameter, and place it on the scale, bringing the loop through its middle ; then' drawing the loop a little through the scale toward you, pass it, double aa it is. through the hole at the comer A, over the knot underneath, and draw it back ; then pass it in the same way through the hole at comer B, over the knot, and draw it back ; then, drawing up the loop a little more, pass it over the knot at top. and afterward through the holes C and D in saccesblon, like the others, and the ring will be fixed. The pusxle consists in releasing the ring ; to effect which, you have only to reverse the
JM FABASOZZa ASO puzzlks.
tomwr iHniwii. bj rmlnj tlu loop throng the holai D, O, B, and A, in tt» m btTora daaorlbed.
Ths jargnile artiat nu; tnM liu tr hnnwriHu UHla d«*l(», irtilah la ainnUd b; drawing on ■ nnniber of ardi, all sT ana ■In, a mH«) or KTotcaqae-lookiag Ombi. mala and tonal*, with droll baad-areBaa, nigbt-aapa, bala. wig^ and helmaU, which he nt^ aeleot &tnn any of iha prtuta or aarioatur«a that bll hi bia way ; bat the genanJ cximpaaa of t^a fkce part ahoold ba within aboal tha ume space In all of Uiem. Then diTide sash card tutu thna fneosa. OottinK >' aoroea in a Una joil below the eye, and again acz« the upper lip ; Uie middle pleoe will tie narrower than the oppsr or lower pieoe. A. box ahonld be provided with paititlooa la It, ao aa la keep all the parte in their nepeetiTs olaaeea. The mid dumld ba cut smigbl, ao that the pleoea of eaoh will fit all the other*, and aU Iba top* ahmld be or the same width -. all the middlca of one width, but nairower than the topa, aod all the bottoms about the aooie siae aa Iha tcpa. An almoat endleaa varlelj- of changes may then be obtained b; placing tba fOrelHad of one cud in contact with the noee on n aeoond. and the chin on a third. I
jt oC in a way oalcnlMwl to
S^ tfuttiqtu (nlndt-SitaUi.
^IBmitotMMhlnc Ihou who mn Dstf ud D ' prahnuUng whMarer H nur be deairoiu tn eooTtj to thstr aUnils, ar - - 4' *^ '^ OEpnaalii^ their ovn wuitl and idvu to thcdr mon luppj H ^ V fWlaw-arwtnnB, b od0 of th« grwtflot tjiiunpbi thu humAul^ can L. Toaooh parlbotionlaaf thiAftrt b« orriad, titml Ihoae affllctad nenioiu of Ita InTonton wore dUroowa, 7 1» plued, is nspMt oC Ewlllt^ oT eomnmiiiciiaon. nsul; on ths be l«Tel witii th«o who m« In po— awton of mil their Ikcaltiee. It hu the great •dvanlage of beiog remarkabljr aimple, ■□ Uiet n modier, a bretber, alitar, or eohool- fBllow, br ■ UtUe penerenno*, mmj (Ira the deaf toA dumb TOOth (ha maku of «m-
710
DEAF AND DUHB ALPHABET.
mmiioating Us wUhet on all oooacions. He may be led progreaaively fhna the alphabet to the oonatructioii and signification of words, the composition of sentences.
and, nltimately, to snoh a complete knowledge of language, as will enable bim to study other branches of education with as much promise of success as if be bad been
DEAF AND DUMB ALPHABET. 711
bom with all hia senses in perfection. Our limits will not allow us to enter into any detail of the manner of conveying instruction to the Dumb, beyond the acquirement of
THB ALrRABXT,
Of which every letter is formed by the fingers and hands in the manner shown in our engraving. Beyond the instruction there convej'cd it is only necessary to state (1) that the vowels A, E^ /, O, and £/, are expressed by touching, with the forefinger of ttie right hand, the thumb, or one of the fingers of the left, according to the letter required to be expressed ; (2) that for O uid J, the fists are placed one upon the other ; and (S) for H^ draw the palm of one hand across the palm and fingers of the other, begin- ning near the ball of the thumb, and going along the hands to the tipe of the fingers, inecisely as if you were brushing something off the palm of one hand with the other.
It is usual to mark the conclusion of each word by snapping the middle finger and thumb of the right hand ; this, it may readily be imagined, rendexi the dumb language much more intelligible.
Nnmhen are counted by the fingers in the most simple way ; one finger held up, ifiyp^f<f.f 1 ; two fingers, S j the open hand, 6 ; the two hands, 10, etc.
covcLvnnra BxnABTa.
In the various pubUo institutions for the deaf and dumb the attendants oonverse with the patients, and the patients with each other, by means of this system of signs, with the most remarkable rapidly. Indeed, so acute does the sense of sight become, that a succession oi motions with the fingers which those who both hear and speak cannot follow with any degree of success, are instantly comprehended by the deaf mute. Thus we leam that no condition of life is altogether wretched, or entirely deprived of its consolations. The poor creatures who would seem to have lost half the means of enjoyment common to the rest of the world, have in this language of the fingers a compensating science which serves for both ears and tongue. And so we ' perceive that although many persons are by Nature deprived of speech, yet Art has so ftff ameliormted their condition, as not to leave them altogether
— :— ^! li-uijuut }^—%-
Tt li with ■ confldemlilA Clegrefl of ngret, nther than plflainn, thtt wt uriTB at U eonehuiOD Df oar Work. WeliaTs bMnanplOTadln B"lBboiirwaddightiii." — alma BTsr^ paga oT Tai Bot'i Own Booi hai piodDced ■am* plsaaant aaioctBdon or mi nlHsiuM ; — it hu Only bean the caM. M we antloipBlail on comnuodag ttw to1dri«- tliat wo have bam orrled back Id imaglnUiaQ to our bajbood. and. M it «er«, livi >ome oT onr happiest boon aver again i in (Um7, at laan. though not In hct. It hi al>o been extremely gratifying (o ni to feel at all dmea, dnring onr progreai, thai t were Increoaing the tcmocent eruoymenti, tha bealthfal exerxjioas, and irnprovu u of the Boys of England. All that now remaini for as, n to oWB! ■ fa r youthful raadora.
fkrewell wordi U
It la a dUBcnIt mauer to lake ona'a lean with a good giBce ; CbeMetHeld nuy bt oonmUed, perhapa with advanta^. aa to the moat proper mode of retiring trom a room. but we have no aathor upon our ahelTH from whom we can learn bow to bow oonelf out of a book. To add to the awkwardnoai itf oar poiltlon. we bara never, at Icaat to <mr own knowledge, aat oureyae upon Ihoae "dear young rrtenfla," to whom we are abontto bid adieu. Wa cannot eay hare, a« to a party In a parlonr, "ieweetgood night to all," tor two reaeona ; — Firat, becanse we may be addraaalng aome aolitaiy iright, who hAa been conning orar onr pagea alone ; and eecondly, in oaae we may hare been permed by a company of our yoang ftnenda. it may be morning, or even mid^day with
FT OB KimB igmkbla nbJBtC XpgrtmiAiag, IbsD, in la
(nut thu mi atUtDpU to kmou tufa bscn ■iiiirimfiil. — Uiat It iriU Im fii— ml. *•
biTo often InBodoeed uMU tDMnuCIOD In Iba obIcuiiib gnb oT mavatus, — that n hara
» haTB BrCppcd plauuitJj lund-ia-hvid Utrottgb oar piffM i St k r, with hearty good wiahca b> " c
AeeiBBiiVAii OoloBTtiM* Aoddtstt in Otfhng, SM AMommodaftloB. tlM Tri pit. 707 AoM flOBTOTMd Into Ktaffi, CA Asm, tlM OmiTtrtlbta. «78 AehroBUitle Ulcrasoop*. M Aeowttei and PntuaMtlott m Aetiac ChandM, 77 AetlBf ProTWb«( 88 Aetion of tht Hand In BIdlDff. 115 AddreM (Dmrlaf -room Play). 78 Advmnco And B«trMl, In Foneinf .
181 Advmatafwnis Wagor, 661 JEoUuHnr|^th«,BI« ACroitntle AnntemeniR, BIO Atry* or Pifoon-tnm ITS A4rfUtJ»iportoor,tt Affon, or llM Qooon't Qnnrds, M7 AUby in Bldlnt, 118 Air « Inbitenot, to Prove. 5M Alrbubbki ftnd8oaBd,Stl Air nooMMry to CombiwUon, 106 Air, to ProTO 1ft hM Wolitht, aa7 AU FlTM. In DomlnoM, 6» ADgnlMr Ctambit, in OhtM, 601 Almond TMek. 640 Almond Tamblor Plgwn* 884 AlpbaboK Deaf Mid Dnmb,7Q0 Alnm Batkots, Cryatalllnd, MB Amorlcon Bacatelto. B6 Amtrlesn Bowls. 171 Anaohnrto alslnMtnim, Of
Anrl«n> ArtlolM Ibr, 86« Attfflori. Oonoral Bnloi fMrnll, ttt
Anglint In Balft Wnt«T> M AnffolftOot»«lt Angom Cat, 418 Animal OInb, tha^ 68 Animalonte fcr Mlaroaoopa^ 861 Animatad Btxpanoab 680 Annnali^ List of Oardan. 4a Annnlatta. or Parlour Qnolta, BB Apparatos for Mieroaoopaa. BBO Appantna for Pholof raphj. 067 AppnTonlly Dvownad PartoDi,
howtoTraaib 908 Apparition, tlio Optlcnl, 816 Appala, in TOnelni; 100 A4vartam,480
Afoariom. Llat of Flah for, 481 Afoarinm, Prindpla of tha^ 481 Afnb*bQnrd»6
ArcbaiTtlol
Arabary Imptamnta, 901 Arehttaetora of Baaa, 4a Amoutomtltr (Photocrapbj). B67 i Arithmttfcal Araasamants, «1 Arithmatioal Moosacrap. the. 188 ArlthmaHoal Profraaaton. 408 Arranfflnff Roopa In Croqnat, 140 Arrows nasd in Archary. 901 Afttflela] FUas. Daaeription of, 170
Artlfldal FUaa. to Maka, 978 ArtMeUl Fly-flshlnr, 977 ATtlfldnllfnffnati,407 Artlflelal Sao'wator. 419 Aadmm. nsad in Arehary, 908 Aaaortad Paak of Cards. 68B Astronemtr and tlM Olown, 866 A«lilatle8poita.l01 Atlaek.inChaaa,B88 Atlllada.inBoiinv.«8
Annt Bally. 170
AnraUa. Grab of OUkworms. 491
Automaton Cbaas Playsr, 606
BACK SAMMOn. 618 Backffanunon. a P«ntomlma
Ckamda,70 Backgammon, Laws ot 691 Baekgammon, Pladng tha Mm.
610 Backirsinmon. Tarms asad la. 6!0 Backlog Water, In Bowing, sot Baak-akntlnff,t94 Badminton, 1B6 Ba«atal1a.689 Bagataila. Amarlean, 66 Bagatana,Caaftl«.8B Baff, Oamaof tba.4B6 Bags.anmsoC66 Baita,FlaUnir.9e4 Balaaotng, in Bwimmlog, 880 Bald-pattdTvmblar. tba. 884 Ball. Crickai 106 Balloon Ball, 16 BaQoon.FlrsbB>l Balloon, ForaaaU Boat, 811 Balloottlng, BIO Balloon, to Conttmot a, r>91 Balls. Oamas with. 14 Balls, osad in Croquet, 144 Bandllor,tha,69 Bandy Ball, In OolXm Bankinc, SelantUo, 486 Bantam, tka^ 886 Barbel. tka^fllO Barb Pigeon. 800 Bam<door Fowlt 868 BarqnabBU
716
IKDSX.
BM«*Bjdl. AiDarieui. UO BM*-BikU. DatfM of PUyen, UO BM*-Ball Field, lao Bu«-B«U. Rule* of, 101 Balmua. th«. in BM«-Ba1l. in BftdUl «nd BtooM. the, 4SS BMket Triok. the. eeo BMt«tb«B«ar,88 BaUm. or Pitch Club, Si Baton BopoM, 4S Bala Ibr Criokat. 106 Bataman, the, tn Criekat» lOB Battladora and Sbattiaoook. 51 Boavlib or Braloh, th«, 410 BaatB on th« BUida ( VanoiBS). 190
BaahlTea,4a
B«et.4n
B«a>t Diieaaai and BamadlM. 417
Baas, Food for. 4S4
Baas, Profit darived from, 437
Baas, thair Arohitaotara. 4iS
Baea, to Winter, 4S7
Belt used in Archery, SOI
Benirai Lights the. 611
Bioyde. Histonr of the. 136
Bicycle, How to manafe the, tt6
Biojde, the Modem, sas
Bleycltnir. »1
Billiards. 066
Billiards, Xnstnicllons In, 610
BiUlarda.Uws 0(669
BilUsrdii, Technical Terms, 688
Billion. Counting a. 461
Binocular Mleroecope, 661
Bird Kite, the. 48
Birda, Diseases ot, 660
Birds. Host to Catoh, 6»
Birds. Singing. 6»
Birds, Talliing, 661
Birds, to Feed, 6S4
Birds, Vsrions Kluds of; 686
Bishop, Mores of, in Chess, 666
BUmuth, Crystals oi; 4iM
B aelibird's Csge, the. 8M
Blackbird, the. 646
Blackcap, the. 647
Black Oat, Blectriolty from, 480
Bladders used in Swlmmiog, i87
Blasting by QalTsnlsm. 486
Blask, the. S7S
Blenheim Spaniel. 407
BUud Man's Butt, 41
Boat, How to Lanadi, 604
Boating. S66
Boating Terma. 109
Boa^ Management of a, 190
Bodies aimilariy Blaetrifled repel
eaoh other. 480 Bolting Horse, in Biding, til Bomerang,the.60 Bonoe About. 6 Bottle Coiguror.661 Bottle ejectment, 061 Bottle Impe, the. 660 Bottle, tb« Inexhaustible, 087 Bottle, the Myatertc us. 066 Bottle, to Lift with a Straw. 066 Bounce Eye, 9 Bouta Bimda, 70 Bowing Bean, 066 Bowler, the, in Orioket, 109 Bowling Crease, in Cricket, 106 Bowling. OaaaoC 90 Bowdng, in Crieket, 117 Bowls, 170
Bowls, American. 179 BowIa,Pari«inr,66 Bow, Mode of Stringing. 106 Bow need in Arohei7,m Boxing; 968
Brace, the. need in Arahery. 906 Bran Trick, the. tea Bream, the, 676
Breast to Mouth (Oymnastios), 148 Breeding Cages. 664 Breeding Hutehes for Babbita. 608 Breeding of Canaries. 610 Breeding of Pigeons. 661 Breeding of Babblte, 40O Breeding of ttquirrcs. 416 Briokbat Trap to Catch Birds, 681 Brick, how to Bee Tnrongh. 641 Bridge of Koives. 000 Bridle and firidoon. in Biding. Si4 Bridle. Uie. in Riding. 910 BriganUna, 619 Brigs, 619 Broadsword, 196 Broad TaUed Shaker Pigeon. 686 Bronsing Plaster Busta. 680 Brown Paper burnt hyFrlction,i08 Buck, Buck, 60 Buck's Hutch, 606 Budding of Plants, 490
Buff with tbe Wand. 06 Bolbe and Tnbers, 4S7 BoUdog, the, 411 BniUach. the, 9M Banting, or Bed Warbler. 947 Butterfliee, Imprasaion ei, 663 Batta used in Arahary. IM
Caaaa for Birds. 666 Ci«ea for Bqnlrrclib «U Cagee for Talking Birds. 969 Oi«as for White Mice. 41F Cagliescre's Magie Minor (Tab.
leaaViTant).07 Camna, in Flkotogmphy. 66S Crsmura liBTJdSj, 6tt
Oamara Stand, 668
Cttarlss, Breeding. 989
canary's Cage, the, 968
OaBai7.tha,86&
CanoaOed figure Oooeead, 4B9
Candle Znrislbly Mxringnlahwl.
808 Candle, Philosophical, 610 Candle, the Philoeophy of, aoB Candle, to Light by Water, OSS Caanon. at BlUiarde, 844 Ouinon. Blectrical, 486 Cannon Oame of BagateMa, 064 Caiioelag,60l Can of Ale, the. 406 Oanter. the. In Biding. 91S Capillaiy Attraction, 979 Capping Beehives, 498 Oapirfng Varsca,08 Captain. Duties oi; in Orlekat. 196 Capuchin Pigeon. 890 Carambole, GasBe orBiaiarda,967 Card drawn from the PaokaO. on Card In the Egg, 070 Card in the Mirror, 69e Card Nailed to Wall. 674 Card of DlTtaiation. 078 Card Perforated by Klactrioity.4l3 Card Pnxsle. 706 Card Revealed by PIneh of Snoff,
676 Cards. Assorted Pack oC 008 Cards. Divination by. 017 Cards, Nerve Ttkk la. 089 Cards, PiquaO Pack, 071
INDEX.
717
Cards, Bhymlim. 60
Card*, Bhuffllnff, M«
Cardf, TdUtalt, m
CaTdR, Tni Pain, M9
Cardi. to aake tha PaM with. Mi
Carda. to Piek anyona trom fba
Pack. 687 Cards, to Tell by Bmellor Walght,
MB Oarda, to Tall Numbar Drawn,
vn
Oards, to Tall tha H nmbar on any
Tlur«e.'d80 Cards, to Tall tba Pips on, 608 Card*, Trieki witb, 608 Card, to Force a, 60* Card, to maka one Jump oat of
Pack. 671 Card, to Predict tha Position of, 071 Card, to Tell Blindfold, 070 Card, to Tell every one in the
Park, 600 Card under tha Hat, 075 Carp, the. MB Carrier Pigeon, 184 Carta, in Panolnf, 179, 180 Casaa for Fireworks, tit CastlDf the Line, in Fiahinr. t» Caatia Baffatella. IB OaaUe, Kinffofthcn Castle, Hovea of, in Ohas8» 080 Castlinic. in Ches«, 800 Cat and Moose, 07 Catch Ball. 17
Oatohicir a Ball, in Cricket, 111 Catehlnir Birds, Uodea of, 020 Caterpillar of the Silkworm, 4i9 Oatherlne Wheels, 017 Cata,«U Oanto Wtnea, 70 Centre Oaiabit, in Chess, OOt Certain Qame, the, 4S7 Cliafflnch, the, tiS Chair, to rraioTC from nnder yon
wlthoat Falllnir, MO Chameleon Mineral, 808 Oharaetera and Fradiotions^ 00 Charades, Acting, 77 Charadaa, Pantomime, 77 Chargea in Fireworks, OlS Chartreoae or Manx Cat, 418 Cheap Baetrlcal Machine, 476
Cheek by DiseoTery, In Chess,
Check, in Chess, 690 Checkmate, in Chase, 867 Checkmataa. Illnstratlons of, 567 Cbemloal Sxperimente. 507 Chemistry, 401 Cherry Cheat, the, 70t Chess, 088
Chees, Sndinga of Games, 5M Chess, Illoatratlons of Varlooa
Checkmates, 807 «f sf«. Chees, X«aws of, 886 Oheas Notation. 800 Cheee, Openings of Games, 000 Cheaa, Poaition of Piecee. 084 Chees, Terms nsed in, SS6 Chickens, Feeding, 800 Chickens, Hatching, 800 Chinese Cat, 418 Chlihstone. 18 Chryaalifl, 411 Chab, the.lTI Circles in Skating, til Clainroyanoe. 680 Clana, Gathering oi the, 667 Claaslflcation of Doge, 40} Clay fbrQraffelttg, 441 Cleft GmfUng, 441 CUmbIng, 340 Clips, in Croquet, 180 Close Game, Football, 188 Cbth Kite, the, 47 Coatin« Plate, in Photography, U1 Cockamaroo, 684 Cockatoo^ the, 805 Cock, the, 868 Cocoon of Silkworm. HO Ooddlngton Lens, 618 Code of Signals, Telegraphic, 401 Coin, Sclf-sapported, 658 Coin, to Irprets Image of a, 581 Coin, to Palm, 687 Coin, to Pass, 607 Cold and Hot, Which la Which?
600 Cotlay, the, 406 Coloured Crystals, 480 Coloured FIraa, 811 Coloured Flames, 611 Colours, Transmutation of. SOI Oolumbus Outdone. 570
Combustion and Explosion, 400 Combustion by Sun's Bays. 800 Combustion in Mixed Gases, 806 Combuatlon under Water. 408 Comical Portraits, 706 Commutator, the Eleotric, 40t Compaaa, Luid, 400 Compaae, Mariner'a, 465 Compound Microeoope, 518 Conflederaoy, Feats ot, 670 Oonftdarate Ohllling, the. 008 OoiOaringTrickB.040 Coi^nror's Joke. 054 Coneequenees, 68 Contect, an Acting Charade, 81 ConTcrtible Aoes, 078 Convertible Coins, 601 Copper, to Uiaeolre, 501 Coral, Artificial, 581 Corks, nsed in Swimming, 167 Coemorama, 58S Coetume fbr Skaters, 8M Counter and Betnm, in Fencing,
189 Counter Attack, in Chees, 587 Counter Changed, thcb 661 Counter in Carte, in Fencing, 186 Counter or Bound Parades, 160 Counting a Billion, 46J OonpUnf of Pigeons, S8S Cover-point, in Cricket, 110 Crackers, 518 Crambo, 00
Cramp, the. in Swimming. 903 Cricket, 101
Cricket^ Changing Poaition, lit Cricket Clubs, Boles tor. m Cricket, Double Wicket, 106 Cricket, Laws of, \U Cricket-match, to Manage a, K6 Cricket, Practical Instructions
In, 117 Cricket, the Field, lOS Crleketk the Way to Play, 104 Crimaon Fire, 518 Croquet, 188
Croquet, arranging Hoops, 140 Crequalk How to Play Well, IM Croquet, Laws oi; 141 Croqaet, Pariour, 68 Croquet, Technical Terma in, 141 Croaa*bow, the 107
718
Orow, Cariom, tti
CroM. Passto ottha, 708
CiOH QoMlloBt ABd Crook«d
CroMToiidk,aO
CryttalUsattoa, 4M
CtiritoU, Coloiind, HM
Oiyttalt of BlUButh, MS
Oambwkad TomIc, tla«, W
Onp and Ball, M
Cop of Tantaloa, 517
Curious OaleaUMoD. 4n
Oorioiu OroM, 4B8
Cnrilav, 117
Oamnti In Bowlag; 801
Cat orer PolnW in FondDgf IM
CuU and Catting Throogli, la
Broadiword Kz«relar, 187. IM Oattar before tha Wind. IQO Ottttar, Daicrlpllon oi; mi, Sit Cattar Blg««d wllh Jigger, SlO Outtar Bowing, M6 Cattinga of Planta. 480 Cutting Table, Photograpbie, W Cylinder Eieetrlcal XaaUna. 478
DA0B,the.l7l Uanelng Bella, €• Dancing DoUa, the^ 478 Dandj.hone, tS4 Dark Boom, in Photogmpby. MM) Dark Slide, in Pkotograpbj.MO Davenport B«pe Triok, OM Davy's Lamp, SOB Days of tbe Week. 17 Deaf and Dwnb Alphabet 7W Deck of a Cutter. SCO Deoompoaltion of Olass, 606 DeoompoeiUon of Paper, 506 Decoy Birds, W Deep Leap. tbe. SIS Deflnltlons. 7S Dereloping lolatlon, 6gS Devekypnent of Pietart, lu Pbo-
tegraphy,B6l Dewlap, in Babbits, 861 Diamond Jar, 483 Dibs, 51
Dice, Oueseed Unseen, 401 Dick, D ock, and Drak«, 80 Digging. 485 Digits, the United. 4B6
Dfaaer Party, the^ 4ai Dioptrical XxpcilaeBt, 548 Direetiona for Sailing a Boai 818 Disehaiglv rtxaworks. 816 Disc, Magic, 586 Diaeaseaof Beei^4S7 Diseeees of Coge Blrd^SSS •( teq. of Dogs, 411 ofOoldriah,4l6 DisoMee of PlgeoBa.861 Diaeasea of Pooltiy, 876 Diseases of Babbits, 400 Diaeeses of TslUag Biids. 868 DiasolTents. MetnlUe. 80i DiMolTing VIewa, 587 Dbtaaee b7 Boimd. bow to Oeas'
pate, 595 Distorted Landscape, tbe, 551 OlTlding Sa^ended Orange, 166 Divination, Card of, 6/8 Diving. «6 Doga,461
Dogs, CiaasiflcKtion of, 405 Doga, Food and Dlaeaaes, 411 Dogs, PecoUaritlesof, 405 Domestic Fowl, the, 861 Domestlo Babbit* 864 Dominoes, 088 Domino Pool, 6li Dorking, the. 86i Dot and Oarty Two. 844 Dotoathene. the. !56 Doable Cheek, in Chcas, 867. 166 Doable Ooanter, in Penning, 187 Doable Cricket^ 186 Doable FanneU the, 676 Doable Pawn, in Obess, 567 Double Wleketk In Oiloket, 106 Doable Wicket, Laws oC 111 Dove Oote, the, 878 Doves, 888
Down Hills, in Driving, 881 Dragoon, the, 886 " Draisena ' Veloelpede, 884 Draughts, 607
Draogfata, Advioe to Players, 0I5 Draaghte,Xndlngs of Osmes, 614 Draui^kta, How to Play at. 606 Drangbts, Laws of, 611 Draughta, Notation of, 006 Drangiits, Prsotioal Exam^es ot Games, 606
Draweriboz, the, 686
Drawing Oamt^ in D«aBinoca,6M
DnwlBg>room Plays, 77 Drawn Oama* in Cheas. 887 Drmw, the, in OHekat. 1» Dress Car <iyBnaatic8, flt Drees, in Criekelk 117 "Dreozlcnne'* Valoelvede,t84 Driving, 89
Driving a Single Hoese, 184 Driving Two Horaei, 686 Dropping the 'XarChlei; 88 Drowning, to Save from. 866. 166 Dry Frooaai^ la Photogcaphr. 8^8 Duck, Qame «( 87 Docks. 874
Dnel, the (Tableaa Vivaut). 66 Damb BeOs, 858 Dumb HotioBs, 41 Danghm Oock. S«t Dutdi Cropper Pigeoa, 8V Dutch Pins. 174 Dy«, Woadeifli]. 005
EAsnT-nuaaa Annanla^ lint OC448 EaaUyTix«d.6BI Eaat Indiaman. 818
Bala. 171
Egg'boK, the. In Ooi^lariBc. i
Egg. Oaid in the, 676
E6g Hat, 16
Egg-eheUs, to BngtaTO, 581
Eggs ia the Bush, 5
Eggs of BUkwwmi, gia. 69
Eighteen Words In Twaaty-threa
Letteia.700 Elbow aBdOolIarClnMip.tn ^ ica6-
ling,S61 Electrical Oannon. 468 EleetrioallCaehliie, a Oheapk C8 Electrical Spider. 466 Eleerieal Spwtomaa, 488 EleotrSeal Windmill, the. 639 Electricity. 474
Eleetrlrity from a Biaek Cat. 480 Elactrid^, Poeitlve and N c«att«w
Conductor, 478 Electridly, Simple Meana of
ducing, 47
INDSZ.
7:9
BlMtrle Llffht, to Biblbtt. 4Si XlMMO-fUdlnff. 488 ElMtro-magaetltm, 484 BlMlfo^rtrlag, 488 Btoetoo-ttlignpl^. 401 Itoetwiljpt CoptoB tn M«Ul« 488 XlMferotjpt, Pro6«M» Um, 487 SketrotyplBC* ^M Muikm OaU0i7. Optical. 680 ■iktmlw of Bom, 417 Banlloh 0mm of Bagatelle, 0)8 Bagtiah Footer PIgooa, 886 KoirllahTmlor,400 So Paanal^ ta Choaa, 687 Ba Priao. la Ohaaa, 687 Batariair Um Wator, la 8«rlm'
BBtrac,a
Brmlao Tnmblar Pigaoa. 881
BTotattooa la Bkattag, how to
Bunofalod Macaefelm, 47f BzporiaMBta la Magnotian, 470 BzparlBMAla, Phoapliorotlei 408 Bxplooloa la Ohamlatnr. 400 Bzporara of Plato, la Photo.
•f«phy,888 Bxtonaloala Oarta (Poadag), 170
F
lAU, tho. lA Wnalllng. M Paadllar OalTaole Bfflwta.4eo faaooi Foitj*flTa, 701 raaoyBabblta,804 PaataUPigooa, 888 WmrmiM^t Vagle Whtola, 644 Faat Frboaor, a, 8U PailaBlag ChlekoBa,800 rattealag of BabUta, 401 Paolta to Avoid la Bowing. 005 raaiharlag Scolla la Bowluo. 808 Faathan, to Taka oot of a HMd-
karehlcf.680 laathar, tho TraTaUlag. 4;e Paata with tho SwonU 100 Faa4«r,l«
Foadlag BMa In Cagaa, 184 FoadlagFowla,S8B FoedlagOoMFlab.4iO FaodlogFlgaoBa,881 FiodlagBabblta.«0 Fiodlag SUkworoia, 410 Folata la Faoolag, 100
I Foaolag, 177, •< •«?• Poraa, Natora Prlntad, BOl Flaldlag. la Orlckat. 111. 118 fight f'^r tho Baanar, 86 Flagor Faat, tba. lie Fialkla Pigaoa. 880 Piio aad Wlaa BotUa, 086 Flro-baU la Water. 400 FlraBanooa,6Sl Fira,CriBiaoa,6it Flr», Foantala oC 408 FlrM,Ooloarod,011 Fira.B|]tar,Uf Flf«.thoWaao(«l8»409 Flroaador Wator. 40» Fireworks on
Ftrawoika, How to Dlaehargo, 118 Flioworks How to Make, 618 Flab for Aqoarlam, 482 Flab. Gold aad BUver, 418 FUh Hooka, 161 Flihiag Uoda, «l Fiah, VarlottA, 888 FlTaa,148 Fixing Procaaa, In Photography,
6H870 FlaaM,Maakof;408 FUoiOi, Colonrad. 618 Flanooaada, la Feaelog, 188 FUaa for Fiahlag, Artlfldal, f7« Floating. Head First. 801 Floollag OB Book, Feet flnt» 191 FloalaforFUhlog.804 Fioirer Baakou for Biilbat eta., 460 FljFaetor.the^rTO FIj.dahlBg.870.S77 Fljlv Ball, la OTmamtlea, M4 FljthoQartar.«4 Poeoaalag. In Photography. Ml Foil, How to Hold. 178 Folia, Maaki^ ote^ la Faaolag. 176 Follow Biy loader, SO Food for Beat, 4M Food for Cage Blrda,S» Pood for Doga, 411 Fgod for Oqalmla, 416 Pood for White Xloa» 417 FooTi Mate, In Choaa. 687 Football, 181 Football, Lawa of, 184 Football. Torma uaed in. 188 Fotoad Mora, la Ohaaa, 867
FarolngaOafd.OM
Foralng tho Blade (f enolag), 187
FordagtoDiaana (FiB0iag).lS8
Forfolta.76
ForUflcatloBa, Oame of, 0
Forward Play, In Orlekel, 110
FonatalBof Fira,4B6
FoBrOoroera,17
Foot Weighta thai will W^lgb
fkomlto40Iba^400 Fowla, Laylag aad HalehlBg, MO Fowla, to FhMea,8M Fowla, Varloiu Kin da of, 883 Fbx and Oaaai, 087 Foxhooadab 4n Fraasiag by Agltat^jB, 878 Freaah aad Kngliih, 86 Freaeh OanM of BogalallOt MS Froaah Hop, 84 Freeh- wator Aqoarlam, iU Friaalaad Pigaoa, 8M FriUbaok Pigooo, 8M Froat Protecting Ftaata from, 446
G*i»x«o a More, la Cheea, 8M QaUop, thOb in Bldlag, SIO OalTanlo Battery. Applied to
Blaatf og, 086 OalTaoloCvmntiVagBetle EActa
of, 400 OalTaaio Ourrantk to Prodnee, 4i6 GalTaale Bflbeta, Familiar, 400 QalTaalam, 404 Gambit, la Cheaa, BOS Gambit Pawn, la Cheae, 6M Gambleia* Warning (rabloaa VI.
Tant), W Game Ooek. the. Mi Game of Bhymee»71 Game of the Bag, 4M GameorthoBace,67 Game of tho Ring, 4M Game, the Certain, 467 Gtmob the Money, 4M Gaaaee, Dxawlag-roooB, M GameatBthoBBow.40 GoBMa with Bella, 14 OamoewithMarUe^8 Gamee with Tope, 11 Gudealag. 4S4 gardening, ladoor, 447 GeidaB,theOlrlded,706
920
INDEX.
Om, HOTn«-raad«, ftlO
Qm, LMlUBff. 804
Ou HleroMope, Macnet undtr.
OwmMtriMl M<m«y, tht, flOO
Oenun Paste, t»
OattlBg Undir Way. Sir
Qhoaft lUualon. fbe. MS
Ohoat la the StarMwoope, 977
Ola&kStrt4a,flM.940
Qig, th«. 4S
QIaM, DaoonpoiitloB oC M
Olaaa Honae, Fhotogra^le. ISO
QlaM of Wlna andar Hat^ 649
Olaaa PodtlTet, sm
Olaia. to Cat. 681
Olaa^ YUlbla Vibimtton oC US
OliMdaa. in Tmdtkg, IW
Globe Box, th«b08S
Globaa for Oold Pith. 4»
QloTca and Draae for BoxiBff. tS8
Olora, tha, oaad in Archarr, 3UI
Gold and SUrar Flah. 4i8
Goldftnoh, tba. 843
Gold Pish, how lo Paad, 4W
Gold Solution, for Ilaetrotyping,
490 aold.toDiaaolTa,801 Ooli;i87
Ooir. Bates of fha Oama, 188 Oolt Taohnical Tarms in, 127 Gooae. Boyal Gama oC 831 Qoillnirs, 878 Oraoa8.th«,U Oaftinff,440 GraftinvCiay,441 GraAlDf Was. Ul OrayUnK,tha,878 Oraaaa-box, ased in Arehary, SQ8 Ortan Plra ondar Watar, 480 Greyhonnd, tha, 408 OroandB4lta.8e6 Gnard and Langai 178 Guard, Broadsword Kxardsaa, 107 Guard In Tlaroa, In Pandnf , 181 QudgaoB. tha, S71 Onlnsa Powl, 871 Oulnoa Plffs, 408 Ounpowdar Pirad by Electricity,
481
Oan, the, Watoh-spriOf, 54 Gun Triek, the, 88i Gay Pawkaa. 511 Oymnasiain, the, tSO Gymnasiom, tha Parloor. 288 Gyasnastia Peats, Sintple, 344 Gymnaatlcs, 841, MO Gymnast, the, 188
Hai.v-caowR, tha marked, 081 Hammar, Throwing the,17S Bandars, or Tipsbares, 8 HandkarehiaCi, the Waabed.OW Handkerchief, Sweats from, 887 Handkerchief tha Bnmt, €84 Hanidng Baskata, 448 Harbour, to Bring Boat into, 818 Harp, .fiollan, 888 Uarrter, the, 410 Hatched Bird. the. 884 Batehlog Chickens, 888 Hatehlnff of Silkworms' Eggs, 418 Hatehlng Turkeys. 871 Hat, the locxhanstlble. 888 Uaxards, at Btniards. 048 Heart and Ball Puzale, 705 Heat and Cold, in Chemiitry, 407 Heel, the. in Biding. 315 Helmet Pigeon, 800 Hen-house, the, 804 Hen, the. 884 Herbaoeons Grafting, 441 Hide and Seek, 81 High Leap, the, 248 Hinta to Toung Horsemen, 215 Hlppaa, 88
Hivaa and Boxes for Bees, 428 Hires in Winter. 427 Hires, SitaaUon of; 4!l Hobby-horse, the, 184 Hockey, 146 HoelBg. 435
Home Blook, in Cricket. 118 Home-made Gas, 810 Honey, how to Take, 416 Hook". Pishing, 164 Hoops, in Croqoet, 144 Hoop, the, 40 Bopping Bases, 16 Hop Sootoh. 84 Hop, Step, and Jump, IS Horn-lop in Rabbits, 806
Horn, to Soften and Mould, 880
Horsadealar's. the. Bargain, €81
Horseman Pigeon, 888
Horsemen, Binto to Toong. Ii5
Horsa-shoe Magnate. 480
Horsa, to Manage, in Biding. Itt
Hothada.488
HotBoOad Beans and Bacon, 49
Hoosabraakan, the. 677
How do yon Like It r 48
Hqaming'Top, 11
Hnntaman,tiie, 81
Hunt the Han, 88
Hunt tha Slipper. 48
Hunt the Whbtle,il
Hurling, 30
Hutches for Babbits, 07
Iaaivioa by Priotion, 406 Ignitton by PercuMion. 4im lU Wind that Blows Nobody
Good (Acting Prorerb). 68 Impoaelbillty made Possible, 800 Impromptu Verae maklac &• Inaxching, 441
lacantatlona, Tbaatxical. S:i Inoombuatible Thread, SOB iBcraaae-Pound, 8 Indian Ball Game. 11 Indian Baakat Trick, 680 Indian Claba.»8 Indian, Game of thSb 78 India Bnbber Ballocaa, 888 Indoor Gaidanlng, 447 Indoor. Qymnaattos, UK Indoor Sliating, SIS Indoor Sports, 41 Inexhaustlbla Bottto, the, 637 InexhanstlbtoHat,888 Inguioua Anamorphosis, MS Ink Changed to Water, 687 Ink, Slympathatic, 406 Inaacts for Aquarium, 4SS Insaota on Plants, to Deatrv.
loraztad Pin, &48
Inrialhle Vapours Visible, 507
Iodine. DeUoato Test oC 8ot
Iron, to Dtsoorer, 48S
Iroa,toI>isBolrabSi01
I Spy I* 81
Italian Greyhound, thctOS
INDEX.
721
JAC«>AW,tlM,tM Jack, jMk, the Brtad Borne, V JMkorPlk«bt]i«,S74 Jaek't AllTt, ITS JmoUbc PiffMB, M J'admbt, to Ch6M, BS8 JapaiMM Butterfly Trick, BM Jepeaeve Ooqjiuinff, OM Jer, the Lcydeii, 477 Jevelto, the. MB Jaj, the, m Jerkfaf, to Bewlnff, 806 Jerk Strmwi, U JeWgHarpkthe,5M Jlbbtnc Horee. to Drivtor. ttt JtofllBc, SI Jocfflto||8tleke,SI Jnarlet'e Deeiert, OBO Jamptof , S4I Jtmiplnir Rope, the, fs Jump Little Hafftell, M
KAuiBOioen, m Xeepinv Time to Rowtnr JOB Kicktoir Hone, to Dririnir. ttt Klektoir HorM. to Bldtog. tSl KiiitCMar,l8 Ktoff CherleaPa Spaniel. 407 Ktnff, In DrMfhIa, 60B Ktoff, Movee of, to Cheet, Sft KlnvortheCaetle.» Kins*! OamMt, to Cheee, eoo Ktore KnIichCi ChunUt. «» Kite. How to Oonatmct a, 47 Kite, the Bim. 48 Kite, the tailor, 40 Knavee and the Conitoble. 870 Knare^ the Three, 880 Kniirht, MoTce oi; to Ohe*», 688.808 Kntoht. the Unboned. 473 Knlvea. the Bridge of, «80 Knotted Haadkerehier, 8&B Knotted Thread, dns Knockle Down. US
LA CBoani, the Canmdian Oame.108 LaCrDaaen»ld,tl>e.188 La Croeae^ Game of, 188 LaCfoaae, Bnlce of, 187 Ladder, CllnbtOf, S40
Lady, fheniffhtcd. 700
Lacfln8 0at,8
Lane Lampliiriitere, the, 46
Lamp without Flame, 807.
Land Oompaea, 486
Landtot from Boat*. S06
Landaoape. the DIatorted, 641
L«nd RpaaleU the^ 410
Lapl>ova,407
Lark'a Cage. the. SS4
LaatXan'a Jnmp,S6
Lanfhtof aaa.60«
Laaaohtoff a Bont^ 801
lAwa Btlllarda, 146
Iawb Tenaia, 161
Lawn Teanla, the Oronnd, *a . 169
Lawa Tenaia aad Badmtoton,
Bemarka on. 187 Lawn Tennla. Bake of. 168 Lawa of Backirammon, 811 lawa of BlUiarda, 830 Lawa of Bowla. 17S Lawe of Cheaa. 888 Lawa of Cricket, 119, 118 Lawa of Croqnel, 141 Lawa of Draairhla. 811 Lawa of Football, 1S4 Lajren, to Oardentor, 488 Layiaf of Fowl8.S06 Lead, Bar of, Cntttov with Sword.
108 Leading Qaeatlona, 64 Lead, to DIaaolfC, 601 Lead Tree, BOO LeapFroir. SI Uapln«'.S48 Lei^lnff. to Riding. Ill Legerdemato, 847 Leghorn Bnnt Pigeon. 888 Leg, In Crioketk ill Leneea, eto., for H leroaeopee, 860 Lentlenlar Steraoeeopa^ 878 Lerdea Jar. the, 477 Llftlag at Arm'a Length. 148 Light, to DiTlde Raj of White, 648 Llanet'a Ctege. the, SM Linnet, the. Sil Llqnld from two Bollda, B07 Little Magaeta, to Make, 488 LlTeBaltabS84 Locked Jaw, the. 888 Long Bowla, 178
Lottg>bowe, to Archery. SO7
Long-fleld, in Cricket 111
Long Leap, the. Sa
Long Podding, 8BS
Long Reach, the. 948
Long^elip, to CHcket» HI
Long-atop. In Cricket. Ill
Lop-eared Rabbita, 104
Lory, the. 664
Loatng Game, at BQllarda, 8S7
Loalng Game, the (DranghU). 818
Loto,880
Loto Spelling Gaoae. 881
Lore and Jealooay (Tableao Tl.
rant). 08 Low Carte, In Fencing, 188 LngKera,810 Lnmlnona Jan, 48S Lnmlnoaa Writing, 406 Lnnga in Carte, to Fencing. 180
M'
ACAw, the, 864 Magical Ampatntion. 6S1 Magic Book, 880 Magic Circle, 8SS Magic Dlac. 888 Magic Lantern. 686 Magic Shadowa, 648 Magic Spider, 488 Magic Spoon, 800 Magic Square, a. 480 Magic Whceli. Faraday'a. 5«4 Magneatnm Wire, 606 Magnetic Action and Reaction. 41 Magnetic Bllbete of the Qalrauio
Corrent, 400 Magnetic Piah. 488 Magnetic MeedJce, Signala by, 471 Magnetic Spark, the. 471 Magnetie Table, the, 471 Magneitam, 488 Magnetiam, Exaggerated, 471 Magnetlam, Xxperimenta in, 470 Magnetiam, to Paae through a
Deal Board, 471 Magneto, a String oC 470 Magneta, HoraC'ahoe. 480 Magneta, to make Little, 480 Uagneta, Varloua ktoda of. 487 Magnrt. the, under a Gaa Micro.
•cope. ^ Magnliying Cemera Obecum. 831
m
INDEX.
lUktoff the Paw with Owdb. 684 Malaj. or Cht>t>iM»«> Wt Ibllcls «Md In CroqiMt, 14S
XmnairaMnt of aBoatk M XMustnint •£ Plaafi la Win*
doiri,4l0 MuKBUTTM, Varioofi. tn WmtnJQi Manx Oat, tha,4U XarUc, how to 8bool» 10 lUiUoa, OaiBM with, t lUrfna Aqoariaai, 4Mi MariBOT^ Oeiiipaa% 4f5 Marked HaUIciowii, tha.Ml KaakoiVlaiiM.«6 Kaatiff.lh«,407
Matadore Qama, io Domlaoaat flB Xatohlnff Honaa, la DrlTlav, SSI Malarlab tot th« FljUahar, «8 Matlavof Pigoona, S81 Xarlik or Throah, BM MawBot. or Kahonat Plfaoa^MB Xaia, the, 701 Kadal, to Prodoee Elaetra^rpe
Copy oi; 480 XeottBff. Paaalng, aad Croaalnc.
lBBowtnv.8Q8 Marallaa, or Nine Xe]k'elIorrlB.<BO Xetalllc Dlaaolfouu. Ml Xctallie Mlxtona Mailed by PrUy
UoD,608 Metallic TraiiaiBntfttloa,IOO MeiftUlc Treeo, 600 MetaUle Yeeetotloa. Brilliant. 807 Metal Melted on Piper, 600 Meula, PredpitotUm oC 600 Metala, to Badooe Irom their
ftolntion*, 4S6 Metal, to Melt, la a Nutehell, 600 Mleacraphj. 678 Mleroaeope, Apparatua for, 680 Mlcroaeopeb Ohl*cta for, 868 MIoroeoope, 'he,fti7 Mleroaoope, Bpeolncna, to Pw-
puv.654 Mid>wleket> la Crleket, ilO Mlnaval, Chameleoa, 808 Miniature Balloona, 8il Miaaow, the, 871 Minor Oamea.a« Minor Optteal EzpetiaMnIa, 515
Minor SoDVBlrda. 860 Mlaor BporiB, I Mlrata, to ImHato a. 648 Mirror, Card ia the, f?8 Miaoellaneotta Ontdoor Bporta. 86 Miaoallanooaa Betoatlflo Boeraa-
tlona,I78 MlMhlaf ia Behool (Tabtoan
Viraat), 97 Mlaaiaaippl. Oamo of; 684 Mixed Oaaea, Combaattoa la. 505 ModaU how to Foeoa, 808 Mon^f Box, the; 600 Money Game, the, 4B5 Money, the Oeometrlaal, 6B6 Mon«y. Iha Mvltlpllad. 540 Mon«y.THekawith.68r MonocyelOi the, »4 Moth of Btlkwom, tha, 481 Motioaa, Daml), 48 Moolda for Btectrelypea, 617 Moantlai. la Bidtn«, til Moaatinir Photoffmpha, 871 Monaa la the Pack, 877 MoltlplylDff Theatre. Optical, 888 MueooTy Book, 875 Mttdcal Glaaaaa, 8M MutUatod 'Kerchief Baatored, 688 Musio Oambit, la Oheea. 60S Myatarloaa BolUe^ the, 686
N'
anra Talklnc Blrda. 865 Natural Balta^m Natural Flr>flahlnc. 178 Natural Mafoata, 487 Natare-prioted Pema. 861 NaatlealTarm8.815 Nefative Oondoetora (Elactrie).
478 Nefative Prooeea, 804 Nerre Tilok, 686 Neto and Trapa for Blrda, 881 Neto for Boa flahlag , S67 Netrfouadlaad ]>ot. 408 NlghangaWa Cafe, the, 8« Nightlagmla. thai, 887 Nlae Holee, 18 Nine Mea'aMoCTb. 668 NiaePiaa^m NltnUa of BUver Bath. 86S Noodaaeript, the. 6n Nooaaa to Oalch Blrda. 881
ValatloB of Chaaa, 880 Hotatioa of Diaaithia* 686 NamherriTeb4B6 Hniaber NIa*. 48B Number BeTaBty4hraa, 468 Nnmbefu. Propextiaa U, 48B VuBbera, to toll Two m
Thoafhtoi;4B4 Nnnber Three, the. 466 Number, to toU a, Thewghft «C686 Nua PicaoB. 686 Norraad Spoil, 15
O'
,AM, I>atcrtptioa of aa, 686 Oar.lopiaBahbl«a,6B8 Oamnaa. Gnvt of aa, 800 Oara, to Tura wlib, 608 Obleeto for tho Mleraaeoraw 868 Ootaff, ia PeaeiBC, 188 Ocular Spectra, 544 OddaBdETen.7 Odd Numbara,468 OddorErca«487 OflMta. la aardealav.48B Ott and Waiar, to BepaaMto. BOB Ombraa Ohinoiaaa, ia One Coin Bobbed into Twew 65B One, Two. the, la roaetas, IBI Oae^ Two, Threcb la Feaelag,lB5 Oa Ouard Uarto. fak reaelac, 17B Opoa Oana. Football, 111 Optteal EsparlBMata, Miaor, 5«i Opli0B,86e
Ora^toi Bnapaadad. OttMlac. 186 Oriffla of 01^01.108 Outdoor Bporta, MleeeUancova. B6 Out of the Conunea, 660 Ova of BUkwoTBM, 41S Owl,thebPif«w.8Bl
lnBldla«.S16 Pack of CArda, Aaaorto< B85 Palated Peek of Garia, 674 Pall Mall, 18 PallaBe,180 Palmiax a Cola, 657 PUM8priof,the,S47 PaagymnaatieMi, tiMt 69 Paatomlaw Oharada^ 77 Paatomtaao, Bhadow, 67 Paper. Deeompofiilvi o^ 666 Paper Klto.thOb 47
INDKX.
Fftptr UnoooraiMd la flMM, M7
PUMdiat«»ia
PamdM ol OeUv* and StmldMlt*
la Ftadar. 184 Pu«dts of 8moo4« aad FrtmMM FindoxM ud PttUlM, 407 FanUtl Btf0. 151 PvltlAB PoQt«r PtgMB, atr Ftrkmr Bowb, ai Parlour OroqiMt, S8 PwioorOTmaMlam, tht* Ml Pwionr Qnolli, H ParxokMft,thi,au Ptfrol.llM.tBt
Ptfrylac «U FoiBto (Vovoiaff ) . in PWryUHb la Bozlnf . Mt pMotav Oola laTtalblj, «7 Pom. to Moko the, with Oordi.«S4 Poolo BolU, m PowBo. XovM oC la OhoM, 6M Pooeoek't ToU (Plxoworlu), U7 Poo-ohoo«or.BB
Fto ttpoa Air. how to Bayport, Mt PtC la tho Blaff, 11 FeaoiratfToCoin.6M Pirah.tho.M
Pvp^taol Ohoek. la Ch«M.M8» Btt PomiaaOAl^tho.4it Fhaatooiaagorla, tt7 PharooVo Borpoato. m Pbllooophlcal Coadlo. BIO Phllooophy Ohooted« 6BA PhoophoiOMOOt Spar, M Pboophorle Btoam Both. 41$ Pkoophonu.Izporlmootowltb.4llS PhotofTophlo Apporotoo, Bi7 Photovnphlo Btodlo. m PhotoRTophy. fliT •( •■?. Photafrophj. Dry ProBOw, B7t PhotofTophy, HopitlTO, 6M Fbotofraphy, Prlatlaff Proeooo,
Plcklac tho Plaow^ • Plotnre, to Copy oa Motal, BBl Pif eoo Lofto. I7t PiffooBo.177
Plgooao, OomniOB. tho. ttO Plcoona. OoapUar ol^ tN Plgooao. Dtoooooo of, tas PilooBO, FoodlBf oad Mattnr. ttl PlROODtk Yorkmo Bpodo^ ttl PlilooaTrap«»t7V
Plko,tho,V4 Plko.TroUlBCftr.t7B Plaholo. Tldoa Thnoch. B48 Piatado, or Oalaoa Fowl, 17S Plo.tholBTortod.545 PIplBffo of Plantib 410 Piquot Pooh of Oard^ 071 Pltoh Olab, tl Pltohor. la Booo Btll. 101 Pitch of Bouodo. Btt Plain BwlatmlBC. S80 Plaata for Aqaaiiom. m Plaato for lodoorCaltaro, 4fiO Plaato la Wladowo, 440 Plaato. Propofatton of. 417 Plaato. Protoctloa oC 440 Plootor Booto. to Broaao. BOO Plato, tbo. la Photography, how
to Olooa aad Coat. BOO. fiOl PUttor. Twirl Iho. 45 Play*. DrawlBg4O0ai.77 Plaaglag Bono la Bldlog. til PuouBiatlei, Ott Poekot>book. Cord la th«, 078 Polator.tho,4l0 Polat. la Criokot. 110 PolMdPoaoy.Otl Pofcor aad Tuaga. 41 Pokor oad Toogo Magaot, 407. Pokor Foot. tho. 148 PoloCllmblBg.t40 Polo Uopli^, 144 PoUoh Draaghti, 016 PoUdi Fowl, tot Poouraalaa Dog. 4lt Pool(BlllUrdo).Oao Poor hoQoo ProUoiB. 100 Popo, or Raff. fTV PopHraa.tho.BO Popplag«croaao. la Oriekot. 108 Ponraltt, Coailoal. 708 PoiltloB la Arehory, tOO Poaeh uaod la Archiry. 100 Poultry, Varicttoo of. 070 Pooltty-yard. tbo. tOl Footer Plffooa, too Poutlog HoTMoiaB Plgeoo. 000 Praaelag Dragooa. 081 Prodpltatloa of Motalo. BOO Prodlctloao. 80 Prtotidigltattoo,047 PrliBO Tbiaot. la Fcaoiag. 181
Priaeo'o Baaoon, tho, 80
Prladplo of tho Aquorlaoi, 491
Prlatlag. Photographlo. BOO
PrlaoMtlo Oamora Oboeura, 081
Priam, to Make a, oa
Priaoaor. a Faot. 008
Prlaoaoro* Baao, 17
Profit aad Loot, OBO
Profit from Booo, 487
Propogatioa of Plaate, 407
Proportlooof Corlala Itamboro,4B8
Protoaa Liquid. BOO
Prororbi^ Aetiag, 00
Pnialog of Plaato. 4U
PafiraadDart.04
Pulloy, the, la OyraaaoUeo. >47
Poll of oa Oamaaa. 000
Poao la tho Coraor. 87
Pottlog tho BtOBO. 175
Paialoi.007
Pnajdo, the Card. TOO
Pnaslo, tho Scale oad Blay, 707
Puasllag Bins*, tbe^ 708
Pyramid. Oaaio o( 4
PynuBlda (BOllarda). 008
^rroteehay. Oil
Q
Qoooalag a Pawn, ia Choo* 600 Queen, Xoroe of. la ChoM. 800 Queen't Onardo. or Agoa, 0S7 Qttiek Match, 015 QulTore need la Armory. 100 qaalt*,17t Qaolto, Pwloor. BO
Raaaitav aad Hatcho*. 007 BabblU.803 Babbitt. DIaeooeo od 400 Babbtto. to Feed aod Koopb 880 Baeo OaoM, the, B7 Raoketa and FItoi. 147 Baaelagh, the. 100 Baoaom. tho Frlaco'e, 80 RaouBcttlue aquatlUa, 401 Baron, the. 105
Ray of White Light, to Dlrlde, 540 RoodyBhymoo,00 BearlagChlokoae. 007 Bearing BorM^ la D Irlng, 118 Beariog, la Bidiag, 121
7M
IKDBZ.
Rcoovw, tOb In ?eBclnfr, IM
Ricov«nr of 8Uv«r, BTS
KedbrMit, or Bobla. S4B
B«d«tMt,th«,IBO
Reduction of Xtinla from th«tr
Solntioni, tfS BM-wnrbltr, ih«» S47 Bad, Whlt*. and Bloc, 17B Befl«otlOff Sttroooeopo. 579 BeflACtlon, Twofold, 648 Beflractbiir Stonoaeopi. &?• BafncUnv Telosoopo, MS BefAl AUUnoe. thc^ 078 Bdn-hold. In Ridlnir. ns Beint, how to Hold in Dritrlnfft fU Bemedies fbr Birds, asa. Ml Baport, Form of. In Crteket. 124 Bapriava. tha Parttal, 70S Basin Onpas, 607 Baatlva Hona» Mana«enient oT.SSS Beatorntlon of ParaonaApparantly
Drownad.S86 Batrlarar, tha, 411 Bctttrnlnff, In Bozlnff, tW Batarn on Bxtaoalon. Fancinc.IW Bhyma^ Garnet of, 71 Bhyminff Cards, 00 Ridinff,MO«<Mf. Big of BaUlnir Vasaals. SOO Binff and Handk««hiaf. 061 Bing. Game of tha, 400 Rlnc,Pagrintba,lt Blnginr Bells, the. 499 Bingi, tha PnuUhp. 70S Blnff-taw. 7 Blnib to Pass Through yonr
Chaak.080 Blnk. the, in CorUng, 9» Koadi, tha, VO
Boad. Bala of the, in Driving, SM BoUn, tha, M Bockats, how to Xaka, Bid Bollar Bkatas, 815 Boman Candles, 817 Book (or Caatla), Moves of, in
Chess, 888 Bopa UmUng.940 Bopa Triek, the DsTanport, 884 Boaamond's Bower. 901 Bonndars, 18
Bound Parades, in Feneing; 186 Boring, in Axehery, SU7 *
Bowing, 886 ft mq.
Bowing, Fanlta to Avoid, 886
R4Xjal Oama <rf Gooae. OH
Buff or Pope. S7S
Buff Pigeon, 800
Boles for a Cricket Clnb, 123
Bnlee of Backgammon, Otl
Bolee of Billiards, 088
Bnles of Cbees, BOB
Bnlas of Croqaat, 141
Bnles of Drangbts, Oil
Bnlas of Football, 184
Bnlee of Golf. 188
Boles of Hockey, 146
Bolee of Trooo. 148
Bonnlng, 848
Bonning away, how to Aet^ in
Driving, 117 Bonnlng Baaos In Base Ball. 186 Bonning Files. 88 Root, Leghom. 888 Bants, Pigeons, 886 Rossian Bagatelle, 8S4 Rosslan Oreyhoond. the. 400 Bosslan Blng Triek, 088
SA»BU*a the Hone, 810 Sailing, 807 Sailing. Directions fbr. 810 SalUng Tassals. Big of. 800 Bailor Kite. the. 40 Salote, the. In Fencings 101 Sans£gal,OM Scale and Bing Posile, 707 Scholar's Maie^ in Cheaa. 860, 808 Schoonar>rtgg«d Boat, 8Q0 Scientific Banking, 406 Bctantiflc Gymnastics, SBO Sclentifie Bacreations, 878 Score. Form of. In Cricket. IS Scorers. In Cricket, 187 Scoring Cards, used in Arehery.804 Scotch Gambit. In Chess, Ott Scotch Terrier. 400 Screens for Phantasmagoria, 887 Screw, the, in Billiards. 646 Scalier. Grasp of the. 801 ScoU or Oar, Deeeripslon U, 80O ScoUs. to Feather the, 868 Sea Flchlng. 906 Sealing-wax Wool, 480 Seat, tha. In Driving. 880
8aKi,th^lnBldhig.m Benwater, Artificial, 488 Bcawaeda and SeaaheUs. 488 Saconda, in Fencing. 186 8ccrrt.the.66 Beads, to Bow. 417 Sea saw, 88
Salf-eopported Coin. 886 Sendtising the Paper, in Pbeto-
gnpfay.587 Serpents. In Fireworkt^ BU Serpenta, Pharaoh's, 806 Setter, tha, 410 Sevan in Two, TOO Shadow Pantomime, tha, 07 BhadovrB,lUgle^B46 Sheep, Cutting with Bword, 100 Shaapfold, the, 700 Shells and Beaweeda, 488 ShIIUng. the Confederate. BBS BblUIng oot of Handkerchief. 080 Shinty. 180 Bhaot In the Blng, 7 Bhort-ellp. la Cricket 1 10 Shower of Bwcatmaata, 087 Bhoffltng Cards, 064 Bhjing Horse, a. in lUdlng. 8& Shying Horse, in Driving. SB BIctllaa Opening. In Chaae, 001 Aide Stroke. In Billiarda, 044 Bteve Trap to Catch Birds, m Signals by Magnetism, 401 Signals, Coda of ElaoCri^ 4BB Bilk, to Wind. 411 Sllkwonns.416 SUv«rFlr^Bla Silver Fish, 488 Stiver, Recovery of. 871 Btlver Solotlon lor Electrotyplagw
SUver. to DIsaolTeii 601
saver Tre^ 801
Simple Disangagamaat and Piarry.
in Fencings 181 Simple Gymnastia Feabi^ M4 Simple Mloroeaopet, the. B47 Singing Birds, 8» Single Flgoras (Tahiaaa ru
vants).100 Bingia Hone. h«w Oa IMti^ ttB Hlng1aaack,106 Single Wicket, and Law* nC, UB
INDEX.
725
BltUnc vpoB NothlBK. 4M Sizpmotti CarefUlj Wnpptd. ODQ 8Up«no«i tb* Aalaated, ABO BixiMimy Trick, <M BkaiM. how to FMten, Sfl 8k«Uiiir,8I»
SkafelDff, ETolatlont 1b, HI 8k«tiB«, how to Btart off and
8top,8U. 8k«leton Lmtm. S80 SUiHJaek, th«, 80 8klttt«, 174 8ky« Terrier, 400 Bkylwk.the.nO BUdM of lli«lo Laoten, 000 811diiig;a» 8Unff,th«,80 Smoke Snake, CV Smothered Mate, la Obees. 600 Snail, or French Hop, 04 Snap Tkmp Cor PlfeoBe* 000 Saowballi,40 Sbow, Gamee la the, 40 SoUe and Maaiuea, 400 Solid flrom Two U^nldi^ 607 8oUtalx«,0» 8onv*thraah,tbe,040 Bound aad Noiae^ an Bound, how to Compnte Distance
hj, 100 Sonnde, Pitch oC 600 Sovereign and Feather .Expcri^
nent,60B Boverelfpi, the; and the Sage^ 401 Sowing Seed*, 407 SpanUl. the, 400 Spanldi Fly, S4 Spanish Fowl, 001 Spaae and Snope, 0 Spark, the Magnetle^ 471 Spar Phoephoreeeent, 408 Spcdflc Ora? 19 of Salt end Freib
Water, OPO Sphinx, or Talking Head* 000 Spider, Kleotrical, 400 Spirito of Wine and Bealn. to Fire
bj Sleettleltj, 481 Sporta, Indoor, 41 Sportaman, Blectrleil. 400 Sports, KlaoellaaeoiM Oaidoor, 80 Sporta of Agilltj, Bueagth, and
8pMd.S0
Sporta with Toja, 40
Springle, the ia Birdcatehlag, 001
Spritnll aad Foieaail, Oil
SqiiailB,081
Square Hole aad Bonad Stopper,
708 Square Humber, to Dleoorer, 400 Square of Triangles, 7M Squibs (Flreworke) , NO. 510 Sqnlnrele. 414 Stalemate, in Chess, 000 Standing Jumps. » Starling, the. ifiO Starting, in Driving, 005 Statue of Snow. 40 Steeple Chase, 06 Stepping Through jour own
Fingers, 040 StersQscope, the, 075 Stereoseoplc Ohoet, 877 Stllts,toWalkon.007 Stock DsTS, 001 Stoaa, Pnttlag the, 175 Stool Ball, 10 Stoola,00
Stooping Stretch, the, 040 Stopplag, ia Driving, iSl Stopping, in Biding. 117. tlO Straw Hives fi»r Bees. 4a Straw, to Lift a Bottle with, 060 Strike ap and Lay Down. 10 String of Magnate, a, 470 String; tbe, used In Archery, 800 Studio^ Photograpbir. 588 Stnmbltag aad SUpptay, ia Driv.
lag; 888 Stumbling, in Biding, ill Stumps, Cricket, lOO Suckers of Plants, 400 Sucker, the, 58 Sugar, to Abalyse,800 Suspenelon Bar, the, 851 Swan, the Wondvrful, 400 Swarmlag of Bees. 480 Sweetmsati; Showsr of, 087 Swimming, 800 Swimming, bow to Teach, SOS Swimming, InstrucHons in, 880 Swimming on the Back, 801 Swimming on the Side. 800 Swimnilng. Plain, 800 Swing, the. 80
Sword, Feate with the. 100 Sympathetic Inks. 400
TAa&BAVS Vivants. 05 Tacking. 017 Tag. 00
Taking Honsy from Bcee, 4«6 Taking your Seat, in Driving, 284 Talking Birds, 851 Talkiog Birds, Diseases of. 850 Talking Head, the, OM Tank and Water for the Aqua*
rittm,401 Tantalus, Cap of, 087 Tape Trick, 050 Tapping far Hoasiy, 400 Target, Lines o( for Broadsword
Kxercises, 107 Targets used in Archery, 804 Tsssel used la Arebery, 808 Teeing In Golf, 1» Teetotum Shot, 0 Telegraphy, Etectrio, 401 Telescope, the, 66ft Tempest, hww to Beprescbt, 680 Tenduthe.OOO Tennis, 140 Terrier, the, 410
Thames on Firs, If Inlatttie. fOO Thaamatrope, the, 00 Theatrical Inoantattoas, 511 Thread. lacombusUble, fluv Thread, the Kootted, 050 Thread the Needle, 00 Three Kaivee, the. 060 Thrueh,the,048
Thrusting all Feints, Fencing, 100 Thrust of (hs Wrist, Veneing, JM Thmsto in Fsnclng, lOO Thamb>stnng, 064 Thnmbk Trial of the. 817 TlmO'thrttst, the, iu Fencing, 100 Tm Tree. 600 Tip.eat88 Tithtfk,the.080 Xongne^graiting, 440 Toning Bath, in Phvtognphj-.SOO Ttoper'a Tripod, 061 Tope, Games with, u TortoisesheU Cat, 418 Toneh,00 Toueh'paper (Fireworks), 515
7M
INDEX.
Tofi,8portiwtth.4S
ToAm ud PrafeMl«iM» 4S «
TnrialiHr for Oymnaatlca, 9$
TnlaiBff of Planta, 4U
Tmnmeli ft>r BlTd-««Mb«ra, Itt
TnuufonutioB of 80k«oms,«ll
Trusmtttofcloa. XttilUc, 800
TnumnatalloB of Coloon, SOI
TnasptftDtlBc. 4tt
Tnp.Ba.uidBiai.M
Tr»pcM,the.m
Ttmpo tm Birds, Ui
Tnp. Snap, for PUtMma. BM
Tr»veU«r> th*. M
TnTtUlnir Feathor, ITS
Trawl N«t for Flahlnv. S«7
Trwdlnff Water (Bwtnmlnir), 104
TrectmtBt of Partona Appareatly
DlUlf IlOdi aM
Traei In Metal, BOO Tfiaofflat. the ilqoara of, TOO Trldka by Confedaraey, 9/9 Trick* with Card*, 06S Trleka with Mmity, 057 Trfeyelt, tha, St7 Trimnlnir Printa, In Photogra-
phy.MB Tripod, tha Topoi'i.Cn
Trip, the, in Wraattinv. SOI
Trivmph, in Ojmnaatlci, iU
Troeo. or Lawn BllUarde, 14S
Trollinf for Pike, !78
Trottinff.lir.nS
TroQbla*Wit,6B8
Tnmtt the, MS
Trompeter PUreon. V^
Tmialnir Oame, the, 44
Tubers, 807
Tambler Pifeon, 88S
Tuning Fork, the, 5M
TurbU Plffeon, 800
Torkejs, 870
Tnmorer Feat, 670
TurnoTcr, the, In OjmnaBtteii,S48
Turtle Dot*, 888
Tuskioff the B{t» In Dritlnr. 817
TnsslinffflOS
TwtH the Platter. 68
TwoMd BefloitleB, 010
Two to One, in Oymnaatiea, SIS
UHrnas, In Criekat, 107 United I)iffita» the, 400 Unseen Dle^ the, ifQeesed, 181 UpsaBdDowna,074
VAVLT, the. In Oymnaatles, SI Ysfletatloo, Brllliaat Metal- Uci07 Vermin In lUrds, 000 Verse- naktnff. Impromptu 8t Verses, Oapplnr, 08 Verses, Oento, 70 VIbratten of Olesa, Vlaihia, OB Vifnettlnr Photographs. 079 Vlsioo Throuffh a Pinhole^ MO
WAvnns, the WonderfU, 004 Walktnff, lis Walking on Stilts, S87 Wardlan Case, the, 447 Washed Handkerehlefk, the, 080 Watdi*sprittr Gun. the, 04 Water and Oil, to Separate^ 800 Water Bewltdiad, 004 Water, Combustion Under. OOS Water Gutter, the. 80 Water, Glass ot, Inverted, 008 Waterinir of Plants, 448 Water. ManaeuTres in the, 9H Water Spaniel, the, 400 Water. Speelflc Gravity of, 570 Water, to Lifht a Candle by, 406 Was for Orafktnv. 441 Week, Days of the. 17 waU of Fire, the, 408. 400 Where or When do You Like It ? 48 Wherry. Deeeription of a. :W Whip, the, in Bldtnir. tio Whip-top. 11 Whistle Hunt, the, 4i White Llfht, IHTide Bay of, 548 White Mioe. 410 Whitethroat, the, 848
Whoop^OI
Wicked Heer to IMtod^llS
WIekettaper. In Griekel»ll0.1lS
WkkelR, the. in Orieke^ M7
Wlddy, Wlddy, Way. to
Wi]dBabUt,804
wm-ar4h»-Wlspk 100
Wind, m, which Blows Mabodj
Good (Aetfa« Provm^XSB WlndlBKSIIk.lil WlndmlU. the Eleetfkal, <• Wladwavd. In BaQtv. m Wine, Olaaa of. under a Halk 000 Wineglass, to Break by Biaa
tr1eity,l8l Wine Merokant and hia Clavk.MS Wlnnlmc Qnaie of BiUlaid% tm Winning the IzdwBg% Ghaasb 9BQ W1raaaiica,00O Wire, Magnealam, aot WitdM^ Danea* the, 7S Wlsar^s Ohariot, 088 Wolf, Goat, and Oabhagae, TOO WonderfU Dye»00O WonderfU Swan, 400 WonderfU Wafors, 054 Woodlark.thek 040 Wood Pigeon, 080
Wood, to Look Uke I««f7. SSO
Word Divined, 74
Words for AeUng ftharaiaii, 77
Working Base, 4»
Wren, the, un
Wrestling, 180
YacBT, Coat of a. 018 Taohtlng, 107 Yachting, Terms nsed in. SIS Yaehta. DaarriptloBS oC SOS YeBow-hammer. the,8B0 YouDgDriv«t«,DiaeUt Sitaatkms
for, 817 Young Horsemen, Hints to. Its
Ziam Cotaua*, the Xath«> matielaa,4B8 Zeologlcil BMiintlona, S»
$nbtnih %ttok&
CROSBY LOCKWOOD & CO..
7, Stationen* Hall Oaurtf Ludgate Hill^ E.O.
€ IVTANT HAPPY EETUKNS OP THE DAT I' A Birthday Book jjf±. for Boys and GKrla. By Chaslss and Mabt CowDnr Culrkb, Authors of the 'Conoordanoe to Shakespeare/ &o. Second Edition, pEofoselj lUnstrated by the Brothers Dalzhl and others. Post Bvo, with illtuninated doth binding, gilt edges, 8#. 8dL
'Ifr. and Mxs. GOftrke haif ban incited all onr **blg litUs people" to a cnad con- Tenaiione. Wbo will not desire to partake of tke enjoyment oif«red by eaeli hoeta F *
AfKtneeum,
'An unobjectionable cfaUd'a book is the rarest of all books. " Many Happy Betcmi of the Day!" is not only this, bat may rely, withont ahiinkiLg, upon Its positiTC excellenoee for a long and dessrred popularity .'^IFiitminftcr i2#»Mio.
MEBBY TALES FOB LITTLE POLK. Edited by Madame db Chatblaik. niustrated with more than Two Hondred Hctnres Cloth gilt, price 8t. 6d.; gilt edges, 4f. Containing—
The House thnt Jack Boilt— Little Bo-Peep— The Old Woman and her Kgga Old Moftber Gooee—Cock Bobhi— Old Xother Hubbard— Henny Penny— The Three Bean— The Ugly little Duck— The White Oat— The Oharmed F^wn— The Eleven Wild Swans— The Bine Bird— Little Mai*— Jack the Giant Killer— Jaek and the Bean Stalk— Sir Qtn of Warwick- Tom Hickathrift— Bold Bobin Hood— Tom Thumb— Pnaa in Boote— Little Bed Biding Hood— Little Dame Crump— little Goody Two Shoes— The Sleeping Bean^ in the Wood— The Fair One with Golden Locks— Beaaty and the Beast— Cinderell»— Prinoaas Boeett*— The EItcs of the fUrr Forest- The Elfin Plough— The Nine Moon tains— Johnny and Lisbeth— The Little Sisher Boy— Hans in Luck— The CHant and th< BraTS Little Tiailor— Peter the Goatherd— Bed Jacket t or. The Nose Tree— The Three Golden Hairs— nm Jew in the Bramble Bnsh.
'A charming collection of fsToarlte stories.'— ^tAmomm.
'A comfortable, pretty and charmingly illnstiated Tolnme, which ought to be placed in ereiy nursery by Act of Parliament/— ^«nt Judy't Xo^aiine.
* All good unclee and aunts— aB dear grandfathers and grandmothers— as you wish to oontxibnte to the happiness of the little darlings who lore you take with you, on your next Tlait, these *• Merry Tales fbr Little Folk.'"— Lody't Oion Paper.
rpHB LITTLE BOY'S OWN BOOK OF SPORTS, PASTIMES, AND X AMUSEMENTS. Abridged from the * Boy's Own Book.' An Entirely New Edition, profusely illustrated, in a new and elegant binding. Royal 16mo, S$. 6d,
' The rery best possible preeent for a youth.'— JSTeriMt.
' It is so full ox information of an interesting character to boys, and so prettily got upb that we predict that it will defy all competition.'— Literary Iforld.
BOOKB PUBLISHED BY CR08B7 LOCKWOOD ^ CO,
ST7KBEAM 8T0BIES. A selection of the Tales by the Author of 'A Tnp to Catch a Sunbeam/ &c. lUnBtrated by Absolon and Anelay. Fibst Ssbibs. Contents : — A Trap to Catch a Sonbeua — ^Old Jolliife— The Seqnel to Old JoUiffe— The Star in the ]>eBert— 'Only' — ' A Merry Christmas.' Fcap. cloth elegant, 8s. 6<i.
Uniform with the ohcvez —
SUNBEAM STOBIES. Sscond Ssbiss. Illnstrated Vy Absolon and Anelay. Contents :— The Clond with the Silver Lininff^-Comin^ Home— Amy's Kitchen— The Hoose on tiie Bock. Fcap. cloUi, elegant^ 3s. 6d.
SXTNBEAM STOBIES. Third Ssribs. lUastrated by James Godwin, &a Contents .—The Dream Chints— Silbert's Wdd; oir» Cross Puzposes. Fcap. cloth elegant, St. 6d.
SUNBEAM STOBIES. Fourth Sbbixs. Contents :— Minnie's Lore, and the New Tale, Married and Settled. Illustrated with four full- page Engravings. Fcap. doth elegant, St. 6d.
TALES FBOM SHAKESPEABE. Designed for the Use of Youn^ Persons. By Chablbs and Mart Laxb. 16Ui Edition, with Steel Portrait and Twenty beautiful full-page Engravings, by Harvey. Fcap. 8vo, extra cloth gilt, price 3s. 6<i. ; gilt edges, 4s.
COMPANION VOLUXB TO LAMB'S TALBS.
nPALES FBOM CHAUCEB, IN PBOSE. With a Memorial of the -i- Poet. Designed chiefly for the Use of Toong Persons. By Chablbs CowDEN Clarke, Author of 'The Biches of Chaucer,' 'Shakespeare Characters,' &c. New and Bevised Edition, with Twelve full-page Engravings. Fcap. 8vo, extra cloth gilt, price 3s. 6d. ; gilt edges, 4s.
' Ifr. Clarke has done that for Chancer wliich Charles and ICary Lamb did for Shake* speare. The quaint old Stories, with thdr digreasiona and entanglements and dieflfrnre- ments, have been taken in hand by him, and are here presented thoroughly purged from their imparities, and newly dressed.'— Ctiy ^rtn,
RIDDLES TK BHYME : a Book of Enigmas, Charades, Conundrums, &&, with Answers. Edited by Edkukd Stzb Fulchxb. In cloth extra, gilt edges, 2s. 6d.
DOUBLE ACBOSTICS. By various Authors. Edited by K. L. Becfmi, Bdxiion, Bevised and Enlarged. In cloth extrm, gUt edg«6» price 2s. 6d.
"PJO YOU GIVE IT UP P A Collection of the most Amusing Conun- ■^-^ drums. Biddies, Ac , of the Day, with Answers. B%wnA Ed,%Xv>n. In cloth limp, lettered* price Is.
V